[
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 383: 1970",
    "title": "Coarse And Fine Aggregates From Natural Sources For Concrete",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements for aggregates, crushed or uncrushed, derived from natural sources for use in the production of structural concrete including mass concrete works.",
    "keywords": [
      "aggregates",
      "grading",
      "sand",
      "micron",
      "concrete",
      "organic",
      "fine"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of naturally occurring sands, crushed stone sands and crushed gravel sands used in mortars for construction of masonry. 2. Requirements 2.1General — The sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings and organic matter and shall not contain the amount of clay, silt and fine dust more than specified in 2.3 (a). 2.2Deleterious Material — The sand shall not contain any harmful impurities such as iron pyrites, alkalis, salts, coal or other organic impurities, mica, shale or similar laminated materials, soft fragments, sea shells in such form or in such quantities as to affect adversely the hardening, strength or durability of the mortar. 2.3Limits of Deleterious Material — The maximum quantities of clay, fine silt, fine dust and organic impurities in the sand s"
    },
    "content": "IS 383: 1970 Coarse And Fine Aggregates From Natural Sources For Concrete\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope — Requirements for aggregates, crushed or uncrushed, derived from natural sources for use in\nthe production of structural concrete including mass concrete works.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Aggregates shall consist of naturally occurring\nstones, gravel and sand, and shall be hard, strong, dense, durable, clear and free from veins, adherent\ncoating and injurious amounts of disintegrated pieces and deleterious substances.\n2.2 Deleterious Materials — Aggregates shall not\ncontain harmful materials, such as pyrites, laminated material, alkali, seashells, and organic impurities and\nthose which may attack the reinforcement, in excess of the limits given in Table 1 of the standard.\nAggargates shall not be chemically reactive with alkalis of cement.\n2.3 Aggregate crushing value shall not exceed 30\npercent for concrete for wearing surfaces (such as runways and roads) and 45 percent for other concrete.\n2.4 Aggregate impact value (alternative to 2.3) shall\nnot exceed 30 percent by weight for concrere for wearing surface and 45 percent by weight for other concrete.\n2.5 Aggregate abrasion value shall not exceed 30\npercent for concrete for wearing surfaces and 50 percent for other concrete.\n2.6 Soundness (for concrete liable to be exposed to\nfrost action) — Coarse and fine aggregates shall pass a sodium or magnesium sulphate accelerated soundness\ntest specified in IS : 2386 (Part V) 1963, for concrete liable to be exposed to the action of frost.\n3.\nSize and Grading\n3.1 Single–Sized and Graded Coarse Aggregates–\nShall be supplied in normal sizes given in the following table:\nIS Sieve\nPercentage Passing for Single-Sized Percentage Passing for Graded\nDesignation\nAggregate of Nominal Size Aggregate of Nominal Size\n63 mm\n40 mm\n20 mm\n16 mm\n12.5 mm\n10 mm\n40 mm\n20 mm 16 mm\n12.5 mm\n80 mm\n100\n-\n-\n-\n-\n-\n100\n-\n-\n-\n63 mm\n85 to 100\n100\n-\n-\n-\n-\n-\n-\n-\n-\n40 mm\n0 to 30\n85 to 100\n100\n-\n-\n-\n95 to 100\n100\n-\n-\n20 mm\n0 to 5\n0 to 20\n85 to 100\n100\n-\n-\n30 to 70 95 to 100\n100\n100\n16 mm\n-\n-\n-\n85 to 100\n100\n-\n-\n- 90 to 100\n-\n12.5 mm\n-\n-\n-\n-\n85 to 100\n100\n-\n-\n- 90 to 100\n10 mm\n0 to 5\n0 to 5\n0 to 20\n0 to 30\n0 to 45\n85 to 100\n10 to 35\n25 to 55\n30 to 70\n40 to 85\n4.75 mm\n-\n-\n0 to 5\n0 to 5\n0 to 10\n0 to 20\n0 to 5 o to 10\n0 to 10\n0 to 10\n2.36 mm\n-\n-\n-\n-\n-\n0 to 5\n-\n-\n-\n- 3.2 Coarse Aggregates for Mass Concrete – Shall be in sizes specified in the following table.\nClass and Size\nIS Sieve Designation\nPercentage Passing\nVery large, 160-80 mm\n160 mm\n90-100\n80 mm\n0-10\nLarge, 80-40 mm\n80 mm\n90-100\n40 mm\n0-10\nMedium, 40-20 mm\n40 mm\n90-100\n20 mm\n0-10\nSmall, 20-4.75 mm\n20 mm\n90-100\n4.75 mm\n0-10\n2.36 mm\n0-2\n3.3 Fine Aggregates – Grading in zones I to IV shall be within the follwoing limits: IS Sieve\nPercentage Passing for Designation\nGrading\nGrading\nGrading\nGrading\nZone I\nZone II\nZone III\nZone IV\n10 mm\n100\n100\n100\n100\n4.75 mm\n90-100\n90-100\n90-100\n95-100\n2.36 mm\n60-95\n75-100\n85-100\n95-100\n1.18 mm\n30-70\n55-90\n75-100\n90-100\n600 micron\n15-34\n35-59\n60-79\n80-100\n300 micron\n5-20\n8-30\n12-40\n15-50\n150 micron\n0-10\n0-10\n0-10\n0-15\n3.4 All-in Aggregates – When available, grading shall be according to the following table:\nIS Sieve Designation\nPercentage Passing for All in\nAggregate of Nominal Size\n40 mm\n20 mm\n80 mm\n100\n—\n40 mm\n95-100\n10\n20 mm\n45-75\n95-100\n4.75 mm\n25-45\n30-50\n600 micron\n8-30\n10-35\n150 micron\n0-6\n0-6\nNote 1 —\nFor methods of tests, refer to all parts of IS : 2386 Methods of test for aggregates for concrete:\nNote 2 —\nDescription and physical characteristics of aggregates for concrete is given in Appendix C of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 383:1970 Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete (second revision). Note — For methods of tests, refer to IS 2386 Methods of test for aggregates for concrete Part 1:1963 Particle size and shape;\nPart 2 : 1963 Estimation of deleterious materials and organic impurities. For detailed information, refer to IS 2116:1980 Specification for sand for masonry mortars (first revision).\n1. Scope — Requirements of naturally occurring\nsands, crushed stone sands and crushed gravel sands used in mortars for construction of masonry.\n2. Requirements\n2.1General — The sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings and organic matter and\nshall not contain the amount of clay, silt and fine dust more than specified in 2.3 (a).\n2.2Deleterious Material — The sand shall not contain any harmful impurities such as iron pyrites, alkalis, salts,\ncoal or other organic impurities, mica, shale or similar laminated materials, soft fragments, sea shells in such\nform or in such quantities as to affect adversely the hardening, strength or durability of the mortar.\n2.3Limits of Deleterious Material — The maximum quantities of clay, fine silt, fine dust and organic impurities\nin the sand shall not exceed the following limits:\na) Clay, fine silt and fine dust 1) In natural sand or crushed gravel sand\nNot more than 5 percent by mass 2) In crushed stone sand\nNot more than 5 percent by mass b) Organic impurities.\nColour of the liquid shall be lighter than that indicated by the standard solution.\n2.4. Grading (a) The particle size grading of sand for use in mortars shall be within the limits as specified below:\nIS Sieve Designation\nPercentage Passing by Mass\n4.75 mm\n100\n2.36 mm\n90 to 100\n1.18 mm\n70 to 100\n600 micron\n40 to 100\n300 micron\n5 to 70\n150 micron\n0 to 15 (b) Various sizes of particle of which the sand is composed shall be uniformally distributed throughout the mass."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2116: 1980",
    "title": "Sand For Masonry Mortars",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "(First Revison)",
    "keywords": [
      "revison",
      "sand",
      "masonry",
      "mortars"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 2116: 1980 Sand For Masonry Mortars\n(First Revison)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9142: 1979",
    "title": "Artificial Lightweight Aggregates For Concrete Masonry Units",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements of artificial lightweight aggregates, such as foamed blast furnace slag, bloated clay aggregate, sintered fly ash aggregate and cinder aggregate intended for use in concrete masonry units in which prime consideration is lightness in mass.",
    "keywords": [
      "aggregates",
      "aggregate",
      "cinder",
      "lightweight",
      "concrete",
      "organic",
      "units"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of artificial lightweight aggregates, such as foamed blast furnace slag, bloated clay aggregate, sintered fly ash aggregate and cinder aggregate intended for use in concrete masonry units in which prime consideration is lightness in mass. 2. Requirements 2.1 Grading — The grading of the aggregate, that is, its particle size distribution as obtained by sieve analysis shall be as given in Table 1. 2.2 Bulk Density — The dry loose bulk density of combined aggregate shall not exceed 1100 kg/m3. 2.3 Uniformity of Mass — The bulk density of succes- sive supplies of lightweight aggregate shall not differ by more than 10 percent from that of the sample submitted for acceptance tests. 2.4 Deleterious Substances 2.4.1 Organic Impurities — Lightweight aggregates, upon being subjected to "
    },
    "content": "IS 9142: 1979 Artificial Lightweight Aggregates For Concrete Masonry Units\n1.\nScope — Requirements of artificial lightweight aggregates, such as foamed blast furnace slag, bloated\nclay aggregate, sintered fly ash aggregate and cinder aggregate intended for use in concrete masonry units in\nwhich prime consideration is lightness in mass.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Grading — The grading of the aggregate, that is,\nits particle size distribution as obtained by sieve analysis shall be as given in Table 1.\n2.2 Bulk Density — The dry loose bulk density of\ncombined aggregate shall not exceed 1100 kg/m3.\n2.3 Uniformity of Mass — The bulk density of succes-\nsive supplies of lightweight aggregate shall not differ by more than 10 percent from that of the sample\nsubmitted for acceptance tests.\n2.4 Deleterious Substances\n2.4.1 Organic Impurities — Lightweight aggregates, upon being subjected to the test for organic impurities,\nthat produce a colour darker than the standard colour shall be rejected, unless it can be demonstrated that the\ndiscolouration is due to small quantities of materials not harmful to the concrete\n2.4.2 Clay Lumps — Shall not exceed 2 percent by dry mass.\n2.4.3 Loss on Ignition — Loss on ignition of aggregates except cinder aggregates shall not exceed 4 per-\ncent by dry mass. For cinder aggregates, loss on ignition shall be as specified in IS 2686:1977* .\n2.5 Concrete Making Properties\n2.5.1 Drying Shrinkage — Shall not exceed 0.10 percent.\n2.5.2 Sulphate Content — Shall not be more than one percent when expressed as sulphuric anhydride (SO3)\nby mass.\nTABLE 1 GRADING REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTWEIGHT COMBINED\nAGGREGATES FOR CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS\nSl No.\nSize\nPercentages (By Mass) Passing IS Sieves\nDesignations\n20\n12.5\n10\n4.75\n2.36\n1.18 300 mm\nmm mm\nmm mm\nmm microns\n(1) (2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\n(9)\ni) Fine aggregate — —\n100\n85-100\n—\n40-80\n10-35\n(4.75 to 0 mm)\nii)\nCoarse aggregate\n(12.5 to 4.75 mm)\n100\n90-100\n40-80\n0-20\n0-10 — —\n(10 to 2.36 mm)\n—\n100\n80-100\n5-40\n0-20 — —\niii) Combined fine and\n—\n100\n90-100\n65-90\n35-65 —\n10-25 coarse aggregate (10 mm to 0)\n*Cinder as fine aggregates for use in lime concrete (first revision) Note — For methods of tests refer to IS 2185 (Part 2):1983 Concrete masonry units Part 2 Hollow and solid light weight\nconcrete blocks (first revision), IS 2386:1963 Methods of tests for aggregates for concrete, (Part 1) Particle size and shape, (Part\n2) Organic Estimation of deleterious materials and organic impurities, Part 3 Specific gravity, density, voids, absorption and bulking, (IS 2686:1977 Cinder aggrerate for use in lime concrete, and IS 4032:1985 Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic\ncement (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 9142:1979 Specification for artificial lightweight aggregates for concrete masonry units."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 269: 1989",
    "title": "Ordinary Portland Cement, 33 Grade",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Covers the manufacture and chemical and physical requirements of 33 grade ordinary Portland cement.",
    "keywords": [
      "cement",
      "portland",
      "setting",
      "ordinary",
      "silica",
      "fume",
      "rice"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the manufacture and chemical and physical requirements of 33 grade ordinary Portland cement.",
      "Chemical Requirements": "When tested in accordance with the methods given in IS 4032 : 1985, 33 grade ordinary Portland cement shall comply with the chemical requirements given in Table 1. 3. Physical Requirements 3.1 Fineness — Specific surface of cement shall not be less than 225 m2 /kg. 3.2 Soundness — Unaerated expansion shall be not more than 10 mm by 'Le Chatelier' method and 0.8 percent by autoclave test; if it fails, aerated sample shall not show more of than 5 mm and 0.6 percent when tested by 'Le Chatelier' method and autoclave method respectively. 3.3 Setting Time — The setting time of the cements, when tested by the vicat apparatus shall conform to the following requirements: a) Initial setting time Not less than in minutes 30; and b) Final setting time Not more than in minutes 600. 3.4 Compressive Str",
      "Delivery": "Packed in specified bags of 50 kg, 25 kg, 10 kg,5 kg, 2 kg or 1 kg net or in bulk with tolerances specified in the standard. TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR 33 GRADE ORDINARY PORTLAND CEMENT Sl. No. Characteristics Requirement (1) (2) (3) i) Ratio of percentage of lime to percentage of Not greater than 1.02 and not silica, alumina and iron oxide, when calculated less than 0.66 by the formula ii) Ratio of percentage of alumina to that of iron oxide Not less than 0.66 iii) Insoluble residue, percent by mass (a)In case no flyash, silica fume, rice, husk ash and metakaoline is added - not more than 5.0 (b) In case of addition of and / or silica fume and/or rice husk ash and /or metakoline - Not more than 5.0 iv) Magnesia, percent by mass Not more than 6.0 percent v) Total sulphur content cal"
    },
    "content": "IS 269: 1989 Ordinary Portland Cement, 33 Grade\n(Fourth Revision)\n1. Scope — Covers the manufacture and chemical and\nphysical requirements of 33 grade ordinary Portland cement.\n2. Chemical Requirements — When tested in\naccordance with the methods given in IS 4032 : 1985, 33 grade ordinary Portland cement shall comply with the\nchemical requirements given in Table 1.\n3. Physical Requirements\n3.1 Fineness — Specific surface of cement shall not be\nless than 225 m2 /kg.\n3.2 Soundness — Unaerated expansion shall be not more\nthan 10 mm by 'Le Chatelier' method and 0.8 percent by autoclave test; if it fails, aerated sample shall not show\nmore of than 5 mm and 0.6 percent when tested by 'Le\nChatelier' method and autoclave method respectively.\n3.3 Setting Time — The setting time of the cements,\nwhen tested by the vicat apparatus shall conform to the following requirements: a) Initial setting time\nNot less than in minutes\n30; and b) Final setting time\nNot more than in minutes\n600.\n3.4\nCompressive Strength — The average of at least three mortar cubes (area of face 50 cm2) composed of\none part of cement, three parts of standard sand by mass and P\n4\n3.0\n+\n\n\n\npercent (of combined mass of cement plus sand) water and prepared, stored and tested shall be as\nfollows:\na) 72 ± 1 hour :\nnot less than 16 MPa, b) 168 2 hours : not less than 22 MPa, and\nc) 672\n4 hours :\nnot less than 33 MPa.\n4. Delivery — Packed in specified bags of 50 kg,\n25 kg, 10 kg,5 kg, 2 kg or 1 kg net or in bulk with tolerances specified in the standard. TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR 33 GRADE ORDINARY PORTLAND CEMENT\nSl. No. Characteristics\nRequirement\n(1) (2) (3)\ni)\nRatio of percentage of lime to percentage of\nNot greater than 1.02 and not silica, alumina and iron oxide, when calculated\nless than 0.66 by the formula\nii)\nRatio of percentage of alumina to that of iron oxide\nNot less than 0.66 iii)\nInsoluble residue, percent by mass\n(a)In case no flyash, silica fume, rice, husk ash and metakaoline is added - not more than 5.0\n(b) In case of addition of and / or silica fume and/or rice husk ash and /or metakoline - Not more than 5.0\niv)\nMagnesia, percent by mass\nNot more than 6.0 percent v)\nTotal sulphur content calculated as\nNot more than 2.5 and 3.0 when tri-calcium sulphuric anhydride (SO3)percent by mass\naluminate percent by mass is 5 or less and greater than 5 respectively\nvi)\nTotal loss on ignition\nNot more than 5 percent\nNote — For method of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 Methods of physical test for hydraulic cement; and IS: 4032-1985\nMethods of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 269:1989 Specification for ordinary portland cement, 33 grade (fourth revision).\n±\n±\n3\n2\n2\n3\n2\n3\n0.7\n2.8\n1.2\n0.65\nCaO\nSO\nSiO\nAl O\nFe O\n−\n+\n+"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 455: 1989",
    "title": "Portland Slag Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Covers the manufacture and chemical and physical requirements for Portland slag cement.",
    "keywords": [
      "slag",
      "cement",
      "portland",
      "kgs",
      "granulated",
      "setting",
      "notes"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Delivery": "Packed in specified bags of 50 kgs or 25 kgs net or in builk with tolerances specified in the standard.",
      "Scope": "Covers the manufacture and chemical and physical requirements for Portland slag cement. 2. Chemical Requirement Percent, Max Magnesium oxide (MgO) 8.0 Sulphur trioxide (SO3) 3.0 Sulphide sulphur (S) 1.5 Loss on ignition 5.0 Insoluble residue 4.0 Notes1—Total chloride content in cement shall not exceed 0.05 percent by mass for cement used in prestressed concrete structures and long span reinforced concrete structures. (Method of test for determination of chloride content in cement is given in IS 12423:1988.)* Notes 2. Granulated slag conforming to IS 12089:1987 † has been found suitable for the manufacture of Portland slag cement. 3. Physical Requirements 3.1Fineness — Specific surface , not less than 225 m2/kg. * Method for colorimetric analysis of hydraulic cement. † Granulated slag for m"
    },
    "content": "IS 455: 1989 Portland Slag Cement\n(Fourth Revison)\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement and IS 4032:1985\nChemical analysis of hydraulic cement (first revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 455:1989. Specification for portland slag cement\n(fourth revision).\n3.2 Soundness — Expansion of unaerated sample\n(i)\nnot more than 10 mm by 'Le Chateliers' method\n(ii) not more than 0.8 percent by autoclave method\n3.3 Setting Time –\na)\nInitial setting time\nNot less than\n30 minutes b)\nFinal setting time\nNot more than\n600 minutes\n3.4 Compressive Strength\na)\n72 ± 1 h\nNot less than 16 MPa b) 168 2 h\nNot less than 22 MPa c) 672 4 h\nNot less than 33 MPa\n4.\nDelivery — Packed in specified bags of\n50 kgs or 25 kgs net or in builk with tolerances specified in the standard.\n1. Scope— Covers the manufacture and chemical and\nphysical requirements for Portland slag cement.\n2. Chemical Requirement Percent, Max\nMagnesium oxide (MgO)\n8.0\nSulphur trioxide (SO3)\n3.0\nSulphide sulphur (S) 1.5\nLoss on ignition\n5.0\nInsoluble residue\n4.0\nNotes1—Total chloride content in cement shall not\nexceed 0.05 percent by mass for cement used in prestressed concrete structures and long span reinforced\nconcrete structures. (Method of test for determination of chloride content in cement is given in\nIS 12423:1988.)*\nNotes 2. Granulated slag conforming to IS\n12089:1987 † has been found suitable for the manufacture of Portland slag cement.\n3. Physical Requirements\n3.1Fineness — Specific surface , not less than\n225 m2/kg.\n* Method for colorimetric analysis of hydraulic cement.\n† Granulated slag for manufacture of Portland slag Cement.\n±\n±"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1489 (Part 1): 1991",
    "title": "Portland Pozzolana Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Covers the manufacture, physical and chemical requirements of Portland pozzolana cement using only fly ash pozzolana.",
    "keywords": [
      "pozzolana",
      "portland",
      "fly",
      "ash",
      "cement",
      "reactivity",
      "flyash"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the manufacture, physical and chemical requirements of Portland pozzolana cement using only fly ash pozzolana. 2. Raw Materials 2.1Pozzolana 2.1.1 Fly ash used in the manufacture of Portland pozzolana cement shall conform to IS 3812 : 1981*. 2.1.2 Fineness and average compressive strength in lime reactivity of fly ash shall not be less than 320 m2/kg and 4.0 MPa respectively. 2.1.3 Average compresive strength in lime reactivity of fly ash shall not be less than 4.0 MPa. 2.1.4 Fly ash content shall be between 15 to 35 percent by mass of portland pozzolana cement. 2.2 Portland Cement Clinker/Portland Cement-shall conform to IS 269:1989†.",
      "Chemical Requirements": "See Table 1. 4. Physical Requirements 4.1Fineness — Specific surface shall be not less than 300 m2/kg. 4.2Soundness — Expansion of unaerated sample— i) Not more than 10 mm by 'Le Chateliers' method. ii) Not more than 0.8 percent by Autoclave method. 4.3 Setting Time — Initial setting time 30 min, Min Final setting 600 min, Max 4.4Compressive Strength — a) At 72 1h 16 MPa, Min b) At 168 2h 22 MPa, Min c) At 672 4h 33 MPa, Min",
      "Delivery": "Packed in specified bags of 50 kg or 25 kg net or in bulk with tolerances specified in the standard. TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS OF PORTLAND POZZOLANA CEMENT SI No. Characteristic Requirement (1) (2) (3) i) Loss on ignition, percent by mass, Max 5.0 ii) Magnesia (MgO), percent by mass, Max 6.0 iii) Sulphuric anhydride (SO3), percent by mass, Max 3.0 iv) Insoluble material, percent by mass, Max Note — For methods of tests, refer to IS 1727:1967 Methods of test for pozzolanic material (first revision), relevant part of IS 4031 Method of physical tests for hydraulic cement and IS 4032:1985 Methods of chemical analysis of hydrolic cement (first revision) For detailed information , refer to IS 1489 (Part 1) 1991 Specification for portland pozzolana cement Part 1 :1991 Fly ash based (third rev"
    },
    "content": "IS 1489 (Part 1): 1991 Portland Pozzolana Cement\nPART 1 FLY ASH BASED\n(Third Revision)\n1. Scope — Covers the manufacture, physical and\nchemical requirements of Portland pozzolana cement using only fly ash pozzolana.\n2. Raw Materials\n2.1Pozzolana\n2.1.1 Fly ash used in the manufacture of Portland pozzolana cement shall conform to IS 3812 : 1981*.\n2.1.2 Fineness and average compressive strength in lime reactivity of fly ash shall not be less than 320\nm2/kg and 4.0 MPa respectively.\n2.1.3 Average compresive strength in lime reactivity of fly ash shall not be less than 4.0 MPa.\n2.1.4 Fly ash content shall be between 15 to 35 percent by mass of portland pozzolana cement.\n2.2\nPortland Cement Clinker/Portland Cement-shall conform to IS 269:1989†.\n3. Chemical Requirements — See Table 1.\n4. Physical Requirements\n4.1Fineness — Specific surface shall be not less than\n300 m2/kg.\n4.2Soundness — Expansion of unaerated sample—\ni)\nNot more than 10 mm by 'Le Chateliers' method.\nii)\nNot more than 0.8 percent by Autoclave method.\n4.3 Setting Time —\nInitial setting time 30 min, Min\nFinal setting\n600 min, Max\n4.4Compressive Strength —\na) At 72 1h\n16 MPa, Min\nb) At 168 2h\n22 MPa, Min\nc) At 672 4h 33 MPa, Min\n5. Delivery — Packed in specified bags of 50 kg or\n25 kg net or in bulk with tolerances specified in the standard.\nTABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS OF PORTLAND POZZOLANA\nCEMENT\nSI No. Characteristic\nRequirement\n(1) (2) (3)\ni)\nLoss on ignition, percent by mass, Max 5.0 ii)\nMagnesia (MgO), percent by mass, Max 6.0 iii)\nSulphuric anhydride (SO3), percent by mass, Max 3.0 iv)\nInsoluble material, percent by mass, Max\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to IS 1727:1967 Methods of test for pozzolanic material (first revision), relevant part of IS\n4031 Method of physical tests for hydraulic cement and IS 4032:1985 Methods of chemical analysis of hydrolic cement (first\nrevision)\nFor detailed information , refer to IS 1489 (Part 1) 1991 Specification for portland pozzolana cement Part 1\n:1991 Fly ash based (third revision). * Flyash for use as pozzolana and admixture (first revision)\n† Ordinary portland cement, 33 Grade (fourth revision).\nwhere x is the declared percentage of flyash in the given\nPortland pozzolana\ncement.\n100\n)\n100\n(\n0.4 x\nx\n−\n+\n±\n±\n±"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1489 (Part 2): 1991",
    "title": "Portland Pozzolana Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Manufacture, Physical and Chemical requriements of Portland- pozzolana cement manufactured by using calcined clay pozzolana or a mixture of calcined clay and fly ash pozzolana.",
    "keywords": [
      "pozzolana",
      "calcined",
      "portland",
      "cement",
      "clay",
      "fly",
      "reactivity"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Chemical Requirements": "See TABLE 1. 4 Physical requirements 4.1Fineness Specific surface of Portland pozzolana cement shall be not less than 300 m2/kg. 4.2Soundness — Expansion of unaerated sample. (i) Not more than 10 mm by ‘Le Chatelier’ Method. (ii) Not more than 0.8 percent by Autoclave method. 4.3Setting time— Initial setting time 30 min, Min. Final setting time 600 min, Min. 4.4Compressive stength a) At 72 ± 1h 16 MPa , Min b) At 168 2h 22 MPa , Min c) At 672 4 h 33 MPa , Min 5 Delivery Packed in specified bags of 50 kgs or 25, kgs net or in bulk with toerances specified in the standard.",
      "Scope": "Requirements for masonry cement to be used for all general purposes where mortars for masonry are required. Masonry cement is, however, not intended for use in structural concrete, for flooring and foundation work or for reinforced and prestressed concrete works."
    },
    "content": "IS 1489 (Part 2): 1991 Portland Pozzolana Cement\nPART 2 CALCINED CLAY BASED\n(Third Revision)\nTABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS OF PORTLAND- POZZOLANA CEMENT\nSI No. Characteristic\nRequirement\n(1) (2) (3)\ni)\nLoss on ignition, percent by mass, Max 5.0 ii)\nMagnesia (MGO), percent by mass, Max 6.0 iii)\nSulphuric anhydrid (SO3),percent by mass, Max 3.0 iv)\nInsoluble material, percent by mass, Max\n100\n)\n100\n(\n0.4 x\nx\n−\n+ where x is the declared percenttage of pozzolana\nin the given Portland pozzolana cement\n3. Chemical Requirement — See TABLE 1.\n4\nPhysical requirements\n4.1Fineness Specific surface of Portland pozzolana cement shall be not less than 300 m2/kg.\n4.2Soundness — Expansion of unaerated sample.\n(i)\nNot more than 10 mm by ‘Le Chatelier’ Method.\n(ii)\nNot more than 0.8 percent by Autoclave method.\n4.3Setting time— Initial setting time\n30 min, Min. Final setting time\n600 min, Min.\n4.4Compressive stength a) At 72 ± 1h\n16 MPa , Min b) At 168 2h\n22 MPa , Min c) At 672\n4 h\n33 MPa , Min\n5\nDelivery Packed in specified bags of 50 kgs or 25, kgs net or in bulk with toerances specified in the\nstandard.\n1. Scope — Manufacture, Physical and Chemical\nrequriements of Portland- pozzolana cement manufactured by using calcined clay pozzolana or a\nmixture of calcined clay and fly ash pozzolana.\n2. Raw Materials\n2.1Pozzolana\n2.1.1 Pozzolana used shall be either calcined clay pozzolana conforming to IS 1344: 1981*. or a mixture of\ncalcined clay pozzolana conforming to IS 1344: 1981 and fly ash conforming to IS 3812 : 1981† .\n2.1.2 Fineness and average compressive strength in lime reactivity of pozzolana shall not be less than 320\nm2/kg and 4.0 MPa respectively.\n2.1.3 Average compressive strength in lime reactivity of pozzolana shall not be less than 4.0 MPa.\n2.2 Portland cement clinker-shall confirm to IS 269:1989‡\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 1727:1967 Methods of test of pozzolanic material (first revision),\nIS 4031— Method of physical tests of hydraulic cement and IS 4032: 1985 Methods of Chemical analysis of hydraulic cement\n(first revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1489(Part 2):1991 Specification for Portland pozzolana cement Part 2 calcined clay based (third revision).\n*\nCalcined clay pozzolana (second revision).\n†\nFly ash for use as pozzolana and admiscture (first revision).\n‡\nOrdinary portland cement 33 Grade (fourth revision).\n±\n± 1. Scope — Requirements for masonry cement to be\nused for all general purposes where mortars for masonry are required. Masonry cement is, however, not intended\nfor use in structural concrete, for flooring and foundation work or for reinforced and prestressed concrete works."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3466: 1988",
    "title": "Masonry Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Manufacture of high alumina cement (HAC) and specific requirements for its use as a structural building material in the colder regions of our country (continuously 18°C and below). Its use as a refractory cement is not covered. NOTE — HAC mainly a refractory cement, but in some cold regions it may find use as a structural material due to high early strength development. Following restrictions shall be followed for its use in concrete— a) Shall not be used in locations where ambient temperature e",
    "keywords": [
      "cement",
      "hac",
      "regions",
      "composed",
      "volume",
      "refractory",
      "masonry"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Delivery": "Packed in specified bags of 50 kg or 25 kg net or in bulk with tolerance as given in the standard. TABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS Sl NO. Characteristic Requirements i) Fineness— Residue on 45-micron IS Sieve, Max percent (by wet sieving) 15 ii) Setting Time (by Vicat Apparatus )— a) Initial, Min 90 min b) Final, Max 24 h iii) Soundness: a) Le- Chatelier Max 10 mm b) Autoclave expansion, Max 1 percent iv) Compressive Strength—Average compressive strength of not less than 3 mortar cubes of 50 mm size, composed of 1 part masonry cement and 3 parts standard stand by volume, Min 7 days 2.5 MPa 28 days 5 MPa v) Air Content—Air content of mortar composed of 1 part masonry coement and 6 percent 3 parts standard sand, by volume vi) Water Retention— Flow after suction of mortar composed of 1 part cem",
      "Scope": "Manufacture of high alumina cement (HAC) and specific requirements for its use as a structural building material in the colder regions of our country (continuously 18°C and below). Its use as a refractory cement is not covered. NOTE — HAC mainly a refractory cement, but in some cold regions it may find use as a structural material due to high early strength development. Following restrictions shall be followed for its use in concrete— a) Shall not be used in locations where ambient temperature exceeds 180C. b) Accelerators like calcium chloride shall not be used. c) Steam curing or elevated temperature of curing shall be avoided. d) Shall not be mixed with other types of cement. 2. Requirements 2.1. Total Alumina Content (Al2O3) — Not less than 32 percent"
    },
    "content": "IS 3466: 1988 Masonry Cement\n(Second Revision)\n2. Physical Requirements — See TABLE 1.\n3. Delivery — Packed in specified bags of 50 kg or 25\nkg net or in bulk with tolerance as given in the standard.\nTABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS\nSl NO. Characteristic\nRequirements i) Fineness— Residue on 45-micron IS Sieve, Max percent (by wet sieving)\n15 ii) Setting Time (by Vicat Apparatus )—\na) Initial, Min\n90 min b) Final, Max\n24 h iii) Soundness:\na) Le- Chatelier Max\n10 mm b) Autoclave expansion, Max\n1 percent iv) Compressive Strength—Average compressive strength of not less than 3 mortar cubes of 50 mm size, composed of 1 part masonry cement and 3 parts standard stand by volume, Min\n7 days\n2.5 MPa\n28 days\n5 MPa\nv) Air Content—Air content of mortar composed of 1 part masonry coement and\n6 percent 3 parts standard sand, by volume vi) Water Retention— Flow after suction of mortar composed of 1 part cement\n60 percent of and 3 parts standard sand by volume, Min\noriginal flow\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031. Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3466:1988 Specification for Masonry Cement\n(second revision). 1. Scope —Manufacture of high alumina cement\n(HAC) and specific requirements for its use as a structural building material in the colder regions of our\ncountry (continuously 18°C and below). Its use as a refractory cement is not covered.\nNOTE — HAC mainly a refractory cement, but in some cold regions it may find use as a structural material due to high\nearly strength development. Following restrictions shall be followed for its use in concrete—\na)\nShall not be used in locations where ambient temperature exceeds 180C.\nb) Accelerators like calcium chloride shall not be used.\nc)\nSteam curing or elevated temperature of curing shall be avoided.\nd) Shall not be mixed with other types of cement.\n2. Requirements\n2.1. Total Alumina Content (Al2O3) — Not less than 32 percent"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6452: 1989",
    "title": "High Alumina Cement For Structural Use",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements for composition, manufacture and testing of supersulphated cement (SSC).",
    "keywords": [
      "cement",
      "hours",
      "setting",
      "aggressive",
      "fineness",
      "supersulphated",
      "time"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Delivery": "Packed in specified bags of 50 kg or 25 kg net or in bulk with tolerances as given in the standard. Note — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 : Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement and IS 4032 :1985 Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement (first revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 6452:1989 Specification for High alumina cement for structural use (first revision). ± ±",
      "Scope": "Requirements for composition, manufacture and testing of supersulphated cement (SSC).",
      "Applications": "Supersulphated cement has been successfully used in a variety of aggressive conditions, for example, for marine works, mass concrete jobs to resist the attack by aggressive water, reinforced concrete pipes in ground water, concrete construction in sulphate bearing soils, and in chemical works under conditions involving exposure to high concentrations of sulphates or weak solutions of mineral acids. It has been used for the underside of bridges over railways and for concrete sewers carrying industrial effluents. Its use under tropical conditions has also been re-commended, provided the prevailing temperature is below 400C. Although its use as a general purpose cement can be made with adequate precautions, it is not recommended for producing steamcured products. Production of this cement wil",
      "Chemical Requirements": "Insoluble residue 4 percent, Max Magnesium oxide 10 percent, Max Sulphuric anhydride 6 percent, Min Sulphide sulphur 1.5 percent, Max 4. Physical Requirements 4.1 Fineness — It shall have a fineness (specific surface) of not less than 400 m2/kg. 4.2 Soundness — Expansion not more than 5 mm by Le Chatelier method 4.3 Setting Time — Initial setting time: Not less than 30 minutes, final setting time: not more than 10 hour. 4.4 Compresssive Strength — a) 72 ± 1 hours not less than 15 MPa b) 168 ± 2 hours not less than 22 MPa c) 672 ± 4 hours not less than 30 MPa 5 Delivery — packed in specified bags of 50 kg or 25 kg net or in bulk with tolerances specified in the standard.."
    },
    "content": "IS 6452: 1989 High Alumina Cement For Structural Use\n(First Revision)\n2.2 Fineness — Specific surface not less than\n225 m2/kg\n2.3 Soundness — Expansion not more than 5 mm\n(quantity of mixing water shall be 22 percent of cement by mass).\n2.4 Setting Time — Initial not less than 30 minutes\nand final not more than 10 hours.\n2.5 Compressive Strength of Cement Mortar Cubes\n1:3 (1 cement: 3 Standard Sand ) by Weight:\na)\nAt 24 hours not less than 30 MPa 30 minutes b) At 72 1 hours not less than 35 MPa\n3.\nDelivery — Packed in specified bags of 50 kg or\n25 kg net or in bulk with tolerances as given in the standard.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 : Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement and IS 4032\n:1985 Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement (first revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6452:1989 Specification for High alumina cement for structural use (first revision). ±\n± 1. Scope—Requirements\nfor composition,\nmanufacture and testing of supersulphated cement\n(SSC).\n2. Application —Supersulphated cement has been\nsuccessfully used in a variety of aggressive conditions, for example, for marine works, mass concrete jobs to\nresist the attack by aggressive water, reinforced concrete pipes in ground water, concrete construction in sulphate\nbearing soils, and in chemical works under conditions involving exposure to high concentrations of sulphates\nor weak solutions of mineral acids. It has been used for the underside of bridges over railways and for concrete\nsewers carrying industrial effluents. Its use under tropical conditions has also been re-commended, provided the\nprevailing temperature is below 400C. Although its use as a general purpose cement can be made with adequate\nprecautions, it is not recommended for producing steamcured products. Production of this cement will also result\nin greater utilization of blastfurnance slag, an industrial by- product of steel in the country.\n3. Chemical Requirements —\nInsoluble residue 4 percent, Max\nMagnesium oxide\n10 percent, Max\nSulphuric anhydride 6 percent, Min\nSulphide sulphur\n1.5 percent, Max\n4. Physical Requirements\n4.1 Fineness — It shall have a fineness (specific\nsurface) of not less than 400 m2/kg.\n4.2 Soundness — Expansion not more than 5 mm by Le\nChatelier method\n4.3 Setting Time — Initial setting time: Not less than 30\nminutes, final setting time: not more than 10 hour.\n4.4 Compresssive Strength —\na)\n72\n±\n1 hours not less than 15 MPa\nb)\n168\n±\n2 hours not less than 22 MPa\nc)\n672\n±\n4 hours not less than 30 MPa\n5\nDelivery — packed in specified bags of\n50 kg or 25 kg net or in bulk with tolerances specified in the standard.."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6909: 1990",
    "title": "Supersulphated Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "(First Revision) Note — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement, and IS 4032:1985 Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement (first revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 6909:1990 Specification for supersulphated cement (first revision).",
    "keywords": [
      "cement",
      "rapid",
      "hardening",
      "chemical",
      "confused",
      "requirment",
      "supersulphated"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Chemical Requirements": "Shall be as laid down in IS 269:1989*. 3. Physical Requirements 3.1 Fineness — Specific surface shall not be less than 325 m2/kg. 3.2 Soundness — Unaerated Cement"
    },
    "content": "IS 6909: 1990 Supersulphated Cement\n(First Revision)\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement, and IS 4032:1985\nMethod of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement (first revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6909:1990 Specification for supersulphated cement\n(first revision). 1. Scope\n1.1 Manufacture and chemical and physical\nrequirements of rapid hardening Portland cement.\nNote —The term ‘rapid hardening’ should not be confused\nwith 'quick- setting.’\n2. Chemical Requirment — Shall be as laid down\nin IS 269:1989*.\n3. Physical Requirements\n3.1 Fineness — Specific surface shall not be less than\n325 m2/kg.\n3.2 Soundness — Unaerated Cement"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8041: 1990",
    "title": "Rapid Hardening Portland Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "(Second Revision) Not more than 10 mm ('Le Chatelier’ method). Not more than 0.8 percent (autoclave). 3.3 Setting Time: Initial setting 30 minutes, final setting 10 h. 3.4 Compressive Strength of Mortar Cubes a) 24 hours 30 Not less than 16 MPa minutes b) 72 1 hours Not less than 27 MPa 4 Delivery — Packed in specified bags of 50 kg or 25 kg net or in bulk with tolerances specified in the standard. Note — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 Methods of physical tests for hydr",
    "keywords": [
      "portland",
      "cement",
      "white",
      "setting",
      "generally",
      "physical",
      "oxide"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Physical Requirements": "Physical require- ments of white portland cement shall be as laid down in IS 269: 1989* except that compressive strength of mortar"
    },
    "content": "IS 8041: 1990 Rapid Hardening Portland Cement\n(Second Revision)\nNot more than 10 mm ('Le Chatelier’ method).\nNot more than 0.8 percent (autoclave).\n3.3 Setting Time: Initial setting 30 minutes, final setting\n10 h.\n3.4 Compressive Strength of Mortar Cubes\na)\n24 hours\n30\nNot less than 16 MPa minutes\nb)\n72\n1 hours\nNot less than 27 MPa\n4\nDelivery — Packed in specified bags of 50 kg or\n25 kg net or in bulk with tolerances specified in the standard.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement, and IS\n4032:1985 Method of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement.( first revision)\n*Ordinary Portland cement,33 Grade.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8041: 1990 Specification for rapid hardening portland cement (second revision). ±\n± 1\nScope\n1.1 Manufacture and chemical and physical\nrequirements of white Portland cement.\nNote–White Portland cement is generally used for architectural\nand decorative purposes and is generally meant for nonstructural use. It is made from raw materials containing very\nlittle iron oxide and magnesium oxide.\n2. Chemical Reqrirements — See Table 1.\n3. Physical Requirements — Physical require-\nments of white portland cement shall be as laid down in\nIS 269: 1989* except that compressive strength of mortar"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8042: 1989",
    "title": "White Portland Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Manufacture and chemical and physical requirements of hydrophobic Portland cement. Note—Hydrophobic cement deteriorates very little during prolonged storage under unfavourable conditions. This cement is obtained by intergrinding 33 grade ordinary Portland cement clinker with certain hydrophobic agents which will impart to the cement a water repelling property. The hydrophobic properties are due to the formation of a water repellant film around each particle of cement. This film is broken during ",
    "keywords": [
      "hydrophobic",
      "cement",
      "portland",
      "ordinary",
      "white",
      "chemical",
      "prepared"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Degree Of Whiteness": "The reflectance of neat cement ring prepared and tested in accordance with the test specified shall not be less than 70 percent.",
      "Delivery": "Packed in specified bags of 50 kg, 10 kg, 5 kg, 2 kg or 1 kg net or in bulk subject to tolerances specified in the standard. TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WHITE PORTLAND CEMENT Sl No. Characteristic Requirements (1) (2) (3) i) Ratio of percentages of lime to percentage of Not greater than 1.02 silica, alumina and iron oxide and not less than 0.66 ii) Iron oxide, percent by mass Not more than 1.0 percent iii) Insoluble residue, percent by mass Not more than 2.0 percent iv) Magenesisa, percent by mass Not more than 6 percent v) Total sulphur content calculated as Not more than 3.5 percent sulphuric anhydride (SO3), percent by mass Note —For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement and IS 4032:1985 Methods of chemical analysis of ",
      "Chemical Requirements": "The chemical requirements hydrophobic cement shall be as laid in IS 269:1989*. *Ordinary portland cement 33 Grade (fourth revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 8042: 1989 White Portland Cement\n(Second Revision)\nprepared from white portland cement shall not be less than 90 percent of those specified for 33 grade ordinary\nPortland cement.\n4. Degree of Whiteness — The reflectance of neat\ncement ring prepared and tested in accordance with the test specified shall not be less than 70 percent.\n5. Delivery— Packed in specified bags of 50 kg,\n10 kg, 5 kg, 2 kg or 1 kg net or in bulk subject to tolerances specified in the standard.\nTABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR WHITE PORTLAND CEMENT\nSl No. Characteristic\nRequirements (1) (2) (3) i) Ratio of percentages of lime to percentage of\nNot greater than 1.02 silica, alumina and iron oxide\nand not less than 0.66 ii) Iron oxide, percent by mass\nNot more than 1.0 percent iii) Insoluble residue, percent by mass\nNot more than 2.0 percent iv) Magenesisa, percent by mass\nNot more than 6 percent v) Total sulphur content calculated as\nNot more than 3.5 percent sulphuric anhydride (SO3), percent by mass\nNote —For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement and IS 4032:1985\nMethods of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement. (first revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8042:1989 Specification for white Portland cement\n(second revision).\n* Ordinary portland cement 33 Grade (fourth revision) 1\nScope — Manufacture and chemical and physical requirements of hydrophobic Portland cement.\nNote—Hydrophobic cement deteriorates very little during\nprolonged storage under unfavourable conditions. This cement is obtained by intergrinding 33 grade ordinary Portland cement\nclinker with certain hydrophobic agents which will impart to the cement a water repelling property. The hydrophobic\nproperties are due to the formation of a water repellant film around each particle of cement. This film is broken during\nthe mixing of the con crete, and normal hydration takes place. Hydrophobic cement shall not be confused with water\nproofing cements.\n2. Chemical Requirements—The chemical\nrequirements hydrophobic cement shall be as laid in\nIS 269:1989*.\n*Ordinary portland cement 33 Grade (fourth revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8043: 1991",
    "title": "Hydrophobic Portland Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Manufacture, chemical and physical requirements of 43 grade ordinary Portland cement. Note—This specification covers the requirements of ordinary Portland Cement for uses such as manufacture of prestressed concrete railway sleepers and precast products.",
    "keywords": [
      "portland",
      "hours",
      "fineness",
      "cement",
      "soundness",
      "ordinary",
      "hydrophobic"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Delivery": "Packed in specified bags of 50 kg or 25 kg net subject to tolerances specified in the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 8043:1991 Specification for hydrophobic Portland cement (second revision). ± ± ±",
      "Scope": "Manufacture, chemical and physical requirements of 43 grade ordinary Portland cement. Note—This specification covers the requirements of ordinary Portland Cement for uses such as manufacture of prestressed concrete railway sleepers and precast products.",
      "Chemical Requirements": "See Table 1. 3. Physical Requirement 3.1 Fineness — Specific surface not less than 225 m2/kg 3.2 Soundness — Unaerated cement not more the 10 mm by ‘Le Chatelier’ method and not more than 0.8 percent by autoclave method."
    },
    "content": "IS 8043: 1991 Hydrophobic Portland Cement\n(Second Revision)\n3. Physical Requirements\n3.1Fineness — Specific surface shall not be less than 350 m2/kg.\n3.2Soundness and Setting Time — Shall be as laid down\nIS 269:1989.\n3.3Compressive Strength a) 72\n1 hours Not less than 15.69 MPa b) 168\n2 hours Not less than 21.57 MPa c) 672\n4 hours Not less than 30.40 MPa\n4. Delivery — Packed in specified bags of 50 kg or\n25 kg net subject to tolerances specified in the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8043:1991 Specification for hydrophobic Portland cement\n(second revision).\n±\n±\n± 1. Scope — Manufacture, chemical and physical\nrequirements of 43 grade ordinary Portland cement.\nNote—This specification covers the requirements of ordinary\nPortland Cement for uses such as manufacture of prestressed concrete railway sleepers and precast products.\n2. Chemical Requirements — See Table 1.\n3. Physical Requirement\n3.1 Fineness — Specific surface not less than\n225 m2/kg\n3.2 Soundness — Unaerated cement not more the 10\nmm by ‘Le Chatelier’ method and not more than 0.8 percent by autoclave method."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8112: 1989",
    "title": "43 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Manufacture, chemical and physical requirments of 53 Grade ordinary Portland cement. Note—For certain specialized works, such as prestressed concrete and certain items of precast concrete, the concrete industry quite often needs a special type of ordinary Portland cement having the compressive strength much higher than the minimum compressive strength limits specified in IS 269:1989*and IS 8112:1991+",
    "keywords": [
      "portland",
      "cement",
      "hour",
      "chemical",
      "setting",
      "ordinary",
      "alumina"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Delivery": "Packed in specified bags of 50 kg , 25 kg, 10 kg, 5 kg, 2 kg or 1 kg net or in bulk with tolerances specified in the standard. TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGH STRENGTH PORTLAND CEMENT Sl No. Characteristic Requirement (1) (2) (3) i) Ratio of percentage of lime to percentages of silica, Not greater than 1.02 and not alumina and iron oxide, when calculated by the formula less than 0.66 ii) Ratio of percentage of alumina to that of iron oxide Not less than 0.66 iii) Insoluble residue, percent by mass Not more than 3.0 iv) Magnesia, percent by mass Not more than 6.0 v) Total sulphur content calculated as sulphuric Not more than 2.5 and 3.0 when tricalcium anhydride (SO3), percent by mass greater than aluminate percent by mass is 5 or less and 5 respectively vi) Total loss on ignition No",
      "Scope": "Manufacture, chemical and physical requirments of 53 Grade ordinary Portland cement. Note—For certain specialized works, such as prestressed concrete and certain items of precast concrete, the concrete industry quite often needs a special type of ordinary Portland cement having the compressive strength much higher than the minimum compressive strength limits specified in IS 269:1989*and IS 8112:1991+",
      "Chemical Requirements": "See Table 1. 3. Physical Requirements 3.1 Fineness — Specific surface shall not be less than 225 m2/kg."
    },
    "content": "IS 8112: 1989 43 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement\n(First Revision)\n3.3 Setting Time —\na) Initial setting time in minutes —not less than 30.\nb) Final setting time in minutes — not more than 600.\n3.4 Compressive strength — a) 72\n1 hour not less than\n23 MPa b) 168\n2 hour not less than 33 MPa c) 672\n4 hour not less than 43 MPa\n4. Delivery — Packed in specified bags of 50 kg , 25\nkg, 10 kg, 5 kg, 2 kg or 1 kg net or in bulk with tolerances specified in the standard.\nTABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR HIGH STRENGTH PORTLAND CEMENT\nSl No. Characteristic Requirement (1) (2) (3) i)\nRatio of percentage of lime to percentages of silica,\nNot greater than 1.02 and not alumina and iron oxide, when calculated by the formula\nless than 0.66 ii) Ratio of percentage of alumina to that of iron oxide\nNot less than 0.66 iii) Insoluble residue, percent by mass\nNot more than 3.0 iv) Magnesia, percent by mass\nNot more than 6.0 v) Total sulphur content calculated as sulphuric\nNot more than 2.5 and 3.0 when tricalcium anhydride (SO3), percent by mass greater than\naluminate percent by mass is 5 or less and\n5 respectively vi)\nTotal loss on ignition\nNot more than 5 percent\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8112:1989 Specification for 43 Grade ordinary portland cement (first revision).\nNote 1 — For specific chemical and physical requirements of cement used for railway sleepers, refer to the standard.\nNote 2 — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement and IS 4032:1985\nMethods of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement. (first revision)\n±\n±\n±\n3\n2\nCao - 0.7SO\n2.8SiO\n2\n3\n2\n3\n+ 1.2AI O + 0.65Fe O 1. Scope — Manufacture, chemical and physical\nrequirments of 53 Grade ordinary Portland cement.\nNote—For certain specialized works, such as prestressed\nconcrete and certain items of precast concrete, the concrete industry quite often needs a special type of ordinary Portland\ncement having the compressive strength much higher than the minimum compressive strength limits specified in IS\n269:1989*and IS 8112:1991+\n2. Chemical Requirement — See Table 1.\n3. Physical Requirements\n3.1 Fineness — Specific surface shall not be less than\n225 m2/kg."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12269: 1987",
    "title": "53 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "The manufacture, chemical and physical requirements and testing of sulphate resisting Portland cement. Note — Sulphate resisting Portland cement is a type of Portland cement in which the amount of tricalcium aluminate is restricted to an acceptably low value. This cement should not be mistaken for supersulphated cement, which is produced by intergrinding or intimately blending a mixture of granu lated blast furnace slag, calcium sulphate and a small amount of Portland cement or Portland cement c",
    "keywords": [
      "portland",
      "cement",
      "ordinary",
      "sulphate",
      "silica",
      "resisting",
      "fume"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Delivery": "Packed in specified bags of 50 kg, 25 kg, 10 kg, 5 kg, 2 kg or 1 kg or in bulk with tolerances specified in this standard. TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR 53 GRADE ORDINARY PORTLAND CEMENT Sl No. Characteristic Requirement (1) (2) (3) i) Ratio of percentage of lime to percentages of silica Not greater than 1.02 and not less than 0.80 alumina and iron oxide ii) Ratio of percentage of alumina to that of iron oxide Not less than 0.66 iii) Insoluble residue, percent by mass (a) In caes no flyash, silica fume, rice hask ash and metakoline in added - Not more than 3.0 (b) In case of addition of fly ash and/or silica fume and/or rice husk ash and/or metakaoline - Not more than 5.0 iv) Magnesia, percent by mass Not more than 6.0 v) Total sulphur content calculated as sulphuric anhydride (SO3), N",
      "Scope": "The manufacture, chemical and physical requirements and testing of sulphate resisting Portland cement. Note — Sulphate resisting Portland cement is a type of Portland cement in which the amount of tricalcium aluminate is restricted to an acceptably low value. This cement should not be mistaken for supersulphated cement, which is produced by intergrinding or intimately blending a mixture of granu lated blast furnace slag, calcium sulphate and a small amount of Portland cement or Portland cement clinker or any other sources of lime. Sulphate resisting Portland cement can be used for structural concrete wherever ordinary Portland cement or Portland pozzolana cement or Portland slag cement are useable under normal conditions. Use of supersulphated cement is, however generally restricted where "
    },
    "content": "IS 12269: 1987 53 Grade Ordinary Portland Cement\n3.2 Soundness — unaerated cement not more than 10\nmm by ‘Le Chatelier’ method and 0.8 percent by autoclave method\n3.3 Setting Time —\na)\nInitial setting time in minutes – not less than 30, and b)\nFinal setting time in minutes – not more than 600.\n3.4 Compressive Strength —\na)\n72\n1 h, not less than\n27 MPa\nb)\n168\n2 h, not less than\n37 MPa\nc)\n672\n4 h, not less than\n53 MPa\n4. Delivery — Packed in specified bags of 50 kg, 25\nkg, 10 kg, 5 kg, 2 kg or 1 kg or in bulk with tolerances specified in this standard.\nTABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR 53 GRADE ORDINARY\nPORTLAND CEMENT\nSl No. Characteristic Requirement (1) (2) (3)\ni) Ratio of percentage of lime to percentages of silica\nNot greater than 1.02 and not less than 0.80 alumina and iron oxide\nii) Ratio of percentage of alumina to that of iron oxide\nNot less than 0.66 iii) Insoluble residue, percent by mass\n(a) In caes no flyash, silica fume, rice hask ash and metakoline in added - Not more than 3.0\n(b) In case of addition of fly ash and/or silica fume and/or rice husk ash and/or metakaoline - Not more than 5.0\niv) Magnesia, percent by mass\nNot more than 6.0 v) Total sulphur content calculated as sulphuric anhydride (SO3),\nNot more than 2.5 and 3.0 when tri-calcium aluminate percent by mass\npercent by mass is 5 or less and greater than 5, respectively\nvi) Total loss on ignition\nNot more than 4 percent\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12269:1987 Specification for 53 Grade ordinary portland cement.\nNote 1 — For specific chemical and physical requirements of cement used for railway sleepers, refer to the standard.\nNote 2 — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement and IS\n4032:1985 Methods of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement. (first revision)\n* Ordinary portland cement 33 grade (fourth revision).\n+ 43 Grade ordinary portland cement (first revision).\n±\n±\n± 1. Scope — The manufacture, chemical and physical\nrequirements and testing of sulphate resisting Portland cement.\nNote — Sulphate resisting Portland cement is a type of\nPortland cement in which the amount of tricalcium aluminate is restricted to an acceptably low value. This cement should\nnot be mistaken for supersulphated cement, which is produced by intergrinding or intimately blending a mixture of granu\nlated blast furnace slag, calcium sulphate and a small amount of Portland cement or Portland cement clinker or any other\nsources of lime.\nSulphate resisting Portland cement can be used for structural concrete wherever ordinary Portland cement\nor Portland pozzolana cement or Portland slag cement are useable under normal conditions. Use of\nsupersulphated cement is, however generally restricted where the prevailing tempera ture ie below 40OC. The\nlater is not recommended for producing steam-cured products.\n2. Chemical Requirements — See Table 1."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12330: 1988",
    "title": "Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements for the following concrete masonry building units which are used in construction of loadbearing and partition walls: a) Hollow (open and closed cavity) load bearing concrete blocks. b) Hollow (open and closed cavity) non-load bearing concrete blocks, and c) Solid load-bearing concrete blocks. Note—Concrete masonry units are used for both load-bearing and non-load bearing walls, for partitions and panel walls, as backing for other types of facing materials, for piers, pilasters and c",
    "keywords": [
      "cavity",
      "block",
      "walls",
      "bearing",
      "closed",
      "calculated",
      "concrete"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Delivery": "Packed in specified bags of 50 kg net or in bulk with tolerances specified in the standard. TABLE1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SULPHATE RESISTING PORTLAND CEMENT Sl No. Characteristic Requirement (1) (2) (3) i) Ratio of percentage if lime to percentages of silica, alumina Not greater than 1.02 and and iron oxide when calculated by the formula not less than 0.66 ii) Insoluble residue, percent by mass Not more than 4 iii) Magmesia, percent by mass Not more than 6 iv) Total sulphur content calculated as sulphuric anhydride (SO3) percent by mass Not more than 2.5 v) Tricalcium aluminate (C3A), percent by mass Not more than 5 vi) Tetracalcium alumino ferrite phase twice the tricalcium aluminate Not mor ethan 25 (C4AF+2C3A), percent by mass vii) Total loss on ignition, percent by mass Not more tha",
      "Scope": "Requirements for the following concrete masonry building units which are used in construction of loadbearing and partition walls: a) Hollow (open and closed cavity) load bearing concrete blocks. b) Hollow (open and closed cavity) non-load bearing concrete blocks, and c) Solid load-bearing concrete blocks. Note—Concrete masonry units are used for both load-bearing and non-load bearing walls, for partitions and panel walls, as backing for other types of facing materials, for piers, pilasters and columns, for retaining walls, garden walls, chimneys and fire places, as fillers in concrete joist floor construction and as shuttering for beams, columns and lintels. 2. Terminology 2.1Hollow (Open or Closed Cavity) Block—A block having one or more large holes or cavities which either pass through t"
    },
    "content": "IS 12330: 1988 Sulphate Resisting Portland Cement\n3. Physical Requirement\n3.1 Fineness — Specific surface not less than\n225 m2/kg\n3.2 Soundness – Unaerated cement-expansion not more\nthan 10 mm by ‘Le Chatelier’ method and not more than\n0.8 percent by autoclave method.\n3.3 Setting Time —\na)\nInitial setting time in minutes, not less than\n30 and b)\nFinal setting time in minutes not more than 600\n3.4 Compressive Strengh —\na)\n72\n1h, not less than 10 MPa\nb)\n168\n2h, not less than\n16 MPa\nc)\n672\n4h, not less than\n33MPa\n4. Delivery— Packed in specified bags of 50 kg net\nor in bulk with tolerances specified in the standard.\nTABLE1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR SULPHATE RESISTING\nPORTLAND CEMENT\nSl No. Characteristic\nRequirement (1) (2) (3)\ni)\nRatio of percentage if lime to percentages of silica, alumina\nNot greater than 1.02 and and iron oxide when calculated by the formula not less than 0.66 ii)\nInsoluble residue, percent by mass\nNot more than 4 iii)\nMagmesia, percent by mass\nNot more than 6 iv)\nTotal sulphur content calculated as sulphuric anhydride (SO3) percent by mass\nNot more than 2.5 v)\nTricalcium aluminate (C3A), percent by mass\nNot more than 5 vi)\nTetracalcium alumino ferrite phase twice the tricalcium aluminate\nNot mor ethan 25\n(C4AF+2C3A), percent by mass vii) Total loss on ignition, percent by mass\nNot more than 5\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12330:1988 Specification for sulphate resisting Portland cement.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 4031 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement and IS 4032 : 1985\nMethod of chemical analysis of hydraulic cement. (first revision).\n±\n±\n±\n3\nO\n2\n0.65Fe\n3\nO\n2\n1.2AI\n2\nO\n1\n2.8S\n3\n0.7SO\n-\nCaO\n+\n+ 1. Scope — Requirements for the following concrete\nmasonry building units which are used in construction of loadbearing and partition walls:\na)\nHollow (open and closed cavity) load bearing concrete blocks.\nb)\nHollow (open and closed cavity) non-load bearing concrete blocks, and\nc)\nSolid load-bearing concrete blocks.\nNote—Concrete masonry units are used for both load-bearing\nand non-load bearing walls, for partitions and panel walls, as backing for other types of facing materials, for piers, pilasters\nand columns, for retaining walls, garden walls, chimneys and fire places, as fillers in concrete joist floor construction and\nas shuttering for beams, columns and lintels.\n2. Terminology\n2.1Hollow (Open or Closed Cavity) Block—A block having one or more large holes or cavities which either\npass through the block (open cavity) or do not effectively pass through the block (closed cavity) and\nhaving the solid material between 50 and 75 percent of the total volume of the block calculated from the overall\ndimensions.\n2.2 Solid Block — A block which has solid material\nnot less than 75 percent of the total volume of the block calculated from the overall dimensions.\n3. Dimension\n3.1 Normal Dimension—\nLength\n400, 500 or 600 mm\nHeight\n200 or 100 mm\nWidth\n200, 250, or 300 mm\nNote 1 — Actual dimensions shall be 10 mm short of nominal\ndimensions or 6mm short in special cases where finer jointing is specified."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2185 (Part 1): 1979",
    "title": "Concrete Masonry Units",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Covers the following lightweight concrete masonry building units which are used in the construction of load-bearing and non-load bearing walls: a) Hollow (open and closed cavity) load bearing concrete blocks, b) Hollow (open and closed cavity) non-load bearing concrete blocks, c) Solid load-bearing concrete blocks, and d) Solid non-load bearing concrete blocks",
    "keywords": [
      "units",
      "cavity",
      "blocks",
      "bearing",
      "hollow",
      "concrete",
      "closed"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Classification": "see Table 2 4.1 Hollow (Open and Closed Cavity) Concrete Blocks — a) Grade A b) Grade B (see Table 2) c) Grade C 4.2 Solid Concrete Blocks — Grade D (See Table 2). 5. Physical Requirement 5.1 General — All units shall be sound and free of cracks or other defects. 5.2 Blocks Density and Compressive Strength – Shall be as given in Table 2. 5.3 Water Absorption — Average value of three units shall be not more than 10 percent by mass. 5.4 Drying Shrinkage — Average value of three units shall not exceed 0.1 percent. 5.5 Moisture Movement —Average value of three units shall not exceed 0.09 percent. ± Note 1 — For requirements regarding materials, surface texture, texture and finish, refer to the standard. Note 2 — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to F of the standard. For detailed inf",
      "Scope": "Covers the following lightweight concrete masonry building units which are used in the construction of load-bearing and non-load bearing walls: a) Hollow (open and closed cavity) load bearing concrete blocks, b) Hollow (open and closed cavity) non-load bearing concrete blocks, c) Solid load-bearing concrete blocks, and d) Solid non-load bearing concrete blocks 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Nominal Dimensions Length 400, 500 or 600 mm Height 100 or 200 mm Width 50, 75, 100, 150, 200, 250 or 300 mm Note 1 — Actual dimensions shall be 10 mm short of the nominal dimensions (or 6 mm short in special cases where finer jointing is specified). Note 2 — In addition, block shall be manufactured in half lengths of 200,250 or 300 mm to correspond to the full lengths. 2.2 Tolerance — Not more than 5"
    },
    "content": "IS 2185 (Part 1): 1979 Concrete Masonry Units\nPART 1 HOLLOW AND SOLID CONCRETE BLOCKS\n(Second Revision)\nNote 2 — Block shall also be manufactured in half lengths of\n200, 250 or 300 mm.\n3.2 Tolerances — Not more than ± 5 mm in length and\n3 mm in height and width of unit.\n3.3 Face shells and webs shall increase in thickness\nfrom the bottom to the top of unit; the thickness shall be not less than the value given in Table 1, as\nappropriate.\n4.\nClassification — see Table 2\n4.1 Hollow (Open and Closed Cavity) Concrete\nBlocks —\na) Grade A b) Grade B (see Table 2)\nc) Grade C\n4.2 Solid Concrete Blocks — Grade D (See Table 2).\n5.\nPhysical Requirement\n5.1 General — All units shall be sound and free of\ncracks or other defects.\n5.2 Blocks Density and Compressive Strength – Shall\nbe as given in Table 2.\n5.3 Water Absorption — Average value of three units\nshall be not more than 10 percent by mass.\n5.4 Drying Shrinkage — Average value of three units\nshall not exceed 0.1 percent.\n5.5 Moisture Movement —Average value of three units\nshall not exceed 0.09 percent. ± Note 1 —\nFor requirements regarding materials, surface texture, texture and finish, refer to the standard.\nNote 2 —\nFor methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to F of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2185 (Part 1):1979 Specification for concrete mansory units : Part 1 Hollow and solid concrete blocks (second revision).\nTABLE 1 MINIMUM FACE SHELL AND WEB THICKNESSES\nAll dimensions in millimetres.\nNominal Block\nFace Shell\nThickness of\nTotal Web Thickness Per\nWidth\nThickness, Min\nWeb, Min Courses in Any 200 mm Length of Walling, Min\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n100 or less\n25\n25\n25\nOver 100 to 150\n25\n25\n30\nOver 150 to 200\n30\n25\n30\nOver 200\n35\n30\n38\nTABLE 2 BLOCK DENSITY AND COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH Type\nGrade\nDensity of Block kg/m3\nMinimum\nMinimum\nAverage\nStrength of\nCompressive\nIndividual\nStrength of\nUnits at\nUnits at 28\n28 days\nDays N/mm2\nN/mm2 (1) (2) (3) (4)\n(5). Hollow (open and closed\nA (3.5)\nNot less than 1500 3.5\n2.8 cavity) load bearing unit\nA (4.5) 4.5\n3.6\nA (5.5) 5.5\n4.4\nA (7.0) 7.0\n5.6\nB (2.0)\nLess than 1 500 but not 2.0\n1.6 less than 1 000\nB (3.0) 3.0\n2.4\nB (5.0) 5.0\n4.0 Hollow (open and closed\nC (1.5)\nLess than 1 500 but 1.5\n1.2 cavity) non-load bearing units\nnot less than 1000 Solid load bearing units\nD (5.0)\nNot less than 1 800 5.0\n4.0\nD (4.0) 4.0\n3.2 1. Scope — Covers the following lightweight concrete\nmasonry building units which are used in the construction of load-bearing and non-load bearing walls:\na)\nHollow (open and closed cavity) load bearing concrete blocks,\nb)\nHollow (open and closed cavity) non-load bearing concrete blocks,\nc)\nSolid load-bearing concrete blocks, and d)\nSolid non-load bearing concrete blocks\n2. Dimensions and Tolerances\n2.1 Nominal Dimensions\nLength\n400, 500 or 600 mm\nHeight\n100 or 200 mm\nWidth\n50, 75, 100, 150, 200,\n250 or 300 mm\nNote 1 — Actual dimensions shall be 10 mm short of the\nnominal dimensions (or 6 mm short in special cases where finer jointing is specified).\nNote 2 — In addition, block shall be manufactured in half\nlengths of 200,250 or 300 mm to correspond to the full lengths.\n2.2 Tolerance — Not more than 5 mm in length and\n3 mm in height and width of unit.\n2.3 Hollow concrete blocks shall be made either with\ntwo cores or three cores. Stretchers in the 200, 250 and\n300 mm width shall generally have concave ends, each end flange being grooved or plain. All 100 and 150 mm\nwide units shall generally be made with plain ends.\n2.4 Face shells and webs shall increase in thickness\nfrom the bottom to the top of the unit. Depending upon the core moulds used, the face shells and webs shall be\nflared and tapered or straight tapered, the former providing a wider surface for mortar. The minimum\nthickness of the face shell and web shall be not less than 20 mm. However, for the top face shell of the closed\ncavity units, the minimum thickness may be less the\n20 mm, but not less then 15 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2185 (Part 2): 1983",
    "title": "Concrete Masonry Units",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Covers the requirements of autoclaved cellular (aerated) concrete blocks having density up to 1 000 kg/ m3. Note — Autoclaved means team curing of concrete products, sandlime bricks, asbestos cement products, hydrous calcium silicate insulation products, or cement in an autoclave at maximum ambient temperatures generally between 170 and 215oC.",
    "keywords": [
      "units",
      "bearing",
      "hollow",
      "walls",
      "lightweight",
      "concrete",
      "grade"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the requirements of autoclaved cellular (aerated) concrete blocks having density up to 1 000 kg/ m3. Note — Autoclaved means team curing of concrete products, sandlime bricks, asbestos cement products, hydrous calcium silicate insulation products, or cement in an autoclave at maximum ambient temperatures generally between 170 and 215oC. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Nominal Dimensions Length 400, 500 or 600 mm Height 200, 250 or 300 mm Width 100, 150, 200 or 250 mm Note 1— Actual dimensions shall be 10mm short of the nominal dimensions (or 6 mm short in special cases where finer jointing is specified). Note 2 — In addition, block shall be manufactured in half lengths of 200, 250 or 300 mm to correspond to the full lengths. 2.2 Tolerance — Not more than 5 mm in length and 3 mm in ",
      "Classification": "Classified into two grades (See Table 1). 4. Physical Requirements 4.1General — All units shall be sound and free of cracks and other defects . 4.2 For block density, compressive strength and thermal conductivity (See Table 1). 4.3 Drying Shrinkage — Shall not be more than 0.05 percent for Grade 1 blocks and 0.10 percent for Grade 2 blocks."
    },
    "content": "IS 2185 (Part 2): 1983 Concrete Masonry Units\nPART 2 HOLLOW AND SOLID LIGHTWEIGHT\nCONCRETE BLOCKS\n(First Revision)\n3. Classification\n3.1 Load bearing lightweight concrete masonry units\nhollow (open and closed cavity) or solid shall conform to the following two grades—\na) Grade A—These are used below and above ground level in damp-proof course, in exterior\nwalls that may or may not be treated with a suitable weather-protective coating and for\ninterior walls.\nb) Grade B — These are used above ground level in damp-proof course, in exterior walls that are\ntreated with a suitable weather-protective coating and for internal walls.\n3.2Non–load bearing lightweight concrete masonry units, hollow (open and closed cavity) or solid shall be\nused in interior walls, partitions, panels and for exterior panel walls in steel or reinforced concrete frame\nconstruction when protected from weather by rendering or by some other efficient treatment.\n4. Physical Requirements\n4.1 General — All units shall be sound and free from\ncracks or other defects.\n4.2 Block Density — Shall not exceed 1 600 kg/m3\n4.3 Compressive Strength — See Table 1.\n4.4 Water Absorption — See Table 1.\n4.5 Drying Shrinkage—Load Bearing —\nGrade ‘A’\n0.08 percent, Max\nGrade ‘B’\n0.09 percent, Max\nNon - Load Bearing\n0.09 percent, Max\n4.6 Moisture Movement— Average value of three units\nshall be less than the drying shrinkage specified in 4.5 by at least 0.01.\n±\n± Note 1 — For requirements regarding materials, manufacture, surface texture and finish refer to the standard.\nNote 2 — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to F of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2185 (Part 2) 1983 Specification for concrete masonry units : Part 2 Hollow and solid lightweight concrete blocks (first revision).\nTABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS Type and Grade Minimum Compressive\nMaximum average water Absorption\nStrength with oven-dry mass of concrete\nAverage of\nIndividual\nLess than 1360\nLess than 1600\n8 units, Min units, Min\n(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)\nHollow,load bearing\nN/mm2 N/mm2 Kg/m3\nKg/m3\nGrade A\n7.0\n5.5 -\n290\nGrade B\n5.0\n4.0 320 -\nHollow, Non-load bearing\n4.0\n3.5 - -\nSolid ,load bearing\nGrade A\n12.5 10.8 -\n290\nGrade B\n8.5\n7.0 320 - 1. Scope— Covers the requirements of autoclaved\ncellular (aerated) concrete blocks having density up to\n1 000 kg/ m3.\nNote — Autoclaved means team curing of concrete products,\nsandlime bricks, asbestos cement products, hydrous calcium silicate insulation products, or cement in an autoclave at\nmaximum ambient temperatures generally between 170 and\n215oC.\n2. Dimensions and Tolerances\n2.1 Nominal Dimensions\nLength\n400, 500 or 600 mm\nHeight\n200, 250 or 300 mm\nWidth\n100, 150, 200 or 250 mm\nNote 1—\nActual dimensions shall be 10mm short of the nominal dimensions (or 6 mm short in special cases where\nfiner jointing is specified).\nNote 2 — In addition, block shall be manufactured in half lengths of 200, 250 or 300 mm to correspond to the full\nlengths.\n2.2 Tolerance — Not more than\n5 mm in length and 3 mm in height and width of the unit.\n3. Classification— Classified into two grades\n(See Table 1).\n4. Physical Requirements\n4.1General — All units shall be sound and free of cracks and other defects .\n4.2 For block density, compressive strength and thermal\nconductivity (See Table 1).\n4.3 Drying Shrinkage — Shall not be more than 0.05\npercent for Grade 1 blocks and 0.10 percent for Grade 2 blocks."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2185 (Part 3): 1984",
    "title": "Concrete Masonry Units",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements for reinforced concrete fence posts for general purposes. Recommendations for the provisions of wire holes and their spacing, as well as the erection of post-and-wire fence have also been included. Reinforced lightweight concrete fence posts and prestressed concrete fence posts are not covered.",
    "keywords": [
      "posts",
      "fence",
      "strainer",
      "autoclaved",
      "concrete",
      "post",
      "cellular"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for reinforced concrete fence posts for general purposes. Recommendations for the provisions of wire holes and their spacing, as well as the erection of post-and-wire fence have also been included. Reinforced lightweight concrete fence posts and prestressed concrete fence posts are not covered. 2. Classification a) Line Posts— Line posts are intermediate posts forming the majority in a post-and-wire system and are intended to carry the fencing wire between the strainer posts. b) Strainer Posts— Posts notched on three sides and used with struts or braces as strainers at the corners or ends, or at intermediate positions in a line of fence. c) Strut or Brace— Member used in inclined position for supporting the strainer post. 3. Shape and Dimension 3.1 Shall be square, rectangular"
    },
    "content": "IS 2185 (Part 3): 1984 Concrete Masonry Units\nPART 3 AUTOCLAVED CELLULAR (AERATED)\nCONCRETE BLOCKS\n(First Revision) TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF AUTOCLAVED CELLULAR\nCONCRETE BLOCKS\nSl No. Density in Ovendry\nCompressive Strength,\nThermal\nCondition\nMin\nConductivity\nAir Dry\nCondition\nGrade 1\nGrade 2 (1)\n(2) (3) (4)\n(5)\nkg/m3\nN/mm2\nN/mm2\nW/m.k i)\n451 to 550\n2.0\n1.5\n0.21 ii)\n551 to 650\n4.0\n3.0\n0.24 iii)\n652 to 750\n5.0\n4.0\n0.30 iv)\n751 to 850\n6.0\n5.0\n0.37 v) 851 to 1 000\n7.0\n6.0\n0.42\nNote 1 — For requirements regarding materials surface texture and finish refer to the standard.\nNote 2 — For methods of test, refer to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2185 (Part 3) 1984 Specification for concrete masonry units: Part 3 Autoclaved cellular (aerated) concrete blocks (first revision).\n±\n± 1. Scope — Requirements for reinforced concrete\nfence posts for general purposes. Recommendations for the provisions of wire holes and their spacing, as\nwell as the erection of post-and-wire fence have also been included. Reinforced lightweight concrete fence\nposts and prestressed concrete fence posts are not covered.\n2. Classification\na) Line Posts— Line posts are intermediate posts forming the majority in a post-and-wire system\nand are intended to carry the fencing wire between the strainer posts.\nb) Strainer Posts— Posts notched on three sides and used with struts or braces as strainers at\nthe corners or ends, or at intermediate positions in a line of fence.\nc) Strut or Brace— Member used in inclined position for supporting the strainer post.\n3. Shape and Dimension\n3.1 Shall be square, rectangular, circular or any\npolygonal in section. May be of uniform section or tapering on two sides or tapering on all four sides. The"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4996: 1984",
    "title": "Reinforced Concrete Fence Posts",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements for precast concrete coping blocks, giving details of materials for manufacture, workmanship, functional requirements and essential dimensions to meet them. Note—The blocks serve as defence against entry of moisture into hollow concrete block walls. Functional requirements are: a) should prevent downward penetraction of water b) should direct water clear of walls below c) should resist lateral displacement, either by its mass or by mechanical means such as clip type coping or by use",
    "keywords": [
      "post",
      "fence",
      "coping",
      "posts",
      "strainer",
      "cross",
      "concrete"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for precast concrete coping blocks, giving details of materials for manufacture, workmanship, functional requirements and essential dimensions to meet them. Note—The blocks serve as defence against entry of moisture into hollow concrete block walls. Functional requirements are: a) should prevent downward penetraction of water b) should direct water clear of walls below c) should resist lateral displacement, either by its mass or by mechanical means such as clip type coping or by use of cramps and dowels. d) should allow for thermal and moisture movements. e) should be durable. 2. Dimension and Tolerances 2.1Dimension of Cross Section— The form of cross section shall be as agreed to mutually. Overall width shall be determined by referring to thickness of wall to which coping is"
    },
    "content": "IS 4996: 1984 Reinforced Concrete Fence Posts\n(First Revision)\ncross-sectional dimensions and the reinforcement shall be adequate to conform to strength requirements given\nin 4.\nNote— Some of the common sizes and shapes for reinforced\nconcrete fence posts with other details such as reinforcement, fencing wire spacing from ground level, spacing of line post\nand strainer post and suitability of particular size of fence post for use are given in Appendix B of the standard for\ngeneral guidance. These may be used provided the strength requirements are fulfilled.\n3.2 Tolerances— ± 15 mm on overall length,± 3 mm on\ncross-sectional dimensions and 0.5 percent on straightness of fence post.\n4. Strength Test\n5.1 Impact Test— When tested, specimen shall show\nno visible permanent cracking.\n5.2 Static-Load Test—The static load required to\nproduce first visible crack in post shall be as given below—\nLine post\n700 N\nStrainer post 2 500 N\nStrut or angle post\n450 N\nNote 1 — For typical details and dimensions of line post, strainer post and brace for fencing intended for various uses, for\nrecommendations for manufacture of reinforced concrete under field conditions and for recommendations for erection of fence posts, refer to the standard.\nNote 2— For method of tests, refer to Appendix C of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4996:1984 Specification for reinforced concrete fence posts (first revision). 1. Scope — Requirements for precast concrete coping\nblocks, giving details of materials for manufacture, workmanship, functional requirements and essential\ndimensions to meet them.\nNote—The blocks serve as defence against entry of moisture\ninto hollow concrete block walls. Functional requirements are:\na) should prevent downward penetraction of water\nb) should direct water clear of walls below c) should resist lateral displacement, either by\nits mass or by mechanical means such as clip type coping or by use of cramps and dowels.\nd) should allow for thermal and moisture movements.\ne) should be durable.\n2. Dimension and Tolerances\n2.1Dimension of Cross Section— The form of cross section shall be as agreed to mutually. Overall width\nshall be determined by referring to thickness of wall to which coping is to be applied."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5751: 1984",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Coping Blocks",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements of precast concrete units for kerbs, channels, edgings, quadrants and gutter aprons in a range of sections, for use in carriageways and footways.",
    "keywords": [
      "kerbs",
      "coping",
      "edgings",
      "kerb",
      "blocks",
      "channels",
      "gutter"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Shape": "Coping blocks shall slope to the rear so as to reduce wash of water and accumulated dirt over face of wall. The slope shall be as steep as possible for rapid shedding of water. Note— For example of concrete copings such as splayed and saddleback coping, see Fig. 3 of the standard.",
      "Mass": "Not less than 35 kg/m for flat bottomed coping without cramps.",
      "Fixing And Jointing": "Ends of coping blocks shall be jointed by means of dowels, cramps or joggled mortar joints. Flashing of non-corrodible material is adopted at joints in coping blocks to prevent leakage.",
      "Fittings": "Stopped ends, hipped stopped ends, stooled ends and right-angled returns, shall be available to match the coping blocks. For detailed information, refer to IS 5751:1984 Specification for precast concrete coping blocks (first revision).",
      "Scope": "Requirements of precast concrete units for kerbs, channels, edgings, quadrants and gutter aprons in a range of sections, for use in carriageways and footways.",
      "Designation": "Dimensions of horizontal face shall be given first and the dimensions of vertical face be second. 3. Dimensions 3.1 Straight Kerbs a) Rectangular Kerbs 150 × 300 125 × 250 100 × 250 mm b) Splayed kerbs 150 × 300 125 × 250 mm c) Half-batter kerbs 150 × 300 125 x 250 mm d) Half-section kerbs 150 x 125 mm 3.2 Straight Channels a) Rectangular kerbs 300 × 150 250 × 125 250 × 100 mm b) Channels 250 × 125 mm 3.3 Edgings — 50 × 250, 50 × 200, 50 × 150mm. 3.4 Quadrant — Depths 125, 200 or 250 mm and width 300 or 450 mm with faces to match the sections of straight kerbs. 3.5Gutter Aprons — Width shall range from 150 to 2 500 or 3 000 mm but usual width shall rage from 300 to 900 mm. Usual range of height 125 to 200 mm. The thickness of precast kerb shall be 75 to 150 mm while minimum thickness of ch",
      "Tolerances": "±3 mm on length and height; + 1.5 and – 3 mm on width.",
      "Moulding": "When made under hydraulic pressure the pressure employed shall not be less than 7 MN/m2. 6. Tests 6.1Transverse Strength — When tested 28 days after they are manufactured, the unit shall support without injury, at least for one minute, the loads given in the Table."
    },
    "content": "IS 5751: 1984 Precast Concrete Coping Blocks\n(First Revision)\nNote —For minimum dimensions of the cross section for\nclip type and for flat bottomed coping, see Fig. 1 and 2 of the standard.\n2.2 Length — 1 m or as agreed.\n2.3 Tolerances — ± 3 mm for cross-sectional profile\nand ± 6 mm for length.\n3. Shape — Coping blocks shall slope to the rear so\nas to reduce wash of water and accumulated dirt over face of wall. The slope shall be as steep as possible for\nrapid shedding of water.\nNote— For example of concrete copings such as splayed and\nsaddleback coping, see Fig. 3 of the standard.\n4. Mass — Not less than 35 kg/m for flat bottomed\ncoping without cramps.\n5. Fixing and Jointing — Ends of coping blocks\nshall be jointed by means of dowels, cramps or joggled mortar joints. Flashing of non-corrodible material is\nadopted at joints in coping blocks to prevent leakage.\n6. Fittings — Stopped ends, hipped stopped ends,\nstooled ends and right-angled returns, shall be available to match the coping blocks.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5751:1984 Specification for precast concrete coping blocks\n(first revision). 1. Scope— Requirements of precast concrete units\nfor kerbs, channels, edgings, quadrants and gutter aprons in a range of sections, for use in carriageways\nand footways.\n2. Designation— Dimensions of horizontal face shall\nbe given first and the dimensions of vertical face be second.\n3. Dimensions\n3.1 Straight Kerbs\na) Rectangular Kerbs\n150 × 300\n125 × 250\n100 × 250 mm b) Splayed kerbs\n150 × 300\n125 × 250 mm c) Half-batter kerbs\n150 × 300\n125 x 250 mm d) Half-section kerbs\n150 x 125 mm\n3.2 Straight Channels\na) Rectangular kerbs\n300 × 150\n250 × 125\n250 × 100 mm b) Channels\n250 × 125 mm\n3.3 Edgings — 50 × 250, 50 × 200, 50 × 150mm.\n3.4 Quadrant — Depths 125, 200 or 250 mm and width\n300 or 450 mm with faces to match the sections of straight kerbs.\n3.5Gutter Aprons — Width shall range from 150 to\n2 500 or 3 000 mm but usual width shall rage from 300 to\n900 mm. Usual range of height 125 to 200 mm. The thickness of precast kerb shall be 75 to 150 mm while\nminimum thickness of channel shall be 125 or 100 mm.\n3.6Lengths — Uniform length of 1m for straight kerb, straight channels, edgings and 1m maximum normally\nfor gutters.\nNote— For standard section of concrete kerbs, channel,\nstandard sections of concrete edgings, standard concrete quadrants and typical sections of kerb and gutter, see Fig 1 to\n5 of the standard.\n4. Tolerances— ±3 mm on length and height;\n+ 1.5 and – 3 mm on width.\n5. Moulding — When made under hydraulic pressure\nthe pressure employed shall not be less than 7 MN/m2.\n6. Tests\n6.1Transverse Strength — When tested 28 days after they are manufactured, the unit shall support without\ninjury, at least for one minute, the loads given in the\nTable."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5758: 1984",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Kerbs",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements for reinforced and unreinforced precast concrete for covering cables.",
    "keywords": [
      "kerbs",
      "supported",
      "factor",
      "ageing",
      "precast",
      "arch",
      "sometimes"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for reinforced and unreinforced precast concrete for covering cables.",
      "Classification": "See Table 1. 2.1Arch type covers are also sometimes used."
    },
    "content": "IS 5758: 1984 Precast Concrete Kerbs\n(First Revision) Type of Product\nDimensions (mm)\nLoad to be Supported (N) a)\nRectangular kerbs\n150 × 300\n22 750\n125 × 250\n13 600\n100 × 250\n9 100 b)\nSplayed kerbs\n150 × 300\n22 750\n125 × 250\n13 600 c)\nHalf-batter kerbs\n150 × 300\n22 750\n125 × 250\n13 600 d)\nHalf-section kerbs\n150 × 125\n8 200 e)\nChannels\n250 × 125\n13 600 f)\nEdgings\n50 × 250\n3 180\n50 × 200\n2 720\n50 × 150\n2 040 6.1.1 If tests are carried out after a longer period, the load to be supported shall be increased by the ageing\nfactor given below—\nAge of sample (months) 3\n6\n12\nAgeing factor\n1.1\n1.15\n1.20\n6.2 Water Absorption — Shall not exceed 3 percent in\nthe first 10 minutes and 8 percent after 24 hours.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5758:1984 Specification for precast concrete kerbs\n(first revision). 1. Scope— Requirements for reinforced and\nunreinforced precast concrete for covering cables.\n2. Classification — See Table 1.\n2.1Arch type covers are also sometimes used.\n3. Dimensions – See Table 2."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5820: 1970",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Cable Covers",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements for autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete wall slabs, having density above 450 and up to 1 000 kg/m3.",
    "keywords": [
      "peak",
      "unreinforced",
      "flat",
      "ehv",
      "hvp",
      "cables",
      "power"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete wall slabs, having density above 450 and up to 1 000 kg/m3.",
      "Terminology": "The cellular concrete consists of an inorganic binder (such as lime and cement) in combination with finely ground material containing silicic acid (such as sand), gas generating material (such as aluminium powder), water, and harmless additives (optional); and steam cured under high pressure in autoclaves.",
      "Classification": "Shall be classified on basis of oven-dry density (without reinforcement) and compressive strength — Class Gross Density(kg/m3) A Over 850 and up to 1 000 B Over 750 and up to 850 C Over 650 and up to 750 D Over 550 and up to 650 E Over 450 and up to 550",
      "Designation": "By indicating compressive strength in kgf/cm2), horizontal load bearing capacity, that is, design load (in kgf/cm2), length (in m), breadth (in mm) and thickness (in mm). 5. Sizes 5.1Preferred Dimensions — Length 1 to 6 m; width 600 mm; thickness 150 to 250 mm with increments of 25 mm."
    },
    "content": "IS 5820: 1970 Precast Concrete Cable Covers\nNote 1 —\nL,W=\nLength, Width.\nT\n=\nTotal thickness in case of flat type and thickness of flat portion excluding peak in case of cover with peak.\nT'\n=\nTotal thickness including peak in case of cover with peak.\nNote 2 —\nFor typical concrete cable cover, flat type and with peak, see Fig. 1 and 2 of the standard.\n3.1Tolerance — On length and width ±3 mm, and on thickness ±2 mm.\n4. Tests\n4.1Impact Strength for Reinforced Covers— Not more than one transverse crack.\n4.2Transverse Strength for Unreinforced Covers—\nAverage breaking load shall not be lower than the value specified in Table 2.\nNote 1— For manufacturing details with regard to the aspects such as mixing, moulding, protection from frost and reinforcement\ndetails, refer to 5 of the standard.\nNote 2— For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5820:1970 Specification for precast concrete cable covers.\nTABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION\nClass\nDescription\nConditions Where Normally Used\nEHV\nReinforced, with peak\n22 kV and 33 kV underground power cables\nHVP\nUnreinforced, with peak\n1.1 kV to below 22 kV underground power cables\nHV\nUnreinforced, flat\nLV\nUnreinforced, flat TABLE 2 DIMENSIONS\nClass\nType No.\nShape Dimensions\nAverage breadking Load for\nL\nW\nT\nT'\nunreinforced Covers, Min (kg)\nEHV\n1\nWith peak\n450\n230\n50\n75\n450\n2\nDo\n600\n230\n50\n75\n750\nHVP\n1\nDo\n300\n180\n40\n65\n300\n2\nDo\n450\n180\n40\n65\n350\nHV\n1\nFlat\n300\n180\n40\n-\n300\n2\nDo\n450\n180\n40\n-\n350\nLV\n1\nDo\n250\n150\n40\n-\n200\n2\nDo\n300\n180\n40\n-\n200\n3\nDo\n450\n180\n40\n-\n200\nFor power cables 1.1. kV and below 1. Scope — Requirements for autoclaved reinforced\ncellular concrete wall slabs, having density above 450 and up to 1 000 kg/m3.\n2. Terminology — The cellular concrete consists of\nan inorganic binder (such as lime and cement) in combination with finely ground material containing\nsilicic acid (such as sand), gas generating material (such as aluminium powder), water, and harmless additives\n(optional); and steam cured under high pressure in autoclaves.\n3. Classification — Shall be classified on basis of\noven-dry density (without reinforcement) and compressive strength —\nClass\nGross Density(kg/m3)\nA\nOver 850 and up to 1 000\nB\nOver 750 and up to 850\nC\nOver 650 and up to 750\nD\nOver 550 and up to 650\nE\nOver 450 and up to 550\n4. Designation — By indicating compressive\nstrength in kgf/cm2), horizontal load bearing capacity, that is, design load (in kgf/cm2), length (in m), breadth\n(in mm) and thickness (in mm).\n5. Sizes\n5.1Preferred Dimensions — Length 1 to 6 m; width 600 mm; thickness 150 to 250 mm with increments of 25 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6072: 1971",
    "title": "Autoclaved Reinforced Cellular Concrete Wall Slabs",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements for autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete floor and roof having density above 450 and up to 1 000 kg/m3",
    "keywords": [
      "cellular",
      "autoclaved",
      "over",
      "concrete",
      "compressive",
      "groove",
      "kgf"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Finish": "Tongue at one side and groove on the other side. Alternatively groove on both sides for filling with cement mortar. Longitudinal edges shall be chamfered. 7. Physical Properties 7.1Density — Range as specified in 3. 7.2Dry Shrinkage — Not more than 0.09 percent. 7.3Residual water content at the time of delivery shall be declared by the manufacturer. 7.4Fire Resistance — Not less than 2 hours. 7.5Compressive Strength and Thermal Conductivity— Class Compressive Thermal Strength, Conductivity Min Max (kgf/cm2) (kcal/m/h/oC) A 70 0.36 B 60 0.32 C 50 0.26 D 35 0.21 E 20 0.18 Note 1 — For methods of tests, refer to IS 3809 1979 Specification for fire resistance test for structures (first revision) and relevant partsof IS 6441 Methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete products . Note 2 — F",
      "Scope": "Requirements for autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete floor and roof having density above 450 and up to 1 000 kg/m3",
      "Terminology": "The cellular concrete consists of an inorganic binder (such as lime and cement) in combination with finely ground material containing silicon dioxide (such as sand), gas generating material (such as aluminium powder), water and additives (optional); and steam cured under high pressure in autoclabes.",
      "Classification": "Shall be classified on basis of oven-dry density (without reinforcement) and compressive strength— Class Gross Density (kg/m3) A Over 850 and up to 1 000 B Over 750 and up to 850 C Over 650 and up to 750 D Over 550 and up to 650 E Over 450 and up to 550",
      "Designation": "By indicating compressive strength (kgf/cm2), load bearing capacity, that is, design load (kgf/cm2), length (m), breadth (mm) and thickness (mm). 5. Sizes 5.1 Preferred Dimensions— Length 1 to 6 m; width 600 mm; thickness 75 to 250 mm with increments of 25 mm."
    },
    "content": "IS 6072: 1971 Autoclaved Reinforced Cellular Concrete Wall Slabs\n5.2Tolerances — For 500 mm and below, ± 2 mm over\n500 mm, ± 5 mm.\nNote — For form tolerances for wall slabs, refer to Table 1 of\nthe standard.\n6. Finish — Tongue at one side and groove on the\nother side. Alternatively groove on both sides for filling with cement mortar. Longitudinal edges shall be\nchamfered.\n7. Physical Properties\n7.1Density — Range as specified in 3.\n7.2Dry Shrinkage — Not more than 0.09 percent.\n7.3Residual water content at the time of delivery shall be declared by the manufacturer.\n7.4Fire Resistance — Not less than 2 hours.\n7.5Compressive Strength and Thermal Conductivity—\nClass\nCompressive\nThermal\nStrength,\nConductivity\nMin\nMax\n(kgf/cm2)\n(kcal/m/h/oC)\nA\n70\n0.36\nB\n60\n0.32\nC\n50\n0.26\nD\n35\n0.21\nE\n20\n0.18\nNote 1 — For methods of tests, refer to IS 3809 1979 Specification for fire resistance test for structures (first revision) and\nrelevant partsof IS 6441 Methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete products .\nNote 2 — For details of manufacture with regard to aspects such as reinforcement, formation of cells of cellular concrete\n(method of autoclavation) and finish, refer to 6 of the standard.\nNote 3 — For structural requirements, refer to 8 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6072:1971 Specification for autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete wall slabs. 1. Scope — Requirements for autoclaved reinforced\ncellular concrete floor and roof having density above\n450 and up to 1 000 kg/m3\n2. Terminology —The cellular concrete consists\nof an inorganic binder (such as lime and cement) in combination with finely ground material containing\nsilicon dioxide (such as sand), gas generating material\n(such as aluminium powder), water and additives\n(optional); and steam cured under high pressure in autoclabes.\n3. Classification — Shall be classified on basis of\noven-dry density (without reinforcement) and compressive strength—\nClass\nGross Density (kg/m3)\nA\nOver 850 and up to 1 000\nB\nOver 750 and up to 850\nC\nOver 650 and up to 750\nD\nOver 550 and up to 650\nE\nOver 450 and up to 550\n4. Designation — By indicating compressive strength\n(kgf/cm2), load bearing capacity, that is, design load\n(kgf/cm2), length (m), breadth (mm) and thickness (mm).\n5. Sizes\n5.1 Preferred Dimensions— Length 1 to 6 m; width\n600 mm; thickness 75 to 250 mm with increments of\n25 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6073: 1971",
    "title": "Autoclaved Reinforced Cellular Concrete Floor And Roof Slabs",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "5.2Tolerances — For 500 mm and below, ± 2 mm over 500 mm, ± 5 mm. Note — For form tolerances for wall slabs, refer to Table 1 of the standard. 6. Finish — Tongue at one side and groove on the other side. Alternatively groove on both sides for filling with cement mortar. Longitudinal edges shall be chamfered. 7. Physical Properties 7.1 Density — Range as specified in 3. 7.2 Dry Shrinkage — Not more than 0.09 percent. 7.3 Residual water content at the time of delivery shall be declared by the manu",
    "keywords": [
      "cellular",
      "autoclaved",
      "groove",
      "slabs",
      "conductivity",
      "fire",
      "concrete"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Finish": "Tongue at one side and groove on the other side. Alternatively groove on both sides for filling with cement mortar. Longitudinal edges shall be chamfered. 7. Physical Properties 7.1 Density — Range as specified in 3. 7.2 Dry Shrinkage — Not more than 0.09 percent. 7.3 Residual water content at the time of delivery shall be declared by the manufacturer. 7.4 Fire Resistance — Not less than 2 hours. 7.5 Compressive Strength and Thermal Conductivity— Class Compressive Thermal Strength, Min Conductivity Max (kgf/cm2) (kcal/m/h/oC) A 70 0.36 B 60 0.32 C 50 0.26 D 35 0.21 E 20 0.18 Note 1 — For methods of tests, refer to IS 3809 : 1979 Specification for fire resistance test for structures (first revision), and relevant parts of IS 6441 Part 1 to 9 Methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete "
    },
    "content": "IS 6073: 1971 Autoclaved Reinforced Cellular Concrete Floor And Roof Slabs\n5.2Tolerances — For 500 mm and below, ± 2 mm over\n500 mm, ± 5 mm.\nNote — For form tolerances for wall slabs, refer to\nTable 1 of the standard.\n6. Finish — Tongue at one side and groove on the\nother side. Alternatively groove on both sides for filling with cement mortar. Longitudinal edges shall be\nchamfered.\n7. Physical Properties\n7.1 Density — Range as specified in 3.\n7.2 Dry Shrinkage — Not more than 0.09 percent.\n7.3 Residual water content at the time of delivery shall\nbe declared by the manufacturer.\n7.4 Fire Resistance — Not less than 2 hours.\n7.5 Compressive\nStrength and Thermal\nConductivity—\nClass\nCompressive\nThermal\nStrength, Min\nConductivity Max\n(kgf/cm2) (kcal/m/h/oC) A\n70\n0.36 B\n60\n0.32 C\n50\n0.26 D\n35\n0.21 E\n20\n0.18\nNote 1 — For methods of tests, refer to IS 3809 : 1979 Specification for fire resistance test for structures (first revision), and\nrelevant parts of IS 6441 Part 1 to 9 Methods of test for autoclaved cellular concrete products.\nNote 2 — For details of manufacture with regard to aspects such as reinforcement, formation of cells of cellular concrete\n(method of autoclavation) and finish, refer to 6 of the standard.\nNote 3 — For structural requirements, refer to 8 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6073:1971 Specification for autoclaved reinforced cellular concrete floor and roof slabs."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6523: 1983",
    "title": "Precast Reinforced Concrete Door And Window Frames",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements for precast reinforced concrete door and window frames. Use of such frames is recommended to be restricted to a maximum opening width of 2.25 m.",
    "keywords": [
      "sills",
      "lintels",
      "lintel",
      "sill",
      "frames",
      "concrete",
      "door"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of precast concrete lintels and sills. 2. Shape and Dimensions 2.1 Lintels 2.1.1 Reinforced concrete lintels — May be precast in one piece or in two pieces as a split lintel Note — The latter is lighter in mass, easier to handle and the air space between the pieces affords insulation which is desirable especially if furring is not provided. 2.1.2 Lintel-cum-sun shade — For use over door, window and ventilator openings of exterior walls in buildings may also be precast. 2.1.3 U-shaped lintels — U-Shaped lintels are precast by stringing together U-shaped concrete masonry units as forms, and then placing reinforcement and pouring concrete to fill the forms. 2.1.4 Lintel bearing — Reinforced concrete lintels for doors and windows shall be bonded into the masonry on either side of ",
      "Dimensions": "Cross section 60 ×100 mm or 70 × 75 mm for single shutter door and 60 × 120 mm for double shutter door. Overall sizes (width and height) of frames shall conform to IS 4021:1995 * Note 1 — Suitable adjustments in cross-sectional shape may be made by agreement between the purchaser and the supplier to provide suitable groove for wall plaster, etc, provided the overall dimensional requirements given above are not affected. Note 2 — For overall dimensions of the frame, the width of the frame shall be the total length of the horizontal piece measured out-to-out; the height of the frame shall be the total height measured from the lowest end of the vertical piece (in case of three member frame or the outer edge of the lower horizontal member in case of four member frame) to the outer edge of the "
    },
    "content": "IS 6523: 1983 Precast Reinforced Concrete Door And Window Frames\n(First Revision)\nNote — For requirements in regard to manufacture (construction and finish, positioning of reinforcement, casting, curing, etc),\narrangements for fixing of hinges to frames, arrangements for door and window fixtures and erection along with illustrations refer to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6523:1983 Specification for precast reinforced concrete door and window frames (first revision).\n1. Scope — Requirements for precast reinforced\nconcrete door and window frames. Use of such frames is recommended to be restricted to a maximum opening\nwidth of 2.25 m.\n2. Shape and Dimensions — Cross section 60 ×100\nmm or 70 × 75 mm for single shutter door and 60 × 120 mm for double shutter door. Overall sizes (width and\nheight) of frames shall conform to IS 4021:1995 *\nNote 1 —\nSuitable adjustments in cross-sectional shape may be made by agreement between the purchaser and\nthe supplier to provide suitable groove for wall plaster, etc, provided the overall dimensional requirements given above\nare not affected.\nNote 2 — For overall dimensions of the frame, the width of the frame shall be the total length of the horizontal\npiece measured out-to-out; the height of the frame shall be the total height measured from the lowest end of the vertical\npiece (in case of three member frame or the outer edge of the lower horizontal member in case of four member frame) to\nthe outer edge of the toe horizontal piece.\n*Specification for timber door, window and ventilator frames\n(second revision).\n3. Requirements\n3.1Materials\n3.1.1 Cement — Ordinary Portland cement or Portland slag cement or Portland pozzolana cement or rapid\nhardening Portland cement or high strength ordinary\nPortland cement.\n3.1.2 Aggregates — Well graded mixture of coarse and fine aggregates. Maximum size of coarse aggregate shall\nbe 10mm.\n3.1.3 Concrete — Not weaker than M 20\n(see IS 456 : 2000) *\n3.1.4 Reinforcement shall be clean and free from loose mill scale, loose rust, mud, oil grease or any other coating\nwhich may reduce the bond between the concrete and the steel. A slight film or rust may not be regarded as\nharmful but the steel shall not be visibly pitted by rust.\n* Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete\n(fourth revision) 1. Scope — Requirements of precast concrete lintels\nand sills.\n2. Shape and Dimensions\n2.1 Lintels\n2.1.1 Reinforced concrete lintels — May be precast in one piece or in two pieces as a split lintel\nNote — The latter is lighter in mass, easier to handle and the\nair space between the pieces affords insulation which is desirable especially if furring is not provided.\n2.1.2 Lintel-cum-sun shade — For use over door, window and ventilator openings of exterior walls in\nbuildings may also be precast.\n2.1.3 U-shaped lintels — U-Shaped lintels are precast by stringing together U-shaped concrete masonry units\nas forms, and then placing reinforcement and pouring concrete to fill the forms.\n2.1.4 Lintel bearing — Reinforced concrete lintels for doors and windows shall be bonded into the masonry\non either side of the opening. It is advisable to provide a bearing length approximately equal to the depth of the\nlintel.\n2.1.5 Throatings — A 16mm wide throatings shall be provided to the soffit to external lintels.\n2.1.6 Inserts for lintels — Provision shall be made for fixing screws to windows, door frames, curtain and blind\nfittings, etc, by means of timber or pre-formed inserts incorporated in the lintels during course of manufacture\nor by the forming of holes for inserts.\nFor details refer to Figs. 1 to 4 of the standard.\n2.2 Sills\n2.2.1 General — General types of sills in common use-the slip sill and the lug sill. Both types are sloped\non the top face to drain water away quickly. If projections are provided, they should project at least 40mm beyond\nwall face and be provided with a groove along the lower outer edge to provide a drip. Lengths up to 1m may be\ncast in one piece.\n2.2.1.1 Slip sills — Slip sills are inserted after the wall proper has been built and therefore require no protection\nduring construction.\n2.2.1.2 Lug sills — Lug sills are those with the ends projecting into the masonry wall. There are no vertical\njoints at the juncture of the sills and the jambs which is one of the advantages of the lug sill over the slip sill.\n2.2.2 Dowell holes for sills — Concrete sills to take metal windows shall be provided with holes 20mm\ndiameter and 32 mm deep at prescribed distances from each end.\n2.2.3 Projection of sills — The projection of sills, when provided, shall be not less than 40mm from the finished\nwall face.\n2.3Tolerances — For lintels, a tolerance of mm shall be allowed on cross-sectional dimensions\nand ± 6 mm on the length. In case of sills, a tolerance of mm shall be allowed on the cross-sectional\ndimensions and ± 3 mm on the length.\nFor details refer to Figs. 5 to 7 of the standard.\n3. Strength Requirement\n3.1Ultimate breaking load obtained as prescribed in\n7.1.1 of the standard shall not be less than the ultimate load which the lintel is designed to carry."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9893: 1981",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Blocks For Lintels And Sills",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding materials, dimensions and physical properties for corrugated roofing sheets made from coir, woodwool and cement. Note — Optimum utilization of national resources demand that use of indigeneous building material should be promoted. Coir, woodwool and few other vegetable fibres which are available in large quantity in this country, have been found suitable for the manufacture of sheets for roofing purposes. The sheets may be either plain or corrugated and manufactured by mix",
    "keywords": [
      "coir",
      "woodwool",
      "sheets",
      "corrugated",
      "optimum",
      "resources",
      "indigeneous"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding materials, dimensions and physical properties for corrugated roofing sheets made from coir, woodwool and cement. Note — Optimum utilization of national resources demand that use of indigeneous building material should be promoted. Coir, woodwool and few other vegetable fibres which are available in large quantity in this country, have been found suitable for the manufacture of sheets for roofing purposes. The sheets may be either plain or corrugated and manufactured by mixing and pressing coir wood-wool and cement in suitable proportions. 2. Materials 2.1Cement—This shall conform to either IS 269:1989* or IS 8041 : 1990† or IS 8112 : 1989‡"
    },
    "content": "IS 9893: 1981 Precast Concrete Blocks For Lintels And Sills\nNote 1 —\nFor details of material, refer to 3 of the standard.\nNote 2—\nFor details of manufacture, or aspects such as construction, finish, mould, reinforcement, occuring etc, refer to\n5 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 9893:1981 Specification for precast concrete lintels and sills.\n+12\n- 0 +0\n- 6 1. Scope — Requirements regarding materials,\ndimensions and physical properties for corrugated roofing sheets made from coir, woodwool and cement.\nNote — Optimum utilization of national resources demand\nthat use of indigeneous building material should be promoted.\nCoir, woodwool and few other vegetable fibres which are available in large quantity in this country, have been found\nsuitable for the manufacture of sheets for roofing purposes.\nThe sheets may be either plain or corrugated and manufactured by mixing and pressing coir wood-wool and cement in suitable\nproportions.\n2. Materials\n2.1Cement—This shall conform to either IS 269:1989* or IS 8041 : 1990† or IS 8112 : 1989‡"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10388: 1982",
    "title": "Corrugated Coir, Woodwool, Cement Roofing Sheets",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements of precast concrete stone masonry blocks, used in the construction of load bearing and non-load bearing walls.",
    "keywords": [
      "stone",
      "woodwool",
      "coir",
      "block",
      "cement",
      "spalls",
      "portland"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Physical Requirements": "See Table 2. * 33 Grade ordinary Portland cement (fourth revision). † Rapid hardening Portland cement (second revision). ‡ 43 Grade ordinary Portland cement (first revision).",
      "Scope": "Requirements of precast concrete stone masonry blocks, used in the construction of load bearing and non-load bearing walls. 2. Terminology 2.1Concrete Stone Masonry Block — A precast cement concrete solid block having stone spalls in it (25-30 percent of block volume) and cement concrete with dense stone aggregate and sand. It is 100 percent solid. 2.2Stone Face Exposed Block — A concrete stone masonry block where the stone spalls are exposed at one of its face. This face, when forms the exposed wall face, the wall gets the texture of stone surface exposed. 3. Dimensions and Tolerances 3.1Nominal dimensions — Length 300 mm Height 150 mm and Width 100, 150 and 200 mm In addition block shall be manufactured in one third half, two-thirds and three quarters of its full length. Note — The term "
    },
    "content": "IS 10388: 1982 Corrugated Coir, Woodwool, Cement Roofing Sheets\nNote — For methods of tests , refer to Appendices A to D of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to I S 10388:1982 Specification for corrugated coir, woodwool, cement roofing sheets.\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES FOR CORRUGATED COIR,\nWOODWOOL, CEMENT ROOFING SHEETS\n(All dimensions in milimeters)\nLength\nWidth\nThickness\nDepth of\nPitch of\nCorrugation\nCorrugation\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n1 500\n1 750\n1 000\n6.5\n48\n146\n2 000\nTolerances\n± 10\n+ free\n+3\n+6\n– 0.5 –6\n–2\nTABLE 2 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF WOODWOOL, COIR CEMENT\nCORRUGATED ROOFING SHEETS\nSl.No Characteristics Requirements (1) (2) (3)\ni) Transverse strength 1.5 × 10–3 N/m width, Min ii) Water absorption 30 percent, Max iii) Impermeability Shall not show any formation of drops of water except traces of moisture on the lower surface iv) Acid resistance Amount of acetic acid to be used 1 150 g/m2, Max\nNote —The age of specimens for testing shall be at least 4 weeks.\n2.2 Woodwool — These shall be obtained from any\nspecies of soft timber in fibre form having following dimensions—\nLength of fibre\n= 200 to 500 mm Width\n= 0.5 to 2.5 mm Thickness\n=\n0.2 to 0.35 mm\n2.3 Coir — These shall be baby fibres, free from pith\nand shall be capable of absorbing cement.\n3. Dimensions and Tolerances—See Table 1.\n4. Physical Requirements— See Table 2. * 33 Grade ordinary Portland cement (fourth revision). † Rapid hardening Portland cement (second revision). ‡ 43 Grade ordinary Portland cement (first revision). 1. Scope — Requirements of precast concrete stone\nmasonry blocks, used in the construction of load bearing and non-load bearing walls.\n2. Terminology\n2.1Concrete Stone Masonry Block — A precast cement concrete solid block having stone spalls in it\n(25-30 percent of block volume) and cement concrete with dense stone aggregate and sand. It is 100 percent\nsolid.\n2.2Stone Face Exposed Block — A concrete stone masonry block where the stone spalls are exposed at\none of its face. This face, when forms the exposed wall face, the wall gets the texture of stone surface exposed.\n3. Dimensions and Tolerances\n3.1Nominal dimensions —\nLength\n300 mm\nHeight\n150 mm and\nWidth\n100, 150 and 200 mm\nIn addition block shall be manufactured in one third half, two-thirds and three quarters of its full length.\nNote — The term ‘nominal’ means that the dimension\nincludes the thickness of the mortar joint. Actual dimensions shall be 10mm short of the nominal dimensions."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12440: 1988",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Stone Masonry Blocks",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "3.2 For 200, 150 and 100 mm nominal thick walls, the blocks shall be of 300 × 200 × 150 mm, 300 × 150 × 150 mm and 300 × 100 × 150 mm nominal size respectively. 3.3 For accommodating vertical reinforcement required in earthquake resistant construction special block of half-width and with semi-circular recess in it (see Fig.1 of the standard) shall be used. These dimensions are suitable for 200 mm thick wall. Similar blocks shall be made for walls of thickness greater than 200 mm. 3.4 Tolerances ",
    "keywords": [
      "blocks",
      "walls",
      "thick",
      "faces",
      "compressive",
      "stone",
      "units"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Classification": "See Table 1. 5. Physical Requirement 5.1 Water Absorption — The water absorption being the average of three blocks, shall not be more than 6 percent by mass. 5.2 Compressive Strength — See Table 1 TABLE 1 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE STONE MASONRY BLOCKS (Based on 28 days Strength) Class Minimum Average* Compressive Minimum strength of Designation Strength of Blocks N/mm2 Individual Blocks N/mm2 5 5.0 3.5 6 6.0 4.2 7 7.0 5.0 9 9.0 6.3 10 10.0 7.5 *For 100 mm wide blocks (for 100 mm thick walls) the miminum strength may be 3.5 N/mm2. Note 1 — For details of materials refer to 5 of the standard. Note 2 — For details of manufacture in regard to mould, mix, placing, compaction, curing and drying refer to 6 of the standard. Note 3 — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the st"
    },
    "content": "IS 12440: 1988 Precast Concrete Stone Masonry Blocks\n3.2 For 200, 150 and 100 mm nominal thick walls, the\nblocks shall be of 300 × 200 × 150 mm, 300 × 150 × 150 mm and 300 × 100 × 150 mm nominal size respectively.\n3.3 For accommodating vertical reinforcement required\nin earthquake resistant construction special block of half-width and with semi-circular recess in it (see Fig.1\nof the standard) shall be used. These dimensions are suitable for 200 mm thick wall. Similar blocks shall be\nmade for walls of thickness greater than 200 mm.\n3.4 Tolerances — The maximum variation in the length\nof the units shall not be more than ± 5 mm and maximum variation in height and width of units not more\nthan ± 3 mm. The faces of blocks shall be flat and rectangular, opposite faces shall be parallel, and all arises\nshall be square. The bedding surfaces shall be at right angles to the faces of the blocks.\n4. Classification — See Table 1.\n5. Physical Requirement\n5.1 Water Absorption — The water absorption being\nthe average of three blocks, shall not be more than 6 percent by mass.\n5.2 Compressive Strength — See Table 1\nTABLE 1 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH OF CONCRETE STONE MASONRY BLOCKS\n(Based on 28 days Strength)\nClass\nMinimum Average* Compressive\nMinimum strength of\nDesignation\nStrength of Blocks N/mm2\nIndividual Blocks N/mm2 5 5.0\n3.5 6 6.0\n4.2 7 7.0\n5.0 9 9.0\n6.3 10\n10.0\n7.5\n*For 100 mm wide blocks (for 100 mm thick walls) the miminum strength may be 3.5 N/mm2.\nNote 1 — For details of materials refer to 5 of the standard.\nNote 2 — For details of manufacture in regard to mould, mix, placing, compaction, curing and drying refer to 6 of the standard.\nNote 3 — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard.\nFor detailed information refer to IS 12440:1988. Specification for precast concrete stone masonry blocks."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12592: 2002",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Manhole Cover And Frame",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements of precast ferrocement water tanks of capacity 270 to 10 000 litres. Note —The capacity of tank means the net capacity which is the volume of the actual usable water confined between the levels of the centres of the overflow and outlet sockets. Gross capacity of a tank shall be taken as the total storage capacity including the dead storage and free board.",
    "keywords": [
      "manhole",
      "tanks",
      "circular",
      "capacity",
      "ferrocement",
      "rectangular",
      "mechanized"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of precast ferrocement water tanks of capacity 270 to 10 000 litres. Note —The capacity of tank means the net capacity which is the volume of the actual usable water confined between the levels of the centres of the overflow and outlet sockets. Gross capacity of a tank shall be taken as the total storage capacity including the dead storage and free board.",
      "Dimensions": "Ferrocement water tanks are generally made in square, rectangular and circular shapes. For relatively large circular tanks of diameter exceeding 2.0 m, a shallow spherical dome may be provided for the base or alternatively, suitable fillets may be provided at the junction of bottom slab and vertical wall. Dimensions of ferrocement water tanks shall be calculated depending upon their capacities. For cylindrical tanks, height to diameter ratio of 1.0 is generally recommended. For rectangular tanks, length to breadth ratio should generally be kept 1.5 whereas the height to length and breadth ratio should generally be 0.5 to 1.5. If the length of any side exceeds 1.5 m, it is desirable to provide stiffeners in the side walls at spacing not exceeding 1.5 m. 3. Tolerances a) Length, breadth, hei"
    },
    "content": "IS 12592: 2002 Precast Concrete Manhole Cover And Frame\n(First Revision)\n4. Physical Requirements\n4.1 General — All covers and frames shall be sound\nand free from cracks and other defects which interferes with the proper placing of the unit or impair the strength\nor performance of the units.\n4.2 Dimensions – The dimensions of the cover and\nframe shall be as specified in 3.2\n4.3 Load Test — Breaking load of individual units\nshall be not less than the value specified in the table given below :\nLoad Test Load and Diameter of Block\nGrade Type\nLoad\nDiameter of Cover in of Block\nkN mm\nLD-2.5\nRectangular, square 25\n300 and circular\nMD-10\nRectangular and 100\n300 circular\nHD-20\nCircular, lamphole, 200\n300 square and rectangular\n(scrapper manhole)\nEHD-35\nCircular, square and 350\n300 rectangular (scrapper\nmanhole)\nNote 1\n— For details of material refer to 4 of the standard.\nNote 2\n— For details of manufacture in regard to mixing, placing, compaction, curing and finishing, refer to 7 of the standard.\nNote 3\n— For methods of tests refer to Annex B and C of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12592 :2002 Specification for precast concrete manhole covers and frames.\n1. Scope\nRequirements for precast steel reinforced cement concrete manhole covers and frames intended for use\nin sewerage and water drainage.\n2. Grades and Types\n2.1 Manhole cover shall be of the following four grades\nand types: Grades\nGrade\nType/Shape of Cover\nDesignation Frame\nLight Duty\nLD-2.5\nRectangular,square and circular\nMedium Duty\nMD-10\nRectangular and circular\nHeavy Duty\nHD-20\nrectangular, square, circular and lamphole\n(scrapper manhole)\nExtra Duty\nEHD-35\nrectangular, square and circular (scrapper manhole)\n2.2 Recomended locations for placement of different\ngrades and types / shapes of manholes covers and frames are given in 3.2.1 to 3.2.4 of the standard.\n3. Shapes and Dimensions\n3.1 Shape— The shapes of precast concrete manhole\ncovers shall be of shape as mentioned in 2.\n3.2 Dimensions and Tolerance – The dimensinos and\ntolerances on dimension of frames shall be as shown in\nTable 1 of the standard.\n5. The permanent set shall not exceed the requirement\ngiven in Annex C of the Standard. 4.2 The tensile stress in reinforcement under services\ncondition shall not exceed 200 N/mm2.\n4.3 The minimum cross-sectional area of main\nreinforcement in any one of the two principal directions shall not be less than 1.0 percent of the gross cross-\nsectional area of the element.\n4.4 Laps in wire mesh, where provided, shall be not\nless than 100 mm.\n4.5 The skeletal steel shall be spaced at not more than\n300 mm centre to centre in both directions. Laps in bars where, provided, shall be not less than 150 mm. The\nskeletal steel may not be necessary in case of mechanized or semi-mechanized casting processes.\n4.6 The minimum wall thickness shall be 12 mm for\ntanks up to 2 000 litres capacity in case of mechanized or semi-mechanized casting and 15 mm for tanks up to\n1 000 litres capacity when hand cast. For larger capacity tanks the wall thickness may be 20 mm to 40 mm\ndepending on capacity.\n4.7 The minimum thickness of the lid/cover slab shall\nin no case be less than 15 mm.\n4.8 In case the bottom slab thickness exceeds 30 mm,\nthe slab may be cast in ferrocement only. However, an intermediate plain concrete layer using graded coarse\naggregate of nominal maximum size 6.3 mm may be introduced between the wire mesh layers to achieve the\ndesign thickness without excessive use of cement. In case of composite slab, the minimum thickness of top\nas well as bottom layer of ferrocement shall not be less than 8 mm.\n4.9 The minimum clear cover to reinforcement shall be\n4 mm.\n1. Scope —Requirements of precast ferrocement\nwater tanks of capacity 270 to 10 000 litres.\nNote —The capacity of tank means the net capacity which is\nthe volume of the actual usable water confined between the levels of the centres of the overflow and outlet sockets.\nGross capacity of a tank shall be taken as the total storage capacity including the dead storage and free board.\n2. Shape and Dimension — Ferrocement water\ntanks are generally made in square, rectangular and circular shapes. For relatively large circular tanks of\ndiameter exceeding 2.0 m, a shallow spherical dome may be provided for the base or alternatively, suitable fillets\nmay be provided at the junction of bottom slab and vertical wall.\nDimensions of ferrocement water tanks shall be calculated depending upon their capacities. For\ncylindrical tanks, height to diameter ratio of 1.0 is generally recommended. For rectangular tanks, length\nto breadth ratio should generally be kept 1.5 whereas the height to length and breadth ratio should generally\nbe 0.5 to 1.5. If the length of any side exceeds 1.5 m, it is desirable to provide stiffeners in the side walls at\nspacing not exceeding 1.5 m.\n3. Tolerances\na)\nLength, breadth, height and\n±5 mm diameter up to 1m; and\nLength, breadth, height\n±10 mm and diameter above 1 m\nb)\nThickness\n±2 mm\n4. Design\n4.1The minimum compressive strength of cement mortar cubes having area of face equal to 50 cm2 shall\nbe 25 N/mm2. The recommended mix proportion is 1 part of cement to 1.5 to 2.5 parts of sand by mass. Water\ncement ratio should be 0.35 to 0.45."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13356: 1992",
    "title": "Precast Ferrocement Water Tanks",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements for precast reinforced concrete planks and joist used for construction of roofs and floors. The planks length upto 1.5 m long only are covered.",
    "keywords": [
      "planks",
      "precast",
      "kept",
      "filling",
      "tanks",
      "joists",
      "partly"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for precast reinforced concrete planks and joist used for construction of roofs and floors. The planks length upto 1.5 m long only are covered. 2. Shape, Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Precast Reinforced Concrete Planks 2.1.1 Shape —Shape of the planks shall be rectangular with haunches as shown in. Top surface shall be chequered finish. 2.1.2 Dimensions 2.1.2.1 Width— The width of the planks shall be 300 mm. 2.1.2.2 Length— The length of the planks shall be limited to a maximum of 11.5 m. However, it is preferable to use lengths in multiple of 300 mm only, keeping in view the requirements of modular co-ordination. 2.1.2.3 Thickness— The plank shall be made partly 30mm and partly 60mm thick. A 100 mm wide tapered concrete filling shall be provided for strengthening the haunch p"
    },
    "content": "IS 13356: 1992 Precast Ferrocement Water Tanks\nUP TO 10 000 LITRES CAPACITY 5. Tests\n5.1 Strength of Mortar — For cubes of size 70.6 mm\nshall be not less than 25 N/mm2.\n5.2 Water Tightness Test — When filled with water, the\nexternal faces of the tanks shall show no sign of leakage and sweating and remain apparently dry over the period\nof observation of seven days after allowing a seven day period for asborption of water after filling. This test\nshall be done before painting the interior of the tanks.\nNote 1 — For details of material, refer to 4 of the standard.\nNote 2 — For details of construction in regard to casting, curing, transportation, finish and painting refer to 6 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 13356:1992 Specification for precast ferrocement water tanks up to 10 000 litres capacity. 1. Scope —Requirements for precast reinforced\nconcrete planks and joist used for construction of roofs and floors. The planks length upto 1.5 m long only are\ncovered.\n2. Shape, Dimensions and Tolerances\n2.1 Precast Reinforced Concrete Planks\n2.1.1 Shape —Shape of the planks shall be rectangular with haunches as shown in. Top surface shall be\nchequered finish.\n2.1.2 Dimensions\n2.1.2.1 Width— The width of the planks shall be\n300 mm.\n2.1.2.2\nLength— The length of the planks shall be limited to a maximum of 11.5 m. However, it is preferable\nto use lengths in multiple of 300 mm only, keeping in view the requirements of modular co-ordination.\n2.1.2.3 Thickness— The plank shall be made partly\n30mm and partly 60mm thick. A 100 mm wide tapered concrete filling shall be provided for strengthening the\nhaunch portion for shear during handling and erection.\nLength of the tapered concrete filling at both ends shall be kept 300 mm for all lengths of planks and the\nlength of central 60 mm thick portion shall be decreased for lengths of planks smaller than 1.5 m.\n2.2 Partially Precast Joists — The width of precast\njoists shall be kept equal to required width of web of Tbeam (see IS 13994 : 1994)* and the depth shall be kept\nequal to the required overall depth of T-beam less the thickness of flange, that is, the maximum thickness of\nRC planks (60 mm)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13990: 1994",
    "title": "Precast Reinforced Concrete Planks And Joists For Roofing And Flooring",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements for prefabricated brick panel and partially precast joist for flooring and roofing.",
    "keywords": [
      "planks",
      "reinforcement",
      "design",
      "joist",
      "panel",
      "bricks",
      "joists"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Tests": "Dimensional test and deflection recovery test shall be routine test whereas failure load test shall be a type test. Type test is intended to prove the suit- ability and performance of a new design and size of a component. Failure load test be applied at the time of design of a component of a particular size or at the time of any change in the design/size.",
      "Scope": "Requirements for prefabricated brick panel and partially precast joist for flooring and roofing. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Prefabricated Brick Pane 2.1.1 Length— Length of panel shall not exceed 1.1 m for bricks having strength less than 40 N/mm2. For bricks having strength more than 40 N/mm2 conforming to IS 2180 : 1988* the length of panel shall not exceed 1.2 m. From economic point of view, the minimum recommended length of panel is 0.9 m. 2.1.2 Width— Width of the panel shall be 53 cm for panels made of conventional size (230 mm × 110 mm × 75mm) bricks and 45 cm for panels made of modular size (190 mm x 90 mm x 90 mm) bricks. 2.1.3 Thickness— Thickness of the panel shall be equal to thickness of a brick, that is, 75 mm for conventional size bricks and 90 mm for modular size bric"
    },
    "content": "IS 13990: 1994 Precast Reinforced Concrete Planks And Joists For Roofing And Flooring\n2.3 Tolerances — Casting tolerances on various\ndimensions of plank shall be as given below —\nDimension\nTolerance\nLength\n± 5 mm\nWidth\n± 3 mm\nThickness\n± 2 mm\nBow (deviation from intended\n± 2 mm line or plane).\nTwist (distance of any corner\n1 mm from the plane containing other\nthree corners).\n2.3.1 Squareness— The long edge of planks shall be taken as the base line. The shorter side shall not vary in\nits length from perpendicular distance between long edges by more than 3 mm.\n2.3.2 Flatness— The maximum deviation from a 1.5 m straight edge placed in any position on a nominal plane\nsurface shall not exceed 2 mm.\n3. Design\n3.1The planks— The planks shall be designed as simply supported for self weight including in situ concrete over\nhaunches, and as a continuous slab for a load comprising live load, self weight and dead load of floor\nfinish and/or water proofing treatment. The design shall be in accordance with the limit state method of\nIS 456 : 2000.*\n3.2 Reinforcement-as per IS 456 : 2000 —\nReinforcement for planks for roofs and floors of residential buildings for spacing of joists at 1.5 m, shall\ncomprise 3 bars of 6 mm of mild steel grade 1 conforming to IS 432 (Part 1) : 1982+ as main reinforcement and 6 mm\ndia bars, of mild steel grade 1 conforming to IS 432 (Part\n* Code of practice for design and construction of floor and roof with precast reinforced concrete planks and joists.\n* Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete\n(fourth revision)\n+ Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wire for concrete bars for concrete reinforcement, Part 1 mild\nsteel and medium tensile bars (third revision). I) : 1982, at 200 mm c/c as transverse reinforcement. In the absence of detailed design same reinforcement may\nbe used for spacing of joist smaller than 1.5 m.\nReinforcement for RCC joist shall be provided as per design (see IS 13994 : 1994).\nNote 1— For details of materials refer to 3 of the standard.\nNote 2— For method of test refer to Annex A of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 13990:1994 Specification for precast reinforced concrete planks and joists for roofing and flooring\n4. Test — Dimensional test and deflection recovery\ntest shall be routine test whereas failure load test shall be a type test. Type test is intended to prove the suit-\nability and performance of a new design and size of a component. Failure load test be applied at the time of\ndesign of a component of a particular size or at the time of any change in the design/size. 1. Scope— Requirements for prefabricated brick panel\nand partially precast joist for flooring and roofing.\n2. Dimensions and Tolerances\n2.1 Prefabricated Brick Pane\n2.1.1 Length— Length of panel shall not exceed 1.1 m for bricks having strength less than 40 N/mm2. For bricks\nhaving strength more than 40 N/mm2 conforming to IS\n2180 : 1988* the length of panel shall not exceed 1.2 m.\nFrom economic point of view, the minimum recommended length of panel is 0.9 m.\n2.1.2 Width— Width of the panel shall be 53 cm for panels made of conventional size (230 mm × 110 mm ×\n75mm) bricks and 45 cm for panels made of modular size\n(190 mm x 90 mm x 90 mm) bricks.\n2.1.3 Thickness— Thickness of the panel shall be equal to thickness of a brick, that is, 75 mm for conventional\nsize bricks and 90 mm for modular size bricks.\n2.2 Partially Precast Joist"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14143: 1994",
    "title": "Prefabricated Brick Panel And Partially Precast Concrete Joist For Flooring And Roofing",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements for precast reinforced concrete channel units having a length of up to 4.5 m used for construction of floors and roofs.",
    "keywords": [
      "joist",
      "channel",
      "panel",
      "reinforcement",
      "kept",
      "unit",
      "brick"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Tests": "Dimensional test and deflection recovery test shall be routine tests whereas failure load test shall be type test. Type test is intended to prove the suitability and performance of a new design and size of a component. Failure load test is applied at the time of any change in the design/size. * Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement, Part 1 Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars (third revision) Fig. 2 Typical Partially Precast Joist ** Code of practice for design and construction of roofs and floors with prefabricated brick panel. ± ± ±",
      "Scope": "Requirements for precast reinforced concrete channel units having a length of up to 4.5 m used for construction of floors and roofs. 2. Shape, Dimension and Tolerance 2.1 Shape 2.1.1 The precast units shall be channel (inverted trough) shapes, having outer sides corrugated and grooved at ends to provide shear key action transfer of moments between adjacent units. (Fig 1 and 2). 2.1.2 Inner sides of the channel shall be kept sloping, as shown in Fig. 2 to simplify easy demoulding. The slope may be kept between 1/8 to 1/16. 2.2 Dimensions 2.2.1 Length— The maximum length of the unit shall be restricted to 4.5 m from stiffness considerations. 2.2.2 Width— The nominal width of channel unit shall be 300 mm or 600 mm. 2.2.3 Depth— The depth of the channel unit shall be kept either 130 mm or 200 "
    },
    "content": "IS 14143: 1994 Prefabricated Brick Panel And Partially Precast Concrete Joist For Flooring And Roofing\n2.2.1 Shape— Partially precast joist shall be rectangular in shape with steel stirrups kept projecting out which\nshall be tied with reinforcement along the joist to achieve monolithicity with concrete (see Fig.2).\n2.2.2 Width— Shall be sufficient to support two successive spans of brick panels with sufficient bearing,\nleaving an adequate gap between them. The minimum recommended width is 13 cm.\n2.2.3 Depth— For clear span of joist up to 4.2 m depth shall be 100 mm for both conventional and modular size\nbricks, Accordingly overall depth of joist with in-situ concrete of 35 mm shall be 210 mm for conventional\nbricks and 225 mm for modular bricks.\n2.3 Thickness of Joints\n2.3.1 Longitudinal Joints— Thickness of longitudinal joints shall be 40 mm to accommodate one 6 mm\nreinforcing bar with adequate cover (see Fig. 1).\n2.3.2 Transverse Joints— Thickness of transverse joints shall vary from a minimum of 15 mm to a maximum\nof 30 mm. However in a single panel unit, this shall be kept uniform for all transverse joints.\n* Heavy duty burnt clay building bricks (third revision)\nFig. 1 Isometric View of Prefab Brick Panel 2.4 Tolerances —Tolerances on various dimensions\nof the panel shall be as given below —\nDimension\nTolerance\nLength of panel\n10 mm\nWidth of panel\n5 mm\nThickness of panel\n4 mm\n3\nReinforcement\n3.1Reinforcement required for brick panel shall consist of 2 bars of required diameter embedded in the\nlongitudinal joints.\n3.1.1 Reinforcement with two mild steel Grade 1 bars of\n6 mm conforming to IS 432 (Part 1) : 1982* may be used in residential building.\nNote 1 — For details of material refer to 3 of the standard.\nNote 2 — For details of manufacture with regard to mould, casting and curing refer to 6 of the standard.\nNote 3 — For methods of tests, refer to Annex B of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 14143:1994 Specification for prefabricated brick panel and partially precast concrete joist for flooring and roofing.\n3.1.2 Reinforcement for RC joist shall be provided as per design (see IS 14142 : 1994).**\n3.2 Cover to Reinforcement — A minimum clear cover\nof 15 mm shall be provided to reinforcement in the panel while for the joist the minimum clear cover shall be\n25 mm.\n4. Test — Dimensional test and deflection recovery test\nshall be routine tests whereas failure load test shall be type test. Type test is intended to prove the suitability\nand performance of a new design and size of a component. Failure load test is applied at the time of any\nchange in the design/size.\n* Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement, Part 1 Mild steel and medium\ntensile steel bars (third revision)\nFig. 2 Typical Partially Precast Joist\n** Code of practice for design and construction of roofs and floors with prefabricated brick panel.\n±\n±\n± 1. Scope— Requirements for precast reinforced\nconcrete channel units having a length of up to 4.5 m used for construction of floors and roofs.\n2. Shape, Dimension and Tolerance\n2.1 Shape\n2.1.1 The precast units shall be channel (inverted trough) shapes, having outer sides corrugated and\ngrooved at ends to provide shear key action transfer of moments between adjacent units. (Fig 1 and 2).\n2.1.2 Inner sides of the channel shall be kept sloping, as shown in Fig. 2 to simplify easy demoulding. The\nslope may be kept between 1/8 to 1/16.\n2.2 Dimensions\n2.2.1 Length— The maximum length of the unit shall be restricted to 4.5 m from stiffness considerations.\n2.2.2 Width— The nominal width of channel unit shall be 300 mm or 600 mm.\n2.2.3 Depth— The depth of the channel unit shall be kept either 130 mm or 200 mm.\n2.2.4 Thickness of flange— The minimum thickness of flange shall be 30 mm for 300 mm wide channel units\nand 35 mm for 600 mm wide channels.\n2.2.5 Thickness of web (legs of channel unit)— The minimum thickness of the channel leg shall be not less\nthan 25 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14201: 1994",
    "title": "Precast Reinforced Concrete Channel Units For Construction Of Floors And Roofs",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements for prefabricated reinforced concrete L-panels used for making roofs for buildings. This standard also covers the requirements for prefabricated reinforced concrete channel units which are to be used along with L-panels in the roof construction.",
    "keywords": [
      "channel",
      "units",
      "reinforcement",
      "unit",
      "bars",
      "roofs",
      "stirrups"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Tests": "Tests for dimensional conformity, deflection recovery and failure load shall be conducted. Fig. 2 Typical Details of Channel Unit",
      "Scope": "Requirements for prefabricated reinforced concrete L-panels used for making roofs for buildings. This standard also covers the requirements for prefabricated reinforced concrete channel units which are to be used along with L-panels in the roof construction. 2. Shape and Dimensions 2.1 Shape— The precast L-panel units shall have a cross-section of “L” shape with end bearing of same depth and width as the rib of L-section at the two ends of length. The end bearing length of rib parallel to the width of L-panel shall be kept lesser than the overall width of L-panel to provide an overlapping of 80-150 mm depending upon climatic conditions (see Fig. 1). 2.1.1 Channel Units— Units having a cross-section of channel shape shall also be produced in required numbers, to be used at the eaves in a ve"
    },
    "content": "IS 14201: 1994 Precast Reinforced Concrete Channel Units For Construction Of Floors And Roofs\n2.3 Tolerances on Dimensions\n2.3.1\nDimension\nTolerance\nLength\n± 5 mm\nWidth\n± 3 mm\nBow (deviation from intended\n± 3 mm line or plane)\nTwist (distance of any corner\n± 3 mm from the plane containing\nother three corners)\n2.3.1 Squareness— When considering the squareness of the corner, the longer of the two sides being checked\nshall be taken as the base line. The shorter length shall not vary in length from the perpendicular by more than\n3 mm.\n2.3.2 Flatness— The maximum deviation from a 1.5 m straight edge placed in any position on a nominal plane\nsurface shall not exceed 2 mm.\n3. Design\n3.1 The channel units shall be designed in accordance\nwith IS 14215:1994.*\n3.2 Reinforcement\n* Code of practice for design and construction of floors and roofs with precast reinforced concrete channel units.\nFig. 1 Channel Unit 3.2.1 Main reinforcement of the channel units shall comprise two bars of required diameter as per the de-\nsign placed at the bottom of two legs of channel unit.\nTwo bars of mild steel Grade 1 conforming to IS 432\n(Part 1): 1982,* 6 mm shall be provided at top corners to support the stirrups (see Fig 2). Stirrups of 3 mm at the\nrate of 300 mm c/c along the length of the channel unit\n(see Fig 2) shall be provided.\nNote 1— For details of materials refer to 3 of the standard.\nNote 2— For details of manufacture refer to 6 of the standard.\nNote 3— For method of test refer to Annex A of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS14201:1994 Specification for precast reinforced concrete channel units for construction of floors and roofs.\n* Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement, Part 1 Mild steel and medium\ntensile steel bars (third revision).\n3.2.2 Cover to reinforcement — The minimum cover to reinforcement shall be 15 mm.\n4. Tests— Tests for dimensional conformity, deflection\nrecovery and failure load shall be conducted.\nFig. 2 Typical Details of Channel Unit 1. Scope— Requirements for prefabricated reinforced\nconcrete L-panels used for making roofs for buildings.\nThis standard also covers the requirements for prefabricated reinforced concrete channel units which\nare to be used along with L-panels in the roof construction.\n2. Shape and Dimensions\n2.1 Shape— The precast L-panel units shall have a\ncross-section of “L” shape with end bearing of same depth and width as the rib of L-section at the two ends\nof length. The end bearing length of rib parallel to the width of L-panel shall be kept lesser than the overall\nwidth of L-panel to provide an overlapping of\n80-150 mm depending upon climatic conditions\n(see Fig. 1).\n2.1.1 Channel Units— Units having a cross-section of channel shape shall also be produced in required\nnumbers, to be used at the eaves in a verandah or for achieving aesthetic effect (see Fig.1)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14241: 1995",
    "title": "Precast Reinforced Concrete L–Panel For Roofing",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Covers corrugated and semi-corrigutated asbestos cement sheets, designed to provide structural weather exposed surfaces of roofs and building walls of industrial, residential, agricultural commercial and institutional types of buildings and for decorative and other purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "reinforcement",
      "rib",
      "panels",
      "bars",
      "units",
      "optional",
      "deformed"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Tests": "Dimension test, deflection, recovery test shall be routine tests while failure load test shall be type test. Note 1— For details of material refer to 3 of the standard. Note 2— For details of manufacture with regard to mould, casting and curing refer to 6 of the standard. Note 3— For methods of tests, refer to Annex A of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 14241:1995 Specification for precast reinforced concrete L-panel for roofing. 3.2 Impermeability test (optional) — The specimens shall not show during 24 hours of test any formation of drops of water except traces of moisutre on the lower surface. 3.3 Frost cracking test (optional) — Shall not show any cracking, surface alteration or delamination. 3.4 Density (Optional test) — Shall not be less than 1.4g/cm3.",
      "Finish": "Shall have rectangular shape; corrugation true and regular; edges strainght and clean and square.",
      "Scope": "Covers corrugated and semi-corrigutated asbestos cement sheets, designed to provide structural weather exposed surfaces of roofs and building walls of industrial, residential, agricultural commercial and institutional types of buildings and for decorative and other purposes.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "See Table 1. 3. Physical and Mechanical Characteristics 3.1 The load bearing capacity of corrugated and semi- corrugated sheets shall be not less than 5 N/mm width of specimen."
    },
    "content": "IS 14241: 1995 Precast Reinforced Concrete L–Panel For Roofing\n2.2 Dimensions\n2.2.1 Length— The maximum span of L-panels shall be restricted to 4 m. Lower lengths may be preferred,\nwherever possible, for easy handling. A minimum bearing on the gable walls shall be kept 60 mm on either\nside of the L-panels.\n2.2.2 Width— A guidance may be taken for choosing the width from Table 2 of the standard.\n2.2.3 Thickness of flange— A thickness of flange of\n30 to 40 mm depending upon the size of units and climatic conditions should be adopted, keeping it\n30 mm for overall width up to and including 700 mm and\n40 mm for widths up to 900 mm.\n2.2.4 Depth and width of rib— The dimensions of rib shall be determined in accordance with the design\nprocedure laid down in IS 14242 : 1995.* In any case, the depth and width of rib shall be not less than those given\nin Table 2 of the standard.\n* Design and construction of roofs using precast reinforced concrete L-panels-code of practice.\nFig. 1 Details of L-Panels and Channel Units 3. Reinforcement\n3.1 Main reinforcement required shall consist of one\nbar of required diameter provided at bottom of the rib of\nL-panel having an adequate cover. The required diameter shall be designed in accordance with IS 14242 : 1995.\nAlternatively, the required diameter may be taken from\nTable 2 which applies for reinforcement conforming to mild steel Grade I of IS 432 (Part 1) : 1982* and high\nstrength deformed bars as per IS 1786 : 1978.** The detailing shall be followed in accordance with Fig. 1.\n* Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars hard-drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement : Part 1 Mild steel bars (third revison).\n** High strength deformed steel bars and wires for concrete reinforcement (third revision).\n3.2 Reinforcement for temperature and handling shall\nbe provided in the flange as per Table 2 of the standard\n3.3 At the eaves over verandah where channel units\nare provided, the same tensile reinforcement as for Lpanel shall be provided in both the ribs (the total\nreinforcement thus being double that of L-panel) while the overall dimensions shall be kept the same.\n4. Tests—Dimension test, deflection, recovery test\nshall be routine tests while failure load test shall be type test.\nNote 1— For details of material refer to 3 of the standard.\nNote 2— For details of manufacture with regard to mould, casting and curing refer to 6 of the standard.\nNote 3— For methods of tests, refer to Annex A of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 14241:1995 Specification for precast reinforced concrete\nL-panel for roofing. 3.2 Impermeability test (optional) — The specimens\nshall not show during 24 hours of test any formation of drops of water except traces of moisutre on the lower\nsurface.\n3.3 Frost cracking test (optional) — Shall not show\nany cracking, surface alteration or delamination.\n3.4 Density (Optional test) — Shall not be less than\n1.4g/cm3.\n4. Finish — Shall have rectangular shape; corrugation\ntrue and regular; edges strainght and clean and square.\n1. Scope— Covers corrugated and semi-corrigutated\nasbestos cement sheets, designed to provide structural weather exposed surfaces of roofs and building walls of\nindustrial, residential, agricultural commercial and institutional types of buildings and for decorative and\nother purposes.\n2. Dimensions and Tolerances — See Table 1.\n3. Physical and Mechanical Characteristics\n3.1 The load bearing capacity of corrugated and semi-\ncorrugated sheets shall be not less than 5 N/mm width of specimen."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 459: 1992",
    "title": "Corrugated And Semi-Corrugated Asbestos Cement Sheets",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements relating to plain ended asbestos cement pipes and joints intended for use under pressure; it defines certain conditions of manufacture, classification, characteristics and acceptance tests applicable to these roducts. Note – Asbestos cement building pipes and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roofing fittings are covered by IS 1626. Asbestos cement pipes and fittings for sewerage and drainage are covered by IS 6908 'Specification for asbestos cement pipes and fittings f",
    "keywords": [
      "corrugated",
      "pipes",
      "sheets",
      "asbestos",
      "works",
      "corrugation",
      "pressure"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements relating to plain ended asbestos cement pipes and joints intended for use under pressure; it defines certain conditions of manufacture, classification, characteristics and acceptance tests applicable to these roducts. Note – Asbestos cement building pipes and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roofing fittings are covered by IS 1626. Asbestos cement pipes and fittings for sewerage and drainage are covered by IS 6908 'Specification for asbestos cement pipes and fittings for swerage and drainage (first revision). 2. Pipes 2.1 Classification 2.1.1 Pipes of Nominal Diameter Up to 1 000 mm – Pipes of nominal diameter up to 1 000 are classified according to the works hydraulic test pressure give in Table 1. TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION Sl.No Classes Works Hydraulic Test Pressu"
    },
    "content": "IS 459: 1992 Corrugated And Semi-Corrugated Asbestos Cement Sheets\n(Third Revision)\nNote 1 — For method of measurement of different dimensions of sheets, refer to 5 of the standard.\nNote 2 — For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913: 2003 Methods of tests for absestos cement products (second revision).\nFor detailed informatoin refer to IS 459:1992 Specification for corrugated and semi-corrugated asbestos cement sheets (third revision).\nTABLE1 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES OF CORRUGATED AND\nSEMI-CORRUGATED SHEETS\nAll dimensions in milimetres\nSl. Types of Depth of Pitch of Overall\nEffective Nominal Length of\nNo. Sheets Corrugation Corrugation Width\nWidth Thickness Sheet\n(1)\n(2) (3) (4)\n(5) (6)\n(7)\n(8)\n(9)\n(10)(11) (12) (13) (14)\ni) Corrugated 48 +3\n146 +6\n1050\n+10\n1010\n+10 6 +free 1500 +5 -5 -2\n-5 -5 -0.5 1750 -10 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000 ii) Semi-corrugated 45 +3\n338 +6\n1100\n+10\n1014\n+10 6 +free 1500 +5 -5 -2 -5\n-5 -0.5 1750 -10 2000 2250 2500 2750 3000\n1. Tolerance given in this table for pitch of corrugation relates to measurement over six pitches for corrugated\nsheets and three pitches for semi corrugated sheets.\n2. Nominal lengths other than those specified in col 13 may also be manufactured by mutual agreement between D Tolerances P Tolerances B Tolerances C Tolerances T Tolerances A Tolerances Note — Corrugated sheets of overall width 1086 mm and effective width 1016 mm with tolerances and other parameters same\nas in this table 1 may also be manufactured by mutual agreement between the manufacturer as the purchaser (see Fig 1A of the standard) 1. Scope—Requirements relating to plain ended\nasbestos cement pipes and joints intended for use under pressure; it defines certain conditions of manufacture,\nclassification, characteristics and acceptance tests applicable to these roducts.\nNote – Asbestos cement building pipes and pipe fittings, gutters\nand gutter fittings and roofing fittings are covered by IS 1626.\nAsbestos cement pipes and fittings for sewerage and drainage are covered by IS 6908 'Specification for asbestos cement\npipes and fittings for swerage and drainage (first revision).\n2.\nPipes\n2.1 Classification\n2.1.1 Pipes of Nominal Diameter Up to 1 000 mm –\nPipes of nominal diameter up to 1 000 are classified according to the works hydraulic test pressure give in\nTable 1.\nTABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION\nSl.No\nClasses\nWorks Hydraulic Test\nPressure, TP (MPa)\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\ni)\n10\n1.0 ii)\n15\n1.5 iii)\n20\n2.0 iv)\n25\n2.5\nNOTES\n1. Pipes of class 12, 18, 24, 30, 35 and 36 corresponding to\nworks hydraulic test pressure of 1.2, 1.8, 2.4, 3.0, 3.5 and\n3.6 MPa respectively may also be manufactured. In such\ncases, detailed dimensions shall be arrived at between the manufacturer and the purchaser.\n2. For pipes of nominal diameter from 600 mm to 1 000\nmm, the procedure given in 3.2.2 may also be used.\nThe relationship between the bursting pressure (BP)\nand the works hydraulic test pressure (TP), and the relationship between the bursting pressure (BP) and\nthe hydraulic working pressure (WP) shall not be less than the values indicated in Table 2."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1592: 2003",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements of socketed asbestos cement building and sanitary pipes and pipe fittings of diameter 50 to 150 mm for use as rain water pipes, soil, waste and ventilating pipes. 1.1 The followings pipes and pipe fittings are covered— a) Single socketed pipe, b) Loose socket, c) Plain bend, d) Swan neck, e) Sanitary bend, f) Single and double equal junctions, g) Single and double unequal junctions, h) Single and double equal inverted junctions with spigot branch, j) Hexagonal rain water head, k) Sh",
    "keywords": [
      "pipes",
      "diameter",
      "nominal",
      "asbestos",
      "external",
      "characteristics",
      "manufacturer"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of socketed asbestos cement building and sanitary pipes and pipe fittings of diameter 50 to 150 mm for use as rain water pipes, soil, waste and ventilating pipes. 1.1 The followings pipes and pipe fittings are covered— a) Single socketed pipe, b) Loose socket, c) Plain bend, d) Swan neck, e) Sanitary bend, f) Single and double equal junctions, g) Single and double unequal junctions, h) Single and double equal inverted junctions with spigot branch, j) Hexagonal rain water head, k) Shoe, m) Cone cap cowl, n) Slotted vent cowl, and p) W.C. connectors,",
      "Workmanship": "The interior surface of the pipes and pipe fittings should be regular. 3. Dimensional Requirements 3.1 Nominal Diameter and Thickness— The nominal diameter of the pipes and pipe fittings corresponds to the internal diameter (bore), tolerances not being taken into account. 3.2 Length 3.2.1 Nominal Length — The nominal lengths of pipes correspond to the useful lengths of the socketed pipes exclusive of internal depth of socket, not taking tolerance into account, and shall be 500, 1000, 1500, 1830, 2000 2440 and 3000 mm."
    },
    "content": "IS 1592: 2003 Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes\n(Fourth Revision)\nTABLE 2 PRESSURE RELATIOSHIP\nSl.No\nNominal Diameters\nTP\nBP\nWP\nBP\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\ni)\nFrom 50 to 100\n2\n4 ii)\nFrom 125 to 200\n1.75\n3.5 iii)\nFrom 250 to 1 000\n1.5\n3\nNote – Pipes of nominal diameter above 1 000 mm and up to\n2 500 m may also be manufactured with the data on the above parameters to be as mutually agreed to between the\nmanufacturer and the purchaser.\n2.1.2 Pipes of Nominal Diameter Exceeding 1 000 m –\nPipes of nominal diameter exceeding 1 000 mm are not classified in the same way as defined in 2.1.1 They are\ndesigned to suit the specific requirements of any particular pipeline.\n2.2 General Appearance and Finish\nThe material surface shall be regular and smooth. The pipes may be coated internally and/or externally with a\nsuitable coating, if required by the purchaser's representative.\n2.3 Characteristics\n2.3.1 Geometrical Characteristics\n2.3.1.1 Nominal diameter\nThe nominal diameter of the pipes corresponds to the intenral diameter expressed in millimetres, tolerances\nexcluded. The series of nominal diameters is given in\nTable 3. TABLE 3 NOMINAL DIAMETER\nAll dimensinos in millimetres\n50\n400\n60\n450\n80\n500\n100\n600\n125\n700\n150\n750\n200\n800\n250\n850\n300\n900\n350\n1 000\nNote – The pipes of nominal diameter above 1 000 mm\nmay also be manufactured, if required with mutual agreement between the manufacturer and the user.\n2.3.1.2 Thickness of wall and external diameter\nThe thickness of wall and external diameters of asbestos cement pressure pipes shall be as per Table 4.\n2.3.1.3 Length\nThe nominla length of the pipes refers to the length measured between the extremities for pipes with plain\nends. It shall not be less than 3 m for pipes with a nominal diameter equal to or less than 200 mm; and not less than\n4 m for pipes with a nominal diameter exceeding 200 mm.\nIn special cases shorter pipes may be specified. The nominal length should preferably be a multiple of 0.5 m\n2.3.1.4 Tolerances\n(a) External diameter of finished ends\nTolerances on the external diameter at 100 mm from ends shall be follows.\nNominal Diameter\nTolerances mm mm\n50 to 300 ± 0.6\n350 to 500\n± 0.8\n600 to 700\n± 1.0\n750 to 1000\n± 1.5\nNote – Such tolerances for sizes above 1 000 mm would be as\nagreed to between the manufacturer and the user.\n(b) Nominal thickness of the well\nOn jointing surfaces at the pipe ends, the lower deviations of the tolerances are as follows :\nNominal Thickness (mm)\nTolerance (mm)\nUp to and including 10\n– 1.0\nOver 10 up to and including 20\n– 1.5\nOver 20 up to and including 30\n– 2.0\nOver 30 up to and including 60\n– 3.0\nOver 60 up to and including 90\n– 3.5\nOver 90\n– 4.0\nNotes\n1 Plus tolerance shall be free\n2 For pipes of 50 and 60 mm diameter, the above tolerances\nare allowable provided that the variation of the internal diameter resulting from the their application does not exceed\n– 5 mm.\n3 The thickness at any point along the barrel of the pipe\nshould be not less than that obtained by application of the tolerances given above.\n4 The average thickness of the samples from the lot shall\nnot be less than the nominal thickness and not more than\n10 percent of the pipes samples should have negative tolerance\n(c) Nominal length\nThe tolerances on nominal length shall be as follows\nFor all length mm\n50\n20\n+\n−\n2.3.2 Physical Characteristics\nShall show no fissure, leakage or sweating.\n2.3.3 Mechanical Characteristics\n2.3.3.1 Bursting\nShall have a minimum unit bursting strength of\n22 N/mm2 except that for diameters exceeding 1 200 mm\nthis strength may be reduced by not more than 20 percent by agreement between the manufacturer and the\npurchaser provided that the safety factors specified in the relevent for large diameter pipes are maintained.\n2.3.3.2 Crushing\nWhen tested in accordance with 3.5 (a) (3) of the standard the pipes shall have a minimum unit transverse crushing\nstrength of 44 N/mm2 except that for diameters exceeding\n1 200 mm this strength may be reduced by not more than\n20 percent by agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser provided that the safety factors specified\nin the relevent Indian Standard for large diameter pipes are maintained. 2.3.3.3 Bending\nWhen tested as prescribed in 3.5 (a)(4) of the standard\n(test limited to pipes with a nominal diameter less than or equal to 150 mm), the pipes shall have a minimum unit\nbending strength of 24.5 N/mm2.\n3. JOINTS\n3.1 Type – Two types of joints are normally provided\nwith asbestos cement pressure pipes and they are (a)\nasbestos cement coupling with rubber sealing rings, and\n(b) cast iron detachable joints with rubber sealing rings and bolts and nuts.\n3.2 Characteristics\n3.2.1 Geometrical Characteristics\n3.2.1.1 Dimensions – The dimensinos of the asbestos cement coupling shall be as given in Annex B of the\nstandard. The shape of all parts including the rubber rings, shall be determined by the manufacturer of the\npipes\nThe joints, when mounted and put under pressure, shall ensure the permanent tightness of the pipeline against\nboth leakage and infiltration.\n3.2.2 Sealing Characteristics – The assembled joints, when tested at the factory, shall be capable of with\nstanding the specified hydraulic test pressure of the pipes on which they are to be used, even when the\npipess are set at the maximum angular deviation recommended by the manufacturer. - TABLE 4 CLASIFICATION AND DIMENSIONS OF ASBESTOS CEMENT PRESSURE PIPES\nAll dimensions are in millimitres\nSl.\nNom\nClass 10\nClass 15\nClass 20\nClass 25\nNo.\nDia\nThickness\nExternal Thickness\nExternal\nThickness E xternal Thickness\nExternal\nDiameter\nDiameter Diameter\nDiameter\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\n(9)\n(10)\n1)\n50\n9.5\n69.0\n9.5\n69.0\n11.0\n71.5\n13.5\n76.5\n2)\n60\n9.5\n79.0\n9.5\n79.0\n11.0\n81.5\n13.5\n86.5\n3)\n80\n9.5\n99.5\n9.5\n99.5\n11.0\n101.5\n13.5\n106.5\n4)\n100\n9.5\n120.0\n10.0\n121.0\n13.5\n126.5\n16.5\n132.5\n5)\n125\n9.5\n145.0\n11.0\n147.0\n14.0\n152.5\n17.5\n159.5\n6)\n150\n9.5\n171.0\n13.0\n176.5\n16.5\n183.0\n21.0\n191.0\n7)\n200\n-\n-\n16.5\n233.5\n22.0\n242.5\n27.5\n253.5\n8)\n250\n-\n-\n17.0\n284.5\n23.0\n294.5\n28.5\n305.5\n9)\n300\n-\n-\n20.0\n340.5\n27.0\n352.5\n34.5\n366.5\n10)\n350\n-\n-\n21.0\n392.0\n27.5\n405.0\n35.0\n419.0\n11)\n400\n-\n-\n24.0\n448.0\n32.0\n463.0\n39.5\n478.0\n12)\n450\n-\n-\n26.5\n498.0\n35.5\n515.0\n44.0\n532.0\n13)\n500\n-\n-\n29.0\n554.5\n39.0\n572.5\n48.5\n591.5\n14)\n600\n-\n-\n35.0\n665.5\n46.0\n686.5\n58.0\n710.5\n15)\n700\n-\n-\n38.0\n769.0\n51.5\n795.0\n65.5\n823.0\n16)\n750\n-\n-\n40.5\n824.0\n55.0\n853.0\n70.0\n882.0\n17)\n800\n-\n-\n43.5\n880.0\n59.0\n910.0\n75.0\n941.0\n18)\n850\n-\n-\n46.0\n935.0\n62.5\n767.0\n79.5\n1000.0\n19)\n900\n-\n-\n48.5\n990.0\n66.0\n1024.0\n84.0\n1059.0\n20)\n1000\n-\n-\n54.0\n1101.0\n73.5\n1138.0\n93.5\n1177.0\nNotes\n1 External diameters at finished ends of the pipes specified in the table are already in practical use and are specified the purpose\nof interchangeability. Due to inherent characteristics of the manufacturing process and common moulds for all classes, external diameter may not be equal to internal diameter plus twice the thickness in all cases.\n2. For nominal diameters 700 to 1 000 mm for Classes 15 to 25, the barrel thickness shall not be less than the thickness\nmentinoed above. The same may be verified from bursting test pieces.\n3. For pipes of nominal diameter above 1 000 mm data/details hall be as agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser. Note — For methods of tests, refer to standard and IS 5913:2003 Methods of tests for asbestos cement products (second\nrevision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1592 : 2003 Specification for asbestos cement pressure pipes (fourth revision). 1. Scope — Requirements of socketed asbestos cement\nbuilding and sanitary pipes and pipe fittings of diameter\n50 to 150 mm for use as rain water pipes, soil, waste and ventilating pipes.\n1.1 The followings pipes and pipe fittings are\ncovered—\na)\nSingle socketed pipe, b)\nLoose socket, c)\nPlain bend, d)\nSwan neck, e)\nSanitary bend, f)\nSingle and double equal junctions, g)\nSingle and double unequal junctions, h)\nSingle and double equal inverted junctions with spigot branch,\nj)\nHexagonal rain water head, k)\nShoe, m) Cone cap cowl,\nn)\nSlotted vent cowl, and p)\nW.C. connectors,\n2. Workmanship— The interior surface of the pipes\nand pipe fittings should be regular.\n3. Dimensional Requirements\n3.1 Nominal Diameter and Thickness— The nominal\ndiameter of the pipes and pipe fittings corresponds to the internal diameter (bore), tolerances not being taken\ninto account.\n3.2 Length\n3.2.1 Nominal Length — The nominal lengths of pipes correspond to the useful lengths of the socketed pipes\nexclusive of internal depth of socket, not taking tolerance into account, and shall be 500, 1000, 1500, 1830, 2000\n2440 and 3000 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1626 (Part 1): 1994",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Building Pipes And Pipe Fittings, Gutters, And Gutter Fittings",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirments of asbestos cement gutters and gutter fittings used in buildings.",
    "keywords": [
      "fittings",
      "gutters",
      "pipes",
      "pipe",
      "bursting",
      "sockets",
      "cowl"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirments of asbestos cement gutters and gutter fittings used in buildings.",
      "Workmanship": "The interior surface of the gutters and their fittings shall be regular and uniform. 3. Dimensional Requirements a) Valley gutters — Normal size (in mm), shall be, 915 × 205 × 230, 610 × 150 × 230, 455 ×125 × 150 and 405 × 125 × 255 with thickness 12.5 mm, and length 1 830 mm. b) Boundary wall gutters — Nominal size (in mm), shall be 510 × 150 × 255, 455 × 150 × 305, 305 × 150 × 230 and 280 × 125 × 180 with thickness 12.5 mm and length 1830 mm. c) Half round gutters Nominal size shall be 305, 230 and 150 mm with thickness 9.5 mm."
    },
    "content": "IS 1626 (Part 1): 1994 Asbestos Cement Building Pipes And Pipe Fittings, Gutters, And Gutter Fittings\nAND ROOF FITTINGS PART 1 PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS\n(Second Revision)\n3.2.2 Overall Length — The overall length is the sum of nominal length and length of socket.\n3.3 Tolerances\n3.3.1 Internal diameter of plain ends and sockets: The ratio of the actual diameter (maximum or minimum bore\nof pipes, pipe fittings or sockets measured over a given section) and the nominal diameter (bore of pipes, pipe\nfittings or sockets) should lie between 0.95 and 1.05 for all diameters of pipes and pipe fittings.\n3.3.2 The nominal length— The tolerances on nominal length of pipes and pipe fittings shall be ± 10 mm and\n± 5 mm respectively.\n3.3.3 The overall length— The tolerances on the overall lengths of pipes shall be ± 10 mm.\n3.3.4 The depth of socket — The tolerances on the depth of the sockets of pipe fittings shall be ± 5 mm.\n4.\nPhysical Requirements\n4.1 The deviation in straightness of pipes shall not\nexceed the following—\nNominal Diameter\nDeviation m m m m\n50 to 60 5.5l\n80 to 150 4.5l where l is the nominal length of the pipe in metres\n4.2 Hydraulic Pressure Test — To be carried out on all\npipes and fittings except on cone cap cowl, slotted vent cowl and pipe fittings provided with access doors.\n4.2.1 Pipes and fittings shall show no fissure or visible sweating on outside surface when subjected to internal\nhydraulic pressure of 0.1 MN/m 2 maintained for 30 seconds. 4.2.2 Hydraulic bursting test — (optional for pipes only) the pipe shall indicate a minimum bursting stress\nof 5 MN/m2\n4.2.3 Longitudinal bursting test — The unit longitudinal bending stress shall not be less than\n12.5 MN/m2.\n4.2.4 Transverse crushing test — The unit transverse crushing stress of pipes at failure shall not be less than\n14 MN/m2.\n4.2.5 Water absorption test— The mean water absorption of speciment shall not be more than\n28 percent of the dry mass of the material.\nNote— For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Method of tests for asbestos cement products (first revision)\nFor detailed information refer to IS 1626 (Part 1):1984 Specification for asbestos cement building pipes and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roof fittings: Part 1 Pipes and pipe fittings\n(second revision). 1. Scope — Requirments of asbestos cement gutters\nand gutter fittings used in buildings.\n2. Workmanship — The interior surface of the\ngutters and their fittings shall be regular and uniform.\n3. Dimensional Requirements\na)\nValley gutters — Normal size (in mm), shall be,\n915 × 205 × 230, 610 × 150 × 230, 455 ×125 × 150 and 405 × 125 × 255 with thickness 12.5 mm,\nand length 1 830 mm.\nb)\nBoundary wall gutters — Nominal size (in mm), shall be 510 × 150 × 255, 455 × 150 × 305, 305\n× 150 × 230 and 280 × 125 × 180 with thickness\n12.5 mm and length 1830 mm.\nc)\nHalf round gutters Nominal size shall be 305,\n230 and 150 mm with thickness 9.5 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1626 (Part 2): 1994",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Building Pipes And Pipe Fittings, Gutters And Gutter Fittings And Roof Fittings",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements of asbestos cement roofing fittings, to be used in conjunction with corrugated and semi-corugated asbestos cement sheets conforming to IS 459:1992* 1.1 The following roofing fittings are covered in this standard. a) Ridges— 1) Serrated adjustable ridges, 2) Plain wing adjustable ridges, 3) One piece plain angular ridges, 4) Unserrated adjustable ridges for hips, 5) Close fitting adjustable ridges, and 6) Northlight adjustable ridges. b) Eaves filler pieces c) Ridge finials, d) Apron",
    "keywords": [
      "ridges",
      "fittings",
      "adjustable",
      "gutters",
      "curves",
      "gutter",
      "northlight"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of asbestos cement roofing fittings, to be used in conjunction with corrugated and semi-corugated asbestos cement sheets conforming to IS 459:1992* 1.1 The following roofing fittings are covered in this standard. a) Ridges— 1) Serrated adjustable ridges, 2) Plain wing adjustable ridges, 3) One piece plain angular ridges, 4) Unserrated adjustable ridges for hips, 5) Close fitting adjustable ridges, and 6) Northlight adjustable ridges. b) Eaves filler pieces c) Ridge finials, d) Apron pieces e) Barge boards for corner pieces, curved barge boards, f) Rooflights, g) North light curves or ventilator curves, h) Cowl type ventilator curves, j) Expansion joints for semi-corrugated sheets and fittings like ridges and northlight curve. k) Louvres, S type, m) Radial exhaust, and n) Curve"
    },
    "content": "IS 1626 (Part 2): 1994 Asbestos Cement Building Pipes And Pipe Fittings, Gutters And Gutter Fittings And Roof Fittings\nPART 2 GUTTERS AND GUTTER FITTINGS\n(Second Revision)\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of tests for asbestos cement products (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1626 (Part 2) : 1994 Specification for asbestos cement building pipes and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roof fittings: Part 2 Gutters and\ngutter fittings (Second Revision).\nNote— For detailed dimensions for various items of gutters\nand their fittings, refer to Tables 2 to 4 and appropriate figures of the standard.\n3.1 Tolerances\nOn length ±10 mm\nOn profile ±10 mm\nOn thickness ±1.5 mm\n4. Physical Requirements\n4.1 When tested for impermeability, the specimen shall\nnot show during 24 h of test any formation of drops of water, except traces fo moisture on the lower surface. 2. Shapes, Dimensions and Tolerances\n2.1 Shapes— The shapes of various fittings shall be as\ndetailed in Table 1 read with appropriate figures as given in the standard.\n2.2 Dimensions—Shall be declared by the manufacture\n2.3 Tolerances\n2.3.1\nLength ± 10 mm\n2.3.2\nThickness + free -1.0 mm\n3. Physical Requirement\n3.1 All the finished products shall be inspected for\nfreedom from visual defects.\n3.2 The surface of fittings intended to be exposed to\nthe weather shall be generally of smooth finish and the finish should permit any minor variation of the surface\nappearance due to the method of manufacture, which does not impair the performance of the fittings.\n3.2.1 The fittings shall be clean with straight and regular edges.\n3.3\nWhen tested for impermeability, the specimen shall not show during 24 hours of test any formation of drops\nof water, except traces of moisture on the lower surface.\n1. Scope — Requirements of asbestos cement roofing\nfittings, to be used in conjunction with corrugated and semi-corugated asbestos cement sheets conforming to\nIS 459:1992*\n1.1\nThe following roofing fittings are covered in this standard.\na)\nRidges—\n1) Serrated adjustable ridges,\n2) Plain wing adjustable ridges,\n3) One piece plain angular ridges,\n4) Unserrated adjustable ridges for hips,\n5) Close fitting adjustable ridges, and\n6) Northlight adjustable ridges.\nb)\nEaves filler pieces c)\nRidge finials, d)\nApron pieces e)\nBarge boards for corner pieces, curved barge boards,\nf)\nRooflights, g)\nNorth light curves or ventilator curves, h)\nCowl type ventilator curves, j)\nExpansion joints for semi-corrugated sheets and fittings like ridges and northlight curve.\nk)\nLouvres, S type, m)\nRadial exhaust, and n)\nCurved sheets."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1626: 1984",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Building Pipes And Pipe Fittings, Gutters And Guter Fittings And Roof Fittings",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding, composition, dimension and tests of asbestos cement flat sheets (semicompressed and fully compressed). These sheets are different from autoclaved silica asbestos cement flat sheets which are covered in IS 13000:1990.*",
    "keywords": [
      "asbestos",
      "roof",
      "cement",
      "sheets",
      "fittings",
      "corrugated",
      "fitings"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding, composition, dimension and tests of asbestos cement flat sheets (semicompressed and fully compressed). These sheets are different from autoclaved silica asbestos cement flat sheets which are covered in IS 13000:1990.*",
      "Classification": "See Table 1. 3. Dimensional and tolerances 3.1 Thickness— shall be 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 and 15 mm. 3.2 Length and Width — See Table 2. 3.3 Tolerances 3.3.1 On thickness — (a) From 3 mm to 5 mm ±0.5 mm (b) From 6 mm and above ± 0.1 mm where 'e' is nominal thickness of sheet."
    },
    "content": "IS 1626: 1984 Asbestos Cement Building Pipes And Pipe Fittings, Gutters And Guter Fittings And Roof Fittings\nPART 3 ROOF FITTINGS\n(Second Revision)\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of tests for asbestos cement products (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1626(Part 3):1994 Specification for asbestos cement building pipes and pipe fittings, gutters and gutter fittings and roof fittings: Part 3 Roof fitings\n(second revision).\n* Corrugated and semi-corrugated asebestos cement sheets (third revision) 1. Scope—Requirements regarding, composition,\ndimension and tests of asbestos cement flat sheets (semicompressed and fully compressed). These sheets are\ndifferent from autoclaved silica asbestos cement flat sheets which are covered in IS 13000:1990.*\n2. Classification— See Table 1.\n3. Dimensional and tolerances\n3.1\nThickness— shall be 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12 and 15 mm.\n3.2\nLength and Width — See Table 2.\n3.3\nTolerances\n3.3.1 On thickness —\n(a) From 3 mm to 5 mm ±0.5 mm\n(b) From 6 mm and above ± 0.1 mm where 'e' is nominal thickness of sheet."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2096: 1992",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Flat Sheets",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding composition, dimensions, and test of asbestos cement building boards. Asbestos cement flat sheets and silica asbestos cement flat sheets which are different, are not covered in this standard.",
    "keywords": [
      "asbestos",
      "cement",
      "sheets",
      "bending",
      "compressed",
      "sheet",
      "silica"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding composition, dimensions, and test of asbestos cement building boards. Asbestos cement flat sheets and silica asbestos cement flat sheets which are different, are not covered in this standard.",
      "Classification": "See Table 1. 3. Tolerances 3.1 Length and Width ±0.5 mm 3.2 Thickness a) From 3 mm to 5 mm ± 0.5 mm"
    },
    "content": "IS 2096: 1992 Asbestos Cement Flat Sheets\n(First Revision)\n3.3.2 On length and width — Shall not vary from the nomoinal dimensions for length and width by more than\n± 5 mm.\n3.3.3 Straightness of edges — Shall be not more than\n2 mm/m for the relevant dimension (length or width)\n3.3.4 Squareness of edges — Shall be not more than\n3 mm/m.\n4. Tests\n4.1 Bending Strength Test and Density — Bending\nstress and density shall not be less than the values specified in Table 1.\n4.2 For measurement of thickness, straightness and\nsquareness of edges, refer to 8 of the standard.\n* Silica asbestos cement flat sheets\nTABLE 1 CLASIFICATION\nClass Description\nMinimum Bending strength in N/mm2\nMinimum of Sheet of Sheet\nDensity g/cc\nLoading Parallel\nLoading at Right Angles to the Fibre of Sheet\nto the Fibre of Sheet\n(1) (2)\n(3)\n(4) (5)\n1 Semi-compressed\n13\n16 1.2\n2 Fully compressed\n20\n28 1.6\nNote— For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of test for asbestos cement products (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2096:1991.Specifiction for asbestos cement sheets\n(first revision).\nTABLE 2 NOMINAL DIMENSIONS OF ASBESTOS\nCEMENT SHEETS\nLength Width 1200 1220\n600 x x\n610 x\nx\n1200 x\nx\n1200 x\nx\n1800 x\nx\n1830 x\nx\n2400 x\nx\n2440 x\nx\n3000 x\nx\n3050 x\nx 1. Scope — Requirements regarding composition,\ndimensions, and test of asbestos cement building boards. Asbestos cement flat sheets and silica asbestos\ncement flat sheets which are different, are not covered in this standard.\n2. Classification — See Table 1.\n3. Tolerances\n3.1 Length and Width ±0.5 mm\n3.2 Thickness\na) From 3 mm to 5 mm ± 0.5 mm"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2098: 1997",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Building Boards",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements for asbestos-cement pipes and fittings suitable for use with gravity flow at atmosopheric pressure, intended for sewerage and drain- age application.",
    "keywords": [
      "boards",
      "class",
      "pipes",
      "junctions",
      "fittings",
      "asbestos",
      "cement"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for asbestos-cement pipes and fittings suitable for use with gravity flow at atmosopheric pressure, intended for sewerage and drain- age application.",
      "Workmanship And Finish": "The pipes shall be seamless, compact and homogeneous. Their internal surface shall be regular and smooth. the internal face between the branch and the parent pipe of junctions shall have a flush and fair finish.",
      "Classification": "Classified according to crush- ing strength as given in Table 1. 4. Fittings 4.1 General appearance and finish shall comply with the requirements of 2. 4.2 Classification and Types 4.2.1 Shall be of equivalent strength to that of the adjacent pipes. 4.2.2 The nominal diameter of fittings shall correspond to nominal diameters of pipes. 4.2.3 Thickness of the barrel of the fittings shall be at least equal to that for corresponding pipe. 4.2.4 The basic types of fittings are— bends, angle junctions, equal or unequal tees, double sockets, sleeves and saddles. 5. Tolerances 5.1 Pipes — See Table 2."
    },
    "content": "IS 2098: 1997 Asbestos Cement Building Boards\n(First Revision)\nb)\nFrom 6 mm and above ± 0.1 e mm (± 10 percent)\nwhere 'e' is nominal thickness of board.\n4. Tests\n4.1 Load Bearing Capacity— Average of two\nspecimens not less than 20 kg for Class A boards and\n15 kg for Class B and Class C boards.\nFurther, the breaking load of either of the specimens shall not be less than 15 kg for Class A boards and 10 kg\nfor Class B and Class C boards.\n4.2 Water Absorption Test— The amount of water\nabsorbed by the specimen shall not exceed 40 percent of its dry weight.\nTABLE 1DIMENSIONS OF ASBESTOS CEMENT BUILDING BOARDS\nClass of Board\nLength\nWidth\nThickness mm\nmm mm\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\nA\n2440\n1220\n6\n(2400)\n(1200)\n1830\n(1800)\n1220\n(1200)\nB\n2440\n1220\n5\n(2400)\n(1200)\n1830\n(1800)\n1220\n(1200)\nC\n2440\n1220\n4\n(2400)\n(1200)\n1830\n(1800)\n1220\n(1200)\nNote — Values which are not in brackets are preferred sizes .\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of tests for asebstos cement products (first revision).\nFor detialed information, refer to IS 2098:1997 Specification for asbestos cement building boards\n(first revision). 1. Scope — Requirements for asbestos-cement pipes\nand fittings suitable for use with gravity flow at atmosopheric pressure, intended for sewerage and drain-\nage application.\n2. General Appearance and Finish— The pipes\nshall be seamless, compact and homogeneous. Their internal surface shall be regular and smooth. the internal\nface between the branch and the parent pipe of junctions shall have a flush and fair finish.\n3. Classification— Classified according to crush-\ning strength as given in Table 1.\n4. Fittings\n4.1 General appearance and finish shall comply with the\nrequirements of 2.\n4.2 Classification and Types\n4.2.1 Shall be of equivalent strength to that of the adjacent pipes.\n4.2.2 The nominal diameter of fittings shall correspond to nominal diameters of pipes.\n4.2.3 Thickness of the barrel of the fittings shall be at least equal to that for corresponding pipe.\n4.2.4 The basic types of fittings are— bends, angle junctions, equal or unequal tees, double sockets, sleeves\nand saddles.\n5. Tolerances\n5.1\nPipes — See Table 2."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6908: 1991",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Pipes And Fittings For Sewerage And Drainage",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Covers asebstos cement cable conduits of 50 to 150 mm diameter together with plastic couplings and asbestos cement conical couplings and asbestos cement collars with rubber rings These are intended to accomodate paper insulated telecommunication and power cables. Also covers asebestos cement cable trough of 100×100 mm to 300×300 mm size together with bends and union clips for use at ground level and above ground level for carrying cables.",
    "keywords": [
      "asbestos",
      "crushing",
      "cement",
      "couplings",
      "nominal",
      "rings",
      "deviations"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers asebstos cement cable conduits of 50 to 150 mm diameter together with plastic couplings and asbestos cement conical couplings and asbestos cement collars with rubber rings These are intended to accomodate paper insulated telecommunication and power cables. Also covers asebestos cement cable trough of 100×100 mm to 300×300 mm size together with bends and union clips for use at ground level and above ground level for carrying cables. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Conduits and Bends — See Table 1. 2.2 The nominal sizes of asbestos cement troughs shall be 100 × 100, 150 × 100, 180 × 150, 300 × 200 and 300 × 300 mm. Nominal length and wall thickness shall be 1.75 m and 12 mm respectively. 2.2.1 Tolerances on depth and width shall be ±3 mm and on length it shall be ± 6 mm."
    },
    "content": "IS 6908: 1991 Asbestos Cement Pipes And Fittings For Sewerage And Drainage\n(First revision)\n5.2 Fittings — Tolerances on the nominal thickness of\nthe fittings shall be as follows:\nUpper deviation\n: Free\nLower deviation\n:—1.5 mm\n6.\nTests\n6.1 Hydraulic ressure Test— The pipe and joints when\ntested to a pressure of 0.25 MPa shall not show any fissure, leakage, or sweating on their outside surface.\n6.2 Transverse Crushing Test—\na)\nPipes— Minimum 33 N/mm.\nb)\nFittings — No minimum transverse crushing load is required\n6.3 Longitudinal Bending Strength (Optional ) Shall not\nfracture below the following bending loads\n100 mm\n2.8 kN\n125 mm\n4.2 kN\n150 mm\n6.0 kN\n6.4 Acid Resistance Test (Optional) — The amount of\nacetic acid neutralied shall not exceed 0.100 g/cm\n7. Joints\na)\nAsbestos cement couplings with rubber sealing rings.\nb)\nCast iron detachable joints with rubber sealing rings and bolts and nuts.\n7.1\nThe assembled joint shall be capable of withstanding an internal hydrostatic pressure of\n0.25 MPa TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF PIPES\nNominal Minimum Ultimate Crushing Load\nDiameter m m\nClass 1 Class 2 Class 3\n(1)\n(2) (3) (4)\n100\n15.0\n15.0\n15.0\n125\n15.0\n15.0\n15.0\n150\n15.0\n15.0\n17.5\n200\n15.0\n17.5\n25.0\n250\n15.0\n22.5\n30.0\n300\n17.5\n27.5\n35.0\n350\n21.5\n31.5\n41.5\n400\n23.5\n36.5\n48.5\n450\n26.5\n40.0\n53.5\n500\n30.0\n45.0\n60.0\n600\n36.5\n53.5\n71.5\n700\n41.5\n63.5\n83.5\n750\n45.0\n67.5\n90.0\n800\n48.5\n71.5\n96.5\n850\n51.0\n76.5\n102.5\n900\n53.5\n81.5\n108.5\n1000\n60.0\n90.0\n120.0\nNote— No crushing load at rupture shall be less than 15 kN/m.\nTABLE 2 PERMISSIBLE DEVIATIONS ON SIZES\nThickness\nPermissible Deviations\nOn Thickness\nOn External\nOn Nominal\nExcluding\nDiameter at\nLength\nMachined Ends\nFinished Ends\n(1)\n(2)\n(3) (4)\nmm mm\nmm mm\nUp to and including 10\n-1.5 +50\nOver 10, up toand including 20\n-2.0\n±1.0 for 100 - 20 for 100 to to 700 mm 300mm nominal\nOver 20, up to and including 30\n-2.5 nominal diameter and diameter and Over 30, up to and including 60\n-3.0\n± 1.5 for 750 + 50 to 1000 mm - 40 for nominal nominal diameter diameter greater than 300 mm\nOver 60, up to andincluding 90\n-3.5\nOver 90\n-4.0\nNote— Nominal length of the pipes shall be 3 m for nominal diameters upto 200 mm and 4 m for greater diameters.\nNote— For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of tests for asbestos cement products (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6908:1991 Specification for asbestos cement pipes and fittings for sewerage and drainage (first revision). 1. Scope— Covers asebstos cement cable conduits\nof 50 to 150 mm diameter together with plastic couplings and asbestos cement conical couplings and asbestos\ncement collars with rubber rings These are intended to accomodate paper insulated telecommunication and\npower cables.\nAlso covers asebestos cement cable trough of\n100×100 mm to 300×300 mm size together with bends and union clips for use at ground level and above ground\nlevel for carrying cables.\n2. Dimensions and Tolerances\n2.1 Conduits and Bends — See Table 1.\n2.2 The nominal sizes of asbestos cement troughs shall\nbe 100 × 100, 150 × 100, 180 × 150, 300 × 200 and 300 × 300 mm. Nominal length and wall thickness shall be 1.75 m\nand 12 mm respectively.\n2.2.1 Tolerances on depth and width shall be ±3 mm and on length it shall be ± 6 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8870: 1978",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Cable Conduits And Troughs",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements for manufacture, classification dimensions, tests and acceptance criteria for asbestos cement pressure pipes (light duty) of class 5 and class 10.",
    "keywords": [
      "conduits",
      "troughs",
      "pressure",
      "hydraulic",
      "bursting",
      "asbestos",
      "regularity"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Finish": "Homogenous with inner and outer surfaces clean, true, smooth and free from any imperfections that render them unsuitable for their purpose. Ends shall be finished square to the axis. 4. Tests 4.1 Conduits shall be tested for straightness, regularity of thickness and diameter, flexural strength, crushing strength, water absorption, impact resistance and flattening resistance. 4.2 Troughs shall be tested for straightness, regularity of thickness, flexural strength and water absorption. Note— For detailed test requirements refer to 6 of the standard. Note— For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of tests for asbestos cement products (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 8870 :1978 Specification for asbestos cement cable conduits and troughs.",
      "Scope": "Requirements for manufacture, classification dimensions, tests and acceptance criteria for asbestos cement pressure pipes (light duty) of class 5 and class 10. 2. Physical Properties 2.1 Hydraulic bursting Stress— Not less than 10 N/mm for class 5 pipes and 12.5 N/mm for class 10 pipes. 2.2 Transverse Crushing Strength — In case of pipes larger than 150 mm, the unit transverse crushing stress shall not be less than 30 N/mm. 2.3 Longitudinal Bending Stress — In case of pipes smaller than 150 mm, the unit longitudinal bending stress shall not be less than 20N/mm . 3. Classification 3.1 Classified with respect to hydraulic pressure as given below : Class Hydraulic Test Pressure N/mm2 5 0.5 10 1.0 3.2 The classification given above is based on the hydraulic test pressure and the hydraulic work"
    },
    "content": "IS 8870: 1978 Asbestos Cement Cable Conduits And Troughs\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS AND PERMISSIBLE VARIATIONS OF ASBESTOS CEMENT\nCONDUITS AND BEND Nominal Length Permissible Variation\nNominal\nInternal Wall\nDiameter\nDiameter Conduits\nBends Thickness\nThickness Length\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\nmm mm\nm m\nmm mm\nmm\n50\n50\n2,3,4\n2\n9.0\n± 1.5\n+50\n-20\n80\n80\n2,3,4\n2\n9.5\n± 1.5\n+50\n-20\n100\n100\n2,3,4\n2\n9.5\n± 1.5\n+50\n-20\n125\n125\n2,3,4\n2\n10.0\n± 1.5\n+50\n-20\n150\n150\n2,3,4\n2\n10.0\n± 1.5\n+50\n-20\nNote — Bends shall be in 900 and 1350 angles.\n2.3 For detailed dimensions for asbestos cement\nconduits, troughs and their fittings, refer to Table 3 to 7 of the standard.\n3. Finish — Homogenous with inner and outer surfaces\nclean, true, smooth and free from any imperfections that render them unsuitable for their purpose. Ends shall be\nfinished square to the axis.\n4. Tests\n4.1 Conduits shall be tested for straightness, regularity\nof thickness and diameter, flexural strength, crushing strength, water absorption, impact resistance and\nflattening resistance.\n4.2 Troughs shall be tested for straightness, regularity\nof thickness, flexural strength and water absorption.\nNote— For detailed test requirements refer to 6 of the standard. Note— For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of tests for asbestos cement products (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8870 :1978 Specification for asbestos cement cable conduits and troughs. 1. Scope—Requirements\nfor manufacture,\nclassification dimensions, tests and acceptance criteria for asbestos cement pressure pipes (light duty) of class\n5 and class 10.\n2. Physical Properties\n2.1 Hydraulic bursting Stress— Not less than 10 N/mm\nfor class 5 pipes and 12.5 N/mm for class 10 pipes.\n2.2 Transverse Crushing Strength — In case of pipes\nlarger than 150 mm, the unit transverse crushing stress shall not be less than 30 N/mm.\n2.3 Longitudinal Bending Stress — In case of pipes\nsmaller than 150 mm, the unit longitudinal bending stress shall not be less than 20N/mm .\n3. Classification\n3.1 Classified with respect to hydraulic pressure as\ngiven below :\nClass\nHydraulic Test\nPressure N/mm2 5\n0.5 10\n1.0\n3.2 The classification given above is based on the\nhydraulic test pressure and the hydraulic working pressure shall normally be not more than 50 per cent of\nthe pressure defining the class.\n3.2.1 The relationship between the bursting pressure\n(BP) and the hydraulic test pressure (TP) and the relatioship between bursting pressure (BP) and the normal\nhydraulic working pressure (WP) shall not be less than the values indicated below\nNominal\nTP\nBP\nWP\nBP\nDiameter, mm 50 to 100 2 4 125 to 200 1.5 3.0"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9627: 1980",
    "title": "Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirement for materials, classification, dimensions and tests for silica-asbestos-cement flat sheets.",
    "keywords": [
      "asbestos",
      "rings",
      "cement",
      "detachable",
      "rubber",
      "pipes",
      "pressure"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirement for materials, classification, dimensions and tests for silica-asbestos-cement flat sheets.",
      "Classification": "Shall be classified according to bending stress and density as given below : Class of Bending Stress N/mm2 .Min Density sheets Loading parallel Loading at g/cm3. Min to fibres right angles 1 13 16 1.2 2 20 28 1.6",
      "Workmanship And Finish": "Shall be free from visible defects that impair its appearance or serviceability. The surface of the sheets shall be of uniform texture and shall have at least one smooth srface. They shall be flat, rectangular and shall have neatly trimmed straight and regular edges and shall be square at the corners. 4. Dimensions and Tolerances 4.1 Thickness shall be 3,4,5,6,8,10,12 and 15 mm 4.2 Nominal lengths and widths of silica- asbestos— Cement flat sheets shall be as follows—"
    },
    "content": "IS 9627: 1980 Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes\n(LIGHT DUTY)\n4. Dimensions and Tolerances\n4.1 Nominal diameters and other dimension of pipes—\nShall be given in Table 1.\n4.2 Tolerances— a) Diameter— ± 0.6 mm b) Thickness—\nNominal Thickness Tolerances mm mm Up to and including 10\n–1.5 Over 10 up to and including 15\n–2.0 c)\nLength — 3,4 and 5 m with tolerance of +50 mm –20 mm d) Deviation in straightness— 50 mm Dia –5.5 l mm 80 mm to 200 Dia –4.5 l mm where l is the length of the pipe in metres\n5. Tests\n5.1 Hydraulic Pressure Tightness Test— The pipe shall\nnot indicate any loss or visible sweating on the outside surface of the pipe, when the hydraulic test pressure as\ngiven in 3 is maintaianed for 30 seconds. The test time may be reduced to 10 seconds without changing the\nclass provided that the internal pressure is increased by\n10 percent.\n6. Joints\na)\nAsbestos cement couplings with rubber sealing rings; and\nb) Cast iron detachable joints with rubber sealing rings and bolts and nuts.\n6.1 Cast iron detachable joints shall conform to\nIS 8794:1988*.\n6.2 Rubber rings used in jointing shall comply with the\nrequirements of IS 5382:1985.\n† If the pipes are to be used for conveying drinking water, the rings shall not affect\nthe quality of water.\n† Rubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains and sewers (first revision).\n* Cast iron detachable joints for use with asbestos cement pressure pipes (first revision). Note — For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of test for asbestos cement products (first revision).\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF ASBESTOS CEMENT PRESSURE PIPES\nSl.\nNo.\nNominal Class 5\nClass 10\nDiameter\nThickness\nExternal\nThickness External\nDiameter Diameter\n(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)\nmm mm mm mm mm i) 50\n9.5 69.0 9.5 69.0 ii) 80\n9.5 99.0 9.5 99.0 iii)\n100\n9.5\n119.0\n11.0\n122.0 iv)\n125\n9.5\n144.0\n11.0\n147.0 v)\n150\n9.5\n169.0\n11.5\n173.0 vi)\n200\n9.5\n219.0\n15.0\n230.0\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 9627:1980 Specification for asbestos cement pressure pipes (light duty). 1. Scope – Requirement for materials, classification,\ndimensions and tests for silica-asbestos-cement flat sheets.\n2. Classification – Shall be classified according to\nbending stress and density as given below :\nClass of Bending Stress N/mm2 .Min Density sheets Loading parallel Loading at g/cm3. Min to fibres right angles 1 13 16 1.2 2 20 28 1.6\n3. General Appearance and Finish — Shall be\nfree from visible defects that impair its appearance or serviceability. The surface of the sheets shall be of\nuniform texture and shall have at least one smooth srface.\nThey shall be flat, rectangular and shall have neatly trimmed straight and regular edges and shall be square\nat the corners.\n4. Dimensions and Tolerances\n4.1 Thickness shall be 3,4,5,6,8,10,12 and 15 mm\n4.2 Nominal lengths and widths of silica- asbestos—\nCement flat sheets shall be as follows—"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13000: 1990",
    "title": "Silica Asbestos - Cement Flat Sheets",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Covers the requirements for materials, dimensions and tests for shallow corrugated asbestos cement sheets.",
    "keywords": [
      "edges",
      "squareness",
      "asbestos",
      "width",
      "straightness",
      "cement",
      "shallow"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Tests": "Shall be done for thickness, straightness of edges, squareness of edges, bending stress and density.",
      "Scope": "Covers the requirements for materials, dimensions and tests for shallow corrugated asbestos cement sheets.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "See Table 1 3. Physical and Mechanical Properties 3.1 Load bearing capacity – Shall be not less than 1.8mm width of the specimen."
    },
    "content": "IS 13000: 1990 Silica Asbestos - Cement Flat Sheets\nNote— For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of test for asbestos cement products (first revision).\nFor detailed information refer to IS 13000:1990 Specification for silica-asbestos-cement flat sheets.\nLength\nWidth mm 1200\n1220 mm\nmm 600\n×\n— 610\n— ×\n1 200\n×\n—\n1 220\n—\n×\n1 800 ×\n—\n1 830\n—\n×\n2 400\n×\n—\n2 440\n—\n×\n3 000\n×\n—\n3 050\n—\n×\n4.3\nTolerances a)\nThickness From 3 mm to 5 mm\n— ±0.5 mm From 6 mm and above— ± 0.1 e mm where e is nominal thickness of sheet.\nb) Length and Width — Shall not vary from the nominal dimensions for length and width by\nmore than ±5 mm.\nc)\nStraightness of Edges— Shall be not more than 2mm/m for the relevant dimension (length\nor width)\nd) Squareness of Edges—The tolerance on squareness of the edges shall be not more\nthan 3 mm/m.\n5. Tests— Shall be done for thickness, straightness\nof edges, squareness of edges, bending stress and density. 1. Scope — Covers the requirements for materials,\ndimensions and tests for shallow corrugated asbestos cement sheets.\n2. Dimensions and Tolerances — See Table 1\n3. Physical and Mechanical Properties\n3.1 Load bearing capacity – Shall be not less than\n1.8mm width of the specimen."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13008: 1990",
    "title": "Shallow Corrugated Asbestos Cement Sheets",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "3.2 Impermeability — Shall not show during 24 hours of test any formation of drops of water except traces of moisture on the lower surface. 4. Finish — Shall have a rectangular shape, smooth surface on the weathering side, a good apearance and shall be true and regular. The edges of the sheets shall be straight and clean. TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES OF SHALLOW CORRUGATED SHEETS All dimensions in millimetres. Sl Characteristics Nominal Tolerances No. Dimension i) Depth of corrugation 20 ±2.",
    "keywords": [
      "shallow",
      "corrugation",
      "sheets",
      "corrugated",
      "apearance",
      "asbestos",
      "impermeability"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Finish": "Shall have a rectangular shape, smooth surface on the weathering side, a good apearance and shall be true and regular. The edges of the sheets shall be straight and clean. TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES OF SHALLOW CORRUGATED SHEETS All dimensions in millimetres. Sl Characteristics Nominal Tolerances No. Dimension i) Depth of corrugation 20 ±2.0 ii) Pitch of corrugation 75 ±1.5 ±10 iii) Overall width 1 015 – 5 +Free iv) Nominal thickness 4.2 – 0.2 v) Length of sheet 1 500 1 750 2 000 ±10 2 250 Note— For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of tests for asbestos cement products (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 13008:1990 Specification for shallow corrugated asbestos cement sheets."
    },
    "content": "IS 13008: 1990 Shallow Corrugated Asbestos Cement Sheets\n3.2 Impermeability — Shall not show during 24 hours\nof test any formation of drops of water except traces of moisture on the lower surface.\n4. Finish — Shall have a rectangular shape, smooth\nsurface on the weathering side, a good apearance and shall be true and regular. The edges of the sheets shall\nbe straight and clean.\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES OF SHALLOW CORRUGATED SHEETS\nAll dimensions in millimetres.\nSl\nCharacteristics Nominal\nTolerances\nNo. Dimension i)\nDepth of corrugation\n20\n±2.0 ii)\nPitch of corrugation\n75\n±1.5\n±10 iii)\nOverall width\n1 015\n– 5\n+Free iv)\nNominal thickness\n4.2\n– 0.2 v)\nLength of sheet\n1 500\n1 750\n2 000\n±10\n2 250\nNote— For methods of tests, refer to IS 5913:1989 Methods of tests for asbestos cement products (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 13008:1990 Specification for shallow corrugated asbestos cement sheets."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 458: 2003",
    "title": "Precast Concrete Pipes (With And",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements for reinforced and unreinforced precast cement concrete pipes, of both pressure and non- pressure varieties used for water mains, sewers, culverts and irrigation. The requirements for collars are also covered by this standard.",
    "keywords": [
      "pipes",
      "including",
      "collar",
      "reinforcement",
      "over",
      "near",
      "concrete"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for reinforced and unreinforced precast cement concrete pipes, of both pressure and non- pressure varieties used for water mains, sewers, culverts and irrigation. The requirements for collars are also covered by this standard.",
      "Classification": "For the purpose of this standard, concrete pipes shall be classifed as per clause 4.1 of the standard 3. Dimensions and Tolerances 3.1 Dimension The internal diameter, barrel wall thickness, length, the minimum reinforcements and strength test requierments for different classes of pipes (see 4.1 of the standard) shall be as specified in Tables 1 to 11of the standard. Dimensions of collar for class NP1 and dimensions and reinforcement of collar for class NP2 shall be as per Tables 1 and 21 of the standard respectively. 3.2 Tolerances The following tolerances shall be permitted : Sl. No. Dimensions Tolerances i) Overal length : ± 1 percent of standard length ii) Internal diameter of pipes: a) Up to and including 300 mm : ± 3 mm b) Over 300 mm and up to and including 600 mm : ± 5 mm c) Over 6"
    },
    "content": "IS 458: 2003 Precast Concrete Pipes (With And\nWITHOUT REINFORCEMENT) – SPECIFICATION\n(Fourth Revision)\n1. Scope — Requirements for reinforced and\nunreinforced precast cement concrete pipes, of both pressure and non- pressure varieties used for water\nmains, sewers, culverts and irrigation. The requirements for collars are also covered by this standard.\n2. Classification — For the purpose of this\nstandard, concrete pipes shall be classifed as per clause\n4.1 of the standard\n3. Dimensions and Tolerances\n3.1 Dimension\nThe internal diameter, barrel wall thickness, length, the minimum reinforcements and strength test requierments\nfor different classes of pipes (see 4.1 of the standard)\nshall be as specified in Tables 1 to 11of the standard.\nDimensions of collar for class NP1 and dimensions and reinforcement of collar for class NP2 shall be as per\nTables 1 and 21 of the standard respectively.\n3.2 Tolerances\nThe following tolerances shall be permitted :\nSl. No.\nDimensions\nTolerances i) Overal length\n: ± 1 percent of standard length\nii) Internal diameter of pipes: a) Up to and including 300 mm : ± 3 mm b) Over 300 mm and up to and including 600 mm\n: ± 5 mm c) Over 600 mm\n: ± 10 mm iii) Barrel wal thickness:\na) Up to and including\n: +2 30 mm\n: – 1 b) Over 30 mm up to and\n: + 3 including 50 mm – 1.5 c) Over 50 mm up to and\n: + 4 including 65 mm – 2 d) Over 65 mm up to\n: + 5 and including 80 mm\n– 2.5 e) Over 80 mm up to and\n: + 6 including 95 mm\n:\n– 3 f) Over 95 mm\n:\n+7 –3.5\nNote — In case of pipes with flexible rubber ring joints, the\ntolerance on thickness near the ends wiill have to be reduced.\nNear the rubber ring joints, the tolerance on thickness shall be as given in Tables 13 to 19 in case of pipes manufactured by\nspinning process and as given in Table 15 and Table 16 in case of pipes manufactured by vibrated casting process.\n4. Workmanship and Finish\n4.1 Pipes shall be straight and free from cracks except\nthat craze cracks may be permitted. The ends of the pipes shall be square with their longitudinal axis so that\nwhen placed in a straight line inthe trench, no opening between ends in contact shall exceed 3 mm in pipes up\nto 600 mm diameter (inclusive), and 6 mm in pipes larger than 600 mm diameter.\n4.2 The outside and inside surfaces of the pipes shall\nbe dense and hard and shall not be coated with cement wash or other preparation unless otherwise agreed to\nbetween the purchaser and the manufacturer or the supplier. The inside surface of the pipe shall be smooth.\nFor better bond, inner surface of the collar may be finished rough.\n5. Tests\n5.1 Every pipe shall be tested, for hydrostatic pressure,\nthree-edge bearing and absorption tests.\nmm mm\nmm mm\nmm mm\nNote 1 — For requirements of materials, design, reinforcement, spigots and sockets refer to the standard.\nNote 2 — For methods of tests refer to IS 3597 : 1998 Methods of test for concrete pipes (second revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 458 : 2003 Specification for precast concrete pipes (with and without reinforcement) (fourth revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 784: 2001",
    "title": "Prestressed Concrete Pipes",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements of prestressed concrete cylinder and non- cylinder pipes (including specials) with nominal internal diameter in the range of 200 mm to 2 500 mm, in which permanent internal stresses are deliberately introduced by tensioned steel to the desired degree to counteract the stresses caused in the pipe under service.",
    "keywords": [
      "cylinder",
      "internal",
      "pipes",
      "permeability",
      "prestressed",
      "concrete",
      "pipe"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for steel cylinder pipes with concrete lining and coating having nominal internal diameter from 200 mm to 3 000 mm for use in water mains, sewers, irrigation works and similar situations. Note — Such pipes shall generally be provided with — a) Plain ends 1) For butt welded joints with collar upto 700 mm dia, and 2) For simple butt welded jointing above 800 mm dia. b) Flanged ends; and c) Spigot and socket ends ( conforming to relevant Indian Standard) for joints with rubber rings. 2. Classification Class Test Pressure Class 1 0.5 MPa (or 50 m head) Class 2 1.0 MPa (or 100 m head) Class 3 1.5 MPa (or 150 m head) Class 4 2.0 MPa (or 200 m head) Class 5 2.5 MPa (or 250 m head) Special class Above 2.5 MPa(or above 250 m head), the exact test pressure being specified by the purchas"
    },
    "content": "IS 784: 2001 Prestressed Concrete Pipes\n(INCLUDING SPECIALS)\n(Second Revision)\n1. Scope — Requirements of prestressed concrete\ncylinder and non- cylinder pipes (including specials)\nwith nominal internal diameter in the range of 200 mm to\n2 500 mm, in which permanent internal stresses are deliberately introduced by tensioned steel to the desired\ndegree to counteract the stresses caused in the pipe under service.\n2. Terminology\n2.1 Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe — A welded\nsheet steel cylinder with steel socket and spigot rings welded to its ends, lined with concrete suitably\ncompacted and circumferentially pre stressed to withstand internal pressure and external design loads\nand subsequently coated with cement mortar or concrete to protect the steel cylinder and prestressing wires.\n2.2 Prestressed Concrete Non Cylinder Pipe– A\nsuitably compacted concrete core longitudinally prestressed with pre-tensioned high tensile steel wire\nembedded in the concrete,circumferentially prestressed and coated with cement mortar/ concrete to protect the\ncircumferential prestressing wire to withstand internal pressure and external design loads.\n3. Dimensions and Tolerances\n3.1 Nominal internal diameter of pipes and minimum\ncore thickness shall be as given below—\nNominal Internal Minimum Nominal Internal Minimum\nDiameter of Core Diameter of Core\nPipe Thickness Pipe\nThickness mm\nmm mm\nmm\n200\n35\n1 300\n75\n250\n35\n1 400\n75\n300\n35\n1 500\n80\n350\n35\n1 600\n85\n400\n35\n1 700\n90\n450\n35\n1 800\n95\n500\n35\n1 900\n100\n600\n40\n2 000\n105\n700\n40\n2 100\n110\n800\n45\n2 200\n115\n900\n55\n2 300\n120 1 000\n60\n2 400\n125 1 100\n65\n2 500\n130 1 200\n70\n3.2\nLength — Effective length shall be 2 to 6 m.\nHowever preferred effective length should be 2, 2.5, 4, 5 and 6 m. For pipes upto and including 300dia, the\neffective length shall not be more than 3 m.\n3.3\nTolerance\n3.3.1 Length — ±1 percent of specified length. 3.3.2 Internal diameter a) For Pipes of lengthless than 4 m. ± 5 mm for dia upto and including 350 mm ±10 mm for dia above 350 mm b) For pipes of length 4m and above\nInternal Diameter Tolerances\nIn areas within\nOver rest\n600 mm of an of the pipe\nend of the Pipe mm\nmm a) Upto 900 mm ±6\n±9 b) Over 900 mm and\n±9\n±12 upto 1600mm\nc) Over 1600 mm\n±12\n±12\n3.3.3 Core thickness — Shall not be less than the designed thickness by more than 5 percent.\n4. Workmanship and finish\n4.1 The maximum permissible deviation from the straight\non internal surfaces of any pipe throughout its length, shall not exceed 5 mm for every metre length.\n4.2 Pipes shall be free from local depressions or bulges\ngreater than 5 mm extending over a length, in any direction, greater than twice the thickness of barrel.\n5. Tests\n5.1 Hydrostatic Factory Test.\n5.2 Permeability Test — The permeability test when\nconducted in accordance with the method described in\nIS 3597 shall meet the requirement of final permeability.\nThe final permeability shall not exceed 0.3 cm3\nNote — It is recommended that initial absorption shall not\nexceed 2.0 cm3 and the difference in any time readings during initial absorption should not be more than 0.8 cm3.\ndrop of water level shall not exceed 2 cm3 at the end of\n2h and final permeability between fourth and fifth hour shall not exceed 0.3 cm3\n5.3 Three-Edge Bearing Test — Pipes designed for\ndrainage, sewarage and culverts when subjected to three-edge bearing test shall meet the requirements given\nin Table 2 of the standard.\nNote — For requirements regarding materials, design manufacture of special and joints refer to the standard.\nNote — For methods of tests and test details, refer to the standard and IS 3597 : 1998 .Methods of test for concrete pipe ( second revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1784 : 2001 Specification for Prestressed concrete pipes\n(including specials) (second revision). 1. Scope — Requirements for steel cylinder pipes with\nconcrete lining and coating having nominal internal diameter from 200 mm to 3 000 mm for use in water mains,\nsewers, irrigation works and similar situations.\nNote — Such pipes shall generally be provided with —\na) Plain ends\n1) For butt welded joints with collar upto\n700 mm dia, and\n2) For simple butt welded jointing above 800 mm dia.\nb) Flanged ends; and c) Spigot and socket ends ( conforming to\nrelevant Indian Standard) for joints with rubber rings.\n2. Classification\nClass\nTest Pressure\nClass 1\n0.5 MPa (or 50 m head)\nClass 2\n1.0 MPa (or 100 m head)\nClass 3\n1.5 MPa (or 150 m head)\nClass 4\n2.0 MPa (or 200 m head)\nClass 5\n2.5 MPa (or 250 m head)\nSpecial class Above 2.5 MPa(or above 250 m head), the exact test pressure being specified by the purchaser.\n3. Dimension\n3.1 Diameter — The internal diameter of finished pipes\nshall be 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800,\n900, 1 000, 1 100, 1 200, 1 300, 1 400, 1 500, 1 600, 1 700,\n1 800, 1 900, 2 000, 2 100, 2 200, 2 300, 2 400, 2 500, 2 600,\n2 700, 2 800, 2 900, and 3 000 mm\nTolerance on internal diameter shall be ± 3 mm for pipes of diameter 300 mm and under, and ± 6 mm or ± 1 1/2\npercent of internal diameter, whichever is less, for pipes of diameter exceeding 300 mm.\n3.2 Length — The recommended length is 6 m. The\noverall length of the pipe shall not vary by more than 1 percent of the agreed length.\nSUMMARY"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1916: 1989",
    "title": "Steel Cylinder Pipes With Concrete Lining And Coating",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirement for porous pipes made of concrete for use in under drainage. The requirements cover pipes ranging from 80 to 900 mm nominal internal diameter with three types of joints.",
    "keywords": [
      "lining",
      "cylinder",
      "pipes",
      "coating",
      "internal",
      "porous",
      "ends"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Workmanship And Finish": "Pipes with linning and coating shall be straight and free from cracks. The ends of the pipes shall be square with their longitudinal axis. The lining and coating of the pipes shall be smooth, dence and hard, and shall not be coated with cement wash or other preparation. The lining and coating shall be free from excessive distance and surface irregularities. Projections exceeding 3mm measured from the general surface of the lining shall be removed. 5. Steel Cylinder 5.1 Thickness of Plates for Steel Cylinder– Shall be as given below— Internal Diameter Minimum of Finished Pipe Thickness of Plate mm mm 200 to 450 3.0 500 to 900 5.0 1 000 to 1 100 6.0 1 200 to 1 500 8.0 1 600 to 1 800 10.0 1 900 to 2 200 12.0 2 300 to 2 600 14.0 2 700 to 3 000 16.0 5.2 Each Cylinder shall undergo hydrostatic t",
      "Scope": "Requirement for porous pipes made of concrete for use in under drainage. The requirements cover pipes ranging from 80 to 900 mm nominal internal diameter with three types of joints. 2. Shape and Dimensions 2.1 Pipes may have butt ends, or rebated or ogee ends. 2.2 Dimensions for Concrete Porous Pipes— See Table1. 2.3 Collar Dimensions— See Table 2. 2.4 Tolerances Nominal Internal Permissible Diameter Deviation from Nominal Internal Diameter Upto and including +3 mm 300 mm –1.5 Over 300 mm, upto +6 mm 400 mm –3 mm over 400 mm +1.5 percent –0.75 percent"
    },
    "content": "IS 1916: 1989 Steel Cylinder Pipes With Concrete Lining And Coating\n(First Revision)\n4. Work manship and finish — Pipes with linning\nand coating shall be straight and free from cracks. The ends of the pipes shall be square with their longitudinal\naxis.\nThe lining and coating of the pipes shall be smooth, dence and hard, and shall not be coated with cement\nwash or other preparation. The lining and coating shall be free from excessive distance and surface irregularities.\nProjections exceeding 3mm measured from the general surface of the lining shall be removed.\n5. Steel Cylinder\n5.1 Thickness of Plates for Steel Cylinder– Shall be as\ngiven below—\nInternal Diameter\nMinimum of Finished Pipe Thickness of Plate mm\nmm 200 to 450\n3.0 500 to 900\n5.0\n1 000 to 1 100\n6.0\n1 200 to 1 500\n8.0\n1 600 to 1 800\n10.0\n1 900 to 2 200\n12.0\n2 300 to 2 600\n14.0\n2 700 to 3 000\n16.0\n5.2 Each Cylinder shall undergo hydrostatic test at the\ntest pressure given in 2.\n6.\nLining and Coating\n6.1 Lining and Coating thickness — Minimum\nthickness shall be as follows: Internal\nMinimum Minimum\nDiameter of Thickness of\nThickness of\nFinished Pipe Lining Coating mm\nmm mm\n200 to 300\n15\n25\n350 to 400\n20\n25\n450 to 3 000\n25\n25\nNote — For requirements of material, design and manufacture and methods of tests, refer to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1916 : 1989 Specification for steel cylinder pipes with concrete lining and coating (first revision). 1.\nScope — Requirement for porous pipes made of concrete for use in under drainage. The requirements\ncover pipes ranging from 80 to 900 mm nominal internal diameter with three types of joints.\n2.\nShape and Dimensions\n2.1 Pipes may have butt ends, or rebated or ogee ends.\n2.2 Dimensions for Concrete Porous Pipes— See\nTable1.\n2.3 Collar Dimensions— See Table 2.\n2.4 Tolerances\nNominal Internal Permissible\nDiameter Deviation from Nominal Internal Diameter\nUpto and including\n+3 mm\n300 mm –1.5\nOver 300 mm, upto +6 mm\n400 mm –3 mm over 400 mm +1.5 percent –0.75 percent"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4350: 1967",
    "title": "Concrete Porous Pipes For Under Drainage",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements for perforated non-reinforced concrete pipes for use in underdrainage work Note— Reinforced cement concrete perforated concrete pipes may be supplied by mutual agreement between the purchaser and the supplier. Note— These pipes are used for underdrainage work in infiltration galleries, reclaiming water logged areas and for similar other purposes",
    "keywords": [
      "ogee",
      "rebated",
      "butt",
      "rows",
      "infiltration",
      "underdrainage",
      "pipes"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for perforated non-reinforced concrete pipes for use in underdrainage work Note— Reinforced cement concrete perforated concrete pipes may be supplied by mutual agreement between the purchaser and the supplier. Note— These pipes are used for underdrainage work in infiltration galleries, reclaiming water logged areas and for similar other purposes 2. Classification a) Circular perforation pipes— 5 to 8 mm diameter perforations arranged in rows parallel to the axis of the pipe. Perforations shall be approximately 75 mm centre to centre, along rows. The rows shall be spaced over not more than 165°of the circumference. b) Slotted perforation pipes— Slots shall be circumferential in direction, not more than 5 mm nor less than 3mmin width, and of the lengths shown in Table 1. There s"
    },
    "content": "IS 4350: 1967 Concrete Porous Pipes For Under Drainage\n2.4.1 Deviation from straightness — Not to exceed 3 mm per metre run.\n3. Tests\n3.1 Load Test — Specimen shall support a minimum\nload of 2000 kg uniformly distributed per metre length of pipe without showing any signs of failure at least for 1\nminute.\n3.2 Infiltration Test\nNominal Internal Rate of\nDiameter Infiltration per metre Length of the Pipe mm\nl/minute 80 to 100 60\n150 to 250\n120\n300 to 900\n300\nTable 1. DIMENSIONS FOR CONCRETE POROUS PIPES Nominal Internal Effective Minimum Wall Joints Diameter Length Thickness mm m mm\n(1) (2)\n(3)\n(4) 80\n2.0\n25\nButt, rebated or ogee 100\n150\n250\n300 2.0 or 2.5 or 3.0\n30\nButt, rebated or ogee\n350\n400\n450\n2.5 or 3.0\n35\nButt, rebated or ogee\n500\n600\n2.5 or 3.0\n40\nButt, rebated or ogee\n700\n800\n2.5 or 3.0\n45\nButt, rebated or ogee\n900\n2.5 or 3.0\n50\nButt, rebated or ogee TABLE 2 COLLAR DIMENSIONS\nNominal Internal Collar Dimension Minimum\nDiameter Length Minimum Caulking\nMinimum Space Thickness mm\nmm mm mm 80\n13\n25\n150 100 150 250 300\n16\n30\n150 350 400\n450\n19\n35\n200\n500\n600\n19\n45\n200\n700 800\n19\n45\n200\n900\nNote — For detailed requirements on manufacture, finish, methods of tests and typical sketches refer to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4350: 1967 Specification for concrete porous pipe for under drainage. 1.\nScope — Requirements for perforated non-reinforced concrete pipes for use in underdrainage work\nNote— Reinforced cement concrete perforated concrete pipes\nmay be supplied by mutual agreement between the purchaser and the supplier.\nNote— These pipes are used for underdrainage work in\ninfiltration galleries, reclaiming water logged areas and for similar other purposes\n2.\nClassification a)\nCircular perforation pipes— 5 to 8 mm diameter perforations arranged in rows parallel to the axis of\nthe pipe. Perforations shall be approximately 75 mm centre to centre, along rows. The rows shall be\nspaced over not more than 165°of the circumference.\nb)\nSlotted perforation pipes— Slots shall be circumferential in direction, not more than 5 mm\nnor less than 3mmin width, and of the lengths shown in Table 1. There shall be two rows of slots,\nspaced 165°"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7319: 1974",
    "title": "Perforated Concrete Pipes",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "3. Sizes and Dimensions — See Table-1 3.1 Tolerances — Table 2 4. Workmanship and Finish 4.1 Shall be free from fractures, cracks and blisters laminations and surface roughness. 4.2 Joints — Spigot and socket type. 4.3. Specials — shall have spigot and socket ends. Curves shall be at 900, 450 and 221/20 5. Tests 5.1 Three edge bearing test or sand bearing test. 5.2 Absorption Test — Total absorption at the end of 24 h shall not exceed 8 percent of dry weight. TABLE 1 SIZES AND DIMENSIONS Interna",
    "keywords": [
      "slots",
      "bearing",
      "over",
      "every",
      "socket",
      "barrel",
      "spigot"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Dimensions": "See Table-1 3.1 Tolerances — Table 2 4. Workmanship and Finish 4.1 Shall be free from fractures, cracks and blisters laminations and surface roughness. 4.2 Joints — Spigot and socket type.",
      "Specials": "shall have spigot and socket ends. Curves shall be at 900, 450 and 221/20 5. Tests 5.1 Three edge bearing test or sand bearing test. 5.2 Absorption Test — Total absorption at the end of 24 h shall not exceed 8 percent of dry weight. TABLE 1 SIZES AND DIMENSIONS Internal Minimum Rows of Perforations Length of Spacing of Minimum Diameter Thickness Perforation Per Row Slots Slots Strength Barrel, kg/m, Three Edge Bearing mm mm mm mm Method (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 80 25 4 9 25 50 — 100 25 4 9 25 75 1 560 150 25 4 9 37.5 75 1 560 200 25 4 9 50 100 1 560 225 25 6 10 50 100 1 670 250 25 6 10 50 100 1 670 300 30 6 10 75 150 1 790 350 32 6 10 75 150 1 880 400 32 8 10 75 150 2 020 450 35 8 10 75 150 2 230 TABLE 2 TOLERANCES a) Overall length ± 1 percent of standard length b) Internal diameter of"
    },
    "content": "IS 7319: 1974 Perforated Concrete Pipes\n3. Sizes and Dimensions — See Table-1\n3.1 Tolerances — Table 2\n4. Workmanship and Finish\n4.1 Shall be free from fractures, cracks and blisters\nlaminations and surface roughness.\n4.2 Joints — Spigot and socket type.\n4.3. Specials — shall have spigot and socket ends.\nCurves shall be at 900, 450 and 221/20\n5. Tests\n5.1 Three edge bearing test or sand bearing test.\n5.2 Absorption Test — Total absorption at the end of\n24 h shall not exceed 8 percent of dry weight.\nTABLE 1 SIZES AND DIMENSIONS Internal\nMinimum\nRows of\nPerforations Length of\nSpacing of Minimum\nDiameter\nThickness\nPerforation\nPer Row\nSlots\nSlots\nStrength\nBarrel, kg/m, Three\nEdge Bearing mm\nmm mm mm\nMethod (1) (2) (3)\n(4) (5) (6)\n(7)\n80\n25\n4\n9\n25\n50\n— 100\n25\n4\n9\n25\n75\n1 560 150\n25\n4\n9\n37.5\n75\n1 560 200\n25\n4\n9\n50\n100\n1 560 225\n25\n6\n10\n50\n100\n1 670 250\n25\n6\n10\n50\n100 1 670 300\n30\n6\n10\n75\n150\n1 790\n350\n32\n6\n10\n75\n150\n1 880\n400\n32\n8\n10\n75\n150\n2 020\n450\n35\n8\n10\n75\n150\n2 230 TABLE 2 TOLERANCES\na) Overall length\n± 1 percent of standard length b) Internal diameter of pipes or socket:\n1) 300 mm and under\n+ 3 mm\n– 1.5 mm\n2) 400 mm\n+ 6 mm\n– 3 mm\n3) over 400 mm\n+ 1.5 percent\n– 0.75 percent c) Barrel wall thickness : 1) up to 25 mm\n± 1.5 mm\n2) Over 25 up to 35 mm\n± 2.0 mm\n3) Over 35 up to 50 mm\n± 3.0 mm\n4) Over 50 mm\n± (3 mm +1 mm for every 15 mm or part thereof over 50 mm, limited to a\nmaximum of 5mm)\nd) Deviation from Straight : The deviation from straight shall not exceed 3mm for every metre run.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to IS 456: 2000 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete (fourth revision) and"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3597: 1998",
    "title": "Methods Of Test For Concrete Pipes.",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "For detailed information, refer to IS 7319 : 1974 Specification for perforated concrete pipes.",
    "keywords": [
      "perforated",
      "pipes",
      "concrete",
      "information",
      "detailed"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 3597: 1998 Methods Of Test For Concrete Pipes.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 7319 : 1974 Specification for perforated concrete pipes."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7322: 1985",
    "title": "Specials For Steel Cylinder Reinforced Concrete Pipes",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements and methods of tests for steel cylinder reinforced concrete specials for steel cylinder reinforced concrete pipes conforming to IS 1916 : 1989* having nominal internal diameter from 200 to 1800mm. Covers special having— a) Spigot and socket ends, b) Plain ends or slip- in type ends suitable for field welding, and c) Flanged ends for connection with valves and accessories.",
    "keywords": [
      "cylinder",
      "specials",
      "dye",
      "concrete",
      "ends",
      "reinforced",
      "special"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Specifies hot applied sealing compounds intended for use in sealing joints in concrete roads, runways, bridges and other structures. The material covered by this standard is suitable only for longitudinal and transverse joints not more than 12 m apart.",
      "Classification": "Special shall have the same classification as for steel cylinder reinforced concrete pipes given in 2 of IS 1916:1989*.",
      "Dimensions": "Nominal internal diameters for bends, tees, scour tees and flanges shall be 200,250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1 000, 1 100, 1 200, 1 300, 1 400, 1 500, 1 600, 1 700 and 1 800 mm. 3.1 Minimum thickness of plate for steel shell and nominal thickness of flange are given below— Nominal Internal Minimum Thickness diameter of Special Finished of Steel Plate for Shell mm mm 200 to 500 2.5 600 to 900 5.0 1 000 to 1 100 6.0 1 200 to 1 500 8.0 1 600 to 1 800 10.0 Nominal Internal Nominal Thickness Diameter of Flange mm m m 200 to 300 15 350 to 450 18 500 to 600 20 700 to 1 100 25 1 200 to 1 800 32 * Steel cylinder pipe with cocrete lining and coating (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 7322 : 1985 Specification for specials for steel cylinder reinforced Concre",
      "Workmanship And Finish": "Specials shall be free from local dents or bulges greater than 3.0 mm in depth and extending over a length in any direction greater than twice the thickness of the barrel. They shall be free from cracks. When actually placed in site trench, no opening between ends in contact shall exceed 3 mm in specials up to 600 mm diameter and 6 mm in specials larger than 600 mm diameter. 5. Tests 5.1 Each fitting shall be tested for conformity to the requirements of this standard. 5.2 The unlined special shall be tested by dye penetration test. 5.3 Dye- Penetration Test — This test shall be done in accordance with IS 3658 : 1999† † Code of practice for liquid penetrant flaw detection (second revision)",
      "Materials": "Joint sealing compounds, composed of suitable mixtures of materials, shall form a resilient and adhesive barrier in concrete joints and shall be capable of resisting the infiltration of water and the ingress of solid particles. They shall not be unduly affected by temperature variation and shall resist any tendency to flow out of the joint or be picked up by vehicle tyres under hot weather conditions. They shall not become brittle or suffer loss of resiliency during cold weather conditions. On heating in suitably designed kettles they shall be capable of acquiring a pouring consistency enabling them to be run molten in a uniform manner into all types of horizontal joints without difficulty."
    },
    "content": "IS 7322: 1985 Specials For Steel Cylinder Reinforced Concrete Pipes\n1. Scope — Requirements and methods of tests for\nsteel cylinder reinforced concrete specials for steel cylinder reinforced concrete pipes conforming to\nIS 1916 : 1989* having nominal internal diameter from\n200 to 1800mm. Covers special having— a)\nSpigot and socket ends, b)\nPlain ends or slip- in type ends suitable for field welding, and c)\nFlanged ends for connection with valves and accessories.\n2.\nClassification — Special shall have the same classification as for steel cylinder reinforced concrete\npipes given in 2 of IS 1916:1989*.\n3.\nDimensions — Nominal internal diameters for bends, tees, scour tees and flanges shall be 200,250, 300,\n350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1 000, 1 100, 1 200,\n1 300, 1 400, 1 500, 1 600, 1 700 and 1 800 mm.\n3.1 Minimum thickness of plate for steel shell and\nnominal thickness of flange are given below— Nominal Internal Minimum Thickness diameter of Special Finished of Steel Plate for Shell mm mm 200 to 500\n2.5 600 to 900 5.0\n1 000 to 1 100\n6.0\n1 200 to 1 500\n8.0\n1 600 to 1 800\n10.0 Nominal Internal Nominal Thickness Diameter of Flange mm m m 200 to 300\n15 350 to 450\n18 500 to 600\n20 700 to 1 100\n25 1 200 to 1 800\n32\n* Steel cylinder pipe with cocrete lining and coating (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 7322 : 1985 Specification for specials for steel cylinder reinforced Concrete pipes.\nNote — For detailed dimensions see Fig. 1 to 5 of the\nstandard\n3.2 Tolerances— The following shall be permitted—\nDimensions\nTolerances Arm length\n±40 mm Arm length (specified)\n±10 mm Internal diameter\n300 mm and under\n± 3 mm over 300mm\n± 6 mm or ±1½ mm\n(which ever is less) Angular deviation\n±1°\n4. Workmanship and Finish — Specials shall be\nfree from local dents or bulges greater than 3.0 mm in depth and extending over a length in any direction greater\nthan twice the thickness of the barrel. They shall be free from cracks. When actually placed in site trench, no\nopening between ends in contact shall exceed 3 mm in specials up to 600 mm diameter and 6 mm in specials\nlarger than 600 mm diameter.\n5. Tests\n5.1 Each fitting shall be tested for conformity to the\nrequirements of this standard.\n5.2 The unlined special shall be tested by dye\npenetration test.\n5.3 Dye- Penetration Test — This test shall be done in\naccordance with IS 3658 : 1999†\n† Code of practice for liquid penetrant flaw detection\n(second revision) 1. Scope— Specifies hot applied sealing compounds\nintended for use in sealing joints in concrete roads, runways, bridges and other structures. The material\ncovered by this standard is suitable only for longitudinal and transverse joints not more than 12 m apart.\n2. Materials— Joint sealing compounds, composed\nof suitable mixtures of materials, shall form a resilient and adhesive barrier in concrete joints and shall be\ncapable of resisting the infiltration of water and the ingress of solid particles. They shall not be unduly\naffected by temperature variation and shall resist any tendency to flow out of the joint or be picked up by\nvehicle tyres under hot weather conditions. They shall not become brittle or suffer loss of resiliency during\ncold weather conditions. On heating in suitably designed kettles they shall be capable of acquiring a pouring\nconsistency enabling them to be run molten in a uniform manner into all types of horizontal joints without\ndifficulty."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1834: 1984",
    "title": "Hot Applied Sealing Compounds For Joints In Concrete",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "(First Revision) TABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF SEALING COMPOUNDS OF GRADES A AND B Sl No. Characteristic Requirement (1) (2) (3) i) Pour point, Max 180°C ii) Flow test, percentage, Max 5 iii) Extensibility, Min 6 mm iv) Penetration, at 250c, 15 Min 100g, 5s, 1/10 50 Max v) Aviation fuel resistance — ( for Grade B only) a) Increase in penetration as measured in (iv) After 7 days immersion in aviation fuel 15 Max b) Change in mass, after 7 days immersion in aviation fuel, percent, 1 Max Note — ",
    "keywords": [
      "aviation",
      "fuel",
      "sealing",
      "kerosine",
      "petroleum",
      "oils",
      "joint"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Physical Requirements": "See Table 1. For detailed information, refer to IS 1838(Part 1) :1983 Specification for preformed fillers for expansion Joint in concrete pavement and structures (non extruding and resilient type): Part 1 Bitumen impregnated fibre (first revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 1834: 1984 Hot Applied Sealing Compounds For Joints In Concrete\n(First Revision) TABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF SEALING COMPOUNDS OF\nGRADES A AND B Sl No. Characteristic Requirement (1)\n(2) (3) i)\nPour point, Max\n180°C ii)\nFlow test, percentage, Max\n5 iii)\nExtensibility, Min\n6 mm iv)\nPenetration, at 250c,\n15 Min\n100g, 5s, 1/10\n50 Max v)\nAviation fuel resistance — ( for Grade B only) a) Increase in penetration as measured in (iv)\nAfter 7 days immersion in aviation fuel\n15 Max b) Change in mass, after 7 days immersion in aviation fuel, percent,\n1 Max\nNote — For methods of tests refer to the standard\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1834 : 1984 Specification for hot applied sealing compounds for joint in concrete (first revision).\nNote—Sealing compound shall be employed for filling\ncontraction and construction joints as well as a sealing medium above expansion joint filler to a depth not exceeding 40 mm.\n3. Grades\na) Grade A ( Ordinary ), and b) Grade B (Fuel Resistant)\nGrade A is suitable for concrete comstructions other\nthan those which are subjected to spillage of kerosine or other petroleum oils.\nGrade B is suitable for use in construction where\nresistance to kerosine or other petroleum oils is required.\n4. Physical Requirements — See Table 1. For detailed information, refer to IS 1838(Part 1) :1983 Specification for preformed fillers for expansion Joint in concrete pavement and structures (non extruding and resilient type):\nPart 1 Bitumen impregnated fibre (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1838 (Part 1): 1983",
    "title": "Preformed Fillers For Expansion Joint In Concrete Pavement And Structures",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "(NON- EXTRUDING AND RESILIENT TYPE) PART 1 BITUMEN IMPREGNATED FIBRE (First Revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "extruding",
      "resilient",
      "impregnated",
      "bitumen",
      "fibre",
      "non",
      "type"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 1838 (Part 1): 1983 Preformed Fillers For Expansion Joint In Concrete Pavement And Structures\n(NON- EXTRUDING AND RESILIENT TYPE)\nPART 1 BITUMEN IMPREGNATED FIBRE\n(First Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1838 (Part 2): 1984",
    "title": "Preformed Fillers For Expansion Joint In Concrete Pavement And Structures",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Specifies the materials, manufacture, properties and tests for CNSL aldehyde resin and coconut pith based fillers for expansion joints in concrete roads, runways, bridges and other structures.",
    "keywords": [
      "cnsl",
      "aldehyde",
      "coconut",
      "pith",
      "expansion",
      "fillers",
      "preformed"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Specifies the materials, manufacture, properties and tests for CNSL aldehyde resin and coconut pith based fillers for expansion joints in concrete roads, runways, bridges and other structures. 2. Properties 2.1 Preformed slabs or strips of expansion joint fillers shall not be deformed or broken by twisting, bending or other handling when exposed to atmospheric conditions. Pieces of the joint filler that have been damaged shall be rejected. 2.2 Recovery— The specimen shall recover at least 70 percent of its thickness before the test. 2.3 The load required to compress to 50 percent of its thickness before test , shall be 0.7 to 5.3 N/mm2. The material after compression shall not show a loss of more than 5 percent of its original mass. 2.4 Extrusion— When tested with three edges restrained an",
      "Dimensions": "Shall conform to the order.",
      "Tolerances": "Tolerances of ±2.5 mm on thickness, ±5 mm on depth and ±7.5 mm in length shall be permitted. Note— For methods of tests, refer to IS 10566 : 1983 Methods of test for preformed fillers for expansion joints in concrete paving and structural construction. For detailed information, refer to IS 1838(Part 2) :1984 Specification for preformed fillers for expansion joint in concrete pavement and structure (Non extruding and resilient type) Part 2 CNSL aldehyde resin and coconut pith."
    },
    "content": "IS 1838 (Part 2): 1984 Preformed Fillers For Expansion Joint In Concrete Pavement And Structures\n(NON-EXTRUDING AND RESILIENT TYPE)\nPART 2 CNSL ALDEHYDE RESIN AND COCONUT PITH\n1.\nScope — Specifies the materials, manufacture, properties and tests for CNSL aldehyde resin and coconut\npith based fillers for expansion joints in concrete roads, runways, bridges and other structures.\n2.\nProperties\n2.1 Preformed slabs or strips of expansion joint fillers\nshall not be deformed or broken by twisting, bending or other handling when exposed to atmospheric conditions.\nPieces of the joint filler that have been damaged shall be rejected.\n2.2 Recovery— The specimen shall recover at least 70\npercent of its thickness before the test.\n2.3 The load required to compress to 50 percent of its\nthickness before test , shall be 0.7 to 5.3 N/mm2.\nThe material after compression shall not show a loss of more than 5 percent of its original mass.\n2.4 Extrusion— When tested with three edges\nrestrained and compressed to 50 percent of its thickness before test, the extrusion of the edges of the test\nspecimen shall not exceed 6.5 mm\n2.5 Weathering— When tested, test specimen shall\nshow no disintegration.\n3. Dimension — Shall conform to the order.\n4. Tolerances — Tolerances of ±2.5 mm on\nthickness, ±5 mm on depth and ±7.5 mm in length shall be permitted.\nNote— For methods of tests, refer to IS 10566 : 1983 Methods of test for preformed fillers for expansion joints in concrete\npaving and structural construction.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1838(Part 2) :1984 Specification for preformed fillers for expansion joint in concrete pavement and structure (Non extruding and resilient type)\nPart 2 CNSL aldehyde resin and coconut pith."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 11433 (Part 1): 1985",
    "title": "One-Part Gun-Grade Polysulphide- Based Joint Sealants",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "General requirements of one-part gun- grade polysulphide-based sealants used in some sealing or glazing applications in buildings and structures.",
    "keywords": [
      "sealant",
      "adhesion",
      "peel",
      "sealants",
      "cure",
      "extend",
      "considered"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "General requirements of one-part gun- grade polysulphide-based sealants used in some sealing or glazing applications in buildings and structures.",
      "Selection Of Material": "The sealant shall cure at ambient temperature and humidity when applied.",
      "Curing Conditions": "Standard cure condition shall be 40 ± 20C temperature and 95±5 percent relative humidity. 4. Test Requirements 4.1 Rheological Properties — The flow of the sealant shall be such that it shall not slump or sag in vertical or horizontal displacement or slip from the channel. 4.2 Recovery — The cure of the sealant shall be considered satisfactory if it exhibits recovery of not less than 75 percent, and if the tensile force required to extend the specimen is not less than 25 N or greater than 300 N. After the test the sealant shall be cut open with a clean sharp knife; there shall be no substantial transfer of the sealant onto the knife blade. 4.3 Mass loss after heat ageing — The mass loss, which includes volatile content, shall not exceed 10 percent. The sealant shall exhibit no cracks bubbl"
    },
    "content": "IS 11433 (Part 1): 1985 One-Part Gun-Grade Polysulphide- Based Joint Sealants\nPART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\n1. Scope— General requirements of one-part gun-\ngrade polysulphide-based sealants used in some sealing or glazing applications in buildings and structures.\n2. Selection of Material— The sealant shall cure\nat ambient temperature and humidity when applied.\n3. Curing Conditions— Standard cure condition\nshall be 40 ± 20C temperature and 95±5 percent relative humidity.\n4. Test Requirements\n4.1 Rheological Properties — The flow of the sealant\nshall be such that it shall not slump or sag in vertical or horizontal displacement or slip from the channel.\n4.2 Recovery — The cure of the sealant shall be\nconsidered satisfactory if it exhibits recovery of not less than 75 percent, and if the tensile force required to\nextend the specimen is not less than 25 N or greater than\n300 N.\nAfter the test the sealant shall be cut open with a clean sharp knife; there shall be no substantial transfer of the\nsealant onto the knife blade.\n4.3 Mass loss after heat ageing — The mass loss, which\nincludes volatile content, shall not exceed 10 percent.\nThe sealant shall exhibit no cracks bubbles or chalking.\n4.4 Staining — There shall be no staining on the test\nmortar.\n4.5 Test for Cyclic Adhesion — Adhesion and cohesion\nshall be considered satisfactory if after three cycles the total area(lengthx depth) of failure does not exceed\n100 mm2 per specimen.\n4.6 Test for Adhesion in Peel\n4.6.1 Adhesion to aluminium, stainless and cement mortar — For each of the test surfaces, that is aluminium,\nstainless steel and cement mortar, the average peel strength shall be no less than 25N and the material shall\nnot fail in adhesion over more than 25 percent of the area of the test surface.For each test surface four strips\nshall be tested and the average peel strength recorded.\nIf all strips meet the requirements the sealant shall be deemed to comply the test.\n4.6.2\nAdhesion to glass after sunlamp exposure through glass — For each of the test strips the average\npeel strength shall be not less than 25N and the material shall not fail in adhesion over more than 25percent of\nthe area of the test surface.\n4.6.3\nAdhesion after heat ageing — The sealant shall be considered satisfactory if the force required to extend\nthe specimen is not less than that required to extend the specimen in 4.2 and not greater than 300N.Adhesion\nand cohesion shall be considered satisfactory if the total area of failure does not exceed 100m2 per specimen.\nNote — For Methods of test , refer to IS 11433 (Part 2) : 1986 One-part gun-grade polysuphide- based joint sealants, Part 2 Methods of\ntest For detailed information, refer to IS 11433 Part 1: 1985 Specifications for one-part gun-grade polysulphide-based joint sealants: Part 1 General requirements"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12118 (Part 1): 1987",
    "title": "Two-Parts Polysulphide Based Sealants",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "General requirements of two grades of two-part polysulphide based sealants for use in general building applications, namely, pouring grade and gun grade. Pouring grade sealants are intended for use in horizental joints. Gun grade sealants are intended for use in vertical and inclined joints (that is, glazing applications).",
    "keywords": [
      "sealant",
      "lime",
      "sealants",
      "pouring",
      "gun",
      "limes",
      "grade"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for building limes used for construction purpose.",
      "Selection Of Material": "The salient shall cure at ambient temperature. 4. Test Requirements 4.1 Rheological Properties 4.1.1 Pouring grade sealant — The sealant shall exhibit a smooth and level surface. 4.1.2 Gun-grade sealant — The sealant shall not stump in vertical displacement by more than 1.0 mm, when tested in a vertical position and shall not protrude in front of 2.1 SECTION 2 BUILDING LIMES CONTENTS Title Page IS 712 : 1984 Building limes (third revision) 2.3 IS 2686 : 1977 Cinder as fine aggregate for use in lime concrete (first revision) 2.6 IS 3068 : 1986 Broken brick (Burnt clay) coarse aggregates for use in lime concrete ( second revision) 2.7 IS 3115 : 1992 Lime based blocks (second revision) 2.8 IS 3182 : 1986 Broken brick (Burnt clay) fine aggregate for use in lime mortar (second revision) 2.9 IS ",
      "Classification": "Class A — Eminently hydraulic lime used for structural purposes. Class B — Semi-hydraulic lime used for masonry mortars, lime concrete and plaster undercoat. Class C — Fatlime used for finishing coat in plastering, whitewashing, composite mortars, etc, and with addition of pozzolanic materials for masonry mortar. Class D — Magnesium/dolomitic lime used for finishing coat in plastering, white washing, etc. Class E — Kankar lime used for masonry mortars. Class F — Siliceous dolomitic lime used for undercoat and finishing coat of plaster. Note 1 — Lime shall be available either in hydrated or quick form, except that of Classes A and E which shall be supplied in hydrated form. Note 2 — Applications indicated are only suggestive."
    },
    "content": "IS 12118 (Part 1): 1987 Two-Parts Polysulphide Based Sealants\nPART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\nthe original profile in a horizontal position.\n4.2 Plastic Deformation— The sealant shall have a\nplastic deformation not greater than 25 percent.\n4.3 Adhesion and Tensile Modulus — Adhesion and\ntensile modulus shall be considered satisfactory, if the total area (length × depth) of failure shall not exceed 100\nmm2and the course requrired to produce the extension shall not be less than 25 N and not more than 270 N . In\ncase of the test after cycles of extension , the total area of failure shall not exceed 100 mm2.\n4.4 Application of Life —The sealant shall have an\napplication life of not less than 2h.\n4.5 Adhesion in Peel — The average peel strength of\nfour strips of backing material for each of the test surfaces shall be not less than 25N and the material\nshall not fail in adhesion over more than 25 percent of the test area.\n4.6 Loss of Mass After Heat Ageing — The loss of mass\nshall not exced 12 percent for pouring grade and 6 percent for gun grade.\n4.7 Staining — The sealant shall produce no staining\non the primed or unprimed surface of the test mortar.\nNote — For Methods of test , refer to IS 12118(Part 2) :1987 Two-part polysuphide-based sealants, Part 2 Methods of test\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12118:1987 Specification for two -part polysulphidebased sealants: Part1 General requirements.\n1. Scope — General requirements of two grades of\ntwo-part polysulphide based sealants for use in general building applications, namely, pouring grade and gun\ngrade. Pouring grade sealants are intended for use in horizental joints. Gun grade sealants are intended for\nuse in vertical and inclined joints (that is, glazing applications).\n2. Grades of Sealants\n2.1 Pouring Grade — A sealant which flows sufficiently\nto give reasonably smooth level surface when applied in a horizontal upward facing joint at ambient temperature.\n2.2 Gun Grade — A sealant which permits application\nin a suitable joint of any aspect or inclination without appreciable slumping at ambient temperature.\n3. Selection of Material — The salient shall cure\nat ambient temperature.\n4. Test Requirements\n4.1\nRheological Properties\n4.1.1 Pouring grade sealant — The sealant shall exhibit a smooth and level surface.\n4.1.2 Gun-grade sealant — The sealant shall not stump in vertical displacement by more than 1.0 mm, when tested\nin a vertical position and shall not protrude in front of 2.1\nSECTION 2\nBUILDING LIMES CONTENTS\nTitle\nPage\nIS\n712 : 1984 Building limes (third revision)\n2.3\nIS\n2686 : 1977\nCinder as fine aggregate for use in lime concrete (first revision)\n2.6\nIS\n3068 : 1986\nBroken brick (Burnt clay) coarse aggregates for use in lime concrete ( second revision)\n2.7\nIS\n3115 : 1992\nLime based blocks (second revision)\n2.8\nIS\n3182 : 1986\nBroken brick (Burnt clay) fine aggregate for use in lime mortar\n(second revision)\n2.9\nIS\n4098 : 1983\nLime pozzolana mixture (first revision)\n2.10\nIS\n4139 : 1989\nCalcum silicate bricks (second revision)\n2.11\nIS 10360 : 1982\nLime pozzolana concrete blocks for paving\n2.12\nIS 10772 : 1983\nQuick setting lime pozzolana mixture\n2.13\nIS\n12894 : 2002\nPulverized fuel ash-lime bricks (first Revision)\n2.14 1. Scope — Requirements for building limes used for\nconstruction purpose.\n2. Classification —\nClass A —\nEminently hydraulic lime used for structural purposes.\nClass B —\nSemi-hydraulic lime used for masonry mortars, lime concrete\nand plaster undercoat.\nClass C —\nFatlime used for finishing coat in plastering, whitewashing, composite\nmortars, etc, and with addition of pozzolanic materials for masonry\nmortar.\nClass D —\nMagnesium/dolomitic lime used for finishing coat in plastering,\nwhite washing, etc.\nClass E —\nKankar lime used for masonry mortars.\nClass F —\nSiliceous dolomitic lime used for undercoat and finishing coat of\nplaster.\nNote 1 — Lime shall be available either in hydrated or quick form,\nexcept that of Classes A and E which shall be supplied in hydrated form.\nNote 2 — Applications indicated are only suggestive.\n3. Chemical Requirements—See Table 1\n4. Physical Requirements —See Table 2"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 712: 1984",
    "title": "Building Limes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements for cinder for use as aggregates in lime concrete.",
    "keywords": [
      "quickhydrated",
      "nil",
      "hydrated",
      "ignited",
      "pop",
      "residue",
      "micron"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Packing": "The hydrated lime shall be supplied, in suitable containers, such as jute bags lined with polythene or high density polythene woven bags lined with polythene or craft paper bags, preferably containing 50 kg of lime. Note — If the hydrated lime can be used within 30 days, use of liner may be dispensed with. Note— For methods of tests, refer to IS 1514: 1990 Methods of sampling and test for quick lime and hydrated lime ( first revision) and revelant parts of IS 6932: 1973 Methods of test for building limes. For detailed information, refer to IS 712: 1984 Specification for building limes (third revision). The quicklime shall be supplied in containers like metal container or similar suitable containers preferably containing 50 kg of lime.",
      "Scope": "Requirements for cinder for use as aggregates in lime concrete.",
      "General": "Cinder aggregates shall be well-burnt furnace residue obtained from furnaces using only coal as fuel. It shall be clean and free from clay, dirt, wood ash or other deleterious matter.",
      "Classes": "a) Class A – for general purposes b) Class B – for interior work not exposed to damp conditions, and c) Class C – for precast blocks.",
      "Grading": "IS Sieve Percentage Designation Passing 10– mm 100 4.75– mm 80 2.36– mm 60 1.18– mm 40 600– micron 30 300– micron 25 150– micron 16 5. Characteristics 5.1 Sulphate Content — Shall not exceed 1 percent when expressed as sulphur trioxide. 5.2 Loss on ignition — Shall not exceed 10 percent for class A, 20 percent for class B and 25 percent for Class C."
    },
    "content": "IS 712: 1984 Building Limes\n(Third Revision)\nTABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIRMENTS\nSL.\nCHARACTERISTICS\nCLASS\nNo.\nA B C D E F\n(1)\n(2) (3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\n(9)\n(10)\n(11)\n(12)\ni)\nCalcium and\n60\n70\n70\n85\n85\n85\n85\n50\n70\n70 magnesium oxides\npercent, Min\n(on ignited basis)\nii)\nMagnesium oxides, 6\n6\n6\n6\n6\n–\n–\n6\n–\n–\npercent (on ignited basis) Max\nMin\n–\n–\n–\n–\n6\n6\n–\n6\n6 iii)\nSilica, alumina and\n20\n10\n10\n–\n–\n–\n–\n20\n10\n10 ferric oxide, percent\nMin (on ignited basis)\niv)\nUnhydrated magnesium\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n8\n8\n–\n8\n8 oxide, percent, Max\n(on ignited basis)\nv)\nInsoluble residue\n15\n10\n10\n2\n2\n2\n2\n25\n10\n10 in dilute acid and\nalkali percent Max (on ignited basis)\nvi)\nCarbondioxide, percent,\n5\n5\n5\n5\n5\n5\n5\n5\n5\n5\nMax (on oven dry basis)\nvii)\nFree moisture content\n2\n–\n2\n–\n2\n–\n2\n2\n–\n2 percent, Max\nviii)\nAvailable lime as CaO,\n–\n–\n–\n75\n75\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\npercent, Min.(drybasis) Hydrated, QuickHydrated, QuickHydrated,QuickHydrated, Hydrated,QuickHydrated TABLE 2 PHYSICAL REQUIRMENTS\nSL.\nCharacteristics\nClass\nNo.\nA\nB C\nD\nE\nF\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\n(9)\n(10)\n(11)\n(12)\ni)\nFineness —\na)\nResidue on 2.36 mm\nNil\n–\nNil\n–\nNil\n–\nNil\nNil\n–\nNil\nIS Sieve, percent,\nMax.\nb)\nResidue on300 micron\n5\n–\n5\n–\nNil\n–\nNil\n5\n–\n5\nIS Sieve, percent,\nMax.\nc)\nResidue on 212\n–\n–\n–\n–-\n10\n–\n10\n–\n–\nNil micron IS Sieve,\npercent, Max ii)\nResidue on slaking —\na)\nResidue on 850\n–\n10\n–\n5\n–\n5\n–\n–\n10\n–\nmicron IS Sieve, percent, Max\nb)\nResidue on 300 micron\n–\n–\n–\n5\n–\n5\n–\n–\n–\n–\nIS Sieve, percent, Max\niii)\nSetting time —\na)\nInitial set, Min, h\n2\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n2\n–\n–\nb)\nFinal set. max, h\n48\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n48\n–\n–\niv)\nCompressive strength,\nMin, N/mm2 a)\nat 14 days\n1.75\n1.25\n1.25\n–\n–\n–\n–\n1.0\n1.25\n1.25 b)\nat 28 days\n2.8\n1.75\n1.75\n–\n–\n–\n–\n1.75\n1.75\n1.75 v)\nTransverse strength\n1.0\n0.7\n0.7\n–\n–\n–\n–\n0.7\n0.7\n0.7 at 28 days,\nN/mm2, Min vi)\nWorkability bumps,\n–\n–\n–\n12\n10\n12\n10\n–\n–\n–\nMax vii)\nVolume yield ml/g\n–\n–\n–\n1.7\n–\n1.4\n–\n–\n–\n–\nMin viii)\nSoundness, Le\n5\n–\n5\n–\n–\n–\n–\n10\n–\n10\nChaterlier expansion, mm, Max\nix)\nPopping &\nFree\n–\nFree\n–\nFree\n–\nFree\n–\n–\nFree pitting\nfrom from\nfrom from\nfrom pop\npop pop\npop pop\nand and\nand and\nand pits\npits pits\npits pits Hydrated, QuickHydrated, QuickHydrated, QuickHydrated, Hydrated, QuickHydrated 5. Packing — The hydrated lime shall be supplied,\nin suitable containers, such as jute bags lined with polythene or high density polythene woven bags lined\nwith polythene or craft paper bags, preferably containing 50 kg of lime.\nNote — If the hydrated lime can be used within 30 days, use of\nliner may be dispensed with.\nNote— For methods of tests, refer to IS 1514: 1990 Methods of sampling and test for quick lime and hydrated lime ( first revision) and\nrevelant parts of IS 6932: 1973 Methods of test for building limes.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 712: 1984 Specification for building limes\n(third revision).\nThe quicklime shall be supplied in containers like metal container or similar suitable containers preferably\ncontaining 50 kg of lime. 1. Scope — Requirements for cinder for use as\naggregates in lime concrete.\n2. General — Cinder aggregates shall be well-burnt\nfurnace residue obtained from furnaces using only coal as fuel. It shall be clean and free from clay, dirt, wood\nash or other deleterious matter.\n3. Classes —\na) Class A – for general purposes b) Class B – for interior work not exposed to damp conditions, and c) Class C – for precast blocks.\n4. Grading —\nIS Sieve\nPercentage\nDesignation\nPassing\n10– mm\n100\n4.75– mm\n80\n2.36– mm\n60\n1.18– mm\n40\n600– micron\n30\n300– micron\n25\n150– micron\n16\n5. Characteristics\n5.1 Sulphate Content — Shall not exceed 1 percent\nwhen expressed as sulphur trioxide.\n5.2 Loss on ignition — Shall not exceed 10 percent for\nclass A, 20 percent for class B and 25 percent for\nClass C."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2686: 1977",
    "title": "Cinder As Fine Aggregates For Use In Lime Concrete",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements for coarse aggregate prepared from broken bricks (burnt clay) for use in lime concrete.",
    "keywords": [
      "aggregate",
      "brick",
      "broken",
      "coarse",
      "prepared",
      "soluble",
      "bricks"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for coarse aggregate prepared from broken bricks (burnt clay) for use in lime concrete.",
      "Quality": "Shall be prepared from the well/ overburnt bricks conforming to class designation 50 and above of IS 1077:1992.* It shall be free from underburnt clay particles, soluble salt and adherent coating of soil or silt. Brick aggregate should be handled least number of times before being used in concrete. 3. Physical Requirements 3.1 Grading for broken brick coarse aggregate -shall be as fallows — IS Sieve Percent Passing Designation (By Mass) 75 mm 100 37.5 mm 95-100 19.0 mm 45- 75 4.75 mm 0- 5 3.2 Requirements of broken brick coarse aggregate- shall be as follows: Characteristic Requirement Bulk density, kg/m3 1 100 - 1 350 Aggregate impact value, 50 percent, Max water absorption, 20 percent, Max Water soluble matter, 1 percent, Max"
    },
    "content": "IS 2686: 1977 Cinder As Fine Aggregates For Use In Lime Concrete\n(First Revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2686 :1977 Specification for cinder as fine aggregates for use in lime concrete(first revision).\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard. 1. Scope — Requirements for coarse aggregate\nprepared from broken bricks (burnt clay) for use in lime concrete.\n2. Quality — Shall be prepared from the well/\noverburnt bricks conforming to class designation 50 and above of IS 1077:1992.* It shall be free from\nunderburnt clay particles, soluble salt and adherent coating of soil or silt. Brick aggregate should be handled\nleast number of times before being used in concrete.\n3. Physical Requirements\n3.1 Grading for broken brick coarse aggregate -shall\nbe as fallows —\nIS Sieve\nPercent Passing\nDesignation\n(By Mass)\n75 mm\n100\n37.5 mm 95-100\n19.0 mm 45- 75 4.75 mm 0- 5\n3.2 Requirements of broken brick coarse aggregate-\nshall be as follows:\nCharacteristic\nRequirement\nBulk density, kg/m3\n1 100 - 1 350\nAggregate impact value,\n50 percent, Max\nwater absorption,\n20 percent, Max\nWater soluble matter,\n1 percent, Max"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3068: 1986",
    "title": "Broken Brick (Burnt Clay) Coarse Aggregate For Use In Lime Concrete",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "(Second Revision) Note — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard and IS 2386: 1963 Methods of tests for aggregates for concrete.",
    "keywords": [
      "aggregates",
      "appendices",
      "concrete"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 3068: 1986 Broken Brick (Burnt Clay) Coarse Aggregate For Use In Lime Concrete\n(Second Revision)\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard and IS 2386: 1963 Methods of tests for aggregates for concrete."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5640: 1970",
    "title": "Methods Of Test For Determining Aggregate Impact Value Of Soft Coarse Aggregates.",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Covers dimension, quality and strength requirement of lime based blocks (both hollow and solid) used for walls, internal partitions and filler walls.",
    "keywords": [
      "blocks",
      "keyed",
      "block",
      "face",
      "burnt",
      "broken",
      "walls"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers dimension, quality and strength requirement of lime based blocks (both hollow and solid) used for walls, internal partitions and filler walls.",
      "General Requirements": "All blocks shall be sound, free from cracks, broken edges, distortion and other defects. The bedding surface shall be at right angles to the face of blocks. The ends of the blocks which form the vertical joints may be plain, tongued and gooved or double grooved. 3. Types Type A – Block with both faces keyed for plastering Type B – Block with both faces smooth and suitable for use without plasterning or rendering on either side,and. Type C – Block with one face keyed and one face smooth. 4. Dimensions 4.1 Actual Sizes Length 390 mm Width 90,190, 290 mm Height 90, 190 mm"
    },
    "content": "IS 5640: 1970 Methods Of Test For Determining Aggregate Impact Value Of Soft Coarse Aggregates.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3068:1986 Specification for broken brick (burnt clay)\ncoarse aggregate for use in lime concrete (second revision).\n*Common burnt clay building bricks (fifth revision) 1. Scope — Covers dimension, quality and strength\nrequirement of lime based blocks (both hollow and solid) used for walls, internal partitions and filler walls.\n2. General Requirements— All blocks shall be\nsound, free from cracks, broken edges, distortion and other defects. The bedding surface shall be at right\nangles to the face of blocks. The ends of the blocks which form the vertical joints may be plain, tongued\nand gooved or double grooved.\n3. Types\nType A –\nBlock with both faces keyed for plastering\nType B –\nBlock with both faces smooth and suitable for use without plasterning or\nrendering on either side,and.\nType C –\nBlock with one face keyed and one face smooth.\n4. Dimensions\n4.1 Actual Sizes\nLength\n390 mm\nWidth\n90,190, 290 mm\nHeight\n90, 190 mm"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3115: 1992",
    "title": "Lime Based Blocks",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements for broken brick (burnt clay) fine aggregate for use in lime mortar.",
    "keywords": [
      "clay",
      "burnt",
      "broken",
      "lime",
      "brick",
      "block",
      "blocks"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for broken brick (burnt clay) fine aggregate for use in lime mortar.",
      "General Quality": "Shall be prepared from broken/ solid bricks conforming to class designation 50 and above of IS 1077:1992*. It shall be free from underburnt clay particles, soluble salts and adherent coating of soil or silt. 3. Physical Requirements IS Sieve Percent Passing(By Mass) 4.75 mm 100 2.36 mm 90-100 1.18 mm 70-100 600 µm 40-100 300 µm 5-70 150 µm 0-15 75 µm Nil * Common burnt clay building bricks (fifth revision). Note — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 2386: Method of test for aggregates for concrete, and IS 3068:1986 Broken brick (burnt clay) coarse aggregate for use in lime concret (second revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 3182:1986 Specification for broken brick (burnt clay) fine aggregate for use in lime mortar (second revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 3115: 1992 Lime Based Blocks\n(Second Revision)\nNote — For methods of test, refer to IS 2185 (Part 1):1979 Concrete masonry units— Part 1 solid and hollow concrete blocks\n(second revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3115:1992 Specification for lime based blocks\n(second revision ).\n4.2 Tolerances—\nLength ± 5 mm, Max\nWidth and Height ± 3 mm, Max\n4.3 Hallow block shall be made with one or more\ncavities and wall thickness at any point shall not be less than 40 mm.\n5. Physical Requirements\n5.1 Block Density — Shall not be less than\n1 000 kg/m3\n5.2 Compressive Strength — Average strength of eight\nblocks shall be not less than 3.5 MPa. Also compressive strength of any individual block shall not fall below the\nminimum average value by more than 20 percent.\n5.3 Drying Shrinkage— Shall not exceed 0.1 percent\n5.4 Moisture Movement— Shall not exceed 0.05\npercent. 1. Scope — Requirements for broken brick (burnt\nclay) fine aggregate for use in lime mortar.\n2. General Quality — Shall be prepared from\nbroken/ solid bricks conforming to class designation\n50 and above of IS 1077:1992*. It shall be free from underburnt clay particles, soluble salts and adherent\ncoating of soil or silt.\n3. Physical Requirements\nIS Sieve\nPercent Passing(By Mass)\n4.75 mm 100\n2.36 mm\n90-100\n1.18 mm\n70-100\n600 µm\n40-100\n300 µm 5-70\n150 µm 0-15 75 µm Nil\n* Common burnt clay building bricks (fifth revision).\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 2386: Method of test for aggregates for concrete, and IS 3068:1986 Broken brick\n(burnt clay) coarse aggregate for use in lime concret (second revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3182:1986 Specification for broken brick (burnt clay) fine aggregate for use in lime mortar (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3182: 1986",
    "title": "Broken Brick (Burnt Clay) Fine Aggregate For Use In Lime Mortar",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements of lime pozzolana mixture for use in construction works.",
    "keywords": [
      "mortars",
      "masonry",
      "foundation",
      "slno",
      "lime",
      "finer",
      "ments"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of lime pozzolana mixture for use in construction works. 2. Types Type Use LP7 For masonry mortars up to Grade MM 0.5, and for foundation concrete LP20 For masonry mortars up to Grade MM 2 and for foundation concrete. LP40 For masonry mortars up to Grade MM 5.",
      "Chemical Requirements": "See Table 1 TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIRE- MENTS SlNo. Characteristic Requirements (1) (2) (3) i) Free moisture content,percent, Max 5 ii) Free lime, percent, Min 22 iii) Carbon dioxide, percent,Max 5 iv) Sulphate content, percent,Max 3 v) Magnesium oxide, percent, Max 8"
    },
    "content": "IS 3182: 1986 Broken Brick (Burnt Clay) Fine Aggregate For Use In Lime Mortar\n(Second Revision)\n4.\nRequirement of Broken Brick Fine Aggregate\nSpecific gravity\n2.4 - 2.7\nClay and silt, percent, Max\n5\nMaterials finer than 75 µm\n15\nIS Sieve, percent Max\nWater soluble matter,\n1 percent, Max 1. Scope — Requirements of lime pozzolana mixture\nfor use in construction works.\n2. Types\nType\nUse\nLP7\nFor masonry mortars up to Grade MM 0.5, and for foundation concrete\nLP20\nFor masonry mortars up to Grade MM 2 and for foundation concrete.\nLP40\nFor masonry mortars up to Grade MM 5.\n3. Chemical Requirements — See Table 1\nTABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIRE-\nMENTS\nSlNo. Characteristic\nRequirements\n(1) (2)\n(3)\ni)\nFree moisture content,percent, Max\n5 ii)\nFree lime, percent, Min\n22 iii)\nCarbon dioxide, percent,Max\n5 iv)\nSulphate content, percent,Max\n3 v)\nMagnesium oxide, percent, Max\n8\n4. Physical Requirements – See Table 2."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4098: 1983",
    "title": "Lime Pozzolana Mixture",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "(First Revision) TABLE 2 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS. Sl Characteristic Requirment No. Type of Mixture LP40 LP20 LP7 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) i) Fineness, percent retained on 150- micron 15 15 – IS Sieve ii) Setting time, hours a) Initial, Min 2 2 2 b) Final, Max 24 36 48 iii) Compressivestrength- average compressive strength of not less than 3 mortar cubes of size 50 mm composed of one part of lime pozzolana mixture and 3 partsof standard sand by weight, N/mm2 a) At 7 days, Min 2 1 0.3 b) At 28 days, Min ",
    "keywords": [
      "lime",
      "mixture",
      "pozzolana",
      "composed",
      "days",
      "mortar",
      "compressivestrength"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Delivery": "Shall be packed in bags (jute, multiply paper, HDPE or cloth) with a net mass of ‘50’ kg. The permissible tolerance on the mass of mixture supplied Note — For methods of tests, refer to IS 1514 : 1990 Methods of sampling and test for quick lime and hydrated lime (first revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 4098: 1983 Lime Pozzolana Mixture\n(First Revision) TABLE 2 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS.\nSl\nCharacteristic\nRequirment\nNo.\nType of Mixture\nLP40\nLP20 LP7\n(1)\n(2) (3)\n(4)\n(5)\ni)\nFineness, percent retained on 150- micron\n15\n15 – IS Sieve ii)\nSetting time, hours a) Initial, Min\n2\n2 2 b) Final, Max\n24\n36 48 iii) Compressivestrength- average compressive strength\nof not less than 3 mortar cubes of size 50 mm composed of one part of lime pozzolana mixture and 3 partsof standard\nsand by weight, N/mm2 a) At 7 days, Min\n2\n1 0.3 b) At 28 days, Min\n4\n2 0.7 iv) Water retention ,flow after suction of mortar composed of\n65\n65\n65 one part of lime-pozzolana and 3 parts of standard sand by weight, percent of original flow, Min.\nv)\nSoundness, autoclave expansion, percent Max.\n1\n1\n1\n5. Delivery—Shall be packed in bags (jute, multiply\npaper, HDPE or cloth) with a net mass of ‘50’ kg. The permissible tolerance on the mass of mixture supplied\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to IS 1514 : 1990 Methods of sampling and test for quick lime and hydrated lime (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1727: 1967",
    "title": "Methods Of Test For Pozzolanic Materials,Relevent Parts Of Is 4031: Methods Of Physical Tests For Hydraulic Cement, And Is 6932 (Part 2): 1973 Methods Of Tests For Building Limes.",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "For detailed information, refer to IS 4098:1983 Specification for lime pozzolana mixture (first revision) in bags shall be ± 2.5 percent per bag with an overall tolerance of ± 0.5 percent for wagon load upto 25 tonnes.",
    "keywords": [
      "bricks",
      "bag",
      "wagon",
      "tonnes",
      "pozzolana",
      "silicate",
      "bags"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 1727: 1967 Methods Of Test For Pozzolanic Materials,Relevent Parts Of Is 4031: Methods Of Physical Tests For Hydraulic Cement, And Is 6932 (Part 2): 1973 Methods Of Tests For Building Limes.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4098:1983 Specification for lime pozzolana mixture (first revision)\nin bags shall be ± 2.5 percent per bag with an overall tolerance of ± 0.5 percent for wagon load upto 25\ntonnes. Note — For method of test, refer to Appendix A of the standard and IS 3495 :1992 Methods of test for burnt clay building bricks\n(first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4139:1989 Specification for calcium silicate bricks\n(second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4139: 1989",
    "title": "Calcium Silicate Bricks",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding classification, general quality, dimensions, compressive strength and drying shrikage of calcium silicate bricks used in building.",
    "keywords": [
      "pozzolana",
      "drying",
      "lime",
      "compressive",
      "shrinkage",
      "bricks",
      "concrete"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers dimensions, quality and strength requirements of lime-pozzolana concrete blocks for use in paving.",
      "General Quality": "Shall be sound, compact and uniform in shape. Shall be free from visible cracks, warpage, organic matter, large pebbles and nodules of free lime. Shall be solid and with or without frog. Shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp and square corners and shall be uniform in colour.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "The size shall be 190 mm × 90 mm × 90 mm and 190 mm × 90 mm × 40 mm. Tolerance on length shall be ± 3 mm and that on breadth and height ± 2 mm. 4. Classification Class Average Designation Compressive Strength (N/mm2) Not less than less than 7.5 7.5 10 10 10 15 15 15 20 20 20 – 5. Physical Characteristics 5.1 The minimum average compressive strength shall not be less than that specified in 4. The compressive strength of any individual brick shall not fall below the minimum average compressive strength specified for the corresponding class of bricks by more than 20 percent. 5.2 Drying Shrinkage— See Table 1. TABLE 1 DRYING SHRINKAGE OF CALCIUM SILICATE BRICKS. Class Drying Shrinkage, Max Designation (Percent of Wet Length) 7.5 0.06 10 0.06 15 0.04 20 0.04",
      "General Requirements": "- Shall be sound, free from cracks, broken edges and other defects that would interfere with the proper placing of the unit.",
      "Dimensions": "300 mm × 300 mm × 100 mm Note 1— In view of low abrasive resistance of lime pozzolana concrete, the blocks shall be provided with a thin wearing course of cement sand mortar of 10 mm cast integrally with the lime pozzolana concrete. Note 2 — Of the total height of 100 mm, the bottom 90 mm shall consist of lime pozzolana concrete and top 10 mm of cement sand mortar."
    },
    "content": "IS 4139: 1989 Calcium Silicate Bricks\n(Second Revision)\n1. Scope—Requirements regarding classification,\ngeneral quality, dimensions, compressive strength and drying shrikage of calcium silicate bricks used in\nbuilding.\n2. General Quality — Shall be sound, compact and\nuniform in shape. Shall be free from visible cracks, warpage, organic matter, large pebbles and nodules of\nfree lime. Shall be solid and with or without frog. Shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp and square\ncorners and shall be uniform in colour.\n3. Dimensions and Tolerances — The size shall\nbe 190 mm × 90 mm × 90 mm and 190 mm × 90 mm ×\n40 mm. Tolerance on length shall be ± 3 mm and that on breadth and height ± 2 mm.\n4. Classification\nClass\nAverage\nDesignation\nCompressive\nStrength (N/mm2)\nNot less than less than\n7.5\n7.5\n10\n10\n10\n15\n15\n15\n20\n20\n20\n–\n5. Physical Characteristics\n5.1 The minimum average compressive strength shall\nnot be less than that specified in 4.\nThe compressive strength of any individual brick shall not fall below the minimum average compressive\nstrength specified for the corresponding class of bricks by more than 20 percent.\n5.2 Drying Shrinkage— See Table 1.\nTABLE 1 DRYING SHRINKAGE OF\nCALCIUM SILICATE BRICKS.\nClass\nDrying Shrinkage, Max\nDesignation\n(Percent of Wet Length)\n7.5\n0.06\n10\n0.06\n15\n0.04\n20\n0.04 1.\nScope — Covers dimensions, quality and strength requirements of lime-pozzolana concrete blocks for use\nin paving.\n2.\nGeneral Requirements —- Shall be sound, free from cracks, broken edges and other defects that would\ninterfere with the proper placing of the unit.\n3.\nDimensions — 300 mm × 300 mm × 100 mm\nNote 1— In view of low abrasive resistance of lime pozzolana\nconcrete, the blocks shall be provided with a thin wearing course of cement sand mortar of 10 mm cast integrally with the lime pozzolana\nconcrete.\nNote 2 — Of the total height of 100 mm, the bottom 90 mm shall\nconsist of lime pozzolana concrete and top 10 mm of cement sand mortar."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10772: 1983",
    "title": "Quick Setting Lime Pozzolana Mixture",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements for classification, general quality, dimensions and physical requirements of fly ash-lime bricks used in buildings. Note— Pulverized fuel ash lime bricks having wet compressive strength less than 30 N/mm2 approximately 300 kg/cm2 are covered in this standard and for higher strength see IS 2180 and IS 1077.",
    "keywords": [
      "bricks",
      "lime",
      "modular",
      "pulverized",
      "fuel",
      "ash",
      "height"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for classification, general quality, dimensions and physical requirements of fly ash-lime bricks used in buildings. Note— Pulverized fuel ash lime bricks having wet compressive strength less than 30 N/mm2 approximately 300 kg/cm2 are covered in this standard and for higher strength see IS 2180 and IS 1077. 2. General Requirements 2.1 Visually the bricks shall be sound, compact and uniform in shape. The bricks shall be free from visible cracks, warpage and organic matter. 2.2 The bricks shall be solid and with or without frog 10 to 20 mm deep on one of its flat side. The shape and size of the frog shall conform to either Fig. 1A or Fig. 1B of the standard. 3. Classification 3.1 Pulverized fuel ash - lime bricks shall be classified on the basis of average wet compresive strength"
    },
    "content": "IS 10772: 1983 Quick Setting Lime Pozzolana Mixture\nNote —For methods of tests, refer to various parts of IS 1514:1990 Methods of sampling and tests for quicklime and hydrated lime\n(first revision) IS 1727:1967 Method of test for pozzolanic material (first revision). Various parts of IS 4031 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement IS 4098:1983 Lime-pozzolana mixture (first revision), and Various parts of IS 6932 Methods of test for\nbuilding limes.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 10772 : 1983 Specification for quick setting lime pozzolana mixture. 1. Scope — Requirements for classification, general\nquality, dimensions and physical requirements of fly ash-lime bricks used in buildings. Note— Pulverized fuel ash lime bricks having wet compressive\nstrength less than 30 N/mm2 approximately 300 kg/cm2 are covered in this standard and for higher strength see IS 2180 and IS 1077.\n2. General Requirements\n2.1 Visually the bricks shall be sound, compact and\nuniform in shape. The bricks shall be free from visible cracks, warpage and organic matter.\n2.2 The bricks shall be solid and with or without frog\n10 to 20 mm deep on one of its flat side. The shape and size of the frog shall conform to either Fig. 1A or\nFig. 1B of the standard.\n3. Classification\n3.1 Pulverized fuel ash - lime bricks shall be classified\non the basis of average wet compresive strength as given in Table 1.\nTable 1 Classes of Pulverized Fuel Ash-Lime\nBricks\nClass\nAverage Wet Compressive Strength\nDesingnation not less than\nN/mm2\nKgf/cm2\n(Approx)\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n30\n30.0\n(300)\n25\n25.0\n(250)\n20\n20.0\n(200)\n17.5\n17.5\n(175)\n15\n15.0\n(150)\n12.5\n12.5\n(125)\n10\n10.0\n(100)\n7.5\n7.5\n(75)\n5\n5.0\n(50)\n3.5\n3.5\n(35)\n4. Dimensions and Tolerances\n4.1 Dimensions\n4.1.1 The standard modular sizes of pulverized fuel ash-lime bricks shall be as follows (see Fig. 1A and\n1B):\nLength (L)\nWidth (W)\nHeight (H)\nmm mm\nmm\n190\n90\n90\n190\n90\n90\n4.1.2 The following non-modular sizes of the bricks may also be used (see Fig. 1A and Fig. 1B) Length (L)\nWidth (W)\nHeight (H)\nmm mm\nmm\n230\n110\n70\n230\n110\n30\n4.1.2.1 For obtaining proper bond arrangement and modular dimensions for the brickwork, with the non-\nmodular sizes, the following sizes of the bricks may also be used:\nLength (L)\nWidth (W)\nHeight (H)\nmm mm\nmm\n70\n110\n701/3 length brick\n230\n50\n701/2 width brick\n4.2 Tolerances\nThe dimensions of bricks when tested in accordance with 5.2.1 shall be within the following limits per 20\nbricks:\n(a) For Modular size\nLength 3 720 to 3 880 mm (3 800 ± 80 mm)\nWidth 1 760 to 1 840 mm (1 800 ± 40 mm)\nHeight 1 760 to 1 840 mm (1 800 ± 40 mm)\n(For 90 mm high bricks)\n760 to 840 mm (800 ± 40 mm)\n(For 40 mm high bricks)\n(b) For Non-modular Size\nLength 4 520 to 4 680 mm (4 600 ± 80 mm)\nWidth 2 160 mm to 2 240 (2 200 ± 40 mm)\nHeight 1 360 mm to 1 440 (1 400 ± 40 mm)\n(Fro 70 mm high bricks)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12894: 2002",
    "title": "Pulverized Fuel Ash-Lime Bricks",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "(First Revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "bricks",
      "stones",
      "tiles",
      "stone",
      "granite",
      "compressive",
      "higher"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 12894: 2002 Pulverized Fuel Ash-Lime Bricks\n(First Revision) Note — For methods of tests, refer to various part of IS 3495 :1992 Methods of tests of burnt clay building bricks (third revision) and\nIS 4139:1989. Calcium silicate bricks (second revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12894:2002 Specification for pulverized fuel ash-lime bricks (first revision).\n560 to 640 mm (600 ± 40 mm)\n(For 30 mm high bricks)\n5. Physical Characteristics.\n5.1 Compressive Strength— Shall be as per 3. The\ncompressive strength of any individual brick shall not fall below the minimum average compressive strength\nof corresponding class of bricks by more than 20 percent.\n5.2 Drying Strinkage — Shall not exceed 0.15 percent.\n5.3 Efflorescence test — Shall have rating not more\nthan ‘moderate’ upto class 12.5 and ‘slight’ for higher classes.\n5.4 Water Absorption— Not more than 20 percent by\nmass upto class 12.5 and 15 percent by mass for higher classes when immersed in cold water for 24 hours. 2.1\nSECTION 3\nSTONES CONTENTS\nTitle\nPage\nIS\n1127 : 1970\nDimensions and workmanship of natural building stones for masonry work\n(first revision)\n3.3\nIS\n1128 : 1974\nLime stone (slab and tiles) (first revision)\n3.4\nIS\n1130 : 1969\nMarble (blocks, slabs and tiles)\n3.5\nIS\n3316 : 1974\nStructural granite (first revision)\n3.6\nIS\n3620 : 1979\nLaterite stone block for masonry (first revision)\n3.7\nIS\n3622 : 1977\nSand stones (Slabs and tiles) (first revision)\n3.8\nIS\n6250 : 1981\nRoofing slate tiles (first revision)\n3.9\nIS\n6579 : 1981\nCoarse aggregate for water bound macadom (first revision)\n3.10\nIS\n9394 : 1979\nStone lintels\n3.11\nIS 14223 (Part 1) : 1995 Polished building stones : Part 1 Granite\n3.12"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1127: 1970",
    "title": "Dimensions And Workmanship Of Natural Building Stones For Masonry Work",
    "category": "Stones",
    "summary": "Recommendations for the dimensions and workmanship of natural building stones used for various types of stone masonry.",
    "keywords": [
      "stones",
      "ashlar",
      "masonry",
      "rubble",
      "breath",
      "limestone",
      "course"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for dimensions and physical properties of limestone slabs and tiles for use in flooring and face work. 2. General Requirements 2.1 Stone shall be without any soft veins, cracks or flaws and shall have a uniform texture. TABLE 2 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF LIMESTONE SLABS. For detailed information, refer to IS 1128:1974 Specification for limestone (slab and tiles) (first revision). 2.2 The curvature in any direction shall not exceed 5 mm.",
      "Workmanship": "Stratified rocks shall be so quarried and dressed that the stones when set in building, are laid along the plane of stratification. Note — For details on dressing of stones, refer to the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS1127:1970 Specification for dimensions and workmanship of natural building stones for masonry work (first revision).",
      "Dimensions": "See Table 1. 4. Tolerances in Thickness +5 mm upto 25 mm thickness and ±5 mm for thickness above 25 mm."
    },
    "content": "IS 1127: 1970 Dimensions And Workmanship Of Natural Building Stones For Masonry Work\n(First Revision)\n1. Scope — Recommendations for the dimensions\nand workmanship of natural building stones used for various types of stone masonry.\n2. Dimensions and Tolerances\n2.1 Dimesion – See Table 1. (based on thickness of\nmortar joints 3 mm for ashlar masonry, 6 mm for block in course and 10 mm for square rubble).\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF NATURAL BUILDING STONES\nSl.No.\nType of Masonry Length Breath Height mm mm mm\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\ni)\nStones for ashlar\n597 297\n297\n697 347\n347 797 397\n397 i)\nStones for block in course 394 194\n194\n494 244\n244 iii)\nStones for square rubble 90 90 90\n140\n90,140\n90,140\n190\n90,140,190\n90,140,190\n240\n90,140,190\n90,140,190\n290\n90,140,190,240\n90,140,190,240\n390\n90,140,190,240,290\n90,140,190,240,290\n440\n90,140,190,240,290\n90,140,190,240,290\n490\n90,140,190,240,290\n90,140,190,240,290\n590\n90,140.190,240,290\n90,140,190,240,290 iv)\nStones for random rubble.\nMay be of any size and shape but not less than 150 mm in any direction.\nv)\nStones for sills and a) 890,990, lintels. 1090,1190, 90, 190, 290, 390, 490 90, 140, 190 1290 b) 1390,1490, 1590,1690, 190, 290, 390, 490, 590 140, 190, 240, 290 1790 vi)\nStones for arches, domes\nThe dimensions depend on the particulars of the curve and circular moulded work.\nvii)\nCoping stones. 190,290,390, 490,590,690, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600 100,150,200 790 viii)\nKerb stones. 390,490,590,\n690,790 100, 200, 30 300, 400, 500 2.2 Tolerances\na) For stones required in ashlar masonry— 1) Length and breath\n± 5 mm – 10 mm 2) Height\n± 5 mm b) For stones required for other than ashlar masonry— 1) Length and breath\n± 5 mm – 10 mm 2) Height\n± 5 mm\n3. Workmanship — Stratified rocks shall be so\nquarried and dressed that the stones when set in building, are laid along the plane of stratification.\nNote — For details on dressing of stones, refer to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS1127:1970 Specification for dimensions and workmanship of natural building stones for masonry work (first revision). 1. Scope — Requirements for dimensions and\nphysical properties of limestone slabs and tiles for use in flooring and face work.\n2. General Requirements\n2.1 Stone shall be without any soft veins, cracks or\nflaws and shall have a uniform texture.\nTABLE 2 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF LIMESTONE SLABS.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1128:1974 Specification for limestone (slab and tiles)\n(first revision).\n2.2 The curvature in any direction shall not exceed\n5 mm.\n3. Dimensions — See Table 1.\n4. Tolerances in Thickness\n+5 mm upto 25 mm thickness and\n±5 mm for thickness above 25 mm.\n5. Physical Properties— See Table 2."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1128: 1974",
    "title": "Limestone (Slab And Tiles)",
    "category": "Stones",
    "summary": "(First Revision) TABLE 1 STANDARD SIZES OF LIMESTONE SLABS AND TILES Length Breadth Thickness (1) (2) (3) 15 to 60 cm in stages of 5 cm 15 to 60 cm in stages of 5 cm 15 to 95 mm in stages of 10mm 60 to 100 cm in stages of 10 cm 30 to 100 cm in stages of 10 cm - do- 100 to 150 cm in stages of 10 cm 30 to 100 cm in stages of 10 cm 25 to 95 mm in stages of 10 mm Sl.No. Characteristics Requirements (1) (2) (3) i) Water absorption 0.15 percent by weight ii) Transverse strength 70 kgf/cm2 iii) Durabil",
    "keywords": [
      "stages",
      "stones",
      "natural",
      "durability",
      "determination",
      "transverse",
      "building"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 1128: 1974 Limestone (Slab And Tiles)\n(First Revision)\nTABLE 1 STANDARD SIZES OF LIMESTONE SLABS AND TILES Length\nBreadth\nThickness\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n15 to 60 cm in stages of 5 cm\n15 to 60 cm in stages of 5 cm\n15 to 95 mm in stages of 10mm\n60 to 100 cm in stages of 10 cm\n30 to 100 cm in stages of 10 cm - do-\n100 to 150 cm in stages of 10 cm\n30 to 100 cm in stages of 10 cm\n25 to 95 mm in stages of 10 mm\nSl.No.\nCharacteristics\nRequirements\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\ni)\nWater absorption\n0.15 percent by weight ii)\nTransverse strength\n70 kgf/cm2 iii)\nDurability\nShall not develop signs of spalling, disintegration of cracks.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to IS 1121(Part 2):1974 Methods of test for determination of strength properties of natural\nbuilding stones.Part 2 Transverse strength (first revision), IS 1124:1974 Method of test for determination for water absorption, apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision) and IS 1126:1974 Method of test for determination\nof durability of natural building stones (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1130: 1969",
    "title": "Marble (Blocks, Slabs And Tiles)",
    "category": "Stones",
    "summary": "Requirements for sizes, physical properties, quality and workmanship of marble (block, slabs and tiles)",
    "keywords": [
      "slabs",
      "marble",
      "stones",
      "blocks",
      "granite",
      "gravity",
      "natural"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers selection, grading and strength requirements of structural granite for the various constructional uses. Note — Granite is a structural and ornamental stone because of its high compressive strength, durability and resistance to wear and abrasion. Fine grained varitey takes and preserves high polish and is suitable for ornamental and monumental work. Available in different colours such as grey, mottled grey, red, pink, dark blue, white or green, depending on component minerals. Granite containing injurious minerals such as pyrites and marcasite shall be excluded.",
      "General Requirements": "Shall be free from flaws, injurious veins, cavities and similar imperfections. 3. Strength Requirements 3.1 Compressive Strength — Shall not be less than 1 000 kgf/cm2. Note — For methods of tests, refer to IS 1121Part 11974 Method test for determination of strength properties of natural building stones. Part 1 Compressive strength (first revision), IS 1122:1974 Method of test for determination of true specific gravity of natural building stones (first revision) and IS 1124:1974 Method of test for determination of water absorption, apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 3316:1974 Specifications for structural granite (first revision).",
      "Tolerances": "With thickness 18 to 24mm in the same piece. 5.1 Blocks — + 2 percent for all dimensions. 5.2 Slabs — + 2 percent for length and width ± 3 percent for thickness 5.3 Tiles — + 4 percent for length and width and for thickness see 4.2. 6. Physical Properties See Table 1 TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF MARBLE Sl. Characteristic Requirement No. (1) (2) (3) i) Moisture absorption Max 0.4% after 24 hours immersion by weight in cold water. ii) Hardness Min 3 iii) Specific gravity Min 2.5",
      "Workmanship": "Edges of the slabs and tiles shall be true. Finishes may be one of the following: a) Sand and/or abrasive finish, b) Hone finish, or c) Polished finish. Note — A short note on grouping of marble in the two categories mentioned above in 2 is given in Appendix A of the standard. Note — For method of tests, refer to IS 1122:1974 Method of test for determination of true specific gravity of natural building stones (first revision), and IS 1124:1974 Method of test for determination of water absorption, apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 1130:1969. Specifications for marble (blocks, slabs and tiles. 3.2 Specific Gravity — Shall not be less than 2.6. 3.3 Water Absorption — Shall not be more than 0.5 percent. 4. "
    },
    "content": "IS 1130: 1969 Marble (Blocks, Slabs And Tiles)\n1. Scope — Requirements for sizes, physical\nproperties, quality and workmanship of marble (block, slabs and tiles)\n2. Classification (a) white, and (b) coloured\n3. General Requirements — The marble, as far\nas possible, shall be free from foreign inclusions and prominent cracks.\n4. Sizes\n4.1 Blocks and slabs, shall be supplied in following\nsizes: Length Width Thickness\nBlocks\n30 to 250 cm 30 to 100 cm\n30 to 100 mm\nSlabs\n70 to 250 cm\n30 to 100 cm\n20 to 150 mm\nNote — All the sizes given are in stages of 10.cm or mm\n4.2 Tiles shall be supplied in following sizes :\n60cm × 60 cm; 50cm × 50 cm; 40cm × 40 cm;\n30cm × 30 cm; 20cm × 20 cm; 10cm × 10 cm;\nwith thickness 18 to 24 mm in the same piece.\n5. Tolerance — With thickness 18 to 24mm\nin the same piece.\n5.1 Blocks — + 2 percent for all dimensions.\n5.2 Slabs —\n+ 2 percent for length and width\n± 3 percent for thickness\n5.3 Tiles —\n+ 4 percent for length and width and for thickness see 4.2.\n6. Physical Properties See Table 1\nTABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF\nMARBLE\nSl.\nCharacteristic\nRequirement\nNo.\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\ni)\nMoisture absorption\nMax 0.4% after 24 hours immersion\nby weight in cold water.\nii)\nHardness\nMin 3 iii)\nSpecific gravity\nMin 2.5\n7. Workmanship — Edges of the slabs and tiles\nshall be true. Finishes may be one of the following:\na) Sand and/or abrasive finish, b) Hone finish, or c) Polished finish.\nNote — A short note on grouping of marble in the two\ncategories mentioned above in 2 is given in Appendix\nA of the standard.\nNote — For method of tests, refer to IS 1122:1974 Method of test for determination of true specific gravity of natural building stones\n(first revision), and IS 1124:1974 Method of test for determination of water absorption, apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1130:1969. Specifications for marble (blocks, slabs and tiles. 3.2 Specific Gravity — Shall not be less than 2.6.\n3.3 Water Absorption — Shall not be more than 0.5\npercent.\n4. Dimensions\n4.1 Slabs — The slabs shall be rectangular or square\nand of specified dimensions. The tolerance in length and breadth shall be ± 2 mm and thickness ±1mm. The\nbottom face may be rough but the top surface shall be fine dressed and joint faces shall be dressed back square\nwith the top surface for at least 50 mm, without hollowness or spalling off.\n4.2 Blocks for Masonry — Dimensions shall be as\nspecified. Tolerance + 5 mm for facing blocks. edges of blocks shall be dressed according to IS 1129 : 1972.*\n* Recommendations for dressing of natural building stones\n(first revision).\n1. Scope — Covers selection, grading and strength\nrequirements of structural granite for the various constructional uses.\nNote — Granite is a structural and ornamental stone because\nof its high compressive strength, durability and resistance to wear and abrasion. Fine grained varitey takes and preserves\nhigh polish and is suitable for ornamental and monumental work. Available in different colours such as grey, mottled\ngrey, red, pink, dark blue, white or green, depending on component minerals. Granite containing injurious minerals\nsuch as pyrites and marcasite shall be excluded.\n2. General Requirements — Shall be free from\nflaws, injurious veins, cavities and similar imperfections.\n3. Strength Requirements\n3.1 Compressive Strength — Shall not be less than\n1 000 kgf/cm2.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to IS 1121Part 11974 Method test for determination of strength properties of natural building\nstones. Part 1 Compressive strength (first revision), IS 1122:1974 Method of test for determination of true specific gravity of natural building stones (first revision) and IS 1124:1974 Method of test for determination of water absorption, apparent specific gravity and\nporosity of natural building stones (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3316:1974 Specifications for structural granite\n(first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3316: 1974",
    "title": "Structural Granite",
    "category": "Stones",
    "summary": "Requirements for dimensions, physical properties and workmanship of rectangular blocks made from laterite stone, used in the construction of walls and partitions.",
    "keywords": [
      "blocks",
      "rains",
      "chisel",
      "saturated",
      "physical",
      "laterite",
      "cavities"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for dimensions, physical properties and workmanship of rectangular blocks made from laterite stone, used in the construction of walls and partitions.",
      "General Requirements": "Shall be exposed for three months before using but not to rains. Shall be without any soft veins, cracks, cavities, flaws and similar imperfections.",
      "Dimensions": "Length Breadth Thickness mm mm mm 390 190 190 490 190 190 590 290 290 3.1 Tolerance — ± 5 mm on all dimensions.",
      "Physical Properties": "See Table 1. TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES SI. Characteristic Requirement No. (1) (2) (3) i) Water absorption Not more than 12 percent by mass ii) Specific gravity Not less than 2.5 iii) Compressive strength Not Less than (for saturated dry samples) 3.5N/mm2",
      "Workmanship": "Blocks shall be of uniform shape with straight edges at right angles and edges be rough and chisel dressed."
    },
    "content": "IS 3316: 1974 Structural Granite\n(First Revision) 1. Scope — Requirements for dimensions, physical\nproperties and workmanship of rectangular blocks made from laterite stone, used in the construction of walls\nand partitions.\n2. General Requirements — Shall be exposed for\nthree months before using but not to rains. Shall be without any soft veins, cracks, cavities, flaws and similar\nimperfections.\n3. Dimensions —\nLength\nBreadth\nThickness mm\nmm mm\n390\n190\n190\n490\n190\n190\n590\n290\n290\n3.1 Tolerance — ± 5 mm on all dimensions.\n4. Physical Properties — See Table 1.\nTABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES\nSI.\nCharacteristic\nRequirement\nNo.\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\ni)\nWater absorption\nNot more than 12 percent by mass\nii)\nSpecific gravity\nNot less than 2.5 iii)\nCompressive strength\nNot Less than (for saturated dry samples)\n3.5N/mm2\n5. Workmanship — Blocks shall be of uniform\nshape with straight edges at right angles and edges be rough and chisel dressed."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3620: 1979",
    "title": "Laterite Stone Block For Masonry",
    "category": "Stones",
    "summary": "Requirements for dimensions and physical properties of sandstone slabs and tiles for use in flooring, roofing and face work.",
    "keywords": [
      "stages",
      "sandstone",
      "slabs",
      "tiles",
      "rough",
      "stones",
      "stone"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for dimensions and physical properties of sandstone slabs and tiles for use in flooring, roofing and face work. 2. General Requirements 2.1 The stone shall be without any soft veins, cracks and flaws and shall have a uniform texture and colour. 2.2 The deviation of surface from straightness shall not exceed 5 mm for slabs and 1 mm for tiles. 3. Dimensions 3.1 Rough Cut — Sandstone slabs and tiles of rough cut edges shall be of sizes as specified below: Length Breadth Thickness 15 to 360 cm 15 to 90 cm 15 to 100 mm in stages of in stages of in stages of 5 cm 5 cm 5 mm"
    },
    "content": "IS 3620: 1979 Laterite Stone Block For Masonry\n(First Revision)\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to IS 1121(Part 1) : 1974 Methods of test for determination of strength properties of natural\nbuilding stones : Part 1 Compressive strength (first revision) and IS 1124:1974 Method of test for determination of water absorption, apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3620:1979 Specifications for laterite stone block for mansonry (first revision). 1. Scope — Requirements for dimensions and\nphysical properties of sandstone slabs and tiles for use in flooring, roofing and face work.\n2. General Requirements\n2.1 The stone shall be without any soft veins, cracks\nand flaws and shall have a uniform texture and colour.\n2.2 The deviation of surface from straightness shall\nnot exceed 5 mm for slabs and 1 mm for tiles.\n3. Dimensions\n3.1 Rough Cut — Sandstone slabs and tiles of rough\ncut edges shall be of sizes as specified below: Length Breadth Thickness\n15 to 360 cm\n15 to 90 cm\n15 to 100 mm in stages of in stages of in stages of 5 cm\n5 cm\n5 mm"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3622: 1977",
    "title": "Sandstone (Slabs And Tiles)",
    "category": "Stones",
    "summary": "(First Revision) Note — The sizes in between (of length and breadth) shall be reckoned as next lower size. This aspect will also cover tolerance in length and breadth. 3.1.1 Tolerances — The tolerance for thickness shall be ± 3 mm. 3.2 Machine Cut Slabs — Machine cut slabs with true and square edges shall be to the size mentioned in 3.1. The tolerance in length and breadth shall be ±1mm and of thickness shall be ± 3 mm 4. Physical Properties — See Table 1. TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF SANDSTON",
    "keywords": [
      "slate",
      "stones",
      "breadth",
      "tiles",
      "slabs",
      "natural",
      "sandstone"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Physical Properties": "See Table 1. TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF SLATE TILES SLNo.. Characteristic Requirement (1) (2) (3) i) Water absorption a) Maximum average — 2 percent by mass. b) Variation should not exceed 20 percent bet ween individual sample. ii) Modulus of rupture 60 N/mm2 (dry), Min 40 N/mm2 (wet), Min iii) Depth of softening 0.05 mm, Max iv) Permeability No water shall ooze from the bottom. v) Sulphuric acid immersion (see Note) Shall show no sign of delamination along the edge or swelling, softening flaking of the surface and shall not exhibit gaseous evolution during immersion. vi) Wetting and drying Shall show no sign of delamination or splitting along the edge nor flaking of the surface. Note — This requirement is related to the conditions of atmospheric pollution and the slate tiles be subjec",
      "Workmanship": "Unless otherwise specified the slates shall be of uniform thickness and rectangular shape with reasonably full corners and the edges shall Note — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to E of the Standard and IS 4122:1967 Method of test for surface softening of natural building stones. For detailed information, refer to IS 6250:1981 Specification for roofing slate tiles (first revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 3622: 1977 Sandstone (Slabs And Tiles)\n(First Revision)\nNote — The sizes in between (of length and breadth) shall be\nreckoned as next lower size. This aspect will also cover tolerance in length and breadth.\n3.1.1 Tolerances — The tolerance for thickness shall be ± 3 mm.\n3.2 Machine Cut Slabs — Machine cut slabs with true\nand square edges shall be to the size mentioned in 3.1.\nThe tolerance in length and breadth shall be ±1mm and of thickness shall be ± 3 mm\n4. Physical Properties — See Table 1.\nTABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF SANDSTONE SLABS\nSL.No. Characteristic\nRequirement\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\ni)\nWater absorption\nNot more than 2.5 percent by mass ii)\nTransverse strength\nNot less than 7 N/mm2 (70 kgf/cm2)\niii)\nResistance to wear\nNot greater than 2 mm on the average and 2.5 mm for any individual specimen iv)\nDurability\nShall not develop signs of spalling, disintegration or cracks.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to IS 1121(Part 2):1974 Methods of test for determination of strength properties of natural\nbuilding stones: Part 2 Transverse strength (first revision), IS 1124:1974 Method of test for determination of water absorption, apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision), IS 1126:1974 Method of test for determination for\ndurability of natural building stones (first revision) and IS 1706:1972 Method of determination of resistance to wear by abrasion of natural building stones (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3622:1977 Specifications for sandstone (slabs and tiles)\n(first revision). 3. Dimensions and Tolerances\n3.1 Standard size of slate tiles shall be as\nfollows —\nLength\nBreadth Thickness mm\nmm mm\n600\n300\n15 Min\n500\n250\n15 Min\n3.2 A tolerance of ± 5 mm shall be allowed on length\nand breadth.\n4. Physical Properties— See Table 1.\nTABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF SLATE TILES\nSLNo..\nCharacteristic\nRequirement\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\ni)\nWater absorption a) Maximum average — 2 percent by mass.\nb) Variation should not exceed 20 percent bet ween individual sample.\nii)\nModulus of rupture 60 N/mm2 (dry), Min 40 N/mm2 (wet), Min\niii)\nDepth of softening 0.05 mm, Max iv)\nPermeability\nNo water shall ooze from the bottom.\nv)\nSulphuric acid immersion (see Note)\nShall show no sign of delamination along the edge or swelling, softening flaking of the surface and shall\nnot exhibit gaseous evolution during immersion.\nvi)\nWetting and drying\nShall show no sign of delamination or splitting along the edge nor flaking of the surface.\nNote — This requirement is related to the conditions of atmospheric pollution and the slate tiles be subjected to this requirement\nonly if required by the purchaser.\n5. Workmanship — Unless otherwise specified the\nslates shall be of uniform thickness and rectangular shape with reasonably full corners and the edges shall\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to E of the Standard and IS 4122:1967 Method of test for surface softening of\nnatural building stones.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6250:1981 Specification for roofing slate tiles\n(first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6250: 1981",
    "title": "Roofing Slate Tiles",
    "category": "Stones",
    "summary": "Requirements of dimensions, physical properties and workmanship of slate tiles used for sloped roof covering. Requirements in regard to method of laying and fixing of slate tiles for roofing covered in IS 5119 (Part 1):1968*.",
    "keywords": [
      "aggregates",
      "slate",
      "course",
      "weakness",
      "source",
      "broken",
      "coarse"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Specifies the quality, physical properties and grading of coarse aggregates suitable for use in WBM construction. 2. Materials 2.1 The coarse aggregates used for WBM construction shall be any one of the followingxa) Crushed or broken rock, b) Crushed or broken slag, and c) Broken brick aggregate. 2.1.1 Natural aggregates (like kankar, laterite, etc) other than mentioned in 2.1 may also be used.",
      "General Requirements": "Slate shall be free from veins, cracks, or other similar source of weakness. shall be of uniform colour and texture and shall not contain white patches and deleterious minerals. Slate shall be of reasonably straight cleavage and the grains shall be longitudinal. *Code of practice for laying and fixing of sloped roof coverings, Part 1 Slating. be true. The exposed surface shall be finished as specified and in accordance with an approved sample.",
      "Quality": "The coarse aggregates from natural source shall be hard and durable. They shall be free from excessive flat, elongated, soft or disintergrated particles, dirt and other similar source of weakness. The coarse aggregates of slag shall be made from air-cooled blast furnace slag and shall not contain glassy material exceeding 20 percent and shall not weight less than 1 120 kg/m3. They shall be dense, of angular shape and shall be free from dirt and other similar sources of weakness.The broken brick aggregate shall be made out of well burnt bricks (see IS 1077 : 1992*) It shall be free from underburnt particles, dust and other foreign matter.",
      "Size And Grading": "See Table 1. 5. Physical Requirements 5.1 Abrasion (Los Angeles) Value — Shall not be more than 40 percent for wearing surface, 50 percent for base course and 60 percent for sub-base course. 5.2 Flakiness Index — shall not be more than 15 percent. 5.3 Impact Value — shall not be more than 30 for wearing surface, 40 for base course and 50 for sub-base course. Note — Aggregates l-ike brick, kankar, and laterite shall be tested for impact value under wet condition."
    },
    "content": "IS 6250: 1981 Roofing Slate Tiles\n(First Revision)\n1. Scope — Requirements of dimensions, physical\nproperties and workmanship of slate tiles used for sloped roof covering. Requirements in regard to method of\nlaying and fixing of slate tiles for roofing covered in IS\n5119 (Part 1):1968*.\n2. General Requirements — Slate shall be free\nfrom veins, cracks, or other similar source of weakness.\nshall be of uniform colour and texture and shall not contain white patches and deleterious minerals. Slate\nshall be of reasonably straight cleavage and the grains shall be longitudinal.\n*Code of practice for laying and fixing of sloped roof coverings,\nPart 1 Slating.\nbe true. The exposed surface shall be finished as specified and in accordance with an approved sample. 1. Scope — Specifies the quality, physical properties\nand grading of coarse aggregates suitable for use in\nWBM construction.\n2. Materials\n2.1 The coarse aggregates used for WBM construction\nshall be any one of the followingxa) Crushed or broken rock,\nb) Crushed or broken slag, and c) Broken brick aggregate.\n2.1.1 Natural aggregates (like kankar, laterite, etc)\nother than mentioned in 2.1 may also be used.\n3. Quality — The coarse aggregates from natural\nsource shall be hard and durable. They shall be free from excessive flat, elongated, soft or disintergrated\nparticles, dirt and other similar source of weakness. The coarse aggregates of slag shall be made from air-cooled\nblast furnace slag and shall not contain glassy material exceeding 20 percent and shall not weight less than 1\n120 kg/m3. They shall be dense, of angular shape and shall be free from dirt and other similar sources of\nweakness.The broken brick aggregate shall be made out of well burnt bricks (see IS 1077 : 1992*) It shall be\nfree from underburnt particles, dust and other foreign matter.\n4. Size and Grading — See Table 1.\n5. Physical Requirements\n5.1 Abrasion (Los Angeles) Value — Shall not be more\nthan 40 percent for wearing surface, 50 percent for base course and 60 percent for sub-base course.\n5.2 Flakiness Index — shall not be more than 15 percent.\n5.3 Impact Value — shall not be more than 30 for\nwearing surface, 40 for base course and 50 for sub-base course.\nNote — Aggregates l-ike brick, kankar, and laterite shall be\ntested for impact value under wet condition."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6579: 1981",
    "title": "Coarse Aggregate For Water Bound Macadam",
    "category": "Stones",
    "summary": "Requirement for dimensions, physical properties, and workmanship of lintels made out of natural stone.",
    "keywords": [
      "lintels",
      "stone",
      "lintel",
      "bed",
      "aggregates",
      "natural",
      "throating"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirement for dimensions, physical properties, and workmanship of lintels made out of natural stone.",
      "General Requirements": "The stone for lintels shall be reasonably fine grained, hard and shall have a uniform texture and colour. They shall be free from weathering and decay. The stone shall be without any cracks, vents, fissures, clayholes or other similar source of weakness. The lintel shall be so cut that when set in the building, the stone is laid on its natural bed or with the bed in the same direction as it was when the test for transverse strength was carried out.",
      "Physical Properties": "See Table 1. TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF THE STONE USED FOR LINTELS Sl.No Characteristics Requirements (1) (2) (3) i) Specific gravity 2.6 Min ii) Water absorption, percent 1.0 Max iii) Transverse strength, N/mm2 11.0 Min iv) Durability Shall not develop spalling or cracks 4. Dimensions and Tolerance 4.1 Stone Lintels—Shall be of rectangular cross- section. The width shall be equal to the thickness of the wall and the depth shall not be less than 100 mm. The length shall be limited to a maximum clear span of 2.65 m. A tolerance of ±1.5 mm shall be allowed on all dimensions of 1.2 m. or less and ± 3 mm on all dimension more than 1.2 m. 4.2 Throating — A 16mm × 8 mm throating shall be provided to the soffit of the external lintel. 4.3 Lintel Bearing — Stone lintels shall be well bonded in",
      "Workmanship": "The edges of the stone lintels shall be dressed as per IS 1129:1972*. The exposed surface of the lintel shall be finished as specified. Note — For design details of stone lintels, 5 of the standard may be refered to. Note — For methods of tests, refer to IS 1121(Part 2):1972 Methods of test for determination of strength properties of natural building stones :Part 2 Transverse strength (first revision), IS 1124:1974 Method of test for determination of water absorption, apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision) and IS 1126:1974 Method of test for determination of durability of natural building stones (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 9394:1979 Specification for stone lintels."
    },
    "content": "IS 6579: 1981 Coarse Aggregate For Water Bound Macadam\n(First Revision)\nNote — For methods of tests refer to relevant parts of IS 2386:1963 Methods of test for aggregates for concrete and IS 5640:1970\nMethod of test for determining aggregate impact value of soft course aggregates.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6579:1981. Specification for coarse aggregate for water bound macadam (first revision).\n*Common burnt clay building bricks (fifth revision)\nTABLE 1 SIZE AND GRADING OF COARSE AGGREGATES\nGrading No.\nSieve Designation\nPercent Passing the Sieve By Mass\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\nmm\n1\n106\n100\n75\n55 to 80\n63\n25 to 60\n37.5\n0 to 15\n19\n0 to 5\n2\n75\n100\n63\n90 to 100\n53\n50 to 80\n37.5\n0 to 15\n19\n0 to 5\n3\n63\n100\n53\n95 to 100\n37.5\n30 to 65\n19\n0 to 10\n11.2\n0 to 5\nNote — For coarse aggregates susceptible to degradation during rolling, the above grading may not hold good. 1. Scope — Requirement for dimensions, physical\nproperties, and workmanship of lintels made out of natural stone.\n2. General Requirements — The stone for lintels\nshall be reasonably fine grained, hard and shall have a uniform texture and colour. They shall be free from\nweathering and decay. The stone shall be without any cracks, vents, fissures, clayholes or other similar source\nof weakness. The lintel shall be so cut that when set in the building, the stone is laid on its natural bed or with\nthe bed in the same direction as it was when the test for transverse strength was carried out.\n3. Physical Properties — See Table 1.\nTABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF\nTHE STONE USED FOR LINTELS\nSl.No Characteristics Requirements\n(1)\n(2) (3)\ni)\nSpecific gravity 2.6 Min ii)\nWater absorption, percent 1.0 Max iii) Transverse strength, N/mm2 11.0 Min\niv) Durability Shall not develop spalling or cracks\n4. Dimensions and Tolerance\n4.1 Stone Lintels—Shall be of rectangular cross-\nsection. The width shall be equal to the thickness of the wall and the depth shall not be less than 100 mm. The\nlength shall be limited to a maximum clear span of\n2.65 m. A tolerance of ±1.5 mm shall be allowed on all dimensions of 1.2 m. or less and ± 3 mm on all dimension\nmore than 1.2 m.\n4.2 Throating — A 16mm × 8 mm throating shall be\nprovided to the soffit of the external lintel.\n4.3 Lintel Bearing — Stone lintels shall be well bonded\ninto the masonry on either side of the opening. The bearing length on either side shall not be less than the\ndepth of the lintel or half the width of the supporting masonry whichever is more. The bearing length shall be\nincreased for exceptionally heavy loads and for long spans. Bed blocks shall be provided if the clear span\nexceeds 2 m.\n5. Workmanship — The edges of the stone lintels\nshall be dressed as per IS 1129:1972*. The exposed surface of the lintel shall be finished as specified.\nNote — For design details of stone lintels, 5 of the standard\nmay be refered to.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to IS 1121(Part 2):1972 Methods of test for determination of strength properties of natural\nbuilding stones :Part 2 Transverse strength (first revision), IS 1124:1974 Method of test for determination of water absorption, apparent specific gravity and porosity of natural building stones (first revision) and IS 1126:1974 Method of test for determination\nof durability of natural building stones (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 9394:1979 Specification for stone lintels."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9394: 1979",
    "title": "Stone Lintels",
    "category": "Stones",
    "summary": "Covers physical properties and finish requirements of polished granite used for various purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "minerals",
      "granites",
      "granite",
      "coloured",
      "indivi",
      "interfere",
      "polished"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers physical properties and finish requirements of polished granite used for various purposes.",
      "General Requirements": "Granites should be free from all imperfections and injurious minerals that may interfere with the appearances, strength, structural integrity and its amenability to take good polish. Hair line cracks/joints, flowers, moles, knots, white and dark lines due to segregation of light coloured minerals in multi-coloured granites and ferro-magnesium minerals in light coloured granites are considered to be the imperfections. Granities should be free from deletereous minerals such as pyrite, marcasite and minerals such as biotite, chlorite, ilmenite, etc, which interfere with the coulur and appearance on weathering and also affect polishing characteristics.",
      "Dimensions": "The slabs shall be rectangular or square and of specified dimensions. The tolerance on length and breadth shall be ± 2 mm and on thickness ± 1 mm. The bottom face may be rough but the top surface shall be fine polished and joint faces shall be dressed with the top surface without hollowness and spalling off.",
      "Finish": "The surface of the polished granite shall be mirror finish without any hairline crack. The polish on the surface shall be checked with glassometer instrument and shall not be less than 95 percent. TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF GRANITE Characteristic Requirements Pink Granite Multi-coloured and grey Granites Moisture content (percent) 0.15, Max 0.15, Max Dry density (M/v) 2.58 to 2.63 2.60 to 2.68 Specific gravity (Min) 2.75 2.75 Water absorption 0.50 Max 0.50, Max Porosity (percent) 1.02 to 2.50 1 to 2 Comptessive strength (kg/cm2) 1 000-1 500 1 300-2 200 Tensile strngth (Min) 90 kg/cm 2 90 kg/cm2 Shear strength (kg/cm2) 280-425 300-540 Hardness (mohs) 6 to 7 6 to 7 Hardness (schmidt) No. 80 to 100 85 to 110 Hardness (shore) No. 50 to 60 46 to 61 Ultrasonic pulse velocity 5 000 Min 5 000 "
    },
    "content": "IS 9394: 1979 Stone Lintels\n*Recommendation for dressing of natural building stones (first revision). 1. Scope — Covers physical properties and finish\nrequirements of polished granite used for various purposes.\n2. General Requirements — Granites should be\nfree from all imperfections and injurious minerals that may interfere with the appearances, strength, structural\nintegrity and its amenability to take good polish. Hair line cracks/joints, flowers, moles, knots, white and dark\nlines due to segregation of light coloured minerals in multi-coloured granites and ferro-magnesium minerals\nin light coloured granites are considered to be the imperfections. Granities should be free from deletereous\nminerals such as pyrite, marcasite and minerals such as biotite, chlorite, ilmenite, etc, which interfere with the\ncoulur and appearance on weathering and also affect polishing characteristics.\n3. Dimensions —The slabs shall be rectangular or\nsquare and of specified dimensions. The tolerance on length and breadth shall be ± 2 mm and on thickness ± 1 mm. The bottom face may be rough but the top surface shall be fine polished and joint faces shall be\ndressed with the top surface without hollowness and spalling off.\n4. Physical Properties — See Table 1\n5. Finish — The surface of the polished granite shall\nbe mirror finish without any hairline crack. The polish on the surface shall be checked with glassometer\ninstrument and shall not be less than 95 percent.\nTABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF GRANITE\nCharacteristic Requirements Pink Granite Multi-coloured and grey Granites\nMoisture content (percent)\n0.15, Max\n0.15, Max\nDry density (M/v)\n2.58 to 2.63\n2.60 to 2.68\nSpecific gravity (Min)\n2.75\n2.75\nWater absorption\n0.50 Max\n0.50, Max\nPorosity (percent)\n1.02 to 2.50\n1 to 2\nComptessive strength (kg/cm2)\n1 000-1 500\n1 300-2 200\nTensile strngth (Min)\n90 kg/cm 2\n90 kg/cm2\nShear strength (kg/cm2)\n280-425\n300-540\nHardness (mohs)\n6 to 7\n6 to 7\nHardness (schmidt) No.\n80 to 100\n85 to 110\nHardness (shore) No.\n50 to 60\n46 to 61\nUltrasonic pulse velocity\n5 000 Min\n5 000 Min\nResistance to wear\nNot greater than 2 m m o n t h e\nNot greater than 2 mmo n t h e average and 2.5 mm for any indivi - averageand 2.5 mm for any indivi\nd u a l s p e c i m e n\nd u a l s p e c i m e n\n."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14223 (Part 1): 1995",
    "title": "Polished Building Stones",
    "category": "Stones",
    "summary": "Requirements for classification, general quality, dimensions and physical requirements of common burnt clay building bricks used in buildings with compressive strength less than 40 N/mm2 Note— For burnt clay bricks having higher strength, see IS 2180*.",
    "keywords": [
      "bricks",
      "clay",
      "burnt",
      "tiles",
      "modular",
      "building",
      "stones"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for classification, general quality, dimensions and physical requirements of common burnt clay building bricks used in buildings with compressive strength less than 40 N/mm2 Note— For burnt clay bricks having higher strength, see IS 2180*.",
      "Classification": "Class Average Compressive Strength Designation not Less Than N/mm2 35 35.0 30 30.0 25 25.0 20 20.0 17.5 17.5 15 15.0 12.5 12.5 10 10.0 7.5 7.5 5 5.0 3.5 3.5",
      "General Quality": "Shall be hand or machinemoulded and shall be free from cracks and flaws and nodules of free lime. Hand-moulded bricks of 90 mm or 70 mm height shall be moulded with a frog 10 to 20 mm deep on one of its flat sides. Bricks of 40mm hieght as well as those made by extrusion process may not be provided with frogs. The bricks shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp corners and uniform colour. *IS 2180:1988 Heavy-duty burnt clay building bricks (second revision). Shapes and sizes of the frog shall conform to either Fig.1A or Fig.1B of the standard. 4. Dimensions 4.1 The standard modular size of common building bricks shall be as follows: Modular 190 × 90 × 90 mm 190 × 90 × 40 mm Non-Modular 230 × 110 × 70 mm 230 × 110 × 30 mm Modular and Non-Modular for proper bond arrangement 70 × 110 × ",
      "Tolerances": "Dimensions of bricks shall be within the following limits per 20 bricks Modular size Non-Modular size mm mm a) Length 3 800 ± 80 4 600 ± 80 b) Width 1 800 ± 40 2 200 ± 40 c) Height 1 800 ± 40 1 400 ± 40 (For 90 mm high bricks) (For 70 mm high bricks) 800 ± 40 600 ± 40 (For 40 mm high bricks) (For 30 mm high bricks) 6. Physical Requirements 6.1 Compressive Strength — Minimum average strength shall be as given in 2. 6.2 Water Absorption — Shall not be more than 20 percent by weight upto class 12.5 and 15 percent for higher classes. 6.3 Efforescence— Shall not be more than ‘moderate’ upto class 12.5 and ‘slight’ for higher classes. Note — For methods of tests, refer to relevent parts of IS 3495 : 1992 Methods of tests of burnt clay buildings bricks (third revision). For detailed information, "
    },
    "content": "IS 14223 (Part 1): 1995 Polished Building Stones\nPART 1 GRANITE Note — For methods of test, refer to relevant parts of IS 1121:1974 Methods of test for determination of strength properties of\nnatural building stones, (first revision) IS 1124:1974 Methods of test for dertermination of water absorption, apparent specific gravity and proposity of natural building stones (first revision), IS 1706:1972 Method for determination of resistance to wear by\nabrasion of natural building stones (first revision), IS 12608:1989 Methods of test for hardness of rock IS 13030:1991 Methods of test for laboratory determination of water content, porosity, density and related properties of rock material, IS 13311 (Part 1):1992\nMethods of non-destructive testing of concrete: Part 1 Ultrasonic pulse velocity and IS 13630 (Part 13):1993 Methods of test for ceramic tiles: Part 13 Determination of scratch hardness of surface according to Mohs.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 14223 (Part 1) : 1995 Specification for polished building stones: Part 1 Granite. 2.1\nSECTION 4\nCLAY PRODUCTS FOR\nBUILDINGS CONTENTS\nTitle\nPage\nBRICKS\nIS\n1077 : 1992\nCommon burnt clay building bricks (fifth revision)\n4.3\nIS\n2180 : 1988\nHeavy duty burnt clay building bricks (third revision)\n4.4\nIS\n2222 : 1991\nBurnt clay perforated building bricks (third revision)\n4.5\nIS\n2691 : 1988\nBurnt clay facing bricks (second revision)\n4.6\nIS\n3583 : 1988\nBurnt clay paving bricks (second revision)\n4.7\nIS\n3952 : 1988\nBurnt clay hollow bricks for walls and partitions (second revision)\n4.8\nIS\n4885 : 1988\nSewer bricks (first revision)\n4.9\nIS\n5779 : 1986\nBurnt clay soling bricks (first revision)\n4.10\nIS\n6165 : 1992\nDimensions of special shapes of clay bricks (first revision)\n4.11\nIS 13757 : 1993\nBurnt clay fly ash building bricks\n4.12\nBURNT CLAY JALLIES\nIS\n7556 : 1988\nBurnt clay jallies (first revision)\n4.13\nTILES\nIS\n654 : 1992\nClay roofing tiles, mangalore pattern (third revision)\n4.14\nIS\n1464 : 1992\nClay ridge and ceiling tiles (second revision)\n4.15\nIS\n1478 : 1992\nClay flooring tiles (second revision)\n4.16\nIS 2690\nBurnt clay flat terracing tiles: (Part 1) : 1993\nMachine-made (second revision)\n4.17 (Part 2) : 1992\nHand made (second revision)\n4.18\nIS\n3367 : 1993\nBurnt clay tiles for use in lining irrigation and drainage works (second revision)\n4.19\nIS 3951\nHollow clay tiles for floors and roofs: (Part 1) : 1975\nFiller type (first revision)\n4.20 (Part 2) : 1975\nStructural type (first revision)\n4.21\nIS 13317 : 1992\nClay roofing country tiles – half round and flat tiles.\n4.22 1.\nScope— Requirements for classification, general quality, dimensions and physical requirements of\ncommon burnt clay building bricks used in buildings with compressive strength less than 40 N/mm2\nNote— For burnt clay bricks having higher strength, see IS\n2180*.\n2.\nClassification —\nClass\nAverage Compressive Strength\nDesignation not Less Than\nN/mm2\n35\n35.0\n30\n30.0\n25\n25.0\n20\n20.0\n17.5\n17.5\n15\n15.0\n12.5\n12.5\n10\n10.0\n7.5\n7.5\n5\n5.0\n3.5\n3.5\n3.\nGeneral Quality — Shall be hand or machinemoulded and shall be free from cracks and flaws and\nnodules of free lime. Hand-moulded bricks of 90 mm or\n70 mm height shall be moulded with a frog 10 to 20 mm deep on one of its flat sides. Bricks of 40mm hieght as\nwell as those made by extrusion process may not be provided with frogs. The bricks shall have smooth\nrectangular faces with sharp corners and uniform colour.\n*IS 2180:1988 Heavy-duty burnt clay building bricks (second revision).\nShapes and sizes of the frog shall conform to either Fig.1A or\nFig.1B of the standard.\n4.\nDimensions\n4.1 The standard modular size of common building\nbricks shall be as follows:\nModular\n190 × 90 × 90 mm\n190 × 90 × 40 mm\nNon-Modular\n230 × 110 × 70 mm\n230 × 110 × 30 mm\nModular and Non-Modular for proper bond arrangement 70 × 110 × 70 mm ½ length brick.\n5.\nTolerances — Dimensions of bricks shall be within the following limits per 20 bricks Modular size Non-Modular size mm\nmm a) Length 3 800 ± 80 4 600 ± 80 b) Width 1 800 ± 40 2 200 ± 40 c) Height 1 800 ± 40 1 400 ± 40 (For 90 mm high bricks) (For 70 mm high bricks) 800 ± 40 600 ± 40 (For 40 mm high bricks) (For 30 mm high bricks)\n6.\nPhysical Requirements\n6.1 Compressive Strength — Minimum average\nstrength shall be as given in 2.\n6.2 Water Absorption — Shall not be more than 20\npercent by weight upto class 12.5 and 15 percent for higher classes.\n6.3 Efforescence— Shall not be more than ‘moderate’\nupto class 12.5 and ‘slight’ for higher classes.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to relevent parts of IS 3495 : 1992 Methods of tests of burnt clay buildings bricks (third revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1077:1992 Specification for common burnt clay bricks\n(fifth revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1077: 1992",
    "title": "Common Burnt Clay Building Bricks",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements for classification, general quality, dimensions and physical proterties of heavy duty burnt clay building bricks.",
    "keywords": [
      "bricks",
      "burnt",
      "clay",
      "duty",
      "building",
      "proterties",
      "heavy"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for classification, general quality, dimensions and physical proterties of heavy duty burnt clay building bricks.",
      "Classification": "Shall be classified on the basis of average compressive strength as given below: Class Average Compressive Designation Strength Not Less than Less than N/mm2 N/mm2 40 40.0 45 45 45.0 —",
      "General Quality": "Shall be manufactured either by pressing or extrusion. When broken, the fractured surface of the brick shall show a uniformly dense structure free from large voids, laminations and lime particles. Two bricks when struck together shall emit a clear metallic ring. The bricks shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp corners and uniform colour. Note — Methods for tests, refer to the standard and relevant parts of IS 3495:1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks (third revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 2180:1988 Specification for heavy duty burnt clay building bricks (third revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 1077: 1992 Common Burnt Clay Building Bricks\n(Fifth Revision) 1.\nScope — Requirements for classification, general quality, dimensions and physical proterties of heavy\nduty burnt clay building bricks.\n2.\nClassification — Shall be classified on the basis of average compressive strength as given below:\nClass\nAverage Compressive\nDesignation\nStrength\nNot Less than\nLess than\nN/mm2\nN/mm2\n40\n40.0\n45\n45\n45.0\n—\n3.\nGeneral Quality — Shall be manufactured either by pressing or extrusion. When broken, the fractured\nsurface of the brick shall show a uniformly dense structure free from large voids, laminations and lime\nparticles. Two bricks when struck together shall emit a clear metallic ring. The bricks shall have smooth\nrectangular faces with sharp corners and uniform colour.\nNote — Methods for tests, refer to the standard and relevant parts of IS 3495:1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks\n(third revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2180:1988 Specification for heavy duty burnt clay building bricks (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2180: 1988",
    "title": "Heavy Duty Burnt Clay Building Bricks",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Covers the dimensions, quality and physical requirements of perforated burnt clay bricks for use in walls and partitions.",
    "keywords": [
      "perforations",
      "bricks",
      "perforation",
      "burnt",
      "area",
      "absorption",
      "perforated"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Tolerances": "Dimensions Tolerance on Individual Bricks mm mm 190 ±4 90,40 ±2 6. Physical Requirements 6.1 Compressive Strength — As given in 2. 6.2 Water Absorption — The average water absorption by mass shall not be more than 10 percent after 24 hours immesion in water absorption by mass shall not exceed 15 percent. Note — If specified by purchaser a 5 hour boiling test may be done and water absorption by mass shall not exceed 15 percent. 6.3 Effloresence — Rating shall be “Nil” 6.4 Bulk Density — Not less than 2.5 g/cm3",
      "Scope": "Covers the dimensions, quality and physical requirements of perforated burnt clay bricks for use in walls and partitions.",
      "General Quality": "Shall be free from cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime. shall have rectangular face with sharp straight edge at right angle and uniform colour and texture.",
      "Dimensions": "The standard size of shall be as follows— Modular 190 mm × 90 mm × 90 mm Non-modular 230 mm × 110 mm × 70 mm 4. Tolerances Dimensions Tolerances on Individual mm mm 70, 90 + 4 110,190 + 7 230 + 10",
      "Perforations": "The area of perforation shall be between 30 percent and 45 percent of the total area of the face. In the case of recrangular perforations, the larger dimension shall be parallel to the longer side of the brick and shorter side shall be less than 20 mm. It shall be less than 25 mm diameter in case of circular perforations. area of each perforation shall not exceed 500 mm2. thickness of any shell shall not be less than 15 mm and that of any web not less than 10 mm. 6. Physical Requirement 6.1 Compressive Strength — Shall have a minimum average compressive strength of 7 N/mm2 on net area. 6.2 Water Absorption — Shall not be more than 20 percent by weight after immersion for 24 hours in cold water. 6.3 Efflorescence — Rating not more than “slight” 6.4 Warpage — Average shall not exceed 3 perce"
    },
    "content": "IS 2180: 1988 Heavy Duty Burnt Clay Building Bricks\n(Third Revision) 4.\nDimensions\n190 mm × 90 mm × 90 mm, and\n190 mm × 90 mm × 40 mm\n5.\nTolerances— Dimensions\nTolerance on\nIndividual Bricks mm\nmm 190\n±4 90,40\n±2\n6.\nPhysical Requirements\n6.1 Compressive Strength — As given in 2.\n6.2 Water Absorption — The average water absorption\nby mass shall not be more than 10 percent after 24 hours immesion in water absorption by mass shall not exceed\n15 percent.\nNote — If specified by purchaser a 5 hour boiling test may be\ndone and water absorption by mass shall not exceed 15 percent.\n6.3 Effloresence — Rating shall be “Nil”\n6.4 Bulk Density — Not less than 2.5 g/cm3 1.\nScope — Covers the dimensions, quality and physical requirements of perforated burnt clay bricks\nfor use in walls and partitions.\n2.\nGeneral Quality — Shall be free from cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime. shall have rectangular\nface with sharp straight edge at right angle and uniform colour and texture.\n3.\nDimensions — The standard size of shall be as follows—\nModular\n190 mm × 90 mm × 90 mm\nNon-modular\n230 mm × 110 mm × 70 mm\n4.\nTolerances\nDimensions\nTolerances on Individual mm\nmm\n70, 90\n+ 4\n110,190\n+ 7\n230\n+ 10\n5.\nPerforations — The area of perforation shall be between 30 percent and 45 percent of the total area of\nthe face. In the case of recrangular perforations, the larger dimension shall be parallel to the longer side of\nthe brick and shorter side shall be less than 20 mm. It shall be less than 25 mm diameter in case of circular\nperforations. area of each perforation shall not exceed\n500 mm2. thickness of any shell shall not be less than\n15 mm and that of any web not less than 10 mm.\n6.\nPhysical Requirement\n6.1 Compressive Strength — Shall have a minimum\naverage compressive strength of 7 N/mm2 on net area.\n6.2 Water Absorption — Shall not be more than 20\npercent by weight after immersion for 24 hours in cold water.\n6.3 Efflorescence — Rating not more than “slight”\n6.4 Warpage — Average shall not exceed 3 percent.\nNote — For the method of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 3495:1992 Methods of test of burnt clay building bricks (third revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2222:1991 Specification for burnt clay perforated building bricks (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2222: 1991",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Perforated Building Bricks",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "summary": "Specifies the dimensions, quality and strength of burnt clay facing bricks used in buildings and other structures.",
    "keywords": [
      "burnt",
      "bricks",
      "clay",
      "facing",
      "angled",
      "nodules",
      "quality"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Specifies the dimensions, quality and strength of burnt clay facing bricks used in buildings and other structures.",
      "General Quality": "shall be of uniform colour, free from cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime and of even texture. Shall have plane rectangular faces with parallel sides and sharp straight right angled edges.",
      "Dimensions": "The standard sizes shall be 190 mm × 90 mm × 90 mm and 190 mm × 90 mm × 40 mm. 4. Tolerances Dimension Tolerances mm mm 190 + 3 90,40 + 2 Note — For the methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 3495 : 1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks. (third revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 2691:1988 Specification for burnt clay facing bricks (second revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 2222: 1991 Burnt Clay Perforated Building Bricks\n(Third Revision) 1.\nScope — Specifies the dimensions, quality and strength of burnt clay facing bricks used in buildings\nand other structures.\n2.\nGeneral Quality — shall be of uniform colour, free from cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime and of\neven texture. Shall have plane rectangular faces with parallel sides and sharp straight right angled edges.\n3.\nDimensions — The standard sizes shall be\n190 mm × 90 mm × 90 mm and\n190 mm × 90 mm × 40 mm.\n4.\nTolerances\nDimension\nTolerances mm\nmm 190\n+ 3 90,40\n+ 2 Note — For the methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 3495 : 1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks. (third revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 2691:1988 Specification for burnt clay facing bricks (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2691: 1988",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Facing Bricks",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "summary": "Covers dimensions, quality and strength, and methods of sampling and test for burnt clay paving bricks for use in construction of pavements.",
    "keywords": [
      "bricks",
      "paving",
      "clay",
      "nil",
      "burnt",
      "average",
      "pavements"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers dimensions, quality and strength, and methods of sampling and test for burnt clay paving bricks for use in construction of pavements.",
      "General": "shall be mechanically shaped and not hand moulded. when broken, bricks show a uniformly dense structure free from lime, large voids and marked laminations. Shall have smooth rectangular faces and sharp corners. 3. Dimensions 190 mm × 90 mm × 90 mm and 190 mm × 90 mm × 40 mm Note — The bricks shall not be provided with frogs. 4. Tolerances Dimensions Total Tolerance for 20 Bricks mm mm 190 ± 80 90,40 ± 40 5. Physical properties 5.1 Average compressive strength shall be not less than 40 N/mm2 5.2 Average water absorption shall be not more than 5 percent 5.3 Efforescence shall be ‘nil’. Note — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 3495:1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks (third revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 3583:1988 Specification for clay pavin"
    },
    "content": "IS 2691: 1988 Burnt Clay Facing Bricks\n(Second Revision)\n5.\nPhysical Requirements\n5.1 Average Compressive Strength shall not be less\nthan 10N/mm2\n5.2 Water absorption after 24 hours immersion shall\nnot exceed 15 percent.\n5.3 Efflorescence shall be “Nil”.\n5.4 Warpage shall not exceed 2.5 mm. 1.\nScope — Covers dimensions, quality and strength, and methods of sampling and test for burnt\nclay paving bricks for use in construction of pavements.\n2.\nGeneral — shall be mechanically shaped and not hand moulded. when broken, bricks show a uniformly\ndense structure free from lime, large voids and marked laminations. Shall have smooth rectangular faces and\nsharp corners.\n3.\nDimensions\n190 mm × 90 mm × 90 mm and\n190 mm × 90 mm × 40 mm\nNote — The bricks shall not be provided with frogs.\n4.\nTolerances\nDimensions\nTotal Tolerance for 20 Bricks mm mm\n190\n± 80\n90,40\n± 40\n5.\nPhysical properties\n5.1 Average compressive strength shall be not less\nthan 40 N/mm2\n5.2 Average water absorption shall be not more than\n5 percent\n5.3 Efforescence shall be ‘nil’.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 3495:1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks\n(third revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3583:1988 Specification for clay paving bricks\n(second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3583: 1988",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Paving Bricks",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "summary": "Covers the dimensions, quality and strength requirements of hollow bricks made from burnt clay and having perforations through and at right angle to the bearing surface.",
    "keywords": [
      "bricks",
      "keyed",
      "bowing",
      "rendering",
      "burnt",
      "winding",
      "plastering"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the dimensions, quality and strength requirements of hollow bricks made from burnt clay and having perforations through and at right angle to the bearing surface. 2. General Requirements 2.1 Bricks shall be free from cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime. Shall be of uniform colour. Shall have plane rectangular faces with parallel sides and shall have sharp straight edges at right angle; and a fine compact and uniform texture. 2.2 The bricks shall be free from excessive winding or bowing. Winding or bowing in length dimension concaity or converxity in external face of brikcs, and angles between sides and joining edges shall be not more than 5 mm. Note— For testing details refer to 3.2 of the standard.",
      "Types A) Type A": "Bricks with both faces keyed for plastering or rendering. b) Type B — Bricks with both faces smooth and suitable for use without plastering or rendering on either side, and c) Type C — Bricks with one face keyed and one face smooth. 4. Dimensions Length Width Height mm mm mm 190 190 90 290 90 90 290 140 90 Thickness of any shell and web shall not be less than 11 mm and 8 mm respectively. 5. Tolerances Dimensions Overall Measurements of 20 Bricks (mm) Min Max 290 5680 5920 190 3720 3880 140 2740 2860 90 1760 1840 5.1 In addition, the size of any individual brick in the sample shall not exceed the corresponding modular size as given below : Dimension of Bricks Modular Size mm mm 290 300 190 200 140 150 90 100",
      "Crushing Strength": "Minimum average value shall be 3.5 N/mm2. The strength of any individual brick shall not fall below the average value by more than 20 percent.",
      "Water Absorption": "Shall not be more than 20 percent by mass.",
      "Efflorescence": "Shall have a rating not more than ‘slight’. Note — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard, and relevant parts of IS 3495 : 1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks (third revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 3952:1988 Specification for burnt clay hollow bricks for walls and partitions (second revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 3583: 1988 Burnt Clay Paving Bricks\n(Second Revision) 1.\nScope — Covers the dimensions, quality and strength requirements of hollow bricks made from burnt\nclay and having perforations through and at right angle to the bearing surface.\n2.\nGeneral Requirements\n2.1 Bricks shall be free from cracks, flaws and nodules\nof free lime. Shall be of uniform colour. Shall have plane rectangular faces with parallel sides and shall have sharp\nstraight edges at right angle; and a fine compact and uniform texture.\n2.2 The bricks shall be free from excessive winding or\nbowing. Winding or bowing in length dimension concaity or converxity in external face of brikcs, and\nangles between sides and joining edges shall be not more than 5 mm.\nNote— For testing details refer to 3.2 of the standard.\n3.\nTypes a) Type A —\nBricks with both faces keyed for plastering or rendering.\nb) Type B —\nBricks with both faces smooth and suitable for use without plastering\nor rendering on either side, and c) Type C —\nBricks with one face keyed and one face smooth.\n4.\nDimensions\nLength\nWidth\nHeight mm\nmm mm\n190\n190\n90\n290\n90\n90\n290\n140\n90\nThickness of any shell and web shall not be less than 11 mm and 8 mm respectively.\n5.\nTolerances\nDimensions\nOverall Measurements of\n20 Bricks (mm)\nMin\nMax\n290\n5680\n5920\n190\n3720\n3880\n140\n2740\n2860 90\n1760\n1840\n5.1 In addition, the size of any individual brick in the\nsample shall not exceed the corresponding modular size as given below :\nDimension of Bricks\nModular Size mm\nmm\n290\n300\n190\n200\n140\n150 90\n100\n6.\nCrushing Strength — Minimum average value shall be 3.5 N/mm2. The strength of any individual brick\nshall not fall below the average value by more than\n20 percent.\n7.\nWater Absorption — Shall not be more than\n20 percent by mass.\n8.\nEfflorescence— Shall have a rating not more than ‘slight’.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard, and relevant parts of IS 3495 : 1992 Method of test for\nburnt clay building bricks (third revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3952:1988 Specification for burnt clay hollow bricks for walls and partitions (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3952: 1988",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Hollow Bricks For Walls And Partitions",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "summary": "(Second Revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "burnt",
      "clay",
      "hollow",
      "bricks",
      "walls",
      "partitions"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 3952: 1988 Burnt Clay Hollow Bricks For Walls And Partitions\n(Second Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4885: 1988",
    "title": "Sewer Bricks",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "summary": "Specifies dimensions, quality and strength, and methods of sampling and test for burnt clay sewer bricks used for sewers of sanitary (domestic) sewage.",
    "keywords": [
      "bricks",
      "burnt",
      "sewer",
      "clay",
      "soling",
      "plane",
      "nodules"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for dimensions, general quality and physical properties for burnt clay bricks for use in soling of roads.",
      "General Quality": "Shall be free from cracks and other flaws and nodules of free lime. Shall have, plane rectangular faces and straight right angle edges. 3. Dimensions 190 mm × 90 mm × 90 mm and 190 mm × 90 mm × 40 mm",
      "Tolerances": "Overall dimensions of 20 bricks, shall be as follows : Length 380 ± 8 cm Width 180 ± 4 cm Height for 90 mm high 180 ± 4 cm for 40 mm high 80 ± 4 cm 5. Physical Properties 5.1 Compresive Strength — Shall be not less than 10 N/mm2. 5.2 Water Absorption — Shall not be more than 20 percent. 5.3 Efflorescence — Shall not be more than “slight’. Note — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 3495:1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks (third revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 5779:1986 Specification for burnt clay soling bricks (first revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 4885: 1988 Sewer Bricks\n(First Revision)\nNote — For method of the tests refer to the relevant parts of IS 3495:1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks (third revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4885:1988 Specification for Sewer bricks (first revision).\n1.\nScope — Specifies dimensions, quality and strength, and methods of sampling and test for burnt\nclay sewer bricks used for sewers of sanitary (domestic)\nsewage.\n2.\nDimensions and Tolerances\n2.1 Dimensions\n190 mm × 90 mm × 90 mm, and 190 mm × 90 mm\n× 40 mm\nNote — For oval and other special shaped sewers, bricks may\nbe tapered suitably.\n2.2. Tolerance\nDimensions Total Tolerance for 20 Bricks mm\nmm\n190\n± 80\n90, 40\n± 40\n2.3. Tolerance for warpage of face or edges from plane surface and straight line shall be 2.5 mm.\n3.\nGeneral Quality — Shall be free from cracks, flaws and nodules of lime. shall have plane rectangular\nfaces with sharp edges and corners. Kiln marks not exceeding 3 mm in depth shall be permitted on the\nopposite edges. When broken, sewer bricks shall show a fracture of uniformly fine grained and compact\nstructure throughout.\n4.\nPhysical properties\n4.1 Average compressive strength shall not be less\nthan 17.5 N/mm2 and for individual brick it shall not be less than 16 N/mm2.\n4.2 Average water absorption shall not exceed 10\npercent and for individual it shall not exceed 12 percent.\n4.3 Efflorecence shall not be more than “slight” 1.\nScope — Requirements for dimensions, general quality and physical properties for burnt clay bricks for\nuse in soling of roads.\n2.\nGeneral Quality — Shall be free from cracks and other flaws and nodules of free lime. Shall have,\nplane rectangular faces and straight right angle edges.\n3.\nDimensions\n190 mm × 90 mm × 90 mm and\n190 mm × 90 mm × 40 mm\n4.\nTolerances — Overall dimensions of 20 bricks, shall be as follows :\nLength\n380 ± 8 cm\nWidth\n180 ± 4 cm\nHeight for 90 mm high\n180 ± 4 cm for 40 mm high 80 ± 4 cm\n5.\nPhysical Properties\n5.1 Compresive Strength — Shall be not less than\n10 N/mm2.\n5.2 Water Absorption — Shall not be more than\n20 percent.\n5.3 Efflorescence — Shall not be more than “slight’.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 3495:1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks (third revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5779:1986 Specification for burnt clay soling bricks\n(first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5779: 1986",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Soling Bricks",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "summary": "Dimensions for special shapes of clay brick used in building and other civil engineering construction. It does not lay down the specification of the special shapes for clay bricks and same shall conform to IS 1077:1991* and IS: 2180:1988†. Note —For exact shape of clay bricks and detailed dimensions, refer to Fig. 1 to 7 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 6165:1992 Specification for dimensions for special shapes of clay bricks (first revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "clay",
      "shapes",
      "bricks",
      "special",
      "civil",
      "exact",
      "lay"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Dimensions for special shapes of clay brick used in building and other civil engineering construction. It does not lay down the specification of the special shapes for clay bricks and same shall conform to IS 1077:1991* and IS: 2180:1988†. Note —For exact shape of clay bricks and detailed dimensions, refer to Fig. 1 to 7 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 6165:1992 Specification for dimensions for special shapes of clay bricks (first revision)"
    },
    "content": "IS 5779: 1986 Burnt Clay Soling Bricks\n(First Revision) 1.\nScope — Dimensions for special shapes of clay brick used in building and other civil engineering\nconstruction. It does not lay down the specification of the special shapes for clay bricks and same shall\nconform to IS 1077:1991* and IS: 2180:1988†.\nNote —For exact shape of clay bricks and detailed dimensions, refer to Fig. 1 to 7 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6165:1992 Specification for dimensions for special shapes of clay bricks (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6165: 1992",
    "title": "Dimensions For Special Shapes Of Clay Bricks",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "summary": "Requirement for classification, general quality, dimensions and physical requirements of common clay building bricks used in buildings. Note — Burnt clay flyash bricks having compressive strength less than 30 N/mm2 (approximately 300 kgf/cm2) are covered in this standard and for higher strength, see IS 2180 :1988* and IS 1077 : 1992**",
    "keywords": [
      "bricks",
      "bullnose",
      "plinth",
      "modular",
      "header",
      "clay",
      "stretcher"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirement for classification, general quality, dimensions and physical requirements of common clay building bricks used in buildings. Note — Burnt clay flyash bricks having compressive strength less than 30 N/mm2 (approximately 300 kgf/cm2) are covered in this standard and for higher strength, see IS 2180 :1988* and IS 1077 : 1992** 2. Classification Class Average Compressive Strength Designation not less than N/mm2 30 30.0 25 25 20 20.0 17.5 17.5 15 15.0 12.5 12.5 10 10.0 7.5 7.5 5 5.0 3.5 3.5",
      "General Quality": "Shall be hand or machine moulded and shall be free from cracks and flaws as black coring, nodules of stone and/or free lime and organic matter. Hand-moulded bricks of 90 mm or 70 mm height shall be moulded with a frog 10 to 20 mm deep on one of its flat sides; and bricks of 40 or 30 mm height as well as those made by extrusion process may not be provided with frogs. Shall have smooth rectangular faces with sharp corners and shall be uniform in shape and colour. 4. Dimensions Modular : 190 mm × 90 mm × 90 mm 190 mm × 90 mm × 40 mm Non-Modular : 230 mm × 110 mm × 70 mm 230 mm × 110 mm × 30 mm Modular and non-modular for proper bond arrangment 70 mm × 110 mm × 70 mm 1/3 length brick 230 mm × 50 mm × 70 mm 1/2 length brick",
      "Tolerances": "Dimensions of bricks shall be within the following limits per 20 bricks. Modular size Non-modular size a) Length 3 800 ± 80 4 600 ± 80 b) Width 1 800 ± 40 2 200 ± 40 c) Height 1 800 ± 40 1 400 ± 40 (For 90 mm high bricks) (For 70 mm high bricks) 800 ± 40 600 ± 40 (For 40 mm high bricks) (For 30 mm high bricks) 6. Physical Requirements 6.1 Compressive Strength — Average strength shall be as given in 2. 6.2 Water Absorption — Shall not be more than 20 percent 6.3 Efflorescence — Not more than “moderate” for class 12.5 and ‘slight’ for brighter classes. For methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 3495:1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks (third revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 13757:1993 Specification for burnt clay fly ash building bricks."
    },
    "content": "IS 6165: 1992 Dimensions For Special Shapes Of Clay Bricks\n(First Revision)\nShape\nMajor Overall Dimensions m m\na) Closers —\ni) Snapheader closer 90 × 90 × 90 ii) King closer\n190 × 90 × 90 iii) Queen closer\n190 × 40 × 90 b) Copings —\ni) Half round coping\n290 × 90 ii) Saddle back coping\n290 × 90 ×145 c) Bullnose Bricks —\ni) Single bullnose or bullnose header\nii) Double bullnose iii) Bullnose stretcher\n190 × 90 × 90 iv) Bullnose mitre\nv) Bullnose double vi) Bullnose on end d) Corner bricks —\ni) Squint 300 ii) Birdsmouth 300\niii) Header splay\n190 × 90 × 90 iv) Single cant or plinth header\nv) Double cant\n2.\nDimensions\n2.1 Size of modular and non-modular bricks shall be : Length Width\nHeight mm mm mm\nModular Size\n190\n90\n90\nNon-Modular Size\n230\n110\n70\n2.2 Sizes of special shapes of clay bricks shall be as\nfollows :\n* Common burnt clay building bricks (fifth revision).\n† Heavy duty burnt clay building bricks (third revision). Shape Major Overall Dimensions m m\ne) Plinth bricks —\ni) Plinth stop ii) Plinth stretcher\niii) Plinth internal return iv) Plinth header\nv) Plinth internal return vi) Plinth external return 190 × 90 × 90\nf) Culvert bricks —\ni) Culvert 10 cm ii) Culvert 20 cm\ng) Chimney or well type bricks—\ni) Chimney or well header ii) chimney or well stretcher 1.\nScope — Requirement for classification, general quality, dimensions and physical requirements\nof common clay building bricks used in buildings.\nNote — Burnt clay flyash bricks having compressive strength\nless than 30 N/mm2 (approximately 300 kgf/cm2) are covered in this standard and for higher strength, see IS 2180 :1988*\nand IS 1077 : 1992**\n2.\nClassification\nClass\nAverage Compressive Strength\nDesignation not less than\nN/mm2\n30\n30.0\n25\n25\n20\n20.0\n17.5\n17.5\n15\n15.0\n12.5\n12.5\n10\n10.0\n7.5\n7.5\n5\n5.0\n3.5\n3.5\n3.\nGeneral Quality — Shall be hand or machine moulded and shall be free from cracks and flaws as black\ncoring, nodules of stone and/or free lime and organic matter. Hand-moulded bricks of 90 mm or 70 mm height\nshall be moulded with a frog 10 to 20 mm deep on one of its flat sides; and bricks of 40 or 30 mm height as well as\nthose made by extrusion process may not be provided with frogs. Shall have smooth rectangular faces with\nsharp corners and shall be uniform in shape and colour.\n4.\nDimensions\nModular\n: 190 mm × 90 mm × 90 mm 190 mm × 90 mm × 40 mm\nNon-Modular\n: 230 mm × 110 mm × 70 mm 230 mm × 110 mm × 30 mm\nModular and non-modular for proper bond arrangment\n70 mm × 110 mm × 70 mm\n1/3 length brick\n230 mm × 50 mm × 70 mm\n1/2 length brick\n5.\nTolerances — Dimensions of bricks shall be within the following limits per 20 bricks.\nModular size\nNon-modular size a) Length\n3 800 ± 80\n4 600 ± 80 b) Width\n1 800 ± 40\n2 200 ± 40 c) Height\n1 800 ± 40\n1 400 ± 40\n(For 90 mm high bricks) (For 70 mm high bricks)\n800 ± 40\n600 ± 40\n(For 40 mm high bricks) (For 30 mm high bricks)\n6.\nPhysical Requirements\n6.1 Compressive Strength — Average strength shall\nbe as given in 2.\n6.2 Water Absorption — Shall not be more than 20\npercent\n6.3 Efflorescence — Not more than “moderate” for\nclass 12.5 and ‘slight’ for brighter classes.\nFor methods of tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 3495:1992 Method of test for burnt clay building bricks (third revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 13757:1993 Specification for burnt clay fly ash building bricks."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13757: 1993",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Fly Ash Building Bricks",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "summary": "Covers dimensions, quality and strength requirement of burnt clay jallies having perforations of ornamental designs. Note — Burnt clay jallies are suitable for providing a screen on Verandah, Construction of parapet or boundary walls, etc.",
    "keywords": [
      "jallies",
      "burnt",
      "shell",
      "clay",
      "web",
      "warpage",
      "bricks"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers dimensions, quality and strength requirement of burnt clay jallies having perforations of ornamental designs. Note — Burnt clay jallies are suitable for providing a screen on Verandah, Construction of parapet or boundary walls, etc. 2. Dimensions and tolerances 2.1. Dimensions (in mm) 190 × 190 × 100 190 × 190 × 50 190 × 140 × 100 190 × 140 × 50 140 × 140 × 100 140 × 140 × 50 140 × 90 × 50 90 × 90 × 50 2.2 Tolerances Dimensions Total Tolerance for 20 Jallies 190 mm 140 mm ± 80 mm 100 mm 90 mm ± 40 mm 50 mm 2.3. The thickness of any shell shall not be less than 10 mm and that of the web not less than 8 mm. The total void area of the jallies shall not eceed 40 percent. 2.4. Keys of bonding with mortar shall be 10 mm wide and 3 mm deep.",
      "General Quality": "Jallies shall be free from web or shell cracks, flaws or nodules of free lime. Shall be uniform in colour and texture. In the case of wire-cut jallies, the cut faces shall be at right angles and parallel to each other and the edges of shell and webs shall be trimmed to a smooth finish. The jallies shall not exhibit excessive warpage when placed between two parallel straight-edges. The maximum warpage permissible shall be 3 percent in any direction. 4. Physical Requirements 4.1. Average breaking load shall not be less than 12 N per mm width : 4.2. Average water absorption shall not be more than 15 percent 4.3. Efflorescence rating shall be not more than “slight”. Note — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 7556:1988 Specific"
    },
    "content": "IS 13757: 1993 Burnt Clay Fly Ash Building Bricks\n* Heavy duty burnt clay building bricks (third revision).\n** Common burnt day building bricks (fifth revision). 1.\nScope — Covers dimensions, quality and strength requirement of burnt clay jallies having perforations of\nornamental designs.\nNote — Burnt clay jallies are suitable for providing a screen\non Verandah, Construction of parapet or boundary walls, etc.\n2.\nDimensions and tolerances\n2.1. Dimensions (in mm)\n190 × 190 × 100\n190 × 190 × 50\n190 × 140 × 100\n190 × 140 × 50\n140 × 140 × 100\n140 × 140 × 50\n140 × 90 × 50 90 × 90 × 50\n2.2 Tolerances Dimensions\nTotal Tolerance for 20 Jallies\n190 mm\n140 mm\n± 80 mm\n100 mm\n90 mm\n± 40 mm\n50 mm\n2.3. The thickness of any shell shall not be less than 10 mm and that of the web not less than 8 mm. The total\nvoid area of the jallies shall not eceed 40 percent.\n2.4. Keys of bonding with mortar shall be 10 mm wide and 3 mm deep.\n3.\nGeneral Quality — Jallies shall be free from web or shell cracks, flaws or nodules of free lime. Shall be\nuniform in colour and texture. In the case of wire-cut jallies, the cut faces shall be at right angles and parallel\nto each other and the edges of shell and webs shall be trimmed to a smooth finish. The jallies shall not exhibit\nexcessive warpage when placed between two parallel straight-edges. The maximum warpage permissible shall\nbe 3 percent in any direction.\n4.\nPhysical Requirements\n4.1. Average breaking load shall not be less than\n12 N per mm width :\n4.2. Average water absorption shall not be more than\n15 percent\n4.3. Efflorescence rating shall be not more than “slight”.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 7556:1988 Specification for Burnt clay allies (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7556: 1988",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Jallies",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "summary": "Covers the machine-pressed clay interlocking roofing tiles of the ‘Mangalore Pattern.’",
    "keywords": [
      "lugs",
      "tile",
      "eave",
      "batten",
      "roofing",
      "class",
      "soud"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the machine-pressed clay interlocking roofing tiles of the ‘Mangalore Pattern.’",
      "Classification": "Class AA and Class A with characteristics given in Table 1. TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF ROOFING TILES Sl.no. Characteristic Requirement Class AA Class A i) Water absorption percent, Max 18 20 ii) Breaking load, kN, Min a)Average 1.0 (for 410 × 235 mm) 0.80(for 410 × 235 mm) 1.10 (for 420 × 250 mm 0.90 (for 420 × 250 mm and 425 × 260 mm) and 425 × 260 mm) b) Individual 0.90 (for 410 × 235 mm) 0.68 (for 410 × 235 mm) 1.00 (for 420 × 250 mm 0.78 (for 420 × 250 mm and 425 × 260 mm) and 425 × 260 mm) 3. General Quality. 3.1. Shall be free from irregularities, such as twists, bends, cracks and laminations. The roofing tile shall be free from impurities like particles of stone, lime or other foreign materials. When struck, the tile shall give a characteristic ringing soud and when broken the fractu",
      "Shape": "Placed on either face on a plane surface, gap at corners shall not exceed 6 mm.",
      "Lugs": "At least 2 batten lugs and 2 eave lugs of thickness not less than 15 mm at bottom and 10 mm at top shall be provided. Projection shall be 7 to 12 mm for batten lugs and not less than 10 mm for eave lugs.",
      "Tie": "down hole — 1.6 to 2 mm diameter. 4. Dimensions Overall Length Overall Width mm mm 410 235 420 250 425 260 Minimum overlap shall be 60 mm length wise and 25 mm widthwise Note— For typical details of Manglaore tile see Fig 1of the standard."
    },
    "content": "IS 7556: 1988 Burnt Clay Jallies\n(First Revision) 1.\nScope — Covers the machine-pressed clay interlocking roofing tiles of the ‘Mangalore Pattern.’\n2.\nClassification — Class AA and Class A with characteristics given in Table 1.\nTABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF ROOFING TILES\nSl.no.\nCharacteristic Requirement Class AA\nClass A i)\nWater absorption percent, Max\n18\n20 ii) Breaking load, kN, Min a)Average\n1.0 (for 410 × 235 mm) 0.80(for 410 × 235 mm)\n1.10 (for 420 × 250 mm 0.90 (for 420 × 250 mm and 425 × 260 mm) and 425 × 260 mm) b) Individual 0.90 (for 410 × 235 mm) 0.68 (for 410 × 235 mm)\n1.00 (for 420 × 250 mm 0.78 (for 420 × 250 mm and 425 × 260 mm) and 425 × 260 mm)\n3.\nGeneral Quality.\n3.1. Shall be free from irregularities, such as twists, bends, cracks and laminations. The roofing tile shall be\nfree from impurities like particles of stone, lime or other foreign materials. When struck, the tile shall give a\ncharacteristic ringing soud and when broken the fracture shall be clean and sharp at the edges. The Class\nAA tile shall be of uniform colour.\n3.2. Shape — Placed on either face on a plane surface, gap at corners shall not exceed 6 mm.\n3.3. Lugs — At least 2 batten lugs and 2 eave lugs of thickness not less than 15 mm at bottom and 10 mm at\ntop shall be provided. Projection shall be 7 to 12 mm for batten lugs and not less than 10 mm for eave lugs.\n3.4. Tie-down hole — 1.6 to 2 mm diameter.\n4.\nDimensions\nOverall Length\nOverall Width mm\nmm\n410\n235\n420\n250\n425\n260\nMinimum overlap shall be 60 mm length wise and\n25 mm widthwise\nNote— For typical details of Manglaore tile see Fig 1of the\nstandard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 654: 1992",
    "title": "Clay Roofing Tiles, Mangalore Pattern",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "summary": "Covers machine pressed clay ridge and ceiling tiles. It does not cover tiles of irregular sizes, shapes and colour and those made to meet special requirements. Sl No. Characteristic Requirement for Class AA Class A (1) (2) (3) (4) i) Water absorption percent (for ridge 18 20 and ceilling tiles), Max ii) Breaking strength (for ridge 0.015 0 (1.5 kg) 0.011 0 (1.10 kg) tiles only) kN, Min 0.012 5 (1.25 kg) 0.009 5 (0.95 kg)",
    "keywords": [
      "tiles",
      "tile",
      "ridge",
      "ceiling",
      "lug",
      "ceilling",
      "battens"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "For Measurement Of Variations In Length/Width Of Tiles The Difference Between": "a) The overall length/width of three tiles and b) The length/width of a tile is calculated and this value shall be within the limits mentioned below— For Tile Value for Value for Sizes Length Width mm mm mm 410 × 235 630 to 650 410 to 430 420 × 250 670 to 690 420 to 440 425 × 260 690 to 710 430 to 450 Note — For tolerances, refer 6.2 of the standard.",
      "Weight": "Average of 6 tiles shall not be less than 2 kg and not more than 3 kg 6. Strength Requirement",
      "Permeability": "Water shall not drip at the bottom when tested as per Annex B of the stanard.",
      "Breaking Load Test": "Shall conform to Table 1 when tested as per annex C of the standard. Note — For the methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to B of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 654:1992 Specification for clay roofing tiles, Mangalore pattern (third revision).",
      "Scope": "Covers machine pressed clay ridge and ceiling tiles. It does not cover tiles of irregular sizes, shapes and colour and those made to meet special requirements. Sl No. Characteristic Requirement for Class AA Class A (1) (2) (3) (4) i) Water absorption percent (for ridge 18 20 and ceilling tiles), Max ii) Breaking strength (for ridge 0.015 0 (1.5 kg) 0.011 0 (1.10 kg) tiles only) kN, Min 0.012 5 (1.25 kg) 0.009 5 (0.95 kg)",
      "Classification": "Class AA and class A with characteristics given in Table 1. TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF RIDGE AND CEILLING TILES",
      "Shape": "Common patterns of ridge and ceiling tiles are shown in Fig. 1 and 2 of the standard. Gap at corners of celing tiles, when placed on a plane surface in normal position, shall be not more than 6 mm. Ceiling tiles are of two types, namely double lug and single lug.",
      "General Quality": "shall be uniform in shape and shall be free from irregularities, such as twists, bends, cracks and laminations. shall be free from impurities like particles of stone, lime or other foreign materials. When struck, the tile shall give a ringing sound and when broken, the fracture shall be clen, dense and sharp at the edges. 5. Dimensions of Ridge Tiles a) Length— 375, 400 and 435 mm. The tolerance shall be ± 5 mm. b) Width and Height — Shall have a base of 265 mm and height of 100 mm with a tolerance of ± 5 mm. c) Thickness — shall be not less than 10 mm throughtout excluding ornamentation, etc. d) Rib — The rib at the rear end of the tile shall be of such a height and shape as to prevent effectively the tendency of the front face of the tile interlocked to slide over it.",
      "Dimension Of Ceiling Tiles": "The length of the double lug ceiling tile at the bottom shall be such that when a tile is placed between two battens the space between the face of the batten and that of end of tile shall be between 3 and 6 mm. The length of the single lug ceiling tile at the bottom shall be 30 mm less than the face to face spacing of battens. The length of the lug shall not be more than 20 mm. Thickness of the tile or lug shall be not less than 10 mm. Note — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 1464:1992 Specification for clay ridge and ceiling tiles (second revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 654: 1992 Clay Roofing Tiles, Mangalore Pattern\n(Third Revision) 4.1. For measurement of variations in length/width of tiles the difference between—\na)\nThe overall length/width of three tiles and b)\nThe length/width of a tile is calculated and this value shall be within the limits\nmentioned below—\nFor Tile\nValue for\nValue for\nSizes\nLength\nWidth mm\nmm mm\n410 × 235\n630 to 650\n410 to 430\n420 × 250\n670 to 690\n420 to 440\n425 × 260\n690 to 710\n430 to 450\nNote — For tolerances, refer 6.2 of the standard.\n5.\nWeight — Average of 6 tiles shall not be less than 2 kg and not more than 3 kg\n6.\nStrength Requirement\n6.1. Water Absorption — See Table 1.\n6.2. Permealibility — Water shall not drip at the bottom when tested as per Annex B of the stanard.\n6.3. Breaking load test — Shall conform to Table 1 when tested as per annex C of the standard.\nNote — For the methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to B of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 654:1992 Specification for clay roofing tiles, Mangalore pattern (third revision). 1.\nScope — Covers machine pressed clay ridge and ceiling tiles. It does not cover tiles of irregular sizes,\nshapes and colour and those made to meet special requirements.\nSl No. Characteristic Requirement for Class AA\nClass A\n(1)\n(2) (3)\n(4)\ni)\nWater absorption percent (for ridge\n18\n20 and ceilling tiles), Max\nii)\nBreaking strength (for ridge\n0.015 0 (1.5 kg) 0.011 0 (1.10 kg)\ntiles only) kN, Min\n0.012 5 (1.25 kg)\n0.009 5 (0.95 kg)\n2.\nClassification– Class AA and class A with characteristics given in Table 1.\nTABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF RIDGE AND CEILLING TILES\n3.\nShape – Common patterns of ridge and ceiling tiles are shown in Fig. 1 and 2 of the standard. Gap at\ncorners of celing tiles, when placed on a plane surface in normal position, shall be not more than 6 mm. Ceiling\ntiles are of two types, namely double lug and single lug.\n4.\nGeneral Quality — shall be uniform in shape and shall be free from irregularities, such as twists,\nbends, cracks and laminations. shall be free from impurities like particles of stone, lime or other foreign\nmaterials. When struck, the tile shall give a ringing sound and when broken, the fracture shall be clen, dense and\nsharp at the edges.\n5.\nDimensions of Ridge Tiles a)\nLength— 375, 400 and 435 mm.\nThe tolerance shall be ± 5 mm.\nb)\nWidth and Height — Shall have a base of 265 mm and height of 100 mm with a tolerance of\n± 5 mm.\nc) Thickness — shall be not less than 10 mm throughtout excluding ornamentation, etc.\nd) Rib — The rib at the rear end of the tile shall be of such a height and shape as to prevent effectively the tendency of the front face of the tile interlocked to slide over it.\n6.\nDimension of Ceiling Tiles — The length of the double lug ceiling tile at the bottom shall be such that\nwhen a tile is placed between two battens the space between the face of the batten and that of end of tile\nshall be between 3 and 6 mm. The length of the single lug ceiling tile at the bottom shall be 30 mm less than the\nface to face spacing of battens. The length of the lug shall not be more than 20 mm. Thickness of the tile or\nlug shall be not less than 10 mm.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1464:1992 Specification for clay ridge and ceiling tiles\n(second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1464: 1992",
    "title": "Clay Ridge And Ceiling Tiles",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "summary": "Requirements for dimensions, quality and strength for clay flooring tiles.",
    "keywords": [
      "thick",
      "tiles",
      "class",
      "flooring",
      "individual",
      "along",
      "frogging"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "General Quality": "shall be free from irregularities, such as twists, bends, cracks, flaws, laminations and imperfections. Faces of tiles shall be plain, grooved fluted or figured as specified and the edges shall be square. 4. Dimensions i) 150 × 150 × 15 mm ii) 150 × 150 × 20 mm iii) 200 × 200 × 20 mm iv) 200 × 200 × 25 mm v) 250 × 250 × 30 mm Depth of the grooves or frogging on the underside shall not exceed 3 mm.",
      "Tolerances A) Length And Breadth": "Average + 5 mm, individual + 2 mm. b) Thickness — Average + 2 mm, individual + 1 mm.",
      "Warpage": "Shall not exceed 2 percent along edges and 1.5 percent along diagonals. Note — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard. For details information, refer to IS 1478:1992 Specifications for clay flooring tiles (second revision).",
      "Scope": "Requirements for dimensions, quality and strength for clay flooring tiles.",
      "Classification": "Class 1, class 2, and class 3 with characteristics given in Table 1. TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF FLOORING TILES SI.No. Characteristic Requirements for Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 i) Water absorption 10 19 24 percent, Max ii) Flexural strength, kg/cm width, Min a) Average 6 3.5 2.5 b) Individual 5 3.0 2.0 iii) Impact maximum height in mm of drop of steel ball: a) 15 mm thick 25 20 15 b) 20 mm thick 60 50 40 c) 25 mm thick 75 65 50 d) 30 mm thick 80 70 60"
    },
    "content": "IS 1464: 1992 Clay Ridge And Ceiling Tiles\n(Second Revision) 3.\nGeneral Quality — shall be free from irregularities, such as twists, bends, cracks, flaws,\nlaminations and imperfections. Faces of tiles shall be plain, grooved fluted or figured as specified and the\nedges shall be square.\n4. Dimensions i) 150 × 150 × 15 mm\nii) 150 × 150 × 20 mm iii) 200 × 200 × 20 mm\niv) 200 × 200 × 25 mm v) 250 × 250 × 30 mm\nDepth of the grooves or frogging on the underside shall not exceed 3 mm.\n5. Tolerances a) Length and breadth — Average + 5 mm,\nindividual + 2 mm.\nb) Thickness — Average + 2 mm, individual\n+ 1 mm.\n6.\nWarpage — Shall not exceed 2 percent along edges and 1.5 percent along diagonals.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard.\nFor details information, refer to IS 1478:1992 Specifications for clay flooring tiles\n(second revision).\n1.\nScope — Requirements for dimensions, quality and strength for clay flooring tiles.\n2.\nClassification — Class 1, class 2, and class 3 with characteristics given in Table 1.\nTABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF\nFLOORING TILES\nSI.No.\nCharacteristic\nRequirements for Class 1 Class 2 Class 3 i)\nWater absorption\n10\n19\n24 percent, Max\nii)\nFlexural strength, kg/cm width, Min a) Average\n6\n3.5\n2.5 b) Individual\n5\n3.0\n2.0 iii)\nImpact maximum height in mm of\ndrop of steel ball: a) 15 mm thick\n25\n20\n15 b) 20 mm thick\n60\n50\n40 c) 25 mm thick\n75\n65\n50 d) 30 mm thick\n80\n70\n60"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1478: 1992",
    "title": "Clay Flooring Tiles",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "summary": "Requirements for machine-made burnt clay flat terracing tiles.",
    "keywords": [
      "machine",
      "tiles",
      "terracing",
      "stages",
      "burnt",
      "toleranes",
      "exturded"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for machine-made burnt clay flat terracing tiles.",
      "General Quality": "Shall be uniform in shape and sizes and shall be free from irregularities, such as twists, bends, cracks and particles of stones. 3. Dimensions and Toleranes 3.1 Length — 250 to 150 mm in stages of 25 mm. 3.2 Width — 200 to 100 mm in stages of 25 mm. 3.3 Thickness —20 and 15 mm. 3.4 Tolerances — ± 2 percent on all dimensions in case of machine pressed tiles and ± 3 percent in case of machine exturded tiles.",
      "Warpage": "Shall not exceed 1 percent in any direction.",
      "Water Absorption": "Average of 6 tiles shall not exceed 15 percent.",
      "Flexural Strength": "Shall not be less than 2N/mm2. Note — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 2690 (Part 1):1993 Specification for burnt clay flat terracing tiles: Part 1 Machine-made (second revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 1478: 1992 Clay Flooring Tiles\n(Second Revision) 1.\nScope — Requirements for machine-made burnt clay flat terracing tiles.\n2.\nGeneral Quality — Shall be uniform in shape and sizes and shall be free from irregularities, such as\ntwists, bends, cracks and particles of stones.\n3.\nDimensions and Toleranes\n3.1 Length — 250 to 150 mm in stages of 25 mm.\n3.2 Width — 200 to 100 mm in stages of 25 mm.\n3.3 Thickness —20 and 15 mm.\n3.4 Tolerances — ± 2 percent on all dimensions in\ncase of machine pressed tiles and ± 3 percent in case of machine exturded tiles.\n4.\nWarpage — Shall not exceed 1 percent in any direction.\n5.\nWater Absorption — Average of 6 tiles shall not exceed 15 percent.\n6.\nFlexural Strength — Shall not be less than\n2N/mm2.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2690 (Part 1):1993 Specification for burnt clay flat terracing tiles: Part 1 Machine-made (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2690 (Part 1): 1993",
    "title": "Burnt Clay–Flat Terracing Tiles",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "summary": "Requirements for hand-made burnt clay flat terracing tiles.",
    "keywords": [
      "stages",
      "terracing",
      "twists",
      "irregularities",
      "stones",
      "flexural",
      "machine"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for hand-made burnt clay flat terracing tiles.",
      "General Quality": "Shall be uniform in shape and sizes and shall be free from irregularities, such as twists, bends, cracks and particles of stones. 3. Dimensions and Tolerances 3.1 Length — 250 to 150 mm in stages of 25 mm. 3.2 Width — 200 to 75 mm in stages of 25 mm. 3.3 Thickness— 25 to 50 mm in stages of 5 mm. 3.4 Tolerances — Shall be ± 3 percent for all dimensions.",
      "Warpage": "Shall not exceed 2 percent of the dimension in any direction.",
      "Water Absorption": "Shall not exceed 20 percent by weight.",
      "Flexural Strength": "Shall not be less that 1.5 N/mm2."
    },
    "content": "IS 2690 (Part 1): 1993 Burnt Clay–Flat Terracing Tiles\nPART 1 MACHINE-MADE\n(Second Revision) 1.\nScope — Requirements for hand-made burnt clay flat terracing tiles.\n2.\nGeneral Quality— Shall be uniform in shape and sizes and shall be free from irregularities, such as\ntwists, bends, cracks and particles of stones.\n3.\nDimensions and Tolerances\n3.1 Length — 250 to 150 mm in stages of 25 mm.\n3.2 Width — 200 to 75 mm in stages of 25 mm.\n3.3 Thickness— 25 to 50 mm in stages of 5 mm.\n3.4 Tolerances — Shall be ± 3 percent for all dimensions.\n4.\nWarpage— Shall not exceed 2 percent of the dimension in any direction.\n5.\nWater Absorption — Shall not exceed 20 percent by weight.\n6.\nFlexural Strength — Shall not be less that\n1.5 N/mm2."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2690 (Part 2): 1992",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Flat Terracing Tiles",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "summary": "Covers machine-pressed, wire-cut, or hand-made rectangular burnt clay tiles used for lining irrigation canals and for drainage channels (other than sewage works).",
    "keywords": [
      "burnt",
      "clay",
      "hand",
      "tiles",
      "lining",
      "drainage",
      "class"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers machine-pressed, wire-cut, or hand-made rectangular burnt clay tiles used for lining irrigation canals and for drainage channels (other than sewage works).",
      "General": "Shall be uniform in size, shape and free from irregulatities, such as cracks and laminations. Shall be free from impurities like particles of stone, lime and other foreign materials. 3. Dimensions and Tolerances. 3.1 Dimensions — 300 mm × 150 mm × 50 mm. 3.2 Tolerances — ± 10 mm in length, ± 5 mm in width, and ± 1.5 mm in thickness.",
      "Classification": "Class 105 and Class 75. 5. Physical Properties See Table 1. Note — For methods of test, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard and relevant parts of IS 3495 Methods of tests of burnt clay building bricks (third revision). For detailed information refer to IS 3367:1993 Specification for burnt clay tiles for use in lining irigation and drainage works (second revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 2690 (Part 2): 1992 Burnt Clay Flat Terracing Tiles\nPART 2 HAND – MADE\n(Second Revision)\nNote — For methods of test, refer to Annex B of the standard, and relevant parts of IS 3495 Methods of tests of burnt clay building\nbricks (third revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2690 (Part 2):1992 Specification for burnt clay flat terracing tiles: Part 2 Hand-made (second revision). TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES\nSl. No.\nCharacteristic\nRequirements\nClass 105\nClass 75\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\ni)\nCompressive strength, N/mn2 Min 10.5 7.5 ii)\nWater absorption percent, Max\n15.0 20.0 iii)\nTransverse strength N/mm2, Min\n1.5 1.2 iv)\nWarp, mm, Max 3.0 3.0\n1.\nScope — Covers machine-pressed, wire-cut, or hand-made rectangular burnt clay tiles used for lining\nirrigation canals and for drainage channels (other than sewage works).\n2.\nGeneral — Shall be uniform in size, shape and free from irregulatities, such as cracks and laminations.\nShall be free from impurities like particles of stone, lime and other foreign materials.\n3.\nDimensions and Tolerances.\n3.1 Dimensions — 300 mm × 150 mm × 50 mm.\n3.2 Tolerances — ± 10 mm in length, ± 5 mm in width,\nand ± 1.5 mm in thickness.\n4.\nClassification — Class 105 and Class 75.\n5.\nPhysical Properties See Table 1.\nNote — For methods of test, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard and relevant parts of IS 3495 Methods of tests of burnt clay\nbuilding bricks (third revision).\nFor detailed information refer to IS 3367:1993 Specification for burnt clay tiles for use in lining irigation and drainage works (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3367: 1993",
    "title": "Burnt Clay Tiles For Use In Lining Irrigation And Drainage Works",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "summary": "Requirements for dimensions, quality and strength requirements of hollow clay filler tiles having perforations parallel to their length and intended for use in floors and roofs.",
    "keywords": [
      "hollow",
      "tiles",
      "clay",
      "roofs",
      "run",
      "floors",
      "filter"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for dimensions, quality and strength requirements of hollow clay filler tiles having perforations parallel to their length and intended for use in floors and roofs.",
      "General Requirements": "Shall be free from cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime. Shall be of uniform colour and shall have plane rectangular faces with parallel sides and straight right angled edges. 2.1 Winding or Bowing — Shall be not more than 5 mm per 30 cm length or width. 2.2 Concavity or Convexity — Shall be not more than 5 mm per 30 cm run at any point on either diagonal. 2.3 Angles between Sides and Joining Edges — Shall be not more than 5 mm per 30 cm run. Note — Tests for trueness of shape are illustrated in Fig 1 to 3 on the standard. 3. Dimensions and Tolerances 3.1 Dimensions Length Width Height mm mm mm 340, 390, 440, 490 350, 300 80, 90 540, 590, 640, 690 250, 200 100, 110 740 3.2 Tolerances — ± 5 percent 3.3 Thickness — Shall be not less than 11 mm for shell and not less than 8 mm for web.",
      "Breaking Strength": "Shall be not less than 10 kgf/cm2 length.",
      "Water Absorption": "Shall not more than 20 percent. Note 1 — Typical shapes of hollow clay filter tiles are shown in Fig. 4 of the standard. Note 2 — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 3951 (Part 1):1975 Specification for hollow clay tiles for floors and roofs:Part 1 Filler type (first revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 3367: 1993 Burnt Clay Tiles For Use In Lining Irrigation And Drainage Works\n(Second Revision) 1.\nScope — Requirements for dimensions, quality and strength requirements of hollow clay filler tiles\nhaving perforations parallel to their length and intended for use in floors and roofs.\n2.\nGeneral Requirements — Shall be free from cracks, flaws and nodules of free lime. Shall be of uniform\ncolour and shall have plane rectangular faces with parallel sides and straight right angled edges.\n2.1 Winding or Bowing — Shall be not more than 5\nmm per 30 cm length or width.\n2.2 Concavity or Convexity — Shall be not more than\n5 mm per 30 cm run at any point on either diagonal.\n2.3 Angles between Sides and Joining Edges — Shall\nbe not more than 5 mm per 30 cm run.\nNote — Tests for trueness of shape are illustrated in Fig 1 to\n3 on the standard.\n3.\nDimensions and Tolerances\n3.1 Dimensions Length\nWidth Height mm\nmm mm 340, 390, 440, 490\n350, 300 80, 90 540, 590, 640, 690\n250, 200 100, 110 740\n3.2 Tolerances — ± 5 percent\n3.3 Thickness — Shall be not less than 11 mm for shell\nand not less than 8 mm for web.\n4.\nBreaking Strength — Shall be not less than\n10 kgf/cm2 length.\n5.\nWater Absorption — Shall not more than 20 percent.\nNote 1 — Typical shapes of hollow clay filter tiles are shown in Fig. 4 of the standard.\nNote 2 — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3951 (Part 1):1975 Specification for hollow clay tiles for floors and roofs:Part 1 Filler type (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3951 (Part 1): 1975",
    "title": "Hollow Clay Tiles For Floors And Roofs",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "summary": "Requirements for quality, dimensions, bulk density, water absorption and strength requirements of structural hollow clay tiles suitable for floor/roof.",
    "keywords": [
      "hollow",
      "stages",
      "tiles",
      "clay",
      "run",
      "bulk",
      "symmetry"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for quality, dimensions, bulk density, water absorption and strength requirements of structural hollow clay tiles suitable for floor/roof.",
      "General Requirements": "Shall be free from cracks, flaws or inclusion of any deleterious materials. 2.1 Shall have at least one plane of symmetry in cross section. 2.2 Shall have serrations (not deeper than 3 mm and not wider than 6 mm) on all faces designed to be concreted or mortared or plastered. 2.3 Winding or Bowing — Shall not be more than5 mm per 30 cm length or width. 2.4 Concavity or Convexity — Shall not be more than 5 mm per 30 cm run at any point in either diagonal. 2.5 Angle between Sides and Joining Edges— Shall not be more than 5 mm per 30 cm run Note — Tests for trueness of shape are illustrated in Fig 1. to 3. of the standard. 3. Dimensions and Tolerances 3.1 Dimensions Length— 290 and 390 mm Width — 90 to 190 mm in stages of 50 mm Height — 125 to 200 mm in stages of 25 mm 3.2 Thickness —Shall be",
      "Bulk Density": "Shall be not below 0.9g/cm3 and not more than 1.2g/cm3.",
      "Compressive Strength": "Average not less than 200 kgf/cm2. Individual not less than 150 kgf/cm2.",
      "Water Absorption": "Shall not exceed 10 percent by weight. Note 1—Typical shapes of structure clay units for flooring and roofing are shown in Fig. 4 of the standard Note 2 — For methods of tests refer to 5.1.1 Appendices A and B of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 3951 (Part 2) : 1975 Specification for hollow clay tiles for floors and roofs: Part 2 Structural type (first revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 3951 (Part 1): 1975 Hollow Clay Tiles For Floors And Roofs\nPART 1 FILLER TYPE\n(First Revision) 1.\nScope —Requirements for quality, dimensions, bulk density, water absorption and strength\nrequirements of structural hollow clay tiles suitable for floor/roof.\n2.\nGeneral Requirements— Shall be free from cracks, flaws or inclusion of any deleterious materials.\n2.1 Shall have at least one plane of symmetry in cross\nsection.\n2.2 Shall have serrations (not deeper than 3 mm and\nnot wider than 6 mm) on all faces designed to be concreted or mortared or plastered.\n2.3 Winding or Bowing — Shall not be more than5 mm\nper 30 cm length or width.\n2.4 Concavity or Convexity — Shall not be more than\n5 mm per 30 cm run at any point in either diagonal.\n2.5 Angle between Sides and Joining Edges— Shall\nnot be more than 5 mm per 30 cm run\nNote — Tests for trueness of shape are illustrated in Fig 1. to\n3. of the standard.\n3.\nDimensions and Tolerances\n3.1 Dimensions Length— 290 and 390 mm Width — 90 to 190 mm in stages of 50 mm Height — 125 to 200 mm in stages of 25 mm\n3.2 Thickness —Shall be not less than 12 mm for shell\nand not less than 10 mm for web.\n3.3 Tolerances — ± 5 percent on length and width.\n+ 5 percent on height.\nNote —Hollow tiles may be either with small perforations or\nlarge holes or a combination of the two.\n4.\nBulk Density — Shall be not below 0.9g/cm3 and not more than 1.2g/cm3.\n5.\nCompressive strength — Average not less than 200 kgf/cm2. Individual not less than 150 kgf/cm2.\n6.\nWater Absorption — Shall not exceed 10 percent by weight.\nNote 1—Typical shapes of structure clay units for flooring and roofing are shown in Fig. 4 of the standard\nNote 2 — For methods of tests refer to 5.1.1 Appendices A and B of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3951 (Part 2) : 1975 Specification for hollow clay tiles for floors and roofs: Part 2 Structural type (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3951 (Part 2): 1975",
    "title": "Hollow Clay Tiles For Floors And Roofs",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "summary": "PART 2 STRUCTURAL TYPE (First Revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "tiles",
      "tile",
      "country",
      "half",
      "round",
      "class",
      "flat"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Specifications": "Covers the specifications of hand made half round and flat country tiles. Sl No. Characteristic Requirement Class AA Class A Class AA Class A (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) Water absorption percent, Max 19 24 19 24 ii) Breaking load, kN, Min a) Average 0.40 (40 kg) 0.30 (30 kg) 0.35 (35 kg) 0.25 (25 kg) b) Individual 0.35 (35 kg) 0.25 (25 kg) 0.30 (30 kg) 0.20 (20 kg) TABLE 2 DIMENSIONS OF TILES Dimensions mm Overall length Overall width Overall height Wide end Narrow end Wide end Narrow end Half Round Tiles Size I 250 105 85 50 40 Size II 250 120 95 60 45 Flat Tile Size I 200 175 145 20 20 SIze II 250 200 160 25 25 TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF CLAY COUNTRY ROOFING TILES",
      "Classification": "Class AA and Class A with characteristics given in Table 1.",
      "Shape, Dimension And Tolerances": "For dimensions see Table 2 When the half round or flat country tile is placed on a plane surface, the gap at the corners shall be not more than 8 mm. The cross-section of the half round and flat country tiles shall be such as to give the tile structural rigidity. The overall minimum overlap in both the type of tiles shall be 60 mm length length wise. There is no overlap width wise in these tiles. The tolerances in length and width shall be below ± 5 percent.",
      "General Quality": "Shall be free from irregularities, such as twists, bend, cracks and lamination. Shall be free from impurities like particles of stone, lime or other foreign materials. Class AA tile shall be of uniform colour.",
      "Weight": "Average of 6 tiles when dried to constant weight at 110°ºC. Half round tile 5 to 8 N, Max Flat tile 7 to 10 N, Max Note 1 — For typical details of country roofing tiles see Fig. 1 of the standard. Note 2 — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard."
    },
    "content": "IS 3951 (Part 2): 1975 Hollow Clay Tiles For Floors And Roofs\nPART 2 STRUCTURAL TYPE\n(First Revision) 1.\nSpecification — Covers the specifications of hand made half round and flat country tiles.\nSl No.\nCharacteristic\nRequirement\nClass AA Class A Class AA Class A\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\ni)\nWater absorption percent, Max\n19\n24\n19\n24 ii)\nBreaking load, kN, Min a) Average\n0.40 (40 kg)\n0.30 (30 kg)\n0.35 (35 kg)\n0.25 (25 kg)\nb) Individual\n0.35 (35 kg)\n0.25 (25 kg)\n0.30 (30 kg)\n0.20 (20 kg)\nTABLE 2 DIMENSIONS OF TILES Dimensions mm\nOverall length Overall width Overall height\nWide end\nNarrow end\nWide end\nNarrow end\nHalf Round Tiles Size I\n250\n105\n85\n50\n40 Size II\n250\n120\n95\n60\n45\nFlat Tile Size I\n200\n175\n145\n20\n20 SIze II\n250\n200\n160\n25\n25\nTABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF CLAY COUNTRY ROOFING TILES\n2.\nClassification — Class AA and Class A with characteristics given in Table 1.\n3.\nShape, Dimension and Tolerances – For dimensions see Table 2\nWhen the half round or flat country tile is placed on a plane surface, the gap at the corners shall be not\nmore than 8 mm. The cross-section of the half round and flat country tiles shall be such as to give the tile\nstructural rigidity. The overall minimum overlap in both the type of tiles shall be 60 mm length length wise.\nThere is no overlap width wise in these tiles. The tolerances in length and width shall be below\n± 5 percent.\n4. General Quality — Shall be free from irregularities,\nsuch as twists, bend, cracks and lamination. Shall be free from impurities like particles of stone, lime or other\nforeign materials. Class AA tile shall be of uniform colour.\n5. Weight — Average of 6 tiles when dried to\nconstant weight at 110°ºC.\nHalf round tile 5 to 8 N, Max\nFlat tile 7 to 10 N, Max\nNote 1 — For typical details of country roofing tiles see Fig. 1 of the standard.\nNote 2 — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13317: 1992",
    "title": "Clay Roofing Country Tiles, Half Round And Flat Tiles",
    "category": "Wood Products for Building",
    "summary": "Requirements for gypsum plaster board intended to be used as a vertical or horizontal lining in building. It includes boards manufactured to receive either direct surface decoration or gypsum plaster finishes.",
    "keywords": [
      "gypsum",
      "plaster",
      "boards",
      "tiles",
      "cohesion",
      "baseboard",
      "premixed"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for gypsum plaster board intended to be used as a vertical or horizontal lining in building. It includes boards manufactured to receive either direct surface decoration or gypsum plaster finishes.",
      "Types": "Gypsum plaster boards are classified according to their use— a) Gypsum wallboards b) Gypsum Board with reduced water Absorption Rate, c) Gypsum wallboard with improved core Cohesion at high temperatures d) Gypsum plaster baseboard, and e) Gypsum plaster baseboard with improved core cohesion at high temperatures",
      "Materials": "Gypsum plaster shall conform to IS 2547 (Part 1) : 1976*. By product gypsum conforming to IS 12679:1987+ shall be used for the preparation of plaster."
    },
    "content": "IS 13317: 1992 Clay Roofing Country Tiles, Half Round And Flat Tiles\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 13317:1992 Specification for clay roofing country tiles, half round and flat tiles.\nHalf Round Tiles\nFlat Tiles 2.1\nSECTION 5\nGYPSUM BUILDING\nMATERIALS CONTENTS\nTitle\nPage\nIS\n2095\nGypsum plaster boards\n(Part I) : 1996\nPlain gypsum plaster boards (second revision)\n5.3\n(Part 3) : 1996\nReinforced gypsum plaster boards (second revision)\n5.5\nIS\n2547\nGypsum building plaster\n(Part I) : 1976\nExcluding premixed light weight plaster (first revision)\n5.7\n(Part 2) : 1976\nPremixed light weight plaster (first revision)\n5.9\nIS\n2849 : 1983\nNon load bearing gypsum partition blocks\n5.10\n(Solid and hollow types)\nIS\n8272 : 1984\nGypsum plaster for use in the manufacture of fibrous\n5.11 plaster boards (first revision) 1. Scope— Requirements for gypsum plaster board\nintended to be used as a vertical or horizontal lining in building. It includes boards manufactured to receive\neither direct surface decoration or gypsum plaster finishes.\n2. Types— Gypsum plaster boards are classified\naccording to their use—\na)\nGypsum wallboards b)\nGypsum Board with reduced water\nAbsorption Rate, c)\nGypsum wallboard with improved core\nCohesion at high temperatures d)\nGypsum plaster baseboard, and e)\nGypsum plaster baseboard with improved core cohesion at high temperatures\n3. Material — Gypsum plaster shall conform to\nIS 2547 (Part 1) : 1976*. By product gypsum conforming to IS 12679:1987+ shall be used for the preparation of\nplaster."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2095 (Part 1): 1996",
    "title": "Gypsum Plaster Boards",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "summary": "PART 1 PLAIN GYPSUM PLASTER BOARDS (Second Revision) 4. General— Gypsum plaster boards consist of a gypsum plaster core with or without fibre encased in and firmly bonded to strong durable paper liners to form rectangular boards. Core shall be dried across full width. The face and back papers shall be securely bonded to the core. The paper surfaces may vary according to the use of the particular type of board, and the core may contain additive to impart additional properties. The longitudinal ed",
    "keywords": [
      "gypsum",
      "plaster",
      "board",
      "boards",
      "paper",
      "baseboard",
      "core"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "General": "Gypsum plaster boards consist of a gypsum plaster core with or without fibre encased in and firmly bonded to strong durable paper liners to form rectangular boards. Core shall be dried across full width. The face and back papers shall be securely bonded to the core. The paper surfaces may vary according to the use of the particular type of board, and the core may contain additive to impart additional properties. The longitudinal edges are paper covered and profiled to suit the application. The paper covered edges of gypsum wall boards are square, tapered, bevelled or rounded. The paper covered edges of gypsum baseboard are square or rounded. The ends of gypsum plaster board are square-cut. 5. Requirements 5.1Dimensions — See Table 1. *Gypsum plaster boards : Part 1Plain gypsum plaster boar"
    },
    "content": "IS 2095 (Part 1): 1996 Gypsum Plaster Boards\nPART 1 PLAIN GYPSUM PLASTER BOARDS\n(Second Revision)\n4. General— Gypsum plaster boards consist of a\ngypsum plaster core with or without fibre encased in and firmly bonded to strong durable paper liners to form\nrectangular boards. Core shall be dried across full width.\nThe face and back papers shall be securely bonded to the core. The paper surfaces may vary according to the\nuse of the particular type of board, and the core may contain additive to impart additional properties. The\nlongitudinal edges are paper covered and profiled to suit the application.\nThe paper covered edges of gypsum wall boards are square, tapered, bevelled or rounded. The paper covered\nedges of gypsum baseboard are square or rounded. The ends of gypsum plaster board are square-cut.\n5. Requirements\n5.1Dimensions — See Table 1.\n*Gypsum plaster boards : Part 1Plain gypsum plaster boards (second revision)\n+ Specification for by product gypsum for use in plaster block and board.\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF GYPSUM PLASTER BOARDS\nType of Width Length Thickness\nBoard mm\nmm mm\n(1)\n(2)\n(3) (4)\nWallboard\n600, 900 and 1 200 1 800 to 3 600 in steps of 100 mm 9.5, 12.5, 15, 19, 23 and 25\nBaseboard\n400 and 900\n1 200, 1 500 and 1 800 9.5 and 12.5\n5.2 Tolerance — Shall be as given below—\nType\nTolerance in mm\nWidth Length Thickness\nGypsum Wallboard 0\n0\n± 0.6 - 5 - 6\nGypsum Baseboard— a) Non-Perforated 0\n0\n± 0.6\n- 8\n- 6 b) Perforated\n0\n0\n± 0.6\n- 8\n-16\n5.3Breaking Load (Transverse Strength)\n— See Table 2.\nTABLE 2 BREAKING LOAD OF GYPSUM\nPLASTER BOARDS.\nType of Board Thickness Breaking Load, Min Transverse Longitudinal Direction\nDirection mm N N (1) (2) (3) (4) Plaster board\n9.5 140 360 12.5 180 500 15.0\n220 650 19.0\n250 750 23.0\n300 850 25.0\n380 1,000 Base board 9.5\n125 180 12.5 165 235 Note — For methods of tests, refer to IS 2542 (Part 2/Sec 1 to 8) : 1981 Methods of test for gypsum plaster, concrete and product:\nPART 2 Gypsum products (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2095 (Part 1) : 1996 Specification for gypsum plaster boards: Part 1 Plain gypsum plaster boards (second revision).\n5.4 Water Absorption — Shall be subject to mutual\nagreement between purchaser and manufacturer.\n5.5 Mass of Plaster — minimum quantity of mass\nof plaster per sq. m of board of 12 mm thickness shall not be less than 9.4 kg.\n5.6 Taper Profile — Taper width shall be 50 to 65\nmm, and depth 0.8 to 2.0 mm. TABLE 1. DIMENSIONS AND OTHER PROPERTIES OF FIBROUS GYPSUM\nPLASTER BOARD AND GRG BOARD\nBoard\nThickness\nLength\nWidth\nMass of Plaster\nDensity (T) (L) (W) per m2 of Board, kg kg/m3 mm\nmm mm\nMin\nMin\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\nFibrous\n12\n1200\n400\n10\n834\nGypsum\n1500\n600\nPlaster\n1800\n900\nBoard\n1200\nGRG Board\n4,6\n2000\n1000\n4-10\n2500\n8,10 and\n1200\n6-15\n12\n3000\n8-20\n10-25\n12-30"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2095 (Part 3): 1996",
    "title": "Gypsum Plaster Boards",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "summary": "Covers the method of manufacture, tests and sampling of fibrous gypsum plaster boards and glass fibre reinforced gypsum (GRG) boards for use as a linning material for ceiling, dry surfacing material for walls, door panels or for partitions.",
    "keywords": [
      "plaster",
      "gypsum",
      "boards",
      "flexural",
      "grg",
      "anhydrous",
      "hemihydrate"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the classification and chemical and physical requirements for gypsum building plasters which possess a definite set due to hydration of calcium sulphate, anhydrous or hemihydrate, to form gypsum and are used in the manufacture of gypsum building products. Premixed lightweight building plasters are not included. 2. Classification a) Plaster of paris, b) Retarded hemihydrate gypsum plaster",
      "Materials": "See 2 of the standard",
      "Method Of Manufacture": "See 5 of the standard. 4. Dimensions and Tolerances 4.1 Shape — The boards shall be square or rectangular in shape. 4.2 Dimensions 4.3 Mass of Plaster — See Table 1. 4.4 Density 4.5 Tolerances a) Length + 0 mm - 6 b) Width + 0 mm - 5 c) Thickness ± 1.0 mm 5. Finish The surface of the boards shall be true and free from imperfection that would render the board unfit for use. The edge shall be straight and the corners shall be square. 6. Tests 6.1 Visual Inspection — All boards shall be sound, free from cracks, broken-edges and such other imperfections that would render them unfit for use. 6.2 Thickness — To be measured as per IS 2542. 6.3 Transverse/Flexural Strength 6.3.1 Deflection shall not exceed 19 mm under a load of 340 N. 6.3.2 Flexural strength — See Table 2. 6.3.3 Impact strength — ",
      "Chemical Requirements": "See Table 1 TABLE 1 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION Requirement Sl. Particulars Plaster of Paris Retarded Anhydrous Keene’sPlaster No. Hemihydrate Gypsum Plaster Gypsum Plaster (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) SO3, percent by mass, Min 35 35 40 47 (ii) CaO, percent by mass, Min 2/3 of SO3content 2/3 of SO3content 2/3 of SO3content 2/3 of SO3content iii) Soluble magnesium 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 salts, expressed as percentage of MgO, Max iv) Soluble sodium salts, 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 expresed as percentage of Na2 O, Max v) Loss on ignition, Not greater Not greater 3.0 Max 2.0 Max percent by mass than 9 than 9 and less and less than 4 than 4 vi) Free lime, Min – 3* — — percent * Applicable to metal lathing plaster"
    },
    "content": "IS 2095 (Part 3): 1996 Gypsum Plaster Boards\nPART 3 REINFORCED GYPSUM PLASTER BOARDS\n(Second Revision)\n1. Scope — Covers the method of manufacture, tests\nand sampling of fibrous gypsum plaster boards and glass fibre reinforced gypsum (GRG) boards for use as a\nlinning material for ceiling, dry surfacing material for walls, door panels or for partitions.\n2. Materials — See 2 of the standard\n3. Method of Manufacture — See 5 of the\nstandard.\n4. Dimensions and Tolerances\n4.1 Shape — The boards shall be square or rectangular\nin shape.\n4.2 Dimensions\n4.3 Mass of Plaster\n— See Table 1.\n4.4 Density\n4.5 Tolerances\na)\nLength\n+ 0 mm\n- 6 b)\nWidth\n+ 0 mm\n- 5 c)\nThickness\n± 1.0 mm\n5. Finish\nThe surface of the boards shall be true and free from imperfection that would render the board unfit for use.\nThe edge shall be straight and the corners shall be square.\n6. Tests\n6.1 Visual Inspection — All boards shall be sound,\nfree from cracks, broken-edges and such other imperfections that would render them unfit for use.\n6.2 Thickness — To be measured as per IS 2542.\n6.3 Transverse/Flexural Strength\n6.3.1 Deflection shall not exceed 19 mm under a load of 340 N.\n6.3.2 Flexural strength — See Table 2.\n6.3.3 Impact strength — When tested by Charpy test, shall have a value as per Table 2.\n6.4 Jolting test — None of the sample should show\ncrack or chipping off from the surface before 80 cycles of jolting. Note — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B on the standard, relevant parts of IS 2380 Methods of test for wood\nparticle boards and boards from other lignocellulosic matarials, IS 2542 (Part 2): Methods of tests for gupsum plaster, concrete and products: Part 2 gypsum products.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2095 (Part 3) : 1996 Specification for gypsum plaster boards: Part 3 Reinforced gypsum plaster boards (second revision).\nTABLE 2 FLEXURAL AND IMPACT STRENGTH OF GRG BOARDS.\nAverage Flexural\nMinimum Flexural\nAverage Impact\nMinimum Impact\nStrength\nStrength on\nStrength\nStrength on\nMpa\nEither Side\nN/mm2\nEither Side\nMpa\nN/mm2\nN/mm2\n18\n15\n17\n14\n6.5 Free Moisture — Shall not exceed 2 percent.\n6.6 Surface hardness— Impression by a steel ball of\n10 mm kept on the board for 5 minutes, shall not exceed\n8 mm in diameter.\n6.7 Water Absorption— Shall not exceed 15 percent in\n24 hours.\n6.8 Swelling— Fro GRG when tested as per IS 2380\n(Part 17) the value shall not exceed 0.5 percent in 24 hours.\n6.9 Fibre content — Shall be determined as per\nIS 2542 (Part 1) Type I Under coat —\n1) Browning plaster,\n2) Metal lathing plaster\nType II Final coat plaster —\n1) Finish plaster,\n2) Board finish plaster,\n3) Anhydrous gypsum plasters are for finishing only, and\n4) Keene’s plaster is for finishing only.\n3. Chemical Requirements - See Table 1\nTABLE 1 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION Requirement\nSl.\nParticulars\nPlaster of Paris Retarded\nAnhydrous Keene’sPlaster\nNo.\nHemihydrate\nGypsum Plaster\nGypsum Plaster\n(1)\n(2)\n(3) (4)\n(5)\n(6)\ni)\nSO3, percent by mass, Min\n35 35\n40\n47\n(ii)\nCaO, percent by mass, Min\n2/3 of SO3content 2/3 of SO3content\n2/3 of SO3content\n2/3 of SO3content iii)\nSoluble magnesium\n0.3 0.3\n0.3\n0.3 salts, expressed as\npercentage of MgO,\nMax iv)\nSoluble sodium salts,\n0.3 0.3\n0.3\n0.3 expresed as percentage\nof Na2 O, Max v)\nLoss on ignition,\nNot greater Not greater\n3.0 Max\n2.0 Max\npercent by mass than 9 than 9 and less and less than 4 than 4 vi)\nFree lime, Min\n– 3*\n—\n—\npercent\n* Applicable to metal lathing plaster\n1. Scope — Covers the classification and chemical\nand physical requirements for gypsum building plasters which possess a definite set due to hydration of calcium\nsulphate, anhydrous or hemihydrate, to form gypsum and are used in the manufacture of gypsum building\nproducts. Premixed lightweight building plasters are not included.\n2. Classification a) Plaster of paris, b) Retarded hemihydrate gypsum plaster"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2547 (Part 1): 1976",
    "title": "Gypsum Building Plasters",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements for premixed lightweight plaster consisting esentially of gypsum plaster and lightweight aggregate used in general building operations.",
    "keywords": [
      "plaster",
      "plasters",
      "gypsum",
      "pats",
      "popping",
      "indentation",
      "set"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Physical Requirements": "See Table 2. Purity — No material shall be added to gypsum plasters except those which are necessary to control the setting, such as sodium citrate, break drown products of keratin, potassium sulphate, sodium sulplate alum and zine sulphate; or working characteristics such as alkyl - Aryl sulphonate or to impart anti-corrosion such as nitrates and nitrites of alkali metals or fungicidal properties. Note — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard, IS 1288:1982 Methods of test for mineral gypsum (second revision) and relevant parts of IS 2542 Methods of test for gypsum plaster, concrete and products. For detailed information, refer to IS 2547 (Part 1):1976 Specification for gypsum building plaster: Part 1 Excluding premixed light weight plasters .",
      "Scope": "Requirements for premixed lightweight plaster consisting esentially of gypsum plaster and lightweight aggregate used in general building operations. 2. Classification Type A – Under coat plasters — a) Browning plaster, b) Metal lathing paster, c) Bonding plaster Type B – Final coat plaster — Finish plaster.",
      "Chemical Requirements": "See Table 1. TABLE -1 PROPERTIES OF DIFFERENT TYPES OF PLASTERS. SL.No. Particulars UnderCoat Plasters Final Coat Plasters (TypeA) (Type B) Browning Metal Bonding Finish Plaster Lathing Plaster Plaster Plaster (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) I) Sum of soluble sodium and 0.25 0.25 No upper limit 0.25 magnesium salt contents, expressed as percentages of sodium oxide (Na2O), and magnesium oxide (MgO) by mass, Max ii) Dry bulk density, Max, kg/m3 640 770 770 – iii) Dry set density, Max, kg/m3 850 1 040 1 040 – iv) Compressive strength, Min, N/mm2 0.93 1.0 1.0 – v) Free lime content, by percent, – 2½ – – mass, Min, vi) Mechanical resistance – – – Diameter of the indentation shall not be less than 4 mm and not more than 5.5 mm."
    },
    "content": "IS 2547 (Part 1): 1976 Gypsum Building Plasters\nPART 1 EXCLUDING PREMIXED LIGHTWEIGHT PLASTERS\n(First Revision) TABLE 2 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENT\nRequirements\nS.LNo. Particulars\nPlaster of Paris Anhydrous\nKeene’s Plaster Gypsum Plaster\nType A (short)\nType B (long time setting\ntime setting\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\ni)\nSetting time\n–\n–\n–\n–\nminutes: a)Plaster sand\n45-120\n120-900\n–\n–\nmixture b)Neat\n20-40\n60-180\n20-360\n20-360 plaster\nii)\nTransverse\n5 4*\n–\n–\nstrength kg/cm2,Min\niii)\nSoundness\nSet plaster pats\nSet plaster pats\nSet plaster pats\nSet plaster pats shall not show\nshall not show shall not show\nshall not show any sign of\nany sign of any sign of\nany sign of disintegration,\ndisintegration, disintegration,\ndisintegration, popping or\npopping or popping or\npopping or pitting\npitting pitting\npitting iv)\nMechanical\n–\n†Diameter of\nDiameter of the\nDiameter of the resistance of\nthe indentation indentation shall\nindentation set neat\nshall not be not be more than\nshall plaster\nless than 3 mm\n4 mm not be more\nand not more than 3.5 mm\nthan 4.5 mm v)\nResidue on 90\n5.0\n5.0*\n2.0\n2.0 mm sieve\n(1.0) † percenage, Max\nvi)\nExpansion on\n––\n0.20 at 24 h ‡\n–\n0.5 at 96 h setting\npercentage, Max\n*\nApplicable to undercoat plasters only.\n†\nApplicable to final coat plasters.\n‡\nApplicable to board finish plasters only.\n4. Physical Requirements — See Table 2.\nPurity — No material shall be added to gypsum plasters except those which are necessary to control the setting,\nsuch as sodium citrate, break drown products of keratin, potassium sulphate, sodium sulplate alum and zine\nsulphate; or working characteristics such as alkyl - Aryl sulphonate or to impart anti-corrosion such as nitrates\nand nitrites of alkali metals or fungicidal properties.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard, IS 1288:1982 Methods of test for mineral gypsum\n(second revision) and relevant parts of IS 2542 Methods of test for gypsum plaster, concrete and products.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2547 (Part 1):1976 Specification for gypsum building plaster: Part 1 Excluding premixed light weight plasters . 1. Scope — Requirements for premixed lightweight\nplaster consisting esentially of gypsum plaster and lightweight aggregate used in general building\noperations.\n2. Classification\nType A – Under coat plasters —\na) Browning plaster, b) Metal lathing paster,\nc) Bonding plaster Type B – Final coat plaster — Finish plaster.\n3. Physical and Chemical Requirements —\nSee Table 1. TABLE -1 PROPERTIES OF DIFFERENT TYPES OF PLASTERS.\nSL.No. Particulars UnderCoat Plasters\nFinal Coat Plasters (TypeA) (Type B)\nBrowning\nMetal\nBonding\nFinish\nPlaster\nLathing Plaster\nPlaster\nPlaster\n(1) (2)\n(3)\n(4) (5) (6)\nI)\nSum of soluble sodium and\n0.25\n0.25 No upper limit\n0.25 magnesium salt contents,\nexpressed as percentages of sodium oxide (Na2O), and\nmagnesium oxide (MgO)\nby mass, Max ii)\nDry bulk density, Max, kg/m3\n640\n770\n770\n–\niii)\nDry set density, Max, kg/m3\n850\n1 040\n1 040\n–\niv)\nCompressive strength, Min, N/mm2\n0.93\n1.0\n1.0\n–\nv)\nFree lime content, by percent,\n–\n2½\n–\n–\nmass, Min, vi)\nMechanical resistance\n–\n–\n–\nDiameter of the indentation shall not be\nless than 4 mm and not more than 5.5 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2547 (Part 2): 1976",
    "title": "Gypsum Building Plaster",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "summary": "PART 2 PREMIXED LIGHTWEIGHT PLASTERS (First Revision) Note—For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard and relevant parts of IS 2542 Methods of test for Gypsum plaster, Concrete and Products. For detailed information, refer to IS 2547 (Part 2): 1976 Specification for gypsum building plasters: Part 2 Premixed lightweight plasters .",
    "keywords": [
      "plasters",
      "premixed",
      "lightweight",
      "gypsum",
      "plaster",
      "relevant",
      "products"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 2547 (Part 2): 1976 Gypsum Building Plaster\nPART 2 PREMIXED LIGHTWEIGHT PLASTERS\n(First Revision)\nNote—For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard and relevant parts of IS 2542 Methods of test for Gypsum\nplaster, Concrete and Products.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2547 (Part 2): 1976 Specification for gypsum building plasters: Part 2 Premixed lightweight plasters ."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2849: 1983",
    "title": "Non-Load Bearing Gypsum Partition Blocks (Solid And Hollow Types)",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements for gypsum partition blocks for use in non-load bearing construction in the interior of buildings and for the protection of columns, elevator shafts, etc, against fire.",
    "keywords": [
      "gypsum",
      "plaster",
      "fibrous",
      "furnace",
      "block",
      "scoring",
      "combustibility"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and tests for calcined gypsum plaster used in manufacturing fibrous plaster boards covered in IS 8273:1984*. Note — Gypsum building plasters are used extensively for general building operations and for the manufacture of preformed gypsum building products which have the specific advantages of lightness and high fire resistance. Fibrous plaster boards are used as coverings for walls, ceilings and partitions in normally dry environments in buildings.",
      "Types And Shapes": "Block may be solid type or hollow type and shall be truly rectangular in shape with straight and square edges and true surfaces. 3. Requirements 3.1 Dimensions 3.2 Tolerances — Length ± 3.0 mm Height and Breadth ± 1.5 mm 3.3 Scoring — When the surfaces of the block are scored, the scoring shall not reduce materially the thickness of the shell. Surfaces of the block shall be such that they afford a suitable bond with plaster.",
      "Compressive Strength": "Shall be not less than 2.0 N/mm2 based on gross area.",
      "General": "Combustibility — When tested in accordance with 6.2.1 of the standard no block shall: a) Cause the temperature readings of the furnace thermocouple to rise by more than 500C above the initial furnace temperature, b) Cause the temperature readings of the specimen thermocouple to rise by more than 500C above the initial furnace temperature, or c) Flame for more than 10 seconds.",
      "Visual Appearance": "Shall be sound, free from cracks, broken edges and other imperfections. Note — For the Methods of tests, refer to IS 2542 (Part 2)-1981 Methods of test for Gypsum plaster, concrete and products- Part 2 gypsum products (first revision) and IS 3808:1979 Method of test for non-combustibility of building materials (first revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 2849:1983 Specification for non- load bearing gypsum partition blocks (solid and hollow types) (first revision). Length Height Breadth Hollow Blocks Side and Edge thickness, Min Circular Holes Elliptical or Rectangular Holes L H B t t 700 Max in 700 Max in 60 – – multiples multiples 75 15 20 of 100 of 100 80 – – 100 20 20 125 25 30 150 15 20 Note—",
      "All Dimensions In Millimeters": "2. Dimensions other than length, height and breadth for guidance only",
      "Chemical Composition": "The plaster shall consist essentially of calcium sulphate hemihydrate ( ) . And shall contain not less than 42 percent sulphur trioxide (SO3) * Fibrous gypsum plaster boards (first revision). Note — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to E of the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 8272:1984 Specification for gypsum plaster for use in the manufactures of fibrous plaster boards (first revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 2849: 1983 Non-Load Bearing Gypsum Partition Blocks (Solid And Hollow Types)\n(First Revision)\n1. Scope — Requirements for gypsum partition blocks\nfor use in non-load bearing construction in the interior of buildings and for the protection of columns, elevator\nshafts, etc, against fire.\n2. Types and Shapes — Block may be solid type or\nhollow type and shall be truly rectangular in shape with straight and square edges and true surfaces.\n3. Requirements\n3.1 Dimensions\n3.2 Tolerances —\nLength ± 3.0 mm Height and Breadth ± 1.5 mm\n3.3 Scoring — When the surfaces of the block are\nscored, the scoring shall not reduce materially the thickness of the shell. Surfaces of the block shall be\nsuch that they afford a suitable bond with plaster.\n4. Compressive Strength — Shall be not less\nthan 2.0 N/mm2 based on gross area.\n5. Non-Combustibility — When tested in\naccordance with 6.2.1 of the standard no block shall:\na)\nCause the temperature readings of the furnace thermocouple to rise by more than\n500C above the initial furnace temperature, b)\nCause the temperature readings of the specimen thermocouple to rise by more\nthan 500C above the initial furnace temperature, or\nc)\nFlame for more than 10 seconds.\n6. Visual Inspection — Shall be sound, free from\ncracks, broken edges and other imperfections.\nNote — For the Methods of tests, refer to IS 2542 (Part 2)-1981 Methods of test for Gypsum plaster, concrete and products-\nPart 2 gypsum products (first revision) and IS 3808:1979 Method of test for non-combustibility of building materials (first revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2849:1983 Specification for non- load bearing gypsum partition blocks (solid and hollow types) (first revision).\nLength Height Breadth\nHollow Blocks Side and\nEdge thickness, Min\nCircular Holes Elliptical or Rectangular Holes L\nH B t t\n700 Max in\n700 Max in\n60\n–\n–\nmultiples multiples\n75\n15\n20 of 100\nof 100\n80\n–\n–\n100\n20\n20\n125\n25\n30\n150\n15\n20\nNote— 1. All dimensions in millimeters — 2. Dimensions other than length, height and breadth for guidance only 1. Scope — Requirements and the methods of\nsampling and tests for calcined gypsum plaster used in manufacturing fibrous plaster boards\ncovered in IS 8273:1984*.\nNote — Gypsum building plasters are used extensively for\ngeneral building operations and for the manufacture of preformed gypsum building products which have the specific advantages of lightness and high fire resistance.\nFibrous plaster boards are used as coverings for walls, ceilings and partitions in normally dry environments in\nbuildings.\n2. Chemical Composition — The plaster shall\nconsist essentially of calcium sulphate hemihydrate\n( ) . And shall contain not less than 42 percent sulphur trioxide (SO3)\n* Fibrous gypsum plaster boards (first revision).\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to E of the standard\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8272:1984 Specification for gypsum plaster for use in the manufactures of fibrous plaster boards (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8272: 1984",
    "title": "Gypsum Plaster For Use In The",
    "category": "Gypsum Building Materials",
    "summary": "Details of the zonal distribution of common commercial timbers of India, classified according to their various uses, and information on the availability of these timbers and on some of their important properties.",
    "keywords": [
      "pradesh",
      "timber",
      "zone",
      "north",
      "west",
      "coniferous",
      "logs"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Details of the zonal distribution of common commercial timbers of India, classified according to their various uses, and information on the availability of these timbers and on some of their important properties.",
      "Uses": "The uses are classified under the following categories: a) Constructional purposes, including building construction, houseposts, beams, rafters, cart building, bridges, piles, poles and railway sleepers; b) Furniture and cabinet making; c) Light packing cases; d) Heavy packing cases (for machinery and similar stores); e) Agricultural implements and tool handles; f) Turnery atricles and toys; and g) Veneers and plywood",
      "Zones": "The territories comprising India, and Bhutan have been divided into five zones as indicated on the Map (See page 85 of the standard), which comprise roughly the following areas: I North Zone Jammu and Kashmir, Punjab, Himachal Pradesh, Delhi, Uttar Pradesh and Rajasthan II East Zone A s s a m , M a n i p u r , T r i p u r a , WestBengal, Bihar, Orissa, Sikkim, Bhutan, Andamans, Arunachal and Meghalaya and Nagaland III Centre Zone Madhya Pradesh, Vidharbha areas of Maharashtra State and the North East part of Andhra Pradesh (Godavari delta area) IV West Zone Maharashtra State (except Vidharbha areas), Gujarat and North West part of Karnataka V South Zone Tamil Nadu, Andhra Pradesh (except the Godavari delta area), Kerala and Karnataka (Except North West part)"
    },
    "content": "IS 8272: 1984 Gypsum Plaster For Use In The\nMANUFACTURE OF FIBROUS PLASTER BOARDS\n(First Revision)\n3. Properties\n3.1 Fineness — Residue retained on 600 micron\nsieve shall not be more than 1 percent by mass.\n3.2 Compressive Strength — Compressive strength\nof the plaster, shall not be less than\n7.6 N/mm2.\n3.3 Initial Setting Time—Shall be between 20 and\n35 minutes.\nO\nH\nCaSO\n2\n4 2\n1 ο 2.1\nSECTION 6\nTIMBER CONTENTS\nTitle\nPage\nTIMBER CLASSIFICATION\nIS\n399 : 1963\nClassification of commercial timber and their zonal distribution(revised)\n6.3\nIS : 12896 : 1990\nIndian timber for door and window shutters and frames—Classification\n6.5\nCONVERSION AND GRADING\nIS\n190 : 1991\nConiferous sawn timber (baulks and scantling) (fourth revision)\n6.7\nIS\n876 : 1992\nWood poles for overhead power and telecommunication lines (third revision)\n6.8\nIS\n1326 : 1992\nNon-coniferous sawn timber (baulks and scantling) (second revision) 6.10\nIS\n1331 : 1971\nCut sizes of timber (second revision)\n6.11\nIS\n2372 : 2004\nTimber for cooling towers (Second revision)\n6.13\nIS\n3337 : 1978\nBallies for general purposes (first revision)\n6.14\nIS\n3629 : 1986\nStructural timber in buildings (first revision)\n6.15\nIS\n3731: 1985\nTeak squares (first revision)\n6.17\nIS\n4891 : 1988\nPreferred cut sizes of sturctral timber (first revision)\n6.18\nIS\n4895 : 1985\nTeak logs (first revision)\n6.20\nIS\n5246 : 2000\nConiferous logs (first revision)\n6.21\nIS\n6056 : 1970\nJointed wood poles for over head power and telecommunication lines\n6.22\nIS\n7308 : 1999\nNon-coniferous logs (first revision)\n6.24\nIS\n10394 : 1982\nWooden sleepers for railway track 6.25 1. Scope— Details of the zonal distribution of\ncommon commercial timbers of India, classified according to their various uses, and information on the\navailability of these timbers and on some of their important properties.\n2. Uses—The uses are classified under the following\ncategories:\na) Constructional purposes, including building construction, houseposts, beams, rafters, cart\nbuilding, bridges, piles, poles and railway sleepers;\nb) Furniture and cabinet making;\nc) Light packing cases;\nd) Heavy packing cases (for machinery and similar stores);\ne) Agricultural implements and tool handles;\nf)\nTurnery atricles and toys; and g) Veneers and plywood\n3. Zones— The territories comprising India, and\nBhutan have been divided into five zones as indicated on the Map (See page 85 of the standard), which\ncomprise roughly the following areas:\nI\nNorth Zone\nJammu and Kashmir, Punjab,\nHimachal Pradesh, Delhi, Uttar\nPradesh and Rajasthan\nII East Zone\nA s s a m , M a n i p u r , T r i p u r a ,\nWestBengal, Bihar, Orissa, Sikkim,\nBhutan, Andamans, Arunachal and\nMeghalaya and Nagaland\nIII Centre Zone\nMadhya Pradesh, Vidharbha areas of\nMaharashtra State and the North\nEast part of Andhra Pradesh (Godavari delta area)\nIV West Zone\nMaharashtra State (except Vidharbha areas), Gujarat and North West part\nof Karnataka\nV South Zone\nTamil Nadu, Andhra Pradesh (except the Godavari delta area), Kerala and\nKarnataka (Except North West part)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 399: 1963",
    "title": "Classification Of Commercial Timbers And Their Zonal Distribution",
    "category": "Timber",
    "summary": "(Revised) 4. Classification — Tables I, II, III, IV, and V of the standard list respectively important timbers commercially available in the five zones described under 3 and classified according to their uses given under 2. Against each species of timber, the availability in that zone, average weight and the range of weight of air-seasoned timber in kg/m3 and lb/ft3, durability, treatability, refractoriness to air seasoning and strength coefficient are given 4.1 Availability— The availability of",
    "keywords": [
      "timbers",
      "refractoriness",
      "heartwood",
      "tonnes",
      "life",
      "availability",
      "treatable"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Classification": "Tables I, II, III, IV, and V of the standard list respectively important timbers commercially available in the five zones described under 3 and classified according to their uses given under 2. Against each species of timber, the availability in that zone, average weight and the range of weight of air-seasoned timber in kg/m3 and lb/ft3, durability, treatability, refractoriness to air seasoning and strength coefficient are given 4.1 Availability— The availability of timbers is categorized under three classes indicated below: X— Most common, 1 415 m3 (1 000 tonnes) and more per year Y— Common, 355 m3 (250 tonnes) to 1 415 m3 (1 000 tonnes) per year Z— Less common, below 355 m3 (250 tonnes) per year 4.2 Weight — The figure for average weight and range of weight per cubic metre (or ft3) at 12"
    },
    "content": "IS 399: 1963 Classification Of Commercial Timbers And Their Zonal Distribution\n(Revised)\n4. Classification — Tables I, II, III, IV, and V of the\nstandard list respectively important timbers commercially available in the five zones described under 3 and\nclassified according to their uses given under 2. Against each species of timber, the availability in that zone,\naverage weight and the range of weight of air-seasoned timber in kg/m3 and lb/ft3, durability, treatability,\nrefractoriness to air seasoning and strength coefficient are given\n4.1 Availability— The availability of timbers is\ncategorized under three classes indicated below:\nX— Most common, 1 415 m3 (1 000 tonnes) and more per year\nY— Common, 355 m3 (250 tonnes) to 1 415 m3 (1 000 tonnes) per year\nZ— Less common, below 355 m3 (250 tonnes) per year\n4.2 Weight — The figure for average weight and range\nof weight per cubic metre (or ft3) at 12 percent moisture content for all the timbers have been given. The range\nof weights is given below the average weight in parentheses.\n4.3 Durability — The timbers are classified for\ndurability according to the average life of these test specimens as follows:\nHigh\n–\nTimbers having average life of 120 months and over\nModerate –\nTimbers having average life of less than 120 months but of 60 months or over\nLow\n–\nTimbers having averge life of less than 60 months.\n4.4 Treatability — The classification is based to\nrepresent approximately the degree of resistance offered by the heartwood of a species to the penetration of the\npreservative fluid under working pressure of\n10.5 kgf/cm2. The treatability of timbers has been classified as follows—\na)\nHeartwood easily treatable b)\nHeartwood treatable, but complete penetration of preservative not always obtained\nc)\nHeartwood only partially treatable d)\nHeartwood refractory to treatment e)\nHeartwood very refractory to treatment penetration of preservative being practically nil from side or end\n4.5 Refractoriness to Air Seasoning— The timbers are\nclassified, as stated below, under three categories, depending upon their behaviour with respect to\ncracking and splitting during normal air-seasoning practice suitable for the species concerned:High\nrefractoriness (indicated ‘High’ in the tables) Moderate refractoriness (indicated “moderate’ in the tables), and\nLow refractoriness (indicated ‘Low’ in the Tables).\n4.6 Comparative Strength Coefficients — The\nfigure for comparative strength coefficients for various uses for all the timbers have been arrived at by suitably\ngrouping the various important mechanical properties that come into play for any particular use and giving\ndue weightage to the relative importance of these properties.\nNote1 — For classification of timbers according to their uses for various zone, refer to Table I to V of the standard.\nNote 2 —For key for field indentification of commercial timber ( soft woods and hard woods) based on their general properties, refers\nto IS 4970 :1973. key for indentification of commercial timbers ( first revision) their zonal distibution (revised)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 399: 1963 Specification for classification of commercial timbers and their zonal distribution (revised)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12896: 1990",
    "title": "Indian Timbers For Door And",
    "category": "Timber",
    "summary": "Covers the general classification of Indian timber species suitable for door and window shutters and frames. It also lays down the general requirements of quality, seasoning, moisture content and preservative treatmesnt for timber. This standard does not, however, cover the species suitable for flush doors.",
    "keywords": [
      "durability",
      "species",
      "group",
      "treatability",
      "timber",
      "coefficient",
      "refractory"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the requirements of coniferous sawn timber (baulks and scantling) 2. Species Trade Botanical Name Abbreviated Name symbol Chir Pinus roxburghi CHR Cypress Cupressus torulosa CYP Deodar Cedrus deodara DEO Fir Abies spp (Other than Abies densa) FIR Kail Pinus Wallichaiana KAL Khasi pine Pinus insularis KPI Red fir Abies densa RFI Spruce Picea simthiana SPR 3. Dimensions: Length — 1 m, 1.5 m, 2.0 m, 2.5 m, 3.0 m, and 3.5 m Cross Section 200 mm × 100 mm, 200 mm × 125 mm 200 mm × 150 mm, 200 mm × 200 mm 250 mm × 125 mm, 250 mm × 150 mm 300 mm × 150 mm 4. Measurement 4.1 Length — The length shall be measured from end to end in metres correct to 0.01m. 4.2 Width and Thickness — The width and thickness shall be measured at the narrowest place correct to 10 mm. 4.3 Volume — The volume shall ",
      "General Requirements": "The timber of all groups shall be free from decay, fungal growth, boxed heart, splits, pitch pockets or streaks on the exposed faces, and dead and loose knots. Live knots up to 25 mm diameter, not more than 3 per metre; live knots over 25 mm and up to 40 mm diameter not more than 2 per metre shall be permissible, provided they are evenly distributed and badly checked. Surface cracks not exceeding 2 mm in depth in timber intended for shutters and not exceeding 3 mm in depth in timber intended for frames shall be permitted. 3. Timber / Spices 3.1 Shutters—Timbers species for the manufacture of door an window shutters shall have adequate strength, weight, retention of shape, ease of working, ability to season well, finish smooth and shall be sufficiently durable and/or treatable. In addition,",
      "Seasoning And Moisture Content": "a) Class A—Highly refractory, b) Class B— Moderately refractory, and c) Class C—Non-refractory 4.1 Highly Refractory— Timber species are slow and difficult to season, free from surface and end cracking.",
      "Moderately Refractory Timber Species": "May be seasoned free from surface and end cracking within reasonably short periods, given a little protection againt rapid drying conditions. 4.3 Non-refractory Timber Species— May be rapidly seasoned free from surface and end cracking even in the open air and sun. If not rapidly dried, they develop blue stain and mould on the surface.Timber shall be seasoned to moisure content conforming to IS 287:1993* by a suitable process specified in IS 1141:1993+ and moisture content shall be determined as per IS 11215:1991‡.",
      "Durability And Preservative Treatment": "Timbers are classified for durability accoring to the average life of the test specimens as follows: Class Average Life (Months) I 120 and over II 60 and over but less than 120 * Permissible moisture content of timber used for different purposes (third revision). + Seasoning of timber (second revision). ‡ Methods for determination of moisture content of timber products (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 12896 : 1990 Specification for Indian timbers for door and window shutters and frames."
    },
    "content": "IS 12896: 1990 Indian Timbers For Door And\nWINDOW SHUTTERS AND FRAMES – CLASSIFICATION\n1. Scope – Covers the general classification of Indian\ntimber species suitable for door and window shutters and frames. It also lays down the general requirements of\nquality, seasoning, moisture content and preservative treatmesnt for timber. This standard does not, however,\ncover the species suitable for flush doors.\n2. General Requirements—The timber of all\ngroups shall be free from decay, fungal growth, boxed heart, splits, pitch pockets or streaks on the exposed\nfaces, and dead and loose knots. Live knots up to 25 mm diameter, not more than 3 per metre; live knots over\n25 mm and up to 40 mm diameter not more than 2 per metre shall be permissible, provided they are evenly\ndistributed and badly checked. Surface cracks not exceeding 2 mm in depth in timber intended for shutters\nand not exceeding 3 mm in depth in timber intended for frames shall be permitted.\n3. Timber / Spices\n3.1 Shutters—Timbers species for the manufacture of\ndoor an window shutters shall have adequate strength, weight, retention of shape, ease of working, ability to\nseason well, finish smooth and shall be sufficiently durable and/or treatable. In addition, for hgih class\npolished door shutters, it shall have excellent appearance and figure and shall have good gloss after polishing.\nThe timber species shall be classified into the following four groups based on strength coefficient, weight\n(expressed as a percentage of teak), durability and treatability, appearance, figure and polish adaptability,\nkeeping also in view their seasoning behaviour, retention of shape and workability.\n3.1.1\nSuper Group—\nStrength – More than or equal to 80 coefficient\nWeight – Between 75-115\nDurability – I or II\nIn addition, these shall be excellent in figure appearance, smooth finishing and polishing. Species of\nthis group are given in Annex A of the standard.\n3.1.2\nGroup I —\nStrength coefficient : More than or equal to 80 Weight\n– Between 75-115 Durability\n– I or II\nIn addition,these shall be good to very good in figure appearace and finishing. Species of this group are given\nin Annex B of the standard\n3.1.3\nGroup II — Strength coefficient : More than or equal to 70 Weight\n– 70-125 Durability\n– I, II or III (with treatbility\n(a), (b) or (c) see 5)\nSpecies of this groups are given in Annex C of the standard. Species which are comparable to Group\nII species in respect of strength, weight, seasoning, working and finishing characters but fall short only in\ntreatability, that is, belong to durability III, with treatability (d) or (e) or whose durability/treatability\ndata are not available shall be grouped in to Group II(A).\nThese species are also given in Annex C of the standardd. Doors made out of the timbers of Group\nII(A) will require special preservative treatment after fabrication.\n3.1.4 Group III — Strength : More than or equal to 60 coefficient Weight\n: 65-125 Durability\n: Any class or not know\nSpecies of this group are given in Annex D of the standard. Doors made out of the species in this group\nthat have durability/treatability Class III (d or e) or whose durability/treatability is not known will require\nspecial preservative treatment after fabrication.\n3.2 Frames —Timber species suitable for the\nmanufacture of door and window frames shall be classified into following three groups depending upon\nstrentgth coefficient, durability and treatability. III\nLess than 60\nThe treatability of heartwood of different species shall be classified into 5 grades [(a) to (e)], each grade being\ndefined as indicated below:\na) Heartwood easily treatable;\nb) Heartwood treatable but complete penetration not always obtained, in case where the least dimension is more than\n6 cm;\nc) Heartwood only partially treatable;\nd) Heartwood refractory to treatment; and e) Heartwood very refractory to treatment penetration of\npreservative being practically nil even from the ends.\nSapwood of even durability Class I species and heartwood and sapwood of durability Class II and III\nspecies shall be pressure treated with suitable preservatives conforming to IS 401: 1982* except in the\nfollowing conditions. Shutters manufactured from species belonging to Super Group in Annex A of the\nstandard having durability Class II shall be pressure/ vacuum treated after complete fabrication only with PCP/\nsolvent system. Shutters manufactured from species belonging to Group II(A) and Group III in Annex C of\nthe standard having durability/tretability III(d) or (e) or whose durability/treatability is not mentioned, shall be\npressure/vacuum treated with PCP/solvent system only after complete fabrication to ensure minimum\npenetration of 2 mm in the finished products. For frames, timber of the species of Group III belonging to durability/\ntreatabilty Class III (c) in Annex F of the standard shall be treated to refusal under pressure when proper\nretentions as in IS 401 : 1982* for ground contact condition are not achievable.\n* Preservation of timber (third revision)\n3.2.1 Group I — Strength coefficient : 80 or more Durability\n: I\nSpecies of this group are given in Annex E of the standard.\n3.2.2 Group II —\nStrength coefficient : 70 or more\nDurability : I, II [with treatability\n(a), (b), or (c) or III with treatability (a), or (b)]\n3.2.3 Group III—\nStrength coefficient —65 or more\nDurability— I, II (with any treatability class) or III [with treatability (a), (b) or (c)]\nSpecies of this group are given in Annex G of the standard.\n4. Seasoning and Moisture content —\na) Class A—Highly refractory, b) Class B— Moderately refractory, and\nc) Class C—Non-refractory\n4.1 Highly Refractory— Timber species are slow and\ndifficult to season, free from surface and end cracking.\n4.2. Moderately Refractory Timber Species— May be seasoned free from surface and end cracking within\nreasonably short periods, given a little protection againt rapid drying conditions.\n4.3 Non-refractory Timber Species— May be rapidly\nseasoned free from surface and end cracking even in the open air and sun. If not rapidly dried, they develop\nblue stain and mould on the surface.Timber shall be seasoned to moisure content conforming to IS 287:1993*\nby a suitable process specified in IS 1141:1993+ and moisture content shall be determined as per IS\n11215:1991‡.\n5. Durability and Preservative Treatment–\nTimbers are classified for durability accoring to the average life of the test specimens as follows: Class\nAverage Life (Months) I\n120 and over II\n60 and over but less than 120\n* Permissible moisture content of timber used for different purposes (third revision).\n+ Seasoning of timber (second revision).\n‡\nMethods for determination of moisture content of timber products (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12896 : 1990 Specification for Indian timbers for door and window shutters and frames. 1. Scope— Covers the requirements of coniferous\nsawn timber (baulks and scantling)\n2. Species\nTrade\nBotanical Name Abbreviated\nName symbol\nChir\nPinus roxburghi\nCHR\nCypress\nCupressus torulosa\nCYP\nDeodar\nCedrus deodara\nDEO\nFir\nAbies spp\n(Other than Abies densa)\nFIR\nKail\nPinus Wallichaiana\nKAL\nKhasi pine\nPinus insularis\nKPI\nRed fir\nAbies densa\nRFI\nSpruce\nPicea simthiana\nSPR\n3. Dimensions: Length — 1 m, 1.5 m, 2.0 m, 2.5 m,\n3.0 m, and 3.5 m\nCross Section\n200 mm × 100 mm,\n200 mm × 125 mm\n200 mm × 150 mm,\n200 mm × 200 mm\n250 mm × 125 mm,\n250 mm × 150 mm\n300 mm × 150 mm\n4. Measurement\n4.1 Length — The length shall be measured from end\nto end in metres correct to 0.01m.\n4.2 Width and Thickness — The width and thickness\nshall be measured at the narrowest place correct to\n10 mm.\n4.3 Volume — The volume shall be computed in cubic"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 190: 1991",
    "title": "Coniferous Sawn Timber",
    "category": "Timber",
    "summary": "Covers wood poles made of both broad leaved and coniferous species of timber and suitable for carrying overhead electric power transmission lines, telephone and telegraph circuits.",
    "keywords": [
      "timber",
      "poles",
      "categorized",
      "sawn",
      "ultimate",
      "groups",
      "represented"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Requirements": "Shall be air seasoned to a moisture content not exceeding 20 percent within a depth of 15 mm from the surface, excluding a l e n g t h of 300 mm from each end.",
      "Grading": "The coniferous sawn timber shall be of three grades, that is Special Grade, Grade1 and Grade 2, depending upon prohibited and permissible defects. 7. Prohibited and Permissable Defects 7.1 Prohibited Defects— The sawn timber of all the three grades shall be free from spiral or twisted grain, warp, any kind of decay or live insect attack. Special grade sawn timber shall be free from centre heart, wane, cup shakes, borer holes (dead infestation) sapstain (bluestain) and knots also. Grade 1 shall be free from cup shakes also. 7.2 Permissible Defects—The defects to the extent specified in Table 1 of the standard .",
      "End Coating": "To prevent and to minimize end cracking, splitting, etc, the ends of each baulk and scantling, up to a distance of at least 25 mm more than the length of longest split, shall be adequately coated with any of the materials mentioned in IS 1141 : 1993* *Seasoning timber — Code of Practice. Note — For methods of measurement of defects in timber, refer to IS 3364 (Part 2): 1976 Methods of measurement and evaluation of defects in timber: (Part 2) Converted timber (first revision). For detail information refer to IS 190:1991 Specifications for Coniferous sawn timber (baulks and scantilings) (fourth revision).",
      "Scope": "Covers wood poles made of both broad leaved and coniferous species of timber and suitable for carrying overhead electric power transmission lines, telephone and telegraph circuits.",
      "Species Of Timber": "The species of timber suitable for wood poles are categorized into three groups, as indicated below, based on the modulus of rupture of small clear specimens tested in the green state, that is, more than 25 percent moisture content: Group A - Very strong timber having a modulus of rupture in bending of 85 N/mm2 and over, represented by sal. Group B - Strong timber having a modulus of rupture in bending of 65 to 85 N/mm2, represented by teak. Group C - Moderately strong timber having a modulus of rupture in bending of 45 to 65 N/mm2, represented by chir. The species of timber recommended for wood poles categorized into the three groups are given in Table 1.",
      "Classification": "The wood poles shall be classified in seven classes based on strength (see Note). The dimensions of different classes categorized into three groups see 2 are given in Table 2. Note - Class 1 — Ultimate breaking load not less than 13500 N. Class 2 — Ultimate breaking load not less than 11000 N and not more than 13500 N. Class 3 — Ultimate breaking load not less than 8 500 N and not more than 11 000 N. Class 4 — Ultimate breaking load not less than 7 000 N and not more than8 500 N."
    },
    "content": "IS 190: 1991 Coniferous Sawn Timber\n(BAULKS AND SCANTLINGS)\n(Fourth Revision)\nmetres correct to three places of decimals.\n5. Requirements— Shall be air seasoned to a\nmoisture content not exceeding 20 percent within a depth of 15 mm from the surface, excluding a l e n g t h\nof 300 mm from each end.\n6. Grading— The coniferous sawn timber shall be\nof three grades, that is Special Grade, Grade1 and Grade\n2, depending upon prohibited and permissible defects.\n7. Prohibited and Permissable Defects\n7.1 Prohibited Defects— The sawn timber of all the\nthree grades shall be free from spiral or twisted grain, warp, any kind of decay or live insect attack. Special\ngrade sawn timber shall be free from centre heart, wane, cup shakes, borer holes (dead infestation) sapstain\n(bluestain) and knots also. Grade 1 shall be free from cup shakes also.\n7.2 Permissible Defects—The defects to the extent\nspecified in Table 1 of the standard .\n8. End Coating — To prevent and to minimize end\ncracking, splitting, etc, the ends of each baulk and scantling, up to a distance of at least 25 mm more than\nthe length of longest split, shall be adequately coated with any of the materials mentioned in IS 1141 : 1993*\n*Seasoning timber — Code of Practice.\nNote — For methods of measurement of defects in timber, refer to IS 3364 (Part 2): 1976 Methods of measurement and evaluation\nof defects in timber: (Part 2) Converted timber (first revision).\nFor detail information refer to IS 190:1991 Specifications for Coniferous sawn timber (baulks and scantilings) (fourth revision). 1. Scope—Covers wood poles made of both broad\nleaved and coniferous species of timber and suitable for carrying overhead electric power transmission lines,\ntelephone and telegraph circuits.\n2. Species of Timber — The species of timber\nsuitable for wood poles are categorized into three groups, as indicated below, based on the modulus of rupture of\nsmall clear specimens tested in the green state, that is, more than 25 percent moisture content:\nGroup A -\nVery strong timber having a modulus of rupture in bending of 85 N/mm2 and over,\nrepresented by sal.\nGroup B -\nStrong timber having a modulus of rupture in bending of 65 to 85 N/mm2, represented by\nteak.\nGroup C -\nModerately strong timber having a modulus of rupture in bending of 45 to 65 N/mm2,\nrepresented by chir. The species of timber recommended for wood poles categorized into\nthe three groups are given in Table 1.\n3. Classification — The wood poles shall be\nclassified in seven classes based on strength (see Note).\nThe dimensions of different classes categorized into three groups see 2 are given in Table 2.\nNote -\nClass 1 —\nUltimate breaking load not less than\n13500 N.\nClass 2 —\nUltimate breaking load not less than 11000\nN and not more than 13500 N.\nClass 3 —\nUltimate breaking load not less than\n8 500 N and not more than 11 000 N.\nClass 4 —\nUltimate breaking load not less than 7 000\nN and not more than8 500 N."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 876: 1992",
    "title": "Wood Poles For Over Head Power And Telecommunication Lines",
    "category": "Timber",
    "summary": "Covers the requirements of non- coniferous sawn timber in the form of baulks and scantling.",
    "keywords": [
      "group",
      "class",
      "sawn",
      "correct",
      "timber",
      "ultimate",
      "treatment"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "General Requirements": "After the poles are felled, their butts shall be sawn square. The bark shall be completely removed and all the branch shall be dressed down flush with the stem. The tops shall be levelled in the shape of an inverted ‘V’ for length equal to top diameter or 100 mm which ever is less.",
      "Preliminary Treatment": "Shall be given as soon as possible, a prophylactic treatment to prevent insect attack and fungal damage.",
      "Preservative Treatment": "Shall be treated with a preservative so as to impregnate completely the sapwood and as much of heartwood of non-durable species as possible. 7. Defects 7.1 Defects Totally Prohibited — Dcay, Hallows in the top, cross breaks and large holes. 7.2 Defects permitted to a limited extent-splits, checks, hollow heart, rot, ring shake, grain, insect damage, knots, scars, shape and strightness and short crook (see 10.3 of the standard). Table 2 Classes of Wood Pole Full length Ground Line Minimum Circumference at Ground Line Position Indicated in Col 2 of Pole Position from Butt End Class 1, Group Class 2, Group Class 3, Group Class 4, Group Class 5, Group Class 6, Group Class 7, Group A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C A B C m m mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm (1) (",
      "Scope": "Covers the requirements of non- coniferous sawn timber in the form of baulks and scantling.",
      "Species Of Timber": "Refer to Annex A and Annex B of the standard for the species of timber covered. 3. Dimensions and Measurements 3.1 The sawn timber is generally available in the following lengths and cross sections: Length— 1 m, 1.5 m, 2.0 m, 2.5 m, 3.0 m, and 3.5 m Cross Section– 200 mm × 100 mm, 200 mm × 125 mm 200 mm ×150 mm, 200 mm × 200 mm 250 mm × 125 mm, 250 mm × 150 mm, and 300 mm × 150 mm. 3.2 Length — The length shall be measured from end to end in metres correct to 0.01 m. Any end portion of sawn timber that has become rounded or damaged shall be excluded from length measurement. Width and Thickness — The width and thickness shall be measured at the narrowest place in millimetre correct to 10 mm. Volume — The volume shall be computed in cubic metres correct to three places of decimal by the prod"
    },
    "content": "IS 876: 1992 Wood Poles For Over Head Power And Telecommunication Lines\n(Third Revision)\nClass 5 -\nUltimate breaking load not less than 5 500 N and not more than 7 000 N.\nClass 6 -\nUltimate breaking load not less than 4 000 N and not more than 7 000 N.\nClass 7 -\nUltimate breaking load not less than 3 000 N and not more than 4 000 N.\n4. General Requirement—After the poles are\nfelled, their butts shall be sawn square. The bark shall be completely removed and all the branch shall be\ndressed down flush with the stem. The tops shall be levelled in the shape of an inverted ‘V’ for length equal\nto top diameter or 100 mm which ever is less.\n5. Preliminary Treatment— Shall be given as\nsoon as possible, a prophylactic treatment to prevent insect attack and fungal damage.\n6. Preservative Treatment — Shall be treated\nwith a preservative so as to impregnate completely the sapwood and as much of heartwood of non-durable\nspecies as possible.\n7. Defects\n7.1 Defects Totally Prohibited — Dcay, Hallows in the\ntop, cross breaks and large holes.\n7.2 Defects permitted to a limited extent-splits, checks,\nhollow heart, rot, ring shake, grain, insect damage, knots, scars, shape and strightness and short crook (see 10.3\nof the standard). Table 2 Classes of Wood Pole\nFull length Ground Line\nMinimum Circumference at Ground Line Position Indicated in Col 2 of Pole\nPosition from\nButt End\nClass 1, Group\nClass 2, Group\nClass 3, Group\nClass 4, Group\nClass 5, Group\nClass 6, Group\nClass 7, Group\nA\nB\nC\nA\nB\nC\nA\nB\nC\nA\nB\nC\nA\nB\nC\nA\nB\nC\nA\nB\nC\nm m\nmm mm mm\nmm mm mm\nmm mm\nmm mm\nmm mm\nmm mm mm\nmm mm\nmm mm mm\nmm\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\n(9)\n(10) (11)\n(12)\n(13)\n(14)\n(15) (16) (17)\n(18)\n(19)\n(20) (21) (22) (23)\n6.0\n1.2\n600 630\n700\n550 580\n650\n500\n530\n600\n480\n500\n550\n440\n460 510\n430\n450\n500\n400 410\n450\n7.0\n1.2\n630 670\n740\n600 630\n700\n550\n570\n640\n510\n530\n600\n470\n500 550\n460\n480\n530\n420 440\n490\n7.5 & 8.0\n1.5\n660 700\n780\n630 660\n730\n570\n600\n670\n540\n560\n630\n490\n520 570\n480\n500\n560\n440 460\n510\n9.0\n1.5\n700 740\n820\n660 700\n760\n600\n630\n700\n560\n590\n660\n520\n540 600\n500\n530\n590\n460 480\n530\n10.0\n1.8\n730 760\n840\n680 720\n780\n620\n650\n720\n580\n610\n680\n640\n560 620\n520\n550\n610\n480 500\n530\n12.0\n1.8\n780 820\n920\n730 760\n850\n670\n700\n780\n630\n660\n720\n580\n610 660\n560\n590\n650\n510 540\n590\n14.0\n2.0\n830 870\n960\n780 810\n900\n710\n750\n830\n670\n700\n780\n620\n650 710\n600\n630\n690\n540 570\n630\nMinimum circumference500520 570\n430 460\n510\n410\n430\n480\n360\n380\n420\n300\n320 350\n290\n310\n340\n260 280\n300 at Top for All Heights in mm\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 876: 1992 Specification for wood poles for overhead power and Telecommunication lines (Third Revision).\n{\n{\n{\n{\n{\n{\n{ 1. Scope— Covers the requirements of non-\nconiferous sawn timber in the form of baulks and scantling.\n2. Species— Refer to Annex A and Annex B of the\nstandard for the species of timber covered.\n3. Dimensions and Measurements\n3.1 The sawn timber is generally available in the\nfollowing lengths and cross sections:\nLength— 1 m, 1.5 m, 2.0 m, 2.5 m, 3.0 m, and 3.5 m\nCross Section– 200 mm × 100 mm, 200 mm × 125 mm 200 mm ×150 mm, 200 mm × 200 mm 250 mm × 125 mm, 250 mm × 150 mm, and 300 mm × 150 mm.\n3.2 Length — The length shall be measured from end\nto end in metres correct to 0.01 m. Any end portion of sawn timber that has become rounded or damaged shall\nbe excluded from length measurement.\nWidth and Thickness — The width and thickness shall be measured at the narrowest place in millimetre\ncorrect to 10 mm.\nVolume — The volume shall be computed in cubic metres correct to three places of decimal by the product\nof length, width and thickness on the basis of accepted sizes.\n4. Requirements and Grading\n4.1 Requirements — Timber shall be air-seasoned to a\nmoisture content not exceeing 20 percent within a depth"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1326: 1992",
    "title": "Non-Coniferous Sawn Timber",
    "category": "Timber",
    "summary": "Covers specification of converted timber normally stocked in timber depot both for structural and non-structural purposes. It refers to cut sizes of timber as stocked and does not take into considertion any reductiion or allowance relating to subsequent use.",
    "keywords": [
      "timber",
      "cut",
      "sawn",
      "prohibited",
      "estimated",
      "scantling",
      "axe"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Treatment": "Prophylactic treatment is optional.",
      "End Coating": "To prevent and to minimize end cracking splitting, etc, the ends of each baulk and scantling, up to a distance of 150 mm, or at least 25 mm more than the length of larger split (whichever is more) shall be adequately coated with any of the materials mentioned in IS 1141 : 1993*. * Code of practice for seasoning of timber (second revision). Note — For method of measurement of defects in timber refer to IS 3364 (Part 2) : 1976 Method of measurement and evaluation of defects in timber. Part 2 Converted timber ( first revision). For detailed informtion, refer to IS 1326 : 1992 Non-coniferous sawn timber (baulks and scantlings) (Second Revision).",
      "Scope": "Covers specification of converted timber normally stocked in timber depot both for structural and non-structural purposes. It refers to cut sizes of timber as stocked and does not take into considertion any reductiion or allowance relating to subsequent use. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Cut sizes of timber shall be grouped in terms of width and thickness or sectional area into four groups, namely, (a) batten, (b) plank, (c) scantling, and (d) baulk. The nominal sizes of width and thickness of cut sizes of timber shall be as given in Table 1. The sizes of cut timber specified in Table 1 are at a moisture content of 20 percent. A method for adjustment of dimensions at different moisture contents is given in Appendix A of the standard. 2.2 Length — The preferred length of cut sizes of tim",
      "Grading Of Cut Sizes Of Timber": "Cut size of timber shall be graded after seasoning at a moisture content not less than 12 percent. 3.1 Grading for Structural Use — Based on permissible and prohibited defects the cut sizes of timber for structural use a) Grade1 — The estimated effect in reduction of the basic strength of timber is not more than 12.5 percent. b) Grade 2 — The estimated effect in reductiion of the basic strength of timber is not more than 25 percent. c) Grade 3 — The estimated effect in reduction of the basic strength of timber is not more than 37.5 percent. SUMMRY OF"
    },
    "content": "IS 1326: 1992 Non-Coniferous Sawn Timber\n(BAULKS AND SCANTLING)\n(Second Revision)\nof 13 mm from the surface, excluding 300 mm from each end.\nTimber shall be either sawn or axe-hewn. Any axe-hewn timber shall be reasonably even. All pieces shall have\nfairly straight and parallel sides and rectangular cross sections.\n4.2 Grading — The non-coniferous sawn timber shall\nbe of three grades, that is, special grade, Grade 1 and\nGrade 2, depending upon prohibited and permissible defects.\n5. Prohibited and Permissible Defects\n5.1 Prohibited Defects — The sawn timber of all the\nthree grades shall be free from spiral or twisted grain, warp, anykind of decay or live insect attack. Special\ngrade sawn timber shall be free from centre heart, wane, cup shakes, borer holes (dead infestation), sapstain\n(blue stain) and knots also. Grade 1 shall be free from cup shakes also.\n5.2 Permissible Defects —Refer to Table 1 of the\nstandard\n6. Treatment — Prophylactic treatment is optional.\n7. End Coatings — To prevent and to minimize end\ncracking splitting, etc, the ends of each baulk and scantling, up to a distance of 150 mm, or at least 25 mm\nmore than the length of larger split (whichever is more)\nshall be adequately coated with any of the materials mentioned in IS 1141 : 1993*.\n* Code of practice for seasoning of timber (second revision).\nNote — For method of measurement of defects in timber refer to IS 3364 (Part 2) : 1976 Method of measurement and evaluation\nof defects in timber. Part 2 Converted timber ( first revision).\nFor detailed informtion, refer to IS 1326 : 1992 Non-coniferous sawn timber (baulks and scantlings) (Second Revision). 1. Scope — Covers specification of converted timber\nnormally stocked in timber depot both for structural and non-structural purposes. It refers to cut sizes of\ntimber as stocked and does not take into considertion any reductiion or allowance relating to subsequent use.\n2. Dimensions and Tolerances\n2.1 Cut sizes of timber shall be grouped in terms of\nwidth and thickness or sectional area into four groups, namely, (a) batten, (b) plank, (c) scantling, and (d) baulk.\nThe nominal sizes of width and thickness of cut sizes of timber shall be as given in Table 1.\nThe sizes of cut timber specified in Table 1 are at a moisture content of 20 percent. A method for adjustment\nof dimensions at different moisture contents is given in\nAppendix A of the standard.\n2.2 Length — The preferred length of cut sizes of timber\nshall be 50 cm and upwards in steps of 10 cm.\n2.3 The measurement of length, with and thickness of\ncut sizes of timber shall be made on mid line of the surface on which it is measured.\n2.4 Tolerence — Permissible tolerances on cut sizes of\ntimber shall be as follows:\na)\nFor width and thickness 1) Up to and including 100 mm\n±0\n3 mm 2) Above 100 mm\n±3\n6 mm b)\nFor length\n±0\n25 mm\n3. Grading of Cut Sizes of Timber — Cut\nsize of timber shall be graded after seasoning at a moisture content not less than 12 percent.\n3.1 Grading for Structural Use — Based on\npermissible and prohibited defects the cut sizes of timber for structural use\na)\nGrade1 — The estimated effect in reduction of the basic strength of timber is not more\nthan 12.5 percent.\nb)\nGrade 2 — The estimated effect in reductiion of the basic strength of timber is not more\nthan 25 percent.\nc)\nGrade 3 — The estimated effect in reduction of the basic strength of timber is not more\nthan 37.5 percent.\nSUMMRY OF"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1331: 1971",
    "title": "Cut Sizes Of Timbers",
    "category": "Timber",
    "summary": "Covers the species, grades, requirements and treatments for timber used in the construction of cooling towers.",
    "keywords": [
      "timber",
      "pinus",
      "chrome",
      "rot",
      "prohibited",
      "radiata",
      "species"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the species, grades, requirements and treatments for timber used in the construction of cooling towers.",
      "Species Of Timber": "The species of timber suitable for cooling towers shall be as given in Table 1. Table 1 Timbers for Cooling Towers Botanical Name Trade Name 1. Abies pindrow Fir 2. Cedrus deodara Deodar 3. picea smithiana Spruce 4. Pinus kesiya Khasi pine 5. pinus roxburghii Chir 6. Pinus wallichiana Kail 7. Tectona grandis Teak 8. Pseudotsuga taxifolia Douglas fir 9. Pinus radiata Radiata pine 3. Grading of Timber 3.1 Colling tower timbers shall be of three grades, namely, select grade, Grade I and Grade II depending on the defects permitted. 3.2 Prohibited Defects (for All Grades) — Timber with loose grain, reaction wood, heartwood, rot warp, worm holes which are likely to affect strength, pitch pockets, centreheart (pith), shakes twisted grain and wane. 3.3 Permissible Defects — The defects to the exte"
    },
    "content": "IS 1331: 1971 Cut Sizes Of Timbers\n(Second Revision)\nTABLE 1 SIZES OF CUT TIMBER FOR STOCKING PURPOSES\nAll measurements in centimetres.\nThickness Width\n1.0\n4.0\n5.0\n6.0\n8.0\n10.0\n12.0\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n1.5 x\nx x\nx x\nx\n14.0\n16.0\n18.0\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n2 x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\n20.0\n22.0\n24.0\n–\n–\n–\n2.5 x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx\n26.0\n28.0\n30.0\n3 x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\n4 x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\n5\n–\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\n6\n–\n–\n–\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\n8\n–\n–\n–\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\n10\n–\n–\n–\n–\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx\n12\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\n14\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\n16\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx x\n18\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\nx x\nx x\nx x\nx\n20\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\nx\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\nx = preferred size of the width For detailed information, refer to IS 1331 : 1971 Specification for cut sizes of timbers\n(second revision).\n3.2 Grading for Non-Structural Use — Based on\npermissible and prohibited defects cut sizes of timber for non-structural use shall be of two grades, namely,\nGrade 1 and Grade 2.\n4. Defects\n4.1 Structural Use\nDefects Prohibited — Loose grains, splits, compressive wood in coniferous timber, heart wood rot,\nsap rot, warp, worm holes made by power post beetles and pitch pockets shall not be permitted.\nPermissible Defects – Defects to teh extent specified in\nTable 2 of the standard shall be permissible\n4.2 Non-Structural Use\nDefect Prohibited – Heart wood rot, sap rot, brashness, shankes, insect attack shall not be permitted.\nPermissible Defect – Defects to the extent specified in\nTable 3 of the standrd shall be permissible. 1. Scope — Covers the species, grades, requirements\nand treatments for timber used in the construction of cooling towers.\n2. Species of Timber — The species of timber\nsuitable for cooling towers shall be as given in\nTable 1.\nTable 1 Timbers for Cooling Towers\nBotanical Name Trade Name\n1.\nAbies pindrow\nFir\n2.\nCedrus deodara\nDeodar\n3.\npicea smithiana\nSpruce\n4.\nPinus kesiya\nKhasi pine\n5.\npinus roxburghii\nChir\n6.\nPinus wallichiana\nKail\n7.\nTectona grandis\nTeak\n8.\nPseudotsuga taxifolia\nDouglas fir\n9.\nPinus radiata\nRadiata pine\n3. Grading of Timber\n3.1 Colling tower timbers shall be of three grades,\nnamely, select grade, Grade I and Grade II depending on the defects permitted.\n3.2 Prohibited Defects (for All Grades) — Timber with\nloose grain, reaction wood, heartwood, rot warp, worm holes which are likely to affect strength, pitch pockets,\ncentreheart (pith), shakes twisted grain and wane.\n3.3 Permissible Defects — The defects to the extent\nspecified in Table 2 of the standard for different grades of timber shall be permissible.\n4. Dimensions and Tolerances\n4.1 Nominal sizes, rough and finished dimensions for\nvarious thicknesses are given in Table 2.\n4.2 A ± 5 mm tolerance in length shall normally be\npermisible. In other dimensions, no minus tolerances shall be permitted but a maximum plus tolerance of 2 mm\nshall be permitted.\nTable 2 Nominal and Dressed Dimensions\nNominal rough thickness or width, in mm – 25 32 38 50 75 over 100\nMinimum rough sawn thickness or width, in mm– 23 30 35 47.5 72.5 off 5\nDressed thickness or width,in mm– 21 27 32 45 70 off 10\n5. Treatment\n5.1 Following treatments are recommended—\na)\nThe structural members and the shell members are to be treated to a net retention of 12 kg/m3\nof timber with copper-chrome arsenic (CCA)\nor acid-copper-chrome (ACC) or 16 kg/m3 of copper-chrome boron (CCB) or 128 kg/m3 of of\ncresote/fuel oil mixture.\nb)\nFill is to be treated under pressure with a minimum average retention of 16 kg/m3 of\ntimber with copper-chrome-arsenic (CCA) or acid-copper-chrome (ACC) or with 20 kg/m3 or\ncopper-chrome boron (CCB) or with 160 kg/m3 of creosote/ fuel oil mixture\n5.2 Penetration of Preservtives\nThe depth of penetration of the preservtive shall be as given in Table 3.\nTable 3 Depth of Penetration of\nPreservative in Different Species of Timber\nTimber Species Depth Minimum Sapwood Heartwood\nAbies pindrow\n100% 5* mm\nCedrus deodara\n100% 10 mm\nPicea smithiana\n100% 5* mm\nPinus kesiya\n100% 20 mm\nPnus roxburghii\n100% 20 mm\nPinus wallichiana\n100% 10 mm\nTectona grandia\n100% Needs no treatment\nDouglas fir\n100% 5* mm\nRadiata pine\n100% 20 mm\n* Forstructural members incision of about 15 mm should be made on all surfaces (except end) to achieve the required absorption."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2372: 2004",
    "title": "Timber For Cooling Towers",
    "category": "Timber",
    "summary": "Covers the requirements of BALLIES used for geneal purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "ballies",
      "upto",
      "over",
      "timber",
      "butt",
      "grain",
      "geneal"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the requirements of BALLIES used for geneal purposes.",
      "Species Of Timber": "The species of timber suitable for BALLIES are given in Appendix A of the standard.",
      "Manufacture": "Bark shall be completely removed and all the branches and excrescences shall be dressed down flush with the surface. The top and bottom ends shall be cut square.",
      "Dimensions": "BALLIES shall conform to the dimensions given below; unless otherwise ordered. Class of Diameter at Diameter at Length Ballies the Top the Butt End cm cm m 1 Over 8.5 upto 12.5 Over 15 upto 20 3 to 9 2 Over 6.5 upto 8.5 Over 11.5 upto 15 3 to 9 3 Over 5 upto 6.5 Over 7.5 upto 11.5 3 to 9",
      "Requirements": "BALLIES shall be air-dried to a moisture content not exceeding 20 percent within a depth of 12 mm from the surface when measured at one third length of the Ballies from its butt end. Shall be reasonably straight, and shall be free from cuts across the grain, live insect attack, any kind of decay (rot), pronounced spiral or twisted grain, hollow heart and dead knots exceeding 5 cm in diameter. 6. Permissible Defects 6.1 Surface Cracks"
    },
    "content": "IS 2372: 2004 Timber For Cooling Towers\n(First Revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2372:2004 Specification for timber for cooling towers\n(Second revision). 1. Scope — Covers the requirements of BALLIES\nused for geneal purposes.\n2. Specie of Timber — The species of timber\nsuitable for BALLIES are given in Appendix A of the standard.\n3. Manafacture — Bark shall be completely removed\nand all the branches and excrescences shall be dressed down flush with the surface. The top and bottom ends\nshall be cut square.\n4. Dimensions— BALLIES shall conform to the\ndimensions given below; unless otherwise ordered.\nClass of\nDiameter at\nDiameter at\nLength\nBallies the Top\nthe Butt End cm\ncm m\n1 Over\n8.5 upto 12.5\nOver 15 upto 20 3 to 9\n2 Over\n6.5 upto 8.5\nOver 11.5 upto 15 3 to 9\n3 Over\n5 upto 6.5\nOver 7.5 upto 11.5 3 to 9\n5. Requirements —BALLIES shall be air-dried to a\nmoisture content not exceeding 20 percent within a depth of 12 mm from the surface when measured at one third\nlength of the Ballies from its butt end. Shall be reasonably straight, and shall be free from cuts across\nthe grain, live insect attack, any kind of decay (rot), pronounced spiral or twisted grain, hollow heart and\ndead knots exceeding 5 cm in diameter.\n6. Permissible Defects\n6.1 Surface Cracks"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3337: 1978",
    "title": "Ballies For General Purposes",
    "category": "Timber",
    "summary": "(First Revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 3337: 1978 Specifications for ballies for general purposes. 6.2 End Cracks 6.3 Spiral or Twisted Grain 6.4 Curvature 6.5 Short Crooks 6.6 Pin Hole (Dead Infestation)—For extent of defects permitted, refer to 7 of the standard. 7. Measurements 7.1 Length — Shall not be more than 7.5 cm shorter or more than 15 cm longer than the ‘ordered’ length. 7.2 Diameter — The top and butt end diameters shall be measured at the extreme ends. 8. Preservati",
    "keywords": [
      "solution",
      "composition",
      "preserved",
      "composiions",
      "cupric",
      "crooks",
      "whenever"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Preservation": "Whenever required shall be preserved by dipping, brushing or spraying with any one of the following composiions: a) Creosote — fuel oil mixture 50:50, b) 6 percent solution of copper-arsenic composition, c) 6 percent solution of acid-cupric-chromate composition, d) 8 percent solution of copper- chrome-boric composition, and e) 1.0 percent solution of sodium pentachlorophenate."
    },
    "content": "IS 3337: 1978 Ballies For General Purposes\n(First Revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3337: 1978 Specifications for ballies for general purposes.\n6.2 End Cracks\n6.3 Spiral or Twisted Grain\n6.4 Curvature\n6.5 Short Crooks\n6.6 Pin Hole (Dead Infestation)—For extent of defects\npermitted, refer to 7 of the standard.\n7. Measurements\n7.1 Length — Shall not be more than 7.5 cm shorter or\nmore than 15 cm longer than the ‘ordered’ length.\n7.2 Diameter — The top and butt end diameters shall\nbe measured at the extreme ends.\n8. Preservation — Whenever required shall be\npreserved by dipping, brushing or spraying with any one of the following composiions:\na) Creosote — fuel oil mixture 50:50, b) 6 percent solution of copper-arsenic composition,\nc) 6 percent solution of acid-cupric-chromate composition, d) 8 percent solution of copper- chrome-boric composition, and e) 1.0 percent solution of sodium pentachlorophenate."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3629: 1986",
    "title": "Structural Timber In Buildings",
    "category": "Timber",
    "summary": "Covers the various requirements of structural timber for use in buildings. It includes classification and grouping of different species of timber, their suitability for permanent and temporary structures, factors affecting strength, tolerances on dimensions, influence of defects and allowance for such defects in timber.",
    "keywords": [
      "species",
      "treatability",
      "durability",
      "heartwood",
      "listed",
      "choice",
      "timber"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the various requirements of structural timber for use in buildings. It includes classification and grouping of different species of timber, their suitability for permanent and temporary structures, factors affecting strength, tolerances on dimensions, influence of defects and allowance for such defects in timber. 2. Material 2.1 The species of timber recommended for various constructionl purposes are given in Table 1. 2.2 Based on permissible defects, cut sizes of structural timbers are classified in three grades, namely, select grade, Grade I and Grade II, materials maby be structural rejects, not suitable for structural members. 2.3 Moisture content of timber for various situations of buildings in different climate zones of the country shall conform to the requirement of IS 287: 1",
      "Permissible Stresses": "See Table 2 4.1 TABLE 2 FACTORS OF SAFETY TO BE APPLIED TO BASIC STRESS TO OBTAIN SAFE PERMISSIBLE STRESS. Sl No. Types of Stress Grade 1 (Standard Location) Inside Outside Wet (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) i) Extreme fibre in beams for broard leaved species. Min 5 6 7.5 ii) Extreme fibre stress for beams in conifers 6 7 8.5 iii) Shear along grain 7 7 7 iv) Horizontal shear in beams 10 10 10 v) Compressive stress 4 4.5 5.5 parallel to grain vi) Compressive stress perpendicular to grain 1.75 2.25 2.75 4.2 For other grades permissible stresses given in"
    },
    "content": "IS 3629: 1986 Structural Timber In Buildings\n(First Revision)\n1. Scope — Covers the various requirements of\nstructural timber for use in buildings. It includes classification and grouping of different species of timber,\ntheir suitability for permanent and temporary structures, factors affecting strength, tolerances on dimensions,\ninfluence of defects and allowance for such defects in timber.\n2. Material\n2.1 The species of timber recommended for various\nconstructionl purposes are given in Table 1.\n2.2 Based on permissible defects, cut sizes of structural\ntimbers are classified in three grades, namely, select grade, Grade I and Grade II, materials maby be structural\nrejects, not suitable for structural members.\n2.3 Moisture content of timber for various situations\nof buildings in different climate zones of the country shall conform to the requirement of IS 287: 1993*\n3.\nSuitability and Grouping\n* Permissible moisture content for timber used for different\nTABLE 1 GROUPING OF TIMBERS FOR STUCTURAL USE\nSpecies for Permanent Structures Species for Temporaary Structure or\nSemi Structural Use First Choice Second Choice\nGroup A— Ping Dhaman (Madras)\nRed Kutch (Lal Khair), Bruguira, (Mangrove)\nChooi Padri (MADRAS)\nGroup B — Babul, Haldu, Karani Maniawaga Dhaman\nSafed Khair, Mundani, Aglaia, Yon, Jungli, Nimbo,Jutili, Hollong, Myrobalan (West Bengal,Gurjan,\nAmari, Dhup, Kasood, Casuarina, Poon, Chestnut, (Harda), Black Oak (West Bengal)\nSatin-Wood, Paii, Tali, Ebony, Gurjar, Eucalyptus,Pipli, chuglam, Kusum (Bihar),Behera\nAsh, Lendi Machilus, Sianohor (kayea)Karol, Bola\nAssam, red bombeve, Oak (Meghalaya), Hoom, Narikel,\nJamen, White chuglam and Bhendi.\nGroup C — Haldu, Kadam, Indian\nHiwar, Blackwood, Black wattle Chestnut (West Bengal)\nMapie, Bael, Horse chentnut, Gokul, Kardhai, Supari, Toon, Chickrassy,\nBirch uriam (Biship-wood) , Tad (Palm), Muntenga, Dillenia, Kanju,\nPoone, Dhuna, Coconut, Dillenia Ebony Lampathi, Mango,aam, Kaim,\nRudrakshi, Mysore-gum Gardenia, Palang, Walnut, Bonsum, Chir, Kail,\nEucalyptus. Jarul, Jhingan, Banati, Subabul, Machilus, Oak (Nefa) Arjun,\nChamp, Raini, Neem, Domsal, Mulberry, Tooli, Pohu, Whitehollock,and Khasipine, Klaskar, Singhi Debdaru, Arupati, Hathipaila, White bombive\nThitmin, Vedankonnai, Chilauni, Makai, Padriwood, ,\nYew Imli and vellapine\n3.0 Suitability for a given purpose depends on —\na) Durability and treatability of species .\nb) Strength charcterestics of the species, and c) Grading in respect of freedom from defects.\n3.1 Suitability in Respect of Durability and\nTreatability for Permanent Structures.\n3.1.1 First choice — The species shall be of any one of the following categories —\na) Untreated heartwood of high durability as listed in Table 1. Heartwood of these species\nof timber , if containing more than 15 percent sapwood, needs treatment for protection.\nb) Treated heartwood of moderate and low durability and Class ‘a’ and Class ‘b’\ntreatability as listed in Table 1.\nc) Heartwood of moderate durability and Class\n‘c’ treatability after pressure impregnaion) For detailed information, refer to IS 3629 : 1981Specification for structural timber in buildings\n(first revision).\nas listed in Table 1.\nd) Sapwood of all classes of ability after through treatement with preservatives.\nNote — All such species which can be adequately treated to\ndesired retention of preservative may be used.\n3.1.2 Second choice — The species shall be heartwood of moderate durability and Class ‘d’ treatability. Small\nthicknesses up to 60 mm when treated under presure impregnation, shall be used for components under cover\nand out of contact with ground. Such timbers are listed in col 3 of Table 1.\n3.1.3 Suitability in Repect of Durability and\nTreatability for Temporary Structures and for Semi-\nStructural Uses — Heartwood of low durability and\nClass ‘e’ tretability or the species whose durability and/ or treatability is yet to be established may be used where\nlife of the structure is not primary consideration.Such timbers are listed in col 4 of Table 1.\n3.2 Grouping —\nGroups Modulus of Elasticity (E) Limit (Ft) N/mm2\nN/mm2 A Above 12, 600\n18.0 B\nAbove 9, 800 and upto12, 600\n12.0 C\nAbove 5, 600 and upto 9, 800 8.5\n4. Permissible Stresses – See Table 2\n4.1 TABLE 2 FACTORS OF SAFETY TO BE APPLIED\nTO BASIC STRESS TO OBTAIN SAFE\nPERMISSIBLE STRESS.\nSl No. Types of Stress\nGrade 1 (Standard Location) Inside Outside Wet\n(1) (2)\n(3) (4) (5) i)\nExtreme fibre in beams for broard leaved species. Min 5 6 7.5 ii)\nExtreme fibre stress for beams in conifers 6 7 8.5 iii) Shear along grain 7 7 7 iv) Horizontal shear in beams\n10 10 10 v) Compressive stress 4 4.5 5.5 parallel to grain vi) Compressive stress perpendicular to grain\n1.75 2.25 2.75\n4.2\nFor other grades permissible stresses given in"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 883: 1994",
    "title": "Shall Be Multiplied By A) For Select Grade Timber",
    "category": "Timber",
    "summary": "1.16 b) For Grade II timber 0.84 5. Dimensions and Tolerances 5.1 Sawn Timber — The cut sizes of timber for Structural purposes and the tolerance shall be those as given in IS 4891: 1988 ‡ except where net dimensions are specifically mentioned Permissible tolerances in measurements shall be as follows — a) For measurements up to and including – 0 mm 100 mm in width or thickness + 3 mm b) For measurements above 100mm – 3 mm in width or thickness + 6 mm c) For measurements of all sizes in – 0 mm l",
    "keywords": [
      "timber",
      "wanes",
      "measurements",
      "beetles",
      "knots",
      "rot",
      "worm"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 883: 1994 Shall Be Multiplied By A) For Select Grade Timber\n1.16 b) For Grade II timber\n0.84\n5. Dimensions and Tolerances\n5.1 Sawn Timber — The cut sizes of timber for\nStructural purposes and the tolerance shall be those as given in IS 4891: 1988 ‡ except where net dimensions\nare specifically mentioned\nPermissible tolerances in measurements shall be as follows — a)\nFor measurements up to and including\n– 0 mm\n100 mm in width or thickness\n+ 3 mm b)\nFor measurements above 100mm\n– 3 mm in width or thickness\n+ 6 mm c)\nFor measurements of all sizes in\n– 0 mm length\n+ 10 mm\n6. Defects\n6.1 Prohibited Defects a)\nTimber with loose grain, splits, compression wood in coniferous structural timber, heart\nwood rot and sap rot and crookedness.\nb)\nWorm holes made by powder post beetles and pitch pockets.\n6.2 Permissible Defects\na)\nWanes are permitted provided they are not combined with knots and the reduction\nin strength on account of the wanes is not more than the reduction with themaximum\nallowable knots. Wanes may also be permitted provided there is no objection to its use as bearing area nailing edge and affects general appearances b)\nWorm holes other than those due to powder post beetles located and grounded to reduce\nthe strength of timber shall be evaluated in the same way as knots; and\nc)\nAll other defect which donot affect any of the mechanical properties of timber shall be\npermitted.\n+ Design of structural timber in building (fourth revision).\n# Preferred cut sizes of structural timber (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3731: 1985",
    "title": "Teak Squares",
    "category": "Timber",
    "summary": "Covers the requirements of various grades of teak squares based on defects.",
    "keywords": [
      "squares",
      "units",
      "defects",
      "preferred",
      "teak",
      "timber",
      "consignment"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers preferred cut sizes of timber for use in the following units: a) Roof trusses, b) Roof purlins, rafters, floor beams, etc; c) Partitions framing, covering; d) Centering; and e) Door / window/ventilators",
      "General Requirements": "Teak squares shall be either sawn or hewn to a resonable evenness. All pieces shall have fairly straight and parallel sides with the planes of end-sections fairly perpendicular to the planes of the side surfaces.All squares shall be of good sound wood and free from defects other than those permitted Plugging or covering of the visible defects shall not be permitted in any form.All pieces shall be air-seasoned to a moisture content not exceeding 20 percent up to a depth of 15 mm from any portion of the surface excluding 30 cm from each end.",
      "Dimensions": "All cross-sectional measurements shall be made at mid length of the teak square correct to 0.5 cm Length shall be measured from end to end correct to the nearest lower 0.05m at the corners of the ends, the shortest length parallel to longitudinal edges shall be taken as the length of the teak square.The volume of any piece shall be computed in m3 to the nearest third decimal place. 5. Permissible Defects and Their Evaluation 5.1 Curvature 5.2 Taper 5.3 Wane 5.4 Knots 5.5 Holes 5.6 Shakes 5.7 Checks and Splits 5.8 Other Defects—For extent of defects permitted, refer to 6 of the standard Note —For methods of measurement and evaluation of defects in timber, refer to IS 3364 (Part 2) : 1976 Methods of measurement and evaluation of defects in timber Part 2 Converted timber (first revision). For",
      "Preferred Sizes": "Preferred cut sizes shall be as covered in Tables 1 to 4. For centering the preferred sizes shall be the same as for partition framing covered in Table 3. 3. Tolerances a) (i) For measurement up to 100 mm 0 to +3mm (ii) Measurement above 100 mm – 3 to + 6 mm b) Length for all sizes 0 to +10 mm TABLE 1 PREFERRED CUT SIZES OF STRUCTURAL TIMBERS FOR ROOF TRUSSES (Span from 3 to 20 meters) Thickness in mm Width in mm 20 40 50 60 80 100 —- —- —- 25 40 50 60 80 100 120 140 160 30 40 50 60 80 100 120 140 160 35 — — 60 80 100 120 140 160 40 — — 60 80 100 120 140 160 50 — — 60 80 100 120 140 160 60 — — — 80 100 120 140 160 80 — — — —- 100 120 140 160 Note1 — For truss spans marginally above 20 m, preferred cut sizes of structural timber maybe allowed. Note2 — Preferred length of timber : 1, 1.5, 2,"
    },
    "content": "IS 3731: 1985 Teak Squares\n(First Revision)\n1. Scope — Covers the requirements of various\ngrades of teak squares based on defects.\n2. Grades\nGrade 1 —\nNo single square shall contain more than 2.0 units of defects and the\naverage for the whole consignment shall be not more than 0.75 units of\ndefects.\nGrade 2 —\nNo sigle square shall contain more than 4.0 units of defects and the\naverage for the whole consignment shall not be more than 1.5 units of\ndefects.\nGrade 3 —\nNo single square shall contain more than 6.0 units of defects and the\naverge for the whole consignment shall not be more than 3 units of\ndefects.\nFor squares more than 5m in length the above limits shall be derived by the following equation—\nPermissible number of defects in squares more than 5m in length —\nL/5 × Permissible defect value according to grade.\nwhere L —\nlength of squares in m.The value derived shallnot exceed\ntwice the number of units of defects permitted for each\ngrade.\n3. General Requirements—Teak squares shall be\neither sawn or hewn to a resonable evenness. All pieces shall have fairly straight and parallel sides with the planes\nof end-sections fairly perpendicular to the planes of the side surfaces.All squares shall be of good sound wood\nand free from defects other than those permitted\nPlugging or covering of the visible defects shall not be permitted in any form.All pieces shall be air-seasoned\nto a moisture content not exceeding 20 percent up to a depth of 15 mm from any portion of the surface excluding\n30 cm from each end.\n4. Dimension and Their Measurements—\nAll cross-sectional measurements shall be made at mid length of the teak square correct to 0.5 cm Length shall\nbe measured from end to end correct to the nearest lower 0.05m at the corners of the ends, the shortest\nlength parallel to longitudinal edges shall be taken as the length of the teak square.The volume of any piece\nshall be computed in m3 to the nearest third decimal place.\n5. Permissible\nDefects and Their\nEvaluation\n5.1 Curvature\n5.2 Taper\n5.3 Wane\n5.4 Knots\n5.5 Holes\n5.6 Shakes\n5.7 Checks and Splits\n5.8 Other Defects—For extent of defects permitted, refer\nto 6 of the standard\nNote —For methods of measurement and evaluation of defects in timber, refer to IS 3364 (Part 2) : 1976 Methods of measurement\nand evaluation of defects in timber Part 2 Converted timber (first revision).\nFor detailed information refer to IS 3731 : 1985 Specification for teak squares (first revision). 1. Scope — Covers preferred cut sizes of timber for\nuse in the following units:\na)\nRoof trusses, b)\nRoof purlins, rafters, floor beams, etc;\nc) Partitions framing, covering;\nd) Centering; and e) Door / window/ventilators\n2. Preferred Sizes — Preferred cut sizes shall be\nas covered in Tables 1 to 4. For centering the preferred sizes shall be the same as for partition framing covered\nin Table 3.\n3. Tolerances\na) (i) For measurement up to 100 mm 0 to +3mm\n(ii) Measurement above 100 mm\n– 3 to + 6 mm b)\nLength for all sizes 0 to +10 mm\nTABLE 1 PREFERRED CUT SIZES OF STRUCTURAL TIMBERS FOR ROOF TRUSSES\n(Span from 3 to 20 meters)\nThickness in mm Width in mm\n20\n40\n50\n60\n80\n100\n—-\n—-\n—-\n25\n40\n50\n60\n80\n100\n120\n140\n160\n30\n40\n50\n60\n80\n100\n120\n140\n160\n35\n—\n—\n60\n80\n100\n120\n140\n160\n40\n—\n—\n60\n80\n100\n120\n140\n160\n50\n—\n—\n60\n80\n100\n120\n140\n160\n60\n—\n—\n—\n80\n100\n120\n140\n160\n80\n—\n—\n—\n—-\n100\n120\n140\n160\nNote1 — For truss spans marginally above 20 m, preferred cut sizes of structural timber maybe allowed.\nNote2 — Preferred length of timber : 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5 and 3 m.\nTABLE 2 PREFERRED CUT SIZES OF STRUCTURAL TIMBER FOR\nROOF PURLINS, RAFTERS, FLOOR BEAMS, ETC Thickness in mm\nWidth in mm 50 80\n100\n120\n140 — — — 60 80\n100\n120\n140\n160 — — 80 — 100 120\n140\n160 — —\n100 — — — —\n140\n160\n180\n200\nNote— Preferred length of timber: 1.5, 2, 2.5 and 3 m."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4891: 1988",
    "title": "Preferred Cut Sizes Of Structural Timber",
    "category": "Timber",
    "summary": "(First revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "timber",
      "preferred",
      "stocked",
      "window",
      "cut",
      "shrinkage",
      "shutters"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 4891: 1988 Preferred Cut Sizes Of Structural Timber\n(First revision) TABLE 3 PREFERRED CUT SIZES OF STRUCTURAL TIMBER FOR PARTITION FRAMING AND COVERING\nThickness in mm Width in mm\n10\n40\n50\n60\n80\n—-\n—\n—\n—\n—\n15\n40\n50\n60\n80\n100\n—\n—\n—\n—\n20\n40\n50\n60\n80\n100\n120\n160\n200\n—\n25\n40\n50\n60\n80\n100\n120\n160\n200\n240\n30\n40\n50\n60\n80\n100\n120\n160\n200\n240\n40\n40\n—\n60\n80\n100\n120\n160\n200\n240\n50 —\n50\n—\n80\n100\n120\n160\n200\n240\n60 —\n—\n60\n80\n100\n120\n160\n200\n240\n80 —\n—\n—\n80\n100\n120\n160\n200\n240 Note — Preferred length of timber : 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5 and 3 m.\nTABLE 4 PREFERRED CUT SIZE OF TIMBER FOR DOOR/ WINDOW\nVENTILATOR COMPONENTS\nThickness\nWidth in mm in mm 15 — — — — — — — — — — 160 180 200 220 240 20 — — — — 50 60\n80 100 — — — — — — — 25 25 — — — 50 60\n80 100 — — — — — — — 30 — 30 — — 50 60\n80 100 — — — — — — — 35 — — 35 — 50 60\n80 100 — — 160 — — — 240 40 — — — 40 50 60\n80 100 — — 160 — — — 240 50 — — — — — — 80 100 120 — — — — — — 60 — — — — — — — 100 120 140 — — — — — Note— Preferred timber lengths (wall opening module of 100 mm) for frames— 590, 790, 890, 990, 1 190, 1 290,1 990 and 2090 mm. Preferred timber length for shutters— 460, 500, 700, 800, 900, 1 100, 1 200, 1 905 and 2 005 mm\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4891 : 1988 Specification for preferred cut sizes of structural timber (first revision).\nTolerances in door/window/ventilatorscomponents shall be permissible as under — a) Frames ±3 mm b) Shutters\n1) Doors i) Width ±3 mm ii) Thickness ±1 mm No tolerance for panels\n2) Window/ventilators, etc Width 40 mm and less ±1 mm Above 40 mm ±3 mm\nCut sizes of timber as stocked and specified in tables are normall at moisture content of 20 percent. But at the\ntime of fabrication and erection, the timber members are required to possess 12 to 20 percent of moisture content\nof the oven-dry weight. Thus a lateral shrinkage effect in the stocked sizes of timber will take place and,\ntherefore, the ultimate shrinkage to which the timber will be subjected to has got to be compensated at the\ntime of converting the timber at 20 percent moisture content for stocking purposes."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4895: 1985",
    "title": "Teak Logs",
    "category": "Timber",
    "summary": "Covers the requiremens of various grades of teak logs intended for conversion purposes. It does not cover the requirements of teak logs for veneering purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "logs",
      "log",
      "defects",
      "minor",
      "pinus",
      "teak",
      "permitted"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the requirements of three grades of coniferous logs, that is, Grade 1, Grade 2 and Grade 3, for conversion into timber. 2. Grades Grade 1— 6 minor defects or 2 major and 2 minor defects. Grade 2— 9 minor defects or 3 major and 3 minor defects. Grade 3— 12 minor defects or 3 major and 6 minor defects.",
      "General Requirements": "The logs shall be free from hollow heart, shatter, anykind of decay (rot) and live insect attack. All buttresses, remnants of branches and large knots shall be trimmed flush with the bole of log. The two ends should be clean-cut with a saw and shall be as close to the plane at right angles to the axis as possible. Plugging or covering of the visible defects shall not be permitted in any form. 3. Permissible Defects 3.1 Curvature 3.2 Shakes 3.3 Flutes 3.4 Knots 3.5 Check and Splits 3.6 Twist 3.7 Holes—For extent of defects permitted refer to 4 of the standard.",
      "Grades": "The logs of 2.5 m length shall be graded as below depending on cumulative value of the permissible defects: Grade 1 — No single log shall contain more than 2.5 units of defects. Grade 2 — No single log shall contain more than 5 units of defects Grade 3 — No single log shall contain more than 7.5 units of defects For logs more than 2.5 m in length, the limits given above shall be derived by the following equation; Permissible number of defects in logs more than 2.5 m in length = Where L — length of log in m, and P — permissible defect value for 2.5 m in length.",
      "Dimensions": "The minimum dimensions of the logs shall be the following Length — 2.5 m Mid – girth — 1 m Note —For method of measurement of defects in timber, refer to IS 3364 (Part 1) : 1976 Methods of measurement and evaluvation of defects in timber Part 1 Logs (first revision). For detailed Information, refer to IS 4895 : 1985.Specification for Teak logs (first revision) 2.5× L P",
      "Species Of Timber": "The logs shall be of the species of timber listed below— Trade Name Botanical Name Abbreviation Fr Abies pindrow Royale FIR Deodar Cedrus deodara D.Don DEO Cypress Cupressus torulasa D.Don CYP Spruce Picea Smithiana Boiss SPR Kail Pinus excelsa Wall KAL Khasi Pine Pinus Khasya Royle KPI Chir Pinus Roxburg Sargent CHR 4. Dimensions Minimum length 2.5 m Minimum mean mid-girth 1 m",
      "Requirements": "The logs shall be free from hollow centre above 15percent of the basal area of the log, spiral grain, any kind of decay (rot), insect attack and any other defects (except those permitted in 6 below). The hollow centre throughout the length of the long shall not be permitted. 6. Permissible Defects 6.1 Lack of Straightness 6.2 Taper 6.3 End Splits 6.4 Surface Cracks 6.5 Cup Shakes 6.6 Knots 6.7 Hollow Centre 6.8 Wounds - For extent of defects permitted, refer to 8 of the standard",
      "End Coating": "Shall be adequately coated, up to a distance of at least 125 mm, with any of the materials mentioned in IS 1141 : 1993*. Application of end coating on the logs shall be done soon after the inspection of the log. *Code of practice for seasoning of timber (second revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 4895: 1985 Teak Logs\n(First Revision)\n1. Scope — Covers the requiremens of various grades\nof teak logs intended for conversion purposes. It does not cover the requirements of teak logs for veneering\npurposes.\n2. General Requirements — The logs shall be\nfree from hollow heart, shatter, anykind of decay (rot)\nand live insect attack.\nAll buttresses, remnants of branches and large knots shall be trimmed flush with the bole of log. The two\nends should be clean-cut with a saw and shall be as close to the plane at right angles to the axis as possible.\nPlugging or covering of the visible defects shall not be permitted in any form.\n3. Permissible Defects\n3.1\nCurvature\n3.2\nShakes\n3.3\nFlutes\n3.4\nKnots\n3.5\nCheck and Splits\n3.6\nTwist\n3.7 Holes—For extent of defects permitted refer to 4 of\nthe standard.\n4. Grades— The logs of 2.5 m length shall be graded\nas below depending on cumulative value of the permissible defects:\nGrade 1 —\nNo single log shall contain more than\n2.5 units of defects.\nGrade 2 —\nNo single log shall contain more than\n5 units of defects\nGrade 3 —\nNo single log shall contain more than\n7.5 units of defects\nFor logs more than 2.5 m in length, the limits given above shall be derived by the following equation;\nPermissible number of defects in logs more than 2.5 m in length =\nWhere\nL — length of log in m, and\nP — permissible defect value for 2.5 m in length.\n5. Dimensions — The minimum dimensions of the\nlogs shall be the following\nLength\n— 2.5 m\nMid – girth — 1 m\nNote —For method of measurement of defects in timber, refer to IS 3364 (Part 1) : 1976 Methods of measurement and evaluvation\nof defects in timber Part 1 Logs (first revision).\nFor detailed Information, refer to IS 4895 : 1985.Specification for Teak logs (first revision)\n2.5×\nL\nP 1. Scope — Covers the requirements of three grades\nof coniferous logs, that is, Grade 1, Grade 2 and Grade 3, for conversion into timber.\n2. Grades\nGrade 1—\n6 minor defects or 2 major and 2 minor defects.\nGrade 2—\n9 minor defects or 3 major and 3 minor defects.\nGrade 3—\n12 minor defects or 3 major and 6 minor defects.\n3. Species —The logs shall be of the species of timber\nlisted below—\nTrade Name Botanical Name Abbreviation\nFr Abies pindrow Royale FIR\nDeodar Cedrus deodara D.Don\nDEO\nCypress Cupressus torulasa D.Don\nCYP\nSpruce Picea Smithiana Boiss\nSPR\nKail Pinus excelsa Wall\nKAL\nKhasi Pine Pinus Khasya Royle\nKPI\nChir Pinus Roxburg Sargent\nCHR\n4. Dimensions\nMinimum length\n2.5 m\nMinimum mean mid-girth\n1 m\n5. Requirements — The logs shall be free from\nhollow centre above 15percent of the basal area of the log, spiral grain, any kind of decay (rot), insect attack\nand any other defects (except those permitted in 6 below). The hollow centre throughout the length of the\nlong shall not be permitted.\n6. Permissible Defects\n6.1 Lack of Straightness\n6.2 Taper\n6.3 End Splits\n6.4 Surface Cracks\n6.5 Cup Shakes\n6.6 Knots\n6.7 Hollow Centre\n6.8 Wounds - For extent of defects permitted, refer to 8\nof the standard\n7. End Coating — Shall be adequately coated, up\nto a distance of at least 125 mm, with any of the materials mentioned in IS 1141 : 1993*. Application of end coating\non the logs shall be done soon after the inspection of the log.\n*Code of practice for seasoning of timber (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5246: 2000",
    "title": "Coniferous Logs",
    "category": "Timber",
    "summary": "Covers the specification of jointed wood poles made of both broad leaved, and coniferous species of timber, grown in India, and suitable for carrying overhead electric power transmission lines, telephone and telegraph circuits.",
    "keywords": [
      "ultimate",
      "breaking",
      "represented",
      "load",
      "strong",
      "rupture",
      "class"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the specification of jointed wood poles made of both broad leaved, and coniferous species of timber, grown in India, and suitable for carrying overhead electric power transmission lines, telephone and telegraph circuits.",
      "Species Of Timber": "Three groups, based on the modulus of rupture of small clear specimens tested in the green condition, that is more than 25 percent moisture content.(see Appendix A of the standard). Group A Very strong timbers having a modulus of rupture in bending of 850 kg/cm2 and above, represented by sal. Group B Strong timbers having a modulus of rupture in bending of 630 to 850 kg/cm2, represented by teak. Group C Moderately strong timbers having a modulus of rupture in bending 450 to 630 kg/cm2, represented by chir. 3. Classification and Dimensions 3.1 Classification Class 1 Ultimate breaking load not less than 1 350 kg. Class 2 Ultimate breaking load not less than 1 100 kg and not more than 1 350 kg. Class 3 Ultimate breaking load not less than 850 kg and not more than 1100 kg. Class 4 Ultimate bre"
    },
    "content": "IS 5246: 2000 Coniferous Logs\n(First revision)\nFor detailed Information, refer to IS 5246 : 2000 Specification for coniferous logs first revision 1. Scope — Covers the specification of jointed wood\npoles made of both broad leaved, and coniferous species of timber, grown in India, and suitable for carrying\noverhead electric power transmission lines, telephone and telegraph circuits.\n2. Species of Timber — Three groups, based on\nthe modulus of rupture of small clear specimens tested in the green condition, that is more than 25 percent\nmoisture content.(see Appendix A of the standard).\nGroup A\nVery strong timbers having a modulus of rupture in bending of 850 kg/cm2 and\nabove, represented by sal.\nGroup B\nStrong timbers having a modulus of rupture in bending of 630 to 850 kg/cm2,\nrepresented by teak.\nGroup C\nModerately strong timbers having a modulus of rupture in bending 450 to\n630 kg/cm2, represented by chir.\n3. Classification and Dimensions\n3.1 Classification\nClass 1\nUltimate breaking load not less than\n1 350 kg.\nClass 2\nUltimate breaking load not less than\n1 100 kg and not more than 1 350 kg.\nClass 3\nUltimate breaking load not less than 850 kg and not more than 1100 kg.\nClass 4\nUltimate breaking load not less than 700 kg and not more 850 kg.\nClass 5\nUltimate breaking load not less than 550 kg and not more than 700 kg.\nClass 6\nUltimate breaking load not less than 400 kg and not more than 550 kg.\nClass 7\nUltimate breaking load not less than\n300 kg and notmore than 400 kg.\nThe above loads are assumed to be applied at a distance\n60 cm from the top of the jointed pole.\n3.2\nDimensions — See Table 1\nTABLE 1 DIMENSION"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6056: 1970",
    "title": "Jointed Wood Poles For Overhead Power Telecommunication Lines",
    "category": "Timber",
    "summary": "Covers the requirements of three grades of non-coniferous logs, for conversion into sawn timber.",
    "keywords": [
      "poles",
      "jointed",
      "logs",
      "group",
      "log",
      "lap",
      "species"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Preliminary Treatment": "A prophylactic treatmen shall be given.",
      "Preservative Treatment": "Shall be treated with a preservative so as to impregnate completely the sapwood and as much of heartwood of non-durable species as possible.",
      "General Requirements": "As far as possible the upper and lower sectiions shall be of the same species or at least species of the same group. Jointing sections belonging to species of different groups is not recommened. The sections being jointed shall have approximately same girth at the joint. 8. Defects 8.1 Defects Totally Prohibited a) Sap rot, b) Hollows in the top, c) Cross breaks, d) Large holes, and e) Short crooks 8.2 Deffects Permitted to a Limited Extent—Dead streaks, Decay, Spilt or checksHallow heart , Rot,Ring shake, grain, insect damage, knots, sears, Shape and straightness . For extent of defects permitted refer to 10 of the standard. 9. Types of Jointed Poles a) Wire bound lap jointed poles b) Z-Type lap jointed poles c) V-Type lap jointed poles d) Angle iron butt jointed poles e) Half — Sleeve Ha",
      "Scope": "Covers the requirements of three grades of non-coniferous logs, for conversion into sawn timber.",
      "Grades": "Grade I — No single log of length 2.5 m shall contain more than 3 units of defects Grade II— No single log of length 2.5 m shall contain more than 6 units of defects. Grade III— No single log of length 2.5 m shall contain more than 9 units of defects. For logs other than 2.5 m in length, the limits given in above shall be derived by the following equation— Permissible number of defect in logs other than 2.5 m in length = L/2.5×P Where L = length of log in m, and P = permissible defect value for 2.5 m length",
      "Species Of Timber": "The logs shall be of the species of timber given in Appendix A of the standard.",
      "Dimensions": "The minimum dimensions of logs shall be the following : Length 2.5 m Mean mid-girth 1 m",
      "Requirements": "The logs shall not be knobbly. They shall be free from brashness, hollow centre, shatter, spiral grain, any kind of decay (rot), live insect attack and any other defects which may reduce the uefulness of logs for conversion into sawn timber.All buttresses, remnants of branches and large knots shall be trimmed flush with the bole of log. The two ends should be clean cut with a saw and shall be as close to the plane at right angles to the axis as possible. 6. Permissible Defects 6.1 Bend 6.2 Taper 6.3 End Splits (Including Heart or Star Shakes) 6.4 Surface Cracks 6.5 Cup shakes (Including Ring Shakes) 6.6 Knots 6.7 Wounds 6.8 Flutes 6.9 Buttress 6.10 Twist 6.11 Hollow heart—For extent of defects permitted, refer to 8 othe standard.",
      "End Coating": "Shall be adequately coated up to a distance of at least 15 cm with any of the materials mentioned in IS 1141 : 1993*. *Code of Practice for preservation of timber (third revision)"
    },
    "content": "IS 6056: 1970 Jointed Wood Poles For Overhead Power Telecommunication Lines\nTABLE 1 DIMENSION OF THE JOINTED WOOD POLES\nOverall\nGroundline Minimum Circumference at Ground LinePosition\nHeight\nPosition\nIndicated in Col. 2 for the Lower Componts of Full\nFrom Butt\nLength\nEnd of\nClass 1\nClass 2\nClass 3\nClass 4\nClass 5\nClass 6\nClass7 of Wood lower\nGroup\nGroup\nGroup\nGroup\nGroup\nGroup\nGroup\nPoles\nComponent\nA\nB\nC\nA\nB C\nA\nB\nC A\nB\nC\nA\nB\nC\nA\nB\nC\nA\nB\nC\n(1)\n(2) (3) (4)\n(5)\n(6) (7) (8)\n(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20) (21) (22) (23)\nm m\ncm cm\ncm cm cm cm\ncm cm\ncm cm\ncm cm\ncm cm\ncm cm cm\ncm cm\ncm cm\n6\n1.2\n62\n65\n72\n60 63 70\n55\n58\n65\n50\n53\n60\n48\n50\n55\n46\n48\n50\n44\n46\n48\n7 1.2\n65\n69\n76\n63 67 74\n60\n63\n70\n55\n57\n64\n51\n53\n60\n48\n50\n52\n46\n48\n50\n7.5 and\n81.5\n68\n71\n80\n66 70 78\n63\n66\n73\n57\n60\n67\n54\n56\n63\n51\n53\n55\n48\n50\n52\n9\n1.5\n72\n76\n84\n70 74 82\n66\n70\n76\n60\n63\n70\n56\n59\n66\n53\n56\n59\n50\n53\n56\n10 1.8\n73\n78\n86\n73 76 84\n68\n72\n78\n62\n65\n72\n58\n61\n68\n55\n58\n61\n52\n55\n58\n12 1.8\n78 84\n94\n78 82 92\n73\n76\n85\n67\n70\n78\n63\n66\n72\n58\n61\n63\n53\n56\n59\n14 2.0\n83\n89\n98\n83 87 96\n78\n81\n90\n71\n75\n83\n67\n70\n78\n61\n64\n67\n56\n59\n62\nMinimum circumference\nat top of upper\n50\n52\n57\n43 46 51\n41\n43\n48\n36\n38\n42\n30\n32\n35\n29\n31\n34\n26\n28\n30 component for\nat heights in cm\nNote — The circumferences for different species at the joints of the components are covered under 8.1.1 and 8.1.2, of the standard\nand the length of the components are covered under individual types of joints. For poles of intermediate length in Table 1, the circumferences given for the next larger pole shall be used } 4. Preparation of Components of Jointed\nPoles—The bark of the components shall be completely removed and all the branches shall be dressed\ndown flush with the stem. The tops of the upper components shall be bevelled in the shape of an inverted\n‘V’ for a length equal to top diameter or 10 cm whichever is less.\n5. Preliminary Treatment— A prophylactic\ntreatmen shall be given.\n6. Preservative Treatment — Shall be treated\nwith a preservative so as to impregnate completely the sapwood and as much of heartwood of non-durable\nspecies as possible.\n7. General Requirements — As far as possible\nthe upper and lower sectiions shall be of the same species or at least species of the same group. Jointing\nsections belonging to species of different groups is not recommened. The sections being jointed shall have\napproximately same girth at the joint.\n8. Defects\n8.1 Defects Totally Prohibited\na) Sap rot, b) Hollows in the top,\nc) Cross breaks, d) Large holes, and\ne) Short crooks\n8.2 Deffects Permitted to a Limited Extent—Dead\nstreaks, Decay, Spilt or checksHallow heart , Rot,Ring shake, grain, insect damage, knots, sears, Shape and\nstraightness .\nFor extent of defects permitted refer to 10 of the standard.\n9. Types of Jointed Poles\na)\nWire bound lap jointed poles b)\nZ-Type lap jointed poles c)\nV-Type lap jointed poles d)\nAngle iron butt jointed poles e)\nHalf — Sleeve Half - lap jointed poles f)\nHalf — Sleeve Tongue and Groove jointed poles\nNote — For details refer to 11 of the standard\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6056 : 1970 Specification for jointed wood poles for overhead power telecommunication lines. 1. Scope — Covers the requirements of three grades\nof non-coniferous logs, for conversion into sawn timber.\n2. Grades —\nGrade I —\nNo single log of length 2.5 m shall contain more than 3 units of defects\nGrade II—\nNo single log of length 2.5 m shall contain more than 6 units of defects.\nGrade III—\nNo single log of length 2.5 m shall contain more than 9 units of defects.\nFor logs other than 2.5 m in length, the limits given in above shall be derived by the following equation—\nPermissible number of defect in logs other than 2.5\nm in length = L/2.5×P\nWhere\nL = length of log in m, and\nP = permissible defect value for 2.5 m length\n3. Species — The logs shall be of the species of\ntimber given in Appendix A of the standard.\n4. Dimensions — The minimum dimensions of logs\nshall be the following :\nLength\n2.5 m Mean mid-girth\n1 m\n5 . Requirements — The logs shall not be knobbly.\nThey shall be free from brashness, hollow centre, shatter, spiral grain, any kind of decay (rot), live insect attack\nand any other defects which may reduce the uefulness of logs for conversion into sawn timber.All buttresses,\nremnants of branches and large knots shall be trimmed flush with the bole of log. The two ends should be clean\ncut with a saw and shall be as close to the plane at right angles to the axis as possible.\n6. Permissible Defects\n6.1\nBend\n6.2\nTaper\n6.3\nEnd Splits (Including Heart or Star Shakes)\n6.4\nSurface Cracks\n6.5\nCup shakes (Including Ring Shakes)\n6.6\nKnots\n6.7\nWounds\n6.8\nFlutes\n6.9\nButtress\n6.10\nTwist\n6.11\nHollow heart—For extent of defects permitted, refer to 8 othe standard.\n7. End Coating — Shall be adequately coated up to\na distance of at least 15 cm with any of the materials mentioned in IS 1141 : 1993*.\n*Code of Practice for preservation of timber (third revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7308: 1999",
    "title": "Non-Coniferous Logs",
    "category": "Timber",
    "summary": "Covers the requirements of wooden sleepers and wooden specials used for broad gauge ,metre and narrow gauge railway tracks.",
    "keywords": [
      "sleepers",
      "sleeper",
      "class",
      "terms",
      "wooden",
      "preservative",
      "treatment"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the requirements of wooden sleepers and wooden specials used for broad gauge ,metre and narrow gauge railway tracks.",
      "Species Of Timber": "See Appendix A of the standard for recommended species and their composite sleeper Index (CSI). 3. Dimensions and Tolerances 3.1 Track Sleepers — See Table 1 3.2 Special Sleepers for Bridges and Crossings — See Table 2",
      "Preservative Treatment": "Sleepers containing sap wood and those without an asterisk mark in Appendix A shall be given preservative treatment.",
      "Grading": "Class I and Class II, depending on permissible defects. A sleeper shall be classified as of the Class II even if it is of that class in terms of only one defect and is of the Class I in terms of all other defects. Likewise, a sleeper shall be rejected if the permissible range in any one of the defects is exceeded. Special sleepers shall be of Class I only.",
      "Permissible Defects": "Refer Table 4 of the standard."
    },
    "content": "IS 7308: 1999 Non-Coniferous Logs\n(First Revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 7308 : 1999 Specification for non-coniferous logs\n(first revision). 1. Scope — Covers the requirements of wooden\nsleepers and wooden specials used for broad gauge\n,metre and narrow gauge railway tracks.\n2. Timber Species — See Appendix A of the\nstandard for recommended species and their composite sleeper Index (CSI).\n3. Dimensions and Tolerances\n3.1 Track Sleepers — See Table 1\n3.2 Special Sleepers for Bridges and Crossings — See\nTable 2\n4. Preservative Treatment — Sleepers\ncontaining sap wood and those without an asterisk mark in Appendix A shall be given preservative treatment.\n5. Grading — Class I and Class II, depending on\npermissible defects. A sleeper shall be classified as of the Class II even if it is of that class in terms of only one\ndefect and is of the Class I in terms of all other defects.\nLikewise, a sleeper shall be rejected if the permissible range in any one of the defects is exceeded.\nSpecial sleepers shall be of Class I only.\n6. Permissible Defects — Refer Table 4 of the\nstandard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10394: 1982",
    "title": "Wooden Sleepers For Railway Track",
    "category": "Timber",
    "summary": "Covers physical and chemical requirements of paving bitumens for use in roadways, runways and allied constructions.",
    "keywords": [
      "bitumen",
      "paving",
      "penetration",
      "crude",
      "waxy",
      "gauge",
      "tar"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers physical and chemical requirements of paving bitumens for use in roadways, runways and allied constructions. 2. Types and Gades a) Type 1— Paving bitumen from non-waxy crude; and b) Type 2 —Paving bitumen from waxy crude. 2.1 Paving Bitumen Type 1— Shall be classified into six grades according to their penetration and each grade shall be given a designation as given in Table 1 with letter ‘S’ denoting the type and a numeral representing the mean of the limits of the penetration specified for the grade. 2.2 Paving bitumen Type 2— Shall be classified into four grades according to their penetration and each grade shall be given a designation as given in Table 2 with letter ‘A’ denoting the type and a numeral representing the mean of the limit of the penetation specified for the grade.",
      "Requirements": "The material shall be homogeneous and shall not foam when heated to 175°C. For a given lot under each type the softening point for samples taken from different parts of the lot shall not vary by more than 8°C from maximum to minimum and shall not fall outside the range of the test range of the test limits specified in Tables 1 and 2. TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR PAVING BITUMEN TYPE 1 Sl Characteristics Requirements for Grades S35 S45 S55 S65 S90 S200 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) i) Specific gravity at 27 °C, Min 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 0.99 ii) Water, percent by mass, Max 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 iii) Flash point, cleveland open cup, °C, Min 175 175 175 175 175 175 iv) Softening point °C 50 to 65 45 to 60 45 to 60 40 to 55 35 to 50 30 to 45 v) Penetration at 25oC 100g, 5Second.,1/10 mm 30 t"
    },
    "content": "IS 10394: 1982 Wooden Sleepers For Railway Track\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 10394 : 1982 Specification for wooden sleeper for railway track\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR STANDARD TRACK SLEEPERS\nGauge\nLength\nTolerance\nCross Sectional\nTolerance in Cross\n(cm)\nin Length, %\nDimensions (cm)\nSection, %\nBroad gauge (BG)\n275\n+10,\n25 × 13\n+10,\n-2.5\n–5\nMetre gauge (MG)\n180 do\n20 × 11.5 do\nNarrow gauge (NG)\n150 do\n18 × 11.5 do\nTABLE 2 DIMENSIONS FOR SPECIAL SLEEPERS\nGauge Cross-Section\nLength Tolerance in\nTolerance in (cm)\nCross-section %\n(cm) Length, %\nBG\n25 × 15\n+ 5\n275, 305, 335 and onwards +5\n– 2.5 varying by 30 cm –1.25\n28 × 15 do\ndo do\n25 × 18 do\ndo do\nMG\n20 × 13 do\n185, 215, 245 and do\nonwards varying by 30 cm\n25 × 13 do\ndo do\n20 × 15 do\ndo do\nNG\n18 × 13 do\ndo do\n20 × 13 do\ndo do\n25 × 13 do\ndo do\n}\n}\n}\n} 2.1\nSECTION 7\nBITUMEN AND TAR PRODUCTS CONTENTS\nTitle\nPage\nIS\n73 : 1992\nPaving bitumen (second revision)\n7.3\nIS\n212 : 1983\nCrude coal tar for general use (second revision)\n7.5\nIS\n215 : 1995\nRoad tar (third revision)\n7.6\nIS\n216 : 1961\nCoal tar pitch (revised)\n7.8\nIS\n218 : 1983\nCreosote oil for use as wood preservatives (second revision)\n7.9\nIS\n454 : 1994\nCutback bitumen from waxy crude (second revision)\n7.10\nIS\n702 : 1988\nIndustrial bitumen (second revision)\n7.11\nIS\n3117 : 2004\nBitumen emulsion for roads and allied application (anionic type) (first revision)\n7.12\nIS\n8887 : 2004\nBitumen emulsion for roads (cationic type) (second revision)\n7.14\nIS\n9912 : 1981\nCoal tar based coating materials and suitable primers for protecting\n7.15 iron or steel pipe lines. 1. Scope — Covers physical and chemical\nrequirements of paving bitumens for use in roadways, runways and allied constructions.\n2. Types and Gades\na) Type 1— Paving bitumen from non-waxy crude; and b) Type 2 —Paving bitumen from waxy crude.\n2.1 Paving Bitumen Type 1— Shall be classified into\nsix grades according to their penetration and each grade shall be given a designation as given in Table 1 with\nletter ‘S’ denoting the type and a numeral representing the mean of the limits of the penetration specified for\nthe grade.\n2.2 Paving bitumen Type 2— Shall be classified into\nfour grades according to their penetration and each grade shall be given a designation as given in Table 2 with\nletter ‘A’ denoting the type and a numeral representing the mean of the limit of the penetation specified for the\ngrade.\n3. Requirements — The material shall be\nhomogeneous and shall not foam when heated to 175°C.\nFor a given lot under each type the softening point for samples taken from different parts of the lot shall not\nvary by more than 8°C from maximum to minimum and shall not fall outside the range of the test range of the\ntest limits specified in Tables 1 and 2.\nTABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR PAVING BITUMEN TYPE 1\nSl\nCharacteristics\nRequirements for Grades\nS35\nS45\nS55\nS65\nS90\nS200\n(1) (2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\ni)\nSpecific gravity at 27 °C, Min\n0.99\n0.99\n0.99\n0.99\n0.99\n0.99 ii)\nWater, percent by mass, Max\n0.2\n0.2\n0.2\n0.2\n0.2\n0.2 iii) Flash point, cleveland open cup, °C, Min\n175\n175\n175\n175\n175\n175 iv) Softening point °C\n50 to 65\n45 to 60\n45 to 60\n40 to 55\n35 to 50\n30 to 45 v)\nPenetration at 25oC 100g, 5Second.,1/10 mm 30 to 40 40 to 50\n50 to 60\n60 to 70\n80 to 100 175 to 225 vi) Penetration ratio*, Min\n35\n35\n35\n35\n35\n35 vii) Ductility at27 ° C, cm, Min\n50\n75\n75\n75\n75\n-viii)Paraffin wax content, percent by mass, Max\n4.5\n4.5\n4.5\n4.5\n4.5\n4.5 ix) Frass breaking point, °C, Min\n– 4\n–4\n–6\n–6\n–8\n–10 x)\nLoss on heating, in thin film oven test, percent by mass, Max\n1\n1\n1\n1\n1\n2 xi)\nRetained penetration after\n55\n55\n52\n52\n47\n42 thin film oven test, 25 °C\n100g, 5 second, 1/10mm percent of original, Min\nxii) Matter soluble in trichloroethylene\n99\n99\n99\n99\n99\n99 percent by mass, Min\nxiii)Viscosity at a) 60°C, Poises\n2 500±500 2 000±400\n1 500±300\n1 000±200\n500±100\n250±50 b) 135°C, CSt, Min 220 210 180 150 110 20"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 73: 1992",
    "title": "Paving Bitumen",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "summary": "(Second Revision) Penetrationat C g s Penetrationat C g s x 4 200 60 25 100 5 100 0 0 , , , , * Penetration ratio=",
    "keywords": [
      "determination",
      "viscosity",
      "penetrationat",
      "penetration",
      "kinematric",
      "absolute",
      "dean"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 73: 1992 Paving Bitumen\n(Second Revision)\nPenetrationat\nC\ng s\nPenetrationat\nC\ng s x\n4\n200\n60\n25\n100\n5\n100\n0\n0\n,\n,\n,\n,\n* Penetration ratio= Note—For methods of tests, refer to.\nIS 1202 : 1978 Methods of testing tar and bituminous material: Determination of specific gravity (first revision).\nIS 1203 : 1978 Determination of penetration (first revision).\nIS 1205 : 1978 Determination of softening point (first revision).\nIS 1206 (Part 2):1978 Determination of viscosity, Part 2 Absolute viscosity (first revision).\nIS 1206 (Part 3):1978 Determination of viscosity Part 3 Kinematric viscosity (first revision).\nIS 1208 : 1978 Determination of ductility (first revision).\nIS 1211 : 1978 Determination of water content (dean and Stark method) (first revision).\nIS 1212 : 1978 Determination of loss on heating (first revision).\nIS 1216 : 1978 Determination of solubility in carbon disulphide trichloroethylene (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1448 (Part 69): 1969",
    "title": "Methods Of Tests For Petroleum And Its Products Part 69: Flash And Fire Point By Cleveland (Open) Cup",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "summary": "IS 9381:1979 Methods of testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of FRAASS breaking point of bitumen. IS 9382 : 1979 Determination of effect of heat and air by thin film oven tests.",
    "keywords": [
      "fraass",
      "determination",
      "effect",
      "thin",
      "oven",
      "film",
      "bituminous"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 1448 (Part 69): 1969 Methods Of Tests For Petroleum And Its Products Part 69: Flash And Fire Point By Cleveland (Open) Cup\nIS 9381:1979 Methods of testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of FRAASS breaking point of bitumen.\nIS 9382 : 1979 Determination of effect of heat and air by thin film oven tests."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10512: 1983",
    "title": "Methods For Determination Of Wax Content In Bitumen.",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "summary": "Covers the requirements of crude coal tar used for general purposes, such as treatment of wooden poles and sleepers, toilet walls, fishing nets, etc.",
    "keywords": [
      "penetration",
      "paving",
      "thin",
      "oven",
      "ratio",
      "film",
      "mass"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the requirements of crude coal tar used for general purposes, such as treatment of wooden poles and sleepers, toilet walls, fishing nets, etc."
    },
    "content": "IS 10512: 1983 Methods For Determination Of Wax Content In Bitumen.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 73:1992. Specification for paving bitumen (second revision).\nTABLE 2 REQUIREMENTS FOR PAVING BITUMEN TYPE 2\nSl\nCharacteristics\nRequirements for Grades\nNo.\nA35\nA55\nA65\nA90\n(1) (2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\ni)\nSpecific gravity at 27°C, Min\n0.99\n0.99\n0.99\n0.98 ii)\nWater, percent by mass, Max\n0.2\n0.2\n0.2\n0.2 iii) Flash point, Cleveland open cup, °C, Min\n175\n175\n175\n175 iv) Softening point °C\n55 to 70\n45 to 60\n45 to 60\n35 to 50 v)\nPenetration at 25°C, 100g,5 sec., 1/10mm 30 to 40\n50 to 60\n60 to 70\n80 to 100 vi) Penetration ratio*, Min\n25\n25\n25\n25 vii) Ductility at 27°C, cm, Min\n10\n15\n15\n15 viii)Paraffin wax content,\n10\n10\n10\n10 percent by mass, Max\nix) Frass breaking point,°C, Min\n–4\n–6\n–8\n–10 x)\nLoss on heating in thin film oven test, percent by mass, Max\n1\n1\n1\n1 xi) Retained penetration after thin film\n57\n57\n47\n42 oven test,25°C 100 g, 5 second, 1/10 mn\npercent of original, Min xii) Matter soluble in trichloroethylene\n99\n99\n99\n99 percent by mass, Min\nxiii)Viscosity at a) 60°C, Poises\n1 000 ±300 400 ±300\n300 ±100\n200 ±50 b) 135°C, cost, Min 250 100 70 50\n0\n0\nPenetration 4 C,200g,60s\nPenetration ratio\n100\nPenetration at 25 C, 100g, 5s\n=\n×\n* 1. Scope — Covers the requirements of crude coal\ntar used for general purposes, such as treatment of wooden poles and sleepers, toilet walls, fishing nets,\netc."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 212: 1983",
    "title": "Crude Coal Tar For General Use",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "summary": "(Second Revision) TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF CRUDE COAL TAR Sl. No. Characteristics Min Max (1) (2) (3) (4) i) Specific gravity 27°C/27°C 1.09 1.24 ii) Water Content percent/ weight — 4 iii) Viscosity BRTA 4mm at 30°Cs, 30 100 iv) Distillation fractions percent w/w Up to 200°C — 4 200 to 230°C 2 10 230 to 270°C 6 12 270 to 300°C 4 7 300 to 350°C 12 17 v) Mineral matter (Ash) 0 1 vi) Matter insoluble in benzene percent by weight 5 25 Note — For methods of tests refer to IS 1202 : 1978 Methods of tes",
    "keywords": [
      "benzene",
      "viscosity",
      "determination",
      "distillation",
      "matter",
      "insoluble",
      "gravity"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 212: 1983 Crude Coal Tar For General Use\n(Second Revision)\nTABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF CRUDE COAL TAR Sl. No. Characteristics\nMin\nMax (1) (2)\n(3)\n(4) i)\nSpecific gravity 27°C/27°C\n1.09\n1.24 ii)\nWater Content percent/ weight\n—\n4 iii)\nViscosity BRTA 4mm at 30°Cs,\n30\n100 iv)\nDistillation fractions percent w/w\nUp to 200°C\n—\n4\n200 to 230°C\n2\n10\n230 to 270°C\n6\n12\n270 to 300°C\n4\n7\n300 to 350°C\n12\n17 v)\nMineral matter (Ash)\n0\n1 vi)\nMatter insoluble in benzene percent by weight\n5\n25\nNote — For methods of tests refer to\nIS 1202 : 1978 Methods of testing tar and bituminous materials: Determination of specific gravity (first revision)\nIS 1206 (Part 3):1978 Determination of viscosity Part 3 Kinematic viscosity (first revision)\nIS 1211 : 1978 Determination of water content (Dean and Stark method) (first revision).\nIS 1213 : 1978 Distillation test (first revision).\nIS 1214 : 1978 Determination matter insoluble in benzene (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1217: 1978",
    "title": "Determination Of Mineral Matter (Ash)",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "summary": "Covers two types of tar each having five grades of road tars with different viscosity ranges suitable for different types of road construction under the climatic conditions prevalling in various parts of the country.",
    "keywords": [
      "road",
      "dressing",
      "grades",
      "tar",
      "five",
      "coal",
      "types"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers two types of tar each having five grades of road tars with different viscosity ranges suitable for different types of road construction under the climatic conditions prevalling in various parts of the country. 2. Types and Grades 2.1 Types Type A — for surface dressing and dense tarsurfacings. Type B — for open graded premix carpet with or without seal coat. 2.2 Grades — There shall be five grades of road tar as follows : RT-1— For surface dressing under cold weather conditions and use on hill"
    },
    "content": "IS 1217: 1978 Determination Of Mineral Matter (Ash)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 212:1983 Specification for crude coal tar for general use\n(second revision).\n2. Composition Shall be obtained as a by product\nof destructive distillation of coal.\n3. Requirements See Table 1 1. Scope — Covers two types of tar each having\nfive grades of road tars with different viscosity ranges suitable for different types of road construction under\nthe climatic conditions prevalling in various parts of the country.\n2. Types and Grades\n2.1 Types\nType A — for surface dressing and dense tarsurfacings.\nType B — for open graded premix carpet with or without seal coat.\n2.2 Grades — There shall be five grades of road tar as\nfollows : RT-1— For surface dressing under cold weather conditions and use on hill"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 215: 1995",
    "title": "Road Tar",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "summary": "(Third Revision) roads at high altitudes as well as for priming the base; RT-2 — For surface painting in normal climatic conditions; RT-3 — a) For surface painting and renewal coat; b) For premix chipping carpet (top course and light carpets); RT-4 — For premix tar macadam (base course) and dense tar surfacing; and RT-5 — For grouping and water proofing. 3. Requirements 3.1 Road tars shall be prepared entirely from crude tar produced as a by- product of carbonization of coal to cover both high t",
    "keywords": [
      "anthracene",
      "oil",
      "weight",
      "tars",
      "viscosity",
      "evt",
      "phenols"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 215: 1995 Road Tar\n(Third Revision)\nroads at high altitudes as well as for priming the base; RT-2 — For surface painting in normal climatic conditions; RT-3 — a) For surface painting and renewal coat; b) For premix chipping carpet (top course and light carpets); RT-4 — For premix tar macadam (base course)\nand dense tar surfacing; and RT-5 — For grouping and water proofing.\n3. Requirements\n3.1 Road tars shall be prepared entirely from crude tar\nproduced as a by- product of carbonization of coal to cover both high temperature (HT) and low temperature\n(LT) coal tars in coke ovens or retorts.\nTABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR TYPE A ROAD TARS Sl. No. Characteristics\nLimits for Grades\nRT-1\nRT-2\nRT-3\nRT-4\nRT-5 (1) (2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7) i)\nSpecific gravity at 27/27°C\n1.16-1.26\n1.16-1.26\n1.18-1.28\n1.18-1.28\n1.18-1.28 ii)\nViscosity by standard tar viscometer (10 mm cup) — a) Temperature of test, °C\n35\n40\n45\n55\n65 b) Viscosity in seconds\n30–55\n30–55\n35–60\n40–60\n40–60 iii)\nEquiviscous temperature (EVT)°C\n32–36\n37–41\n43–46\n53–57\n63–68 iv)\nSoftening point (R&B), °C\n15–19\n20–24\n26–29\n26–40\n45–50 v)\nDistillation fractions, percent by weight (g per 100g)\nDistilling — a) Light oil below 200°C\n0.5\n0.5\n0.5\n0.5\n0.5 b) Middle oil 200°C-270°C\n5–12\n2–9\n1–6\n0.5–4\n0–4 c) Heavy oil 270°C-300°C\n4–10\n4–8\n3–6\n2–7\n1–5 d) Anthracene oil 300°C-350°C 15–25\n16–26\n17–27\n18–29\n18–29 e) Pitch residue converted\n45–60\n50–65\n55–70\n60–75\n65–80 to 76°C (R &B) vi)\nSoftening point (R&B) of the pitch residue —\npercent by weight, Max a) at 300°C, Max\n48\n50\n52\n54\n56 b) at 360°C, Max\n90\n90\n90\n90\n90 vii)\nWater content, percent by weight, Max\n0.5\n0.5\n0.5\n0.5\n0.5 viii)\nPhenols, percent by weight, Max\n2.0\n2.0\n2.0\n2.0\n2.0 ix)\nNaphthalene, percent by weight,\n4.0\n3.5\n3.0\n2.5\n2.0\nMax x)\nRaw anthracene, percent\n3.5\n4.0\n4.0\n4.0\n4.0 by weight, Max xi) Matter insoluble in toluene, 22\n22 24 24\n24 percent by weight, Max TABLE 2 REQUIREMENTS FOR TYPE B ROAD TARS Sl.No. Characteristics\nLimits of Grades\nRT-1\nRT-2\nRT-3\nRT-4\nRT-5 (1) (2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7) i)\nSpecific gravity at 27/27oC\n1.10-1.28\n1.10-1.28\n1.12-1.28\n1.12-1.28\n1.14-1.28 ii) Viscosity by standard tar\nviscometer (10 mm cup): a) Temperature of test, °C\n35\n40\n45\n55\n65 b) Viscosity in seconds\n30-55\n30-55\n35-60\n35-70\n35-70 iii) Equiviscous temperature (EVT)°C\n32-36\n37-41\n43-46\n53-57\n63-67 iv) Softening point (R&B), °C\n-\n-\n-\n-\n45-50 v) Distillation fractions, percent\nby weight (g per 100g)\nDistilling : a) Light oil below 170°C\n0.5\n0.5\n0.5\n0.5\n0.5 b) Middle oil 170oC-270°C\n5-12\n2-9\n1-6\n0-4\n0-4 c) Heavy oil 270oC-300°C\n4-10\n4-8\n3-6\n2-7\n1-5 d) Anthracene oil above 300°C\n17-27\n18-28\n18-28\n19-30\n19-30 e) Pitch residue converted\n50-70\n61-71\n64-74\n67-77\n70-80 to 76°C (R&B) vi) Softening point (R&B) of the pitch residue, °C a) at 300°C, Max\n40\n40\n40\n40\n40 b) at 360°C, Max\n80\n80\n80\n80\n80 vii) Water content, percent by\nweight, Max\n0.5\n0.5\n0.5\n0.5\n0.5 viii) Phenols, percent by\n2.0\n2.0\n2.0\n2.0\n2.0 weight, Max ix) Naphthalene, percent\n4.0\n3.5\n3.0\n2.5\n2.0 by weight, Max x) Raw anthracene, percent\n3.5\n4.0\n4.0\n4.0\n4.0 by weight, Max xi) Matter insoluble in toluene,\n22\n22\n24\n24\n24 percent by weight, Max\ns\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to\nIS 1202 : 1978 Methods of testing tar and bituminous material : Determination of specific gravity (first revision).\nIS 1205 : 1978 Determination of Softening point (first revision).\nIS 1206(Part 1) : 1978 Determination of viscosity: Part 1 Industrial viscosity (first revision).\nIS 1207 : 1978 Determination of equiriscous temperature (EVT) (first revision).\nIS 1211: 1978 Determination of water content (Deam and Stark method) (first revision).\nIS 1215 : 1978 Determination of matter insoluble in toluene (first revision).\nIS 1218 : 1978 Determination of phenols (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1219: 1978",
    "title": "Determination Of Naphthalene.",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "summary": "Requirements for the range of four grades of coal tar pitch from soft to hard consistencies with softening points varying from 45 to 92°C intended for the production of waterproofing, protective and binding compounds employed in masonary, steel, timber and concrete structures and also for the preparation of roofing felts. Note — Coal tar pitch is also used for caulking of decks, as a binder for carbon electrodes and coal briquetters, for damp-proof courses, fllooring mastics and as a base for co",
    "keywords": [
      "coal",
      "tar",
      "pitch",
      "soft",
      "softening",
      "distillation",
      "hard"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for the range of four grades of coal tar pitch from soft to hard consistencies with softening points varying from 45 to 92°C intended for the production of waterproofing, protective and binding compounds employed in masonary, steel, timber and concrete structures and also for the preparation of roofing felts. Note — Coal tar pitch is also used for caulking of decks, as a binder for carbon electrodes and coal briquetters, for damp-proof courses, fllooring mastics and as a base for coal tar paints. This is not suitable for formulation of quick drying black enamels nor for road construction.",
      "Grades": "Shall be classified into the following four grades: a) Soft pitch, b) Soft medium pitch, c) Hard medium pitch, d) Hard pitch. 3. Requirements 3.1 Composition — The material shall be: a) either the residue of the direct distillation of crude tar produced by the high temperature carbonization of coal in coke ovens or retorts, or b) obtained by fluxing back such pitch residues with high boiling coal tar distillates to give products of the desired softening point. 3.2 The material shall also comply with the requirements, according to grade, given in Table1. Note — For methods of tests, refer to IS 1202:1978 methods of testing tar bituminous material: Determination of specific gravity (first revision) IS 1205:1978 Determination of softening point (first revision). IS 1213:1978 Distillation test"
    },
    "content": "IS 1219: 1978 Determination Of Naphthalene.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 215 : 1995 Specification for road tar (third revision). 1. Scope — Requirements for the range of four\ngrades of coal tar pitch from soft to hard consistencies with softening points varying from 45 to 92°C intended\nfor the production of waterproofing, protective and binding compounds employed in masonary, steel, timber\nand concrete structures and also for the preparation of roofing felts.\nNote — Coal tar pitch is also used for caulking of decks, as\na binder for carbon electrodes and coal briquetters, for damp-proof courses, fllooring mastics and as a base for\ncoal tar paints. This is not suitable for formulation of quick drying black enamels nor for road construction.\n2. Grades — Shall be classified into the following\nfour grades:\na) Soft pitch, b) Soft medium pitch,\nc) Hard medium pitch, d) Hard pitch.\n3. Requirements\n3.1 Composition — The material shall be:\na)\neither the residue of the direct distillation of crude tar produced by the high temperature\ncarbonization of coal in coke ovens or retorts, or\nb)\nobtained by fluxing back such pitch residues with high boiling coal tar distillates to give\nproducts of the desired softening point.\n3.2 The material shall also comply with the\nrequirements, according to grade, given in Table1.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to IS 1202:1978 methods of testing tar bituminous material: Determination of specific gravity\n(first revision)\nIS 1205:1978 Determination of softening point (first revision).\nIS 1213:1978 Distillation test (first revision).\nIS 1215:1978 Determination of matter insoluble in toulene (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 216: 1961",
    "title": "Coal Tar Pitch",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "summary": "(Revised) TABLE 1 EQUIREMENTS FOR COAL TAR PITCH Sl. Characteristics Requirements for Grades No. Soft Pitch Soft Medium Hard Medium Hard Pitch Pitch Pitch (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) Specific gravity at 27°C 1.20 to 1.30 1.22 to 1.32 1.22 to 1.32 1.28 to 1.38 ii) Softening point 45 to 55°C 58 to 68°C 70 to 80°C 82 to 92°C iii) Distillate : Percent by weight below 270°C, Max 4 4 3 No Test Percent by weight below 300°C, Max 8 8 4 No Test iv) Matter insoluble in toluene (free carbon), percent by wei",
    "keywords": [
      "pitch",
      "soft",
      "weight",
      "equirements",
      "hard",
      "distillate",
      "toluene"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 216: 1961 Coal Tar Pitch\n(Revised)\nTABLE 1 EQUIREMENTS FOR COAL TAR PITCH Sl.\nCharacteristics\nRequirements for Grades No.\nSoft Pitch\nSoft Medium\nHard Medium\nHard Pitch\nPitch\nPitch (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i)\nSpecific gravity at 27°C\n1.20 to 1.30\n1.22 to 1.32\n1.22 to 1.32\n1.28 to 1.38 ii)\nSoftening point 45 to 55°C 58 to 68°C 70 to 80°C 82 to 92°C iii)\nDistillate :\nPercent by weight below 270°C, Max 4\n4\n3\nNo Test\nPercent by weight below 300°C, Max 8\n8\n4\nNo Test iv)\nMatter insoluble in toluene\n(free carbon), percent by weight, Max 25\n28\n30\n35 v)\nAsh, percent by weight, Max\n0.5\n0.5\n0.75\n0.8"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 454: 1994",
    "title": "Cutback Bitumen From Waxy Crude",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "summary": "Covers the physical and chemical requirements of cutbacks bitumen from waxy crude of indigenous origin.",
    "keywords": [
      "viscosity",
      "distillation",
      "determination",
      "waxy",
      "distillate",
      "crude",
      "ductility"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the physical and chemical requirements of cutbacks bitumen from waxy crude of indigenous origin. 2. Grades a) Light grade — For use as primer. TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR CUTBACK BITUMEN FROM WAXY CRUDE Sl.No. Characteristics Requirement for Grades Light Medium Heavy Min Max Min Max Min Max (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) i) Kinematic viscosity, 600C cst 70 140 800 1600 3000 6000 ii) Flash point, Pensky Martens closed type,0°C 38 — 55 — 55 — iii) Distillate volume, percent of total distillate up to 3600C a) Up to 190° C 10 — 30 — — — b) Up to 225° C 50 — 30 — — — c) Up to 260° C 70 — 30 — — — d) Up to 315° C 85 — 75 — 50 — iv) Residue from distillation up to 360°C, percent by volume (by difference) 55 — 75 — 80 — v) Tests on residue from distillation upto 360°C a) Viscosity at 60° C, p",
      "Requirements": "See Table 1 Note— For methods of tests, refer to IS 1203 : 1978 Determination of penetration (first revision). IS 1206 (Part1):1978 Determination of viscosity Part 1 Industrial viscosity (first revision). IS 1208 : 1978 Determination of ductility (first revision). IS 1209 : 1978 Determination of flash point and fire point (first revision). IS 1211 : 1978 Determination of water content (Dean and Stark method) (first revision). IS 1213 : 1978 Distillation test (first revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 454: 1994 Cutback Bitumen From Waxy Crude\n(Second Revision)\n1. Scope— Covers the physical and chemical\nrequirements of cutbacks bitumen from waxy crude of indigenous origin.\n2. Grades\na) Light grade — For use as primer.\nTABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR CUTBACK BITUMEN FROM WAXY CRUDE Sl.No. Characteristics Requirement for Grades Light\nMedium Heavy\nMin\nMax\nMin Max\nMin\nMax (1) (2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5) (6)\n(7)\n(8)\ni)\nKinematic viscosity, 600C cst\n70\n140\n800 1600\n3000\n6000 ii)\nFlash point, Pensky Martens closed type,0°C\n38\n—\n55 —\n55\n—\niii)\nDistillate volume, percent of total distillate up to 3600C a) Up to 190° C\n10\n—\n30 —\n—\n— b) Up to 225° C\n50\n—\n30 —\n—\n— c) Up to 260° C\n70\n—\n30 —\n—\n— d) Up to 315° C\n85\n—\n75 —\n50\n—\niv)\nResidue from distillation up to 360°C, percent by volume (by difference)\n55\n—\n75 —\n80\n—\nv)\nTests on residue from distillation upto 360°C a) Viscosity at 60° C, poises\n600\n2400\n100 2400\n100\n2400 b) Ductility at 27° C\n12\n—\n10 —\n10\n— c) Matter soluble in Trichloroethylene percent by mass\n99\n—\n99 —\n99\n— d) Penetration 25° C /100g/5Sec\n35\n70\n50 100\n25\n50 vi)\nWater content percent by mass\n—\n0.2\n— 0.2\n—\n0.2 b)\nMedium grade — For surface dressing and resurfacing operations, and\nc)\nHeavy grade— For pre-mix type of construction.\nNote — The source and grade shall be stated by the\nmanufacturer.\n3. Requirements— See Table 1\nNote— For methods of tests, refer to\nIS 1203 : 1978 Determination of penetration (first revision).\nIS 1206 (Part1):1978 Determination of viscosity Part 1 Industrial viscosity (first revision).\nIS 1208 : 1978 Determination of ductility (first revision).\nIS 1209 : 1978 Determination of flash point and fire point (first revision).\nIS 1211 : 1978 Determination of water content (Dean and Stark method) (first revision).\nIS 1213 : 1978 Distillation test (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1203: 1978",
    "title": "Determination Of Solubility In Carbon Disulphide Trichloroethylene.",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "summary": "Covers the physical and chemical requirements of industrial bitumen for use in buildings and other indusrtrial purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "bitumen",
      "indusrtrial",
      "cutback",
      "waxy",
      "crude",
      "industrial",
      "buildings"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the physical and chemical requirements of industrial bitumen for use in buildings and other indusrtrial purposes.",
      "Grades": "a) 85/25 b) 85/40 c) 90/15"
    },
    "content": "IS 1203: 1978 Determination Of Solubility In Carbon Disulphide Trichloroethylene.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 454 : 1991 Specifications for cutback bitumen from waxy crude (second revision). 1. Scope — Covers the physical and chemical\nrequirements of industrial bitumen for use in buildings and other indusrtrial purposes.\n2. Grades –\na) 85/25 b) 85/40\nc) 90/15"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 702: 1988",
    "title": "Industrial Bitumen",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "(Second Revision) d) 115/15 e) 135/10 f) 155/6 Note— The two values given in the grade denotes approximately softnening point and penetration respectively 3. Requirements — See Table 1 TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF INDUSTRIAL BITUMEN Sl. Characteristics Requirements for Grades No. 85/25 85/40 90/15 115/15 135/10 155/6 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) i) Specific gravity at 27°C 1.00 to 1.05 1.00 to 1.05 1.01 to 1.06 1.02 to 1.07 1.02 to 1.071.02 to 1.07 ii) Flash point, cleveland open cup, °C 225 225 2",
    "keywords": [
      "determination",
      "penetration",
      "point",
      "ductility",
      "heating",
      "softening",
      "gravity"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Requirements": "See Table 1 TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF INDUSTRIAL BITUMEN Sl. Characteristics Requirements for Grades No. 85/25 85/40 90/15 115/15 135/10 155/6 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) i) Specific gravity at 27°C 1.00 to 1.05 1.00 to 1.05 1.01 to 1.06 1.02 to 1.07 1.02 to 1.071.02 to 1.07 ii) Flash point, cleveland open cup, °C 225 225 225 225 225 225 iii) Softening point, °C 80 to 90 80 to 90 85 to 100 110 to 120 130 to 140 150 to 160 iv) Penetration at 25°C, 20 to 30 35 to 45 10 to 20 8 to 20 7 to 12 2 to 10 100g, 5 sec, 1/10mm v) a) Loss on heating, percent by mass, Max 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 b) Penetration of the residue at 25°C, 100g, 5s, percent of original Min 60 60 60 60 60 60 vi) Ductility at 27°C, cm, Min 3 3 2 2 1 0 vii) Matter soluble in trichloro-ethylene, percent by mass, Min 99 9"
    },
    "content": "IS 702: 1988 Industrial Bitumen\n(Second Revision)\nd) 115/15 e) 135/10\nf) 155/6\nNote— The two values given in the grade denotes\napproximately softnening point and penetration respectively\n3. Requirements — See Table 1\nTABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF INDUSTRIAL BITUMEN Sl. Characteristics\nRequirements for Grades No.\n85/25\n85/40\n90/15\n115/15\n135/10\n155/6 (1) (2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7) (8) i)\nSpecific gravity at 27°C 1.00 to 1.05\n1.00 to 1.05\n1.01 to 1.06\n1.02 to 1.07\n1.02 to 1.071.02 to 1.07 ii)\nFlash point, cleveland open cup, °C\n225\n225\n225\n225\n225\n225 iii)\nSoftening point, °C\n80 to 90\n80 to 90\n85 to 100\n110 to 120\n130 to 140 150 to 160 iv)\nPenetration at 25°C,\n20 to 30\n35 to 45\n10 to 20\n8 to 20\n7 to 12\n2 to 10\n100g, 5 sec, 1/10mm v)\na) Loss on heating, percent by mass, Max\n0.30\n0.30\n0.30\n0.30\n0.30\n0.30 b) Penetration of the residue at 25°C, 100g, 5s, percent of original Min\n60\n60\n60\n60\n60\n60 vi)\nDuctility at 27°C, cm, Min\n3\n3\n2\n2\n1\n0 vii)\nMatter soluble in trichloro-ethylene,\npercent by mass, Min 99\n99\n99\n99\n99\n99\nNote—For methods of tests, refer to\nIS 1202:1978 Methods of testing tar and bituminous materials, determination of specific gravity (first revision).\nIS 1203:1978 Determination of penetration (first revision)\nIS 1205:1978 Determination of softening point (first revision)\nIS 1208:1978 Determination of ductility (first revision)\nIS 1212:1978 Determination of loss on heating (first revision)\nIS 1216:1978 Determination of solubility in carbon disulphide trichloroethylene (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3117: 2004",
    "title": "Bitumen Emulsion For Roads And Allied Applications (Anionic Type)",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "summary": "Physical and chemical requirements of grades of bitumen emulsion (anionic type) for roads and allied applcations.",
    "keywords": [
      "bitumen",
      "emulsion",
      "emulsified",
      "setting",
      "miscibility",
      "fluxing",
      "fair"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Physical and chemical requirements of grades of bitumen emulsion (anionic type) for roads and allied applcations. 2. Materials 2.1 Bitumen — The bitumen straight or fluxed, used for the manufacture of the emulsion, shall comply with the following requirements. a) The penetration shall be between 100 and 350; b) Softening point (Ring and Ball) shall not be higher than 48°C; c) Solubility in carbon disulphide shall not be less than 99.0 percent; and d) The loss of weight after heating for five hours at 163° shall not exceed two percent of the original weight. After carrying out this test the penetration of bitumen shall not be less than 60 percent of its original value. 2.1.1 If it is desired to modify the performance of the emulsion during periods of low temperature, fluxing the bitumen wit"
    },
    "content": "IS 3117: 2004 Bitumen Emulsion For Roads And Allied Applications (Anionic Type)\n(First Revision )\n1. Scope — Physical and chemical requirements of\ngrades of bitumen emulsion (anionic type) for roads and allied applcations.\n2. Materials\n2.1 Bitumen — The bitumen straight or fluxed, used\nfor the manufacture of the emulsion, shall comply with the following requirements.\na) The penetration shall be between 100 and 350;\nb) Softening point (Ring and Ball) shall not be higher than 48°C;\nc) Solubility in carbon disulphide shall not be less than 99.0 percent; and\nd) The loss of weight after heating for five hours at 163° shall not exceed two percent of the\noriginal weight. After carrying out this test the penetration of bitumen shall not be less than 60\npercent of its original value.\n2.1.1 If it is desired to modify the performance of the emulsion during periods of low temperature, fluxing the\nbitumen with the addition of a quantity of fluxing agent not exceeding five percent by weight of bitumen shall\nbe permitted. Unless otherwise agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser, the fluxing agents shall\ncomply with the following requirements:\na) Intial boiling point not less than 140°C; and b) Distillate at 350°C not less than 90 percent by volume.\n2.2 Emulsifying Agent — The emulsifying agent, in\nthe proportion in which it is present in the bitumen deposited by the emulsion, shall not have any\ndeleterious effect upon the properties of that bitumen.\n3. Types\n3.1 a) Rapid Setting – Type RS b) Medium Setting – Type MS\nc)\nSlow Setting – Type SS\n3.2 Applications a) Type RS — A quick setting, emulsified bitumen used for penetration and surface treatments;\nb)\nType MS — A medium setting emulsified bitumen used for plant mixes with coarse\naggregate, substantially all of which is retained on 2.80-mm IS Sieve with practically no material\npassing a 75- micron IS Sieve c)\nType SS — A slow setting emulsified bitumen used for fine aggregate mixes in which a\nsubstantial quantity of aggregate passes a\n2.80-mm IS Sieve and a portion may passing a\n75 micron IS Sieve.\nNote — These types are to be used only down to a emperature\nof 5°C. Below 5° C the utility of the bitumen emulsion is likely to be impaired because of freezing as such they shorted\nbe preferally be stored above 4 0C.\n4. Requirements\n4.1 Bitumen emulsion shall be homogeneous. Within\n90 days after manufacture it shall show no undispersed bitumen after thorough mixing.\n4.2 Physical and chemical requirements shall be as\ngiven in Table 1.\nNote -Can shall be exercised to the that materials used in the\nmanufacture of butiurn shall not have any time effects on the plant or animl life. Note — The emulsified bitumen shall not show an a preciable separation of bituminous base from the water of the emulsion\nand shall coat the aggragate thoroughly.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to IS 1211:1978 Methods for testing tar and bitumen: Determination of water content\n(Dean and Stark method) (first revision) and Appendices A to J of the stand.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3117 : 2004 Specifications for Bitumen emulsion for roads and allied application. (Anionic type)\nTABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF BITUMEN EMULSION\nSl. No.\nCharacteristic\nRapid\nMedium\nStow\nMethod of Test,\nSetting\nSetting\nSetting\nRef to Annex\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\ni)\nViscosity by Sabybolt Furol\n20-100\n20-100\n20-100\nA\nviscometer, in second at 25ºC ii)\nBitumen content, percent by mass, Min\n65\n65\n57\nB\niii)\nSettlement, 5 days, percent, Max\n3\n3\n3\nC\niv)\nDemulsibility, 35 ml of 0.02 N\n60\n_\n_\nD\ncalcium chloride, percent Min v)\nMiscibility1 in water, coagulation in 2 h\n_\nNil\n_\nE\nvi)\nModified miscibility with water\n_\n_\n4.5\nF\ndifference of bitumen content, Max vii)\nCement mixing test, percent, Max\n_\n_\n2.0\nG\nviii)\nCoating ability and water resistance a) Coating dry aggregate\n_\nGood\n_ b) Coating after spraying\n_\nFair\n_ c) Coating wet aggregate\n_\nFair\n_\nH\nd) Coating after spraying\n_\nFair\n_ ix)\nSieve test, percent, Max\n0.10\n0.10\n0.5\nJ\nx)\nParticle charge\nNegative\nNegativ\nNegative\nK\n1If the sample of emulsified bitumen being tested fails to conform to the requirement, the sample shall be tested for 5-day settlement and for miscibility and if the numerical difference between the average percentage of residue in the 5-day settlement test is less than\n3, and if the miscibility test shows no appreciable coagulation in 2h, then the emulsified bitumen shall be considered conforming to this standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9912: 1981",
    "title": "Coal Tar Based Coating Materials And Sutable Primers For Protecting Iron Or Steel Pipe Lines",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "summary": "Requirements of hot applied coal tar based coatings and their associated primers used for protecting iron and steel pipes. This standard covers two types of coating materials suitable for extremes of temperature (See Table 1).",
    "keywords": [
      "coal",
      "primers",
      "primer",
      "pitches",
      "viscosity",
      "penetration",
      "solvents"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of hot applied coal tar based coatings and their associated primers used for protecting iron and steel pipes. This standard covers two types of coating materials suitable for extremes of temperature (See Table 1).",
      "Hot Applied Coating Material": "The material shall be produced by digestion of bituminous coal or its selected fractions suitable for this purpose together with an approved inert filler (like talc, etc) sized to ensure that not less than 100 percent passes through 45-micron IS Sieve. 3. Primers 3.1 The primers shall be of two types, namely, Type A and Type B. 3.2 Type A primer shall be composed of processed coal tar pitch suitably blended with selected grades of solvents, to a fluid that may be applied cold by brushing, spraying or any other method. The primer shall also comply with the requirement given in Table 2. 3.3 Type B primer shall consist of chlorinated rubber and synthetic plasticiser together with solvents needed to give a consistency suitable for application by brush or spray. Type B primer shall comply with "
    },
    "content": "IS 9912: 1981 Coal Tar Based Coating Materials And Sutable Primers For Protecting Iron Or Steel Pipe Lines\n1. Scope — Requirements of hot applied coal tar\nbased coatings and their associated primers used for protecting iron and steel pipes. This standard covers\ntwo types of coating materials suitable for extremes of temperature (See Table 1).\n2. Hot Applied Coating Material — The material\nshall be produced by digestion of bituminous coal or its selected fractions suitable for this purpose together with\nan approved inert filler (like talc, etc) sized to ensure that not less than 100 percent passes through 45-micron\nIS Sieve.\n3. Primers\n3.1 The primers shall be of two types, namely, Type A\nand Type B.\n3.2 Type A primer shall be composed of processed coal\ntar pitch suitably blended with selected grades of solvents, to a fluid that may be applied cold by brushing,\nspraying or any other method. The primer shall also comply with the requirement given in Table 2.\n3.3 Type B primer shall consist of chlorinated rubber\nand synthetic plasticiser together with solvents needed to give a consistency suitable for application by brush\nor spray. Type B primer shall comply with the requirements of Table 3.\nTABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF HOT APPLIED COATING MATERIAL Sl Characteristics Requirements No. Type I Type II\nMin\nMax\nMin\nMax (1) (2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6) i)\nSoftening point (R&B)°C\n105\n115\n105\n115 ii)\nPenetration (see Note): at 25°C/100 g/5 seccond\n5\n10\n12\n20 at 45°C/50g/5 second\n10\n25\n20\n50 iii)\nSpecific gravity at 270C\n1.4\n1.6\n1.4\n1.6 iv)\nAsh, percent\n25\n35\n25\n35 v)\nSag test at 70°C\n—\n1.5 mm\n—\n1.5 mm vi) Cracking at 20°C Not applicable None vii)\nImpact test\nDisbonded area, Max :\nDirect\n70 cm2 50 cm2\nIndirect\n20 cm2 10 cm2 viii) Peel-initial/delayed at 30°C, Max\n3 mm 3 mm at 40°C, Max\n3 mm 3 mm at 50°C, Max\n3 mm 3 mm at 60°C, Max\n3 mm 3 mm at 70°C, Max\n3 mm 3 mm\nNote — Coal dispersion pitches have a tendency to form a hard thin skin while hot, and penetration values tend to show a wide\nvariation, on the prior preparation of the sample, which is not easy to control, and dependent on the point chosen on the surface for the test. The behaviour and performance of these coal dispersion pitches are functions of the property of the body\nof the material and not of any surface skin. To overcome this, fill the cup up to the brim and after cooling down, pour a little excess of material slowly and carefully to form a convex surface. The excess material is to be cut with a hot knife after cooling\nfor 15 min at room temperature. Sl Characterics Requirements No.\ni)\nViscosity at 25oC\n20 to 40 Second ii)\nFlash point\n35°C (Min)\niii)\nVolatile matter at\n40 to 60 percent 145°C-150°C\nby weight iv) Drying time\nConditions of\nAppendix C shall apply\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices of the standard and the following:\nIS 82:1973 Methods of sampling and test for thinners and solvent for paints (first revision).\nIS 1202:1978 Methods of testing tar and bituminous materials, Determination of specific gravity (first revision).\nIS 1203:1978 Determination of penetration (first revision).\nIS 1205:1978 Determination of softening point (first revision).\nIS 1206 (Part 1):1978 Determination of Viscosity : Part 1 Industrial viscosity (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1207: 1978",
    "title": "Determination Of Equiviscous Temperature.",
    "category": "Bitumen and Tar Products",
    "summary": "For detailed informatiom refer to IS 9912 : 1981 Specifications for coal tar based coating materials and suitable primers for protecting iron or steel pipe lines. TABLE 2 REQUIREMENTS OF TYPE A PRIMER TABLE 3 REQUIREMENTS OF TYPE B PRIMER Sl Characteristics Requirements No. i) Viscosity at 25°C 20 to 40 Second ii) Flash point 35°C (Min) iii) Volatile matter at 60 to 80 percent 100-110°C by weight iv) Drying time Conditions of Appendix C shall apply",
    "keywords": [
      "tiles",
      "ceramic",
      "mastic",
      "bitumen",
      "group",
      "dust",
      "pressed"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 1207: 1978 Determination Of Equiviscous Temperature.\nFor detailed informatiom refer to IS 9912 : 1981 Specifications for coal tar based coating materials and suitable primers for protecting iron or steel pipe lines.\nTABLE 2 REQUIREMENTS OF TYPE A PRIMER\nTABLE 3 REQUIREMENTS OF TYPE B PRIMER Sl Characteristics Requirements No.\ni)\nViscosity at 25°C\n20 to 40 Second ii)\nFlash point\n35°C (Min)\niii)\nVolatile matter at\n60 to 80 percent\n100-110°C\nby weight iv)\nDrying time\nConditions of\nAppendix C shall apply 2.1\nSECTION 8\nFLOOR, WALL, ROOF COVERINGS\nAND FINISHES CONTENTS\nTitle\nPage\nGENERAL\nIS\n1237:1980\nCement concrete flooring tiles (first revision)\n8.4\nIS\n1542:1992\nSand for plaster (second revision)\n8.6\nIS\n2116:1980\nSand for masonry mortars (first revision) 8.7\nIS\n4457:1982\nCeramic unglazed vitreous acid resisting tile (first revision).\n8.8\nIS 4832\nChemical resistant mortars :\n(Part 1) :1969\nSilican type.\n8.9\n(Part 2) :1969\nResin type.\n8.10\n(Part 3) :1968\nSulphur type\n8.11\nIS 4860:1968\nAcid Resistant bricks 8.12\nIS 13753:1993\nDust pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption E>10 percent Group (B III)\n8.13\nIS 13754:1993\nDust pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of 6<E ≤ 10 percent Group (B IIb)8.15\nIS 13755:1993\nDust pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of 3<E <6 percent Group (BII a) 8.18\nIS 13756:1993\nDust pressed ceramic tiles with Low water absorption of E ≤3 percent Group (B I)8.21\nIS 14862 :2000\nFibre cement flat sheets\n8.24\nIS 14871-2000\nProducts in fibre reinforced cement– Long corrugated or asymetrical section sheets and fittings for roofing and cladding\n8.27\nBITUNINOUS\nIS 1195:2002\nBitumen mastic for flooring (third revision)\n8.30\nIS 5317:2002\nBitumen mastic for bridge decking and roads (second revision)\n8.32\nIS\n8374:1977\nBitumen mastic, anti–static and electrically conducting grade\n8.33\nIS 9510:1980\nBitumen mastic acid–resisting grade\n8.34\nIS 12583:1988\nCorrugated bitumen roofing sheets\n8.36\nIS 13026:1991\nBitumen mastic for flooring for industries handling LPG and other light hydrocarbon products\n8.38\nLINOLEUM\nIS 653:1992\nLinoleum sheets and tiles (third revision)\n8.39\nPLASTIC PVC AND EPOXY RESIN\nIS 3461:1980\nPVC asbestos floor tiles (first revision)\n8.41 Title\nPage"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3462: 1986",
    "title": "Unbacked Flexible Pvc Flooring",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "Requirements for cement concrete flooring tiles of plain cement, plain coloured and terrazo types. Chequered tiles are not covered.",
    "keywords": [
      "tiles",
      "wearing",
      "chips",
      "terrazo",
      "layer",
      "sizevarying",
      "coloured"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for cement concrete flooring tiles of plain cement, plain coloured and terrazo types. Chequered tiles are not covered. 2. Terminology",
      "Plain Cement Tiles": "Tiles having a wearing surface wherein no pigments and stone chips are used. 2.2 Plain Coloured Tiles– Tiles having a plain wearing surface wherin pigments are used but no stone chips. 2.3 Terrazo Tiles– Tiles at least 25 percent of whose wearing surface is composed of stone chips in a matrix of ordinary or coloured Portland cement mixed with or without pigments and mechanically ground and filled. 3. Classification a) General Purpose — Used for flooring of normally lightly loaded, such as in office building, schools colleges, hospitals and residential buildings. b) Heavy Duty Floor Tiles— Used for heavy conditions, foot paths, entrances and staircases of public buildings, passages of auditoriums and storage godowns. 4. Dimensions 4.1 Size shall be as follows: Length Breadth Thickness mm mm",
      "General Quality": "Wearing layer of tiles shall be free from projections, depressions , cracks, holes, cavities and other blemishes. Edges of wearing layer may be rounded.",
      "Finish": "Colour and texture of wearing layer shall be uniform throughout its thickness. No appreciable difference in appearance of tiles from point of view of colour of aggregate, its type and its distribution on surface of wearing layer shall be present.",
      "Physical Requirements": "All tests shall be carried out not earlier than 28 days from the date of manufacture."
    },
    "content": "IS 3462: 1986 Unbacked Flexible Pvc Flooring\n8.42\nIS 9197:1979\nEpoxy resin, hardeners and epoxy resin composition for floor topping.\n8.44\nIS 12866:1989\nPlastic translucent sheets made from thermosetting\n8.46 polyester resin (Glassfibre reinforced)\nRUBBER\nIS 638:1979\nSheet rubber jointing and rubber insertion jointing (second revision) 8.48\nIS 809:1992\nRubber flooring materials for general purposes (second revision)\n8.50 1. Scope — Requirements for cement concrete\nflooring tiles of plain cement, plain coloured and terrazo types. Chequered tiles are not covered.\n2. Terminology\n2.1. Plain Cement Tiles – Tiles having a wearing surface wherein no pigments and stone chips are used.\n2.2 Plain Coloured Tiles– Tiles having a plain wearing\nsurface wherin pigments are used but no stone chips.\n2.3 Terrazo Tiles– Tiles at least 25 percent of whose\nwearing surface is composed of stone chips in a matrix of ordinary or coloured Portland cement mixed with or\nwithout pigments and mechanically ground and filled.\n3. Classification\na) General Purpose — Used for flooring of normally lightly loaded, such as in office building, schools\ncolleges, hospitals and residential buildings. b) Heavy Duty Floor Tiles— Used for heavy conditions, foot paths, entrances and staircases\nof public buildings, passages of auditoriums and storage godowns.\n4. Dimensions\n4.1 Size shall be as follows: Length Breadth Thickness mm mm mm\n200 200 20\n250 250 22\n300 300 25\n4.1.1 Half tiles rectangular in shape shall also be available.\n4.1.2 Other shapes and sizes of tiles may be manufactured when agreed to mutually provided all\nother requirements are met.\n5. Tolerances\n5.1 On length or breadth, it shall be ±1 mm and on\nthickness +5 mm.\n5.2 Thickness of Wearing Layer — The minimum\nthickness for various classes of tiles shall be as specified in Table 1. TABLE 1 THICKNESS OF WEARING LAYER\nSl. No. Class of Tile\nMinimum\nThickness of Wearing\nLayer mm i)\nPlain cement and plain coloured tiles for general purpose 5 ii)\nTerrazo tiles with chips of sizevarying from the smallest up to6 mm, for\ngeneral purpose 5 iii)\nTerrazo tiles with chips of sizevarying from the smallest upto12 mm, for\ngeneral purpose 5 iv)\nTerrazo tiles with chips of sizevarying from the smaller up to 20 mm, for\ngeneral purpose 6 v)\nPlain cement and plain coloured tiles for heavy duty 6 vi)\nTerrazo tiles with chips of size varying from the smallest upto 20 mm, for\nheavy duty 6\n6. General Quality — Wearing layer of tiles shall\nbe free from projections, depressions , cracks, holes, cavities and other blemishes. Edges of wearing layer\nmay be rounded.\n7. Finish — Colour and texture of wearing layer\nshall be uniform throughout its thickness. No appreciable difference in appearance of tiles from point\nof view of colour of aggregate, its type and its distribution on surface of wearing layer shall be present.\n8. Physical Requirements — All tests shall be\ncarried out not earlier than 28 days from the date of manufacture."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1237: 1980",
    "title": "Cement Concrete Flooring Tiles",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "Requirements of naturally occurring sands and crushed gravel sands used in mortars for internal wall and ceiling plastering, and external plastering using mixes of lime, cement, composite lime-cement, activated lime pozzolana mixture (ALMP) or gypsum with or without admixtures and sand.",
    "keywords": [
      "sands",
      "sand",
      "grading",
      "wear",
      "crushed",
      "organic",
      "impurities"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of naturally occurring sands and crushed gravel sands used in mortars for internal wall and ceiling plastering, and external plastering using mixes of lime, cement, composite lime-cement, activated lime pozzolana mixture (ALMP) or gypsum with or without admixtures and sand. 2. Quality of sand 2.1 General — The sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings and organic matter and shall not contain clay, silt and dust more than specified. 2.2 Deleterious Materials 2.2.1 The sand shall not contain any harmful impurities, such as, iron pyrites, alkalis, salts, coal, mica, shale or similar laminated materials, soft fragments, sea shells and organic impurities in such quantities as to affect adversely the hardening , the strength, the durability or the appearance"
    },
    "content": "IS 1237: 1980 Cement Concrete Flooring Tiles\n(Second Revision) 8.1 Flatness of tile Surface –The amount of concavity\nand convexity shall not exceed 1 mm.\n8.2 Perpendicularity – The longest gap between the\narm of the ‘square’ and the edge of tile shall not exceed\n2 percent of length of edge.\n8.3 Straightness – The gap between the thread and the\nplane of tile shall not exceed 1 percent of length of edge.\n8.4 Water Absorbtion – Average value shall not exceed\n10 percent.\n8.5 Wet Transverse Strength –Average value shall not\nbe less than 3 N/mm\n8.6 Resistance of Wear – The wear shall not exceed the\nfollowing values —\na) For general purpose tiles— 1) Average wear 3.5 mm 2) Wear on individual specimen 4 mm b) For heavy duty floor tiles — 1) Average wear 2 mm 2) Wear on individual specimen 2.5 mm\nNote — For requirements in regard to materials, manufacture and for methods of tests refer to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1237 : 1980 Specification for cement concrete flooring tiles (first revision). 1. Scope — Requirements of naturally occurring\nsands and crushed gravel sands used in mortars for internal wall and ceiling plastering, and external plastering\nusing mixes of lime, cement, composite lime-cement, activated lime pozzolana mixture (ALMP) or gypsum\nwith or without admixtures and sand.\n2. Quality of sand\n2.1 General — The sand shall be hard, durable, clean\nand free from adherent coatings and organic matter and shall not contain clay, silt and dust more than specified.\n2.2 Deleterious Materials\n2.2.1 The sand shall not contain any harmful impurities, such as, iron pyrites, alkalis, salts, coal, mica, shale or\nsimilar laminated materials, soft fragments, sea shells and organic impurities in such quantities as to affect\nadversely the hardening , the strength, the durability or the appearance of the plaster of applied decoration, or\nto cause corrosion of metal lathing or other metal in contact with the plaster.\n2.2.2 Maximum quantities of clay, fine silt, fine dust and organic impurities in the sand shall not exceed the\nfollowing limits:\na)\nClay, silt and dust not more than 5 percent by weight.\nb)\nOrganic impurities colour of liquid below that indicated by comparison with the standard solution\nspecified in 6.2.2of IS 2386 (Part 2) : 1963*\n2.3. Average compressive strength of mortar cubes composed of one part of cement and six parts of sand\nconforming to gradation in Table 1 shall not be less than 3 N/mm2 at 28 days.\n*IS 2386 Methods of test for aggregates for concrete Part 2–\nEstimation of deleterious materials and organic impurities.\nTABLE 1 GRADING OF STAND FOR INTERNAL\nWALL OR EXTERNAL WALL OR CEILING\nPLASTER IS Sieve Percentage Designation Passing 10 mm 100 4.75 mm 95-100 2.36 mm 95-100 1.18 mm 90-100 600 micron 80-100 300 micron 20-65 150 micron 0-15\nNote — For crushed stone sands and orushed gravel sands,\nthe permissible limit on 150 micron IS Sieve is increased to\n20 percent. This does not affect 5 percent allowance permitted.\n3. Grading of Sand\n3.1 The particle size grading of sand for plaster work\nshall be as specified in Table 1. Where the grading falls outside the limits of the grading zones of sieves other\nthan 150, 300 and 600 micron IS Sieve by a total amount not exceeding 5 percent, it shall be regarded as falling\nwithin the grading.\n3.2 The fineness modulus of sand shall be not less\nthan 1.4 in case of crushed stone sands and crushed gravel sands and not less than 1.5 in case of naturally\noccuring sands.\n3.3 The various sizes of particles of which the sand is\ncomposed shall be uniformly distributed throughout the mass.\n3.4 The required grading may often be obtained by\nscreening and /or by blending together either natural sands or crushed stone screenings, which are by\nthemselves of unsuitable grading. Note — For methods of tests, refer to\nIS 1727 : 1967 Methods of test pozzolanic materials (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2250: 1981",
    "title": "Code Of Practice For Preparation And Use Of Masonry Mortars.",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "For detailed information refer to IS 1542:1992 Specificaion for sand for plaster (second revision).",
    "keywords": [
      "specificaion",
      "plaster",
      "sand",
      "information",
      "detailed"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 2250: 1981 Code Of Practice For Preparation And Use Of Masonry Mortars.\nFor detailed information refer to IS 1542:1992 Specificaion for sand for plaster (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1542: 1992",
    "title": "Sand For Plaster",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "Requirements of naturally occurring sands, crushed stone sands and crushed gravel sands used in mortars for construction of masonry.",
    "keywords": [
      "sand",
      "crushed",
      "sands",
      "organic",
      "impurities",
      "grading",
      "fine"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of naturally occurring sands, crushed stone sands and crushed gravel sands used in mortars for construction of masonry. 2. Quality of Sand",
      "General": "The sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings and organic matter and shall not contain the amount of clay, silt and fine dust more than specified. 2.2. Deleterious Material 2.2.1 The sand shall not contain any harmful impurities such as iron pyrites, alkalis, salts, coal or other organic impurities, mica, shale or similar laminated materials, soft fragments, sea shells in such form or in such quantities as to affect adversely the hardening, strength or durability of the mortar. 2.2.2 Maximum quantities of clay, fine silt, fine dust and organic impurities in the sand shall not exceed the following limits: a) Clay, fine silt and fine dust— 1) In natural sand or Not more than 5 percent by crushed gravel sand mass 2) In crushed stone sand Not more than 5 percent by mas"
    },
    "content": "IS 1542: 1992 Sand For Plaster\n(Second Revision) 1. Scope — Requirements of naturally occurring\nsands, crushed stone sands and crushed gravel sands used in mortars for construction of masonry.\n2. Quality of Sand\n2.1. General — The sand shall be hard, durable, clean and free from adherent coatings and organic matter and\nshall not contain the amount of clay, silt and fine dust more than specified.\n2.2. Deleterious Material\n2.2.1 The sand shall not contain any harmful impurities such as iron pyrites, alkalis, salts, coal or other organic\nimpurities, mica, shale or similar laminated materials, soft fragments, sea shells in such form or in such quantities\nas to affect adversely the hardening, strength or durability of the mortar.\n2.2.2 Maximum quantities of clay, fine silt, fine dust and organic impurities in the sand shall not exceed the\nfollowing limits: a) Clay, fine silt and fine dust— 1) In natural sand or Not more than 5 percent by crushed gravel sand mass 2) In crushed stone sand Not more than 5 percent by mass b) Organic impurities— Colour of the liquid shall be lighter than that indicated by the specified in IS: 2386 (Part 2) : 1963*\n3. Grading of Sand\n3.1 The particle size grading of sand for use in mortars\nshall be within the limits as specified in Table 1.\nTABLE 1 GRADING OF SAND FOR USE IN\nMASONRY MOTORS\nTTTTTTTTTTTABLETABLE 1GRADING OF AND\nIS sieve Percentage designation passing by mass\n(1)\n(2)\n4.75 mm 100\n2.36 mm\n90 to 100\n1.18 mm\n70 to 100\n600 micron\n40 to 100\n300 micron 5 to 70\n150 micron 0 to 15\n3.2\nVarious sizes of particles of which the sand is composed shall be uniformly distributed throughout\nthe mass.\n3.3\nThe required grading may often be obtained by screening and/or by blending together either natural\nsands or crushed stone screenings, which are, by themselves unsuitable. Note: For methods of test, refer to IS 2386 Methods of tests for aggregates for concrete Part 1 : 1963 Particle size and shape\n* Part 2 : 1963 Estimation of deleterious materials and organic impurities.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2116 : 1980 Specificaion for sand for masonry mortars\n(first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4457: 1982",
    "title": "Ceramic Unglazed Vitreous Acid Resisting Tiles",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "Requirements for ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resisting titles.",
    "keywords": [
      "silicate",
      "tiles",
      "acid",
      "potassium",
      "resistant",
      "kgf",
      "sodium"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for chemically setting silicate type of chemical resistant mortars for bonding chemical resistant mansonry units. Such mortars are resistant to most type of acids except hydrofluoric acid and concentrated orthophosphoric acids. They are not resistant to alkalis or to boiling water and steam. They deteriorate by continued exposure to water. 2. Materials 2.1 Binder — Solution of sodium silicate or potassium silicate with silica/sodium oxide or silica/potassium oxide molecular ratio of 3 to 3.7. Specific gravity 1.4. 2.2 Fillers — Silica, quartz, ganister, andesite, etc. 2.3 Selling Agent — Fluoride or acid compound.",
      "Chemical Requirements": "Limits of chemical resistance may be settled between the purchaser and the supplier. TABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUITEMENTS OF SILICATE TYPE CHEMICAL RESISTANT MOTARS Sl No. Property Requirement Sodium Potassium Silicate Silicate Type Type (1) (2) (3) (4) (i) Working time at 27 ± 2o C, 15 20 Min,minutes (ii) Flexural strength at 35 40 7 days,Min, kgf/cm2 (iii) Compressive strength at 100 150 7 days Min, kgf/cm2 (iv) Bond strength, Min kgf/cm2 5 5 (v) Absorption of toluene, Max, 18 18 percent by weight"
    },
    "content": "IS 4457: 1982 Ceramic Unglazed Vitreous Acid Resisting Tiles\n(First Revision)\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4457 : 1982 Specificaion for ceramic unglazed vitreous acid resisting tiles (first revision).\n1. Scope — Requirements for ceramic unglazed\nvitreous acid resisting titles.\n2. Dimensions and Tolerances\n2.1 Sizes —\n(i)\n100 × 100 mm or 98.5 × 98.5 mm\n(ii)\n150 × 150 mm or 148.5 × 148.5 mm and\n(iii) 200 × 200 mm or 198.5 mm × 198.5 mm\n2.2 Thickness — Shall be 25, 20, 12 and 10 mm.\n2.3 The depth of the grooves on the under side of the\ntiles shall not exceed 3 mm.\nNote — The thickness of the tiles shall be measured after\nfilling the grooves with cement mortar and drying.\n2.4 Half tiles for use as full tiles, if manufactured, shall\nhave dimensions which shall be such as to make the half tiles, when jointed together, match with the\ndimension of a full tile.\n2.5 Tolerances — Tolerances on length, width and\nthickness of the tiles shall be ± 2.5 percent.\n3. Requirements\nTABLE 1 REQUIREMENT OF CERAMIC UN-\nGLAZED VITREOUS ACID RESISTING TILES\nSl. No. Characteristic Requirement\n(1) (2) (3)\ni)\nSquareness\nThe gap between the inner edge of the square and the ad-\njacent side of the tile shall not exceed 1 mm per100 mm run\nii)\nWarpage for size(i) ± 1.5 mm for size(ii) ± 2.0 mm for size(iii) ± 2.5 mm iii)\nWater absorption\n2 percent, Max iv)\nCompressive strength\n70 N/mm\n2 (700 kgf/ cm2), Min v)\nFlexural strength\n20 N/mm2(200kgf/ cm2), Min\nvi)\nResistance to acid\nLoss in mass shall not exceed\n1.5 percent vii)\nAbrasion resistance i) Average wear 2 mm, Max\nii) Wear on individual specimen 2.5mm, Max. 1. Scope — Requirements for chemically setting silicate\ntype of chemical resistant mortars for bonding chemical resistant mansonry units. Such mortars are resistant to\nmost type of acids except hydrofluoric acid and concentrated orthophosphoric acids. They are not\nresistant to alkalis or to boiling water and steam. They deteriorate by continued exposure to water.\n2. Materials\n2.1 Binder — Solution of sodium silicate or potassium\nsilicate with silica/sodium oxide or silica/potassium oxide molecular ratio of 3 to 3.7. Specific gravity 1.4.\n2.2 Fillers — Silica, quartz, ganister, andesite, etc.\n2.3 Selling Agent — Fluoride or acid compound.\n3.\nPhysical Requirements — See Table 1.\n4.\nChemical Requirements — Limits of chemical resistance may be settled between the purchaser and\nthe supplier.\nTABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUITEMENTS OF\nSILICATE TYPE CHEMICAL RESISTANT\nMOTARS Sl No. Property Requirement Sodium Potassium Silicate Silicate Type Type (1)\n(2)\n(3) (4) (i) Working time at 27 ± 2o C,\n15 20 Min,minutes (ii) Flexural strength at\n35 40 7 days,Min, kgf/cm2 (iii) Compressive strength at 100 150 7 days Min, kgf/cm2 (iv) Bond strength, Min kgf/cm2 5 5 (v) Absorption of toluene, Max, 18 18 percent by weight"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4832 (Part 1): 1969",
    "title": "Chemical Resistant Mortars",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "Requirements of resin type chemical resistant mortars for bonding chemical resistant masonry units. Such mortars have good resistance to non-oxidizing mineral acid and poor resistance to oxidizing mineral acid. Fairly resistant to inorganic alkalis. Resistant to water; hence give impermeable joints. Used for joining acid-proof bricks and tiles.",
    "keywords": [
      "mortars",
      "resistant",
      "chemical",
      "silicate",
      "resin",
      "resins",
      "type"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of resin type chemical resistant mortars for bonding chemical resistant masonry units. Such mortars have good resistance to non-oxidizing mineral acid and poor resistance to oxidizing mineral acid. Fairly resistant to inorganic alkalis. Resistant to water; hence give impermeable joints. Used for joining acid-proof bricks and tiles. 2. Materials 2.1 Resins — Penolic, furane, epoxy, polyester. 2.2 Fillers— Siliceous or other inert fillers. Shall be graded so as to permit 1.5 mm joints. 2.3 Catalyst — May be incorporated in fillers",
      "General Requirements": "Resin shall have viscosity. Filler material shall have properly graded particles that will permit preparation of a minimum joint thickness of 1.5 mm.",
      "Chemical Resistance Requirement": "The limits may be settled between the purchaser and supplier.",
      "Shelf Life": "For phenolic and polyster resins is about 3 months and for furance and epoxy resins about 12 months from date of manufacture."
    },
    "content": "IS 4832 (Part 1): 1969 Chemical Resistant Mortars\nPART I – SILICATE TYPE\nNote 1— For method of tests, refer to IS 4456 (Part 1) : 1967 Methods of test for chemical resistant mortar: Part I Silicate type\nand resin type\nNote 2— For general guide for chemical resistance of sillicate type mortars to various substances, refer to Table 1 of IS\n4441:1980 Code of practice for use of silicate type chemical resistant mortars (first revision).\nFor detailed informations, refer to IS 4832 (Part 1) : 1969 Specificaion for chemical resistant mortars: Part 2 Silicate type. Note 1—\nFor methods of tests, refer to IS 4456(Part I) : 1967 Methods of test for chemical resistant mortars: Part I\nSilicate type and resin type.\nNote 2—For general guide for chemical resistance of resin type mortars to various substances, refer to Table 1of IS 4443:1980.\nCode of practic for use of resin type chemical resistant mortar (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4832 (Part 2) : 1969 Specification for chemical resistant mortars: Part 2 Resin type.\n.\n1. Scope — Requirements of resin type chemical\nresistant mortars for bonding chemical resistant masonry units. Such mortars have good resistance to\nnon-oxidizing mineral acid and poor resistance to oxidizing mineral acid. Fairly resistant to inorganic\nalkalis. Resistant to water; hence give impermeable joints. Used for joining acid-proof bricks and tiles.\n2. Materials\n2.1 Resins — Penolic, furane, epoxy, polyester.\n2.2 Fillers— Siliceous or other inert fillers. Shall be\ngraded so as to permit 1.5 mm joints.\n2.3 Catalyst — May be incorporated in fillers\n3. Physical Requirements — See Table 1.\n4. General Requirements — Resin shall have\nviscosity. Filler material shall have properly graded particles that will permit preparation of a minimum joint\nthickness of 1.5 mm.\n5. Chemical Resistance Requirement — The\nlimits may be settled between the purchaser and supplier.\n6. Shelf Life — For phenolic and polyster resins is\nabout 3 months and for furance and epoxy resins about\n12 months from date of manufacture."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4832 (Part 2): 1969",
    "title": "Chemical Resistant Mortars",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "Requirements of sulphur type chemical resistant mortars for bonding chemical resistant masonry units. Note — Such mortars have good resistance against most of the acids except concentrated oxidizing acids, but have poor resistance to alkalis. Used for jointing acid resistance bricks or tiles.",
    "keywords": [
      "mortars",
      "micron",
      "resistant",
      "acids",
      "kgf",
      "bond",
      "retained"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of sulphur type chemical resistant mortars for bonding chemical resistant masonry units. Note — Such mortars have good resistance against most of the acids except concentrated oxidizing acids, but have poor resistance to alkalis. Used for jointing acid resistance bricks or tiles. 2. Composition a) Sulphur—55 to 70 percent b) Inert filler—30 to 45 percent c) Sieve analysis of silica filler The percent material retained on different sieves shall not exceed the following: IS Sieve Percentage Retained Designation by Mass 425 micron 5 max 150 micron 10 min 75 micron 35 min Note — For other fillers, requirements gi ven at Sl No. (vii) of Table 1 shall apply."
    },
    "content": "IS 4832 (Part 2): 1969 Chemical Resistant Mortars\nPART 2 RESIN TYPE\nTABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF RESIN TYPE CHEMICAL RESISTANT\nMORTARS\nSl No.\nParticular\nRequirements for Type of Mortar Phenolic\nFurane\nEpoxy\nPolyester Type\nType\nType\nType\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5) (6)\ni) Working time at 27 ± 2°C, Min minutes 20 20 20 20 ii) Flexural strength at 7 days, Min, kgf/cm2 75 75\n150 150 iii) Compressive strength at 7 days, Min, kgf/cm2 350\n350\n500 500 iv) Bond strength, Max, kgf/cm2 10 10 12 12 v) Absorption, Max, Percent by weight\n1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0\nNote— In the test for bond strength the joint shall not fail at or below the value specified. 1. Scope— Requirements of sulphur type\nchemical resistant mortars for bonding chemical resistant masonry units.\nNote — Such mortars have good resistance against most of\nthe acids except concentrated oxidizing acids, but have poor resistance to alkalis. Used for jointing acid resistance bricks\nor tiles.\n2. Composition\na) Sulphur—55 to 70 percent b) Inert filler—30 to 45 percent\nc) Sieve analysis of silica filler\nThe percent material retained on different sieves shall not exceed the following: IS Sieve Percentage Retained Designation by Mass\n425 micron\n5 max\n150 micron\n10 min\n75 micron\n35 min\nNote — For other fillers, requirements gi ven at Sl No.\n(vii) of Table 1 shall apply.\n3. Physical Requirements — See Table 1"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4832 (Part 3): 1968",
    "title": "Chemical Resistant Mortars",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "Requirements of acid-resistant bricks. Such bricks are designed primarily, for use in chemical allied industries and are used in masonry, flooring, etc, subject to acid attack, lining of sewers carrying industrial effluents, etc. Made out of suitable clay or shale with low lime and iron content, felspar, flint or sand and vitrified at high temperatures.",
    "keywords": [
      "mortars",
      "resistant",
      "sulphur",
      "chemical",
      "hours",
      "storage",
      "tanks"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Chemical Resistance Requirements": "The limits may be settled between the purchaser and the supplier.",
      "Shelf Life": "Shall not be less than 2 years. Shall be placed in a dry place away from fire. Note 1 — For methods of tests, refer to IS 4456(Part 2) : 1967 Methods of test for chemical resistant mortars: Part 2 Sulphur type. Note 2— For general guide for chemical resistance of sulphur type mortars to various substances, refer to Table 1 of IS 4442:1980 Code of practic for use of resin type chemical resistant mortar (First Revision.) For detailed information, refer to IS 4832 (Part 3) : 1968 Specification for chemical resistant mortars: Part 3 Sulphur type.",
      "Scope": "Requirements of acid-resistant bricks. Such bricks are designed primarily, for use in chemical allied industries and are used in masonry, flooring, etc, subject to acid attack, lining of sewers carrying industrial effluents, etc. Made out of suitable clay or shale with low lime and iron content, felspar, flint or sand and vitrified at high temperatures. 2. Classification 2.1 Class I —Recommended for severe type of corrosive environments as obtained in storage tanks, pickling tanks etc. 2.2 Class II— Recommended for areas subject to occassional pillage of acids, fumes, and contact with dry chemicals as in fertilizer silos."
    },
    "content": "IS 4832 (Part 3): 1968 Chemical Resistant Mortars\nPART 3 – SULPHUR TYPE\nTABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUIRE-\nMENTS OF SULPHUR TYPE CHEMI-\nCAL\nRESISTANT MORTARS S.No. Property Requirement (1) (2) (3)\ni)\nCompressive strength at 48 hours,\n280\nMin, kgf/cm\n2 ii)\nTensile strength at 48 hours, Min, 30 kg/cm\n2 iii)\nFlexural strength at 48 hours, Min 70 kg/cm\n2 iv)\nBond strength at 48 hours Min kg/cm\n2 10 v)\nProportion of original strength retained after Shock test, Min percent\n20.0 vi)\nMoisture absorption, Max, present\n1.0 vii)\nTendency of aggregate to settle, Max\n0.6 variation from unity\n4. Chemical Resistance Requirements—\nThe limits may be settled between the purchaser and the supplier.\n5. Storage Life — Shall not be less than 2 years.\nShall be placed in a dry place away from fire.\nNote 1 — For methods of tests, refer to IS 4456(Part 2) : 1967 Methods of test for chemical resistant mortars: Part 2 Sulphur\ntype.\nNote 2— For general guide for chemical resistance of sulphur type mortars to various substances, refer to Table 1 of IS 4442:1980\nCode of practic for use of resin type chemical resistant mortar (First Revision.)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4832 (Part 3) : 1968 Specification for chemical resistant mortars: Part 3 Sulphur type. 1. Scope — Requirements of acid-resistant bricks.\nSuch bricks are designed primarily, for use in chemical allied industries and are used in masonry, flooring, etc,\nsubject to acid attack, lining of sewers carrying industrial effluents, etc. Made out of suitable clay or shale with\nlow lime and iron content, felspar, flint or sand and vitrified at high temperatures.\n2. Classification\n2.1 Class I —Recommended for severe type of\ncorrosive environments as obtained in storage tanks, pickling tanks etc.\n2.2 Class II— Recommended for areas subject to\noccassional pillage of acids, fumes, and contact with dry chemicals as in fertilizer silos."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4860: 1968",
    "title": "Acid – Resistant Bricks",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "3. Performance Requirements–See Table 1 4. Dimensions — 230 × 114 × 64 mm. 5. Tolerances Dimensions Tolerances (mm) (mm) 230 ± 3.5 114 ± 2.0 64 ± 1.0 6. Warpage — Not more than 2.5 mm at any point. Note— For measurement of warp, refer to 2.4.1 of the standard. TABLE 1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OF ACID RESISTANT BRICKS S. No. Characteristic Requirements Class I Bricks Class II Bricks (1) (2) (3) (4) i) Water absorption, percent, Max 2 4 ii) Flexual strength, kgf/cm2 , Min 100 70 iii) Compressive s",
    "keywords": [
      "bricks",
      "acid",
      "wear",
      "resistant",
      "flexual",
      "kgf",
      "loss"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Dimensions": "230 × 114 × 64 mm. 5. Tolerances Dimensions Tolerances (mm) (mm) 230 ± 3.5 114 ± 2.0 64 ± 1.0",
      "Warpage": "Not more than 2.5 mm at any point. Note— For measurement of warp, refer to 2.4.1 of the standard. TABLE 1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OF ACID RESISTANT BRICKS S. No. Characteristic Requirements Class I Bricks Class II Bricks (1) (2) (3) (4) i) Water absorption, percent, Max 2 4 ii) Flexual strength, kgf/cm2 , Min 100 70 iii) Compressive strength, kgf/cm2, Min 700 500 iv) Resistance to acid Loss in weight shall not Loss in weight shallnot exceed 1.5 percent exceed 4.0 percent v) Resistance to wear (optional) Average wear shall not exceed 2 mm Note – For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to D of the standard and Appendix A of IS 1237:1980 Specification for cement concrete flooring tiles (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 4860 : 1968 Specification for acid resistant br"
    },
    "content": "IS 4860: 1968 Acid – Resistant Bricks\n3. Performance Requirements–See Table 1\n4. Dimensions — 230 × 114 × 64 mm.\n5. Tolerances\nDimensions\nTolerances\n(mm) (mm)\n230 ± 3.5\n114 ± 2.0 64 ± 1.0\n6.\nWarpage — Not more than 2.5 mm at any point.\nNote— For measurement of warp, refer to 2.4.1 of the\nstandard.\nTABLE 1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OF ACID RESISTANT BRICKS\nS. No.\nCharacteristic Requirements\nClass I Bricks Class II Bricks\n(1) (2) (3) (4)\ni)\nWater absorption, percent, Max 2 4 ii)\nFlexual strength, kgf/cm2 , Min 100 70 iii)\nCompressive strength, kgf/cm2, Min 700 500 iv)\nResistance to acid\nLoss in weight shall not\nLoss in weight shallnot exceed 1.5 percent\nexceed 4.0 percent v)\nResistance to wear (optional)\nAverage wear shall not exceed 2 mm\nNote – For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to D of the standard and Appendix A of IS 1237:1980 Specification for cement\nconcrete flooring tiles (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4860 : 1968 Specification for acid resistant bricks."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13753: 1993",
    "title": "Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles With Water",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "Specifies sizes, dimensional tolerances, mechanical, physical and chemical requirements, surface quality requirements and marking of ceramic tiles. 1.1It is applicable only to dust-pressed ceramic glazed tiles first quality, with a water absorption (E>10%) according to Group B III of IS 13712 : 1993* for use as both wall and floor coverings. Tiles in this group are mainly used in areas not subject to severe mechanical load. They are not intended for applications where conditions of frost may app",
    "keywords": [
      "tiles",
      "spacer",
      "lugs",
      "work",
      "ceramic",
      "group",
      "lug"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Specifies the sizes, dimensional tolerances, mechanical, physical and chemical requirements, surface quality requirements and marking of ceramic tiles. It is applicable only to dust-pressed ceramic tiles of first quality, including tiles premounted on sheets, with a water absorption of 6%<E ≤10% according to Group B- IIb of IS 13712:1993* for interior and exterior use on both floors and walls.",
      "Description": "The surface of tiles and components belonging to this group can be smooth, profiled, wavy, decorated or finished in some other way. It can be unglazed (UGL), glossy, matt or semi-matt (GL). Although tiles have visible surface and usually a surface which is intended to be adhered and bears a back panel, they may have identical surface without a panel or marking. Tiles may have spacer lugs. 3. Shapes and Sizes 3.1 The modular preferred coordinating sizes (work size+joint width) in cm are M10×10, M15×15, M20×10, M20×15, M20×20 and M30×30. The manufacturer shall choose the work size (dimensions of the visible faces, length and width) in order to allow a nominal joint width between 2 and 5 mm. * Ceramic tiles— defination, classification, characteristics and marking 3.2 The most common non-modul",
      "Spacer Lug Tiles": "Spacer lugs are projections, which are located along certain edges of tiles so that when two tiles are placed together, in line, the lugs on adjacent edges separate the tiles by a distance not less than the specified width of joint. Lugs are positioned so that the joint between the tiles may be filled with grout without the lugs remaining exposed. Dust–pressed tiles— may be made with other spacer lug systems and in such cases the manufacturer’s work size shall apply. Note — Some tiles have one or more manufacturing projections part way along certain edges and smaller than 0.3 mm. These are not intended as spacer lugs and lugs and should not be used to space joints."
    },
    "content": "IS 13753: 1993 Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles With Water\nABSORPTION OF E>10% GROUP B III\n1. Scope — Specifies sizes, dimensional tolerances,\nmechanical, physical and chemical requirements, surface quality requirements and marking of ceramic tiles.\n1.1It is applicable only to dust-pressed ceramic glazed tiles first quality, with a water absorption (E>10%)\naccording to Group B III of IS 13712 : 1993* for use as both wall and floor coverings. Tiles in this group are\nmainly used in areas not subject to severe mechanical load. They are not intended for applications where\nconditions of frost may apply.\n1.2There is a small production of dust-pressed ceramic unglazed tiles with a water absorption greater than 10%\nthat is not covered by this standard.\n2. Description — The surface of tiles and compo-\nnents belonging to this group can be smooth, profiled, wavy, decorated or finished in some other way. It can be\nglossy, matt or semi-matt (GL).— Tiles may have spacer lugs.\n3. Shapes and Sizes\n3.1 The modular preferred coordinating sizes (work size\n+ joint width) in cm are M30×30, M30×15, M25×15,\nM20×20, M20×15, M15×15, M15×7.5 and M10×10. The manufacturers shall choose the work size (dimension of\nthe visible faces, length and width) in order to allow a nominal joint width between 1.5 and 5 mm.\n3.2 The most common non-modular nominal sizes in\ncm are 40×40, 33×33, 30×30, 30×15, 25×25, 21.6×10.8,\n20×40, 20×30, 20×20, 20×15, 15.2×15.2, 15.2×7.6, 15×15,\n15×7.5, 10.8×10.8 and 10×20. The manufactures shall choose work size such that difference between the work\nsize and nominal size is not more than ± 2 mm. For spacer lug tiles, work size shall apply for each nominal size\nwithin the limits mentioned above.\n3.3 The thickness including the profile on the visual\nface and on the rear side shall be specified by the manufacturer.\nNote— For details of shapes, refer to Fig 1 and 2 of the\nstandard.\n4. Spacer Lug Tiles—Spacer Lugs are projections,\nusually of 0.6 mm, which are located along certain edges of tiles so that when two tiles are placed together in line,\nthe lugs on adjacent edges separate the tiles by a distance not less than the specified width of joint . Lugs\nare positioned so that the joint between the tiles may be filled with grout without the lugs remaining exposed.\nDust – pressed tiles may be made with other spacer lug systems and in such cases the manufacturer’s work size\nshall apply.\nNote— Some tiles have one or more manufacturing\nprojections part way along certain edges and smaller than\n0.3 mm. These are not intended as spacer lugs and shall not be used to space joints\n5.\nRequirements : See Table 1.\n* Ceramic tiles — defination, classification, characteristics and marking. TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS Characteristics\nRequirements\nTest According to\nIS 13630\nA)\nDimensions and Surface Quality i) Length and Width\nPart 1 e The deviation in % of the average size for each tile\n1 12 cm: 0.75)1) (2 or 4 sides) from the work size\n1> 12 cm: 0.5 Tiles with spacer lugs\n+0.6/-0.3 f The deviation in % of the average size for each tile\n1 12cm: 0.51) (2 or 4 sides) from the average size of the 10 test specimens\n1>12cm: 0.3 (20 or 40 sides) Tiles with spacer lugs 0.25 ii) Thickness\nPart 1 The deviation in mm of the average thickness of each tile from the work size thickness <250 cm2 0.5 >250 to 500 cm2 0.6 >500 to 1000 cm2\n+ 0.7 >1000 cm2 0.8 iii) Straightness of sides 2 (facial sides)\nPart 1 The maximum deviation from straightnes in % 0.3 related to the corresponding work size iv) Rectangularity 2)\nPart 1 The maximum deviation from rectangularity, in %\n+ 0.5 related to the corresponding work sizes Tiles with spacers lugs\n+ 0.3 v) Surface flatness\nPart 1 The maximum deviation from flatness in % for tiles with spacer lugs values are in mm (in brackets ) a) Centre curvature, related to diagonal calculated\n+ 0.5/--0.3(+0.8/-0.1mm) from the work size b) Edge curvature, related to the corresponding\n+0.5/-0.3 (+0.8/-.1mm) work size c) Warpage, related to diagonal calculated from the 0.5( 0.5mm) work sizes vi) Surface Quality\nMin 95% of tiles shall be free from\nPart 1 visible defects that would impair\nthe appearance of major area of tiles\nB) Physical Properties i) Water absorption % by weight\nAverage 10-20%. When the\nPart 2 value exceeds 20% this shall be indicated\nby the manufacturer ii) Modulus of rupture in N/mm2\nAverage 15 7.5 mm thickness\nPart 6\nAverage 12 7.5 mm thickness iii) Scratch hardness of surface (Moh’s)\nMin 3 (walls), Min 5 (floors)\nPart 13 iv) Resistance to surface abrasion of tiles\nAbrasion class shall be intended for floors\nspecified by the manufacturer\nPart 11 v) Co-efficient of linear thermal expansion from\nMax 9X10-6 K-1 ambient temperature to 100oC\nPart 4 vi) Thermalshock resistance\nRequired\nPart 5 vii) Crazing resistance3)\nRequired\nPart 9\nC) Chemicals Properties i) Resistance to staining\nMin Class 2\nPart 8 ii) Resistance to household chemicals and swimming .\nMin Class B\nPart 8 poolswater cleaners except to cleansing agents containing hydrofuoric acid and its compounds ii) Resistance to acids and alkali (with the exception of\nRequired, if agreed according to the\nPart 8 hydrofluoric acid and its compounds)\nChemical resistance class indicated bythe manufacturer 1).For tiles having one or more adjacement glazed tiles. 2).Not application for tiles having curved shapes. 3). Certain decorative effects may have the tendency to craze. These shall be identified by the manufaturer in which case the crazing tests not applicable.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to various parts of IS 13630 Methods of tests for Ceramic tiles\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 13753:1993Specification for Dust-pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of E>10% (Group – B111 )\n≤\n≤\n≤\n≤\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n± 1. Scope — Specifies the sizes, dimensional\ntolerances, mechanical, physical and chemical requirements, surface quality requirements and marking\nof ceramic tiles.\nIt is applicable only to dust-pressed ceramic tiles of first quality, including tiles premounted on sheets, with\na water absorption of 6%<E ≤10% according to Group\nB- IIb of IS 13712:1993* for interior and exterior use on both floors and walls.\n2. Description — The surface of tiles and\ncomponents belonging to this group can be smooth, profiled, wavy, decorated or finished in some other way.\nIt can be unglazed (UGL), glossy, matt or semi-matt (GL).\nAlthough tiles have visible surface and usually a surface which is intended to be adhered and bears a back panel,\nthey may have identical surface without a panel or marking. Tiles may have spacer lugs.\n3. Shapes and Sizes\n3.1 The modular preferred coordinating sizes (work\nsize+joint width) in cm are M10×10, M15×15, M20×10,\nM20×15, M20×20 and M30×30. The manufacturer shall choose the work size (dimensions of the visible faces,\nlength and width) in order to allow a nominal joint width between 2 and 5 mm.\n* Ceramic tiles— defination, classification, characteristics and marking\n3.2 The most common non-modular nominal sizes in\ncm are 10×10, 15×7.5, 15×10, 15×15, 15.2×7.6, 15.2×15.2,\n20×10, 20×20, 25×25, 30×15, 30×20, 30×30 and 40×30.\nThe manfacturer shall choose the work size in such a way that the difference between the work size and the\nnominal size is not more than ± 2 percent and 5 mm.\n3.3 The thickness including profile on the visible face\nand on the rear side shall be specified by the manufacturer.\nNote: For details of shape, refer to Fig 1 and 2 of the\nstandard.\n4. Spacer Lug Tiles—Spacer lugs are projections,\nwhich are located along certain edges of tiles so that when two tiles are placed together, in line, the lugs on\nadjacent edges separate the tiles by a distance not less than the specified width of joint. Lugs are positioned so\nthat the joint between the tiles may be filled with grout without the lugs remaining exposed.\nDust–pressed tiles— may be made with other spacer lug systems and in such cases the manufacturer’s work\nsize shall apply.\nNote — Some tiles have one or more manufacturing projections\npart way along certain edges and smaller than 0.3 mm. These are not intended as spacer lugs and lugs and should not be used to\nspace joints. 5. Requirements— See Table 1"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13754: 1993",
    "title": "Dust – Pressed Ceramic Tiles With",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "Specifies the sizes, dimensional tolerances, mechanical, physical and chemical requirements, surface quality requirements and marking of ceramic tiles. It is applicable only to dust-pressed ceramic tiles of first quality, including tiles premounted on sheets, with a water absorption of 3%<E 6% according to Group B IIa of IS 13712 : 1993* for interior and exterior use on both floors floors and walls.",
    "keywords": [
      "tiles",
      "work",
      "tile",
      "deviation",
      "unglazed",
      "related",
      "glazed"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Specifies the sizes, dimensional tolerances, mechanical, physical and chemical requirements, surface quality requirements and marking of ceramic tiles. It is applicable only to dust-pressed ceramic tiles of first quality, including tiles premounted on sheets, with a water absorption of 3%<E 6% according to Group B IIa of IS 13712 : 1993* for interior and exterior use on both floors floors and walls.",
      "Description": "Mosaic is a tile of any geometrical shape whose surface area is equal to or less than 90cm2. The surface of tiles and components belonging to this group can be smooth, profiled, wavy,decorated or finished in some other way. It can be unglazed (UGL), glossy, matt or semi-matt (GL). Although tiles have visible surface and usually a surface which is intended to be adhered and bears a back panel, they may have identical surface without a panel or marking. Tiles may have spacer lugs. 3. Shapes and Sizes 3.1 The modular preferred coordinating sizes (work size + joint width) in cm are M10×10, M15×15, M20×10, M20×15, M20×20 and M30×30. The manufacturer shall chose the work size (dimensions of the visible faces, length and width) in order to allow a nominal joint width between 2 and 5 mm. 3.2 The m",
      "Spacer Hug Style": "Spacerlugs are projections, which are located along certain edges of tiles so that when two tiles are placed together, in line, the lugs on adjacent edges separate the tiles by a distance not less than the specified width of joint Lugs are positioned so that the joint between the tiles may be filled with grout without the lugs remaining exposed. Dust – pressed tiles – may be made with other spacer lug systems and in such case the manufacturer’s work size shall apply. Note– Some tiles have one or more manufacturing projections part way along certain edges and smaller than 0.3 mm.These are not intended as spacer lugs and should not be used to space joints."
    },
    "content": "IS 13754: 1993 Dust – Pressed Ceramic Tiles With\nWATER ABSORPTION OF 6% < E ≤ 10%\n(GROUP B II B )\nCharacteristics\nA) Dimensions and Surface Quality i) Length and width—\nThe deviation in % of the average size of each tile (2 to 4 sides) from the work size.\nThe deviation in % of the average size of each tile(2or 4 sides) from the average size of 10 test\nspecimens (20 or 40 sides) ii) Thickness—\nThe deviation in % of the average thickness of each tile from the work size thickness iii) Straightness of sides1) (facial sides)—\nThe maximum deviation from straightness in % related to the corresponding work size. iv) Rectangularity1)\nThe maximum deviation from rectangularity in % related to the corresponding work size TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS\nSurface S of the Product (cm2)\nS ≤ 90\n90 < S ≤190\n190 < S ≤410\nS > 410\n± 1.2\n± 1.0\n± 0.75\n± 0.6\n± 0.75\n± 0.5\n± 0.5\n± 05\n± 10\n± 10\n± 5\n± 5\n± 0.75\n± 0.5\n± 0.5\n± 0.5 Characteristics\nSurface S of the Product (cm2)\nTest According to\nIS 13630\nS ≤ 90\n90 < S ≤ 190\n190 < S ≤ 410\ns > 410\n(A) Dimensions and surface Quality i) Lenght and width\nPart 1 e\nThe deviation in % of the\n± 1.2\n± 1.0\n± 0.75\n± 0.6 average size of each tile (2\nor 4 sides) from the work size (W) f\nThe deviation in % of the\n±0.75\n±0.5\n±0.5\n±0.5 average size of each tile (2\nor 4 sides) from the average size of the 10 test specimens\n(20 or 40 sides)\nii) Thickness\nPart 1\nThe deviation in % of the\n±10\n±10\n±5\n±5 average thickness of each tile\nfrom the work size thickness iii) Straightness of sides1 (facial sides)\nPart 1\nThe maximum deviation from\n± 0.75\n± 0.5\n±0.5\n±0.5 straightness in % related to\nthe corresponding work sizes iv) Rectangularity1)\nPart 1\nThe maximum deviation from rectangularity in % related to\nthe corresponding work sizes v) Surface flatness\nPart 1\nThe maximum deviation from flatness in:\na) centre curvature, related to\n± 1.0\n± 0.5\n±0.5\n±0.5 diagonal calculated from\nthe work sizes b) Edge curvature, related to the\n±1.0\n±0.5\n±0.5\n±0.5 corresponding work size\nc) Warpage, related to diagonal\n± 1.0\n± 0.5\n± 0.5\n± 0.5 calculated from the work sizes\nvi) Surface quality2)\nMin 95% of tiles shall be free from visible defects that would Part 1 impair the appearance of a major area of tiles\nB Physical Properties i) Water absorption % by weight\nAverage 6 <E ≤ 10 Individual Max 11.0\nPart 2 ii) Modulus of rupture in N/mm2\nAverage ≤ 18, Individual Min 16\nPart 6 iii) Scratch hardness of surface (Mohs’ scale) a) Glazed tiles\nMin 5 b) Unglazed tiles\nMin 6 iv) Abrasion resistance: a) Resistance to deep abrasion\nMax 540\nPart 12 of unglazed tiles, removed volume in mm3 b) Resistance of abrasion of\nAverage to the abrasion class indicated by\nPart 11 glazed tiles Class I-IV\nThe manufacturer v) co-efficient of linear thermal\nMax 9 × 10–6\nPart 4 expansion from ambient temperature to 1000ºC (K–1)\nvi) Thermal shock resistance\nRequired\nPart 5 vii) Crazing resistance3) glazed tiles\nRequired\nPart 9 viii) Frost resistance\nRequired, if agreed\nPart 10 ix) Moisture expansion unglazed\nMax 0.6\nPart 3 tiles mm/m 1) Not applicable for tiles having curved shapes 2) Because of firing slight vartiations from the standard colour are unavoidable. This does not apply to intentional irregulari ties of colour variation of the face of dust-pressed tiles of low water absorption(which can be unglazed,glazed, or partly glazed)or to the colour variation over a tile areas which is characteristic for this type of tile and desirable.Spots or coloured dots which are introduced for decorative purposes are not consid ered a defect. 3) Certain decorative effects may have a tendency to craze. These shall be identified by the manufacturer in which case the crazing test is not applicable. 4) If the hue becomes slightly different this is not considered to be chemical attack.\nNote1— For details regarding classification and characteristics, refer to IS 13712:1993 Ceramic tiles- definitions, classifica-\ntions, characteristics and marking.\nNote 2—For methods of tests, refer to various parts of IS 13630 Methods of tests for ceramic tiles.\nFor detailed information refer to IS 13754:1993 Specification for Dust-pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of 6%<E≤ 10% (Group-BII b).\nC) Chemical Properties i) Resistance to staining of glazed\nMin Class2\nPart 8 tiles Class 1 - 3\nii) REsistance to household chemicals and swimming pool water\ncleansers, except to cleansing agents containing hydrofluoric acid and its\ncompounds a) Glazed tiles Class AA-D\nMin Class B\nPart 8 b) Unglazed tiles\nRequired\nPart 7 iii) Resistance to acids and alkalis\n(with the exception of hydrofluoric acid its comounds)\na) Glazed tiles Class AA-D\nRequired if agreed according to the chemical ersistance class indicated by the manufacturer\nPart 8 b) Unglazed tiles\nRequired 4)\npart 7 1. Scope – Specifies the sizes, dimensional\ntolerances, mechanical, physical and chemical requirements, surface quality requirements and marking\nof ceramic tiles.\nIt is applicable only to dust-pressed ceramic tiles of first quality, including tiles premounted on sheets, with\na water absorption of 3%<E 6% according to Group\nB IIa of IS 13712 : 1993* for interior and exterior use on both floors floors and walls.\n2. Description— Mosaic is a tile of any geometrical\nshape whose surface area is equal to or less than 90cm2.\nThe surface of tiles and components belonging to this group can be smooth, profiled, wavy,decorated or\nfinished in some other way. It can be unglazed (UGL), glossy, matt or semi-matt (GL). Although tiles have\nvisible surface and usually a surface which is intended to be adhered and bears a back panel, they may have\nidentical surface without a panel or marking. Tiles may have spacer lugs.\n3. Shapes and Sizes\n3.1 The modular preferred coordinating sizes (work size\n+ joint width) in cm are M10×10, M15×15, M20×10,\nM20×15, M20×20 and M30×30. The manufacturer shall chose the work size (dimensions of the visible faces,\nlength and width) in order to allow a nominal joint width between 2 and 5 mm.\n3.2 The most common non-modular nominal sizes in\ncm are 10×10, 15×7.5, 15×10, 15×15, 15.2×7.6, 15.2×15.2,\n20×10, 20×20, 25×25, 30×15, 30×20,30×30 and 40×30.\nThe manufacturer shall choose the work size in such a way that the difference between the work size and the\nnominal size is not more than ± 2 percent and 5 mm.\n3.3 The thickness including profile on the visible face\nand on the rear side shall be specified by the manufacturer.\nNote—For details of shapes, refer to Fig 1 and 2 of the\nstandard.\n4. Spacer Hug Style – Spacerlugs are projections,\nwhich are located along certain edges of tiles so that when two tiles are placed together, in line, the lugs on\nadjacent edges separate the tiles by a distance not less than the specified width of joint Lugs are positioned\nso that the joint between the tiles may be filled with grout without the lugs remaining exposed.\nDust – pressed tiles – may be made with other spacer lug systems and in such case the manufacturer’s\nwork size shall apply.\nNote– Some tiles have one or more manufacturing projections\npart way along certain edges and smaller than 0.3 mm.These are not intended as spacer lugs and should not be used to space\njoints.\n5. Requirements — See Table 1"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13755: 1993",
    "title": "Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "WITH WATER ABSORPTION OF 3% < E ≤ 6% (GROUP – B II A) *Ceramictiles— definitions,classification, characteristics and marking TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS Characteristics Surface S of the Product (cm2) A) Dimensions and Surface Quality S< 90 - 90<S< 190 1 90 < S < 410 S>410 i) Length and width— The deviation in % of the average size of each tile (2 of 4 sides) from the work size ±1.2 ± 1.0 ±0.75 ±0.6 The deviation in % of the average size of each tile(2or4 sides) from the averge size ofthe 10 test specim",
    "keywords": [
      "tiles",
      "tile",
      "work",
      "related",
      "deviation",
      "glazed",
      "sides"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 13755: 1993 Dust– Pressed Ceramic Tiles\nWITH WATER ABSORPTION OF 3% < E ≤ 6%\n(GROUP – B II A)\n*Ceramictiles— definitions,classification, characteristics and marking TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS Characteristics Surface S of the Product (cm2)\nA) Dimensions and Surface Quality S< 90 - 90<S< 190 1 90 < S < 410 S>410 i) Length and width— The deviation in % of the average size of each tile (2 of 4 sides) from the work size ±1.2 ± 1.0 ±0.75 ±0.6 The deviation in % of the average size of each tile(2or4 sides) from the averge size ofthe 10 test specimens (20 or 40 sides) ± 0.75 ±0.5 ± 0.5 ±05 ii) Thickness— The deviation in % of the average thickness of each tile from the work size thickness ± 10 ± 10 ± 5 ±5 iii) Straightness of sides1) (facial sides)— The maximum diviation from straightness in % related to the corresponding work size. ± 0.75 ±0.5 ± 0.5 ± 0.5 iv) Rectangularity1)— The maximum deviation from rectangularity in % related to the corresponding work size ±1.0 ±0.6 ± 0.6 ±0.6\n≤ Characteristics Surface S of the Product (cm2)\nTest According to\nIS 13630\nS ≤ 90\n90 < S ≤ 190\n190 < S ≤ 410\ns > 410\n(A) Dimensions and surface Quality i) Lenght and width\nPart 1 e\nThe deviation in % of the\n± 1.2\n± 1.0\n± 0.75\n± 0.6 average size of each tile (2\nor 4 sides) from the work size (W) f\nThe deviation in % of the\n±0.75\n±0.5\n±0.5\n±0.5 average size of each tile (2\nor 4 sides) from the average size of the 10 test specimens\n(20 or 40 sides)\nii) Thickness\nPart 1\nThe deviation in % of the\n±10\n±10\n±5\n±5 average thickness of each tile\nfrom the work size thickness iii) Straightness of sides1 (facial sides)\nPart 1\nThe maximum deviation from\n± 0.75\n± 0.5\n±0.5\n±0.5 straightness in % related to\nthe corresponding work sizes iv) Rectangularity1)\nPart 1\nThe maximum deviation from rectangularity in % related to\nthe corresponding work sizes v) Surface flatness\nPart 1\nThe maximum deviation from flatness in:\na) centre curvature, related to\n± 1.0\n± 0.5\n±0.5\n±0.5 diagonal calculated from\nthe work sizes b) Edge curvature, related to the\n±1.0\n±0.5\n±0.5\n±0.5 corresponding work size\nc) Warpage, related to diagonal\n± 1.0\n± 0.5\n± 0.5\n± 0.5 calculated from the work sizes\nvi) Surface quality2)\nMin 95% of tiles shall be free from visible defects that would Part 1 impair the appearance of a major area of tiles\nB Physical Properties i) Water absorption % by weight\nAverage 3 <E ≤ 6 Individual Max 11.0\nPart 2 ii) Modulus of rupture in N/mm2\nAverage ≤ 22, Individual Min 20\nPart 6 iii) Scratch hardness of surface (Mohs’ scale) a) Glazed tiles\nMin 5 b) Unglazed tiles\nMin 6 iv) Abrasion resistance: a) Resistance to deep abrasion\nMax 345\nPart 12 of unglazed tiles, removed volume in mm3 b) Resistance of abrasion of\nAccording to the abrasion class indicated by\nPart 11 glazed tiles Class I-IV\nThe manufacturer v) co-efficient of linear thermal\nMax 9 × 10–6\nPart 4 expansion from ambient temperature to 1000ºC (K–1)\nvi) Thermal shock resistance\nRequired\nPart 5 vii) Crazing resistance3) glazed tiles\nRequired\nPart 9 viii) Frost resistance\nRequired, if agreed\nPart 10 ix) Moisture expansion unglazed\nMax 0.6\nPart 3 tiles mm/m C) Chemical Properties i) Resistance to staining of glazed\nMin Class2\nPart 8 tiles Class 1 - 3\nii) REsistance to household chemicals and swimming pool water\ncleansers, except to cleansing agents containing hydrofluoric acid and its\ncompounds a) Glazed tiles Class AA-D\nMin Class B\nPart 8 b) Unglazed tiles\nRequired\nPart 7 iii) Resistance to acids and alkalis\n(with the exception of hydrofluoric acid its comounds)\na) Glazed tiles Class AA-D\nRequired if agreed according to the chemical ersistance class indicated by the manufacturer\nPart 8 b) Unglazed tiles Required 4)\npart 7\n1.\nNot applicalbe for tiles having curved shapes.\n2.\nBecause of firing, slight variations fromthe standard colour are unavoidable. This does not apply to intentional irregularities of colour variation of the face of dust pressed tiles of low water absorption( which can be unglazed, glazed\nor partly glazed) or to the colour variation over a tile area, which is characteristic for this type of tile and desirable.\nSpots or coloured dots which are introduced for decorative purposes are not considered defect.\n3.\nCertain decorative effects may have a tendency to craze. These shall be identified by the manufacturer, in which case the crazing test in not applicable.\n4.\nIf the hue becomes slightly different this is not considered to be chemical attack,\nFor detailed information refer to IS 13755:1993 Dust-pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption of 3%<E≤ 6% (Group—BII a)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13756: 1993",
    "title": "Dust – Pressed Ceramic Tiles With Low",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "Specifies the sizes,dimensional tolerances, mechanical, physical and chemical requirements, surface quality requirements and marking of ceramic tiles. It is applicable only to dust-pressed ceramic tiles including tiles premounted on sheets of first quality, with a low water absorption (E ≤ 3%) according to Group BI of IS 13712 : 1993 Ceramic tiles– Efinitions, Classifications, Characteristics and marking. For interior and exterior use on both floors and walls.",
    "keywords": [
      "tiles",
      "work",
      "related",
      "deviation",
      "tile",
      "glazed",
      "sides"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Specifies the sizes,dimensional tolerances, mechanical, physical and chemical requirements, surface quality requirements and marking of ceramic tiles. It is applicable only to dust-pressed ceramic tiles including tiles premounted on sheets of first quality, with a low water absorption (E ≤ 3%) according to Group BI of IS 13712 : 1993 Ceramic tiles– Efinitions, Classifications, Characteristics and marking. For interior and exterior use on both floors and walls. 2. Shapes and Sizes 2.1 The modular preferred coordinating sizes (work size + joint width) in cm are M 10×10, M15×15, M20×10, M20×15, M20×20 and M 30×30. The manufacturer shall chose the work size (dimensions of the visible faces, length and width) in order to allow a nominal joint width between 2 and 5 mm. 2.2 The most common non-do",
      "Spacer Lug Tiles": "Spacer lugs are projections, which are located along certain edges of tiles so that when two tiles so that wen two tiles are placed together, in line, the lugs on adjacent edges separate the tiles by a distance not less than the specified width of joint lugs are positioned so that the joint between the tiles may be filled with grout without the lugs remaining exposed. Dust–Pressed tiles– may be made with other spacer lug systems and in such cases the manufacturer’s work size shall apply. Note—Some tiles have one or more manufacturing projections part way long certain edges and smaller than 0.3mm. These are not intended as spacer lugs and shall not be used to space joints.",
      "Requirements": "See Table 1 TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS Characteristics Surface S of the Product (cm2) A). Dimensions and Surface Quality S 90 90<S 190 190 < S 410 S>410 i) Length and width— The deviation in % of the average size of each tile (2 of 4 sides) from the work size 1.2 1.0 0.75 0.6 The deviation in % of the average sizeof tile ( 2 or 4 sides) from the average sizeof the10 test specimens ( 20 or 40 sides) 0.75 0.5 0.5 05 ii) Thickness— The deviation in % of the average thickness of each tile from the work size thickness 10 10 5 5 iii) Straightness of sides1) (facial sides)— The maximum diviation from straightness in % related to the corresponding work size. 0.75 0.5 0.5 0.5 iv) Rectangularity1) — The maximum deviation from rectangularity in % related to the corresponding work size v) Surface flatness T"
    },
    "content": "IS 13756: 1993 Dust – Pressed Ceramic Tiles With Low\nWATER ABSORPTION OF E 3%\nGROUP B1\n1. Scope —Specifies the sizes,dimensional\ntolerances, mechanical, physical and chemical requirements, surface quality requirements and marking\nof ceramic tiles.\nIt is applicable only to dust-pressed ceramic tiles including tiles premounted on sheets of first quality,\nwith a low water absorption (E ≤ 3%) according to Group\nBI of IS 13712 : 1993 Ceramic tiles– Efinitions,\nClassifications, Characteristics and marking. For interior and exterior use on both floors and walls.\n2. Shapes and Sizes\n2.1 The modular preferred coordinating sizes (work size\n+ joint width) in cm are M 10×10, M15×15, M20×10,\nM20×15, M20×20 and M 30×30. The manufacturer shall chose the work size (dimensions of the visible faces,\nlength and width) in order to allow a nominal joint width between 2 and 5 mm.\n2.2 The most common non-dodular nominal sizes in cm\nare 10×10, 15×7.5, 15×10, 15×15, 15.2×7.6, 15.2×15.2,\n20×10, 20×20, 25×25, 30×15,30×20, 30×30 and 40×30. The manufacturer shall choose the work size in such a way\nthat the difference between the work size and the nominal size is not more than ± 2 percent and 5 mm.\n2.3 The thickness including profile on the visible face\nand on the rear side shall be specified by the manufacturer.\nNote– For details of shapes, refer to Fig. 1 and 2 of the\nstandard.\n3. Spacer Lug Tiles—Spacer lugs are projections,\nwhich are located along certain edges of tiles so that when two tiles so that wen two tiles are placed together,\nin line, the lugs on adjacent edges separate the tiles by a distance not less than the specified width of joint lugs\nare positioned so that the joint between the tiles may be filled with grout without the lugs remaining exposed.\nDust–Pressed tiles– may be made with other spacer lug systems and in such cases the manufacturer’s work size\nshall apply.\nNote—Some tiles have one or more manufacturing projections\npart way long certain edges and smaller than 0.3mm. These are not intended as spacer lugs and shall not be used to space\njoints.\n5. Requirements— See Table 1 TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS Characteristics\nSurface S of the Product (cm2) A). Dimensions and Surface Quality S 90 90<S 190 190 < S 410 S>410 i) Length and width— The deviation in % of the average size of each tile (2 of 4 sides) from the work size 1.2 1.0 0.75 0.6 The deviation in % of the average sizeof tile ( 2 or 4 sides) from the average sizeof the10 test specimens ( 20 or 40 sides) 0.75 0.5 0.5 05 ii) Thickness— The deviation in % of the average thickness of each tile from the work size thickness 10 10 5 5 iii) Straightness of sides1) (facial sides)— The maximum diviation from straightness in % related to the corresponding work size. 0.75 0.5 0.5 0.5 iv) Rectangularity1) — The maximum deviation from rectangularity in % related to the corresponding work size v) Surface flatness The maximum deviation from flatness,in— a) Centre curvature, related to diagonal 1.0 0.5 0.5 0.5 calculated from the work size\n≤\n≤\n≤\n≤\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n± Characteristics Surface S of the Product (cm2)\nTest According to\nIS 13630\nS ≤ 90\n90 < S ≤ 190\n190 < S ≤ 410\ns > 410\n(A) Dimensions and surface Quality i) Lenght and width\nPart 1 e\nThe deviation in % of the\n± 1.2\n± 1.0\n± 0.75\n± 0.6 average size of each tile (2\nor 4 sides) from the work size (W) f\nThe deviation in % of the\n±0.75\n±0.5\n±0.5\n±0.5 average size of each tile (2\nor 4 sides) from the average size of the 10 test specimens\n(20 or 40 sides)\nii) Thickness\nPart 1\nThe deviation in % of the\n±10\n±10\n±5\n±5 average thickness of each tile\nfrom the work size thickness iii) Straightness of sides1 (facial sides)\nPart 1\nThe maximum deviation from\n± 0.75\n± 0.5\n±0.5\n±0.5 straightness in % related to\nthe corresponding work sizes iv) Rectangularity1)\nPart 1\nThe maximum deviation from\n±1.0\n±0.6\n±0.6\n±0.6 rectangularity in % related to\nthe corresponding work sizes v) Surface flatness\nPart 1\nThe maximum deviation from flatness in:\na) centre curvature, related to\n± 1.0\n± 0.5\n±0.5\n±0.5 diagonal calculated from\nthe work sizes b) Edge curvature, related to the\n±1.0\n±0.5\n±0.5\n±0.5 corresponding work size\nc) Warpage, related to diagonal\n± 1.0\n± 0.5\n± 0.5\n± 0.5 calculated from the work sizes\nvi) Surface quality2)\nMin 95% of tiles shall be free from visible defects that would Part 1 impair the appearance of a major area of tiles\nB Physical Properties i) Water absorption % by weight\nAverage ≤ 3 Individual Max 3.3\nPart 2 ii) Modulus of rupture in N/mm2 Min 27\nPart 6 iii) Scratch hardness of surface (Mohs’ scale) a) Glazed tiles\nMin 5 b) Unglazed tiles\nMin 6 iv) Abrasion resistance: a) Resistance to deep abrasion\nMax 205\nPart 12 of unglazed tiles, removed volume in mm3 b) Resistance of abrasion of\nAccording to the abrasion class indicated by\nPart 11 glazed tiles Class I-IV\nThe manufacturer v) co-efficient of linear thermal\nMax 9 × 10–6\nPart 4 expansion from ambient temperature to 1000ºC (K–1)\nvi) Thermal shock resistance\nRequired\nPart 5 vii) Crazing resistance3) glazed tiles\nRequired\nPart 9 viii) Frost resistance\nRequired\nPart 10 ix) Moisture expansion unglazed\nPart 3 tiles mm/m Note — For methods of tests, refer to IS 13630 methods of test for ceramic tiles.\nFor detailed information refer to IS 13756:1993 Specification for Dust-pressed ceramic tiles with water absorption E<3% (Group— BI)\nC) Chemical Properties i) Resistance to staining of glazed\nMin Class2\nPart 8 tiles Class 1 - 3\nii) REsistance to household chemicals and swimming pool water\ncleansers, except to cleansing agents containing hydrofluoric acid and its\ncompounds a) Glazed tiles Class AA-D\nMin Class B\nPart 8 b) Unglazed tiles\nRequired\nPart 7 iii) Resistance to acids and alkalis\n(with the exception of hydrofluoric acid its comounds)\na) Glazed tiles Class AA-D\nRequired if agreed according to the chemical ersistance class indicated by the manufacturer\nPart 8 b) Unglazed tiles Required 4)\npart 7 i)\nNot applicable for tiles having cured shapes ii)\nBecause of firing slight vartiations from the standard colour are unavoidable. This does not apply to intentional irregularities of colour variation of the face of dust-pressed tiles of low water absorption(which can be unglazed,glazed,\nor partly glazed)or to the colour variation over a tile areas which is characteristic for this type of tile and desirable.Spots or coloured dots which are introduced for decorative purposes are not considered a defect.\niii)\nCertain decorative effects may have a tendency to craze. The shall be identified by the manufacturer in which case the crazing test is not applicable.\niv)\nIf the hue becomes slightly different this is not considered to be chemical attack."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14862: 2000",
    "title": "Fibre Cement Flat Sheets",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "1. Scope 1.1 This standard covers the characteristics and establishes methods of control and test as well as acceptance conditions for fibre cement flat sheets. It covers sheets intended for external applications, such as cladding facades, curtain walls, soffits, etc, and sheets intended for internal use, such as partitions, floors, ceiling, etc, with a wide range of properties appropriate to the type of application. These sheets may have either a smooth or textured surface. 1.2 This standard do",
    "keywords": [
      "sheets",
      "rapture",
      "sheet",
      "equilibrium",
      "his",
      "characteristics",
      "cement"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Type Characteristics": "This clause applies to Type A sheets only. These tests shall be carried out on products as delivered. Where the tests are carried out on coated sheets, this shall be stated in the report. 4.1 Bending Strength—Shall not be less than the values for the appropriate category specified in Table 1. When tested in equilibrium and wet condition. In addition, the mean modulus of rapture under wet conditions shall be not less than 50 percent of the mean modulus of rapture under equilibrium conditions. 4.2 Water Impermeability—Traces of moisture may appear on the underside of the sheet, but in no instance shall there be formation of drops of water. 4.3 Frost Resistance— For sheets for frost resistant applications, after 50 freeze-thaw cycles, the limit L1 of the average ratio r shall not be less than",
      "Use Of Hand": "tools. Note 1— For method of measurement of different dimensions of sheets refer to Annex. B of the standard. Note 2— For method of tests, refer to Annex. C, D, E, F, G, H and J of the standard. For detailed information refer to IS 14862 : 2000 Specification for fibre cement flat sheets. 1. Scope 1.1 This standard covers the requirement for straight fibre cement profiled sheets of more than 0.9 m length and their fittings used as roofing and cladding materials. It also specifies tests for checking these characteristics as well as marking and conditions for acceptance. 1.2 Some of these requirements may apply, after agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser, to curved corrugated sheets. 1.3 This standard does not apply to asbestos cement prifiled sheets which are covered by IS 45"
    },
    "content": "IS 14862: 2000 Fibre Cement Flat Sheets\n1. Scope\n1.1 This standard covers the characteristics and\nestablishes methods of control and test as well as acceptance conditions for fibre cement flat sheets.\nIt covers sheets intended for external applications, such as cladding facades, curtain walls, soffits, etc, and\nsheets intended for internal use, such as partitions, floors, ceiling, etc, with a wide range of properties\nappropriate to the type of application. These sheets may have either a smooth or textured surface.\n1.2 This standard does not apply to the following\nproducts, most of which are covered under seperate standard:\na)\nAsbestos cement flat sheets;\nb)\nAsbestos cement building boards;\nc)\nGypsum plaster board;\nd)\nBoards of cement reinforced with fibrous wood particles;\ne)\nFibre cement slates and siding shinges;\nf)\nSilica- asbestos-cement flat sheets; and g) Non- combustible fibre-reinforced boards of\ncalcium silicate or cement for insulation and fire protection.\n2. Classification\n2.1 Flat sheets covered by his standard shall be of two\ntypes, namely, Type A and Type B.\na) Type A — Type A sheets are intended for external applications where they may be\nsubjected to the direct action of sun, rain and /or snow. They may be supplied coated\nor uncoated. Type A sheets shall comply with the requirements of the type characteristics\ngiven in 6.\n.\nb) Type B— Type B sheets are not subjected to the type tests and are intended for internal\napplications and external applications where they will not be subjected to the direct action\nof sun, rain and/or snow.\nNote — If sheets of type B are used in external applications\nwhere they are directly exposed to the weather but are protected (for example, coating or impregnation). the\nweather resistance of the product is determined by the quality of the protection and methods for control and test are outside\nthe scope of this standard.\n2.2 The sheets are further classified into five categories\naccording to their modulus of rapture as given in Table1.\n2.3 The manufacturer shall declare the type and\ncategory of his product in his literature.\n3. Acceptance Characteristics\n3.1 Dimensional and Geometrical Characteristics\n3.1.1 Nominal length and width – Flat fibre cement sheets shall be available in nominal lengths up to 3000\nmm and nominal widths up to 1220 mm.Sheets of greater nominal lengths and widths may be supplied as agreed\nbetween the manufacturer and the supplier.\nNote— The nominal dimensions(width and length) may be\ncreased by 20 to 30 mm (over size sheets) for application where the sheet is required to be cut by the user.\n3.1.2\nThickness — Flat fibre cement sheets shall normally be available in thickness from 3 to 9 mm.\n3.1.3\nTolerances on dimensions —Tolerances on nominal dimensions shall be as follows—\na) On length and width (indicated by d)\nd ≤ 1000 mm: ± 5 mm\n1000 mm <d ≤ 1600 mm: ± 0.5 mm d ≤ 1600 mm: ± 8 mm\nThese tolerances do not apply to oversize sheets.\nb) On thickness, e –\ne ≤ 6 mm : ± 0.6 mm e ≤ 6 mm : ± 0.10 percent\nFor sheets without texture on the exposed face, the maximum difference between extreme values of the\nthickness measurements within one sheet shall not exceed 15 percent of the maximum measured value.\nNote–Tighter tolerances may be adopted by agreement\nbetween the manufacturer and the purchaser. 3.1.4 Tolerance on shape\n3.1.4.1 Straightness of edges—The tolerance on the straightness of edges shall be 3 mm/m for the relevant\ndimension (length or width).\n3.1.4.2 Squareness of edges —The tolerance on the squareness of sheets shall be 4 mm/m\nNote—Tighter tolerances may be adopted by agreement\nbetween the manufacturer and the purchaser.\n3.2 Mechanical and Physical Characteristics—\nWhere the product is supplied coated, the following mechanical and physical specifications shall apply to\nthe coated (that is finished) product. When sampling is to be done from continuous production, testing of the\nbase sheet prior to coating is acceptable when it can be shown that there is a correlation between the results of\ny tests on sheets with and without coating.\n3.2.1 Bending Strength— shall be as specified in Table\n1.The modulus of rapture shall be the average of the values obtained from testing the samples in both\ndirections.\nTABLE 1 MINIMUM MODULUS OF\nRAPTURE\nCategory Modulus of Rapture,Min (MPa)\nType A Sheet Type B Sheet (1) (2) (3) 1 —\n4 2 —\n7 3 7\n10 4 13\n16 5 18\n22\nType A sheet strength shal only be specified in the wet condition and the specimens shall be tested in\nthe wet condition.\nType B sheet strengths shall only be specified in the equilibrium condition and the specimens shall be\ntested in the equilibrium condition. When sampling is to be done from continuous production, these sheets\nmay be tested on dry or saturated s p e c i m e n s ,\nprovided a relationship can be established between the equilibrium values and the dry or saturaed values.\nNote — If the manufacturer includes product strengths in\nhis literature, it should be clearly stated whether they are mean or minimum values.\n3.2.2 Apparent density—shall be not less than the value specified by the manufacturer.\n3.2.3 Other characteristics—The manufacturer shall provide such technical data as is necessary to confirm\nthe suitability of the product for any particular recommended application.\n4. Type Characteristics — This clause applies\nto Type A sheets only. These tests shall be carried out on products as delivered. Where the tests are carried\nout on coated sheets, this shall be stated in the report.\n4.1 Bending Strength—Shall not be less than the\nvalues for the appropriate category specified in Table 1.\nWhen tested in equilibrium and wet condition. In addition, the mean modulus of rapture under wet\nconditions shall be not less than 50 percent of the mean modulus of rapture under equilibrium conditions.\n4.2 Water Impermeability—Traces of moisture may\nappear on the underside of the sheet, but in no instance shall there be formation of drops of water.\n4.3 Frost Resistance— For sheets for frost resistant\napplications, after 50 freeze-thaw cycles, the limit L1 of the average ratio r shall not be less than 0.75.\n4.4 Warm Water—The limit L1 of the average ratio r\nshall be greater than 0.75.\n4.5 Soak-Dry— The limit L1 of the average ratio r shall\nbe greater than 0.75.\n4.6 Heat-Rain—Any visible cracks, declamination or\nother defects in the sheets shall not be of a degree such as to affect their performance in use.\n5.\nTests\n5.1 Acceptance Tests\na)\nDimensional and Geometrical characteristics\n(compulsory)\nb)\nBending Strength (compulsory)\nc)\nApparent density (compulsory)\n5.2 Type Test—The following type tests shall be carried\nout:\na)\nBending strength b)\nWater impermeability c) Freeze-thaw\nd) Warm- water e) Soak-dry\nf) Heat-rain test Warm-water, Freeze-thaw and heat-rain test are optional tests as per the requirement of the purchaser. 6. Safety Rules\na)\nProduction Identification—Sheet shall be marked with indelible characters to show that\nthey do not contain as bestos. b)\nInformation to Users—The company should, through its distribution system, supply\nadequate information to the users concerning safety precautions to be taken during handling\nor machining of products and that excessive exposureto dust by cutting, drilling, sanding\nand turning or similar operations should be avoided by one or several of the following\nmeans\n1) Using low speed power tools,\n2) Wetting the product,\n3) Using personal protective equipment\n(respirator), and\n4) Use of hand-tools.\nNote 1— For method of measurement of different dimensions of sheets refer to Annex. B of the standard.\nNote 2— For method of tests, refer to Annex. C, D, E, F, G, H and J of the standard.\nFor detailed information refer to IS 14862 : 2000 Specification for fibre cement flat sheets. 1. Scope\n1.1 This standard covers the requirement for straight\nfibre cement profiled sheets of more than 0.9 m length and their fittings used as roofing and cladding materials.\nIt also specifies tests for checking these characteristics as well as marking and conditions for acceptance.\n1.2 Some of these requirements may apply, after\nagreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser, to curved corrugated sheets.\n1.3 This standard does not apply to asbestos cement\nprifiled sheets which are covered by IS 459.\n2. Sheets\n2.1 General Appearance and Finish—The surface of\nthe sheets intended to be exposed to the weather shall be gradually of smooth finish. Variations of the surface\nappearance, due to the method of manufacture, which do not impair the strength or performance of the sheets,\nare permitted.\nThe sheets may be left with their natural colour or colouring matter may be added in the composition.\nThey may also receive adherent coloured or uncoloured coating in their either side surfaces.\n2.2 Classification\n2.2.1 According to nominal height of corrugations—\nThe sheets shall be of categories based on height of their corrugations, h and minimum thickness, e in\naccordance with Table-1.\n2.2.2 According to thickness— Type A —The thickness of the sheets shall be approximately constant throughout\nthe width of profile. Type B –\nThe thickness of the sheets shall vary regularly between the valley and the\ncrown for corrugated sheets or between the lower part and the up\nper part of ribs for asymmetrical section sheets, in the same cross-\nsection.\n2.2.3 According to minimum breaking load in\nBending – For each category of sheet the minimum breaking load requirement shall be as given in Table 1.\n2.3 Characteristics\n2.3.1 Dimensions—Nominal dimensions shall be declared by the manufacturer. Standard dimensions for\ncorrugated sheet shall include length; overall width, effective nominal thickness of sheet, and depth and\npitch of corrugation. The profile and other dimensions shall be tested in accordance with Annex. B of the\nstandard.\n2.3.2– Tolerances on dimensions— Following tolerances"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14871: 2000",
    "title": "Products In Fibre Reinforced",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "Specifies requirements for four grades of bitumen mastic for building, composed of ground limestone, coarse aggregate and pigment, if required, incorporated with asphaltic cements. This standard does not cover special grades of bitumen mastic flooring such as chemical resistant, oil resistant or spark free flooring, for these purpose special bitumen mastics are available. A guide to the selection of the appropriate grade is given in Appendix A of the standard.",
    "keywords": [
      "sheets",
      "flooring",
      "their",
      "frost",
      "bitumen",
      "category",
      "warm"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Use Of Hand": "tools. Note– 1. For method of testing profile and other dimensions, refer to Annex B of the standard. Note– 2.For method of tests, refer to Annex C & D of the standard. For details refer to IS 14871 : 2000 Specification for products in fibre reinforced cement— Long corrugated or asymmetrical section sheets and fittings for roofing and cladding",
      "Scope": "Specifies requirements for four grades of bitumen mastic for building, composed of ground limestone, coarse aggregate and pigment, if required, incorporated with asphaltic cements. This standard does not cover special grades of bitumen mastic flooring such as chemical resistant, oil resistant or spark free flooring, for these purpose special bitumen mastics are available. A guide to the selection of the appropriate grade is given in Appendix A of the standard.",
      "Grades": "Bitumen mastic floorings are graded according to usage as follows: Grade I Special flooring Grade II Light duty flooring Grade III Medium duty flooring Grade IV Industrial factory flooring Grades I and II may be used as a polished flooring for light traffic or as an underlay to other floor coverings. 3. Materials 3.1 Bitumen used shall conform to the requirements in Table 1. 3.2 Aggregate"
    },
    "content": "IS 14871: 2000 Products In Fibre Reinforced\nCEMENT—LONG CORRUGATED OR ASYMMETRICAL SECTION\nSHEETS AND FITTINGS FOR ROOFING AND CLADDING\nTABLE 1 CATEGORY AND CLASS (MINIMUM BREAKING LOAD IN N/M)\nCategory Minimum\nClass Thickness, e, mm 1\n2\n3\n4\n5\n6\n7\n8\n9\n10\nA (15 mm h 55 mm) 3 600\n800\n1000\n1400\n–\n–\n–\n–\n– –\nB (25 mm ≤ h 55 mm) 4 –\n–\n1000\n1400\n2000\n2500\n3300\n–\n– –\nC (40 mm ≤ h 80 mm) 4.5 –\n–\n–\n1400\n2000\n2500\n3300\n–\n–\nD (60 mm ≤ h 150 mm) 5.5 –\n–\n– –\n–\n–\n3300\n4250\n5600\n7400\nNote — The sheet being commonly manufractured in India at the time of formulation of this standard fall under category\nB and C and Class 7. shall apply to nominal dimensions given by manufacturer:\na) Tolerance on pitch a — a ≤ 75 mm +4.0 –2.0 mm 75 mm< a ≤ 180mm +c6. –2.0 mm 180 mm < a ≤ 260mm +8.0 –3.0 mm 260 mm < a + 9.0 –3.0 mm\nTolerance for pitch of corrugation rel ates to measurement over extreme corrugation b)\nTolerance on height of corrugation,h—\n15 mm ≤ h ≤ 45 mm ± 2 mm\n45 mm £ h ≤ 150 mm + 3 mm – 5 c)\nTolerance on length ± 10 mm d)\nTolerance on overall Width and effective width,\nW e\n+10\n- 5 mm e)\nTolerance on nominal thickness, e: ± 10 percent but not more than ± 0.6 mm of the nominal\nthickness.\nf) Out of squareness of sheets—less than 10mm.\ng) Tolerance on height of edges — The producer shall specify this tolerance in their literature\nwhen it is necessary to ensure the weather tightness of the roof, only for sheets having an\nascending edge one side and a descending edge on the other side.\n2.3.3 Mechanical characteristics\nNote — For non-roofing and cladding applications, alternative\nmechanical characteristics may be agreed between the manufacturer and the purchaser.\n2.3.3.1 Breaking load–Sheet shall have a breaking load at least equal to the requirements specified in Table 1.\n2.3.3.2 Deflection–When tested as prescribed, the increase in deflection ft, between applying 20 percent\n(f0.2) and 70 percent (f0.7) of the load specifying the class shall not exceed the conventional value, f given by the\nfollowing equation:\n2.3.4 Physical characteristic\n2.3.4.1 Impermeability –Traces of moisture may appear on the under face of the sheet but in no\ninstance shall there be any formation of water drops during 24 h of the test.\n2.3.4.2\nFrost resistance—Any visible cracks, ination or other defects in the sheets, shall not be of a degree\nas to affect their peroformance in use.\n2.3.4.3 Apparent density—Shall have an apparent density equal to value indicated by the manufacturer\nwith a tolerance of ±10 percent.\n2.3.4.4 Warm water—Any visible cracks, delamination or other defects in the sheets shall not be\nof a degree as to affect their performance in use.\n2.3.4.5\nHeat-rain — Any visible cracks delamination or other defects in the sheets shall not be of a degree as\nto affect their performance in use.\n3. Tests\n3.1 Acceptance Tests\n3.1.1 Compulsory tests a) Dimensions and\nb) Mechanical characteristics : breaking load\n3.1.2 Optional tests (at purchaser’s request) Apparent density\n3.2 Type Tests\na) Mechanical characteristics: deflection b) Impermeability,\nc) Frost resistance, d) Warm water and\ne) Heat-rain.\nFrost resistanc, warm water and heat-rain tests are optional tests as per the requirements of the purchaser.\n4. Fittings\n4.1 General Appearance at Finish – Fittings are\ncomponents with particular shapes which are fitted to profiled sheets and complete the roofing at the verge,\nridge and eaves or perform functions such as ventilation, daylight-admission etc.\n3\n0.7 10−\n=\n×\n× f\nh\n2I Fittings shall have straight and clean edges. They may have lapping joints. They may be left in their natural\ncolour or colouring matter may be added in the composition. They may also receive adherent coloured\nor uncoloured coatings on their surface.\n4.2 Characteristics\n4.2.1 Dimensions—Shall have dimensions and tolerances appropriate for use with their corresponding\nsheets.\n4.2.2 Frost resistance (type characteristics)—Any visible cracks, delamination or other defects in the\nfittings should not be of a degree as to affect their performance in use.\n5. Safety Rules\na)\nProduct Idnetification — Sheets shall be marked with indelible characters to show that\nthey do not contain asbestos.\nb)\nInformation to Users — The manufacturer should, through its distribution system,supply\nadequate information to the users concerning safety precautions to be taken during handling or machining\nof products, like excessive exposure to dust by cutting, drilling, sanding and turning or similar operations should\nbe avoided by one or several of the following means:\n1) Using low speed power tools,\n2) Wetting the product,\n3) Using personal protective equipment,\n(respirators), and\n4) Use of hand-tools.\nNote– 1. For method of testing profile and other dimensions, refer to Annex B of the standard.\nNote– 2.For method of tests, refer to Annex C & D of the standard.\nFor details refer to IS 14871 : 2000 Specification for products in fibre reinforced cement— Long corrugated or asymmetrical section sheets and fittings for roofing and cladding 1. Scope– Specifies requirements for four grades\nof bitumen mastic for building, composed of ground limestone, coarse aggregate and pigment, if required,\nincorporated with asphaltic cements. This standard does not cover special grades of bitumen mastic flooring such\nas chemical resistant, oil resistant or spark free flooring, for these purpose special bitumen mastics\nare available. A guide to the selection of the appropriate grade is given in Appendix A of the standard.\n2. Grades—Bitumen mastic floorings are graded\naccording to usage as follows:\nGrade I\nSpecial flooring\nGrade II\nLight duty flooring\nGrade III\nMedium duty flooring\nGrade IV\nIndustrial factory flooring\nGrades I and II may be used as a polished flooring for light traffic or as an underlay to other floor coverings.\n3. Materials\n3.1 Bitumen used shall conform to the requirements\nin Table 1.\n3.2 Aggregate"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1195: 2002",
    "title": "Bitumen Mastic For Flooring",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "(Second Revision) 3.2.1 Fine Aggregate — The fine aggregate shall consist of naturally occuring limestone rock ground to a grading as given in Table 2, and shall have a calcium carbonate content of not less than 80 percent by weight 3.2.2. Coarse Aggregate : The coarse aggregates shall consist of clean igneous or calcareous rock or siliceous material obtained from natural deposits either directly or by screening, crushing or other mechanical process, as free from dust as is practicable. Where li",
    "keywords": [
      "mastic",
      "sieve",
      "micron",
      "bitumen",
      "retained",
      "coarse",
      "asphalt"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Composition": "See Table 4 TABLE 4 COMPOSITION OF BITUMEN MASTIC Requirement Percentage By Mass Min Max (1) (2) (3) Soluble bitumen 12.0 18.0 Passing 75-micron IS Sieve 40.0 56.0 Passing 212-micron IS Sieve and retained on 75- micron 8.0 25.0 IS Sieve Passing 600-micron IS Sieve and retained on 212 micron IS Sieve 8.0 32.0 Note— Percentage by mass of bitumen mastic excluding the material retained on a 600-micron IS Sieve.",
      "Hardness Number": "The hardness number of the bitumen mastic shall be as follows— a) At the time of manufacture— Grade I Not more than 15 at 45° C (after addition of specified coarse aggregates) Grade II & III Not more than 12 at 35° C (after addition of specified coarse aggregates) Grade IV Not more than 40 at 35° C (before addition of specified coarse aggregate) b) At the time of laying— Grade I Not less than 2 nor more than 12 at 45°C Grade II & III Not less than 2 nor more than 12 at 35°C. Note—For methods of tests for bitumen, refer to IS 1203:1978 Determination of penetration. IS 1205:1978 Determination of softening point. IS 1208:1978 Determination of ductility. IS 1212:1978 Determination of loss on heating."
    },
    "content": "IS 1195: 2002 Bitumen Mastic For Flooring\n(Second Revision) 3.2.1 Fine Aggregate — The fine aggregate shall consist of naturally occuring limestone rock ground to a\ngrading as given in Table 2, and shall have a calcium carbonate content of not less than 80 percent by weight 3.2.2. Coarse Aggregate : The coarse aggregates shall consist of clean igneous or calcareous rock or\nsiliceous material obtained from natural deposits either directly or by screening, crushing or other\nmechanical process, as free from dust as is practicable. Where limestone chippings are used for floor-\ning, the quality of the limestone shall be such that the aggregate curshing value shall not be greater\nthan 28. The percentage and size of coarse aggregate incorporated in the bitumen mastic will be de-\npendent primarily upon the thicknessof the finished work. The size shall be within the limits specified in\nTable 3. The percentage shall be such that the total percentage of material retained on a 600-micron IS\nSieve, on analysis of the bitumen mastic as laid, including the material derived from the fine aggre-\ngate, shall fall within the appropriate limits specifiedin Table 3.\nTABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF BITUMEN\nSL\nCharacteristics\nRequirements for Requirements for\nNo. Grade I Grades II, III & IV Mastic Asphalt\nColoured Mastic\nMastic Asphalt\nColoured Mastic forFlooring\nAsphalt for for Flooring\nAsphalt\nFlooring for Flooring\n(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) Penetration at 25oC — — 5 to 15 5 to 15 ii) Softening point (ring & ball), Max 105oC 105oC 100oC 100oC iii) Solubility in CS2, percent Min 60 60 99.5 60 iv) Ash content (mineral matter), Max, percent by mass 30 30 0.5 30 v) Loss on heating for 5h at 163oC, percent by mass, Max 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 TABLE 3 PERCENTAGE AND SIZE OF COARSE AGGREGATE FOR BITUMEN\nMASTIC FOR FLOORING AND COLOURED BITUMEN MASTIC FORFLOORING\nS.l No. Grade Aggreate Size and Type of Coarse\nPercentage Thickness\n(1) (2)\n(3) (4)\nI and II Retained on 600-micron IS Sieve 85%\n15-25\n15-20 Min Passing 4.75mm IS Sieve 100%\nIII Retained on 600-micron IS Sieve 85% Min Passing 4.75mm IS Sieve 100%\n25-35\n20-30\nIV Retained on 600-micron IS Sieve 95% Min Passing 9.5mm IS Sieve 90%\n30-50\n30-50\n4.\nComposition – See Table 4\nTABLE 4 COMPOSITION OF BITUMEN MASTIC\nRequirement\nPercentage By Mass\nMin\nMax\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\nSoluble bitumen\n12.0\n18.0\nPassing 75-micron IS Sieve\n40.0\n56.0\nPassing 212-micron IS Sieve and retained on 75- micron 8.0\n25.0 IS Sieve\nPassing 600-micron IS Sieve and retained on 212 micron IS Sieve 8.0\n32.0\nNote— Percentage by mass of bitumen mastic excluding the material retained on a 600-micron IS Sieve.\n5. Hardness Number — The hardness number of the bitumen mastic shall be as follows— a) At the time of manufacture—\nGrade I\nNot more than 15 at 45° C (after addition of specified coarse aggregates)\nGrade II & III\nNot more than 12 at 35° C (after addition of specified coarse aggregates)\nGrade IV\nNot more than 40 at 35° C (before addition of specified coarse aggregate) b) At the time of laying—\nGrade I\nNot less than 2 nor more than 12 at\n45°C\nGrade II & III Not less than 2 nor more than 12 at 35°C.\nNote—For methods of tests for bitumen, refer to\nIS 1203:1978 Determination of penetration.\nIS 1205:1978 Determination of softening point.\nIS 1208:1978 Determination of ductility.\nIS 1212:1978 Determination of loss on heating."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5317: 2002",
    "title": "Bitumen Mastic For Bridge Decking And Roads",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "Requirements for bitumen mastic used as a surfacing material for bridge decks and roads.",
    "keywords": [
      "micron",
      "sieve",
      "aggregate",
      "passing",
      "bitumen",
      "coarse",
      "mastic"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for bitumen mastic used as a surfacing material for bridge decks and roads. 2. Materials 2.1 Bitumen — See Table 1 TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF BITUMEN SL. No. Characteristic Requirements (1) (2) (3) i) Softening point (ring and ball method) 50 to 90oC ii) Penetration at 25oC in 1/100 cm 10 to 40 iii) Ductility at 27oC, Min in cm 3 iv) Loss on heating, percent, Max 1 v) Solubility in carbon disulphide,percent Min 99 2.2 Filler The filler shall be lime stone powder passing 75-micron IS Sieve and shall have a calcium carbonate content of not less than 80 percent by weight. 2.3 Aggregates 2.3.1 Fine Aggregate – Fine aggregate shall consist of naturally occuring sand or crushed lime stone or crushed hard-rock. The grading of the fine aggregates inclusive of the filler is given i",
      "Hardness Number": "The bitumen mastic whose composition is given at Table 3 before the addition of coarse aggregate, shall have hardness number of 60 to 80 at 25°C.",
      "Composition": "See Table 3 TABLE 3 COMPOSITION OF BITU- MEN MASTIC (WITHOUT COARSE AGGREGATE) Requirement Percentage by Weight of Mastic Without Coarse Aggregate Min Max (1) (2) (3) i) Bitumen 14 17 ii) Passing 75-micron IS Sieve 25 45 iii) Passing 212 micron IS Sieve 8 18 and retained on75-micron IS Sieve iv) Passing 600-micron IS Sieve 4 30 and retained on 212-micron IS Sieve v) Passing 2.36mm IS Sieve and 0 22 retained on 600-micron IS Sieve Note— For methods of tests for bitumen, refer to IS 1203:1978 Determination of penetration. IS 1205:1978 Determination of softening point. IS 1208:1978 Determination of ductility. IS 1212:1978 Determination of loss on heating."
    },
    "content": "IS 5317: 2002 Bitumen Mastic For Bridge Decking And Roads\n(Second Revision)\n1. Scope — Requirements for bitumen mastic used\nas a surfacing material for bridge decks and roads.\n2. Materials\n2.1 Bitumen — See Table 1\nTABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES\nOF BITUMEN SL. No.\nCharacteristic Requirements (1) (2) (3) i)\nSoftening point (ring and ball method)\n50 to 90oC ii)\nPenetration at 25oC in 1/100 cm\n10 to 40 iii)\nDuctility at 27oC, Min in cm 3 iv)\nLoss on heating, percent, Max 1 v)\nSolubility in carbon disulphide,percent Min 99\n2.2 Filler The filler shall be lime stone powder passing\n75-micron IS Sieve and shall have a calcium carbonate content of not less than 80 percent by weight.\n2.3 Aggregates\n2.3.1 Fine Aggregate – Fine aggregate shall consist of naturally occuring sand or crushed lime stone or\ncrushed hard-rock. The grading of the fine aggregates inclusive of the filler is given in Table 2 for guidance.\nTABLE 2 GRADING OF FINE\nAGGREGATES\nS.l No. Passing\nRetained on\nPercentage by\nIS Sieve\nIS Sieve mass\nMin\nMax\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\ni)\n75 - micron\n—\n0\n5 ii)\n212 - micron 75 micron\n10\n20 iii)\n600 - micron\n212 micron\n5\n35 iv) 2.36 mm\n600 micron\n0\n25\n2.3.2 Coarse Aggregate — Coarse aggregate shall consist of hard durable crushed rock having aggregate\nimpact value of not more than 20 and abrasion value not more than 40.\n3.\nHardness Number — The bitumen mastic whose composition is given at Table 3 before the addition\nof coarse aggregate, shall have hardness number of 60 to 80 at 25°C.\n4.\nComposition — See Table 3\nTABLE 3 COMPOSITION OF BITU-\nMEN MASTIC (WITHOUT COARSE AGGREGATE)\nRequirement\nPercentage by Weight of\nMastic\nWithout Coarse Aggregate\nMin\nMax\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\ni) Bitumen 14\n17 ii) Passing 75-micron IS Sieve 25\n45 iii) Passing 212 micron IS Sieve 8\n18 and retained on75-micron IS Sieve iv) Passing 600-micron IS Sieve 4\n30 and retained on 212-micron IS Sieve v) Passing 2.36mm IS Sieve and 0\n22 retained on 600-micron IS Sieve\nNote— For methods of tests for bitumen, refer to\nIS 1203:1978 Determination of penetration.\nIS 1205:1978 Determination of softening point.\nIS 1208:1978 Determination of ductility.\nIS 1212:1978 Determination of loss on heating."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1216: 1978",
    "title": "Determination Of Solubility In Carbon Disulphide Trichloroethylene .",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "For detailed information refer to IS 5317 : 2002 Bitumen mastic for bridge decking and roads (second revision).",
    "keywords": [
      "decking",
      "bridge",
      "roads",
      "mastic",
      "bitumen",
      "information",
      "detailed"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 1216: 1978 Determination Of Solubility In Carbon Disulphide Trichloroethylene .\nFor detailed information refer to IS 5317 : 2002 Bitumen mastic for bridge decking and roads\n(second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9510: 1980",
    "title": "Bitumen Mastic, Acid – Resisting Grade",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "TABLE 2 GRADING OF FINE AGGREGATES Sl. No. Grading Percent by Mass (1) (2) (3) i) Passing 75-micron IS Sieve 45 to 55 (filler) ii) Passing 212-micron IS Sieve 10 to 30 and retained on 75-micron IS Sieve iii) Passing 600-micron IS Sieve 10 to 30 and retained on 212-micron IS Sieve iv) Passing 2.36 mm IS Sieve and retained on 600 micron IS Sieve 5 to 20 v) Retained on 2.36 mm IS Sieve Nil TABLE 3 SIZE OF COARSE AGGREGATES FOR USE IN BITUMEN MASTIC Thickness of Size of Aggregates Percentage Each La",
    "keywords": [
      "sieve",
      "micron",
      "passing",
      "retained",
      "mastic",
      "aggregates",
      "bitumen"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Composition": "See Tables 4 and 5 TABLE 4 PERCENTAGE OF COARSE AGGREGATES Sl Thickness of Each Percentage of No. Layer of the Mastic Coarse Aggregates byMass of Total Mastic (1) (2) (3) i) 15 mm 15 to 30 ii) 20 to 25 mm 20 to 35 iii) 25 to 30 mm 30 to 45 TABLE 5 COMPOSITION OF BITU- MEN MASTIC Sl Requirement Percentage by No. Mass of Bitumen Mastic Excluding the Coarse Aggre gate (1) (2) (3) i) Soluble bitumen 13 to 18 ii) Grading of aggregate Passing 75-micron IS Sieve 45 to 55 Passing 212 micron IS Sieve 8 to 32 and retained on 75-micron IS Sieve Passing 600-micron IS Sieve 8 to 30 and retained on 212 micron IS Sieve 4. Properties 4.1 Hardness Number– Unless otherwise agreed between the purchaser and the user, the hardness number of bitumen mastic as laid shall be 4 to 12 at 35oC 4.2 Acid-Resistance– T"
    },
    "content": "IS 9510: 1980 Bitumen Mastic, Acid – Resisting Grade\nTABLE 2 GRADING OF FINE AGGREGATES\nSl. No. Grading Percent by Mass (1) (2) (3) i)\nPassing 75-micron IS Sieve 45 to 55 (filler) ii)\nPassing 212-micron IS Sieve 10 to 30 and retained on 75-micron\nIS Sieve iii)\nPassing 600-micron IS Sieve 10 to 30 and retained on 212-micron IS Sieve iv)\nPassing 2.36 mm IS Sieve and retained on 600 micron\nIS Sieve 5 to 20 v)\nRetained on 2.36 mm IS Sieve Nil\nTABLE 3 SIZE OF COARSE AGGREGATES\nFOR USE IN BITUMEN MASTIC\nThickness of\nSize of Aggregates Percentage\nEach Layer of by mass\nthe mastic (1) (2) (3)\n10mm\nNo coarse aggregates may —\nbe incorporated\n15mm\nPassing 4.75mm IS Sieve. 100\nRetained on 600 micron IS Sieve 85Min\n20mm\nPassing 4.75mm 100\nIS Sieve Retained on 600-micron\nIS Sieve 95Min\n25mm\nPassing 10mm 100\nIS Sieve retained on\n2.36mm IS Sieve 95Min\n3. Composition — See Tables 4 and 5\nTABLE 4 PERCENTAGE OF COARSE\nAGGREGATES Sl Thickness of Each Percentage of No. Layer of the Mastic Coarse Aggregates byMass of Total Mastic (1) (2) (3) i) 15 mm 15 to 30 ii) 20 to 25 mm 20 to 35 iii) 25 to 30 mm 30 to 45 TABLE 5 COMPOSITION OF BITU-\nMEN MASTIC Sl Requirement\nPercentage by No.\nMass of Bitumen Mastic Excluding the Coarse Aggre gate (1) (2) (3) i)\nSoluble bitumen 13 to 18 ii)\nGrading of aggregate\nPassing 75-micron IS Sieve 45 to 55\nPassing 212 micron IS Sieve\n8 to 32 and retained on 75-micron\nIS Sieve\nPassing 600-micron IS Sieve\n8 to 30 and retained on 212 micron\nIS Sieve\n4. Properties\n4.1 Hardness Number– Unless otherwise agreed\nbetween the purchaser and the user, the hardness number of bitumen mastic as laid shall be 4 to 12 at 35oC\n4.2 Acid-Resistance– The test specimens shall be\nsubjected to acid-resistance test. The test specimen shall be observed for change of mass, surface cracks,\nloss of gloss, etching, pitting, and softening. The concentration of acid solutions to which the specimens\nto be are tested shall be as specified by the user.\n4.2.1 The immersion medium shall be observed for discolouration and the formation of sediments.\nNote 1— For guidance on performance and recommendation for use of bitumen mastic, refer to Table 6 of the standard.\nNote 2— For methods of tests for bitumen, refer to:\nIS 1203:1978 Determination of penetration.\nIS 1205:1978 Determination of softening point.\nIS 1212:1978 Determination of loss on heating."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13026: 1991",
    "title": "Bitumen Mastic For Flooring For Industries Handling Lpg And Other Light Hydrocarbon Products",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "Requirements of linoleum manufactured as sheets or tiles on a hessian backing and used as floor covering. Note — This standard does not include jute canvas as backing material.",
    "keywords": [
      "linoleum",
      "backing",
      "wearing",
      "tiles",
      "hessian",
      "cork",
      "rolls"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of linoleum manufactured as sheets or tiles on a hessian backing and used as floor covering. Note — This standard does not include jute canvas as backing material. 2. Materials 2.1 The wearing surface of the linoleum shall be made from the following material: a) Oxidized or polymerized linseed oil (conforming to IS 75 : 1973) * or other suitable drying oil, with necessary driers; b) Rosin or resin or their combination: c) Cork flour or wood flour or both: d) Mineral fillers; and e) Colouring material or pigments Note — The material shall be mixed and pressed to a specially smooth surface on the backing (see 2.2). The backing material shall be securely bonded to the wearing surface. 2.2 The type of hessian used for backing is dependent on the type of conform method of manufactu",
      "Finish": "The wearing surface of linoleum shall be smooth, uniform and shall be free from indentations, cracks and protruding particles.",
      "Packing": "The linoleum sheet shall be tightly wound on cores of mandrels of diameter not less than 75 mm. The rolls shall be wrapped in kraft paper (the weight of which shall not be less than 50 (g/m2) securely tied or otherwise fastend and finally packed in strong hessian or sacking. The ends of the rolls shall be suitably protected by means of cardboard or other suitable disc to avoid any damage. * Linseed oil, raw and refined (second revision) + Indian Hessain Part 2-305 and 229 g/m2 at 16 percent contact regain (first revision)"
    },
    "content": "IS 13026: 1991 Bitumen Mastic For Flooring For Industries Handling Lpg And Other Light Hydrocarbon Products\n1. Scope — Requirements of linoleum manufactured\nas sheets or tiles on a hessian backing and used as floor covering.\nNote — This standard does not include jute canvas as\nbacking material.\n2. Materials\n2.1 The wearing surface of the linoleum shall be made\nfrom the following material:\na) Oxidized or polymerized linseed oil (conforming to\nIS 75 : 1973) * or other suitable drying oil, with necessary driers;\nb) Rosin or resin or their combination:\nc) Cork flour or wood flour or both:\nd) Mineral fillers; and e) Colouring material or pigments\nNote — The material shall be mixed and pressed to a\nspecially smooth surface on the backing (see 2.2). The backing material shall be securely bonded to the wearing\nsurface.\n2.2 The type of hessian used for backing is dependent\non the type of conform method of manufacture and the machine and for manufacture.\n3. Types\n3.1 Plain Linoleum — The composition of plain\nlinoleum shall be of uniform colour extending evenly throughout the full thickness from the wearing surface\nto the hessian backing.\n3.2 Moire, Jaspe and Marble Linoleum — Linoleum\nother than plain shall be designed as in laid lislum. They are composed of different columns extendity from the\nwearing surface to the backing at random to form a variegated surface.\n4. Dimensions and Tolerance\n4.1 Linear Dimensions\n4.1.1 Sheets — Unless otherwise specified the linoleum sheets of all thickness shall be supplied in\nrolls of lengths not less than 5.0 m.The standard width of the sheets shall be 2.0 m.\n4.1.2 Tiles — The size of tiles shall be 225, 300 and 450 mm square.\n4.2 Thickness — The standard overall thickness of the\nlinoleum tiles shall be 4.5 mm, 3.2 mm, 2.5 mm and 20 mm.\n4.3 Tolerances — The tolerances on the specified width\nof sheets, tiles sizes and thickness shall be as given in\nTable 1.\n4.4 Cork Tiles — Cork tiles if supplied shall be of sizes\nand thickness as specified in 4.1.2 and 4.2 respectively.\nThe permissible deviation in thickness shall be + 5 percent\n5. Finish —The wearing surface of linoleum shall be\nsmooth, uniform and shall be free from indentations, cracks and protruding particles.\n6. Physical Requirement — See Table 1\n7. Packing —The linoleum sheet shall be tightly\nwound on cores of mandrels of diameter not less than\n75 mm. The rolls shall be wrapped in kraft paper (the weight of which shall not be less than 50 (g/m2) securely\ntied or otherwise fastend and finally packed in strong hessian or sacking. The ends of the rolls shall be suitably\nprotected by means of cardboard or other suitable disc to avoid any damage.\n* Linseed oil, raw and refined (second revision)\n+ Indian Hessain Part 2-305 and 229 g/m2 at 16 percent contact regain (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 653: 1992",
    "title": "Linoleum Sheet And Tiles",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "Requirements for smooth surfaced homogeneous PVC asbestos floor tiles. Laminated floor tiles and floor tiles having embossed surface are not covered in this standard.",
    "keywords": [
      "tiles",
      "linoleum",
      "arms",
      "fastness",
      "tile",
      "floor",
      "jig"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for smooth surfaced homogeneous PVC asbestos floor tiles. Laminated floor tiles and floor tiles having embossed surface are not covered in this standard.",
      "Materials": "Blended composition of thermoplastic binder (vinyl chloride polymer and/ or vinyl chloride copolymers), asbestos fibre fillers, and pigments. 3. Dimensions and Tolerance 3.1 Size —200 and 250 mm square.— Other size and shape as agreed to mutually.Tolerance, ± 0.4 mm on 200 mm size and ± 0.5 mm on 250 mm size. For larger size tolerance shall be ± 0.2 percent. 3.2 Thickness — 1.5, 2.0, 2.5 and 3.0 mm. Tolerance, ± 0.15 mm.",
      "Colour And Finish": "Tiles shall be plain or mottled. Plain tiles shall have colour uniformly distributed through tiles. Mottled tiles shall have colours distributed at random throughout thickness of tile.",
      "Physical Requirements": "See Table 1. TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF PVC ASBESTOS FLOOR TILES S.l.No. Charactristic Requirement (1) (2) (3) i)Squareness Gap between the sides of the tile and the arms of the metal jig shall not be greater than 0.15 mm for last 50 mm to wards the farther end from the junction of the arms. ii)Dimensional stability Change in any linear dimension shall not exceed 0.25 percent. iii) Colour fastness Shall not be inferior to that of No. 5 of daylight the 8 standard patterns of blue dyed woolen fabric specified in IS 686:1985*"
    },
    "content": "IS 653: 1992 Linoleum Sheet And Tiles\n(Third Revision) TABLE 1 REQUIREMENT OF\nNOLEUM SHEETS, LINOLEUM\nTILES AND CORK TILES\nSl.No\nCharacteristic Requirement (1) ( 2)\n(3) i) Width of sheet Average value shall not vary by more than ±3 mm ii) Tolerance to tile size ±0.15 percent iii)\nThickness\nAverage value shall not vary by more\nthan +0.15 m iv)\nSquareness Gap between thesides (for tiles only)\nof tileand arms of the metal jig ,shall not be\ngreater than 0.25 mm at any point along the\nsides\n. v)\nSeasoning(for plain The cut surface shall linoleum only)\nshow no difference in colouror grain, between\nthe edges and the entre, 24hoursafter the cut has beenmade.\nvi) Residual Shall not exceed 10 indentation percent of the original overall thickness\nSl.No\nCharacteristic Requirement (1) ( 2)\n(3)\nvii) Flexibility Shall not crack or break viii) Water Absorption For Absorption Thickness Max mm Percent, 4.5 5.5 3.2 6.5 2.0 9.0 1.65 10.5 ix) Colour fastness Shall not be inferior to that of\nNo.5 of the standard patterns of the blue dyed wool cloth as\nspecified in IS 686 :1985*\n* Methods for determination of colour fastness of textile materials to day -lighting (first revision) day to light\nNote — The tolerances on sizes are applicable at the time of actual cutting of the tiles.\nNote— For methods of tests, refer to IS 9704:1980 Methods pf tests for linoleum sheets and tiles.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 653:1992 Specification for linoleum sheets and tiles\n(third revision). 1. Scope — Requirements for smooth surfaced\nhomogeneous PVC asbestos floor tiles. Laminated floor tiles and floor tiles having embossed surface are not\ncovered in this standard.\n2. Materials — Blended composition of\nthermoplastic binder (vinyl chloride polymer and/ or vinyl chloride copolymers), asbestos fibre fillers, and\npigments.\n3. Dimensions and Tolerance\n3.1 Size —200 and 250 mm square.— Other size and\nshape as agreed to mutually.Tolerance, ± 0.4 mm on 200 mm size and ± 0.5 mm on 250 mm size. For larger size\ntolerance shall be ± 0.2 percent.\n3.2 Thickness — 1.5, 2.0, 2.5 and 3.0 mm. Tolerance, ± 0.15 mm.\n4. Colour and Finish — Tiles shall be plain or\nmottled. Plain tiles shall have colour uniformly distributed through tiles. Mottled tiles shall have colours\ndistributed at random throughout thickness of tile.\n5. Physical Requirements — See Table 1.\nTABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF PVC\nASBESTOS FLOOR TILES\nS.l.No. Charactristic\nRequirement (1) (2) (3) i)Squareness\nGap between the sides of the tile and the arms of the metal jig\nshall not be greater than 0.15 mm for last 50 mm to wards the\nfarther end from the junction of the arms. ii)Dimensional stability\nChange in any linear dimension shall not exceed 0.25 percent. iii) Colour fastness\nShall not be inferior to that of\nNo. 5 of daylight the 8 standard patterns of blue dyed woolen\nfabric specified in IS 686:1985*"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3461: 1980",
    "title": "Pvc Asbestos Floor Tiles",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "(First Revision) iv) Volatile matter Loss in weight shall not exceed 1 percent. v) Curling Shall not exceed 0.75 mm vi) Indentation a) At 27 2o C Average indentation at the end of one minute shall not exceed 0.38 mm and no individual reading shall deviate from the aver- age by more than 0.05 mm.In relation to the one minute in- dentation figures. The average indentation at the end of 10minutes shall not exceed the value specified and no individual reading shall deviate from the average by more t",
    "keywords": [
      "indentation",
      "reading",
      "deviate",
      "exceed",
      "average",
      "individual",
      "minute"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 3461: 1980 Pvc Asbestos Floor Tiles\n(First Revision)\niv) Volatile matter\nLoss in weight shall not exceed\n1 percent.\nv) Curling\nShall not exceed 0.75 mm vi) Indentation\na) At 27 2o C\nAverage indentation at the end of one minute shall not exceed\n0.38 mm and no individual reading shall deviate from the aver-\nage by more than 0.05 mm.In relation to the one minute in-\ndentation figures. The average indentation at the end of\n10minutes shall not exceed the value specified and no individual\nreading shall deviate from the average by more than 0.05 mm.\nb) At 46 2oC Average indentation shall not exceed 0.82 mm and no individual\nreading shall deviate from the average by more than 0.05mm\nvii) Residual indentation Shall not exceed 0.15 mm viii) Resistance to various\nAfter immersion in various substances and when tested the\nwidth of the sceratch on the surface shall not exceed 3 mm. The\ncolour of the treated test piece shall show no significant change\nwhen compared with the untreated test piece.\nix) Deflection\nShall deflect at least 25 mm with out breaking.\nx) Impact\nShall not suffer a fracture.\nxi) Abrasion resistance To be agreed between the purchaser and the supplier.\nNote 1 : For methods of tests, refer to IS 3464:1980 Methods of test for plastic floor covering and wall tiles (first revision).\nNote 2 : For categories of tests refer to 6 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3461 : 1980 Specification for PVC asbestos floor tiles\n(first revision).\n* Methods for determination of colour, fastness of textiles materials to daylight (first revision). † For detailed requirements of indentation limits at 27± 2°C, refer to Table 2 of the standard.\n±\n±"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9197: 1979",
    "title": "Epoxy Resin, Hardeners And Epoxy Resin Compositions For Floor Topping",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "Specifies dimensions, tolerances, strength and light transmission of glass fibre reinforced translucent plastic sheeting of the profiles specified in IS 277 : 1992*, IS 459:1992** and IS 1254:1991+ for use in roofs.” Recommended temperature range is from —20 to 60°C",
    "keywords": [
      "resin",
      "epoxy",
      "curing",
      "exotherm",
      "pot",
      "hardener",
      "rate"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Specifies dimensions, tolerances, strength and light transmission of glass fibre reinforced translucent plastic sheeting of the profiles specified in IS 277 : 1992*, IS 459:1992** and IS 1254:1991+ for use in roofs.” Recommended temperature range is from —20 to 60°C",
      "Materials": "Shall be composed of a thermosetting styranated or acrylated polyester resin system reinforced with glass fibre which may include curing agents, catalysts and light stabilizers. Glassfibre shall be in the form of chopped strand mat having a highly soluble modified polyester binder in accordance with IS 11551:1996@ having a density of 450 g/m2 and minimum width of 500 mm. Special grade of unsaturated polyester resin having a refractive index matching that of the glassfibre (that is 1.53) and conforming to the broad specifications given below shall be used. a) Viscosity at 25oC, in cps : 400 to 500 (Brooke –field LVF spindle 2/12 rev 1 min) b) Specific gravity at 20oC : 1.11 c) Acid number, in mg KOH/g : 25 to 30 d) Solids, in percent : 65 3. Profiles, Dimensions and Tolerances 3.1 Profiles—"
    },
    "content": "IS 9197: 1979 Epoxy Resin, Hardeners And Epoxy Resin Compositions For Floor Topping\n}\n2.3 Accelerator — Liquids generally tertiary amines.\n2.4 Plasticizers and Non-reactive Diluents — May be incorporated in the resins and hardeners, provided the total quantity of these ingredients does not\nexceed 25 parts per hundred parts by weight of the resin, in the resin-hardener mixture.\n2.5 Liquid Coal Tar — May be incorporated either in\nthe resin or the hardener or both provided the quantity added shall not exceed 1:1 by weight of the epoxy resin\nhardener mixture and that the pot life, curing time and other physical and chemical properties of the mixture\nshall conform to those specified in the standard. See\nTable 4.\n2.6 Aggregates — Aggregates shall be free from any\nreactive or deleterious substances. Fine aggregate shall conform to grading Zone III or Zone IV of IS 383:1970*.\nCoarse aggregate shall also conform to IS 383:1970.*\n3. Properties of Epoxy Resin Compositions\n3.1 Pot Life — Shall be at least 45 minutes at 27 2oC\nand at 65 5 percent relative humidity.\n3.2 Chemical Resistance — Shall conform to the re-\nquirements of Table 1 of IS 4631:1986.+\n3.3 Resistance to Wear — Permissible average wear\nand individual wear of specimen shall be as given in\nTable 5.\n3.4 Other Requirements — The cured samples of ep-\noxy resin-hardener-filler (including aggregates) when shall conform to the requirements specified in Table 5.\n* Coarse and fine aggregates from natural sources for concrete (second revision)\n** Code of practice for laying of epoxy resin floor toppings (first revision)\n±\n± Note— For methods of tests, refer to IS 9162:1979 Methods of tests for epoxy resins, hardenrs and epoxy resin composi-\ntions for floor topping.\nFor detailed information refer to IS 9197 : 1979 Specification for epoxy resin hardners and epoxy resin compositions for floor topping.\nTABLE 3 HARDNESS FOR EPOXY RESIN SL Type Viscosity at Amine Value\nSpecific Amount REMARKS No. 25oC MPa.s mg KOH/g\nGravity\nRecommended at 25°C\nPer Equivalent\nEpoxy in Resin (1) (2)\n(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (a) Aliphatic Amine i)\nA 10 to 20 1300 to 1700\n0.97to0.99 16 to 25\nHigh rate of reaction with strong exotherm. Curing sensitive to\nhumidity. ii)\nB 20 to 40 450 to 500 -- 50 to 55\nSlow rate of curing with long pot-life and low exotherm iii)\nC 3000 to 6000 830 to 910 -- 50 to 55\nHigh rate of reaction and high exotherm (b) Aromatic Amine Adduct i)\nA 3800 to 6000 260 to 290 1.11 to 1.12\n110 to 130\nPermits curing at high\natomospheric humidity and low temperature, medium rate of\ncuring. ii)\nB 14000 to 22000 250 to 280 1.125 to 1.13\n110 to 130\nPermits curing at high atmospheric humidity and low\ntemperature, Fast rate of curing (c) Polyamionamide i)\nA\n12500to 17500 350 to 410 0.96 to 0.98\n110 to 190\nSlow rate of curing with low exotherm ii)\nB\n14000to 15000 190 to 210 1.05 to 1.07\n100 to 110 do iii) C\n9000 to 13000 280 to 300 0.96 to 0.98\n160 to 180 do (d) Aminoresin compound i) A\n17000to 23000 300 to 360 --\n100 to 110\nPossibility of adjusting pot-life and exotherm\nTABLE 5 REQUIREMENTS OF EPOXY RESIN\nCOMPOSITION FOR FLOORING TOPPING SL. Characteristic Requirememt\n(1) (2) (3)\ni)\nCompressive strength, N/mm2 80 Min\nii)\nBond strength, N/mm2 2 Min\niii)\nFlexural strength, N/mm2 20 Min\niv)\nTensile strength, N/mm2 15 Min\nv)\nModulas of elasticity, N/mm2 35x10-3 Min vi)\nCoefficient of linear thermal 45x10-6 Max expansion, mm/mmoC\nvii) Thermal conductivity (optional) W/mk 1 Max viii) Linear shrinkage, percent 0.10 Max\nix)\nWater absorption, percent 0.50 Max\nx)\nResistance to wear, Averagewear 2 Max/mm\nIndividual 2.5 Max xi)\nShear strength N/mm2 3.2 Min\nTABLE 4 GENERAL SPECIFICATION\nFOR LIQUID COAL TAR SL. Characteristic Requirememt (1) (2) (3) i) Viscosity at 40oC, Pa.s 14 to 16 ii) Specific gravity at 27oC 1.15 to 1.21 iii) Residue (pitch), percent 60 to 70 iv) Softening point of residual pitch 67oC v) Fractional distillation, percent by mass\n170o-270oC 7.85\n270o-300oC 5.46\n300o-350oC 19.06 vi) Phenol, cresolos etc, Percent, Max 3 vii) Naphthalene, percent, Max 2 1. Scope — Specifies dimensions, tolerances,\nstrength and light transmission of glass fibre reinforced translucent plastic sheeting of the profiles specified in\nIS 277 : 1992*, IS 459:1992** and IS 1254:1991+ for use in roofs.”\nRecommended temperature range is from —20 to 60°C\n2. Materials — Shall be composed of a thermosetting\nstyranated or acrylated polyester resin system reinforced with glass fibre which may include curing agents,\ncatalysts and light stabilizers. Glassfibre shall be in the form of chopped strand mat having a highly soluble\nmodified polyester binder in accordance with IS\n11551:1996@ having a density of 450 g/m2 and minimum width of 500 mm.\nSpecial grade of unsaturated polyester resin having a refractive index matching that of the glassfibre (that\nis 1.53) and conforming to the broad specifications given below shall be used.\na)\nViscosity at 25oC, in cps : 400 to 500 (Brooke –field LVF spindle 2/12 rev 1 min)\nb) Specific gravity at 20oC : 1.11 c) Acid number, in mg KOH/g : 25 to 30 d) Solids, in percent : 65\n3.\nProfiles, Dimensions and Tolerances\n3.1 Profiles— The profile of the sheet shall match the\nprofiles specified in the appropriate Indian Standards for the particular material. See Table 1.\n* Galvanized steel sheet (plain and corrugated (fifth revision)\n** Corrugated and semi-corrugated asbestos cementsheets (third revision)\n+ Corrugated aluminium sheet (third revision)\n@ Glass fibre chopped strand mat for the rein-forcement of epoxy, phenolic and polyester resin systems (first revision)\n4. Workmanship and finish\n4.1 The sheets shall have a smooth surface finish on\nboth sides. A resin rich surface on the exposed part of the sheet is necessary to ensure that the sheet has good\nweathering properties.The moulded sheets shall be reasonably free from visible defects, such as, fibre\npattern, foreign inclusions, cracks, crazing, die-lines, pin holes, striations, and bubbles over 1.3 mm in\ndiameter."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12866: 1989",
    "title": "Plastic Translucent Sheet Made From Thermosetting Polyester Resin",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "(GLASS FIBRE REINFORCED) TABLE 1 DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES OF GLASSFIBRE REINFORCED CORRUGATED TRANSLUCENT ROOFLIGHT SHEETS All dimensions in millimetres. Sl. Type of Profile Depth of Pitch of Overall Effective Minimum Length of No. Sheet No. Corrugation Corrugation Width Width Thickness Sheet D Tolerance P Tolerance B Tolerance Tolerance T Tolerance A Tolerance (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14) i) Corrugated 1 48 + 3 146 + 6 1050 +10 +10 1.1 +0.15 1 750 0.5% asbestos -",
    "keywords": [
      "plies",
      "gradient",
      "diffusion",
      "constant",
      "sheets",
      "diffusing",
      "ageing"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 12866: 1989 Plastic Translucent Sheet Made From Thermosetting Polyester Resin\n(GLASS FIBRE REINFORCED)\nTABLE 1 DIMENSION AND TOLERANCES OF GLASSFIBRE\nREINFORCED CORRUGATED TRANSLUCENT ROOFLIGHT SHEETS\nAll dimensions in millimetres.\nSl.\nType of\nProfile\nDepth of\nPitch of Overall\nEffective\nMinimum Length of\nNo. Sheet No.\nCorrugation\nCorrugation Width\nWidth\nThickness Sheet\nD\nTolerance\nP\nTolerance\nB\nTolerance\nTolerance\nT\nTolerance\nA Tolerance\n(1) (2) (3)\n(4) (5) (6) (7)\n(8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13)\n(14)\ni) Corrugated 1\n48 + 3\n146 + 6\n1050 +10 +10 1.1 +0.15 1 750 0.5% asbestos - 5 - 9 -5 -5 2 000 of length cement, profile 2\n45 + 3\n338 + 6\n1100 +10 +10 2 500 in accordance - 5 - 2 -5 -5 3 000 with IS 459:1992\nii) Corrugated 3\n17.5 2.5 75 +5 660 +0.15 1 800 0.5% steel 4\n12.5 2.5 810 2 200 of length profile in 910 2 500 accordance with 680 2 800\nIS 277 : 1992 830 3 000 iii) Corrugated 5\n19 — 75 +5 650 25 1.1 +0.15 1 800 aluminum sheets 800 25 2 400 0.5% profile in\nof length accordance with 6 38 —\n125 5 795 +25 3 000\n±\n±\n±\n±\n± 4.2 Special Finishes – A clear tissue of fibreglass\nsurface mat or polyester mat may be applied to the sheet surface( on the side exposed to weathering ) during\nmanufacture to improve resistance to weathering.\nAlternatively, PVF and polyester cladding films can be bonded to the sheet surface (on the side exposed to\nweathering).\n5. Performance Requirements:\n5.1 Density —The nominal weight of 1.10 + 0.15 mm\nthick plain sheet shall be 1.85 kg/sq m.\n5.2 Glass Content—Shall not be less than 30 percent\n5.3 Water Absorption — Shall not absorb water in\nexcess of 0.3 percent\n5.4 Hardness (Barcol) – Barcol hardness shall not\nincrease by more than 30 percent of its initial value.\n5.5 Bolt Shear Test – Arithmetic mean of the loads at\nwhich the first tear appears, shall be not less than 375\nN. The load at which the first tear appears while testing any one of the specimens, shall be not less than 250 N.\n5.6 Load Deflection Test – Applicable only to\ncorrugated sheets and flats of curved sheets. When three sheets of 1.10+0.15 mm thickness are tested none\nof the sheets shall rupture although minor cracking around the areas of support or loading shall be permitted.\nThe total load as shown in Table 2 shall produce a deflection of not more than 15mm (that is, span/70) on\nany of the sheets. TABLE 2 DEFLECTION UNDER TEST LOAD Profile No. in\nTotal Load\nAccordance N With Table (1)\n(2) 1\n1 100 2\n1 100 3\n190 4\n190 5\n190 6\n850 7\n750\n5.7 Light Diffusion — The gradient constant shall be\nas per Table 3\nTABLE 3 LIGHT DIFFUSION\nGRADIENT CONSTANT G Diffusion Description\nGradient\nClassification\nConstant G (1) (2) (3) I\nClear\nAbove 0.80\nII\nModerately diffusing\n0.32 to 0.80\nIII\nHeavily diffusing\n0.10 to 0.32\nIV\nVery heavily diffusing\nBelow 0.10\n5.8 Transmission— The gradient constant shall lie\nwithin the limits set out in Table 4 for the appropriate class of sheet.\nTABLE 4 MINIMUM TOTAL LIGHT TRANSMISSION\nDiffusion\nMinimum Total\nClassification\nTransmission (1) (2) I 80 II 75 III 70 IV 60\nNote— for methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to G of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12866 : 1989 specification for plastic translucent sheets made from thermosetting polyster resin (glass fibre reinforced). Table 1 Thickness and Number of Fabric plies\nThickness of Sheet Tolerance on Number of Plies\nRubberJointing or Thickness in RubberInsertion\nRubber Insertion Jointing\n(1) (2) (3)\nmm mm\n0.8 ± 0.2 1\n1.5 ±0.2 1\n3 ±0.3 2\n5 ±0.5 2\n6 ±0.6 3\n8 and above ±0.7 4\n4.2.2.1 Position of plies — In the case of three or more plies of fabric, they shall be so placed within the\nthickness of the jointing that the rubber layers between the plies are of approximately same thickness.\n4.2.2.2 Each outer layer of rubber shall be not less than 0.8 mm thick in all insertions containing two or\nmore plies of fabric. The outer layers of rubber shall in all cases be of equal thickness.\n4.3 Size — Sizes up to 6 mm thickness shall be supplied\nin one piece of 1 × 10 metres and sizes above 6 mm thickness the minimum length shall be as agreed to\nbetween the purchaser and the supplier.\n4.4 Tensile Strength and Elongation at Break— see\nTable 2\n4.5 Accelerated Ageing\n4.5.1 Jointing to be used for joints subjected to water and air pressure—After ageing at 70 ± 1°C for a period\nof 72 hours shall not vary by more than percent for\ntensile strength and +\n−\n5\n15 percent for elongation at break of the corresponding values obtained before ageing.\n4.5.2 Jointing to be used for joints subjected to steam pressure — The ageing shall be done at 100 ± 1°C for 72\nhours and shall not vary by more than\n+\n−\n10\n25 percent for tensile strength and +\n−\n10\n35 percent for elongation at break of the corresponding values obtained before ageing"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 638: 1979",
    "title": "Sheet Rubber Jointing And Rubber Insertion Jointing",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for sheet rubber jointing and rubber insertion jointing for use between flanges and similar joints subjected to water pressure, air pressure or low pressure steam. Note —The recommended low pressure steam is up to 350 kN/m2 (approximately 3.5kgf/cm2)",
    "keywords": [
      "rubber",
      "jointing",
      "insertion",
      "irhd",
      "flooring",
      "hardness",
      "compression"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Lays down the composition, minimum requirements, workmanship and prescribes tests for rubber flooring material suitable for covering floors of domestic and public buildings, cinemas, hospitals, large stores, ships, transport vehicles, etc. This standard does not cover the requirements for special types of rubber flooring used for electrical insulating purposes, conductive or antistatic flooring or rubber flooring having chemical and oil-resistant properties. 2. Composition 2.1 Shall be made from a compound of natural or synthetic rubber which may also contain reclaim rubber and suitable fillers. All colouring matter shall be of good quality, insoluble in water, resistant to alkalies and direct sunlight or artificial light. 2.2 Suitable cotton sheeting shall be used as backing, impregnated ",
      "Grades": "Grade 1 and 2 4. Requirements 4.1 Material 4.1.1 Jointing Material — Shall be made of one of the following materials: a) Sheet rubber, or b) Sheet rubber reinforced with fabric rubber insertion jointing. 4.1.2 Composition of Rubber Compound — Shall be natural or synthetic rubber or a blend thereof, suitably compounded and vulcanized having the degree of hardness as specified in 2. 4.1.3 Fabric reinforcement for rubber insertion jointing — Shall have a minimum breaking load of 120 N/cm (approx 12 kgf/cm) width for both warp and weft direction. 4.2 Construction and Workmanship 4.2.1 Shall be free from surface defects, such as pitting, blemishes and other irregularities and the rubber used in both shall be homogeneous and be free from porosity and grit as judged visually on surface or any cut"
    },
    "content": "IS 638: 1979 Sheet Rubber Jointing And Rubber Insertion Jointing\n(Second Revision)\n1. Scope — Requirements and the methods of\nsampling and test for sheet rubber jointing and rubber insertion jointing for use between flanges and similar\njoints subjected to water pressure, air pressure or low pressure steam.\nNote —The recommended low pressure steam is up to 350\nkN/m2 (approximately 3.5kgf/cm2)\n2. Types:\na) Type A — 50 to 65 Hardness in IRHD, and b) Type B —66 to 80 Hardness in IRHD.\n3. Grades — Grade 1 and 2\n4. Requirements\n4.1 Material\n4.1.1 Jointing Material — Shall be made of one of the following materials:\na) Sheet rubber, or b) Sheet rubber reinforced with fabric rubber insertion\njointing.\n4.1.2 Composition of Rubber Compound — Shall be natural or synthetic rubber or a blend thereof, suitably\ncompounded and vulcanized having the degree of hardness as specified in 2.\n4.1.3 Fabric reinforcement for rubber insertion jointing — Shall have a minimum breaking load of\n120 N/cm (approx 12 kgf/cm) width for both warp and\nweft direction.\n4.2 Construction and Workmanship\n4.2.1 Shall be free from surface defects, such as pitting, blemishes and other irregularities and the rubber used\nin both shall be homogeneous and be free from porosity and grit as judged visually on surface or any cut-surface\nof the test sample.\n4.2.2 Thickness and number of plies — See Table1.\n+\n−\n10\n15 TABLE 2 TENSILE STRENGTH AND ELONGATION AT BREAK OF\nSHEET RUBBER JOINTING AND RUBBER USED IN INSERTION JOINTING\nSl.\nType\nJoints Subjected to water\nJoints subjected to and Air Pressure\nsteam pressure\nTensile Strength MN/m2\nElongation at Break\nTensile Strength MN/m2 Elongation at Break\n(approx kgf/cm2)\nPercent\n(Approx kgf/cm2)\nPercent Min Min Min Min\nGrade 1\nGrade 2\nGrade 1\nGrade 2\nGrade 1\nGrade 2\nGrade 1\nGrade 2\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\n(9)\n(10)\ni)\nA\n8.5(85)\n6(60)\n400\n350\n12(120)\n7(70)\n450\n400 ii)\nB\n8.5(85)\n6(60)\n300\n250\n12(120)\n7(70)\n350\n300\nNote— For methods of tests, refer to the standard, and IS 3400: Methods of tests for vulcanized rubbers\nPart 1 : 1987 Tensile stress-strain properties (second reivsion)\nPart 2 : 1995 Hardness (second revision)\nPart 4 : 1987 Accelerated ageing (second revision)\nPart 5 : 1986 Adhesion of rubber to textile fabrics (second revision)\nPart10 : 1977 Compression set at constant strain (first revision)\nNote — This standard is also applicable to Section 10 on Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 638 : 1979 Sheet rubber jointing and rubber insertion jointing (second revision).\n4.6 Compression Set\n4.6.1 Jointing to be used for joints subjected to water and air pressure: The compression set at 27 ±1°C for\n24 ± 2 hours shall not exceed 35 percent.\n4.6.2 Jointing to be used for joints subjected to steam pressure: The compression set at 100±1°C for 24 ±2 hours\nshall not exceed 35 percent.\n4.7 Resistance to bending — There shall be no visible\nsigns of cracking of the surfaces or separation of rubber from the fabric (in case of rubber insertion jointing) when\nsubjected to bending test.\n4.8 Adhesion— Rate of separation shall not exceed\n25 mm per minute under a load of 4kg.,\n4. 9 Hardness— See Table 2. 1. Scope — Lays down the composition, minimum\nrequirements, workmanship and prescribes tests for rubber flooring material suitable for covering floors of\ndomestic and public buildings, cinemas, hospitals, large stores, ships, transport vehicles, etc. This standard does\nnot cover the requirements for special types of rubber flooring used for electrical insulating purposes,\nconductive or antistatic flooring or rubber flooring having chemical and oil-resistant properties.\n2. Composition\n2.1 Shall be made from a compound of natural or\nsynthetic rubber which may also contain reclaim rubber and suitable fillers. All colouring matter shall be of good\nquality, insoluble in water, resistant to alkalies and direct sunlight or artificial light.\n2.2 Suitable cotton sheeting shall be used as backing,\nimpregnated with a high grade rubber compound. The hessian used shall conform to Type II hessian as\nspecified in IS 2818 (Part 2) : 1971.* The hessian shall be impregnated with a high grade rubber compound.\n3. Workmanship\n3.1 Appearance — Shall be of first class workmanship,\nsatisfactorily vulcanized, free from sulphur bloom and objectionable odour and blisters, cracks and embedded\nforeign matter. There shall be no porosity on the surface or throughout the thickness of the sheet. The surface\nfinish of the flooring shall be either glossy or mat. The underside of the floor covering shall be either furnished\nwith a cloth impression or be buffed smooth.The edges and ends shall be cut true and square.\n3.2 Colour — The colour of the flooring shall not be\npermanently affected by cleaning with water and a washing somap or by treatment with a suitable floor\npolish.\n4. Dimension\n4.1 Thickness —3 mm, 4 mm,\n5 mm,\n6 mm\n4.2 Overall thickness shall not differ from the declared\nnominal value by more than 0.3 mm at any of the twenty measuring points.\n4.3 Tile Sizes and Squareness— Rubber flooring, when\nsupplied in the form of tiles, shall be of any thickness\n(in the case of ribbed or fluted rubber flooring, the thickness refers to the thickness of the base) specified\nin 4.1 and of the following sizes:\n200 mm × 200 mm\n300 mm × 300 mm\n500 mm × 500 mm\n4.4 The length of side shall not vary from the nominal\nvalue by more than 0.15 percent.\n4.5 Sheet Width— 0.9 m, 1.2 m, 1.5 m, 1.8 m, 2.0 m,\n2.1m. The width of the sheet at any point shall not be less than the nominal value, and shall not exceed the\nnominal value by more than 6 mm. The sponge-backed rubber flooring shall have a wearing surface of solid\nrubber at least 3 mm thick on a sponge rubber base of 3 mm thickness.\n5. Performance\n5.1 Hardness — Shall be neither less than 65 IRHD nor\ngreater than 96 IRHD.\nTABLE 1 TOLERANCE IN HARDNESS Nominal Hardness\nTolerances on Hardness\nIRHD\nIRHD\n65 to 76\n± 5\nOver 76 to 86\n± 4\nOver 86 to 96\n± 3\n5.2 Water Absorption — Shall not absorb water by\nweight more than 0.5 percent of the original weight\n5.3 Compression Set — Shall not exceed 15 percent\nconditional for 24\n+\n−\n0\n2 hours and 27+1°C\n5.3.1 The test pieces shall show no signs of cracking after the test is conducted.\n5.4 Resistance to Abrasion — Shall be as agreed\nbetween purchaser and supplier."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 809: 1992",
    "title": "Rubber Flooring Materials For General Purpose",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "(First Revision) * Indian Hessian, Part 2-305 and 229g/m2 at 16 percent contact regain (first revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "proofing",
      "damp",
      "bitumen",
      "felts",
      "mastic",
      "compounds",
      "rotating"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 809: 1992 Rubber Flooring Materials For General Purpose\n(First Revision) * Indian Hessian, Part 2-305 and 229g/m2 at 16 percent contact regain (first revision) Note:\nFor methods of tests refer to Appendices B to F of the standard and IS 3400. Methods of test for vulcanized rubbers Part 2 : 1995 Hardness (first revision) Part 3 : 1987 Abrasion resistance using rotating cylindrical drum device (first revision) Part 10 : 1977 Compression set at constant strain (first revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 809 : 1992 Specification for rubber flooring materials for general purposes (second revision). 2.1\nSECTION 9\nWATERPROOFING AND DAMP - PROOFING\nMATERIALS CONTENTS\nTitle\nPage\nIS\n1322 : 1993\nBitumen felts for water-proofing and damp-proofing (fourth revision)\n9.3\nIS\n1580 :1991\nBituminous compounds for water-proofing and caulking purposes\n9.6 (second revision)\nIS\n2645 : 2003\nIntegral cement water-proofing compounds (second revision)\n9.7\nIS\n3037 : 1986\nBitumen mastic for use in water-proofing of roofs (first revision)\n9.8\nIS\n3384 : 1986\nBitumen primer for use in water-proofing and damp proofing (first revision)\n9.10\nIS\n5871 : 1987\nBitumen mastic for tanking and damp proofing (first revision)\n9.11\nIS\n7193 : 1994\nGlass fibre base bitumen felts.(first revision)\n9.12\nIS 12027 : 1987\nSilicone-based water repellents.\n9.13\nIS 14695 : 1999\nGlass fibre base coal tar pitch outer wraps\n9.14"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1322: 1993",
    "title": "Bitumen Felts For Water–Proofing",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements for saturated bitumen felts (underlay) and self-finished bitumen felts used for water proofing and damp-proofing.",
    "keywords": [
      "felt",
      "bitumen",
      "proofing",
      "felts",
      "self",
      "base",
      "hessian"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for saturated bitumen felts (underlay) and self-finished bitumen felts used for water proofing and damp-proofing. 2. Classification 2.1 Fibre Base Type 1 — Saturated felt for underlay Type 2 — Self finished felt ( for water-proofing) 2.2 Hessian Base Type 3— [Self-finished felt (for water-proofing) Grade 1] [Self-finished felt (for damp-proofing) Grade 2]",
      "Weight": "Weight of ingredients of bitumen felt for 10 m shall not be less than those specified in Table1.",
      "Dimensions": "It shall be in width of 90 cm or 100 cm and generally on lengths of 10 m 0r 20 m 5. Other Requirement 5.1 The finished material shall be free from visible external defects, such as holes, oil patches, ragged or untrue edges, breaks, cracks, tears, protuberances and indentations. 5.2 Tests — See Table 2. TABLE 1 MINIMUM WEIGHT OF BITUMEN FELT (IN KG) Sl Type of Felt For 10m2 Untreated Base Saturant Coatant Bitumen Total Weight of the (see Note) Content Finished Bitumen Felt in Dry with Condition Mica Dusting Powder Min (see Notes 2 and 3) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) a) Fibre Base i) Type 1 Underlay 4.0 4.5 -- 3.6 7.6 ii) Type 2 Self finished felt 5.0 5.7 12.9 12.0 22.6 b) Hessian Base i) Type 3 Self finsihed 2.3 1.8 17.7 12.1 23.0 felt Grade 1 iii) Type 3 self finished 2.3 1.8 31.8 20.2 37."
    },
    "content": "IS 1322: 1993 Bitumen Felts For Water–Proofing\nAND DAMP–PROOFING\n(Fourth Revision)\n1. Scope—Requirements for saturated bitumen felts\n(underlay) and self-finished bitumen felts used for water proofing and damp-proofing.\n2. Classification\n2.1 Fibre Base\nType 1 — Saturated felt for underlay\nType 2 — Self finished felt ( for water-proofing)\n2.2 Hessian Base\nType 3—\n[Self-finished felt (for water-proofing)\nGrade 1]\n[Self-finished felt (for damp-proofing)\nGrade 2]\n3. Weight — Weight of ingredients of bitumen felt\nfor 10 m shall not be less than those specified in Table1.\n4. Dimensions — It shall be in width of 90 cm or\n100 cm and generally on lengths of 10 m 0r 20 m\n5. Other Requirement\n5.1 The finished material shall be free from visible\nexternal defects, such as holes, oil patches, ragged or untrue edges, breaks, cracks, tears, protuberances and\nindentations.\n5.2 Tests — See Table 2.\nTABLE 1 MINIMUM WEIGHT OF BITUMEN FELT (IN KG)\nSl\nType of Felt\nFor 10m2\nUntreated Base\nSaturant Coatant Bitumen Total Weight of the\n(see Note) Content Finished Bitumen Felt in Dry with Condition Mica Dusting Powder Min (see Notes 2 and 3)\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6) (7)\na) Fibre Base i) Type 1 Underlay\n4.0\n4.5\n--\n3.6\n7.6 ii) Type 2 Self finished felt\n5.0\n5.7\n12.9\n12.0\n22.6 b) Hessian Base\ni) Type 3 Self finsihed\n2.3\n1.8\n17.7\n12.1\n23.0 felt Grade 1\niii) Type 3 self finished\n2.3\n1.8\n31.8\n20.2\n37.1 felt Grade 2\nNotes—1. The weight of the untreated base shall be taken as in dry condition for fibre base felts. In the case of hessian base the weight\nof untreated base shall conform to IS 2818 (Part2) : 1971.*\n2. Include allowance for 1.2kg minimum mica dusting powder in dry condition except for Type 1.\n3. When other type of mineral powders are used, the weights shown in the last column shall be changed on the basis of\n4.4.2 of the standard.\n* Indian hessian: Part 2 : 305 and 229 g/m at 16 percent contract regain (first revision) TABLE 2 REQUIREMENTS OF BITUMEN FELTS\nType Breaking Strength, Pliability Test Storage Heat Pressure Water of Min, Kg Sticking Resistance Head Absorption\nFelt Test Test Test Test, Max Warpway Weftway\n(1)\n(2)\n(3) (4) (5)\n(6) (7) (8)\nType 1\n72\n24 i) The roll shall not show cracks\n—\n—\n— — on unrolling ii) Consider any surface rupture exceeding 5mm in length as failure\nType 2\n95\n60 i) The roll shall not show crack The test pieces The test pieces The test pieces 5.0% on unrolling shall be shall show shall show examined no sign of no sign of after cooling melting of leakage the bitumen compound ii) Consider any surface rupture\nAfter release\n—\n— — exceeding 5 mm in lengt of the load as failure the layers\nfelt shall be capable of\nbeing separated withoutdamaging\nthe coatant, in any way\nType 3\n135\n90 i) The roll shallnot show cracks\nThe test The test The test 2.0%\n(all grades) on unrolling pieces shall pieces shall piecesshall\nbe examined show no show no after cooling sign of melting sign of of the bitumen leakage compound ii) Consider any surface rupture After release -- -exceeding 5mm in length of the load the as failure layers of felt shall be capable of being separated without damaging the coatant in any way\n* Diameter of Mandrel for pliability test shall be as follows :\nType 1\nType 2\n50 mm\nType 3, Grade 1\nType 3, Grade 2\n75 mm\nNotes — 1. The tests shall be carried out not earlier than two days from the date of manufacture\n2. See Fig. 1 of the standard for cutting test pieces from the roll Note— For test procidures refer to IS 13826 Methods of test for bitumen based felt:\nIS (Part 1) : 1993 Breaking strength test.\nIS (Part 2) : 1993 Pliability test.\nIS (Part 3) : 1993 Storage sticking test.\nIS (Part 4) : 1993 Pressure head test.\nIS (Part 5) : 1993 Heat resistance test.\nIS (Part 6) : 1993 Water absorption test.\nFor detialed information, refer to IS 1322 :1993 Specification for bitumen felts for waterproofing and damp-proofing (fourth revision). Note— For test procedures, refer to Annex A to C of the standard and\nIS 1209 : 1978 Determination of flash point and fire point (first revision).\nIS 1211 : 1978 Determination of water content (Dean and Stark method) (first reivsion)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1580: 1991",
    "title": "Bituminous Compounds For Water-Proofing And Caulking Purposes",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements and methods of sampling and tests for bituminous compound, applied cold and used for stopping leaks through cracks of roofs, floors, walls, etc; as sealant for plate joints of wagons, coaches and buses; as caulking agent for crevices and vertical joints between steel plates, folded sections, wood joints, precast concrete cladding, etc; and as adhesives for rainguards for rubber trees.",
    "keywords": [
      "satisfy",
      "homogenous",
      "oils",
      "paste",
      "container",
      "consistency",
      "requirement"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and methods of sampling and tests for bituminous compound, applied cold and used for stopping leaks through cracks of roofs, floors, walls, etc; as sealant for plate joints of wagons, coaches and buses; as caulking agent for crevices and vertical joints between steel plates, folded sections, wood joints, precast concrete cladding, etc; and as adhesives for rainguards for rubber trees. 2. Grades a) Grade 1 – Shall be semistiff, smooth and homogenous paste suitable for application by spreading with hand, trowel, spatula or gun. b) Grade 2 – Shall be of light consistency and homogenous paste suitable for application by putty knife.",
      "Composition": "The material shall consist of bitumen and flus oils with or without addition of vegetable or resinous oils, cut back with volatile thinners and intimately mixed with non-gritty absorbent, inorganic fibrous material (with or without powder) in suitable proportions as to comply with the requirements of this standard.(see Table 1).",
      "Keeping Properties": "When stored under cover in a dry place in the original sealed container under normal temperature the material shall retain the specified properties for a period of not less than six months from the date of manufacture as declared on container. TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR BITUMINOUS COMPOUNDS Sl. No. Characteristic Requirements Grade 1 Grade 2 (1) (2) (3) (4) i) Water content, percent by mass, Max 0.5 0.5 ii) Ash content, percent by mass, Max 40 30 iii) Flow Shall satisfy the Shall satisfy the requirement requirement iv) Flash point oC, Min 35 35 v) Flexibility and adhesion Shall satisfy the Shall satisfy the requirement requirement vi) Consistency a) Before setting (test after 1h) Min 100 225 b) After setting (test after 24 h) Min 80 200"
    },
    "content": "IS 1580: 1991 Bituminous Compounds For Water-Proofing And Caulking Purposes\n(Second Revision)\n1. Scope — Requirements and methods of sampling\nand tests for bituminous compound, applied cold and used for stopping leaks through cracks of roofs, floors,\nwalls, etc; as sealant for plate joints of wagons, coaches and buses; as caulking agent for crevices and vertical\njoints between steel plates, folded sections, wood joints, precast concrete cladding, etc; and as adhesives for\nrainguards for rubber trees.\n2. Grades\na) Grade 1 – Shall be semistiff, smooth and homogenous paste suitable for application by spreading\nwith hand, trowel, spatula or gun.\nb) Grade 2 – Shall be of light consistency and homogenous paste suitable for application by putty\nknife.\n3. Composition — The material shall consist of\nbitumen and flus oils with or without addition of vegetable or resinous oils, cut back with volatile thinners\nand intimately mixed with non-gritty absorbent, inorganic fibrous material (with or without powder) in\nsuitable proportions as to comply with the requirements of this standard.(see Table 1).\n4. Keeping Quality — When stored under cover\nin a dry place in the original sealed container under normal temperature the material shall retain the specified\nproperties for a period of not less than six months from the date of manufacture as declared on container.\nTABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR BITUMINOUS COMPOUNDS\nSl. No.\nCharacteristic\nRequirements\nGrade 1\nGrade 2\n(1) (2)\n(3)\n(4)\ni) Water content, percent by mass, Max\n0.5\n0.5 ii) Ash content, percent by mass, Max\n40\n30 iii) Flow\nShall satisfy the\nShall satisfy the requirement\nrequirement iv) Flash point oC, Min\n35\n35 v) Flexibility and adhesion\nShall satisfy the\nShall satisfy the requirement requirement vi)\nConsistency a) Before setting (test after 1h) Min\n100\n225 b) After setting (test after 24 h) Min\n80\n200"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2645: 2003",
    "title": "Integral Cement Water-Proofing Compounds",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements for integral cement water- proofing compounds, which shall be assessed by: a) Permeability to water, and b) Physical tests of setting time and compressive strengths of cement mixed with the water-proofing compounds. Note — Proportions as recommended by manufacturers, but not exceeding 3 percent by weight of cement.",
    "keywords": [
      "days",
      "cement",
      "proofing",
      "permeability",
      "compressive",
      "cubes",
      "compounds"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for integral cement water- proofing compounds, which shall be assessed by: a) Permeability to water, and b) Physical tests of setting time and compressive strengths of cement mixed with the water-proofing compounds. Note — Proportions as recommended by manufacturers, but not exceeding 3 percent by weight of cement. 2. Requirements 2.1 Permeability to water of specimens prepared with the recommended proportion of the compound shall be less than half the permeability of similar specimens prepared without the addition of the compound. 2.2 Setting time of cement mixed with water-proofing– Initial – not less than 30 minutes; final – not more than 600 minutes. 2.3 Compressive Strengths – of mortar cubes using the recommended proportion of waterproofing compound shall be as follows :"
    },
    "content": "IS 2645: 2003 Integral Cement Water-Proofing Compounds\n(Second Revision)\n1. Scope — Requirements for integral cement water-\nproofing compounds, which shall be assessed by:\na)\nPermeability to water, and b)\nPhysical tests of setting time and compressive strengths of cement mixed with the water-proofing compounds.\nNote — Proportions as recommended by manufacturers,\nbut not exceeding 3 percent by weight of cement.\n2. Requirements\n2.1 Permeability to water of specimens prepared with\nthe recommended proportion of the compound shall be less than half the permeability of similar specimens\nprepared without the addition of the compound.\n2.2 Setting time of cement mixed with water-proofing–\nInitial – not less than 30 minutes; final – not more than\n600 minutes.\n2.3 Compressive Strengths – of mortar cubes using the\nrecommended proportion of waterproofing compound shall be as follows :\nAt 3 days — Not less than the minimum specified 3 days compressive strength of the grade of ordinary Portland cement\nused nor less than 90 percent of the 3 days compressive strength of mortar cubes made with the same cement and sand only.\nAt 7 days — Not less than the minimum specified 7 days compressive strength of the grade of ordinary Portland cement\nused nor less than 90 percent of the 7 days compressive strength of mortar cubes made with the same cement and sand only.\n2.4 The chloride content and sulphate content in the\nproduct shall be declared by the manufacturer.\nNote— For methods of tests, refer to Appendix B of the standard,\nIS 4031 Methods of physical tests for hydraulic cement\nIS 6925 Methods of test for determination of water soluble chlorides in concrete and admixtures.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2645 : 2003 Specification of integral cement water proofing compounds (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3037: 1986",
    "title": "Bitumen Mastic For Use In",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements for bitumen mastic suitable for water proofing of roofs. This bitumen mastic is not intended to be used as a paving material or to with stand exceptional conditions, such as acid or alkali actions.",
    "keywords": [
      "sieve",
      "bitumen",
      "micron",
      "mastic",
      "retained",
      "passing",
      "proofing"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the requirements for bitumen primer for application to concrete and masonry surfaces and to be used with bitumen in damp-proofing and waterproofing below or above ground level.",
      "General Characteristics": "It shall consist of a mixture of bitumen, aggregates and mineral filler in such suitable proportions as to give it a semi fluid consistency when heated to about 180oC. The mastic at this temperature shall be easily compressible by trowels into a compact and uniform layer, not less than 10 mm in thickness. 3. Materials 3.1 Bitumen — See Table 1. Note–For methods of tests, refer to IS 1203:1978*, IS 1205 : 1978 **, IS 1208 : 1978#, IS 1212 : 1978 ^, IS 1216:1978``. 3.2 Aggregate — Aggrates shall be crushed rock or gravel of silicious, granite or limestone origin with mineral fillers, such as, limestone dust or cement. Aggregates used shall be clean and free of all foreign matter. Shall conform to gradings as given in Table 2. Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials— * Determination ",
      "Hardness Number": "The hardness number of the bitumen mastic at the time of laying shall be between 2 to 8 at 25oC, and 10 to 65 at 45oC. For detailed information, refer to IS 3037 : 1986 Specification for bitumen mastic for use in water-proofing of roofs (first revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 3037: 1986 Bitumen Mastic For Use In\nWATER—PROOFING OF ROOFS\n(First Revision)\n1. Scope — Requirements for bitumen mastic suitable\nfor water proofing of roofs. This bitumen mastic is not intended to be used as a paving material or to with\nstand exceptional conditions, such as acid or alkali actions.\n2. General Characteristic — It shall consist of\na mixture of bitumen, aggregates and mineral filler in such suitable proportions as to give it a semi fluid\nconsistency when heated to about 180oC. The mastic at this temperature shall be easily compressible by trowels\ninto a compact and uniform layer, not less than 10 mm in thickness.\n3. Materials\n3.1 Bitumen — See Table 1.\nNote–For methods of tests, refer to IS 1203:1978*, IS\n1205 : 1978 **, IS 1208 : 1978#, IS 1212 : 1978 ^, IS\n1216:1978``.\n3.2 Aggregate — Aggrates shall be crushed rock or\ngravel of silicious, granite or limestone origin with mineral fillers, such as, limestone dust or cement.\nAggregates used shall be clean and free of all foreign matter. Shall conform to gradings as given in Table 2.\nMethods for testing tar and bituminous materials—\n*\nDetermination of penetration\n†\nDetermination of softening point\n‡\nDetermination of ductility\n§\nDetermination of loss heating\n*\nDetermination of solu bility in Carbon disulphide tricholoroethylene.\nTABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES OF BITUMEN\nSl No.\nCharacteristics Requirements\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\ni)\nSoftening point (R&D)\n55 to 90oC ii)\nPenetration\n10 to 30 iii)\nDuctility\n3 to 30 iv)\nLoss on heating, percent, Max\n2.0 v)\nSolubility in carbon disulphide, carbon\n99% tetrachloride or trichloroethylene, Min\nTABLE 2 GRADING OF AGGREGATES Type of Sieve used\nPercentage by Weight of\nPassing 75-micron IS Sieve 40 to 45\nRetained on 75-micron IS Sieve and passing 425-micron IS Sieve\n15 to 20\nRetained on 425-micron IS Sieve and passing 2.00-mm IS Sieve\n15 to 20\nRetained on 2.00-mm IS Sieve and passing 4.75-mm IS Sieve\n20 to 30\nRetained on 10-mm IS Sieve\nNil TABLE 3 COMPOSITION OF BITUMEN MASTIC BY ANALYSIS\nSl No.\nRequirement Percentage by weight of Total Mastic\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\ni) Bitumen\n15 to 20\nAggregate passing ii)\n4-75 mm IS Sieve and retained on 2.00 mm\n18 to 20 iii)\n2.00 mm IS Sieve and retained on 425-micron IS Sieve\n12 to 18 iv)\n425 – micron IS Sieve and retained on 75-micron IS Sieve\n12 to 18 v) 75 – micron IS Sieve (mineral filler)\n35 to 40\n4. Composition — See Table 3\n5. Hardness Number —The hardness number of the\nbitumen mastic at the time of laying shall be between 2 to 8 at 25oC, and 10 to 65 at 45oC.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3037 : 1986 Specification for bitumen mastic for use in water-proofing of roofs (first revision). 1. Scope — Covers the requirements for bitumen primer\nfor application to concrete and masonry surfaces and to be used with bitumen in damp-proofing and\nwaterproofing below or above ground level."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3384: 1986",
    "title": "Bitumen Primer For Use In",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "summary": "WATER–PROOFING AND DAMP–PROOFING (First Revision) TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF PRIMER Sl.No. Characteristic Requirement (1) (2) (3) i) Viscosity by standard tar viscometer,4-mm orifice, in sec, at 25oC 4 to 24 ii) Distillation fractions, percent by volume of the primer– a) Up to 225oC, Min 35 b) Up to 360oC, Max 65 iii) Flash point, Pensky Martens closed type, Min 40 iv) Water content, percent, Max 0.2 v) Tests on residue from distillation up to 360oC a) Ductility, 27oC, Min 3 b) Penetration at 25oC,",
    "keywords": [
      "distillation",
      "determination",
      "viscosity",
      "proofing",
      "ductility",
      "flash",
      "sec"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 3384: 1986 Bitumen Primer For Use In\nWATER–PROOFING AND DAMP–PROOFING\n(First Revision)\nTABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF PRIMER\nSl.No.\nCharacteristic\nRequirement\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\ni)\nViscosity by standard tar viscometer,4-mm orifice, in sec, at 25oC\n4 to 24 ii)\nDistillation fractions, percent by volume of the primer– a) Up to 225oC, Min\n35 b) Up to 360oC, Max 65\niii)\nFlash point, Pensky Martens closed type, Min\n40 iv)\nWater content, percent, Max\n0.2 v)\nTests on residue from distillation up to 360oC a) Ductility, 27oC, Min\n3 b) Penetration at 25oC, 100g, 5 sec in 1/100 cm\n20 to 50 c) Matter soluble in carbon disulphide or carbon tetrachloride or trichloroethylene,\n99.0 percent by weight, Min\nNote— For test rocedures, refer to Methods of testing tar and bituminous materials;\nIS 1203 : 1978 Determination of penetration\nIS 1206 (Part 1): 1978 Determination of viscosity: Part 1 Industrial viscosity.\nIS 1208 : 1978 Determination of ductility.\nIS 1209 : 1978 Determination of flash point and fire point.\nIS 1211 : 1978 Determination of water content (Dean and Stark Method).\nIS 1213 : 1978 Distillation test"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5871: 1987",
    "title": "Bitumen Mastic For",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements for bitumen mastic used as covering material for damp-proofing of underground tanks, basements of building, water reservoirs, swimming pools, irrigation canals, etc.",
    "keywords": [
      "sieve",
      "micron",
      "passing",
      "retained",
      "aggregate",
      "mastic",
      "bitumen"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for bitumen mastic used as covering material for damp-proofing of underground tanks, basements of building, water reservoirs, swimming pools, irrigation canals, etc.",
      "General Characteristics": "It shall consist of a mixture of bitumen, aggregates and mineral filler in suitable proportions so as to give it a semi fluid consistency when heated to about 180oC. The mastic at this temperature shall be easily compressible by trowels into a compact and uniform layer. 3. Materials 3.1 Bitumen – Physical Properties i) Softening point (ring and ball method) 50 to 90oC ii) Penetration at 25oC in 1/100cm 20 to 40 iii) Ductility at 27oC (Min) in cm 3 iv) Loss on heating, percent Max 1 v) Solubility in CS2, percent Min 99 or Carbon tetrachloride or trichloroethylene Note— For methods of tests, refer to IS 1203 : 1978*, IS 1205 : 1978+, IS 1208 : 1978‡ , IS 1212 : 1978§, IS 1216 : 1978//. Methods for testing tar and bituminous materials: * Determination of penetration (first revision). + Determ",
      "Composition": "See Table 1. TABLE 1 COMPOSITION OF BITUMEN MASTIC BY ANALYSIS Sl.No. Requirements Percentage by Total Mastic i) Soluble bitumen 15 to 17 ii) Aggregate passing 75-micron IS Sieve 42 to 52 iii) Aggregate passing 212-micron IS Sieve 3 to 10 and retained on 75-micron IS Sieve iv) Aggregate passing 600 micron IS Sieve 15 to 25 and retained on 212-micron IS Sieve v) Aggregate passing 2.36 mm IS Sieve 7 to 20 and retained on 600-micron IS Sieve vi) Aggregate retained on 2.36 mm IS Sieve Nil",
      "Hardness Number": "The hardness number of the bitumen mastic shall be between 20 and 50 at 250c. For detailed information, refer to IS 5871 : 1987 Specification for bitumen mastic for tanking and damp – proofing (first revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 5871: 1987 Bitumen Mastic For\nTANKING AND DAMP–PROOFING\n(First Revision)\n1. Scope — Requirements for bitumen mastic used\nas covering material for damp-proofing of underground tanks, basements of building, water reservoirs,\nswimming pools, irrigation canals, etc.\n2. General Characteristics — It shall consist\nof a mixture of bitumen, aggregates and mineral filler in suitable proportions so as to give it a semi fluid\nconsistency when heated to about 180oC. The mastic at this temperature shall be easily compressible by trowels\ninto a compact and uniform layer.\n3. Materials\n3.1 Bitumen – Physical Properties\ni) Softening point (ring and ball method) 50 to 90oC ii) Penetration at 25oC in 1/100cm 20 to 40\niii) Ductility at 27oC (Min) in cm 3 iv) Loss on heating, percent Max 1\nv) Solubility in CS2, percent Min 99 or\nCarbon tetrachloride or trichloroethylene\nNote— For methods of tests, refer to IS 1203 : 1978*,\nIS 1205 : 1978+, IS 1208 : 1978‡ , IS 1212 : 1978§,\nIS 1216 : 1978//.\nMethods for testing tar and bituminous materials:\n*\nDetermination of penetration (first revision).\n+\nDetermination of softening point (first revision).\n‡\nDetermination of ductility (first revision). §\nDetermination of loss heating (first revision).\n//\nDetermination of solubility in Carbon disulphide tricholoroethylene. (first revision).\n3.2 Filler — The filler shall be lime-stone powder\npassing 75-micron IS Sieve and shall have a calcium carbonate content of not less than 80 percent by weight.\n3.3 Aggregates — Fine aggregate shall only be used.\nFine aggregate shall consist of naturally occuring sand or crushed lime-stone or crushed hard rock. The grading\nof the aggregate is given below for guidance.\nGRADING OF FINE AGGREGATES\nType of Sieve Used\nPercentage of Weight\nPassing 75 micron IS Sieve 0 to 10\nRetained on 75 micron\n10 to 18\nIS sieve and passing 215 micron IS Sieve\nRetained on 212 micron\n40 to 54\nIS Sieve and passing\n600 micr on IS Sieve\nRetained on 600 micron\n24 to 40\nIS Sieve and passing\n2.36 mm IS Sieve\nRetained on 2.36 mm IS Sieve Nil\n4. Composition — See Table 1.\nTABLE 1 COMPOSITION OF BITUMEN MASTIC BY ANALYSIS\nSl.No. Requirements Percentage by Total Mastic i)\nSoluble bitumen 15 to 17 ii)\nAggregate passing 75-micron IS Sieve 42 to 52 iii) Aggregate passing 212-micron IS Sieve 3 to 10\nand retained on 75-micron IS Sieve iv) Aggregate passing 600 micron IS Sieve 15 to 25\nand retained on 212-micron IS Sieve v)\nAggregate passing 2.36 mm IS Sieve 7 to 20 and retained on 600-micron IS Sieve vi) Aggregate retained on 2.36 mm IS Sieve Nil\n5. Hardness Number— The hardness number of\nthe bitumen mastic shall be between 20 and 50 at 250c.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5871 : 1987 Specification for bitumen mastic for tanking and damp – proofing (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12027: 1987",
    "title": "Silicone-Based Water Repellents",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "summary": "Covers the requirement for glass fibre base coal tar pitch outerwrap used for corrosion protection of buried mild steel pipelines.",
    "keywords": [
      "repellent",
      "repellency",
      "outerwrap",
      "base",
      "evaporation",
      "untreated",
      "glass"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Consistency": "The water repellent shall be of such consistency that it can be readily applicable to masonary by brushing or spraying. 4. Performance Requirement 4.1 Early Water Repellency — Water repellency shall be such that no pool of water shall be completely absorbed within 10 minutes. 4.2 Absorption of Water — The relative absorption of water through treated and untreated faces shall not be more than 10 percent for any one of three test specimens. 4.3 Evaporation of Water — The evaporation ratio of water as determined in Appendix E of the standard shall be not less than 10 percent. 4.4 Durability — When the water repellent is tested as decribed in Appendix F of the standard it shall meet the requirements of 4.1,4.2 and 4.3 after a period of 12 months weathering. Note— For test procedures refer to A",
      "Scope": "Covers the requirement for glass fibre base coal tar pitch outerwrap used for corrosion protection of buried mild steel pipelines. 2. Dimensions and Weight 2.1 Dimensions— Glass fibre base outerwrap shall be supplied in width of one metre and in lengths of 100 m. 3.2 Weight — See Table 1. TABLE 1 MINIMUM WEIGHT OF GLASS FIBRE BASE OUTERWRAPS FOR 10 m2 Untreated Treated Total Weight in Dry Base Base condition Including kg kg Surfacing Material. kg (1) (2) (3) 0.4 4.5 5.5"
    },
    "content": "IS 12027: 1987 Silicone-Based Water Repellents\n3. Consistency — The water repellent shall be of\nsuch consistency that it can be readily applicable to masonary by brushing or spraying.\n4. Performance Requirement\n4.1 Early Water Repellency — Water repellency shall\nbe such that no pool of water shall be completely absorbed within 10 minutes.\n4.2 Absorption of Water — The relative absorption of\nwater through treated and untreated faces shall not be more than 10 percent for any one of three test specimens.\n4.3 Evaporation of Water — The evaporation ratio of\nwater as determined in Appendix E of the standard shall be not less than 10 percent.\n4.4 Durability — When the water repellent is tested\nas decribed in Appendix F of the standard it shall meet the requirements of 4.1,4.2 and 4.3 after a period of 12\nmonths weathering.\nNote— For test procedures refer to Appendices A to G of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12027 : 1987 Specification for silicone-based water repellents. 1. Scope — Covers the requirement for glass fibre\nbase coal tar pitch outerwrap used for corrosion protection of buried mild steel pipelines.\n2. Dimensions and Weight\n2.1 Dimensions— Glass fibre base outerwrap shall be\nsupplied in width of one metre and in lengths of\n100 m.\n3.2 Weight — See Table 1.\nTABLE 1 MINIMUM WEIGHT OF\nGLASS FIBRE BASE OUTERWRAPS\nFOR 10 m2\nUntreated\nTreated Total Weight in Dry\nBase\nBase condition Including\nkg kg Surfacing Material. kg\n(1)\n(2) (3)\n0.4\n4.5 5.5"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14695: 1999",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Base Coal Tar Pitch Outer Wrap",
    "category": "Water Proofing and Damp Proofing Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding material, construction, workmanship dimensions, weights and finish of cast iron brackets and supports for wash basins and sinks.",
    "keywords": [
      "specific",
      "pipes",
      "iron",
      "cast",
      "valves",
      "sink",
      "water"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Other Requirements": "See Table 2 TABLE 2 REQUIREMENTS OF GLASS FIBRE OUTER WRAPS Sl.No. Properties Requirement (1) (2) (3) i) Breaking strength a) Wrap 30 in Kg, min b) Weft 15 ii) Pliability after a) Roll shall not conditioning the show cracks on unrolling sample for 3 h at 5 oC. b) Consider any surface repture exceeding 5 mm in length as fracture. 2.1 SECTION 10 SANITARY APPLIANCES AND WATER FITTINGS g CONTENTS Title Page GENERAL IS 775 :1970 Cast iron brackets and supports for wash basins and sink (second revision) 10.8 IS 782 :1978 Caulking lead (third revision) 10.9 IS 804 :1967 Rectangular presssed steel tanks (first revision) 10.10 IS 1700 :1973 Drinking fountains (first revision) 10.11 IS 2963 :1979 Copper alloy wastage-fittings for wash basins and sinks (first revision) 10.12 IS 3489 :1985 Enamelled s",
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding material, construction, workmanship dimensions, weights and finish of cast iron brackets and supports for wash basins and sinks. 2. Type and Weights Type Weight a) Cantilever support for sink 1.8 b) Recessed cantilever support for 1.8 sink c) Wall fixing bracket for sink 2.7 d) Wall fixing bracket with resses for 2.7 sink e) Strap and leg support for sink 1.8 f) Strap and leg support with recess 1.8 for sink g) Bracket and leg support for sink 1.8 h) Bracket and leg support with recess 2.0 for sink j) Built-in-single rail type bracket for 1.5 wash basin k) Built-in cantilever type bracke for 1.5 wash basin m) Wall fixing single rail type bracket 1.2 for wash basin n) Wall fixing cantilever type bracket 1.0 for wash basin p) Strap and leg support with As utually front",
      "Finish": "Painted, galvanized or porcelain enamelled. For hospital use, chromium plated or porcelain enamelled. Note—-For dimensions and figures refer to the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 775 : 1970 Specification for cast iron brackets and supports for wash-basins and sinks (second revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 14695: 1999 Glass Fibre Base Coal Tar Pitch Outer Wrap\nNote— For test procedure, refer to IS 13826 : 1993 Methods of test for bitumen based felts:\n(Part 1) Breaking strength test.\n(Part 2) Pliability test.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 14695 : 1999 Specification for glass fibre base coal tar pitch outer wrap.\n3. Other Requirements — See Table 2\nTABLE 2 REQUIREMENTS OF\nGLASS FIBRE OUTER WRAPS\nSl.No.\nProperties Requirement\n(1)\n(2) (3)\ni) Breaking strength a) Wrap 30 in Kg, min b) Weft 15 ii) Pliability after a) Roll shall not conditioning the show cracks on unrolling sample for 3 h at 5 oC. b) Consider any surface repture exceeding 5 mm in length as fracture. 2.1\nSECTION 10\nSANITARY APPLIANCES AND WATER FITTINGS g\nCONTENTS Title\nPage\nGENERAL\nIS\n775 :1970\nCast iron brackets and supports for wash basins and sink (second revision)\n10.8\nIS\n782 :1978\nCaulking lead (third revision)\n10.9\nIS\n804 :1967\nRectangular presssed steel tanks (first revision)\n10.10\nIS\n1700 :1973\nDrinking fountains (first revision)\n10.11\nIS\n2963 :1979\nCopper alloy wastage-fittings for wash basins and sinks (first revision)\n10.12\nIS\n3489 :1985\nEnamelled steel bath tubs (first revision)\n10.13\nIS\n5219 (Part1) :1969\nCast copper alloy traps Part1 - ‘P’ and ‘S‘ traps.\n10.16\nIS\n6411:1985\nGel-Coated glass fibre reinorced polyester resin bath tubs (first revision) 10.18\nIS\n8718 :1978\nVitreous enamelled steel kitchen sinks\n10.20\nIS\n8727:1978\nVitreous enamelled steel wash-basins.\n10.21\nIS\n12701:1996\nRotational moulded polyethylene water storage tanks (first revision)\n10.22\nIS\n13983:1994\nStainless steel sinks for domestic purposes.\n10.25\nIS\n14399 (Part & 2) :1996\nHot press moulded thermosetting glass fibre reinforced poltester resin\n10.27\n(GRP) Sectional water storage tanks.\nPIPES AND FITTINGS EXCLUDING VALVES\nBrass and Copper\nIS\n407 : 1981\nBrass tube for general purposes (third revision)\n10.29\nIS\n2501 : 1995 Solid drawn copper tubes for general engineering purposes (third revision) 10.31\nCast - Iron\nIS:\n1230 : 1979\nCast iron rain water pipes and fittings (second revision).\n10.32\nIS\n1536 : 2001\nCentrufugally cast (spun) iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage\n10.33\n(fourth revision)\nIS\n1537 : 1976\nVertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (first revision) 10.35\nIS\n1538 : 1993\nCast iron fitting for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (third revision) 10.36\nIS\n1729 : 2002\nSand cast iron spigot and socket soil waste and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories (second revision)\n10.40\nIS\n1879 : 1987\nMalleable cast iron pipe fittings (second revision)\n10.42\nIS\n3989 : 1984\nCentrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories (second revision)\n10.46\nIS\n5382 : 1985\nRubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains and sewers (first revision)\n10.48\nIS\n5531 :1988\nCast iron specials for asbestos-cement pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (first revision)\n10.50 Title\nPage\nIS\n6163 : 1978\nCentrifugally cast (spun) iron low pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage\n10.52 (first revision)\nIS\n6418 : 1971\nCast iron and malleable cast iron flanges for general engineering purpose. 10.54\nIS\n7181:1986\nHorizontally cast iron double flanged pipes for water, gas and sewage\n10.56 (first revision)\nIS\n8329 : 2000\nCentrifugally cast (spun) ductile iron pressure pipes for water, gas and\n10.57 sewage (third revision)\nIS\n8794 : 1988\nCast iron detachable joints for use with asbestos cement pressure pipes\n10.59 first revision)\nIS\n9523 : 2000\nDuctile iron fitting for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage\n(first revision)\n10.60\nIS\n10292 : 1988\nDimensional requirements of rubber sealing rings for CID joints in asbestos cement piping (first revision)\n10.61\nIS\n10299 : 1982\nCast iron saddle pieces for service connection from asbestos cement pressure pipes. 10.62\nIS\n12820 : 2004\nDimensional requirements of rubber gaskets for mechanical joints and push on joints for use with cast iron pipes and fittings for carrying\nwater, gas and sewage (first revision)\n10.63\nIS\n12987 : 1991\nCast iron detachable joints for use with asbestos cement pressure pipes (light duty)\n10.65\nIS\n12988 : 1991\nDimensional requirements for rubber sealing rings for CID joints in asbestos cement piping for light duty AC pipes.\n10.66\nIS\n13382 : 2004\nCast iron specials for mechanical and push- on flexible joints for pressure pipe lines for water, gas and sewage (first revision)\n10.67\nFIBRE PIPES\nIS\n11925 : 1986\nPitch impregnated fibre pipes and fittings for drainage puposes\n10.69\nLEAD PIPES\nIS 404 (Part 1) : 1993\nLead pipes (Part I) for other than chemical purposes (third revision)\n10.71\nPLASTIC PIPES\nIS\n3076 : 1985\nLow density polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies (second revision).\n10.72\nIS\n4984 : 1995\nHigh density polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies (fourth revision)\n10.74\nIS\n4985 : 2000\nUnplasticised PVC pipes for potable water supplies (third revision). 10.76\nIS\n7834 : 1987\nInjection moulded PVC fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies\n(first revision)\nPart I General requirements\n10.78\nPart 2 Specific requirement for 450 elbows\n10.80 Title\nPage\nPart 3\nSpecific requirement for 90° elbows\n10.81\nPart 4\nSpecific requirement for 90° tees\n10.82\nPart 5\nSpecific requirement for 45° tees\n10.83\nPart 6\nSpecific requirement for sockets\n10.84\nPart 7\nSpecific requirement for unions\n10.85\nPart 8\nSpecific requirement for caps\n10.86\nIS\n8008 : 2003\nInjection moulded HDPE fitting for potable water supplies (first revision)\nPart I\nGeneral requirements for fittings\n10.87\nPart 2\nSpecific requirements for 90° bends\n10.88\nPart 3\nSpecific requirements for 90° tees.\n10.89\nPart 4\nSpecific requirements for reducers\n10.90\nPart 5\nSpecific requirement s for ferrule reducers\n10.91\nPart 6\nSpecific requirements for pipe ends.\n10.92\nPart 7\nSpecific requirements for sandwich flanges\n10.93\nIS\n8360 : 1977\nFabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fitting for potable water supplies\nPart I\nGeneral requirements\n10.94\nPart 2\nSpecific requirements for 90° tees\n10.95\nPart 3\nSpecific requirements for 90° bends\n10.96\nIS\n10124 : 1988\nSpecification for fabricated PVC fitting water supplies (first revision)\nPart I\nGeneral requirements\n10.97\nPart 2\nSpecific requirements for sockets.\n10.98\nPart 3\nSpecific requirements for straight reducers\n10.99\nPart 4\nSpecific requirements for caps\n10.101\nPart 5\nSpecific requirements for equal tees.\n10.102\nPart 6\nSpecific requirements for flanged tail piece with metallic flanges 10.104\nPart 7\nSpecific requirements fors threaded adaptors.\n10.106\nPart 8\nSpecific requirements for 90° bends\n10.108\nPart 9\nSpecific requirements for 60° bends\n10.109\nPart10\nSpecific requirements for 45° bends\n10.110\nPart 11\nSpecific requirements for 30° bends\n10.111\nPart12\nSpecific requirement s for 22.1/2° bends\n10.112\nPart 13\nSpecific requirements for 11.1/4° bends\n10.113\nIS\n12709 : 1994\nGlass fibre reinforced plaster (GRP) pipes joints and fittings for use for potable water supply (first revision).\n10.114\nIS\n12818 : 1992\nUnplasticised PVC screens and casting pipes for bore / tubewell supplyuse\n10.118\n(first revision). Title\nPage\nIS\n13592:1992\nUPVC pipes for soil and waste discharge systems for inside and outside buildings including ventilation and rain water system\n10.122\nIS\n14333:1996\nHigh density polyethylene pipe for sewage\n10.125\nIS\n14402:1996\nGRP pipes joint and fitting for sewerage, industrial waste and water\n(other than potable)\n10.127\nIS\n14735: 1999\nUnplasticised polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) injection moulded fitting for soil and waste discharge system for inside and outside buildings including\nventilation and rain water systems.\n10.130\nSTEEL TUBES, PIPES AND FITTINGS\nIS 1239:\nSteel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fittings\nPart I:2004\nSteel tubes (sixth revision)\n10.133\nPart 2:1992\nSteel tubulars and other wrought steel fittings (fourth revision)\n10.136\nIS\n3589:2001\nSeamless or electrically welded steel pipes for water, gas and sewage\n(168.3 to 2032 mm outside diameter) (third revision)\n10.138\nIS 4270: 2001\nSteel tubes used for water wells (thir drevision)\n10.140\nIS\n5504:1997\nSpiral welded pipes.(first revision)\n10.142\nIS 6286:1971\nSeamless welded steel pipes for sub zero temperature service\n10.143\nSTONEWARE\nIS\n651: 1992\nSalt glazed stoneware pipes and fittings (fifth revision)\n10.145\nIS 3006 :1979\nChemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes and fittings (first revision)\n10.147 Note— Asbestos, cement and concrete pipes have been covered in Section 1 On cement and concrete\nSANITARY APPLIANCES\nIS\n771:\nGlazed fire-clay sanitary appliances\nPart 1: 1979\nGeneral requirements (second revision)\n10.149\nPart 2 :1985\nSpecific requirements for kitchen and laboratory sinks (third revision)\n10.150\nPart 3 : 1979\nSpecific requirements for urinals. Section–1, slab urinals (second revision)\n10.151\nPart 3 : 1985\nSpecific requirements for urinals. Section–2, Stall urinals (third revision)\n10.152\nPart 5 : 1979\nSpecific requirements for shower trays (second revision)\n10.153\nPart 7 : 1981\nSpecific requirements of slop sink (second revision)\n10.154\nIS\n772 : 1973\nGeneral requirements of enamelled cast iron sanitary appliances (second revision)\n10.155 Title\nPage\nIS\n773 : 1988\nEnamelled cast iron water- closets, railway coaching stock type (fourth revision).\n10.156\nIS\n774 : 2004\nFlushing cistern for water closets and urinals (other than plastic cistern)\n( fifth revision)\n10.157\nIS\n1726 :1991\nCast iron man-hole covers and frames (third revision)\n10.159\nIS\n2326 : 1987\nAutomatic flushing cisterns for urinals other than plastic interms (first revision)\n10.161\nIS\n2548 : 1996\nPlastic seats and covers for water closets (fifth revision)\nPart 1:\nThermoset seats and covers.\n10.162\nPart 2 :\nThermoplastic seats and covers\n10.164\nIS\n2556 :\nVitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china)\nPart 1 : 1994\nGeneral requirements (third revision)\n10.166\nPart 2 : 1994\nSpecific requirements of washdown, water closet(fourth revision)\n10.169\nPart 3 : 1994\nSpecific requirements for squatting pans (fourth revision)\n10.171\nPart 4 : 1994\nSpecific requirements of wash basins (third revision)\n10.173\nPart 5 : 1994\nSpcific requirements of laboratory sinks (third revision)\n10.174\nPart 6 : 1995\nSpecific requirements of urinals and partition plates (fourth revision)\n10.175\nPart 7 : 1995\nSpecific requirements of accessories for sanitary appliances (third revision)\n10.180\nPart 8 :1995\nSpecific requirements of Kedastal close coupled washdown andsiphonic water-closets (fourth revision)\n10.184\nPart 9 : 1995\nSpecific requirements of Biets (fourth revision) 10.188\nPart 14 : 1995\nSpecific requirements of integrated sqatting pans (first revision)\n10.190\nPart 15 : 1995\nSpecific requirements of universal waterclosets (first revision)\n10.191\nIS 5455 : 1969\nCast iron steps for man-holds\n10.193\nIS 5961 : 1970\nCast-iron gratings for drainage purposes\n10.195\nIS 7231 : 1994\nPlastic flushing cisterns for water closets and urinals (second revision) 10.196\nIS 11246 : 1992\nGlass fibre reinforced polyester resin (GRP) squatting pans (first revision)\n10.198\nVALVES AND FITTINGS ( INCLUDING FERRULES)\nIS\n778 : 1984\nCopper alloy gate, globe and check valves for water works purposes\n(fourth revision)\n10.200\nIS\n781:1984\nCast copper alloy screw down bib taps and stop valves for water services\n(third revision)\n10.202\nIS\n1701: 1960\nMixing valves for ablutionary and domestic purposes\n10.203\nIS\n1703 : 2000\nWater fittings copper alloy float valves (horizontal plunger type) for water supply fittings (fourth revision)\n10.204 Title\nPage\nIS\n1711:1984\nSelf closing taps for water supply purposes (second revision)\n10.205\nIS\n1795 :1982\nPillar taps for water supply purposes (second revision)\n10.206\nIS\n2692 : 1989\nFerrules for water services (second revision)\n10.207\nIS\n3004 :1979\nPlug cocks for water supply purposes (first revision)\n10.208\nIS\n3311:1979\nWaste plug and its accessories for sink and wash basins (first revision)\n10.209\nIS\n4346 :1982\nWashers for use with fittings for water serices (first revision)\n10.210\nIS\n5312:\nSwing check type reflux (non-return) valves\nPart 1:2004\nSingle door pattern (second revision)\n10.211\nPart 2:1986\nMulti door pattern\n10.213\nIS\n8931:1993\nCopper alloy fancy single taps, combination tap assembly and stop valve for water services (first revision)\n10.214\nIS\n9338 :1984\nCast-iron screw-down stop valves and stop check valves for water works purposes (first revision)\n10.216\nIS\n9739 :1981\nPressure reducing valves for domestic water supply systems\n10.218\nIS\n9758 :1981\nFlush valves and fittings for water closets and urinals\n10.219\nIS\n9762 : 1994\nPolyethylene floats (spherical) for float valves (first revision)\n10.220\nIS\n9763 : 2000\nPlastic bib taps, pillar taps, angle valves for hot and cold water services\n(second revision)\n10.221\nIS\n12234 : 1988\nPlastic equilibrium float valves for cold water services\n10.223\nIS\n13049 : 1991\nDiaphragm type (Plastic body) float operated valves for cold water services\n10.224\nIS\n13114 : 1991\nForged brass gate, globe and check valves for water works purposes\n10.225\nIS\n13349 : 1992\nSingle faced cast-iron thimble mounted sluice gates\n10.227\nIS\n14845 : 2000\nResilient seated cast iron air relief valves for water works purposes\n10.229\nIS\n14846 : 2000\nSluice valves for water works purposes (50 to 1 200 mm size)\n10.231\nWATER METERS\nIS\n779 : 1994\nWater meters (domestic type) (sixth revision)\n10.232\nIS\n2104 : 1981\nWater meter boxes domestric types (first revision)\n10.234\nIS\n2373 : 1981\nWater meters (bulk type) (third revision)\n10.235\nNote— IS 638 : 1979 Sheet rubber jointing and rubber insertion jointing (second revision)is covered in Section 8 Floor Covering and Finishing. 1. Scope–Requirements regarding material,\nconstruction, workmanship dimensions, weights and finish of cast iron brackets and supports for wash basins\nand sinks.\n2. Type and Weights\nType\nWeight a)\nCantilever support for sink 1.8 b)\nRecessed cantilever support for\n1.8 sink\nc)\nWall fixing bracket for sink\n2.7 d)\nWall fixing bracket with resses for\n2.7 sink\ne)\nStrap and leg support for sink\n1.8 f)\nStrap and leg support with recess\n1.8 for sink\ng)\nBracket and leg support for sink\n1.8 h)\nBracket and leg support with recess\n2.0 for sink\nj)\nBuilt-in-single rail type bracket for\n1.5 wash basin\nk)\nBuilt-in cantilever type bracke for\n1.5 wash basin\nm)\nWall fixing single rail type bracket\n1.2 for wash basin\nn)\nWall fixing cantilever type bracket\n1.0 for wash basin\np)\nStrap and leg support with As utually front towel rail for wash basin agreed\n3. Construction and Workmanship\na) Brackets for building into wall shall include a lugged portion, and a flange at bottom to indicate\nwall line. Lugged portion shall be slotted.\nb) Brackets for screwing to wall shall have back fixing plate\nc) Supports with horizontal strap and supporting leg, or cast iron brackets with supporting leg shall\nbearranged for wall fixing. Leg support shall be\n15 mm bore steel tube or casting and shall terminate in a flange for fixing to floor.\nd) Strap or bracket and supporting leg shall be made separately.\n4. Finish - Painted, galvanized or porcelain enamelled.\nFor hospital use, chromium plated or porcelain enamelled.\nNote—-For dimensions and figures refer to the standard\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 775 : 1970 Specification for cast iron brackets and supports for wash-basins and sinks (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 775: 1970",
    "title": "Cast Iron Brackets And Supports For Wash-Basins And Sinks",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "(Second Revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "cast",
      "iron",
      "brackets",
      "supports",
      "wash",
      "basins",
      "sinks"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 775: 1970 Cast Iron Brackets And Supports For Wash-Basins And Sinks\n(Second Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 782: 1978",
    "title": "Caulking Lead",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for different types of caulking lead suitable for use in water supply and sanitary installations.",
    "keywords": [
      "lead",
      "caulking",
      "pig",
      "yarn",
      "strands",
      "joints",
      "plaited"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for different types of caulking lead suitable for use in water supply and sanitary installations. 2. Type a) Pig Lead — Used in caulking joints in gas, water and sewer lines, where it is possible to use cast lead caulking. b) Lead Wool and Lead Yarn – Used in caulking joints in gas, water and sewer lines where it is impracticable to use cast lead (such as inverted joints, under water joints, etc.) Such joints will withst and greater displacement than cast lead joints. 3. Material and Quality a) Pig Lead — Shall be of uniform softness and capable of being easily caulked. For detailed information, refer to IS 782 : 1978 Specification for caulking lead (third revision). b) Lead Wool — Free from sulphur. Shall consist of fine strands or plaited ribbons. Section not less than 0.13 "
    },
    "content": "IS 782: 1978 Caulking Lead\n(Third Revision)\n1. Scope — Requirements for different types of\ncaulking lead suitable for use in water supply and sanitary installations.\n2. Type\na) Pig Lead — Used in caulking joints in gas, water and sewer lines, where it is possible to use cast\nlead caulking.\nb) Lead Wool and Lead Yarn – Used in caulking joints in gas, water and sewer lines where it is\nimpracticable to use cast lead (such as inverted joints, under water joints, etc.) Such joints will\nwithst and greater displacement than cast lead joints.\n3. Material and Quality\na) Pig Lead — Shall be of uniform softness and capable of being easily caulked.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 782 : 1978 Specification for caulking lead (third revision).\nb) Lead Wool — Free from sulphur. Shall consist of fine strands or plaited ribbons. Section not less\nthan 0.13 mm and not more than 0.9 mm.\nc) Lead Yarn—Free from sulphur. Shall consist of fine strands of plaited ribbons. Cross section of\nindividual strands shall be triangular. Section not less than 0.13 mm and not more than 0.9 mm.\n4. Packing\na) Pig lead in pigs of 35 kg + 10 percent, each or linked ingots.\nb) Lead wool and lead yarn, in the form of ropers packed in wax paper or polythene sheets and\nfinally put in polythene lined hessian bags to prevent oxidation of lead."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 804: 1967",
    "title": "Rectangular Pressed Steel Tanks",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for the materials, fabrication, erection and supply for rectangular pressed steel tanks used for the storage of cold and hot water and certain other liquids under pressure not greater than the static head corresponding to the depth of the tank. This specification does not cover the requirements of tanks storing liquids having temperature higher than 100°C, or those tanks subject to earth or other external pressure besides wind pressure.",
    "keywords": [
      "tanks",
      "tank",
      "depths",
      "liquids",
      "pressed",
      "erection",
      "flanges"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for the materials, fabrication, erection and supply for rectangular pressed steel tanks used for the storage of cold and hot water and certain other liquids under pressure not greater than the static head corresponding to the depth of the tank. This specification does not cover the requirements of tanks storing liquids having temperature higher than 100°C, or those tanks subject to earth or other external pressure besides wind pressure. 2. Types Type 1 Tanks with all flanges external. Type 2 Tanks with all flanges internal. Type 3 Tanks with bottom flanges internaland side flanges external. Each of the above types may be either with open top or with covered top. 3. General 3.1 Pressed steel tanks are not recommended for depths greater than 5 m. 3.2 Type 1 tanks are normally us",
      "Tests": "Each tank shall be tested at site after erec- tion for leakage under full static head. Note — 1. For fabrication and erection, refer to the standard. 2. Refer to Fig 1 of the standard for details of fabrication. 3. For sizes, weights and nominal capacities of tanks and plate thickness refer to Tables 1 to 5 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 804 : 1967 Specification for rectangular pressed steel tanks (first revised)."
    },
    "content": "IS 804: 1967 Rectangular Pressed Steel Tanks\n(First Revision)\n1. Scope — Requirements for the materials, fabrication,\nerection and supply for rectangular pressed steel tanks used for the storage of cold and hot water and certain\nother liquids under pressure not greater than the static head corresponding to the depth of the tank.\nThis specification does not cover the requirements of tanks storing liquids having temperature higher than\n100°C, or those tanks subject to earth or other external pressure besides wind pressure.\n2. Types\nType 1\nTanks with all flanges external.\nType 2\nTanks with all flanges internal.\nType 3\nTanks with bottom flanges internaland side flanges external. Each of the above\ntypes may be either with open top or with covered top.\n3. General\n3.1 Pressed steel tanks are not recommended for depths\ngreater than 5 m.\n3.2 Type 1 tanks are normally used where plain internal\nsurface is necessary or where there are no restrictions as to external acess or where the exterior of the tank is to\nbe lagged.\n3.3 Type 2 tanks are normally used at a location\nwhere access to the exterior for erection is precluded due to insufficient space inside a building.\n3.4 Type 2 and type 3 tanks are suitable for use where\nthey are to be erected on a solid level floor.\n4. Material\n4.1 Mid steel plates and components used in pressed\nsteel tanks shall conform to the prescribed standards.\n4.2 Bolts and Nuts— Bolts and nuts used shall be of\nmild steel. They shall be hexagonal and finished black.\n4.3 Jointing Material— The material used for jointing\nshall be insoluble in the liquid to be stored and shall be capable of withstanding the temperature variation in\nthe liquid to be stored in the tank.\n5. Dimensions\n5.1\nThe norminal size of unit plates shall be 1.25 m square. The size of tanks shall be specified as multiples\nof the nominal dimensions of 125 m. The nominal capacity shall be based upon the nominal dimensions\nof the tank, for example, 1.25 × 1.25 × 1.25 m equals\n1950 litres.\n5.2 Pressed mild steel tanks shall be either 1.25m, 2.50\nm, 3.75m or 5.00 m deep. Typical sizes, approximate weights and nominal capacity of Type 1 tanks with open\ntops for the depths mentioned above are given respectively in Tables 1, 2, 3 and 4 of the standard.\n5.3 The minimum nominal thickness of plates used for\ndifferent depths of tanks used for storage of cold liquids with specific gravity not exceeding 1.0 shall be as given\nin Table 5 of the standard.\nIn the case of hot liquids with specific gravity not exceeding 1.0, the thickness of plates for different depths\nof tanks shall conform to that laid down in Table 5 of the standard, except that no plate of the tank shall be less\nthan 6.0 mm thick.\n6. Tests – Each tank shall be tested at site after erec-\ntion for leakage under full static head. Note — 1. For fabrication and erection, refer to the standard.\n2. Refer to Fig 1 of the standard for details of fabrication.\n3. For sizes, weights and nominal capacities of tanks and plate thickness refer to Tables 1 to 5 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 804 : 1967 Specification for rectangular pressed steel tanks (first revised)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1700: 1973",
    "title": "Drinking Fountains",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Covers the material, construction, essential hygienic and performance requirements and finish of drinking fountains used in schools, parks and other public places.",
    "keywords": [
      "drinking",
      "jet",
      "nozzle",
      "receptacle",
      "fountain",
      "fountains",
      "mouth"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the material, construction, essential hygienic and performance requirements and finish of drinking fountains used in schools, parks and other public places. 2. Materials Sl. No Component Part Material i) Basin or receptacle a) Glazed earthenware b) Vitreousware c) Enamelled cast iron d) Cement concrete with smooth finish e) Stoneware f) Stainless steel ii) Pipe work for jet mechanism a) Brass b) Copper, Solid drawn c) Stainless steel iii) Fittings a) Brass,cast or hot pressed b) Stainless steel iv) Nozzle a) Bronze b) Any other non-oxidizing copperalloy 3. Construction 3.1 Basin or Receptacle — Shall be fixed at such a height that the drinking level is most convenient to persons utilizing the fountain. 3.2 Jet Mechanism — With nozzle mouth not greater than 10 mm diameter or one squa",
      "Finish": "All metal work shall be chromium plated over a base of nickel plating. Fig. 1 TYPICAL ILLUSTRATION OF DRINKING FOUNTAIN"
    },
    "content": "IS 1700: 1973 Drinking Fountains\n(First Revision)\n1. Scope — Covers the material, construction, essential\nhygienic and performance requirements and finish of drinking fountains used in schools, parks and other\npublic places.\n2. Materials\nSl. No Component Part\nMaterial i)\nBasin or receptacle a) Glazed earthenware\nb) Vitreousware c) Enamelled cast iron\nd) Cement concrete with smooth finish\ne) Stoneware f) Stainless steel\nii)\nPipe work for jet mechanism\na) Brass b) Copper, Solid drawn\nc) Stainless steel iii)\nFittings a) Brass,cast or hot pressed\nb) Stainless steel iv)\nNozzle a) Bronze\nb) Any other non-oxidizing copperalloy\n3. Construction\n3.1 Basin or Receptacle — Shall be fixed at such a height\nthat the drinking level is most convenient to persons utilizing the fountain.\n3.2 Jet Mechanism — With nozzle mouth not greater\nthan 10 mm diameter or one square centimentre in area, the nozzles shall be placed so that the lower edge of the\nnozzle mouth is at an elevation not less than 20 mm above the floor level rim of the receptable.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1700 : 1973 Specification for Drinking fountains (first revision).\n3.3 The water supply to the jet shall be controlled by a\nself closing tap of nominal size, 15 mm, fixed at the right hand side of the connecting inlet pipe when viewed from\nthe front.\n3.4 Waste Water Fitting— The drain shall be provided\nwith a trap and shall terminate in a tail piece suitable for connecting to waste pipe.\n4. Finish— All metal work shall be chromium plated\nover a base of nickel plating.\nFig. 1 TYPICAL ILLUSTRATION OF DRINKING FOUNTAIN"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2963: 1979",
    "title": "Copper Alloy Waste Fittings For Wash-Basins And Sinks",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for materials, manufacture and workmanship, nominal sizes, dimensions and finish of copper alloy waste fittings used in wash-basins and sinks complying with the prescribed standards.",
    "keywords": [
      "basins",
      "sinks",
      "wash",
      "waste",
      "fordetailed",
      "nickle",
      "copper"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for materials, manufacture and workmanship, nominal sizes, dimensions and finish of copper alloy waste fittings used in wash-basins and sinks complying with the prescribed standards. 2. Requirements 2.1 Materials Body — Brass or leaded tin bronze Nut — Brass rod Fordetailed information, refer to IS 2963 : 1979 Specification for copper alloy waste fittings for wash-basins and sinks (first revision). 2.2 Nominal Sizes – 32 mm for wash basins. 50 mm for sinks Note—For detailed dimensions refer to te figures in the standard. 2.3 Finish — Nickle chromium plated.",
      "Materials": "Mild Steel sheet conforming to the prescribed standard and having a minimum thickness of 1.60 mm shall be free from lamination and surface cracks."
    },
    "content": "IS 2963: 1979 Copper Alloy Waste Fittings For Wash-Basins And Sinks\n(First Revision)\n1. Scope— Requirements for materials, manufacture\nand workmanship, nominal sizes, dimensions and finish of copper alloy waste fittings used in wash-basins and\nsinks complying with the prescribed standards.\n2. Requirements\n2.1 Materials\nBody — Brass or leaded tin bronze\nNut — Brass rod\nFordetailed information, refer to IS 2963 : 1979 Specification for copper alloy waste fittings for wash-basins and sinks (first revision).\n2.2 Nominal Sizes – 32 mm for wash basins.\n50 mm for sinks\nNote—For detailed dimensions refer to te figures in the\nstandard.\n2.3 Finish — Nickle chromium plated. 3. Material— Mild Steel sheet conforming to the\nprescribed standard and having a minimum thickness of 1.60 mm shall be free from lamination and surface\ncracks.\n4. Dimensions— See Table 1."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3489: 1985",
    "title": "Enamelled Steel Bath Tubs",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for material, construction and workmanship, patterns, dimensions, tolerances and maintenance for vitreous enamelled steel bath tubs.",
    "keywords": [
      "tubs",
      "bath",
      "roll",
      "tap",
      "pattern",
      "centre",
      "tub"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for material, construction and workmanship, patterns, dimensions, tolerances and maintenance for vitreous enamelled steel bath tubs.",
      "Pattens": "See Fig 1 and Fig. 2. Fig. 1 Bath Tub – Pattern 1 Fig. 2 Bath Tub – Pattern 2 Size1 Size 2 Size 3 Length overall, A 1525 1700 1850 1700 Width overall, B 700 700 700 730 Depth inside (at waste hole), C 440 440 440 430 Roll (at sides), D (see Note) 60-80 60-80 60-80 60-80 Roll (at tap end), E 60-80 60-80 60-80 60-80 Roll (at tap end), F 75-100 75-100 75-100 75-100 Distance of tap holes, centre to centre,G 180 Min 180 Min 180 Min 180 Min Height Overall, H with 35 mm Min seal trap 580 580 580 570 with 70 mm Min seal trap 620 620 620 610 Wast hole - horizontal distance 250 Min 250 Min 250 Min 250 Min from outside edge of roll at tap end to centre of waste hole, J Overflow centre- vertical 90-105 90-105 90-105 90-105 distance below top edge, K Note— In case of bath tubs pressed from one sheet th"
    },
    "content": "IS 3489: 1985 Enamelled Steel Bath Tubs\n(First Revision)\n1. Scope—Requirements for material, construction\nand workmanship, patterns, dimensions, tolerances and maintenance for vitreous enamelled steel bath tubs.\n2. Pattens— See Fig 1 and Fig. 2.\nFig. 1 Bath Tub – Pattern 1 Fig. 2 Bath Tub – Pattern 2 Size1\nSize 2\nSize 3\nLength overall, A\n1525\n1700\n1850\n1700\nWidth overall, B\n700\n700\n700\n730\nDepth inside (at waste hole), C\n440\n440\n440\n430\nRoll (at sides), D (see Note)\n60-80\n60-80\n60-80\n60-80\nRoll (at tap end), E\n60-80\n60-80\n60-80\n60-80\nRoll (at tap end), F\n75-100\n75-100 75-100\n75-100\nDistance of tap holes, centre to centre,G\n180 Min\n180 Min\n180 Min 180 Min\nHeight Overall, H with 35 mm Min seal trap\n580\n580\n580\n570 with 70 mm Min seal trap\n620\n620\n620\n610\nWast hole - horizontal distance\n250 Min\n250 Min\n250 Min\n250 Min from outside edge of roll at tap end to centre of waste hole, J Overflow centre- vertical\n90-105\n90-105\n90-105\n90-105 distance below top edge, K\nNote— In case of bath tubs pressed from one sheet the dimension may be increased to 100 mm maximum, whilst the slope of the\nsides and ends will be steeper than that shown in Fig. and 2. TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF BATH TUBS\nParticulars\nDimension of Tubs\nPattern 1\nPattern 2\nNote: For method of tests refer to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3489 : 1985 Specification for enamelled steel bath tubs\n(first revision).\n5. Tolerances\n5.1 Overall width and length ± 1 percent.\n5.2 For other values specified in Table 1, ± 4 percent\n6. Surface Coating\n6.1 Finish – Gloss, colour and opacity shall be uniform\nand visually satisfactory.\n6.2 Chemical resistance—\na)\nAlkali resistance test—There shall be no loss in weight after the prescribed test\nb)\nAcid resistance test— There shall be no loss in weight after the prescribed test.\n6.3 Defects — shall be liable to rejection if the finish\nshows any of the following defects:\na) Crazin~g b) Dimples, rundown, sagging\nc) Blisters d) Pinholes\ne) Specks\n6.4 Thickness of Enamel— shall be between 0.2 mm to\n0.5 mm.\n6.5 Warpage— Shall not exceed 5 mm/m for edges\nset against wall or floor and shall not exceed 1.5 mm/m for other edges."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5219: 1969",
    "title": "Cast Copper Alloys Traps",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Covers copper alloy cast traps P and S types and their associated components of nominal sizes 32 mm, 40 mm and 50 mm for use in wash–basins, sinks, bath tubs and similar waste appliances.",
    "keywords": [
      "traps",
      "bath",
      "tubs",
      "polyester",
      "gel",
      "tail",
      "trap"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for materials, construcation, workmabship, finish, perfornance and testing for gel coated glass fibre reinnforced polyester resin bath tubs. 2. Materials 2.1 Glass Fibre – The fibre glass used shall be low alkali glass (for example, E-glass) compatible with polyester resin. 2.1.1 The glass content of the laminate shall be minimum 30 percent by weight. 2.2 Polyester resin—Unsaturated polyester resin used in the manufacture of bath tubs should be resistant to hot water and weathering. A ratio of not less than 1: 2 of glass fibre to polyester is recommended. 2.3 Fillers and Colouring Materials—When filler and colouring materials are used, their quality and proportion should be compatible to the polyester and the materials should not have any harmful effect on the quality and perf",
      "Materials": "Castings – Shall be of brass with copper content not less than 56 percent. Pressing – Pressings where used for associated Components shall be forgeable brass with the follow ing composition: Min Max Copper 56.5 60.0 Lead 1.0 2.5 Zinc — Remainder Note— Total impurities not more than 0.75 percent 3. Workmanship and Finish 3.1 Casting shall be sound in all respects, free from blow holes, laps and sand pittings. Both the external and internal surface shall be clean, smooth and free from sand. No casting shall be plugged, stoped or patched. 3.2 The external surface of traps and associated components shall have one of the following finishes— a) Self-colour, free from grease and tool marks; b) Polished; and c) Nickel or chromium plated. 4. Design and Construction Note—Typical illustrations of tra"
    },
    "content": "IS 5219: 1969 Cast Copper Alloys Traps\nPART 1 P AND S TRAPS\n1. Scope – Covers copper alloy cast traps P and S\ntypes and their associated components of nominal sizes\n32 mm, 40 mm and 50 mm for use in wash–basins, sinks, bath tubs and similar waste appliances.\n2. Materials–\nCastings – Shall be of brass with copper content not less than 56 percent.\nPressing – Pressings where used for associated\nComponents shall be forgeable brass with the follow ing composition:\nMin\nMax\nCopper\n56.5\n60.0\nLead\n1.0\n2.5\nZinc\n— Remainder Note— Total impurities not more than 0.75 percent\n3. Workmanship and Finish\n3.1 Casting shall be sound in all respects, free from\nblow holes, laps and sand pittings. Both the external and internal surface shall be clean, smooth and free\nfrom sand. No casting shall be plugged, stoped or patched.\n3.2 The external surface of traps and associated\ncomponents shall have one of the following finishes—\na) Self-colour, free from grease and tool marks;\nb) Polished; and c) Nickel or chromium plated.\n4. Design and Construction\nNote—Typical illustrations of traps are shown in Tables 1\nto 8 of the standard.\n4.1 Inlet — Inlet of every trap shall have internal threads\nconforming to the basic profile of ISO metric screw threads and shall be provided with a tail pipe and a\ncoupling nut. the tail pipe shall be screwed on to the inlet with a minimum engagement of 8 mm and secured\nin position by soldering.\n4.2 Outlet — The outlet of ‘P’ and ‘S’ trap shall be\neither with plain ends suitable for conection to lead pipe or with external parallel pipe threads of fastening\ntype.\n4.3 Tail Pipes — Tail pipes shall be of any of the\nfollowing types:\na) Screwed inlet straight tail pipes— shall conform to Table 6 of the standard and\nshall be threaded externally to a length sufficient to have a minimum engagement of\n8mm into trap inlet. Collar shall be integral with the tail pipe.\nb) Bent rail pipe — when used for bathtrap,overflow connections shall conform\nto Table 7 of the standard and shall have an integral collar. It may also be used for\nconverting a ‘P’ trap to an ‘S’ trap.\n4.4 Coupling Nuts — The dimensions of coupling nuts\nfor trail piples shall coform to Table 8 of the standard.\n4.5 Blank Nuts —Blank nuts for bath traps shall be of\n25 mm nominal size conforming to Table 8 of the standard except that the flange shall be without hole.\n4.6 Access for Inspection and Cleaning — Every trap\nof the type shown in Tables 1 and 2 of the standard shall be provided with a clean out in the position shown\nin the figures and shall be fitted with the clean out plugs\n(see Table 5 of the standard).\n4.7 Lower Flow Openings – Bath traps shall be\nprovided with branches in4 positions shown in Tables\n3 and 4 of the standard and shall be screwed externall with 25 mm (P-1) parallel pipe theads conforming to IS\n2643 : 1975 with a minimum thread lenght of 10 mm.\n4.7.1 One branch shall be fitted with a blank cap, complete with washer. 5.\nDimensions\n5.1 The traps and associated components shall\nconform to the dimensions given in Tables 1 to 8 of the stndard.\n5.2 Thickness of Wall — The average thickness of the\nwall of the traps shall be not less than 2.3 mm and at no point shall be the thickness less than 1.6 mm.\n5.3 Depth of Seal — The minimum depth of the seal\nshall be either 35 mm or 75 mm as ordered.\n5.4 Rake of Outlet — In “P” traps, the outlet shall be in\npossession of a rake of 1 1/40 Min and 50 Max below the horizontal when the access of the inlet is vertical.\nVariation shall be ermissible when so ordered.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5219 (Part 1) : 1969 Specification for cast copper alloys traps Part 1: ‘P’ and ‘S’ traps. 1. Scope—Requirements for materials, construcation,\nworkmabship, finish, perfornance and testing for gel coated glass fibre reinnforced polyester resin bath\ntubs.\n2. Materials\n2.1 Glass Fibre – The fibre glass used shall be low\nalkali glass (for example, E-glass) compatible with polyester resin.\n2.1.1 The glass content of the laminate shall be minimum 30 percent by weight.\n2.2 Polyester resin—Unsaturated polyester resin used\nin the manufacture of bath tubs should be resistant to hot water and weathering. A ratio of not less than 1: 2 of\nglass fibre to polyester is recommended.\n2.3 Fillers and Colouring Materials—When filler and\ncolouring materials are used, their quality and proportion should be compatible to the polyester and\nthe materials should not have any harmful effect on the quality and performance of bath tubs.\n2.4 Gel-coat— The bath tub should possess a uniform\ngel-coat on the working surface.The gel-coat used shall be based on isophthalic grade of polyester, or epoxy\nresin or any equally suitable chemical resistant grade of resin .\n3. Workmanship and Finish\n3.1 The bath tubs shall be free from cracks, crazing,\npinholes, blisters or chipped areas or moulding defects that may affect their appearance and service-ability.\nThere shall be no readily visible wrinkles in any area when viewed with lighting. The gel-coat shall be free\nfrom voids and no voids between the gel-coat and the back-up resin shall be closer than 0.5 mm to the inner\nface.\n3.2 Non-permissible defects Sl.No\nPart\nNon-permissible.\n(1)\n(2) (3) i)\nUpper rim, inner wall,\nSmall pores, wrinkle, craze, bottom, apron, other\nbubbles, defective readily visible faces.\nimpregnation, superficial defects injuries, aggregate\ndefects ii)\nObscure faces.\nDefective impregnation,\nsuperficial defects.\n3.3 Permissible Range of Defects\nSl. No Defects\nUpper Inner Apron Bottom Other/ Readily\n/parts\nRim\nWall\nVisiable Parts\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6) (7)\ni)\nTraces of mending\n2\n2\n2 2\nNot conspicuous ii)\nImpurities\n2\n3\n2\n3\n\" \" iii)\nPin Holes\n2\n3\n2 3 \" \" iv)\nColour bolts\nShould not be conspicuous v)\nUnevenness\nShould not be conspicuous vi)\nDeformity\nThe horizontal section of the upper rimshould drain off water readil. The bend of the section in\ncontact with wall should be less than 5 mm.\nDeformities of the othersections of the bath tubs should not be conspicuous.\n4. Dimensions\nAll dimensions in millimetres\nLength overall at top\n1680 to 1700\nWidth overall at top\n730 to 760\nHeight overall\n500 to 570\nDepth inside, at waste\n440\nRoll (at head end and sides)\n60 Min to 85Max\nRoll (at tap end)\n75 Min to100Max\nDistance of tap holes\n180 centre-to-center\nWaste hole- horizontal\n250 distance from outside edge\nof roll at tap end to centre of waste hole Overflow\ncentre-vertical distance belowtop edge\n100"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8718: 1978",
    "title": "Vitreous Enamelled Steelkitchen Sinks",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding material, construction and workmanship, patterns and sizes, dimansions and tolerances and marking for vitreous enamelled steel wash basins.",
    "keywords": [
      "enamelled",
      "enamel",
      "basins",
      "sinks",
      "wash",
      "white",
      "patterns"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Tolerances": "Overall length and width shall not vary by more than +2 percent. Note — Kitchen sinks may be made in other patterns and sizes where mutually agreed.",
      "Surface Coating": "Interioirs of wash basins shall be adequately and evenly coated with vitreous enamel of qualityin 5.1 to 5.5 Atleast one ground or primer coating preferably white, or coloured enamel coating shall be applied on the outer surface. 5.1 Finish — Gloss, colour and opacity shall be uniform and visually satisfactory. 5.2 Abrasion — Shall withstand resistance to scratching . 5.3 Alkali Aesistance — There shall be no loss in weight. 5.4 Acid Resistance 5.4.1 White enamelled wash basins — There shall be no loss in weight. 5.4.2 Coloured enamelled wash basins — Shall conform to classes AA,A and B. 5.5 Defects — Shall be liable to rejection if finish shows any of the following defects : a) Crazing b) Dimples , rundown and sagging c) Blisters —Not more than two in number on interior surface shall bew ",
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding material, construction and workmanship, patterns and sizes, dimansions and tolerances and marking for vitreous enamelled steel wash basins.",
      "Materials": "Mild steel sheet of thickness 1 mm. min. 3. Patterns and Sizes Pattern Norminal Size (Overall Length × Overall Width) mm mm i) Flat-back (Type 1) 480 × 430 500 × 450 Flat-back (Type 2) 500 × 450 600 × 500 ii) Flat-rim 480 × 430 500 × 400 510 × 450 530 × 430 iii) Overall 450 × 400 iv) Round 450 Dia 3.1 Tolerance – On overall dimension + 2 percent. Note 1— Wash basins may be made in other patterns and sizes where mutually agreed. Note 2 – For detailed dimensions and figures refer to the standard. 4. Requirement 4.1 Basin shall have in integral soap holder recess or recesses which shall drain into the bowl. 4.2 A slot type of overflow having an area of not less than 500 mm2 shall be provided in the front or back faciloitte cleaning of the overflow. The cross-sectional area of passageway of ov"
    },
    "content": "IS 8718: 1978 Vitreous Enamelled Steelkitchen Sinks\n1. Scope : Requirmements regading material\nconstruction and workmanship, patterns and sizes, dimensions and tolerance and marking for vitreous\nenamelled steel kitchen sinks.\nSl.\nPattem\nOverall\nOverall OverallDepth (in mm)\nNo.\nlength\nWidth mm\nmm\nMin\nMax mm\nmm i)\nFlat-rim\n750\n450\n150\n200\n600\n450\n150\n200\n500\n400\n150\n200\n450\n400\n150\n200\n400\n400\n150\n200 ii)\nFlat-rim-ledge\n750\n500\n150\n200\n600\n500\n150\n200 iii)\nFlat-rim- ledge,\n1050\n500\n150\n200 with doule compartment\n800\n500\n150\n200 4. Tolerances — Overall length and width shall not\nvary by more than +2 percent.\nNote — Kitchen sinks may be made in other patterns\nand sizes where mutually agreed.\n5 . Surface Coating — Interiors of sinks shall be adequately and evenly coated with vitreous enamel of\nquality complying with requirements given 4.1 to 4.5 of the standard. Atleast one ground or primer coating\npreferably white, or coloured enamel coating preferably white or coloured enamel coating shall be applied on\nthe outer surface.\n5.1 Finish — Gloss, colour and opacity shall be uniform\nand visually satisfactory .\n5.2 Abrasion — shall withstand resisrtance to\nscratching.\n5.3 Alkali Resistance — There shall be no loss in weight\nafter the test.\n5.4 Acid Resistancer\n5.4.1 White enamelled sinks —There shall be no loss in weight .\n5.4.2 Coloured enamelled sinks–Shall conform to classes AA,a and B.\n5.5 Defects — Shall be liable to rejection if finish shows\nany of the following defects:\na) Crazing b) Dimples, rundown and sagging.\nc) Bisters — not more than two in number on the interior surface shall be permitted\nprovided they can not be broken by pressure of a finger nail.\nd) Pin holes — maximum 2 for coloured sinks and 4 for white enamelled siniks. There shall\nbe no grouping and they shall not penetrate to the metal.\ne) Specks — shall be less than 1 mm in size and maximum 5 in number and there shall and\nmaximum 0.5 mm.\n5.6 Thickness of Enamel — Minimum 0.2 m, and\nmaximum 0.5 mm.\n5.7 Warpage of edges set against wall and edged of\nroll rims shall not exceed 5 mm/m. Warpage of all other edges shal not exceed 7.5 mm/m.\n2.\nMaterial : Mild steel sheet minimum 1 mm thick. 3.\nPatterns and Sizes:\nNote —For test procedures refer to IS 772 : 1973 General requirements for enamelled casti iron sanitary appliances (second\nrevision) and IS 3972 Methods of test for vitreous enamel ware.\nFor detailed information, refer of IS 8718 : 1978 Specification for vitreous enamelled steel kitchen sinks. 1.\nScope—Requirements regarding material, construction and workmanship, patterns and sizes,\ndimansions and tolerances and marking for vitreous enamelled steel wash basins.\n2.\nMaterial — Mild steel sheet of thickness 1 mm.\nmin.\n3.\nPatterns and Sizes\nPattern\nNorminal Size\n(Overall Length × Overall Width)\nmm mm\ni)\nFlat-back (Type 1)\n480\n×\n430\n500\n×\n450\nFlat-back (Type 2)\n500\n×\n450\n600\n×\n500 ii)\nFlat-rim\n480\n×\n430\n500\n×\n400\n510\n×\n450\n530\n×\n430 iii) Overall\n450\n×\n400 iv) Round\n450 Dia\n3.1 Tolerance – On overall dimension + 2 percent.\nNote 1— Wash basins may be made in other patterns and sizes\nwhere mutually agreed.\nNote 2 – For detailed dimensions and figures refer to the standard.\n4.\nRequirement\n4.1 Basin shall have in integral soap holder recess or\nrecesses which shall drain into the bowl.\n4.2 A slot type of overflow having an area of not less\nthan 500 mm2 shall be provided in the front or back faciloitte cleaning of the overflow. The cross-sectional\narea of passageway of overflow shall be 400 mm2, minmum.\n5. Surface Coating— Interioirs of wash basins shall\nbe adequately and evenly coated with vitreous enamel of qualityin 5.1 to 5.5 Atleast one ground or primer\ncoating preferably white, or coloured enamel coating shall be applied on the outer surface.\n5.1 Finish — Gloss, colour and opacity shall be uniform\nand visually satisfactory.\n5.2 Abrasion — Shall withstand resistance to\nscratching .\n5.3 Alkali Aesistance — There shall be no loss in\nweight.\n5.4 Acid Resistance\n5.4.1 White enamelled wash basins — There shall be no loss in weight.\n5.4.2 Coloured enamelled wash basins — Shall conform to classes AA,A and B.\n5.5 Defects — Shall be liable to rejection if finish shows\nany of the following defects :\na)\nCrazing b)\nDimples , rundown and sagging c)\nBlisters —Not more than two in number on interior surface shall bew permitted provided\nthey cannot be broken by a pressure of a finger nail.\nd)\nPinholes—maximum 2 for cloloured wash basins and maximum 4 for white enamelled wash\nbasins permissible. There shall be no grouping of pinholes and they shall not penetrate to the\nmetal.\ne)\nSpecks — shall be less than 1 mm in size and maximum 5 in number and there shall be no\ngrouping.\n5.6 Thickness of Enamel— Minimum 0.2 mm, and\nmaximum 0.5 mm.\n5.7 Warpage of edges set against wall and edges of rol\nrims shall not exceed 5 mm/m warpage of all other edges shall not exceed 7.5 mm/m."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8727: 1978",
    "title": "Vitreous Enamelled Steel Wash–Basins",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Note — For test procedures refer to IS 772 : 1973 General requirements for enamelled cast iron sanitary appliances(second revision), and IS 3972. Methods of test for vitreous enamel ware. For detailed information, refer to IS 8727 : 1978 Specification for vitreous enamelled steel wash-basins.",
    "keywords": [
      "tanks",
      "vitreous",
      "enamelled",
      "rotatiional",
      "underground",
      "ware",
      "tank"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 8727: 1978 Vitreous Enamelled Steel Wash–Basins\nNote — For test procedures refer to IS 772 : 1973 General requirements for enamelled cast iron sanitary appliances(second\nrevision), and IS 3972. Methods of test for vitreous enamel ware.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8727 : 1978 Specification for vitreous enamelled steel wash-basins. 1. Scope\n1.1 Requirements of materials, dimensions,\nconstruction, shape workmanship, performance requirements and inspection and testing of rotatiional\nmoulded polyethylene water storage tanks with a nominal service temperature +1oC to + 50 oC.\n1.1.1 These tanks are not meant for underground applications.\n1.2. This standard is applicable tanks subjected to the following conditions :\na)\nOwn hydrostatic head of water, and b)\nTank with uniform flat base support ."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12701: 1996",
    "title": "Rotational Moulded Polyethylene Water Storage Tanks",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding material dimaesions, construction and workmanship for sit-in and inset type stainless steel sinks for domestic purposes. Options are specified for sinks with or without overflow holes, tap holes or selected waste facilities. The standard does not specify methods of supporting or methos of fixing and sealing sinks.",
    "keywords": [
      "bowl",
      "sink",
      "sinks",
      "tanks",
      "tank",
      "drainer",
      "lid"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Finish": "The internal and external surface of the water storage tank shall be smooth, clean and free from other hidden internal defects, such as air bubbles, pits and mertallic or other foreign material inclusions. 5. Performance Requirement 5.1 Resistance to deformation – The difference between the circumferiential measurement shall not be greater than 2 percent of the original measurements for cylindrical vertical tanks.The difference between the longitudinal measurements shall not be greater than 3 percent of the original measurements, for rectangular loft tanks. 5.2 Resistance to Impact–The impact shall neither result into cracking nor puncture of the tank. 5.3 Test for Load Resistance —After removal of the load the test specimen shall be inspected for deformation or crack on the surface and af",
      "General": "Hole, Hand-Hole Lids 6.1 Man-hole hand-hole lids shall be moulded from polyolefins of moinimum thickness 3 mm and shallhave sufficient ribs to provide adequate stiffness. It shall be stabilized with 2 to ? percent of carbon black having satisfactory dispersions. 6.2 The lid shall fit securely over the top rim of the tank and it shall rest evenly on it in order to prevent the ingress of foreign matter such as insects, mosquitoes or dust through the top of the tank. The lid shall also be provided with suitable locking arrangenment . 6.3 To test the lid being fit securely to the manhole, no clearance in it should permit a 1.6 mm diameter wire to pass through. *Polyethylene for its safe use in contact with Food stuffs, phaunaceuticals and drinking water. For detailed information, refer to IS 1",
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding material dimaesions, construction and workmanship for sit-in and inset type stainless steel sinks for domestic purposes. Options are specified for sinks with or without overflow holes, tap holes or selected waste facilities. The standard does not specify methods of supporting or methos of fixing and sealing sinks. 2. Types Type A1 or A2 – Single bowl without drainer. Type B1 or B2 – Double bowl without drainer Type C – Single bowl without drainer right or lefthand. Type D – Single bowl double drainer Type E1, E2 or E3– Double bowl single drainer, right or left hand. Type F – Double bowl double drainer.",
      "Materials": "Austenitic stainless steel of specified grade. 4. Dimensions and Tolerances 4.1 Norminal Thickness of Sheet— not less than 1 mm. 4.2 Thickness at any point of sink, after forming, shall not be less than 0.75 mm. 4.3 The depth of the sink bowl shall be 150 mm minimum, when measured from the top edge of the bowl to the base of the sink. 4.4 The minimum internal dimensions, when measured on the bowl centre lines across the top of the bowl, shall be 380 mm × 340 mm for rectangular bowls and 360 mm for round bowls 4.5 a) The distance between the edge of the sink bowl and the end of the sink shall be 15 mm, minimum for sit-on type sinks and 30 mm, mini mum for inset type sinks. Depth of the collar provided for inset sinks shall be 10+2 mm. b) For sinks designed for use with a 600 mm wide worktop"
    },
    "content": "IS 12701: 1996 Rotational Moulded Polyethylene Water Storage Tanks\n(First Revision)\nasdfa\nFIG. 1 TYPICAL DETAILS OF CYLINDRICAL VERTICAL TANK TABLE 1 DIMENSION 0F CYLINDERICAL VERTICAL TANK\nSl.Minimum Net Range\nCapacity\nOverall\nOverall\nMinimum Internal\nMinimum Wall\nMinimum\nNo.\nUp to Effective\nDiameter\nHeight\nDia of Man-Hole/ and Bottom\nWeight of Tank\nHeight\nRange\nRange\nHand-Hole\nThickness\n(Without Lid)\n(I)\n(mm)\n(mm)\n(mm)\n(mm)\n(kg)\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\ni)\n200\n650-850\n490-690\n265\n3.0\n7.8 ii)\n300\n650-850\n700-900\n265\n3.0\n9.0 iii)\n400\n700-980\n700-950\n265\n3.5\n15.0 iv)\n500\n800-1140\n625-1025\n370\n4.0\n18.0 v)\n700\n900-1140\n800-1100\n370\n4.4\n23.0 vi)\n1000\n1000-1200\n1050-1350\n370\n4.5\n33.0 vii)\n1500\n1080-1450\n1150-1590\n370\n4.5\n47.0 viii)\n1700\n1300-1500\n1260-1650\n370\n4.5\n54.0 ix)\n2000\n1365-1500\n1400-1700\n450\n5.4\n64.0 x)\n2500\n1380-1610\n1400-1810\n450\n7.7\n81.0 xi)\n3000\n1410-1800\n1640-2150\n450\n8.1\n96.0 xii)\n4000\n1450-1920\n1750-2400\n450\n10.4\n147.0 xiii)\n5000\n1800-2110\n1800-2100\n450\n10.7\n180.0 xiv)\n6000\n1800-2200\n2065-2800\n450\n10.72\n05.0 xv)\n7500\n1890-2250\n2100-2930\n450\n10.72\n39.0 xvi)\n10000\n1900-2680\n2400-3740\n450\n11.53\n19.0 xvii)\n15000\n2100-2680\n2100-4000\n450\n11.5\n408.0 xviii)\n20000\n2100-3150\n3190-5000\n450\n13.2\n566.0\nNote— The gross capacity of the tanks shall be at least 5 percent in excess of the minimum net capacity.\n1.3\nThis standard does not cover mobile and horizontal cylindrical water tanks\n2. Material\n2.1 Shall be such that it does not impart any taste, colour\nor odour to water, nor have any toxic effect, and it shall not contaminate water thereby making it unpotable.\n2.2 Polyethylene resin to be used should be of\nrotational moulded grade and duly stabilized with antioxidants. The anti oxidants used, not exceeding 0.3%\nby mass of finished resin, should be physiologically harmless and should be selected from the list given in\nIS 10141: 1982. Positive list of constituents of polyethylene in contact with food stuffs,\npharmaceuticals and drinking water.\n2.3 The density of resin (base material ) at 23 oC shall\nbe within 932 to 943 kg/m3.\n2.4 The melt flow rate (MFR) of the resin under\n(Temperature 190’ C and nominal load of 2.16 kg) shall be within 2.0 to 6.0 g/10 minutes.\n2.5 The water tanks meant for out door use shall be\nmanufactured from carbon black compounded polyethylene and shall meet the following requirements:\na) The percentage of carbon black content in the materials shal be within 2.0 and 3.0,and\nb) The dispersion of carbon black shall be satisfactory.\n2.6 The addition of not more than 10 percent of the\nmanufacturers own reworked material resulting from the manufacture of tanks only according to this atandard is\npermissible.\n3 Types and Features\na)\nCylindrical vertical tanks b)\nRectangules tanks 4.\nFinish — The internal and external surface of the water storage tank shall be smooth, clean and free from\nother hidden internal defects, such as air bubbles, pits and mertallic or other foreign material inclusions.\n5. Performance Requirement\n5.1 Resistance to deformation – The difference\nbetween the circumferiential measurement shall not be greater than 2 percent of the original measurements for\ncylindrical vertical tanks.The difference between the longitudinal measurements shall not be greater than 3\npercent of the original measurements, for rectangular loft tanks.\n5.2 Resistance to Impact–The impact shall neither result\ninto cracking nor puncture of the tank.\n5.3 Test for Load Resistance —After removal of the\nload the test specimen shall be inspected for deformation or crack on the surface and after 4 hours of\nthe removal of the load the flat surface shall return to position.This test shall be applied to tanks with capacity\n1500 litres and more.\n5.4 Tensile Strength — Shall not be less than\n12 N/mm 2.\n5.5 Flexural Modulus — Shall not be less than 300 N/\nmm2.\n5.6 Overall Migration — As specified in IS 10146 :1982*\n6.\nMan-Hole, Hand-Hole Lids\n6.1 Man-hole hand-hole lids shall be moulded from\npolyolefins of moinimum thickness 3 mm and shallhave sufficient ribs to provide adequate stiffness. It shall be\nstabilized with 2 to ? percent of carbon black having satisfactory dispersions.\n6.2 The lid shall fit securely over the top rim of the tank\nand it shall rest evenly on it in order to prevent the ingress of foreign matter such as insects, mosquitoes\nor dust through the top of the tank. The lid shall also be provided with suitable locking arrangenment .\n6.3 To test the lid being fit securely to the manhole, no\nclearance in it should permit a 1.6 mm diameter wire to pass through.\n*Polyethylene for its safe use in contact with Food stuffs, phaunaceuticals and drinking water.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12701 : 1996 Specification for rotational moulded polyethylene water storage tanks (first revision).\nTABLE 2 DIMENSIONS OF RECTANGULAR LOFT TANKS\nSI.\nMinimum Net\nOverall\nOverall\nOver all\nMinimum\nMinimum wall\nMinimum\nNo\nCapacity\nLength\nWidth\nHeight\nInternal dia\nThickness\nWeight of of Handhole\n(Measured on)\nTank\nRectangular\n(Without Lid)\nVertical Port and Bottom\nThickness\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\ni)\n150\n620-820\n620-820\n285-485\n300\n2.75\n6.6 ii)\n200\n930-1130\n620-820\n285-485\n300\n2.75\n7.7 iii)\n300\n995-1200\n620-820\n285-485\n300\n2.75\n11.0 iv)\n400\n1150-1350\n855-1150\n335-535\n300\n2.75\n13.0 v)\n500\n1150-1500\n900-1250\n335-535\n300\n2.75\n17.5\nFIG. 2 RECTANGULAR LOFT TANK 1. Scope — Requirements regarding material\ndimaesions, construction and workmanship for sit-in and inset type stainless steel sinks for domestic\npurposes. Options are specified for sinks with or without overflow holes, tap holes or selected waste facilities.\nThe standard does not specify methods of supporting or methos of fixing and sealing sinks.\n2. Types\nType A1 or A2 –\nSingle bowl without drainer.\nType B1 or B2 –\nDouble bowl without drainer\nType C –\nSingle bowl without drainer right or lefthand.\nType D –\nSingle bowl double drainer\nType E1, E2 or E3–\nDouble bowl single drainer, right or left hand.\nType F –\nDouble bowl double drainer.\n3. Materials – Austenitic stainless steel of specified\ngrade.\n4. Dimensions and Tolerances\n4.1 Norminal Thickness of Sheet— not less than 1 mm.\n4.2 Thickness at any point of sink, after forming, shall\nnot be less than 0.75 mm.\n4.3 The depth of the sink bowl shall be 150 mm\nminimum, when measured from the top edge of the bowl to the base of the sink.\n4.4 The minimum internal dimensions, when measured\non the bowl centre lines across the top of the bowl, shall be 380 mm × 340 mm for rectangular bowls and 360\nmm for round bowls\n4.5 a) The distance between the edge of the sink bowl\nand the end of the sink shall be 15 mm, minimum for sit-on type sinks and 30 mm, mini mum for\ninset type sinks. Depth of the collar provided for inset sinks shall be 10+2 mm.\nb) For sinks designed for use with a 600 mm wide worktop, the distance between theedge of the\nsink bowl and the front of the sink shall be 50 mm minimum and in the case of sinks designed\nfor use with 500 mm wide worktop, the distance shall be 45 mm minimum.\nc) Both single and double bowl sink shall be set a minimum of 10 mm from gridline.\n4.6 The demensions of the sink shall comply with Table1\nread with Fig. 1 of the standerd.\n5 . Construction and workmanship\n5.1 Sinks shall be constructed of the lowest practical\nnumbers of sections compatible with the manufacturing practice to ensure a smooth surface.\n5.2 Drainers shall be fluted or grooved and shall be\ninclined towards the–sink bow.\n5.3 Waste Outlet-Sink bowls shall be designed/\nconstrucrted with a fall to the waste outlet. The waste outlet fitting shall be recessed type.\n5.4 Tap Holes–Sinks shall be proveded, in one of the\nfolowing conditions :\na) Without tap holes;\nb) With two tap holes of 30+2 mm diameter with a distance of 180+2 mm between centres,or 300+2\nmm between centre for round bowled sinks only, for nominal size 1/2 outlet pillar or high level\ncombination taps."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13983: 1994",
    "title": "Stainless Steelsinks For Domestic Purposes",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for the panels of glass fibre reinforced polyesrter resin (GRP) sectional tanks meant for storing potable water under pressure not exceeding the static head correspondinbg to the depth of the tanks and temperature of exceeding 50°C. GRP panels used in manufacturing tanks as covered in this standard are not compression moulded, using sheet moulding compound (SMC).",
    "keywords": [
      "resin",
      "sinks",
      "polyester",
      "tap",
      "tanks",
      "shade",
      "grp"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Finish": "Sinks maybe supplied with a bright or dull finish. ° ° °",
      "Scope": "Requirements for the panels of glass fibre reinforced polyesrter resin (GRP) sectional tanks meant for storing potable water under pressure not exceeding the static head correspondinbg to the depth of the tanks and temperature of exceeding 50°C. GRP panels used in manufacturing tanks as covered in this standard are not compression moulded, using sheet moulding compound (SMC).",
      "Materials": "Shall be composed of unsaturated thermosetting polyester resin (food grade) reinforced with glassfibre. This system will include satalysts and may include pigments (compatible with unsaturated polyester resin) and ultra violet stabilizers. 2.1 Polyester Resin—Shall meet the following characrteristics: a) Specific gravity = 1,13+0.01 at 27°C b) Acid value = 16+4 mg. KOH/g, c) Volatile content = 30 percent +3 percent, d) Gel time at 25°C = 20 to 30 minutes. Cured resin shall also be met with: a) Barcol hardness = 40 BHU min; b) Heat deflection temperature = 80°C to 90°C c) Elongation at break = 1.9 percent,-0+ 25°C d) Water absorption = 1 percent,after 7 day sat 25°C max. 2.1.1 Hydrolysis Test — There shall be no evidence of weight loss (due to break down of the polymer) when tasted as presc"
    },
    "content": "IS 13983: 1994 Stainless Steelsinks For Domestic Purposes\nc) with single tap hole of 35 + 2 mm diameter for high outlet mixer tap.The centres of tap holes\nshall be more than 60 mm from the nearest back edge of the bowl and not less than 50 mm to the\nfront face of the upstand.\n5.5 Overflows— Sinks shall be provided in either of\nthe following conditions :\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 13983 : 1994 Specification for stainless steel sinks for domestic purposes.\na) Without an overflow hole;\nb) With an overflow hole having a horizontal dimension not less than 64 mm, and a verti cal\nheight not less then 15 mm giving an area of not less than 6430 mm , and located\ncompletely below the spillover level of the sink.\n6. Finish —Sinks maybe supplied with a bright or dull\nfinish. °\n°\n°\n1.\nScope — Requirements for the panels of glass fibre reinforced polyesrter resin (GRP) sectional tanks\nmeant for storing potable water under pressure not exceeding the static head correspondinbg to the depth\nof the tanks and temperature of exceeding 50°C.\nGRP panels used in manufacturing tanks as covered in this standard are not compression moulded, using\nsheet moulding compound (SMC).\n2.\nMaterials — Shall be composed of unsaturated thermosetting polyester resin (food grade) reinforced\nwith glassfibre. This system will include satalysts and may include pigments (compatible with unsaturated\npolyester resin) and ultra violet stabilizers.\n2.1\nPolyester Resin—Shall meet the following characrteristics:\na)\nSpecific gravity\n=\n1,13+0.01 at 27°C b)\nAcid value\n=\n16+4 mg. KOH/g, c)\nVolatile content\n=\n30 percent +3 percent, d)\nGel time at 25°C\n=\n20 to 30 minutes.\nCured resin shall also be met with:\na)\nBarcol hardness\n=\n40 BHU min;\nb)\nHeat deflection temperature\n=\n80°C to 90°C c)\nElongation at break\n= 1.9 percent,-0+ 25°C d)\nWater absorption\n=\n1 percent,after 7 day sat 25°C max.\n2.1.1 Hydrolysis Test — There shall be no evidence of weight loss (due to break down of the polymer) when\ntasted as prescribed.\n2.2 Glass Fibre Reinforcements — Shall be of\ncommercial grade E type and shall conform to the prescribed standards.\n2.3 Fillers —Inert inorganic filers (with particle size\nbelow 0.05 mm) shall only be used, if required.\n2.4 Additives may be incorporated for modifying the\npropertie to the resin.\n2.5 Colour —Colour of the panel shall be a shade of\ngrey or cream. Any other colour (pastel shade0 may be used."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 407: 1981",
    "title": "Brass Tubes Forgeneral Purposes",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "(Third revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "tubes",
      "drawn",
      "copper",
      "dhp",
      "dpa",
      "half",
      "tube"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Chemical Composition": "Shall comply with relevant grade of copper as specified in IS 191 (Parts 1 to 10):1980* 7. Physical Properties 7.1 Tensile test TENSILE STRENGTH AND CONSTANT FOR HYDROSTATICTEST .K Condition Tensile Percentage K Strength, Elongation on MPa Gauge Lenght 5.65 So Min Min (1) (2) (3) (4) As drawn(HD) — — 113 i) As such 280 — — ii) Strip cut from tube 250 — — Half Hard (HB) — — 99 i) As such 235 25 — ii) Strip cut from tube 225 25 — Annealed(O) — — 85 i) As such 205 40 — ii) Strip cut — — — from tube 195 45 — The tubes shall also satisfy the following prescribed tests. 7.2 Flattening and Doubling Over test 7.3 Drift Expanding Test 7.4 Non-Destructive testing: a) Eddy-current test b) Hydrostatic test c) Pneumatic test 7.5 Microscopic Examination (for 0 conditononly) 7.6 Hydrogen Embrittlement te"
    },
    "content": "IS 407: 1981 Brass Tubes Forgeneral Purposes\n(Third revision) 6.3 Flattening (for tubes not exceeding 100 mm\nOutside Diameter) — Test piece shall not crack.\n6.4 Double Bend Test (for Round Tubes over 100 mm\nOutside Diameter — Test piece shall not crack on the outside of either bend. For detailed information, refer to IS 407: 1981. Specification for brass tubes for general purposes\n(third revision).\n6.5 Mercurous Nitrate Test —As drawn and stress\nrelievd (after the final draw) tubes shall withstand the prescribed test without showing any sign of cracking. 1. Scope\n1.1 Requirements of solid drawn (seamless)copper\ntubes for general engineering purposes.\n2. Grades\n2.1 Types— Cu-ETP, Cu-DHP, Cu-FRTP, Cu-DPA, Cu-ATP.\n3. Supply Condition:\na) As Drawn (HD)—Tubes in half hard condition produced by cold drawing.\nb) Half Hard (HB) — Tubes in half hard condition produced by cold drawing.\nc) Annealed (O)\n4. Freedom from Defects\n4.1 Shall be reasonable clean,smooth and free from\ncracks, seams, silver, scales and other defects detrimental to the intended applcations.\n5. Dimension and Tolerances\n5.1 Dimensions — Shall be designated by the ourside\ndiameter and the wall thickness. See IS 5493 :1981 for rationalised sizes.\n5.2 Tolerances — As per IS 5493:1981.No tolerance on\novality shall be specfied for tubes if wall thickness up to and including 0.4 mm.\n6. Chemical Composition— Shall comply with\nrelevant grade of copper as specified in IS 191 (Parts 1 to 10):1980*\n7. Physical Properties\n7.1 Tensile test\nTENSILE STRENGTH AND CONSTANT FOR\nHYDROSTATICTEST .K\nCondition\nTensile\nPercentage\nK Strength,\nElongation on MPa Gauge Lenght 5.65\nSo Min Min\n(1)\n(2) (3) (4)\nAs drawn(HD)\n—\n—\n113 i) As such\n280\n—\n—\nii) Strip cut from tube\n250\n—\n—\nHalf Hard (HB)\n—\n—\n99 i) As such 235\n25\n—\nii) Strip cut from tube\n225\n25\n— Annealed(O)\n—\n—\n85 i) As such\n205\n40\n—\nii) Strip cut\n—\n—\n— from tube\n195\n45\n—\nThe tubes shall also satisfy the following prescribed tests.\n7.2 Flattening and Doubling Over test\n7.3 Drift Expanding Test\n7.4 Non-Destructive testing:\na) Eddy-current test b) Hydrostatic test\nc) Pneumatic test\n7.5 Microscopic Examination (for 0 conditononly)\n7.6 Hydrogen Embrittlement test (for Cu-DHP and Cu-\nDPA Grades). For detailed information, refer to IS 2501: 1995 Specification for solid drawn copper tubes for general engineering purposes. (third revision).\n++ Dimensions for wrought copper and copper alloy tubes (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2501: 1995",
    "title": "Solid Drawn Copper Tubes For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "(Third Revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "gutters",
      "rainwater",
      "accessories",
      "fittings",
      "half",
      "round",
      "appendix"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 2501: 1995 Solid Drawn Copper Tubes For General Engineering Purposes\n(Third Revision) 1. Scope\n1.1 Requirements for cast iron rainwater pipes, half-\nround gutters, their fittings and accessories.\n1.2 The requirements of O.G. gutters and fittings are\ncovered in Appendix A of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1230: 1979",
    "title": "Cast Iron Rainwater Pipes And Fittings",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "(Second Revision) Note 1 — For dimens of bends, shoes, branches, offsets, union sockets, holderbats, rainwater heads, refer to the standard. Note 2 — For test details, refer to the standard and IS 1500:1983 Methods for brinell hardness test for mettallic materials (second revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 1230 : 1979 Specification for cast iron rainwater pipes and fittings (second revision). Note — Unless otherwise specified, pipes and fittings shall be supplied without ears. For ",
    "keywords": [
      "pipes",
      "centrifugally",
      "spigot",
      "socket",
      "cast",
      "bead",
      "hydrostatic"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "General": "round Gutters and Fittings: Nominal size, mm 75 100 125 150 Width, mm 75 100 125 150 Radius, mm 40 50 65 75 Thickness, mm 3 3 3 3 Length of gutters : +13.0 mm Length of gutter fittings : + 3.0 mm Mass : 10 percent",
      "Freedom From Defects": "Pipes and fittings shall be sound and free from surface and other defects. 4. Tests 4.1 Brinell Hardness Test — The hardness of external unmachined surface shall not exceed 230 HB. 4.2 Hydrostatic Test — Shall withstand pressure test without showing any leakage, sweating or other defect of any kind. 4.3 Hammer Test— When tested for soundness pipe shall emit a clear ringing sound. 2. Dimensions and Mass 2.1 Pipes and Fittings Length, mm 1800 1800 1800 1800 Minimum weight for 1800 mm length, kg. 5 5.9 7.5 9.1 Nominal Size, mm 50 75 100 125 150 External dia, mm 53 79 104 130 156 Thickness, 3 3 3 3 4 Pipes Projection of spigot bead, mm 1 1 1 1 1 Width of spigot bead, mm 20 20 20 20 20 Length of Width of spigot bead, mm 1 800 1 800 1 800 1 800 1 800 Internal dia, mm 63 89 114 139 167 Thickness,",
      "Hydrostatic Test": "Hydrostatic testpressure for Centrifugally Cast Socket and Spigot Pipes Class Hydrostatic Test Pressure atWorks,MPa Upto 600 DN* Above 600 DN* (1) (2) (3) LA 3.5 1.5 A 3.5 2.0 B 3.5 2.5 Note— *DN : Nominal diameter. Hydrostatic Test Pressure for Centrifugally Cast Screwed on flanges Class Hydrostatic Test pressure at Works,MPa Upto 300 DN* 350 to 600 DN* (1) (2) (3) B 2.5 1.6 Note— *DN : Nominal Diameter. 5. Sizes and Mass 5.1 Nominal Diameter 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, 750, 800, 850, 900, 1000 and 1050 mm. 5.2 Working Length a) Socket and spigot pipes — 3.0, 3.5, 3.66, 4, 4.5 5, 5.5, and 6.0 m. b) Flanged pipes—2.75, 3, 4, 4.5, 5 , 5.25 and 5.5 m. Note — For dimensions of sockets spigots and flanges etc and for mass refer to the standard"
    },
    "content": "IS 1230: 1979 Cast Iron Rainwater Pipes And Fittings\n(Second Revision)\nNote 1 — For dimens of bends, shoes, branches, offsets, union sockets, holderbats, rainwater heads, refer to the standard.\nNote 2 — For test details, refer to the standard and IS 1500:1983 Methods for brinell hardness test for mettallic materials (second\nrevision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1230 : 1979 Specification for cast iron rainwater pipes and fittings (second revision).\nNote — Unless otherwise specified, pipes and fittings shall\nbe supplied without ears. For details refer to the standard.\n2.1.1. Tolerances\nExternal dia of barrel\n: ± 3 mm for 50 and 75 mm pipes\n± 3.5 mm for 100 and\n125 mm pipes\n± 4 mm for 150 mm pipes\nInternal dia of socket\n: ±3mm\nDepth of socket\n: ±10m\nThickness\n: ±1mm\nThickness of guttersfittings : – 1.0 mm\nLength of pipe\n: ±13.0 mm\nLength of fittings\n: ± 3 mm\nMass\n: -10 percent\n2.2.\nHalf-round Gutters and Fittings:\nNominal size, mm\n75\n100\n125\n150\nWidth, mm\n75\n100\n125\n150\nRadius, mm\n40\n50\n65\n75\nThickness, mm\n3\n3\n3\n3\nLength of gutters\n: +13.0 mm\nLength of gutter fittings\n: + 3.0 mm\nMass\n: 10 percent\n3. Freedom from Defects — Pipes and fittings\nshall be sound and free from surface and other defects.\n4. Tests\n4.1 Brinell Hardness Test — The hardness of external\nunmachined surface shall not exceed 230 HB.\n4.2 Hydrostatic Test — Shall withstand pressure test\nwithout showing any leakage, sweating or other defect of any kind.\n4.3 Hammer Test— When tested for soundness pipe\nshall emit a clear ringing sound.\n2. Dimensions and Mass\n2.1 Pipes and Fittings\nLength, mm\n1800 1800 1800 1800\nMinimum weight for 1800 mm\nlength, kg. 5 5.9 7.5 9.1\nNominal Size, mm 50\n75\n100\n125\n150\nExternal dia, mm 53\n79\n104\n130\n156\nThickness, 3\n3\n3\n3\n4 Pipes\nProjection of spigot bead, mm 1\n1\n1\n1\n1\nWidth of spigot bead, mm 20\n20\n20\n20\n20 Length of Width of spigot bead, mm 1 800 1 800\n1 800\n1 800\n1 800\nInternal dia, mm 63\n89\n114\n139\n167\nThickness, Min, mm 4\n4\n4\n4\n4 Sockets Internal depth, mm 60\n65\n65\n75\n75\nThickness of beads, mm 7\n7\n7\n9\n9 Mass\nNominal mass of 1800 mm pipe 7.5\n11\n14\n20\n26 without ears, kg. 1. Scope\n1.1 Requirements for centrifugally cast (spun iron pipes\nfor pressure main lines for water,gas and sewage, maufactured in metal (lined or unlined) or sand lined\nmoulds.\n1.2 This standard is applicable to cast iron pipes having\nsocket/spigot (both lead caulked or push on flexible) or flanges as specified in this standard. On casr of push-\non joints the inner profile of socket end and spigot end of the pipe shall depend on the type of rubber gasket\nensuring that the overall dimensions aremaintained for reasons of safety and interchangeabillty.\n2.\nClassification\n2.1\nClassified as LA and B acccording to their thicknessess. Class LA pipes have been taken as the basis\nfor envolving the series of pipes. Class a allows a 10 percent increase in thickness over class LA. Class B\nallows a 20 percent increases in thickness over Class LA\n2.2\nFor special uses, Classes, C, D or E may be derived after allowing corresponding increases of\nthinckness of 30, 40 or 50 percent respectively.\n3. Mechanical tests:\na)\nRing Test (for pipes centrifugally cast in metal moulds) Nominal Diameter Modulus of\nRuputure,\nMin MPa\nUpto and including 300 mm 390 b) Tensile Test for pipes over 300 mm\nType of\nNominal\nTensile\nMoulding\nDiameter\nStrength\nMin,MPa i) For pipes centrifugally Over 300 mm cast in metal moulds and up to and\nincluding 600 mm 200 over 600 mm 180 ii) For pipes centrifugally All diameters 180 cast in sand linedmoulds.\nc) Brinell Hardness—\nshall not exceed\n230\n4. HydrostaticTest —Hydrostatic testpressure\nfor Centrifugally Cast Socket and Spigot Pipes Class Hydrostatic Test Pressure atWorks,MPa\nUpto 600 DN*\nAbove 600 DN* (1) (2)\n(3) LA 3.5\n1.5 A 3.5\n2.0 B 3.5\n2.5\nNote— *DN : Nominal diameter.\nHydrostatic Test Pressure for\nCentrifugally\nCast Screwed on flanges Class Hydrostatic Test pressure at Works,MPa\nUpto 300 DN*\n350 to 600 DN* (1)\n(2) (3) B\n2.5 1.6\nNote— *DN : Nominal Diameter.\n5. Sizes and Mass\n5.1 Nominal Diameter 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300,\n350, 400, 450, 450, 500, 550, 600, 650, 700, 750, 800, 850,\n900, 1000 and 1050 mm.\n5.2 Working Length\na) Socket and spigot pipes — 3.0, 3.5, 3.66, 4, 4.5 5,\n5.5, and 6.0 m.\nb) Flanged pipes—2.75, 3, 4, 4.5, 5 , 5.25 and 5.5 m.\nNote — For dimensions of sockets spigots and flanges etc\nand for mass refer to the standard.\n6. Tolerances\n6.1 Tolerances on barrel diameter and socket\ndimensions (lead joint) (refer to Table below) and Fig.\nof the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1536: 2001",
    "title": "Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "(Fourth Revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "pipes",
      "socket",
      "flanged",
      "spigot",
      "tolerance",
      "sewage",
      "flanges"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Mass": "Density of cast iron is taken as 7.15 kg/ dm3. 4.1 Tolerance on standard mass 5 percent."
    },
    "content": "IS 1536: 2001 Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage\n(Fourth Revision) 6.2 Tolerance on ovality (push-on-joint). Nominal diameter Allowable Difference DN Between Mionor Axis and DE, Min mm 80 - 300\n1.0\n350 - 600\n1.75 700\n2.00\n750 - 800\n2.4\n900 -1050\n3.5\nNote— For tolerance on barrel diameter and socket\ndimensions for push-on - joint refer to the standard.\n6.3 Tolerance on Thickness Dimensions Tolerance in mm a) Wall thickness -- (1+0.05 e) b) Flange thickness ±(2+0.05\nWhere e is the thickness of the wall in mm and b is the thickness of the flange in mm.\n6.4 Tolerance on Length:\nTyping of Casting\nTolerance in mm a) Socket and spigot\n± 100 and plain ended pipes.\nb) Flanged pipes\n± 10\n6.5 Deviation from a Stright Line — The maxmimum\ndeviation from a straight line in mm shall not be greater than 1.25 times the length L in meters of standard.\n6.6 Tolerance on Dimensions of Flanges — See 11.6\nof the standard.\n6.7 Tolerance on Mass — ± 5 percent.\n7. Coating\n7.1 All pipes shall be coated externally and internally\nwith the same material by dip ping in a tar or suitable base bath. The pipes may be either preheated before\ndipping or the bath may be uniformly heated. The coating material shall set rapidly with good adherance\nand shall not scale. Dimensions\nNominal Diameter\nTolerances DN mm a)\nExternal diameter of barrel (DE)\nAll diameters\n± f= ±(4.5+0.0015 DN) b)\nInternal diameter of socket (DI) All diameters\n± 3\n1 f = ±(3+0.001 DN) c ) Depth of socket (P)\nUp to and including ± 5\nDN 600\nOver DN 600 upto ±10 and including 1050 Note — “f” is the caulking sace of the joint in mm and us equal to (9+0.003 DN).\nNote— For methods of test refer to the standard and IS 1500 : 1983 Method for Brinell hardness test for smetallic materials\n(second revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1536 : 1989 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun)\niron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (third revision).\n2\n1 1. Scope\n1.1 Requriements for cast iron pipes for pressure main\nlines of water gas and sewage manufactured by vertical casing in sand moulds.\n1.2 Applicable to pipes with sockets (for lead joints) or\nflanges. Standard may also be made applicable to other types of joints specially rubber joints, where overall\nmeasuements shall be adhered to, to ensure interchangeability.\n2. Requirements\n2.1 Hardness — shall not exveed 210 HB.\n2.2 Tensile Strength— shall not be lower than 15 kgf/\nmm2\n2.3 Hydrostatic Test — Pipes shall with stand following\ntest pressures kgf/cm2.\nDiameter Socket and Flanged Pipe Spigot Pipes\nClass A Class B ClassA Class B\n1)\nUp to 300 mm 20\n25\n20\n25\n2)\nOver 300 and up to 600 mm 20\n25\n15\n20\n3)\nOver 600 and up to 1000 mm 15\n20\n10\n15\n4)\nOver 1000 and up to 1500 mm 10\n15\n10\n10\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1537 : 1976 Specification for vertically cast iron pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (first revision).\n3. Sizes\na) Working lenght of socket and spigot pipes 3.66,\n4, 4.88, 5 and 5.5 m.\nb) Working length of flanged pipes 2 to 3 m for 80 mm nominal diameter pipe and 2 to 4 m for others.\nc) Norminal diameter of socket and spigot pipes and flanged pipes 80, 100,125, 150, 200, 250, 300,\n350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 750, 800, 900,1 000, 1\n100, 1 200, 1 500.\nd) Tolerances\n1) Length (socket and spigot, and plain ended pipes)\n2) Length (flanged pipes) ± 10 mm.\n3) Maximum deviation from straight line shall not exceed (1.2 L) mm where l is length in meters.\nNote— For dimesions of sockets, spigots, flanges, etc, refer\nto the standard.\n4. Mass — Density of cast iron is taken as 7.15 kg/\ndm3.\n4.1 Tolerance on standard mass\n5 percent."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1537: 1976",
    "title": "Vertically Cast Iron Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "(First Revision) ±",
    "keywords": [
      "branches",
      "principal",
      "fittings",
      "including",
      "upto",
      "half",
      "over"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 1537: 1976 Vertically Cast Iron Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage\n(First Revision)\n± HYDROSTATIC TEST\nPRESSURE FOR FITTINGS Nominal Diameter\nTest Pressure\nFittings without\nFittings with Branches or with Branches Branches not\nGreater than Greater than Half the\nHalf the Principal\nPrincipal\nDiameter\nDiameter\nMPa (N/mm2)\nMPa (N/mm2)\nUp to and including 300\n2.5 (25)\n2.5 (25)\nOver 300 and upto\n2.0 (20)\n2.0 (20)\nand including 600\nOver 600 and upto\n1.5 (15)\n1.0 (10) and including 1500\n3.\nTolerances\n3.1 Diameter – 3.3 Length —\nType of Fitting\nNominal Dia\nTolerance mm Socket fittings and\nUpto and\n+ 20 flange and spigot\nincluding pieces\n450\nOver 450\n+ 20\n- 30 Flanged fittings\nAll diameters 10"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1538: 1993",
    "title": "Cast Iron Fittings For Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "(Third Revision) 1. Scope 1.1 General requirements for cast iron fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage. 1.2 Applicable to all cast iron fittings having spigots, sockets or flanges as specified in this standard and also to fittings with other type of joints, the general dimensions of which, except those relating to the joints, conform to this standard. 2. General Requirements 2.1 Material —The metal used for the manufacture of pipes shall be of a quality not less than that of the ",
    "keywords": [
      "branch",
      "diameter",
      "flanged",
      "nominal",
      "sockets",
      "fittings",
      "double"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Coating": "Where coating material has tar or similar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of 65°C but not so brittle at a temperature of 0°C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a pen knife. 6. Dimensions 6.1 Sockets and Spigots of Pipes (Lead Joints) Nominal Barrel Internal Diameter Diameter Dia of Socket (DN) (DE) (DI) (mm) (mm) (mm) 80 98 116 100 118 137 125 114 163 150 170 189 200 222 241 250 274 294 300 326 346 350 378 398 400 429 449 450 480 501 500 532 553 600 635 657 700 738 760 750 790 813 800 842 865 900 945 968 1000 1048 1072 1050 1124 1143 1100 1152 1177 1200 1256 1281 1500 1567 1594 Note — Intenal diameter of sockets (DI) given above is applicable to sockets of fittings (lead joint) also. 6.2 Flanges of pipes and fitting inc"
    },
    "content": "IS 1538: 1993 Cast Iron Fittings For Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage\n(Third Revision)\n1. Scope\n1.1 General requirements for cast iron fittings for\npressure pipes for water, gas and sewage.\n1.2 Applicable to all cast iron fittings having spigots,\nsockets or flanges as specified in this standard and also to fittings with other type of joints, the general\ndimensions of which, except those relating to the joints, conform to this standard.\n2. General Requirements\n2.1 Material —The metal used for the manufacture of\npipes shall be of a quality not less than that of the specified standard.\n2.2 Tensile Strength – minimum of 150 MPa (N/mm2).\n2.3 Brinell Hardness – Less than 210 HBS.\n2.4 Hydrostatic Test – Shall withstand the pressure\nshown below:\nDimension\nNature of Joint\nNominal Diameter\nTolerance (DN) mm External diameter of\nLead joints\nAll diameters 1/2 f or spigot (DE) (4.5+0.0015 DN) Internal diameter of\nLead joints\nAll diameters 1/3 f or socket (DI) (3+0.001 DN)\nUp to and including 600 5\nOver 600 up to and 10 Depth of socket (P)\nLead joints including 1000\nOver 1000 upto and 15 including 1500\nNote— ‘f’is the caulking space of the joint in mm (=9+0.003 DN).\n3.2 Thickness\nDimension\nTolerance, mm\nWall thickness - (2+0.05 e)\nFlange thickness + (3+0.05 b)\nwhere e =\nthe standard thickness of the wall in millimetres, and\nb = the standard thickness of the flange in\nmillimetres.\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n± 4. Mass\na)The masses have been calculated by taking the density of iron as 7.5 kg/ dm3\nb)The permissible tolerances on standard mass of fittings shall be 8 percent except for bends, fittings with more than one branch and non-\nstandard fittings, in which case the tolerance shall be 12 percent.\nNote— Standard masses shall conform to those given in\nTables 7 to 28 of the standard.\n5. Coating — Where coating material has tar or\nsimilar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of\n65°C but not so brittle at a temperature of 0°C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a pen knife.\n6. Dimensions\n6.1 Sockets and Spigots of Pipes (Lead Joints)\nNominal Barrel\nInternal\nDiameter Diameter\nDia of\nSocket (DN)\n(DE)\n(DI) (mm) (mm) (mm) 80 98\n116\n100\n118\n137\n125\n114\n163\n150\n170\n189\n200\n222\n241\n250\n274\n294\n300\n326\n346\n350\n378\n398\n400\n429\n449\n450\n480\n501\n500\n532\n553\n600\n635\n657\n700\n738\n760\n750\n790\n813\n800\n842\n865\n900\n945\n968\n1000\n1048\n1072\n1050\n1124\n1143\n1100\n1152\n1177\n1200\n1256\n1281\n1500\n1567\n1594\nNote — Intenal diameter of sockets (DI) given above is\napplicable to sockets of fittings (lead joint) also.\n6.2 Flanges of pipes and fitting including Raised\nFlanges\nNominal\nFlange\nDiameter\nDiameter (DN)\n(D)\n(mm)\n(mm) (1) (2)\n80\n200\n100\n220\n125\n250\n150\n285\n200\n340\n250\n395\n300\n445\n350\n505\n400\n565\n450\n615\n500\n670\n600\n780\n700\n895\n750\n960\n800\n1015\n900\n1115\n1000\n1230\n1050\n1258\n1100\n1340\n1200\n1455\n1500\n1800\n6.3 Flanged Sockets, Flanged Spigots, Collars,\nDouble Sockets – 1/4,1/8, 1/16 and 1/32 bends.\nNominal Diamter – 80, 100, 125, 150, 200,250, 300, 350,\n400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 750, 800, 900, 1 000, 1\n050, 1 100, 1 200, and 1 500 mm.\n6.4 All flanged tees— All sockets, all flanges.\nNominal\nNominal\nDiameter\nDiameter of Branch\n(DN)\n(dn)\nmm mm\n80\n80\n100\n80\n—\n100\n125\n80\n—\n100\n—\n125\n150\n80\n—\n100\n—\n125\n—\n150\n200\n80\n—\n100\n—\n125\n—\n150\n200\n250\n80\n—\n100\n—\n125\n—\n150\n—\n200\n—\n250\nNominal\nNominal\nDiameter\nDiameter of Branch\n(DN)\n(dn)\nmm mm\n300\n80\n—\n100\n—\n125\n—\n150\n—\n200\n—\n250\n—\n300\n350\n200\n250\n—\n300\n—\n350\n350\n400\n200\n250\n300\n350\n—\n400\n±\n± 6.6 All Crosses, All Sockets – Nominal Diameter—80,100, 125, 200, 250, and\n300 mm\n6.7 Double Scoket Tapers and Double flanged Tapers\nNominal\nNominal\nNominal\nNominal\nDiameter\nDiameter\nDiameter\nDiameter of Branch\nof Branch\n(DN)\n(dn)\n(DN)\n(dn)\nmm mm\nmm mm\n100\n80\n750\n600\n700\n125 80 800\n600\n100\n700\n750\n150 80 900\n700\n100\n750\n125\n800\n200 100\n1000\n800\n125\n900\n150\n250\n125\n1050\n800\n150\n1000 200\n900\n1000\n300\n150\n200 1100\n900\n250\n1000\n350 200 1200\n900\n250\n1000\n300\n1100\n1000\n400\n250\n1100\n300\n350\n1500\n1000\n1100\n450\n350*\n1200\n400\n300t\n1100\n350\n1200\n400\n500 350\n400\n450\n600 400\n450\n500\n700\n500\n6.8 Caps and Plugs\nNominal Diameter 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250,\n300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 750, 800, 900,\n1 000, 1 050, 1 100, 1 200 and 1 500 mm\nNominal\nNominal\nDiameter\nDiameter of Branch\n(DN)\n(dn)\nmm mm 450 250\n—\n300\n—\n350\n—\n400\n—\n450\n500\n250\n—\n300\n—\n350\n—\n400\n—\n450\n—\n500\n600\n300\n—\n350\n—\n400\n—\n450\n—\n500\n—\n600\n700\n350\n—\n400\n—\n450\n—\n500\n—\n600\n—\n700\n—\n750\n800\n400\n—\n450\n—\n500\n—\n600\n—\n700 —\n750\n—\n800 * For double socket + For double flanged. * * * Nominal Nominal\nDiameter Diameter of Branch\n(DN) (dn)\nmm mm\n900 450 — 500 — 600 — 700 — 800 — 900\n1000 500 — 600 — 700 — 750 — 800 — 900 — 1050 1100 600 — 700 — 750 — 800 — 900 — 1000 — 1100 1200 600 — 700 — 800 — 900 — 1000 — 1100 — 1200\n1500 750 — 800 — 900 — 1000 — 1100 — 1200 — 1500\n6.5 Double Scoket Tee with Flanged Branch— (for\nAir Valves and Hydrant Tees)\nNominal\nNominal\nDiameter\nDiameter of Branch\n(DN)\n(dn)\nmm mm 80\n80\n100 80\n125 80\n150\n80\n200\n80\n250 80\n300\n80\n300\n100 350 80\n350\n100\n400\n80\n400\n100\n450\n100 500 150\n600 150\n700 150\n750\n150\n800 200\n900\n200\nNominal Nominal\nDiameter Diameter of Branch (DN) (dn) mm mm 1000 200 1050 200 1100 250 1200 250 1500 250 — — — —\nt t\nt Note – For detailed dimensions and sketches refer to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1538 : 1993 Specification for cast Iron Fittings for pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (third revision).\n6.9 Bell Mouth Pieces\nNominal\nBig End\nDiameter (DN)\nDiameter (DI) mm mm\n80\n125\n100\n150\n125\n175\n150\n200\n200\n285\n250\n350\n300\n450\n350\n525\n400\n600\n450\n650\n500\n750\n600\n900\n700\n1050\n800\n1200\n900\n1350 1000\n1500 1050\n1550 1100\n1650 1200\n1800 1500\n2250\n6.10\nDouble flanged 1/4 and 1/8 Bends\nNominal diameter — 80, 100, 125, 150, 200,\n250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 750, 800,\n900, 1 000, 1 050, 1 100, 1 200 and 1 500 mm.\n6.11\nDouble flanged 1/4 Duckfoot Bends\nNominal Diameter — 80, 100, 125, 150, 200,\n250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 and 600 mm.\n6.12\nAll flanged Radial Tees\nNominal Diameters– 80, 100, 125, 150, 200,\n250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 750, 800,\n900 and 1000 mm.\n6.13\nBlank Flanges\nNominal Diameters – 80, 100, 125, 150, 200,\n250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 750, 800,\n900, 1 000, 1 050, 1 100, 1 200 and 1 500 mm. 1. Scope\n1.1 Requirements for sand cast iron spigot and socket\nsoil, waste and ventilating pipes together with details of fittings and accessories. These pipes and fittings are\naccessories. These pipes and fittings are sutiable for use above ground only.\n2. Requirements\n2.1 Shall be free from defects, other than any\nunavoidable surface imperfections and shall be such that they could be cut. Shall emit clear ringing sound\nwhen struck with light hand hammer.\n2.2 Shall emit clear ringing sound when struck with light\nhand hammer.\n2.3 Hydraulic Test— Pipes and fittings shall withstand\na hydrostatic pressure of 0.07 N/mm2 for minimum 15 seconds without showing any signs of leakage. These\ntests shall be carried out after an internal or external coating.\n2.4 Ears shall be provided only if specifically required.\nWhen provided, they shall have following projections:\n50 and 75 mm dia\n32 mm\n100 and 150 mm dia\n38 mm\n3. Dimensions (in mm)\n3.1 Straight Pipes and Scokets–\n50\n75\n100\n150\nPipe\nExternal diameter\n60\n85\n110\n160\nThickness 5\n5\n5\n5\nSocket\nInternal diameter\n76\n101\n129 181\nThickness\n6\n6\n6\n6\nNominal mass\n1500 mm length\n9.56\n13.86\n18.14\n26.70 of pipe(kg)\n1800 mm length\n11.41\n16.52\n21.67\n31.92 excluding ears\n2000 mm length\n12.65\n18.37\n24.15\n35.66"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2002: 1979",
    "title": "Sand Cast Iron Spigot And Socket Soil, Waste And Ventilating Pipes, Fittings And Accessories",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "(Second Revision) 3.2 Short Radius Bends with and without Access Doors Nominal Size θ (Bend) 50, 75,100,150, 92½°, 95°, 100°, 112½° ,120°, 135°, 100 104° 3.3 Large Radius Bends Nominal Size θ (Bend) 50, 75,100,150, 92½°,95°, 100°, 112½° ,120°, 135°, 3.4 Off Sets Nominal Size Projection 50,75,100,150 76, 114, 152, 229, and 305 { 3.5 Equal Branches with and without oval Access Doors Nominal θ (Bend) 50,75,100,150 92½°,95°, 100°, 12½° 100 120°, 135° ,104° 3.6 Unequal Branches with and without Oval ",
    "keywords": [
      "bends",
      "access",
      "nominal",
      "branches",
      "pipe",
      "dia",
      "size"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Weight": "Density of cast iron taken as 7.15 kg/dm3 Tolerance : 10 percent.",
      "Coating": "Where coating material has tar or similar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of 77°C but not so brittle at 0°C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a penknife. 3.8 Inverted Branches, Socket and SpigotType— Nominal Size θ Bend Main Pipe 50 100 100 950, 112½0 , 1800 Branch Pipe 50 100 50 3.9 Trap Nominal Size 50 75 100 150 3.10 Oval Access Doors Nominal Size 50 75 100 150 3.11 Diminishing Pieces Large Diameter 50 75 100 100 3.12 Straight Inspection Pieces Nominal Size 50 75 100 150 3.13 Loose Sockets and Collars Nominal Size 50 75 100 150 3.14 Cast Iron Holderbats Nominal Size 50 75 100 150 3.15 Ware Balloons Galvanished Steel or Copper Nominal Size 50 75 100 150 3.16 Sanitary connection 3.16.1 Socket to Fit WC Outlet Nominal "
    },
    "content": "IS 2002: 1979 Sand Cast Iron Spigot And Socket Soil, Waste And Ventilating Pipes, Fittings And Accessories\n(Second Revision)\n3.2 Short Radius Bends with and without Access Doors Nominal Size θ (Bend) 50, 75,100,150, 92½°, 95°, 100°, 112½° ,120°, 135°, 100 104°\n3.3 Large Radius Bends\nNominal Size θ (Bend)\n50, 75,100,150, 92½°,95°, 100°, 112½° ,120°, 135°,\n3.4 Off Sets\nNominal Size\nProjection\n50,75,100,150 76, 114, 152, 229, and 305\n{\n3.5\nEqual Branches with and without oval Access\nDoors Nominal θ (Bend)\n50,75,100,150 92½°,95°, 100°, 12½°\n100 120°, 135° ,104°\n3.6\nUnequal Branches with and without Oval\nAccces Doors Nominal (Bend)\nMain pipe 50,75,100,150 92½°, 95°, 100°,\nBranch pipe 50, 50,75, 100 112½°,120°, 135°\n3.7\nParallel Branches, Singles, Equal and\nUnequal\n—\nMain Pipe\nBranch Pipe 100 100 100 50\n{\n{\n{\n{\n{\n{\n{ 3.17\nBossed Pipes and Connections for One Pipe\nSystems.\nNominal size of basin and bath connector (single and double) = 100 mm\nNote — For dimensions of rectangular access doors (for\nstraight pipes and large radius bends, roof outlet square grating, circular grating, “D” grating, bent), straight inspection pieces\nwith rectangular access door, vent pipe, roof connectors , floor trap, floor trap (Nahani), 90 and 100 mm WC\nconnectors with anti-syphon socket, refer to the standard.\n4. Tolerances\nWall thickness\n1.0 mm\nExternal dia of barrel\n3 mm for 50 and 75 mm dia\n3.5 mm for 100 mm dia\n4 mm for 150 mm dia\nInternal dia of socket\n3 mm for all dia\nDepth of socket\n10 mm for all dia\nLength\n20 mm for pipes and\n10 mm for fittings\n5. Weigth — Density of cast iron taken as 7.15\nkg/dm3 Tolerance : 10 percent.\n6. Coating — Where coating material has tar or similar\nbase, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of 77°C but\nnot so brittle at 0°C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a penknife.\n3.8\nInverted Branches, Socket and SpigotType— Nominal Size θ Bend\nMain Pipe 50 100 100\n950, 112½0 , 1800\nBranch Pipe 50 100 50\n3.9\nTrap\nNominal Size\n50\n75\n100 150\n3.10\nOval Access Doors\nNominal Size\n50\n75\n100 150\n3.11\nDiminishing Pieces\nLarge Diameter\n50\n75\n100 100\n3.12\nStraight Inspection Pieces\nNominal Size\n50\n75\n100 150\n3.13\nLoose Sockets and Collars\nNominal Size\n50\n75\n100 150\n3.14\nCast Iron Holderbats\nNominal Size\n50\n75\n100 150\n3.15 Ware Balloons Galvanished Steel or Copper\nNominal Size\n50\n75\n100 150\n3.16 Sanitary connection\n3.16.1 Socket to Fit WC Outlet\nNominal Size Dimension—\n100 Pipe — Internal dia, Min\n100 Socket— Internal dia, Min\n150\n3.16.2 S and P Branches and Bends— Nominal Size\n100\n3.16.3 Bends Nominal Size\n100\n3.16.4 Short Connection Pipe\nNominal Size\nLength 100\n150, 225, 450, 600\nFor detailed information refer to IS 1729:2002. Specification for sand cast iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories (first revision).\n{\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n± 1. Topic\n1.1 Requirements for following types of malleablecast\niron pipe fittings threaded in accordance with IS 554:1985 for general purposes for the transmission of fluid and\ngas upto the limit of pressure and temperature specified in 1.3 :\na) Elbows including twin elbows, union elbows and side outlet elbows,\nb) Tees including pitcher tees and side outlet tees, c) Crosses,\nd) Bends including long sweep bends and return bends,\ne) Sockets, f)\nBushing and hexagon nipples, g) Backnuts,\nh) Caps and plugs, and j)\nUnions\n1.2 Dimensions which are not included in the standard\nare left to the discretion of the manufacturer depending on the end use of the fittings.\n1.3 These fittings shall be suitable for working pressure\nof up to 1.4 MPa in the case of water and up to 0.7 MPa in the case of steam, air, gas and oil at a temperature not\nexceeding 100°C.\nNote—Relationship between nominal size (in inch) of the\nthread at the outlet of the fitting and the corresponding nominal diameter DN in mm is given in Appendix A of the\nstandard.\n2.\nDesignation\n2.1 Malleable cast iron fittings shall be designated\ngiving the following particulars in the sequence shown:\na)\nType of fitting b)\nSize designation c)\nRight and left-hand thread where applicable, d)\nCode number\n3. Material\n3.1 Shall conform to— IS 14329:1995+ 4. Galvanising\n4.1 Shall be galvanised to meet the standard.\n5. Threads\n5.1 Outlets of fittings shall be threaded to dimensions\nand tolerances as per the prescribed standard.\n6. Dimensions\n6.1 Wall Thickness ad Reinforcement Shall be as\nFollows:\nSize Wall-Thickness Reinforcement\nDesignation Basic size\nTolerance *\nProjection width\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\nm m m m\nm m m m\nm m\n1/8\n2.0 -0.5\n1.0\n3.0\n1/4\n2.5\n-0.5\n1.3\n3.6\n3/8\n2.5 -0.5\n1.3\n4.0\n1/2\n2.5 -0.5\n1.5\n4.6\n3/4\n3.0\n-0.7\n1.5\n4.6\n1\n3.0\n-0.7\n1.8\n5.1\n1¼\n3.5\n-0.7\n1.8\n5.1\n1½\n3.5\n-0.7\n2.0\n5.6\n2\n4.0\n-0.7\n2.3\n6.1\n2½\n4.5\n-1.0\n2.5\n6.1\n3\n5.0\n-1.0\n2.8\n6.1\n4\n6.0\n-1.0\n3.3\n7.1\n5\n6.5\n-1.0\n4.0\n8.1\n6\n7.5\n-1.0\n4.6\n8.9\n* No limit for plus tolerance.\n6.2 Tolerances on Dimensions— Where maximum and\nminimum dimensions are not specified shall be as follows:"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1879: 1987",
    "title": "Malleable Cast Iron Pipe Fittings",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for centrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes together with the details of the fittings and accessories. These pipes and fittings are suitable for use above ground only.",
    "keywords": [
      "reducing",
      "male",
      "female",
      "elbows",
      "designation",
      "sweep",
      "seat"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Compression Test": "Shall satisfy the prescribed test. For detailed information, refer to IS 1879 : 1987 Specification for malleable cast iron pipe fittings (second revision).",
      "Scope": "Requirements for centrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes together with the details of the fittings and accessories. These pipes and fittings are suitable for use above ground only. 2. General Requirements 2.1 Shall be capable of being cut with the tools normally used for installation. 3. Tests 3.1 Hardness — not greater than 230 HBS. 3.2 Soundness — When tested for soundness by striking with a light hand hammer, shall emit a clear ringing sound. 3.3 Hydrostatic Test— When hydrostatically tested at a pressure of 0.07 MPa (N/mm2) for 15 seconds the pipes and fittings shall not show any sign of leakage, sweating or other defects of any kind. The test shall be conducted after surface coating.",
      "Sizes": "Nominal Diameter DN, of pipes and fittings are 50, 75, 100 and 150. 4.1 Socket and Spigot Pipes Nominal Diameter 50 75 100 150 Barrel Ext. Dia 57 83 109 161 Internal Dia. of Socket73 99 126 179 Joint thickness 8 8 8.5 9 Length of pipes 1,000 1,500 1,800 2,000 2,500 3,000 4.2 Bends With and Without Access Doors Nominal Dia Angle of Bend 50 75 100 92½°, 112½° and 135°. 150 4.3 Equal and Unequal Branches With and Without Access door a) Equal Branch Angle θ Nominal Dia 50 75 100 92½°, 112½° and 135°. 150 b) Unequal Branches Nominal Dia Angle Body Branch 75 50 100 50 100 75 92½°, 112½° and 135°. 150 100 4.4 Nominal Dia Offsets 50 75 100 75, 115 and 150. 150 4.5 Taper Nominal Diameter Spigot Socket DN dn 75 50 100 50 100 75 150 100 4.6 Access Door — See Table 8 of the Standard. 4.7 Collars Nomin"
    },
    "content": "IS 1879: 1987 Malleable Cast Iron Pipe Fittings\n(Second Revision)\n+ Malleable Iron Castings Designations Upto and\nTolerances\nAbove\nIncluding\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\nmm mm\nmm\n—\n30\n+1.5\n30\n50\n+ 2.0\n50\n75\n± 2.5\n75\n100\n+ 3.0\n100\n150\n+ 3.5\n150\n200\n+ 4.0\n200\n—\n+ 5.0\n6.3 Size Designation of Elbows, Reducing A1, and\nMale and Female Elbows, Reducing A4.\na)Elbows, reducing A1— 3/8 × 1/4, 1/2 × 3/8, 3/\n4 × 3/8, 3/4 × 1/2, 1 × 1/2, 1 × 3/4, 1¼ × ½, 1¼\n× 3/4, 1¼×1,1½ × ½, 1½ × 3/4, 1½ × 1, 1½\n× 1¼, 2 × ½, 2 × 3/4, 2 × 1, 2 × 1¼, 2 × 1½ and 2½\n× 2. b) Male and female elbows, reducing A4 — ½ × 3/8, 3/4 × ½, 1 × 3/4 and 1¼ x 1.\n6.4 Size Designation of 45° Elbows A1/45° and 45°\nMale and Female Elbows A4/45°\n3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1¼, 1½ and 2.\n6.5 Size Designation of Twin Elbows E2\n3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1¼, 1½ and 2.\n6.6 Size Designation of Elbows, Reducing E2\n3/4 × ½ × ½, 1 × ½ × ½, 1 × 3/4 × 3/4, 1¼ × 3/4 × 3/4, 1¼\n× 1 × 1, 1½ × 1 × 1, 1½ × 1¼ × 1¼, 2 × 1¼ × 1¼ and 2 × 1½\n× 1½.\n6.7 Size Designation of Union Elbows, Flat Seat UA1;\nMale and Female Union Elbows, Flat Seat UA2; Union\nElbows, Taper Seat UA11; and Male and Female Union\nElbows, Taper Seat UA12—\nSize Designation\nUA1\nUA2\nUA11\nUA12\n—\n—\n¼\n¼\n*\n*\n*\n*\n½\n½\n½\n½\n¾\n¾\n¾\n¾\n1\n1\n1\n1\n1¼\n1¼\n1¼\n1¼\n1½\n1½\n1½\n1½\n2\n2\n2\n2\n6.8 Size Designation of Tees B1 and Side Outlet Tees,\nZa2—\nTees B1— 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1¼, 1½, 2, 2½, 3,\n3½, 4, 5 and 6.\nSide Outlet Tees, Za2 — 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1¼, 1½\n6.9 Size Designation of Tees – Reducing or Increasing\non the Branch B1–\n3/8×1/4×3/8\n1×3/8×1\n1½×2×1½\n3/8×1/2×3/8\n1×1/2×1\n2×½×2\n1/2×1/4×1/2\n1×3/4×1\n2×¾×2\n1/2×3/8×1/2\n1×1¼×1\n2×1×2\n1/2×3/4×1/2\n1×1½×1\n2×1¼×2\n1/2×1×1/2\n1¼×3/8×1¼\n2×1½×2\n3/4×1/4×3/4\n1¼×½×1¼\n2½×1×2½\n3/4×3/8×3/4\n1¼×3/4×1¼\n2½×1¼×2½\n3/4×1/2×3/4\n1¼×1×1¼\n2½×1½×2½\n3/4×1×3/4\n1¼×1½×1¼\n2½×2×2½\n3/4×1¼×3/4\n1¼×2×1¼\n3×3/4×3\n1×1¼×1\n1½×½×1½\n3×1×3\n1½×3/4×1½\n3×1¼×3\n1½×1×1½\n3×1½×3\n1½×1¼×1½\n3×2×3\n3×2½×3\n4×2×4\n4×3×4\n6.10 Size Designation of Tees —\nReducing on the Run, Reducing Equal to or Increasing on the Branch B1 —\n1/2×3/8×3/8\n1×3/8×3/4\n1¼×½×1\n1½×½×1¼\n2×1½x1½\n1/2×1/2×1/2 1¼×¾×¾\n1¼×1×1¼\n1½×¾×1¾\n2×2×¾\n1×1/2×3/4\n1¼×¾×1\n1½×1¼×¾\n2×2×1\n3/4×3/8×3/8\n1×3/4×3/8\n1¼×1×½\n1½×1¼×1\n2×2×1¼\n3/4×3/8×1/2\n1×3/4×1/2\n1¼×1×¾\n1½×1¼×1¼\n2×2×1½\n3/4×1/2×3/8\n1×3/4×3/4\n1¼×1×1\n1½×1½×½\n3/4×1/2×1/2\n1×1×3/8\n1¼×1¼×½\n1½×1½×¾\n3/4×3/4×3/8\n1×1×1/2\n1¼×1¼×¾\n1½×1½×1\n3/4×3/4×1/2\n1×1×3/4\n1¼×1¼×1\n1½×1½×1¼\n3/4×1×1/2\n1×1¼×3/4\n1¼×1½×1\n1½×¾×1¼\n2×¾×1½\n2×1×1½\n2×1¼×1¼\n2×1¼×1½\n2×1½×1¼ 6.11 Size Designation of Pitcher Teees E1\n3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1¼, 1½ and 2.\n6.12\nSize Designation of Pitcher Tees\nReducing on the Branch, Reducing the Run, and Reducing on Branch and Run E1.\n¾×½×½\n1¼×½×1¼\n1½×¾×1½\n2×1×2\n2×1¼×2\n¾×½×¾\n1¼×¾×1\n1½×1×1¼\n2×1¼×1½\n2×1½×1¼\n¾×¾×½\n1¼×¾ ×1¼\n1½×1×1½\n2×1½×1½\n1×½×¾\n1¼×1×¾\n1½×1¼×1\n2×1½×2\n1×½×1\n1¼×1×1\n1½×1¼×1¼\n1×¾×½\n1¼×1×1¼\n1½×1¼×1½\n1×¾×¾\n1¼×1¼×1\n1×¾×1\n1×1×¾\n6.13\nSize Designation of Crosses C1\n1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1¼, 1½, 2, 2½, 3 and 4.\n6.14\nSize Designation of Crosses — Reducing C1. 3/8× ½× ×3/8\n1¼×½×1¼×½\n1/4×3/8×¾×3/8\n1¼×¾×1¼×¾\n3/8×1×3/8\n1¼×1×1¼×1\n1×½×1×½\n1½×¾×1½×¾\n1×½×1×½\n1½×1×1½×1\n1×¾×1×¾\n1½×1¼×1½×1¼\n2×1×2×1\n2×1¼×2×1¼\n2×1½×2×1½\n6.15\nSize Designation of Bends D1 and Male and\nFemale Bends D4\n¼, 3/8, ½, ¾, 1¼, 1½ and 2.\n6.16\nSize Designation of Long Sweep Bends G1, Male and Female Long Sweep Bends G4, and Male Long\nSweep Bends G8.\na) Long sweep bends G1, and male and female long sweep bends G4\n1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1¼, 1½, 2, 2½, 3, 3½ and 4.\nb) Male long sweep bend G8:\n3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1¼, 1½ and 2.\n6.17\nSize Designation of 45° Long Sweeep Bends G1/\n45° and Male and Female Long Sweep Bends G4/45°:\n¼, 3/8, ½, ¾, 1, 1¼, 1½, 2, 2½ and 3.\n6.18\nSize designation of Return Bends Kb1 :\n½, ¾, 1, 1¼, 1½ and 2.\n6.19\nSize Designation of Sockets M2; Sockets, Right and Left Hand Thread M2R-L; Sockets, Reducing M2;\nand Eccentric Sockets, Reducing M3:\na) Sockets M2 — 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1¼,\n1½, 2, 2½, 3, 3½, 4,5 and 6.\nb) Sockets, right and left hand thread M2R-L:\n1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1,\n1¼, 1½, 2, 2½ and 3.\nc) Sockets, reducing M2 :\n1/4 × 1/8, 3/8 × 1/8,\n3/8 × 1/4, 1/2 × 1/4,\n1/2 × 3/8, 3/4 × 1/4,\n3/4 × 3/8, 3/4 × 1/2,\n1 × 3/8, 1 × 1/2, 1 × 3/4,\n1¼ × 3/8, 1¼ × 1/2,\n1¼ × 3/4, 1¼ × 1,\n1½ × ½, 1½ × ¾,\n1½ × 1, 1½ × 1¼,\n2 × ½, 2 × ¾, 2 × 1,\n2 × 1¼, 2 × 1½, 2½ × ½,\n2½ × ¾, 2½ × 1,\n2½ ×1¼, 2½ × 1½,\n2½ × 2, 3 × ½, 3 × ¾,\n3 × 1, 3 × 1¼, 3 × 1½,\n3 × 2, 3 × 2½, 4 × 2,\n4 × 2½ and 4 × 3.\nd) Eccentric sockets, reducing M3\n¾ × ½,1 ×1½, 1 × ¾, 1¼ × ½,\n1¼ × ¾, 1¼ × 1, 1½ × ½, 1½ × ¾,\n1½ × 1 , 1½ × 1¼, 2 × ¾,\n2 × 1, 2 × 1¼ and 2 × 1½.\n6.20\nSize Designation of Male and Female Sockets\nM4, and Male and Female Sockets, Reducing M4 a) Equal Socket size designation M4 3/8, ½, ¾, 1 and 1¼.\nb) Reducing socket size designation M4\n3/8 × ¼, ½ × ¼, ½ × 3/8 ×¾× 3/8, ¾ × ½, 1 × ½,\n1 × ¾, 1¼ × ¾, 1¼ × 1, 1½ × 1, 1½ × 1¼, 2 × 1¼ and 2 × 1½. 6. 21 Size Designation of Bushings N4\n1/4 × 1/8, 3/8 × 1/8, 3/ 8 × 1/4, 1/2 × 1/8, 1/2 × 1/4,\n1/2 × 3/8, 3/4 × 1/4, 3/4 × 3/8, 3/4 × 1/2, 1 × 1/4,\n1 × 3/8, 1× 1/2, 1 × 3/4, 1¼ × 3/8, 1¼ × ½, 1¼ × ¾,\n1¼ × 1, 1½ × 3/8,1½ × ½, 1½ × ¾, 1½ × 1,\n1½ × 1¼, 2 × ½, 2 × ¾, 2 × 1, 2 × 1¼, 2 × 1½,\n2½ × 1, 2½ × 1¼, 2½ × 1½, 2½ × 2, 3 × 1, 3 × 1¼,\n3× 1½, 3 × 2, 3 × 2½, 3½ × 3, 4 × 2½, 4 × 3and 4 × 3½.\n6.22\nSize Designation of Hexagon Nipples N8;\nHexagon Nipples, Right - and Left- Hand Thread N8,\nR-L ; and Hexagon Nipples, Reducing N8:\na) Equal nipple size designation N8 :\n1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1¼, 1½, 2, 2½, 3, 3½ and 4.\nb) Equal nipple size designation N8 R-L : 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1/¼, 1½ and 2.\nc) Reducing nipple size reducing N8 :\n3/8 × 1/4\n1¼ × ½\n2 × ½\n1¼ × ¾\n2 × ¾\n½ × ¼\n1¼ × 1\n2 × 1\n½ × 3/8\n2 × 1¼\n1½ × ½\n2 × ½\n¾ × 3/8\n1½ × ¾\n¾ × ½\n1½ × 1\n2½ × 1½\n1½ × 1\n2½ × 2\n1 × ½\n1 × ¾\n3 x 2\n3 x 2½\n6. 23 Size Designation of Back Nuts P4 1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1¼, 1½, 2, 2½ and 3.\n6. 24 Size Designation of Hexagon Caps T1, Round\nCaps T2, Plain Plugs T8, Beaded Plugs T9 and\nCountersunk Plugs T11.\nSize Designation\nT 1\nT 2\nT 8\nT 9\nT11\n—\n1/8\n1/8\n1/8\n—\n1/4\n1/4\n1/4\n1/4\n—\n3/8\n3/8\n3/8\n3/8\n3/8\n1/2\n1/2\n1/2\n1/2\n1/2\n3/4\n3/4\n3/4\n3/4\n3/4\n1\n1\n1\n1\n1\n1¼\n1¼\n1¼\n1¼\n—\n1½\n1½\n1½\n1½\n—\n2\n2\n2\n2\n—\n2½\n—\n2½\n2½\n—\n3\n—\n3\n3\n—\n—\n—\n—\n3½\n—\n4\n—\n4\n4\n—\n6. 25 Size Designation of Unions, Flat Seat U1; Male and Female Unions, Flat Seat U2; Unions, Taper Seat\nU11; and Male and Female Unions, Raper SEat U12\nSize Designation\nU1\nU2\nU11\nU12\n1/8\n—\n1/8\n—\n1/4\n1/4\n1/4\n1/4\n3/8\n3/8\n3/8\n3/8\n1/2\n1/2\n1/2\n1/2\n3/4\n3/4\n3/4\n3/4\n1\n1\n1\n1\n1¼\n1¼\n1¼\n1¼\n1½\n1½\n1½\n1½\n2\n2\n2\n2\n2½\n—\n2½\n2½\n3\n—\n3\n3\n4\n—\n4\n—\n5\n—\n—\n—\n6\n—\n—\n—\n6. 26 Gasket for Unions,\nFlat seat\n— U1, U2, UA1 and UA2\nFitting Sizesof Unions\n— 1/8, 1/4, 3/8, 1/2, 3/4, 1, 1¼,\n1½, 2, 2½, 3 and 4.\n6.27\nNominal Sizes of Pipe Threads and corresponding Nominal diameter DN\nNominal Size of\nCorresponding\nPipe Threads\nBore\n(Size Designation)\nmm\n1/8\n6\n1/4\n8\n3/8\n10\n1/2\n15\n3/4\n20\n1\n25\n1¼\n32\n1½\n40\n2\n50\n2½\n65\n3\n80\n4\n100\n5\n125\n6\n150\n7. Pressure Test\n7.1 Shall be subjected to either of the two following\npressure tests a) Internal hydraulic pressure of not less than 2.1 MPa,\nor b) Internal air pressure of 1.05 MPa whilst the fitting is\ncompletely immersed in water or light oil.\n8. Compression Test —Shall satisfy the prescribed\ntest.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1879 : 1987 Specification for malleable cast iron pipe fittings (second revision). 1. Scope — Requirements for centrifugally cast (spun)\niron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes together with the details of the fittings and accessories.\nThese pipes and fittings are suitable for use above ground only.\n2. General Requirements\n2.1 Shall be capable of being cut with the tools\nnormally used for installation.\n3. Tests\n3.1 Hardness — not greater than 230 HBS.\n3.2 Soundness — When tested for soundness by\nstriking with a light hand hammer, shall emit a clear ringing sound.\n3.3 Hydrostatic Test— When hydrostatically tested at\na pressure of 0.07 MPa (N/mm2) for 15 seconds the pipes and fittings shall not show any sign of leakage, sweating\nor other defects of any kind. The test shall be conducted after surface coating.\n4. Sizes (in mm) —\nNominal Diameter DN, of pipes and fittings are 50, 75, 100 and 150.\n4.1 Socket and Spigot Pipes\nNominal Diameter\n50\n75\n100 150\nBarrel Ext. Dia\n57\n83\n109 161\nInternal Dia. of Socket73\n99\n126 179\nJoint thickness\n8\n8\n8.5\n9\nLength of pipes\n1,000\n1,500\n1,800\n2,000\n2,500\n3,000\n4.2 Bends With and Without Access Doors\nNominal Dia\nAngle of Bend\n50\n75\n100 92½°, 112½° and 135°.\n150\n4.3 Equal and Unequal Branches With and Without\nAccess door a) Equal Branch Angle θ\nNominal Dia\n50\n75\n100\n92½°, 112½° and 135°.\n150 b) Unequal Branches\nNominal Dia\nAngle\nBody\nBranch\n75\n50\n100\n50\n100\n75\n92½°, 112½° and 135°.\n150\n100\n4.4\nNominal Dia\nOffsets\n50\n75\n100\n75, 115 and 150.\n150\n4.5\nTaper\nNominal Diameter\nSpigot\nSocket\nDN\ndn\n75\n50\n100\n50\n100\n75\n150\n100\n4.6\nAccess Door — See Table 8 of the Standard.\n4.7\nCollars\nNominal\nL Diameter\n50\n140\n75\n150\n100\n160\n150\n170"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3989: 1984",
    "title": "Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Spigot And Socket Soil Waste And Ventilating Pipes Fittings And Accessories",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for materials used for vulcanized solid rubber sealing rings for water supply and drainage systems, drain pipes, sewers and rainwater pipes, all at ambient temerature including gas connections. It covers joint rings for all pipeling materials including iron, steel, stonewares, asbestos-cement, concrete, pitch fibre, plastics and glass reinforced plastics. This standard does not cover dimensional and joint design requirements.",
    "keywords": [
      "dia",
      "socket",
      "traps",
      "nominal",
      "branches",
      "angle",
      "connectors"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Tolerances": "Tolerances on external diameter of the barrel, internal diameter of the socket and the depth of the socket shall be as follows – (see figures of Table 1 of the Standard). Dimensions Nominal Tolerance Tolerance Diameter Lead Rubber DN Joint Joint (mm) (mm) (mm) i) External diameter 50, 75 3.0 + 3.0 of barrel, DE – 0 100 3.5 + 3.5 – 0 150 4.0 + 4.0 – 0 ii) Internal diameter All diameters 3.0 + 3.0 of socket, DI – 0 iii) Depth of socket, P All diameters 10 10 The tolerance on length of pipes shall be 20 mm. The tolerances on dimensioins of fittings shall be as given below Note–For details on tolerances, refer 7 of the standard.",
      "Mass": "Specific mass of cast iron is taken as 7.15 kg/dm3. Toterance on mass –10 prercent. 7. Coating 7.1 In all cases where the coating material has a tar or similar base, it shall be smooth, tenacious and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of 65°C but not so brittle at a temperature of 0°C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a penknife. 7.2 Coating shall not be applied to any pipe or fitting unless its surface is clean, dry and free from rust. Note— For detailed dimensions and body sketches refer to the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 3989 : 1984 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun) iron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories (second revision). θ θ ± ± ± ± ± ± ±",
      "Scope": "Requirements for materials used for vulcanized solid rubber sealing rings for water supply and drainage systems, drain pipes, sewers and rainwater pipes, all at ambient temerature including gas connections. It covers joint rings for all pipeling materials including iron, steel, stonewares, asbestos-cement, concrete, pitch fibre, plastics and glass reinforced plastics. This standard does not cover dimensional and joint design requirements.",
      "Types": "Six types, 1 to 6 corresponding to the respective nominal hardness of 40,50,60,70,80 and 88 IRHD. 3. Requirements 3.1 Material — The rubber shall be free from extractable substances which impart taste, odour or toxicity to water. If the pipe is to convey drinking water."
    },
    "content": "IS 3989: 1984 Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Spigot And Socket Soil Waste And Ventilating Pipes Fittings And Accessories\n(Second Revision)\n{ θ 4.8 Connectors (C.I. to Stoneware)\nNominal Dia 100 and 150.\n4.9 Connectors— Plug (Stopper)\nNominal Dia 50, 75, 100 and 150.\n4.10 Larger Radius Bends–\nNominal Dia\nAngle of Bend\n75\n100\n92½°, 112½°, 36°\n150\n4.11\nEqual and unequal single parallel branches–\nBody\nBranch\nNominal dia dn\n100\n100\n100\n50\n100\n50\n4.12\nEqual and unequal inverted branches socket type\nNominal\nDiameter Angle θ\nBody\nBranches\n50\n50\n100\n100 95°, 112½°, 1800\n100\n50\n4.1 3 Traps Nominal\nAngle Diameter DN\n50\n75\n100\n95°, 135°, 1800\n150\n4.14\nStraight inspection piece\nNominal Dia. 50, 75, 100 and 150.\n4.15\nFloor Traps\nNominal Dia. 50, 75 and 100.\n4.16\nTraps with Vent Diameter\nBody\nAngle\nVent\nDN\ndn\n100\n95°\n50\n100\n135°\n50\n100\n180°\n50\n4.17\nFloor Trap (Nahani)\nNominal Dia. 50, 75, 100 and 150\n4.18\nShoe bends and cowls\nNominal Dia. 50, 75, 100 and 150\n5. Tolerances — Tolerances on external diameter of\nthe barrel, internal diameter of the socket and the depth of the socket shall be as follows – (see figures of Table\n1 of the Standard).\nDimensions Nominal Tolerance Tolerance\nDiameter\nLead\nRubber\nDN\nJoint\nJoint\n(mm)\n(mm)\n(mm)\ni)\nExternal diameter\n50, 75 3.0\n+ 3.0 of barrel, DE – 0\n100 3.5\n+ 3.5\n– 0\n150 4.0\n+ 4.0\n– 0 ii)\nInternal diameter\nAll diameters 3.0\n+ 3.0 of socket, DI\n– 0 iii) Depth of socket, P\nAll diameters 10 10\nThe tolerance on length of pipes shall be 20 mm. The tolerances on dimensioins of fittings shall be\nas given below\nNote–For details on tolerances, refer 7 of the standard.\n6. Mass – Specific mass of cast iron is taken as 7.15\nkg/dm3. Toterance on mass –10 prercent.\n7. Coating\n7.1 In all cases where the coating material has a tar or\nsimilar base, it shall be smooth, tenacious and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of\n65°C but not so brittle at a temperature of 0°C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a penknife.\n7.2 Coating shall not be applied to any pipe or fitting\nunless its surface is clean, dry and free from rust.\nNote— For detailed dimensions and body sketches refer to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3989 : 1984 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun)\niron spigot and socket soil, waste and ventilating pipes, fittings and accessories (second revision). θ θ\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n± 1. Scope — Requirements for materials used for\nvulcanized solid rubber sealing rings for water supply and drainage systems, drain pipes, sewers and rainwater\npipes, all at ambient temerature including gas connections. It covers joint rings for all pipeling materials\nincluding iron, steel, stonewares, asbestos-cement, concrete, pitch fibre, plastics and glass reinforced\nplastics. This standard does not cover dimensional and joint design requirements.\n2. Types — Six types, 1 to 6 corresponding to the\nrespective nominal hardness of 40,50,60,70,80 and 88\nIRHD.\n3. Requirements\n3.1 Material — The rubber shall be free from extractable\nsubstances which impart taste, odour or toxicity to water.\nIf the pipe is to convey drinking water."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5382: 1985",
    "title": "Rubber Sealig Rings For Gas Mains, Water Mains And Sewers",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "(First Revision) 3.2 Finish — The rings shall be homogeneous; free from porosity, grit, excessive blooms, blisters or other visible surface imperfections. The fin or flash shall be reduced as much as possible and in any case the thickness of it shall be reduced as much as possible and in any case the thickness of it shall not exceed 0.4 mm and the width 0.8 mm. 3.3 Stretch Test — Stretch gaskets till the circumference is increased by 50 percent, then visually inspect for the following. The surfa",
    "keywords": [
      "rubber",
      "elongation",
      "break",
      "stretch",
      "type",
      "much",
      "irhd"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 5382: 1985 Rubber Sealig Rings For Gas Mains, Water Mains And Sewers\n(First Revision)\n3.2 Finish — The rings shall be homogeneous; free\nfrom porosity, grit, excessive blooms, blisters or other visible surface imperfections. The fin or flash shall be\nreduced as much as possible and in any case the thickness of it shall be reduced as much as possible and\nin any case the thickness of it shall not exceed 0.4 mm and the width 0.8 mm. 3.3 Stretch Test — Stretch gaskets till the circumference\nis increased by 50 percent, then visually inspect for the following.\nThe surface of the gasket shall be smooth, free from pitting, cracks, blisters, air marks and any other\ninperfection that may affect its behaviour in service.\nThe body of the gasket shall be free from porosity and air pockets.\n3.4 Physical Requirements— See Tables 1 and 2\nTABLE 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\nSL. NO. CHARACTERISTICS\nREQUIREMENTS\nType 1\nType 2\nType 3\nType 4\nType 5\nType 6\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\ni)\nHardness in IRHD\n40 ± 5\n50 ± 5\n60 ± 5\n70 ± 5\n80 ± 4\n88 ± 3 ii)\nCompression set, percent, Max for 24 h at 70 ± 1°C\n25\n25 25 25\n25 25 – 2 for 72 +0 h at 70 ± 1°C\n12\n12\n12\n12\n15\n15 – 2 iii)\nAgeing, maximum change for unaged values after 7\ndays in air at 70oC a) Hardness in IRHD\n–5 to+ 8\n–5 to + 8\n–5 to + 8\n–5 to + 8\n–5 to + 8\n–5to + 8 b) Tensile strength, percent\n20\n20\n20\n20\n20\n20 c) Elongation at break, percent\n–30 to +10 –30 to +10\n–30 to +10\n–30 to +10 –30 to +10 –30 to +10 iv)\nWater immersion change in volume\n–0 to+ 8 – 0 to + 8\n–0 to + 8\n–0 to + 8\n–0 to + 8\n–0 to + 8 after immersion in neutral water for\n7 days at 70oC v)\nCold resistance, increase in hardness\n+5\n+5\n+5\n+5\n+5\n+5 after 72 hours at 0oC, Max\nvi)\nSplice strength, elongation imposed,\n100\n100\n100\n100\n100\n100 percent, Max TABLE 2 TENSILE STRENGTH AND ELONGATION FOR DIFFERENT\nTYPES\nSL. NO. POLYMER USED\nREQUIREMENTS\nType 1\nType 2\nType 3\nType 4\nType 5\nType 6\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\ni)\nNatural rubber (NR) and Isoprene rubber (IR)\na) Tensile strength, MPa, percent, Min\n18\n18\n17\n15\n11\n6 b) Elongation at break, percent, Min\n450\n450\n375\n250\n175\n100 ii)\nButadiene-styrene rubber (SBR)\na) Tensile strength, MPa, percent, Min\n12\n13\n14\n13\n11\n8 b) Elongation at break, percent, Min\n450\n425\n400\n300\n250\n150 iii)\nEthylene propyiene rubber (EPM)\na) Tensile strength, MPa, percent, Min\n11\n11\n11\n11\n9\n8 b) Elogngation at break, percent Min.\n450\n400\n325\n200\n125\n100\nNote — For methods of tests refer to the relevant parts of IS 3400 Methods of test for vulcanised rubber and Appendices B and\nC of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5382 :1985 Specification for rubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains and sewers (first revision).\n3.5Water Absorption — shall not absorb more than\n10 percent.\n3.6\nOptional Requirements a) Low temperature Applications\nb) Streess relaxation in compressions"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5531: 1988",
    "title": "Cast Iron Specials For Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for cast iron specials to be used with asbestos cement pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage. 1.2 Applicable to cast iron specials for use with asbestos cement pressure pipes suitable for connection with cast iron detachable joints or asbestos cement couplings.",
    "keywords": [
      "iron",
      "cast",
      "dia",
      "specials",
      "asbestos",
      "plain",
      "cement"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for cast iron specials to be used with asbestos cement pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage. 1.2 Applicable to cast iron specials for use with asbestos cement pressure pipes suitable for connection with cast iron detachable joints or asbestos cement couplings.",
      "Materials": "As per the psrescribed standard 3. Mechanical Tests 3.1 Tensile Strength — Min. 150 MPa. 3.2 Brinell Hardness— Not to exceed 215 HBS. 4. Hydrostatic Test 4.1 Shall withstand (without showing leakage, sweating or other defects) the test pressure, maintained for atleast 15 seconds, as specified in IS 1592 : 1989 for the class of asbestos cement pressure pipes with which they are to be used.",
      "Dimensions": "(mm) 5.1 Cast Iron Plain and Bends Nominal Dia 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 Bend Angle 900, 450, 22½0, and 11¼0 5.2 Cast Iron Plain and Bends Nominal Dia 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400 Length 125, 130, 135, 140, 150, 153, 160, 165, 170. Nominal Dia 450, 500, 600 Length 175, 180, 185 5.3 Cast Iron Plain and Reducers Nominal Dia Nominal Dia (Large end) (Small end) 100 80 125 80,100 150 80, 100, 125 200 100, 125, 150 225 125,150, 200 250 80, 100, 125,150, 200, 250 300 80, 100, 125,150, 200, 250, 300 350 200, 250, 300, 350 400 200, 250, 300, 350, 400 500 250, 300, 350, 400,450, 500 600 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 5.4 Cast Iron Crosses Nominal Dia 80,100,125,150,250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 5.5 Cast Iron Plain and Flanged Spigots— Nominal Dia 80, 1"
    },
    "content": "IS 5531: 1988 Cast Iron Specials For Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope — Requirements for cast iron specials to be used with asbestos cement pressure pipes for water,\ngas and sewage.\n1.2 Applicable to cast iron specials for use with\nasbestos cement pressure pipes suitable for connection with cast iron detachable joints or asbestos cement\ncouplings.\n2. Material — As per the psrescribed standard\n3. Mechanical Tests\n3.1 Tensile Strength — Min. 150 MPa.\n3.2 Brinell Hardness— Not to exceed 215 HBS.\n4. Hydrostatic Test\n4.1 Shall withstand (without showing leakage, sweating\nor other defects) the test pressure, maintained for atleast\n15 seconds, as specified in IS 1592 : 1989 for the class of asbestos cement pressure pipes with which they are\nto be used.\n5. Dimensions — (mm)\n5.1 Cast Iron Plain and Bends\nNominal Dia\n80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250,\n300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600\nBend Angle\n900, 450, 22½0, and 11¼0\n5.2 Cast Iron Plain and Bends\nNominal Dia\n80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250,\n300, 350, 400\nLength\n125, 130, 135, 140, 150,\n153, 160, 165, 170.\nNominal Dia\n450, 500, 600\nLength\n175, 180, 185\n5.3\nCast Iron Plain and Reducers\nNominal Dia\nNominal Dia\n(Large end)\n(Small end)\n100\n80\n125\n80,100\n150\n80, 100, 125\n200\n100, 125, 150\n225\n125,150, 200\n250\n80, 100, 125,150, 200, 250\n300\n80, 100, 125,150, 200, 250, 300\n350\n200, 250, 300, 350\n400\n200, 250, 300, 350, 400\n500\n250, 300, 350, 400,450, 500\n600\n300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600\n5.4\nCast Iron Crosses\nNominal Dia\n80,100,125,150,250, 300,\n350, 400, 450, 500, 600\n5.5\nCast Iron Plain and Flanged Spigots—\nNominal Dia\n80, 100, 125, 150, 250, 300\n350, 400, 450, 500, 600\n5.6\nCast Iron Plain and Tees and Plain and Waves\nNominal Dia\nNominal Dia\n(Main)\n(Branch)\n80\n80\n100\n80,100\n125\n80,100,125\n150\n80, 100,125,150\n200\n80,100,125,150,200\n250\n80,100,125,150,200,250\n300\n80,100,125,150,200,250, 300\n350\n200,250,300,350\n400\n200,250,300,350,400\n450\n250,300,350,400,450\n500\n250,300,350,400,450,500\n600\n300,350,400,450,500,600\n6.\nTolerances\nWall thickness, e — (2.00 mm + 0.05 e)\n(see note)\nFlange thickness, b (3.00 mm + 0.05 b)\n± where e = standard thickness of the wall in mm, and\nb = standard thickness of the flange in mm.\nNote — No limit for the plus tolerances is specified.\n6.1\nOther Dimensions\nDimension\nTolerance mm\nMachined outside diameters +1.5\n(D2 and d2)\n– 1.0\nLength (l) and height (h)\n+15\n– 10\nNote— For method of test, refer to IS 1500 : 1983 Method for brinell hardness test for metallkic materials (second revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5531 : 1988 Specification for cast iron specials for asbestos cement pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (second revision).\n6.2 Mass — Tolerance on the mass of the specials shall\nbe 8 percent except for bends and fittings with more than one branch and non-standard fittings, where it\nshall be 12 percent.\n7. Coatings\n7.1 Coating shall not be applied to any castings, unless\nits surface is clean, dry and free from rust.\n7.2 In all cases where the coating material has tar or\nsimilar base, it shall be smooth, tenacious and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of\n650C but not so brittle at a temperature of 00C as to clip off when scribed lightly with a pen knife.\n±\n±"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6163: 1978",
    "title": "Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Low Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for centrifugally cast (spun) iron low pressure pipes, known as LP pipes, for conveyance of water, gas and sewage, manufactured in metal or sand moulds. 1.2 This standard is applicable to cast iron pipes having spigots and sockets as specified in this standard, and also to pipes with other types of joints particularly rubber joints. In case of rubber joints the inner profile of the socket end of the pipe shall depend on the type of rubber joint ensuring that the overall dimensions a",
    "keywords": [
      "pipes",
      "dia",
      "moulds",
      "cast",
      "kgf",
      "iron",
      "socket"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for centrifugally cast (spun) iron low pressure pipes, known as LP pipes, for conveyance of water, gas and sewage, manufactured in metal or sand moulds. 1.2 This standard is applicable to cast iron pipes having spigots and sockets as specified in this standard, and also to pipes with other types of joints particularly rubber joints. In case of rubber joints the inner profile of the socket end of the pipe shall depend on the type of rubber joint ensuring that the overall dimensions are maintained for reasons of safety and interchangeability. 2. Mechanical Tests 2.1 Ring Test (for Pipes Cast in Metal Moulds) Up to and including Modulus of Rupture 300 mm nominal dia. 40 kgf/mm2, Min 2.2 Tensile Test 2.2.1 Pipes Cast in Metal Moulds Nominal Dia Tensile Strength Min Over 300 mm and",
      "Tests": "Hardness of external unmachined surface shall not exceed 230 HB.",
      "Hydrostatic Test": "Shall withstand test pressure of 17.5 kf/cm2 without showing leakage, sweating or other defects, when kept under pressure for 15 seconds. All pipes shall withstand a test pressure of 6 kgf/cm2 after installation. Note — For method of test refer to IS 1500 : 1983 Method for Brimell hardness test for metallic materials(second revision) For detailed information, Refer to IS 6163 : 1978 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun) iron low pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage. 6. Tolerances a) External diameter of barrel ½f = + (4.5+0.0015 dn) mm b) Internal diameter of socket ½f = + (3+0.001 dn) mm c) Depth of socket Nominal dia up to 600 mm — 5 mm Nominal dia over 600 mm — 10 mm d) Length — 25 mm e) Wall thickness — (1 + 0.05 e) mm f) Maximum deviation from straight line (in mm) shall not",
      "Coating": "Where coating material has tar or similar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough not to flow at temperature of 77°C and not so brittle as to chip off at 0°C when scribed lightly with a penknife. When pipes are used for conveying potable water, inside coating shall not contain any constituent soluble such water or any ingredient which could impart any taste or odour to the potable water after sterilization and washing of the mains. ± ± ± ± ± ± 1. Scope 1.1 Covers grey cast iron and malleable cast iron flanges for general engineering purposes, which shall be applicable from 0 to 300°C for oil, water, steam, compressed air, gases and other non-corrosive fluids."
    },
    "content": "IS 6163: 1978 Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron Low Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage\n(First Revision)\n5. Sizes (in mm)\n5.1 Sockets and Spigots of Low Pressure Pipes (Lead\nJoint)\nNominal\nExternal Socket\nDia\nDia of Barrel\nInternal\nDepth\nDia. 80 98\n116\n84\n100\n118\n137\n88\n125\n144\n163\n91\n150\n170\n189\n94\n200\n222\n241\n100\n250\n274\n294\n103\n300\n326\n346\n105\n350\n378\n398\n107\n400\n429\n449\n110\n450\n480\n501\n112\n500\n532\n553\n115\n600\n635\n657\n120\n700\n738\n760\n122\n750\n790\n813\n123\n5.2 Socket and Spigot Low Pressure Pipes – Class LP\nNominal\nBarrel\nMass Approx\nDia kg/m\nExternal\nThickness\nDia.\n80\n98\n4.9\n10.25\n100\n118\n5.1\n12.94\n125\n144\n5.4\n16.82\n150\n170\n5.7\n21.04\n200\n222\n6.5\n31.48\n250\n274\n7.0\n42.00\n300\n329\n7.6\n54.27\n350\n378\n8.8\n72.20\n400\n429\n9.4\n87.70\n450\n480\n10.0\n105.70\n500\n532\n11.4\n132.20\n600\n635\n12.6\n175.80\n700\n738\n14.0\n226.60\n750\n790\n14.6\n253.40\nWorking length – 3.66, 4, 4.88 and 5.5 m.\n1. Scope — Requirements for centrifugally cast (spun)\niron low pressure pipes, known as LP pipes, for conveyance of water, gas and sewage, manufactured in\nmetal or sand moulds.\n1.2 This standard is applicable to cast iron pipes having\nspigots and sockets as specified in this standard, and also to pipes with other types of joints particularly rubber\njoints. In case of rubber joints the inner profile of the socket end of the pipe shall depend on the type of rubber\njoint ensuring that the overall dimensions are maintained for reasons of safety and interchangeability.\n2. Mechanical Tests\n2.1 Ring Test (for Pipes Cast in Metal Moulds)\nUp to and including Modulus of Rupture\n300 mm nominal dia.\n40 kgf/mm2, Min\n2.2 Tensile Test\n2.2.1 Pipes Cast in Metal Moulds\nNominal Dia\nTensile Strength Min\nOver 300 mm and\n20 kgf/mm2 up to 600 mm\nOver 600 mm\n18 kgf/mm2\n2.2.2 Pipes Cast in Sand Moulds\nTensile strength\n18 kgf/mm2, Min\n(all diameters)\n3. Brinell Hardness Test — Hardness of external\nunmachined surface shall not exceed 230 HB.\n4. Hydrostatic Test — Shall withstand test\npressure of 17.5 kf/cm2 without showing leakage, sweating or other defects, when kept under pressure\nfor 15 seconds. All pipes shall withstand a test pressure of 6 kgf/cm2 after installation. Note — For method of test refer to IS 1500 : 1983 Method for Brimell hardness test for metallic materials(second revision)\nFor detailed information, Refer to IS 6163 : 1978 Specification for centrifugally cast (spun)\niron low pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage.\n6.\nTolerances a) External diameter of barrel ½f = + (4.5+0.0015 dn) mm b) Internal diameter of socket ½f = + (3+0.001 dn) mm c) Depth of socket\nNominal dia up to 600 mm — 5 mm\nNominal dia over 600 mm — 10 mm d) Length — 25 mm\ne) Wall thickness — (1 + 0.05 e) mm f)\nMaximum deviation from straight line (in mm)\nshall not be greater than 1.25 times the length of pipe in metres.\nWhere “f” is caulking space of joint in mm — 9 + 0.003 dn\ndn — Nominal dia in mm e — Wall thickness in mm\n7. Mass\n7.1 Density of cast iron is taken as 7.15 kg/dm3.\nTolerance 5 percent.\n8. Coating —Where coating material has tar or similar\nbase, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough not to flow at temperature of 77°C and not so brittle as\nto chip off at 0°C when scribed lightly with a penknife.\nWhen pipes are used for conveying potable water, inside coating shall not contain any constituent soluble\nsuch water or any ingredient which could impart any taste or odour to the potable water after sterilization\nand washing of the mains.\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n± 1. Scope\n1.1 Covers grey cast iron and malleable cast iron\nflanges for general engineering purposes, which shall be applicable from 0 to 300°C for oil, water, steam,\ncompressed air, gases and other non-corrosive fluids."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6418: 1971",
    "title": "Cast Iron And Malleable Cast Iron Flanges For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for double flanged cast iron pipes of Class B only up to dn 750 for pressure main lines of water, gas and sewage manufactured by horizontal castings in sand moulds.",
    "keywords": [
      "flanges",
      "iron",
      "cast",
      "malleable",
      "integral",
      "pressure",
      "nominal"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Pressure And Temperature Rating": "Table1 Nominal Typeof Material Design Pressure (N/mm2) at Temperature °C Pressure N/mm2 Cast Iron Malleable –10 150 180 200 220 250 260 300 Cast Iron to 120 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (29) (30) (31) 0.25 15 — 0.25 — — — — — — — 20 — 0.25 0.23 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.18 0.17 0.15 0.60 15 — 0.60 — — — — — — — 20 — 0.60 0.56 0.52 0.50 0.50 0.45 0.43 0.36 IS : 2107 0.60 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.55 0.50 0.50 0.50 IS : 2108 0.60 0.58 0.56 0.55 0.55 0.50 0.50 0.50 1.0 15 — 1.0 — — — — — — — 20 — 1.0 0.92 0.85 0.80 0.80 0.70 0.68 0.60 1.6 20 — 1.60 1.48 1.39 1.30 1.30 1.10 1.08 1.00 — IS : 2107 1.60 1.48 1.52 1.50 1.40 1.40 1.38 1.30 — IS : 2108 1.60 1.56 1.52 1.50 1.40 1.40 1.38 1.30 2.5 25 — 2.50 2.30 2.12 2.00 1.80 1.80 1.75 1.60 — IS : 2107 2.50 2.30 2.35 2.30 2.20 2.10 2.08 2.00 — IS : 2108 2.50 2.42 2",
      "Designation": "By nominal size and flange table reference. First part of the table reference is nominal pressure and the second part indicates the material and type of flange as follows a) Grey cast iron— intergral (1) b) Malleable cast iron—integral (2) c) Malleable cast iron — screwed boss (3) TABLE 1 PRESSURE TEMPERATURE RATINGS FOR GRLY AND MALLEABLE CAST IRON FLANGES For detailed information, refer to IS 6418 : 1971 Specification for cast iron and malleable cast iron flanges for general engineering purposes. Note 2 – For typical illustration of “Integral Flange” and “Screwed Boss Flange “See Figures 1and 2 of the standard. Note 3 – For detailed dimensions see Table 2 to 12 of the standard. 4. Flange Facing a) Smooth — With no visible tool marks, or b) Serrated — With a continuous sprial groove of 1.",
      "Hydraulic Test": "Test pressure applied to the joint shall not exceed 1.5 times the nominal pressure for flanges. Table 7 1.6/1 Integral grey cast iron flanges Nominal pressure — 1.6 N/mm2 Nominal size — 10 to 1000 mm Table 8 1.6/2 Malleable cast iron integral flanges Nominal pressure— 1.0 and 1.6 N/mm2 Nominal size — 10 to 150 mm Table 9 1.6/3 Malleable cast iron screwed boss flanges Nominal pressure— 1.0 and 1.6 N/mm2 Nominal size — 6 to 150 mm Table 10 2.5/1 Integral grey cast iron flanges Nominal pressure — 2.5 N/mm2 Nominal size — 10 to 500 mm Table 11 2.5/2 Malleable cast iron integral flanges Nominal pressure — 2.5 N/mm2 Nominal size — 10 to 150 mm Table 12 2.5/3 Malleable cast iron screwed boss flanges Nominal pressure — 2.5 N/mm2 Nominal size — 6 to 150 mm Note 1— Nominal sizes are 6, 8, 10, 15, 20",
      "Scope": "Requirements for double flanged cast iron pipes of Class B only up to dn 750 for pressure main lines of water, gas and sewage manufactured by horizontal castings in sand moulds. 2. Mechanical Tests 2.1 Tensile Test — Minimum 150 MPa. 2.2 Hardness — Not more than 230 HBS.",
      "Hydrostatic Test": "Shall not show any sign of leakage, sweating or other defects when pressure indicated below is applied for 15 s. HYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURE FOR HORIZONTALLY CAST PIPES Nominal Diameter Test Suggested DN Pressure Maximum Hydraulic Working Pressure including Surge (1) (2) (3) MPa MPa Upto and including 300 mm 2.5 1.2 Over 300 mm and upto and 2.0 1.0 including 600 mm Over 600 mm 1.5 0.6 4. Sizes 2.1 Nominal diameter— DN : 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700 and 750 mm. Working Lengths — 2.75 and 3 m. 2.2 Nominal Thickness — 10.0, 10.5, 11.1, 11.7, 12.8, 14.0, 15.2, 16.3, 17.5, 18.7, 19.8, 22.2, 24.5 and 25.6 corresponding to nominal diameters 80 to 750 mm respectively. 5. Tolerances 5.1 On External Diameter Dimension Nominal Diameter Tolerance DN mm External diameter"
    },
    "content": "IS 6418: 1971 Cast Iron And Malleable Cast Iron Flanges For General Engineering Purposes\n1.2. Type of gasket and gasket materials are not covered in the standard and shall be subject to agreement\nbetween the manufacturer and the purchaser.\n2. Pressure and Temperature Rating —\nTable1\nNominal Typeof Material\nDesign Pressure (N/mm2) at Temperature °C\nPressure\nN/mm2\nCast Iron\nMalleable –10\n150\n180\n200\n220\n250\n260\n300\nCast Iron to 120\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\n(29)\n(30)\n(31)\n0.25\n15\n— 0.25\n—\n—\n—\n—\n—\n—\n—\n20\n— 0.25\n0.23\n0.20\n0.20\n0.20\n0.18\n0.17\n0.15\n0.60\n15\n— 0.60\n—\n—\n—\n—\n—\n—\n—\n20\n— 0.60\n0.56\n0.52\n0.50\n0.50\n0.45\n0.43\n0.36\nIS : 2107 0.60\n0.58\n0.56\n0.55\n0.55\n0.50\n0.50\n0.50\nIS : 2108 0.60\n0.58\n0.56\n0.55\n0.55\n0.50\n0.50\n0.50\n1.0\n15\n— 1.0\n—\n—\n—\n—\n—\n—\n—\n20\n— 1.0\n0.92\n0.85\n0.80\n0.80\n0.70\n0.68\n0.60\n1.6\n20\n— 1.60\n1.48\n1.39\n1.30\n1.30\n1.10\n1.08\n1.00\n—\nIS : 2107 1.60\n1.48\n1.52\n1.50\n1.40\n1.40\n1.38\n1.30\n—\nIS : 2108 1.60\n1.56\n1.52\n1.50\n1.40\n1.40\n1.38\n1.30\n2.5\n25\n— 2.50\n2.30\n2.12\n2.00\n1.80\n1.80\n1.75\n1.60\n—\nIS : 2107 2.50\n2.30\n2.35\n2.30\n2.20\n2.10\n2.08\n2.00\n—\nIS : 2108 2.50\n2.42\n2.35\n2.30\n2.20\n2.10\n2.08\n2.00\nTable 2\n0.25/1 Integral grey cast iron flanges\nNominal pressure— 0.25 N/mm2.\nNominal size — 10 to 4000 mm\nTable 3\n0.6/1 Integral grey cast iron flanges\nNominal pressure — 0.6 N/mm2\nNominal size — 10 to 3600 mm\nTable 4\n0.6/2 Malleable cast iron integral flanges\nNominal pressure — 0.6 N/mm2\nNominal size — 10 to150 mm\nTable 5\n0.6/3 Malleable cast iron screwed boss flanges Nominal pressure — 0.6\nN/mm Nominal size — 6 to 150 mm\nTable 6\n1.0/1 Integral grey cast iron flanges\nNominal pressure — 1.0 N/mm2\nNominal size — 200 to 3000 mm\nNote — For grey cast iron flanges, the pressure and temperature\nrating shall be reduced by 25 percent, where moderate shock (as may occur in efficient boiler fee main) is likely to be present.\nNote — Intermediate values may be obtained by linear\ninterpolation.1 N/mm2 = 0.012 kg/mm2.\n3. Designation —By nominal size and flange table\nreference. First part of the table reference is nominal pressure and the second part indicates the material and\ntype of flange as follows a) Grey cast iron— intergral (1)\nb) Malleable cast iron—integral (2)\nc) Malleable cast iron — screwed boss (3)\nTABLE 1 PRESSURE TEMPERATURE RATINGS FOR GRLY AND MALLEABLE CAST IRON FLANGES For detailed information, refer to IS 6418 : 1971 Specification for cast iron and malleable cast iron flanges for general engineering purposes.\nNote 2 – For typical illustration of “Integral Flange” and\n“Screwed Boss Flange “See Figures 1and 2 of the standard.\nNote 3 – For detailed dimensions see Table 2 to 12 of the\nstandard.\n4. Flange Facing\na)\nSmooth — With no visible tool marks, or b)\nSerrated — With a continuous sprial groove of 1.5 mm pitch and approximately 0.25mm\ndeep.\n5. General\n5.1 Flange surfaces shall be free from casting surface\ndefects and segregations.\n5.2 It is recommended to use stud bolts with nuts on\nboth sides for nominal pressures above 15 kgf/cm2.\n6. Hydraulic Test —Test pressure applied to the joint\nshall not exceed 1.5 times the nominal pressure for flanges.\nTable 7\n1.6/1 Integral grey cast iron flanges\nNominal pressure — 1.6 N/mm2\nNominal size — 10 to 1000 mm\nTable 8\n1.6/2 Malleable cast iron integral flanges\nNominal pressure— 1.0 and 1.6 N/mm2\nNominal size — 10 to 150 mm\nTable 9\n1.6/3 Malleable cast iron screwed boss flanges\nNominal pressure— 1.0 and 1.6 N/mm2\nNominal size — 6 to 150 mm\nTable 10\n2.5/1 Integral grey cast iron flanges\nNominal pressure — 2.5 N/mm2\nNominal size — 10 to 500 mm\nTable 11\n2.5/2 Malleable cast iron integral flanges\nNominal pressure — 2.5 N/mm2\nNominal size — 10 to 150 mm\nTable 12\n2.5/3 Malleable cast iron screwed boss flanges\nNominal pressure — 2.5 N/mm2\nNominal size — 6 to 150 mm\nNote 1— Nominal sizes are 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40,50,\n65, 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 300, 350, 400, 500, 600, 700,\n800, 900, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, 2200,\n2400, 2600, 2800, 3000, 3200, 3400, 3600, 3800 and 4000. For detailed information, Refer to IS 7181 : 1986 Specification for horizontally cast iron double flanged pipes for water, gas and sewage (first revision).\n1. Scope –Requirements for double flanged cast iron\npipes of Class B only up to dn 750 for pressure main lines of water, gas and sewage manufactured by\nhorizontal castings in sand moulds.\n2. Mechanical Tests\n2.1 Tensile Test — Minimum 150 MPa.\n2.2 Hardness — Not more than 230 HBS.\n3. Hydrostatic Test — Shall not show any sign of\nleakage, sweating or other defects when pressure indicated below is applied for 15 s.\nHYDROSTATIC TEST PRESSURE FOR\nHORIZONTALLY CAST PIPES\nNominal Diameter\nTest\nSuggested\nDN\nPressure\nMaximum\nHydraulic Working\nPressure including\nSurge\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\nMPa\nMPa\nUpto and including 300 mm\n2.5\n1.2\nOver 300 mm and upto and\n2.0\n1.0 including 600 mm\nOver 600 mm\n1.5\n0.6\n4. Sizes\n2.1 Nominal diameter— DN : 80, 100, 125, 150, 200,\n250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700 and 750 mm.\nWorking Lengths — 2.75 and 3 m.\n2.2 Nominal Thickness — 10.0, 10.5, 11.1, 11.7, 12.8,\n14.0, 15.2, 16.3, 17.5, 18.7, 19.8, 22.2, 24.5 and 25.6 corresponding to nominal diameters 80 to 750 mm\nrespectively.\n5. Tolerances\n5.1\nOn External Diameter\nDimension Nominal Diameter\nTolerance\nDN\nmm\nExternal diameter\nAll diameters (4.5+0.0015 DN) of barrel (DE)\n5.2\nOn Thickness\nDimension\nTolerance\nWall thickness\n– (1+0.05e)\nFlange thickness (2+0.05b)\nWhere e = thickness of wall in mm, and b = thickness of flange in mm.\n5.3\nOn length — 10 mm\nDeviation from a straight line— Less than 0.00125 l where l is the length.\n6. Coating\n6.1 Coating shall not be applied to any pipe unless its\nsurfaces are clean, dry and free from rust.\n6.2 In all cases where the coating material has a tar or\nsimilar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of\n65°C but not so brittle at a temperature of 0°C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a penknife."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7181: 1986",
    "title": "Horizontally Cast Iron Double Flanged Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Specifies the requirements and associated test methods applicable to ductile iron pipes manufactured in metal (lined or unlined) or sand moulds and their joints for the construction of pipe lines : — to convey water, sewage or gas — to be installed below or above ground — operated with or without pressure. 1.2. This standard also specifies requirements for materials, dimensions and tolerances, mechanical properties and standard coatings and linings of ductile iron pipes. 1.3 The standard applies",
    "keywords": [
      "lined",
      "ductile",
      "pipes",
      "specifies",
      "socketted",
      "convey",
      "unlined"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Specifies the requirements and associated test methods applicable to ductile iron pipes manufactured in metal (lined or unlined) or sand moulds and their joints for the construction of pipe lines : — to convey water, sewage or gas — to be installed below or above ground — operated with or without pressure. 1.2. This standard also specifies requirements for materials, dimensions and tolerances, mechanical properties and standard coatings and linings of ductile iron pipes. 1.3 The standard applies to pipes, which are — Manufactured with socketted, flanged or spigot ends for jointing by means of various types of gaskets, which are not with in the scope of this standard and normally to be delivered externally and internally lined and are suitable for fluid temperatures between 0°C and 50°C, ex"
    },
    "content": "IS 7181: 1986 Horizontally Cast Iron Double Flanged Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage\n(First Revision)\n±\n±\n± 1.\nScope — Specifies the requirements and associated test methods applicable to ductile iron pipes\nmanufactured in metal (lined or unlined) or sand moulds and their joints for the construction of pipe lines :\n—\nto convey water, sewage or gas\n—\nto be installed below or above ground\n—\noperated with or without pressure.\n1.2. This standard also specifies requirements for materials, dimensions and tolerances, mechanical\nproperties and standard coatings and linings of ductile iron pipes.\n1.3 The standard applies to pipes, which are —\nManufactured with socketted, flanged or spigot ends for jointing by means of various types of gaskets, which\nare not with in the scope of this standard and normally to be delivered externally and internally lined and are\nsuitable for fluid temperatures between 0°C and 50°C, excluding frost.\n1.4. This standard does not include the provisions for fittings used with the pipes conforming to this standard.\nA separate standard IS : 9523 covers the specification on such fittings."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8329: 2000",
    "title": "Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Ductile Iron Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for cast iron detachable joints to be used with asbestos cement pressure pipes conforming to IS 1592 : 1989*.",
    "keywords": [
      "flange",
      "joints",
      "pipes",
      "flanged",
      "pressure",
      "class",
      "hydrostatic"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Rubber Gasket": "As per IS 5382 : 1985 for push on joints and mechanical joints, and as per IS 638: 1979 for flanged joints. 5. Tests 5.1. Tensile and Elongation Nominal Minimum Minimum Diameter Tensile Elongation (dn) mm Strength at Break, MPa Percent 80 – 1000 420 10 1000 – 2000 420 7 5.2. Brindl hardness shall not exceed 230 HB. 5.3. Hydrostatic test *Rubber sealing rings for Water, Mains, Gas and Sewer (first revision). ++Sheet rubber jointing and Rubber insertion jointing (second Revision)",
      "Tolerances": "See 15 of the standard.",
      "Coating": "Any one of the following protection may be applied depending upon the external condition of use : Metallic zinc with finishing layer. Zinc rich paint with finishing layer, bituminous paint. For detailed information, refer to IS 8329:2000 Centrifugally cast (spun) iron, pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (third revision).",
      "Scope": "Requirements for cast iron detachable joints to be used with asbestos cement pressure pipes conforming to IS 1592 : 1989*.",
      "Metal": "As per the prescribed standard. 3. Requirements 3.1 Brinells hardness — Not to exceed 215 HBS. 3.2 Tensile strength — Min. of 150 MPa. 3.3 Hydrostatic test — It should not show any leakage, or sweating or any other defect under a test pressure as per IS : 1592-1989 maintained for minimum of 15 seconds. 4. Dimensions for Flanges and Collars Nominal Class External Dia Dia of AC Pipe dn D2 (1) (2) (3) 80 5,10,15 99.5 20 101.5 25 106.5 100 5,10 120.0 15 121.0 20 126.5 25 132.5 125 5,10 145.0 15 147.0 20 152.5 25 159.5 150 5,10 171.0 15 176.5 20 183.0 25 191.0 200 5 221.0 10 225.0 15 233.5 20 242.5 25 253.5"
    },
    "content": "IS 8329: 2000 Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Ductile Iron Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage\n(First Revision)\n1.5. Fittings conforming to IS 13382 : 1992* may also be used with ductile iron pipes, when the pressure\nrequirements matches.\n2. Classification\n2.1 K7, K8, K9, K10, K12, ..... depending on service\nconditions and manufacturing process.\n2.2 Wall Thickness, “e”\ne\n=\nK (0.5 + 0.001 dn)\nwhere e\n= wall thickness in mm\ndn\n= the nominal diameter, and\nK\n= the whole number coefficient.\n2.3 The value of K will depend on the following service\nconditions:\nSERVICE CONDITIONS\nNominal\nWater\nSewers\nGas Mains\nDia\nMain 80 - 300\nK9 - K12\nK7 - K12\nK9 - K12 350 - 600\nK8 - K10\nK7 - K10\nK9 - K10 700 - 2000\nK7 - K10\nK7 - K10\nK9 - K10\n2.4 Minimum classes for screwed or welded on flange\npipes as per working criteria :\n* Pressure pipe lines for cast iron special for mechanical and push on flexible joints for water, gas and sewage.\nMINIMUM CLASS FOR DUCTILE IRON FLANGED PIPES\nNominal\nScrewed on Flange\nWelded on Flange\nDia\nMinimum\nMinimum\nPN 10\nPN 16\nPN 25\nPN 40\nPN 10\nPN 16\nPN 25\nPN 40 80 – 450 K 9 K 9 K 9 K 9\nK9\nK9\nK9\nK9\n500– 600\nK10\nK10\nK10\nK10\nK9\nK9\nK9\nK10\n700–1200\nK10\nK10\nK10 — K9\nK9\nK9 1400– 2000\nK10\nK10\n— — K9\nK9\n—\n—\nWhere PN is nom inal pressure. Nominal\n‘P’- Minimum Hydrostatic Test Pressure at Works, MPa\nDiameter (dn)\nmm\nCentrifugally cast pipes with\nPipes with screwed or flexible joints\nwelded-on flanges\nClass K7\nClass K8\nClass K9,\nPN10\nPN16\nPN25\nPN40 Class K10, Flange\nFlange\nFlange\nFlange\nClass K12\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\n80 to 300\n3.2\n4.0\n5.0\n1.6\n2.5\n3.2\n4.0\n350 to 600\n2.5\n3.2\n4.0\n1.6\n2.5\n3.2\n4.0\n700 to 1000\n1.8\n2.5\n3.2\n1.6\n2.5\n3.2\n—\n1100 to 2000\n1.2\n1.8\n2.5\n1.6\n2.5\n2.5\n—\nWhere “P” is the hydrostatic test pressure at works in MPa, maintained for atleast 10 s, and the pipe shall not show any sign of leakage, sweating or other defects.\n6. Dimensions\n6.1 Working Length — 4,5, 5.5 and 6 m for socket and\nspigot pipes, 4, 5 and 5.5 for flanged pipes.\n6.2 Nominal Diameter — 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250,\n300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 750, 800, 900, 1000, 1100,\n1200,1400, 1600, 1800 and 2000 mm.\n6.3 Wall Thickness — See 2.2.\n3. Joints\na)\nPush on joint b)\nFlanged joint c)\nFexible joints and Inter connection d)\nRestrained joints\nNote – For details see 6 of the standard.\n4. Rubber Gasket — As per IS 5382 : 1985 for\npush on joints and mechanical joints, and as per IS 638:\n1979 for flanged joints.\n5. Tests\n5.1. Tensile and Elongation\nNominal\nMinimum\nMinimum\nDiameter\nTensile\nElongation\n(dn) mm Strength at Break, MPa\nPercent 80 – 1000 420\n10\n1000 – 2000 420\n7\n5.2. Brindl hardness shall not exceed 230 HB.\n5.3. Hydrostatic test\n*Rubber sealing rings for Water, Mains, Gas and Sewer\n(first revision).\n++Sheet rubber jointing and Rubber insertion jointing\n(second Revision)\n7. Tolerances — See 15 of the standard.\n8. Coating —Any one of the following protection may\nbe applied depending upon the external condition of use :\nMetallic zinc with finishing layer.\nZinc rich paint with finishing layer, bituminous paint.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8329:2000 Centrifugally cast (spun) iron, pressure pipes for water, gas and sewage (third revision). 1. Scope — Requirements for cast iron detachable\njoints to be used with asbestos cement pressure pipes conforming to IS 1592 : 1989*.\n2. Metal —As per the prescribed standard.\n3. Requirements\n3.1 Brinells hardness — Not to exceed 215 HBS.\n3.2 Tensile strength — Min. of 150 MPa.\n3.3 Hydrostatic test — It should not show any leakage,\nor sweating or any other defect under a test pressure as per IS : 1592-1989 maintained for minimum of 15 seconds.\n4. Dimensions for Flanges and Collars\nNominal\nClass\nExternal\nDia\nDia of\nAC Pipe dn\nD2\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n80\n5,10,15\n99.5\n20\n101.5\n25\n106.5\n100\n5,10\n120.0\n15\n121.0\n20\n126.5\n25\n132.5\n125\n5,10\n145.0\n15\n147.0\n20\n152.5\n25\n159.5\n150\n5,10\n171.0\n15\n176.5\n20\n183.0\n25\n191.0\n200\n5\n221.0\n10\n225.0\n15\n233.5\n20\n242.5\n25\n253.5"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8794: 1988",
    "title": "Cast Iron Detachable Joints For Use With Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "(First Revision) Nominal Class External Dia Dia of AC Pipe dn D2 (1) (2) (3) 250 5 271.0 10 276.5 15 284.5 20 294.5 25 305.5 300 5 322.5 10 328.5 15 340.5 20 352.5 25 366.5 350 5,10 379.5 15 392.0 20 405.0 25 419.0 400 5,10 432.0 15 448.0 20 463.0 25 478.0 450 5,10 482.0 15 498.0 20 515.0 25 532.0 500 5,10 536.5 15 554.5 20 572.5 25 591.5 600 5,10 643.5 15 665.5 20 686.5 25 710.5 5. Coating 5.1 Coating shall not be applied to any part unless its surface is clean, dry and free from rust. 5.2 In a",
    "keywords": [
      "annex",
      "joints",
      "mortar",
      "cement",
      "paint",
      "lining",
      "pressure"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Hydrostatic Test": "Shall withstand the pressure test without showing any leakage at prescribed test pressure.",
      "Sizes": "Nominal sizes of 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 600, 700, 750, 800, 900, 1000, 1100, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800 and 2000 mm. Note – For dimensional and other requirements for socket/ spigot of push on joints, mechanical joints and flanges. See table 3 to 7 and for fittings table 15 to 31. Tolerances for various dimension of flanges shall be as given in tables 8 to 11. Tolerances in ovaliyty is as given in table 12 and 13. 6. Coating 6.1 External coatings one of the following a) Metallic zinc with finishing layer (Annex-A) b) Zinc rich paint with finishing layer (Annex-A) c) Bituminous paint (Annx C) d) External steerig (Annex D) 6.2 Internal lining — following lining may be applied. a) Post land cement (with or without additives) mortar (Annex-B) b) Blast furnace slag cement "
    },
    "content": "IS 8794: 1988 Cast Iron Detachable Joints For Use With Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes\n(First Revision)\nNominal\nClass\nExternal\nDia\nDia of\nAC Pipe dn\nD2 (1)\n(2)\n(3)\n250\n5\n271.0\n10\n276.5\n15\n284.5\n20\n294.5\n25\n305.5\n300\n5\n322.5\n10\n328.5\n15\n340.5\n20\n352.5\n25\n366.5\n350\n5,10\n379.5\n15 392.0\n20\n405.0\n25\n419.0\n400\n5,10\n432.0\n15\n448.0\n20\n463.0\n25\n478.0\n450\n5,10\n482.0\n15\n498.0\n20\n515.0\n25\n532.0\n500\n5,10\n536.5\n15\n554.5\n20\n572.5\n25\n591.5\n600\n5,10\n643.5\n15\n665.5\n20\n686.5\n25\n710.5\n5. Coating\n5.1 Coating shall not be applied to any part unless its\nsurface is clean, dry and free from rust.\n5.2 In all instances where the coating material has a tar\nor similar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious, and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature\nof 65°C but not so brittle at a temperature of 0°C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a pensknife.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8794 : 1988. Specification for cast iron detachable joints for use with asbestos cement pressure pipes (first revision).\n*Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes (Third Revision). 1. Scope\n1.1 Requirements for ductile iron fittings for pressure\npipes for water, gas and sewage sizes for 80 to 200mm nominal diameter .\n1.2 Applicable to fittings meant for mechanical joints\n(bolted gland), push on joints and flanged joints for jointing by means of various types of gasket. The design\nof socket and gasket are not within the scope.\n1.3 Does not restrict use and development of other types\nof joints as long as they maintain overall dimensions for safety and interchargability.\n1.4 Are normally supplied with externally and internally\ncoated to protect against corrosion.\n1.5 A suitable for fluid temperature between 0°C and\n50 cC excluding frost.\n2. General requirements\n2.1 Manufacture — Metal used for manufacture of\ncasting shall conform to the appropriate grade specified in IS 1865 : 1991*\n2.2 Thickness – C is calculated by using e = K ( 0.5 + 0.001 DN) where k = 14, 12 dn = Nominal Diameter\n3. Mechanical test\n3.1 Tensile test Nominal Type of Tensile Elongatton at Diameter casting Strength break, percent (Mpa) (Min) (Min) All size Fittings 420 5\n3.2 Hardness test— Shall not exceed 250 HBS.\n4. Hydrostatic test— Shall withstand the pressure\ntest without showing any leakage at prescribed test pressure.\n5. Sizes— Nominal sizes of 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250,\n300, 350, 400, 450, 600, 700, 750, 800, 900, 1000, 1100,\n1200, 1400, 1600, 1800 and 2000 mm.\nNote – For dimensional and other requirements for socket/\nspigot of push on joints, mechanical joints and flanges. See table 3 to 7 and for fittings table 15 to 31. Tolerances for\nvarious dimension of flanges shall be as given in tables 8 to\n11. Tolerances in ovaliyty is as given in table 12 and 13.\n6. Coating\n6.1 External coatings one of the following\na) Metallic zinc with finishing layer (Annex-A)\nb) Zinc rich paint with finishing layer (Annex-A)\nc) Bituminous paint (Annx C)\nd) External steerig (Annex D)\n6.2 Internal lining — following lining may be applied.\na)\nPost land cement (with or without additives)\nmortar (Annex-B)\nb)\nBlast furnace slag cement mortar (Annex-B)\nc)\nHigh alumina cement mortar (Aannex-B)\nd)\nCement mortar with seal coat (Annex B)\ne)\nBituminus- paint (Annex C)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9523: 2000",
    "title": "Ductile Iron Fittings For Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Specifies the dimensional requirements for rubber sealing rings to be used with cast iron detachable joints conforming to IS 8794 : 1988* for joining the asbestos cement pressure pipes conforming to IS 1592 : 1989+. This standard covers the dimensions of rubber sealing rings having circular cross section only, up to 600 mm nominal diameter.",
    "keywords": [
      "rings",
      "sealing",
      "rubber",
      "modular",
      "iron",
      "rubbr",
      "complied"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Specifies the dimensional requirements for rubber sealing rings to be used with cast iron detachable joints conforming to IS 8794 : 1988* for joining the asbestos cement pressure pipes conforming to IS 1592 : 1989+. This standard covers the dimensions of rubber sealing rings having circular cross section only, up to 600 mm nominal diameter.",
      "General": "Requirements of rubbr sealing rings as specified in IS 5382 : 1985, shall be complied with. The rubber rings shall conform to type 3 of IS 5382 : 1985."
    },
    "content": "IS 9523: 2000 Ductile Iron Fittings For Pressure Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage\n(First Revision)\n*Iron castings with spheroidal modular or modular graphite\n(third revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 9523 : 1980 Specification for ductile iron fittings, for pressure pipes for water gas and sewage. 1. Scope — Specifies the dimensional requirements\nfor rubber sealing rings to be used with cast iron detachable joints conforming to IS 8794 : 1988* for joining\nthe asbestos cement pressure pipes conforming to IS\n1592 : 1989+. This standard covers the dimensions of rubber sealing rings having circular cross section only,\nup to 600 mm nominal diameter.\n2. General — Requirements of rubbr sealing rings\nas specified in IS 5382 : 1985, shall be complied with.\nThe rubber rings shall conform to type 3 of IS 5382 :\n1985.\n3. Dimensions — See Table"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10292: 1988",
    "title": "Dimensional Requirements For Rubber",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for cast iron saddle piece for service connection from asbestos cement pressure pipes conforming to IS 1592 : 1989*",
    "keywords": [
      "asbestos",
      "rings",
      "sealing",
      "cement",
      "piping",
      "saddle",
      "dia"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Tolerances": "A tolerance of ± mm shall be allowed on the cross sectional dia. *Cast iron detachable joints for use with asbestos cement pressure pipes (first revision) +Asbestos cement pressure pipes (third revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 10292 : 1988. Specification for dimensional requirements for rubber sealing rings for C I D joints in asbestos cement piping (first revision). *Rubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains and sewers (first revision) 5.0 0",
      "Scope": "Requirements for cast iron saddle piece for service connection from asbestos cement pressure pipes conforming to IS 1592 : 1989*",
      "Metal": "As per the prescribed standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 10299 : 1982 Specification for cast iron saddle pieces for service connection from asbestos cement pressure pipes."
    },
    "content": "IS 10292: 1988 Dimensional Requirements For Rubber\nSEALING RINGS FOR C I D. JOINTS IN\nASBESTOS CEMENT PIPING\n(First Revision)\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF RUBBER SEALING RINGS\nNominal Dia of\nClass\nInner Dia\nCross Sectional\nNumber\nPipe and Joint\nY\nDia X\nPer Set mm\nmm\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n( 5) 80\n5,10,15,20\n90\n14\n2 25\n90\n14\n2\n100\n5,10,15,20\n109\n14\n2\n25\n115\n14\n2\n125\n5,10,15,20\n131\n14\n2\n25\n138\n14\n2\n150\n5,10,15,20\n155\n14\n2\n25\n165\n14\n2\n200\n5,10,15,20\n201\n14\n2\n25\n219\n14\n2\n250\n5,10,15,20\n246\n14\n2\n25\n264\n14\n2\n300\n5,10,15,20\n293\n14\n2\n25\n316\n14\n2\n350\n5,10,15,20 345\n16\n2\n25\n362\n16\n2\n400\n5,10,15,20\n392\n16\n2\n25\n412\n16\n2\n450\n5,10,15,20\n438\n18\n2\n25\n459\n18\n2\n500\n5,10,15,20\n487\n20\n2\n25\n510\n20\n2\n600\n5,10,15,20\n585\n20\n2\n25\n613\n20\n2\n4. Tolerances — A tolerance of ±\nmm shall be allowed on the cross sectional dia. *Cast iron detachable joints for use with asbestos cement pressure pipes (first revision) +Asbestos cement pressure pipes (third revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 10292 : 1988. Specification for dimensional requirements for rubber sealing rings for C I D joints in asbestos cement piping (first revision).\n*Rubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains and sewers (first revision)\n5.0\n0 1. Scope — Requirements for cast iron saddle piece\nfor service connection from asbestos cement pressure pipes conforming to IS 1592 : 1989*\n2. Metal —As per the prescribed standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 10299 : 1982 Specification for cast iron saddle pieces for service connection from asbestos cement pressure pipes."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10299: 1982",
    "title": "Cast Iron Saddle Pieces For Service Connection From Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Specifies the dimensional requirements for rubber gaskets to be used in cast iron pipes/fittings for the mechnical joints and push-on flexible joints for carrying water, gas and sewage.",
    "keywords": [
      "saddle",
      "boss",
      "strap",
      "gaskets",
      "joint",
      "hardness",
      "push"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Tests": "Minimum 150 MPa. 3.2 Brinell Hardness — Not more than 215 HB. 4. Dimensions see Table 1 TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR SADDLE PIECES Nominal Thickness of Width of Boss Boss Tapping Mass Diameter Saddle or Saddle or Diameter Thickness Size of Pipe Strap Strap (DN) (t) (b) (d) (t1) Max Kg (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 80 11 38 60 13 25 1.7 100 11 42 65 13 25 2.0 125 11 45 75 13 25 2.5 150 12 45 75 14 37 3.0 200 12 45 85 14 37 3.9 * Asbestos cement pressure pipes (third revision) 5. Tolerances Dimensions Tolerances mm Cored holes and other 2 dimensions Drilled holes 1.5",
      "Mass": "Shall be calculated by taking the density of the cast iron as 7.15 kg/dm3. Tolerance shall be –5 percent. No unit for plus tolerance is specified. 7. Coating 7.1 Coating shall not be applied to any part unless its surface is clean, dry and free from rust. 7.2 In all instances where the coating material has a tar or similar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of 77°C but not so brittle at a temperature of 0°C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a penknife. ± ±",
      "Scope": "Specifies the dimensional requirements for rubber gaskets to be used in cast iron pipes/fittings for the mechnical joints and push-on flexible joints for carrying water, gas and sewage.",
      "Requirement For Gaskets": "As per IS 5382 : 1985*. 3. Quality TABLE 1 TYPE OF RUBBER AND HARDNESS Joint Type of Rubber* Hardness IRHD Mechanical Joint 4 60 ± 5 — Bulb 2 50 ± 5 Push-on-joint — Heel5 80 4 + Refer to Table 1 of IS 5382 : 1985",
      "Dimensions": "Refer to the Figs. in the Standard. See Tables 2 and 3 ."
    },
    "content": "IS 10299: 1982 Cast Iron Saddle Pieces For Service Connection From Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes\n3. Tests\n3.1. Tensile test— Minimum 150 MPa.\n3.2 Brinell Hardness — Not more than 215 HB.\n4. Dimensions see Table 1\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR SADDLE PIECES\nNominal\nThickness of\nWidth of\nBoss\nBoss\nTapping\nMass\nDiameter\nSaddle or\nSaddle or\nDiameter\nThickness\nSize of Pipe\nStrap\nStrap\n(DN)\n(t)\n(b)\n(d)\n(t1)\nMax\nKg\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n80\n11\n38\n60\n13\n25\n1.7\n100\n11\n42\n65\n13\n25\n2.0\n125\n11\n45\n75\n13\n25\n2.5\n150\n12\n45\n75\n14\n37\n3.0\n200\n12\n45\n85\n14\n37\n3.9\n* Asbestos cement pressure pipes (third revision)\n5. Tolerances\nDimensions Tolerances mm\nCored holes and other 2 dimensions\nDrilled holes 1.5\n6. Mass— Shall be calculated by taking the density of\nthe cast iron as 7.15 kg/dm3. Tolerance shall be –5 percent. No unit for plus tolerance is specified.\n7. Coating\n7.1 Coating shall not be applied to any part unless its\nsurface is clean, dry and free from rust.\n7.2 In all instances where the coating material has a tar\nor similar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature\nof 77°C but not so brittle at a temperature of 0°C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a penknife.\n±\n± 1. Scope— Specifies the dimensional requirements\nfor rubber gaskets to be used in cast iron pipes/fittings for the mechnical joints and push-on flexible joints for\ncarrying water, gas and sewage.\n2. Requirement for Gaskets — As per IS 5382\n: 1985*.\n3. Quality\nTABLE 1 TYPE OF RUBBER AND HARDNESS\nJoint\nType of Rubber*\nHardness IRHD\nMechanical Joint\n4\n60 ± 5 — Bulb 2\n50 ± 5\nPush-on-joint — Heel5\n80 4\n+ Refer to Table 1 of IS 5382 : 1985\n4. Dimensions — Refer to the Figs. in the Standard.\nSee Tables 2 and 3 ."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12820: 2004",
    "title": "Dimensional Requirements Of Rubber Gaskets For Mechanical Joints And Push-On Joints For Use With Cast Iron Pipes And Fittings For Carrying Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Covers the requirements for cast iron detachable joints to be used with asbestos cement pressure pipes (light duty) conforming to IS 9627:1980.*",
    "keywords": [
      "gaskets",
      "rubber",
      "collars",
      "joints",
      "push",
      "heel",
      "bulb"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the requirements for cast iron detachable joints to be used with asbestos cement pressure pipes (light duty) conforming to IS 9627:1980.*",
      "Metal": "Prescribed Standard 3. Tests Requirements. 3.1 Tensile Strength — Minimum of 150 MPa. 3.2 Brinell Hardness — Not more than 215 HBs. 3.3 Hydrostatic test—May be carried out for collars only. The collars shall withstand the test pressure specified in Table 1 of IS 9627 : 1980 for 15 Seconds without showing any leakage, sweating or other defects. 4. Dimensions 4.1 Nominal Dia — 50, 80, 100, 125, 150, 200 mm with classes 5 and 10 for each Dia. for flanges and collars."
    },
    "content": "IS 12820: 2004 Dimensional Requirements Of Rubber Gaskets For Mechanical Joints And Push-On Joints For Use With Cast Iron Pipes And Fittings For Carrying Water, Gas And Sewage\n(First Revision)\nTABLE 2 DIMENSIONS OF RUBBER\nGASKETS FOR MECHANICAL\nJOINT\nAll dimensions in millimetres.\nNominal\nDimensions\nDiameter\nDN\nN\nQ\nR\nT\nU\nV\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n80\n130\n98\n32\n10\n16\n6\n100\n150\n118\n32\n10\n16\n6\n125\n176\n144\n32\n10\n16\n6\n150\n202\n170\n35\n10\n16\n6\n200\n254\n222\n35\n10\n16\n6\n250\n308\n274\n35\n10\n17\n6\n300\n360\n326\n35\n10\n17\n6\n350\n416\n378\n40\n10\n19\n8\n400\n467\n429\n40\n10\n19\n8\n450\n518\n480\n40\n10\n19\n8\n500\n570\n532\n45\n10\n20\n8\n600\n675\n635\n45\n10\n20\n8\n700\n788\n738\n45\n10\n25\n8\n750\n840\n790\n45\n10\n25\n8\n800\n892\n842\n45\n15\n25\n8\n900\n995\n945\n45\n15\n25\n8\n1000\n1098\n1048\n45\n15\n25\n8\n1050\n1184\n1124\n50\n15\n30\n10\n1100\n1220\n1152\n55\n20\n34\n10\n1200\n1324\n1256\n55\n20\n34\n10\n1500\n1635\n1567\n60\n20\n34\n10\nTABLE 3 DIMENSIONS OF RUBBER GASKETS FOR PUSH-ON JOINTS\nNominal Diameter\nBulb\nHeel\nHeight dn\nC\nJ A\nD\nN\nB\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5) (6)\n(7) 80\n16 122\n10\n5 124\n26\n100\n16 142\n10\n5 144\n26 125\n16 169\n10\n5 171\n26 150\n16 196\n10\n5 198\n26 200\n18 252.5\n11\n6 254.5\n30 250\n18 306\n11\n6 308\n32 300\n20 362.5\n12\n7 364.5\n34 350\n20 416\n12\n7 418\n34 400\n22 472\n13\n8 474\n38 450\n22 525\n13\n8 527\n38 500\n24 580\n14\n9 582\n42 600\n26 689\n15\n10 691\n46 700\n29 799\n17.5\n10 801.5\n51 750\n30 854\n18.5\n10.3 856.5\n52.5 800\n30 906\n18.5\n10.3 908.5\n52.5 900\n30\n1009\n18.5\n10.3\n1012\n52.5\n1000\n30\n1118\n18.5\n10.3\n1120\n52.5\n1050 30.5\n1181\n19\n10.3\n1183\n52.5\n+ Rubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains and sewers\n(first revision)\n± 5. Tolerances\nTABLE 4 TOLERANCES ON DIMENSIONS OF\nRUBBER GASKETS FOR MECHANICAL JOINTS\nSl.No.\nDimension\nNominal\nTolerances\nDiameter (mm)\n(mm)\ni)\nThickness, U\n80 to 600\n±1.0\n700 to 1500\n±1.5 ii)\nInternal diameter, Q\n80 to 300\n±1.5\n350 & 400\n±2.0\n450 to 600\n±3.0\n700 to 1500\n±4.0 iii)\nWidth, R\n80 to 600\n±5.0\n700 to 1500\n±8.0 iv)\nDimension, V\n80 to 600\n±2.0\n700 to 1500\n±3.0 v)\nDimension, T\n80 to 750\n±2.0\n800 to 1500\n±4.0\nTABLE 5 TOLERANCES ON DIMENSIONS OF\nRUBBER GASKETS FOR PUSH-ON JOINTS\nSl.No.\nDimension\nNominal Diameter Tolerances (mm) (mm)\ni)\nBulb\nC\n80 to 600\n±0.5\n250 to 1050\n± 0.8\n700 to 1050\n±1.0\nJ\n80 to 125\n±1.0\n50 to 300\n±1.5\n350 & 400\n±2.0\n450 to 600\n±3.0\n700 to 800\n±4.0\n900 to1050\n±6.0 ii)\nHeel\nA\n80 to 250\n±0.5\n300 to 450\n±0.6\n500 to 1050\n±0.8\nD\n80 to 250\n±0.3\n300 to 700\n±0.4\n750 to 1050\n±0.5\nN\n80 to 125\n±1.0\n150 to 300\n±1.5\n350 & 400\n±2.0\n450 to 600\n±3.0\n700 to 800\n±4.0\n900 to 1050\n±6.0 iii)\nHeight\nB\n80 to150\n±0.5\n200 to 600\n±0.8\n700 to1050\n±1.0\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12820 : 2004. Specification for dimensional requirements of rubber gaskets for mechanical joints and push-on-joints for use with cast iron pipes and\nfittings for carrying water, gas and sewage (first revision)\nFIG. 1 & 2 1. Scope — Covers the requirements for cast iron\ndetachable joints to be used with asbestos cement pressure pipes (light duty) conforming to IS 9627:1980.*\n2. Metal —Prescribed Standard\n3. Tests Requirements.\n3.1 Tensile Strength — Minimum of 150 MPa.\n3.2 Brinell Hardness — Not more than 215 HBs.\n3.3 Hydrostatic test—May be carried out for collars\nonly. The collars shall withstand the test pressure specified in Table 1 of IS 9627 : 1980 for 15 Seconds\nwithout showing any leakage, sweating or other defects.\n4. Dimensions\n4.1 Nominal Dia — 50, 80, 100, 125, 150, 200 mm with\nclasses 5 and 10 for each Dia. for flanges and collars."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12987: 1991",
    "title": "Cast Iron Detachable Joints For Use With Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes (Light Duty)",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Specifies the dimensional requirement for rubber sealing rings to be used with cast iron detachable joints conforming to IS : 12987 : 1991* for joining light duty asbestos cement pressure pipes conforming to IS : 9627 1980*",
    "keywords": [
      "detachable",
      "asbestos",
      "iron",
      "duty",
      "pipes",
      "tar",
      "cast"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Specifies the dimensional requirement for rubber sealing rings to be used with cast iron detachable joints conforming to IS : 12987 : 1991* for joining light duty asbestos cement pressure pipes conforming to IS : 9627 1980* 2. General 2.1 The rubber sealing rings shall conform to the general requirement and type 3 of IS 5382:1985++ 3. Dimensions"
    },
    "content": "IS 12987: 1991 Cast Iron Detachable Joints For Use With Asbestos Cement Pressure Pipes (Light Duty)\nNote — Nominal diameter of detachable joint shall refer to\nthe corresponding nominal diameter of the asbestos cement pressure pipes.\n5. Coatings\n5.1 Coating shall not be applied to any part unless its\nsurface is clean, dry and free from rust\n5.2 All cast iron parts shall be coated externally and\ninternally with the same material; the parts being preheated prior to total immersion in a bath containing a\nuniformly heated bituminous/tar or other suitable base.\nNote — Coal tar should not be used in cast iron detachable\njoints used with AC pipes for carrying potable water.\n5.3 In all instances where the coating material has a tar\nor similar base, it shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature\nof 66°C but not so brittle at a temperature of 0°C as to chip off when scribed lightly with a penknife.\n*Asbestos cement pressure pipes (light duty).\n+Grey iron castings (fourth revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12987 : 1991 Specification for cast Iron detachable joints for use with asbestos cement pressure pipes (light duty). 1.\nScope —Specifies the dimensional requirement for rubber sealing rings to be used with cast iron detachable\njoints conforming to IS : 12987 : 1991* for joining light duty asbestos cement pressure pipes conforming to IS\n: 9627 1980*\n2.\nGeneral\n2.1 The rubber sealing rings shall conform to the general\nrequirement and type 3 of IS 5382:1985++\n3. Dimensions"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12988: 1991",
    "title": "Dimensional Requirements For Rubber Sealing Rings For Cid Joints For Light Duty",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for cast iron special castings to be used with pressure pipes for carrying water, gas and sewage for sizes from DN 80 mm up to 1 500 mm cast iron and ductile iron. 1.2. This standard is applicable to fittings meant for mechanical joints (bolted gland), push-on-joints (single rubber gasket) and flanged joints.",
    "keywords": [
      "joints",
      "pipes",
      "duty",
      "rubber",
      "rings",
      "sealing",
      "light"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for cast iron special castings to be used with pressure pipes for carrying water, gas and sewage for sizes from DN 80 mm up to 1 500 mm cast iron and ductile iron.",
      "This Standard Is Applicable To Fittings Meant For Mechanical Joints (Bolted Gland), Push": "on-joints (single rubber gasket) and flanged joints.",
      "Metal": "Shall conform to appropiate grade of IS 210 : 1993* 3. Joints 3.1 In case of push-on joints the spigot ends of pipes and fittings shall be suitably chamfered for smooth entry of pipe in the socket of the casting fitted with rubber gasket. 3.2 In case of flange and mechanical joint castings, the flanges shall be at right angle to the axis of the joint. The bolt holes shall be cored or drilled."
    },
    "content": "IS 12988: 1991 Dimensional Requirements For Rubber Sealing Rings For Cid Joints For Light Duty\nAC PIPES – DIMENSIONAL REQUIREMENTS\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12988 : 1991 Specification for rubber sealing rings for\nCID joints for light duty AC pipes–Dimensional requirements. * Rubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains and sewers\n(first revision).\n† Asbestos cement pressure pipes (light duty).\n‡ Cast Iron detachable joints for use with asbestos cement pressure pipes (Light Duty).\nNominal\nClass\nInner Dia\nCross Number Dia of Pipe\n“φY” Sectional Per\n& Joint Dia,φ X”\nSet mm\nmm mm\n50\n5 and 10\n60\n10\n2\n80\n5 and 10\n90\n14\n2\n100\n5 and 10\n109\n14\n2\n125\n5 and 10\n131\n14\n2\n150\n5 and 10\n155\n14\n2\n200\n5 and 10\n201\n14\n2\n4. Tolerances\n4.1 A tolerance of shall be alllowed on cross sectional diameter “ØX” and ± 1 percenton inner dia\n“ØY”.\nFIG. 1 RUBBER SEALING RINGS FOR LIGHT DUTY AC PIPES\nmm mm\n5.0\n0.0\n+\n− 1. Scope — Requirements for cast iron special\ncastings to be used with pressure pipes for carrying water, gas and sewage for sizes from DN 80 mm up to 1\n500 mm cast iron and ductile iron.\n1.2. This standard is applicable to fittings meant for mechanical joints (bolted gland), push-on-joints (single\nrubber gasket) and flanged joints.\n2. Metal — Shall conform to appropiate grade of\nIS 210 : 1993*\n3. Joints\n3.1 In case of push-on joints the spigot ends of pipes\nand fittings shall be suitably chamfered for smooth entry of pipe in the socket of the casting fitted with\nrubber gasket.\n3.2 In case of flange and mechanical joint castings, the\nflanges shall be at right angle to the axis of the joint.\nThe bolt holes shall be cored or drilled."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13382: 2004",
    "title": "Cast Iron Specials For Mechanical And Push On Flexible Joints For Pressure Pipe Lines For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "(First revision) 3.3 The bolt hole circles shall be concentric with the bore and shall be located off the centre line, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser. Where there are two or more flanges, the bolt holes shall be correctly aligned. 3.4 The flanges shall be plain faced over the contact surface with a tool mark finishing having a pitch of 1 0.3 mm, serrations may be spiral or concentric. 4. Rubber Gaskets – Shall conform to IS 12820 : 1989+ 5. Tests Requirement 5.1 Tensile Test — Minim",
    "keywords": [
      "castings",
      "flanges",
      "branches",
      "push",
      "principal",
      "concentric",
      "off"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Rubber Gaskets": "Shall conform to IS 12820 : 1989+ 5. Tests Requirement 5.1 Tensile Test — Minimum 150 MPa. 5.2 Hardness Test — Not more than 210 HBS. 5.3 Hydrostatic Test — shall not show leakage, sweating or any other defect, under test pressures given below and maintained for 15 s. Nominal Test Presure Diameter dn Castings without Branches Castings with Branches or with Branches not Greater Greater than Half the than Half the Principal Dia Principal Diameter mm MPa MPa (1) (2) (3) Up to and including 300 2.5 2.5 Over 300 and upto 2.0 2.0 and including 600 Over 600 and upto 1.5 1.0 and including 1 500 * Grey iron castings (fourth revision) †Dimensional requirements of rubber gaskets and push-on joints for use with cast iron pipes and fittings for carrying water, gas and sewage. ± For detailed information",
      "Sizes Nominal Diameter Of The Casting": "80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700,750, 800, 900,1 000, 1 050, 1 100, 1 200 and 1 500. Note — 1 For dimensional and other requirements for socket/ spigot of push on joints mechanicaljoints and flanges see section 2 = ( Tables 5 to10) of the standard. Note — 2 For dimensional and other requirements for castings see section 3 (Tables 11 to 34) of the standard. 7. Tolerances 7.1 Tolerances on Thickness —Tolerances on wall thickness and flange thickness of fittings are limited as follows : Dimensions Tolerances mm Wall thickness -(2+0.05 e) Flange thickness (3+0.05b) Where e = standard thickness of the wall in millimetres, and b = standard thickness of the flanges in millimetres. Note — No limit for the plus tolerances is specified. 7.2 Tolerances on Lengths — Toler"
    },
    "content": "IS 13382: 2004 Cast Iron Specials For Mechanical And Push On Flexible Joints For Pressure Pipe Lines For Water, Gas And Sewage\n(First revision)\n3.3 The bolt hole circles shall be concentric with the\nbore and shall be located off the centre line, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser. Where there are\ntwo or more flanges, the bolt holes shall be correctly aligned.\n3.4 The flanges shall be plain faced over the contact\nsurface with a tool mark finishing having a pitch of 1\n0.3 mm, serrations may be spiral or concentric.\n4. Rubber Gaskets – Shall conform to IS 12820 :\n1989+\n5. Tests Requirement\n5.1 Tensile Test — Minimum 150 MPa.\n5.2 Hardness Test — Not more than 210 HBS.\n5.3 Hydrostatic Test — shall not show leakage,\nsweating or any other defect, under test pressures given below and maintained for 15 s.\nNominal\nTest Presure\nDiameter dn\nCastings without Branches\nCastings with Branches or with Branches not Greater\nGreater than Half the than Half the Principal Dia\nPrincipal Diameter mm\nMPa\nMPa\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\nUp to and including 300\n2.5\n2.5\nOver 300 and upto\n2.0\n2.0 and including 600\nOver 600 and upto\n1.5\n1.0 and including 1 500\n* Grey iron castings (fourth revision)\n†Dimensional requirements of rubber gaskets and push-on joints for use with cast iron pipes and fittings for carrying water, gas\nand sewage.\n± For detailed information, refer to IS 13382 : 2004. Specification for cast Iron specials for mechanical and push-on flexible joints for pressure pipe lines for water, gas and sewage (first\nrevision)\n6. Sizes Nominal Diameter of the casting — 80, 100,\n125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700,750,\n800, 900,1 000, 1 050, 1 100, 1 200 and 1 500.\nNote — 1 For dimensional and other requirements for socket/\nspigot of push on joints mechanicaljoints and flanges see section 2 = ( Tables 5 to10) of the standard.\nNote — 2 For dimensional and other requirements for castings\nsee section 3 (Tables 11 to 34) of the standard.\n7. Tolerances\n7.1\nTolerances on Thickness —Tolerances on wall thickness and flange thickness of fittings are limited\nas follows :\nDimensions\nTolerances mm\nWall thickness\n-(2+0.05 e)\nFlange thickness (3+0.05b)\nWhere e = standard thickness of the wall in millimetres, and b = standard thickness of the flanges in millimetres.\nNote — No limit for the plus tolerances is specified.\n7.2 Tolerances on Lengths — Tolerances on lengths\nof fittings normally manufactured shall be as follows\nType of Fitting\nLength\nDeviation / Tolerance mm\nFlanged scket\nL\nDN 80 to 1 200 : ± 25\nFlanged spigot\nDN 1 400 to 1 600 : ± 35 collar & taper\nBend 90o\nL\n± (15 + 0.03 DN )\nBend 45o\nL\n± (10 + 0.025 DN)\nBend 221/2o\nL\nDN 80 to DN 1 000 :\nand 111/4o\n± (10 + 0.02 DN)\nDN 1 200 to 1 600 :\n± (10 ± 0.025 DN)\nTee\nL and h DN 80 to 1 200 : +50\n– 25\nDN 1 400 to 1 600: + 75\n– 35\nNote: For details on tolerances, see 12 of the standard.\n8. Coating\n8.1 The coating material shall set rapidly with good\nadherence and shall not scale off.\n8.2 Where the coating material has a tar or similar base,\nit shall be smooth and tenacious and hard enough not to flow when exposed to a temperature of 65°C but not\nso brittle at a temperature of 0°C as to chip off when scribed with a penknife.\n±"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 11925: 1986",
    "title": "Pitch Impregnated Fibre Pipes And Fittings For Draingage Purposes",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Covers materials, dimension and methods of testing of pitch impregnated fibre pipes and fittings in diametrs ranging from 50 to 200 mm for drainage purposes below and above ground level. 1.2 The standard also covers perforated pipes of the same materials for sub-surface drainage.",
    "keywords": [
      "couplings",
      "polypropylene",
      "joints",
      "pipes",
      "coupling",
      "crushing",
      "fittings"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers materials, dimension and methods of testing of pitch impregnated fibre pipes and fittings in diametrs ranging from 50 to 200 mm for drainage purposes below and above ground level. 1.2 The standard also covers perforated pipes of the same materials for sub-surface drainage. 2. Material 2.1 Pipes shall consist of a preformed felted fibrous structure impregnated, with pitch, bitumen or other no less suitable compound. 2.2 Couplings and fittings shall be made of : a) The same material as the pipe, or b) Polypropylene or other plastics material no less suitable, or c) Mineral fibre moulded from an inert aggregate mixed with an inorganic cement and impregnated with pitch, bitumen or other no less suitable material. 3. General 3.1 Pipes 3.1.1 Length —Between 1.5 to 3.5 m with a tolerance o",
      "Fittings": "Shall be either moulded to shape, or fabricated from pipe prior to impregnation. 5.2 Polypropylene fittings shall be black and consist of polypropylene polymer or copolymer composed principally of isotatic polypropylene together with suitably compounded stabilizers, lubricants and fillers. 5.3 Body Wall Thickness of Polypropylene Fittings— Nominal Bore, mm Minimum thickness 50 75 100 125 150 200 225 below ground work 3.5 3.5 4.0 5.2 5.2 7.0 7.0 Minimum thickness 2.7 2.7 2.7 3.8 3.8 3.8 3.8 above ground work ± ± Note—IS 5382 : 1985 Rubber sealing rings for gas gains, water mains and sewers (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 11925 : 1986 Specification for pitch impregnated fibre pipes and fittings for drainage purposes. 6. Test 6.1 Pipes, Couplings and Fittings (except p",
      "Tests For Joints": "Shall be capable of withstandig the specified internal hydraulic pressure . (kg per coupling)"
    },
    "content": "IS 11925: 1986 Pitch Impregnated Fibre Pipes And Fittings For Draingage Purposes\n1. Scope — Covers materials, dimension and methods\nof testing of pitch impregnated fibre pipes and fittings in diametrs ranging from 50 to 200 mm for drainage\npurposes below and above ground level.\n1.2 The standard also covers perforated pipes of the\nsame materials for sub-surface drainage.\n2. Material\n2.1 Pipes shall consist of a preformed felted fibrous\nstructure impregnated, with pitch, bitumen or other no less suitable compound.\n2.2 Couplings and fittings shall be made of :\na)\nThe same material as the pipe, or b) Polypropylene or other plastics material no less\nsuitable, or c)\nMineral fibre moulded from an inert aggregate mixed with an inorganic cement and impregnated\nwith pitch, bitumen or other no less suitable material.\n3. General\n3.1 Pipes\n3.1.1 Length —Between 1.5 to 3.5 m with a tolerance of 25 mm. Variation from straight length maximum\n1 in 100.\nNominal Diameter of Pipes Nominal Bore, mm\nLimites of internal\n50 75\n100 125\n150 200 225 diameter, mm\nMinimum\n50 75\n100 125\n150 200 225\nMaximum\n54 80\n106 133\n160 213 239\n3.1.2 Pipes shall be made with ends suitable for the joint specified; square cut plain ends for snap joints\nand “C” coupling joints and with machined ends for taper coupling joints, soil “O” ring joints and for spigot\nand socket joints.\n3.2 Perforated Pipes\n3.2.1 Perforations shall be evenly spaced on rows parallel to the axis of the pipe.\n3.2.2 The perforations shall be not less than 5 mm dia and not greater than 16 mm dia and the spacing in any\nrow of perforations shall be 150 10 mm between adjacent holes in that row.\nFor pipes up to 100 mm bore there shall be two rows of holes and for larger sizes there shall be four rows of\nholes.\nThe centre lines of all perforations shall be contained within an arc of 160° and shall be cleanly drilled\n4. Joints and Couplings\na)\nTaper Cupling Joint b)\nSnap ring joint.\nc)\nSoil pipe “O” ring joints.\nd)\nSpigot and socket or rebated joints.\ne)\nJoints “C” coupling joints.\nNote— For details refer to 5 of the standard.\n5. Fittings — Shall be either moulded to shape, or\nfabricated from pipe prior to impregnation.\n5.2 Polypropylene fittings shall be black and consist\nof polypropylene polymer or copolymer composed principally of isotatic polypropylene together with\nsuitably compounded stabilizers, lubricants and fillers.\n5.3 Body Wall Thickness of Polypropylene Fittings— Nominal Bore, mm\nMinimum thickness 50 75\n100 125\n150 200 225 below ground work 3.5 3.5\n4.0\n5.2\n5.2\n7.0 7.0\nMinimum thickness 2.7 2.7\n2.7\n3.8\n3.8 3.8 3.8 above ground work ±\n± Note—IS 5382 : 1985 Rubber sealing rings for gas gains, water mains and sewers (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 11925 : 1986 Specification for pitch impregnated fibre pipes and fittings for drainage purposes.\n6. Test\n6.1 Pipes, Couplings and Fittings (except plastic\nmaterials).\n6.1.1 Chemical resistance — Shall not show any evidence of softening or disintegration\n6.1.2 Water Absorption — Gain in mass, expressed as a percentage of the original mass, shall not exceed 2\npercent.\n6.1.3 Resistance to Boiling Water — Shall show no sign of disintegration or seperation into laminations.\n6.1.4 Heat resistance — Shall show no appreciable distortion and no appreciable exudation of impregnant.\n6.1.5 Resistance to flattening (pipe only)— Neither test piece shall show a decrease in diameter exceeding 3\npercent at the point of application of the load.\n6.1.6 Crushing strength test — When tested for dry crushing wet crushing, resistance to kerosene, crushing\nafter boiling water and crushing strength for coupling and fittings, the load at rupture shall not be less than\nthat shown below: Nominal Bore, mm 50 75\n100\n125\n150 200 225\nPipes kg per m\n1640\n1640\n1640\n1940\n1940\n2380\n2530 kg per test length\n500\n500 500\n590 590\n725\n760\nCouplings\n122\n143 169\n195 195\n304\n317\n6.1.7. Test of adhesive used in fabricated fittings —\nShall with stand, without fracture of the joint, on drop of 3.520.05 kg weight through its full distance of 1800mm.\n6.2. Couplings and Fittings of Plastic Materials. 6.2.1. Impact test— Shall show no evidence of open or closed cracking either on inside on outside surface when\ntested as per the prescribed procedures.\n6.2.2. Tensile strength of weld line — The ring shall not fracture shilst being driven the specified distance.\n6.3. Tests for Joints— Shall be capable of withstandig the specified internal hydraulic pressure . (kg per coupling)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 404 (Part 1): 1993",
    "title": "Lead Pipes – For Other Than Chemical Purposes",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements of lead pipes for other than chemical purposes. The lead pipes covered in this standard are not suitable for potable water supply.",
    "keywords": [
      "lead",
      "drift",
      "pipes",
      "chemical",
      "expansion",
      "tellurium",
      "pronounced"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of lead pipes for other than chemical purposes. The lead pipes covered in this standard are not suitable for potable water supply. 2. Freedom from Defects: Shall be sound in all respect and free from laminations, flaws, pronounced extrusion marks or other harmful defects and shall, as far as possible, be circular in cross section, smooth and of uniform wall thickness throughout. 3. Chemical Composition Chemical Composition of Lead Pipes Constituent Grade 1 Grade 2 Percent Percent (1) (2) (3) Lead, Min 99.80 99.25 Antimony, Max 0.06 0.10 Copper, Max — 0.07 Tellurium, Max 0.005 — Tin, Max 0.075 0.50 Zinc, Max — 0.005 Total of all impurities Max 0.20 0.75 4. Nominal Diameters (internal) 10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80,100 and 125 mm. 5. Thickness 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8 and 10 mm",
      "Drift Expansion Test": "Shall meet the requirements specified below Drift Expanding Test Nominal Upto Angle of Minimum ID mm and Mandrel Expansion Over Including Degree in OD Percent (1) (2) (3) (4) 10 15 23 100 15 25 35 100 25 — 35 75 For detailed information, refer to IS 404 (Part) : 1993 Specification for lead pipes–for other than chemical purposes (third revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 404 (Part 1): 1993 Lead Pipes – For Other Than Chemical Purposes\n(Third Revision)\n1. Scope — Requirements of lead pipes for other\nthan chemical purposes. The lead pipes covered in this standard are not suitable for potable water supply.\n2. Freedom from Defects: Shall be sound in all\nrespect and free from laminations, flaws, pronounced extrusion marks or other harmful defects and shall, as\nfar as possible, be circular in cross section, smooth and of uniform wall thickness throughout.\n3. Chemical Composition\nChemical Composition of Lead Pipes\nConstituent Grade 1 Grade 2 Percent Percent (1) (2) (3)\nLead, Min 99.80 99.25\nAntimony, Max 0.06 0.10\nCopper, Max — 0.07\nTellurium, Max 0.005 —\nTin, Max 0.075 0.50\nZinc, Max — 0.005 Total of all impurities Max 0.20 0.75\n4. Nominal Diameters (internal)\n10, 13, 16, 20, 25, 30, 40,\n50, 60, 80,100 and 125 mm.\n5. Thickness\n2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8 and 10 mm.\n6. Tolerances\n6.1 The tolerance on the nominal internal diameter\nshall be + 0% and — 5%.\n6.2 The tolerance on wall thickness shall be ± 7.5\npercent.\n7. Drift Expansion Test — Shall meet the\nrequirements specified below\nDrift Expanding Test\nNominal\nUpto\nAngle of\nMinimum\nID mm and\nMandrel\nExpansion\nOver\nIncluding\nDegree in OD\nPercent\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n10\n15\n23\n100\n15\n25\n35\n100\n25\n—\n35\n75\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 404 (Part) : 1993 Specification for lead pipes–for other than chemical purposes (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3076: 1985",
    "title": "Low Density Polyethylene Pipes For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for low density black polyethylene pipes of outside diameters up to 140 mm for use in potable water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "pipes",
      "rating",
      "black",
      "polyethylene",
      "density",
      "pressure",
      "pipe"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for high density polyethylene pipes from 16 mm to 1000 mm nominal diameter of pressure rating from 0.25 MPa to 1.6 MPa in material grades of PE 63, PE 80, and PE 100, for use for buried water mains and services and for water supply above ground, both inside and outside buildings. 2. Designation 2.1 Pipes shall be designated according to the grade of material followed by pressure rating and nominal diameter. For example, PE 63 PN 10 DN 200 indicates a pipe pertaining to materail grade 63, pressure rating 1.0 MPa and outside nominal diameter 200 mm. 2.2 Classification of Pipe Material Sl. Material MRS Maximum No. Grade (Minimum Required Allowable Strength) of Hydrostatic Material in MPa Design Stress at 20°C, 50 years (σ) MPa At 20°C At 30°C (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) i) PE 63 6.3 5.0 ",
      "Visual Appearance": "The internal and external surfaces of the pipes shall be smooth, clean, and free from groovings and other defects. The ends shall be cleanly cut and shall be square with the axis of the pipe. 6. Performance Requirements 6.1 Hydraulic Characteristics— When subjected to internal pressure creep rupture test the pipe shall show no signs of localized swelling, leakage or weeping and shall not rupture during the prescribed test duration. The temperatures, durations of test and stresses for quality and acceptance tests shall be as given in Table 2. Note — For melthod of test refer to 6 of the Standard For detailed information, refer to IS 3076 : 1985 Specification for low density, polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies. (second revision). 6.2 Reversion Test— The dimension shall not change ",
      "Supply Of Pipes": "The pipes shall be supplied on coil of nominal lengths 25, 50, 100, 150 and 200 m.",
      "Colour": "Shall be black 4. Material 4.1 High Density Polyethylene — High density polyethylene (HDPE) used for the manufacture of pipes shall conform to dsignation PEEWA-45-T-006 of IS 7328 : 1992*. HDPE conforming to designation PEEWA-45- T-012 of IS 7328 : 1992 may also be used with the exception that melt flow rating (MFR) shall not exceed 1.10 g / 10 minutes. In addition the material shall also conform to 5.6.2 of IS 7328:1992. The specified base density shall be between 940.5 kg/m3 and 946.4 kg/m3 (both inclusive) when determined at 27°C. The value of the density shall also not differ from the nominal value by more than 3 kg/m3. The MFR of the material shall be between 0.41 and 1.10 (both inclusive) when tested at 190°C with nominal load of 5 kg. The resin shall be compounded with carbon black."
    },
    "content": "IS 3076: 1985 Low Density Polyethylene Pipes For Potable Water Supplies\n(Second Revision)\n1. Scope — Requirements for low density black\npolyethylene pipes of outside diameters up to 140 mm for use in potable water supplies.\n2. Classification\nClass of Pipe WorkingPressure at 27°C\nClass 1\n0.25 MPa\nClass 2\n0.4 MPa\nClass 3\n0.6 MPa\nClass 4\n1.0 MPa\nNote — The above pipes are recomended for water\ntemperature ranging from –40oC to +38oC. The crecp rupture shergth of the pipe diminishes with the increase in temperature\nabove 20oC and therefor the working pressure should be modified as gives in figure of the wtameland.\n3. Material\n3.1 The low density polyethylene shall have a base\ndensity (virgin polymer) of not more than 0.928 g/ml at\n27°C.\nDIMENSION OF LOW DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPES\nAll dimensionsin millimetres\nOutside\nTolerance\nDiameter on Outside\nWall Thickness for Working Pressures\nDiameter\nClass 1\nClass 2\nClas 3\nClass 4\n(0.25 MPa)\n(0.4 MPa)\n(0.6 MPa)\n(1.0 MPa)\nMin\nMax\nMin\nMax\nMin\nMax Min Max\n(1) (2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8) (9) (10)\n10\n+0.3\n—\n—\n—\n—\n—\n— — —\n12\n+0.3\n—\n—\n—\n—\n—\n— 2.0 2.4\n16\n+0.3\n—\n—\n—\n—\n—\n—\n2.7\n3.2\n20\n+0.3\n—\n—\n—\n—\n2.2\n2.7 3.3 3.9\n25\n+0.3\n—\n—\n—\n—\n2.7\n3.2 4.2 4.9\n32\n+0.3\n—\n—\n2.4\n2.9\n3.4\n4.0 5.3 6.1\n40\n+0.4\n1.9\n2.3\n3.0\n3.5\n4.3\n5.0 6.6 7.5\n50\n+0.5\n2.4\n2.9\n3.7\n4.3\n5.3\n6.1 8.3 9.4\n63\n+0.6\n3.0\n3.5\n4.7\n5.4\n6.7 7.6 10.4 11.7\n75\n+0.7\n3.6\n4.2\n5.5\n6.3\n8.0\n9.0 — —\n90\n+0.8\n4.3\n5.0\n6.6\n7.5\n9.6\n10.8 — —\n110\n+1.0\n5.2\n6.0\n8.1\n9.2\n11.7\n13.1 — —\n125\n+1.2\n5.9\n6.7\n9.2\n10.4\n—\n— — —\n140\n+1.3\n6.6\n7.5\n10.3\n11.6\n—\n— — —\n3.2 The material used for extrusion shall be dried to\nbring the moisture content to less than 0.1 percent by mass.\n3.3 The percentage of antioxidant used shall be not\nmore than 0.3 percent by mass.\n3.4 The carbon black used shall comply with the\nfollowing :\na)\nDensity : 1.5 to 2.0 g/ml.\nb)\nVolatile matter : not more than 9 percent when tested in accordance with Appendix A of the Standard.\nc)\nToluene extract : not more than 0.1 percent by mass when determined by the method in Appendix B of the\nStandard.\nd)\nThe percentage of carbon black in the material shall be\n2.5 + 0.5 by mass, and e)\nThe dispersion of carbon black shall be satisfactory.\n4. Dimensions 5. Visual Appearance— The internal and external\nsurfaces of the pipes shall be smooth, clean, and free from groovings and other defects. The ends shall be\ncleanly cut and shall be square with the axis of the pipe.\n6. Performance Requirements\n6.1 Hydraulic Characteristics— When subjected to\ninternal pressure creep rupture test the pipe shall show no signs of localized swelling, leakage or weeping and\nshall not rupture during the prescribed test duration.\nThe temperatures, durations of test and stresses for quality and acceptance tests shall be as given in\nTable 2.\nNote — For melthod of test refer to 6 of the Standard\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3076 : 1985 Specification for low density, polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies. (second revision).\n6.2 Reversion Test— The dimension shall not change\nby more than 3 percent in the longitudinal direction.\n6.3 Tensile Test\nThickness of\nTensile Strength\nElongation\nPipe Wall\nMin at Break\nMin\n≤5 mm\n8.85 MPa\n350 percent\n> 5 mm\n8.85 MPa\n200 percent\n7. Supply of Pipes — The pipes shall be supplied\non coil of nominal lengths 25, 50, 100, 150 and 200 m. 1. Scope — Requirements for high density\npolyethylene pipes from 16 mm to 1000 mm nominal diameter of pressure rating from 0.25 MPa to 1.6 MPa in\nmaterial grades of PE 63, PE 80, and PE 100, for use for buried water mains and services and for water supply\nabove ground, both inside and outside buildings.\n2. Designation\n2.1\nPipes shall be designated according to the grade of material followed by pressure rating and nominal\ndiameter. For example, PE 63 PN 10 DN 200 indicates a pipe pertaining to materail grade 63, pressure rating\n1.0 MPa and outside nominal diameter 200 mm.\n2.2\nClassification of Pipe Material\nSl.\nMaterial\nMRS\nMaximum\nNo.\nGrade (Minimum Required\nAllowable\nStrength) of\nHydrostatic\nMaterial in MPa\nDesign Stress at 20°C, 50 years\n(σ) MPa\nAt 20°C\nAt 30°C\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\ni)\nPE 63\n6.3\n5.0\n4.0 ii)\nPE 80\n8.0\n6.3\n5.0 iii)\nPE 100\n10.0\n8.0\n6.3\n2.3 Pressure Rating —Pipes shall be classified by\npressure rating (PN) corresponding to the maximum permissible working pressure at 30°C, as follows :\nPressure Rating\nMaximum Permissile of Pipe\nWorking Pressure\nPN 2.5\n0.25 MPa\nPN 4\n0.40 MPa\nPN 6\n0.60 MPa\nPN 10\n1.00 MPa\nPN 12.5\n1.25 MPa\nPN 16\n1.60 MPa\nNote—The pipes are recommended for maximum water\ntemperature of + 45oC. The pipes may also be used upto the ambient temperature of –40oC . As the creep rupture strergth of\nthe pipe varies with the change in water temperature, the maximum working pressure should be modified by applying the\npressure coefficient given in fig. 1 of the standard.\n2.4 Nominal Diameter (dn) — The nominal diameter\nof pipes covered in this standard are :\n16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63, 75, 90, 110, 125, 140,160,\n180, 200, 225, 250, 280,315, 355,00, 450, 560, 630,\n710, 800, 900 and 1000 mm.\n3. Colour — Shall be black\n4. Material\n4.1 High Density Polyethylene — High density\npolyethylene (HDPE) used for the manufacture of pipes shall conform to dsignation PEEWA-45-T-006 of IS 7328\n: 1992*. HDPE conforming to designation PEEWA-45-\nT-012 of IS 7328 : 1992 may also be used with the exception that melt flow rating (MFR) shall not exceed\n1.10 g / 10 minutes. In addition the material shall also conform to 5.6.2 of IS 7328:1992.\nThe specified base density shall be between 940.5 kg/m3 and 946.4 kg/m3 (both inclusive) when determined\nat 27°C. The value of the density shall also not differ from the nominal value by more than 3 kg/m3.\nThe MFR of the material shall be between 0.41 and\n1.10 (both inclusive) when tested at 190°C with nominal load of 5 kg. The resin shall be compounded with carbon black.\nThe carbon black content in the material shall be within\n2.5 0.5% and the dispersion of carbon black shall be satisfactory.\n4.3 Anti-Oxidant — The percentage of anti-oxidant\nused shall not be more than 0.3 percent by mass of finished resin.\n4.4 Reworked Material — Not more than 10 percent\nof the manufacturer’s own reworked material resulting from the manufacture of pipes."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4984: 1995",
    "title": "High Density Polyethylene Pipes For Water Supply",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "(Fourth Revision) * High density polyethylene malerials for molding and extension (first revision). ±",
    "keywords": [
      "pipes",
      "class",
      "within",
      "reversion",
      "safe",
      "pipe",
      "dispersion"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Classification": "Shall be classified by pressure ratings (working pressure at 270C . Class of Pipe Working Pressure (PN) Class 1 0.25 MPa (2.5kg/cm2) Class 2 0.4 MPa (4.0 kg/cm2) Class 3 0.6 MPa (6.0 kg/cm2) Class 4 0.8 MPa (8.0 kg/cm2) Class 5 1.0 MPa (10.0 kg/cm2) Class 6 1.25 MPa (12.5kg/cm2) Note— The above pipes are recommended for water temperature ranging from + 1 to 450C, The recommended maximum safe working stress for these pipes is 8.6 MPa at 270C. At higher temperature upto 450C the strength of pipes reduce and working pressure shall be modified in accordance with fig1 of the standard.",
      "Composition": "Material shall consist substantially of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride to which maybe added additives that are needed to facilitate the manufacture of pipe and production of sound and durable pipe of good surface finish mechanical strength and opacity. The monomer consent (VCM) in the resin shall be within the links of IS 10151:1982* 4. Dimension 4.1 Dimensions of UPVC Pipes:"
    },
    "content": "IS 4984: 1995 High Density Polyethylene Pipes For Water Supply\n(Fourth Revision)\n* High density polyethylene malerials for molding and extension\n(first revision).\n± 5. Dimensions\nTABLE 2 OUTSIDE DIAMETER,\nTOLERANCE AND OVALITY OF\nPIPES\nNominal\nOutside\nTolerance\nOvality\nDiameter\nDiameter mm\nmm dn\nmm\n(only positive tolerances)\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n1 6\n16.0\n0.3\n1.2\n2 0\n20.0\n0.3\n1.2\n2 5\n25.0\n0.3\n1.2\n3 2\n32.0\n0.3\n1.3\n4 0\n40.0\n0.4\n1.4\n5 0\n50.0\n0.5\n1.4\n6 3\n63.0\n0.6\n1.5\n7 5\n75.0\n0.7\n1.6\n9 0\n90.0\n0.9\n1.8\n1 1 0\n1 1 0 . 0\n1 . 0\n2 . 2\n1 2 5\n1 2 5 . 0\n1 . 2\n2 . 5\n1 4 0\n1 4 0 . 0\n1 . 3\n2 . 8\n1 6 0\n1 6 0 . 0\n1 . 5\n3 . 2\n1 8 0\n1 8 0 . 0\n1 . 7\n3 . 6\n2 0 0\n2 0 0 . 0\n1 . 8\n4 . 0\n2 2 5\n2 2 5 . 0\n2 . 1\n4 . 5\n2 5 0\n2 5 0 . 0\n2 . 3\n5 . 0\n2 8 0\n2 8 0 . 0\n2 . 6\n9 . 8\n3 1 5\n3 1 5 . 0\n2 . 9\n11.1\n3 5 5\n3 5 5 . 0\n3 . 2\n12.5\n4 0 0\n4 0 0 . 0\n3 . 6\n14.0\n4 5 0\n4 5 0 . 0\n4 . 1\n15.6\n5 0 0\n5 0 0 . 0\n4 . 5\n17.5\n5 6 0\n5 6 0 . 0\n5 . 0\n19.6\n6 3 0\n6 3 0 . 0\n5 . 7\n22.1\n7 1 0\n7 1 0 . 0\n6 . 4\n24.9\n8 0 0\n8 0 0 . 0\n7 . 2\n28.0\n9 0 0\n9 0 0 . 0\n8 . 1\n31.5\n1 0 0 0\n1000.0\n9.0\n35.0\n5.2 For Wall Thickness — Refer Tables 3, 4 and 5 of\nthe standard.\n5.3 Length — 5 m to 20 m.\n5.4 Coiling — The pipes supplied in coils shall be\ncoiled on drums of minimum diameter of 25 times the nominal diameter of the pipe ensuring that kinking of\npipe is prevented.\n6. Visual Appearance\n6.1 The internal and external surfaces of the pipes shall\nbe smooth, clean and free from grooving and other defects. The ends shall be cleanly cut and shall be square\nwith axis of the pipes. Slight shallow longitudinal grooves or irregularities in the wall thickness shall be\npermissible provided that the wall thickness remains within the permissible limits.\n7. Performance Requirements\n7.1 Hydraulic Characteristics —When subjected to\ninternal pressure creep rupture test the pipes under test shall show no signs of localized swelling, leakage or\nweeping, and shall not burst during the prescribed.\n7.2 Reversion Test — Longitudinal Reversion shall not\nbe greater than 3 percent.\n7.3 Overall Migration test — Shall be within the limits\nstipulated in*.\n7.4 Carbon Black Content and Dispersion— the\ncarbon black content shall be within 2.5 ± 0.5 percent, and the dispersion of carbon black shall be satisfactory.\n*Polyethylen e for is safe use in contact with food stuff, pharmaceuticals land drinking water.\nNote: For explanatory notes and methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4984 : 1995 Specification for high density polyethylene pipes for water supply (fourth revision). 1. Scope\n1.1 Requirements for plain end as well as socket end\npipes including those for use with electronic sealing rings.\n1.2 This standard does not cover unplasticized PVC\npipes use in suction and delivery lines of agricultural pumps.\n1.3 The pipes covered in this standard are not suitable\nfor use as casing pipes in tubewells.\n2. Classification— Shall be classified by pressure\nratings (working pressure at 270C .\nClass of Pipe\nWorking Pressure (PN)\nClass 1\n0.25 MPa\n(2.5kg/cm2)\nClass 2\n0.4 MPa\n(4.0 kg/cm2)\nClass 3\n0.6 MPa\n(6.0 kg/cm2)\nClass 4\n0.8 MPa\n(8.0 kg/cm2)\nClass 5\n1.0 MPa\n(10.0 kg/cm2)\nClass 6\n1.25 MPa\n(12.5kg/cm2)\nNote— The above pipes are recommended for water\ntemperature ranging from + 1 to 450C, The recommended maximum safe working stress for these pipes is 8.6 MPa at\n270C. At higher temperature upto 450C the strength of pipes reduce and working pressure shall be modified in accordance\nwith fig1 of the standard.\n3. Composition–Material\nshall consist\nsubstantially of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride to which maybe added additives that are needed to\nfacilitate the manufacture of pipe and production of sound and durable pipe of good surface finish\nmechanical strength and opacity.\nThe monomer consent (VCM) in the resin shall be within the links of IS 10151:1982*\n4. Dimension\n4.1 Dimensions of UPVC Pipes:"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4985: 2000",
    "title": "Unplasticized Pvc Pipes For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "(Third Revision) DIMENSION OF UPVC PIPES Nominal outside Mean outside Diameter mm Diameter mm Min Max 20 20.0 20.3 25 25.0 25.3 32 32.0 32.3 40 40.0 40.3 50 50.0 50.3 63 63.0 63.3 75 75.0 75.3 90 90.0 90.3 110 110.0 110.4 125 125.0 125.4 140 140.0 140.5 160 160.0 160.5 180 180.0 180.6 200 200.0 200.6 225 225.0 225.8 280 280.0 280.9 315 315.0 316.0 335 355.0 356.1 400 400.0 401.2 450 450.0 451.2 500 500.0 501.5 560 560.0 561.7 630 630.0 631.9 4.2 Dimensions of UPVC Plain End Pipe for Plumbing in ",
    "keywords": [
      "pipes",
      "pvc",
      "upvc",
      "outside",
      "plastics",
      "effect",
      "copoplymers"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 4985: 2000 Unplasticized Pvc Pipes For Potable Water Supplies\n(Third Revision)\nDIMENSION OF UPVC PIPES\nNominal outside\nMean outside\nDiameter mm\nDiameter mm Min\nMax\n20 20.0 20.3\n25 25.0 25.3\n32 32.0 32.3\n40 40.0 40.3\n50 50.0 50.3\n63 63.0 63.3\n75 75.0 75.3\n90 90.0 90.3\n110\n110.0 110.4\n125\n125.0\n125.4\n140\n140.0 140.5\n160\n160.0\n160.5\n180\n180.0 180.6\n200\n200.0 200.6 225\n225.0\n225.8 280\n280.0\n280.9 315\n315.0\n316.0\n335\n355.0\n356.1\n400\n400.0\n401.2\n450\n450.0 451.2\n500\n500.0\n501.5\n560\n560.0\n561.7\n630\n630.0 631.9\n4.2 Dimensions of UPVC Plain End Pipe for Plumbing\nin Buildings Nominal Outside Mean Outside Diameter, mm Diameter mm Min Max\n20 20.0 20.3\n25 25.0 25.3\n32 32.0 32.3\n40 40.0 40.3\n50 50.0 50.3\nNote— For detailed dimensions including wall thickness of all\nclasses of pipes and tolerances refer to 7 of the standard.\n5. Physical and Chemical Characteristics\n5.1 Visual Appearance: The colour of pipes shall be\nlight grey. The internal and external surfaces of the pipes shall be smooth clean and free from grooving and other\ndefects.\n5.2 Opacity – Wall of the plain pipe shall not transit\nmore than 0.2 percent of the visible light falling on it.\n+ Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and its copoplymers for use in contact with food stuffs, pharmaceuticals and drinking water 5.3 Effect on Water — Pipes shall not have any\ndetrimental effect on composition of water flowing through them. When tested toxic substances extracted\nfrom internal walls of the pipes shall not exceed the concentrations in the test solution as given in 10.3 of\nthe standard.\n5.4 Reversion Test — A length of pipe 200±20 mm long\nshall not alter in length by more than 5 percent.\n5.5 Vicat Softening Temperature —Shall not be less\nthan 800C.\n5.6 Density—Shall be between 1.40 and 1.46 g/cm3\n5.7 Sulphated Ash content— Shall not exceed 11\npercent.\n6. Mechanical properties\n6.1 Hydrostatic Characteristics—Shall not fail during\nthe prescibed test duration.\n6.2 Resistance to external blows at 00C shall have a\ntrue impact rate of not more than 10 percent.\nNote — For methods of measurements and tests, refer to IS 6307 : 1987 Rigid PVC sheets (first revision) relevant parts of IS\n12235 : 1986. Methods of test for unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies, IS1 3360 (Part 3/ sec 1): 1995 Plastics\nMethods of testing, Part 3 Physical and dimensional properties, Section 1 Determination of density and relative density of noncellular plastics\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4985 : 2000 Specification for unplasticised PVC pipes for potable water supplies (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7834: 1987",
    "title": "Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "General requirements regarding materials, manufacture, methods of test, inspection and marking of all types of injection moulded PVC socket fittings intended for connection, by using solvent cement, to PVC pipes covered by IS 4985 : 1988 [Specification for unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies (second revision) for water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "socket",
      "extraction",
      "pvc",
      "fitting",
      "supplies",
      "injection",
      "laying"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for 45° elbows made of injection moulded PVC for water supplies. 2. Requirements 2.1 Laying Length and tolerance thereon shall be as follows — TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR LAYING LENGTHS OF 45°ELBOWS Size 45° Elbow Laying mm Length, mm 16 4.5 1 20 5 1 25 6 + 1.2 – 1 32 7.5 + 1.6 – 1 40 9.5 + 2 – 1 50 11.5 + 2.5",
      "Materials": "Shall substantially consist of polyvinyl chloride, to which may be added only those additives that are needed to facilitate the manufacture of sound pipe of good surface finish, mechanical strength and opacity. 3. Size of Fitting 3.1 Shall be designated by the diameters of their sockets. The inside diameters of the sockets of the fittings shall correspond to the outside diameters of the pipes given in IS 4985 : 2000*",
      "Socket Length And Diameter At Mid": "Point of Socket Length. 5.1 Minimum socket length (L) of any fitting shall be = 0.5 D + 6 mm (subject to a minimum of 12 mm) where D is the nominal inside diameter of fittings. * Unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies (third revision). TABLE 1 - SOCKET DIMENSIONS Nominal Minimum Mean Socket Internal Size Socket Diameter at Mid-Point Length of Socket Length Min Max (1) (2) (3) (4) 16 14 16.1 16.3 20 16 20.1 20.3 25 19 25.1 25.3 32 22 32.1 32.3 40 26 40.1 40.3 50 31 50.1 50.3 63 38 63.1 63.3 75 44 75.1 75.3 90 51 90.1 90.3 110 61 110.1 110.4 125 69 125.1 125.4 140 76 140.1 140.5 160 86 160.2 160.5 180 96 180.2 180.5 200 106 200.3 200.6 225 118.5 225.3 225.7 250 131.0 250.4 250.8 280 146.0 280.4 280.9 315 163.5 315.4 316.0 5.2 Out of Roundness Tolerances of Socket Inside Diameter "
    },
    "content": "IS 7834: 1987 Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies\nPART – 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENT\n(First Revision)\n1. Scope — General requirements regarding materials,\nmanufacture, methods of test, inspection and marking of all types of injection moulded PVC socket fittings\nintended for connection, by using solvent cement, to\nPVC pipes covered by IS 4985 : 1988 [Specification for unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies\n(second revision) for water supplies.\n2. Materials — Shall substantially consist of\npolyvinyl chloride, to which may be added only those additives that are needed to facilitate the manufacture\nof sound pipe of good surface finish, mechanical strength and opacity.\n3. Size of Fitting\n3.1 Shall be designated by the diameters of their\nsockets. The inside diameters of the sockets of the fittings shall correspond to the outside diameters of the\npipes given in IS 4985 : 2000*\n4. Thickness —Minimum of 3 mm.\n5. Socket Length and Diameter at Mid-\nPoint of Socket Length.\n5.1 Minimum socket length (L) of any fitting shall be\n= 0.5 D + 6 mm (subject to a minimum of 12 mm) where D is the nominal inside diameter of fittings.\n* Unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies (third revision).\nTABLE 1 - SOCKET DIMENSIONS\nNominal\nMinimum\nMean Socket Internal\nSize\nSocket\nDiameter at Mid-Point\nLength of Socket Length\nMin\nMax\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n16\n14\n16.1\n16.3\n20\n16\n20.1\n20.3\n25\n19\n25.1\n25.3\n32\n22\n32.1\n32.3\n40\n26\n40.1\n40.3\n50\n31\n50.1\n50.3\n63\n38\n63.1\n63.3\n75\n44\n75.1\n75.3\n90\n51\n90.1\n90.3\n110\n61\n110.1\n110.4\n125\n69\n125.1\n125.4\n140\n76\n140.1\n140.5\n160\n86\n160.2\n160.5\n180\n96\n180.2\n180.5\n200\n106\n200.3\n200.6\n225\n118.5\n225.3\n225.7\n250\n131.0\n250.4\n250.8\n280\n146.0\n280.4\n280.9\n315\n163.5\n315.4\n316.0\n5.2 Out of Roundness Tolerances of Socket Inside\nDiameter — Maximum tolerance (Maximum dia. minus\nMinimum dia) shall be a) less than or equal to 0.007 D, or\nb) equal to 0.2 mm (if 0.007 D is less than\n0.2 mm).\n6. Tests for Performance Requirements\n6.1 Stress Relief Test – Shall not show blisters,\nexcessive delamination or cracking, or weldline splitting.\n6.2 Opacity – Wall of fitting shall not transmit more\nthan 0.2 percent of visible light falling on it. 6.3 Effect on Water — Shall not have any detrimental\neffect on composition of water flowing through them.\nToxic substances extracted by water from internal walls of fitting shall not exceed the following :\nLead (first extraction)\n1.0 mg/I\nLead (third extraction)\n0.3 mg/I\nDialkyl tin C4 and higher\n0.02 mg/I homologues measured\nas tin (third extraction)\nOther toxic substances\n0.01 mg/I\n(third extraction)\n6.4 Short Term Hydraulic Test — Fitting shall\nwithstand a pressure of 4.2\n2.0\n0\n+\n− times the working\npressure for one hour without failure.\nNote— For methods of test to Appendices A to D the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 7834 (Part) : 1987 Specification for injection moulded\nPVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water suplies : Part 1 general specific requirements (first revision). 1. Scope —Requirements for manufacture,\ndimensions, tolerances and marking for 45° elbows made of injection moulded PVC for water supplies.\n2. Requirements\n2.1 Laying Length and tolerance thereon shall be as\nfollows —\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR LAYING\nLENGTHS OF 45°ELBOWS\nSize\n45° Elbow Laying mm\nLength, mm\n16\n4.5 1\n20\n5 1\n25\n6 + 1.2\n– 1\n32\n7.5 + 1.6\n– 1\n40\n9.5 + 2\n– 1\n50\n11.5 + 2.5"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7834 (Part 2): 1987",
    "title": "Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for 900 elbows made of injections moulded PVC for water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "elbows",
      "socket",
      "supplies",
      "moulded",
      "pvc",
      "comply",
      "suplies"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for 900 elbows made of injections moulded PVC for water supplies. 2. Requirements 2.1 The laying length and the tolerances there on shall comply with those given in Table 1. * General requirements"
    },
    "content": "IS 7834 (Part 2): 1987 Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water\nSUPPLIES PART 2 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 45° ELBOWS.\n(First Revision)\n– 1\n63\n14 + 3.2\n– 1\n75\n16.5 + 4\n– 1\n90\n19.5 + 5\n– 1\n110\n23.5 + 6\n– 1\n125 27 + 6\n– 1\n140\n30 + 7\n– 1\n160\n34 + 8\n– 1\n180\n38 + 8\n– 1\n200\n43 + 9\n– 1\n225\n48 + 10\n– 1\n250\n53 + 11\n– 1\n280\n60 + 12\n– 1\n315\n67 + 13\n– 1\n2.2 The inside diameter of the socket and the socket\nlength shall comply with those given in IS 7834 (Part 1)\n: 1987* .\n+General requirements.\nNote — For typical illustration, see Fig 1 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 7834 (Part 2) :1987 Specification for injection moulded\nPVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water suplies : Part 2 Specific requirements for 45° elbows (first revision).\n±\n± 1. Scope —Requirements for manufacture,\ndimensions, tolerances and marking for 900 elbows made of injections moulded PVC for water supplies.\n2. Requirements\n2.1 The laying length and the tolerances there on shall\ncomply with those given in Table 1. * General requirements"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7834 (Part 3): 1987",
    "title": "– Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "PART-3 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 900 ELBOWS First Revision Note— For typical illustration of 90° elbow see Fig.1 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS :7834 (Part 3) : 1987 Specification for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies ; Part 3 – for 90° elbows (first revision). TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR LAYING LENGTH OF 90° ELBOWS Size 900 Elbow Laying Length, mm mm 16 9 1 20 11 1 25 13.5 + 1.6 – 1 32 17 + 1.6 – 1 40 21+ 2 – 1 50 26 + 2.5 – 1",
    "keywords": [
      "elbows",
      "elbow",
      "socket",
      "laying",
      "injection",
      "illustration",
      "solvent"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 7834 (Part 3): 1987 – Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies\nPART-3 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 900 ELBOWS\nFirst Revision\nNote— For typical illustration of 90° elbow see Fig.1 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS :7834 (Part 3) : 1987 Specification for injection moulded\nPVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies ; Part 3 – for 90° elbows (first revision).\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR LAYING\nLENGTH OF 90° ELBOWS\nSize\n900 Elbow Laying Length,\nmm mm\n16\n9 1\n20\n11 1\n25\n13.5 + 1.6\n– 1\n32\n17 + 1.6\n– 1\n40\n21+ 2\n– 1\n50\n26 + 2.5\n– 1\n63\n32.5+3.2\n– 1\n75\n38.5 + 4\n– 1\n90\n46 + 5\n– 1\n110\n56 + 3\n– 1\n125\n63.5 + 6\n– 1\n140\n71 + 7\n– 1\n160\n81 + 8\n– 1\n180\n91+ 9\n– 1\n200\n101 + 9\n– 1\n225\n114 +10\n– 1\n250\n126 + 11\n– 1\n280\n141 +12\n– 1\n315\n158+13\n– 1\n2.2\nThe inside diameter of the socket and the socket length shall comply with those given in IS 7834 (Part 1) :1987.*\n±\n±"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7834 (Part 4): 1987",
    "title": "– Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for 900 tee made of injection moulded PVC for water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "tees",
      "laying",
      "socket",
      "injection",
      "supplies",
      "moulded",
      "pvc"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for 900 tee made of injection moulded PVC for water supplies. 2. Requirements 2.1 The laying length and tolerances there on shall comply with those given in Table 1. * General requirements Note — For typical illustration of 90° Tees see Fig.1 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS : 7834 (Part 4) : 1987 Specification for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies : Part 4 Specific requirements for 90° tees. (first revision). TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR LAYING LENGTH OF 900 TEES Size 90° Elbow Laying Length, mm mm 16 9 1 20 11 1 25 13.5 + 1.6 – 1 32 17 + 1.6 – 1 40 21+ 2 – 1 50 26 + 2.5 – 1 63 32.5+3.2 – 1 75 38.5 + 4 – 1 90 46 + 5 – 1 110 56 + 3 – 1 125 63.5 + 6 – 1 140 71 +"
    },
    "content": "IS 7834 (Part 4): 1987 – Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies\nPART 4 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 90° TEES (First Revision)\n1. Scope – Requirements for manufacture,\ndimensions, tolerances and marking for 900 tee made of injection moulded PVC for water supplies.\n2. Requirements\n2.1\nThe laying length and tolerances there on shall comply with those given in Table 1. * General requirements\nNote — For typical illustration of 90° Tees see Fig.1 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS : 7834 (Part 4) : 1987 Specification for injection moulded\nPVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies : Part 4 Specific requirements for 90° tees. (first revision).\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR LAYING LENGTH\nOF 900 TEES\nSize 90° Elbow Laying Length, mm\nmm\n16\n9 1\n20\n11 1\n25\n13.5 + 1.6\n– 1\n32\n17 + 1.6\n– 1\n40\n21+ 2\n– 1\n50\n26 + 2.5\n– 1\n63\n32.5+3.2\n– 1\n75\n38.5 + 4 – 1\n90\n46 + 5\n– 1\n110\n56 + 3\n– 1\n125\n63.5 + 6\n– 1\n140\n71 + 7\n– 1\n160\n81 + 8\n– 1\n180\n91+ 9\n– 1\n200\n101 + 9\n– 1\n225\n114 +10\n– 1\n250\n126 + 11\n– 1\n280\n141 +12\n– 1\n315\n158.5+13\n– 1\n2.2 The inside diameter of the socket and the socket\nlength shall comply with those given in IS 7834 (Part 1) :1987.*\n±\n±"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7834 (Part 5): 1987",
    "title": "– Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for 450 tees made of injections moulded PVC for water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "laying",
      "tees",
      "socket",
      "supplies",
      "injections",
      "elbow",
      "moulded"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for sockets made of injections moulded PVC for water supplies. 2. Requirements 2.1 The laying length Z and tolerances thereon shall comply with those given in Table 1. TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR LAYING LENGTH OF SOCKET Size Socket Elbow Laying Length, mm Z, mm 16 3 1 20 3 1 25 3 + 1.6 – 1 32 3 + 1.6 – 1 40 3 + 2 – 1 50 3 + 2 – 1 63 3+ 2 – 1"
    },
    "content": "IS 7834 (Part 5): 1987 – Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water\nSUPPLIES PART – 5 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 450 TEES.\n(First Revision)\n1. Scope —Requirements for manufacture, dimensions,\ntolerances and marking for 450 tees made of injections moulded PVC for water supplies.\n2. Requirements\n2.1 The laying length Z and Z1 and the tolerance there\non shall be as per Table 1.\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR LAYING LENGTH\nOF 450 TEES\nSize\n450 Elbow Laying Length,\nmm mm z\nz1 mm\nmm\n16\n— —\n20\n27 3 6 2\n– 1\n25\n33 + 3\n7 + 2 – 1\n32\n42 + 4\n8 + 2\n– 3\n– 1\n40\n51 + 5\n10+ 2\n– 3\n– 1\n50\n63 + 6\n12+ 2\n– 3\n– 1\n63\n79 +7\n14 + 2\n– 3\n– 1\n75\n94 + 9\n17 + 2\n– 3 – 1\n90\n112+ 11\n20 + 3\n–3\n– 1 110\n137 +13\n24 + 3 – 4 – 1\n125\n157 +15\n27 + 3\n– 4\n– 1\n140\n175 + 17\n30 + 4\n– 5\n– 1 160\n200 + 20\n35 + 4 – 6\n– 1 * General requirements\nNote— For typical illustration of 45o Tees and symbols Z and Z1 see Fig.1 of the standard\nFor detailed information, refer to IS : 7834 (Part 5) : 1987 Specification for Injection moulded\nPVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies : Part 5 Specific requirements for 45o tees. (first revision). 2.2\nThe inside diameter of the socket and the socket length shall comply with those given in IS 7834\n(PART 1) :1987.*\n±\n± 1.\nScope— Requirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for sockets made\nof injections moulded PVC for water supplies.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1\nThe laying length Z and tolerances thereon shall comply with those given in Table 1.\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR LAYING\nLENGTH OF SOCKET\nSize\nSocket Elbow Laying Length, mm\nZ, mm\n16\n3 1\n20\n3 1\n25\n3 + 1.6\n– 1\n32\n3 + 1.6\n– 1\n40\n3 + 2\n– 1\n50\n3 + 2\n– 1\n63\n3+ 2\n– 1"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7834 (Part 6): 1987",
    "title": "Injection Moulding Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for union made of injections moulded PVC for water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "socket",
      "laying",
      "unions",
      "union",
      "supplies",
      "moulded",
      "pvc"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for union made of injections moulded PVC for water supplies. 2. Requirements 2.1 The laying length Z and tolerances there on shall comply with those given in Table 1. TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR LAYING LENGTH OF UNION Size Socket Elbow Laying Length mm mm 16 13.5 ± 1 20 13.5 ± 1 25 13.5 ± 1.2 – 1 32 13.5 + 1.6 – 1 40 15+ 2 – 1 50 17 + 2.5 – 1 63 21±3.2 – 1 Note— For typical illustration of unions, see fig. 1 of the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 7834 (Part 7) : 1987 Specification for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies ; Part 7 Specific requirements for unions (first revision). * General requirements"
    },
    "content": "IS 7834 (Part 6): 1987 Injection Moulding Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies\nPART 6 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR SOCKETS (First Revision)\nNote – For typical illustration of socket and Z see fig. 1 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 7834 (Part 6) : 1987 Specification for Injection moulded\nPVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies : Part 6 Specific requirements for sockets (first revision).\n75\n4 + 2\n– 1\n90\n5 + 2\n– 1\n110\n6 + 3\n– 1\n125 6 + 3\n– 1\n140\n8 + 3\n– 1\n160\n8 + 4\n– 1\n180\n8 + 4\n– 1\n200\n8 + 5\n– 1\n225\n10 + 5\n– 1\n250\n10 + 6\n– 1\n280\n12 + 6\n– 1\n315\n12 + 7\n– 1\n2.2 The inside diameter of the socket, the socket length\nand the tolerance thereon shall comply with those given in IS 7834 (Part 1) : 1987+. * General requirements\n±\n± 1. Scope —Requirements for manufacture, dimensions,\ntolerances and marking for union made of injections moulded PVC for water supplies.\n2. Requirements\n2.1\nThe laying length Z and tolerances there on shall comply with those given in Table 1.\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR LAYING LENGTH\nOF UNION\nSize\nSocket Elbow Laying Length mm\nmm\n16\n13.5 ± 1\n20\n13.5 ± 1\n25\n13.5 ± 1.2 – 1\n32\n13.5 + 1.6\n– 1\n40\n15+ 2 – 1\n50\n17 + 2.5\n– 1\n63\n21±3.2\n– 1\nNote— For typical illustration of unions, see fig. 1 of the standard\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 7834 (Part 7) : 1987 Specification for injection moulded\nPVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies ; Part 7 Specific requirements for unions (first revision).\n* General requirements"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7834 (Part 7): 1987",
    "title": "Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fitings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "PART 7 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR UNIONS. (First Revision) 2.2 The inside diameter of the socket and the length shall comply with those given in IS 7834 (Part 1):1987*",
    "keywords": [
      "unions",
      "comply",
      "socket",
      "inside",
      "specific",
      "diameter",
      "length"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 7834 (Part 7): 1987 Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fitings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies\nPART 7 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR UNIONS.\n(First Revision)\n2.2 The inside diameter of the socket and the length\nshall comply with those given in IS 7834 (Part 1):1987*"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7834 (Part 8): 1987",
    "title": "- Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for caps made of injections moulded PVC for water supplies. Note— For General requirements,refer to IS 7834 (Part 1) 1987. For detailed information, refer to IS 7834 (Part 8) : 1987 Specification for injection moulded PVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part 8 Specific requirements for caps (first revision).",
    "keywords": [
      "weld",
      "caps",
      "sanduich",
      "supplies",
      "moulded",
      "diameters",
      "fittings"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "General requirements for materials, manufacture, methods of test and inspection and marking of all types of injection moulded HDPE pipes covered by IS 4984:1995* for potable water supplies.",
      "Requirements": "The diameter of the socket of cap shall be as follows: 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63,75, 90 110, 12 5, 140, 160, 180, 200, 225, 250, 280 or 315 mm.",
      "Composition": "The fitting shall be made from a compared consisting of origin poly ethylen grades of fibric PE 63/ PE 80/ PE 100, whichever is applicable.",
      "Sizes And Dimensions Of Fittings": "Sizes of fittings shall be designated by their outside diameters at free ends, which shall correspond to outside diameters of pipes given in IS 4984 :1995. Out side diameters and corresponding wall thickness of fittings at free ends for weld shall comply with those given in IS 4984 :1995",
      "Weld Length": "A minimum weld length of 15 mm is specified to make provision for revelding and to avoid wastage of whole fitting due to shortage of weld length. Size, mm Weld Length, mm 20 3 25 4 32 5 40 6 50 8 63 10 75 12 90 14 110 15 5. Performance Requirements 5.1 Hydraulic Characteristic – There shall be no signs of localised swelling, leakage or weeping. 5.2 Sanduich Flange Hydraulic Testing – Sanduich hange shall be tested on per 9.1 of the standard. 5.2 Ovality —Shall conform to Table 2 of IS 4984 : 1995 *High density polyethylene pipes for potable water supply (fourth revision)"
    },
    "content": "IS 7834 (Part 8): 1987 - Injection Moulded Pvc Socket Fittings With Solvent Cement Joints For Water Supplies\nPART 8 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR CAPS\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope — Requirements for manufacture, dimensions, tolerances and marking for caps made of\ninjections moulded PVC for water supplies.\nNote— For General requirements,refer to IS 7834 (Part 1) 1987.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 7834 (Part 8) : 1987 Specification for injection moulded\nPVC socket fittings with solvent cement joints for water supplies: Part 8 Specific requirements for caps (first revision).\n2.\nRequirements — The diameter of the socket of cap shall be as follows: 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63,75,\n90 110, 12 5, 140, 160, 180, 200, 225, 250, 280 or 315 mm. 1. Scope — General requirements for materials,\nmanufacture, methods of test and inspection and marking of all types of injection moulded HDPE pipes\ncovered by IS 4984:1995* for potable water supplies.\n2.\nComposition — The fitting shall be made from a compared consisting of origin poly ethylen grades of\nfibric PE 63/ PE 80/ PE 100, whichever is applicable.\n3.\nSizes and Dimensions of Fittings — Sizes of fittings shall be designated by their outside diameters\nat free ends, which shall correspond to outside diameters of pipes given in IS 4984 :1995. Out side diameters and\ncorresponding wall thickness of fittings at free ends for weld shall comply with those given in IS 4984 :1995\n4. Weld Length — A minimum weld length of 15 mm is\nspecified to make provision for revelding and to avoid wastage of whole fitting due to shortage of weld length.\nSize, mm\nWeld Length, mm\n20\n3\n25\n4\n32\n5\n40\n6\n50\n8\n63\n10\n75\n12\n90\n14\n110\n15\n5.\nPerformance Requirements\n5.1 Hydraulic Characteristic – There shall be no\nsigns of localised swelling, leakage or weeping.\n5.2 Sanduich Flange Hydraulic Testing – Sanduich\nhange shall be tested on per 9.1 of the standard.\n5.2 Ovality —Shall conform to Table 2 of IS 4984 : 1995\n*High density polyethylene pipes for potable water supply (fourth revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8008 (Part 1): 2003",
    "title": "Injection Moulded High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances, and marking for injection moulded andh macined HOPE 90° bends for portable water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "injection",
      "supplies",
      "moulded",
      "hdpe",
      "polyethylene",
      "fittings",
      "portable"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances, and marking for injection moulded andh macined HOPE 90° bends for portable water supplies. 2. Requirements 2.1 Laying lengths and tolerances thereon shall be as follows : Nominal Diameter Laying Length mm mm 20 35 ± 1 25 40 ± 2 32 50 ± 2 40 60 ± 2 Note — For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS 8008 (Part 1) : 2003 injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for portable water supplies: Part I general requirements, for fittings. For detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 2):2003. Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 2 Specific requirements for 90° bends (first revision) 50 70 ± 2 63 80 ± "
    },
    "content": "IS 8008 (Part 1): 2003 Injection Moulded High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies\nPART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR FITTINGS\n(First Revision)\nNote – For test procedures refer to annex. B and C of IS 4984:1995.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS: 8008(Part I ):2003. Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part I General\nrequirements. 1. Scope —Requirements for manufacture, dimensions\nand tolerances, and marking for injection moulded andh macined HOPE 90° bends for portable water supplies.\n2. Requirements\n2.1\nLaying lengths and tolerances thereon shall be as follows :\nNominal Diameter\nLaying Length mm\nmm\n20\n35 ± 1\n25\n40 ± 2\n32\n50 ± 2\n40\n60 ± 2\nNote — For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS 8008 (Part 1) : 2003 injection\nmoulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for portable water supplies: Part I general requirements, for fittings.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 2):2003. Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 2 Specific requirements\nfor 90° bends (first revision)\n50\n70 ± 2\n63\n80 ± 2\n75\n90 ± 2\n90\n110 ± 2\n110\n140 ± 3\n125\n140 ± 3\n140\n150 ± 3\n160\n170 ± 3\nNote — for typical illustration of 90° bend see Fig. 1 of the\nstandard.\n2.2\nOutside diameters and wall thicknesses at ends for welding shall comply ith the requirements given in\nIS 8008 (Part I) : 2003."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8008 (Part 2): 2003",
    "title": "Injection Moulded High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances, and marking for injection moulded and machined HDPE 90° tees for portable water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "injection",
      "hdpe",
      "portable",
      "supplies",
      "moulded",
      "laying",
      "tees"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances, and marking for injection moulded and machined HDPE 90° tees for portable water supplies. 2. Requirements 2.1 Overall laying lengths and tolerances thereon shall be as follows : Nominal Diameter Laying Length mm mm 20 36.5 ± 1 25 39 ± 1 32 46 ± 1 Note — For general requirements, regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc.refer toIS 8008 (Part1):2003. Injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for portable water supplies : PART 1General requirements for fittings. For detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 3 ) :2003 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part3 specific requirements for 90° tees."
    },
    "content": "IS 8008 (Part 2): 2003 Injection Moulded High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies\nPART 2 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 90O BENDS\n(First Revision) 1. Scope — Requirements for manufacture, dimensions\nand tolerances, and marking for injection moulded and machined HDPE 90° tees for portable water supplies.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1\nOverall laying lengths and tolerances thereon shall be as follows : Nominal Diameter Laying Length mm\nmm\n20\n36.5 ± 1\n25\n39 ± 1\n32\n46 ± 1\nNote — For general requirements, regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc.refer toIS 8008 (Part1):2003. Injection\nmoulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for portable water supplies : PART 1General requirements for fittings.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 3 ) :2003 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part3 specific requirements\nfor 90° tees."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8008 (Part 3): 2003",
    "title": "Injection Moulded High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances, and marking for injection moulded and machined HDPE reducers for potable water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "injection",
      "hdpe",
      "supplies",
      "reducers",
      "potable",
      "moulded",
      "polyethylene"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances, and marking for injection moulded and machined HDPE reducers for potable water supplies. 2. Requirements 2.1 Two different diameters at either end shall be concentric. 2.2 Overall laying length and the tolerance thereon shall be as follows: Note — For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS 8008 (Part-1):2003. Injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 1 General requirements for fifths. For detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 4 ) :2003 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 4 specific requirements for reducers (first revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 8008 (Part 3): 2003 Injection Moulded High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies\nPART 3 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 90O TEES\n(First Revision)\n40\n63 ± 2\n50\n75 ± 2\n63\n80 ± 2\n75\n88 ± 2\n90\n98.5 ± 2\n110\n122.5 ± 3\n125\n135 ± 3\n140\n145 ± 3\n160\n157 ± 3\nNote — For typical illustration of 90° tee see Fig.1 of the\nstandard.\n2.2\nOutside diameter and wall thickness at ends for welding shall be in accordance with IS 8008\n(Part 1) : 2003. 1. Scope — Requirements for manufacture, dimensions\nand tolerances, and marking for injection moulded and machined HDPE reducers for potable water supplies.\n2. Requirements\n2.1\nTwo different diameters at either end shall be concentric.\n2.2\nOverall laying length and the tolerance thereon shall be as follows:\nNote — For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS 8008 (Part-1):2003. Injection\nmoulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 1 General requirements for fifths.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 4 ) :2003 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 4 specific requirements\nfor reducers (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8008 (Part 4): 2003",
    "title": "Injection Moulded High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances, and marking, for injection moulded made of HDPE ferrule reducers for potable water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "reducer",
      "ferrule",
      "reducers",
      "injection",
      "hdpe",
      "laying",
      "supplies"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances, and marking, for injection moulded made of HDPE ferrule reducers for potable water supplies. 2. Requirements 2.1 Overall laying lengths and the tolerances thereon shall be as follows : Size Bends Laying Length mm mm 32 × 63 48 90 × 63 74.3 110 × 63 89.4 150 × 63 98.5 225 × 63 102.8 Note — For typical illustration of ferrule reducer see Fig.1 of the standard. 2.2 Outside diameter and wall thickness of straight pipe portion at reducer end shall comply with the requirements given in IS 8008 (Part 1) : 2003."
    },
    "content": "IS 8008 (Part 4): 2003 Injection Moulded High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies\nPART 4 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR REDUCERS\n(First Revision)\nSize\nBends Laying Length mm\nmm\n32 × 63\n70 ± 1 63 × 75\n70 ± 1 63 × 90 80 ± 1 75 × 90 80 ± 1 90 × 110 95 ± 1 110 × 160\n125 ± 1 160 × 225 165 ± 1\nNote — For typical illustration of reducer see Fig.1 of the\nstandard.\n2.3\nOutside diameter and wall thickness at ends for welding shall be in accordance with IS 8008\n(Part 1) : 2003. Note — For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc,refer to IS: 8008 (Part1): 2003 Injection\nmoulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for portable water supplies : Part 1 general requirements, for fittings\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 5 ) :2003. Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 5 Specific\nrequirements for ferrule reducers.\n1. Scope —Requirements for manufacture, dimensions\nand tolerances, and marking, for injection moulded made of HDPE ferrule reducers for potable water supplies.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1\nOverall laying lengths and the tolerances thereon shall be as follows :\nSize\nBends Laying Length mm\nmm\n32 × 63\n48\n90 × 63\n74.3\n110 × 63\n89.4\n150 × 63\n98.5\n225 × 63\n102.8\nNote — For typical illustration of ferrule reducer see Fig.1\nof the standard.\n2.2 Outside diameter and wall thickness of straight\npipe portion at reducer end shall comply with the requirements given in IS 8008 (Part 1) : 2003."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8008 (Part 5): 2003",
    "title": "Injection Moulded High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "PART 5 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR FERRULE REDUCERS (First Revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "ferrule",
      "reducers",
      "machined",
      "injection",
      "hdpe",
      "supplies",
      "potable"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 8008 (Part 5): 2003 Injection Moulded High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies\nPART 5 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR FERRULE REDUCERS\n(First Revision) 1. Scope\n1.1 Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and\ntolerances, and marking for injection moulded and machined HDPE pipe ends for potable water supplies."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8008 (Part 6): 2003",
    "title": "Injection Moulded High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances, and marking for injection moulded and machine moulded HDFE sandwich flanges Note — For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS 8008 (Part I ) :2003 Injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 1 General requirements, for fittings. For detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 7 ) : 2003 Specification for injection moulded high density polyet",
    "keywords": [
      "injection",
      "moulded",
      "hdpe",
      "collar",
      "polyethylene",
      "supplies",
      "xxii"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances, and marking for injection moulded and machine moulded HDFE sandwich flanges Note — For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS 8008 (Part I ) :2003 Injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 1 General requirements, for fittings. For detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 7 ) : 2003 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for portable water supplies : Part 7 Specific requirements for sandwich flanges."
    },
    "content": "IS 8008 (Part 6): 2003 Injection Moulded High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies\nPART 6 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPE ENDS\n(First Revision)\nNote —For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS 8008 (Part 1) : 2003.\nInjection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for portable water supplies : Part 1 General requirements for fittings\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 6 ) : 2003 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 6 Specific requirements\nfor pipe ends.\n2.\nDimensions and Tolerances\n2.1\nOverall dimensions and tolerances there on shall be as follows :\nTable 1 Dimensions for Injectino and Machined Pipe Ends\nSl.\nNominal\nDiameter for\nCollar\nPN6\nPN 10\nNo.\nDiameter\nManufacturing Diameter\nLaying\nCollar\nWelding\nLaying\nCollar\nWelding\nLength\nHeight\nLength\nLength\nHeight\nLength\nD\nD3\nD4\nZ\nH\nL\nZ\nH\nL\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\n(9)\n(10)\ni)\n20\n28\n47\n50\n–\n–\n50\n7\n28 ii)\n25\n34\n57\n50\n9\n28\n50\n9\n27 iii)\n32\n40\n67\n50\n10\n27\n50\n10\n27 iv)\n40\n49\n78\n50\n11\n24\n50\n11\n24 v)\n50\n60\n88\n50\n12\n23\n50\n12\n23 vi)\n63\n72\n103\n50\n14\n16\n50\n14\n16 vii)\n75\n84\n123\n50\n16\n14\n50\n16\n14 viii)\n90\n99\n138\n80\n17\n43\n80\n17\n43 ix)\n110\n119\n158\n80\n18\n37\n80\n18\n17 x)\n125\n134\n188\n80\n18\n42\n80\n25\n35 xi)\n140\n150\n188\n80\n18\n34\n80\n25\n27 xii)\n160\n170\n214\n80\n18\n34\n80\n25\n27 xiii)\n180\n190\n214\n80\n20\n30\n80\n30\n20 xiv)\n200\n210\n269\n100\n24\n36\n100\n32\n28 xv)\n225\n235\n269\n100\n24\n46\n100\n32\n38 xvi)\n250\n261\n320\n100\n25\n35\n100\n35\n35 xvii)\n280\n291\n320\n100\n25\n45\n100\n35\n35 xviii)\n315\n327\n370\n100\n25\n35\n100\n35\n35 xix)\n355\n373\n430\n120\n30\n50\n120\n40\n40 xx)\n400\n427\n482\n120\n33\n42\n120\n46\n29 xxi)\n450\n514\n585\n120\n46\n14\n130\n60\n10 xxii)\n500\n530\n585\n120\n46\n24\n120\n60\n10 xxiii)\n560\n615\n685\n120\n50\n10\n130\n60\n10 xxiv)\n630\n642\n685\n120\n50\n30\n120\n60\n20 xxv)\n710\n737\n800\n120\n50\n20\n120\n–\n–\nxxvi)\n800\n840\n905\n120\n52\n18\n120\n–\n–\nxxii)\n900\n944\n1 005\n120\n55\n15\n120\n–\n–\nxxviii)\n1 000\n1 047\n1 110\n140\n60\n10\n140\n–\n–\nNote 1 — For typical illustration of pipe end see Fig.1 of the standard.\nNote 2 — Outside diameter and wall thickness of the end to be welded to pipe shall complywith the requirements given in IS 8008\n(Part 1) : 2003. 1. Scope —Requirements for manufacture, dimensions\nand tolerances, and marking for injection moulded and machine moulded HDFE sandwich flanges\nNote — For general requirements regarding material, manufacture, methods of test, etc, refer to IS 8008 (Part I ) :2003 Injection\nmoulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 1 General requirements, for fittings.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8008 (Part 7 ) : 2003 Specification for injection moulded high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for portable water supplies : Part 7 Specific\nrequirements for sandwich flanges."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8008 (Part 7): 2003",
    "title": "Injection Moulded High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "General requirements for material, sizes, performance requirements, sampling and marking of all types of fabricated HDPE fittings intended for connection to HDPE pipes covered by IS 4984 :1995* for potable water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "hdpe",
      "sandwich",
      "flanges",
      "diameter",
      "fittings",
      "flange",
      "supplies"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "General requirements for material, sizes, performance requirements, sampling and marking of all types of fabricated HDPE fittings intended for connection to HDPE pipes covered by IS 4984 :1995* for potable water supplies. 2. Material 2.1 Pipes used for the fabrication of HDPE fittings for potable water supplies shall conform to IS 4984 : 1995. 3. Sizes and Dimensions of Fittings 3.1 Sizes of fittings shall be designated by their outside diameters at the free end, which shall correspond to For detailed information, refer to IS 8360 (Part I ) :1977 Specification for fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 1 General requirements."
    },
    "content": "IS 8008 (Part 7): 2003 Injection Moulded High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies\nPART 7 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR SANDWITCH FLANGES\n(First Revision)\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF SANDWICH FLANGES\nSl.\nNominal\nPipe\nInside\nPitch Circle\nOutside\nThickness\nThickness\nDiameter\nNumber\nNo.\nFlange\nOutside\nDiameter\nDiameter\nDiameter of Flange\nof Mild of Hole\nof Hole size\nDiameter\nD\nD3\nD4\nZ\nT\nd\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\n(9)\n(10)\ni)\n15\n20\n32\n65\n95\n20\n6 ± 0.3\n14\n4 ii)\n20\n25\n38\n75\n105\n20\n6 ± 0.3\n14\n4 iii)\n25\n32\n44\n85\n115\n20\n6 ± 0.3\n14\n4 iv)\n32\n40\n53\n100\n140\n20\n6±0.3\n18\n4 v)\n40\n50\n64\n110\n150\n20\n6±0.3\n18\n4 vi)\n50\n63\n76\n125\n165\n20\n6±0.3\n18\n4 vii)\n65\n75\n88\n145\n185\n20\n6±0.3\n18\n4 viii)\n80\n90\n103\n160\n200\n20\n9±0.5\n18\n8 ix)\n100\n110\n123\n180\n220\n20\n9±0.5\n18\n8 x)\n100\n125\n138\n210\n250\n20\n9±0.5\n18\n8 xi)\n125\n140\n154\n210\n250\n20\n9±0.5\n18\n8 xii)\n150\n160\n174\n240\n285\n20\n9±0.5\n22\n8 xiii)\n200\n180\n194\n240\n285\n20\n9±0.5\n22\n8 xiv)\n200\n200\n214\n295\n340\n25\n12±0.5\n22\n8 xv)\n200\n225\n239\n295\n340\n25\n12±0.5\n22\n8 xvi)\n250\n250\n265\n350\n395\n30\n16±0.5\n22\n12 xvii)\n250\n280\n295\n350\n395\n30\n16±0.5\n22\n12 xviii)\n300\n315\n331\n400\n445\n30\n19±0.5\n22\n12 xix)\n350\n355\n376\n460\n505\n30\n19±0.5\n22\n16 xx)\n400\n400\n430\n515\n565\n35\n22±0.5\n26\n16 xxi)\n500\n450\n517\n620\n670\n35\n22±0.5\n26\n26 xxii)\n500\n500\n533\n620\n670\n35\n22±0.5\n26\n20 xxiii)\n600\n560\n618\n725\n780\n35\n22 ±0.5\n30\n20 xxiv)\n600\n630\n645\n725\n780\n35\n22±0.5\n30\n24 Note – Tolerance on various dimensions are given below:\n1\n2\nDimensino\nTolerance\nInside Diameter, D1\n± 1mm\nPitch circle diameter, D2\n± 1mm\nOutside diameter, D3\n± 1mm\nThickness of flange, Z\n± 1mm\n2. Dimensions and Tolerances\n2.1 Overall dimensions of sandwich flanges and\ntolerances thereon shall be as follows : 1. Scope — General requirements for material, sizes,\nperformance requirements, sampling and marking of all types of fabricated HDPE fittings intended for\nconnection to HDPE pipes covered by IS 4984 :1995* for potable water supplies.\n2. Material\n2.1 Pipes used for the fabrication of HDPE fittings for\npotable water supplies shall conform to IS 4984 : 1995.\n3. Sizes and Dimensions of Fittings\n3.1 Sizes of fittings shall be designated by their outside\ndiameters at the free end, which shall correspond to\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8360 (Part I ) :1977 Specification for fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 1 General requirements."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8360 (Part 1): 1977",
    "title": "Fabricated High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances and marking for fabricated HDPE 90° tees for potable water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "fabricated",
      "supplies",
      "hdpe",
      "polyethylene",
      "potable",
      "proof",
      "laying"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances and marking for fabricated HDPE 90° tees for potable water supplies. 2. Requirements 2.1 Laying lengths and tolerances thereon shall be as follows : Size Overall Laying Length mm mm 20 50 ± 2 25 62.5 ± 2 32 80 ± 2 40 80 ± 2 50 90 ± 2 63 94.5 ± 4 75 112.5 ± 4 90 135 ± 4 110 165 ± 4 125 181.5 ± 4 140 210 ± 6 160 240 ± 6 180 270 + 6 200 300 + 6 225 337.5 + 8 250 375.5 + 8 280 420 + 8 315 472.5 + 8 355 532.5 + 10 400 600 + 10 450 675 + 10 500 750 +10 Note— For typical illustration of 90° fabricated tee see Fig. 1 of the standard. Note—For general requirements regarding material, sizes, method of test and sampling refer to IS 8360 (Part 1) : 1977 Fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for portable water supplies : Part 1 Gene"
    },
    "content": "IS 8360 (Part 1): 1977 Fabricated High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water Supplies\nPART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\noutside diameters of pipes given in IS 4984 : 1995.\nOutside diameters and corresponding wall thickness of fittings at free ends for weld shall comply with those\ngiven in Table 1 of IS 4984 : 1995\n4.\nPerformance Requirements\n4.1\nHydraulic Proof Test — Fitting duly plugged, when subjected to a hydraulic proof test of twice the\nrecommended working pressure at ambient temperature and for a period of 1 hour shall not show any sign of\nlocalized swelling, leakage or creeping, and shall not burst. * Injection moulded high density polyethylene pipes for potable water supplies, sewage and industrial effluents (fourth revision) 1. Scope– Requirements for manufacture, dimensions\nand tolerances and marking for fabricated HDPE 90° tees for potable water supplies.\n2. Requirements\n2.1\nLaying lengths and tolerances thereon shall be as follows :\nSize\nOverall Laying Length mm\nmm\n20\n50 ± 2\n25\n62.5 ± 2\n32\n80 ± 2\n40\n80 ± 2\n50 90 ± 2\n63\n94.5 ± 4\n75\n112.5 ± 4\n90\n135 ± 4\n110\n165 ± 4\n125 181.5 ± 4\n140\n210 ± 6\n160\n240 ± 6\n180\n270 + 6 200\n300 + 6\n225\n337.5 + 8\n250 375.5 + 8 280\n420 + 8\n315\n472.5 + 8\n355\n532.5 + 10\n400\n600 + 10\n450\n675 + 10\n500 750 +10\nNote— For typical illustration of 90° fabricated tee see Fig.\n1 of the standard.\nNote—For general requirements regarding material, sizes, method of test and sampling refer to IS 8360 (Part 1) : 1977\nFabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for portable water supplies : Part 1 General requirements.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8360 (Part 2):1977 Specification for fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 2 specific requirements\nfor 90° tees."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8360 (Part 2): 1977",
    "title": "Fabricated High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "SUPPLIES PART 2 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 90O TEES 2.2 Ouside diameters and wall thickness of pipes out of which 90° tees are fabricated shall comply with those givenin IS 8360 (Part 1) :1977. Wall thickness of a fabricated 90° tee shall not be less than that of the pipe to which it i to be welded.",
    "keywords": [
      "fabricated",
      "laying",
      "tees",
      "ouside",
      "givenin",
      "supplies",
      "thereon"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 8360 (Part 2): 1977 Fabricated High Density Polyethylene (Hdpe) Fittings For Potable Water\nSUPPLIES PART 2 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 90O TEES\n2.2 Ouside diameters and wall thickness of pipes out\nof which 90° tees are fabricated shall comply with those givenin IS 8360 (Part 1) :1977. Wall thickness of a\nfabricated 90° tee shall not be less than that of the pipe to which it i to be welded. 1.\nScope\n1.1\nRequirements for manufacture, dimensions and tolerances and marking for fabricated HDPE 90° bends\nfor potable water supplies.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1\nLaying lengths and tolerances thereon shall be as follows —\nSize Overall Laying mm Length mm\n20\n100 ± 3\n25\n100 ± 3\n30\n100 ± 3\n40\n100 ± 3\n50\n100 ± 3\n63\n108 ± 5\n75\n128 ± 5\n90\n154 ± 5\n110\n188 ± 5 125\n213 ± 5 140\n239 ± 8\n160 273 ± 8 180\n307 ± 8 200\n341 ± 8 225 384 ±10 250\n427 ±10\n280 478 ±10\n315\n538 ±10\n355\n606 ±10 400 683 ±10 450 769 ±10 500 855 ±10\nNote — For typical illustration of 90° fabricated bend\nsee Fig.1 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8360 (Part 3): 1977",
    "title": "Fabricated High Density Polyethylene",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "General requirements for materials, sizes methods of test and inspection, and marking of all types of fabricated PVC fittings for jointing with solvent cement to the PVC pipes covered in IS 4985 : 1988 for portable water supplies. This specification covers the sizes of fittings from 63 to 315 mm.",
    "keywords": [
      "socket",
      "roundness",
      "fabricated",
      "fittings",
      "supplies",
      "fitting",
      "hdpe"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "General requirements for materials, sizes methods of test and inspection, and marking of all types of fabricated PVC fittings for jointing with solvent cement to the PVC pipes covered in IS 4985 : 1988 for portable water supplies. This specification covers the sizes of fittings from 63 to 315 mm.",
      "Materials": "The pipes used for the fabrication of PVC fittings for portable water supplies shall conform to IS 4985 : 2000*",
      "Size Of Fitting": "The size of fittings shall be designated by the nominal diameters of the pipe given in IS 4985 : 2000 with which they are to be used.",
      "Socket Length And Diameter At Mid": "Point of Socket Length 4.1 Minimum socket length ‘L’ of any fitting shall be given by L=0.5D + 6 mm where D is the nominal inside diameter of the fitting. The minimum socket lengths based on the above formula for different socket diameters are given in Table 1. 4.2 Out-of-Roundness Tolerances of Socket Inside Diameter: the maximum of out-of-roundness tolerances (maximum diameter-minimum diameter) shall be : a) Equal to 0.007 D, or b) Equal to 0.2 mm (if 0.007D is less than 0.2 mm), Note— Out of roundness tolerances of socket inside diameter shall not apply to fittings of nominal pressure rating 0.25 MPa (Class1), 0.4 MPa 5. Tests and performance requirements 5.1 Opacity – The wall of the fitting shall not transmit more than 0.2 percent of the visible light falling on it. TABLE 1. SOCKET DI"
    },
    "content": "IS 8360 (Part 3): 1977 Fabricated High Density Polyethylene\n(HDPE) FITTINGS FOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES\nPART 3 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 90° BENDS\nNote—For general requirements regarding material, sizes, methods of test and sampling refer to IS : 8360 (Part 1) :1977.\nFabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 1 General Requirements.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8360 (Part 3) :1977. Specification for fabricated high density polyethylene (HDPE) fittings for potable water supplies : Part 3 Specific requirements\nfor 90° bends.\n2.2\nOutside diameters and wall thicknesses of pipes out of which 90° bends are fabricated shall comply with\nthose given in IS 8360 (Part 1) : 1977. Wall thickness of fabricated bend shall not be less than that of the pipe to\nwhich it is to be less than that of the pipe to which it is to be welded. 1. Scope — General requirements for materials, sizes\nmethods of test and inspection, and marking of all types of fabricated PVC fittings for jointing with solvent cement\nto the PVC pipes covered in IS 4985 : 1988 for portable water supplies. This specification covers the sizes of\nfittings from 63 to 315 mm.\n2. Material —The pipes used for the fabrication of\nPVC fittings for portable water supplies shall conform to IS 4985 : 2000*\n3. Size of Fitting —The size of fittings shall be\ndesignated by the nominal diameters of the pipe given in IS 4985 : 2000 with which they are to be used.\n4. Socket Length and Diameter at Mid-Point of Socket\nLength\n4.1 Minimum socket length ‘L’ of any fitting shall be\ngiven by L=0.5D + 6 mm where D is the nominal inside diameter of the fitting. The minimum socket lengths\nbased on the above formula for different socket diameters are given in Table 1.\n4.2 Out-of-Roundness Tolerances of Socket Inside\nDiameter: the maximum of out-of-roundness tolerances\n(maximum diameter-minimum diameter) shall be :\na) Equal to 0.007 D, or b) Equal to 0.2 mm (if 0.007D is less than 0.2 mm),\nNote— Out of roundness tolerances of socket inside\ndiameter shall not apply to fittings of nominal pressure rating 0.25 MPa (Class1), 0.4 MPa\n5. Tests and performance requirements\n5.1 Opacity – The wall of the fitting shall not transmit\nmore than 0.2 percent of the visible light falling on it.\nTABLE 1. SOCKET DIMENSIONS\nAll dimensions in millimetres\nNominal\nMinimum\nMeam Socket Internal at\nSize\nSocket\nDiameter Mid-Point\nLength of Socket Length\nMin\nMax (1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4) 16 14.0\n16.1 16.3 20 16.0\n20.1 20.3 25 19.0\n25.1 25.3 32 22.0\n32.1 32.3 40 26.0\n40.1 40.3 50 31.0 50.1 50.3\n63 37.5\n63.1 63.3 75 43.5 75.1 75.3 90 51.0 90.1 90.3 110 61.0 110.1 110.4 125 68.5 125.1 125.4 140 76.0\n140.2 140.5 160\n86.0\n160.2 160.5 180 96.0\n180.2 180.5 200 106.0\n200.3 200.6 225 118.5\n225.3\n225.7 250 131.0\n250.4\n250.8 280 146.0\n280.4\n280.9 315\n163.5\n315.4 316.0 355\n183.5\n355.4 356.0 400\n206.0\n400.4 401.0 450\n231.0\n450.4 451.0 500\n256.0\n500.4 501.0 560\n286.0\n560.4 561.0 630\n321.0\n630.4 631.0"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 1): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC sockets for potable water suplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "class",
      "potable",
      "pvc",
      "fabricated",
      "supplies",
      "fittings",
      "sockets"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC sockets for potable water suplies.",
      "Requirements": "The general requirements for materials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and criteria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988.",
      "Marking": "The socket shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different classes of fittings : Class of Fitting Colour Class 1 (0.25 MPa) Red Class 2 (0.4 MPa) Blue Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPa) Yellow TABLE 1 ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES Size B Minimum wall thickness ( I) For Working Pressure Min 0.25 0.4 0.6 1.0 MPa MPa Mpa MPa Class1 Class2 Class3 Class 4 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 63 20 – 1.4 2.0 3.2 75 20 – 1.7 2.4 3.8 90 35 1.2 1.9 2.8 4.5 110 35 1.5 2.3 3.4 5.5 125 35 1.7 2.7 3.9 6.3 140 45 1.8 2.9 4.4 7.0 160 45 2.1 3.4 4.9 8.0 180 45 2.4 3.8 5.5 9.0 200 45 2.7 4.2 6.2 10.0 225 55 3.0 4.7 6.9 11.2 250 55 3.3 5.2 7.7 12.5 280 55 3.7 5.8 8.6 13.9 315 55 4.2 6.5 9.7 15.6 355 65 4.6 7.3 10.8 17.7 400 65 5.3 8.2 12.2 19.8 450 65 5.9 9.3 13.7 22.4 500 65 6.5 10.3 15.3 24.8 560 75 "
    },
    "content": "IS 10124 (Part 1): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies\nPART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\n(First Revision)\n+ Unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies\n(third revision)\n5.2 Short term Hydraulic Test — The fittings shall\nwithstand a pressure of 4.2 times the working\npressure for one hour without failure\nNote— For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to, IS 10124 (Part 1) 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies: Part 1 General requirements (first revision). 2.0\n0\n+\n− 1. Scope — Requirements for manufacture, dimensions\nand marking for fabricated PVC sockets for potable water suplies.\n2. Requirements — The general requirements for\nmaterials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and criteria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988.\n3. Dimensions —See Table 1\n4. Marking — The socket shall be marked in colour as\nindicated below for different classes of fittings :\nClass of Fitting\nColour\nClass 1 (0.25 MPa)\nRed\nClass 2 (0.4 MPa)\nBlue\nClass 3 (0.6 MPa)\nGreen\nClass 4 (1.0 MPa)\nYellow\nTABLE 1 ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES\nSize B\nMinimum wall thickness ( I) For Working Pressure\nMin\n0.25\n0.4 0.6\n1.0\nMPa\nMPa Mpa MPa\nClass1\nClass2\nClass3\nClass 4 (1)\n(2) (3) (4) (5)\n(6)\n63\n20\n–\n1.4 2.0\n3.2\n75\n20\n–\n1.7 2.4\n3.8\n90\n35\n1.2\n1.9 2.8\n4.5\n110\n35\n1.5\n2.3 3.4\n5.5\n125\n35\n1.7\n2.7 3.9\n6.3\n140\n45\n1.8\n2.9 4.4\n7.0\n160\n45\n2.1\n3.4 4.9\n8.0\n180\n45\n2.4\n3.8 5.5\n9.0\n200\n45\n2.7\n4.2 6.2\n10.0\n225\n55\n3.0\n4.7 6.9\n11.2\n250\n55\n3.3\n5.2 7.7\n12.5\n280\n55\n3.7\n5.8 8.6\n13.9\n315\n55\n4.2\n6.5 9.7\n15.6\n355\n65\n4.6\n7.3 10.8\n17.7\n400\n65\n5.3\n8.2 12.2\n19.8\n450\n65\n5.9\n9.3 13.7\n22.4\n500\n65\n6.5 10.3 15.3\n24.8\n560\n75\n7.3 11.6 17.2\n27.8\n630\n75\n8.2 13.0 19.2\n31.3 For detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 2):1998 Specification for fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies Part 2 Specific requirements for sockets (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 2): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC straight reducers for portable water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "define",
      "illustrate",
      "features",
      "criteria",
      "terms",
      "intended",
      "portable"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC straight reducers for portable water supplies.",
      "Requirements": "The general requirements for material, sizes, methods of test, sampling and criteria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) :1988."
    },
    "content": "IS 10124 (Part 2): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies\nPART 2 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR SOCKETS\n(First Revision)\nNote—This figure is only intended to define the terms\nused in Table1and is not intended to illustrate specific design features. FIG. 1 SOCKET 1. Scope—Requirements of manufacture, dimensions\nand marking for fabricated PVC straight reducers for portable water supplies.\n2. Requirements — The general requirements for\nmaterial, sizes, methods of test, sampling and criteria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) :1988."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 3): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Portable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "PART 3 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR STRAIGHT REDUCER (First Revision) 3. Dimensions — See Table 1 4. Marking —The straight reducers shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different classes of fittings Class of Fitting Colour Class 2 (0.4 MPa) Blue Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPa) Yellow D— Mean socket internal diameter at mid-point of socket length as specified in IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988*. d— mean outside diameter of a spigot portion, that is mean outside diameter of pipe used f",
    "keywords": [
      "reducer",
      "portion",
      "class",
      "spigot",
      "reducers",
      "socket",
      "straight"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Marking": "The straight reducers shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different classes of fittings Class of Fitting Colour Class 2 (0.4 MPa) Blue Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPa) Yellow D— Mean socket internal diameter at mid-point of socket length as specified in IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988*. d— mean outside diameter of a spigot portion, that is mean outside diameter of pipe used for making reducer. L—minimum socket length in accordance with IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988*. C—minimum length of spigot portion (plain end) calculated from 0.5 dnom +10mm where dnom is nominal outside diameter of pipe from which the reducer is fabricated. * Specification for fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies. T—minimum wall thickness of spigot portion (corresponds to minimum wall thickness o"
    },
    "content": "IS 10124 (Part 3): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Portable Water Supplies\nPART 3 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR STRAIGHT REDUCER\n(First Revision)\n3. Dimensions — See Table 1\n4. Marking —The straight reducers shall be marked\nin colour as indicated below for different classes of fittings\nClass of Fitting Colour\nClass 2 (0.4 MPa)\nBlue\nClass 3 (0.6 MPa)\nGreen\nClass 4 (1.0 MPa)\nYellow\nD— Mean socket internal diameter at mid-point of socket length as specified in IS 10124\n(Part 1) : 1988*.\nd— mean outside diameter of a spigot portion, that is mean outside diameter of pipe used\nfor making reducer.\nL—minimum socket length in accordance with\nIS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988*.\nC—minimum length of spigot portion (plain end)\ncalculated from 0.5 dnom +10mm where dnom is nominal outside diameter of pipe from which\nthe reducer is fabricated.\n* Specification for fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies.\nT—minimum wall thickness of spigot portion\n(corresponds to minimum wall thickness of pipe of the same nominal size as that of the\nsocket and the corresponding pressure class). t—minimum wall thickness of socket portion calculated on the basis of 90 percent of the\nminimum wall thickness at spigot portion rounded off to the next higher 0.1 mm.\nNote—This figure is only intended to define the terms used\nin Table 1 and is not intended to illustrate specific design features.\nFIG. 1 STRAIGHT REDUCER TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF STRAIGHT REDUCERS\nAll dimensions in millimetres\nSize d\nB\nC\nMinimum Wall Thickness (t) For Working Pressure\nMin\nMax\nMin\nMin\n0.4 MPa (Class 2)\n0.6 MPa (Class 3)1.0 MPa (Class 4)\nT\nt\nT\nt\nT\nt\n(1)\n(2) (3)\n(4) (5) (6)\n(7)\n(8) (9)\n(10) (11)\n20-15\n16.0\n16.3 10\n18 – –\n– –\n1.1\n1.0\n25-20\n20.0\n20.3\n10 20 –\n–\n–\n–\n1.1\n1.0\n32-25\n25.0\n25.3\n10\n23 – – –\n–\n1.4\n1.3\n40-32 32.0\n32.3\n10\n26 – – –\n–\n1.8\n1.6\n50-40\n40.0\n40.3\n15\n30 – –\n1.4\n1.3 2.2 2.0\n63-50\n50.0\n50.3\n15\n35 – –\n1.7\n1.5\n2.8\n2.5\n75-63\n63.0\n63.3\n20\n42 1.5\n1.4\n2.2\n2.0\n3.5\n3.2\n90-75 75.0\n75.3 35\n48\n1.8\n1.7\n2.6\n2.4\n4.2\n3.8\n110-90\n90.0\n90.3\n35\n55 2.1\n1.9\n3.1\n2.8 5.0\n4.5\n125-110\n110.0\n110.4 35\n65\n2.5\n2.3\n3.7\n3.4\n6.1 5.5\n140-125\n125.0\n125.4\n45\n73\n2.9 2.7\n4.3\n3.9 6.9 6.3\n160-140\n140.0\n140.5\n45\n80\n3.2 2.9\n4.8 4.4\n7.7 7.0\n180-160\n160.0\n160.5\n45\n90 3.7\n3.4\n5.4\n4.9\n8.8\n8.0\n200-180\n180.0\n180.6 45\n100\n4.2\n3.8\n6.1 5.5 9.9 9.0\n225-200\n200.0 200.6\n55\n110\n4.6\n4.2\n6.8\n6.2\n11.0\n10.0\n250-225\n225.0\n225.7\n55\n123\n5.2\n4.7\n7.6\n6.9\n12.4\n11.2\n280-250\n250.0\n250.8 55 135\n5.7 5.2\n8.5\n7.7\n13.8\n12.5\n315-280 280.0\n280.9\n55 150\n6.4 5.8\n9.5\n8.6\n15.4\n13.9\n355-315\n315.0\n316.0\n65 168\n7.2 6.5 10.7\n9.7\n17.3\n15.6\n400-355\n355.0\n356.1\n65 188\n8.1\n7.3\n12.0\n10.8\n19.6 17.7\n450-400\n400.0\n401.2\n65 210\n9.1\n8.2 13.5\n12.2\n22.0\n19.8\n500-450\n450.0\n451.4\n65 235\n10.3 9.3\n15.2\n13.7 24.8\n22.4\n560-500\n500.0\n501.5\n75 260\n11.4\n10.3\n16.9\n15.5\n27.5 24.8\n630-560\n560.0\n561.7\n75 290\n12.8\n11.6\n18.9 17.2\n30.8 27.8\nFor detailed information,refer to IS 10124(Part 3): 1988 Specification for Fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies: Part 3 Specific requirements for straight reducers (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 4): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC caps for potable water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "caps",
      "class",
      "fabricated",
      "supplies",
      "potable",
      "pvc",
      "marking"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC caps for potable water supplies.",
      "Requirements": "The general requirements for materials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform toIS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988.",
      "Marking": "The cap shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different class of fittings— Class of Fitting Colour Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPA) Yellow For detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 4) :1988 Specification for fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies: Part 4 Specific requirements for caps (first revision). Note — For pipes of 0.25 MPa and 0.4 MPa pressure class, there are no caps and for these, the caps designed for 0.6 MPa working pressure may be used."
    },
    "content": "IS 10124 (Part 4): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies\nPART 4 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR CAPS\n(First Revision)\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR CAPS ALL\nDIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES\nSize\nMinimum Wall Thickness (t) For\nWorking Pressures\n0.6 MPa\n1.0 MPa (Class 3)\n(Class 4) (1)\n(2)\n(3) 63\n2.0\n3.2 75\n2.4\n3.8 90\n2.8\n4.5 110\n3.4\n5.5 125\n3.9\n6.3 140\n4.4\n7.0 160\n4.9\n8.0 180\n5.5\n9.0 200\n6.2\n10.0 225\n6.9\n11.2 250\n7.7\n12.5 280\n8.6\n13.9 315\n9.7\n15.6 355\n10.8\n17.7 400\n12.2\n19.8 450\n13.7\n22.4 500\n15.3\n24.8 560\n17.2\n27.8 630\n19.2\n31.3\n1. Scope — Requirements of manufacture, dimensions\nand marking for fabricated PVC caps for potable water supplies.\n2. Requirements —The general requirements for\nmaterials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform toIS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988.\n3. Dimensions —See Table 1\n4. Marking—The cap shall be marked in colour as\nindicated below for different class of fittings—\nClass of Fitting\nColour\nClass 3 (0.6 MPa)\nGreen\nClass 4 (1.0 MPA)\nYellow\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 4) :1988 Specification for fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies: Part 4 Specific requirements for caps (first revision).\nNote — For pipes of 0.25 MPa and 0.4 MPa pressure class,\nthere are no caps and for these, the caps designed for 0.6\nMPa working pressure may be used."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 5): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Portable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC tees for potable water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "class",
      "tees",
      "equal",
      "pvc",
      "marking",
      "fabricated",
      "critieria"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC flanged tail pieces with metallic flange for portable water supplies.",
      "Requirements": "The general requirements for materials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988.",
      "Marking": "The flanged tail piece with metallic flange shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different classes of fittings : Class of Fitting Colour Class 1 (0.25 MPa) Red Class 2 (0.4 MPa) Blue Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPa) Yellow"
    },
    "content": "IS 10124 (Part 5): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Portable Water Supplies\nPART 5 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT FOR EQUAL TEES\n(First Revision)\n1. Scope — Requirements of manufacture, dimensions\nand marking for fabricated PVC tees for potable water supplies.\n2. Requirements—The general requirements for\nmaterials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988.\n3. Dimensions —See Table 1\n4. Marking— The equal tee shall be marked in colour\nas indicated below for different class of fittings:\nClass of Fitting\nColour\nClass 2 (0.4 MPa)\nBlue\nClass 3 (0.6 MPa)\nGreen\nClass 4 (1.0 MPA)\nYellow\nTABLE 1 DIMENSION OF EQUAL TEES ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES\nSize\nB\nMinimum Wall Thickness (t )For Working Pressures Min 0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa\n1.0 MPa (Class 2)\n(Class 3)\n(Class 4) (1) (2)\n(3) (4)\n(5) 63\n98\n1.4\n2.0\n3.2 75\n115\n1.7\n2.4\n3.8 90\n137\n1.9\n2.8\n4.5 110\n166\n2.3\n3.4\n5.5 125\n188\n2.7\n3.9\n6.3 140\n209\n2.9\n4.4\n7.0 160\n238\n3.4\n4.9\n8.0 180\n267\n3.8\n5.5\n9.0 200\n296\n4.2\n6.2\n10.0 225\n333\n4.7\n6.9\n11.2 250\n369\n5.2\n7.7\n12.5 280\n412\n5.8\n8.6\n13.9 315\n463\n6.5\n9.7\n15.6 355\n521\n7.3\n10.8\n17.7 400\n586\n8.2\n12.2\n19.8 450\n659\n9.3\n13.7\n22.4 500\n731\n10.3\n15.3\n24.8 560\n818\n11.6\n17.2\n27.8 630\n920\n13.0\n19.2\n31.3\nNote — For pipes of 0.25 MPa pressure class, there are no equal tees for these, equal tees designed for 0.4 MPa may be used. * PVC welded by solvent or welding rod and with fibre glass reinforcement of 40 m width and 3 mm minimum thickness.\nD = mean socket internal diameter at mid-point of socket length as specified in IS : 10124 (Part 1) - 1988*.\nL = minimum socket length in accordance with IS : 10124 (Part 1) 1988*.\nB = 1.45 x nominal outside diameter of the pipe + 6 mm.\nt = minimum wall thickness of equal tees calculated on the basis of 90 percent of the minimum wall thickness of the corresponding size and pressure class of pipe rounded off to the next higher 0.1 mm.\nNote — The figure is only intended to define the terms used in Table 1 and is not intended to illustrate specific design features.\nFIG. 1 EQUAL TEE\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 5) : 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies : Part 5 Specific requirements for equal tees (first revision).\n* General requirements 1. Scope —Requirements of manufacture, dimensions\nand marking for fabricated PVC flanged tail pieces with metallic flange for portable water supplies.\n2. Requirements —The general requirements for\nmaterials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988.\n3. Dimensions — See Table 1\n4. Marking— The flanged tail piece with metallic\nflange shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different classes of fittings :\nClass of Fitting\nColour\nClass 1 (0.25 MPa)\nRed\nClass 2 (0.4 MPa)\nBlue\nClass 3 (0.6 MPa)\nGreen\nClass 4 (1.0 MPa)\nYellow"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 6): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC threaded adaptors for potable water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "tail",
      "class",
      "pieces",
      "flanged",
      "fabricated",
      "pvc",
      "dia"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC threaded adaptors for potable water supplies.",
      "Requirements": "The general requirements for sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988.",
      "Marking": "The threaded adaptors shall be marked in colour as iindicated below for different class of fittings: Class of Fitting Colour Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPa) Yellow"
    },
    "content": "IS 10124 (Part 6): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies\nPART 6 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR FLANGED TAIL\nPIECES WITH METTALLIC FLANGES\n(First Revision) Note— This figures is intended to define the terms used in Table 1 and is not intended to illustrate specific design features FIG 1 PVC FLANGED TAIL PIECE WITH METALLIC FLANGE Note — Fabricated tail pieces for sizes 225 mm and above are not generally recommended. For 0.25 MPa pressure class,\nfabricated tail pieces shaould not be made from 0.25 MPa (Class 1) pressure class pipes. For this, tail pieces made from 0.4 MPa\n(Class 2) pressure class pipe should be used.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS : 10124 (Part 6) : 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies: Part 6 Specific requirements for flanged tail pieces with\nmetallic flanges (first revision).\nTABLE 1. DIMENSIONS OF PVC FLANGED TAIL PIECE WITH METALLIC FLANGES\nAll dimensions in millimetres.\nSize\nDia, G\nDia, D Dia, d\nT\nDia H\nNo.\nR L\nDia E\nBolt of Holes\nMin\nMin\nMax\nSize (1) (2)\n(3) (4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\n(9)\n(10)\n(11) 63\n125 165 64\n7.0\n19\n4\n2.5\n68\n101\nM 16 75\n145 185 76\n7.0\n19\n4\n2.5\n80\n121\nM 16 90\n160 200 91\n9.5\n19\n4\n3.0\n95\n136\nM 16 110\n180 220 112\n9.5\n19\n8\n3.0\n115\n156\nM 16 125\n210 250 127\n11.0\n19\n8\n3.0\n130\n186\nM 16 140\n210 250 142\n12.5\n19\n8\n4.0\n145\n186\nM 16 160\n240 285 162\n12.5\n23\n8\n4.0\n165\n212\nM 20 180\n240 285 183\n12.5\n23\n8\n4.0\n185 212\nM 20 200\n295 340 203\n16.0\n23\n8\n4.0\n205 267\nM 20 225\n295\n340 228\n20.0\n23\n8\n4.0\n230 267\nM 20\n250\n350\n395\n253\n20.0\n23\n12\n5.0\n255 322\nM 20\n280 350\n395\n284\n20.0\n23\n12 5.0\n285 322\nM 20\n315 400\n445\n319\n24.5\n23\n12 5.0 320 372\nM 20\n355 460\n505 359\n24.5\n23\n16 5.0 360 432\nM 20\n400 515\n565 405 24.5\n28\n16 6.0 405 483\nM 24\n450 565\n615 455 28.0\n28\n16 6.0 455 533\nM 24 500\n620 670 506\n28.0 28\n20 6.0 505 588\nM 24 560\n685 740\n566 32.0 33\n20 6.0 565 649\nM 24 630\n755\n810 637\n32.0 33\n20 7.0 635 719\nM 27\n+1.0\n-0\n+1.0\n-0\n+1.0\n-0\n+1.0\n-0\n+1.0\n-0\n+1.0\n-0\n+1.0\n-0\n+1.0\n-0\n+1.0\n-0\n+1.0\n-0\n+1.0\n-0\n+1.0\n-0\n+1.0\n-0\n+1.0\n-0\n+2.0\n-0\n+2.0\n-0\n+2.0\n-0\n+2.0\n-0\n+2.0\n-0 1. Scope – Requirements of manufacture, dimensions\nand marking for fabricated PVC threaded adaptors for potable water supplies.\n2. Requirements – The general requirements for sizes,\nmethods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988.\n3. Dimensions – See Table 1\n4. Marking— The threaded adaptors shall be marked\nin colour as iindicated below for different class of fittings:\nClass of Fitting\nColour\nClass 3 (0.6 MPa)\nGreen\nClass 4 (1.0 MPa)\nYellow"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 7): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC 90 o bends for potable water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "threaded",
      "adaptors",
      "adaptor",
      "class",
      "portion",
      "bends",
      "fabricated"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC 90 o bends for potable water supplies.",
      "Requirements": "The general requirements for materials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988.",
      "Dimensions": "See Table 1. TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR 90O BENDS All Dimensions in millimetres. Size Y L R Minimum Wall Thickness(t) Min Min Min for Working Pressure (Only for Plain Bends) 0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 1.0 MPa (Class 2) (Class 3) (Class 4) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 63 297 63 189 1.4 2.0 3.2 75 354 75 225 1.7 2.4 3.8 90 424 90 270 1.9 2.8 4.5 110 519 110 330 2.3 3.4 5.5 125 589 125 375 2.7 3.9 6.3 140 660 140 420 2.9 4.4 7.0 160 754 160 480 3.4 4.9 8.0 180 848 180 540 3.8 5.5 9.0 200 942 200 600 4.2 6.2 10.0 225 1060 225 675 4.7 6.9 11.2 250 1178 250 750 5.2 7.7 12.5 280 1319 280 840 5.8 8.6 13.9 315 1484 315 945 6.5 9.7 15.6 355 1673 355 1065 7.3 10.8 17.7 400 1884 400 1200 8.2 12.2 19.8 450 2120 450 1350 9.3 13.7 22.4 500 2355 500 1500 10.3 15.3 24.8 560 2638 560 1680 11.6 17.2 27.8 630 2968 630 1890 1"
    },
    "content": "IS 10124 (Part 7): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fittings For Potable Water Supplies\nPART 7 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENT FOR THREADED ADAPTERS\n(First Revision)\nFIG. 1 THREADED ADAPTORS TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF THREADED ADAPTORS\nAll dimensions in millimetres.\nNominal Outside Diameter\nLength of\nThickness at\nThread\nDimensions\nLength of\nDimensions\nSize\nAtPlain Portion\nPlain portion Plain Portion\nDesigning\nPitch\nUseful of Pipe\nof threaded of Threaded\nof Threaded of Threaded\nThread\nRequired for\nAdaptor. Dia\nAdaptor\nFor Basic\nMaking\nGauge\nThreaded Adaptor\nLength\nOutside\nWall\nA\nB\nDiameter Thickness\nMax\nMin\nMin\nClass 3 Class4\nMin\nMin\nMaxClass 3Class4 0.\n6MPa 10MPa\nMin\nMin\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6) (7)\n(8)\n(9)\n(10)\n(11)\n(12)\n(13) 63 63.0\n63.3\n68.0\n5.5\n6.8\n2\n2.309\n23.4\n63.0\n63.3\n5.6\n6.9 75\n75.0\n75.3\n74.0\n4.1 5.7\n2. 1/2\n2.309\n26.7\n75.0\n75.3\n4.2\n5.8 90\n90.0\n90.3\n86.0\n5.7 7.6\n3\n2.309 29.8\n90.0\n90.3\n5.8\n7.7\n110\n110.0\n110.4\n106.0\n3.8 6.2\n4\n2.309\n35.8\n114.1\n114.5\n6.0\n8.4\nNote — For pipes of 0.25 MPa and 0.4 MPa, threaded adaptors for 0.6 MPa shall be used.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 7) : 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC fittings of potable water supplies: Part 7 Specific requirements for threaded adaptors (first\nrevision). 1. Scope – Requirements of manufacture, dimensions\nand marking for fabricated PVC 90 o bends for potable water supplies.\n2. Requirements — The general requirements for\nmaterials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988.\n3. Dimensions – See Table 1.\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR 90O BENDS\nAll Dimensions in millimetres.\nSize\nY\nL\nR Minimum Wall Thickness(t)\nMin\nMin\nMin for Working Pressure\n(Only for\nPlain\nBends) 0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 1.0 MPa\n(Class 2) (Class 3) (Class 4)\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n63\n297\n63\n189\n1.4\n2.0\n3.2\n75\n354\n75\n225\n1.7\n2.4\n3.8\n90\n424\n90\n270\n1.9\n2.8\n4.5\n110\n519\n110\n330\n2.3\n3.4\n5.5\n125\n589\n125\n375\n2.7\n3.9\n6.3\n140\n660\n140\n420\n2.9\n4.4\n7.0\n160\n754\n160\n480\n3.4\n4.9\n8.0\n180\n848\n180\n540\n3.8\n5.5\n9.0\n200\n942\n200\n600\n4.2\n6.2\n10.0\n225\n1060\n225\n675\n4.7\n6.9\n11.2\n250\n1178\n250\n750\n5.2\n7.7\n12.5\n280\n1319\n280\n840\n5.8\n8.6\n13.9\n315\n1484\n315\n945\n6.5\n9.7\n15.6\n355\n1673\n355\n1065\n7.3\n10.8\n17.7\n400\n1884\n400\n1200\n8.2\n12.2\n19.8\n450\n2120\n450\n1350\n9.3\n13.7\n22.4\n500\n2355\n500\n1500\n10.3\n15.3\n24.8\n560\n2638\n560\n1680\n11.6\n17.2\n27.8\n630\n2968\n630\n1890\n13.0\n19.2\n31.3"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 8): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fitting For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC 60 o bends for potable water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "bends",
      "class",
      "fabricated",
      "bend",
      "supplies",
      "potable",
      "pvc"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Marking": "The bend shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different class of fittings— Class of Fitting Colour Class 2 (0.4 MPa) Blue Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPa) Yellow Note 1— For 0.25 MPa pressure class, fabricated bends should not be made from 0.25 MPa pressure class pipes. For this, bends made from 0.4 MPa pressure class pipe should be used. Note 2—Y is calculated from × 2 π r, where r, radius of the bend is equal to 3 times the nominal outside diameter (D) For detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 8) : 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies: Part 8 Specific requirements for 90 o bends. (first revision). FIG. 1 90O BEND r o 360 90",
      "Scope": "Requirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC 60 o bends for potable water supplies.",
      "Requirements": "The general requirements for materials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988."
    },
    "content": "IS 10124 (Part 8): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fitting For Potable Water Supplies\nPART 8 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 90O BENDS.\n(First Revision)\n4. Marking —The bend shall be marked in colour as\nindicated below for different class of fittings—\nClass of Fitting\nColour\nClass 2 (0.4 MPa)\nBlue\nClass 3 (0.6 MPa)\nGreen\nClass 4 (1.0 MPa)\nYellow\nNote 1—\nFor 0.25 MPa pressure class, fabricated bends should not be made from 0.25 MPa pressure class pipes. For this, bends made from 0.4\nMPa pressure class pipe should be used.\nNote 2—Y is calculated from\n× 2 π r, where r, radius of the bend is equal to 3 times the nominal outside diameter (D)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 8) : 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies: Part 8 Specific requirements for 90 o bends. (first revision).\nFIG. 1 90O BEND\nr o\n360\n90 1. Scope – Requirements of manufacture, dimensions\nand marking for fabricated PVC 60 o bends for potable water supplies.\n2. Requirements — The general requirements for\nmaterials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988.\n3. Dimensions — See Table 1."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 9): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fitting For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC 45 o bends for potable water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "bends",
      "class",
      "fabricated",
      "bend",
      "pressure",
      "supplies",
      "potable"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Marking": "The bend shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different class of fittings: Class of Fitting Colour Class 2 (0.4 MPa) Blue Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPa) Yellow TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR 60O BENDS All Dimensions in millimetres. Size Y L R Minimum Wall Thickness(t) Min Min Min for Working Pressure (Only for Plain Bends) 0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 1.0 MPa (Class 2) (Class 3) (Class 4) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 63 198 63 189 1.4 2.0 3.2 75 236 75 225 1.7 2.4 3.8 90 283 90 270 1.9 2.8 4.5 110 346 110 330 2.3 3.4 5.5 125 393 125 375 2.7 3.9 6.3 140 440 140 420 2.9 4.4 7.0 160 503 160 480 3.4 4.9 8.0 180 566 180 540 3.8 5.5 9.0 200 629 200 600 4.2 6.2 10.0 225 707 225 675 4.7 6.9 11.2 250 786 250 750 5.2 7.7 12.5 280 880 280 840 5.8 8.6 13.9 315 990 315 945 6.5 9.7 15.6 355 1115 355 10",
      "Scope": "Requirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC 45 o bends for potable water supplies.",
      "Requirements": "The general requirements for materials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988."
    },
    "content": "IS 10124 (Part 9): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fitting For Potable Water Supplies\nPART 9 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 60O BENDS.\n(First Revision)\n4. Marking —The bend shall be marked in colour as\nindicated below for different class of fittings:\nClass of Fitting\nColour\nClass 2 (0.4 MPa)\nBlue\nClass 3 (0.6 MPa)\nGreen\nClass 4 (1.0 MPa)\nYellow\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR 60O BENDS\nAll Dimensions in millimetres.\nSize\nY\nL\nR Minimum Wall Thickness(t)\nMin\nMin\nMin for Working Pressure\n(Only for\nPlain\nBends) 0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 1.0 MPa\n(Class 2) (Class 3) (Class 4)\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n63\n198\n63\n189\n1.4\n2.0\n3.2\n75\n236\n75\n225\n1.7\n2.4\n3.8\n90\n283\n90\n270\n1.9\n2.8\n4.5\n110\n346\n110\n330\n2.3\n3.4\n5.5\n125\n393\n125\n375\n2.7\n3.9\n6.3\n140\n440\n140\n420\n2.9\n4.4\n7.0\n160\n503\n160\n480\n3.4\n4.9\n8.0\n180\n566\n180\n540\n3.8\n5.5\n9.0\n200\n629\n200\n600\n4.2\n6.2\n10.0\n225\n707\n225\n675\n4.7\n6.9\n11.2\n250\n786\n250\n750\n5.2\n7.7\n12.5\n280\n880\n280\n840\n5.8\n8.6\n13.9\n315\n990\n315\n945\n6.5\n9.7\n15.6\n355\n1115\n355\n1065\n7.3\n10.8\n17.7\n400\n1256\n400\n1200\n8.2\n12.2\n19.8\n450\n1413\n450\n1350\n9.3\n13.7\n22.4\n500\n1570\n500\n1500\n10.3\n15.3\n24.8\n560\n1759\n560\n1680\n11.6\n17.2\n27.8\n630\n1979\n630\n1890\n13.0\n19.2\n31.3\nFIG. 1 600 BEND\nNote 1— For 0.25 MPa pressure class, fabricated bends should not be made from 0.25 MPa pressure class pipes. For this, bends\nmade from 0.4 MPa pressure class pipe should be used.\nNote 2— Y is calculated from × 2 π R, where R, radius of the bend is equal to 3 times the nominal outside diameter (D)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 9) : 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies: Part 9 Specific requirements for 60 o bends. (first revision).\nr o\n360\n90 1. Scope – Requirements of manufacture, dimensions\nand marking for fabricated PVC 45 o bends for potable water supplies.\n2. Requirements — The general requirements for\nmaterials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988.\n3.\nDimensions — See Table 1."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 10): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fitting",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC 30 o bends for potable water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "bends",
      "class",
      "fabricated",
      "supplies",
      "potable",
      "bend",
      "pressure"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Marking": "The bend shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different class of fittings: Class of Fitting Colour Class 2 (0.4 MPa) Blue Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPa) Yellow TABLE 1. DIMENSIONS FOR 45O BENDS All dimensions in millimetres. Size Y L R Minimum Wall Thickness(t) Min Min Min for Working Pressure (Only for Plain Bends) 0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 1.0 MPa (Class 2) (Class 3) (Class 4) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 63 149 63 189 1.4 2.0 3.2 75 177 75 225 1.7 2.4 3.8 90 212 90 270 1.9 2.8 4.5 110 259 110 330 2.3 3.4 5.5 125 295 125 375 2.7 3.9 6.3 140 330 140 420 2.9 4.4 7.0 160 377 160 480 3.4 4.9 8.0 180 424 180 540 3.8 5.5 9.0 200 471 200 600 4.2 6.2 10.0 225 530 225 675 4.7 6.9 11.2 250 589 250 750 5.2 7.7 12.5 280 660 280 840 5.8 8.6 13.9 315 742 315 945 6.5 9.7 15.6 355 837 355 10",
      "Scope": "Requirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC 30 o bends for potable water supplies.",
      "Requirements": "The general requirements for materials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988."
    },
    "content": "IS 10124 (Part 10): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fitting\nFOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES.\nPART 10 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 45O BENDS.\n(First Revision)\n4.\nMarking —The bend shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different class of fittings: Class of Fitting\nColour\nClass 2 (0.4 MPa)\nBlue\nClass 3 (0.6 MPa)\nGreen\nClass 4 (1.0 MPa)\nYellow\nTABLE 1. DIMENSIONS FOR 45O BENDS\nAll dimensions in millimetres.\nSize\nY\nL\nR Minimum Wall Thickness(t)\nMin\nMin\nMin for Working Pressure\n(Only for\nPlain\nBends)\n0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 1.0 MPa\n(Class 2) (Class 3) (Class 4)\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n63\n149\n63\n189\n1.4\n2.0\n3.2\n75\n177\n75\n225\n1.7\n2.4\n3.8\n90\n212\n90\n270\n1.9\n2.8\n4.5\n110\n259\n110\n330\n2.3\n3.4\n5.5\n125\n295\n125\n375\n2.7\n3.9\n6.3\n140\n330\n140\n420\n2.9\n4.4\n7.0\n160\n377\n160\n480\n3.4\n4.9\n8.0\n180\n424\n180\n540\n3.8\n5.5\n9.0\n200\n471\n200\n600\n4.2\n6.2\n10.0\n225\n530\n225\n675\n4.7\n6.9\n11.2\n250\n589\n250\n750\n5.2\n7.7\n12.5\n280\n660\n280\n840\n5.8\n8.6\n13.9\n315\n742\n315\n945\n6.5\n9.7\n15.6\n355\n837\n355\n1065\n7.3\n10.8\n17.7\n400\n842\n400\n1200\n8.2\n12.2\n19.8\n450\n1060\n450\n1350\n9.3\n13.7\n22.4\n500\n1178\n500\n1500\n10.3\n15.3\n24.8\n560\n1319\n560\n1680\n11.6\n17.2\n27.8\n630\n1484\n630\n1890\n13.0\n19.2\n31.3\nNote 1—\nFor 0.25 MPa pressure class, fabricated bends should not be made from 0.25 MPa pressure class pipes. For this, bends made from 0.4 MPa pressure class pipe should be used.\nNote 2— Y is calculated from\n× 2 π R, where R, radius of the bend is equal to 3 times the nominal outside diameter (D)\nFIG. 1 450 BEND\nr o\n360\n90\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 10) : 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies Part 10 Specific requirements for 45 o bends. (first revision). 1. Scope– Requirements of manufacture, dimensions\nand marking for fabricated PVC 30 o bends for potable water supplies.\n2. Requirements — The general requirements for\nmaterials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988.\n3. Dimensions—See Table 1."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 11): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fitting",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC 22½ o bends for potable water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "bends",
      "class",
      "fabricated",
      "supplies",
      "potable",
      "bend",
      "pressure"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Marking": "The bend shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different class of fittings: Class of Fitting Colour Class 2 (0.4 MPa) Blue Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPa) Yellow TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR 30O BENDS All dimensions in millimetres. Size Y L R Minimum Wall Thickness(t) Min Min Min for Working Pressure (Only for Plain Bends) 0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 1.0 MPa (Class 2) (Class 3) (Class 4) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 63 99 63 189 1.4 2.0 3.2 75 118 75 225 1.7 2.4 3.8 90 142 90 270 1.9 2.8 4.5 110 173 110 330 2.3 3.4 5.5 125 197 125 375 2.7 3.9 6.3 140 220 140 420 2.9 4.4 7.0 160 252 160 480 3.4 4.9 8.0 180 283 180 540 3.8 5.5 9.0 200 314 200 600 4.2 6.2 10.0 225 354 225 675 4.7 6.9 11.2 250 393 250 750 5.2 7.7 12.5 280 440 280 840 5.8 8.6 13.9 315 495 315 945 6.5 9.7 15.6 355 558 355 1065",
      "Scope": "Requirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC 22½ o bends for potable water supplies.",
      "Requirements": "The general requirements for materials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988."
    },
    "content": "IS 10124 (Part 11): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fitting\nFOR POTABLE WATER SUPPLIES.\nPART 11 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 30O BENDS.\n(First Revision)\n4. Marking —The bend shall be marked in colour as\nindicated below for different class of fittings:\nClass of Fitting\nColour\nClass 2 (0.4 MPa)\nBlue\nClass 3 (0.6 MPa)\nGreen\nClass 4 (1.0 MPa)\nYellow\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR 30O BENDS\nAll dimensions in millimetres.\nSize\nY\nL\nR Minimum Wall Thickness(t)\nMin\nMin\nMin for Working Pressure\n(Only for\nPlain\nBends)\n0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 1.0 MPa\n(Class 2) (Class 3) (Class 4)\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7) 63\n99\n63\n189\n1.4\n2.0\n3.2\n75\n118\n75\n225\n1.7\n2.4\n3.8\n90\n142\n90\n270\n1.9\n2.8\n4.5\n110\n173\n110\n330\n2.3\n3.4\n5.5\n125\n197\n125\n375\n2.7\n3.9\n6.3\n140\n220\n140\n420\n2.9\n4.4\n7.0\n160\n252\n160\n480\n3.4\n4.9\n8.0\n180\n283\n180\n540\n3.8\n5.5\n9.0\n200\n314\n200\n600\n4.2\n6.2\n10.0\n225\n354\n225\n675\n4.7\n6.9\n11.2\n250\n393\n250\n750\n5.2\n7.7\n12.5\n280\n440\n280\n840\n5.8\n8.6\n13.9\n315\n495\n315\n945\n6.5\n9.7\n15.6\n355\n558\n355\n1065\n7.3\n10.8\n17.7\n400\n628\n400\n1200\n8.2\n12.2\n19.8\n450\n707\n450\n1350\n9.3\n13.7\n22.4\n500\n785\n500\n1500\n10.3\n15.3\n24.8\n560\n880\n560\n1680\n11.6\n17.2\n27.8\n630\n990\n630\n1890\n13.0\n19.2\n31.3\nNote 1—\nFor 0.25 MPa pressure class, fabricated bends should not be made from 0.25 MPa pressure class pipes.For this, bends made from 0.4\nMPa pressure class pipe should be used.\nNote 2— Y is calculated from × 2 π r, where r, radius of the bend is equal to 3 times the nominal outside diameter (D)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 11) : 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies Part 11 Specific requirements for 30 o bends. (first revision).\nFIG. 1 30O BEND\nr o\n360\n90 1. Scope — Requirements of manufacture, dimensions\nand marking for fabricated PVC 22½ o bends for potable water supplies.\n2. Requirements — The general requirements for\nmaterials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988.\n3. Dimensions—See Table 1."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 12): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fitting For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC 11¼ o bends for potable water supplies.",
    "keywords": [
      "bends",
      "class",
      "fabricated",
      "bend",
      "pressure",
      "supplies",
      "potable"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Marking": "The bend shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different class of fittings: Class of Fitting Colour Class 2 (0.4 MPa) Blue Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPA) Yellow Note 1– For 0.25 MPa pressure class, fabricated bends should not be made from 0.25 MPa pressure class pipes.For this, bends made from 0.4 MPa pressure class pipe should be used. Note 2 – Y is calculated from × 2 π r, where r, radius of the bend is equal to 3 times the nominal outside diameter (D) For detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 12) : 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies Part 12 Specific requirements for 22½ o bends. (first revision). FIG. 1 220–30’ BEND o o 360 2 1 22",
      "Scope": "Requirements of manufacture, dimensions and marking for fabricated PVC 11¼ o bends for potable water supplies.",
      "Requirements": "The general requirements for materials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988."
    },
    "content": "IS 10124 (Part 12): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fitting For Potable Water Supplies\nPART 12 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 22½O BENDS\n(First Revision)\nTABLE 1. DIMENSIONS FOR 22½O BENDS\nAll Dimensions in millimetres\nSize\nY\nL\nR Minimum Wall Thickness (t)\nMin\nMin\nMin for Working Pressure\n(Only for\nPlain\nBends)\n0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 1.0 MPa\n(Class 2) (Class 3) (Class 4)\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7) 63\n75\n63\n189\n1.4\n2.0\n3.2\n75\n89\n75\n225\n1.7\n2.4\n3.8\n90\n106\n90\n270\n1.9\n2.8\n4.5\n110\n130\n110\n330\n2.3\n3.4\n5.5\n125\n148\n125\n375\n2.7\n3.9\n6.3\n140\n165\n140\n420\n2.9\n4.4\n7.0\n160\n189\n160\n480\n3.4\n4.9\n8.0\n180\n213\n180\n540\n3.8\n5.5\n9.0\n200\n236\n200\n600\n4.2\n6.2\n10.0\n225\n266\n225\n675\n4.7\n6.9\n11.2\n250\n295\n250\n750\n5.2\n7.7\n12.5\n280\n330\n280\n840\n5.8\n8.6\n13.9\n315\n371\n315\n945\n6.5\n9.7\n15.6\n355\n419\n355\n1065\n7.3\n10.8\n17.7\n400\n471\n400\n1200\n8.2\n12.2\n19.8\n450\n530\n450\n1350\n9.3\n13.7\n22.4\n500\n589\n500\n1500\n10.3\n15.3\n24.8\n560\n660\n560\n1680\n11.6\n17.2\n27.8\n630\n742\n630\n1890\n13.0\n19.2\n31.3\n4. Marking —The bend shall be marked in colour as\nindicated below for different class of fittings: Class of Fitting Colour\nClass 2 (0.4 MPa)\nBlue\nClass 3 (0.6 MPa)\nGreen\nClass 4 (1.0 MPA)\nYellow\nNote 1– For 0.25 MPa pressure class, fabricated bends should not be made from 0.25 MPa pressure class pipes.For this, bends\nmade from 0.4\nMPa pressure class pipe should be used. Note 2 – Y is calculated from\n× 2 π r, where r, radius of the bend is equal to 3 times the nominal outside diameter (D)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 12) : 1988 Specification for fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies Part 12 Specific requirements for 22½ o bends. (first revision).\nFIG. 1 220–30’ BEND\no o\n360\n2\n1\n22 1. Scope — Requirements of manufacture, dimensions\nand marking for fabricated PVC 11¼ o bends for potable water supplies.\n2. Requirements — The general requirements for\nmaterials, sizes, methods of test, sampling and critieria for conformity shall conform to IS 10124 (Part 1) : 1988.\n3. Dimensions—See Table 1."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10124 (Part 13): 1988",
    "title": "Fabricated Pvc Fitting For Potable Water Supplies",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for materials, dimensions, classification, testing and type of joints of machine-made pipes with glass fibre reinforced thermosetting resin with or without aggregate filler having nominal diameter from 200 mm to 3000 mm for use at pressure up to 1500 kPa for conveyance of potable water. Provisions relating to fittings fabricated from GRP pipes or by moulding process and joints covered in this standard are for guidance only.",
    "keywords": [
      "class",
      "bends",
      "pressure",
      "stiffness",
      "kpa",
      "resin",
      "pipes"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Marking": "The bend shall be marked in colour as indicated below for different class of fittings: Class of Fitting Colour Class 2 (0.4 MPa) Blue Class 3 (0.6 MPa) Green Class 4 (1.0 MPa) Yellow TABLE 1DIMENSIONS FOR 11¼O BENDS All dimensions in millimetres. Size Y L R Minimum Wall Thickness(t) Min Min Min for Working Pressure (Only for Plain Bends) 0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 1.0 MPa (Class 2) (Class 3) (Class 4) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 63 38 63 189 1.4 2.0 3.2 75 45 75 225 1.7 2.4 3.8 90 53 90 270 1.9 2.8 4.5 110 65 110 330 2.3 3.4 5.5 125 74 125 375 2.7 3.9 6.3 140 83 140 420 2.9 4.4 7.0 160 95 160 480 3.4 4.9 8.0 180 106 180 540 3.8 5.5 9.0 200 118 200 600 4.2 6.2 10.0 225 133 225 675 4.7 6.9 11.2 250 148 250 750 5.2 7.7 12.5 280 165 280 840 5.8 8.6 13.9 315 186 315 945 6.5 9.7 15.6 355 209 355 1065 7.3 1",
      "Scope": "Requirements for materials, dimensions, classification, testing and type of joints of machine-made pipes with glass fibre reinforced thermosetting resin with or without aggregate filler having nominal diameter from 200 mm to 3000 mm for use at pressure up to 1500 kPa for conveyance of potable water. Provisions relating to fittings fabricated from GRP pipes or by moulding process and joints covered in this standard are for guidance only. 2. Classification 2.1 Pressure Classes (PN) : Five pressure classes of pipes namely, PN 3, PN 6, PN 9, PN 12 and PN 15 correspond to the working pressure rating of 300, 600, 900, 1 200 and 1500 KPa respectively. Note — The working pressure ratings mentiond above may have to be changed for use at fluid temperature greater than 43.50 C, in occordance with the",
      "Designation": "is based on nominal diameters, DN Summary of — which are 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1 000, 1 100, 1 200, 1 400, 1 600, 1 800, 2 000, 2 200, 2 400, 2 600, 2 800 and 3 000 mm. 4. Materials 4.1 Resin – Appropriate type of unsaturated polyster resin systems conforming to IS 6746 : 1994@. The resin and additives used shall be such that they contain no ingredients, in an amount that has been demonstrated to migrate into water in quantities that are considered to be toxic; satisfying the potability of water. 4.2 Glass Fibre Reinforcement — Glass fibre reinforcement shall be of commercial grade E type and shall conform to IS 11273:1992+, IS 11320 : 1985 * or IS 11551: 1986 ++, as a appropriate."
    },
    "content": "IS 10124 (Part 13): 1988 Fabricated Pvc Fitting For Potable Water Supplies\nPART 13 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR 11¼O BENDS\n(First Revision)\n4. Marking —The bend shall be marked in colour as\nindicated below for different class of fittings: Class of Fitting\nColour\nClass 2 (0.4 MPa)\nBlue\nClass 3 (0.6 MPa)\nGreen\nClass 4 (1.0 MPa)\nYellow\nTABLE 1DIMENSIONS FOR 11¼O BENDS\nAll dimensions in millimetres.\nSize\nY\nL\nR Minimum Wall Thickness(t)\nMin\nMin\nMin for Working Pressure\n(Only for\nPlain\nBends)\n0.4 MPa 0.6 MPa 1.0 MPa\n(Class 2) (Class 3) (Class 4)\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7) 63\n38\n63\n189\n1.4\n2.0\n3.2\n75\n45\n75\n225\n1.7\n2.4\n3.8\n90\n53\n90\n270\n1.9\n2.8\n4.5\n110\n65\n110\n330\n2.3\n3.4\n5.5\n125\n74\n125\n375\n2.7\n3.9\n6.3\n140\n83\n140\n420\n2.9\n4.4\n7.0\n160\n95\n160\n480\n3.4\n4.9\n8.0\n180\n106\n180\n540\n3.8\n5.5\n9.0\n200\n118\n200\n600\n4.2\n6.2\n10.0\n225\n133\n225\n675\n4.7\n6.9\n11.2\n250\n148\n250\n750\n5.2\n7.7\n12.5\n280\n165\n280\n840\n5.8\n8.6\n13.9\n315\n186\n315\n945\n6.5\n9.7\n15.6\n355\n209\n355\n1065\n7.3\n10.8\n17.7\n400\n236\n400\n1200\n8.2\n12.2\n19.8\n450\n265\n450\n1350\n9.3\n13.7\n22.4\n500\n295\n500\n1500\n10.3\n15.3\n24.8\n560\n330\n560\n1680\n11.6\n17.2\n27.8\n630\n371\n630\n1890\n13.0\n19.2\n31.3\nFIG 1 110–15’ BEND\nNote 1— For 0.25 MPa pressure class, fabricated bends should not be made from 0.25 MPa pressure class pipes. For this, bends\nmade from 0.4 MPa pressure class pipe should be used.\nNote 2 — Y is calculated from 11¼o × 2 π r, where r, radius of the bend is equal to 3 times the nominal outside diameter (D). 3600\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 10124 (Part 13) : 1988 Specification for Fabricated PVC fittings for potable water supplies. Part 13 specific requirements for 11¼o bends. (first revision). 4.3 Other Materials\nNote—For other materials, see 6.3 of the standard.\n5. Dimensions\n5.1\nDiameters— See Tables 1 and 2.\nTABLE 1 SPECIFIED INSIDE DIAMETERS AND\nTOLERANCES\nAll Dimensions in Millimetres\nNominal Inside Diameter Tolerances\nDiameter, Range on Declared\nDN ID\nID Min Max 200 196 204\n±1.5 250 246 255\n±1.5 300 296 306\n±1.8 350 346 356\n± 2.0 400 396 408\n± 2.4 450 446 459\n± 2.7 500 496 510\n± 3.0 600 596 612\n± 3.6 700 695 714 800 795 816\n± 4.2 900 895 918\n1000 995 1 020\n1100\n1 095 1 120\n1200\n1 195 1 220\n1400\n1 395 1 420\n± 5.0\n1600\n1 595 1 620\n1800\n1 795 1 820\n2000\n1 995 2 020\n2200\n2 195 2 220\n2400\n2 395 2 420\n2600\n2 595 2 620 ± 6.0\n2800\n2 795 2 820\n3000\n2 995 3 020\n1. Scope—Requirements for materials, dimensions,\nclassification, testing and type of joints of machine-made pipes with glass fibre reinforced thermosetting resin with\nor without aggregate filler having nominal diameter from\n200 mm to 3000 mm for use at pressure up to 1500 kPa for conveyance of potable water. Provisions relating to\nfittings fabricated from GRP pipes or by moulding process and joints covered in this standard are for guidance only.\n2. Classification\n2.1 Pressure Classes (PN) : Five pressure classes of\npipes namely, PN 3, PN 6, PN 9, PN 12 and PN 15 correspond to the working pressure rating of 300, 600,\n900, 1 200 and 1500 KPa respectively.\nNote — The working pressure ratings mentiond above may\nhave to be changed for use at fluid temperature greater than\n43.50 C, in occordance with the manufacturer's\nrecommendations.\n2.2 Stiffness Class (SN) — Four stiffness classes of\npipes namely A, B, C and D correspond to minimum pipe stiffness values of 62, 124, 248 and 496 kPa respectively\nat 5% deflection.\n3. Size designation— is based on nominal diameters,\nDN Summary of — which are 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450,\n500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1 000, 1 100, 1 200, 1 400, 1 600, 1\n800, 2 000, 2 200, 2 400, 2 600, 2 800 and 3 000 mm.\n4. Materials\n4.1 Resin – Appropriate type of unsaturated polyster\nresin systems conforming to IS 6746 : 1994@. The resin and additives used shall be such that they contain no\ningredients, in an amount that has been demonstrated to migrate into water in quantities that are considered to be\ntoxic; satisfying the potability of water.\n4.2 Glass Fibre Reinforcement — Glass fibre\nreinforcement shall be of commercial grade E type and shall conform to IS 11273:1992+, IS 11320 : 1985 * or IS\n11551: 1986 ++, as a appropriate."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12709: 1994",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes, Joints And Fittings For Use For Potable Water Supply",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements of ribbed screen, plain screen and plain casing pipes of nominal diameter 40 to 400 mm produced from unplasticized polyvinyl chloride for bore/tubewell for water supply.",
    "keywords": [
      "laminate",
      "maximum",
      "pipe",
      "screen",
      "resin",
      "stiffness",
      "reinforcement"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Restrained": "Similar to 6.1 (a) with supplemental restraining elements. Butt Joint - with laminate over lay. Socket-and spigot with laminated overlay . Socket-and- Spigot-adhesive bounded, flanged and mechanical. 6.3 Gasket— Elastomeric gaskets when used with the pipe shall conform to the requirements of IS 5382 : 1985.**",
      "Workmanship": "Shall meet the acceptance specified is table 3 ** Rubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains and savers (first revision) Fracture Rupture of laminate surface without complete Maximum diameter, 29 mm penetration. Air bubble Air entrapment within and between the plies of Maximum diameter, 3.0 mm (void) reinforcement. Blister Rounded elevation of the surface of a laminate, Maximum diameter, 6.5 mm; with boundaries that may be more or less Height from surface not to be side sharply defined, some what resembling in shape tolerance. side drawing tolerance.a blister on the human skin. Burned Showing evidence of thermal decomposition None through some discolouration, distortion, or destruction of the surface of the laminate. Fish-eye Small globular mass which has not blended Maximum diameter,",
      "Pipe Stiffness": "Each length of pipe shall have sufficient strength to exhibit the minimum pipe stiffness (F/rY) specified in Table 4. TABLE 4 PIPE STIFFNESS AT 5 PERCENT DEFLECTION Stiffness Minimum Stiffness of Pipe of Class(SN) DN, At 5 percent Deflection, kPa 200 mm 250 mm 300 mm A — — 62 B — — 124 C 248 248 248 D 496 496 496 where F = load per unit length in kN per mete length, and ry = vertical pipe deflection, in metres.",
      "Fittings": "All GRP fittings, such as bends, tees, junctions and reducers, shall be equal or superior in performance to pipe of the same classification and shall be smoothly finished internally. GRP fittings are not subject to tests for strength and it is essential that external restraint be considered for installation. 9.1Fittings may be made : a) from straight pipes b) by moulding 10. Hydraulic Test 10.1 General — Working pressure Pw in the system shall not exceed the pressure class of the pipe, i.e. Pw PN. When surge pressure is considered , the maximum pressure class of pipe Pw+PN>1.4 PN. 10.2 Soundness— Shall withstand without leakage or cracking the internal hydrostatic test pressures specified in Table 4 of the standard.",
      "Longitudinal Strength": "Shall withstand without failure the beam loads specified in Table 5 of the standard.",
      "Hoop Tensile Strength": "Shall meet or exceed the hoop tensile strength shown in Table 6 of the standard.",
      "Long Term Hydrostatic Design Pressure Test": "Pressure classes specified shall be based on long term hydrostatic design pressure data categorised in accordance with Table 7 of the standard.",
      "Test To Establish Portability Of Water": "shall satisfy the prescribed tests. Note— For methods of tests refer to Appendices A to F of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 12709 : 1994 Specification for glass fibre reinforced plastic (GRP) pipes, joints and fittings for use for potable water supply (first revision) ≤",
      "Scope": "Requirements of ribbed screen, plain screen and plain casing pipes of nominal diameter 40 to 400 mm produced from unplasticized polyvinyl chloride for bore/tubewell for water supply.",
      "Composition": "The pipe shall be produced from material consisting substantially polyvinyl chloride conforming to IS 10151 : 1982* which may be added only those additives as are needed to facilitate manufacture of sound pipe with good surface finish, mechanical strength and opacity under conditions of use.",
      "Colour": "Shall be of regular blue colour throughout. Slight colour deviation is permissible.",
      "Designation": "Pipe shall be designated by its type whether ribbed screen (RS), plain screen (PS) or casing (CS or CM) followed by its nominal diameter DN, slot width and length of the pipe. Example — Ribbed Screen pipe of DN 200 with slot width 1.5 mm and length 2000 mm shall be designated as RS 200 × 1.5 × 2000. 5. Dimensions",
      "Screen Pipes": "See Table 1 and 2 and also Fig. 1 of the Standard. 5.2 Casing Pipe — See Tables 3 and 4. 5.3 Ribs — Minimum number of ribs provided shall be three ribs per centimetre of the slotted segments on the circumference. Minimum height, h of the rib 5.4 Lengths — See Tables 5 and 6. 5.5 Slots — See Table 7 Tolerances on overall length and segmental lengths of pipes shall be as follows : i) Effective length: l2 — not less than the specified value. ii) Effective Thread length, l3 — a) For DN up to and including 200 shall be 2mm. The ribs should not have sharp edges - spigot end + 0, – 4mm- socket end + 4, – 0 mm b) For DN above 200- spigot end +0.6 mm- socket end + 6,– 0 mm iii) Segmental length,: l4 ± 25 mm (screen portion) iv) Segmental length, l5 + 25, – 0 mm"
    },
    "content": "IS 12709: 1994 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes, Joints And Fittings For Use For Potable Water Supply\n(First Revision)\n@ Unsaturated polyester resin system (first revision)\n+ Woven roving fabrics of ‘E’ glass fibre (first revision)\n* Glass fibre roving for the reinforcement of polyester and of epoxide resin systems (first revision).\n++ Glass fibre chopped strand mat for reinforcement of epoxy, phenolic and polyester resin systems (first revision). TABLE 3 ALLOWABLE DEFECTS\nName\nDefinition Visual acceptance Level\nChip\nA small piece broken off an edge or surface\nMamimum dimension of break 6.5 mm\nCrack\nAn actual separation of the laminate, Visible\nNone on opposite surfaces, and extending through\nthe thickness\nCrack, surface\nCrack existing only on the surface of the laminate\nMaximum length, 6.5 mm\nCrazing\nFine cracks at or under the surface of a laminate\nMaximum dimension of crazing 2.5 mm\nDelamination, edge\nSeparation of the layers of material at the\nMaximum dimension, 6.5 mm edge of a laminate.\nDelamination\nSeparation of the layer of material in a\nNone internal\nlaminate\nDry-spot\nArea of incomplete surface film where the\nMamimum diamaeter, 14 mm reinforcement has not been wetted with resin\nForeign inclusion\nMetallic particles included in a laminate\nMaximum dimension, 1.5 mm\n(metallic)\nwhich are foreign to its composition.\nForeign inclusion\nNon-metallic particles of substance included in a\nMaximum dimension, 1.5 mm\n(non-metallic)\nlaminate which seem foreign to its compostion\nTABLE 2 SPECIFIED OUTSIDE DIAMETERS AND\nTOLERANCES\nAll dimensions in millimetres.\nNominal\nInside Diameter Tolerance\nTolerances\nDiameter, DN OD 200 208\n+2.0 250 259 +2.1 300 310 +2.3 350 361 +2.4 400 412 +2.5 450 463 +2.7 500 514 +2.8 600 614 +3.0 700 718 +3.3 800 820 +3.5 900 922 +3.8 1000 1024 +4.0 – 0.2 1100 1126\n+4.3 1200 1228 +4.5 1400 1432\n+5.0 1600 1636\n+5.5 1800 1840\n+6.0 2000 2044\n+6.5 2200 2248\n+7.0 2400 2452\n+7.5 2600 2656\n+8.0 2800 2830\n+8.5 3000 3064\n+9.0\n5.2 Lengths — 6 m, 9 m, and 12 m effective lengths with\na tolerance of ± 25mm.\n5.3 Out of squareness of pipe–All points around each\nend of a pipe unit shall fall within ± 6.5 mm or ± 0.5 percent of the nominal diameter of the pipe which ever\nis greater, to a plane prependicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe.\n5.4 Wall Thickness – Shall be such as to satisfy the\noutside and inside diameter and the tests specified\n6. Joints\n6.1 Unrestrained (a) Couping or socket and spigot Gasket Joints.\n(b) Mechanical Couplings\n6.2. Restrained— Similar to 6.1 (a) with supplemental restraining elements. Butt Joint - with laminate over lay.\nSocket-and spigot with laminated overlay . Socket-and-\nSpigot-adhesive bounded, flanged and mechanical.\n6.3 Gasket— Elastomeric gaskets when used with the\npipe shall conform to the requirements of IS 5382 : 1985.**\n7. Workmanship – Shall meet the acceptance specified\nis table 3\n** Rubber sealing rings for gas mains, water mains and savers (first revision) Fracture\nRupture of laminate surface without complete Maximum diameter, 29 mm penetration.\nAir bubble\nAir entrapment within and between the plies of\nMaximum diameter, 3.0 mm\n(void)\nreinforcement.\nBlister\nRounded elevation of the surface of a laminate,\nMaximum diameter, 6.5 mm;\nwith boundaries that may be more or less\nHeight from surface not to be side sharply defined, some what resembling in shape\ntolerance.\nside drawing tolerance.a blister on the human skin.\nBurned\nShowing evidence of thermal decomposition None through some discolouration, distortion, or\ndestruction of the surface of the laminate.\nFish-eye\nSmall globular mass which has not blended\nMaximum diameter, 13 mm completely into the surrounding material\nand is particularly evident in a transparent or translucent material.\nLack of fillout\nAn area, occuring usually at the edge of a\nMaximum diameter, 9.5 mm laminated plastic where the reinforcement\nhas not been wetted with resin.\nOrange-peel\nUneven surface somewhat resembling an\nMamimum diameter, 29 mm organge-peel\nPimple\nSmall, sharp, or conical elevation of the surface\nMaximum diameter, 3.0 mm of a laminate.\nPit (pinhole)\nSmall crater in the surface of the laminate,\nMaximum diameter 0.8 mm;\nwith its width approximately of the same order depth less than 20 percent of wall\nmagnitude as its depth.\nthickness\nPorosity Pinhole\nPresence of numerous visible pits (Pinholes)\nMaximum of 50 pits (Pinholes)\npre-gel\nAn unintentional extra layer of cured resin on\nMaximum dimension, 13 mm;\npart of the surface of the laminate above surface not to be outside\n(The condition does not include gel coats)\ndrawing tolerance.\nResin-pocket\nAn apparent accumulation of excess resin\nMaximum diameter, 6.5 mm in a small localized area witnin the laminate\nResin-rich edge\nInsufficient reinforcing material at the edge\nMaximum 0.8 mm from the edge of molded laminate\nShrink-mark\nDepression in the surface of a moulded\nMaximum diameter, 14 mm; epth\n(sink)\nlaminatewhere it has retracted from the greater than 25% of wall\nmould thickness\nWash\nArea where the reinforcement of moulded\nMaximum dimension, 29 mm plastic has moved inadvertently during closure\nof the mould resulting in resin rich areas\nWormhole\nElongated air entrapment which is either in or\nMaximum diameter, 6.5 mm near the surface of a laminate and may be\ncovered by a thin film of cured resin\nWrinkles\nIn a laminate, an imperfecting that has the\nMaximum length surface side, 25 mm, appearance of a wave moulded into one or\nMaximum length opposite material more plies of fabric or other reinforcement material\nside, 25 mm. Depth less than 15% of wall thickness.\nScratch\nShallow Mark, groove, furrow, or channel\nMaximum length, 25 mm;\ncaused by improper handling or storage maximum depth, 0.225 mm\nShort\nIn a laminate, an incompletely filled out condition\nNone 8. Pipe stiffness — Each length of pipe shall have\nsufficient strength to exhibit the minimum pipe stiffness\n(F/rY) specified in Table 4. TABLE 4 PIPE STIFFNESS AT 5 PERCENT\nDEFLECTION\nStiffness\nMinimum Stiffness of Pipe of\nClass(SN)\nDN,\nAt 5 percent Deflection, kPa\n200 mm\n250 mm\n300 mm\nA\n—\n—\n62\nB\n—\n—\n124\nC\n248\n248\n248\nD\n496\n496\n496 where\nF = load per unit length in kN per mete length, and ry = vertical pipe deflection, in metres.\n9. Fittings — All GRP fittings, such as bends, tees,\njunctions and reducers, shall be equal or superior in performance to pipe of the same classification and shall\nbe smoothly finished internally.\nGRP fittings are not subject to tests for strength and it is essential that external restraint be considered for\ninstallation.\n9.1Fittings may be made :\na) from straight pipes b) by moulding\n10. Hydraulic Test\n10.1\nGeneral — Working pressure Pw in the system shall not exceed the pressure class of the pipe, i.e.\nPw PN. When surge pressure is considered , the maximum pressure class of pipe Pw+PN>1.4 PN.\n10.2 Soundness— Shall withstand without leakage or\ncracking the internal hydrostatic test pressures specified in Table 4 of the standard.\n11. Longitudinal strength – Shall withstand without\nfailure the beam loads specified in Table 5 of the standard.\n12. Hoop tensile strength – Shall meet or exceed the\nhoop tensile strength shown in Table 6 of the standard.\n13. Long term hydrostatic design pressure test—\nPressure classes specified shall be based on long term hydrostatic design pressure data categorised in\naccordance with Table 7 of the standard.\n14. Test to establish portability of water— shall satisfy\nthe prescribed tests.\nNote— For methods of tests refer to Appendices A to F of\nthe standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12709 : 1994 Specification for glass fibre reinforced plastic\n(GRP) pipes, joints and fittings for use for potable water supply (first revision) ≤ 1. Scope — Requirements of ribbed screen, plain screen\nand plain casing pipes of nominal diameter 40 to 400 mm produced from unplasticized polyvinyl chloride for\nbore/tubewell for water supply.\n2. Composition — The pipe shall be produced from\nmaterial consisting substantially polyvinyl chloride conforming to IS 10151 : 1982* which may be added only\nthose additives as are needed to facilitate manufacture of sound pipe with good surface finish, mechanical strength\nand opacity under conditions of use.\n3. Colour — Shall be of regular blue colour throughout.\nSlight colour deviation is permissible.\n4. Designation — Pipe shall be designated by its type\nwhether ribbed screen (RS), plain screen (PS) or casing\n(CS or CM) followed by its nominal diameter DN, slot width and length of the pipe.\nExample — Ribbed Screen pipe of DN 200 with slot width 1.5 mm and length 2000 mm shall be designated\nas RS 200 × 1.5 × 2000.\n5. Dimensions\n5.1. Screen Pipes —See Table 1 and 2 and also Fig.\n1 of the Standard.\n5.2\nCasing Pipe — See Tables 3 and 4.\n5.3\nRibs — Minimum number of ribs provided shall be three ribs per centimetre of the slotted segments on\nthe circumference. Minimum height, h of the rib 5.4 Lengths — See Tables 5 and 6.\n5.5 Slots — See Table 7 Tolerances on overall length and segmental lengths of pipes shall be as follows :\ni)\nEffective length: l2 — not less than the specified value.\nii) Effective Thread length, l3 —\na) For DN up to and including 200 shall be 2mm.\nThe ribs should not have sharp edges - spigot end +\n0, – 4mm- socket end + 4, – 0 mm b) For DN above 200- spigot end +0.6 mm- socket\nend + 6,– 0 mm iii) Segmental length,: l4 ± 25 mm (screen portion)\niv) Segmental length, l5 + 25, – 0 mm"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12818: 1992",
    "title": "Unplasticised Pvc Screen And Casing Pipes For Bore/Tube Well",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for plain and socket end unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipes with nominal outside diameters 40 mm to 160 mm for soil and waste discharge system inside buildings including ventilating and rain water applications.",
    "keywords": [
      "screen",
      "casing",
      "pipe",
      "segmental",
      "outer",
      "pipes",
      "threads"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Threading Of Screen And Casing Pipes": "The screen and casing pipe shall have male threads at spigot end and female threads at the socket end. Screen and casing pipe of nominal diameter from 40 to 80 mm shall have threads in accordance with IS 554 : 1985*. Screen and casing pipes of nominal diameters of 100 to 400 mm shall have threads in accordance with basic profile for metric trapezoidal threads. Rubber element should be used with the trapezoidal threads shall be of shore hardnes 165±5 7. Tests 7.1 Visual Appearance —The internal and external surfaces of each pipe shall be smooth, clean and free from any defects. The ends shall be clean and square with the axis of the pipe. 7.2 Internal Dia —Test mandrel of diameter as specified below of 100 mm length shall pass smoothly through the pipe. 7.3 Specific gravity — Between 1.4 to",
      "Scope": "Requirements for plain and socket end unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipes with nominal outside diameters 40 mm to 160 mm for soil and waste discharge system inside buildings including ventilating and rain water applications.",
      "Types": "Type A : for use in ventilation pipe work and rain water applications. Type B : for use in soil and water discharge systems.",
      "Sizes": "Normal outside diameter DN of pipes as covered are 40, 50, 63, 75, 90, 110, 125, 140 and 160 mm.",
      "Colour Of Pipe": "Shall be dark shade of grey.",
      "Materials": "Shall consist essentially polyvinyl chloride to which may be added only those additives that are needed to facilitate the manufacture of sound pipes of good surface finish, mechanical strength, and opacity under condition of use. None of these additives"
    },
    "content": "IS 12818: 1992 Unplasticised Pvc Screen And Casing Pipes For Bore/Tube Well\n(First Revision)\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF SCREEN PIPES WITH RIBS\nNominal\nMean Outer\nOuterDiameter\nOuter\nWall Thickness ,s (Under Ribs)\nDiameter\nDiameter of pipe of Pipe at any\nDiameter Over\nDN\nd\nPoint\nConnection, ds\nMin\nMin\nMax\nMin\nMax\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n40\n52.0\n51.9\n56.0\n3.5\n4.0\n50\n64.0\n63.9\n69.0\n4.0\n4.6\n80\n92.0\n91.8\n98.0\n4.0\n4.6\n100\n117.0\n116.8\n124.0\n5.0\n5.7\n125\n144.0\n143.7\n154.0\n6.5\n7.3\n150\n169.0\n168.6\n182.0\n7.5\n8.5\n175\n204.0\n203.6\n219.0\n8.8\n9.8\n200\n229.0\n228.5\n247.0\n10.0\n11.2\n250\n284.0\n283.4\n302.0\n12.5\n14.0\n300\n334.0\n333.3\n356.0\n14.5\n16.2\n350\n404.0\n403.2\n432.0\n17.5\n19.5\n400\n454.0\n453.1\n483.0\n19.5\n21.7 TABLE 4 DIMENSIONS OF `CS' CASING PIPES\nAll dimensions in millimetres\nNominal\nMean OuterDiameter of\nOuter Diameter of Pipe at\nMean Outer Wall Thickness, s\nDiameter\nPipe, d\nAny Point\nDiameter Over\nConnection ds\nDN\nMin\nMax\nMin\nMax\nMax\nMin\nMax\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\n150\n165.0\n165.4\n164.8\n165.6\n174.0\n5.7\n6.5\n175\n200.0\n200.5\n199.8\n200.6\n211.0\n7.0\n7.8\n200\n225.0\n225.5\n224.8\n225.8\n238.0\n7.6\n8.8\n250\n280.0\n280.5\n279.6\n280.8\n292.0\n9.6\n11.0\n350\n330.0\n300.6\n329.6\n331.0\n346.0\n11.2\n13.3\n400\n400.0\n400.7\n399.6\n401.2\n420.0\n14.0\n15.5\n450\n450.0\n450.8\n449.5\n451.3\n470.0\n16.0\n17.5 TABLE 3 DIMENSIONS OF `CM' CASING PIPES\nAll dimensions in millimetres.\nNominal\nMean OuterDiameter of\nOuter Diameter of Pipe at\nMean Outer Wall Thickness, s\nDiameter\nPipe, d\nAny Point\nDiameter Over\nConnection ds\nDN\nMin\nMax\nMin\nMax\nMax\nMin\nMax\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\n40\n48.0\n48.2\n47.9\n48.3\n52.0\n3.5\n4.0\n50\n60.0\n60.2\n59.9\n60.3\n65.0\n4.0\n4.6\n80\n88.0\n88.3\n87.9\n88.4\n94.0\n4.0\n4.6\n100\n113.0\n113.3\n112.9\n113.4\n120.0\n5.0\n5.7\n125\n140.0\n140.4\n139.9\n140.5\n150.0\n6.5\n7.3\n150\n165.0\n165.4\n164.8\n165.6\n178.0\n7.5\n8.5\n175\n200.0\n200.5\n199.8\n200.6\n215.0\n8.8\n9.8\n200\n225.0\n225.5\n224.8\n225.8\n243.0\n10.0\n11.2\n250\n280.0\n280.5\n279.6\n280.8\n298.0\n12.5\n14.0\n300\n330.0\n330.6\n329.6\n331.0\n352.0\n14.5\n16.2\n350\n400.0\n400.7\n399.6\n401.2\n428.0\n17.5\n19.5\n400\n450.0\n450.8\n449.5\n451.3\n479.0\n19.5\n21.7\nTABLE 2 DIMENSIONS OF PLAINS SCREEN PIPES\nAll dimensions in millimetres.\nNominal\nMean Outer Diameter of\nOuter Diameter of Pipe at\nMean Outer\nWall Thickness, s\nDiameter\nPipe, d\nAny Point\nDiameter Over\nConnection, DN\nMin\nMax\nMin\nMax\nMax\nMin\nMax (1)\n(2) (3)\n(4)\n(5) (6) (7) (8) 250 280.0\n280.5\n279.6\n280.8\n298.0\n12.5\n14.0 300 330.0\n330.6 329.6\n331.0\n352.0\n14.5\n16.2 350 400.0\n400.7 399.6\n401.2\n428.0\n17.5\n19.5 400 450.0\n450.8 449.5\n451.3\n479.0\n19.5\n21.7\n*Polyvinyl chloride PVC and its copolymer for its safe use in contact with food stuffs, pharmaceuticals and drinking water. TABLE 5 EFFECTIVE AND SEGMENTAL\nLENGTHS OF SCREEN PIPES\nNominal\nEffective\nSegmental\nLengths m m\nDiameter Length, mm\nDN\nl 2 l3\nl4 l5\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n40\n1000\n25\n880\n60\n2000\n25\n1880\n60\n3000\n25\n2880\n60\n50\n1000\n30\n870\n70\n2000\n30\n1870\n70\n3000\n30\n2870\n70\n80 1000\n40\n860\n80\n2000\n40\n1860\n80 3000\n40\n2860\n80\n100\n1000\n45 850\n90\n2000\n45\n1850\n90\n3000\n45\n2850\n90\n125\n2000\n60\n1800\n160\n3000\n60\n2800\n160\n150\n2000\n60\n1770\n170\n3000\n60\n2770\n170\n175\n2000\n60\n1770\n170\n3000\n60 2770 170\n200\n2000\n70\n1760\n180\n3000\n7 0\n2760\n180\n250\n2000\n85\n1720\n220\n3000\n85\n2720\n220\n300\n2000\n85\n1720\n220\n3000\n85\n2720\n220\n400\n2000\n95\n1700\n240\n3000\n95\n2700\n240 TABLE 6 EFFECTIVE AND SEGMENTAL\nLENGTHS OF CASING PIPES\nNominal\nEffective\nSegmental\nDiameter\nLength,mm\nLength,mm\nNominal effective\nSegmental\nDN\nl2 l3\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n40\n2000\n25\n3000\n25\n4000\n25\n50\n2000\n30\n3000\n30\n4000\n30\n80\n2000\n40\n3000\n40\n4000\n40\n100\n2000\n45\n3000\n45\n4000\n45\n125\n2000\n60\n3000\n60\n4000\n60\n150\n2000\n60\n3000\n60\n4000\n60\n175\n2000\n60\n3000\n60\n4000\n60\n200\n2000\n70\n3000\n70\n4000\n70\n250\n2000\n85\n3000\n85\n4000\n85\n300\n2000\n85\n3000\n85\n4000\n85\n350\n2000\n85\n3000\n85\n4000\n85\n400\n2000\n95\n3000\n95\n4000\n95 6. Threading of Screen and Casing Pipes –The screen\nand casing pipe shall have male threads at spigot end and female threads at the socket end. Screen and casing\npipe of nominal diameter from 40 to 80 mm shall have threads in accordance with IS 554 : 1985*. Screen and casing pipes of nominal diameters of\n100 to 400 mm shall have threads in accordance with basic profile for metric trapezoidal threads. Rubber\nelement should be used with the trapezoidal threads shall be of shore hardnes 165±5\n7. Tests\n7.1 Visual Appearance —The internal and external\nsurfaces of each pipe shall be smooth, clean and free from any defects. The ends shall be clean and square\nwith the axis of the pipe.\n7.2 Internal Dia —Test mandrel of diameter as\nspecified below of 100 mm length shall pass smoothly through the pipe.\n7.3 Specific gravity — Between 1.4 to 1.45 g/cm3\n7.4 Impact Strength at OoC — Shall not fracture or\ncrack through its complete wall thickness.\n7.5 Tensile Strength— Shall not be less than 45 MPa.\n7.6 Vicat Softening Temperatue— Not less than 76 o C.\n7.7 Effect on Water— Shall meet the specified\nrequirements.\nTABLE 7 DIMENSIONS AND LAYOUT OF SLOTS ON SCREEN PIPE\nNominal\nDiameter n ∑ a ± 5% Free passage Area, in % (Mean Value) for Width of Slot (w), mm of DN mm\n0.2\n0.3\n0.5\n0.75\n1.0\n1.5\n2.0\n3.0\n40\n3\n85\n3.5\n5.0\n6.0\n8.5\n9.0\n9.5\n12.0\n—\n50\n3\n108\n3.5\n5.0\n6.0\n8.5\n9.0\n9.5\n12.0\n—\n80\n3\n168\n3.5\n5.0\n6.0\n8.5\n9.0\n9.5\n12.0\n—\n100\n5\n216\n3.5\n5.0\n6.0\n8.5\n9.0\n9.5\n12.0\n—\n125\n5\n240\n—\n4.5\n5.5\n7.5\n8.0\n8.5\n11.0\n—\n150\n5\n285\n—\n—\n5.5\n7.5\n8.0\n8.5\n11.0\n13.5\n175\n5\n335\n—\n—\n5.5\n7.5\n8.0\n8.5\n11.0\n13.5\n200\n6\n390\n—\n—\n—\n7.5\n8.0\n8.5\n11.0\n13.5\n250\n6\n450\n—\n—\n—\n7.0\n7.5\n8.0\n10.0\n12.5\n300\n6\n530\n—\n—\n—\n7.0\n7.5\n8.0\n10.0\n12.5\n350\n8\n640\n—\n—\n—\n––\n7.5\n8.0\n10.0\n12.5\n400\n8\n720\n—\n—\n—\n—\n7.5\n8.0\n10.0\n12.5\nWidth of material between slots (b)± 0.5 (see Note 3)\n4.0 4.0 5.5 5.5 6.5 9.5 9.5 11.0\nNotes\n1. ∑ a is the summation of slot lengths over the internal circumference of the cross section.\n2. n is the minimum number of slots on the circumference of the cross section.\n3. In each metre of secreen 10 wider pieces between slits up to 2 mm in width are permitted.\n4. Percentages of opening given in the table are based on internal surface area versus internal open area of pipe.\nTolerance on width of slot ( w ), given in Table 7 shall be as under:\nSlot width ( w )in mm\n0.2\n0.3\n0.5\n0.75\n1.0\n1.5\n2.0\n3.0\nTolerance,\n+ 0.06\n+ 0.06\n+ 0.10\n+ 0.20\n+ 0.20\n+ 0.20\n+ 0.20\n+ 0.30\n– 0.0\n– 0.0\n– 0.0\n– 0.0\n– 0.0\n– 0.0\n– 0.0\n– 0.0\nNote—For methods of test, refer to Appendix A of the standard, IS 8543 (Part 1/Sec 2) : 1979 Methods of testing plastics, Part\n1: Characterization of polymer structure and size, section 2 : Determination of density of solid plastics; IS 8543\n(Part 4/sec 1) : 1984 Methods of testing plastics, Part 4 : Short term mechanical properties, Section 1 Determination of tensile properties; and IS 12235 : 1986 Methods of test for unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12818 : 1992 Specific ation for unplasticized PVC screen and casing pipes for bore tube well (first revision) *Dimensions of pipe threads where pressure tight joints are erquired on the threads (third revision) 1. Scope – Requirements for plain and socket end\nunplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipes with nominal outside diameters 40 mm to 160 mm for soil and\nwaste discharge system inside buildings including ventilating and rain water applications.\n2. Types –\nType A : for use in ventilation pipe work and rain water applications.\nType B : for use in soil and water discharge systems.\n3. Size – Normal outside diameter DN of pipes as\ncovered are 40, 50, 63, 75, 90, 110, 125, 140 and 160 mm.\n4. Colour of Pipe — Shall be dark shade of grey.\n5. Materials – Shall consist essentially polyvinyl\nchloride to which may be added only those additives that are needed to facilitate the manufacture of sound\npipes of good surface finish, mechanical strength, and opacity under condition of use. None of these additives"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13592: 1992",
    "title": "Unplastilized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc) Pipes For Soil And Waste Discharge System For Inside And Outside Buildings Including Ventilation And Rain Water System",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for high density polyethylene pipes from 63 mm to 630 mm nominal diameter of pressure rating from 0.25 MPa to 1.6 MPa in material grades of PE63, PE80 and PE100 for sewerage applications.",
    "keywords": [
      "peewa",
      "pipes",
      "rating",
      "socket",
      "diameter",
      "outside",
      "beading"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Diameter And Wall Thickness": "See Table 1. 6.2 Length — Pipe shall be supplied in nominal lengths of 2, 3, 4 or 6 metres either plain or with sliding/grooved socket. Tolerances on specified length shall be + 10 mm and – 0 mm. 6.3 Socket of pipe— See Tables 2, 3 , 4 and Figs. 2 & 3 of the standard. TABLE 2 MINIMUM WALL THICKNESS OF SOCKETS ON PIPES All dimensions in millimetres Nominal S2,Min S3,Min Outside Diameter DN Type A Type B Type A Type B (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 40 1.6 2.9 1.0 2.4 50 1.6 2.9 1.0 2.4 63 1.6 2.9 1.0 2.4 75 1.6 2.9 1.0 2.4 90 1.7 2.9 1.1 2.4 110 2.0 2.9 1.2 2.4 125 2.3 2.9 1.4 2.4 140 2.6 3.2 1.6 2.7 160 2.9 3.6 1.8 3.0 TABLE 3. DIMENSIONS FOR SLIDING SOCKETS All dimensions in millimetres Nomina Socket Mean Inside Diameter Outside Depth, C of Socket at Midpoint, Diameter Min D1 Max Min (1) (2) (3) (4) ",
      "Visual Appearance": "The internal and external surface of the pipes shall be smooth and clean, and free from groovings and other defects. the end shall be clearly cut and shall be square with the axis of the pipe.",
      "Reversion Test": "A length of pipe of approximately 300 mm shall not in length by more than 5 percent. 7.3 Stress Relief Test—This test shall be carried out for socket end pipes only. When tested the test specimens shall not show blisters, excessive delamination or cracking or signs of weld line splitting. 7.4 Vicat Softening Temperature—Not less than 790C. 7.5 Effect of Sunlight—When exposed to sun for atleast 1600 h at ambient temperature it shall not show any difference in colour or physical appearance. 8 Resistance to Sulphuric Acid —The mass of specimen shall neither increase by more than 0.32 g, nor decrease by more than 0.13 g when tested as per IS 12235 (Part 7) : 1986. 9. Mechanical 9.1. Impact Strength at 0oC — When tested by the method in IS : 12235 (Part 9) : 1986, the pipe sample shall not frac",
      "Tensile Strength And Elongation": "Not less than 45 MPa and 80 percent. Note— For methods of tests refer to Appendix A of the standard, IS 6307 : 1985 Rigid PVC sheets (first revision), IS 8543 (Part 4/sec 1) 1984 Methods of testing plastics, Part 4 Short term mechanical properties, Section 1 Determination of tensile properties and relevant parts of IS 12235 : 1986 Methods of test for unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies. For detailed information, refer to IS 13592 : 1992 Specification for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipes for soil and waste discharge system for inside and outside buildings including ventilation and rain water system. 9.3 Axial Shrinkage (for Type B Pipes Only) — The axial shrinkage shall not exceed 2 percent.",
      "Water Tightness Of Joints": "Assemble the fit- tings with teh scaling devices, fill with water ensuring all air is removed. Jointing of solvent cementing joints is to be created out using selvent conforming to IS 14182",
      "Scope": "Requirements for high density polyethylene pipes from 63 mm to 630 mm nominal diameter of pressure rating from 0.25 MPa to 1.6 MPa in material grades of PE63, PE80 and PE100 for sewerage applications. 2. Designation 2.1 Pipes shall be designated according to the pressure rating (see2.2) and nominal diameter (see 2. 3 ). For example, PN 10 DN 200 indicates a pipe having a pressure rating 1.0 MPa and outside nominal diameter 200 mm. 2.2 Grade of material — Pipes shall be classified as Material MRS Grade (Minimum Required Strength) (Maximum Allowable Hydrostatic) of Material in MPa, at 200C Design stress, MPa, at 50 years for Sewage and At20o at 30o industrial affluent PE63 6.3 5.0 4.0 3.0 PE63 8.0 6.3 5.0 4.0 PE63 6.3 8.0 6.3 5.0 2.3 Pressure Rating – Pipes shall be classified by pressure ra",
      "Colour": "Shall be black . 4. Materials 4.1 High Density Polyethylene–High density Polythylene ( HDPE ) used for the manufacture of pipes shall conform to designation PEEWA -45- T-006 or PEEW A-45 - T-003 or PEEWA - 50 - T- 003 or PEEWA - 50-T-006 or PEEWA - 57-T-003 or PEEWA-57-T-006 or"
    },
    "content": "IS 13592: 1992 Unplastilized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc) Pipes For Soil And Waste Discharge System For Inside And Outside Buildings Including Ventilation And Rain Water System\nTABLE 1 DIAMETER AND WALL THICKNESS\nAll dimensions in millimetres Nominal\nMean\nOutside\nWall Thickness\nOutside\nOutside\nDiameter\nDiameter\nDiameter at Any Point\nType A\nType B\nDN\nMin\nMax\nMin\nMax\nMin,\nMax\nMin,\nMax\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\n(9)\n40\n40.0\n40.3\n39.5\n40.5\n1.8\n2.2\n3.2\n3.8\n50\n50.0\n50.3\n49.4\n50.6\n1.8\n2.2\n3.2\n3.8\n63\n63.0\n63.3\n62.2\n63.8\n1.8\n2.2\n3.2\n3.8\n75\n75.0\n75.3\n74.1\n75.9\n1.8\n2.2\n3.2\n3.8\n90\n90.0\n90.3\n88.9\n91.2\n1.9\n2.3\n3.2\n3.8\n110\n110.0\n110.4\n108.6\n111.4\n2.2\n2.7\n3.2\n3.8\n125\n125.0\n125.4\n123.5\n126.5\n2.5\n3.0\n3.2\n3.8\n140\n140.0\n140.5\n138.3\n141.7\n2.9\n3.4\n3.6\n4.2\n160\n160.0\n160.5\n158.0\n162.0\n3.2\n3.8\n4.0\n4.6 shall be used separately or together in quantities\nsufficient to constitute a toxic hazard, impair the fabrication, welding, chemical and physical properties\nof the fittings. The material should also consist of sufficient quantity of stabilizer to withstand thermal\nageing and exposure to ultra-violet light. The addition of the manufacturer’s own rework material produced\nduring the manufacture and work testing of pipes complying with this standard is permissible upto 10\npercent. No other rework material shall be used.\n6. Dimensions\n6.1. Diameter and Wall Thickness — See Table 1.\n6.2 Length — Pipe shall be supplied in nominal lengths\nof 2, 3, 4 or 6 metres either plain or with sliding/grooved socket. Tolerances on specified length shall be + 10 mm\nand – 0 mm.\n6.3 Socket of pipe— See Tables 2, 3 , 4 and Figs. 2 & 3 of the standard. TABLE 2 MINIMUM WALL THICKNESS OF\nSOCKETS ON PIPES\nAll dimensions in millimetres\nNominal\nS2,Min\nS3,Min\nOutside\nDiameter\nDN\nType A\nType B\nType A\nType B\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n40\n1.6\n2.9\n1.0\n2.4\n50\n1.6\n2.9\n1.0\n2.4\n63\n1.6\n2.9\n1.0\n2.4\n75\n1.6\n2.9\n1.0\n2.4\n90\n1.7\n2.9\n1.1\n2.4\n110\n2.0\n2.9\n1.2\n2.4\n125\n2.3\n2.9\n1.4\n2.4\n140\n2.6\n3.2\n1.6\n2.7\n160\n2.9\n3.6\n1.8\n3.0 TABLE 3. DIMENSIONS FOR SLIDING SOCKETS\nAll dimensions in millimetres\nNomina Socket Mean Inside Diameter Outside Depth, C of Socket at Midpoint, Diameter Min\nD1 Max Min (1) (2) (3) (4) 40 26.0 40.1 40.3 50 30.0 50.1 50.3 63 36.0 63.1 63.3 75 40.0 75.1 75.3 90 46.0 90.1 90.3 110 48.0\n110.1\n110.4 125 51.0\n125.1\n125.4 140 54.0\n140.2\n140.5 160 58.0\n160.2\n160.5\nTABLE 4 DIMENSIONS OF GROOVED SOCKET\nAll dimensions in millimetres\nNominal\nInside Diameter\nInside Diameter\nLength of\nNeck\nLength\nOutside of Socket\nof Beading\nBeading of\nBeyond\nD1\nD2\nand Neck\nSocket\nBeading\nA\nB\nC\nMin\nMax\nMin\nMax\nMin\nMax\nMin\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\n40\n40.3\n41.1\n49.6\n50.6\n18\n5\n18\n50\n50.3\n51.1\n59.6\n60.6\n18\n5\n20\n63\n63.3\n64.1\n72.9\n73.9\n18\n5\n23\n75\n75.3\n76.1\n84.5\n85.5\n20\n5\n25\n90\n90.3\n91.2\n99.5\n100.5\n23\n5\n28\n110\n110.4\n111.2\n120.3\n121.3\n26\n6\n32\n125\n125.4\n126.3\n137.1\n138.2\n28\n7\n35\n140\n140.5\n141.4\n152.1\n153.2\n30\n8\n38\n160\n160.5\n161.5\n173.8\n175.0\n32\n9\n42\n7. Tests\n7.1. Visual Appearance – The internal and external surface of the pipes shall be smooth and clean, and free\nfrom groovings and other defects. the end shall be clearly cut and shall be square with the axis of the pipe.\n7.2. Reversion Test — A length of pipe of approximately\n300 mm shall not in length by more than 5 percent.\n7.3 Stress Relief Test—This test shall be carried out for\nsocket end pipes only. When tested the test specimens shall not show blisters, excessive delamination or\ncracking or signs of weld line splitting.\n7.4 Vicat Softening Temperature—Not less than 790C.\n7.5 Effect of Sunlight—When exposed to sun for atleast\n1600 h at ambient temperature it shall not show any difference in colour or physical appearance.\n8 Resistance to Sulphuric Acid —The mass of\nspecimen shall neither increase by more than 0.32 g, nor decrease by more than 0.13 g when tested as per IS\n12235 (Part 7) : 1986. 9. Mechanical\n9.1. Impact Strength at 0oC — When tested by the method in IS : 12235 (Part 9) : 1986, the pipe sample shall\nnot fracture or crack through its complete wall thickness.\n9.2. Tensile Strength and Elongation—Not less than\n45 MPa and 80 percent. Note— For methods of tests refer to Appendix A of the standard, IS 6307 : 1985 Rigid PVC sheets (first revision), IS 8543\n(Part 4/sec 1) 1984 Methods of testing plastics, Part 4 Short term mechanical properties, Section 1 Determination of tensile properties and relevant parts of IS 12235 : 1986 Methods of test for unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 13592 : 1992 Specification for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) pipes for soil and waste discharge system for inside and outside buildings\nincluding ventilation and rain water system.\n9.3 Axial Shrinkage (for Type B Pipes Only) — The\naxial shrinkage shall not exceed 2 percent.\n10. Water Tightness of Joints — Assemble the fit-\ntings with teh scaling devices, fill with water ensuring all air is removed. Jointing of solvent cementing joints\nis to be created out using selvent conforming to IS\n14182 1.\nScope—Requirements for high density polyethylene pipes from 63 mm to 630 mm nominal\ndiameter of pressure rating from 0.25 MPa to 1.6 MPa in material grades of PE63, PE80 and PE100 for sewerage\napplications.\n2.\nDesignation\n2.1\nPipes shall be designated according to the pressure rating (see2.2) and nominal diameter\n(see 2. 3 ). For example, PN 10 DN 200 indicates a pipe having a pressure rating 1.0 MPa and outside nominal\ndiameter 200 mm.\n2.2\nGrade of material — Pipes shall be classified as Material MRS Grade (Minimum Required Strength)\n(Maximum Allowable Hydrostatic) of Material in MPa, at 200C Design stress, MPa, at 50 years for Sewage and\nAt20o at 30o industrial affluent PE63\n6.3\n5.0\n4.0 3.0 PE63\n8.0\n6.3\n5.0 4.0 PE63\n6.3\n8.0\n6.3 5.0\n2.3 Pressure Rating – Pipes shall be classified by\npressure rating (PN)as follows : Pressure Rating Maximum Permissible of Pipe Working Pressure , MPa PN 2.5\n0.25\nPN 4\n0.40\nPN 6\n0.60\nPN 8\n0.8\nPN10\n1.00\nPn12.5\n1,25\nPN16.0\n1.60\n2.4 Nominal Diameter ( DN ) –The nominal diameter\nof pipes covered in this standard are: 63, 75, 90, 110, 125, 140, 160, 180, 200, 225, 250, 280,\n315, 335, 400, 450, 500, 560 and 630 mm.\n3.\nColour — Shall be black .\n4.\nMaterials\n4.1 High Density Polyethylene–High density\nPolythylene ( HDPE ) used for the manufacture of pipes shall conform to designation PEEWA -45- T-006 or\nPEEW A-45 - T-003 or PEEWA - 50 - T- 003 or PEEWA -\n50-T-006 or PEEWA - 57-T-003 or PEEWA-57-T-006 or"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14333: 1996",
    "title": "High Density Polyethyelene Pipes For Sewerage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for materials, dimensions, classification, testing and sampling of machine made pipes with glass fibre reinforced thermosetting resin with or without aggregate filler having nominal diameter from 200 mm to 3 000 mm for use at pressure upto 1 500 kPa for conveyance of sewerage, industrial waste and water (other than potable) such as river water, well water, sea water and storm water.",
    "keywords": [
      "pipes",
      "polyester",
      "peewa",
      "fibre",
      "classes",
      "glass",
      "stiffness"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Wall Thickness": "Shall be as given in Tables 3,4 and 5 of the standard.",
      "Coiling": "The pipes supplied in coils shall be coiled on drums of minimum diameter of 25 times the nominal diameter of the pipe ensuring that kinking of pipe is prevented.",
      "Visual Appearance": "The internal and external surfaces of the pipes shall be smooth, clean and free from grooving and other defects. 7. Performance Characteristics 7.1 Hydraulic Characteristics — Shall not show signs of localized swelling, leakage or weeping and shall not burst during the prescribed test duration. 7.2 Reversion Test — Longitudinal reversion shall not be greater than 3 percent.",
      "Scope": "Requirements for materials, dimensions, classification, testing and sampling of machine made pipes with glass fibre reinforced thermosetting resin with or without aggregate filler having nominal diameter from 200 mm to 3 000 mm for use at pressure upto 1 500 kPa for conveyance of sewerage, industrial waste and water (other than potable) such as river water, well water, sea water and storm water. 2. Classification",
      "Pressure Classes (Pn)": "Five pressure classes of pipes namely, PN3, PN6, PN9, PN12 and PN15 correspond to the working pressure ratings of 300, 900, 1200 and 1500 kPa respectively. 2.2 Stiffness Classes (SN) — Four stiffness classes of pipes namely A, B, C, and D corresponding to minimum pipe stiffness values of 62, 124, 248 and 496 kPa respectively at 5 percent deflection. Notes – 1. The working pressure ratings mentioned above may have to be changed for use at fluid temperature greater than 43.5oC in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. 2. The above pressure classes correspond to the long term hydrostatic design pressure categories.",
      "Nominal Sizes": "200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1 100, 1 200, 1 400, 1 600, 1 800, 2 000, 2 200, 2 400, 2 600, 2 800, 3 000 mm. 4. Materials 4.1 Resins —Appropriate type of unsaturated polyester resin systems conforming of IS 6746 : 1994* shall be used. 4.2 Glass Fibre Reinforcement —Glass fibre reinforcement shall be of commercial grade E type and shall conform to IS 11273 : 1992+, IS 11320 : 1997‡ or IS 11551 : 1996§, as appropriate. * Unsaturated polyester resin system (first revision) † Woven roving fabrics of ‘E’ glss fibre (first revision) ‡ Glass fibre rovings for the reinforcement of polyester and epoxideresin systems(first revision) § Glass fibre chopped strand mat for the reinforcement of epoxy, phenolic and polyester resinsystems (first revision) DN ID ID Min Max 20"
    },
    "content": "IS 14333: 1996 High Density Polyethyelene Pipes For Sewerage\nof IS 7328 : 1992*, HDPE conforming to designation\nPEEWA -45-T-012 PEEWA -50-T-012 or PEEWA - 57 - T\n- 012 of IS 7328 : 1992 may also be used with the exception that melt flow rate (MFR ) shall be between\n0.20 g/10 min to 1.10 g / 10 min (both in clusive)\n4.1.1 Base density between 940 kg/m 3 and 958.4 kg / m3 ( both inclusive ) at 27 0 C .\n4.1.2 The MFR (Melt Flow Rate) of the material shall be between 0.20 g/10 min and 1.10 g/10 min (both\ninclusive) when tested at 190oC.\n4. 1. 3 The resin shall be compounded with carbon black. The carbon black content in the material shall be\nwithin 2.5 ± 0.5 percent and the dispersion of carbon black shall be satisfactory.\n4.2 Anti-Oxidant — Shall not be more than 0.3 percent\nby mass of finished resin.\n4.3 Reworked Material – The addition of not more\nthan 10 percent of the manufacturer's own rework material resulting from the manufacture of pipes of this standard\nis permissible.\n5. Diamensions of Pipes\n5.1 Outside Diameter— See Table 1.\n*High density polyethylene material for moulding and extrusion Note 1 — For chemical resistance classification table for HDPE pipes and fittings see Appendix D of the standard.\nNote 2 — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices B and C of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 14333 : 1996 Specification for high density polyethylene pipes for sewerage. TABLE 1 OUTSIDE DIAMETER,\nTOLERANCE AND OVALITY OF PIPES\nNominal\nOutside\nTolerance\nOvality\nDiameter,\nDiameter,\n(only positive tolerances)\nDN\nmm mm\nmm\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n63\n63.0\n0.6\n1.5\n75\n75.0\n0.7\n1.6\n90\n90.0\n0.9\n1.8\n110\n110.0\n1.0\n2.2\n125\n125.0\n1.2\n2.5\n140\n140.0\n1.3\n2.8\n160\n160.0\n1.5\n3.2\n180\n180.0\n1.7\n3.6\n200\n200.0\n1.8\n4.0\n225\n225.0\n2.1\n4.5\n250\n250.0\n2.3\n5.0\n280\n280.0\n2.6\n9.8\n315\n315.0\n2.9\n11.1\n355\n355.0\n3.2\n12.5\n400\n400.0\n3.6\n14.0\n450\n450.0\n4.1\n15.6\n500\n500.0\n4.5\n17.5\n560\n560.0\n5.0\n19.6\n630\n630.0\n5.7\n22.1\n5.2. Wall Thickness — Shall be as given in Tables 3,4 and 5 of the standard.\n5.3. Length — 5 to 20 mm.\n5.4. Coiling — The pipes supplied in coils shall be coiled on drums of minimum diameter of 25 times the\nnominal diameter of the pipe ensuring that kinking of pipe is prevented.\n6. Visual Appearance — The internal and external\nsurfaces of the pipes shall be smooth, clean and free from grooving and other defects.\n7. Performance Characteristics\n7.1 Hydraulic Characteristics — Shall not show signs\nof localized swelling, leakage or weeping and shall not burst during the prescribed test duration.\n7.2 Reversion Test — Longitudinal reversion shall not\nbe greater than 3 percent. 1.\nScope – Requirements for materials, dimensions, classification, testing and sampling of machine made\npipes with glass fibre reinforced thermosetting resin with or without aggregate filler having nominal diameter\nfrom 200 mm to 3 000 mm for use at pressure upto 1 500 kPa for conveyance of sewerage, industrial waste and\nwater (other than potable) such as river water, well water, sea water and storm water.\n2.\nClassification\n2.1.\nPressure Classes (PN) — Five pressure classes of pipes namely, PN3, PN6, PN9, PN12 and PN15\ncorrespond to the working pressure ratings of 300, 900,\n1200 and 1500 kPa respectively.\n2.2 Stiffness Classes (SN) — Four stiffness classes of pipes namely A, B, C, and D corresponding to minimum\npipe stiffness values of 62, 124, 248 and 496 kPa respectively at 5 percent deflection.\nNotes –\n1. The working pressure ratings mentioned above may have to\nbe changed for use at fluid temperature greater than 43.5oC in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.\n2. The above pressure classes correspond to the long term\nhydrostatic design pressure categories.\n3.\nNominal Diameter —200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450,\n500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1 100, 1 200, 1 400, 1 600,\n1 800, 2 000, 2 200, 2 400, 2 600, 2 800, 3 000 mm.\n4.\nMaterials\n4.1 Resins —Appropriate type of unsaturated polyester\nresin systems conforming of IS 6746 : 1994* shall be used.\n4.2 Glass Fibre Reinforcement —Glass fibre\nreinforcement shall be of commercial grade E type and shall conform to IS 11273 : 1992+, IS 11320 : 1997‡ or IS\n11551 : 1996§, as appropriate.\n* Unsaturated polyester resin system (first revision)\n† Woven roving fabrics of ‘E’ glss fibre (first revision)\n‡ Glass fibre rovings for the reinforcement of polyester and epoxideresin systems(first revision)\n§ Glass fibre chopped strand mat for the reinforcement of epoxy, phenolic and polyester resinsystems (first revision) DN ID ID Min Max 200 196 204\n±1.5 250 246 255\n±1.5 300 296 306\n±1.8 350 346 356\n±2.0 400 396 408\n±2.4 450 446 459\n±2.7 500 496 510\n±3.0 600 596 612\n±3.6 700 695 714 800 795 816\n±4.2 900 895 918 1000 995 1 020 1100\n1 095 1 120 1200\n1 195 1 220 1400\n1 395 1 420\n±5.0 1600\n1 595 1 620 1800\n1 795 1 820 2000\n1 995 2 020 2200\n2 195 2 220 2400\n2 395 2 420 2600\n2 595 2 620\n±6.0 2800\n2 795 2 820 3000\n2 995 3 020"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14402: 1996",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes Joint And Fittings For Use For Sewerage, Industrial Waste And Water (Other Than Potable)",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for Unplasticized Polyvinyl chloride (upvc) injection moulded fittings for jointing with solvent cement or elastomeric sealing ring to the UPVC pipes for soil and waste discharge system for inside and out side building including ventilation and rain water system covered in IS 13592 : 1992*.",
    "keywords": [
      "maximum",
      "pipe",
      "stiffness",
      "fittings",
      "diameter",
      "grp",
      "socket"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Lengths": "Pipes shall be supplied in effective lengths of 6 m, 9 m and 12 m. The tolerance on effective length shall be within ±15 mm.",
      "Out Of Squareness Of Pipe": "All points around each end of a pipe unit shall fall within ± 6.5 mm or ± 0.5 percent of the nominal diameter of the pipe whichever is greater, to a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the pipe. 5.5 Wall Thickness — Shall be such as to satisfy inside and outside diameter specified.",
      "Joints": "The pipe shall have a joining system that shall provide for fluid tightness for the intended service condition. 6.1. Unrestrained a) Coupling or Socket and Spigot Gasket Joints. b) Mechanical couplings 6.2. Restrained a) Joints similar to those in 6.1.1 with supplemental restraining elements. b) Butt joint, with laminated overlay. c) Socket-and-spigot, with laminated overlay. d) Socket-and-spigot, adhesive bonded. e) Flanged f) Mechanical.",
      "Gaskets": "Elastomeric gaskets when used with this pipe shall conform to the requirements of IS 5382 : 1995*.",
      "Workmanship": "Shall meet the acceptance criteria specified in Table 3 Pit (pinhole) Maximum diameter, 0.8 mm; depth less than 20 percent of wall thickness. Porosity (pinhole) Maximum of 50 pits (pinholes) Pre-gel Maximum dimension, 13 mm; height above surface not to be outside drawing tolerance. Resin-pocket Maximum diameter, 6.5 mm Resin-rich edge Maximum 0.8 mm from the edge. Shrink-mark (sink) Maximum diameter 14 mm; depth not greater than 25 percent of wall thickness. Wash Maximum dimension, 29 mm Wormhole Maximum diameter, 6.5 mm Wrinkles Maximum length surface side, 25 mm maximum length opposite side, 25 mm depth less than 15 percent of wall thickness. Scratch Maximum length, 25 mm; maximum depth, 0.255 mm Short None Note— For definations of defects see Table 3 of the standard. * rubber sealing ri",
      "Pipe Stiffness": "Each length of pipe shall have sufficient strength to exhibit the minimum pipe stiffness (f/∆y) specified in Table 4. Pipe stiffness = where F = Load per unit length in kN per metre length; and ∆y = vertical pipe deflection, in metres. TABLE 4 PIPE STIFFNESS AT 5 PERCENT DEFLECTION Stiffness Minimum Stiffness of Pipe Class (SN) of DN, at 5 Percent deflection, kPa 200 mm 250 mm 300 mm and above A – – 62 B – 124 124 C 248 248 248 D 496 496 496 9. Fittings 9.1 General — All GRP fittings, such as bends, tees, junctions and reducers, shall be equal or superior in performance to pipe of the same classification and shall be smoothly finished internally. GRP fittings are not subject to tests for strength and it is essential that external restraint be considered for installation. 9.2 Fittings may b",
      "Chemical Requirements": "Shall be capable ofbeing deflected, without failure, at the 50 year strain level given in Table 9 of the standard . When exposed to I.ON. sulphuric acid. f ∆ y ≥",
      "Scope": "Requirements for Unplasticized Polyvinyl chloride (upvc) injection moulded fittings for jointing with solvent cement or elastomeric sealing ring to the UPVC pipes for soil and waste discharge system for inside and out side building including ventilation and rain water system covered in IS 13592 : 1992*.",
      "Type Of Fittings": "Fitting shall be of one of the following types : a) tee (87. 5o ), Wye (45o) single, double (cross) or reducing, with or without inspection doors; b) Bend, with or without inspection doors (87.5o,45o and 22½o); c) Reducer ; d) Coupler; e) Socket plug ; f) Cleansing pipe; g) Adaptor (for connecting UPVC pipes to other materials); h) Vent cowl; j) Pipe clip; and k) Waste trap with strainer (Nahani trap with Jali).",
      "Designation": "Shall be designated by the diameters of their sockets. The nominal inside diameter of the fitting shall correspond to the nominal outside diameter of the pipes given in IS 13592 : 1992.",
      "Colour Of Fittings": "Shall be uniform dark shade of grey.",
      "Materials": "Shall consist essentially of polyvinyl chloride , to which may be added only those additive that are needed to facilitate the manufacture of sound and durable fittings of good surface finish , mechanical strength and opacity under conditions of use , together with such pigments as are necessary to meet the requirements of 4.The material shall contain not less than 2.5 percent by mass of titanium dioxide. The addition of the manufacturer’s own clean rework material produced during manufacturer and work testing, complying with this standard is permissible upto 10 percent . 6. Dimensions 6.1 Wall Thickness — See Table 1. TABLE 1 WALL THICKNESS SI Nominal WallThickness No. Diameter DN At Plain End At Socket e e2 e3 Min Max Min Max mm mm mm mm mm (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) 40 3.2 3.8 2.9 2.4 ii"
    },
    "content": "IS 14402: 1996 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastics (Grp) Pipes Joint And Fittings For Use For Sewerage, Industrial Waste And Water (Other Than Potable)\nNote— For details of other materials, see 6.3 of the standard.\n5. Dimensions\n5.1 Inside Diameters and Tolerances —See Table1 TABLE 1 SPECIFIED INSIDE DIAMETERS AND\nTOLERANCES\nNominal Inside Tolerances on\nDiameter Diameter Range Declared Name\nVisual Acceptance Levels\nChip\nMaximum dimension of break,\n6.5 mm\nCrack\nNone\nCrack, surface\nMaximum length, 6.5 mm\nCrazing\nMaximum dimension of crazing,\n25 mm\nDelamination, edge\nMaximum dimension, 6.5 mm\nDelamination, internal\nNone\nDry-spot\nMaximum diameter, 14 mm\nForeign inclusion\n(metallic)\nMaximum dimension, 1.5 mm\nForeign inclusion\n(non-metallic)\nMaximum dimension, 1.5 mm\nFracture\nMaximum dimension, 29 mm\nAir bubble (void)\nMaximum diameter, 3.0 mm\nBlister\nMaximum diameter, 6.5; height from\nsurface not to be outside drawing tolerance.\nBurned\nNone\nFish-eye\nMaximum diameter, 13 mm\nLack of fillout\nMaximum diameter, 9.5 mm\nOrange-peel\nMaximum diameter, 29 mm\nPimple\nMaximum diameter, 3.0 mm\n5.2. Alternatively, the outside diameter of pipes for each of the size designation shall be as given in Table 2 subject\nto the tolerances, as specified.\nTABLE 2 SPECIFIED OUTSIDE DIAMETERS AND\nTOLERANCES\nAll dimensions in millimeters Nominal\nOutside Tolerances Diameter,\nDN\nDiameter, OD 200 208 +2.0 250 259 +2.1 300\n310\n+2.3 350\n361\n+2.4 400\n412\n+2.5 450\n463\n+2.7 500\n514\n+2.8 600\n614\n+3.0 700\n718\n+3.3 800\n820\n+3.5 900\n922\n+3.8\n1 000\n1 024\n+4.0 2.0\n1 100\n1 126\n+4.3\n1 200\n1 228\n+4.5\n1 400\n1 432\n+5.0\n1 600\n1 636\n+5.5\n1 800\n1 840\n+6.0\n2 000\n2 044\n+6.5\n2 200\n2 248\n+7.0\n2 400\n2 452\n+7.5\n2 600\n2 656\n+8.0\n2 800\n2 860\n+8.5\n3 000\n3 064\n+9.0\n5.3. Lengths —Pipes shall be supplied in effective lengths of 6 m, 9 m and 12 m. The tolerance on effective\nlength shall be within ±15 mm.\n5.4. Out of squareness of Pipe — All points around each end of a pipe unit shall fall within ± 6.5 mm or ± 0.5\npercent of the nominal diameter of the pipe whichever is greater, to a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal axis\nof the pipe.\n5.5 Wall Thickness — Shall be such as to satisfy inside\nand outside diameter specified.\n6. Joints – The pipe shall have a joining system that\nshall provide for fluid tightness for the intended service condition.\n6.1. Unrestrained a)\nCoupling or Socket and Spigot Gasket Joints.\nb)\nMechanical couplings\n6.2. Restrained a)\nJoints similar to those in 6.1.1 with supplemental restraining elements. b)\nButt joint, with laminated overlay.\nc)\nSocket-and-spigot, with laminated overlay.\nd)\nSocket-and-spigot, adhesive bonded.\ne)\nFlanged f)\nMechanical.\n6.3. Gaskets —Elastomeric gaskets when used with this pipe shall conform to the requirements of IS 5382 : 1995*.\n7. Workmanship — Shall meet the acceptance criteria\nspecified in Table 3\nPit (pinhole)\nMaximum diameter, 0.8 mm;\ndepth less than 20 percent of wall thickness.\nPorosity (pinhole)\nMaximum of 50 pits (pinholes)\nPre-gel\nMaximum dimension, 13 mm;\nheight above surface not to be outside drawing tolerance.\nResin-pocket\nMaximum diameter, 6.5 mm\nResin-rich edge\nMaximum 0.8 mm from the edge.\nShrink-mark (sink)\nMaximum diameter 14 mm; depth not greater than 25 percent of\nwall thickness.\nWash\nMaximum dimension, 29 mm\nWormhole\nMaximum diameter, 6.5 mm\nWrinkles\nMaximum length surface side, 25 mm maximum length opposite\nside, 25 mm depth less than 15 percent of wall thickness.\nScratch\nMaximum length, 25 mm;\nmaximum depth, 0.255 mm\nShort\nNone\nNote— For definations of defects see Table 3 of the standard.\n* rubber sealing rings for gasd Mains, water mains and sewers (first revision)\nTABLE 3 ALLOWABLE DEFECTS For detailed information, refer to IS 14402 : 1996 Specification for glass fibre reinforces plastics\n(GRP) pipes, joints and fittings for use for sewerage, industrial waste and water (other than potable).\n8. Pipe Stiffness — Each length of pipe shall have\nsufficient strength to exhibit the minimum pipe stiffness\n(f/∆y) specified in Table 4.\nPipe stiffness = where F = Load per unit length in kN per metre length; and\n∆y = vertical pipe deflection, in metres. TABLE 4 PIPE STIFFNESS AT 5 PERCENT\nDEFLECTION\nStiffness Minimum Stiffness of Pipe\nClass (SN) of DN, at 5 Percent deflection, kPa 200 mm 250 mm 300 mm and above\nA – –\n62\nB –\n124\n124\nC\n248\n248\n248\nD\n496\n496\n496\n9. Fittings\n9.1 General — All GRP fittings, such as bends, tees,\njunctions and reducers, shall be equal or superior in performance to pipe of the same classification and shall\nbe smoothly finished internally.\nGRP fittings are not subject to tests for strength and it is essential that external restraint be considered for\ninstallation.\n9.2 Fittings may be made :\na) from straight pipes, or b) by moulding\n9.3. Tolerances for GRP Fittings :\n9.3.1 Except for flanged pipe work, which may require closer tolerances, the permissible deviations from the\nstated value of the angle of change of direction of a fittings such as a bend, tee or junction shall not exceed ±10.\n9.3.2 Except for flanged pipe work, which may require closer tolerances, the permissible deviations on the\nmanufacturer’s declared length of a fittings, exclusive of the socket where applicable, shall be ±25 mm taken\nfrom the point of intersection to the end of the fitting.\n10. Hydraulic Test\n10.1\nGeneral — Working pressure Pw in the system shall not exceed the pressure class of the pipe, that is Pw < PN.\nWhen surge pressure is considered the maximum pressure in the system due to working pressure plus\nsurge pressure, the same shall not exceed 1.4 times the pressure class of pipe.\nPw + Ps 1.4 PN\n10.2\nSoundness —Shall withstand without leakage or cracking the internal hydrostatic test pressure specified\nin Table 5 of the standard.\n10.3\nLongitudinal strength – Shall withstand without failure, the beam loads specified in Table 6 of the\nstandard.\n10.4\nHoop tensile strength – Shall meet or exceed the hoop tensile strength shown in Table 7 of the standard.\n11.\nChemical Requirements— Shall be capable ofbeing deflected, without failure, at the 50 year strain\nlevel given in Table 9 of the standard . When exposed to\nI.ON. sulphuric acid.\nf\n∆ y\n≥ 1. Scope– Requirements for Unplasticized Polyvinyl\nchloride (upvc) injection moulded fittings for jointing with solvent cement or elastomeric sealing ring to the\nUPVC pipes for soil and waste discharge system for inside and out side building including ventilation and\nrain water system covered in IS 13592 : 1992*.\n2. Type of Fittings – Fitting shall be of one of the\nfollowing types :\na)\ntee (87. 5o ), Wye (45o) single, double (cross)\nor reducing, with or without inspection doors;\nb)\nBend, with or without inspection doors\n(87.5o,45o and 22½o);\nc)\nReducer ;\nd)\nCoupler;\ne)\nSocket plug ;\nf)\nCleansing pipe;\ng)\nAdaptor (for connecting UPVC pipes to other materials);\nh)\nVent cowl;\nj)\nPipe clip; and k)\nWaste trap with strainer (Nahani trap with Jali).\n3. Size Designation — Shall be designated by the\ndiameters of their sockets. The nominal inside diameter of the fitting shall correspond to the nominal outside\ndiameter of the pipes given in IS 13592 : 1992.\n4. Colour of Fittings– Shall be uniform dark shade of\ngrey.\n5. Materials – Shall consist essentially of polyvinyl\nchloride , to which may be added only those additive that are needed to facilitate the manufacture of sound\nand durable fittings of good surface finish , mechanical strength and opacity under conditions of use , together\nwith such pigments as are necessary to meet the requirements of 4.The material shall contain not less\nthan 2.5 percent by mass of titanium dioxide.\nThe addition of the manufacturer’s own clean rework material produced during manufacturer and work testing,\ncomplying with this standard is permissible upto 10 percent .\n6. Dimensions\n6.1\nWall Thickness — See Table 1. TABLE 1 WALL THICKNESS SI\nNominal\nWallThickness\nNo.\nDiameter\nDN\nAt Plain End\nAt Socket e\ne2 e3\nMin Max Min Max mm mm mm\nmm mm (1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\ni)\n40\n3.2\n3.8\n2.9\n2.4 ii)\n50\n3.2\n3.8\n2.9\n2.4 iii)\n63\n3.2 3.8 2.9 2.4 iv)\n75\n3.2 3.8\n2.9 2.4 v)\n90\n3.2 3.8\n2.9\n2.4 vi)\n110\n3.2\n3.8\n2.9\n2.4 vii)\n125\n3.2\n3.8\n2.9\n2.4 viii)\n140\n3.6 4.2\n3.2\n2.7 ix)\n160\n4.0 4.6\n3.6\n3.0\nNote — For both solvent cement fittings and ring seal fittings\na redution of 5 percent of the wall thickness resulting from core shifting is permitted. In such a case, the average of two\nopposite wall thickness shall be equal to or exceed the values given in this table. 6.2\nSocket Dimensions — See table 2 and 3"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14735: 1999",
    "title": "Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc) Injection Moulded Fitting For Soil And Waste Discharge System For Inside And Outside Buildings Including Ventilation And Rain Water Systems",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "* UPVC pipes for soil and waste discharge systems inside buildings including ventilation and rain water system.",
    "keywords": [
      "socket",
      "spigot",
      "fitting",
      "ring",
      "ends",
      "diameter",
      "mean"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Chamfer": "The spigot ends of fittings shall be chamfered to an angle of 15o ± 1o; to the the axis of the pipe.",
      "Sealing Rings": "As per IS 5382 : 1985* with IRHD hardness of 50 ± 5. *Specification for rubber lings for gas mains, water mains and sowers. 0 2 − +",
      "Workmanship": "Both the inner and outer surface of the fitting shall be cleanly finished, smooth and free from grooving, blistering or other deleterious defects, when viewed without magnification. Each end of the fitting shall be square to the axis of the approximate line. 9. Requirements 9.1 Sockets of fittings shall be either of solvent cement type or rubber ring type. 9.2 Socket and Spigot Configurations — A fitting shall have any of the following configrations of socket and spigot. a) Asolvent cement type of socket at each end of the fittings; b) A rubber ring type of socket at each end of fitting; c) A solvent cement type socket at one or two ends, and a spigot at the other end, or at each of the other ends ( as applicable) of the fitting; d) A rubber ring type socket at one or two ends, and a spigo",
      "Resistance To Sulphuric Acid": "The mass of the specimen shall neither increase by more than 0.32 g not decrease by more than 0.13 g.",
      "Sulphated Ash Content": "Not more than 10 oercent by mass. 13. Mechanical Properties 13.1 Impact Test (Drop Test) — Shall not fracture or crack through its complete wall thickness.",
      "Water Tightness Of Joint": "Assembly of fitting with the pipe shall show no leakage.",
      "Titanium Dioxide Content": "Shall not be less than 2.5 percent by mass. Note – For methods of tests refer to Appendices A to D of the standard and IS 6307 : 1985 Rigid PVC sheets and"
    },
    "content": "IS 14735: 1999 Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride (Upvc) Injection Moulded Fitting For Soil And Waste Discharge System For Inside And Outside Buildings Including Ventilation And Rain Water Systems\n* UPVC pipes for soil and waste discharge systems inside buildings including ventilation and rain water system. TABLE 3 SOCKET AND SPIGOT DIMENSIONS FOR RING SEAL FITTING\nSl.\nNominal\nMean Inside Diameter Length of Neck of\nLengthbeyond\nMean outside Diameter\nNo.\nDiameter of Socket at Midpoint\nBeading Neck\nSocket\nBeading of Spigot Portion\nDN D1 A\nB C D2\nMin\nMax\nMax\nMin Min\nMin Max mm mm mm mm mm\nmm mm\nmm\n(1)\n(2) (3) (4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7) (8)\n(9) i)\n40 40.1\n41.1 18 5\n18\n40.0\n40.3 ii)\n50 50.1\n51.1 18 5\n20\n50.0\n50.3 iii)\n63 63.1\n64.1 18 5\n23\n63.0\n63.3 iv)\n75 75.1\n76.2 20 5\n25\n75.0\n75.3 v)\n90 90.1\n91.2 23 5\n28\n90.0\n90.3 vi)\n110\n110.1 111.3 26 6\n32\n110.0\n110.4 vii)\n125 125.1 126.4 28 7\n35\n125.0 125.4 viii)\n140 140.2 141.4 30 8\n38\n140.0 140.5 ix)\n160\n160.2 161.5 32 9\n42\n160.0 160.5\nNote — The minimum dimensions D1 in this table for grooved sockets shall be maintained same as that of sliding sockets\n(D1) in table 2. TABLE 2 SOCKET AND SPIGOT DIMENSIONS FOR SOLVENT CEMENT FITTINGS\nSI\nNominal\nSocket\nMean Inside\nMean Outside\nNo.\nDiameter\nDepth\nDiameter of\nDiameter of\nSocket at Mid Point\nSpigot Portion\nDN\nu\nD1\nD2\nMin\nMax\nMin\nMax\nMin\nMax mm\nmm mm\nmm mm\nmm\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\ni)\n40\n26.0\n40.1\n40.3\n40.0\n40.3 ii)\n50\n30.0\n50.1\n50.3\n50.0\n50.3 iii)\n63\n36.0\n63.1\n63.3\n63.0\n63.3 iv)\n75\n40.0\n75.1\n75.3\n75.0\n75.3 v)\n90\n46.0\n90.1\n90.3\n90.0\n90.3 vi)\n110\n48.0\n10.1\n110.4\n110.0\n110.4 vii)\n125\n51.0\n125.1\n125.4\n125.0\n125.4 viii)\n140\n54.0\n140.1\n140.5\n140.0\n140.5 ix)\n160\n58.0\n160.2\n160.5\n160.0\n160.5\nNote—See also sketches of table 2 and 3.\n6.3\nDimensions for Waste Trap (Nahani Trap)\nMaximum diameter of rim of bowl\n=\n135.0 mm\nMaximum depth of bowl\n=\n80.0 mm\nMinimum wateer seal\n=\n10.0 mm\nMinimum spigot length\n=\n70.0 mm\nSpigot end outside\n= 75.0 mm\n6.4.\nChamfer – The spigot ends of fittings shall be chamfered to an angle of 15o ± 1o; to the the axis of the\npipe.\n7.\nSealing Rings – As per IS 5382 : 1985* with\nIRHD hardness of 50 ± 5.\n*Specification for rubber lings for gas mains, water mains and sowers.\n0\n2\n−\n+ 8. Workmanship — Both the inner and outer surface\nof the fitting shall be cleanly finished, smooth and free from grooving, blistering or other deleterious defects,\nwhen viewed without magnification. Each end of the fitting shall be square to the axis of the approximate line.\n9. Requirements\n9.1 Sockets of fittings shall be either of solvent cement\ntype or rubber ring type.\n9.2 Socket and Spigot Configurations — A fitting shall\nhave any of the following configrations of socket and spigot.\na) Asolvent cement type of socket at each end of the fittings; b) A rubber ring type of socket at each end of fitting;\nc) A solvent cement type socket at one or two ends, and a spigot at the other end, or at each of the other ends ( as\napplicable) of the fitting;\nd) A rubber ring type socket at one or two ends, and a spigot at the other end, or at each of the other ends (as applicable)\nof the fittings; and e) A solvent cement type socket at one or two ends, and a\nrubber ring Type socket at the other end, or at each of the other nds (asapplicable) of the fitting. 9.3 Access Openings— When so required, fittings\nshall be supplied with an access opening, with threaded caps. Dimensions of access opening shall be as\nfollows—\nNominal\nMinimum Clear Opening\nDiameter mm\n(Diameter) mm\n40 to 50\nEqual to inside diameter of fitting\n63 to 90\n54. 0\n110 to 140\n63.0\n160\n75.0 9.4 Vent Cowl —Vent cowls maybe of suitable length\nwith perforations/openings. The dimentions of wall thickness and socket depth may be as follows\nNominal\nSocket Depth\nWall Thickness\nDiameter\nMin of Socket, Min mm mm\nmm\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n40 to 63\n20.0\n1.8\n75 to 90\n22.0\n2.0\n110 to 160\n24.0\n2.0\n9.5 Pipe Clips —Pipes clips may be of G1/Anti-corrosive\nmaterial.The dimensions of pipe clips may be follows:\nNominal\nMinimum\nMean Inside Diameter\nDiameter\nStand off\nDistance\nMin Max mm\nmm mm\nmm\n40\n50.0\n40.0\n40.4\n50\n55.0\n50.0\n50.4\n63\n61.0\n63.0\n63.4\n75\n67.0\n75.0\n75.5\n90\n75.0\n90.0\n90.6\n110\n85.0\n110.0\n110.7\n125\n92.0\n125.0\n125.7\n140\n100.0\n140.0\n140.8\n160\n110.0\n160.0\n168.0\n10. Physical Test Requirements\n10.1\nVisual Appearance — The internal and external surfaces of fittings shall be smooth and clean, and free\nroovings and other defects. The ends shall be clean and shall be square with the exisof the appropriate line.\n10.2\nStress Relief Test— Shall not show blisters, excessive delamination or cracking or signs of weld line\nsplitting.\n10.3\nVicat Softening Temperature —Shall not be less than 78oC\n11. Resistance to Sulphuric Acid — The mass of the\nspecimen shall neither increase by more than 0.32 g not decrease by more than 0.13 g.\n12. Sulphated Ash Content —Not more than 10 oercent\nby mass.\n13. Mechanical Properties\n13.1\nImpact Test (Drop Test) — Shall not fracture or crack through its complete wall thickness.\n14. Water Tightness of Joint — Assembly of fitting\nwith the pipe shall show no leakage.\n15. Titanium Dioxide Content— Shall not be less\nthan 2.5 percent by mass.\nNote – For methods of tests refer to Appendices A to D of the standard and IS 6307 : 1985 Rigid PVC sheets and"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12235: 1986",
    "title": "Methods Of Test For Unplasticized Pvc Pipes For Potable Water Supplies Part 6 Stress Relef Test: Part 7 Resistance To Sulphuric Acid.",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "For detailed information, refer to IS 14735 :1999 Specification for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) injection moulded fittings for soil and waste discharge system for inside and outside buildings including ventilation and rain water system.",
    "keywords": [
      "system",
      "nonimal",
      "socketed",
      "upvc",
      "ventilation",
      "rain",
      "outside"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 12235: 1986 Methods Of Test For Unplasticized Pvc Pipes For Potable Water Supplies Part 6 Stress Relef Test: Part 7 Resistance To Sulphuric Acid.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 14735 :1999 Specification for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (UPVC) injection moulded fittings for soil and waste discharge system for inside and\noutside buildings including ventilation and rain water system. TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF STEEL TUBES – LIGHT\nNonimal\nOutside Diameter\nThickness\nMass of Tube\nBore\nPlain End\nScrewed and\nMaximum\nMinimum\n(kg/m)\nSocketed mm\nmm mm\nmm\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n6\n10.1\n9.7\n1.8\n0.360\n0.363\n8\n13.6\n13.2\n1.8\n0.515\n0.519\n10\n17.1\n16.7\n1.8\n0.670\n0.676\n15\n21.4\n21.0\n2.0\n0.947\n0.956\n20\n26.9\n26.4\n2.3 0.138\n0.139\n25\n33.8\n33.2\n2.6 1. 98\n2.00\n32\n42.5\n41.9\n2.6\n2.54\n2.57\n40\n48.4\n47.8\n2.9\n3.23\n3.27\n50\n60.2\n59.6\n2.9\n4.08\n4.15\n65\n76.0\n75.2\n3.2\n5.71\n5.83\n80\n88.7\n87.9\n3.2\n6.72\n6.89\n100\n113.9\n113.0\n3.6,\n9.75\n10.00"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1239 (Part 1): 2004",
    "title": "Steel Tubes, Tubulars Andother Wrought Steel Fittings",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirement for welded and seamless plain end or screwed and socketed steel tubes intended for the use in water, gas airlines and steam. Medium and heavy tubes only are recommended for carrying steam services. The maximum permissible pressure and temperatures for different sizes of tubes are given in Annex A of the standard for guidance only.",
    "keywords": [
      "tubes",
      "screwed",
      "seamless",
      "socketed",
      "series",
      "heavy",
      "welded"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirement for welded and seamless plain end or screwed and socketed steel tubes intended for the use in water, gas airlines and steam. Medium and heavy tubes only are recommended for carrying steam services. The maximum permissible pressure and temperatures for different sizes of tubes are given in Annex A of the standard for guidance only.",
      "Designation": "Shall be designated by their nominal bore, and shall be further classified as light, medium and heavy depending on the wall thickness; and screwed and socketed or plain- ended to denote end condition, and black or galvanized to denote surface condition. 3. Manufacture 3.1 Seamless — Seamless steel tubes shall be made from tested quality steel manufactured by any approved process and shall be fully killed. The Sulphur and phosphorus requirement in steel shall not exceed 0.04 percent each. 3.2 Steel tubes shall be manufactured by one of the following processes: a) Hot finished seamless (HFS) b) Electric resistance welded (ERW) c) High frequency induction welded (HFIW) d) Hot finished welded (HFW) and e) Cold fiished seamless (cds) 4. Dimensions TABLE 3 DIMENSIONS OF STEEL TUBES HEAVY Nonimal",
      "Joints": "All screwed tubes shall be supplied with pipe threads conforming to IS554 : 1999*",
      "Lengths": "4 to 7 m including one socket for screwed and socketed tubes. 7.1. Tolerances on Length : mm on exact length and ±150 mm of approximate length.",
      "Galvanizing": "All tubes shall be galvanized. Coating shall be as per IS 4736 : 1986†. Tubes which are to be screwed shall be galvanized before screwing.",
      "Leak Tightness Test": "Eddy current test may be done in place of hydrostatic test subject to mutual agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer. Hydrostatic test when carried out a pressure of 5 MPa, maintainted for at least 3 seconds and shall not show any leakage in the pipe. 10.Test on Finished Tubes",
      "Tensile Strength": "Not less than 320 MPa,",
      "Elongation": "The elongation percentage on a gauge length of 5.65. , where So is the original cross-sectional area of the test specimen, shall be as follows : Nominal Bore Elongation Percent Min a) For steam services 20 percent for all sizes b) For other services Up to and including 25 mm 12 percent Over 25 mm up to and 20 percent including 150 mm 10.3 Bend Test – (Upto 50 mm nominal dia.) – Shall be capable of withstanding the bend test without showing any signs of fracture or failure. 10.4 Flattering Test – (for tubes above 50 mm nominal bore) - No opening shall occur by fracture in the weld until the distance between the plates is less than 75 percent of the original outside diameter of the pipe and no crack on breaks in the metal elsewhere than in the weld shall occur until the distance between the ",
      "Workmanship": "All pipes shall be cleanly finished and reasonably free from injurious defects. The ends shall be cleanly cut and reasonably square with axis of the pipe. The tubes shall be reasonably straight. Note — For methods of tests refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals Tensile testing (second revision) and"
    },
    "content": "IS 1239 (Part 1): 2004 Steel Tubes, Tubulars Andother Wrought Steel Fittings\nPART 1 STEEL TUBES\n(Sixth Revision)\n1. Scope — Requirement for welded and seamless plain\nend or screwed and socketed steel tubes intended for the use in water, gas airlines and steam. Medium and\nheavy tubes only are recommended for carrying steam services. The maximum permissible pressure and\ntemperatures for different sizes of tubes are given in\nAnnex A of the standard for guidance only.\n2. Designation — Shall be designated by their nominal\nbore, and shall be further classified as light, medium and heavy depending on the wall thickness; and\nscrewed and socketed or plain- ended to denote end condition, and black or galvanized to denote surface\ncondition.\n3. Manufacture\n3.1 Seamless — Seamless steel tubes shall be made\nfrom tested quality steel manufactured by any approved process and shall be fully killed. The Sulphur and\nphosphorus requirement in steel shall not exceed 0.04 percent each.\n3.2 Steel tubes shall be manufactured by one of the\nfollowing processes:\na)\nHot finished seamless (HFS)\nb)\nElectric resistance welded (ERW)\nc)\nHigh frequency induction welded (HFIW)\nd)\nHot finished welded (HFW) and e)\nCold fiished seamless (cds)\n4. Dimensions TABLE 3 DIMENSIONS OF STEEL TUBES HEAVY\nNonimal\nOutside Diameter\nThickness\nMass of Tube\nBore\nPlain end\nScrewed and\nMaximum\nMinimum\n(kg/m.)\nSocketed mm\nmm mm\nmm mm\nmm\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6) 6\n10.6\n9.8\n2.6 0.487\n0.490 8\n14.0\n13.2\n2.9 0.765 0.769 10\n17.5\n16.7\n2.9\n1.02\n1. 03 15\n21.8\n21.0\n3.2\n1.44\n1.45 20\n27.3\n26.5\n3.2\n1.87\n1.88 25\n34.2\n33.3\n4.0\n2.93\n2.95 32\n42.2\n42.0\n4.0\n3.79\n3.82 40\n48.8 47.9\n4.0 4.37\n4.41 50\n60.8\n59.7\n4.5\n6.19\n6.26 65\n76.6\n75.3\n4.5\n7.93\n8.05 80\n89.5\n88.0\n4.8 9.90\n10.40\n100\n115.0\n113.1\n5.4\n14.5\n14.8\n125\n140.8\n138.5\n5.4 17.9\n18.4\n150\n166.5\n163.9\n5.4\n21.3\n21.9 Note—- Thickness is applicable to both black and galvanized tubes\nTABLE 2 DIMENSIONS OF STEEL TABLES MEDIUM\nNonimal\nOutside Diameter\nThickness\nMass of Tube\nBore plain end\nScrewed and\nMaximum\nMinimum\n(kg/m.)\nSocketed mm\nmm mm\nmm mm\nmm\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6) 6\n10.6 9.8\n2.0\n0.404\n0.407 8\n14.0\n13.2\n2.3\n0.641\n0.645\n10\n17.5\n16.7\n2.3\n0.839\n0.845\n15\n21.8\n21.0\n2.6\n1.21\n1.22\n20\n27.3\n26.5\n2.6\n1.56\n1.57\n25\n34.2\n33.3\n3.2\n2.41\n2.43\n32\n42.9\n42.0\n3.2\n3.10\n3.13\n40\n48.8\n47.9\n3.2\n3.56\n3.60\n50\n60.8\n59.7\n3.6\n5.03\n5.10\n65\n76.6\n75.3\n3.6\n6.42\n6.54\n80\n89.5\n88.0\n4.0\n8.36\n8.53\n100\n115.0\n113.1\n4.5\n2.2\n12.5\n125\n140.8\n138.5\n4.8\n15.9\n16.4\n150\n166.5\n163.9\n4.8\n18.9\n19.5 5. Tolerances\na) Thickness–\n1) Welded tubes:\nLight tubes\n+ not limited\n– 8 percent\nMedium and heavy\n+ not limited tubes\n– 10 percent\n2) Seamless tubes\n+ not limited\n– 12.5 percent a) Mass:\n1) Single tube (light\n+ 10 percent series)\n– 8 percent\n2) Single tube (medium)\n± 10 percent and heavy series\n3) For quantities per\n+ 7.5 percent load of 10 tonnes,\n– 5 percent\nMin (light series)\n4) For quantities per\n± 7.5 percent load of 10 tonnes,\nMin (medium and and heavy series)\nNote: For the purpose of minimum weighment of 15 tonnes\nlot, the weighment may be done in conveninet lots at the option of the manufacturer.\n6. Joints – All screwed tubes shall be supplied with\npipe threads conforming to IS554 : 1999*\n7. Lengths — 4 to 7 m including one socket for screwed\nand socketed tubes.\n7.1.\nTolerances on Length : mm on exact length and\n±150 mm of approximate length.\n8. Galvanizing – All tubes shall be galvanized. Coating\nshall be as per IS 4736 : 1986†. Tubes which are to be screwed shall be galvanized before screwing.\n9. Leak Tightness Test – Eddy current test may be\ndone in place of hydrostatic test subject to mutual agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer.\nHydrostatic test when carried out a pressure of 5 MPa, maintainted for at least 3 seconds and shall not show\nany leakage in the pipe.\n10.Test on Finished Tubes\n10.1. Tensile strength — Not less than 320 MPa,\n10.2. Elongation — The elongation percentage on a gauge length of 5.65.\n, where So is the original cross-sectional area of the test specimen, shall be as\nfollows :\nNominal Bore\nElongation\nPercent Min a) For steam services\n20 percent for all sizes\nb) For other services\nUp to and including 25 mm\n12 percent\nOver 25 mm up to and\n20 percent including 150 mm\n10.3\nBend Test – (Upto 50 mm nominal dia.) – Shall be capable of withstanding the bend test without showing\nany signs of fracture or failure.\n10.4\nFlattering Test – (for tubes above 50 mm nominal bore) - No opening shall occur by fracture in the weld\nuntil the distance between the plates is less than 75 percent of the original outside diameter of the pipe and\nno crack on breaks in the metal elsewhere than in the weld shall occur until the distance between the plates is\nless than 60 percent of the original outside diameter.\nSee 14.3 of the standard.\n11. Workmanship — All pipes shall be cleanly finished\nand reasonably free from injurious defects. The ends shall be cleanly cut and reasonably square with axis of\nthe pipe. The tubes shall be reasonably straight.\nNote — For methods of tests refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals Tensile testing (second revision) and"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2329: 1985",
    "title": "Methods Of Bend Test On Metallic Tubes (In Full Section).",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for butt welded and seamless, plain ended, screwed and socketed steel tubulars and other welded and seamless wrought steel pipe fittings. The requirements of backnuts are covered in IS 3468 : 1991+",
    "keywords": [
      "tubulars",
      "outlet",
      "tees",
      "welded",
      "tubes",
      "wrought",
      "fittings"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for butt welded and seamless, plain ended, screwed and socketed steel tubulars and other welded and seamless wrought steel pipe fittings. The requirements of backnuts are covered in IS 3468 : 1991+",
      "Designation": "Mild steel sockets and tubular shall be designated by their nominal bore. Other wrought steel fittings shall be designated giving the following particulars in the sequence shown : a) Type of fittings, and b) Size designation 3. Manufacture 3.1 Tubulars shall be made from tubes which comply with all the appropriate requirement of IS 1239 (Part 1): 1990. 3.2 Sockets shall be manufactured from any of the following processes : a) Hot- finished seamless (HFS) b) Electric resistance welded (ERW) c) High frequency induction welded (HFIW) and d) Hot finished welded (HFW) 3.3 The steel from which the fittings are made shall show a minimum tensile strength of 320 MPa. The percentage elongation shall not be less than 9500 divided by the tensile strength.",
      "Chemical Composition": "Shall not show Sulphur and Phosphorus is amounts exceeding 0.06 percent each.",
      "Dimensions Of Tubulars": "Pieces, Nipples (close Tape, running and barrel nipples) long screws, bends, springs, return bends and mild steel sockets having, nominal bore 6, 0, 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 65,80,100,125 and 150mm. Note— For details of dimensions and figures see tables 1 to 6 of the standard. 6. Dimensions of Wrought Steel Fittings (other than tubulars) 6.1 Screwed ends of fittings — Nominal size of outlet 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150. 6.2 Elbows, tees and croses, equal — Nominal size of outlet 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80,100, 150. 6.3 Elbows, Tees and crosses, equal — Nominal size of outlet 8×6, 10×6, 10×8, 15×8, 15×10, 20×8, 20×10, 20×15, 25×10, 25×15, 25×20, 32×15, 32×20, 32×25, 40×15, 40×20, 40×20, 40×25, 40×32, 50×15, 50×20, 50×25, 50×32, 50×40, 65×50, 80×25"
    },
    "content": "IS 2329: 1985 Methods Of Bend Test On Metallic Tubes (In Full Section).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS:1239 (Part 1) : 2004 Specification for steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fittings Part 1 Steel tubes (sixth revision).\n*Pipe threads where pressure - tight joints are made on the threads dimensions tolerance and designation (fouth revision)\n†Hot-dip zinc coatings on steel tubes (fourth revision)\nSo 10.136\n1.\nScope — Requirements for butt welded and seamless, plain ended, screwed and socketed steel\ntubulars and other welded and seamless wrought steel pipe fittings. The requirements of backnuts are covered\nin IS 3468 : 1991+\n2.\nDesignation – Mild steel sockets and tubular shall be designated by their nominal bore. Other\nwrought steel fittings shall be designated giving the following particulars in the sequence shown :\na) Type of fittings, and b) Size designation\n3.\nManufacture\n3.1 Tubulars shall be made from tubes which comply\nwith all the appropriate requirement of IS 1239 (Part 1):\n1990.\n3.2 Sockets shall be manufactured from any of the\nfollowing processes :\na) Hot- finished seamless (HFS)\nb) Electric resistance welded (ERW)\nc) High frequency induction welded (HFIW) and d) Hot finished welded (HFW)\n3.3 The steel from which the fittings are made shall\nshow a minimum tensile strength of 320 MPa. The percentage elongation shall not be less than 9500 divided\nby the tensile strength.\n4.\nChemical Composition – Shall not show\nSulphur and Phosphorus is amounts exceeding 0.06 percent each.\n5.\nDimensions of Tubulars – Pieces, Nipples\n(close Tape, running and barrel nipples) long screws, bends, springs, return bends and mild steel sockets\nhaving, nominal bore 6, 0, 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50,\n65,80,100,125 and 150mm. Note— For details of dimensions and figures see tables 1 to\n6 of the standard.\n6.\nDimensions of Wrought Steel Fittings\n(other than tubulars)\n6.1 Screwed ends of fittings — Nominal size of outlet 6,\n8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150.\n6.2 Elbows, tees and croses, equal — Nominal size of\noutlet 6, 8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80,100, 150.\n6.3 Elbows, Tees and crosses, equal — Nominal size of\noutlet 8×6, 10×6, 10×8, 15×8, 15×10, 20×8, 20×10, 20×15,\n25×10, 25×15, 25×20, 32×15, 32×20, 32×25, 40×15, 40×20,\n40×20, 40×25, 40×32, 50×15, 50×20, 50×25, 50×32, 50×40,\n65×50, 80×25, 80×50, 100×50, 100×80.\n6.4 Tees, Reducing (on the branch)— Nominal size of\noutlet 8×6, 10×6, 10×8, 15×10, 20×8, 20×10, 20×15, 25×10,\n25×8, 25×15, 25×20, 32×10, 32×15, 32×10, 32×15, 32×20,\n32×25, 40×10, 40×25, 40×32, 50×15, 50×20, 50×20, 50×20,\n50×25 and 50×32.\n6.5 Tees, Reducing (on the run and branches, or on\nthe run only)— Nominal size of outlet 20×15×15,\n20×15×20, 25×20×15,25×20×20,25×20×25,32×25×20,\n32×25×25,32×25×32,32×25×40,40×32×25,\n40×32×32,40×32×40, 40×32×50, 50×32×50, 50×40×25,\n50×40×40, 50×50×50, 50×50×65, 80×50×50, 80×50×80, and 100×80×80.\n6.6 Tees (increasing on the branch) – Nominal size of\nthe outlet 6×8, 8×10, 10×15, 15×20, 15×20, 15×25, 20×25,\n25×32, 25×40, 32×40, 40×50, 50×65, 50×80, 65×80, 80×100.\n6.7 Crosses, Reducding— Nominal size of outlet 8×6,\n10×8, 15×10, 20×15, 25×15, 25×20, 32×15, 32×25, 40×15,\n125×100, 150×80, 150×100.\n6.9 Elbows, round, male and female equal — Nominal\nsize of outlet— 8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80, 100."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3589: 2001",
    "title": "Seamless Or Electrically Welded Steel Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for steel tubes used for water wells, such as, casing, drive pipe and housing,having the following types of joints a) Screwed and socketed butt joints, b) Screwed flush butt joints, and c) Plain bevelled end pipes for butt welded joints.",
    "keywords": [
      "pipe",
      "outside",
      "welded",
      "pipes",
      "seamless",
      "efw",
      "bevelled"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Hydraulic Pressure Test": "The hydraulic test pressure shall be the pressure calculated from the following formula, except that the maximum test presure shall not exceed 5 MPa. D t S P 2 = where P = test pressure in MPa, S = Stress in MPa which shall be taken as40 percent of the specified minimum tensile strength t = specified thickness in mm. D = specified outside diameter in mm. Test pressure shall be applied and maintained for sufficiently long time for proof and inspection. Note — Normally 5 seconds are sufficient for the purpose of the test. NDT test may be carried out in place of hydraulic pressure test. Method of NTD and the acceptance level shall be as agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser 12. Joints and Ends a) Plain ends or bevelled ends for buttwelding (see Fig. 1A and 1B of the Standard) u",
      "Workmanship": "All pipes shall be cleanly finished and when visually inspected, shall be free from defects such as cracks, surface flaws, laminations, etc. The ends shall be cleanly cut and reasonably square with the axis of the pipe. For detailed information, refer to IS 3589 : 2001 Specification for seamless or electrically welded steel Sipes for water, gas and sewage (168.3 to 2032 mm outside diameter) (third revision) SP 21 : 2005 10.140 Dimentions of Plain Casing Pipes Nominal Bore Outside Diameter Thickness of Pipe of Pipe of Pipe (mm) (mm) (mm) 100 1 14.3 5.0 125 1 41.3 5.0 150 1 68.3 5.0 175 1 93.7 5.4 200 2 19.1 5.4 225 2 44.5 6.0 250 2 73.0 7.1 300 3 23.9 7.1 350 3 55.6 8.0,10.0 and 12.0 400 4 06.4 8.0,10.0,12, 14.0 400 4 06.4 10.0,12.0 and14.0 450 4 57.2 10.0 Dimensions and Masses of Drive Pip",
      "Scope": "Requirements for steel tubes used for water wells, such as, casing, drive pipe and housing,having the following types of joints a) Screwed and socketed butt joints, b) Screwed flush butt joints, and c) Plain bevelled end pipes for butt welded joints.",
      "Grades": "Tubes shall be one of the following types and grades of steel: Type of Tube Grade of Steel Hot Finished Seamless (HFS) Electric Automatic/semi-automatic Fusion Welded (EFW) Electric resistance welded (ERW)and Fe 410 High frequency induction Fe 450 welded (HFIW)",
      "Manufacture": "Steel used shall be made by open- hearth, electric or basic oxygen process, having not more than 0.06 percent each of sulphur and phosphorous. 4. Dimensions 4.1 Length — Random lengths of 4 to 7 m. Dimensions of Screwed and Socketed Casing Pipes All dimensions in millimetres. Nominal Outside Thickness Socket Overall Bore of Diameter of Pipe Outside Length of Pipe of Pipe Diameter Socket, Min 100 114.3 5.4 130.0 114.3 125 141.3 5.4 157.0 120.6 7.1 150 168.3 5.4 184.0 27.0 7.1 175 193.7 6.4 211.6 152.4 8.0 200 219.1 6.4 237.0 152.4 8.0 225 244.5 7.1 262.5 165.1 9.0 250 273.1 8.0 291.0 177.8 10.0 300 323.9 8.0 346.0 177.8 10.0"
    },
    "content": "IS 3589: 2001 Seamless Or Electrically Welded Steel Pipes For Water, Gas And Sewage\n(168.3 TO 2540 mm OUTSIDE DIAMETER)\n(Third Revision)\nNote—In case of non-avaibility of ladle analysis, the\nfinished product may be checked to verify the chemical composition, if so agreed to by the producer.\n5.2 Product Analysis–The permissible variation from\nthe limits specified shall be as given below:\nElement\nPermissible Deviation on\nProducts\nAnalysis, Percent\nCarbon\n+ 0.02\nSulphur\n+ 0.005\nPhosphorous + 0.005\n0\n10\n±\nSP 21 : 2005 10.139\n9. Tolerances\n9.1 Outside Diameter – on pipe body Outside Diameter Tolerance mm\nWelded Pipe Seamless Pipe\nUpto 508 ±0.75 percent\n±1 Percent\nOver 508 ±1 percent\n±1.5 percent\n9.2 Wall thickness\nERW Pipe ± 10 percent\nEFW Pipe and ± 20 percent\nSeamless Pipe –12.5 percent\n9.3 Straightness – Finished pipe shall not deviate from\nstraightness by more than 0.2 per cent of the total length.\n10. Wall Thickness Minimum Specified Outside Dia\nThickness of\nPipes 168.3 to 406.6 mm 4 mm\nAbove 406.6 to 599.0 mm 5 mm\nAbove 599.0 to 914.0 mm 6 mm\nAbove 914.0 to 1219.0 mm 7 mm\nAbove 1219.0 to 1620.0 mm 8 mm\nAbove 1620.0 to 2032.0 mm 10 mm\n11. Hydraulic Pressure Test – The hydraulic test\npressure shall be the pressure calculated from the following formula, except that the maximum test presure\nshall not exceed 5 MPa.\nD\nt\nS\nP\n2\n= where\nP = test pressure in MPa,\nS =\nStress in MPa which shall be taken as40 percent of the specified minimum tensile strength\nt = specified thickness in mm.\nD =\nspecified outside diameter in mm.\nTest pressure shall be applied and maintained for sufficiently long time for proof and inspection.\nNote — Normally 5 seconds are sufficient for the purpose of\nthe test. NDT test may be carried out in place of hydraulic pressure test. Method of NTD and the acceptance level shall\nbe as agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser\n12. Joints and Ends\na)\nPlain ends or bevelled ends for buttwelding (see Fig.\n1A and 1B of the Standard) unless otherwise agreed,bevelled ends shall be bevelled to an angle of 30o\nmeasured from a linedrawn perpendicular to theaxis of the pipe. The root face shall be 1.6 ± 0.8 mm.\nb)\nJoints with sleeve joint or swelled and plain ends for welding (see Fig. 2 of the Standard)\n12.1 Depth of Sleeve, X (for Welded Tubes)\n.Dimension Outside Diameter of Pipe Tolerance mm\nmm mm 50\n168.3 upto 406.4 ± 6 60\n457.0 upto 1219.0 ± 6 75\n1321.0 upto 2032.0 ± 6\nClearance Y 168.3 upto 1219.0 4 between\nPlain Ends.\nMax\n1321.0 upto 2032.0 6\n13. Tests\n13.1. Tensile Test Not less than the values specified under 6.\n13.2 Flattering test\n13.2.1 For ERW pipes — No opening shall occur by fracture in the weld until the distance between the plates\nis less than 75 percent of the original outside diameter of the pipe and no cracks or breaks on the metal else\nwhere than in the weld shall occur until the distance between the plates is less than 60 percent of the original\noutside diameter.\n13.2.2 For seamless pipes— Shall be flattened when cold between two parallel that surfaces without showing\neither crack or flaw, until when the pressure is released, the interior surfaces remain at middle of a distance apart\nnot greater than lot for Fe 450 and Bt Fa Fe 330 & Fe 410.\n13.3 Guided Bend Test(For EFW Pipes) — Shall not\nfracture completely.\nNote — For details see 16 of the standard.\n14. Workmanship — All pipes shall be cleanly\nfinished and when visually inspected, shall be free from defects such as cracks, surface flaws, laminations, etc.\nThe ends shall be cleanly cut and reasonably square with the axis of the pipe.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3589 : 2001 Specification for seamless or electrically welded steel Sipes for water, gas and sewage (168.3 to 2032 mm outside diameter) (third revision)\nSP 21 : 2005 10.140\nDimentions of Plain Casing Pipes\nNominal Bore\nOutside\nDiameter Thickness of Pipe of Pipe of Pipe (mm)\n(mm) (mm) 100 1 14.3 5.0 125\n1 41.3 5.0 150\n1 68.3 5.0 175\n1 93.7 5.4 200\n2 19.1 5.4 225\n2 44.5 6.0 250\n2 73.0 7.1 300\n3 23.9 7.1 350\n3 55.6 8.0,10.0 and 12.0 400\n4 06.4 8.0,10.0,12, 14.0 400\n4 06.4 10.0,12.0 and14.0 450\n4 57.2 10.0\nDimensions and Masses of Drive Pipes for\nScrewed Flush Butt Joints (SquareThreads)\nNominal Bore\nOutside Diameter Thickness mm mm mm (1) (2) (3) 100 114.3 6.0 125 141.3 6.0 150 168.3 8.0 175 193.7 8.0 200 219.0 10.0 225 244.5 10.0 250 273.0 10.0 300 323.9 10.0 350 355.6 10.0 400 406.4 12.0 and 14.0 450 457.2 12.0 and 14.0 500 508.0 12.0 and 14.0 550 558.8 14.0 625 635.0 14.0\nDimensions of Plain End Drive Pipes Nominal Bore Outside Diameter Thickness (mm)\n(mm) (mm)\n(1)\n(2) (3) 300 323.9 10.0 and 12.0 350 355.6 10.0,12.0 and 14.0 400 406.4 10.0,12.0 and 14.0 450 457.2 10.0,12.0 and 14.0 475 482.6 14.0 500 508.0 10.0 and 14.0 550\n558.8 14.0 625\n635.0 14.0\nNote— For masses see Tables 1 to 4 of the standard.\n1. Scope — Requirements for steel tubes used for\nwater wells, such as, casing, drive pipe and housing,having the following types of joints\na)\nScrewed and socketed butt joints, b)\nScrewed flush butt joints, and c)\nPlain bevelled end pipes for butt welded joints.\n2.\nTypes and Grades— Tubes shall be one of the following types and grades of steel:\nType of Tube\nGrade of Steel Hot Finished Seamless (HFS) Electric Automatic/semi-automatic Fusion Welded (EFW) Electric resistance welded (ERW)and Fe 410 High frequency induction Fe 450 welded (HFIW)\n3. Manufacture – Steel used shall be made by open-\nhearth, electric or basic oxygen process, having not more than 0.06 percent each of sulphur and\nphosphorous.\n4. Dimensions\n4.1 Length — Random lengths of 4 to 7 m.\nDimensions of Screwed and Socketed Casing Pipes\nAll dimensions in millimetres.\nNominal Outside Thickness Socket\nOverall\nBore of Diameter of Pipe Outside\nLength of\nPipe of Pipe Diameter\nSocket,\nMin\n100 114.3 5.4 130.0\n114.3\n125 141.3 5.4 157.0 120.6 7.1\n150 168.3 5.4 184.0 27.0 7.1\n175 193.7 6.4 211.6 152.4 8.0\n200 219.1 6.4 237.0 152.4 8.0\n225 244.5 7.1 262.5 165.1 9.0\n250 273.1 8.0 291.0 177.8 10.0\n300 323.9 8.0 346.0 177.8 10.0"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4270: 2001",
    "title": "Steel Tubes Used For Water Wells",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements of spiral seam welded steel pipe over 457 mm dia and upto 2000 mm dia with wall thickness upto 12.5 mm inclusive. The pipe is intended for general use. The suitability of pipe for various purposes is dependent on its dimensions, properties and condition of service. The purpose for which the pipe is intended should be stated in the enquiry and order.",
    "keywords": [
      "tubes",
      "threads",
      "butt",
      "pipe",
      "welding",
      "handed",
      "ends"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Condition Of Pipes": "All pipes shall be, free from harmful defects, of good commercial finish and free from loose scale and rust. When required, the ends shall be cut square with the axis of the pipe. 8. Tests 8.1 Tensile Test—Tensile strength and elongation. Grade Tensile Yield Elongation Min strength strength 5.65 MPa MPa Percent (N/mm2) (N/mm2) Fe 450 275 13 Fe 410 235 15 For detailed information, refer to IS 4270 : 2001 Specification for Steel tubes used for water wells (third revision) 8.2 Flattening Test – Shall not show crack or flaw. 8.3 Alignment Test – When two tubes are screwed together till they butt, and their axes shall not then be out of line by more than 100 mm in each 6 metre length. Note — This test is not applicable to the plain end pipes.",
      "Hydraulic Pressure Test": "Every pipe shall withstand the test pressure as calculated by the following formula for 3 s. Grade Test Pressure N/mm2 Fe 410 280 t/D Fe 450 350 t/D where t = thickness of pipe in mm, and D = outside diameter of pipe in mm. The maximum pressure applied shall be 7 MPa.",
      "Coating Of Tubes": "The tubes shall be externally coated with a bituminous solution or any other protective anti-corrosion coating. Where tubes are required to be galvanized, the zinc coating on the tubes shall be in accordance with IS 4736 :1986*. 10. Protection of ends 10.1 All threads shall be coated with a petroleum jelly or other suitable rust preventing compound. 10.2 All tubes with V-form threads shall have the threads protected with plastic rings or sleeves. 10.3 All tubes with square form threads shall have the exposed male threads protected with steel rings or sleeves and the female threads protected with steel nipples or bushes. 10.4 No protection of the ends shall be provided for tubes for Butt Welding unless specially called for by the purchaser. * Hot-dip zinc coatings on mild steel tubes (first",
      "Scope": "Requirements of spiral seam welded steel pipe over 457 mm dia and upto 2000 mm dia with wall thickness upto 12.5 mm inclusive. The pipe is intended for general use. The suitability of pipe for various purposes is dependent on its dimensions, properties and condition of service. The purpose for which the pipe is intended should be stated in the enquiry and order.",
      "Manufacture": "Steel used shall be produced by open hearth a electic or one of the basic oxygen processes. The helical seam shall be welded by one of the following processes : a) Electric fusion butt welding internally and automatic are welding externally. b) Electric resistance welding c) Automatic submerged are welding. 3. Chemical Composition 3.1 Ladle analysis C percent S percent P percent Max Max Max 0.25 0.05 0.05 3.2 Product analysis Element Variation Over and Above Specified Limit, percent C 0.02 P 0.005 S 0.005 4. Physical Tests 4.1. Tensile Test U.T.S Min Y.S. Min E Percent Min on 5.65 410 MPa 240 MPa 20"
    },
    "content": "IS 4270: 2001 Steel Tubes Used For Water Wells\n(Third Revision)\nSP 21 : 2005 10.141\n5. Tolerances\n5.1 Outside Diameter — Permissible tolerances on\noutside diameter of pipe and socket shall be ±1 percent but not greater than 3 mm in the case of socket.\n5.2 Thickness – The permissible tolerances on the tube\nthickness shall be as follows : Seamless tube + 20 percent - 12.5 percent Welded tube Up to and including + 15 percent 406.4 mm outside - 12.5 percent diameter Over 406.4 mm + 15 percent outside diameter - 10 percent\n5.3 Straightness —Tubes shall not deviate from\nstraightness by more than 1 in 600 of any length.\n6.\nJoints\n6.1 Screwed and socketed butt joints shall have right-\nhanded V-form threads in accordance with the particulars given in Fig. 4 and Table 6 of the Standard\n6.2 Screwed flush butt joints shall have right handed\nsquare form threads in accordance with the particulars given Fig. 5 and Table 7 of the Standard.\n6.3 The plain-end pipes shall be supplied with both ends\nbevelled or both ends square cut or one end bevelled and one square cut.\n7. Condition of Pipes — All pipes shall be, free\nfrom harmful defects, of good commercial finish and free from loose scale and rust. When required, the ends shall\nbe cut square with the axis of the pipe.\n8. Tests\n8.1 Tensile Test—Tensile strength and elongation.\nGrade\nTensile Yield Elongation Min strength strength 5.65\nMPa MPa\nPercent\n(N/mm2)\n(N/mm2)\nFe\n450\n275 13\nFe\n410\n235 15\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4270 : 2001 Specification for Steel tubes used for water wells (third revision)\n8.2 Flattening Test – Shall not show crack or flaw.\n8.3 Alignment Test – When two tubes are screwed\ntogether till they butt, and their axes shall not then be out of line by more than 100 mm in each 6 metre length.\nNote — This test is not applicable to the plain end pipes.\n8.4. Hydraulic Pressure Test – Every pipe shall withstand the test pressure as calculated by the following\nformula for 3 s.\nGrade\nTest Pressure\nN/mm2\nFe 410\n280 t/D\nFe 450\n350 t/D where\nt\n= thickness of pipe in mm, and\nD\n= outside diameter of pipe in mm.\nThe maximum pressure applied shall be 7 MPa.\n9. Coating of Tubes — The tubes shall be externally\ncoated with a bituminous solution or any other protective anti-corrosion coating. Where tubes are required to be\ngalvanized, the zinc coating on the tubes shall be in accordance with IS 4736 :1986*.\n10. Protection of ends\n10.1 All threads shall be coated with a petroleum jelly or\nother suitable rust preventing compound.\n10.2 All tubes with V-form threads shall have the threads\nprotected with plastic rings or sleeves.\n10.3 All tubes with square form threads shall have the\nexposed male threads protected with steel rings or sleeves and the female threads protected with steel nipples or\nbushes.\n10.4 No protection of the ends shall be provided for\ntubes for Butt Welding unless specially called for by the purchaser.\n* Hot-dip zinc coatings on mild steel tubes (first revision) 0\nS\nSP 21 : 2005 10.142\n1.\nScope – Requirements of spiral seam welded steel pipe over 457 mm dia and upto 2000 mm dia with wall\nthickness upto 12.5 mm inclusive. The pipe is intended for general use. The suitability of pipe for various\npurposes is dependent on its dimensions, properties and condition of service. The purpose for which the\npipe is intended should be stated in the enquiry and order.\n2.\nManufacture – Steel used shall be produced by open hearth a electic or one of the basic oxygen\nprocesses. The helical seam shall be welded by one of the following processes :\na) Electric fusion butt welding internally and automatic are welding externally.\nb) Electric resistance welding c) Automatic submerged are welding.\n3.\nChemical Composition\n3.1 Ladle analysis\nC percent\nS percent P percent\nMax\nMax Max\n0.25\n0.05 0.05\n3.2 Product analysis\nElement\nVariation Over and Above\nSpecified Limit, percent\nC\n0.02\nP\n0.005\nS\n0.005\n4.\nPhysical Tests\n4.1. Tensile Test U.T.S Min Y.S. Min\nE Percent Min on 5.65 410 MPa 240 MPa 20"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5504: 1997",
    "title": "Spiral Welded Pipes",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "(First Revision) 4.2 Flattering Test — Shall withstand the prescribed test. 4.3 Submerged Arc Weld Test — Shall withstand the prescribed test. 5. Hydrostatic Test — Shall be tested at mill to a hydrostatic pressure, equal to a minimum of 150 percent of working pressure required. In no case the maximum stress produced exceeds 40 percent of minimum ultimate tensile strength envisaged in the steel. Note — Steel tensile strength may be assumed as 410 MPa normally and unless otherwise agreed. The pre",
    "keywords": [
      "random",
      "pipe",
      "pressure",
      "envisaged",
      "hydrostatic",
      "normally",
      "assumed"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Hydrostatic Test": "Shall be tested at mill to a hydrostatic pressure, equal to a minimum of 150 percent of working pressure required. In no case the maximum stress produced exceeds 40 percent of minimum ultimate tensile strength envisaged in the steel. Note — Steel tensile strength may be assumed as 410 MPa normally and unless otherwise agreed. The pressure shall be calculated from the following equation : P = 2 st/D where P = test pressure MPa, s = stress in MPa (normally 40 percent of 410 MPa, that is 164 MPa) t = specified wall thickness in mm, and D = specified outside diameter in mm. 6. Permissible Variations in Dimensions 6.1 Lengths — Steel pipe shall be supplied in single random length between 4 to 7 m or double random length of 7 to 14 m. 6.2 Thickness and Diameter — The tolerance on wall thickness ",
      "Finish": "The finished pipe shall be reasonably straight, free from injurious defects. S o For detailed information, refer to IS 5504 : 1997 Specification Spiral welded pipes (first revision) SP 21 : 2005 10.143"
    },
    "content": "IS 5504: 1997 Spiral Welded Pipes\n(First Revision)\n4.2 Flattering Test — Shall withstand the prescribed\ntest.\n4.3 Submerged Arc Weld Test — Shall withstand the\nprescribed test.\n5. Hydrostatic Test — Shall be tested at mill to a\nhydrostatic pressure, equal to a minimum of 150 percent of working pressure required. In no case the maximum\nstress produced exceeds 40 percent of minimum ultimate tensile strength envisaged in the steel.\nNote — Steel tensile strength may be assumed as 410\nMPa normally and unless otherwise agreed.\nThe pressure shall be calculated from the following equation :\nP = 2 st/D where\nP\n= test pressure MPa, s\n= stress in MPa (normally 40 percent of 410 MPa, that is 164 MPa)\nt\n= specified wall thickness in mm, and\nD\n= specified outside diameter in mm.\n6. Permissible Variations in Dimensions\n6.1 Lengths — Steel pipe shall be supplied in single\nrandom length between 4 to 7 m or double random length of 7 to 14 m.\n6.2 Thickness and Diameter — The tolerance on wall\nthickness shall be +15 percent and 12.5 percent.\nThe tolerance on outside diameter of pipe shall be as follows :\nUpto 1,000 mm OD = ± 0.75 percent\nOver 1,000 mm OD = ± 1 percent\nThe ovality of pipe shall be with ± 0.75 percent. 7. Finish — The finished pipe shall be reasonably\nstraight, free from injurious defects.\nS o\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5504 : 1997 Specification Spiral welded pipes (first revision)\nSP 21 : 2005 10.143"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6286: 1971",
    "title": "Seamless And Welded Steel Pipe For Sub-Zero Temperature Service",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for 4 grades of seamless and electric welded steel pipe for conveying fluids at sub-zero temperature.",
    "keywords": [
      "kgf",
      "grade",
      "seamless",
      "longitudinal",
      "transverse",
      "manganese",
      "impact"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for 4 grades of seamless and electric welded steel pipe for conveying fluids at sub-zero temperature.",
      "Manufacture": "Stell used shall be made by open hearth, electric, basic oxygen or a combination of these 2.1 Steel shall be of fully killed type. 2.2 Pipes of grades 1,2 and 3 shall be made either by seamless or electric welded process. Pipes of grade 4 shall be made by seamless process only. 3. Chemical Requirements see Table 1 3.1 Ladle Analysis 3.2 Product Analysis — The mxaimum permissible variation of various elements in the case of product analysis from the limits stated in 2.1 shall be bas follows: Percent Carbon ± 0.02 Manganese 0.03 Phosphorus + 0.005 Sulphur + 0.005 4. Dimensions Nominal Outside Thickness Bore Diameter mm mm mm 6 10.2 1.8,2.0 and 2.65 8 13.5 1.8,2.35 and 2.9 10 17.2 1.8,2.35 and 2.9 15 21.3 2.0,2.65 and 3.25 20 26.9 2.35, 2.65 and 3.25 25 33.7 2.65,3.25, 4.05 and 4.85 32 42.4 2",
      "Workmanship And Finish": "Plain-end pipes of 60.3 mm outside diameter and larger shall be furnished withthe ends bevelled to an angle 30o of measured from a line drawn perpendicular to the pipe and with a root face of 1.6 0 0.8 mm. The end finish for pipes smaller than 60.3 mm outside diameter shall be as specified by the purchaser. 5.1 All defects shall be explored for depth when the depth is in excess of 12.5 percent of the nominal wall thickness or encroaches on the minimum wall thickness, such defects shall be considered injurious. TABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS GRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4 Carbon percent Max 0.30 0.30 0.19 0.12 Manganese percent 0.40 to 1.06 0.29 to 1.06 0.90 Max 0.50 to 10.5 Phosphorus percent Max 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.04 Sulphur percent Max 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.04 Silicon percent - 0.10 Min 0.13 to",
      "Hydrostatic Test": "When subjected to a test pressure P for 5 seconds, there shall be no leakage. P (kgf/cm2 )=200St D Where P = hydrostatic test pressure in kgf/cm S = fibre stress in kfg/mm2 , t = speceified outside diameter in mm",
      "General": "Destructive Tests — Any mutually agreed. SP 21 : 2005 10.145"
    },
    "content": "IS 6286: 1971 Seamless And Welded Steel Pipe For Sub-Zero Temperature Service\n1. Scope – Requirements for 4 grades of seamless\nand electric welded steel pipe for conveying fluids at sub-zero temperature.\n2. Manufacture – Stell used shall be made by open\nhearth, electric, basic oxygen or a combination of these\n2.1 Steel shall be of fully killed type.\n2.2 Pipes of grades 1,2 and 3 shall be made either by\nseamless or electric welded process. Pipes of grade 4 shall be made by seamless process only.\n3.\nChemical Requirements see Table 1\n3.1 Ladle Analysis\n3.2 Product Analysis — The mxaimum permissible\nvariation of various elements in the case of product analysis from the limits stated in 2.1 shall be bas follows: Percent\nCarbon ±\n0.02\nManganese 0.03\nPhosphorus +\n0.005\nSulphur +\n0.005\n4.\nDimensions\nNominal Outside Thickness\nBore\nDiameter mm\nmm mm\n6\n10.2\n1.8,2.0 and 2.65\n8\n13.5\n1.8,2.35 and 2.9\n10\n17.2\n1.8,2.35 and 2.9\n15\n21.3\n2.0,2.65 and 3.25\n20\n26.9\n2.35, 2.65 and 3.25\n25\n33.7\n2.65,3.25, 4.05 and 4.85\n32\n42.4\n2.65,3.25,4.05 and 5.4\n40\n48.3\n2.9, 3.25 4.05, 4.85 and 5.9\n50\n60.3\n2.9, 3.65, 4.5, 4.85, 5.6, and 6.35\n65\n76.1\n3.25, 3.65, 4.5, 5.4 and 6.5\n80\n88.9\n3.25, 4.05, 4.85, 5.4, and 6.35\n90\n101.6\n3.65, 4.05, 4.85, and 6.35\n100\n114.3\n3.65, 4.5, 5.4, 5.9, 6.35, and 8.0\n125\n139.7\n3.65, 4.5, 4.85, 5.4, 6.35, 8.0and 9.5\n150\n165.1& 168.3\n3.65, 4.5, 4.85, 5.4, 6.35, 7.1,\n8.0 and 9.5\n175\n193.7\n3.65, 4.5, 4.85, 5.4, 6.35,7.0 and 9.5\n200\n291.1\n4.85,5.4,6.35,7.1,8.0,9.5, 11.0, and 12.5\n225\n244.5\n5.9, 7.1, 8.0 and 9.5\n250\n273.0\n5.9, 6.35,7.1, 8.0, 9.5, 11.0, and12.5\n398\n323.9\n6.35, 7.1,8.0,9.5,11.0 and 12.5\n350\n355.6\n6.0, 9.5 and 11.0\n400\n406.4\n8.0,9.5,11.0 and 12.5\n450\n457.2 8.8.9.5,11.0 and 12.5 lengths between 1 to 13 m\n4.1 Tolerances – The following tolerances shall apply—\na)\nOutside diameter 1 percent b)\nWall thickness 15.0 percent\n– 12.5\n5.\nWorkmanship and Finish — Plain-end pipes of 60.3 mm outside diameter and larger shall be furnished\nwiththe ends bevelled to an angle 30o of\nmeasured from a line drawn perpendicular to the pipe and with a root face of 1.6 0 0.8 mm. The end finish for\npipes smaller than 60.3 mm outside diameter shall be as specified by the purchaser.\n5.1 All defects shall be explored for depth when the\ndepth is in excess of 12.5 percent of the nominal wall thickness or encroaches on the minimum wall thickness,\nsuch defects shall be considered injurious.\nTABLE 1 CHEMICAL REQUIREMENTS\nGRADE 1 GRADE 2 GRADE 3 GRADE 4\nCarbon percent Max\n0.30\n0.30\n0.19\n0.12\nManganese percent\n0.40 to 1.06\n0.29 to 1.06\n0.90 Max\n0.50 to 10.5\nPhosphorus percent Max\n0.05\n0.05\n0.05\n0.04\nSulphur percent Max\n0.05\n0.05\n0.05\n0.04\nSilicon percent -\n0.10 Min\n0.13 to 0.32\n0.08 to 0.37\nNickel percent - -\n2.03 to 2.57\n0.47 to 0.98\nChromium percent - - -\n0.44 to 1.01\nCopper percent - - -\n0.40 to 0.75\nAluminum percern - - -\n0.04 to 0.30\nNote — For each reduction of 0.01 percent carbon below 0.30 an increase of 0.04 percent manganese above 1.05 shall be permitte\nto a maximum of 1.30 percent.\n±\n0\n0\n5\n0\n+\n−\n±\n±\n±\nSP 21 : 2005 10.144\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6286 : 1971 Specification for seamless and welded steel pipe for sub-zero temperature service.\n6. Physical Tests\n6.1 Tensile Test Tensile Requirements Grade 1 Grade 2 Grade 3 Grade 4\nTensile Strength kgf/mm2, Min 38.5 42.0 45.5 42.0\nYield point, kgf/mm2, Min 21.0 24.5 24.5 24.5\nNote — Elongation 50.8 mm Min percent shall be\ncomputed by using the following equations.\nGrade\nDirection of Test Equation\n1\nLongitudinal\nE= 2.2051 + 17.50\nTransverse\nE=1.575t + 12.50\n2\nLongitudinal\nE= 1.890t + 15.00\nTransverse\nE=1.260t + 11.00\n3\nLongitudinal\nE= 1.890t + 15.00\nTransverse\nE=1.339t + 11.00\n4\nLongitudinal\nE= 1.890t + 15.00\nTransverse\nE=1.260t + 6.50\nWhere\nE\n= percent elongation in 50.8 mm, and t = Actual thickness of specimen in millimeters.\n6.2 Flattening Test — Shall with stand the prescribed\ntest\n6.3 Impact Test\nGrade\nMinimum Impact\nTest Temperature\n1 - 46°C\n2 - 46°C\n3 - 73°C\n4 - 101°C\nImpact Properties\nSize of Specimen\nMinimum Average\nMinimum\nNotched Bar\nNotched\nBar Impact Value\nBar Impact of Each Set of\nValueof one\nThree Specimen\nSpecimen Only of a set mm x mm kgf.m kgf.m\n10 x 10\n2.07\n1.38\n10 x 7.5\n1.73\n1.17\n10 x 5\n1.38\n0.97\n10 x 2.5\n0.69\n0.48\n7.\nHydrostatic Test — When subjected to a test pressure P for 5 seconds, there shall be no leakage.\nP (kgf/cm2 )=200St D\nWhere\nP\n= hydrostatic test pressure in kgf/cm\nS\n= fibre stress in kfg/mm2 , t = speceified outside diameter in mm\n8.\nNon-Destructive Tests — Any mutually agreed.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.145"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 651: 1992",
    "title": "Salt Glazed Stoneware Pipes And Fittings",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Covers dimensions and performance requirements for the following glazed stoneware pipes and fittings— Straight pipes and taper pipes; Bends; Taper bend; Junctions; Half-section channels, straight and taper; Channel junctions; Channel bends; Channel interceptors; Gully traps; and Inspection pipes. The pipes covered in this standard are not meant for potable water applications. Dimensions are grouped into two sections A and B. Section A covers dimensions of straight pipes and all such fittings whi",
    "keywords": [
      "pipes",
      "taper",
      "barrels",
      "fittings",
      "glaze",
      "straight",
      "section"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers dimensions and performance requirements for the following glazed stoneware pipes and fittings— Straight pipes and taper pipes; Bends; Taper bend; Junctions; Half-section channels, straight and taper; Channel junctions; Channel bends; Channel interceptors; Gully traps; and Inspection pipes. The pipes covered in this standard are not meant for potable water applications. Dimensions are grouped into two sections A and B. Section A covers dimensions of straight pipes and all such fittings which normally form pact of pipe line and which are subject to same conditions, specifications and tests as straight pipes. Section B includes dimensions of fittings which are commonly used but do not form. Section B being hand rounded articles, their conformity to dimensional specifications is not req",
      "General": "hand and Left-hand Fittings— A right-hand fitting is such that when viewed from the spigot towards the socket, the arm of a junction or the socket of a bend projects to the right. A left-hand fitting is such that when viewed as above, the arm of socket projects to the left.",
      "General Quality": "All pipes and fittings shall be sound and free from visible defects which impair the strength, durability and serviceability. The glaze of pipes and fittings shall be free from crazing. The pipes and fittings shall give a sharp clear note when struck with a light hammer. Colour of pipes/fittings may vary from yellow to dark brown/black.",
      "Glazing": "The interior and exterior surfaces of the pipes and fittings which remain exposed after jointing, shall be glazed. The glaze shall be obtained by the action of fumes of volatized common salt on the material of the pipes and fittings during the process of burning or glaze shall be ceramic glaze consisting of glazing material, applied prior to firing. 5. Tests 5.1 Hydraulic Test — Straight pipes shall withstand the internal hydraulic test pressure of 0.15 MPa on the barrels and fitting covered in Section A of the standard and 0.075 MPa for fitting covered in Section B of the standard, without showing signs of injury or leakage. 5.2 Absorption Test — Maximum increase in mass shall be as follows : Thickness of Pipe or Increase in Fitting, mm Mass Percent Upto and including 20 6 Over 20 and upt"
    },
    "content": "IS 651: 1992 Salt Glazed Stoneware Pipes And Fittings\n(Fifth Revision)\n1. Scope – Covers dimensions and performance\nrequirements for the following glazed stoneware pipes and fittings— Straight pipes and taper pipes; Bends;\nTaper bend; Junctions; Half-section channels, straight and taper; Channel junctions; Channel bends; Channel\ninterceptors; Gully traps; and Inspection pipes.\nThe pipes covered in this standard are not meant for potable water applications. Dimensions are grouped\ninto two sections A and B. Section A covers dimensions of straight pipes and all such fittings which\nnormally form pact of pipe line and which are subject to same conditions, specifications and tests as straight\npipes. Section B includes dimensions of fittings which are commonly used but do not form. Section B being\nhand rounded articles, their conformity to dimensional specifications is not required to be so accurate as for\nthose in Section 'A'.\n2. Right-hand and Left-hand Fittings— A\nright-hand fitting is such that when viewed from the spigot towards the socket, the arm of a junction or the\nsocket of a bend projects to the right. A left-hand fitting is such that when viewed as above, the arm of socket\nprojects to the left.\n3. General Quality — All pipes and fittings shall\nbe sound and free from visible defects which impair the strength, durability and serviceability. The glaze of\npipes and fittings shall be free from crazing. The pipes and fittings shall give a sharp clear note when struck\nwith a light hammer. Colour of pipes/fittings may vary from yellow to dark brown/black.\n4. Glazing — The interior and exterior surfaces of\nthe pipes and fittings which remain exposed after jointing, shall be glazed. The glaze shall be obtained\nby the action of fumes of volatized common salt on the material of the pipes and fittings during the process of\nburning or glaze shall be ceramic glaze consisting of glazing material, applied prior to firing.\n5. Tests\n5.1 Hydraulic Test — Straight pipes shall withstand\nthe internal hydraulic test pressure of 0.15 MPa on the barrels and fitting covered in Section A of the standard\nand 0.075 MPa for fitting covered in Section B of the standard, without showing signs of injury or leakage.\n5.2 Absorption Test — Maximum increase in mass shall\nbe as follows :\nThickness of Pipe or Increase in Fitting, mm\nMass Percent\nUpto and including 20 6\nOver 20 and upto 25 7\nOver 25 and upto 32 8\nOver 32 and upto 38 9\nOver 38 10\n5.3 Test for Acid Resistance — The loss in mass shall\nnot exceed 2.5 percent\n5.4 Test for Alkali Resistance — There shall be no\nevidence of pitting, softening, spalling or cracking in the pipe or fitting after the test.\n5.5 Crushing Strength Test —Minimum 16 KN/m\nlength.\n6.\nDimensions of Pipes and Fittings forming\nPart of Pipe Line.\n6.1 Internal Diameter — The internal diameter of the\nbarrels of straight pipes, fuctions and bends shall be\n100, 150, 200, 230, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 and 600 mm.\nThe tolerance shall be ± 5,\n6,\n6,\n6,\n8,\n8,\n8,\n10,\n10,\n12 and\n12 mm respectively.\n6.2 Thickness of Barrels, Sockets, and Bends— Shall\nbe minimum 12, 15, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 37, 40 and 43 mm corresponding to each internal diameter specified above.\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\nSP 21 : 2005 10.146\n6.3 Length and Straightness of barrels for straight and\ntaper pipes.\na) Length – 600, 750, or 900 mm b) Tolerance – 100 mm for 600 and 750 mm and\n15 mm for 900 mm length.\nc) Permissible deviation from straightnes – Shall be\n5mm for 600 mm, 6 mm for 750 mm and 7 mm for pipes of 900 mm length.\n6.4 Tapers, Bends and Junctions — Internal diameters\nof taper pipes, half section straight channels, half section taper channels and junction hsall be selected from 6.1\nDimension of bend s shall be in accordance with Table\n2 to 6 of the standard.\n6.5 Sockets – Minimums table of hmm, measured on\nthe diameter, per 15 mm length. Depth of sockets and shoulder shall be as given in Table 1 of the standard.\nNote1— For dimensions of fittings covered under section B\nsec. tables 7 to 12 of the standard.\nNote 2—For methods of tests refer to Appendics A to C of the\nstandard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 651 : 1992 Specification forsalt glazed stoneware pipes andfittings (fifth revision).\n±\n±\nSP 21 : 2005 10.147"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3006: 1979",
    "title": "Chemically Resistant Glazed Stoneware Pipes And Fittings",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Material and performance equirements for chemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes (straight pipes) and fittings (taper pipes; bends, taper bends; junctions; half section channels; straight and taper ; channel junctions; channel bends; channel interceptors; gully traps and inspection pipes). Dimensions of chemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes and fittings are grouped into two sections, A and B. Section A covers dimensions of straight pipes and all such fittings which normally form a part",
    "keywords": [
      "pipes",
      "taper",
      "junctions",
      "gully",
      "barrels",
      "channel",
      "traps"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Material and performance equirements for chemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes (straight pipes) and fittings (taper pipes; bends, taper bends; junctions; half section channels; straight and taper ; channel junctions; channel bends; channel interceptors; gully traps and inspection pipes). Dimensions of chemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes and fittings are grouped into two sections, A and B. Section A covers dimensions of straight pipes and all such fittings which normally form a part of a pipe line and which are subject to the same conditions, specifications and tests as straight pipes. Section B includes dimensions of fittings which are commonly used and which do no form a part of the normal pipe line. The fittings in Section B being hand-moulded, their conformity to dimension",
      "Grooving": "The interior of the sockets, and the exterior of the spigots shall be grooved circumferentially and such grooving on the spigot shall be for a length equal to one and a half times the depth of the sockets, and the depth of such grooves shall be between 1mm and 2 mm. Note 1 – For detailed dimensions and sketches refer to the standard. Note 2 – For test procedures, 6 of the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 3006 : 1979 Specification for chemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes and fittings (first revision). ± ± SP 21 : 2005 10.149"
    },
    "content": "IS 3006: 1979 Chemically Resistant Glazed Stoneware Pipes And Fittings\n(Fifth Revision)\n1. Scope—Material and performance equirements for\nchemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes (straight pipes) and fittings (taper pipes; bends, taper bends;\njunctions; half section channels; straight and taper ;\nchannel junctions; channel bends; channel interceptors;\ngully traps and inspection pipes). Dimensions of chemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes and fittings\nare grouped into two sections, A and B. Section A covers dimensions of straight pipes and all such fittings\nwhich normally form a part of a pipe line and which are subject to the same conditions, specifications and tests\nas straight pipes. Section B includes dimensions of fittings which are commonly used and which do no form\na part of the normal pipe line. The fittings in Section B being hand-moulded, their conformity to dimensional\nspecifications is not required to be so accurate as for those in Section A.\n2. Requirements\n2.1 Shall be sound and free from visible defects, such\nas, cracks, crazing, etc.\n2.2 Shall give sharp clear note when struck with light\nhammer.\n2.3 Interior and exterior surfaces of the pipes and fittings\nwhich remain exposed after jointing, shall be glazed.\n3.\nTests\n3.1 Pipes shall withstand hydraulic pressure of 0.3 MPa\non the barrels and 0.15 MPa on fittings. The pressure shall be maintained for not less than 5 seconds without\nshowing signs of leakage or injury.\n3.2 Water absorption shall not exceed the following :\nThickness of Pipe or\nIncrease in Mass,\nFitting\nPercent\nUp to 20 mm\n3\n20 to 25 mm\n4\n25 to 32 mm\n5\n32 to 38 mm\n6\nOver 38 mm\n8\n3.3 Acid Resistance — Loss in mass shall not exceed\n1.5 percent.\n3.4 Alkali Resistance — Shall not show evidence of\npitting, softening, spalling or cracking.\n4. Dimensions\n4.1 Pipes, Barrels and Sockets\nInternal\nMean Thickness\nInternal\nDiameter of the Barrel\nDepth of Pipe\nand of Socket, of Socket\nMin\nMin\n100\n12\n50\n150\n15\n57\n200\n16\n63\n250\n20\n70\n300\n25\n70\n350\n30\n75\n400\n35\n75\n450\n37\n76\n500\n40\n80\n600\n43\n90\n4.2 Length of the barrels of straight and taper pipes,\njunctions and half-section channels, exclusive of the internal depth of the socket, shall be 600, 750 or 900 mm.\n4.2.1 Tolerance on length ± 10 mm for 600 mm and 750 mm length and ±15 mm for 900 mm length pipes.\n4.2.2 Deviation from straightness shall not exceed 5 mm for 600 mm length of pipes, 6 mm for 750 mm length\nand 7 mm for pipes of 900 mm length.\n4.3 Sockets — The interior of the sockets shall be\nconical, having a minimum taper of 1 mm, measured on the diameter, per 15 mm length.\n4.4 Tapers, Bends and Junctions.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.148\n6. Gully Traps\n6.1 Round Mouth Gully Traps\nType\nSize mm\nP\n100 × 100, 125 × 100, 150 × 100\n180 × 100 and 180 x 150\nQ\n125 × 100\nS\n125 × 100, 150 × 100 and 180 × 150\n6.2 Square Mouth Gully Traps\nType\nSize mm\nP\n100 ×100, 125 × 100, 150 × 100\n180 × 100 and 180 × 150\nQ\n125 × 100\nS\n125 × 100, 150 × 100 and 180 × 150\n4.4.1 Internal diameters of taper pipes, half-section straight channel half-section taper channels, bends (one\nquarter, one eight and one sixteenth).\n4.4.2 Barrels and branches of half-section channel junctions may be any of the dirameters given in 4.1, but\nthe diameter of branches shall not exceed the barrel diameter. Angle at junction shall be 45 3o or 90\n30.\n5. Grooving – The interior of the sockets, and the\nexterior of the spigots shall be grooved circumferentially and such grooving on the spigot shall be for a length\nequal to one and a half times the depth of the sockets, and the depth of such grooves shall be between 1mm\nand 2 mm.\nNote 1 – For detailed dimensions and sketches refer to the standard.\nNote 2 – For test procedures, 6 of the standard\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3006 : 1979 Specification for chemically resistant glazed stoneware pipes and fittings (first revision).\n±\n±\nSP 21 : 2005 10.149"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 771 (Part 1): 1979",
    "title": "Glazed Fire–Clay Sanitary Appliances",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "General requirements for materials, manufacture, finish, methods of test, sampling and inspection of all glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances.",
    "keywords": [
      "bodies",
      "clays",
      "glaze",
      "total",
      "appliances",
      "fire",
      "over"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "General requirements for materials, manufacture, finish, methods of test, sampling and inspection of all glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances. 2. Material and Manufacture 2.1 Fire – Clay bodies are moderately fine, porous, off-white bodies using natural fire clays, ball clays or stoneware clays and clay grogs covered by a glaze properly matured and fitted to the body. 2.2 Permissible defects and blemishes – See Table 1 TABLE 1 BLEMISHES AND DEFECTS PERMITTED IN VARIOUS APPLIANCES SL LOCATION BLEMISH OR MAXIMUM PERMITTED DEFECT (1) (2) (3) (4) i) General Warpage Not to exceed ± 2% on all planes or 10 mm which ever is less Spots and A total of not over 6 Bilsters ii) Service Bubbles, A total of not over 8 space, top of pinholes rim and or slab, specks inside of bowl Polishing A total of not "
    },
    "content": "IS 771 (Part 1): 1979 Glazed Fire–Clay Sanitary Appliances\nPART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\n(Second Revision)\n1. Scope – General requirements for materials,\nmanufacture, finish, methods of test, sampling and inspection of all glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances.\n2. Material and Manufacture\n2.1 Fire – Clay bodies are moderately fine, porous,\noff-white bodies using natural fire clays, ball clays or stoneware clays and clay grogs covered by a glaze\nproperly matured and fitted to the body.\n2.2 Permissible defects and blemishes – See Table 1\nTABLE 1 BLEMISHES AND DEFECTS\nPERMITTED IN VARIOUS\nAPPLIANCES\nSL\nLOCATION BLEMISH OR\nMAXIMUM PERMITTED DEFECT\n(1)\n(2) (3)\n(4) i)\nGeneral\nWarpage\nNot to exceed ± 2% on all planes or 10 mm\nwhich ever is less\nSpots and\nA total of not over 6\nBilsters ii)\nService\nBubbles,\nA total of not over 8 space, top of pinholes\nrim and\nor slab, specks\ninside of bowl\nPolishing\nA total of not over 4 marks and\nexposed bodies\nSpots and\nA total of not over 6 blisters\niii) Visible\nBubbles,\nNot over 3 in surfaces\nPinholes one pottery\nother than andsquare, a\nabove specks\nA total of not over 10\nPolishing\nA total of not marks and\nover 4 exposed\nbodies.\n2.3 Minimum Thickness — At any place shall not be\nless than 8 mm\n2.4 Glazing — All visible surfaces of the body shall be\nglazed. Surfaces coming in contact with floor or wall and the underside of sinks, etc, and points where\nappliances are supported in the kiln may be unglazed.\nThe glaze shall be uniform, free from craze and shall posses an impervious surface. It shall have a high gloss\nand shall normally be white. In the case of glazes containing lead, the lead content shall not exceed 5\npercent of soluble lead.\n3. Performance Requirements\na) Warpage — See Table 1 b) Crazing — None of the test pieces shall show\ncrazing.\nc) Water absorption — Shall not exceed 15 percent.\nd)Thermal shock — (See 8.4 of the Standard) -The appliance shall not show any sign of injury.\ne) Chemical Resistance — See Appendix A of the\nStandard) - No loss of reflectivity of glaze.\nf) Modulus of Rupture — Not less than 20 MPa.\ng)Resistance to staining and Burning — No stain shall remain. (See Appendix B of the Standard).\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to B of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 771 (Part1) : 1979 Specification for fire-clay sanitary appliances, Part 1 general requirements (second revision)\nSP 21 : 2005 10.150"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 771 (Part 2): 1985",
    "title": "Glazed Fire – Clay Sanitary Appliances",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Lays down the pattern and sizes, construction, dimensions and tolerances of kitchen and laboratory sinks made of fire-clay.",
    "keywords": [
      "sinks",
      "laboratory",
      "kitchen",
      "construction",
      "rim",
      "pattern",
      "fire"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Lays down the pattern and sizes, construction, dimensions and tolerances of kitchen and laboratory sinks made of fire-clay. 2. Requirements 2.1 General requirements for materials, manufacture, methods of test and inspection shall conform to Part-1 (General requirements) of the standard. 2.2 Patterns and Sizes Pattern Sizes mm a) Kitchen sinks 750 × 450 × 250 600 × 450 × 200 600 × 450 × 200 b) Laboratory sinks 600 × 400 × 200 500 × 350 × 150 450 × 300 × 150 400 × 250 × 150 2.3 Thickness — The minimum thickness of the walls and bottom of the sinks of sizes mentioned shall not be less than 25 mm and 15mm, respectively for 2.2(a) and 2.2(b). 3. Tolerances a) On dimensions of 50 mm and over ± 4 percent;and b) On dimensions less than 50 mm ± 2 mm. 4. Construction 4.1 The kitchen sinks shall be o"
    },
    "content": "IS 771 (Part 2): 1985 Glazed Fire – Clay Sanitary Appliances\nPART 2 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF KITCHEN AND\nLABORATORY SINKS\n(Third Revision)\n1. Scope – Lays down the pattern and sizes,\nconstruction, dimensions and tolerances of kitchen and laboratory sinks made of fire-clay.\n2. Requirements\n2.1 General requirements for materials, manufacture,\nmethods of test and inspection shall conform to Part-1\n(General requirements) of the standard.\n2.2 Patterns and Sizes\nPattern\nSizes mm a) Kitchen sinks\n750 × 450 × 250\n600 × 450 × 200\n600 × 450 × 200 b) Laboratory sinks\n600 × 400 × 200\n500 × 350 × 150\n450 × 300 × 150\n400 × 250 × 150\n2.3 Thickness — The minimum thickness of the walls\nand bottom of the sinks of sizes mentioned shall not be less than 25 mm and 15mm, respectively for 2.2(a) and\n2.2(b).\n3. Tolerances\na) On dimensions of 50 mm and over ± 4 percent;and b) On dimensions less than 50 mm ± 2 mm.\n4. Construction\n4.1 The kitchen sinks shall be of one piece construction\nwith or without rim but without overflow.\n4.2 The laboratory sinks shall be of one piece\nconstruction with or without rim and with or without combined over flow.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 771 (Part 2) : 1985 Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances\nPart 2 of kitchen and laboratory sinks (third revision).\nSP 21 : 2005 10.151"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 771 (Part 5): 1979",
    "title": "Glazed Fire Clay Appliances,",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Lays down the pattern, size, construction, dimensions, tolerances and finsh of shower trays made of fire-clay.",
    "keywords": [
      "shower",
      "trays",
      "waste",
      "fire",
      "skid",
      "tray",
      "finsh"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Construction": "Shower trays shall be of one piece construction. The inside surface of the shower trays shall be uniform and smooth except for grooves provided for skid resistance. The shower trays shall have a circular waste hole into which the interior of the tray shall drain. The waste hole shall be rebated or bevelled internally.",
      "Scope": "Lays down the pattern, size, construction, dimensions, tolerances and finsh of shower trays made of fire-clay.",
      "Sizes": "600 × 600 × 100 mm with skirting all around. 2. Requirements 2.1 General requirements for materials, manufacture, methods of test and inspection, shall conform to Part 1 General requirements of the standard. SP 21 : 2005 10.154"
    },
    "content": "IS 771 (Part 5): 1979 Glazed Fire Clay Appliances,\nPART 5 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF SHOWER TRAYS\n(Second Revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 771 (Part 5) : 1979 Specification for glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances:\nPart 5 Specific requirements of shower trays (second revision).\n.\n3. Tolerance\na) On dimensions of 50 mm and over ± 4% b) On dimensions less than 50 mm ± 2 mm\n4. Construction — Shower trays shall be of one\npiece construction. The inside surface of the shower trays shall be uniform and smooth except for grooves\nprovided for skid resistance. The shower trays shall have a circular waste hole into which the interior of the\ntray shall drain. The waste hole shall be rebated or bevelled internally.\n1. Scope — Lays down the pattern, size, construction,\ndimensions, tolerances and finsh of shower trays made of fire-clay.\n2. Size — 600 × 600 × 100 mm with skirting all around.\n2. Requirements\n2.1 General requirements for materials, manufacture,\nmethods of test and inspection, shall conform to Part 1\nGeneral requirements of the standard.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.154"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 771 (Part 7): 1981",
    "title": "Glazed Fire Clay Sanitary Appliances,",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Lays down the pattern, sizes, construction, dimensions, tolerances of slop sinks made of fire-clay.",
    "keywords": [
      "slop",
      "sink",
      "mounted",
      "sinks",
      "trap",
      "rim",
      "outlet"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Lays down the pattern, sizes, construction, dimensions, tolerances of slop sinks made of fire-clay. 2. Requirements 2.1 General requirements for materials, manufacture, methods of test , sampling and inspection, shall conform to Part 1 General requirements of the standard. 2 .2 Pattern and Size — The wall mounted slope sink shall be size 610 × 630 mm. The floor mounted slop sink shall be of size 430 × 460 mm.",
      "Construction": "The slop sink shall be of one piece construction and shall have a suitable flushing rim which may be boxed or open type. In the case of box rim, adequate number of holes on allsides shall be provided for clean flushing of the bowl of the sink. The rim shall have an inlet or supply horn of dimensions conforming to those given in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2 of the standard for connecting the flush pipe. The wall mounted slop sink shall have an integral trap with outlet. The floor mounted slop sink shall have an integral trap with P or S outlet. The inside surface of the slop sink and trap shall be uniform and smooth in order to ensure efficient flush. The serrated part of the outlet shall not be glazed extrenally. 4. Tolerances a) On dimensions of 50 mm and over ± 4% and b) On dimensions less than 50 "
    },
    "content": "IS 771 (Part 7): 1981 Glazed Fire Clay Sanitary Appliances,\nPART 7 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF SLOP SINKS\n(Second Revision)\n1. Scope – Lays down the pattern, sizes, construction,\ndimensions, tolerances of slop sinks made of fire-clay.\n2. Requirements\n2.1 General requirements for materials, manufacture,\nmethods of test , sampling and inspection, shall conform to Part 1 General requirements of the standard.\n2 .2 Pattern and Size — The wall mounted slope sink shall be size 610 × 630 mm. The floor mounted slop sink\nshall be of size 430 × 460 mm.\n3.\nConstruction — The slop sink shall be of one piece construction and shall have a suitable flushing\nrim which may be boxed or open type. In the case of box rim, adequate number of holes on allsides shall be\nprovided for clean flushing of the bowl of the sink. The rim shall have an inlet or supply horn of dimensions\nconforming to those given in Fig. 1 and Fig. 2 of the standard for connecting the flush pipe.\nThe wall mounted slop sink shall have an integral trap with outlet. The floor mounted slop sink shall have an\nintegral trap with P or S outlet.\nThe inside surface of the slop sink and trap shall be uniform and smooth in order to ensure efficient flush.\nThe serrated part of the outlet shall not be glazed extrenally.\n4. Tolerances\na)\nOn dimensions of 50 mm and over ± 4% and b)\nOn dimensions less than 50 mm ± 2 mm. Note — For dimensions see Fig. 1 and 2 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 771 (Part 7) : 1981 Glazed fire-clay sanitary appliances: Part 7 Specific requirements of slop sinks (second revision).\nSP 21 : 2005 10.155"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 772: 1973",
    "title": "General Requirement For Enamelled Cast Iron Sanitary Appliances",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "General requirement of material, thickness, warpage, enamelling, acid and alkali resistance, inspection rules and marking, for enamelled cast iron sanitary appliance like water-closets and commodes.",
    "keywords": [
      "enamel",
      "wares",
      "specks",
      "iron",
      "cast",
      "alkali",
      "enamelled"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "General requirement of material, thickness, warpage, enamelling, acid and alkali resistance, inspection rules and marking, for enamelled cast iron sanitary appliance like water-closets and commodes.",
      "Requirements": "Thickness of cast iron base not less than 6.5 mm.Tolerance ± 3 percent on specified dimensions. Warpage shall not exceed 5 mm per metre for edges set against wall or floor and 7.5 mm per metre for other edges. Finishing in vitreous enamel fused to cast iron base; enamel thickness not less than 0.5 mm. 2.1 Defects — Not more than one of the following when examined through inspection window is permitted: a) Crazing; b) Dimples, rundown, sagging; c) Blisters— not more than on interior surface: d) Pinholes — not more than two for coloured wares and not more than four for white wares; Note- For test procedures refer to the Standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 772:1973 Specification for general requirements for enamelled cast iron sanitary appliances (second revision). e) Specks — les"
    },
    "content": "IS 772: 1973 General Requirement For Enamelled Cast Iron Sanitary Appliances\n(Second Revision)\n1. Scope — General requirement of material, thickness,\nwarpage, enamelling, acid and alkali resistance, inspection rules and marking, for enamelled cast iron\nsanitary appliance like water-closets and commodes.\n2. Requirements — Thickness of cast iron base not\nless than 6.5 mm.Tolerance ± 3 percent on specified dimensions. Warpage shall not exceed 5 mm per metre\nfor edges set against wall or floor and 7.5 mm per metre for other edges. Finishing in vitreous enamel fused to\ncast iron base; enamel thickness not less than 0.5 mm.\n2.1 Defects — Not more than one of the following when\nexamined through inspection window is permitted:\na) Crazing;\nb) Dimples, rundown, sagging;\nc) Blisters— not more than on interior surface:\nd) Pinholes — not more than two for coloured wares and not more than four for white wares; Note- For test procedures refer to the Standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 772:1973 Specification for general requirements for enamelled cast iron sanitary appliances (second revision).\ne) Specks — less than 1mm and not exceeding 5 in number. Specks less than 0.25 mm in size shall\nnot be treated as defects unless in sufficient number to form discolouration; and\nf) Flaw — The number shall not exceed\nSmall\n:\n2, Max\nMedium\n:\n2, Max\nLarge\n:\nNone.\n3. Tests for Enamel\na) Enamel shall be of acid and alkali resisting quality.\nb) Abrasion test — Shall withstand test for resistance to scratching by Powder no.5\n(on Moh's scale).\nSP 21 : 2005 10.156"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 773: 1988",
    "title": "Enamelled Cast Iron Water–Closets, Railway Coaching Stock Type",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements for material, workmanship, manufacture, dimensions and finish of enamelled cast iron-railway type water-closets generally used in the coaching stock of the Indian Railways.",
    "keywords": [
      "closet",
      "coaching",
      "enamelled",
      "stock",
      "iron",
      "railway",
      "enamel"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for material, workmanship, manufacture, dimensions and finish of enamelled cast iron-railway type water-closets generally used in the coaching stock of the Indian Railways.",
      "Requirements": "Shall be of one piece construction. Each water closet shall have flushing pipe housed in the water closet casting. Bottom flange shall not be less than 13 mm thick and shall be provided with not less than six holes of 10 mm diameter.The inlet or supply horn shall consists of a threaded adopter, nipple fixed to a plain hole of the water closet and secured rigidly by a socket union",
      "Finish": "The inside and outside surfaces of each fixture shall be coated with vitreous enamel thoroughly fixed to the cast iron base. The enamel shall be uniform, non-crazing and free from discoloration, and shall posses an impervious surface. Note 1— These shall conform to the requirement of IS 772 : 1973 General requirement of enamelled cast iron sanitary appliances. Note 2 — For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 773 : 1988 Specification for enamelled cast iron water - closets, railway coaching stock type (third revision). SP 21 : 2005 10.157"
    },
    "content": "IS 773: 1988 Enamelled Cast Iron Water–Closets, Railway Coaching Stock Type\n(Third Revision)\n1. Scope—Requirements for material, workmanship,\nmanufacture, dimensions and finish of enamelled cast iron-railway type water-closets generally used in the\ncoaching stock of the Indian Railways.\n2. Requirements — Shall be of one piece\nconstruction. Each water closet shall have flushing pipe housed in the water closet casting.\nBottom flange shall not be less than 13 mm thick and shall be provided with not less than six holes of 10 mm\ndiameter.The inlet or supply horn shall consists of a threaded adopter, nipple fixed to a plain hole of the water\ncloset and secured rigidly by a socket union\n3. Finish — The inside and outside surfaces of each\nfixture shall be coated with vitreous enamel thoroughly fixed to the cast iron base. The enamel shall be uniform,\nnon-crazing and free from discoloration, and shall posses an impervious surface.\nNote 1— These shall conform to the requirement of IS 772 : 1973 General requirement of enamelled cast iron sanitary appliances.\nNote 2 — For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 773 : 1988 Specification for enamelled cast iron water - closets, railway coaching stock type (third revision).\nSP 21 : 2005 10.157"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1726: 1991",
    "title": "Cast Iron Manhole Covers And Frames",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Lays down basic and performance requirements for manhole covers and frames in castiron, intended for use in drainage and water works.",
    "keywords": [
      "manhole",
      "circular",
      "scrapper",
      "rectangular",
      "dia",
      "traffic",
      "duty"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Materials": "of appropriate grade of grey cast iron as per prescribed standard. 4. Basic and Performance Requirements",
      "Scope": "Lays down basic and performance requirements for manhole covers and frames in castiron, intended for use in drainage and water works. 2. Grades and Types Grades Grade Type/Shape Designation of Covers Light-duty LD-2.5 Rectangular, Square Circular Medium-Duty MD-10 Circular Rectangular Heavy- Duty HD-20 Circular Lamphole Square Rectangular (Scrapper Manhole) Extra-Heavy EHD-35 Circular Duty Square Rectangular (Scrapper manhole) 2.1 Recommended Locations LD-2.5 - Rectangular, Square or Circular Solid Types — Suitable for use within residential and institutional complexes/areas with pedestrain but occassional light motor vehicle traffic. These covers are also used for `Inspection Chambers MD-10 Circular or Rectangular Types – SP 21 : 2005 10.160 5. Manufacture 5.1 Covers and Frames — Covers a",
      "Load Test": "Shall with stand without fracture, the loads specified in 4 for a minimum period of 30s. Note 1— For dimensions and tolerances, see 7 of the standard Note 2— For testing procedure see 10.2 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 1726 : 1991 specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames (third revision) IS 210 : 1993 Grey iron castings (fourth revision). TABLE 1 BASIC AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OF MANHOLE COVERS AND FRAMES GRADE TYPE/SHAPE OF CLEAR OPENING FRAME TEST LOAD TONNES DESIGNATION COVER OF FRAME Depth Seating mm mm mm (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) LD-2.5 Rectangular 450 × 600 35 50 2.5 Square 450 × 450 30 50 400 × 400 30 50 Circular 370 (dia) 45 40 370 (dia) 45 40 MD-10 Circular 450 (dia) 60 40 10 480 (dia) 70 40 500 (dia) 80 50 Rectangular 450 × 600 80 50 HD-20"
    },
    "content": "IS 1726: 1991 Cast Iron Manhole Covers And Frames\n(Third Revision)\nSuitable for use in service lanes/roads, on pavements for use under medium-duty vehicular traffic including\nfor car parking areas.\nHD-20 Circular, Square or Rectangular\n(Scrapper Manhole) Types\nSuitable for use in institutional/commercial areas/ carriage ways/city trunk roads/bus terminals, with heavy-\nduty vehicular traffic of wheel loads between 5 to 10 tonnes, like buses, trucks and parking areas and where\nthe manhole chambers are located in-between the pavement and the middle of the road.\nEHD-35 Circular, Square or Rectangular (Scrapper\nManhole) Types -\nSuitable for use on carriageways in commercial/ industrial/port areas/near warehouses/godowns where\nfrequent loading and unloading of trucks/trailers are common, with slow to fast moving vehicular traffic of\nthe types having wheel loads up to 11.5 tonnes irrespective of the location of the manhole chambers.\n3.\nMaterials — of appropriate grade of grey cast iron as per prescribed standard.\n4.\nBasic and Performance Requirements\n1. Scope – Lays down basic and performance\nrequirements for manhole covers and frames in castiron, intended for use in drainage and water works.\n2. Grades and Types\nGrades\nGrade\nType/Shape\nDesignation of Covers\nLight-duty\nLD-2.5\nRectangular,\nSquare\nCircular\nMedium-Duty MD-10\nCircular\nRectangular\nHeavy- Duty\nHD-20\nCircular\nLamphole\nSquare\nRectangular (Scrapper Manhole)\nExtra-Heavy EHD-35\nCircular\nDuty\nSquare\nRectangular (Scrapper manhole)\n2.1 Recommended Locations\nLD-2.5 - Rectangular, Square or Circular Solid\nTypes — Suitable for use within residential and institutional complexes/areas with pedestrain but\noccassional light motor vehicle traffic. These covers are also used for `Inspection Chambers MD-10 Circular\nor Rectangular Types –\nSP 21 : 2005 10.160\n5. Manufacture\n5.1 Covers and Frames — Covers and frames shall be\ncleanly cast and they shall be free from air and sand holes, cold shuts and warping which are likely to impair\nthe utility of the castings. Covers shall have on its operative top a raised chequered design to provide for\nan adequate no-slip grip. The rise of the chequer shall be not less than 4 mm.\n5.2 Key Holes and Keys — Key holes, keys and lifting\ndevices shall be provided in the manhole covers to facilitate their placement in the frames, and their\noperative maintenance during use in the field.\n5.3 Locking Devices — Suitable locking devices\nincluding that with galvanized chain or a lock, or a combination of both shall be provided in the manhole\ncover system, if so desired bythe purchaser.\n5.4 Coating — shall be coated with a material having\nbase with a black bitumen composition.\n6.\nLoad Test — Shall with stand without fracture, the loads specified in 4 for a minimum period of 30s. Note 1— For dimensions and tolerances, see 7 of the standard Note 2— For testing procedure see 10.2 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1726 : 1991 specification for cast iron manhole covers and frames (third revision) IS 210 : 1993 Grey iron castings (fourth revision).\nTABLE 1 BASIC AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS OF MANHOLE\nCOVERS AND FRAMES GRADE\nTYPE/SHAPE OF CLEAR OPENING FRAME TEST LOAD TONNES DESIGNATION COVER OF FRAME Depth Seating mm mm mm\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4) (5)\n(6)\nLD-2.5\nRectangular 450 × 600\n35 50\n2.5\nSquare 450 × 450\n30 50 400 × 400\n30 50\nCircular 370 (dia)\n45 40\n370 (dia)\n45 40\nMD-10\nCircular 450 (dia)\n60 40\n10\n480 (dia)\n70 40\n500 (dia)\n80 50\nRectangular 450 × 600\n80 50\nHD-20\nCircular 500 (dia) 100 50\n20 560 (dia) 110 60 600 (dia) 110 75\nLamphole cover 350 (dia)\n130 25\nSquare 560 × 560\n110 75\nRectangular 450 × 900\n100 60\n(Scrapper manhole)\nEHD-35\nCircular 560 (dia) 130 60\n35\n600 (dia) 140 75\nSquare 560 × 560 130 60\nRectangular 600 × 900 120 70\n(Scrapper manhole)\nSP 21 : 2005 10.161"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2326: 1987",
    "title": "Automatic Flushing Cisterns For Urinals",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Lays down the materials, nominal sizes, construction, performance requirements and finish for automatic flushing cisterns of the type used for flushing urinals.",
    "keywords": [
      "seats",
      "cisterns",
      "cistern",
      "seat",
      "urinal",
      "underside",
      "litres"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for thermoplastic seats and covers for water-closets.",
      "Materials": "Cast iron, vitreous china or enamelled pressed steel compiled with specified requirements.",
      "Nominal Sizes": "5 and 10 littres with a tolerance of ± 0.5 litres. Note — The nominal size of any urinal cistern shall be based on a minimum capacity of 2.5 litres per urinal served. 4. Construction a) Cistern – The thickness of the body and the cover shall not be less than 5 and 6 mm for cast iron and vitreous china cisterns respectively. The body of the pressed steel cistern shall be of seamless or welded construction. The thickness of body and cover shall not be less than 1.60 mm and 1.25 mm respectively before coating and shall be porcelain enamelled or otherwise protected against corrosion by equally efficient coating. b) Depth of Cistern Body — The depth of the body of cistern shall provided for a clearance of not less than 25 mm between the highest level that can be reached by water before siphonag",
      "Finish": "Cast iron cisterns shall be painted inside with suitable anti-corrosive paint and with a protective coating on the outside before delivery. Alternatly, cast iron cisterns shall be protected against corrosion by a coating of enamel. 6. Performance Requirements a) Shall deliver not less than 2.5 litres per urinal of not less than 10 minutes and not more than 20 minutes. b) Shall discharge at an average of not less than 5 litres in 7 seconds when fitted with a straight open ended flush pipe of 20 mm bore and 900 mm length.",
      "Endurance Test": "Shall be operated for 3000 times and after this test, the cistern and component parts shall not show any damage or defects and all the parts shall be satisfactory For detailed information, refer to IS 2326 : 1987 Specification for automatic flushing cisterns for urinals (other than plastic cisterns)(second revision). SP 21 : 2005 10.162",
      "Types": "Type PF moulded from phenolic plastics and Type UF moulded from urea- formaldehyde. 3. Materials Seats and Covers : a) Material for type PF seats and covers shall be phenolic plastics conforming to Grade 2 or 3 of IS 1300 : 1994* b) Material for Type UF seats and covers shall be urea-for maldehyde conforming to IS 3389 : 1994+ 3.2 Hinging Device — Bronze or brass or mild steel with nickel chromium plating or aluminnium alloy with anodic coating or suitable plastic (with reinforcement)",
      "Manufacture": "See Fig.1 for details. 4.1 Seat — The underside of the seats may be either flat or recessed. Where the underside is flat, the seat shall be a solid moulding, and where the underside is recessed, the section shall be not less than 3 mm at any point. The seats may be of the closed or open front pattern (see Fig. 1). 4.2 Cover — The cover shall completely cover the aperture of the seat and shall be so designed that it is capable of being raised easily from the seat. 4.3 Dimensions — See Table 1 4.4 Finish – The surfaces of the seats, covers and components shall be smooth, free from blisters and delamiation and reasonably free from flowlines, contamination, streaking and unintended colour variation. 4.5 Hinging Device – The bolts shall have a minimum shank length of 65 mm and a coarse thread o"
    },
    "content": "IS 2326: 1987 Automatic Flushing Cisterns For Urinals\n(OTHER THAN PLASTIC CISTERNS)\n(Second Revision)\n1. Scope – Lays down the materials, nominal sizes,\nconstruction, performance requirements and finish for automatic flushing cisterns of the type used for flushing\nurinals.\n2. Materials – Cast iron, vitreous china or enamelled\npressed steel compiled with specified requirements.\n3. Nominal Sizes – 5 and 10 littres with a tolerance\nof ± 0.5 litres.\nNote — The nominal size of any urinal cistern shall be based\non a minimum capacity of 2.5 litres per urinal served.\n4. Construction\na) Cistern – The thickness of the body and the cover shall not be less than 5 and 6 mm for cast iron and\nvitreous china cisterns respectively. The body of the pressed steel cistern shall be of seamless or welded\nconstruction. The thickness of body and cover shall not be less than 1.60 mm and 1.25 mm respectively before\ncoating and shall be porcelain enamelled or otherwise protected against corrosion by equally efficient coating.\nb) Depth of Cistern Body — The depth of the body of cistern shall provided for a clearance of not less than 25\nmm between the highest level that can be reached by water before siphonage commences and the spillover\nlevel of the top of cistern.\nc) Siphonic Apparatus — Siphons shall be made of vitreous china, HDEP, LDEP, polypropylene, cast iron\nsuitably protected both internally and externally against corrosion or of both smooth finished material which is\nimpervious to liquids, corrosion-resistant and of adequate thickness and rigidity.\nd) Outlet Connection — The nominal diameter of the outlet of the siphon shall not be less than 25 mm for all\nsizes of cistern e) Lid and Cover — Cisterns shall be provided with\nmosquito-proof lids.\nf)\nFeeding Device — The outlet of the feeding device shall be so located that it is not less than 3 mm above\nthe highest water-level thatcan be reached by water before siphonage commences.\n5. Finish — Cast iron cisterns shall be painted inside\nwith suitable anti-corrosive paint and with a protective coating on the outside before delivery. Alternatly, cast\niron cisterns shall be protected against corrosion by a coating of enamel.\n6. Performance Requirements\na) Shall deliver not less than 2.5 litres per urinal of not less than 10 minutes and not more than 20 minutes.\nb) Shall discharge at an average of not less than 5 litres in 7 seconds when fitted with a straight open ended\nflush pipe of 20 mm bore and 900 mm length.\n7. Endurance Test — Shall be operated for 3000\ntimes and after this test, the cistern and component parts shall not show any damage or defects and all the\nparts shall be satisfactory\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2326 : 1987 Specification for automatic flushing cisterns for urinals (other than plastic cisterns)(second revision).\nSP 21 : 2005 10.162\n1. Scope – Requirements for thermoplastic seats and\ncovers for water-closets.\n2. Types – Type PF moulded from phenolic plastics\nand Type UF moulded from urea- formaldehyde.\n3. Materials Seats and Covers :\na)\nMaterial for type PF seats and covers shall be phenolic plastics conforming to Grade 2 or 3 of\nIS 1300 : 1994*\nb)\nMaterial for Type UF seats and covers shall be urea-for maldehyde conforming to IS 3389\n: 1994+\n3.2 Hinging Device — Bronze or brass or mild steel\nwith nickel chromium plating or aluminnium alloy with anodic coating or suitable plastic (with reinforcement)\n4. Manufacture — See Fig.1 for details.\n4.1 Seat — The underside of the seats may be either\nflat or recessed. Where the underside is flat, the seat shall be a solid moulding, and where the underside is\nrecessed, the section shall be not less than 3 mm at any point. The seats may be of the closed or open front\npattern (see Fig. 1).\n4.2 Cover — The cover shall completely cover the\naperture of the seat and shall be so designed that it is capable of being raised easily from the seat.\n4.3 Dimensions — See Table 1\n4.4 Finish – The surfaces of the seats, covers and\ncomponents shall be smooth, free from blisters and delamiation and reasonably free from flowlines,\ncontamination, streaking and unintended colour variation.\n4.5 Hinging Device – The bolts shall have a minimum\nshank length of 65 mm and a coarse thread of M8 size iwithin 25 mm of the flange of fixing to the pan.\n4.6 Buffers – Each seat if not provided with not less\nthan three rubber or plastic buffers of size 25 mm × 40 mm × 10 mm for closed front seats and not less than 4\nfor open front seats, which shall be securely fixed to underside of the seat."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2548 (Part 1): 1996",
    "title": "Plastic Seats And Covers For",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements for thermoplastic seats and covers for water-closets.",
    "keywords": [
      "seats",
      "seat",
      "covers",
      "cover",
      "point",
      "underside",
      "hinge"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for thermoplastic seats and covers for water-closets.",
      "Grades": "1 and 2 based on deflection characteristics 3. Materials 3.1 Seats and Covers a) Polystyrene or b) Polypropylene conforming to requirments specified 3.2 Hinging Device — Bronze or brass or mild steel with nickel chromium plating or aluminium alloy with anodic coating or suitable plastic (with reinforcement), conforming to the prescribed standards. 4. Manufacture 4.1 Seat — The underside of the seats may be either flat or recessed. Where the underside is flat, the seat shall be a solid moulding, and where the underside is recessed, the section shall be not less than 3 mm at any point. The seats may be of the closed or open front pattern (see Fig. 1). 4.2 The cover shall completely cover the aperture of the seat and shall be so designed that it is capable of being raised easily from the seat"
    },
    "content": "IS 2548 (Part 1): 1996 Plastic Seats And Covers For\nWATER- CLOSETS, PART 1 THERMOSET SEATS AND COVERS\n(Fifth Revision)\n* Phenolic moulding materials (third revision)\n+ Urea-formal dehyde, moulding material (first revision)\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF SEATS AND COVERS\nAll dimensions in millimetres.\nSL NO.\nDESCRIPTION DIMENSION Min\nMax (1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\ni)\nDistance from centre line of hinge\n445\n475 bolts to extreme edge of rim at front, A\nii)\nLength of opening at longest point, B\n250 290 iii)\nWidth of opening at widest point, C 215 240 iv)\nOverall width at widest point, D 380\n-v)\nDistance between inner and outer rims, E\n55\n-vi)\nCentre-to-centre distance of seat bolt holes, F\n145\n175 vii)Distance from centre line of hinge bolts to\n85\n-inner rim of seat at the back, G\nviii)\nThickness of seat at thinnest point\n3\n–\nix)\nThickness of cover at thinnest point 3 –\nSP 21 : 2005 10.163\n5. Tests\n5.1 Strength requirements for seats — Shall withstand,\nwithout permanent distortion of the seat or the hinge fittings or damage to any finish, a load of 1 150 N applied\nfor a period of 30 minutes.\n5.2 Impact Resistance — When tested for impact, the\nseat, cover buffers and hinges shall show any visible damage.\n5.3 Water Absorption — The increase in mass shall\nbe 0.75 percent, Max and on visual inspection after immersion, it shall shown no impairment.\n5.4 Rigidity\nSeats – The maximum deflection shall be as given below and on visual inspection after the load is removed, Note — For methods of tests refer to Appendices A to K of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2548 (Part 1) 1996 Specification for Plastic seats and covers for waterclosets Part 1 Thermoset seats and covers (fifth revision).\nthe seats shall not show any fracture\n5.4.2 Covers — Maximum deflection shall be as given below and on visual inspection after the load is removed,\nthe cover shall not show any fracture Maximum distortion shall be 3mm.\n5.5 Staining by Seats and Covers — There shall not\nbe any visible colour transfer to the white cloth.\n5.6 Staining and/or Other Surface Deterioration of\nSeats and Covers – There shall not be any change of colour or other adverse change in surface\ncharacteristics.\n5.7 Endurance Test for Seats, Covers and Buffers:\nNeither seat, cover or buffer should be damaged or dislocated. This is a type test.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.164\n1.\nScope – Requirements for thermoplastic seats and covers for water-closets.\n2.\nGrades – 1 and 2 based on deflection characteristics\n3.\nMaterials\n3.1 Seats and Covers\na) Polystyrene or b) Polypropylene conforming to requirments\nspecified\n3.2 Hinging Device — Bronze or brass or mild steel\nwith nickel chromium plating or aluminium alloy with anodic coating or suitable plastic (with reinforcement),\nconforming to the prescribed standards.\n4.\nManufacture\n4.1 Seat — The underside of the seats may be either\nflat or recessed. Where the underside is flat, the seat shall be a solid moulding, and where the underside is\nrecessed, the section shall be not less than 3 mm at any point. The seats may be of the closed or open front\npattern (see Fig. 1).\n4.2 The cover shall completely cover the aperture of\nthe seat and shall be so designed that it is capable of being raised easily from the seat. The cover shall be not\nless than 3 mm in thickness at any point.\n4.3 Dimensions — See Table 1"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2548 (Part 2): 1996",
    "title": "Plastic Seats And Covers For Water-Closets,",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "PART 2 – THERMOPLASTIC SEATS AND COVERS (Fifth Revision) TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF SEATS AND COVERS ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES. SL NO. DESCRIPTION DIMENSION Min Max (1) (2) (3) (4) i) Distance from centre line of hinge 445 475 bolts to extreme edge of rim at front, A ii) Length of opening at longest point, B 250 290 iii) Width of opening at widest point, C 215 240 iv) Overall width at widest point, D 380 -v) Distance between inner and outer rims, E 55 -vi) Centre-to-centre distance of seat bolt h",
    "keywords": [
      "seats",
      "seat",
      "buffers",
      "distance",
      "covers",
      "cover",
      "deflection"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 2548 (Part 2): 1996 Plastic Seats And Covers For Water-Closets,\nPART 2 – THERMOPLASTIC SEATS AND COVERS\n(Fifth Revision)\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF SEATS AND COVERS ALL DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETRES.\nSL NO.\nDESCRIPTION DIMENSION Min\nMax (1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\ni)\nDistance from centre line of hinge\n445\n475 bolts to extreme edge of rim at front, A\nii)\nLength of opening at longest point, B\n250\n290 iii)\nWidth of opening at widest point, C 215 240 iv)\nOverall width at widest point, D\n380\n-v)\nDistance between inner and outer rims, E\n55 -vi)\nCentre-to-centre distance of seat bolt holes, F\n145 175 vii)\nDistance from centre line of hinge bolts to\n85 -inner rim of seat at the back, G\nviii)\nThickness of seat at thinnest point\n3\n-ix)\nThickness of cover at thinnest point\n3\n--\nSP 21 : 2005 10.164 A\nFIG. 1\nSP 21 : 2005 10.165\n4.4 Finish – The surfaces of the seats, covers and\ncomponents shall be smooth, free from blisters and delamination and reasonably free from flowlines,\ncontamination, streaking and unintended colour variation colour variation.\n4.6 Hinging Device – The bolts shall have a minimum\nshank length of 65 mm and a coarse thread of M8 size within 25 mm of the flange of fixing to the pan.\n4.7 Buffers and Distance Pieces – Each seat (if not\nprovided with distance pipes) shall be provided with not less than three rubber or plastic buffers of size 25\nmm × 40 mm × 10 mm for closed front seats and not less than 4 for open front seats, which shall be securely\nfixed to underside of the seat.\n5. Test\n5.1 Strength – The seats shall withstand, without\npermanent distortion of the seat or the hinge fit tings or damage to any finish, a load of 1 150 N applied for a\nperiod of 30 minutes.\n5.2 Water Absorption – The increase in mass shall be\n0.75 percent, Max and on visual in spection after immersion, it shall shown no impairment.\n5.3 Impact Resistance\n5.3.1 Seats – When tested for impact, the seat, hinges and buffers/distance pieces shall show no visible\ndamage.\n5.3.2 Covers – When tested for impact, the cover, cover hinges and cover buffers shall show no visible damage.\n5.4 Rigidity\n5.4.1 Seats — The maximum deflection shall be as given below and on visual inspection after the load is removed,\nthe seats shall not show any fracture (See Annex F of the standard)\nGrade\nDeflection, mm 1 12.5 2 20.0\n5.4.2 Covers – The maximum deflection shall be as given below and on visual inspection after the load is\nremoved, the cover shall not show any fracture and no part of the edge of the cover shall be pushed through\nthe seat opening\nGrade\nDeflection, mm 1\n25 2\n40\n5.5 Staining by Seats and Covers — There shall not\nbe any visible colour transfer to the white cloth.\n5.6 Staining and/or Other Surface Deterioration of\nSeats and Covers — There shall not be any change of colour or other adverse change in surface\ncharacteristics.\n5.7 Surface Hardness - Minimum value of Rockwell\nHardness Number (HR) shall be `L45'.\n5.8 Endurance Test for Seats, Covers and Buffers—\nNeither seat, cover or buffer should be damaged or dislocated. This is a type test. Note — For method of test, refer to Appendixs B to M of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2548 (Part 1) : 1996 Specification for plastic seats and covers for water closets: Part 1 Thermoplastic seats and covers (fifth revision).\nSP 21 : 2005 10.166"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2556 (Part 1): 1994",
    "title": "Vitreous Sanitary Appliances",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "General requirements relating to terminology, material and manufacture, glazing, defects, minimum thickness, tolerance, performance and methods of test for vitreous sanitary appliances covered by various parts of the standard.",
    "keywords": [
      "coloured",
      "appliances",
      "none",
      "total",
      "permitted",
      "warpage",
      "vitreous"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for patterns, construction, dimensions and tolerances, finish and marking for vitreous washdown water closets (henceforth referred as WC). 2. Patterns a) Pattern 1 Pedestal WC with and independent cistern Pattern 2 (See Fig. 1) b) Pattern 3 Pedestal WC with independent cistern and horizontal outlet (See Fig2) c) Pattern 4 Pedestal WC with independent cistern and concealed Strap (See Fig.3) 3. Requirements 3.1 Each water closet shall be provided with not less than four fixing holes having a minimum diameter of 6.5mm. 3.2 Flushing rim may be box rim or open rim type flushing rim and the inlet shall be of self draining type. 3.3 Integral trap with P or S outlet 3.4 Anti-siphonage vent loinat an angle of 450 where required by sanitation authority. Note— For detailed dimensions and",
      "Material And Glazing": "Vitreous sanitary ware is a strong high grade ceramicware made from a mixture of suitable clays and finely ground minerals, such as quartz and felspar. It shall be coated on all exposed surfaces with an impervious non-crazing vitreous glaze giving a white or coloured finish. The vitreous glazing medium shall be thoroughly fused to the body. All exposed surfaces of an appliance shall be uniformly glazed, shall be free from craze and discolouration and shall posses an impervious surface. In case of certain coloured glaze, the lead content, if any, shall not exceed 5 percent of the weight of the glaze.",
      "Permissible Blemishes And Defects": "See Tables 1, 2 and 3. TABLE 1BLEMISHES OR DEFECTS PERMITTED IN WC PANS BIDETS, SQUATTING PANS, URINALS, PARTITION PLATES, PEDESTALS AND ACCESSORIES Location Blemish of Defect Maximum Permitted Wavy finish None on all visible surfaces Warpage WC an and bidets Squatting pans Not more than 6 mm a) Not more than 6 mm for long pattern of 580 m size. b) Not more than 10 mm for long pattern of 630 mm size and Orissa patterns of 580. General Other appliances Not more than 1 mm per 100 mm; total warpage not more than 6 mm. Accessories Not to exceed 5 mm on any plane Discoloration None on all visible surfaces Spots, blisters and pinholes A total of not over three; no grouping, for coloured appliances, blister and pinhole limited to one each. Flushing surface and horizontal face of rims of Bubbles a",
      "Minimum Thickness": "At any place in an appliance shall not be less than 6 mm. 5. Tolerances (a) On dimensions 75 mm and more ± 2 percent of the specified dimension or ±2 mm which ever is more. (b) On dimensions less than 75 mm ± 5 percent of the specifed dimension or ± 2 mm whichever is more. (c) On the height of the flush outlet of P-Traps,or horizontal outlets ± 5 mm; and (d) On all angles ± 3o. SP 21 : 2005 10.168 Note — For method of tests, refer to 10 and Appendics A to C of the standard. For detailed information refer to IS 2556 (Part 1) : 1994 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part 1 General requirements (third revision). 6. Performance Requirements 6.1 Warpage — Feeler gauge of maximum thickness specified (see Tables 1, 2 or 3) should not slide under the appliances witho"
    },
    "content": "IS 2556 (Part 1): 1994 Vitreous Sanitary Appliances\n(VITREOUS CHINA) PART 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS\n(Third Revision)\n1. Scope – General requirements relating to\nterminology, material and manufacture, glazing, defects, minimum thickness, tolerance, performance and methods\nof test for vitreous sanitary appliances covered by various parts of the standard.\n2. Material and Glazing — Vitreous sanitary ware is\na strong high grade ceramicware made from a mixture of suitable clays and finely ground minerals, such as quartz\nand felspar. It shall be coated on all exposed surfaces with an impervious non-crazing vitreous glaze giving a\nwhite or coloured finish.\nThe vitreous glazing medium shall be thoroughly fused to the body. All exposed surfaces of an appliance shall\nbe uniformly glazed, shall be free from craze and discolouration and shall posses an impervious surface.\nIn case of certain coloured glaze, the lead content, if any, shall not exceed 5 percent of the weight of the\nglaze.\n3. Permissible Blemishes and Defects — See Tables\n1, 2 and 3.\nTABLE 1BLEMISHES OR DEFECTS PERMITTED IN WC PANS BIDETS,\nSQUATTING PANS, URINALS, PARTITION PLATES, PEDESTALS AND\nACCESSORIES\nLocation\nBlemish of Defect\nMaximum Permitted\nWavy finish\nNone on all visible surfaces\nWarpage\nWC an and bidets\nSquatting pans\nNot more than 6 mm a) Not more than 6 mm for long pattern of 580 m size.\nb) Not more than 10 mm for long pattern of 630 mm size and Orissa patterns of 580.\nGeneral\nOther appliances\nNot more than 1 mm per 100 mm; total warpage not more than 6 mm.\nAccessories\nNot to exceed 5 mm on any plane\nDiscoloration\nNone on all visible surfaces\nSpots, blisters and pinholes\nA total of not over three; no grouping, for coloured appliances, blister and pinhole limited to one each.\nFlushing surface and horizontal face of rims of\nBubbles and specks\nNot over two in one pottery square; a total of not\nWC pans, squatting pans over four. Four coloured appliance, a total not over\nbidets urinals two.\nPolishing marks\nOne only; none permitted for coloured appliances.\nSpots, blisters and pinholes\nA total of not over five; no grouping. For coloured appliances no blisters are permitted and pinholes are\nin to a total of two.\nVisible surfaces other than above\nBubbles and specks\nNot over three in one pottery square; a total of not over ten.\nPolishing marks\nTwo only ; none permitted for coloured appliances.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.167\nTABLE 2 BLEMISHES OR DEFECTS PERMITTED IN WASH BASINS,\nLABORATORY\nSINKS AND DRINKING FOUNTAINS\nLocation\nBlemish of Defect\nMaximum Permitted\nWavy finish\nNone on all visible Surfaces\nWarpage :\nWash basins and drinking fountains\nWarpage of slab out of horizontal plane not to exceed 6 mm on all sizes (warpage of backs of wash basins which\nare attached to the wall not to exceed 3 mm).\nGeneral\nLaboratory sinks\nWarpage not to exceed ± 3 percent on all planes.\nDiscoloration\nNone on all visible surfaces.\nSpots, blisters and pinholes\nA total of not over two; no grouping for coloured appliances no blisters are permitted and pinhole limited to one\nonly.\nService space, top of slab, inside of bowl, fron of fascia\nBubbles and specks\nA total of not over four; no grouping. For coloured appliances, a total of not over two.\nPolishing marks\nOne only; one permitted for coloured appliances.\nSpots, blisters and pinholes\nOne only, no back or on either side; a total of not over three.\nFor coloured appliances no blisters are permitted and pinholes are limited to a total of two.\nFace of internal,\nBubbles and specks\nA total of not over four; no grouping.\nback and side\nPolishing marks\nTwo only; One permitted for coloured appliances.\nTABLE 3 BLEMISHES OR DEFECTS PERMITTED IN FLUSHING CISTERNS,\nAUTO CISTERNS AND COVERS WHEN ASSEMBLED\nLocation\nBlemish of Defect\nMaximum Permitted\nGeneral\nWarpage\nWarpage of the flat back portion in case of cisterns not to exceed 5 mm and for bottom portion in case of coupled\ncistern not to exceed 3 mm.\nDiscoloration\nNone on all visible surfaces.\nWavy finish\nNot more than 2500 mm2 on one end only.\nSpots, blisters and Pinholes\nA total of not over four; no grouping. However, a total of not over one on covers. For coloured appliances, blister\nand pinhole limited to one each, none on covers.\nVisible Surface\nBubbles and specks\nNot over two in one pottery square; total of not over six;\nincluding not over two on cover.\nPolishing marks\nOne only; none on cover; none permitted for coloured appliance.\n4. Minimum Thickness — At any place in an appliance\nshall not be less than 6 mm.\n5. Tolerances\n(a) On dimensions 75 mm and more ± 2 percent of the specified dimension or ±2 mm which ever is more.\n(b) On dimensions less than 75 mm ± 5 percent of the specifed dimension or ± 2 mm whichever is more.\n(c) On the height of the flush outlet of P-Traps,or horizontal outlets ± 5 mm; and\n(d) On all angles ± 3o.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.168 Note — For method of tests, refer to 10 and Appendics A to C of the standard.\nFor detailed information refer to IS 2556 (Part 1) : 1994 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part 1 General requirements (third revision).\n6.\nPerformance Requirements\n6.1 Warpage — Feeler gauge of maximum thickness\nspecified (see Tables 1, 2 or 3) should not slide under the appliances without application forec.\n6.2 Crazing — None of the test pieces shall show\ncrazing.\n6.3 Water Absorption — No execeeding 0.5 percent\n(average) and 0.75 percent (individual)\n6.4 Modules of rupture – Shall not be less than 60 MPa.\n6.5 Chemical resistance – No loss of reflectivity of\nglaze when compare with the control sample.\n6.6 Resistance to Straining and Burning — No stain\nshall remain on either of the test pieces.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.169\n1. Scope — Requirements for patterns, construction,\ndimensions and tolerances, finish and marking for vitreous washdown water closets (henceforth referred\nas WC).\n2. Patterns\na) Pattern 1 Pedestal WC with and independent cistern Pattern 2 (See Fig. 1)\nb) Pattern 3 Pedestal WC with independent cistern and horizontal outlet (See Fig2)\nc) Pattern 4\nPedestal WC with independent cistern and concealed Strap (See Fig.3)\n3. Requirements\n3.1 Each water closet shall be provided with not less\nthan four fixing holes having a minimum diameter of\n6.5mm.\n3.2 Flushing rim may be box rim or open rim type\nflushing rim and the inlet shall be of self draining type.\n3.3 Integral trap with P or S outlet\n3.4 Anti-siphonage vent loinat an angle of 450 where\nrequired by sanitation authority.\nNote— For detailed dimensions and tolerance refer to 5\nof the standard.\n4. Flushing Tests\n4.1 Toilet Paper Test — On repetition of test for the\npan shall discharge full charge of the paper at least thrice.\n5.2 Smudge Test — Immediately after the flushing, there\nshall be no smudge left on the bowl.\n5.3 Holding Capacity Test — Shall be capable of\nholding not less than 10 litres of water between the normal water level and the highest possible water level\nof the water closet as installed.\n5.4 Single Ball Test — The ball shall be discharged in\nthe normal manner.\n5.5 Fifty Ball Test — A minimum of 85 percent of all\nballs should be flushed out in the five tests."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2556 (Part 2): 1994",
    "title": "Vitreous Sanitary Appliances",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements for patterns, sizes, construction, dimensions, finish, flushing tests, inspection and marking for vitreous squatting pans.",
    "keywords": [
      "vitreous",
      "closets",
      "fig",
      "pattern",
      "closet",
      "china",
      "trap"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for patterns, sizes, construction, dimensions, finish, flushing tests, inspection and marking for vitreous squatting pans. 2. Requirements 2.1 Patterns and sizes a) Long 580 and 630 mm ( See Fig.1) b) Orissa 580 × 440 and 630 × 450 mm (See Fig.1) c) Rural 480 mm (See Fig 3) Note — For detailed dimension and tolerances refer to 6 of the standard."
    },
    "content": "IS 2556 (Part 2): 1994 Vitreous Sanitary Appliances\n(VITREOUS CHINA) PART 2 - SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF\nWASHDOWN WATER CLOSETS\n(Fourth Revision)\nFIG. 1 PATERN 1 AND PATTERN 2 WATER CLOSETS\nSP 21 : 2005 10.170 Note 1 — For method of tests refer to 8 of the standard. Note 2 — For general requirements refer to Part 1 General requirements of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2556 (Part 2) : 1994 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances\n(vitreous china): Part 2 Specific requirements of wash-down water closets (fourth revision).\nFIG. 2 PATTERN 3 WATER CLOSET WITH HORIZONTAL P– TRAP\nFIG. 3 PATTERN 4 WATER CLOSET WITH CONCELATED S-TRAP\nSP 21 : 2005 10.171\n1. Scope — Requirements for patterns, sizes,\nconstruction, dimensions, finish, flushing tests, inspection and marking for vitreous squatting pans.\n2. Requirements\n2.1 Patterns and sizes\na) Long 580 and 630 mm ( See Fig.1)\nb) Orissa 580 × 440 and 630 × 450 mm (See Fig.1)\nc) Rural 480 mm (See Fig 3)\nNote — For detailed dimension and tolerances refer to 6 of\nthe standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2556 (Part 4): 1994",
    "title": "Vitreous Sanitary Aplliances",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "(VITREOUS CHINA) PART 4 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF WASH BASINS (Third Revision) Note 2 — For general requirements refer to Part 1 General requirements of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 2556 (Part 4) : 1994 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances (vitreous china): Part 4 Specific requirements of wash basins (third revision). 2.2 One piece construction with /without a combined overflow and soap holder. Those to be used in surgeons room and operation theatre shall not be p",
    "keywords": [
      "basins",
      "overflow",
      "wash",
      "vitreous",
      "soap",
      "holder",
      "china"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Finish": "Inside surfaces of wash basins shall be glazed uniform and smooth in order to ensure efficient draining. SP 21 : 2005 10.174"
    },
    "content": "IS 2556 (Part 4): 1994 Vitreous Sanitary Aplliances\n(VITREOUS CHINA)\nPART 4 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF WASH BASINS\n(Third Revision)\nNote 2 — For general requirements refer to Part 1 General requirements of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2556 (Part 4) : 1994 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances\n(vitreous china): Part 4 Specific requirements of wash basins (third revision).\n2.2 One piece construction with /without a combined\noverflow and soap holder. Those to be used in surgeons room and operation theatre shall not be provided with\nsoap holder recess and combined overflow.\n2.3 Waste hole shall accomodate a waste filling having\na flange diameter of 64 mm.\n2.4 Overflow slot, if provided. shall have a horizontal\ndimension not larger than 64 mm and an area not less than 500 mm2.\n2.5 Glazed pedestal, if required, shall be so designed as\nto make the height from floor to top of the rim of basin between 750 to 800 mm.\n3. Finish – Inside surfaces of wash basins shall be\nglazed uniform and smooth in order to ensure efficient draining.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.174"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2556 (Part 9): 1994",
    "title": "Vitreous Sanitary Appliances",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements for patterns, dimensions and tolerances, construction, finish, tests, inspection and marking for integrated vitreous sqatting pans.",
    "keywords": [
      "bidets",
      "vitreous",
      "rim",
      "bidet",
      "integrated",
      "pedestal",
      "pattern"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Construction": "Shall be of one piece construction.",
      "Finish": "Inside surface of the integrated pan shall be glazed uniform and smooth in order to ensure efficient flush.",
      "Scope": "Requirements for patterns, dimensions and tolerances, construction, finish, tests, inspection and marking for integrated vitreous sqatting pans. 2. Requirements 2.1 Pattern — Long pattern 500. Other sizes and patterns may be made, however, except functional dimensions, all other requirements shall be complied with. 2.2 Shall be provided with either box or open rim. 2.3 Anti - syphonage vent horn shall be provided where required by the sanitation authority. 2.4 Depth of water seal shall in no case be less than no case be less than 50 mm."
    },
    "content": "IS 2556 (Part 9): 1994 Vitreous Sanitary Appliances\n(VITREOUS CHINA )\nPART 9 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OFPEDASTAL TYPE BIDETS\n(Fourth Revision)\nii) Pattern 2 — Pedestal bidets without flushing rim and over rim supply (See Fig. 2A & 2B).\n3. Construction — Shall be of one piece\nconstruction.\n4. Finish — The inside surface of the bidet and waste\noutlet shall be glazed uniform, smooth for effcient drawing.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.189\nFIG. 2 TYPICAL ILLUSTRATION OF BIDET WITHOUT FLUSHING RIM\nNote1 — For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to 6 of the standard.\nNote 2 — For general requirements refer to Part 1 general requirements of the standard.\nFor detailed information, Refer to IS : 2556 (Part 9) : 1995 Specification for vitreous sanitary appliances\n(vitreous china)Part 9 Specific requirements of pedestal type bidets (Fourth Revision).\nSP 21 : 2005 10.190\n1. Scope — Requirements for patterns, dimensions\nand tolerances, construction, finish, tests, inspection and marking for integrated vitreous sqatting pans.\n2. Requirements\n2.1 Pattern — Long pattern 500. Other sizes and\npatterns may be made, however, except functional dimensions, all other requirements shall be complied\nwith.\n2.2 Shall be provided with either box or open rim.\n2.3 Anti - syphonage vent horn shall be provided where\nrequired by the sanitation authority.\n2.4 Depth of water seal shall in no case be less than\nno case be less than 50 mm.\n3. Finish — Inside surface of the integrated pan shall be glazed uniform and smooth in order to ensure efficient\nflush."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2556 (Part 14): 1994",
    "title": "Vitreous Sanitary Appliances",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements for patterns, dimensions and tolerances, construction, finish, tests, inspection and marking for universal water closets made of vitreous china.",
    "keywords": [
      "trap",
      "vitreous",
      "pan",
      "china",
      "closets",
      "smudge",
      "universal"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for patterns, dimensions and tolerances, construction, finish, tests, inspection and marking for universal water closets made of vitreous china. 2. Requirements 2. 1 Sizes Size 1 – 560 × 460 mm, 'P' or 'S' trap Size 2 – 640 × 460 mm, 'P' or 'S' trap Other sizes may also be made, except for functional dimensions other requirements shall be compiled with. Note — For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to 5 of the standard 2.2 P trap closets shall be in one piece 5 trap closets may be made in one or two pieces. Each closet shall be provided with not less than four fixing holes having a maximum diameter of 6.5 mm. 2.3 Flushing rim shall be of box type. FIG. 1 UNIVERSAL WATER CLOSET"
    },
    "content": "IS 2556 (Part 14): 1994 Vitreous Sanitary Appliances\n(VITREOUS CHINA )\nPART 14 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS OF INTEGRATED\nSQATTING PANS\n(First Revision)\nNote1 — For method of test, refer to 8 of the standard.\nNote 2 — For general requirements refer to Part 1 general requirements of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS : 2556 (Part 14) : 1995 Specification for Vitreous Sanitary Appliances\n(Vitreous China): Part 14 Specific Requirements of Integrated Squatting Pans (First Revision)\n4. Flushing Test\n4.1 Toilet Paper Test — When repeated four times, the\npan shall discharge the full charge of the paper atleast thrice.\n4.2 Smudge Test — Immediately after the flush there\nshall be no smudge left in the pan.\n4.3 Holding capacity Test — Shall be capable of\nholding not less than 10 litres of water between the normal water level and the highest possible water level\nof the pan.\n4.4 Ball Test — The ball shall be discharged in the\nnormal manner.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.191\n1. Scope — Requirements for patterns, dimensions\nand tolerances, construction, finish, tests, inspection and marking for universal water closets made of vitreous\nchina.\n2. Requirements\n2. 1 Sizes\nSize 1 – 560 × 460 mm, 'P' or 'S' trap\nSize 2 – 640 × 460 mm, 'P' or 'S' trap\nOther sizes may also be made, except for functional dimensions other requirements shall be compiled with.\nNote — For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to\n5 of the standard\n2.2 P trap closets shall be in one piece 5 trap closets\nmay be made in one or two pieces. Each closet shall be provided with not less than four fixing holes having a\nmaximum diameter of 6.5 mm.\n2.3 Flushing rim shall be of box type.\nFIG. 1 UNIVERSAL WATER CLOSET"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5455: 1969",
    "title": "Cast Iron Steps For Manholes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements for cast iron gratings for use in drainage works.",
    "keywords": [
      "iron",
      "steps",
      "manhole",
      "cast",
      "frame",
      "gratings",
      "drainage"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Tolerances": "±2 mm on all dimensions",
      "Coating": "Shall be coated with a material having tar base or with a black bituminous composition or cashew-nut shell liquid. The coating shall be smooth and tenacious. It shall not flow when exposed to a temperature of temperature of 63°C and shall not brittle as to chip of at a temperature of o°C.",
      "Tests": "shall with stand a load of 225 kg at a point at the centre of the front tread for 1 minute All dimensions in millimetres. FIG. 1A CAST IRON STEPS FOR MANHOLE (PATTERN 1) SP 21 : 2005 10.194 Note — For method of test, refer to Appendix A of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 5455: 1969. Specification for cast iron steps for manholes. All dimensions in millimetres. FIG. 1B CAST IRON STEPS FOR MANHOLE (PATTERN 2) SP 21 : 2005 10.195 + Cast iron manhole covers and frames (third revision)",
      "Scope": "Requirements for cast iron gratings for use in drainage works.",
      "Materials": "Frame and cover shall be of grey cast iron. Hinge pin shall be of mild steel wire.",
      "Manufacture And Workmanship": "Frame and cover shall be free from air and sand holes, cold shuts and warping. 4. Dimensions and Tolerances Size of frame = 600 × 560 mm (Outside dimensions) Height of frame = 100 mm 4.1 Tolerance — On internal dimensions of the top of For detailed information, refer to IS 5961 : 1970 Specification for cast iron gratings or drainage purposes."
    },
    "content": "IS 5455: 1969 Cast Iron Steps For Manholes\n4. Tolerance – ±2 mm on all dimensions\n5. Coating – Shall be coated with a material having\ntar base or with a black bituminous composition or cashew-nut shell liquid. The coating shall be smooth\nand tenacious. It shall not flow when exposed to a temperature of temperature of 63°C and shall not brittle\nas to chip of at a temperature of o°C.\n6. Test – shall with stand a load of 225 kg at a point\nat the centre of the front tread for 1 minute\nAll dimensions in millimetres.\nFIG. 1A CAST IRON STEPS FOR MANHOLE (PATTERN 1)\nSP 21 : 2005 10.194\nNote — For method of test, refer to Appendix A of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5455: 1969. Specification for cast iron steps for manholes.\nAll dimensions in millimetres.\nFIG. 1B CAST IRON STEPS FOR MANHOLE (PATTERN 2)\nSP 21 : 2005 10.195 + Cast iron manhole covers and frames (third revision)\n1. Scope – Requirements for cast iron gratings for\nuse in drainage works.\n2.\nMaterials – Frame and cover shall be of grey cast iron. Hinge pin shall be of mild steel wire.\n3. Manufacture and Workmanship — Frame and\ncover shall be free from air and sand holes, cold shuts and warping.\n4. Dimensions and Tolerances\nSize of frame = 600 × 560 mm\n(Outside dimensions)\nHeight of frame = 100 mm\n4.1 Tolerance — On internal dimensions of the top of\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5961 : 1970 Specification for cast iron gratings or drainage purposes."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5961: 1970",
    "title": "Cast Iron Grating For Drainage Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements for manually operated high- level and low-level plastic flushing cisterns of capacities 5 litres and 10 litres, both single flush and dual-flush types, for water-closets, squatting pans and urinals.",
    "keywords": [
      "cistern",
      "level",
      "flush",
      "pipe",
      "overflow",
      "valve",
      "lever"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Coating": "Shall be with a material having tar base with a black bituminous composition. Coating shall be smooth and tenacious which will not flow at a temperature of 63°C, and which is not so brittle as to chip off at 0°C.",
      "Tests": "Gratings shall withstand without fracture a load of 35 tonnes for a minimum period of 30 seconds when subjected to loading test described in IS 1726 : 1991+. SP 21 : 2005 10.196",
      "Scope": "Requirements for manually operated high- level and low-level plastic flushing cisterns of capacities 5 litres and 10 litres, both single flush and dual-flush types, for water-closets, squatting pans and urinals. 2. Materials a) Cistern and Cover — High density polyethylene (HDPE) or Polystyrene high impact or Polyproylene T or Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene or glass fibre reinforced plastic (GRP) conforming to prescribed standards b) Flush Pipe – Steeltube, seamless or welded, medium or light completely protected inside and outside by hot dip galvanizing electroplatting or vitreous enamelling or lead pipe or copper alloy tube, HDPE pipes or VPVC plumbing pipe conforming to prescribed standard. c) Overflow pipe— HDPE or VPVC or any other corrosion resistant material conforming to prescribe",
      "Cover": "Removable cover which shall fit closely and shall be secured against displacement. 3.3 Flush Pipe — The flush pipe (except plastic flush pipe) shall have an internal diameter of 32 ± 1 mm for high-level cistern and 38 ± 1 mm for low-level cistern. The steel flush pipe shall be not less than 1 mm thick whereas the lead flush pipe shall have a minimum thickness of 3.5 mm. For high density polyethylene pipes, the outside diameter of the pipes shall be 40 mm. For unplasticized PVC plumbing pipes the outside diameter of the pipe shall be 40 mm for high-level cisterns, and 50 mm for low-level cistern. 3.3.1 Flush Pipe Connection to Cistern —The flush pipe shall be securely connected to the cistern outlet and made airtight by means of a coupling nut. The nominal internal diameter of the cistern o"
    },
    "content": "IS 5961: 1970 Cast Iron Grating For Drainage Purposes\nthe frame ± 2 mm.\nNote — For detailed dimensions see Fig. 1 of the standard.\n5. Weight – 75 kg minimum.\n6. Coating – Shall be with a material having tar base\nwith a black bituminous composition. Coating shall be smooth and tenacious which will not flow at a\ntemperature of 63°C, and which is not so brittle as to chip off at 0°C.\n7. Test – Gratings shall withstand without fracture a\nload of 35 tonnes for a minimum period of 30 seconds when subjected to loading test described in IS 1726 :\n1991+.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.196\n1. Scope – Requirements for manually operated high-\nlevel and low-level plastic flushing cisterns of capacities\n5 litres and 10 litres, both single flush and dual-flush types, for water-closets, squatting pans and urinals.\n2. Materials\na) Cistern and Cover — High density polyethylene\n(HDPE) or Polystyrene high impact or\nPolyproylene T or Acrylonitrile butadiene styrene or glass fibre reinforced plastic (GRP)\nconforming to prescribed standards b) Flush Pipe – Steeltube, seamless or welded,\nmedium or light completely protected inside and outside by hot dip galvanizing electroplatting or\nvitreous enamelling or lead pipe or copper alloy tube, HDPE pipes or VPVC plumbing pipe\nconforming to prescribed standard.\nc) Overflow pipe— HDPE or VPVC or any other corrosion resistant material conforming to\nprescribed\n3. Construction\n3.1 Cistern – It shall be mosquito-proof. The thickness\nof the body including cover at any point shall not be less than 2 mm for GRP, and not less than 3 mm for other\nplastic materials.\n3.2. Cover – Removable cover which shall fit closely and shall be secured against displacement.\n3.3 Flush Pipe — The flush pipe (except plastic flush\npipe) shall have an internal diameter of 32 ± 1 mm for high-level cistern and 38 ± 1 mm for low-level cistern.\nThe steel flush pipe shall be not less than 1 mm thick whereas the lead flush pipe shall have a minimum\nthickness of 3.5 mm. For high density polyethylene pipes, the outside diameter of the pipes shall be 40 mm.\nFor unplasticized PVC plumbing pipes the outside diameter of the pipe shall be 40 mm for high-level\ncisterns, and 50 mm for low-level cistern. 3.3.1 Flush Pipe Connection to Cistern —The flush pipe shall be securely connected to the cistern outlet\nand made airtight by means of a coupling nut. The nominal internal diameter of the cistern outlet shall be\nnot less than 32 mm and 38 mm for high-level and lowlevel cisterns respectively.\n3.4 Inlet and Outlet Holes —The cistern shall be\nprovided with inlet and overflow holes, situated one at each end, which shall be capable of accommodating\noverflow pipe of not less than 20 mm nominal bore and a 15 mm size float valve.\n3.5 Operating Lever — The operating mechanism/lever\nshall not project beyond the side of the cistern for a distance greater than 350 mm measured from the centre\nof the cistern to the end of the lever arm.\n3.6 String (Chain) — The string (chain) shall be of\nsuch a strength as to sustain a dead load of 500 N without any apparent or permanent deformation.\n3.7 Overflow Pipe — The overflow piepe shall be of\nnot less than 20 mm nominal bore and shall incorporate a non-corrodible mosquito-proof device.\n3.8 Float Valve — Shall be 15 mm nominal size\n4. Operational and Performance Requirements\n4.1 Flushing Arrangement — The cistern under\nworking conditions and with the float valve in closed position shall operate on a single operation of the\noperating mechanism/lever without calling for a sudden jerk in pulling. If a valve is used instead of siphon for\nflushing purposes, the valve shall be completely leakproof.\n4.2 Working Water Level — The working water level\nshall be a minimum of 6.5 cm below the effective top edge of the cistern and shall be legibly and permanently\nmarked on the inside of the cistern."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7231: 1994",
    "title": "Plastic Flushing Cisterns For Water Closets And Urinals",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements for material, construction, workmanship, finish, performance and testing for glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (GRP) pourflush type squatting pans conact moulded as well as compression moulded.",
    "keywords": [
      "litres",
      "cistern",
      "discharge",
      "flush",
      "litre",
      "level",
      "capacity"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for material, construction, workmanship, finish, performance and testing for glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (GRP) pourflush type squatting pans conact moulded as well as compression moulded."
    },
    "content": "IS 7231: 1994 Plastic Flushing Cisterns For Water Closets And Urinals\n(Second Revision) T Talc as filler if used shall not exceed 20%\nNote— For materials of other components See Table1 of\nthe standard.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.197\nNote — For method of test, refer to 9 and Appendices B to D of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 7231 : 1994 Specification for plastic flushing cisterns for water closets and urinals (second revision).\n4.3 Freedom from Self Siphonage — The siphonic\nsystem shall be capable of being rapidly brought into action when the water is at the working water level, but\nshall not self-siphon or leak into the flush pipe when the water is up to 1 cm above the invert of the overflow\npipe.\n4.4 Reduced Water Level – The discharge shall operate\nsatisfactorily when the cistern is filled to a level up to 1 cm below the working water level.\n4.5 Discharge Capacity – Cistern of 5 litres and 10\nlitres capacities, when required to give a full flush, shall respectively discharge 5 litres and 10 litres with variation\nof ± 0.5 litres. Dual-flush cistern of 10 litres capacity shall discharge alternatively a short flush of 5 ± 0.5\nlitres. Dual flush western 6/3 liture capacity shall discharge 6 ± 0.5 liters and atternatively a half flush of\n3 ± 0.5 litre\n4.6 Discharge Rate – The discharge rate shall be 10 ±\n0.5 litres within 6 seconds and 5 ± 0.5 litres and 6±0.5 litre within 6 s and 3 ± 0.5 litres within 35 for liters of\ncapacity 6/3 litre. 3 seconds for cistern of capacities 10 litres and 5 litres respectively.\n5. Tests\n5.1 Distortion Resistance Test — The cistern shall not\nbuldge more than 6 mm and the cover shall not be dislodged.\n5.2 Dead Load Test – When tested by the application\nof a dead load of 230 N applied 6 mm from the end of the operating lever arm for 30 seconds, shall not distort to\nsuch an extent that any part becomes detached.\n5.3 Front Thrust Test – Only to cisterns intendent for\nlow level use shall not distort to such an extent as to be inoperable or unsighhtly when the load is removed.\n5.4 Impact Test – The cistern, complete with its fittings,\nshall show no defect after one impact.\n5.5 Endurance Test – The cistern and its component\nparts shall not show any damage or defects and all the parts shall be satisfactory, after 3000 operations.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.198\n1. Scope — Requirements for material, construction,\nworkmanship, finish, performance and testing for glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (GRP) pourflush type\nsquatting pans conact moulded as well as compression moulded."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 11246: 1992",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Polyester Resin (Grp) Squatting Pans",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements of copper alloy gate, globe and check valves of nominal sizes 8 to 100 mm suitable for working temperatures up to 450 C and non shock working pressure up to 16 MPa, for water works purposes. This standard may be used for other fluids, but the physical and chemical testing shall be done for the same fliud.",
    "keywords": [
      "pan",
      "coat",
      "gel",
      "glass",
      "resin",
      "polyester",
      "fibre"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Polyster Resin": "Unsaturated polyster resin shall be isopthalic type",
      "Sheet Moulding Compound (Smc)": "Shall be of low profile grade and shall consist of glass fibre reinforcements pre-impregnated with filled unsaturated polyester resin system in sheet form. 2.4Surface Coat a) Gel coat. b) Polyurethane resin coat 3. Thickness and Mass 3.1 Thickness i) With gel coat — 2.0 mm, Min ii) With PU coat — 1.8 mm, Min At the point of additional reinfore cement, that is rim and bottom outlet, the minimum thickness shall be 2.8 mm with gel coat and 2.6 mm with PU coat. 3.2 Mass – The minimum mass of hand laid pans shall be 750 gm and for sheet moulding compound (SMC) shall be 900 gms. 4. Performance requirements 4.1 Warpage — Feeler guage of 4mm shall not slide under it without application of force. 4.2 Thickness – See 3.1 4.3 Impact Resistance — Shall not show any cracks in the surface coat. 4.4 Craz",
      "Scope": "Requirements of copper alloy gate, globe and check valves of nominal sizes 8 to 100 mm suitable for working temperatures up to 450 C and non shock working pressure up to 16 MPa, for water works purposes. This standard may be used for other fluids, but the physical and chemical testing shall be done for the same fliud. 2. Nominal Sizes 2.1 Screwed End Valves 8(1/4), 10(3/8) , 15(1/2), 20(3/4), 25(1) 32(1.1/4), 40 (11/2), 50(2), 65(21/2), 80(3) and 100 mm(4) The nominal sizes shown in parantheses refer to the size of screw threads. 2.2 Flanged Valves Shall be as follows 15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 65, 80, and 100mm."
    },
    "content": "IS 11246: 1992 Glass Fibre Reinforced Polyester Resin (Grp) Squatting Pans\n(First Revision)\n* Glass fibre rovings for reinforcement of polyester and epoxide resin systems (first revision)\n+ Glass fibre chopped strand mat for the reinforcement of epoxy, phenolic and polyester resin systems (first revision)\n2. Material\n2.1 Glass Fibre — As per IS 11320: 1997* and IS\n11551 : 1996+\nLow alkali glass with glass content of the laminate minimum 30 percent by weight.\nFIG. 1 SQUATING PAN\nTABLE 1 FUNCTIONAL DIMENSIONS\nDESCRIPTION\nREF IN FIG. 1\nDIMENSIONS (mm)\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\nWidth of front profile (semi-circle)\nA\n125\nWdith at rear profile (semi-circle)\nB\n200\nVertical drop in front wall of pan\nC\n70\nRear of back wall of the pan nclination to horizontal off\nD\n6-8° set to trap opening\nLength of top opening\nE\n425\nSlope of bottom of pan\nF\n25-28°\nOverall depth of pan (see Note)\nG\n320\nLength of entry of squatting pan into the P-trap\nH\n40 Min\nDia at entry from sqattig pan to P-trap\nJ\n77, ID\nProjected bend of rim all-round\nK\n20-25\nNotes —\n1 Dimension C, G and H are for general guidance.\n2 Tolerance + 4% for all dimensions of 50 mm and above.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.199\n2.2. Polyster Resin — Unsaturated polyster resin shall be isopthalic type\n2.3. Sheet Moulding Compound (SMC) – Shall be of low profile grade and shall consist of glass fibre\nreinforcements pre-impregnated with filled unsaturated polyester resin system in sheet form.\n2.4Surface Coat a) Gel coat.\nb) Polyurethane resin coat\n3. Thickness and Mass\n3.1 Thickness i) With gel coat — 2.0 mm, Min ii) With PU coat — 1.8 mm, Min\nAt the point of additional reinfore cement, that is rim and bottom outlet, the minimum thickness shall be 2.8\nmm with gel coat and 2.6 mm with PU coat.\n3.2 Mass – The minimum mass of hand laid pans shall\nbe 750 gm and for sheet moulding compound (SMC)\nshall be 900 gms.\n4. Performance requirements\n4.1 Warpage — Feeler guage of 4mm shall not slide\nunder it without application of force.\n4.2 Thickness – See 3.1\n4.3 Impact Resistance — Shall not show any cracks in\nthe surface coat.\n4.4 Crazing – Shall not show cracks or crazing after\noven test.\n4.5 Water Absorption — Shall not absorb water in\nexcess of 0.5 percent.\n4.6 Gel Coat — Shall not be less than 0.20mm thick\nand not more than 0.40mm thick.\n4.7 Reistance of hydrochloric acid/uric acid: there shall\nbe no discoloration and exposure of glass fibre.\n4.8 Hardness — Minimum 30 points for gel coated 20\npoints for Pu coats or Barcol impressor.\n4.9 Scratch Resistance — Shall withstand 40,000 cycles\nin scrub test. 4.10 Ink Test - Ink stains and defects mentioned under\n5.3 of the standard shall not be permitted.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 11246 : 1992 Specification for glass fibre reinforced polyester resin (FRP)\nsquatting pans (first revision).\nSP 21 : 2005 10.200\n1. Scope — Requirements of copper alloy gate, globe\nand check valves of nominal sizes 8 to 100 mm suitable for working temperatures up to 450 C and non shock\nworking pressure up to 16 MPa, for water works purposes.\nThis standard may be used for other fluids, but the physical and chemical testing shall be done for the\nsame fliud.\n2. Nominal Sizes\n2.1 Screwed End Valves\n8(1/4), 10(3/8) , 15(1/2), 20(3/4), 25(1) 32(1.1/4), 40\n(11/2), 50(2), 65(21/2), 80(3) and 100 mm(4)\nThe nominal sizes shown in parantheses refer to the size of screw threads.\n2.2 Flanged Valves Shall be as follows\n15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 65, 80, and 100mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 778: 1984",
    "title": "Copper Alloy Gate, Globe And Check Valves For Water Works Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "(Fourth Revision) TABLE 1 MATERIALS FOR COMPONENT PARTS OF GATE, GLOBE AND CHECK VALVES SL. NO. COMPONENT MATERIAL (1) (2) (3) I) Body a)Brass b) Leaded tin bronze ii) Bonnet or cover a) leaded tin bronze b) Forged brass c) Brass iii) Stuffing box, disc hinge, check nut, a) leaded tin broze stem nut, disc retaining nut, gland, b) Extruded brass rod gland nut, glandflange. body seat rings c) Forged brass and disc or wedge facing rings(where d) Brass renewable) iv) Stem, hinge pin and plug a) Extr",
    "keywords": [
      "valves",
      "valve",
      "disc",
      "check",
      "bonnet",
      "gland",
      "brass"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Design And Manufacture": "See 7 of the standard. 6.1 Body end port shall be circular end of a diameter not less than the nominal size of the ports of the valve 6.2 Area of water way through and between the ports of the value shall be not less than area of a circle of diameter equal to the nominal size of the valve except to globe and check valves where area may be reduced through the valve seats to 85 percent of the fullwater way area. 6.3 Bonnets shall be screwed in bonnet, screwed on bonnet or bolted bonnet. 6.4 Gland shall be of one piece or two piece design consisting of a sleeve sliding in the stuffing box and secured by a gland nut or bolted flange. 6.5 Stem shall be in one piece and designed to prevent the wedge or disc from leaving the stem. Note — For details of design see 7 of the standard. For details in",
      "Dimensions": "The overall length of stop valves shall be as given below with a tolerance of +3 mm Nominal mm Size Internally Externally Mixed Threaded Threaded Ends 8 45 65 55 10 50 75 62 15 60 85 70 20 70 100 85 25 85 125 105 32 100 135 115 40 110 145 125 50 135 175 155 Tolerance ±3mm Note— For detailed dimensions, refer to the standard.",
      "Finish": "The bib taps shall be always polished bright. The stop valves may be polished bright or they may have an unpolished as `cast' finish. The bib taps or stop valves may also nickel-chromium plated. The plating shall be capable of taking high polish and shall not easily tarnish.",
      "Tests": "When tested in closed position under hydraulic pressure of 1.5 MPa minimum maintained at that pressure for a period of at least 2 minutes during which it shall neither leak nor sweat. For details information, refer to IS 781 : 1984 Specification for Cast copper alloy screw down bib taps and stop valves for water services (third revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 778: 1984 Copper Alloy Gate, Globe And Check Valves For Water Works Purposes\n(Fourth Revision)\nTABLE 1 MATERIALS FOR COMPONENT PARTS OF GATE, GLOBE AND CHECK VALVES\nSL. NO. COMPONENT\nMATERIAL\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\nI)\nBody a)Brass\nb) Leaded tin bronze ii)\nBonnet or cover a) leaded tin bronze\nb) Forged brass c) Brass\niii)\nStuffing box, disc hinge, check nut, a) leaded tin broze\nstem nut, disc retaining nut, gland, b) Extruded brass rod\ngland nut, glandflange. body seat rings c) Forged brass\nand disc or wedge facing rings(where d) Brass\nrenewable)\niv)\nStem, hinge pin and plug a) Extruded brass rod\nb) High-tensile brass v)\nBall ( for ball type check valves)\nc) Forged brass Chromium steel vi)\nBolts, nuts\nMild steel vii)\nHandwheel\nCast iron* viii)\nGasket\nCompressed asbestos fibre ix)\nGland packing a) hemp and jute\nb) Asbestos x)\nSpring\nPhosphor bronge wire xi)\nSeating ring\nSynthetic rubber\nThe nominal sizes of valves shall be designated by the nominal bore of the pipe of which the valve is nor-\nmally fitted. The actual bore shall not be less than the nominal size.\n3.\nClassification\nClass 1 Valves — Valves of this class are suitable for non-shock cold working pressure up to 1.0 MPa\n(cold service means a temperature not exceeding 45oC).\nClass 2 Valves — Valves of this class are suirable for non-shock cold working pressure up to 1.6MPa.\n4.\nTypes\n4.1 Gate Valves\na) Solid wedge type b) Split wedge type and\nc) Double disc type.\n* Steel, aluminium alloy, zink and non metallic material may be permitted if required.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.201\n4.2 Globe Valve –\na) Straight type and b) Right angle type.\n4.3 Check Valve –\na) Swing type and b) Lift type with disc or ball check\n5.\nMaterial s – See Table 1\n6.\nDesign and Manufacture — See 7 of the standard.\n6.1 Body end port shall be circular end of a diameter\nnot less than the nominal size of the ports of the valve\n6.2 Area of water way through and between the ports\nof the value shall be not less than area of a circle of diameter equal to the nominal size of the valve except to\nglobe and check valves where area may be reduced through the valve seats to 85 percent of the fullwater\nway area.\n6.3 Bonnets shall be screwed in bonnet, screwed on\nbonnet or bolted bonnet.\n6.4 Gland shall be of one piece or two piece design\nconsisting of a sleeve sliding in the stuffing box and secured by a gland nut or bolted flange.\n6.5 Stem shall be in one piece and designed to prevent\nthe wedge or disc from leaving the stem.\nNote — For details of design see 7 of the standard.\nFor details information, refer to IS 778 : 1984. Specification for Copper alloy gate, globe and check valves for water works purposes (Fourth revision).\n7.\nDimension\nMINIMUM WALL THICKNESS OF BODY AND\nBONNET\nAll dimensions in millimetres\nClass of Nominal Size of Valves\nValve 8\n10\n15\n20\n25\n32\n40\n50 65\n80 100\n1\n1.7 1.7\n1.8 1.9 2.0 2.2 2.3\n2.5 2.7 3.0 3.5\n2 2.0 2.0\n2.2 2.3 2.5 2.7 2.9\n3.2 3.6 3.9 4.5 Note — for dimensional details see 8 of the standard.\n8.\nTests\n8.1 Material Test — shall conform to the prescribed\nstandards.\n8.2 Body Test (Hdrostatic) — Shall not show any\nleakage when prescribed pressure in applied to the inlet end, outlet and is blanked and valve isfully open.\n8.3 Back Seat Test — There shall be no leakage through\nthe stuffing box.\n8.4 Seat-Test-(Hydrostatic) — Shall not show any\nleakage under the prescribed test. Note — For method of test refer to the standard.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.202\n4.\nDimensions — The overall length of stop valves shall be as given below with a tolerance of\n+3 mm\nNominal mm\nSize\nInternally\nExternally\nMixed\nThreaded\nThreaded\nEnds\n8\n45\n65 55\n10\n50\n75 62\n15\n60\n85 70\n20\n70\n100 85\n25\n85\n125 105 32 100\n135 115 40 110 145 125 50 135 175 155\nTolerance ±3mm Note— For detailed dimensions, refer to the standard.\n5.\nFinish – The bib taps shall be always polished bright. The stop valves may be polished bright or they\nmay have an unpolished as `cast' finish. The bib taps or stop valves may also nickel-chromium plated. The\nplating shall be capable of taking high polish and shall not easily tarnish.\n8.\nTesting – When tested in closed position under hydraulic pressure of 1.5 MPa minimum maintained at\nthat pressure for a period of at least 2 minutes during which it shall neither leak nor sweat.\nFor details information, refer to IS 781 : 1984 Specification for Cast copper alloy screw down bib taps and stop valves for water services (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 781: 1984",
    "title": "Castcopper Alloyscrew Down Bib Taps Andstopvalves For Waterservices",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements for copper alloy screw down bib taps and stop valves suitable for cold non- shock working pressure up to 1.0 MPa. Bib taps shall have screwed male inlet. Stop valves shall have screwed female end or male ends or mixed ends (mixed ends means one end screwed male and the other end screwed female). Note — Cold service means a temperature not exceeding 45ºC.",
    "keywords": [
      "valve",
      "valves",
      "bib",
      "mixing",
      "stop",
      "male",
      "screwed"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding sizes, material, manufacture, workmanship and testing of mixing valves for ablutionary and domestic purposes.",
      "Sizes": "Shall be of three sizes, namely 15 mm (or ½ in.), 20 mm (or ¾ in.) and 25 mm (or 1 in.).The size of a mixing valve shall be denoted by the nominal size of the bore of the inlets which shall always be of equal diameters.",
      "Materials": "Brass ,Leaded Tin Bronze,Stainless steel or equally suitable corrosion resisting alloy and manganese bronze in case of hot pressing.",
      "Operation": "The sequence of operation of the valve shall be as follows : Off or Shut Cold Warm or Tepid Hot Closing of the valve shall be performed by rotation of control in an anticlockwise direction. 5. Workmanship All gravity — and die-castings shall be in all respects, free from laps, blow holes and pitting. Both external and internal surfaces shall be clean, smooth and free from sand. They shall be neatly dressed and no castings shall be burned, plugged, stopped or patched. All hot-pressed components shall be sound and solid For detailed information, refer to IS 1701: 1960 Specification for mixing valves for ablutionary and domestic purposes. without lamination and shall be finished smooth.",
      "Tests": "Shall withstand without leaking or sweating a hydraulic pressure of 20 kg/cm2 applied for a period of two minutes with the control in the mid-open position . When the control is in the 'shut' position, the valve shall remain closed and show no leakage against a pressure of 15 kg/cm2 applied for a period of two minutes. The head loss through the mixing valve at different rates of flow shall not exceed those given in Table 1. TABLE 1 LOSS OF HEAD SIZE OF RATE OF HEAD LOSS MAXIMUM FLOW L/MIN IN FITTING VALVE PERMISSIBLE m 15 5 1.0 10 1.5 15 2.5 20 20 1.5 25 2.0 30 3.0 25 40 2.5 45 3.0"
    },
    "content": "IS 781: 1984 Castcopper Alloyscrew Down Bib Taps Andstopvalves For Waterservices\n(Third Revision)\n1.\nScope — Requirements for copper alloy screw down bib taps and stop valves suitable for cold non-\nshock working pressure up to 1.0 MPa. Bib taps shall have screwed male inlet. Stop valves shall have screwed\nfemale end or male ends or mixed ends (mixed ends means one end screwed male and the other end screwed female).\nNote — Cold service means a temperature not exceeding\n45ºC.\n2.\nNominal sizes a) Bib taps shall be 8, 10, 15, 20 and 25 mm.\nb) Stop valves shall be 8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40 and 50 mm. Nominal size of the bib tap and stop valves\nshall be designated by the nominal bore of the socket or pipe outlet to which the tap or valve is\nnormally fitted.\n3.\nMaterials\nSl No.\nComponent\nMaterial i)\nBody and bonnet a) Cast brass b) Leaded tin bronze ii)\nSpindle nuts\nBrass (extruded rolled or forged)\niii)\nGland Crutch\nBrass (extruded, rolled, cast, die\n(handle) cast washer,\nplate etc.\niv)\nWasher\nLeaded tin bronze\nSP 21 : 2005 10.203\n1.\nScope – Requirements regarding sizes, material, manufacture, workmanship and testing of mixing valves\nfor ablutionary and domestic purposes.\n2.\nSizes – Shall be of three sizes, namely 15 mm (or ½ in.), 20 mm (or ¾ in.) and 25 mm (or 1 in.).The size of a\nmixing valve shall be denoted by the nominal size of the bore of the inlets which shall always be of equal\ndiameters.\n3.\nMaterials – Brass ,Leaded Tin Bronze,Stainless steel or equally suitable corrosion resisting alloy and\nmanganese bronze in case of hot pressing.\n4.\nOperation – The sequence of operation of the valve shall be as follows :\nOff or Shut\nCold\nWarm or Tepid\nHot\nClosing of the valve shall be performed by rotation of control in an anticlockwise direction.\n5.\nWorkmanship\nAll gravity — and die-castings shall be in all respects, free from laps, blow holes and pitting. Both external and\ninternal surfaces shall be clean, smooth and free from sand. They shall be neatly dressed and no castings\nshall be burned, plugged, stopped or patched.\nAll hot-pressed components shall be sound and solid\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1701: 1960 Specification for mixing valves for ablutionary and domestic purposes.\nwithout lamination and shall be finished smooth.\n6.\nTests — Shall withstand without leaking or sweating a hydraulic pressure of 20 kg/cm2 applied for\na period of two minutes with the control in the mid-open position .\nWhen the control is in the 'shut' position, the valve shall remain closed and show no leakage against a\npressure of 15 kg/cm2 applied for a period of two minutes. The head loss through the mixing valve at different rates of flow shall not exceed those given in Table 1.\nTABLE 1 LOSS OF HEAD\nSIZE OF\nRATE OF\nHEAD LOSS\nMAXIMUM\nFLOW L/MIN\nIN FITTING\nVALVE\nPERMISSIBLE m 15 5\n1.0\n10\n1.5\n15\n2.5 20\n20\n1.5\n25\n2.0\n30\n3.0 25\n40\n2.5\n45\n3.0"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1701: 1960",
    "title": "Mixing Valves For Ablutionary And Domestic Purpose",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding sizes,materials, manufacture and workmanship, and testing of float valves (horizontal plunger type ) for water supply purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "float",
      "valves",
      "rod",
      "lever",
      "pressure",
      "inlet",
      "valve"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding sizes,materials, manufacture and workmanship, and testing of float valves (horizontal plunger type ) for water supply purposes.",
      "Classification": "a) High Pressure — High Pressure float valves are indicated by the abbreviation 'HP'and are designed for use on mains having pressure of 0.175 MPa or above. b) Low Pressure — Low Pressure float valves are indicated by the abbreviation 'LP', and are designed for use on mains having a pressure less than 0.175 MPa.",
      "Nominal Sizes": "5, 20, 25, 32, 40 and 50 mm. Note — For detailed dimensions, refer to the standard 4. Materials TABLE 1 MATERIALS FOR BODY AND COMPONENT PARTS OF FLOAT VALVES SL. NO COMPONENT MATERIAL (1) (2) (3) i) Body and parts of a) Cast Brass fittings (except lever rod and back nut) b) Leaded tin bronze ii) Lever rod Brass rod iii) Back nut and a) Brass rod nuts for inlet pipe b) Leaded tin bronze iv) Washer Synthetic rubber v) Inlet pipe Brass 5. Construction 5.1 The inlet shank shall be horizontal in case of 15 mm size it may be either horizontal or vertical. 5.2 The lever may be made in one piece or the short aim and rod may be seperately constructed. 5.3 Floats shall conform to IS 9762 : 1994+ 6. Testing 6.1 Hydraulic Test — Every float valve while in closed position shall withstand an internally"
    },
    "content": "IS 1701: 1960 Mixing Valves For Ablutionary And Domestic Purpose\nSP 21 : 2005 10.204\n1.\nScope – Requirements regarding sizes,materials, manufacture and workmanship, and testing of float\nvalves (horizontal plunger type ) for water supply purposes.\n2. Classification – a) High Pressure — High Pressure float valves are indicated by the abbreviation 'HP'and are designed for\nuse on mains having pressure of 0.175 MPa or above. b) Low Pressure — Low Pressure float valves are indicated by the abbreviation 'LP', and are designed for\nuse on mains having a pressure less than 0.175 MPa.\n3.\nNominal Sizes – 5, 20, 25, 32, 40 and 50 mm.\nNote — For detailed dimensions, refer to the standard\n4.\nMaterials\nTABLE 1 MATERIALS FOR BODY AND\nCOMPONENT PARTS OF FLOAT VALVES\nSL. NO\nCOMPONENT\nMATERIAL\n(1) (2) (3)\ni)\nBody and parts of a) Cast Brass\nfittings (except lever rod and back nut)\nb) Leaded tin bronze ii)\nLever rod\nBrass rod iii)\nBack nut and a) Brass rod\nnuts for inlet pipe b) Leaded tin bronze\niv)\nWasher\nSynthetic rubber v)\nInlet pipe\nBrass\n5.\nConstruction\n5.1 The inlet shank shall be horizontal in case of 15 mm\nsize it may be either horizontal or vertical.\n5.2 The lever may be made in one piece or the short aim\nand rod may be seperately constructed.\n5.3 Floats shall conform to IS 9762 : 1994+\n6.\nTesting\n6.1 Hydraulic Test — Every float valve while in closed\nposition shall withstand an internally applied hydraulic pressure of 1.5 MPa for a minimum period of 2 minutes\nwithout leakage or sweating.\n6.2 Shutting Off Test — Every 'HP' float valve when\nassembled in working condition with the float immersed to not more than half its volume shall remain closed\nagainst test pressure of 1.05 MPa and a 'LP' float valve against a test pressure of 0.35 MPa.\n6.3 Test for Machanical Strength of lever — Shall be\ncapable of supporting the prescribed test loads.\n+polyethylene floats (spherical) for float valves."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1703: 2000",
    "title": "Water Fittings Copper Alloy Float Valves (Horizontal Plunger Type)",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements for self-closing taps with or without stuffing box.",
    "keywords": [
      "bronze",
      "tap",
      "pushbutton",
      "tin",
      "closing",
      "self",
      "pressing"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for self-closing taps with or without stuffing box.",
      "Nominal Sizes": "15 mm and 20 mm. Nominal size shall refer to the nominal bore of the inlet connection.",
      "Design": "The opening of the tap shall be performed by hand pressing of the handle up or down or turning sideways or by pressing in of the pushbutton, and the tap shall close when the handle or pushbutton is released. The force required for operating the selfclosing tap for its full opening shall not exceed 70 N. For self-closing tap which operate against heads exceeding 2 m, a non-concussive function is essential and provision to this effect shall be made in the design.",
      "Finish": "All machining shall be so carried out that the parts are true to shape and are in correct adjustment when assembled. All machined surfaces shall be smoothly finished. If the body is of lead tin bronze, the outside surface shall be polished bright. 6. Tests 6.1 Shall withstand an internelly applied hydraulic pressure of 2MPa for a minimum period of 2 minutes without leakage or sweating. TABLE 1 MATERIALS FOR COMPONENTS FOR SELF – CLOSING TAPS SL. NO COMPONENT MATERIAL (1) (2) (3) i) Body, cover and lever or a) Grey cast iron lever or push-button b) Malleable iron castings c) Cast brass d) Leaded t in bronze ii) Spindle a) Mild steel b) Leaded tin bronze iii) Spindle spring a) Phosphor bronze wire b) Spring steel wire c) Any corrosion resisting alloy having a tensile strength of phosphor bro"
    },
    "content": "IS 1703: 2000 Water Fittings Copper Alloy Float Valves (Horizontal Plunger Type)\n(Fourth Revison)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1703: 1999 Specification for water fittings copper alloy float Valves\n(horizontal plunger type) (fourth revision)\nSP 21 : 2005 10.205\n1.\nScope – Requirements for self-closing taps with or without stuffing box.\n2.\nNominal size – 15 mm and 20 mm. Nominal size shall refer to the nominal bore of the inlet connection.\n3.\nMaterials – See Table 1\n4.\nDesign – The opening of the tap shall be performed by hand pressing of the handle up or down or turning\nsideways or by pressing in of the pushbutton, and the tap shall close when the handle or pushbutton is\nreleased. The force required for operating the selfclosing tap for its full opening shall not exceed 70 N.\nFor self-closing tap which operate against heads exceeding 2 m, a non-concussive function is essential\nand provision to this effect shall be made in the design.\n5.\nFinish – All machining shall be so carried out that the parts are true to shape and are in correct adjustment\nwhen assembled. All machined surfaces shall be smoothly finished. If the body is of lead tin bronze, the\noutside surface shall be polished bright.\n6.\nTests\n6.1 Shall withstand an internelly applied hydraulic\npressure of 2MPa for a minimum period of 2 minutes without leakage or sweating.\nTABLE 1 MATERIALS FOR COMPONENTS\nFOR SELF – CLOSING TAPS\nSL. NO\nCOMPONENT\nMATERIAL\n(1)\n(2) (3) i)\nBody, cover and lever or a) Grey cast iron\nlever or push-button b) Malleable iron castings c) Cast brass\nd) Leaded t in bronze ii)\nSpindle a) Mild steel\nb) Leaded tin bronze iii)\nSpindle spring a) Phosphor bronze wire b) Spring steel wire\nc) Any corrosion\nresisting alloy having a tensile strength of\nphosphor bronze wire.\niv)\nCage and valve\nLead tin bronze v)\nBrass washer\nBrass vi)\nSeat washer and\nAs specified in other washers\nvii)\nGasket a) Vulcanized fibre\nb) Any other equally suitable material"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1711: 1984",
    "title": "Self–Closing Taps For Water Supply Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding material, manufacture and workmanship, construction, finish and testiang of pillar taps.",
    "keywords": [
      "taps",
      "pillar",
      "capstan",
      "gland",
      "spindle",
      "body",
      "washer"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding material, manufacture and workmanship, construction, finish and testiang of pillar taps.",
      "Nominal Sizes": "15 mm and 20 mm. The nominal size of the pillar taps shall be designated by the nominal bore of the pipe outlet to which the tap is to be fitted.",
      "Materials": "See Table 1 4. Construction 4.1 For detailed dimensions of body, backnut, bannet and gland, capstan head, spindle and washerplate and screw threads refer to the standard. 4.2 Anti- splash device shall be fitted, if required",
      "Finished Mass": "Minimum finished mass of 15 mm and 20 mm size pillar taps shall be 650 g and 1175 g respectively. TABLE 1 MATERIALS FOR COMPONENTS PART OF PILLAR TAPS SL. NO. COMPONENT MATERIAL i) Body, body components, a) Cast brass capstan head and washer plate b) Leaded tin bronze ii) Spindle, gland, washer a) Brass rod plate and nut (extruded or rolled) b) Brass"
    },
    "content": "IS 1711: 1984 Self–Closing Taps For Water Supply Purposes\n(Second Revision)\nFor details information, refer to IS 1711 : 1984 Specification for self-closing taps for water supplypurposes\n(second revision)\n6.2 Endurance Test — Shall not show any leakage or\nfailure of the spring or other working parts after 50,000 operations\nSP 21 : 2005 10.206\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1975 : 1982 Specification forPillar taps for water supply purposes (second revision)\n1.\nScope — Requirements regarding material, manufacture and workmanship, construction, finish and\ntestiang of pillar taps.\n2.\nNominal Sizes — 15 mm and 20 mm. The nominal size of the pillar taps shall be designated by the nominal\nbore of the pipe outlet to which the tap is to be fitted.\n3.\nMaterials — See Table 1\n4.\nConstruction\n4.1 For detailed dimensions of body, backnut, bannet\nand gland, capstan head, spindle and washerplate and screw threads refer to the standard.\n4.2 Anti- splash device shall be fitted, if required\n5.\nFinished Mass — Minimum finished mass of 15 mm and 20 mm size pillar taps shall be 650 g and 1175 g\nrespectively.\nTABLE 1 MATERIALS FOR COMPONENTS\nPART OF PILLAR TAPS\nSL. NO.\nCOMPONENT\nMATERIAL\ni)\nBody, body components, a) Cast brass capstan head and washer\nplate b) Leaded tin bronze ii)\nSpindle, gland, washer a) Brass rod\nplate and nut (extruded or rolled) b) Brass"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1795: 1982",
    "title": "Pillar Taps For Water Supply Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "(Second Revision) 6. Finish — Shall be nickel-chromium plated. Shall be capable of taking high polish. 7. Testing — Shall withstand internally applied hydraulic pressure of 2 MPa (20Kgf/cm2) for 2 minutes without leakage or sweating. SP 21 : 2005",
    "keywords": [
      "polish",
      "taking",
      "internally",
      "sweating",
      "nickel",
      "chromium",
      "plated"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Finish": "Shall be nickel-chromium plated. Shall be capable of taking high polish.",
      "Tests": "Shall withstand internally applied hydraulic pressure of 2 MPa (20Kgf/cm2) for 2 minutes without leakage or sweating. SP 21 : 2005 10.207"
    },
    "content": "IS 1795: 1982 Pillar Taps For Water Supply Purposes\n(Second Revision)\n6.\nFinish — Shall be nickel-chromium plated. Shall be capable of taking high polish.\n7.\nTesting — Shall withstand internally applied hydraulic pressure of 2 MPa (20Kgf/cm2) for 2 minutes\nwithout leakage or sweating.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.207"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2692: 1989",
    "title": "Ferrules For Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Lays down nominal sizes and requirements regarding material, manufactrue and workmanship, construction, sampling and testing of copper alloy screwdown ferrules for use on water supply mains.",
    "keywords": [
      "ferrules",
      "washer",
      "leaded",
      "copper",
      "manufactrue",
      "extrudedrolled",
      "diecast"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Lays down nominal sizes and requirements regarding material, manufactrue and workmanship, construction, sampling and testing of copper alloy screwdown ferrules for use on water supply mains. 2. Nominal Size 8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40 and 50 mm.",
      "Tests": "Every ferrule, complete with its component parts, shall withstand hydraulic pressure of at least 1.5 MPa, applied for two minutes, and during this period it shall neither leak nor sweat. TABLE 1 MATERIALS FOR DIFFERENT PARTS OF FERRULES SL. COMPONENT MATERIAL (1) (2) (3) i) Body, plug and Leaded tin cap bronze ii) Washer plate Brass and nut (extrudedrolled, cast, diecast) Leaded brass iii) Resilient washer Leather Vulcanized fibre, rubber iv) Copper washer Copper Note — For detailed dimensions refer to the standard. For detailed informaton, refer to IS 2692 : 1989 Specification for ferrules for water services (second revision) SP 21 : 2005 10.208"
    },
    "content": "IS 2692: 1989 Ferrules For Water Services\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Lays down nominal sizes and requirements regarding material, manufactrue and workmanship,\nconstruction, sampling and testing of copper alloy screwdown ferrules for use on water supply mains.\n2.\nNominal Size\n8, 10, 15, 20, 25, 32, 40 and 50 mm.\n3.\nMaterials – See Table 1.\n4.\nTesting – Every ferrule, complete with its component parts, shall withstand hydraulic pressure of\nat least 1.5 MPa, applied for two minutes, and during this period it shall neither leak nor sweat.\nTABLE 1 MATERIALS FOR DIFFERENT PARTS\nOF FERRULES\nSL.\nCOMPONENT\nMATERIAL\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\ni)\nBody, plug and\nLeaded tin cap\nbronze ii)\nWasher plate\nBrass and nut\n(extrudedrolled, cast, diecast) Leaded brass\niii)\nResilient washer\nLeather Vulcanized fibre, rubber\niv)\nCopper washer\nCopper\nNote — For detailed dimensions refer to the standard.\nFor detailed informaton, refer to IS 2692 : 1989 Specification for ferrules for water services (second revision)\nSP 21 : 2005 10.208"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3004: 1979",
    "title": "Plug Cocks For Water Supply Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements of plug cocks of 15 mm, 20 mm and 25 mm nominal size with a key head for use underground for water supply purposes up to 1 MPa working pressure.",
    "keywords": [
      "plug",
      "chain",
      "union",
      "stay",
      "tail",
      "cocks",
      "body"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for materials, manufacture, construction, testing and finish of waste plug, chain and stay suitable for use in wash-basins and sinks complying IS 771 (Part 2) 1985*, IS 2556 (Part 4): 1994+ *IS 2556 (Part 5) :1994‡ . Dimensions of the waste plug have been specified so as to suit waste fittings covered in IS 2963: 1979. 2. Requirements",
      "Materials, Manufacture And Construction": "a) Waste plug — Rubber of hard and durable quality or any other equally suitable material. b) Chain—Phosphor bronze or brass wire of minimum diameter 1.8 mm with brazed oval links approximately 13 mm long (any other equally suitable corrosion resistant material allowable). Overall length of chain not less than 300 mm. c) Stay— Chain stay shall be bolt type or screw type, made of brass or other corrosion resistant material. Note — For details refer to Fig. 1 of the standard. 2.2 Load Test — Shall withstand 20 kgf without deformation. 2.3 Finish — Chain and stay shall be chromium plated."
    },
    "content": "IS 3004: 1979 Plug Cocks For Water Supply Purposes\n(First Revision)\nnuts, union nuts and tail pipes.\n2.4 Taper of the side of plug and body shall be 1 in 15\n(1 in 7/5 included angle).\n2.5 The larger end of the plug taper shall project 6 ± 1.5\nmm from the body.\n2.6 Finish of Body Ends — Body ends intended for\ndirect plumbing to lead pipe shall be finished by machining and grinding.\nNote — For details of nut and tail pipe, when the outlet has\nunion for lead, refer to the standard.\n2.7 Hydraulic Test — Shall be tested for body and seat\ntests under internal hydraulic pressure of at least 2 MPa and 1 MPa respectively.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3004 : 1979 Specification for plug cocks for water supply purpose (first revison)\n1.\nScope – Requirements of plug cocks of 15 mm, 20 mm and 25 mm nominal size with a key head for use\nunderground for water supply purposes up to 1 MPa working pressure.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Types of End — Plug cocks shall have each body\nend suitable for one of the following types of joints:\na) Plain ends for lead (wiped) joint, b) Socket end for capillary solder joint,\nc) Union and tail piece for lead (wiped) joint, d) Union and tail pipe for capillary solder joint, and\ne) Union for copper tube compression joint.\n2.1.1 Ends for (b), (d) and (e) by mutual agreement.\n2.2 Nominal Size — 15, 20 and 25 mm. Note — For detailed dimensions refer to the standard.\n2.3 Materials — Cast brass and leaded tin bronze for\nbodies and components. Brass rod for washers, plug\nSP 21 : 2005 10.209\n1.\nScope – Requirements for materials, manufacture, construction, testing and finish of waste plug, chain\nand stay suitable for use in wash-basins and sinks complying IS 771 (Part 2) 1985*, IS 2556 (Part 4): 1994+\n*IS 2556 (Part 5) :1994‡ . Dimensions of the waste plug have been specified so as to suit waste fittings covered\nin IS 2963: 1979.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1. Materials, Manufacture and Construction–\na) Waste plug — Rubber of hard and durable quality or any other equally suitable material.\nb) Chain—Phosphor bronze or brass wire of minimum diameter 1.8 mm with brazed oval links\napproximately 13 mm long (any other equally suitable corrosion resistant material allowable).\nOverall length of chain not less than 300 mm.\nc) Stay— Chain stay shall be bolt type or screw type, made of brass or other corrosion resistant\nmaterial. Note — For details refer to Fig. 1 of the standard.\n2.2 Load Test — Shall withstand 20 kgf without\ndeformation.\n2.3 Finish — Chain and stay shall be chromium plated."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3311: 1979",
    "title": "Waste Plug And Its Accessories For Sinks",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements of washers for water services suitable for use in bib taps, stop valves, self- closing taps, flush valves, pillar taps and ferrules, covered under respective standards.",
    "keywords": [
      "washer",
      "basins",
      "wash",
      "vitreous",
      "washers",
      "taps",
      "sinks"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of washers for water services suitable for use in bib taps, stop valves, self- closing taps, flush valves, pillar taps and ferrules, covered under respective standards. 2. Effects on Potable Water and Metals 2.1 Effect on Potable Water – Material used for tap washer shall not impart any taste to water having a residual cholride content not exceeding 0.2 mg/l or have any toxic effects or foster growth of bacteria, it shall also not impart colour when exposed for a second time in normal potable water for 24 hours in a glass containing 250 ml of water at 10º and 45ºC. 2.2 Effect on Metal – The material of the washer shall not corrode the metal seating or the washer plate sufficiently to impair the performance and life of a tap or valve. 3. Materials a) Synthetic or natural vulcan"
    },
    "content": "IS 3311: 1979 Waste Plug And Its Accessories For Sinks\nAND WASH-BASINS.\n(First Revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3311 : 1979 Specification for waste plug and its accessories for sinks and wash-basins (first revision).\n* Glazed fireclay sanitary appliances, Part 2 Specific requirements for kitchen and laboratorysinks (second revision)\nt Vitreous sanitary appliances (Vitreous China) Part 4 specific requirements of wash basins (third revision)\n‡ Vitreous sanitary appliances(Vitreous China) Part 5 specific requirements of laboratory sinks (third revision)\n§ Copper alloy waste fitting for wash basins and sinks (first revision)\nSP 21 : 2005 10.210\n1.\nScope – Requirements of washers for water services suitable for use in bib taps, stop valves, self-\nclosing taps, flush valves, pillar taps and ferrules, covered under respective standards.\n2.\nEffects on Potable Water and Metals\n2.1 Effect on Potable Water – Material used for tap\nwasher shall not impart any taste to water having a residual cholride content not exceeding 0.2 mg/l or have\nany toxic effects or foster growth of bacteria, it shall also not impart colour when exposed for a second time\nin normal potable water for 24 hours in a glass containing\n250 ml of water at 10º and 45ºC.\n2.2 Effect on Metal – The material of the washer shall\nnot corrode the metal seating or the washer plate sufficiently to impair the performance and life of a tap or\nvalve.\n3.\nMaterials a) Synthetic or natural vulcanized rubber\nb) Vegetable tanned hydraulic leather – The moisture content shall be between 15 percent\nand 20 percent.\nc) Polyethylene high density d) Vulcanized fibre – The material shall comply with\nthe following requirements :\na) Tensile strength, Min 55 MPa;\nb) Density, Min 1.10g/cm3;\nc) Shear strength, Min 55 MPa\n4.\nDimensions\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF WASHERS\nAll dimensions in millimetres. Nominal\nThickness diameter of washer Size of of Washer\nTap/Valve Min\nInternal*\nExternal Min Max (1)\n(2)\n(3) (4) (5) 8\n2.5\n3\n14.3\n14.5\n10\n4.0\n4\n15.9\n16.1\n15\n4.0\n5\n19.0\n19.3\n20\n4.0\n6\n25.4\n25.6\n25\n5.0\n6\n33.0\n33.6\n32\n5.0\n7\n40.1\n40.6\n40\n6.5\n8\n47.7\n48.3\n50\n6.5\n10\n63.5\n64.2\n* A tolerance of mm shall be permitted.\nThe variation in thickness in the case of leather washers shall not exceed ± 5 percent.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4346: 1982 Specification for washers for use with fittings for water services\n(first revision)\n+ 0.5\n– 0.0"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4346: 1982",
    "title": "Washers For Use With Fittings For Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "(First Revision) SP 21 : 2005",
    "keywords": [
      "washers",
      "use",
      "fittings",
      "water",
      "services"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 4346: 1982 Washers For Use With Fittings For Water Services\n(First Revision)\nSP 21 : 2005 10.211"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5312 (Part 1): 2004",
    "title": "Swing Check Type Reflux",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements for flanged reflux valves of single door, swing check type used for water works purposes of sizes 50 to 600 mm.",
    "keywords": [
      "door",
      "valves",
      "reflux",
      "hinge",
      "leaded",
      "tin",
      "bronze"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for flanged reflux valves of multi-door, swing check type used for water works purpose of sizes from 400 to 1200 mm.",
      "Coating": "Shall be smooth, glossy and tenacious, sufficiently hard so as not to flow when exposed to a temperature of 77oC and not so brittle at a temperature of 15oC as to chip off when scratched lightly with a point of a per knife. Note— For alternative material see Table of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 5312 (Part1) : 2004. Specification for swing check type reflux (nonreturn) valves for water works purposes Part 1- Single door pattern (second revision). 7. Testing 7.1 Hydrostatic Body Test — Shall not show any leakage or permanent distortion under the specified pressure . 7.2 Hydrostatic Seat Test — shall show no leakage when subjected to the prescribed pressure. SP 21 : 2005 10.213",
      "Class": "PN 0.6 and PN 1.0 where PN is Nominal Pressure defined as the maximum permissible gauge working pressure in MPa.",
      "Nominal Sizes": "400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 750, 800, 900, 1000, 1100 and 1 200 mm. The nominal size shall refer to the nominal bore of the water way. 4. Materials Sl. No. Component Material (1) (2) (3) i) Body with hinge Grey cast iron and diaphragm ii) Hinge pin High tensile brass iii) Bolts Carbon steel iv) Nuts, nuts for Carbon hinge pins steel v) Bearing bushes Leaded tin bronze vi) Face and seat Leaded tin rings bronze vii) Flange jointing Rubber material"
    },
    "content": "IS 5312 (Part 1): 2004 Swing Check Type Reflux\n(NON-RETURN) VALVES FOR WATER WORKS PURPOSES\nPART 1 SINGLE - DOOR PATTERN\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope — Requirements for flanged reflux valves of single door, swing check type used for water works\npurposes of sizes 50 to 600 mm.\n2.\nNominal Pressure Sizes of Valves Nominal Pressure (PN) mm\nMPa\n50 to 125\n1.6\n150 to 300\n1.0\n350 to 600\n0.6\n3.\nNominal Sizes\n50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 and 600 mm.\nThe nominal size shall refer to the nominal bore of the water way. The actual bore at any point shall not be less\nthan the nominal size.\n4.\nMaterials\nTABLE 1MATERIALS FOR DIFFERENT COMPONENT\nPARTS OF REFLUX VALVES\nSl. No.\nComponent\nMaterial (1)\n(2)\n(3)\ni)\nBody, cover, door\nGrey cast bearing holder and\niron door face disc\nii) Hinge pin, door pin\nStainless steel and door suspension\niii)\nBody seat rings\nLeaded in bronze iv)\nDoor face ring leaded tin bronze\nv)\nBearing bushes/\nLeaded tin bronze\nBearing block vi)\nPlugs for hinge pin/\nLeaded tin bronze Air release plug vii)\nBolts\nCarbon steel viii)\nNuts\nCarbon steel xi)\nGaskets\nRubber x)\nHinges\nGrey cast iron\nNote— For alternative material See Table of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5312 (Part1) : 1984. Specification for Swing check type reflux (nonreturn) valves for water works purposes- Part 1- single door pattern (first revision).\n5.\nManufacture\n5.1 All the parts of the valves shall be desinged so as\nto withstand the specified test pressures.\n5.2 The area for flow passage at any cross-section in\nthe valve shall not be less than the area of the nominal bore of the valve.\n5.3 The design of hinge, hinge pin, door and door\nsuspension shall be such to ensure free swinging of the door.\n5.4 The design of valves used in verticl pipe lines shall\nbe such that in the working position the valves positively close when the flow in the pipe comes to a\nstop.\n5.5 The thickness of metal in all castings shall be\nmaintained as uniform as possible throughout any section to avoid strains set up by sudden changes of\ncross - section.\n5.6 Each reflux valve shall carry in arrow, very\nprominently to indicate the direction of flow.\n5.7 Unless otherwise specified in the contract or order,\nthe flanges and their dimensions of drilling shall be in accordance with IS 1535.\n5.8 The inside diameter of the body sing shall not be\nless than the nominal bore of the valve.\n5.9 Doors and Hings - The design of the doors and\nhings shall be suitable so as the withstand satisfactaly the repuated impact likely to occur during service\n5.10 Door faces - The minimum thickness of door shall\nbe 5 mm.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.212 Note — For detailed dimensions and tolerances refer to\nthe standard.\n6.\nCoating – Shall be smooth, glossy and tenacious, sufficiently hard so as not to flow when exposed to a\ntemperature of 77oC and not so brittle at a temperature of 15oC as to chip off when scratched lightly with a\npoint of a per knife.\nNote— For alternative material see Table of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5312 (Part1) : 2004. Specification for swing check type reflux (nonreturn) valves for water works purposes Part 1- Single door pattern (second revision).\n7.\nTesting\n7.1 Hydrostatic Body Test — Shall not show any\nleakage or permanent distortion under the specified pressure .\n7.2 Hydrostatic Seat Test — shall show no leakage\nwhen subjected to the prescribed pressure.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.213\n1.\nScope – Requirements for flanged reflux valves of multi-door, swing check type used for water works\npurpose of sizes from 400 to 1200 mm.\n2.\nClass – PN 0.6 and PN 1.0 where PN is Nominal\nPressure defined as the maximum permissible gauge working pressure in MPa.\n3.\nNominal Sizes-\n400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 750, 800, 900, 1000, 1100 and\n1 200 mm. The nominal size shall refer to the nominal bore of the water way.\n4.\nMaterials\nSl. No.\nComponent\nMaterial\n(1)\n(2) (3)\ni)\nBody with hinge\nGrey cast iron and diaphragm\nii)\nHinge pin\nHigh tensile brass iii)\nBolts\nCarbon steel iv)\nNuts, nuts for\nCarbon hinge pins\nsteel v)\nBearing bushes\nLeaded tin bronze vi)\nFace and seat\nLeaded tin rings bronze\nvii)\nFlange jointing\nRubber material"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5312 (Part 2): 1986",
    "title": "Swing Check Type Reflux",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding materials, manufacture, workmanship, constructions, dimensions, finish and testing of chromium plated copper alloy nonrising spindle type fancy single taps, combination tap assembly and valves, suitable for operation from 0.1 MPa to 0.5 MPa pressure at maximum temperature of 650C.",
    "keywords": [
      "brass",
      "tap",
      "forged",
      "bronze",
      "tubes",
      "valves",
      "outlet"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Coating": "Shall be smooth-glossy and tenacious sufficiently hard so as not to flow when scratched lightly with the point of a pen knife. 7. Testing: 7.2 Body Test – Shall not show leakage or permanent distortion of any coponent when subjected to the prescribed test. For detailed information, refer to IS : 5312 (Part 2) : 1986 Specification for swing check type reflux (non-return) valves for waterworks purposes Part 2- Multi-door door pattern. SP 21 : 2005 10.214",
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding materials, manufacture, workmanship, constructions, dimensions, finish and testing of chromium plated copper alloy nonrising spindle type fancy single taps, combination tap assembly and valves, suitable for operation from 0.1 MPa to 0.5 MPa pressure at maximum temperature of 650C. 2. Materials: Sl.No. Component Material 1. Body, body components, a) Castbrass inlet tubes, nozzle, bonnet b) Die cast and back nuts brass c) Forged brass d) Leaded tin bronze e) Brass rods f) Brass tubes g) Copper tubes 2. Flanges a) Castrass b) Die cast brass c) Forged brass d) Leaded tin bronze e) Brass rods f) Brass sheet 3. Spindle, glands, a) Brass rods washer plate, nuts, (Extruded or rolled) screws and pin b) Forged brass 4. Circlip, wire locks a) Phosphor bronze sheet b) Phosphor b",
      "Nominal Sizes": "Pillar tap 15 mm Bib tap 15 mm Combination tap assembly 15 mm Stop valve 15 mm and 20 mm Angle stop valve 15 mm and 20 mm 4. Construction 4.1 The inlet and outlet connection threads whether internal or external, shall be a pipe thread. 4.2 Area of waterway throughout the body of a tap or valve shall not be less than the area of a circle of diameter equal to the minimum bore of seating unless otherwise specified. 4.3 The internal diameter of a combined outlet shall not be less than 15 mm 4.4 Flow straightening and aerating device may be filled in taps if required. 5. Dimensions 5.1 Minimum Thickness – Minimum of 2.0 mm . See also 7. In the case of single tap and combination tap assemblies the open outlet nozzle portion may be reduced to 1.6 mm in case of castings and forging and to 0.6 mm w"
    },
    "content": "IS 5312 (Part 2): 1986 Swing Check Type Reflux\n(NON-RETURN) VALVES FOR WATER WORKS PURPOSES\nPART 2 MULTI - DOOR PATTERN\n(First Revision) Note— For alternative material see Table 1of the standard.\n5.\nDesign and Manufacture\n5.1 Body may be made in two parts-inlet shell (having\nduck foot support) and outlet shell.\n5.2 Area of waterway through the multidoor in the\ndiaphragm shall not be less than the bore area except that this area may be reduced by not more than 15\npercent for any properietory designs.\n5.3 Minimum two number of doors shall be provided in\nthe diaphran plate.\n5.4 By-pass shall be made for connection if required.\n5.5 Minimum finished mass of valves shall be as\nprescribed.\n6.\nCoating — Shall be smooth-glossy and tenacious sufficiently hard so as not to flow when scratched lightly\nwith the point of a pen knife.\n7.\nTesting:\n7.2 Body Test – Shall not show leakage or permanent\ndistortion of any coponent when subjected to the prescribed test.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS : 5312 (Part 2) : 1986 Specification for swing check type reflux (non-return)\nvalves for waterworks purposes Part 2- Multi-door door pattern.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.214\n1.\nScope – Requirements regarding materials, manufacture, workmanship, constructions, dimensions,\nfinish and testing of chromium plated copper alloy nonrising spindle type fancy single taps, combination tap\nassembly and valves, suitable for operation from 0.1\nMPa to 0.5 MPa pressure at maximum temperature of\n650C.\n2.\nMaterials:\nSl.No. Component\nMaterial\n1.\nBody, body components, a) Castbrass\ninlet tubes, nozzle, bonnet b) Die cast and back\nnuts brass c) Forged brass\nd) Leaded tin bronze e) Brass rods\nf) Brass tubes g) Copper tubes\n2.\nFlanges a) Castrass\nb) Die cast brass c) Forged brass\nd) Leaded tin bronze e) Brass rods\nf) Brass sheet\n3.\nSpindle, glands, a) Brass rods\nwasher plate, nuts,\n(Extruded or rolled)\nscrews and pin b) Forged brass\n4.\nCirclip, wire locks a) Phosphor bronze sheet b) Phosphor bronze wire c) Stainless steel\n5.\nO ring a) Synthetic rubber\n6.\nGasket and seat a) Acrylo Nitrillebuta\nwasher diene rubber\nb) Neoprene rubber c) Synthetic butadiene rubber (S.B.R.)\n7.\nKnob, knob components, a) Cast brass\ndivertor & components b) Die cast brass\nc) Forged brass d) Leaded tin bronze\ne) Brassrods f) Zinc\ng) Plastics\n3.\nNominal Sizes –\nPillar tap\n15 mm\nBib tap\n15 mm\nCombination tap assembly\n15 mm\nStop valve\n15 mm and\n20 mm\nAngle stop valve\n15 mm and\n20 mm\n4.\nConstruction\n4.1 The inlet and outlet connection threads whether\ninternal or external, shall be a pipe thread.\n4.2 Area of waterway throughout the body of a tap or\nvalve shall not be less than the area of a circle of diameter equal to the minimum bore of seating unless otherwise\nspecified.\n4.3 The internal diameter of a combined outlet shall not\nbe less than 15 mm\n4.4 Flow straightening and aerating device may be filled\nin taps if required.\n5.\nDimensions\n5.1 Minimum Thickness – Minimum of 2.0 mm . See\nalso 7. In the case of single tap and combination tap assemblies the open outlet nozzle portion may be\nreduced to 1.6 mm in case of castings and forging and to 0.6 mm when drawn tubes are used. Note — For detailed dimensions, refer to the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8931: 1993",
    "title": "Copper Alloy Fancy Single Taps Combination Tap Assembly And Stop Valves For Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "(First Revision) SP 21 : 2005",
    "keywords": [
      "tap",
      "stop",
      "assembly",
      "valve",
      "combination",
      "taps",
      "valves"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Pressure Resistance Characteristic": "No permanent deformation in the part of the taps and valves situated upstream or down stream shall be produced 7.3 Hydraulic Characteristic (Flow Rate) – Shall not be less than a) 12.l/min for 15 mm nominal size single and combination tap and valve. b) 23.l/min for 20 mm nominal size.",
      "Mechanical Strength Characterist": "No permanent deformation or loosing of any part of the tap and valve.",
      "Finish": "The significant surfaces of taps, combination tap assembly and stop valves shall be nickle-chromium plated. However, the body of concealed stop valve and side stop valve of pillar mounting combination tap assembly may be polished bright or may have an unpolished surface, as 'Cast' finish. 7. Performance Tests",
      "Water Tightness Characteristsic": "Shall not show any leakage of water or escape of airbubbles through the walls of the body, bonnet and diverto assembly. For detailed information, refer to IS 8931 : 1993. Specification for copper alloy fancy single taps, combination tap assembly and stop valves for water services (first revision) SP 21 : 2005 10.216"
    },
    "content": "IS 8931: 1993 Copper Alloy Fancy Single Taps Combination Tap Assembly And Stop Valves For Water Services\n(First Revision)\nSP 21 : 2005 10.215\n7.2. Pressure Resistance Characteristic — No permanent deformation in the part of the taps and valves\nsituated upstream or down stream shall be produced\n7.3 Hydraulic Characteristic (Flow Rate) – Shall not\nbe less than a) 12.l/min for 15 mm nominal size single and\ncombination tap and valve.\nb) 23.l/min for 20 mm nominal size.\n7.4. Mechanical Strength Characterist – No permanent deformation or loosing of any part of the tap and valve.\n6.\nFinish – The significant surfaces of taps, combination tap assembly and stop valves shall be\nnickle-chromium plated. However, the body of concealed stop valve and side stop valve of pillar mounting\ncombination tap assembly may be polished bright or may have an unpolished surface, as 'Cast' finish.\n7.\nPerformance Tests\n7.1. Water Tightness Characteristsic — Shall not show any leakage of water or escape of airbubbles through\nthe walls of the body, bonnet and diverto assembly.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8931 : 1993. Specification for copper alloy fancy single taps, combination tap assembly and stop valves for water services (first revision)\nSP 21 : 2005 10.216"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9338: 1984",
    "title": "Cast Iron Screw-Down Stop Valves And Stop And Check Valves For Water Works Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements for flanged cast iron screwdown stop valves from 15 to 300 mm nominal sizes of the following types used for water supply up to 450 C : Globe stop valve; Angle stop valve; oblique stop valve; Globe stop and check value and Angle stop and check valves.",
    "keywords": [
      "valves",
      "disc",
      "seat",
      "valve",
      "stop",
      "body",
      "leaded"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regading material, construction and workmanship, performance and marking of pressure reducing valves of different sizes for domestic water supply system suitable for maximum inlet pressure of 1.7225 MPa. The valves covered by this standard are self-contained, direct acting, single seat, diaph gram type. Valves with integral or separate strainers connected to the valve inlet are included. 2. Nominal sizes 15 mm (1/2), 20 mm (3/4), 25 mm (1), 32 mm (1.1/4), 40 mm (1.1/2) and 50 mm (2). Note — The figures within the brackets refer to the sizesand designations of the threaded end 3. Materials Sl.No. Component Material i) Body, Disc holder, Leaded-tin bronze Bottom cover, Drain plug, Diaphragm retaining disc. Spring discs and Check nuts ii) Diaphragm cover Cast iron and spring cham",
      "Nominal Pressure": "Valves shall be designated by nominal pressure (PN) defined as the maximum permissible gauge working pressure in MPa for the sizes indicated as follow: Nominal Pressure (PN) Nominal Sizes MPa mm 1.0 200 to 300 1.6 Up to and including150 3. Nominal Sizes : 15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250 and 300 mm. The nominal size shall refer to the nominal bore of thewater way. Note – For dimensions, refer to Figs 1 to 5 and Table 2 to 5 of the Standard. 4. Material Sl.No. Component Material (1) (2) (3) i) Body, bonnet, Cast iron handwheel,gland (one piece) and back seat intergal ii) a) Fasteners/bolting Carbon steel b) Nut -doiii) Stem a) High tensile brass b) Stainless Steel iv) Body seat a) Leaded tin ring/disc bronze facing ring b) Stainless Steel v) Solid disc a) Leaded tin w",
      "Coating": "Shall be smooth glossy and sufficiently tenacious so as not to flow when exposed to temperature of 77ºC and not become so brittle to a temperature of 15ºC so as to chip off when scratched lightly with the point of a pen knife.",
      "Tests": "Each valve shall be subjected to hydrostatic test as per following Table 1 and the value shall show no sign of leakage. SP 21 : 2005 10.217 Note — For method of test refer to Appendix B of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 9338 : 1984 Specification for Cast Iron screw-down stop valves and stops and check valves for water works purposes (first revision) TEST PRESSURE (GAUAGE) AND TEST DURATOIN OF VALVES PN Rating of Valve Test Test Pressure (Gauge), Min Test Duration, Min (1) (2) (3) (4) MPa MPa min 1.6 Body test 2.4 5 Seat test 1.6 2 Back seat test 2.4 5 (Where specified) 1.0 Body test 1.5 5 Seat test 1.0 2 Back seat test 1.5 5 (Where specified) SP 21 : 2005 10.218"
    },
    "content": "IS 9338: 1984 Cast Iron Screw-Down Stop Valves And Stop And Check Valves For Water Works Purposes\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements for flanged cast iron screwdown stop valves from 15 to 300 mm nominal sizes of\nthe following types used for water supply up to 450 C :\nGlobe stop valve; Angle stop valve; oblique stop valve; Globe stop and check value and Angle\nstop and check valves.\n2. Nominal Pressure – Valves shall be designated by nominal pressure (PN) defined as the maximum\npermissible gauge working pressure in MPa for the sizes indicated as follow: Nominal Pressure (PN)\nNominal Sizes\nMPa mm\n1.0 200 to 300\n1.6 Up to and including150\n3.\nNominal Sizes :\n15, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250 and 300 mm. The nominal size shall refer to the\nnominal bore of thewater way.\nNote – For dimensions, refer to Figs 1 to 5 and Table 2 to 5\nof the Standard.\n4.\nMaterial\nSl.No. Component\nMaterial\n(1) (2) (3)\ni)\nBody, bonnet,\nCast iron handwheel,gland\n(one piece) and back seat intergal\nii)\na) Fasteners/bolting\nCarbon steel b) Nut -doiii)\nStem a) High tensile brass\nb) Stainless Steel iv)\nBody seat a) Leaded tin\nring/disc bronze\nfacing ring b) Stainless Steel\nv)\nSolid disc a) Leaded tin\nwith integralface bronze\nb) Stainless Steel vi)\nDisc with separate\nCast iron facing rings\nvii) Glad packing a) Jute and hemp\nb) Asbestos viii) Bonnet\nCompressed gasket\nasbestos fibre ix)\nDisc stem nut, a) Leaded tin bronze\nback seat bushing b) Stainless Steel\n(where separate), gland (two piece design)\nx) Yoke bush a) Leaded tin bronze\nb) High tensile brass c) SG iron\n5.\nManufacture\n5.1 Area of the body end parts shall not be less than\nthe area of the circle of diameter equivalent to the nominal size of the valve except that this area may be\nreduced by not more than 15 percent though the seats to permit use of disc guides from below.\n5.2 The stems shall have trapezoidal threads.\n5.3 The overall heights of the valves shall not exceed\nthe specified valves.\n6.\nCoating – Shall be smooth glossy and sufficiently tenacious so as not to flow when exposed to\ntemperature of 77ºC and not become so brittle to a temperature of 15ºC so as to chip off when scratched\nlightly with the point of a pen knife.\n7.\nTesting – Each valve shall be subjected to hydrostatic test as per following Table 1 and the value\nshall show no sign of leakage.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.217\nNote — For method of test refer to Appendix B of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 9338 : 1984 Specification for Cast Iron screw-down stop valves and stops and check valves for water works purposes (first revision)\nTEST PRESSURE (GAUAGE) AND TEST DURATOIN OF VALVES\nPN Rating of Valve\nTest\nTest Pressure (Gauge), Min\nTest Duration, Min\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\nMPa\nMPa min\n1.6\nBody test\n2.4\n5\nSeat test\n1.6\n2\nBack seat test\n2.4\n5\n(Where specified)\n1.0\nBody test\n1.5\n5\nSeat test\n1.0\n2\nBack seat test\n1.5\n5\n(Where specified)\nSP 21 : 2005 10.218\n1.\nScope – Requirements regading material, construction and workmanship, performance and\nmarking of pressure reducing valves of different sizes for domestic water supply system suitable for maximum\ninlet pressure of 1.7225 MPa. The valves covered by this standard are self-contained, direct acting, single\nseat, diaph gram type. Valves with integral or separate strainers connected to the valve inlet are included.\n2.\nNominal sizes\n15 mm (1/2), 20 mm (3/4), 25 mm (1), 32 mm (1.1/4),\n40 mm (1.1/2) and 50 mm (2).\nNote — The figures within the brackets refer to the sizesand\ndesignations of the threaded end\n3.\nMaterials\nSl.No. Component\nMaterial i)\nBody, Disc holder,\nLeaded-tin bronze\nBottom cover, Drain plug,\nDiaphragm retaining disc.\nSpring discs and Check nuts ii)\nDiaphragm cover\nCast iron and spring chamber\niii)\nBody seat ring\nChromium steel\n(when replaceable), adjusting screw and\nvalve stem iv)\nTommy bar\nMild steel v)\nDiaphragm and\nSynthetic rubber valve disc\nvi)\nGaskets\nCompressed asbestos fibre\nvii)\nFasteners\nSteel viii)\nSprings\nCarbon steel ix)\nStrainer screen\nStainless steel\n4.\nConstruction\n4.1 Body and components shall be so designed as to\nprovide ample. resiotance to distortion under maximum working pressure.\n4.2 Valves shall have screwed female ends threaded\nfor connection to pipe line."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9739: 1981",
    "title": "Pressure Reducing Valves For Domestic Water Supply System",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements for flush valves, flush pipes and stop valves for water closet and urinals.",
    "keywords": [
      "valve",
      "reduced",
      "pressure",
      "reducing",
      "valves",
      "flush",
      "inlet"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for flush valves, flush pipes and stop valves for water closet and urinals.",
      "Materials": "See Table 1. Sl.No. Component Material (1) (2) (3) i) Body of flush valve a) Cast brass b) Die casting brass ii) Flush pipe a) Steel tubes seamless or welded completely protected, inside and outside, either by vitreous enamelling (see IS 3972-1968) or hot dip galvanishing (see IS2629-1985) b) PVC c) High density polythylene d) Lead iii) Washers Rubber iv) Springs a) Phosphor bronze b) Stainless steel v) Stop valve Cast brass vi) Spindle to stop valve Extruded brass lever or flush valve",
      "Nominal Sizes": "15, 25 and 32 mm. Nominal size shall be the nominal bore of the supplypipe to which the valve is connected. For detailed information, refer to IS 9758:1981 Specification for flush valves and fittings for water closets and urinals."
    },
    "content": "IS 9739: 1981 Pressure Reducing Valves For Domestic Water Supply System\n(Third Revision)\n4.3 Screen of the strainer shall have a minimum\nunobstructed open flow area (total area of holes ) equal to or greater than twice the nominal pipe flow area. The\nmaximum hole demension of the screen shall not exceed\n1/12 of the valve orifice escape diameter.\n5. Performance Requirements\n5.1 Hydrostatic Test – When subjected to hydrostatic\npressure of 1.722 5 MPa at its inlet and an equal back pressure on the reduced pressure side, there shall be no\nleakage or distortion of parts that will affect the performance of the valve.\n5.2 Reduced Pressure Deviation – The reduced\npressure delivered by the reducing valve shall not deviate by more than 0.007 MPa for every 0.07 MPa\nchange in the inlet pressure.\n5.3 Minimum Reduced Pressure – When water flows\nthrough a pressure reducing valve at the rate given in\nTable 2, with the inlet pressure being maintained at\n1.7225 MPa the valve shall be capable of adjustment to\na reduced pressure as low as 0.17225 MPa.\nTABLE 1 CAPACITIES OF PRESSURE\nREDUCING VALVES\nNominal size (mm) 15 20 25 32 40 50\nFlow (1/s) 0.63 1.05 1.58 2.65 3.46 4.89\n5.4 Reduced Pressure Adjustment Range — The\nreducing valve shall be provided with a reduced pressure adjustment range of not less than 0.172 25 MPA.\n5.5 Capacity – The reducing valve shall have minimum\ncapacity as shown in Table 1 when maintaining a reduced pressure of 0.117 1 MPa less than its no-flow set pressure\nand the inlet pressure maintained at 0.344 5 MPa higher than the reduced point pressure.\nNote— For methods of tests, refer 6 to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 9739 : 1981 specification for pressure reducing valves for domestic water supply system.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.219\n1.\nScope – Requirements for flush valves, flush pipes and stop valves for water closet and urinals.\n2.\nMaterials — See Table 1.\nSl.No. Component\nMaterial\n(1) (2) (3)\ni)\nBody of flush valve a) Cast brass\nb) Die casting brass ii)\nFlush pipe a) Steel tubes seamless\nor welded completely protected, inside and\noutside, either by vitreous enamelling\n(see IS 3972-1968) or hot dip galvanishing\n(see IS2629-1985)\nb) PVC c) High density polythylene d) Lead\niii)\nWashers\nRubber iv)\nSprings a) Phosphor bronze\nb) Stainless steel v)\nStop valve\nCast brass vi)\nSpindle to stop valve\nExtruded brass lever or flush valve\n3.\nNominal Size – 15, 25 and 32 mm. Nominal size shall be the nominal bore of the supplypipe to which\nthe valve is connected.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 9758:1981 Specification for flush valves and fittings for water closets and urinals."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9758: 1981",
    "title": "Flush Valves And Fittings For Water Closets And Urinal",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements for polyethylene spherical floats suitable for float valves of nominal sizes of 15, 20, 25, 32, 40 and 50 mm. Note— Nominal size of the float is related with the nominal size of the float valve with which it is to be used",
    "keywords": [
      "float",
      "floats",
      "insert",
      "discharge",
      "litres",
      "litre",
      "valve"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Finish": "The outside of the body shall be polished bright and chromium plated. The plating shall be capable of taking high polish which shall not easily tarnish or scaled off. For concealed work concealed parts need not be plated. ± 0.5 litre SP 21 : 2005 10.220",
      "Scope": "Requirements for polyethylene spherical floats suitable for float valves of nominal sizes of 15, 20, 25, 32, 40 and 50 mm. Note— Nominal size of the float is related with the nominal size of the float valve with which it is to be used",
      "Materials": "High density polyethylene (HDPE) used for the manufacture of floats shall conform to Designation PEBW A50 T 090 or PEBN A50 T090 of IS 7328 : 1992+. The addition of not more than 10 percent of the manufacturer's own rework material resulting from the manufacture of floats conforming to this standard is permissible. No other reworked material shall be used. 3. Designation HP 25 — For float of nominal size of 25 mm to be used for high pressure applications. LP 40 — For float of nominal size of 40 mm to be used for low pressure applications. TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF FLOAT, BOSS AND INSERT All dimensiions in millimetres. Sl. No. Particulars Dimensions of Floats for Nominal Size 15 20 25 32 40 50 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) i) Dia of float HP 127 152 203 229 254 305 LP114 127 178 203 203 254 i"
    },
    "content": "IS 9758: 1981 Flush Valves And Fittings For Water Closets And Urinal\n4.\nManufacture and Construction\n4.1 Flush valve of nominal sizes 15, 25 and 32mm shall\nhave an outlet of 20, 32 and 40mm outside diameter respectively.\n4.2 Fush valve shallbe self closing and non-concussive\nin action.\n5. Performance & Consturction – 5 litres 10 litres\n5.1 Discharge Rate — Flush valves shall discharge at\nanaverage rate of 5 litres with a tolerance of plus 0.5 litre in 3 seconds and there shall be no appreciable change\nin the force of the flush during the period of discharge.\n5.2 Working Pressure — It shall be capable of working\nundre pressure of 0.15 to 0.5 MPa and shall be capable of discharging the full capacity in a single operation.\n6.\nFinish – The outside of the body shall be polished bright and chromium plated. The plating shall be\ncapable of taking high polish which shall not easily tarnish or scaled off. For concealed work concealed\nparts need not be plated.\n± 0.5 litre\nSP 21 : 2005 10.220\n1.\nScope – Requirements for polyethylene spherical floats suitable for float valves of nominal sizes of 15, 20,\n25, 32, 40 and 50 mm.\nNote— Nominal size of the float is related with the nominal\nsize of the float valve with which it is to be used\n2.\nMaterial – High density polyethylene (HDPE) used for the manufacture of floats shall conform to\nDesignation PEBW A50 T 090 or PEBN A50 T090 of IS\n7328 : 1992+. The addition of not more than 10 percent of the manufacturer's own rework material resulting from\nthe manufacture of floats conforming to this standard is permissible. No other reworked material shall be used.\n3.\nDesignation\nHP 25 — For float of nominal size of 25 mm to be used for high pressure applications.\nLP 40 —\nFor float of nominal size of 40 mm to be used for low pressure applications.\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF FLOAT, BOSS AND INSERT\nAll dimensiions in millimetres.\nSl. No.\nParticulars\nDimensions of Floats for Nominal Size\n15\n20\n25 32 40\n50\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5) (6)\n(7)\n(8)\ni)\nDia of float HP\n127\n152\n203 229\n254 305\nLP114\n127\n178 203\n203 254 ii)\nWallthickness, (Min)\n1.5\n2.0 2.5\n2.5\n2.5 2.5 iii)\nTapping of boss\nM 8 × 1.25\nM 8 × 1.25\nM 1 2 × 1.75\nM 14 × 2 M 14 × 2 M16 × 2 iv) Insert wall thickness\n1.50 1.50\n1.75 2.0 2.0 2.0\n(below threads)\nv) Insert base thickness\n2.00 2.00\n2.25 2.50 2.50 2.50 vi)\nAxial length of thread\n8.0\n8.0\n13.0 16.0\n16.0 19.0\nNote – Tolerance on diameter ± 2.5 mm"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9762: 1994",
    "title": "Polyethylene Floats (Spherical) For Float Valves",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "(First Revision) + High density polyehylene materials for moulding and extrusion. (First Revision) 4. Dimensions and Tolerances — See Table 1. 5. Testing 5.1 Leakage and Water Absorption Test – The increase in mass of the float shall not be more than 0.5 percent and shall show no leakage. 5.2 Deflection Test — The float shall not deflect by more than 7 mm. 5.3 Impact Test — Floats when dropped from a height of 1500 mm on to a concrete floor at ambient temperature shall not develop any crack or d",
    "keywords": [
      "float",
      "boss",
      "floats",
      "polyehylene",
      "dropped",
      "distorted",
      "ato"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "See Table 1. 5. Testing 5.1 Leakage and Water Absorption Test – The increase in mass of the float shall not be more than 0.5 percent and shall show no leakage. 5.2 Deflection Test — The float shall not deflect by more than 7 mm. 5.3 Impact Test — Floats when dropped from a height of 1500 mm on to a concrete floor at ambient temperature shall not develop any crack or damage. 5.4 Boss Test — The boss and/or float shall not be visibly distorted or damaged. Note — For method of test, refer to Appendices Ato C of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 9762 : 1994 Specification for polyethylene floats (spherical) for float valves (first revision) SP 21 : 2005 10.221"
    },
    "content": "IS 9762: 1994 Polyethylene Floats (Spherical) For Float Valves\n(First Revision) + High density polyehylene materials for moulding and extrusion.\n(First Revision)\n4.\nDimensions and Tolerances — See Table 1.\n5.\nTesting\n5.1 Leakage and Water Absorption Test – The increase\nin mass of the float shall not be more than 0.5 percent and shall show no leakage.\n5.2 Deflection Test — The float shall not deflect by\nmore than 7 mm.\n5.3 Impact Test — Floats when dropped from a height\nof 1500 mm on to a concrete floor at ambient temperature shall not develop any crack or damage.\n5.4 Boss Test — The boss and/or float shall not be\nvisibly distorted or damaged.\nNote — For method of test, refer to Appendices Ato C of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 9762 : 1994 Specification for polyethylene floats (spherical) for float valves\n(first revision)\nSP 21 : 2005 10.221"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9763: 2000",
    "title": "Plastic Bib Taps, Pillar Taps, Angle Valves For Hot And Cold Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding material, dimensions, construction finish, and testing of plastic bib taps, pillar taps, stop valve & angle valves for hot and cold water services.",
    "keywords": [
      "valve",
      "tap",
      "abs",
      "float",
      "polyacetal",
      "taps",
      "nylon"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding size, materials manufacture and workmanship, performance test and appropriate dimensions of equilibrium float valves for water service up to 45ºC such as coolers, flush tanks and over head tanks. 2. Classification a) Horizontal inlet shank type, and b) Vertical inlet shank type. Note — Foot values may be fitted with two pressure reducing attachments, if required",
      "Materials": "See Table 1. TABLE 1 MATERIALS FOR BODY AND COMPONENT PARTS OF FLOAT VALVES Sl.No. Component Material 1. Valve body, inlet shank, Polyacetal valve seat, back nut, cap and float arm 2. Float, flow restrictors Polyacetal and discharge horn or polypropylene or polypropathene Synthetic rubber 3. Diaphragm Synthetic rubber 4. Diaphragm pin Stainless steel or any other non-corrosive material or polyacetal.",
      "Nominal Sizes": "Plastic taps and stop valves shall be of the nominal sizes: 15 mm (1/2”) and 20 mm (3/4”). Note — The figures within brackets refer to the size and designation of the threaded end The nominal bore of the socket or pipe outlet to which the tap or valve is normally fitted shall designate nominal size of taps or valves.",
      "Dimensions": "The thickness in any portion of the body and bonnet shall not be less than 2.5 mm for all sizes. Note — For dimensions, refer to 6 of the standard",
      "Identification": "The control devices for taps shall be indentified by: a) The colour blue, preferably, or the letter C for cold water b) The colour red, preferably, or the letter H for hot water. The cold water control device shall be on the right and hot water control device on the left,when viewed from the front",
      "Finish": "Only Plastic materials impervious to plating solutions shall be allowed to come in to contact with solution during plating. SP 21 : 2005 10.222 Note — For dimensions, refer to 6 of the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 9763 : 2000 Specification for plastic bib taps, pillar taps angle valves and stop valves for hot and cold water services (second revision). 7. Test 7.1 Resistance to Residual Chlorine in Water — Plastic taps and valves shall remian unaffected after being immersed in a 10 percent solution of hydrochloric acid for 24 hours. 7.2 Drip Proofness Test — This test shall be carried out by applying a hydraulic pressure of 0.1MPa maintained for 15 minutes. There shall be no leakage of water during the test. Alternatively, the test can be performed using 0.04 MPa of pneuma",
      "Hydraulic And Shut": "off Test — The float valve shall be capable of with standing 2.0 MPa water presssure for 60 seconds without leak or sweating when held in the closed position. The diaphragm valve when assembled in working condition but without flow restrictors and with the float immersed to half its volume shall remain closed against a test pressure of 1.05 MPa.",
      "General": "siphonage Test — The float valve shall have no back siphonage as indicated by the presence of water in the catch pot. This shall be type test.",
      "Flow Test": "The float valve shall be capable of delivering at least 9 litres of water in 3 min into its container",
      "Endurance Test": "The float valve shall be capable of completing 200,000 cycles and shall then be capable of satisfying hydraulic and shut-off test. This shall be type test."
    },
    "content": "IS 9763: 2000 Plastic Bib Taps, Pillar Taps, Angle Valves For Hot And Cold Water Services\n(Second Revison)\n1.\nScope — Requirements regarding material, dimensions, construction finish, and testing of plastic\nbib taps, pillar taps, stop valve & angle valves for hot and cold water services.\n2.\nMaterials — See Table 1.\nComponent\nRecommended Material\nBody of Tap/valve\nPP copolymer, Nylon 66, PBT,\nNylon 66 GF, Polyacetal, ABS,\nABS-PC Alloy, PVC\nBonnet of tap/valve PP\nCopolymer, Nylon 66, PBT,\nNylon66 GF, Polyacetal, ABS,\nABS-PC Alloy\nSpindle of tap/valve PP\nCopolymer, Nylon 66,PBT,\nNylon 66 GF, Polyacetal, ABS,\nABS-PC Alloy\nHandle of Tap/valve\nPP\nCopolymer,\nPBT,\nPolyacetal, ABS, ABS-PC\nAlloy\nSeal of Tap/Valve\nRubber, Nitrile PVC,Thermo plastic polyster based\nelastomer.\n2.1 Chemical and Hygiene Requirements — All plastic\nmaterials coming into contact with water indented for human consumption shall not present any health risk\nupto a temperature of 900 C. They shall not cause any change to the drinking water in terms of quality,\nappearance, smell or taste. Materials shall be resistant to corrosion. Within the recommended limit for current\nTABLE 2 RECOMMENDED LIMIT FOR CURRENT OPERATION – CONDITIONS OF\nUSE OF TAP WARE Parameter\nMaximum Limit of Use\nRecommended limits for Correct Operation Pressure\nStatic : 1 MPa (10 bar) Flow : not less than 0.01 MPa (0.1bar) Temperature\n900 C Maximum : 65º C Lower limit: as for installations.\noperation given in Table 2, the material shall not under go any change that would impair the performance of the\ntaps. Parts subjected to the pressure shall withstand the maximum operating pressures given in Table 2\n3.\nNominal Sizes – Plastic taps and stop valves shall be of the nominal sizes: 15 mm (1/2”) and 20 mm (3/4”).\nNote — The figures within brackets refer to the size and\ndesignation of the threaded end The nominal bore of the socket or pipe outlet to which the tap or valve is normally\nfitted shall designate nominal size of taps or valves.\n4.\nDimensions – The thickness in any portion of the body and bonnet shall not be less than 2.5 mm for all\nsizes.\nNote — For dimensions, refer to 6 of the standard\n5.\nIdentification – The control devices for taps shall be indentified by:\na) The colour blue, preferably, or the letter C for cold water\nb) The colour red, preferably, or the letter H for hot water. The cold water control device shall be on\nthe right and hot water control device on the left,when viewed from the front\n6.\nFinish – Only Plastic materials impervious to plating solutions shall be allowed to come in to contact with\nsolution during plating.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.222\nNote — For dimensions, refer to 6 of the standard\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 9763 : 2000 Specification for plastic bib taps, pillar taps angle valves and stop valves for hot and cold water services (second revision). 7. Test\n7.1 Resistance to Residual Chlorine in Water —\nPlastic taps and valves shall remian unaffected after being immersed in a 10 percent solution of hydrochloric\nacid for 24 hours.\n7.2 Drip Proofness Test — This test shall be carried\nout by applying a hydraulic pressure of 0.1MPa maintained for 15 minutes. There shall be no leakage of\nwater during the test. Alternatively, the test can be performed using 0.04 MPa of pneumatic pressure.\n7.3 Thermal Shock Test — This test shall be carried\nout by dipping the tap, valve in water maintained at a temperature not more than 65 ± 2º C for one hour and\nthen suddenly quenching in water with temperature not more than 15º C and repeating the operation for 10\ntimes. There shall be no defect in the tap or valve at the end of the test.\n7.4 Hydraulic Pressure Test — Every Bib tap, Pillar\ntap, Angle valve, Stop valve complete with component parts shall be tested under an internal pressure of 1.6\nMPa for a minimum period of 60 sec. During this period there shall not be any leak, sweat, bulge or pressure\ndrop. Alternatively, the components may also be tested at 0.6 MPa of air pressure for a minimum period of 20\nsec.\n7.5 Mechanical Strength Characterists — The Bib tap,\nPillar tap, Angle valve, Stop valve shall be held in vertical position. A torque of not less than 6 Nm shalll be applied\nto the operating mechanism using a torque wernch in closing direction for a period of 5 min. Throughout the\nduration of the test and the end of the test, there shall be no deformation or loosening of any part of the tap or\nvalve.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.223\n5.\nConstruction\n5.1 Body, inlet shank (vertical or horizontal) and seat\nshould be made one single unit to constitute the\nbody of the value.\n5.2 The inlet shank shall have external parallel fastening\nthread of the same size the nominal size of the float valve.\n5.3 Valve shall be provided with a discharge with\nantisiphonage provision.\n6.\nPerformance Tests\n6.1. Hydraulic and Shut-off Test — The float valve shall be capable of with standing 2.0 MPa water\npresssure for 60 seconds without leak or sweating when held in the closed position. The diaphragm valve when\nassembled in working condition but without flow restrictors and with the float immersed to half its volume\nshall remain closed against a test pressure of 1.05 MPa.\n6.2. Anti-siphonage Test — The float valve shall have no back siphonage as indicated by the presence of water\nin the catch pot. This shall be type test.\n6.3. Flow Test — The float valve shall be capable of delivering at least 9 litres of water in 3 min into its\ncontainer\n6.4. Endurance Test – The float valve shall be capable of completing 200,000 cycles and shall then be capable\nof satisfying hydraulic and shut-off test. This shall be type test.\n1. Scope – Requirements regarding size, materials manufacture and workmanship, performance test and\nappropriate dimensions of equilibrium float valves for water service up to 45ºC such as coolers, flush tanks\nand over head tanks.\n2.\nClassification a)\nHorizontal inlet shank type, and b)\nVertical inlet shank type.\nNote — Foot values may be fitted with two pressure reducing\nattachments, if required\n3.\nSize – 15 mm nominal\n4. Materials – See Table 1.\nTABLE 1 MATERIALS FOR BODY AND\nCOMPONENT PARTS OF FLOAT VALVES\nSl.No. Component\nMaterial\n1.\nValve body, inlet shank,\nPolyacetal valve seat, back nut,\ncap and float arm\n2.\nFloat, flow restrictors\nPolyacetal and discharge horn\nor polypropylene or\npolypropathene\nSynthetic rubber\n3.\nDiaphragm\nSynthetic rubber\n4.\nDiaphragm pin\nStainless steel or any other non-corrosive\nmaterial or polyacetal."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12234: 1988",
    "title": "Plastic Equilibrium Float Valves For Cold Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Specifies materials, workmanship, performance and sampling requirements besides where appropriate, dimensions and tolerances, of diaphragm type float operated valves for water services up to 45oC for use in flush tanks, overhead water tanks, etc.",
    "keywords": [
      "float",
      "seat",
      "valve",
      "hydraulic",
      "discharge",
      "inlet",
      "polyacetal"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Specifies materials, workmanship, performance and sampling requirements besides where appropriate, dimensions and tolerances, of diaphragm type float operated valves for water services up to 45oC for use in flush tanks, overhead water tanks, etc. 2. Materials Sl. No Components/Parts Material (1) (2) (3) 1. Valve body, inlet shank Polyacetal vale seat and back nut 2. Discharge horn Polyacetal (if provided) or Polypropylene or polyethylene or Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS) or Ethylene Vinyl Acetate (EVA) or any other suitable material 3. Diaphragm Synthetic rubber",
      "Nominal Sizes": "15 mm 4. Construction 4.1 Inlet shank shall be not less than 48 mm in length. 4.2 Valves shall be supplied with a high pressure (HP) or a low pressure (LP) seal. 4.3 Diaphragms made of synthetic rubber shall have the form and dimension as required for the operation of the valve. 4.4 Float aim and assembly shall have not more than 25mm, Inlet diflection after the test additional deflection after boading for 28 days shall not be more than 12mm. 5. Performance Tests 5.1 Hydraulic Test — Shall be capable of witstanding whilst held in the closed position, an internally applied hydraulic pressure of MPa for a period of 0 5 60− + seconds, without leaking. 5.2 Shut-off Test — When assembled in working condition but without flow restrictions and fitted with the relevant seat and the float immersed "
    },
    "content": "IS 12234: 1988 Plastic Equilibrium Float Valves For Cold Water Services\nNote — For method of test refer to Appendices A to C of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12234 : 1988 Specification for plastic equilibrium float valve for cold water services.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.224\n1.\nScope – Specifies materials, workmanship, performance and sampling requirements besides where\nappropriate, dimensions and tolerances, of diaphragm type float operated valves for water services up to 45oC\nfor use in flush tanks, overhead water tanks, etc.\n2.\nMaterials\nSl. No Components/Parts\nMaterial\n(1) (2) (3)\n1.\nValve body, inlet shank\nPolyacetal vale seat\nand back nut\n2.\nDischarge horn\nPolyacetal\n(if provided)\nor Polypropylene or polyethylene\nor Acrylonitrile\nButadiene\nStyrene (ABS)\nor Ethylene Vinyl\nAcetate (EVA)\nor any other suitable material\n3.\nDiaphragm\nSynthetic rubber\n3.\nNominal Size – 15 mm\n4.\nConstruction\n4.1 Inlet shank shall be not less than 48 mm in length.\n4.2 Valves shall be supplied with a high pressure (HP)\nor a low pressure (LP) seal.\n4.3 Diaphragms made of synthetic rubber shall have\nthe form and dimension as required for the operation of the valve.\n4.4 Float aim and assembly shall have not more than\n25mm, Inlet diflection after the test additional deflection after boading for 28 days shall not be more than 12mm.\n5.\nPerformance Tests\n5.1 Hydraulic Test — Shall be capable of witstanding\nwhilst held in the closed position, an internally applied hydraulic pressure of MPa for a period of\n0\n5\n60−\n+ seconds, without leaking.\n5.2 Shut-off Test — When assembled in working\ncondition but without flow restrictions and fitted with the relevant seat and the float immersed to half its\nvolume, shall remain closed against the following minimum test pressures as appropriate:\nHP seat — 1.05 MPa\nLP seat — 0.35 MPa\n5.3 Anti-siphonage Test — Shall have no back\nsiphonage as indicated by the presence of water in the catchpot.\n5.4 Flow Test — Shall be capable of delivering at least\n9 litres of water in 140 seconds into the container.\n5.5 Endurance Test — Shall be capable of completing\n200000 cycles and shall then immediately satisfy the hydraulic and shut-off tests.\n5.6 Hydraulic Pressue on Discharge Arrangements –\nThe valve together with its discharge arrangements shall withstand a constantly applied hydraulic pressure of 1\nMPa for 7 without causing any permanent deformation or separation of any component part."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13049: 1991",
    "title": "Diaphragm Type (Plastic Body) Float Operated Valves For Cold Water Services",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Note— For method of test refer to Appendices Aot C of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 13049 : 1991 Specification for diaphragm type (plastric body) float operated valves for cold water services. 0 025 .0 2 − + SP 21 : 2005",
    "keywords": [
      "valves",
      "gland",
      "forged",
      "brass",
      "globe",
      "stem",
      "gate"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 13049: 1991 Diaphragm Type (Plastic Body) Float Operated Valves For Cold Water Services\nNote— For method of test refer to Appendices Aot C of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 13049 : 1991 Specification for diaphragm type (plastric body) float operated valves for cold water services.\n0\n025\n.0\n2\n−\n+\nSP 21 : 2005 10.225\n1.\nScope : Requirements for forged brass gate, globe and check valves suitable for working temperatures up\nto 45ºC and non-shock maximum hydraulic working pressure of 2 MPa for water works purposes.\n2.\nNominal Sizes : 8(1/4), 10(3/8), 15(1/2), 20(3/\n4),25(1),32(1.1/4), 40(1.1/2) and 50(2) mm.\nNote : The nominal sizes shown in parantheses refer to the\nsize of screw threads.\n3.\nMaterials: See Table 1.\nTABLE 1 MATERIALS\nComponent\nMaterial\nBody, bonnet,\nForged brass cover stuffing\nbox,disc, wedge and hinge\nGland, gland nut,\nForged brass ball, stem, stem\nor free cutting nut, hinge pin\nbrass\nHandwheel\nCast iron\n(see Note)\nGland packing a) Hemp and jute\nb) Asbestos c) Any other equally\nefficient packing material suitable for\ncold water\nSpring (in case\nPhosphor check valve is\nbronze wire spring loaded)\nNote : Handwheels may also be made either in steel, aluminium\nalloy, zinc alloy or of non- metallic materials.\n4.\nTypes a)\nGate valves b)\nGlobe valves"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13114: 1991",
    "title": "Forged Brass Gate, Globe And Check Valves For Water Works Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Covers single faced vertically sliding type cast iron sluice gates of nominal sizes from 300 to 2500 mm, suitable for mounting on the flange of cast iron wall thimble. These sluice gates are meant for use for water supply and waste water application. These sluice gates are designed for either seating head or unseating head or unseating head, or both. Sluice gates as per this standard in addition to manual may be adapted to electric, hydraulic or pneumatic power operation. Requirements for actuat",
    "keywords": [
      "sluice",
      "gates",
      "valves",
      "check",
      "closure",
      "metres",
      "globe"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "See Tables 2 & 3 6. Design and Manufacture 6.1 Flow way area at any point shall be not less than that of a circle having an equivalent diameter as specified. However, globe and check valves with plug types discs and discs guided from below shall have a flow way area of not less than 85 percent of that specified for above. 6.2 For globe valves and check valves the direction of flow shall be with the upstream pressure under the disc. 6.3 Handwheel shall close the valve by turning in clockwise direction, when facing the wheel. 7. Testing 7.1 Hydrostatic Test 7.1.1 Test Pressures : Shall show no visible leakage during the test under conditions as below: a) Shell Test : 1.5 × maximum working pressure of 2 MPa. b) Seat and Backseat Test : 1.1 × maximum working pressure of 2MPa. 7.1.2. Test Durat",
      "Scope": "Covers single faced vertically sliding type cast iron sluice gates of nominal sizes from 300 to 2500 mm, suitable for mounting on the flange of cast iron wall thimble. These sluice gates are meant for use for water supply and waste water application. These sluice gates are designed for either seating head or unseating head or unseating head, or both. Sluice gates as per this standard in addition to manual may be adapted to electric, hydraulic or pneumatic power operation. Requirements for actuating gear except in case of manual operation is left to the mutual agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer. Sluice gates as per this standard may be of the conventional-closure or of flush-bottom closure type. 2. Classification a) Class 1 : Suitable for maximum Sluice gates unbalanced he"
    },
    "content": "IS 13114: 1991 Forged Brass Gate, Globe And Check Valves For Water Works Purposes\nc)\nCheck valves: Swing type and Lift type\n5.\nDimensions and Tolerances – See Tables 2 & 3\n6.\nDesign and Manufacture\n6.1 Flow way area at any point shall be not less than\nthat of a circle having an equivalent diameter as specified. However, globe and check valves with plug\ntypes discs and discs guided from below shall have a flow way area of not less than 85 percent of that specified\nfor above.\n6.2 For globe valves and check valves the direction of\nflow shall be with the upstream pressure under the disc.\n6.3 Handwheel shall close the valve by turning in\nclockwise direction, when facing the wheel.\n7.\nTesting\n7.1 Hydrostatic Test 7.1.1 Test Pressures : Shall show no visible leakage during the test under conditions as below:\na) Shell Test :\n1.5 × maximum working pressure of 2 MPa.\nb) Seat and Backseat Test :\n1.1 × maximum working pressure of 2MPa. 7.1.2. Test Duration : Minimum test duration shall be as follows\na) Shell Test\n:\n15 ses.\nb) Seat and Backseat Test\n:\n15 ses.\nThere shall be no visible leakage during the tests.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.226 NOMINAL GATE VALVES GLOBE VALVES HORIZONTAL LIFT VERTICALLIFT SWING CHECK SIZE CHECK VALVES CHECK VALVES CHECK VALVES (1) (2) (3)\n(4) (5) (6)\nmm mm\nmm mm\nmm mm\n8\n43\n47\n47\n47\n--\n10\n43\n50\n50\n50\n--\n15\n52\n60\n60\n52\n58\n20\n56\n70\n70\n60\n72\n25\n65\n80\n80\n63\n83\n32\n73\n95\n95\n76\n--\n40\n76\n110\n110\n86\n--\n50\n90\n125\n125\n97\n--\nTABLE 3 END -TO-END DIMENSIONS Note: Whenever dimensions are not given, those sizes are not generally manufactured in those designs.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 13114: 1991 Forged brass gate, globe and check valves for water works purposes. TABLE 2 WALL THICKNESS AND OTHER DIMENSIONS Nominal Minimum Minimum Mini mum Mini mum Length of Size\nWall Stem Across Flat or OD Threads at Ends Thickness Diameter of Sealing Face at Ends (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) mm mm mm mm mm 8 1.6 5.5 18 7.0 10 1.7 6.0 22 7.5 15 1.8 6.5 26 9.5 20 2.0 7.5 32 10.5 25 2.1 8.5 39 12.0 32 2.4 9.5 49 13.5 40 2.5 10.5 55 13.5 50 2.8 12.0 68 10.227\n4.\nNominal Sizes : See Tables 1 and 2.\nTABLE 1 NOMINAL SIZE OF SQUARE (OR\nROUND) SLUICE GATES, IN MM\n300 750\n1 200\n1 800\n400 900\n1 400\n2 000\n500\n1 000\n1 500\n2 250\n600\n1 100\n1 600\n2 500\nTABLE 2 NOMINAL SIZE OF RECTANGULAR\nSLUICE GATES, IN MM\nWidth × Height\nWidth × Height Width × Height 300 × 400\n1 000 × 750 1 500 × 1 800 400 × 300\n1 000 ×1 200 1 500 × 2 000 500 × 400\n1 000 × 1 500 1 600 × 1 200 500 × 750\n1 100 × 900 1 600 × 2 000 600 × 400\n1 100 × 1 500 1 800 × 1 200 600 × 750\n1 200 × 900 1 800 × 1 500 750 × 500\n1 200 × 1 500 1 800 × 2 500 750 × 600\n1 200 × 1 800 2 000 ×1 500 750 × 900\n1 400 × 1 000 2 000 × 2 500\n1.\nScope – Covers single faced vertically sliding type cast iron sluice gates of nominal sizes from 300 to 2500\nmm, suitable for mounting on the flange of cast iron wall thimble. These sluice gates are meant for use for water\nsupply and waste water application.\nThese sluice gates are designed for either seating head or unseating head or unseating head, or both.\nSluice gates as per this standard in addition to manual may be adapted to electric, hydraulic or pneumatic\npower operation. Requirements for actuating gear except in case of manual operation is left to the mutual agreement\nbetween the purchaser and the manufacturer.\nSluice gates as per this standard may be of the conventional-closure or of flush-bottom closure type.\n2. Classification\na) Class 1 :\nSuitable for maximum\nSluice gates unbalanced head upto and including\n5 metres of water.\nb) Class 2 :\nSuitable for maximum\nSluice gates unbalanced head above 5 metres and upto and including 10metres of water,\nand c) Class 3 :\nSuitable for maximum\nSluice gates unbalanced head above 10 metres and upto and including 15metres of water.\n3.\nShapes and Types a) The opening of the sluice gates and the wall\nthimble may be either circular, square or rectangular.\nb) Sluice gates may be manufactured either with rising stem or non-rising stem.\nc) Sluice gates may be either of conventional bottom closure or flush bottom closure.\nd) Sluice gates maybe for either upward opening or downward opening.\ne) Sluice gates may have operating head stock either mounted on platform or directly mounted\non yoke."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13349: 1992",
    "title": "Single Faced Cast Iron Thimble Mounted Sluice Gates",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements of single air valve (small and large orifice) double air valves (small and large orifice with or without integral isolating valve) and kinetic air valves with or without separate isolating sluice valve for use on water mains.",
    "keywords": [
      "air",
      "orifice",
      "valve",
      "valves",
      "kinetic",
      "isolating",
      "small"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Materials": "see Table 3 TABLE 3 MATERIALS Sl. No. Item Material (1) (2) (3) 1. Thimble, frame, guide, Cast iron extension guide, slide (shutter), gear box, pedestal, stem guide, bracket, wedging devices, flush bottom seal support bar 2. Yoke (Bridge) Cast Iron structural steel 3. a) Wedges Cast iron Naval brass Phosphor bronze Leaded tin bronze Stainless steel b) Wedge facings Naval brass Phosphor bronze Leaded tin bronze Stainless Note : For materials of other components, refer to Table 3 of the standard SP 21 : 2005 10.228",
      "Surface Preparation And Painting": "After cleaning, the surfaces shall be primed by application of either one shop coat of zinc chromate or coaltar coating suitable for use in potable water and applied. After painted surfaces are dry, the machined or bearing surfaces and the holes, both plain and threaded, shall be coated with grease to offer temporary protection to the surfaces until the time of installation. Surfaces of thimble and stem guides which would be in contact with the concrete shall not be coated. 7. Manual Lifting Devices : Shall be ungeared or geared operatable by handwheel or a cracle handle. Geared mechanism may be either single ordual speed as necessary. Note : For details see 9 of the standard. 8. Shop Testing a) Seat Clearance Check b) Smooth Movement Test c) Shop Leakage Test 8.1. Hydrostatic Test : Water",
      "Scope": "Requirements of single air valve (small and large orifice) double air valves (small and large orifice with or without integral isolating valve) and kinetic air valves with or without separate isolating sluice valve for use on water mains. 2. Types a) Single Air valve : Small orifice type (S 1) : Large orifice type (S 2) b) Double Air valve : Standard type with in-built isolating valve (DS1) or without isolating valves (DS2) c) Kinetic Air valve : Kinetic air valve (DK)",
      "Nominal Pressures": "Maximum permissible gauge working pressures of PN 1.0 and PN 1.6 MPa. 4. Nominal Sizes a) Single air valve S 1 : (Small orifice type) 15,25,40 mm b) Single air valve S 2 : (Large orifice type) 25,40,50 mm c) Double air valve : (All types) (DS 1,2) 40,50, 80,100,150 and 200 mm d) Kinetic air valve : 40,50,80,100, (DK) 150 and 200 mm",
      "Temperature Rating": "All air valves shall be suitable for continuous use at their PN rating within the temperature of 45o C. 6. Service Application 6.1 Single Air Valve (Small Orifice)–For automatically releasing air which may accumulate under pressure in a section of pipe line during normal working condition. 6.2 Single Air Valve (Large Orifice)– For automatically releasing/admitting air that may accumlulate under pressure in a section of pipe line at the time of initial charging or draining of mass. 6.3 Double Air Valves–These valves are simply a combination of small and large orifice air valves with common connection to the main, small orifice function being similar to that of a single air valve. Large orifice serves for automatically exhausting air when a pipe is being filled with water, or automatically v",
      "End Connection": "End connection of single air valves (Small and large orifice) shall be either flanged or screwed. Double air valves shall have flange ends machined and drilled. For kinetic air valves, all flanges including that of the isolating sluice valve shall be machined and drilled 8. Materials TABLE 1 MATERIALS Sl.no. Component / Body Material i) Body, Cover, Grey cast iron Valve, Stuffing box,Valve guide, Cowl, gland, cap, Joint supprting ii) Stem High tensile brass iii) Low Pressure Natural Seatring & Face ring rubber v) High Pressure Orifice Leaded tin bronze vi) Stem nut Leaded tin bronze vii) Body seat ring Leaded tin bronze viii) Bolts Carbon steel SUMMMARY OF"
    },
    "content": "IS 13349: 1992 Single Faced Cast Iron Thimble Mounted Sluice Gates\n5.\nMaterials – see Table 3\nTABLE 3 MATERIALS\nSl. No.\nItem\nMaterial (1) (2) (3) 1.\nThimble, frame, guide,\nCast iron extension guide, slide\n(shutter), gear box, pedestal, stem guide,\nbracket, wedging devices, flush bottom seal\nsupport bar 2.\nYoke (Bridge)\nCast Iron structural steel 3. a) Wedges\nCast iron\nNaval brass\nPhosphor bronze\nLeaded tin bronze\nStainless steel b) Wedge facings\nNaval brass\nPhosphor bronze\nLeaded tin bronze\nStainless\nNote : For materials of other components, refer to Table 3 of the standard\nSP 21 : 2005 10.228\n6.\nSurface Preparation and Painting – After cleaning, the surfaces shall be primed by application of either one\nshop coat of zinc chromate or coaltar coating suitable for use in potable water and applied. After painted\nsurfaces are dry, the machined or bearing surfaces and the holes, both plain and threaded, shall be coated with\ngrease to offer temporary protection to the surfaces until the time of installation.\nSurfaces of thimble and stem guides which would be in contact with the concrete shall not be coated.\n7.\nManual Lifting Devices : Shall be ungeared or geared operatable by handwheel or a cracle handle.\nGeared mechanism may be either single ordual speed as necessary. Note : For details see 9 of the standard.\n8.\nShop Testing a) Seat Clearance Check\nb) Smooth Movement Test c) Shop Leakage Test\n8.1. Hydrostatic Test : Water pressure of 1.5 times the unbalanced specified maximum operating hed shall be\napplied to the sluice gates in closed position for a period of 5 minutes. Under this test there shall be no leakage\nthrough the metal nor shall anypart be permanently deformed.\nNote 1 : For Design and Construction requirements refer to 7 of the standard.\nNote 2 : For method of test refer to the Standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 13349 : 1992 Specification for single faced cast iron thimble mounted sluice gates.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.229\n1. Scope – Requirements of single air valve (small and large orifice) double air valves (small and large\norifice with or without integral isolating valve) and kinetic air valves with or without separate isolating\nsluice valve for use on water mains.\n2. Types a) Single Air valve\n:\nSmall orifice type (S 1)\n:\nLarge orifice type (S 2)\nb) Double Air valve :\nStandard type with in-built isolating valve (DS1) or\nwithout isolating valves\n(DS2)\nc) Kinetic Air valve : Kinetic air valve (DK)\n3. Nominal Pressures – Maximum permissible gauge working pressures of PN 1.0 and PN 1.6 MPa.\n4.\nNominal Sizes a) Single air valve S 1 : (Small orifice type) 15,25,40\nmm b) Single air valve S 2 : (Large orifice type)\n25,40,50 mm c) Double air valve\n: (All types) (DS 1,2)\n40,50, 80,100,150 and 200 mm\nd) Kinetic air valve\n: 40,50,80,100, (DK)\n150 and 200 mm\n5.\nTemperature Rating - All air valves shall be suitable for continuous use at their PN rating within the\ntemperature of 45o C.\n6.\nService Application\n6.1 Single Air Valve (Small Orifice)–For automatically\nreleasing air which may accumulate under pressure in a section of pipe line during normal working condition.\n6.2 Single Air Valve (Large Orifice)– For automatically\nreleasing/admitting air that may accumlulate under pressure in a section of pipe line at the time of initial\ncharging or draining of mass.\n6.3 Double Air Valves–These valves are simply a\ncombination of small and large orifice air valves with common connection to the main, small orifice function\nbeing similar to that of a single air valve. Large orifice serves for automatically exhausting air when a pipe is\nbeing filled with water, or automatically ventilating a pipe when it is being emptied of water.\n6.4 Kinetic Air Valves–These valves are essentially the\nsame as the conventional double air valves but with certain refinements and are suitable for high head pipe\nlines where high rates of air discharge and ventilation is required.\n7.\nEnd Connection–End connection of single air valves (Small and large orifice) shall be either flanged or\nscrewed. Double air valves shall have flange ends machined and drilled.\nFor kinetic air valves, all flanges including that of the isolating sluice valve shall be machined and drilled\n8.\nMaterials\nTABLE 1 MATERIALS\nSl.no. Component / Body\nMaterial i)\nBody, Cover,\nGrey cast iron\nValve, Stuffing box,Valve guide, Cowl,\ngland, cap, Joint supprting ii)\nStem\nHigh tensile brass iii)\nLow Pressure\nNatural\nSeatring & Face ring rubber\nv)\nHigh Pressure Orifice\nLeaded tin bronze vi)\nStem nut\nLeaded tin bronze\nvii)\nBody seat ring\nLeaded tin bronze viii)\nBolts\nCarbon steel\nSUMMMARY OF"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14845: 2000",
    "title": "Resilient Seated Cast Iron Air Relief Valves For Water Works Purposes",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements for non-rising stem type sluice valves from 50 to 1 200 mm sizes used for water supply up to 45º C and having double flanged ends for connections.",
    "keywords": [
      "valve",
      "orifice",
      "body",
      "seat",
      "wedge",
      "air",
      "valves"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Coating": "All coatings shall be carried out after satisfactory testing of the valves prior to despatch. All unmachined ferrous surfaces of the valve (both inside and outside) shall be thoroughly clean, dry and shall be free from rust and grease before painting All exposed machined ferrous surfaces shall be painted with one coat of aluminium red oxide primer. 7. Testing 7.1 Hydrostatic Test TEST PRESSURE FOR SLUICE VALVES PN Rating Test for Test Pressure Body/Seat MPa (Gauge) PN 1.0 Body 1.5 Seat 1.0 PN 1.6 Body 2.4 Seat 1.6 TEST DURATION FOR SLUICE VALVES Valve Size Test for Test Duration (mm) Body/Seat (Minutes) 50 to1200 Body 5 Seat 2",
      "Liquid Penetrant Test": "After forming of a collar no stem shall show any sign of flaw when subjected to liquid penetrant flaw detection test in accordance with IS : 3658.",
      "Scope": "Requirements for non-rising stem type sluice valves from 50 to 1 200 mm sizes used for water supply up to 45º C and having double flanged ends for connections.",
      "Nominal Pressures": "(Maximum permissible gauge working pressur) Nominal Pressure (PN) Nominal Sized MPa mm PN 1.0 50 to 1200 PN 1.6 50 to 600",
      "Nominal Sizes": "50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150,200,250, 300, 350, 400,450, 500, 600, 700, 750,800, 900, 1000,1100 and 1 200 mm. The nominal size shall refer to the nominal bore of the waterway. The actual bore at any point shall not be less than the nominal size. 4. Materials Sl.No. Component Material i) Body, Bonnet, Grey cast iron Dome, Stool cover, Wedge, Stuffing box, gland, thrust Plate and Cap ii) Hand wheel Grey Cast iron iii) Stem Stainless Steel iv) Wedge nut, Leaded tin Shoe, Channel Bronze v) Body seat ring, Leaded tin Wedge facing Bronze ring and Bushes vi) Bolts Carbon Steel vii) Nuts Carbon Steel viii) Gasket Rubber ix) Gland Packing Jute and hemp x) Gear Spheroidal graphite iron xi) Gear Housing Grey cast iron xii) Pinion & Pinion Wrought Shaft Carbon Steel"
    },
    "content": "IS 14845: 2000 Resilient Seated Cast Iron Air Relief Valves For Water Works Purposes\nSP 21 : 2005 10.230\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 14845:2000 Resilient sealed cast Iron air relief valves for water works purposes\nix)\nNuts\nCarbon steel x)\nGasket\nRubber xi)\nGland packing\nJute/hemp xii)\nFloat (Low\nTimber core pressure\nwith vulcaniorifice)\nte coating xiii)\nFloat (High\nTimber core pressure\nwith vulcaniorifice)\nte coating xiv)\nFloat Guide\nLeaded tin bronze\nNote : For altermative mataials refer to Table 1 of the standard.\n9.\nDesign and Manufacture\n9.1 Minimum body thickness shall be as indicated in\nTable 2.\nTABLE 2 BODY THICKNESS\nSingle Air Valve\nValve Small Large Double Air Kinetic Air\nSize Orifice Orifice Valve Valve PN PN PN PN PN PN PN PN 1.0 1.6 1.0 1.6 1.0 1.6 1.0 1.6\n15 6 8 - - - - - -\n25 6 8 6 8 - - - -\n40 8 10 8 10 8 10 8 10\n50 - - 9 10 9 10 9 10\n80 - - - - 12 10 12\n100 - - - - 10 12 10 12\n150 - - - - 13 16 13 16\n200 - - - - 14.5 18 14.5 18\n9.2 The orifice size in case of high pressure orifece shall\nnot be less than 2.5 mm and tapering to 10mm suitable to release accumulated air within thepipe.\n9.3 Minimum float diameter shall be as indicated Table\n3.\nTABLE 3 MINIMUM FLOAT DIAMETER\n(All dimensions in mm)\nSingle Air Valve Double Air Valve Kinetic Air Valve\nValve Small Large Small Large Small Large\nSize Orifice Orifice Orifice Orifice Orifice Orifice\n15 75 40 -- -- -- --\n25 100 75 -- -- -- --\n40 100 75 100 75 90 55\n50 100 75 100 75 100 75\n80 -- -- 100 100 115 100\n100 -- -- 125 125 125 125\n150 -- -- 125 200 150 200\n200 -- -- 140 250 150 250\nNote : For design and manufacture refer to Fig 1 to 4 and clause\n10 of the Standard.\nFor details see 10 of the standard.\n10. Finish : The finish of the castings shall be smooth\nand free from blow-hole, crack, flaw, burr and other defects.\n11. Testing and perfomance\n11.1 When tested as specified the air passage and\nfunction of hall floats in a valve shall be satisfactory.\n11.2 Hydrostatic test of valve body shall reveal no\nleakage through pressure sustaining components and joints.\n11.3 When tested as specified the valve seat body shall\nshow no leakage.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.231\nNote; For details of materials , see Table1of the standard.\nNote: For methods of tests, refer to Annex. B of the standard and IS 3658 : 1999 code of practice for liquid penetrant how detection\n(second revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 14846: 2000. Sluice valves for water works purposes\n(50 to 1200 mm) size.\n5.\nManufacture\n5.1 The portion of bonnet (gland and stuffin box) which\ncome in contact with spindle shall be provided cohenever required with bushings of minimum 3 mm\nthickness and specified material.\n5.2 Valves shall be filled withdouble faced cast iron wedge\nmade in one piece and having twomachired facing rings.\n5.3 Stems shall have machine cut single start the wedge\ncan be raised to a position so as to ensure full flow passage through the valve.\nNote : For detailed dimeension and typical sketches refer to\nthe standard.\n6.\nCoating — All coatings shall be carried out after satisfactory testing of the valves prior to despatch. All\nunmachined ferrous surfaces of the valve (both inside and outside) shall be thoroughly clean, dry and shall be\nfree from rust and grease before painting All exposed machined ferrous surfaces shall be painted with one\ncoat of aluminium red oxide primer.\n7.\nTesting\n7.1 Hydrostatic Test\nTEST PRESSURE FOR SLUICE VALVES\nPN Rating\nTest for\nTest Pressure\nBody/Seat\nMPa (Gauge) PN 1.0\nBody\n1.5\nSeat\n1.0 PN 1.6\nBody\n2.4\nSeat\n1.6 TEST DURATION FOR SLUICE VALVES\nValve Size\nTest for\nTest Duration (mm)\nBody/Seat (Minutes)\n50 to1200\nBody 5\nSeat 2\n7.2. Liquid Penetrant Test – After forming of a collar no stem shall show any sign of flaw when subjected to\nliquid penetrant flaw detection test in accordance with\nIS : 3658.\n1.\nScope — Requirements for non-rising stem type sluice valves from 50 to 1 200 mm sizes used for water\nsupply up to 45º C and having double flanged ends for connections.\n2.\nNominal Pressures— (Maximum permissible gauge working pressur)\nNominal Pressure (PN)\nNominal Sized MPa mm PN 1.0\n50 to 1200 PN 1.6\n50 to 600\n3.\nNominal Sizes – 50, 65, 80, 100, 125, 150,200,250,\n300, 350, 400,450, 500, 600, 700, 750,800, 900, 1000,1100 and 1 200 mm. The nominal size shall refer to the nominal\nbore of the waterway. The actual bore at any point shall not be less than the nominal size.\n4.\nMaterials\nSl.No.\nComponent\nMaterial i)\nBody, Bonnet,\nGrey cast iron\nDome, Stool cover, Wedge,\nStuffing box, gland, thrust\nPlate and Cap ii)\nHand wheel\nGrey Cast iron iii)\nStem\nStainless Steel iv)\nWedge nut,\nLeaded tin\nShoe, Channel\nBronze v)\nBody seat ring,\nLeaded tin\nWedge facing\nBronze ring and Bushes\nvi)\nBolts\nCarbon Steel vii)\nNuts\nCarbon Steel viii)\nGasket\nRubber ix)\nGland Packing\nJute and hemp x)\nGear\nSpheroidal graphite iron\nxi)\nGear Housing\nGrey cast iron xii)\nPinion & Pinion\nWrought\nShaft\nCarbon Steel"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14846: 2000",
    "title": "Sluice Valves For Water Works Purposes",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Covers terminology, construction, technical characteristics, metrological characteristics and other requirements of water meters with threaded end connections of size up to and including 50 mm, having nominal flow rates in the range of 1.5 to 15 kl/h, suitable for measuring the flow of cold potable water at a nominal pressure of 1 MPa (Max) and ambient temperature. This standard is appliable both for semipositive (piston type) and inferential (turbine type) including magnetic type water meters h",
    "keywords": [
      "interval",
      "scale",
      "verification",
      "plastics",
      "meter",
      "piston",
      "brass"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers terminology, construction, technical characteristics, metrological characteristics and other requirements of water meters with threaded end connections of size up to and including 50 mm, having nominal flow rates in the range of 1.5 to 15 kl/h, suitable for measuring the flow of cold potable water at a nominal pressure of 1 MPa (Max) and ambient temperature. This standard is appliable both for semipositive (piston type) and inferential (turbine type) including magnetic type water meters having dry or wet dial.",
      "Nominal Sizes": "5, 20, 25, 40 and 50 mm.",
      "Classes": "A and B depending on maximum verification scale interval and metrological characteristics.",
      "Materials": "Body / Component Materials Body a) Bronze b) Brass Registration box a) Bronze b) Brass c) Plastic Strainers a) Plastics b) Brass c) Stainless steel Impellers, pistons a) Ebonite and chambers (for piston only) b) Vulcanite (for piston only) c) Plastics Measuring chamber a) Brass b)Bronze c) Plastics (Semi positive meters only) Gears, gearshaft and pinions a) For use under water i) StainlessSteel ii) Nickel alloy iii) Plastics b) For use above water i) Brass rod ii) Brass sheet (for gears only) iii) Stainless iv) Plastics c) Dia Copper duly Enamelled or powder coated 5. Indicating Device : Indicating device shall be able to record 9999 kl (min) for meter size of 15, 20 and 25 mm and 99999 kl (min) for size 40 and 50 mm and shall thereafter indicate zero. For digital indicators the visible di"
    },
    "content": "IS 14846: 2000 Sluice Valves For Water Works Purposes\n(50 TO 1200 mm SIZE)\nSP 21 : 2005 10.232\n1.\nScope – Covers terminology, construction, technical characteristics, metrological characteristics and other\nrequirements of water meters with threaded end connections of size up to and including 50 mm, having\nnominal flow rates in the range of 1.5 to 15 kl/h, suitable for measuring the flow of cold potable water at a nominal\npressure of 1 MPa (Max) and ambient temperature.\nThis standard is appliable both for semipositive\n(piston type) and inferential (turbine type) including magnetic type water meters having dry or wet dial.\n2.\nNominal Sizes – 5, 20, 25, 40 and 50 mm.\n3.\nClasses – A and B depending on maximum verification scale interval and metrological\ncharacteristics.\n4.\nMaterials -\nBody / Component\nMaterials\nBody a) Bronze\nb) Brass\nRegistration box a) Bronze\nb) Brass c) Plastic\nStrainers a) Plastics\nb) Brass c) Stainless steel\nImpellers, pistons a) Ebonite and chambers (for piston only)\nb) Vulcanite\n(for piston only)\nc) Plastics\nMeasuring chamber a) Brass\nb)Bronze c) Plastics\n(Semi positive meters only)\nGears, gearshaft and pinions a) For use under water\ni) StainlessSteel ii) Nickel alloy\niii) Plastics b) For use above water\ni) Brass rod ii) Brass sheet\n(for gears only)\niii) Stainless iv) Plastics\nc) Dia\nCopper duly\nEnamelled or powder coated\n5.\nIndicating Device : Indicating device shall be able to record 9999 kl (min) for meter size of 15, 20 and 25 mm\nand 99999 kl (min) for size 40 and 50 mm and shall thereafter indicate zero.\nFor digital indicators the visible displacement of all digits shall be upward in value.Indicators with pointer\nshall rotate in a clockwise direction.\nEach scale shall be either :\na)\ngraduated in values expressed in litres, or b)\naccompained by a multiplying factor (×.001,\n×.01, ×.1, ×10, ×100, ×1 000, etc.)\nThe fastest-moving visible graduated element, the control element, the scale interval of which is known as\nthe \"verification scale interval\", shall move continuously. The length of verification scale interval\nshall be not less than 1 mm and not more than 5 mm.\nTable 1 Verfication Scale Interval METER\nMAXIMUM VALUE OF VERIFICATION SIZE\nSCALE INTERVAL, LITRES\nClass A class B 15 0.2 0.2 20 0.5 0.2 25 1.0 0.5 40 2.0 1.0 50 2.0 2.0\n6.\nMeter Size and Over all Dimensions: See Table 2.\n7.\nTechnical Characteristics\n7.1 Pressure Tightness – Meter shall be able to\nwithstand constantly without defects, leakage, seepage,the continous water pressure of\ni)\n1.6 Mpa for 15 minutes, and\nii)\n2 Mpa for 1 minute"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 779: 1994",
    "title": "Water Meters (Domestic Type)",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Requirements for materials, dimensions and construction of boxes for water meters of nominal size conforming to IS 779 – 1994*.",
    "keywords": [
      "meters",
      "flow",
      "rate",
      "meter",
      "boxes",
      "nipples",
      "qmax"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Fabrication And Fittings": "Locking arrangement may be provided either with a dog-and-clamp arrangement or alternatively, by means of a padlock. Suitable anchorage for fixing box to concrete or masonry bed plate shall be provided.",
      "Scope": "Requirements for materials, dimensions and construction of boxes for water meters of nominal size conforming to IS 779 – 1994*. 2. Sizes and Shape 2.1. Shall be of two sizes and suitable for the water meters of following sizes : Size 1 – for 15, 20 and 25 mm water meters, and Size 2 – for 40 and 50 mm water meters. 2.2. Shape : Oval or rectangular.",
      "Dimensions": "Minimum inside clear dimensions : Size Length Width Height mm mm mm 1 600 600 500 2 900 600 600 4. Manufacture For detailed information, refer to IS 2104 : 1981 Specification for water meter boxes (domestic type) ( first revision)"
    },
    "content": "IS 779: 1994 Water Meters (Domestic Type)\n(Sixth Revision)\nNote: For material details, see Annex. B of the standard.\nSP 21 : 2005 10.233 Table 3 Minimum Starting Flow Rate, Transitional Flow Rate and Maximum Flow Rate Values\nMETER MINIMUM STARTING FLOW RATE TRANSITIONAL FLOW RATE QT L/H FOR MAXIMUM\nQMIN L/H FOR FLOW RATE QMAX KL/H\nClass A Class B\nClass A\nClass B\n(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)\n(6)\n15 60 30 150 120 3\n20 100 50 250 200 5\n25 140 70 350 280 7\n40 400 200\n1 000 800\n20\n50 600 300\n1 500\n1 200\n30\nTable 2 Meter Size, Threads, Nominal Flow Rates and Dimensions All dimensions in millimetres\nMETER SIZE THREADS\nNOMINAL MINIMUM LENGTH OF OVERALL DIMENSIONS\nFLOW RATE, THREADS ON EITHER\n(SEE FIG. 1 OF THE STANDARD)\nQ\nN IN KL/H END OF BODY (SEE FIG. 2 OF THE STANDARD) Length Width W Height (Max) With Without H1 H2 nipples nipples\n(a) (b) Preferred Alternate\n(1) (2) (3)\n(4)\n(5) (6)\n(7) (8) (9)\n(10)\n(11)\n15 G ¾ B\n1.5\n10\n12 250\n165 110\n100\n50\n180\n20 G 1 B\n2.5\n12\n14 290\n190 165\n130\n60\n240\n25 G 1¼B\n3.5\n12\n16 380\n260 -\n170\n65\n260\n40 G 2 B\n10\n13\n20 430\n300 -\n210\n75\n300\n50 G 2½B\n15\n15\n25 470\n330 -\n270\n115\n300\nTolerance : On the overall length shall be ± 5 mm for meter with nipples and +0,-2 mm for meters without nipple.\nNote : Meters shall be supplied with nuts and nipples unless specified otherwise by thepurchaser.\n8.2 Minimum Starting Flow Rate as Table 3.\n7.2\nLoss of Pressure – Shall not exceed 0.025 Mpa at the maximum flow rate, Qmax.\n7.3 Temperature suitability – as prescribed\n8.\nMetrological Characterists\n8.1 Metring accuracy – The maximum permissible error\nin the metering accuracy, shall be as under :\na) In the lower region of flow, ± 5%\nQmin (inclusive) to Qt (exclusive) b)In the upper region of flow, ± 2%\nQt (inclusive) to Qmax (inclusive)\nNote: For methods of tests, refer to IS 6784 :1996 Method of performance testing of water meters(domestic type) (second\nrevision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 779:1994 Water meters (domestic type) (sixth revision)\nSP 21 : 2005 10.234\n4.1 Construction –\na) Cast iron boxes – Minimum thickness of box shall be 8 mm for Size 1 and 10 mm for Size2.\nb) Mild steel boxes – Minimum thickness shall be 3 mm.\nc) Precast reinforced concrete boxes –\nThickness of wall shall not be less than 40 mm.\nd) Sloth for pipe – Height of slot shall be half the clear inside height of box and width shall\nbe 40 mm for Size 1and 75 mm for Size 2 with a tolerance of +3 mm.\nNote : For typical illustration water meter boxes of different\nmaterials, refer to Fig. 1 to 5 of the standard.\n4.2. Fabrication and Fittings – Locking arrangement may be provided either with a dog-and-clamp\narrangement or alternatively, by means of a padlock.\nSuitable anchorage for fixing box to concrete or masonry bed plate shall be provided.\n1.\nScope – Requirements for materials, dimensions and construction of boxes for water meters of nominal size\nconforming to IS 779 – 1994*.\n2. Sizes and Shape\n2.1. Shall be of two sizes and suitable for the water meters of following sizes :\nSize 1 – for 15, 20 and 25 mm water meters, and\nSize 2 – for 40 and 50 mm water meters.\n2.2. Shape : Oval or rectangular.\n3.\nDimensions –\nMinimum inside clear dimensions :\nSize\nLength Width Height mm mm mm 1 600 600 500 2 900 600 600\n4.\nManufacture\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2104 : 1981 Specification for water meter boxes (domestic type)\n( first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2104: 1981",
    "title": ". Water Meter Boxes (Domestic Type)",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "(First Revision) * Water meters (domestic type) (sixth revision) SP 21 : 2005",
    "keywords": [
      "meters",
      "sixth",
      "domestic",
      "type",
      "water"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 2104: 1981 . Water Meter Boxes (Domestic Type)\n(First Revision)\n* Water meters (domestic type) (sixth revision)\nSP 21 : 2005 10.235"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2373: 1981",
    "title": "Water Meters (Bulk Type)",
    "category": "Building Limes",
    "summary": "Covers bulk type water meters of the following types : a) Vane-wheel (impeller) type water meters from 50 to 300 mm ; and b) Helical type water meters from 50 to 500 mm",
    "keywords": [
      "hinges",
      "meters",
      "mortice",
      "door",
      "locks",
      "ratings",
      "vane"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers bulk type water meters of the following types : a) Vane-wheel (impeller) type water meters from 50 to 300 mm ; and b) Helical type water meters from 50 to 500 mm 2. Nominal size : (Bore of inlet) 50, 80, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400 and 500 mm. 3. Ranges of Registration : Nominal Ranges of Registration of Water Size Meters in Litres Minimum Resistration Maximum in Dial Division Not Registration tobe More Than Not to be Less than 50 10 100 000 000 80 10 100 000 000 100 100 100 000 000 150 100 100 000 000 200 100 1000000000 250 100 1000 000 000 300 100 1000 000 000 350 100 1000 000 000 400 1 000 10 000 000 000 450 1 000 10 000 000 000 4. Performance Requirementst 4.1. Temperature : Up to 45oC. 4.2. Hydrostatic Test : Shall satisfactorily withstand a pressure of 1.6 MPa (16 kgf/cm"
    },
    "content": "IS 2373: 1981 Water Meters (Bulk Type)\n(Third Revision)\n4.4 Capacity Ratings for Intermediate flows\nNominal Capacity Ratings of watermeters Size in Litres per hour mm\nVane-Wheel Type\nHelical Type\n50\n17 000\n20 000\n80\n27 000\n62 000\n100\n40 000\n100 000\n150\n80 000 250 000\n200\n150 000\n400 000\n250\n220 000\n550 000\n300\n300 000\n750 000\n350\n-\n1 000 000\n400\n-\n1 500 000\n500\n-\n2 500 000\n4.5. Minimum Starting flow :\nNominal\nCapacity Ratings of Water Meters Size in Litres per hour mm Vane-Wheel Type Helical Type 50 250 500 80 500 1 000\n100 700 1 500\n150 1 000 3 500\n200 2 400 5 500\n250 3 200 9 000\n300 6 400 14 000\n350 -\n20 000\n400 -\n25 000\n500 -\n35 000\n1.\nScope – Covers bulk type water meters of the following types :\na) Vane-wheel (impeller) type water meters from 50 to 300 mm ; and b) Helical type water meters from 50 to 500 mm\n2.\nNominal size : (Bore of inlet) 50, 80, 100, 150, 200,\n250, 300, 350, 400 and 500 mm.\n3.\nRanges of Registration :\nNominal Ranges of Registration of Water Size Meters in Litres\nMinimum Resistration Maximum in Dial Division Not Registration\ntobe More Than Not to be Less than\n50\n10\n100 000 000\n80\n10\n100 000 000\n100\n100\n100 000 000\n150\n100\n100 000 000\n200\n100\n1000000000\n250\n100\n1000 000 000\n300\n100\n1000 000 000\n350\n100\n1000 000 000\n400\n1 000\n10 000 000 000\n450\n1 000 10 000 000 000\n4.\nPerformance Requirementst\n4.1. Temperature : Up to 45oC.\n4.2. Hydrostatic Test : Shall satisfactorily withstand a pressure of 1.6 MPa (16 kgf/cm2).\n4.3. Capacity Ratings :\nNomininal Capacity Ratings\nNominal Capacity Ratings of Water Meters Size in Litres per hour mm Vane-Wheel Type Helical Type 50\n30 000\n50 000\n80\n50 000\n125 000\n100\n70 000 200 000\n150 150 000\n500 000\n200\n250 000\n800 000\n250\n400 000\n1 100 000\n300\n500 000\n1 500 000\n350 - 2 000 000\n400\n-\n3 000 000\n500\n-\n5 000 000\n4.6 Metering Accuracy : ± 2 percent.\n5.\nFrost Protection :Metres liable to be damaged by frost shall be protected with suitable frost protection\ndevices. Note: For materials and manufacturing details, refer to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2373 : 1981. Specification for water meters (bulk type)\nSP 21 : 2005 11.1\nSECTION 11\nBUILDERS HARDWARE CONTENTS\nTitle\nPage\nIS\n204 (Part 1) : 1991\nTower bolts : Part 1 Ferrous metal (fifth revision)\n11.4\nIS\n204 (Part 2) : 1992\nTower bolts : Part 2 Non - Ferrous metals (fifth revision)\n11.5\nIS\n205 : 1992\nNon-ferrous metal butt hinges (fourth revision)\n11.6\nIS\n206 : 1992\nTee and strap hinges (fourth revision)\n11.7\nIS\n208 : 1996\nDoor handles (first revision)\n11.8\nIS\n281 : 1991\nMild steel sliding door bolts for use with padlocks (third revision) 11.9\nIS\n362 : 1991\nParliament hinges (fifth revision) 11.10\nIS\n363 : 1993\nHasps and staples (fourth revision)\n11.11\nIS\n364 : 1993\nFan light catch (third revision)\n11.12\nIS\n452 : 1973\nDoor springs, Rat-tail type (second revision)\n11.13\nIS\n453 : 1993\nDouble acting spring hinges (third revision) 11.14\nIS\n1019 : 1974\nRim latches (second revision)\n11.15\nIS\n1341 : 1992 Steel butt hinges (sixth revision)\n11.16\nIS\n1823 : 1980\nFloor door stoppers (third revision)\n11.17\nIS\n1837 : 1966\nFan light pivots (first revision)\n11.18\nIS\n2209 : 1976\nMortice locks (vertical type) (third revision)\n11.19\nIS:\n2681 : 1993\nNon-ferrous metal sliding door bolts (aldrops) for use with pad locks\n(third revision) 11.20\nIS\n3564 : 1995\nHydraulically regulated door closers (fourth revision)\n11.21\nIS\n3818 : 1992\nContinuous (piano) hinges (third revision)\n11.22\nIS\n3828 : 1966\nVentilator chains 11.23\nIS\n3843 : 1995\nSteel back flap hinges (Second revision) 11.24\nIS\n3847 : 1992\nMortice night latches (first revision)\n11.25\nIS\n4621 : 1975\nIndicating bolts for use in public baths and lavatories (first revision)\n11.26\nIS\n4948 : 2002\nWelded steel wire fabric for general use (first revision)\n11.27\nIS\n4992 : 1975\nDoor handles for mortice locks (vertical type) (first revision)\n11.28\nIS\n5187 : 1972\nFlush bolts (first revision)\n11.29\nIS\n5899 : 1970\nBathroom latches 11.30\nIS\n5930 : 1970\nMortice latch (vertical type)\n11.31\nIS\n6315 : 1992\nFloor springs (hydraulically regulated) for heavy doors (second revision) 11.32\nIS\n6318 : 1971\nPlastic window stays and fasteners.\n11.33 Title\nPage\nIS\n6343 : 1982\nDoor closers (pneumatically regulated) for light doors weighing up to 40 kg (first revision)\n11.34\nIS\n6607 : 1972\nRebated mortice locks (vertical type)\n11.35\nIS\n7196 : 1974\nHold fast\n11.36\nIS\n7197 : 1974\nDouble action floor springs (without oil check) for heavy doors\n11.37\nIS\n7534 : 1985\nSliding locking bolts for use with padlocks (first revision)\n11.38\nIS\n7540 : 1974\nMortice dead locks\n11.39\nIS\n8760 : 1978\nMortice sliding door locks, with lever mechanism\n11.40\nIS 9106 : 1979\nRising butt hinges\n11.41\nIS\n9131 : 1979\nRim locks\n11.42\nIS\n10019 : 1981\nMild steel stays and fasteners.\n11.43\nIS\n10090 : 1982\nNumericals\n11.44\nIS\n10342 : 1982\nCurtain rail system\n11.45\nIS\n12817 : 1997\nStainless steel butt hinges (first revision)\n11.46\nIS\n12867 : 1989\nPVC hand rail covers\n11.47\nIS\n14912 : 2001\nDoor closers, concealed type (hydraulically operated)\n11.48"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 204 (Part 1): 1991",
    "title": "Tower Bolts",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for tower bolts made of ferrous metals.",
    "keywords": [
      "tower",
      "barrel",
      "bolts",
      "mild",
      "bolt",
      "steel",
      "riveted"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for tower bolts made of ferrous metals. 2. Types Type Description a) Barrel Tower Bolts 1A Mild steel barrel tower bolts with mild steel barrel and mild steel bolt. 1B Mild steel barrel tower bolts with mild steel barrel and cast iron bolt. b) Semi-Barrel Tower Bolts 2A Mild steel semi-barrel tower bolts, full cover with mild steels sheet pressed barrel and mild steel bolt. 2B Mild steel semi-barrel tower bolts, full cover with mild steel sheet pressed barrel and cast iron bolt. 3A Mild steel semi-barrel tower bolts, open cover with mild steel sheet pressed barrel and mild steel bolt. 3B Mild steel semi-barrel tower bolts, open cover with mild steel sheet pressed barrel and cast iron bolt. c) Riveted or Spot Welded Tower Bolts 4A Mild steel tower bolts riveted type with back p"
    },
    "content": "IS 204 (Part 1): 1991 Tower Bolts\nPART 1 FERROUS METALS\n(Fifth Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements for tower bolts made of ferrous metals.\n2.\nTypes\nType\nDescription a) Barrel Tower Bolts\n1A\nMild steel barrel tower bolts with mild steel barrel and mild steel bolt.\n1B\nMild steel barrel tower bolts with mild steel barrel and cast iron bolt.\nb) Semi-Barrel Tower Bolts\n2A\nMild steel semi-barrel tower bolts, full cover with mild steels sheet pressed barrel\nand mild steel bolt.\n2B\nMild steel semi-barrel tower bolts, full cover with mild steel sheet pressed barrel\nand cast iron bolt.\n3A\nMild steel semi-barrel tower bolts, open cover with mild steel sheet pressed barrel\nand mild steel bolt.\n3B\nMild steel semi-barrel tower bolts, open cover with mild steel sheet pressed barrel\nand cast iron bolt.\nc) Riveted or Spot Welded Tower Bolts\n4A\nMild steel tower bolts riveted type with back plate and mild steel bolt and open\nstaple.\n4B\nMild steel tower bolts riveted type with back plate and cast iron bolt and open\nstaple.\nNote— If specifically ordered, this type of tower bolt may also\nbe supplied with alternative staple of riveted or welded type with back plate.\nd) Skeleton Tower Bolts\n5.\nMild steel skeleton towerbolts with steel sheet pressed plate and staples and mild\nsteel bolt.\n3.\nMaterials i)\nMild steel sheets ii)\nMild steel bars iii)\nCast iron\nNote— For details of materials see 4 and Table 5 of the standard.\n4.\nDimensions\n4.1 Barrel Tower Bolts — 75, 100 ,125 ,150,175, 200,\n225, 250 and 300 mm sizes\n4.2 Semi-Barrel Tower Bolts — 75, 100, 125, 150, 175,\n200, 225,250, 300, 375 and 450 mm sizes.\n4.3 Riveted or Spot Welded Tower Bolts — 100, 125,\n150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 300, 375, 450, 600, 750 and 900 mm sizes.\n4.4 Skeleton Tower Bolts — 375, 450, 600, 750 and 900\nmm sizes.\nNote — For detailed dimensions and tolerances on them, refer\nto Tables 1 to 4 of the standard.\n5\nFinish – Unless otherwise ordered for the bolts shall be bright finished or bright, satin finished. Other\nparts of the tower bolts shall be finished as above or may also be stove enamelled black. (See 7 of the\nstandard).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 204 (Part 1) : 1991 Specification for tower bolts:Part 1 Ferrous metal (fifth revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 204 (Part 2): 1992",
    "title": "Tower Bolts",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for butt hinges made from non-ferrous metals.",
    "keywords": [
      "tower",
      "brass",
      "bolts",
      "barrel",
      "skeleton",
      "hinges",
      "extruded"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for butt hinges made from non-ferrous metals. 2. Types a) Extruded aluminium alloy butt hinges, b) Extruded brass butt hinges, c) Cast brass butt hinges, and d) Sheet brass butt hinges. 3. Materials i) Extruded aluminium alloy Flap ii) Extruded brass iii) Cast brass iv) Brass sheet i) Alumium alloy ii) Phosphor bronze wire or rod Pin iii) Mild steel wire or rod iv) Brass wire v) Stainless steel",
      "Dimensions": "Dimesnions of different types of higes shall be normally as given in Tables 2 to 5 of the standard. For tolerances see table 6 of the standard. 5. Requirements 5.1 Number of knuckles in each hinge shall not be less than five except in case of cast brass hinges of sizes less than 40 mm and in case of sheet brass hinges where it shal not be less than three. 5.2 Screw Holes— Shall be counter sunk.",
      "Workmanship And Finish": "Hinges shall be free from all defects. All sharp edges shall be rounded. 6.1 Brass hinges shall have bright or satin finish and shall be suitably protected against discoloration. Aluminium alloy hinges shall be anodized. Note— For details see 4 and Table 1 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 205 :1992 Specification for non-ferrous metal but thinges (fifth revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 204 (Part 2): 1992 Tower Bolts\nPART 2 NON FERROUS METALS\n(Fifth Revison)\n1.\nScope Requirements for tower bolts made of nonferrous metals.\n2.\nTypes\nType\nDescription a) Barrel Tower Bolts\n1\nBrass barrel tower bolts with cast brass barrel and rolled or cast brass bolts.\n2\nBrass barrel tower bolts with barrel of extruded sections of brass and rolled or\ndrawn brass.\n3\nBrass barrel tower bolts with brass sheet barrel and rolled or drawn brass bolt.\n4\nAluminium barrel tower bolts with barrel and bolt of extruded sections of\naluminium alloys.\n5 zinc barrel tower bolts with barrel and\nbolt of die-cast zinc alloy. b) Skeleton Tower Bolts\n6\nBrass skeleton tower bolts with cast brass plate and staples and rolled or\ndrawn brass bolt.\n7\nBrass skeleton tower bolts with staples and plate of extruded sections of brass\nand rolled or drawn brass bolt.\n8\nAluminium skeleton tower bolts with plate, staples and bolt of extruded\nsections of aluminium alloy.\n9\nZinc skeleton tower bolts with plate, staples and bolts of die-cast zinc alloy.\n3.\nMaterials i)\nAluminium alloy tubes ii)\nAluminium alloy extruded rods iii)\nBrass sheets iv)\nCast brass v)\nExtruded brass vi)\nZinc base alloy die casting.\nNote— For details of materials see 4 and Table 3 of the\nstandard.\n4.\nDimensions\n4.1 Barrel Tower Bolts — 75, 100 ,125, 150,175, 200,\n225, 250 and 300 mm sizes\n4.2 Skeleton Tower Bolts— 375, 450, 600,750, and 900\nmm sizes.\nNote — For detailed dimensions and tolerances on them, refer\nto Tables 1 and 2 of the standard.\n5.\nFinish a) Barrel Tower Bolts\n1)\nBrass tower bolts (Types 1 to 3) — Bolt and barrel polished or plated as specified\nby the purchaser.\n2)\nAluminium alloy tower bolts (Type 4) —\nBolts and barrel anodized. The anodic film may be either transparent or dyed as\nspecified by the purchaser.\n3)\nZinc alloy tower bolts (Type5) — Bolt and barrel oxidized, bronzed or plated as\nspecified by the purchaser.\nb) Skeleton Tower Bolts 1)\nBrass skeleton bolts (Types 6 and 7) Bolt, plate and staples bright finished.\n2)\nAluminium alloy skeleton tower bolts\n(Type 8) —Bolt, plate and staples anodized.\nThe anodic film may be either transparent or dyed as specified by the purchaser.\n3)\nZinc alloy tower bolts (Type 9) — Bolt and barrel oxidized, bronzed or plated as\nspecified by the purchaser.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 204 (Part 2) : 1992 Specification for tower bolts Part 2 :Non ferrous metals\n(fifth revision). 1. Scope – Requirements for butt hinges made from non-ferrous metals.\n2.\nTypes a)\nExtruded aluminium alloy butt hinges, b)\nExtruded brass butt hinges, c)\nCast brass butt hinges, and d)\nSheet brass butt hinges.\n3.\nMaterials i)\nExtruded aluminium alloy Flap ii) Extruded brass\niii) Cast brass iv) Brass sheet\ni)\nAlumium alloy ii) Phosphor bronze wire or rod Pin iii) Mild steel wire or rod\niv) Brass wire v) Stainless steel\n4.\nDimensions— Dimesnions of different types of higes shall be normally as given in Tables 2 to 5 of the\nstandard. For tolerances see table 6 of the standard.\n5.\nRequirements\n5.1 Number of knuckles in each hinge shall not be\nless than five except in case of cast brass hinges of sizes less than 40 mm and in case of sheet brass hinges\nwhere it shal not be less than three.\n5.2 Screw Holes— Shall be counter sunk.\n6.\nWorkmanship and Finish— Hinges shall be free from all defects. All sharp edges shall be rounded.\n6.1 Brass hinges shall have bright or satin finish and\nshall be suitably protected against discoloration.\nAluminium alloy hinges shall be anodized.\nNote— For details see 4 and Table 1 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 205 :1992 Specification for non-ferrous metal but thinges (fifth revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 205: 1992",
    "title": "Non Ferrous Metal Butt Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for mild steel Tee and strap hinges that are commonly used in generall building construction.",
    "keywords": [
      "hinges",
      "strap",
      "tee",
      "weight",
      "heavy",
      "light",
      "medium"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for mild steel Tee and strap hinges that are commonly used in generall building construction. 2. Types 2.1 Tee hinges shall be of the following types— Type Designation 1 Light weight 2 Medium weight 3 Heavy weight 2.2 Strap hinges shall be of the following types — Type Designation 1 Light weight strap 2 Medium weight 3 Heavy weight 3. Materials i) Mild steel sheet ii) Mild steel wire 4. Dimensions 4.1 Light Weight Tee Hinges — 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, and 400 mm sizes. 4.2 Medium Weight Tee Hinges — 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm sizes. 4.3 Heavy Weight Tee Hinges — 150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500 and 600 mm sizes. 4.4 Light Weight Strap Hinges– 75, 100, 125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350 and 400 mm sizes. 4.5 Medium Weight Strap Hing",
      "Finish": "Tee and strap hinges shall be either bright finished or stove enamelled black, as specified by the purchaser. Note – For details of materials, see 4 and Table 1 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 206 : 1992 Specification for tee and strap hinges (fourth revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 205: 1992 Non Ferrous Metal Butt Hinges\n(Fourth Revision) 1.\nScope – Requirements for mild steel Tee and strap hinges that are commonly used in generall building\nconstruction.\n2.\nTypes\n2.1 Tee hinges shall be of the following types— Type Designation\n1 Light weight\n2 Medium weight\n3 Heavy weight\n2.2 Strap hinges shall be of the following types — Type Designation\n1 Light weight strap\n2 Medium weight\n3 Heavy weight\n3.\nMaterials i) Mild steel sheet ii) Mild steel wire\n4.\nDimensions\n4.1 Light Weight Tee Hinges — 75, 100, 125, 150, 200,\n250, 300, 350, and 400 mm sizes.\n4.2 Medium Weight Tee Hinges — 75, 100, 125, 150,\n200, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450 and 500 mm sizes.\n4.3 Heavy Weight Tee Hinges — 150, 200, 250, 300, 350,\n400, 450, 500 and 600 mm sizes.\n4.4 Light Weight Strap Hinges– 75, 100, 125, 150, 200,\n250, 300, 350 and 400 mm sizes.\n4.5 Medium Weight Strap Hinges— 75, 100, 125, 150,\n200, 250, 300, 350, 450 and 500 mm\n4.6 Heavy Weight Strap Hinges— 150, 200, 250, 300,\n350, 400, 450, 500 and 600 mm sizes.\nNote— For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to Tables 2\nto 7 of the standard.\n5.\nFinish – Tee and strap hinges shall be either bright finished or stove enamelled black, as specified by the\npurchaser. Note – For details of materials, see 4 and Table 1 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 206 : 1992 Specification for tee and strap hinges (fourth revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 206: 1992",
    "title": "Tee And Strap Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for materials, manufacture, dimensions and finish of door handles of the type that are commonly fixed to doors.",
    "keywords": [
      "handles",
      "cast",
      "enammelled",
      "stove",
      "bright",
      "type",
      "satin"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for materials, manufacture, dimensions and finish of door handles of the type that are commonly fixed to doors. 2. Types Type 1 Cast Type 2 Pressed oval Type 3 Pressed half oval Type 4 Fabricated 3. Materials Type 1 Cast iron, malleable cast iron, cast brass, cast aluminium or zinc and 3 alloydiecasting, Type 2and 3 Mild steel, and Type 4 Brass or aluminium alloy.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "Shall conform to Tables 2A and 2B, read with Figures 1 to 4 of the standard. Note– The material used shall comply with the requirements given in Table 1 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 208 : 1996 Specification for door handles (fifth revision). Dimensions Tolerance mm mm Up to 100 ± 1 101 to 200 ± 1.5 201 and above ± 2 5. Finish Type 1– Bright satin finish, nickel chromium plated or copper oxidised or bronze finish for cast brass and zinc die cast handles. Stove enamelled black or copper oxidized for cast iron and malleable cast iron handles. Aluminium anodized to a bright natural, mat or stain finish or dyed. Type 2– Stove enammelled black. Type 3– Stove enammelled black. Type 4– Bright satin finish, nickel plated or copper-oxidized, bronze finish for brass handles."
    },
    "content": "IS 206: 1992 Tee And Strap Hinges\n(Fourth Revision) 1. Scope – Requirements for materials, manufacture,\ndimensions and finish of door handles of the type that are commonly fixed to doors.\n2. Types\nType 1 Cast\nType 2 Pressed oval\nType 3 Pressed half oval\nType 4 Fabricated\n3.\nMaterials Type 1\nCast iron, malleable cast iron, cast brass, cast aluminium or zinc and 3\nalloydiecasting, Type 2and 3 Mild steel, and Type 4 Brass or aluminium alloy.\n4.\nDimensions and Tolerances — Shall conform to\nTables 2A and 2B, read with Figures 1 to 4 of the standard. Note– The material used shall comply with the requirements given in Table 1 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 208 : 1996 Specification for door handles (fifth revision).\nDimensions\nTolerance mm\nmm\nUp to 100\n± 1\n101 to 200\n± 1.5\n201 and above\n± 2\n5.\nFinish\nType 1–\nBright satin finish, nickel chromium plated or copper oxidised or bronze\nfinish for cast brass and zinc die cast handles. Stove enamelled black or\ncopper oxidized for cast iron and malleable cast iron handles.\nAluminium anodized to a bright natural, mat or stain finish or dyed.\nType 2–\nStove enammelled black.\nType 3–\nStove enammelled black.\nType 4–\nBright satin finish, nickel plated or copper-oxidized, bronze finish for\nbrass handles. Aluminium anodized to a bright, natural, mat or satin finish\nor dyed."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 208: 1996",
    "title": "Door Handles",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of mild steel sliding door bolts commonly used in general building constrcution for locking doors, gates, etc, with padlocks.",
    "keywords": [
      "sliding",
      "bolt",
      "bolts",
      "clip",
      "plate",
      "mild",
      "hasp"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of mild steel sliding door bolts commonly used in general building constrcution for locking doors, gates, etc, with padlocks. 2. Types i) Plate Type, and ii) Clip or bolt type. 3. Sizes (a) Plate type sliding bolts— 150, 200, 250, 300, 375 and 450 mm; and (b)Clip or bolt type sliding bolts— 200, 250, 300, 375 and 450 mm 4. Materials Mild Steel Mild Steel Wire Mild Steel Rod Note— For details of material see 5 of the standard.",
      "Sizes A) Plate Type Sliding Bolts": "150, 200, 250, 300, 375 and 450 mm. b) Clip or bolt type sliding bolts – 200, 250, 300, 375 and 450 mm 5.1 Tolerances–Length of bolt - Sizes up to and including 300 mm ± 2 mm Sizes 375 mm and 450 mm ± 3 mm Note— Size represents length of the bolt. For detailed dimensions and tolerances see 6 of the standard.",
      "Finish": "i) Sliding Bolts, Plate Type – Back plate straps and staple plate shall be stove enamalled black before assmebling. Hasp and bolt shall be finished bright or copper-oxidized or shall be plated with nickel or chromium. ii) Sliding Bolts, Clip or Bolt Type — Hasp, bolt, staple and clips or fixing bolts shall be copper oxidized or shall be plated with nickel or chromium . Note—When the sliding bolts is to be finished bright, a thin coating of rust preventive shall be given. For detailed information, refer to IS 281 : 1991 Specification for mild steel sliding door bolt for use with padlocks (third revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 208: 1996 Door Handles\n(Fifth Revision) 1.\nScope – Requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of mild steel sliding\ndoor bolts commonly used in general building constrcution for locking doors, gates, etc, with padlocks.\n2.\nTypes i)\nPlate Type, and ii)\nClip or bolt type.\n3.\nSizes\n(a) Plate type sliding bolts— 150, 200, 250, 300,\n375 and 450 mm; and\n(b)Clip or bolt type sliding bolts— 200, 250, 300,\n375 and 450 mm\n4.\nMaterials Mild Steel Mild Steel Wire Mild Steel Rod\nNote— For details of material see 5 of the standard.\n5.\nSizes a) Plate type sliding bolts — 150, 200, 250, 300,\n375 and 450 mm.\nb) Clip or bolt type sliding bolts – 200, 250, 300,\n375 and 450 mm\n5.1 Tolerances–Length of bolt -\nSizes up to and including 300 mm ± 2 mm\nSizes 375 mm and 450 mm ± 3 mm\nNote— Size represents length of the bolt. For detailed\ndimensions and tolerances see 6 of the standard.\n6.\nFinish– i)\nSliding Bolts, Plate Type – Back plate straps and staple plate shall be stove enamalled\nblack before assmebling. Hasp and bolt shall be finished bright or copper-oxidized or shall\nbe plated with nickel or chromium. ii)\nSliding Bolts, Clip or Bolt Type — Hasp, bolt, staple and clips or fixing bolts shall be copper\noxidized or shall be plated with nickel or chromium .\nNote—When the sliding bolts is to be finished bright, a thin\ncoating of rust preventive shall be given.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 281 : 1991 Specification for mild steel sliding door bolt for use with padlocks (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 281: 1991",
    "title": "Mild Steel Sliding Door Bolts For Use With Padlocks",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding materials, manufactre, finihs. ,marking and packing of parliament hinges.",
    "keywords": [
      "hinges",
      "parliament",
      "alluminium",
      "brass",
      "alloy",
      "bright",
      "washer"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding materials, manufactre, finihs. ,marking and packing of parliament hinges. 2. Types Type 1 Cast (Cast brass) Type 2 Pressed (Mildsteel, Alluminium alloy) Type 3 Fabricated (Extruted Alluminium alloy) Note— Materials for different types are given above within brackets. For requirements of materials, see Table 1 of the standard. 3. Dimensions 3.1 Alluminium Alloy Parliament Hinges — 50, 65, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175, and 200 mm. For tolerances see Table 2 of the standard. 3.2 Cast Brass Parliament Hinges — 50, 65, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175 and 200 mm. For tolerances see Table 3 of the standard. 3.3 Mild Steel Parliament Hinges —50, 65, 75, 100, 125, 150, 175 and 200 mm. For tolerances see Table 4 of the standard",
      "Manufacture": "Hinges shall be well made and be free from flaws and defects of all kinds. Washer shall be provided between knuckles for Type 1 and Type 3 hinges. Washer shall be made of nylon, plastic or any other suitable material. In locations susceptible to corrosion, use of brass or phosphor bronze hinge pins is recommended in case of brass hinges. All screw holes shall be clean and counter sunk.",
      "Finish": "Brass parliament hinges shall have either bright or satin finish and shall be suitably protected against discoloration. 5.1 Aluminium alloy hinges shall be anodized to a bright, natural, mat or satin finish or dyed. 5.2 Mild steel parliament hinges shall be finished bright or electro-galvanized as specified by the purchaser. For detailed information, refer to IS 362 : 1991 Specification for parliament hinges (fourth revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 281: 1991 Mild Steel Sliding Door Bolts For Use With Padlocks\n(Third Revision) 1.\nScope – Requirements regarding materials, manufactre, finihs. ,marking and packing of parliament\nhinges.\n2.\nTypes Type 1 Cast (Cast brass) Type 2 Pressed (Mildsteel, Alluminium alloy) Type 3 Fabricated (Extruted Alluminium alloy)\nNote— Materials for different types are given above within\nbrackets. For requirements of materials, see Table 1 of the standard.\n3.\nDimensions\n3.1 Alluminium Alloy Parliament Hinges — 50, 65, 75,\n100, 125, 150, 175, and 200 mm.\nFor tolerances see Table 2 of the standard.\n3.2 Cast Brass Parliament Hinges — 50, 65, 75, 100,\n125, 150, 175 and 200 mm.\nFor tolerances see Table 3 of the standard.\n3.3 Mild Steel Parliament Hinges —50, 65, 75, 100,\n125, 150, 175 and 200 mm.\nFor tolerances see Table 4 of the standard\n4.\nManufacture – Hinges shall be well made and be free from flaws and defects of all kinds. Washer shall be\nprovided between knuckles for Type 1 and Type 3 hinges. Washer shall be made of nylon, plastic or any\nother suitable material. In locations susceptible to corrosion, use of brass or phosphor bronze hinge pins\nis recommended in case of brass hinges. All screw holes shall be clean and counter sunk.\n5.\nFinish—Brass parliament hinges shall have either bright or satin finish and shall be suitably protected\nagainst discoloration.\n5.1 Aluminium alloy hinges shall be anodized to a\nbright, natural, mat or satin finish or dyed.\n5.2 Mild steel parliament hinges shall be finished bright\nor electro-galvanized as specified by the purchaser.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 362 : 1991 Specification for parliament hinges (fourth revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 362: 1991",
    "title": "Parliament Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding materials, manufacture, dimensions, manufacture and finish of hasps and staples.",
    "keywords": [
      "hasps",
      "staples",
      "mild",
      "brass",
      "alloy",
      "aluminium",
      "steel"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding materials, manufacture, dimensions, manufacture and finish of hasps and staples. 2. Types Type Description 1. Mild steel, brass or aluminium alloy hasps and staples—safety type.",
      "Mild Steel Hasps And Staples": "wire type. 3. Sizes 3.1 Mild Steel Hasps and Staples Type 1— 90, 115, 150 and 175 mm. 3.2 Brass or Aluminium Alloy Hasps and Staples Type 1 – 90, 115, 150 and 175 mm. 3.3 Mild Steel Hasps and Staples Type 2 — 65,75, 90, 100, 125,150 and 175 mm. For tolerances see Tables 2, 3 and 4 of the standard.",
      "Finish": "a) Mild steel hasps — Stove enamelled, black and staples b) Brass hasps – Oxidized or covered with staples clear lacquer after polishing as specified by the purchaser c) Aluminium alloy – Anodized. Note— For details regarding materials see 4 and Table 1 of the standard. For detailed information,refer to IS 363 : 1993 Specification for hasps and staples (fourth revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 362: 1991 Parliament Hinges\n(Fifth Revision) 1.\nScope – Requirements regarding materials, manufacture, dimensions, manufacture and finish of\nhasps and staples.\n2.\nTypes Type\nDescription 1. Mild steel, brass or aluminium alloy hasps and\nstaples—safety type. 2. Mild steel hasps and staples— wire type.\n3.\nSizes\n3.1 Mild Steel Hasps and Staples\nType 1— 90, 115, 150 and 175 mm.\n3.2 Brass or Aluminium Alloy Hasps and Staples\nType 1 – 90, 115, 150 and 175 mm.\n3.3 Mild Steel Hasps and Staples\nType 2 — 65,75, 90, 100, 125,150 and 175 mm.\nFor tolerances see Tables 2, 3 and 4 of the standard.\n4.\nFinish –\na) Mild steel hasps — Stove enamelled, black and staples\nb) Brass hasps –\nOxidized or covered with staples clear\nlacquer after polishing as specified by the\npurchaser c) Aluminium alloy –\nAnodized.\nNote— For details regarding materials see 4 and Table 1 of the standard.\nFor detailed information,refer to IS 363 : 1993 Specification for hasps and staples (fourth revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 364: 1993",
    "title": "Fan Light Catch",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding material, dimensions, manufacture and finish of fan light catches commonly used on ventilators in buildings.",
    "keywords": [
      "catches",
      "fan",
      "tail",
      "roller",
      "light",
      "door",
      "springs"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for materials, dimensions, manufacture, finish and tests for door springs, rat-tail type commonly used in building constrcution. 2. Types (According to material used) a) Mild steel door srings, and b) Brass door springs.",
      "Finish": "Mild steel door springs, casing, tail od, spindle cap and base plate shall be stove enamelled black or copper oxidized. In case of brass, there shall be bright finished or copper oxidized. 6.1 Spindle, roller plate and roller shall be bright finished and the spring if made of mild steel wire shall be copper oxidized or electro-galvanized. Note 1 — For details regarding material of door spring rat-tail type see 3 of the standard. Note 2 — For detailed dimension of door springs see Fig.1 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 452 : 1973 Specification for door spring rat- tail type ( second revision).",
      "Sizes": "300 and 375 mm Note – Size denotes distance between centres of spindle and roller. 4. Requirements a) Tail road – 10 mm dia. b) Roller plate – 16 mm thick. c) Base plate – 2.5 mm thick (size 80 × 40 mmcentre to cnetre of screw holes). d) Roller– 2 mm dia and 3 mm thick. 5. Performance Tests a) The tail rod when pushed through to the maximum possible limit and released 100 times in quick succession the spring shall show no sign of damage or any permanent set. b) The torque required to push open the door through 900 shall not exceed 4 kgf/m."
    },
    "content": "IS 364: 1993 Fan Light Catch\n(Third Revision)\n1.\nScope—Requirements regarding material, dimensions, manufacture and finish of fan light catches\ncommonly used on ventilators in buildings.\n2.\nTypes a)\nMild steel fan light catches, b)\nAluminium alloy fan light catches,and c)\nCast brass fan light catches.\n3.\nMaterials a)\nMild steel sheet shall satisfy prescribed bend test.\nb)\nMild steel wire shall have a tensile strength of 40 kg /mm 2 , minimum and shall satisfy the\nprescribed wrapping test.\nNote— For details regarding material, see 4 of the standard.\n4.\nDimensions and Tolerances\n4.1 Dimensions — The leading dimensions shall\nconform to those specified in Fig. 1 of the standard.\n4.2 Tolerances\nDimension\nTolerance mm\nmm\nUp to and including 5\n± 0.2\nAbove 5 and up to and\n± 0.5 including 25\nAbove 25\n± 1\n5.\nFinish — Aluminium alloy fan light catches shall be anodized after the initial fabrication work. A coating\nnot less than 0.015 mm is recommended for normal use.\nThe anodic film may be transparent or dyed as desired by the purchaser. For exterior use, where sunlight falls\non the fittings, only light fast colours like light fast bronze or light fast gold or plain anodic finishes shall\nbe employed and the thickness of the anodic film shall be not less than 0.025 mm.\n5.1 Brass fan light catches shall have satin finish or\nother finish as specified by the purchaser.\n5.2 Mild steel fan light catches may be stove enam-\nelled to a colour and finish as specified by the purchaser.\nFor detailed information,refer to IS 364 : 1993 Specification for fan light catch (third revision). 1.\nScope—Requirements for materials, dimensions, manufacture, finish and tests for door springs, rat-tail\ntype commonly used in building constrcution.\n2.\nTypes (According to material used)\na) Mild steel door srings, and b) Brass door springs.\n3.\nSizes – 300 and 375 mm\nNote – Size denotes distance between centres of spindle\nand roller.\n4.\nRequirements a)\nTail road – 10 mm dia.\nb)\nRoller plate – 16 mm thick.\nc)\nBase plate – 2.5 mm thick (size 80 × 40 mmcentre to cnetre of screw holes).\nd)\nRoller– 2 mm dia and 3 mm thick.\n5.\nPerformance Tests a) The tail rod when pushed through to the\nmaximum possible limit and released 100 times in quick succession the spring shall show no\nsign of damage or any permanent set.\nb) The torque required to push open the door through 900 shall not exceed 4 kgf/m.\n6.\nFinish – Mild steel door springs, casing, tail od, spindle cap and base plate shall be stove enamelled\nblack or copper oxidized. In case of brass, there shall be bright finished or copper oxidized.\n6.1 Spindle, roller plate and roller shall be bright finished\nand the spring if made of mild steel wire shall be copper oxidized or electro-galvanized.\nNote 1 — For details regarding material of door spring rat-tail type see 3 of the standard.\nNote 2 — For detailed dimension of door springs see Fig.1 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 452 : 1973 Specification for door spring rat- tail type ( second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 452: 1973",
    "title": "Door Spring Rat- Tail Type",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "(Second Revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "door",
      "spring",
      "rat",
      "tail",
      "type"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 452: 1973 Door Spring Rat- Tail Type\n(Second Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 453: 1993",
    "title": "Double-Acting Spring Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for material, dimensions manufacture, finish and tests of double-acting spring hinges and corresponding blank hinges used generally for swing doors.",
    "keywords": [
      "hinges",
      "acting",
      "hinge",
      "spring",
      "double",
      "blank",
      "door"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for material, dimensions manufacture, finish and tests of double-acting spring hinges and corresponding blank hinges used generally for swing doors. 2. Types a) Mild Steel double-acting spring hinges, and b) Brass double-acting spring hinges. 3. Sizes Size of Spring Size of Blank Hinge Hinge mm mm 100 70 125 75 150 75",
      "Dimensions": "See Fig 1 and 2 of the standard. 5. Performance Test a) Door when pushed through 900 and released 2 000 times on each side in quick sucession, the hinge and its components shall show no sign of damage. b) Door shall require force of 2.0 ± 0.5 kg for 100 mm hinge and 3.0 ± 0.5 kg. For 125 mm and 150 mm hinges, at a distance of 45 cm from the hinge pin to move the door through 900",
      "Finish": "a) Mild Steel Hinges — Stove-enamelled black or copper-oxidized. b) Brass Hinges — Satin, bright, nickel plated, or copper-oxidized. Note— For details regarding materials see 4 of the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 453 : 1993 Specification for double-acting spring hinges (third revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 453: 1993 Double-Acting Spring Hinges\n(Third Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements for material, dimensions manufacture, finish and tests of double-acting spring\nhinges and corresponding blank hinges used generally for swing doors.\n2.\nTypes a)\nMild Steel double-acting spring hinges, and b)\nBrass double-acting spring hinges.\n3.\nSizes\nSize of Spring\nSize of Blank Hinge\nHinge mm\nmm 100\n70 125\n75 150\n75\n4.\nDimensions— See Fig 1 and 2 of the standard.\n5.\nPerformance Test a) Door when pushed through 900 and released\n2 000 times on each side in quick sucession, the hinge and its components shall show no\nsign of damage.\nb) Door shall require force of 2.0 ± 0.5 kg for 100 mm hinge and 3.0 ± 0.5 kg. For 125 mm and\n150 mm hinges, at a distance of 45 cm from the hinge pin to move the door through 900\n6.\nFinish–\na) Mild Steel Hinges — Stove-enamelled black or copper-oxidized.\nb) Brass Hinges — Satin, bright, nickel plated, or copper-oxidized. Note— For details regarding materials see 4 of the standard\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 453 : 1993 Specification for double-acting spring hinges (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1019: 1974",
    "title": "Rim Latches",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding material, dimensions, manufacture and finish of rim latches for general use.",
    "keywords": [
      "latches",
      "rim",
      "hand",
      "turned",
      "latch",
      "opens",
      "left"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding material, dimensions, manufacture and finish of rim latches for general use.",
      "Handling Of Rim Latches": "Left hand latch if fitted on left hand door. Right hand latch if fitted on right hand door. 3. Types Type 1— Opens when handle is turned in one direction only. Type 2 — Opens when hande is turned in any direction. 3.1 Type 1 rim latches shall either be ‘left-hand’ or ‘right- hand’.",
      "Sizes": "75, 100, 125 and 150 mm denoted by overall length of the body measured from the outside face of the fore end to the rear end.",
      "Materials": "Shall be of the mild steel, brass, aluminium alloy or zinc base alloy. 6. Dimensions (in mm) Size Length × Breadth × Depth 75 75 × 60 × 14 100 100 × 70 × 20 125 125 × 70 × 20 150 150 × 70 × 20 Tolerance + 1 mm 6. Finish Brass latches Bright or satin finish Aluminium latches Anodized finish Steel latches Black japanned, stove enamelled black or copper oxidoized.",
      "Performance Requirements": "When knob of latch is turned, the catch bolt shall draw smoothly into the body and shall be flush with the face of the body. Note— For requirements for material of rim latches see Table 1 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 1019 : 1974 Specification for rim latches (second revision)"
    },
    "content": "IS 1019: 1974 Rim Latches\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements regarding material, dimensions, manufacture and finish of rim latches for\ngeneral use.\n2.\nHandling of Rim Latches— Left hand latch if fitted on left hand door. Right hand latch if fitted on right\nhand door.\n3.\nTypes\nType 1—\nOpens when handle is turned in one direction only.\nType 2 — Opens when hande is turned in any direction.\n3.1 Type 1 rim latches shall either be ‘left-hand’ or ‘right-\nhand’.\n4.\nSizes – 75, 100, 125 and 150 mm denoted by overall length of the body measured from the outside face of\nthe fore end to the rear end.\n5.\nMaterial – Shall be of the mild steel, brass, aluminium alloy or zinc base alloy.\n6.\nDimensions (in mm)\nSize Length × Breadth ×\nDepth\n75\n75\n×\n60\n×\n14\n100\n100\n×\n70\n×\n20\n125\n125\n×\n70\n×\n20\n150\n150\n×\n70\n×\n20\nTolerance + 1 mm\n6.\nFinish\nBrass latches\nBright or satin finish\nAluminium latches\nAnodized finish\nSteel latches\nBlack japanned, stove enamelled black or\ncopper oxidoized.\n8.\nPerformance Requirement — When knob of latch is turned, the catch bolt shall draw smoothly into the\nbody and shall be flush with the face of the body.\nNote— For requirements for material of rim latches see Table 1 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1019 : 1974 Specification for rim latches (second revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1341: 1992",
    "title": "Steel Butt Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding material, dimensions, manufacture and finish of mild steel butt hinges.",
    "keywords": [
      "hinges",
      "butt",
      "mild",
      "broad",
      "weight",
      "steel",
      "sixth"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding material, dimensions, manufacture and finish of mild steel butt hinges. 2. Types a) Light weight hinges b) Medium weight hinges c) Broad type hinges d) Square type hinges e) Heavy type I and II hinges 3. Materials i) Flap – Mild steel ii) Pin – Mild steelwire Note—For details on materials, see 4 and Table1of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 1341 : 1992 Specification for steel butt hinges (sixth revision). 4. Dimensions and Tolerances 4.1 Light Weight Mild Steel Butt Hinges— 15, 25,40, 50, 65, 75 and 100 mm sizes. 4.2 Medium Weight Mild Steel Butt Hinges— 20, 25, 40, 50, 65, 75, 90, 100, 125 and 150 mmsizes. 4.3 Broad Type Mild Steel Butt Hinges— 50, 75, 100, 125 and 150 mm sizes. 4.4 Square Type Mild Steel Butt Hinges— 50, 65, 75, 90 and 100 mm siz",
      "Finish": "Hinges shall be finished bright with smooth surfaces."
    },
    "content": "IS 1341: 1992 Steel Butt Hinges\n(Sixth Revision)\n1.\nScope—Requirements regarding material, dimensions, manufacture and finish of mild steel butt\nhinges.\n2.\nTypes a)\nLight weight hinges b)\nMedium weight hinges c)\nBroad type hinges d)\nSquare type hinges e)\nHeavy type I and II hinges 3. Materials\ni)\nFlap – Mild steel ii)\nPin – Mild steelwire\nNote—For details on materials, see 4 and Table1of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1341 : 1992 Specification for steel butt hinges (sixth revision).\n4.\nDimensions and Tolerances\n4.1 Light Weight Mild Steel Butt Hinges— 15, 25,40,\n50, 65, 75 and 100 mm sizes.\n4.2 Medium Weight Mild Steel Butt Hinges— 20, 25,\n40, 50, 65, 75, 90, 100, 125 and 150 mmsizes.\n4.3 Broad Type Mild Steel Butt Hinges— 50, 75, 100,\n125 and 150 mm sizes.\n4.4 Square Type Mild Steel Butt Hinges— 50, 65, 75,\n90 and 100 mm sizes.\n4.5 Heavy Weight Mild Steel Butt Hinges— 50, 65, 75,\n90, 100, 125, 150, 175 and 200 mm sizes.\n4.6 Tolerances—See Tables 2 to 7 of the standard.\n5.\nFinish — Hinges shall be finished bright with smooth surfaces."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1823: 1980",
    "title": "Floor Door Stoppers",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for floor door stopper suitable for use with door shutters of 30, 35, 40, and 45 mm thickness.",
    "keywords": [
      "stoppers",
      "door",
      "plate",
      "cover",
      "brass",
      "stopper",
      "floor"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for floor door stopper suitable for use with door shutters of 30, 35, 40, and 45 mm thickness.",
      "Materials A) For Body Or Housing And Cover Plate": "Aluminium alloy (pressure die) castings or aluminium alloy sheets or brass sheet or cast brass or brass gravity die casting. b) For Spring— Phosphor bronze or hard drawn steel wire. c) For Tongue—Aluminium alloy pressure die casting or cast brass or nylon or plastic. 3. Requirements a) Four countersunk holes for fixing door stopper to floor. b) Body or housing shall be cast in one piece and fixed to cover plate by brass or mild steel screws. c) Rubber piece shall be attached to extreme end to absorb shocks. 4. Dimensions (in mm) Thickness of door 30 35 40 45 shutter Overall length of 140 140 150150 cover plate Width of cover plate. 40 40 40 40 Thickness of cover plate 4.5 for castings 3 for sheet metal 4.1 Tolerances a) On overall length of cover plate ± 0.5 mm b) On thickness of cover pla",
      "Workmanship And Finish": "Stoppers shall be free from flaws and defects of all kinds. Aluminium door stoppers shall be anodized and brass stoppers be finished smooth. Stoppers may also be chromium or nickel plated, anodized or oxidized. The exterior of door stopper shall be flush with floor and be finished bright or satin. For detailed information, refer to IS 1823 : 1980 Specification for floor door stoppers (third revision). } SUMARRY OF"
    },
    "content": "IS 1823: 1980 Floor Door Stoppers\n(Third Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements for floor door stopper suitable for use with door shutters of 30, 35, 40, and 45\nmm thickness.\n2.\nMaterials a) For Body or Housing and Cover Plate—\nAluminium alloy (pressure die) castings or aluminium alloy sheets or brass sheet or cast\nbrass or brass gravity die casting.\nb) For Spring— Phosphor bronze or hard drawn steel wire.\nc) For Tongue—Aluminium alloy pressure die casting or cast brass or nylon or plastic.\n3.\nRequirements a)\nFour countersunk holes for fixing door stopper to floor.\nb)\nBody or housing shall be cast in one piece and fixed to cover plate by brass or mild steel\nscrews.\nc)\nRubber piece shall be attached to extreme end to absorb shocks.\n4.\nDimensions (in mm)\nThickness of door\n30\n35\n40 45 shutter\nOverall length of\n140 140\n150150 cover plate\nWidth of cover plate.\n40\n40\n40 40\nThickness of cover plate\n4.5 for castings\n3 for sheet metal\n4.1 Tolerances\na) On overall length of cover plate ± 0.5 mm b) On thickness of cover plate + 0.3 mm\nand – 0mm.\nNote —For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to Table\n2 to be with Fig. 1 of the standard.\n5.\nManufacture\n5.1 The stoppers shall be well made and free from\ndefects likely to prevent its correct fixing or affect adversely its reliability in use.\n5.2 Body or housing shall be cast in one piece and\nfixed to cover plate by brass or mild steel screws.\n5.3 There shall be four countersunk holes for fixing\nstoppers to the floor.\n5.4 On the extreme end, a rubber piece shall be attached\nto absorb shocks due to pulling action of door. The rubber used shall comply with the following\nrequirements:\na) Relative density, Max 1.3 b) Hardness 60 ± 5 c) Ageing for 24 h at i)\nChange in 100 ±10C\ninitial hardness\n+5, – 0 ii) Shall not develop\nbrittleness or tackiness\n6.\nWorkmanship and Finish — Stoppers shall be free from flaws and defects of all kinds. Aluminium door\nstoppers shall be anodized and brass stoppers be finished smooth. Stoppers may also be chromium or\nnickel plated, anodized or oxidized. The exterior of door stopper shall be flush with floor and be finished bright\nor satin.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1823 : 1980 Specification for floor door stoppers (third revision).\n} SUMARRY OF"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1837: 1966",
    "title": "Fan Light Pivots",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for fan light pivots (also known as ventilator hinges)",
    "keywords": [
      "pivots",
      "pivot",
      "pin",
      "fan",
      "projection",
      "ventilator",
      "breadth"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for fan light pivots (also known as ventilator hinges) 2. Types Type 1 – Mild steel pivots Type 2 – Aluminium pivots Type 3 – Brass pivots 3. Dimensions (in mm) No. Thickness Pivot Pivot Pin Pin Dia of Ventilator Length Breadth Projection Shutte Type 1 Type 2 and 3 1 25 20 50 10 10 9.5 2 30 25 50 12.5 12.5 12.5 3 30 25 65 12.5 12 12.5 4 35 25 65 15 16 15 5 35 25 75 15 16 15 Note — For requirement for materials see 3.1 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 1837 : 1966 Specification for fan light pivots (first revision). 3.1 Tolerances Pivot length and breadth ± 0.5 mm Pin Projection ± 0.2 mm Pin dia ± 0.2 mm Note — For detailed dimensions refer to the standard.coverplate 4. Finish Type 1 – Bright finished with smooth surface Type 2 – Natural or anodized finish "
    },
    "content": "IS 1837: 1966 Fan Light Pivots\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope — Requirements for fan light pivots (also known as ventilator hinges)\n2.\nTypes\nType 1 – Mild steel pivots\nType 2 – Aluminium pivots\nType 3 – Brass pivots\n3.\nDimensions (in mm) No.\nThickness\nPivot Pivot\nPin Pin Dia of Ventilator\nLength Breadth\nProjection\nShutte\nType 1\nType 2 and 3 1 25 20 50 10 10 9.5 2 30 25 50 12.5 12.5 12.5 3 30 25 65 12.5 12 12.5 4 35 25 65 15 16 15 5 35 25 75 15 16 15\nNote — For requirement for materials see 3.1 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1837 : 1966 Specification for fan light pivots (first revision).\n3.1 Tolerances\nPivot length and breadth\n± 0.5 mm\nPin Projection\n± 0.2 mm\nPin dia\n± 0.2 mm Note — For detailed dimensions refer to the standard.coverplate\n4.\nFinish Type 1 –\nBright finished with smooth surface Type 2 –\nNatural or anodized finish Type 3 –\nBright or satin finish"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2209: 1976",
    "title": "Mortice Locks (Vertical Type)",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for mortice locks (vertical type)",
    "keywords": [
      "bolts",
      "sliding",
      "locks",
      "brass",
      "door",
      "hasp",
      "mortice"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirement for non-ferrous metal sliding door bolts (aldrops) commonly used in general building construction for locking doors, gates etc. with padlocks. 2. Types Type 1— Brass sliding door bolts with sand cast brass hasp, staple and fixing bolts or clips and rolled or drawn brass bolts. Type 2— Brass sliding door bolts with die-cast brass hasp, staple and fixing bolts or clips and rolled or drawn brass bolts. Type 3 — Aluminium alloy sliding door bolts with hasp, staple and fixing clips of sheets, or extruded sections and fixing bolts and sliding bolts of extruded sections of aluminium alloy.",
      "Sizes": "65, 75 and 100 mm. Size shall be denoted by the overall length of body measured from the outside face of the fore end to the rear end. Measured length shall not vary by more than 3 mm from the length specified for size. Note 1—Mortice locks of other size may be made if mutally agreed. Note 2 — For typical design of mortice lock see Fig. 1 of the standard",
      "Materials": "Shall comply with the requirements given in Table 1 of the standard. 4. Dimensions Type Size, mm 1 and 2 150, 200, 250, 300, 375 and 450 3 200, 250, 300, 350, 375 and 450 Note— For details of dimensions and tolerance see Tables 2 and 3 read with Fig. 1 of the standard.",
      "General": "Interchangeability — Two lever locks shall be manufactured to have non-interchangeable keys in a batch consisting of a minimum of 24 locks. In case of locks with more than two levers, these shall have non- interchangeable keys in a batch of minimum 100 locks. For detailed information, refer to IS 2209 : 1976 Specification for mortice locks (vertical type) (third revision). 5. Manufacture a) Body—Clear depth 15 mm, Max. b) Locking bolt— Section not less than 8 × 25 mm. c) Lever spring — Lever spring fitted into the lever shall withstand the prescribed tests without showing signs of permanent set. d) Lock shall be capable of being opened with the key from both inside and outside.",
      "Finish": "Brass sliding door bolts shall have satin finish or shall be polished or plated. Aluminium shall be anodiezed to a bright, natural, sat or satin finish or dyed. For detailed information, refer to IS 2681 : 1993 Specification for non-ferrous metal sliding door bolts (aldrops) for use with padlocks (third revision).",
      "Tests": "Shall withstand the performance and endurance tests as given in 9.1 and 9.2 of the standard."
    },
    "content": "IS 2209: 1976 Mortice Locks (Vertical Type)\n(Third Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements for mortice locks (vertical type)\n2.\nSizes – 65, 75 and 100 mm. Size shall be denoted by the overall length of body measured from the outside\nface of the fore end to the rear end. Measured length shall not vary by more than 3 mm from the length\nspecified for size.\nNote 1—Mortice locks of other size may be made if mutally\nagreed.\nNote 2 —\nFor typical design of mortice lock see Fig.\n1 of the standard\n3.\nMaterial –Material for different component parts shall comply with the requirements given in Tables 2\nand 3 of the standard.\n4.\nNon-Interchangeability — Two lever locks shall be manufactured to have non-interchangeable keys in a\nbatch consisting of a minimum of 24 locks. In case of locks with more than two levers, these shall have non-\ninterchangeable keys in a batch of minimum 100 locks.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2209 : 1976 Specification for mortice locks (vertical type) (third revision).\n5.\nManufacture a)\nBody—Clear depth 15 mm, Max.\nb)\nLocking bolt— Section not less than 8 × 25 mm.\nc)\nLever spring — Lever spring fitted into the lever shall withstand the prescribed tests\nwithout showing signs of permanent set.\nd)\nLock shall be capable of being opened with the key from both inside and outside.\n6.\nFinish –\na)\nBrass body – Finished smooth.\nb)\nSteel body – Protective coating such as painting.\nc)\nAluminium alloy body – Anodized.\nd)\nFace plate and striking plate— Finished smooth and polished bright or satin (or may\nbe chromium plated anodized or oxidized).\n7.\nTests — Shall withstand the performance and endurance tests as given in 9.1 and 9.2 of the standard. 1.\nScope – Requirement for non-ferrous metal sliding door bolts (aldrops) commonly used in general building\nconstruction for locking doors, gates etc. with padlocks. 2. Types\nType 1—\nBrass sliding door bolts with sand cast brass hasp, staple and fixing bolts or\nclips and rolled or drawn brass bolts. Type 2— Brass sliding door bolts with die-cast brass hasp, staple and fixing bolts or\nclips and rolled or drawn brass bolts. Type 3 — Aluminium alloy sliding door bolts with hasp, staple and fixing clips of\nsheets, or extruded sections and fixing bolts and sliding bolts of extruded\nsections of aluminium alloy.\n3.\nMaterials – Shall comply with the requirements given in Table 1 of the standard.\n4.\nDimensions Type\nSize, mm 1 and 2 150, 200, 250, 300, 375 and 450 3\n200, 250, 300, 350, 375 and 450\nNote— For details of dimensions and tolerance see Tables 2\nand 3 read with Fig. 1 of the standard.\n5.\nFinish — Brass sliding door bolts shall have satin finish or shall be polished or plated.\nAluminium shall be anodiezed to a bright, natural, sat or satin finish or dyed.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2681 : 1993 Specification for non-ferrous metal sliding door bolts\n(aldrops) for use with padlocks (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2681: 1993",
    "title": "Non-Ferrous Metal Sliding Door Bolts",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for exposed type hydraulically regulated door closers for vertical hinge type doors opening to one side only and weighing more than 80 kg. This does not cover the requirements for concealed type hydraulic door closers and also the pneumatic or mechanical type of door closers.",
    "keywords": [
      "closers",
      "door",
      "closer",
      "speed",
      "piston",
      "clockwise",
      "hydraulically"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for exposed type hydraulically regulated door closers for vertical hinge type doors opening to one side only and weighing more than 80 kg. This does not cover the requirements for concealed type hydraulic door closers and also the pneumatic or mechanical type of door closers. 4. Materials i) Non porous body Cast iron /Aluminium and back plate alloy / Zinc alloy ii) Piston or Pack- Cast iron / Steel piston / pinion Aluminium alloy/Zinc alloy Note— For materials for other components see 7 and Table 2 of the standard. 5. Essential Requirements 5.1 The closer shall be manufactured in three sizes conforming to the requirements given in Table 1, in accordance with the direction of the opening of the door either clockwise or anti-clockwise. 5.2 The closing time shall be easily adjust",
      "Finish": "Polished or painted and finished with lacquer In case of aluminium body, it may be anodized. Mild steel parts shall be pickled and given phosphate treatment. Note—For methods of test, refer to Annex B of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 3564 : 1995 Specification for hydraulically regulated door closers (fourth revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 2681: 1993 Non-Ferrous Metal Sliding Door Bolts\n(ALDROPS) FOR USE WITH PADLOCKS\n(Third Revision) 1.\nScope – Requirements for exposed type hydraulically regulated door closers for vertical hinge\ntype doors opening to one side only and weighing more than 80 kg. This does not cover the requirements for\nconcealed type hydraulic door closers and also the pneumatic or mechanical type of door closers.\n4.\nMaterials i) Non porous body Cast iron /Aluminium\nand back plate alloy / Zinc alloy\nii) Piston or Pack- Cast iron / Steel piston / pinion Aluminium alloy/Zinc alloy Note— For materials for other components see 7 and Table 2 of the standard.\n5.\nEssential Requirements\n5.1 The closer shall be manufactured in three sizes\nconforming to the requirements given in Table 1, in accordance with the direction of the opening of the\ndoor either clockwise or anti-clockwise.\n5.2 The closing time shall be easily adjustable between\n5 and 20 seconds by means of regualting screw.\n5.3 Hydraulic oil filling shall work satisfactorily at all\ntemperatures between 50 ºC and –10 ºC without requiring any change except adjustment of the regulating screw.\n5.4 The closer shall be capable to regulate the speed\nby extending spring or adjustment in control valve screw, as the case may be.\n6.\nTest\n6.1 Performance Requirements — When opened\nthrough 90º , the door shall swing back to an angle of\n20 5º with normal speed, but thereafter the speed should get automatically retarded and should smoothly\nnegotiate with the latch (where provided)\n6.2 Endurance Test — After 50,000 operations against\nmaximum load specified, the closer shall show no defects, failure or leakage of oil etc.\nNote — For test details see Annex B of the standard.\n7.\nFinish — Polished or painted and finished with lacquer In case of aluminium body, it may be anodized.\nMild steel parts shall be pickled and given phosphate treatment.\nNote—For methods of test, refer to Annex B of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3564 : 1995 Specification for hydraulically regulated door closers (fourth revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3564: 1995",
    "title": "Hydraulically Regulated Door Closer",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for continuous (piano) hinges.",
    "keywords": [
      "doors",
      "door",
      "piano",
      "closers",
      "continuous",
      "hinges",
      "sheet"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Nominal Sizes": "The nominal sizes of door closers in relation to the mass and the width of the door size, to which it is intended to be fitted, shall be as given in Table 1. TABLE 1 DESIGNATION OF DOOR CLOSERS Sl. Designation of Mass of the Width of the Remarks No. Closer Door(kg) Door (mm) (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) i) 1. Up to 35 Up to 700 For light doors, such as double leaved and toilet doors ii) 2 36-60 701 to 850 Interior doors, such as of bedrooms, kitchen and store iii) 3 61 to 80 851 to 1 000 Main doors in a building, such as entrance doors ±",
      "Scope": "Requirements for continuous (piano) hinges. 2. Material Name of Material Component Flap a) Mild Steel sheet b) Aluminium alloy sheet c) Cold rolled low carbon steel sheets Pin a) Mild steel wire b) Aluminium alloy sheet",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "Dimension of type I, II, III and IV and permissible tolerances shall conform to those specified in Fig. 1 to 3 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 3818 : 1992 Specification for continuous (piano) hinges ( third revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 3564: 1995 Hydraulically Regulated Door Closer\n(Fourth Revision)\n2.\nTypes a) Bottle type (Type A)\nb) Tubular type (Type B)\nNote— See Fig. 1 to 4 of the standard.\n3.\nNominal Sizes —The nominal sizes of door closers in relation to the mass and the width of the door size, to\nwhich it is intended to be fitted, shall be as given in\nTable 1.\nTABLE 1 DESIGNATION OF DOOR CLOSERS Sl.\nDesignation of\nMass of the\nWidth of the Remarks No.\nCloser\nDoor(kg)\nDoor (mm) (1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4) (5) i)\n1.\nUp to 35\nUp to 700\nFor light doors, such as double leaved and toilet doors ii)\n2\n36-60\n701 to 850\nInterior doors, such as of bedrooms, kitchen and store iii)\n3\n61 to 80 851 to 1 000\nMain doors in a building, such as entrance doors\n± 1.\nScope – Requirements for continuous (piano)\nhinges.\n2.\nMaterial\nName of\nMaterial\nComponent\nFlap a)\nMild Steel sheet b)\nAluminium alloy sheet c)\nCold rolled low carbon steel sheets\nPin a)\nMild steel wire b)\nAluminium alloy sheet\n3.\nDimensions and Tolerances — Dimension of type\nI, II, III and IV and permissible tolerances shall conform to those specified in Fig. 1 to 3 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3818 : 1992 Specification for continuous (piano) hinges ( third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3828: 1966",
    "title": "Ventilator Chains",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Covers types and the requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of steel back flap hinges.",
    "keywords": [
      "hinges",
      "flap",
      "weight",
      "steelcover",
      "back",
      "heavy",
      "sunk"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers types and the requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of steel back flap hinges.",
      "Types": "a) Light weight hinges, and b) Heavy weight hinges",
      "Materials": "a) Flap Steelcover plate b) Pin Mild Steel wire For detailed information, refer to IS 3843 : 1995 Specification for steel back flap hinges ( second revision). 4. Sizes 4.1 Light Weight Hinges — 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 65 and 75 mm 4.2 Heavy Weight Hinges — 25, 40, 50, 65 and 75 mm Note—For details of dimensions and tolerances refer to Table 1 and 2 of the standard.",
      "Requirements": "All screw holes shall be clean and counter sunk.",
      "Finish": "The hinges shall be oxidized or finished bright with smooth and rust free surface."
    },
    "content": "IS 3828: 1966 Ventilator Chains\n(Third Revision) 1.\nScope – Covers types and the requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish\nof steel back flap hinges.\n2.\nTypes – a) Light weight hinges, and b) Heavy weight hinges\n3.\nMaterials –\na) Flap\nSteelcover plate b) Pin\nMild Steel wire\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3843 : 1995 Specification for steel back flap hinges ( second revision).\n4.\nSizes\n4.1 Light Weight Hinges — 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60,\n65 and 75 mm\n4.2 Heavy Weight Hinges — 25, 40, 50, 65 and 75 mm\nNote—For details of dimensions and tolerances refer to\nTable 1 and 2 of the standard.\n5.\nRequirements — All screw holes shall be clean and counter sunk.\n6.\nFinish— The hinges shall be oxidized or finished bright with smooth and rust free surface."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3843: 1995",
    "title": "Steel Back Flap Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for mortice night latches for general use.",
    "keywords": [
      "latches",
      "hand",
      "night",
      "mortice",
      "body",
      "left",
      "fitted"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for mortice night latches for general use.",
      "General": "Nominal size shall be denoted by overall length of the body measured from the outside face of the fore end to the rear end. Termed ‘Left hand’ if fitted on ‘Left hand door’ and ‘Right Hand’ if fitted in ‘Right Hand door’. Two lever latches and latches with more than two livers shall have non-interchangeable keys for a batch of minimum 12 and 60 latches respectively.",
      "Materials": "For body, body covers, i) Mild Steel (shall satisfy the prescribed bend test) Note— For methods of tests refer to 10 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 3847 : 1992 Specification for mortice night latches (first revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 3843: 1995 Steel Back Flap Hinges\n(Second Revision) 1.\nScope – Requirements for mortice night latches for general use.\n2.\nGeneral — Nominal size shall be denoted by overall length of the body measured from the outside face of\nthe fore end to the rear end. Termed ‘Left hand’ if fitted on ‘Left hand door’ and ‘Right Hand’ if fitted in ‘Right\nHand door’. Two lever latches and latches with more than two livers shall have non-interchangeable keys for\na batch of minimum 12 and 60 latches respectively.\n3.\nMaterials – For body, body covers, i) Mild Steel (shall\nsatisfy the prescribed bend test)\nNote— For methods of tests refer to 10 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3847 : 1992 Specification for mortice night latches (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3847: 1992",
    "title": "Mortice Night Latches",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for indicating bolts for use in public baths and lavatories.",
    "keywords": [
      "casting",
      "indicating",
      "brass",
      "bolt",
      "plate",
      "alloy",
      "background"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Finish": "Assembled bolt shall be satin finished or bright polished. Aluminium bolts shall be anodized.",
      "Tests": "Shall satisfy the prescribed tests.",
      "Scope": "Requirements for indicating bolts for use in public baths and lavatories.",
      "General": "Operation of bolt may be achieved either by gear work or by displacement. Normally made in two sizes, namely, size 1 and size 2. When the bolt is drawn, it shall show the word “ENGAGED” on red background, and when it is withdrawn it shall show the world “VACANT” on green background. 3. Material a) Body, knob Aluminium alloy casting, and indicating Extruded aluminium alloy, spindle Brass casting, Extruded brass, Zinc base alloy die casting. b) Indicating disc Aluminium alloy sheet, Brass casting For detailed information, refer to IS 4621 : 1975 Specification for indicating bolts for use in public baths and lavatories (first revision). c) Gears Alumminium alloy casting, Brass casting 4. Dimensions and Tolerances Size 1 Size 2 Tolerance (mm) (mm) (mm) Length of bolt 75 85 ± 1 Breadth of bolt "
    },
    "content": "IS 3847: 1992 Mortice Night Latches\n(First Revision)\nCase plate, face plate ii) Aluminium alloy sheet and striking\nplate iii) Cast brass (copper\ncontent shall not be less than 60 percent\niv) Brass sheet\nNote—For materials for the other components see 6 and Table\n1 of the standard.\n4.\nFinish – Steel body shall be given suitable protective coating, such as painting. Face plate and\nstriking, plate shall be finished smooth and polished bright or satin.\n5.\nTest – Shall satisfy the prescribed tests. 1.\nScope – Requirements for indicating bolts for use in public baths and lavatories.\n2.\nGeneral – Operation of bolt may be achieved either by gear work or by displacement. Normally made in two\nsizes, namely, size 1 and size 2. When the bolt is drawn, it shall show the word “ENGAGED” on red background,\nand when it is withdrawn it shall show the world\n“VACANT” on green background.\n3.\nMaterial a) Body, knob\nAluminium alloy casting, and indicating\nExtruded aluminium alloy, spindle\nBrass casting, Extruded brass, Zinc base alloy die\ncasting.\nb) Indicating disc\nAluminium alloy sheet,\nBrass casting\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4621 : 1975 Specification for indicating bolts for use in public baths and lavatories (first revision).\nc) Gears\nAlumminium alloy casting,\nBrass casting\n4.\nDimensions and Tolerances\nSize 1\nSize 2 Tolerance\n(mm)\n(mm)\n(mm)\nLength of bolt\n75\n85 ± 1\nBreadth of bolt\n45\n50\n± 1\nDia of disc 70\n70 ± 1\nNote— For detailed dimensions and tolerances, see 4 of the\nstandard.\n5.\nFinish – Assembled bolt shall be satin finished or bright polished. Aluminium bolts shall be anodized."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4621: 1975",
    "title": "Indicating Bolt For Use In Public Baths And Lavatories",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for welded wire fabric for general use, such as fencing, window grill and crates. Not intended to cover fabric for concrete reinforcement.",
    "keywords": [
      "fabric",
      "wire",
      "welded",
      "mesh",
      "weld",
      "vary",
      "crates"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for welded wire fabric for general use, such as fencing, window grill and crates. Not intended to cover fabric for concrete reinforcement. 2. Materials 2.1. Mild steel wire used for the manufacture of welded fabric shall coaform to IS 280. 2.2 Stainless steel wire used for the manufacture of welded fabric shall conform to grade X 04 Cr 17 Ni 12 Mo 2 or X 04 Cr 18 Ni 10 of IS 6528*. 2.3 Tolerance on Diameter For size of wire 1.6 to 5.6 mm ± 0.050 For size of wire over 5.6 mm ± 0.060",
      "Mesh Sizes Commonly Available (In Mm)": "Refer to Annex A of the standard. 4. Tolerance 4.1 In any individual mesh, the maximum variation between two members when measured between centre to centre shall not vary more than 5 percent. 4.2 The length of flat sheets or rolls measured on my wire may vary by 25 mm or one percent whichever is greater.",
      "Test For Welding": "The minimum average strength value of the weld shall not be less than 21 kgf/mm2 and the area of the wire to be taken into consideration for calculation is the longitudional wire. Fabric having a diameter difference between transverse and longitudinal wire greater than 2 mm shall not be subjected to weld shear test. Note 1 — For quality of wire refer to 3 of the standard. Note 2 — For method of test, refer to 6 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 4948 : 2002 Specification for welded steel wire fabric for general use (second revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 4621: 1975 Indicating Bolt For Use In Public Baths And Lavatories\n(First Revision) 1.\nScope – Requirements for welded wire fabric for general use, such as fencing, window grill and crates.\nNot intended to cover fabric for concrete reinforcement.\n2.\nMaterials\n2.1. Mild steel wire used for the manufacture of welded fabric shall coaform to IS 280.\n2.2 Stainless steel wire used for the manufacture of\nwelded fabric shall conform to grade X 04 Cr 17 Ni 12\nMo 2 or X 04 Cr 18 Ni 10 of IS 6528*.\n2.3 Tolerance on Diameter\nFor size of wire\n1.6 to 5.6 mm ± 0.050\nFor size of wire over 5.6 mm ± 0.060\n3.\nMesh Sizes Commonly available (in mm) — Refer to Annex A of the standard.\n4. Tolerance\n4.1 In any individual mesh, the maximum variation\nbetween two members when measured between centre to centre shall not vary more than 5 percent.\n4.2 The length of flat sheets or rolls measured on my\nwire may vary by 25 mm or one percent whichever is greater.\n5.\nTest for Welding – The minimum average strength value of the weld shall not be less than 21 kgf/mm2 and\nthe area of the wire to be taken into consideration for calculation is the longitudional wire. Fabric having a\ndiameter difference between transverse and longitudinal wire greater than 2 mm shall not be subjected to weld\nshear test.\nNote 1 — For quality of wire refer to 3 of the standard.\nNote 2 — For method of test, refer to 6 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4948 : 2002 Specification for welded steel wire fabric for general use\n(second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4948: 2002",
    "title": "Welded Steel Wire Fabric For General Use",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for door handles for operation of mortice locks (vertical type) covered in IS 2209 : 1976.*",
    "keywords": [
      "handles",
      "handle",
      "lock",
      "knob",
      "mortice",
      "alloy",
      "chromium"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for door handles for operation of mortice locks (vertical type) covered in IS 2209 : 1976.*",
      "Types": "Handle type and knob type.",
      "Materials": "Brass, mild steel, aluminium alloy, etc.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "Size of Door handle knob housing = (150 ±5) × (40 ± 2 )mm Length of handle = 90 ± 2 mm. * Mortice lock (vertical type) (third revision)",
      "Performance Requirements": "A sample picked out at random from a lot of 100, when fitted to a lock and operated 1 000 times shall not show any damage or ineffectiveness in working. When the handle is in its extreme position in the lock and pulled horizontally with a load of 100 kgf, it shall not develop cracks, lose shape or get damaged.",
      "Workmanship": "All sharp edges shall be removed.",
      "Finish": "Brass handles shall have natural finish or shall be bright chromium electroplated. Aluminium alloy handles shall be anodized. Zinc base alloy die cast handles and mild steel handles shall be bright chromium plated."
    },
    "content": "IS 4948: 2002 Welded Steel Wire Fabric For General Use\n(Second Revision)\n* Stainless steel wire - Specification (first revision 1.\nScope – Requirements for door handles for operation of mortice locks (vertical type) covered in\nIS 2209 : 1976.*\n2.\nType— Handle type and knob type.\n3.\nMaterial — Brass, mild steel, aluminium alloy, etc.\n4.\nDimension and Tolerances — Size of Door handle knob housing = (150 ±5) × (40 ± 2 )mm Length of handle = 90 ± 2 mm. * Mortice lock (vertical type) (third revision)\n5.\nPerformance Requirements – A sample picked out at random from a lot of 100, when fitted to a lock and\noperated 1 000 times shall not show any damage or ineffectiveness in working. When the handle is in its\nextreme position in the lock and pulled horizontally with a load of 100 kgf, it shall not develop cracks, lose shape\nor get damaged.\n6.\nWorkmanship – All sharp edges shall be removed.\n7.\nFinish – Brass handles shall have natural finish or shall be bright chromium electroplated. Aluminium alloy\nhandles shall be anodized. Zinc base alloy die cast handles and mild steel handles shall be bright chromium\nplated."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4992: 1975",
    "title": "Door Handles For Mortice Locks",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for flush bolts for use in cupboards and doors",
    "keywords": [
      "bolt",
      "faceplate",
      "throw",
      "extruded",
      "brass",
      "flush",
      "aluminium"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for flush bolts for use in cupboards and doors",
      "Material A) Body And Plate": "Cast brass, cast aluminium and extruded aluminium alloy b) Bolt— Cast brass, extruded brass and extruded aluminium alloy. c) Spring— Phosphor bronze and steel strip.",
      "Manufacture": "Rod shall be retained in its maximum bolting position by the spring. 4. Dimensions and Tolerances Type Size FacePlate Throw of Bolt Bolt Dia Length Min. (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) 1 100 100 20 8 ± 1 For detailed information, refer to IS 5187 : 1972 Specification for flush bolt (first revision). Type Size FacePlate Throw of Bolt Bolt Dia Length Min. (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) 1 150 150 25 8 ± 1 1 200 200 30 8 ± 1 2 100 100 15 8 ± 1 2 150 150 15 8 ± 1 2 200 200 15 8 ± 1 2 250 250 15 8 ± 1 2 300 300 15 8 ± 1 Note— For detailed dimensions and tolerances, See 5 of the standard.",
      "Workmanship And Finish": "Shall have smooth and easy working when assembled. Brass bolts shall be satin or bright polished, or nickel or chromium plated or copper oxidized. Aluminium flush bolts shall be anodized."
    },
    "content": "IS 4992: 1975 Door Handles For Mortice Locks\n(VERTICAL TYPE)\n(First Revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4992 : 1975 Specification for door handles for mortice locks (vertical type)\n(first revision). 1.\nScope — Requirements for flush bolts for use in cupboards and doors\n2.\nMaterial a) Body and plate — Cast brass, cast aluminium\nand extruded aluminium alloy b) Bolt— Cast brass, extruded brass and\nextruded aluminium alloy.\nc) Spring— Phosphor bronze and steel strip.\n3.\nManufacture — Rod shall be retained in its maximum bolting position by the spring.\n4.\nDimensions and Tolerances\nType\nSize FacePlate Throw of Bolt Bolt Dia\nLength\nMin.\n(mm)\n(mm)\n(mm)\n(mm)\n1\n100\n100\n20 8 ± 1\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5187 : 1972 Specification for flush bolt (first revision).\nType\nSize FacePlate Throw of Bolt Bolt Dia\nLength\nMin.\n(mm)\n(mm)\n(mm)\n(mm)\n1\n150\n150\n25\n8 ± 1\n1\n200\n200\n30 8 ± 1\n2\n100\n100\n15\n8 ± 1\n2\n150\n150\n15\n8 ± 1\n2\n200\n200\n15\n8 ± 1\n2\n250\n250\n15\n8 ± 1\n2\n300\n300\n15\n8 ± 1\nNote— For detailed dimensions and tolerances, See 5 of the\nstandard.\n5.\nWorksmanship and Finish — Shall have smooth and easy working when assembled. Brass bolts shall be\nsatin or bright polished, or nickel or chromium plated or copper oxidized. Aluminium flush bolts shall be anodized."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5187: 1972",
    "title": "Flush Bolts",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "(First Revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "flush",
      "bolts"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 5187: 1972 Flush Bolts\n(First Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5899: 1970",
    "title": "Bath Room Latches",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for material, size and finish of bathroom latches.",
    "keywords": [
      "extrusions",
      "cast",
      "aluminium",
      "brass",
      "bathroom",
      "latches",
      "alloy"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for material, size and finish of bathroom latches. 2. Shape and Size Overall size — 40 × 50 mm Thickness – 10 mm Note— For typical illustration see Fig. 1 of the standard. 3. Material For detailed information, refer to IS 5899 : 1970 Specification for bathroom latches. a) Body – Cast brass, cast iron, aluminium alloy, and aluminium extrusions. b) Bolts – Brass cast, brass extruded, mild steel rod, cast iron, aluminium alloy and aluminium extrusions. c) Knob – Cast brass, cast iron, aluminium alloy and aluminium extrusions.",
      "Workmanship And Finish": "Latch shall be smoothly finished. Aluminium alloy body may be anodized. Cast brass body shall be given a protective coating such as painting."
    },
    "content": "IS 5899: 1970 Bath Room Latches\n1.\nScope – Requirements for material, size and finish of bathroom latches.\n2.\nShape and Size\nOverall size — 40 × 50 mm\nThickness – 10 mm\nNote— For typical illustration see Fig. 1 of the standard.\n3.\nMaterial\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5899 : 1970 Specification for bathroom latches.\na) Body –\nCast brass, cast iron, aluminium alloy, and aluminium extrusions.\nb) Bolts –\nBrass cast, brass extruded, mild steel rod, cast iron, aluminium\nalloy and aluminium extrusions.\nc) Knob –\nCast brass, cast iron, aluminium alloy and aluminium extrusions.\n4.\nWorkmanship and Finish— Latch shall be smoothly finished. Aluminium alloy body may be\nanodized. Cast brass body shall be given a protective coating such as painting."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5930: 1970",
    "title": "Mortice Latch",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for mortice latches for use on doors, such as bath room doors, W.C. doors and doors to private rooms.",
    "keywords": [
      "lever",
      "spring",
      "body",
      "latch",
      "mortice",
      "doors",
      "turn"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for mortice latches for use on doors, such as bath room doors, W.C. doors and doors to private rooms.",
      "Sizes": "65, 75 and 100 mm. Size shall be denoted by overall length of the body measured from the outside face of the fore end to the rear end. Measured length shall not vary by more than 3 mm from the length specified for size. Note — For typical illustration of a mortice lock see fig.1 of the standard.",
      "Materials": "Material for different component parts shall comply with the requirements given in Tables 1 and 2 of the standard.",
      "Interchangeability": "Component parts of latches of the same size and type shall be completely interchangeable.",
      "Manufacture": "a) Body— Depth of body shall not exceed 15 mm. b) Locking Bolt – Section not less than 18 × 25 mm. c) Mechanism – Latch shall operate easily from both sides of the door. Bolt shall turn into locking position when the thumb turn knob is turned through 900. d) Lever Spring — Lever spring fitted into the lever shall withstand following tests without showing signs of permanent set. i) Lever spring shall be pressed down so as to touch top edge of lever and released. Repeat six times. ii) Lever spring shall also stand a transverse load of 15 kgf before failure of joint between lever and spring.",
      "Workmanship And Finish": "Brass body shall be finished smooth. Steel body shall be given a protective coating such as painting. Aluminium alloy body may be anodized. Face plate and striking plate shall be finished smooth and polished bright or satin, or chromium plated, anodized or oxidized.",
      "Tests": "The finally assembled latch shall withstand tests given in 9.1.1 to 9.1.3 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS : 5930-1970 Specification for mortice latch (vertical type)."
    },
    "content": "IS 5930: 1970 Mortice Latch\n(VERTICAL TYPE)\n1.\nScope – Requirements for mortice latches for use on doors, such as bath room doors, W.C. doors and\ndoors to private rooms.\n2.\nSizes – 65, 75 and 100 mm. Size shall be denoted by overall length of the body measured from the outside\nface of the fore end to the rear end. Measured length shall not vary by more than 3 mm from the length\nspecified for size.\nNote — For typical illustration of a mortice lock see fig.1 of\nthe standard.\n3.\nMaterial — Material for different component parts shall comply with the requirements given in Tables 1\nand 2 of the standard.\n4.\nInterchangeability — Component parts of latches of the same size and type shall be completely\ninterchangeable.\n5.\nManufacture –\na) Body—\nDepth of body shall not exceed 15 mm.\nb) Locking Bolt –\nSection not less than 18 ×\n25 mm. c) Mechanism –\nLatch shall operate easily from both sides of the door.\nBolt shall turn into locking position when the thumb\nturn knob is turned through\n900.\nd) Lever Spring —\nLever spring fitted into the lever shall withstand\nfollowing tests without showing signs of\npermanent set.\ni) Lever spring shall be pressed down so as to\ntouch top edge of lever and released. Repeat six times.\nii) Lever spring shall also stand a transverse load of\n15 kgf before failure of joint between lever and spring.\n6.\nWorkmanship and Finish — Brass body shall be finished smooth. Steel body shall be given a protective\ncoating such as painting. Aluminium alloy body may be anodized. Face plate and striking plate shall be finished\nsmooth and polished bright or satin, or chromium plated, anodized or oxidized.\n7.\nTests — The finally assembled latch shall withstand tests given in 9.1.1 to 9.1.3 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS : 5930-1970 Specification for mortice latch (vertical type)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6315: 1992",
    "title": "Floor Springs (Hydraulically Regulated) For Heavy Doors",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requuirements for concealed type floor springs (hydraulically regulated) for vertical doors weighing not more than 125 kg. In case of doors consisting of more than one leaf the weight of each leaf shall not exceed 125 kg.",
    "keywords": [
      "floor",
      "leaf",
      "springs",
      "enamel",
      "door",
      "sheet",
      "spring"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requuirements for concealed type floor springs (hydraulically regulated) for vertical doors weighing not more than 125 kg. In case of doors consisting of more than one leaf the weight of each leaf shall not exceed 125 kg.",
      "Construction": "Oil check shall work satisfactorily at all temperature between 490C and –100C without requiring any other change except by the adjustment of the capstan nut. Note— For typical details of floor springs see fig. 1 of the standard.",
      "Materials": "For foundation Cast brass, Brass box, main body sheet. Mild steel sheet, and half cover Cast iron, Aluminium alloy sheet, Zinc base alloy pressure die-casting. Note — For details of material see 5 and Table 1 of the standard 4. Performance Requirements 4.1 Floor spring shall not show any change or deterioration in working after it has been subjected to 50 000 operations at a rate of not more than 6 to 8 operations per minute. 4.2 Closing time of floor spring shall be easily adjustable between 3 and 20 for which a suitable device to adjust the speed shall be provided. 4.3 Door leaf when opened through 900 plus and released, the door shall stand open till pushed back in the closing position. When opened to an angle less that 900, the door shall swing back automatically. 4.4 Force not more th"
    },
    "content": "IS 6315: 1992 Floor Springs (Hydraulically Regulated) For Heavy Doors\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requuirements for concealed type floor springs (hydraulically regulated) for vertical doors\nweighing not more than 125 kg. In case of doors consisting of more than one leaf the weight of each leaf\nshall not exceed 125 kg.\n2.\nConstruction – Oil check shall work satisfactorily at all temperature between 490C and –100C without\nrequiring any other change except by the adjustment of the capstan nut.\nNote— For typical details of floor springs see fig. 1 of the\nstandard.\n3.\nMaterial –\nFor foundation\nCast brass, Brass box, main body\nsheet. Mild steel sheet, and half cover\nCast iron, Aluminium alloy sheet, Zinc base\nalloy pressure die-casting.\nNote — For details of material see 5 and Table 1 of the standard\n4.\nPerformance Requirements\n4.1 Floor spring shall not show any change or\ndeterioration in working after it has been subjected to\n50 000 operations at a rate of not more than 6 to 8 operations per minute.\n4.2 Closing time of floor spring shall be easily adjustable\nbetween 3 and 20 for which a suitable device to adjust the speed shall be provided.\n4.3 Door leaf when opened through 900 plus and\nreleased, the door shall stand open till pushed back in the closing position. When opened to an angle less\nthat 900, the door shall swing back automatically.\n4.4 Force not more than 20 N shall be required at a\ndistance of one meter from the frame, to open the door leaf weighing 125 Kg through 90 degrees.\n5.\nFinish\n5.1 The hydraulic floor spring should be covered by\none brass/aluminium sheet which only will flush on the floor. The cover sheet, shoe and top-centre will be\npolished or electroplated as agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer.\n5.1.1 Mild steel parts may be given the treatment as follows:\na. All dents, burrs and sharp edges shall be removed from various components and they\nshall be pickled, scrubbed and rinsed to remove grease, rust, scale or any other foreign\nelement.\nb. After pickling all the mild steel parts shall be given phosphating treatment followed by a\ncoat of suitable primer, such as red oxide.\n5.1.2 Two coats of enamel paint shall then be applied as follows:\na) Undercoat, and b) Finish coat with synthetic stoving enamel,\naccording to prescribed standard.\n5.1.3 The components shall, thereafter, be baked at a specified temperature in an oven heated uniformly. The\nfinish shall be smooth and uniform with a hard and tough film of enamel strongly adhering to the surface. The\nfinish shall be free from all visible defects and shall not chip, when tappped lightly with a pointed instrument.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6315 : 1992 Specification for floor springs (hydraulically regulated ) for heavy doors (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6318: 1971",
    "title": "Plastic Window Stays And Fasteners",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Lays down performance and functional requirements of window stays made of polypropylene and fasteners (handles) made of nylon.",
    "keywords": [
      "window",
      "stay",
      "kgf",
      "fasteners",
      "fastener",
      "stays",
      "polypropylene"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Lays down performance and functional requirements of window stays made of polypropylene and fasteners (handles) made of nylon. 2. Material Requirements of polypropylene a) Density, 0.900 to 0.910 g/ml b) Tensile strength at yield, Min 315 kgf/cm2 c) Impact strength, Min 3.7 kgf/cm (of notch) d) Water absorption, 3.7 Max 0.04 percent e) Deflection temperature, Min 540C f) Weather resistance — Shall retain at least 50 percent of original elongation g) Deformation underload, Max 6.0 percent, 500C and 70 kg/cm2. Note — For test procedures see 4 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 6318 : 1971 Specification for plastic window stay and fasteners. 3. Size and Shape Length of window stay = 300 mm Length of window fastener = 110 mm Note — For typical illustration see Fig 1 of the "
    },
    "content": "IS 6318: 1971 Plastic Window Stays And Fasteners\n1.\nScope – Lays down performance and functional requirements of window stays made of polypropylene\nand fasteners (handles) made of nylon. 2. Material\nRequirements of polypropylene a)\nDensity, 0.900 to 0.910 g/ml b)\nTensile strength at yield, Min 315 kgf/cm2 c)\nImpact strength, Min 3.7 kgf/cm (of notch)\nd)\nWater absorption, 3.7 Max 0.04 percent e)\nDeflection temperature, Min 540C f)\nWeather resistance — Shall retain at least 50 percent of original elongation\ng)\nDeformation underload, Max 6.0 percent, 500C and 70 kg/cm2. Note — For test procedures see 4 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6318 : 1971 Specification for plastic window stay and fasteners.\n3.\nSize and Shape\nLength of window stay = 300 mm\nLength of window fastener = 110 mm\nNote — For typical illustration see Fig 1 of the standard.\n4.\nTests\n4.1 Test for Stays — Window stay shall be capable of\nrestraining the shutter in three positions, at angles of\n300, 600 and 900 with the frame. Tolerance in position of restraint: ±50 .\n4.2 Test for Fasteners — Fastener shall be able to hold\na force of 40 kgf (applied in increments of 5 kgf at one minute intervals)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6343: 1982",
    "title": "Door Closers (Pneumatically Regulated)",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for door closers (pneumatically regulated) for use on light doors weighing up to 40 kg.",
    "keywords": [
      "closer",
      "door",
      "alloy",
      "speed",
      "pneumatically",
      "tube",
      "operations"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for door closers (pneumatically regulated) for use on light doors weighing up to 40 kg.",
      "Material A) Cylinder": "Brass tube mild steel tube/ aluminium tube, b) Piston/Piston Rod—Steel/cast iron/ aluminium alloy/zinc alloy. c) Brackets and Fittings — Mild steel/ cast iron/ aluminium alloy/zinc alloy/ cast brass, d) Spring — Steel, and e) Regulating Screws—Brass/bronze/aluminium alloy/ steel/zinc alloy.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "Shall be as agreed upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer. 4. General Requirements 4.1 The surface of closer shall be clean, without sharp edges, free from cracks, dents, burrs or any other visible surface defects. 4.2 After fixing, the closer shall operate smoothly and quietly without any undue play during opening and closing operation. 4.3 The closer shall work satisfactorily at all temperatures between 40ºC and 10ºC without requiring any other change except by adjustment of regulating screw. 4.4 The speed of closing the door shall be adjusted by increase or decrease in the tension of helical spring. Note — For requirements regarding manufacture and details of finishing, refer to the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 6343 : 1982 Specification for door closers (pneu",
      "Finish": "The exposed surface shall be polished or pointed as agreed to mutually. In case of aluminium body, it may be anodized. All components of mild steel shall be pickled, scrubbed and rinsed to remove grease, rust, scale or any other foreign element. The finish of mild steel surface shall be smooth, uniform and free from all visible defects with hard and tough film of enamel strongly adhering to the surface. All components shall be finished in colour as agreed to mutually."
    },
    "content": "IS 6343: 1982 Door Closers (Pneumatically Regulated)\nFOR LIGHT DOORS WEIGHING UPTO 40 KG\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope–Requirements for door closers\n(pneumatically regulated) for use on light doors weighing up to 40 kg.\n2.\nMaterial a) Cylinder— Brass tube mild steel tube/\naluminium tube, b) Piston/Piston Rod—Steel/cast iron/\naluminium alloy/zinc alloy.\nc) Brackets and Fittings — Mild steel/ cast iron/ aluminium alloy/zinc alloy/ cast brass,\nd) Spring — Steel, and e) Regulating Screws—Brass/bronze/aluminium\nalloy/ steel/zinc alloy.\n3.\nDimensions and Tolerances — Shall be as agreed upon between the purchaser and the manufacturer.\n4.\nGeneral Requirements\n4.1 The surface of closer shall be clean, without sharp\nedges, free from cracks, dents, burrs or any other visible surface defects.\n4.2 After fixing, the closer shall operate smoothly and\nquietly without any undue play during opening and closing operation.\n4.3 The closer shall work satisfactorily at all\ntemperatures between 40ºC and 10ºC without requiring any other change except by adjustment of regulating\nscrew.\n4.4 The speed of closing the door shall be adjusted by\nincrease or decrease in the tension of helical spring.\nNote — For requirements regarding manufacture and details of finishing, refer to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6343 : 1982 Specification for door closers (pneumatically regulated) for light doors weighting up to 40 kg (first revision).\n4.5 The closer shall not show any sign of leakage in\nthe air pressure.\n4.6 Each closer shall be furnished with clear, detailed\ninstructions for installation and regulation of the closer.\nNote — For typical illustration of the door closer, see Fig.1 of\nthe standard.\n5.\nPerformance Requirements\n5.1 After being fitted in its position, when the door is\nopened through 900 and released, it shall swing back to an angle of 20±50 with normal speed, but thereafter the\nspeed shall get automatically retarded till a smooth, final close is reached.\n5.2 Endurance Test — The closer fitted to the door of\nmaximum permissible weight shall be subjected to 50,000 operations at the rate of a maximum of 6 to 8 operations\nper minute. The number of operations to be carried out continuously at any time during the test shall not be\nless than 3 000. At the end of the test the closer shall show no defects, failure, or deterioration in its working.\n6.\nFinish — The exposed surface shall be polished or pointed as agreed to mutually. In case of aluminium\nbody, it may be anodized. All components of mild steel shall be pickled, scrubbed and rinsed to remove grease,\nrust, scale or any other foreign element. The finish of mild steel surface shall be smooth, uniform and free\nfrom all visible defects with hard and tough film of enamel strongly adhering to the surface. All components shall\nbe finished in colour as agreed to mutually."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6607: 1972",
    "title": "Rebated Mortice Locks (Vertical Type)",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for rebated mortice locks suitable for use on double leaf doors with rebated meeting stiles.",
    "keywords": [
      "locks",
      "rebated",
      "body",
      "mortice",
      "keys",
      "lever",
      "levers"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for rebated mortice locks suitable for use on double leaf doors with rebated meeting stiles.",
      "Sizes": "65, 75 and 100 mm. Sizes shall be denoted by length of the body measured from the outside face of the fore end to the rear end over the body in mm. The measured length shall not vary more than ± 3 mm from the length specified for size. Note — For typical design of rebated mortice locks see Fig. 1 of the standard.",
      "General": "interchangeability – Two-lever locks shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch of minimum of 24 locks. Locks with more than two levers shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch of a minimum of 100 locks. 4. Requirements a) Body – Depth of body shall not exceed 15 mm. b) Locking bolt – Section shall not be less than Note — For requirements for materials for component parts of mortice locks see Table 1 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 6607 : 1972 Specification for rebated mortice locks (vertical type). 12 × 16 mm for all sizes of locks. c) Mechanism — Locking mechanism shall be lever type with not less than two levers. d) Lever Spring — Shall withstand the prescribed test. e) Keys — Two for each lock usable from inside and outside. f) Latch Bolt — Section not ",
      "Workmanship And Finish": "Brass body shall be finished smooth and polished. Aluminium alloy body may be anodized. Rebated face plate and striking plate may be polished, chormium plated or oxidized. Steel body shall be given protective coating. Steel parts shall be given specified protective teatment before painting.",
      "Tests": "Shall withstand the tests specified in 9 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 7196 : 1974 Specification for hold fast."
    },
    "content": "IS 6607: 1972 Rebated Mortice Locks (Vertical Type)\n1. Scope – Requirements for rebated mortice locks\nsuitable for use on double leaf doors with rebated meeting stiles.\n2.\nSizes – 65, 75 and 100 mm.\nSizes shall be denoted by length of the body measured from the outside face of the fore end to the rear end\nover the body in mm. The measured length shall not vary more than ± 3 mm from the length specified for size.\nNote — For typical design of rebated mortice locks\nsee Fig. 1 of the standard.\n3.\nNon-interchangeability – Two-lever locks shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch of minimum\nof 24 locks. Locks with more than two levers shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch of a minimum of\n100 locks.\n4.\nRequirements a)\nBody – Depth of body shall not exceed\n15 mm.\nb)\nLocking bolt – Section shall not be less than\nNote — For requirements for materials for component parts of mortice locks see Table 1 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6607 : 1972 Specification for rebated mortice locks (vertical type).\n12 × 16 mm for all sizes of locks.\nc)\nMechanism — Locking mechanism shall be lever type with not less than two levers.\nd)\nLever Spring — Shall withstand the prescribed test.\ne)\nKeys — Two for each lock usable from inside and outside.\nf)\nLatch Bolt — Section not less than\n12 × 16 mm.\n5.\nWorkmanship and Finish — Brass body shall be finished smooth and polished. Aluminium alloy body\nmay be anodized. Rebated face plate and striking plate may be polished, chormium plated or oxidized. Steel\nbody shall be given protective coating. Steel parts shall be given specified protective teatment before painting.\n6.\nTests — Shall withstand the tests specified in 9 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 7196 : 1974 Specification for hold fast."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7196: 1974",
    "title": "Hold Fast",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for mild steel hold fasts for use with wooden doors and window frames.",
    "keywords": [
      "hold",
      "mild",
      "fasts",
      "fast",
      "dents",
      "sanded",
      "wooden"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for mild steel hold fasts for use with wooden doors and window frames. 2. Size and Dimensions Shall be as given in Fig. 1",
      "Manufacture": "Shall be made from mild steel flats not less than 5 mm thick, and without any burrs or dents.",
      "Finish": "Shall be given a coat of bitumen and sanded. All dimensions in millimetres. Fig. 1 Mild Steel Hold Fast"
    },
    "content": "IS 7196: 1974 Hold Fast\n.\n1.\nScope — Requirements for mild steel hold fasts for use with wooden doors and window frames.\n2.\nSize and Dimensions Shall be as given in Fig. 1\n3.\nManufacture — Shall be made from mild steel flats not less than 5 mm thick, and without any burrs or dents.\n4.\nFinish – Shall be given a coat of bitumen and sanded.\nAll dimensions in millimetres.\nFig. 1 Mild Steel Hold Fast"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7197: 1974",
    "title": "Double Action Floor Springs",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for concealed type floor springs (without oil check) for vertical doors weighing not more than 125 kg. For doors having more than one leaf, the weight of each leaf shall not exceed 125 kg.",
    "keywords": [
      "leaf",
      "floor",
      "bolt",
      "spring",
      "locking",
      "thick",
      "sheet"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of sliding locking bolts commonly used for locking doors, gates, etc. with padlocks. 2. Types Type I – with straight lokcing plate, and Type II – with curved locking plate. 3. Sizes 110, 150, 200, 250 and 300 mm 4. Material Part Material Bolt plate and Mild steel sheet receiving plate Aluminium alloy sheet Bolt Mild steel rods Aluminium alloy extruded rod For detailed information, refer to IS 7534:1985 Specification for sliding locking bolts for use with pad locks (first revision). 5. Dimensions and Tolerances Type Size Length of Length of Bolt Dia. of Bolt Bolt Plate Bolt I 150 210 1 150 2 200 260 1 200 2 10 0.5 250 310 1 250 2 or 300 360 1 300 2 12 0.5 II 110 65 1 110 2 10 0. Note — For detailed dimensions and tolerance",
      "Types": "For typical details of a floor spring see Fig.1 of the standard.",
      "Material A) Foundation Box, Main Body And Half Cover": "Brass sheet 1.25 mm, minimum thick; Mild steel sheet 1.25 mm, minimum thick; Cast iron; aluminium alloy pressure die-castings 2 mm, minimum thick; aluminium alloy sheet 1.25 mm, minimum thick or zinc base alloy pressure die-castings 2 mm, minimum thick. b) Spring Rod – Mild steel Note — For requirements for materials for other parts of floor spring see Table 1 of the standard.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "As agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer. For detailed information, refer to IS 7197:1974 Specification for double action floor springs (without oil check) for heavy doors.",
      "Construction": "Floor spring shall be covered by brass or aluminium sheet which only shall be flush with the floor. Provision shall be made in floor springs for adjusting door leaf to final closed position by turning the adjusting screw.",
      "Performance Requirements": "A sample mounted to a door leaf weighing 125 kg shall be subjected to 50,000 operations (that is, movement of door leaf through 1800) at the rate of not more than 6 to 8 operations per minute. Floor spring shall not show any damage or deterioration at the end of test. A force of not more than 2 kgf shall be required at a distance of one metre from the door frame, to open the door leaf weighing 125 kg through 900.",
      "Finish": "Shall be copper oxidized, electrogalvanized or stove enamelled black. Aluminim alloy bolt shall be anodized to a bright, natural mat or satin finish or dyed"
    },
    "content": "IS 7197: 1974 Double Action Floor Springs\n(WITHOUT OIL CHECK) FOR HEAVY DOORS\n1.\nScope – Requirements for concealed type floor springs (without oil check) for vertical doors weighing\nnot more than 125 kg. For doors having more than one leaf, the weight of each leaf shall not exceed 125 kg.\n2.\nType and Size — For typical details of a floor spring see Fig.1 of the standard.\n3.\nMaterial a) Foundation box, main body and half cover—\nBrass sheet 1.25 mm, minimum thick; Mild steel sheet 1.25 mm, minimum thick; Cast iron;\naluminium alloy pressure die-castings 2 mm, minimum thick; aluminium alloy sheet 1.25 mm,\nminimum thick or zinc base alloy pressure die-castings 2 mm, minimum thick.\nb) Spring Rod – Mild steel\nNote — For requirements for materials for other parts of\nfloor spring see Table 1 of the standard.\n4.\nDimensions and Tolerances — As agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 7197:1974 Specification for double action floor springs (without oil check)\nfor heavy doors.\n5.\nConstruction – Floor spring shall be covered by brass or aluminium sheet which only shall be flush with\nthe floor. Provision shall be made in floor springs for adjusting door leaf to final closed position by turning\nthe adjusting screw.\n6.\nPerformance Requirements — A sample mounted to a door leaf weighing 125 kg shall be subjected to\n50,000 operations (that is, movement of door leaf through\n1800) at the rate of not more than 6 to 8 operations per minute. Floor spring shall not show any damage or\ndeterioration at the end of test.\nA force of not more than 2 kgf shall be required at a distance of one metre from the door frame, to open the\ndoor leaf weighing 125 kg through 900.\n7.\nFinish — Cover sheet, shoe and top centre pivot shall be polished, electroplated or anodized. Mild steel\nand cast iron parts shall be given a synthetic stoving enamel finish according to prescribed specifications.\nThe finish shall be smooth, uniform and shall not chip when tapped lightly with a pointed instrument.\nAluminium parts shall be anoidized. 1.\nScope – Requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of sliding locking\nbolts commonly used for locking doors, gates, etc. with padlocks.\n2.\nTypes\nType I – with straight lokcing plate, and\nType II – with curved locking plate.\n3.\nSizes\n110, 150, 200, 250 and 300 mm\n4.\nMaterial\nPart\nMaterial\nBolt plate and\nMild steel sheet receiving plate\nAluminium alloy sheet\nBolt\nMild steel rods\nAluminium alloy extruded rod\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 7534:1985 Specification for sliding locking bolts for use with pad locks\n(first revision).\n5.\nDimensions and Tolerances\nType\nSize\nLength of\nLength of Bolt\nDia. of\nBolt\nBolt Plate\nBolt\nI\n150\n210 1\n150 2\n200\n260 1\n200 2\n10 0.5\n250\n310 1\n250 2 or\n300\n360 1\n300 2\n12 0.5\nII\n110\n65 1\n110 2\n10 0.\nNote — For detailed dimensions and tolerances see 6 and Table\n2 of the standard.\n6. Finish — Shall be copper oxidized, electrogalvanized or\nstove enamelled black. Aluminim alloy bolt shall be anodized to a bright, natural mat or satin finish or dyed"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7534: 1985",
    "title": "Sliding Locking Bolts For Use With Padlocks",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for mortice dead locks. Note – Mortice dead locks have a single bolt which is shot and withdrawn by means of key (from either side) providing reasonable degree of security. Being lock for occasional rather than frequent use it is well suited for use alone, or as an additional lock for the doors of store rooms, cellers, warehouses, etc.",
    "keywords": [
      "locks",
      "body",
      "mortice",
      "dead",
      "keys",
      "levers",
      "interchangeable"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for mortice dead locks. Note – Mortice dead locks have a single bolt which is shot and withdrawn by means of key (from either side) providing reasonable degree of security. Being lock for occasional rather than frequent use it is well suited for use alone, or as an additional lock for the doors of store rooms, cellers, warehouses, etc.",
      "Sizes": "45, 65 and 75 mm. Size is denoted by overall length of the body measured from the outside face of the face end to the rear end. Measured length shall not be more than ± 3 mm from the specified size Note — For typical details of mortice dead locks see Fig. 1 of the standard. 3. Material",
      "Body, Body Cover": "Mild steel, cast brass, brass sheet, aluminium alloy castings and sheets and zinc base alloy casting. Note — For requirements of materials for other component parts, see Table 1 of the standard.",
      "General": "interchangeability — Two-lever locks shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch of a minimum of 24 locks. Locks with more than two levers shall have non-interchangeable keys in a match of a minimum of 100 locks. For detailed information, refer to IS 7540 : 1974 Specification for mortice dead locks 5. Manufacture a) Body Depth of body shall not exceed 15 mm b) Locking Bolt Section shall not be less than 10 × 30 mm. c) Levers Not less than two. d) Lever spring Shall withstand the prescribed tests with out showing any sign of permanent set. e) Keys Two for each.",
      "Finish": "Brass body shall be finished smooth and polished. Aluminium alloy body be anodized. Face plate and striking plate shall be polished, painted, plated or oxidized. Steel body shall be given suitable protective coating.",
      "Tests": "Shall withstand the tests specified in 9 of the standard."
    },
    "content": "IS 7534: 1985 Sliding Locking Bolts For Use With Padlocks\n(First Revision)\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n± 1.\nScope – Requirements for mortice dead locks.\nNote –\nMortice dead locks have a single bolt which is shot and withdrawn by means of key (from either side) providing\nreasonable degree of security. Being lock for occasional rather than frequent use it is well suited for use alone, or as an additional\nlock for the doors of store rooms, cellers, warehouses, etc.\n2.\nSizes – 45, 65 and 75 mm. Size is denoted by overall length of the body measured from the outside face of the face\nend to the rear end. Measured length shall not be more than ± 3 mm from the specified size\nNote — For typical details of mortice dead locks see Fig. 1 of\nthe standard.\n3.\nMaterial\n3.1. Body, Body Cover — Mild steel, cast brass, brass sheet, aluminium alloy castings and sheets and zinc\nbase alloy casting.\nNote — For requirements of materials for other component\nparts, see Table 1 of the standard.\n4.\nNon-interchangeability — Two-lever locks shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch of a minimum\nof 24 locks. Locks with more than two levers shall have non-interchangeable keys in a match of a minimum of\n100 locks.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 7540 : 1974 Specification for mortice dead locks\n5.\nManufacture a) Body\nDepth of body shall not exceed 15 mm\nb) Locking Bolt\nSection shall not be less than 10 × 30 mm.\nc) Levers\nNot less than two.\nd) Lever spring\nShall withstand the prescribed tests with out\nshowing any sign of permanent set. e) Keys\nTwo for each.\n6.\nFinish – Brass body shall be finished smooth and polished. Aluminium alloy body be anodized. Face plate\nand striking plate shall be polished, painted, plated or oxidized. Steel body shall be given suitable protective\ncoating.\n6.\nTests — Shall withstand the tests specified in 9 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7540: 1974",
    "title": "Mortice Dead Locks",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for mortice sliding door locks having lever mechanism.",
    "keywords": [
      "locks",
      "sliding",
      "mortice",
      "lever",
      "body",
      "interchangeable",
      "batch"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for mortice sliding door locks having lever mechanism.",
      "Sizes": "30 mm, 50 mm, 70 mm and 100 mm. Size shall be denoted by the overall length of the body in millimetres measured from the outside face of the fore–end to rear end. Measured length shall not vary by more than 3 mm from the length specified for size.",
      "Shape And Design": "Any shape but shall be capable of being opened with key from both sides. Note — For typical illustration of mortice sliding door lock see Fig 1 of the standard.",
      "Dimensions": "As agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer.",
      "General": "interchangeability – Two lever locks shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch consisting of a minimum of 24 locks. For detailed information, refer to IS : 8760 1978. Specification for mortice sliding door locks with lever mechanism (first revision). Locks with more than two levers shall have non interchangeable keys in a batch consisting of a minimum of 100 locks. 6. Finish Brass body Finished smooth Steel body Suitable protective coating such as painting. Aluminium alloy Anodized body Face plate and Finished smooth and striking plate polished bright or satin. May be chromium plated, anodized or oxidized where so desired by purchaser.",
      "Tests": "Shall withstand the tests specified in 10 of the standard."
    },
    "content": "IS 7540: 1974 Mortice Dead Locks\n1.\nScope – Requirements for mortice sliding door locks having lever mechanism.\n2.\nSizes – 30 mm, 50 mm, 70 mm and 100 mm. Size shall be denoted by the overall length of the body in millimetres\nmeasured from the outside face of the fore–end to rear end. Measured length shall not vary by more than 3 mm\nfrom the length specified for size.\n3.\nShape and Design – Any shape but shall be capable of being opened with key from both sides.\nNote — For typical illustration of mortice sliding door\nlock see Fig 1 of the standard.\n4.\nDimensions – As agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer.\n5.\nNon-interchangeability – Two lever locks shall have non-interchangeable keys in a batch consisting of\na minimum of 24 locks.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS : 8760 1978. Specification for mortice sliding door locks with lever mechanism (first revision).\nLocks with more than two levers shall have non interchangeable keys in a batch consisting of a minimum\nof 100 locks.\n6.\nFinish\nBrass body\nFinished smooth\nSteel body\nSuitable protective coating such as painting.\nAluminium alloy\nAnodized body\nFace plate and\nFinished smooth and striking plate\npolished bright or satin.\nMay be chromium plated, anodized or oxidized where\nso desired by purchaser.\n7.\nTest — Shall withstand the tests specified in 10 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8760: 1978",
    "title": "Mortice Sliding Door Locks With Lever Mechanism",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of rising butt hinges.",
    "keywords": [
      "hinges",
      "rising",
      "butt",
      "brass",
      "extruded",
      "iron",
      "mild"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of rising butt hinges. 2. Types Type Material 1. Cold rolled mild steel 2. Cast iron 3. Extruded brass 3. Materials Flap (i) Mild steel (ii) Cast iron (iii) Extruded brass Pin – Mild steel wire Note — For details on material see 3 and Table1 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to : IS 9106 :1979 Specification for rising butt hinges.",
      "Sizes": "Steel rising butt hinges – 75 and 100 mm Cast iron rising butt hinges – 75 and 100 mm Brass rising butt hinges – 75,100, and 125 mm. Note — For detailed dimensions and tolerances see Table 5 of the standard.",
      "Finish": "Hinges shall be well made and shall be free from flaws and defects. Hinges shall be finished bright with smooth surfaces. The brass hinges shall have bright or satin finish and shall be suitably protected against discolouration."
    },
    "content": "IS 8760: 1978 Mortice Sliding Door Locks With Lever Mechanism\n1.\nScope — Requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of rising butt hinges.\n2.\nTypes\nType\nMaterial\n1.\nCold rolled mild steel\n2.\nCast iron\n3.\nExtruded brass\n3.\nMaterials\nFlap\n(i) Mild steel\n(ii) Cast iron\n(iii) Extruded brass\nPin – Mild steel wire\nNote — For details on material see 3 and Table1 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to : IS 9106 :1979 Specification for rising butt hinges.\n4.\nSizes –\nSteel rising butt hinges\n–\n75 and 100 mm\nCast iron rising butt hinges\n–\n75 and 100 mm\nBrass rising butt hinges\n–\n75,100, and\n125 mm.\nNote — For detailed dimensions and tolerances see Table\n5 of the standard.\n5.\nFinish – Hinges shall be well made and shall be free from flaws and defects.\nHinges shall be finished bright with smooth surfaces.\nThe brass hinges shall have bright or satin finish and shall be suitably protected against discolouration."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9106: 1979",
    "title": "Rising Butt Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements for materials, construction, dimensions and finish of rim locks of two types commonly fixed to single and double-leaf doors in buildings.",
    "keywords": [
      "locks",
      "rim",
      "body",
      "reversible",
      "eamelled",
      "hand",
      "japanned"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for materials, construction, dimensions and finish of rim locks of two types commonly fixed to single and double-leaf doors in buildings. 2. Types Type 1 – Left hand or right-hand, and Type 2 – Reversible",
      "Sizes": "100 and 150 mm The size of the rim lock shall be denoted by the length of face over the body in millimetres. The measured length shall not vary by more than 3 mm, from the length specified for the sizes.",
      "Materials": "Shall comply with the requirements given in Tables 1 and 2 of the standard.",
      "General": "Interchangeability — The rim locks shall be manufactured to have non-interchangeable keys in a batch consisting of a minimum of 24 locks.",
      "Construction A) Body": "Overall depth of the body shall be not more than 15 mm. b) Locking bolt — Section not less than 8×22 mm c) Mechanism — Shall be of ordinary lever type or any other type approved by the purchaser. d) Latch Bolt — Section not less than 8×14 mm",
      "Finish": "Brass rim locks shall have bright or satin finish, and aluminium locks anodized finish. The steel locks shall be japanned, stove eamelled black or copper oxidized as specified by the purchaser.",
      "Tests": "The finally assembled block shall with stand the tests given in 12.1.1 to 12.1.6 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 9131 : 1979 Specification for rim locks."
    },
    "content": "IS 9106: 1979 Rising Butt Hinges\n1.\nScope – Requirements for materials, construction, dimensions and finish of rim locks of two types\ncommonly fixed to single and double-leaf doors in buildings.\n2.\nTypes\nType 1 – Left hand or right-hand, and\nType 2 – Reversible\n3.\nSize – 100 and 150 mm\nThe size of the rim lock shall be denoted by the length of face over the body in millimetres. The measured\nlength shall not vary by more than 3 mm, from the length specified for the sizes.\n4.\nMaterials — Shall comply with the requirements given in Tables 1 and 2 of the standard.\n5.\nNon–Interchangeability — The rim locks shall be manufactured to have non-interchangeable keys in a\nbatch consisting of a minimum of 24 locks.\n6.\nConstruction a) Body – Overall depth of the body shall be\nnot more than 15 mm.\nb) Locking bolt — Section not less than 8×22 mm\nc) Mechanism — Shall be of ordinary lever type or any other type approved by the purchaser.\nd) Latch Bolt — Section not less than 8×14 mm\n7.\nFinish – Brass rim locks shall have bright or satin finish, and aluminium locks anodized finish. The steel\nlocks shall be japanned, stove eamelled black or copper oxidized as specified by the purchaser.\n8.\nTests — The finally assembled block shall with stand the tests given in 12.1.1 to 12.1.6 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 9131 : 1979 Specification for rim locks."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9131: 1979",
    "title": "Rim Locks",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of stays and fasteners made of mild steel of the types that are commonly used in windows.",
    "keywords": [
      "stays",
      "mild",
      "fasterners",
      "window",
      "holding",
      "galvanised",
      "positions"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of stays and fasteners made of mild steel of the types that are commonly used in windows. 2. Types a) Type 1 – Mild steel stays and fasterners having tabular cross section, and b) Type 2 – Mild steel stays and fasterners made out of one piece sheet. 3. Materials i) Mild steel sheets ii) Mild steel bars Note— For details of materials see 3 and Table 1 of the standard.",
      "Dimensions": "Shall be as given in Fig 1 and 2 of the standard.",
      "Test For Window Stays": "The stay shall be capable of holding the window shutter in three different positions so as to make angles of 30º, 60º and 90º with the window frame. Tolerances in such positions shall not exceed + 5º.",
      "Finish": "Shall be either copper oxidized or a holding galvanised or electro-galvanised. For detailed information, refer to IS 10019 : 1981 Specification for mild steel stays and fasteners."
    },
    "content": "IS 9131: 1979 Rim Locks\n1.\nScope – Requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of stays and\nfasteners made of mild steel of the types that are commonly used in windows.\n2.\nTypes a) Type 1 –\nMild steel stays and fasterners having tabular cross section, and\nb) Type 2 –\nMild steel stays and fasterners made out of one piece sheet.\n3.\nMaterials i) Mild steel sheets\nii) Mild steel bars\nNote— For details of materials see 3 and Table 1 of the\nstandard.\n4.\nShape and Dimension – Shall be as given in Fig 1 and 2 of the standard.\n5.\nTest for Window Stays – The stay shall be capable of holding the window shutter in three different positions\nso as to make angles of 30º, 60º and 90º with the window frame. Tolerances in such positions shall not exceed +\n5º.\n6.\nFinish – Shall be either copper oxidized or a holding galvanised or electro-galvanised.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 10019 : 1981 Specification for mild steel stays and fasteners."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10019: 1981",
    "title": "Mild Steel Stays And Fasteners",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of numericals.",
    "keywords": [
      "numericals",
      "discoloration",
      "suitably",
      "protected",
      "they",
      "cast",
      "manufacrurer"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of numericals. 2. Materials i) Cast brass ii) Cast bronze iii) Cast aluminium Note— For details of materials see 2 and Table 1 of the standard.",
      "Sizes": "25, 50, 75, 100, 150 and 300 mm. The thickness of the numericals shall not be less than 2 mm, and the width shall be as agreed upon between the purchaser and the manufacrurer. 4. Manufacture a) Shall be manufactured in one piece and shall be free from all defects. b) Projecting lugs or pins at the back or countersunk screw holes shall be provided for fixing.",
      "Finish": "Brass and bronze numericals shall be finished smooth, and shall have bright or satin finish, or they shall be plated. They shall be suitably protected from discoloration. They shall be suitably protected from discoloration. Aluminium numericals shall be anodized. For detailed information, refer to IS 10090 : 1982 Specification for numericals."
    },
    "content": "IS 10019: 1981 Mild Steel Stays And Fasteners\n1.\nScope – Requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of numericals.\n2.\nMaterials i) Cast brass ii) Cast bronze iii) Cast aluminium\nNote— For details of materials see 2 and Table 1 of the\nstandard.\n3.\nSizes — 25, 50, 75, 100, 150 and 300 mm. The thickness of the numericals shall not be less than 2 mm,\nand the width shall be as agreed upon between the purchaser and the manufacrurer.\n4.\nManufacture a) Shall be manufactured in one piece and shall be\nfree from all defects.\nb) Projecting lugs or pins at the back or countersunk screw holes shall be provided for fixing.\n5.\nFinish – Brass and bronze numericals shall be finished smooth, and shall have bright or satin finish, or\nthey shall be plated. They shall be suitably protected from discoloration. They shall be suitably protected from\ndiscoloration. Aluminium numericals shall be anodized.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 10090 : 1982 Specification for numericals."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10090: 1982",
    "title": "Numericals",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Numericals",
    "keywords": [
      "numericals"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 10090: 1982 Numericals\n"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10342: 1982",
    "title": "Curtain Rail System",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding materials, manufacture, dimensions, testing and finish of rails, runners and hooks used in the curtain rail system. Note — This standard, however does not cover the requirements for drop curtain rail system used in theaters, auditoriums, etc.",
    "keywords": [
      "hinges",
      "curtain",
      "rail",
      "rails",
      "system",
      "weight",
      "components"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Types and requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of stainless steel butt hinges. 2. Types a) Light weight (narrow) hinges b) Medium weight hinges c) Heavy weight hinges d) Unequal flap hinges 3. Sizes 3.1 Light Weight (Narrow) Hinges — 60 and 75 mm 3.2 Medium Weight Hinges — 50, 65, 75, 100, 125 and 150 mm 3.3 Heavy Weight Hinges — 75, 100, 125 and 150 mm 3.4 Uneaual Flat Hinges 60 × 10 × 16 mm 60 × 12 × 19 mm 75 × 10 × 16 mm 75 × 12 × 19 mm Note 1– The size shall be denoted by the length of the hinge. Note 2 – For details on dimensions and tolerances, refer to 6 and Tables 1 to 4 of the standard.",
      "Finish": "Unless otherwise specified, hinges, shall be naturally finished bright with smooth surface without chemical coatings. For detailed information, refer to IS 12817:1997 Specification for stainless steel butt hinges (first revision)",
      "Materials": "Shall conform to the prescribed grades of the standard."
    },
    "content": "IS 10342: 1982 Curtain Rail System\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 10342 : 1982 Specification for curtain rail system.\n1.\nScope – Requirements regarding materials, manufacture, dimensions, testing and finish of rails,\nrunners and hooks used in the curtain rail system.\nNote — This standard, however does not cover the\nrequirements for drop curtain rail system used in theaters, auditoriums, etc.\n2.\nTypes and Materials\nType 1 –\nCast, (brass, aluminium)\nType 2 –\nPressed, (mild steel or brass or aluminium alloy sheet).\nType 3 –\nFabricated, (extruded brass or aluminium alloy)\nNote— For details of materials see 4 and Table 1 of\nthe standard.\n3.\nShape and Dimensions\n3.1 The curtain ring shall be either ‘I’ or ‘C’ section\n3.2 Dimension for ‘C’ rails : 900, 1 200, 1 800, and 2 400\nmm length with a tolerance of ± 3 mm.\n3.3 Dimensions for ‘I’ rails : 1 800, 1 200 and 2 400 mm\nlength with a tolerance of ± 3 mm.\n4.\nFinish – All components of curtain rail system shall be finished smooth. Aluminium components shall be\nanodized to a bright, natural, mat or satin finish or shall be dyed. Brass components shall have bright or satin\nfinish and may be lacquered, nickel plated, or copper oxidized or bronze finished. Mild steel components shall\nbe stove enamelled or electrogalvanized. 1.\nScope – Types and requirements regarding materials, dimensions, manufacture and finish of\nstainless steel butt hinges.\n2.\nTypes a) Light weight (narrow) hinges b) Medium weight hinges c) Heavy weight hinges d) Unequal flap hinges\n3.\nSizes\n3.1 Light Weight (Narrow) Hinges — 60 and 75 mm\n3.2 Medium Weight Hinges — 50, 65, 75, 100, 125 and\n150 mm\n3.3 Heavy Weight Hinges — 75, 100, 125 and 150 mm\n3.4 Uneaual Flat Hinges\n60 × 10 × 16 mm\n60 × 12 × 19 mm\n75 × 10 × 16 mm\n75 × 12 × 19 mm\nNote 1– The size shall be denoted by the length of the\nhinge.\nNote 2 – For details on dimensions and tolerances, refer to\n6 and Tables 1 to 4 of the standard.\n4.\nMaterials — Shall conform to the prescribed grades of the standard.\n5.\nFinish — Unless otherwise specified, hinges, shall be naturally finished bright with smooth surface without\nchemical coatings.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12817:1997 Specification for stainless steel butt hinges (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12817: 1997",
    "title": "Stainless Steel Butt Hinges",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Covers the dimensions and requirements for PVC handrail covers for use on metal strip handrails.",
    "keywords": [
      "handrail",
      "covers",
      "handrails",
      "pvc",
      "exudation",
      "strip",
      "desired"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the dimensions and requirements for PVC handrail covers for use on metal strip handrails.",
      "Materials": "Handrails covers are manufactured by extrusion using plasticized PVC compound of desired formulation and colour.",
      "Sizes": "PVC handrail covers are normally made available in widths to match the desired width of metal TABLE 1 - REQUIREMENTS OF PVTC HANDRAIL COVERS Sl. No. Characteristics Requirements i) Heat ageing and exudation No exudation of plasticizer shall be apparent nor shall there be any change in appearance. ii) Tensile strength test Tensile strength shall not be les than 10 N/mm2 iii) Elongation Minimum elongation shall be 115 percent iv) Hardness Minimum value of Rockwell hardness number shall be L65 v) Resistance to combustion The specimen shall not burn to the 25 mm mark and shall not show any flame or after glow after 5 s after the burner has been removed. strip, suitably welded as part of the handrail, with a view to providing comforable grip. The common sizes shall suit metallic flats of width ",
      "Requirements": "See Table 1 Note 1 — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard and IS 8543 (Part 4/ Sec 1): 1984 Method of testing plastics: Part 4 short term mechanical properties, Section 1 Determination of tensile properties. Note 2 — Method of installation is given in Annex D of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 12867 : 1989 Specification for PVC handrail covers."
    },
    "content": "IS 12817: 1997 Stainless Steel Butt Hinges\n(First Revision) 1.\nScope – Covers the dimensions and requirements for PVC handrail covers for use on metal strip handrails.\n2.\nMaterial – Handrails covers are manufactured by extrusion using plasticized PVC compound of desired\nformulation and colour.\n3.\nSizes – PVC handrail covers are normally made available in widths to match the desired width of metal\nTABLE 1 - REQUIREMENTS OF PVTC HANDRAIL COVERS Sl. No.\nCharacteristics\nRequirements i)\nHeat ageing and exudation\nNo exudation of plasticizer shall be apparent nor shall there be any change in appearance.\nii)\nTensile strength test\nTensile strength shall not be les than 10 N/mm2 iii)\nElongation\nMinimum elongation shall be 115 percent iv)\nHardness\nMinimum value of Rockwell hardness number shall be L65\nv)\nResistance to combustion\nThe specimen shall not burn to the 25 mm mark and shall not show any flame or after glow after 5 s after\nthe burner has been removed.\nstrip, suitably welded as part of the handrail, with a view to providing comforable grip. The common sizes\nshall suit metallic flats of width 25 mm, 40 mm, 50 mm and 65 mm. For general use handrail covers should be\nsupplied in 25 m lengths.\n4.\nRequirements – See Table 1\nNote 1 — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard and IS 8543 (Part 4/ Sec 1): 1984 Method of testing\nplastics: Part 4 short term mechanical properties, Section 1 Determination of tensile properties.\nNote 2 — Method of installation is given in Annex D of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12867 : 1989 Specification for PVC handrail covers."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12867: 1989",
    "title": "Pvc Hand Rail Covers",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Requirement for concealed type hydraulically operated door closers, fixed in concealed position within the thickness of the panel on vertical, hinge type doors opening to one side only and not weiging more than 80 kg. This standard does not cover overhead type door closers covered in IS 3564 : 1995* or pneumatic type door closers or closers working on only mechanical device.",
    "keywords": [
      "closers",
      "door",
      "hydraulically",
      "speed",
      "concealed",
      "closure",
      "adjustment"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirement for concealed type hydraulically operated door closers, fixed in concealed position within the thickness of the panel on vertical, hinge type doors opening to one side only and not weiging more than 80 kg. This standard does not cover overhead type door closers covered in IS 3564 : 1995* or pneumatic type door closers or closers working on only mechanical device. 2. Nominal Sizes Designation Mass of Door Width of Door No. 1 Up to 60 kg Up to 850 mm No. 2 60 to 80kg 851 to 1 000 mm 3. Materials Non porous body – Aluminium alloy Piston – Steel / Cast iron Note— For materials of other components see Table 2 of the standard. *Hydraulically regularated door closers. 4. Requirements a) Closing time shall be easily adjustable between 5 to 20 seconds by means of regu lating screws. b) ",
      "Test A) Performance Requirement": "When opened through 90º, the door shall swing back to 200 50 with normal speed but thereafter speed should automatically get retarded and should smoothly negotiate, with the latch (where provided) b) Endureance test – After 50,000 operations against maximum load specified, the closure shall show no defects, failure or leakage of oil etc. For detailed information, refer to IS 14912 : 2001. Specification for door closers–concealed type (hydraulically regulated)"
    },
    "content": "IS 12867: 1989 Pvc Hand Rail Covers\n1.\nScope – Requirement for concealed type hydraulically operated door closers, fixed in concealed\nposition within the thickness of the panel on vertical, hinge type doors opening to one side only and not\nweiging more than 80 kg.\nThis standard does not cover overhead type door closers covered in IS 3564 : 1995* or pneumatic type door closers\nor closers working on only mechanical device.\n2.\nNominal Sizes\nDesignation\nMass of Door\nWidth of Door\nNo. 1\nUp to 60 kg\nUp to 850 mm\nNo. 2\n60 to 80kg\n851 to 1 000 mm\n3.\nMaterials\nNon porous body\n–\nAluminium alloy\nPiston\n–\nSteel / Cast iron\nNote— For materials of other components see Table 2 of\nthe standard.\n*Hydraulically regularated door closers.\n4.\nRequirements a) Closing time shall be easily adjustable between\n5 to 20 seconds by means of regu lating screws.\nb) Hydraulic oil, filling shall work satisfactorily at all termperature between 50ºC and -10ºC without\nrequiring any change except adjustment of the regulating screw.\nc) The closure shall be capable to regulate the speed by extending spring or adjustment in\ncontrol valve screw, as the case may be.\n5.\nTest a) Performance requirement – When opened through\n90º, the door shall swing back to 200 50 with normal speed but thereafter speed should automatically get\nretarded and should smoothly negotiate, with the latch (where provided)\nb) Endureance test – After 50,000 operations against maximum load specified, the closure shall show no\ndefects, failure or leakage of oil etc.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 14912 : 2001. Specification for door closers–concealed type (hydraulically regulated)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14912: 2001",
    "title": "Door Closers - Concealed Type",
    "category": "Builder's Hardware",
    "summary": "Covers the dimensions, such as length, measurement for wood based panel materials. The wood based panels considered are plywood, blockboard, hardboard, fibre insulation board, particle board, veneered particle board, particle board for insulation and high density particle board.",
    "keywords": [
      "particle",
      "plywood",
      "boards",
      "board",
      "wood",
      "bamboo",
      "fibre"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the dimensions, such as length, measurement for wood based panel materials. The wood based panels considered are plywood, blockboard, hardboard, fibre insulation board, particle board, veneered particle board, particle board for insulation and high density particle board. 2. Dimensions 2.1 Plywood 2.1.1 Size– Plywood panels shall be of the sizes specified below Length Width mm mm 2400 × 1200 2100 × 1200 2100 × 900 1800 × 1200 1800 × 900 2.1.2 Thickness–The thickness shall be as given in the specification. 2.2 Hardboard 2.2.1 Size– Hardboards shall be of the sizes specified bel ow: Length Width mm mm 4800 × 1200 3600 × 1200 3000 × 1200 2400 × 1200 2100 × 1200 2100 × 900 1800 × 1200 1800 × 900 1200 × 1200 2.2.2 Thickness –The thicknesses shall be as given in the specification. 2.3 Blo"
    },
    "content": "IS 14912: 2001 Door Closers - Concealed Type\n(HYDRAULICALLY REGULATED)\n± 12.1\nSECTION 12\nWOOD PRODUCTS\nSP 21 : 2005 CONTENTS\nTitle Page\nGENERAL\nIS\n12049 : 1987\nDimensions and tolerances relating to wood based panel materials.\n12.4\nADHESIVES\nIS\n849 : 1994\nCold setting casein glue for wood (first revision)\n12.6\nIS\n851 : 1978\nSynthetic resin adhesives for construction work (non-structural) in wood\n12.7\n(first revision)\nIS\n852 : 1994\nAnimal glue for general wood-working purposes (second revision)\n12.9\nPLYWOOD\nIS\n303 : 1989\nPlywood for general purposes (third revision)\n12.10\nIS\n1328 : 1996\nVeneered decorative plywood (third revision)\n12.12\nIS\n4990 : 1993\nPlywood for concrete shuttering work (second revision)\n12.13\nIS\n5509 : 2000\nFire retardant plywood (second revision)\n12.15\nIS\n5539 - 1969\nPreservative Treated Plywood\n12.16\nIS\n7316 : 1974\nDecorative plywood using plurality of veneers for decorative faces\n12.18\nIS\n10701 : 1983\nStructural plywood\n12.19\nIS\n13957 : 1994\nMetal faced plywood.\n12.21\nPARTICLE BOARDS AND FIBRE BOARDS\nIS\n1658 : 1977\nFibre hardboards (second revision)\n12.22\nIS\n1659 : 2004\nBlock boards (third revision)\n12.23\nIS\n3087 : 1985\nWood particle boards (medium density) for general purposes (first revision) 12.25\nIS\n3097 : 1980\nVeneered particle boards (first revision)\n12.28\nIS\n3129 : 1985\nLow density particle boards (first revision)\n12.30\nIS\n3308 : 1981\nWood wool building slabs (first revision)\n12.32\nIS\n3348 : 1965\nFibre insulation boards\n12.33\nIS\n3478 : 1966\nHigh density wood particle boards\n12.34\nIS\n12406 : 2003\nMedium density fibre boards for general purposes. (first revision)\n12.35\nIS\n12823 : 1990\nPrelaminated particle boards.\n12.37 IS\n14276 : 1995\nCement bonded particle boards.\n12.39 IS\n14587 : 1998\nPrelaminated medium density fibre board.\n12.40 Title Page WOOD BASED LAMINATES IS\n3513 : 1989\nResin treated compressed wood laminates. (compregs)\nPart I For Electrical purposes (first revision)\n12.42\nPart 2 For chemical purposes (first revision)\n12.45\nPart 3 for general purposes (first revision)\n12.48\nIS: 14616 : 1999\nLaminated veneer lumber\n12.51\nBAMBOO AND COIR\nIS\n13958 : 1994\nBamboo mat board for general purposes.\n12.53\nIS\n14588 : 1999\nBamboo mat veneer composite for general purposes. 12.54\nIS\n14842 : 2000\nCoir Veneer board for general purposes\n12.55\nIS\n15476 : 2004\nBamboo mat corrugated sheets – Specification\n12.56\nIS\n15491 : 2004\nMedium density coirboards for general purposes – Specification\n12.57 1.\nScope – Covers the dimensions, such as length, measurement for wood based panel materials.\nThe wood based panels considered are plywood, blockboard, hardboard, fibre insulation board, particle\nboard, veneered particle board, particle board for insulation and high density particle board.\n2.\nDimensions\n2.1 Plywood\n2.1.1 Size– Plywood panels shall be of the sizes specified below\nLength\nWidth mm\nmm\n2400 ×\n1200\n2100\n×\n1200\n2100\n×\n900\n1800\n×\n1200\n1800\n×\n900 2.1.2 Thickness–The thickness shall be as given in the specification.\n2.2 Hardboard 2.2.1 Size– Hardboards shall be of the sizes specified bel ow:\nLength\nWidth mm\nmm\n4800\n×\n1200\n3600\n×\n1200\n3000\n×\n1200\n2400\n×\n1200\n2100\n×\n1200\n2100\n× 900\n1800\n×\n1200\n1800\n× 900\n1200\n×\n1200 2.2.2 Thickness –The thicknesses shall be as given in the specification.\n2.3 Blockboard\n2.3.1\nSizes – Blockboards shall be of the sizes specified below :\nLength\nWidth mm\nmm\n2400\n×\n1200\n2100\n×\n1200\n2100\n×\n900\n1800\n×\n1200\n1800\n×\n900 2.3.2 Thickness – The thickness shall be as given in the specification.\n2.4 Fibre Insulation Board 2.4.1 Size – Fibre insulation boards shall be of the sizes specified below :\nLength\nWidth mm\nmm\n3600\n×\n1200\n3000\n×\n1200\n2400\n×\n1200\n2100\n×\n1200\n2100\n×\n900\n1800\n×\n1200\n1800\n×\n900 2.4.2 Thickness – The thickness shall be as given in the specification.\n2.5 Wood Particle Board (Medium Density) – and\nprelamination particle board."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 849: 1994",
    "title": "Cold Setting Case In Glue For Wood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Requirements for cold setting casein glue used in the wood panel industry, wood-work and joinery industry.",
    "keywords": [
      "casein",
      "glue",
      "gap",
      "joint",
      "close",
      "contact",
      "bwp"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for synthetic resin adhesives suitable for wood work (non-structural) and joinery.",
      "General Quality": "The glue shall be in the form of powder, the adhesive constituent of which shall be mainly casein conforming to IS 850 : 1994*. When prepared in water in accordance with the manufacturer’s instruction, it shall yield a homogeneous pasty fluid, free from grit and of satisfactory consistency. The glue shall be supplied in non-absorbent airtight containers. 3. Tests 3.1 Adhesive Strength— The mean failing load shall be not less than 270 kg and 45 kg (2 700 N and 450 N) for dry and wet tests, respectively. 3.2 Mycological Test— Where specified by the purchaser, the mycological test shall be conducted. The test pieces shall comply with the requirements specified under 3.1 for wet test. 3.3 Test for Chloride Content –The aqueous extract of the paper joined with casein glue shall not contain chlo",
      "Keeping Properties": "The glue after being manufactured when stored in the original closed containers in a cool place for 12 months or for the period specified by the manufacturer shall comply with the requirements specified under 3.1. * Natural sour [(lactic)] casein for glue manufacture (first revision). Note: For method of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 849 : 1994 Specification for cold setting casein glue for wood (first revision) TABLE 1 TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR SYNTHETIC RESIN ADHESIVES Resistance To Water Dry Test Test Resistance to Requirements Gap Close Boiling Water Test Hot Water Test Cold Water Test Micro-Organism Joint Contact Joint Gap Close Gap Close Gap Close Gap Close Joint Contact Joint Contact Joint Contact Joint Contact Joint Joint Joint",
      "Types": "Synthetic resin adhesives for wood shall be of the following four types : Boiling Water Proof BWP Boiling Water Resistance BWR Warm Water Resistance WWR Cold Water Resistance CWR 2.1 Gap filling and close contact adhesives of four types shall have following symbols :"
    },
    "content": "IS 849: 1994 Cold Setting Case In Glue For Wood\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements for cold setting casein glue used in the wood panel industry, wood-work and joinery\nindustry.\n2.\nGeneral Quality – The glue shall be in the form of powder, the adhesive constituent of which shall be\nmainly casein conforming to IS 850 : 1994*. When prepared in water in accordance with the manufacturer’s\ninstruction, it shall yield a homogeneous pasty fluid, free from grit and of satisfactory consistency. The glue\nshall be supplied in non-absorbent airtight containers.\n3.\nTests\n3.1 Adhesive Strength— The mean failing load shall\nbe not less than 270 kg and 45 kg (2 700 N and 450 N) for dry and wet tests, respectively.\n3.2 Mycological Test— Where specified by the\npurchaser, the mycological test shall be conducted. The test pieces shall comply with the requirements specified\nunder 3.1 for wet test.\n3.3 Test for Chloride Content –The aqueous extract of\nthe paper joined with casein glue shall not contain chlorides calculated as sodium chloride exceeding 0.1\npercent. This test shall only be conducted when specifically required by the purchaser.\n3.4 Test for Sulphate Content —When specifically\nrequired by the purchaser, the aqueous extract of the paper joined with casein glue shall not contain sulphates\ncalculated as anhydrous sodium sulphate exceeding 0.6 percent.\n4. Storage Properties –The glue after being\nmanufactured when stored in the original closed containers in a cool place for 12 months or for the period\nspecified by the manufacturer shall comply with the requirements specified under 3.1. * Natural sour [(lactic)] casein for glue manufacture (first revision).\nNote: For method of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 849 : 1994 Specification for cold setting casein glue for wood (first revision) TABLE 1 TEST REQUIREMENTS FOR SYNTHETIC RESIN ADHESIVES Resistance To Water Dry Test\nTest Resistance to\nRequirements\nGap\nClose\nBoiling Water Test\nHot Water Test\nCold Water Test\nMicro-Organism\nJoint\nContact\nJoint Gap\nClose\nGap\nClose\nGap\nClose\nGap\nClose\nJoint\nContact Joint\nContact\nJoint\nContact Joint\nContact\nJoint\nJoint\nJoint\nJoint\nMean Failing\n205\n275\n100 for\n150 for\n100\n150\n180\n200\n180\n200\nLoad, kg, Min\nBWP\nBWP\n90 for\n115 for\nBWR\nBWR\n4.\nResistance to water\n4.1 Gap joints — See Table 2.\nTABLE 2 RESISTANCE TO WATER (GAPJOINTS)\nType\nTemperature of Water in Which\nTime of\nMean Failing\nTest Pieces shall be immersed\nImmersion\nLoad\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n0C\nh kg\nBWP\n100\n6\n100\n(or at the boiling point of water)\nBWR\ndo\n3\n90\nWWR\n70 ± 2\n3\n100\nCWR\n27 ± 2\n16 to 24\n180\n1.\nScope – Requirements for synthetic resin adhesives suitable for wood work (non-structural) and joinery.\n2.\nTypes – Synthetic resin adhesives for wood shall be of the following four types :\nBoiling Water Proof\nBWP\nBoiling Water Resistance\nBWR\nWarm Water Resistance\nWWR\nCold Water Resistance\nCWR\n2.1 Gap filling and close contact adhesives of four types\nshall have following symbols :"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 851: 1978",
    "title": "Synthetic Resin Adhesives For Construction Work (Non-Structural) In Wood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "(First Revision) Type Symbol Gap -Filling Close Contact Adhesive Adhesive Boiling Water Proof BWP/GF BWP/CC Boiling Water Resistance BWR/GF BWR/CC Warm Water Resistance WWR/GF WWR/CC Cold Water Resistance CWR/GF BWP/CC 3. Keeping Properties —Adhesives shall comply with the test requirements given in Table 1, after the resin and hardener have been stored in the original closed containers according to the manufacturer’s instructions and up to the date recommended by the manufacturer. }",
    "keywords": [
      "bwp",
      "wwr",
      "close",
      "boiling",
      "failing",
      "contact",
      "bwr"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Keeping Properties": "Adhesives shall comply with the test requirements given in Table 1, after the resin and hardener have been stored in the original closed containers according to the manufacturer’s instructions and up to the date recommended by the manufacturer. } 4.2 Close-Contact Joints — See Table 3. TABLE 3 RESISTANCE TO WATER (CLOSE-CONTACT JOINTS) Type Temperature of Water in Which Time of Mean Failing Test Pieces Shall be Immersed Immersion Load (1) (2) (3) (4) oC h kg BWP 100 6 150 (or at the boiling point of water) BWR 100 3 115 (or at the boiling point of water) WWR 70 ± 2 3 150 CWR 27 ± 2 16 to 24 200 Note – For methods of tests, refer to Appendices B to G of the standard and IS1734 (Part 7) : 1983 Methods of test for plywood Part 7 Mycological test. For detailed Information, refer to IS 851: 197",
      "Resistance To Micro": "organism (Mycological Test) 5.1 Gap Joints— Average failing load shall not be less than 180 kg for all types. 5.2 Close- Contact Joint — Average failing load shall not be less than 200 kg for all types"
    },
    "content": "IS 851: 1978 Synthetic Resin Adhesives For Construction Work (Non-Structural) In Wood\n(First Revision) Type Symbol Gap -Filling Close Contact Adhesive Adhesive\nBoiling Water Proof\nBWP/GF\nBWP/CC\nBoiling Water Resistance\nBWR/GF\nBWR/CC\nWarm Water Resistance\nWWR/GF\nWWR/CC\nCold Water Resistance\nCWR/GF BWP/CC\n3.\nKeeping Properties —Adhesives shall comply with the test requirements given in Table 1, after the resin\nand hardener have been stored in the original closed containers according to the manufacturer’s instructions\nand up to the date recommended by the manufacturer.\n} 4.2 Close-Contact Joints — See Table 3.\nTABLE 3 RESISTANCE TO WATER (CLOSE-CONTACT JOINTS)\nType\nTemperature of Water in Which\nTime of\nMean Failing\nTest Pieces Shall be Immersed\nImmersion\nLoad\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\noC h\nkg\nBWP\n100\n6\n150\n(or at the boiling point of water)\nBWR\n100\n3\n115\n(or at the boiling point of water)\nWWR\n70 ± 2\n3\n150\nCWR\n27 ± 2\n16 to 24\n200 Note – For methods of tests, refer to Appendices B to G of the standard and IS1734 (Part 7) : 1983 Methods of test for plywood\nPart 7 Mycological test.\nFor detailed Information, refer to IS 851: 1978 Specification for synthetic resin adhesives for construction work (nonstructural) in wood (first revision).\n5.\nResistance to Micro-organism (Mycological Test)\n5.1 Gap Joints— Average failing load shall not be less\nthan 180 kg for all types.\n5.2 Close- Contact Joint — Average failing load shall\nnot be less than 200 kg for all types"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 852: 1994",
    "title": "Animal Glue For General Wood-Working Purposes",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Requirements of animal glue for general wood-working purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "glue",
      "plywood",
      "aminoresins",
      "prepared",
      "animal",
      "spicies",
      "moisture"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of different grades and types of plywood used for general purpuses. 2. Grades a) Boiling water resistant or BWR grade, and b) Moisture resistant or MR grade. 3. Types based on classification by appearance. 3.1 Plywood for general purposes shall be classified into three types, namely, AA, AB and BB based on the quality of the two surfaces, namely, A and B in terms of general permissible defects. 4. Materials",
      "Materials": "The glue shall be prepared from skin or bone material. It shall be supplied in the form of sheets, cakes, granules, pearls, flakes or powder, or in a kibbled form, as specified by the purchaser. 3. Requirements 3.1 Odour – The odour of a freshly prepared hot solution of the glue shall not be objectionable. 3.2 Keeping Quality —The glue shall keep not less than six days without evidence of liquefaction, purefaction or mould growth. 3.3 Storage Properties – The glue shall retain all the properties specified under 3.1and 3.4 to 3.7 for at least 12 months from the date of manufacture, when stored in a cool dry place. 3.4. Moisture Content 3.4.1 The average moisture content of the glue, shall be not greater than 14 percent and no individual value shall be greater than 18 percent. 3.4.2 Should t",
      "Timber": "Any spicies of timber may be used for plywood manufacture. However, a list of spicies, for the manufacture of plywood is given in Annex B of the standard for guidance. 4.2 Adhesive – See IS 848 : 1974*. 4.2.1.Extenders may be used with the synthetic resin adhesive (aminoresins). However, synthetic resin adhesives (aminoresins) when extented by more than 25 percent shall contain suitable preservative chemicals in sufficient concentration to satisfy the mycological test described in the standard.",
      "Quality": "See Tables 1 and 2. TABLE 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS OF PLYWOOD FOR GENERAL PURPOSES. Sl. Defect Types of Surfaces No. Categories A B (1) (2) ( 3 ) ( 4 ) i) Blister Nil Nil ii) Checks Individual check Individual check not not more than more than 100 mm 50 mm in length in lengthand the total SUMMARY"
    },
    "content": "IS 852: 1994 Animal Glue For General Wood-Working Purposes\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements of animal glue for general wood-working purposes.\n2.\nMaterial —The glue shall be prepared from skin or bone material. It shall be supplied in the form of sheets,\ncakes, granules, pearls, flakes or powder, or in a kibbled form, as specified by the purchaser.\n3.\nRequirements\n3.1 Odour – The odour of a freshly prepared hot\nsolution of the glue shall not be objectionable.\n3.2 Keeping Quality —The glue shall keep not less\nthan six days without evidence of liquefaction, purefaction or mould growth.\n3.3 Storage Properties – The glue shall retain all the\nproperties specified under 3.1and 3.4 to 3.7 for at least\n12 months from the date of manufacture, when stored in a cool dry place.\n3.4. Moisture Content 3.4.1 The average moisture content of the glue, shall be not greater than 14 percent and no individual value\nshall be greater than 18 percent. 3.4.2 Should the average moisture content be more than 14 percent (not to exceed 18 percent under any\ncircumstances), the supplier shall make good the deficiency in the mass delivered in the manner stated\nbelow:\nThe mass of the material delivered (as weighed on delivery) shall be equal to — Where\nN = nominal mass of the consignmentrdered, and\nM = average percentage moisture content.\n3.5 Chloride – The chloride content shall not exceed 2\npercent calculated as sodium chloride.\n3.6 Acidity and Alkalinity (pH) – The pH value of the\nglue, shall be not lower than 4.0 and nor higher than 8.2.\n3.7 Overlap Joint Strength in Longitudinal Shear –\nThe average failing load of six test specimens, prepared and tested shall be not less than 275 kg. Note — For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to E of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 852 : 1994 Specification for animal glue for general wood-working purposes\n(second revision).\nM\n100\n86\nN\n−\n= 1.\nScope – Requirements of different grades and types of plywood used for general purpuses.\n2.\nGrades a)\nBoiling water resistant or BWR grade, and b)\nMoisture resistant or MR grade.\n3.\nTypes based on classification by appearance.\n3.1 Plywood for general purposes shall be classified\ninto three types, namely, AA, AB and BB based on the quality of the two surfaces, namely, A and B in terms of\ngeneral permissible defects.\n4.\nMaterials\n4.1. Timber – Any spicies of timber may be used for plywood manufacture. However, a list of spicies, for the\nmanufacture of plywood is given in Annex B of the standard for guidance.\n4.2 Adhesive – See IS 848 : 1974*. 4.2.1.Extenders may be used with the synthetic resin adhesive (aminoresins). However, synthetic resin\nadhesives (aminoresins) when extented by more than\n25 percent shall contain suitable preservative chemicals in sufficient concentration to satisfy the mycological\ntest described in the standard. 5. Quality — See Tables 1 and 2.\nTABLE 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS OF PLYWOOD\nFOR GENERAL PURPOSES.\nSl.\nDefect Types of Surfaces\nNo.\nCategories A B\n(1)\n(2)\n( 3 )\n( 4 ) i)\nBlister\nNil\nNil ii)\nChecks\nIndividual check\nIndividual check not not more than\nmore than 100 mm\n50 mm in length in lengthand the total\nSUMMARY"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 303: 1989",
    "title": "Plywood For General Purpose",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "(Third Revision) * Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood(phenolic and amino plastic) (first revision). + Extruders for use in synthetic resin adhesive (Urea formaldehyde) for plywood (first revision). and the total length not more than length not more 1000 mm/m2 300 mm/m2 iii) Discolo Nil 5 percent ration iv) Dote 5cm/m2 15cm/m2 v) Insect Scattered up to Scattered up to hole 12 holes/ m2 24 holes/ m2 vi) Joints One joint for No Restriction every multiple of 200 mm provided no individual piece is",
    "keywords": [
      "restriction",
      "ply",
      "plywood",
      "mar",
      "patches",
      "filled",
      "provided"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "6.1 The dimension of plyboards shall be as follows 2400 mm × 1200 mm 2100 mm × 1200 mm 1800 mm × 1200 mm 2100 mm × 900 mm 1800 mm × 1200 mm Note – Any other dimension as agreed to between the manufactuer and the purcheser may also be used. 6.2 Thickness — See Table 3. TABLE 3 THICKNESS OF PLYWOOD BOARDS BOARD THICKNESS mm (1) (2) 3 ply 3,4,5,6, 5 ply 5, 6, 8, 9 7ply 9,12,15,16, 9 ply 12, 15, 16, 16 11 ply 19, 22, 25 Above 11 ply As ordered The thickness shall be measured up to one place of decimal. 6.3 Tolerances Dimensions Tolerance a) Length : + 6 mm : – 0 mm b) Width : + 3 mm – 0 mm c) Thickness (1) Less than 6 mm : ± 10% (2) 6 mm and above : ± 5% d) Squareness : 0.2% e) Edge straightness : 0.2% 7. Tests 7.1 Glue adhesion — Shall have an average and minimum shear strength not less than "
    },
    "content": "IS 303: 1989 Plywood For General Purpose\n(Third Revision)\n* Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood(phenolic and amino plastic) (first revision).\n+ Extruders for use in synthetic resin adhesive (Urea formaldehyde) for plywood (first revision).\nand the total length not more than\nlength not more\n1000 mm/m2\n300 mm/m2 iii)\nDiscolo\nNil\n5 percent ration iv)\nDote\n5cm/m2\n15cm/m2 v)\nInsect\nScattered up to\nScattered up to hole\n12 holes/ m2\n24 holes/ m2 vi)\nJoints\nOne joint for\nNo Restriction every multiple\nof 200 mm provided no\nindividual piece is less than\n100 mm in width.\nvii)\nKnots\n2up to12 mm\n4up to 20 mm dia/m2\n(dead)\ndia/m2 vii)\nPin knots 6 2/m2\n6/m2\n(dead)\nix)\nPin Knots No restriction\nNo restriction\n(Live) x)\nKnots\n6 upto25 mm\nNo Restriction\n(tight)\ndia/m2 xi)\nPatches\n4 patches/m2\nAny number provided they are provided they are\nall tight patchess all tight patches and\nand donot mar the donot mar the appearance\nappearance xii)\nSplits\n2 splits,each not\n3 splits, each not more than 1mm more than 4 mm wide and length\nwide and length not more100 mm not more150 mm\nprovided they are filled provided they filled with suitable are filled with suitable\nfiller\nVeneer inserts. Splitup to 25 mm long and\n0.8mm wide may be ignored provided they\nare suitably filled with a filler.\nxiii)\nSwirl\nUnlimited, provided No restriction they do not mar\nthe appearance\n} TABLE 2 PERMISSIBLE CATEGORIES OF DEFECTS\nType of Surface\nMaximum Number of Categories of\nPermissible Defects per sq metre\nA\n3\nB\n5\n6.\nDimensions and Tolerances—\n6.1 The dimension of plyboards shall be as follows\n2400 mm\n×\n1200 mm\n2100 mm\n×\n1200 mm\n1800 mm\n×\n1200 mm\n2100 mm\n×\n900 mm\n1800 mm\n×\n1200 mm\nNote – Any other dimension as agreed to between the manufactuer\nand the purcheser may also be used.\n6.2 Thickness — See Table 3.\nTABLE 3 THICKNESS OF PLYWOOD BOARDS\nBOARD\nTHICKNESS\nmm\n(1)\n(2)\n3 ply\n3,4,5,6,\n5 ply\n5, 6, 8, 9\n7ply\n9,12,15,16,\n9 ply\n12, 15, 16, 16\n11 ply\n19, 22, 25\nAbove 11 ply\nAs ordered\nThe thickness shall be measured up to one place of decimal.\n6.3 Tolerances\nDimensions Tolerance a) Length\n:\n+ 6 mm\n: – 0 mm b) Width\n:\n+ 3 mm\n– 0 mm c) Thickness (1) Less than 6 mm\n:\n± 10% (2) 6 mm and above :\n± 5% d) Squareness\n:\n0.2% e) Edge straightness\n:\n0.2%\n7.\nTests\n7.1 Glue adhesion — Shall have an average and\nminimum shear strength not less than the values specified in Table 4, against each grade.\nTABLE 4 AVERAGE AND MINIMUM INDIVIDUAL\nSHEAR STRENGTH OF PLYWOOD Sl.No. Grade Shear strength, Min(N) Drystate Mycological Water Resistance i)\nBWR\nMinimum average 1350\n1000\n1000\nIndividual 1100\n800\n800 ii)\nMR\nMinimum average 1000\n800\n800\nIndividual 800\n650\n650\n7.2 Moisture Content —Not less than 5 percent and\nnot more than 15 percent.\nNote— For method of tests refer to the standard and various\nparts of IS 1734. Method of test for plywood.\nFor detailed Information, refer to IS 303 :1989 Specification for plywood for general purposes (third revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1328: 1996",
    "title": "Veneered Decorative Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Covers types of plywood with ornamental veneers on one or both faces used for decorative purposes, such as furniture making, panelling of all kinds, including panelling for railway coaches, buses and ships.",
    "keywords": [
      "plywood",
      "decorative",
      "veneered",
      "bwr",
      "knots",
      "grain",
      "adhesive"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers types of plywood with ornamental veneers on one or both faces used for decorative purposes, such as furniture making, panelling of all kinds, including panelling for railway coaches, buses and ships. 2. Grades and Types . 2.1 Determine decrotave plywood shall be of two grades, namely BWR and MR 2.2 Decorative plywood shall be of two types, namely Type 1 and Type 2",
      "Materials": "The species of timber commonly used for decorative veneers or decorative plywood shall be specified by the purchaser. Commonly used species are given in Annex. B of the standard. Any species of timber may be used for cores and backs of decorative veneered plywood. However, a list of species, given in Annex B of IS 303 : 1989* may be used for guidance The adhesive for bonding of veneers shall be MR and BWR type synthetic resin adhesive, conforming to IS 848: 1974.+ for MR and BWR grade veneered decorative ply respectively. Plywood, when used in the manufacture of veneered decorative plywood of MR and BWR grade shall be MR and BWR type conforming to IS 303 : 1989.* 4. Requirements 4.1 Type 1—Open splits, checks or open Joints not more than 150 mm in length and 0.5 mm in width shall be permis",
      "Finish": "The edges of the decorative plywood shall be trimmed square within 3 mm and sanded to a smooth finish. ++Dimensions and tolerances relating to wood based panel materials. Note—For method of tests, refer to the standard and IS 1734 (Part 1) : 1983 Method of tests for plywood, Part1 determination of density and moisture(second revision). For detailed Information, refer to IS 1328 : 1996 Specification for veneered decorative plywood (third revision). * Plywood for general purpose (first revision) + Synthetic resin adhesive for plywood (phenolic and aminoplastic) (first revision)"
    },
    "content": "IS 1328: 1996 Veneered Decorative Plywood\n(Third Revision)\n1.\nScope – Covers types of plywood with ornamental veneers on one or both faces used for decorative\npurposes, such as furniture making, panelling of all kinds, including panelling for railway coaches, buses\nand ships.\n2.\nGrades and Types .\n2.1 Determine decrotave plywood shall be of two grades,\nnamely BWR and MR\n2.2 Decorative plywood shall be of two types, namely\nType 1 and Type 2\n3.\nMaterials – The species of timber commonly used for decorative veneers or decorative plywood shall be\nspecified by the purchaser. Commonly used species are given in Annex. B of the standard.\nAny species of timber may be used for cores and backs of decorative veneered plywood. However, a list\nof species, given in Annex B of IS 303 : 1989* may be used for guidance\nThe adhesive for bonding of veneers shall be MR and BWR type synthetic resin adhesive, conforming to\nIS 848: 1974.+ for MR and BWR grade veneered decorative ply respectively. Plywood, when used in the\nmanufacture of veneered decorative plywood of MR and BWR grade shall be MR and BWR type conforming\nto IS 303 : 1989.*\n4.\nRequirements\n4.1 Type 1—Open splits, checks or open Joints not more\nthan 150 mm in length and 0.5 mm in width shall be permissible provided the same are rectified with a veneer\ninsert bonded with synthetic resin adhesive.\nShall be free from torn grain, dead knots, dote, discolouration and sapwood.The decorative veneered\nsurface shall be selected for figure, texture, colour and grain characteristics. It shall be free from all\nmanufacturing and wood defects except to the extent permitted above.\n4.2 Type 2 — Open splits, checks, or open joints not\nmore than 200 mm in length and 1 mm in width shall be permissible, provided these are rectified in the manner\nspecified under 4.1. Tight knots and patches not more than 25 mm in diameter, and pin knots not more than 4\nmm in diameter, shall be permissible.\n4.2.1 Shall be free from the torn grain, dead knots, dote and discolouration. Sapwood, if it does not affect the\nappearance, shall be permissible.\n4.2.2 Surface shall be selected for figure, texture, colour and grain characteristics. It shall be free from all\nmanufacturing and wood defects, except to the extent permitted above.\n5.\nDesignation of Dimensions and Tolerances\n5.1 The dimensions and tolerances (including on\nthickness ) of plywood shall be as given in IS 12049 :\n1987 ++.\nNote – Any other dimension as agreed to between the\nmanufacture and for chaser may be used\n5.2 Thickness — Thickness of the plywood boards\nshall be 3 mm, 4 mm, 6 mm, 9 mm,12 mm, 19 mm or 25 mm.\n6.\nTests a)\nMoisture content — Not less than 5 percent and more than15 percent.\nb)\nWater resistance test—Shall not show delamination or blister formation when tested\nas per the standard.\n7.\nFinish —The edges of the decorative plywood shall be trimmed square within 3 mm and sanded to a\nsmooth finish. ++Dimensions and tolerances relating to wood based panel materials.\nNote—For method of tests, refer to the standard and IS 1734 (Part 1) : 1983 Method of tests for plywood, Part1 determination\nof density and moisture(second revision).\nFor detailed Information, refer to IS 1328 : 1996 Specification for veneered decorative plywood (third revision).\n* Plywood for general purpose (first revision)\n+ Synthetic resin adhesive for plywood (phenolic and aminoplastic) (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4990: 1993",
    "title": "Plywood For Concrete Shuttering Work",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Requirements of plywood for concrete shuttering and form work.",
    "keywords": [
      "shuttering",
      "plywood",
      "ply",
      "work",
      "direction",
      "veneers",
      "kgf"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of plywood for concrete shuttering and form work.",
      "Types": "Plywood for concrete shuttering work shall be preservative treated, of BWP grade and shall be of three types as given below Type Description Designation 1 Plywood for concrete CS shuttering work (plain) 2 Plywood for concrete CSC shuttering work with plastic coating (coated) 3 Plywood for concrete CSFF shuttering work with suitable overlay (film faced) 3. Materials 3.1 Timber — Any species of timber may be used , However a list of species given in Annex B of the standard may be used for selection of species. 3.2 Adhesives for Bonding of Veneers—Shall be of the hot press synthetic resin (phenol formaldehyde) type and shall conforn to BWP type specified in IS 848 : 1974.+ 4. Dimensions and Tolerances 4.1. Size Unless otherwise specified, plywood boards for concrete shuttering work shall be o",
      "Workmanship And Finish": "Shall be smooth and the faces and back shall be free from harmful discolouration, pleats, overlaps and loose knots. The edges shall be of smooth uniform finish. * Dimensions and tolerances relating to wood based panel materials. Gaps and open joints shall be permitted as follows a) In Face — The gap or opening shall not exceed a width of 0.4 mm, If it exceeds 0.4mm this may be rectified by well-fitted veneer inserts of suitable width provided the grain of the veneer insert does not deviate by more than 10 percent from the grain direction of the surrounding veneer. b) In Core (Cross-Band) — The width of the opening shall of exceed 1 mm in the case of 3- ply and 5-ply, and 2 mm in the case of plywod of more than 5 ply, pnomided that such openings are not less than 300 mm apart in any reneer ",
      "Tests": "6.1 Moisture Content – Shall be not less than 5 percent and not more than 15 percent. 6.2 Glue Adhesion in Dry State 6.2.1 Glue shear strength – Average failing load shall be not less than 1350 N (135 kgf) and no individual value shall be less than 1100 N (110 kgf ). 6.2.2 Adhesion of plies – The veneers shall offer appreciable resistance to separation and the fractured samples shall show some adherent fibres distributed more or less uniformly. 6.3 Water Resistance Test Note — For method of tests, refer to various parts of IS 1734 : 1983 Method of tests for plywood (second revision) For detailed informations, refer to IS 4990 : 1993 Specification for plywood for concrete shuttering work (second revision). 6.3.1 Glue shear strength – The average failing load shall be not less than 1000 N (1"
    },
    "content": "IS 4990: 1993 Plywood For Concrete Shuttering Work\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements of plywood for concrete shuttering and form work.\n2.\nTypes – Plywood for concrete shuttering work shall be preservative treated, of BWP grade and shall be of\nthree types as given below\nType Description\nDesignation\n1\nPlywood for concrete\nCS\nshuttering work (plain)\n2\nPlywood for concrete\nCSC\nshuttering work with plastic coating (coated)\n3\nPlywood for concrete CSFF\nshuttering work with suitable overlay (film\nfaced)\n3.\nMaterials\n3.1 Timber — Any species of timber may be used ,\nHowever a list of species given in Annex B of the standard may be used for selection of species.\n3.2 Adhesives for Bonding of Veneers—Shall be of the\nhot press synthetic resin (phenol formaldehyde) type and shall conforn to BWP type specified in IS 848 :\n1974.+\n4.\nDimensions and Tolerances\n4.1. Size\nUnless otherwise specified, plywood boards for concrete shuttering work shall be of length and width\nas specfied below—\nmm mm\nmm mm\n2400\n×\n1200\n1500\n×\n1200\n2400\n×\n900\n1500\n×\n900\n2100\n×\n1200\n1200\n×\n1200\n2100\n×\n900\n1200\n× 900\n1800\n×\n1200\n1200\n× 600\n1800 x\n900 900\n× 900\nNote – Plywood boards for concrete shuttering may also be\nmanufactured under the following alternative sizes if specified by the purchaser\nmm mm\nmm mm\n2400\n× 1220\n1540\n×\n1220\n2440 × 920\n1540\n× 920\n2140\n×\n1220\n1220\n×\n1220\n2140 × 920\n1220\n× 920\n1840\n× 1220\n1220 × 610\n1840\n× 920 920\n× 920 + Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood (Phenolic and amino plastic (first revision)\n4.2 Thickness – Unless other wise specified, thickness\nof plywood board shall be as specified below for the respective number of plies\nBoard\nThickness\n3-ply\n4 mm\n5 mm\n6 mm\n5-ply\n6 mm\n8 mm\n9 mm\n7-ply\n12 mm\n16 mm\n9-ply\n16 mm\n19 mm\nMore than 9- ply\n22 mm\n25 mm\n30 mm 35 mm\n40 mm\n4.3 Tolerances— The tolerances on the nomial sizes of\nfinished boards shall be as specified in IS 12049 :1987*.\n5.\nWorkmanship and Finish— Shall be smooth and the faces and back shall be free from harmful\ndiscolouration, pleats, overlaps and loose knots. The edges shall be of smooth uniform finish.\n* Dimensions and tolerances relating to wood based panel materials. Gaps and open joints shall be permitted as follows a) In Face — The gap or opening shall not\nexceed a width of 0.4 mm, If it exceeds 0.4mm this may be rectified by well-fitted veneer\ninserts of suitable width provided the grain of the veneer insert does not deviate by more\nthan 10 percent from the grain direction of the surrounding veneer.\nb) In Core (Cross-Band) — The width of the opening shall of exceed 1 mm in the case of 3-\nply and 5-ply, and 2 mm in the case of plywod of more than 5 ply, pnomided that such\nopenings are not less than 300 mm apart in any reneer and staggered not less than 150\nmm between any neveer and the next one with the same direction.\nThe faces of plywood for concrete shuttering work with plastic coating, or with suitable\noverlay shall be dense smooth, without blisters and patch marks and of uniform colour.\n6.\nTests –\n6.1 Moisture Content – Shall be not less than 5 percent\nand not more than 15 percent.\n6.2 Glue Adhesion in Dry State\n6.2.1 Glue shear strength – Average failing load shall be not less than 1350 N (135 kgf) and no individual\nvalue shall be less than 1100 N (110 kgf ).\n6.2.2\nAdhesion of plies – The veneers shall offer appreciable resistance to separation and the fractured\nsamples shall show some adherent fibres distributed more or less uniformly.\n6.3 Water Resistance Test\nNote — For method of tests, refer to various parts of IS 1734 : 1983 Method of tests for plywood (second revision)\nFor detailed informations, refer to IS 4990 : 1993 Specification for plywood for concrete shuttering work\n(second revision). 6.3.1 Glue shear strength – The average failing load shall be not less than 1000 N (100 kgf) and no individual\nvalue shall be less tha n 800 N (80 kgf). 6.3.2 Adhesion of plies – Same as in 6.2.2 6.3.3 Plywood for concrete shuttering work with plastic coating or with suitable overlay, after being\nsubjected to 72 hours boiling, shall not show any softening, checking, craking or deterioration of the\nsurface layer.\n6.3.4\nWhen tested plywood shall have retention of preservative chemical not less than 12 kg/m3\n6.4 Tensile Strength — The tensile strength, shall\ncomply with the following requirements—\na) Tensile strength shall be not less than 32..5\nN/ mm2 ( 325 kgf/cm2 ) in the direction parallel to the grain direction of the face veneers,\nb) Tensile strength shall be not less than 22.5 N/ mm2 (225 kgf/cm2) in the direction of the face\nveneers, and c) The sum of the tensile strengths in both\ndirections shall be not less than 60.0 N/mm2\n(60 kgf/cm2).\n6.5 Mycological Test – The test piece shall show no\nappreciable signs of separation at the edges of the veneers.\n6.6 Modulus of Elasticity – The modulus of elasticity\nshall be not less than 8000 N/mm2 along the direction parallel to the grain direction of the face veneer and not\nless than 4000 N/ mm2 perpendicular to the grain direction of the face veneers, when tested in dry condition."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5509: 2000",
    "title": "Fire Retardant Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Covers the fire retardant chemicals, method of treatment, retentions and requirements of fire retardant plywood.",
    "keywords": [
      "plywood",
      "retardant",
      "treatment",
      "ammonium",
      "flame",
      "fire",
      "phosphate"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the fire retardant chemicals, method of treatment, retentions and requirements of fire retardant plywood. 2. Types",
      "Flame Retardants": "Flame retardant chemicals used for treatments of plywood shall generally be the following – Type 1 Ammonium phosphate Type 2 Boron compounds Type 3 Ammonium sulphate Type 4 Combination of ammonium phosphate and boron compounds Type 5 Combination of ammonium sulphate and ammonium phosphate 2.2 Where flame retardant treatment and preserva – tive treatment are required together, the types of chemical and their retention, shall be as given IS 12120 : 1987 +",
      "Preparation Of Plywood For Treatment": "Plywood shall conform to BWR grade of IS 303:1989t and shall have a moisture content of notexceeding 15 percent.",
      "Fire Retardent Treatment": "Type of treatment shall be either of the two below : a) Pressure impregnation, and b) Soaking treatment * Code of practice for preservation of plywood and other panel products. t Plywood for general purposes (third revision)",
      "Conditioning After Treatment": "Plywood after treatment shall be conditioned to suitable equilibrium moisture content of not more than 20 percent.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "The dimensions and tolerance of fire retardant plywood shall conform IS 12049 : 1987‡",
      "Workmanship And Finish": "The finished plywood shall be reasonably clean to handle and free of dirt and stain other than any uniform colour of the flame retardant solution. 8. Tests Requirement",
      "Moisture Content": "Shall not exceed 20 percent 8.2 Flammability– The time taken for the second ignition shall not be less than 30 minutes. 8.3 Flame Penetration – Time taken for flame penetration shall not be less than 15 minutes for every 6 mm thickness. 8.4 Rate of Burning —The time taken to lose weight from 30 percent to 70 percent shall not be less than 20 minutes. 8.5 Other Tests – Glue shear strength in dry state mycological test, water resistance test and any other mechanical property as per IS 303 : 1989. ‡ Dimensions and tolerances relating to wood based panel materials. t Plwood for general purposes (and revision). Note — For method of test refer IS 1734. (Part 1) : 1983 Method of test for plywood – Part 1– 1983. Determination of density and moisture content ( second revision) Methods of test for p"
    },
    "content": "IS 5509: 2000 Fire Retardant Plywood\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Covers the fire retardant chemicals, method of treatment, retentions and requirements of fire retardant\nplywood.\n2.\nTypes\n2.1. Flame Retardants— Flame retardant chemicals used for treatments of plywood shall generally be the\nfollowing –\nType 1\nAmmonium phosphate\nType 2\nBoron compounds\nType 3\nAmmonium sulphate\nType 4\nCombination of ammonium phosphate and boron compounds\nType 5\nCombination of ammonium sulphate and ammonium phosphate\n2.2 Where flame retardant treatment and preserva –\ntive treatment are required together, the types of chemical and their retention, shall be as given IS 12120 : 1987 +\n3.\nPreparation of Plywood for Treatment — Plywood shall conform to BWR grade of IS 303:1989t and shall\nhave a moisture content of notexceeding 15 percent.\n4.\nFire Retardent Treatment—Type of treatment shall be either of the two below :\na) Pressure impregnation, and b) Soaking treatment * Code of practice for preservation of plywood and other panel products. t Plywood for general purposes (third revision)\n5.\nConditioning after Treatment – Plywood after treatment shall be conditioned to suitable equilibrium\nmoisture content of not more than 20 percent.\n6.\nDimensions and Tolerances — The dimensions and tolerance of fire retardant plywood shall conform\nIS 12049 : 1987‡\n7.\nWorkmanship and Finish –The finished plywood shall be reasonably clean to handle and free of dirt and\nstain other than any uniform colour of the flame retardant solution.\n8.\nTests Requirement\n8.1. Moisture Content – Shall not exceed 20 percent\n8.2 Flammability– The time taken for the second\nignition shall not be less than 30 minutes.\n8.3 Flame Penetration – Time taken for flame\npenetration shall not be less than 15 minutes for every 6 mm thickness.\n8.4 Rate of Burning —The time taken to lose weight\nfrom 30 percent to 70 percent shall not be less than 20 minutes.\n8.5 Other Tests – Glue shear strength in dry state\nmycological test, water resistance test and any other mechanical property as per IS 303 : 1989.\n‡ Dimensions and tolerances relating to wood based panel materials.\nt Plwood for general purposes (and revision).\nNote — For method of test refer IS 1734. (Part 1) : 1983 Method of test for plywood – Part 1– 1983. Determination of density\nand moisture content ( second revision) Methods of test for plywood. Part 3 – 1983. Determination of fire resistance (second revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS : 5509-1980. Specification for fire retardant plywood.(first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5539: 1969",
    "title": "Preservative Treated Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Treatment of plywood for protection against fungi, termites and other insects and marine borers and requiremments of preservatives treated plywood.",
    "keywords": [
      "plywood",
      "chrome",
      "creosote",
      "treatment",
      "arsenic",
      "copper",
      "process"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Treatment of plywood for protection against fungi, termites and other insects and marine borers and requiremments of preservatives treated plywood. 2. Type of Preservatives a) Type 1 ( Oil Type) – Coal tar creosote with or without admixture with various grades of petroleum and other oils having high boiling point. b) Type 2 ( Organic Solvent Type)– Copper/zinc naphthenate, trichlorophenol, Lindane. c) Type 3 ( Water Soluble Non- fixing Type)– Zinc chloride, boric acid, borax, sodium fluoride and sodium pentachlorophenate. d) Type 4 ( Water Soluble ‘Fixed’ Type)–Copperchrome arsenic composition, acid Copper chrome composition, chromated zinc chloride and copper chrome boric composition.",
      "Preparation Of Plywood For Treatment": "Plywood for preservative treatment shall have moisture content not exceeding 16 percent and shall have been bonded with water resistant glue of BWR type. TABLE 1 RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT OF PLYWOOD FOR VARIOUS CONDITIONS Sl. Service Conditions Timber used in Plywood Type of Mode of Minimum No for Treated Plywood According to Relevant Preservative Treatment Retention Indian Standard on Plywood Recommemded Recommended kg/m3 Required to be Treated (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) i) Plywood in direct contact All Type 4 (Copper Pressure 12.0 with water or ground and chrome-arsenic process required to be painted as composition or Veneer for pontoons, boats, rafts acid- copper-chorme treatment 12.0 tugs, fence posts, box, composition) colums, etc ( IS 710 : 1976*) ii) Plywood in di",
      "Choice Of Treatment": "This is governed by the timber species in the plywood, sapwood content and use after treatment. Recommended practice on choice of preservative and amount of absorption and service conditions is given in Table 1. Note – For information regarding natural durability and degree of treatability of different species of timber see Appendix B of the standard. 5. Modes of Treatment a) By pressure impregnation after manufacture. b) By soaking or surface application after manufacture. c) By treatment of dry or wet veneers before assembly.",
      "Conditioning": "Plywood after treatment shall be conditioned to a moisture content of not more than 14 percent for interior use and 18 percent for exterior uses. If the plywood is to be painted subsequently the moisture content shall be between 6 and 14 percent. Sl Service Conditions Timber used in plywood Type of Mode of Minimum No for Treated Plywood According to Relevant Preservative Treatment Retention Indian Standard on Plywood Recommemded Recommended Required to be Treated (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) iii) Marine structures exposed All Type 1[Creosote or Pressure 200.0 to marine borer danger creosote fuel oil process (IS : 710 -1976) + mixture (50:50] iv) Concrete shuttering plywood All Type 4 ( Copper- Pressure 12.0 IS : 4990 -1993†) chrome arsenic process composition or acid-copper-chrome- Veneer 12.0 "
    },
    "content": "IS 5539: 1969 Preservative Treated Plywood\n1.\nScope – Treatment of plywood for protection against fungi, termites and other insects and marine\nborers and requiremments of preservatives treated plywood.\n2.\nType of Preservatives a) Type 1 ( Oil Type) – Coal tar creosote with\nor without admixture with various grades of petroleum and other oils having high boiling\npoint.\nb) Type 2 ( Organic Solvent Type)– Copper/zinc naphthenate, trichlorophenol, Lindane.\nc) Type 3 ( Water Soluble Non- fixing Type)–\nZinc chloride, boric acid, borax, sodium fluoride and sodium pentachlorophenate.\nd) Type 4 ( Water Soluble ‘Fixed’ Type)–Copperchrome arsenic composition, acid Copper\nchrome composition, chromated zinc chloride and copper chrome boric composition.\n3.\nPreparation of Plywood for Treatment – Plywood for preservative treatment shall have moisture content\nnot exceeding 16 percent and shall have been bonded with water resistant glue of BWR type.\nTABLE 1 RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR PRESERVATIVE TREATMENT\nOF PLYWOOD FOR VARIOUS CONDITIONS\nSl.\nService Conditions\nTimber used in Plywood\nType of\nMode of\nMinimum\nNo for Treated Plywood\nAccording to Relevant\nPreservative\nTreatment\nRetention\nIndian Standard on Plywood\nRecommemded\nRecommended kg/m3\nRequired to be Treated\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\ni)\nPlywood in direct contact\nAll\nType 4 (Copper\nPressure 12.0 with water or ground and\nchrome-arsenic process\nrequired to be painted as composition or\nVeneer for pontoons, boats, rafts\nacid- copper-chorme treatment 12.0 tugs, fence posts, box,\ncomposition)\ncolums, etc ( IS 710 : 1976*)\nii)\nPlywood in direct contact\nAll a) Type 4(Copper\nPressure\n12.0 with water or ground and\nchrome-arsenic process\nrequired to be painted as composition or\nfor pontoons,, boats, rafts, acid-copper chrome\ntugs, fence posts, box colu composition)\nmns, etc (IS 710 : 1976)\nbut plywood not requiring b) Type 1 [Creosote\nPressure\n100.0 light painting or only back\nor creosote fuel process\ncoal tar base (IS 710 : 1976)\noil mixture (50 : 50)]\n* Marine plywood (first revision)\n4.\nChoice of Treatment – This is governed by the timber species in the plywood, sapwood content and\nuse after treatment. Recommended practice on choice of preservative and amount of absorption and service\nconditions is given in Table 1.\nNote – For information regarding natural durability and\ndegree of treatability of different species of timber see\nAppendix B of the standard.\n5.\nModes of Treatment a)\nBy pressure impregnation after manufacture.\nb)\nBy soaking or surface application after manufacture.\nc)\nBy treatment of dry or wet veneers before assembly. 6. Conditioning – Plywood after treatment shall be\nconditioned to a moisture content of not more than 14 percent for interior use and 18 percent for exterior uses.\nIf the plywood is to be painted subsequently the moisture content shall be between 6 and 14 percent. Sl\nService Conditions\nTimber used in plywood\nType of\nMode of\nMinimum\nNo for Treated Plywood\nAccording to Relevant\nPreservative\nTreatment\nRetention\nIndian Standard on Plywood\nRecommemded\nRecommended\nRequired to be Treated\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\niii)\nMarine structures exposed\nAll\nType 1[Creosote or\nPressure\n200.0 to marine borer danger\ncreosote fuel oil process\n(IS : 710 -1976) +\nmixture (50:50] iv)\nConcrete shuttering plywood\nAll\nType 4 ( Copper-\nPressure\n12.0\nIS : 4990 -1993†)\nchrome arsenic process\ncomposition or acid-copper-chrome-\nVeneer\n12.0 composition)\ntreatment v)\nWood for outer cladding of All\nType 4 (Copper-chrome\nVeneer\n12.0 houses, roofing, bunkers\narsenic composition or treatment\nand shelters, and in other acid-copper-chrome\nconditions exposed to rain, composition)\nsun and outer weather but requiring paintin ( IS 303:\n1989*) (BWR Grade)\nvi)\nPlywood for outer cladding\nAll\nType 1 [Creosote or\nPressure\n100.0 of houses, roofing bunkers\ncreosote fuel oil mixture process\nand shelters, and in other\n(50:50)] conditions exposed to rain,\nsun and outer weather but requiring painting, but paint and colour not important\n(IS 303 :1989 BWR Grade) vii)\nPlywood for bus flooring\nAll\nType 4 ( Copper-\nPressure\n7.5.0 or rail coach flooring\nchrome-arsenic process\n( IS : 303 : 1989 BWR Grade)\ncomposition or acidcopper -chrome\ncomposition) or Type 1\n[Creosote or creosote fuel oil mixture (50:50)]\n75.0 viii)\nPlywood not in direct\nAll timbers except\nType 4(Copper-chrome-\nPressure\n5.5 contact with ground or\nwhen only heart-wood arsenic composition\nor soaking water but exposed and of\ndurable timber is or acid-copper-chrome\ngiven paint or varnish used.\ncomposition) or Type 2\n4.5 regularly as in plywood\nused for rail coach ceilings partitioning and other\ninterior use, bus interior, ammunition boxes, exterior\ndoors, etc.(IS 303:1989)\nBWR Grade ix)\nDecorative panelling do\nType 2 or Type 3 not\nPressure\n4.0 on rail coaches and ship\ncolour imparting process building(IS 303 : 1989)\nor soaking\nBWR Grade)\nx)\nPlywood for internal uses in do\nType 2 or Type 3 or\nPressure\n4.0 dry localities, such as inner\nType 4 process\npartitions, panelling, wall or soaking\nboarding, ceiling and furniture\n(IS 303 : 1989 and IS 1328 : 1996)@ + Marine plywood (first revision).\n† Plywood for concrete shuttering work.(second revision).\n* Plywood for general purpose (third revision).\n@ Veenerd decorative plywood (third revision).\nNote—For information regarding natural durability and degree of treatability of different species of timber see Appendix B of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5539 : 1969 Specification for preservative treated plywood."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7316: 1974",
    "title": "Decorative Plywood Using Plurality Of Veneer For Decorative Faces",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Covers decorative plywood with ornamental faces produced by use of plurality of veneers meant for decorative use, such as interior panelling of buildings, buses, ships, etc. and for decorative furniture of all types.",
    "keywords": [
      "decorative",
      "plywood",
      "bwr",
      "plurality",
      "wwr",
      "adhesive",
      "veneers"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers decorative plywood with ornamental faces produced by use of plurality of veneers meant for decorative use, such as interior panelling of buildings, buses, ships, etc. and for decorative furniture of all types. 2. Material 2.1 Timber – Shall be according to IS 303 : 1989*. Non durable timbers and sapwood of all other timber shall be given a preservative treatment. 2.2 Adhesive – Synthetic resin adhesive BWR or WMR. 2.3 Plywood – When used, shall be BWR or WWR synthetic resin bonded type.",
      "Permissible Defects": "Open splits, checks or open joints not more than 150 mm long and 0.5 mm wide, provided the same are rectified with a matching veneer insert bonded with BWR or WWR adhesive. Decorative veneered surface shall be free from torn grain, dote, worm hole, discolouration or other visual defects. 4. Standard Dimensions Length 240, 210, 180, 150, 120 and 90 cm Width 120 and 90 mm Thickness 3, 4, 6, 9, 12, 19, and 25 mm *Plywood for general purposes (third revision) 5. Tolerances Length up to 120 cm +3 mm – 0 mm Length over 120 cm +6 mm – 0 mm Width up to 90 cm +3 mm – 0 mm Width above 90 cm +6 mm – 0 mm Thickness = + 0.2 mm +5 percent of nominal thickness = – 0.1 mm+2.5 percent of nominal thickness Rectangular panels shall have their diagonal length not varying beyond 9 mm",
      "Finish": "Trimmed square and sanded to a smooth finish. 7. Tests 7.1 Moisture Content— Not less than 5 percent and not more than 15 percent . 7.2 Water Resistance Test – Shall not show delamination or blister formation Note — For method of test refer to the standard and IS1734 (Part 1) 1983 Method tests for plywood Part 1 Determination of density and moisture content (second revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 7316 : 1974 Specification of decorative plywood using plurality of veneers for decorative faces."
    },
    "content": "IS 7316: 1974 Decorative Plywood Using Plurality Of Veneer For Decorative Faces\n1. Scope – Covers decorative plywood with ornamental faces produced by use of plurality of veneers\nmeant for decorative use, such as interior panelling of buildings, buses, ships, etc. and for decorative furniture\nof all types.\n2.\nMaterial\n2.1 Timber – Shall be according to IS 303 : 1989*. Non\ndurable timbers and sapwood of all other timber shall be given a preservative treatment.\n2.2 Adhesive – Synthetic resin adhesive BWR or WMR.\n2.3 Plywood – When used, shall be BWR or WWR\nsynthetic resin bonded type.\n3.\nPermissible Defects—Open splits, checks or open joints not more than 150 mm long and 0.5 mm wide,\nprovided the same are rectified with a matching veneer insert bonded with BWR or WWR adhesive. Decorative\nveneered surface shall be free from torn grain, dote, worm hole, discolouration or other visual defects.\n4.\nStandard Dimensions\nLength\n240, 210, 180, 150, 120 and 90 cm\nWidth\n120 and 90 mm\nThickness\n3, 4, 6, 9, 12, 19, and 25 mm *Plywood for general purposes (third revision)\n5.\nTolerances\nLength up to 120 cm\n+3 mm\n– 0 mm\nLength over 120 cm\n+6 mm\n– 0 mm\nWidth up to 90 cm\n+3 mm\n– 0 mm\nWidth above 90 cm\n+6 mm\n– 0 mm Thickness = + 0.2 mm +5 percent of nominal thickness = – 0.1 mm+2.5 percent of nominal thickness\nRectangular panels shall have their diagonal length not varying beyond\n9 mm\n6.\nFinish – Trimmed square and sanded to a smooth finish.\n7.\nTests\n7.1 Moisture Content— Not less than 5 percent and\nnot more than 15 percent .\n7.2 Water Resistance Test – Shall not show delamination\nor blister formation\nNote — For method of test refer to the standard and IS1734 (Part 1) 1983 Method tests for plywood Part 1 Determination of\ndensity and moisture content (second revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 7316 : 1974 Specification of decorative plywood using plurality of veneers for decorative faces."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10701: 1983",
    "title": "Structural Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Requirements of plywood for structural purposes, such as stressed skin panels, plywood web beams, sheathing, silos, rail and ship containers.",
    "keywords": [
      "plywood",
      "restriction",
      "grain",
      "nil",
      "failing",
      "panels",
      "failed"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of plywood for structural purposes, such as stressed skin panels, plywood web beams, sheathing, silos, rail and ship containers. 2. Materials 2.1 Timber –The species of timber recommended for use shall be from the species mentioned in Appendix A of the standard. 2.2 Adhesive — Shall conform to BWP type specified in IS 848 : 1974*.",
      "Plywood": "Shall conform to BMP grade in accordance with IS 303 : 1989 +.",
      "Treatment": "Shall be given preservative treatment with fixed type of preservatives as per IS 5539 :1969 ++.",
      "General Requirements": "See Table 1. 6. Dimensions and Tolerances",
      "Sizes": "Structural plywood panels shall be of the sizes given below: 240 × 120 cm; 210 × 120 cm;180 × 120 cm; 240 × 90 cm; 210 × 90 cm;180 × 90 cm; TABLE 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ON VENEERS USED IN MANUFACTURE OF PLYWOOD FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES Requirements Sl. No. Defects Face Core i ) Blister Nil Nil ii) Checks Nil No restriction iii) Discolouration 3 percent of the area if it will 6 percent of the area if it not impair the board properties. will not impair the board properties. iv) Dote Nil 5 cm/m2 v) Insect holes Nil No restriction vi) Knots (dead) Nil 2 up to 12mm dia/m2 Pin knots (dead) Nil 2/m2 Pin knots (live) Permitted provided they do not mar No restriction the appearance Knots (tight) 3 up to 25 mm dia/m2 6 up to 25 mm dia/ m2 vii) Split on each panel One split not more than 2 splits not ",
      "Thickness": "Thickness of plywood panels shall be as given below – No. of Plies Thickness m m 3 4 5 6 9 7 12 16 9 16 19 11 19 25 { { { + Plywood for general purposes(third revision) ++ Preservative treated plywood. * Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood (phenolic and aminoplastic) (first revision) } TABLE 2 MINIMUM AVERAGE FAILING LOAD AND WOOD FAILURE REQUIREMENTS OF PLYWOOD FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES Dry State Resistance to Water Resistance to Micro Organism Average Average Average Average Average Average Failing Wood Failing Wood Failing Wood Load, N Failure Load, N Failure Load, N Failure Percent Percent Percent 1324 and above No restriciion 981and above No restriction 981 and above No restriction 1226-1323 60 883- 980 60 883- 980 60 1079-1225 80 785- 882 80 785- 882 80 <1079 Panel to be <785 Panel t",
      "Tolerances": "The tolerances on the nominal sizes of finished panels shall be as given below: Length ± 6 mm – 0 mm Width ± 3 mm – 0 mm Thickness up to and excluding ±10 percent 6mm 6 to 9 mm ±7 percent Above 9 mm ±5 percent",
      "Workmanship And Finish": "The faces of plywood panels shall be smooth. 8. Tests 8.1 Moisture Content – Shall not be less than 5 percent and not more than 15 percent. 8.2 Glue Shear Strength in Dry State— See Table 2 8.3 Resistance to Water —See Table 2 8.4 Resistance to Micro Organism — See Table 2 8.5 Preservation Retention — Shall not be less than 12 kg m3 for water soluble fixed type. 8.6 Tensile strength — See Table 3"
    },
    "content": "IS 10701: 1983 Structural Plywood\n1.\nScope – Requirements of plywood for structural purposes, such as stressed skin panels, plywood web\nbeams, sheathing, silos, rail and ship containers.\n2.\nMaterials\n2.1 Timber –The species of timber recommended for\nuse shall be from the species mentioned in Appendix A of the standard.\n2.2 Adhesive — Shall conform to BWP type specified\nin IS 848 : 1974*.\n3.\nPlywood – Shall conform to BMP grade in accordance with IS 303 : 1989 +.\n4.\nTreatment – Shall be given preservative treatment with fixed type of preservatives as per IS 5539 :1969 ++.\n5.\nQuality Requirements — See Table 1.\n6.\nDimensions and Tolerances\n6.1. Size – Structural plywood panels shall be of the sizes given below: 240 × 120 cm; 210 × 120 cm;180 × 120 cm; 240 × 90 cm; 210 × 90 cm;180 × 90 cm;\nTABLE 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ON VENEERS USED IN MANUFACTURE OF PLYWOOD FOR\nSTRUCTURAL PURPOSES\nRequirements\nSl. No.\nDefects\nFace\nCore i )\nBlister\nNil\nNil ii)\nChecks\nNil\nNo restriction iii)\nDiscolouration\n3 percent of the area if it will\n6 percent of the area if it not impair the board properties.\nwill not impair the board properties. iv)\nDote\nNil\n5 cm/m2 v)\nInsect holes\nNil\nNo restriction vi)\nKnots (dead)\nNil\n2 up to 12mm dia/m2\nPin knots (dead)\nNil\n2/m2\nPin knots (live)\nPermitted provided they do not mar\nNo restriction the appearance\nKnots (tight)\n3 up to 25 mm dia/m2\n6 up to 25 mm dia/ m2 vii)\nSplit on each panel One split not more than\n2 splits not more than\n0.8 mm wide and length\n6 mm wide and length\n50mm provided it is filled\n200 mm provided it is with suitable filler.\nfilled with suitable filler. viii)\nSwirl\nUp to 4/m2 provided\nNo restriction.\nthey do not mar the appearance. {\n6.2. Thickness –Thickness of plywood panels shall be as given below –\nNo. of Plies\nThickness m m\n3\n4\n5\n6\n9\n7\n12\n16\n9\n16\n19\n11\n19\n25\n{\n{\n{ + Plywood for general purposes(third revision)\n++ Preservative treated plywood. * Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood (phenolic and aminoplastic) (first revision) }\nTABLE 2 MINIMUM AVERAGE FAILING LOAD AND WOOD FAILURE REQUIREMENTS\nOF PLYWOOD FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES\nDry State Resistance to Water Resistance to Micro Organism Average Average Average Average Average Average Failing Wood Failing Wood Failing Wood Load, N Failure Load, N\nFailure Load, N Failure Percent Percent Percent 1324 and above No restriciion 981and above No restriction 981 and above No restriction 1226-1323 60 883- 980 60 883- 980 60 1079-1225 80 785- 882 80 785- 882 80 <1079 Panel to be <785 Panel to be <785 Panel to be considered\nconsidered considered as failed as failed as failed irrespective\nirrespective irrespective of percentage of percentage of percentage\nTABLE 3 MINIMUM STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS OF PLYWOOD FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES Sl. No. Property Strength Requirement N/mm2 i)\nUltimate tensile strength\n:\nAlong the grain 54\nAcross the grain 34 ii)\nCompressive strength\n:\nAlong the grain 34\nAcross the grain 29 iii)\nModulus of rupture\n:\nAlong the grain 49\nAcross the grain 29 iv)\nModulus of elasticity\n:\nAlong the grain 7 355\nAcross the grain 3 923 v)\nPanel shear strength\n: 125 vi)\nModulus of rigidity\n: 588 vii)\nRolling shear strength\n: 3\nNote – For methods of tests refer to various parts of IS 1734. Methods of tests for plywood and all parts of IS 2753 :1991. Methods\nfor estimation of preservatives in treated timber and in treating solutions (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 10701:1983 specification for Structural plywood.\n6.3. Tolerance –The tolerances on the nominal sizes of finished panels shall be as given below:\nLength\n± 6 mm\n– 0 mm\nWidth\n± 3 mm\n– 0 mm\nThickness up to and excluding\n±10 percent\n6mm\n6 to 9 mm\n±7 percent\nAbove 9 mm\n±5 percent\n7.\nWorkmanship and Finish —The faces of plywood panels shall be smooth.\n8.\nTests\n8.1 Moisture Content – Shall not be less than 5 percent\nand not more than 15 percent.\n8.2 Glue Shear Strength in Dry State— See Table 2\n8.3 Resistance to Water —See Table 2\n8.4 Resistance to Micro Organism — See Table 2\n8.5 Preservation Retention — Shall not be less than 12\nkg m3 for water soluble fixed type.\n8.6 Tensile strength — See Table 3"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13957: 1994",
    "title": "Metal Faced Plywood",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Covers manufacture and requirements of metal faced plywood composite. The scope is limited to the use of galvanized iron sheet or aluminium sheet only, as metal sheet.",
    "keywords": [
      "plywood",
      "ply",
      "faced",
      "metal",
      "sheet",
      "phenol",
      "formaldehyde"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers manufacture and requirements of metal faced plywood composite. The scope is limited to the use of galvanized iron sheet or aluminium sheet only, as metal sheet. 2. Materials 2.1 Plywood — Shall be BWR grade conforming to IS 303 : 1989*. 2.2 Galvanised Iron Sheets— Shall conform to IS 277 : 1992++. 2.3 Aluminium Sheet — Shall conform to IS 737 : 1986 @. 2.4 Adhesive 2.4.1 Phenol formaldehyde (PF) resin — Phenol formaldehyde resol resin shall be used for bonding galvanized sheet or aluminium sheet with plywood. 2.4.2 Polyvinyl acetal resin ? Polyvinyl formal or polyvinyl butyral resin shall be used in combination with phenol formaldehyde resol resin.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "The dimensions of metal faced plywood boards shall be as given for plywood in IS 12049 :1987§. Thickness of metal faced plywood boards shall be as given in Table 1. TABLE 1 THICKNESS OF METAL FACED PLYWOOD Board Thickness mm (1) (2) 3 ply 3, 4, 5 ,6 5 Ply 5, 6, 8, 9 7 Ply 9,12,15, 16 9 Ply 12.15.16.19 11 Ply 19,22,25 Above 11 Ply As ordered 3.1 Tolerances – The tolerances on the nominal sizes of finished boards shall be as specified in IS 12049:1987.",
      "Workmanship And Finish": "The metal faced plywood boards shall be of uniform thickness within the tolerance limits specified. 5. Tests 5.1 Bond Quality Test – A specimen shall be considered to have passed the test if : a) No visible delamination has occured in the glue lines of plywood and if no visible delamination has occured between the plywood faces and the metal sheet, and b) On forcible seperation using a suitable lever, wood fibres are found adhered to the metal sheet uniformly over the entire surface. 5.2 Optional Tests : a) Modulus of elasticity b) Modulus of rupture c) Core shear stress d) Facing stress Note—For method of tests refer to the standard. For detailed Information, refer to IS 13957 : 1994.Specification for metal faced plywood. ++ Galvanized steelsheet (plain and corrugated) (fifth revision). *"
    },
    "content": "IS 13957: 1994 Metal Faced Plywood\n1.\nScope – Covers manufacture and requirements of metal faced plywood composite. The scope is limited to\nthe use of galvanized iron sheet or aluminium sheet only, as metal sheet.\n2.\nMaterials\n2.1 Plywood — Shall be BWR grade conforming\nto IS 303 : 1989*.\n2.2 Galvanised Iron Sheets— Shall conform to IS 277\n: 1992++.\n2.3 Aluminium Sheet — Shall conform to IS 737 : 1986 @.\n2.4 Adhesive 2.4.1 Phenol formaldehyde (PF) resin — Phenol formaldehyde resol resin shall be used for bonding\ngalvanized sheet or aluminium sheet with plywood. 2.4.2 Polyvinyl acetal resin ? Polyvinyl formal or polyvinyl butyral resin shall be used in combination\nwith phenol formaldehyde resol resin.\n3.\nDimensions and Tolerances—The dimensions of metal faced plywood boards shall be as given for\nplywood in IS 12049 :1987§.\nThickness of metal faced plywood boards shall be as given in Table 1.\nTABLE 1 THICKNESS OF METAL FACED\nPLYWOOD\nBoard\nThickness mm\n(1)\n(2)\n3 ply\n3, 4, 5 ,6\n5 Ply\n5, 6, 8, 9\n7 Ply\n9,12,15, 16\n9 Ply\n12.15.16.19\n11 Ply\n19,22,25\nAbove 11 Ply\nAs ordered\n3.1 Tolerances – The tolerances on the nominal sizes\nof finished boards shall be as specified in IS 12049:1987.\n4.\nWorkmanship and Finish—The metal faced plywood boards shall be of uniform thickness within\nthe tolerance limits specified.\n5.\nTests\n5.1 Bond Quality Test – A specimen shall be considered\nto have passed the test if :\na) No visible delamination has occured in the glue lines of plywood and if no visible\ndelamination has occured between the plywood faces and the metal sheet, and\nb) On forcible seperation using a suitable lever, wood fibres are found adhered to the metal\nsheet uniformly over the entire surface.\n5.2 Optional Tests :\na) Modulus of elasticity b) Modulus of rupture\nc) Core shear stress d) Facing stress Note—For method of tests refer to the standard.\nFor detailed Information, refer to IS 13957 : 1994.Specification for metal faced plywood.\n++ Galvanized steelsheet (plain and corrugated) (fifth revision).\n* Plywood for general purposes (third revision).\n@ Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloysheetand strip for general engineering purposes (third revision)\n§ Dimensions and tolerances relating to wood based panel materials. 4.\nRequirements\nThickness\nBending\nWater Absorption\nStrength after 24th immersion\n(Modulus of\nPercent\nRupture\nAverage) mm Mpa Max a) Medium\nhardboard all thicknesses 6 40 b) Standard hardboard 3 30 40 4 5 6 30 30 9 c) Tempered hardboard all thickness 50 20 5. Workability and Finish\na) Hardboards shall not crack, split or chip when drilled ,sawed or nailed perpendicular to the\nsurface.\nb) Shall be free from warp."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1658: 1977",
    "title": "Fibre Hard Boards",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Requirements of fibre hardboards for general purposes. This standard does not cover requirements of insulation boards, wood particle boards (chip boards), and similar boards.",
    "keywords": [
      "hardboard",
      "boards",
      "hardboards",
      "tempered",
      "density",
      "modify",
      "fibre"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of fibre hardboards for general purposes. This standard does not cover requirements of insulation boards, wood particle boards (chip boards), and similar boards.",
      "Types": "Classified according to their method of manufacture, density, mechanical and physical properties: a) Medium hardboard – Density between 0.35 g/cm3 and 0.8 g/cm3 b) Standard hardboard – Density more than 0.80 g/cm3 c) Tempered hardboard–Hardboard further treated during manufacture to modify their properties.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "a) Thickness (mm) i) Medium hard board 6 8 10 12 Tolerance(mm) ± 0.5 ±0.7 ±0.7 ±0.9 ii) Standard hardboard iii) Tempered 3 4 5 6 9 hardboard Tolerance ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.4 ±0.5 ±0.7 (mm) b) Width 1.2 m; tolerance ±0.3 mm c) Length – 1.2, 1.8, 2.4, 3.0, 3.6, 4.8 and 5.5m; tolerance ± 0.5 mm d) Boards shall be rectangular and shall have square edges. Difference between lengths of two diagonals shall exceed ±3 mm per metre length of diagonal Note — For method of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 1658 : 1977 Specification for fibre hardboards (second revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 1658: 1977 Fibre Hard Boards\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements of fibre hardboards for general purposes. This standard does not cover\nrequirements of insulation boards, wood particle boards\n(chip boards), and similar boards.\n2.\nTypes – Classified according to their method of manufacture, density, mechanical and physical\nproperties:\na) Medium hardboard – Density between 0.35 g/cm3 and 0.8 g/cm3\nb) Standard hardboard – Density more than\n0.80 g/cm3 c) Tempered hardboard–Hardboard further\ntreated during manufacture to modify their properties.\n3.\nDimensions and Tolerances—\na) Thickness (mm)\ni) Medium hard board\n6\n8\n10\n12\nTolerance(mm)\n± 0.5\n±0.7 ±0.7 ±0.9 ii) Standard\nhardboard iii) Tempered\n3\n4\n5\n6\n9 hardboard\nTolerance\n±0.4\n±0.4\n±0.4 ±0.5 ±0.7\n(mm)\nb) Width 1.2 m; tolerance ±0.3 mm c) Length – 1.2, 1.8, 2.4, 3.0, 3.6, 4.8 and 5.5m;\ntolerance ± 0.5 mm d) Boards shall be rectangular and shall have\nsquare edges. Difference between lengths of two diagonals shall exceed ±3 mm per metre\nlength of diagonal\nNote — For method of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1658 : 1977 Specification for fibre hardboards (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1659: 2004",
    "title": "Block Boards",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Essential requirements of commercial and decorative blockboards meant for interior and exterior uses.",
    "keywords": [
      "block",
      "bwp",
      "decorative",
      "boards",
      "grade",
      "annex",
      "modulus"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Essential requirements of commercial and decorative blockboards meant for interior and exterior uses. 2. Grades and Types 2.1 Block boards shall be of the following two grades: a) BWP Grade– Such block board may be used for bus bodies, railway coaches, prefabricated houses, etc, where it is likely to be exposed to high humidity and for external use. b) MR Grade – Such block board may be used for interior use such as furniture, partition, panelling, ceiling, etc. 2.2 Each of the grades specified in 4.1 shall be of the following two types. a) Decorative Type– These are block boards with decorative face veneers on one or both sides for use in high class furniture, panelling, interior decoration, partitions, etc. b) Commercial Tyep – These are block boards with veneers of commerical timber on "
    },
    "content": "IS 1659: 2004 Block Boards\n(Fourth Revision)\n1.\nScope – Essential requirements of commercial and decorative blockboards meant for interior and exterior\nuses.\n2.\nGrades and Types\n2.1 Block boards shall be of the following two grades:\na) BWP Grade– Such block board may be used for bus bodies, railway coaches, prefabricated\nhouses, etc, where it is likely to be exposed to high humidity and for external use.\nb) MR Grade – Such block board may be used for interior use such as furniture, partition,\npanelling, ceiling, etc.\n2.2 Each of the grades specified in 4.1 shall be of the\nfollowing two types.\na) Decorative Type– These are block boards with decorative face veneers on one or both\nsides for use in high class furniture, panelling, interior decoration, partitions, etc.\nb) Commercial Tyep – These are block boards with veneers of commerical timber on both\nsides and are used for ordinary furniture, table tops, partitions and panelling to be painted\nover flooring and seats of bus bodies, railway carriages, etc.\n2.3 The grades and types of block boards shall be\nrepresented by the symbols given below:\nGrade and Type Symbol\nBWP Grade, Decorative type BWP-DEC\nBWP Grade, Commercial type BWP - COM\nMR Grade, Decorative type MR - DEC\nMR Grade, Commercial type\nMR - COM 3. Materials\n3.1 Timber 3.1.1 Any suitable species of timber may be used for blockboard manufacture. A list of species for\nmanufacture of blockboard is given in Annex B of the\nStandard for guidance. 3.1.2 Face Veneers for Decorative Type of\nBlockboards – The species of timber for the decorative face veneer in decorative type of block baord shall be\nspecified by the purchaser while placing the order. The species of timber commonly used for face veneers of\ndecorative type of block boards is given in Annex C of the standard for guidance only.\n3.2 Adhesives – The adhesives used for bonding\npurposes shall be the BWP type conforming to IS 848 for BWP Grade block boards. For MR Grade block board,\nthe adhesives shall be MR type conforming to IS 848.\n4.\nDimensions and Tolerance\n4.1 Thickness –The thickness of blockboards shall be\n12, 15, 19, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45 or 50mm.\n4.2 Sizes & Tolerances – Shall be as per 7.2 and 7.3 of\nthe standard. 5. Tests\n5.1 Dimensional Changes Caused by Humidity – when\ntested according to Annex E the dimensions shall not change by more than ± 1mm at relative humidities of 90\npercent and 40 percent compared to the dimensions of the specimens conditioned at 65 percent relative\nhumidity. There shall be no delamination at the extreme ranges of humidity and the changes in local planeness\nmeasured as d/L shall be as follows:\nd/L < 1/150 where\nd= Vertical gap between any two points, and\nL= horizontal distance between these points.\n5.2 Resistance to Water When tested according to the methods specified in\n9.2.2.1 and 9.2.2.2 of the standard the block boards shall satisfy the requirements given therein.\n5.3 Adhesion of Plies\nThe adhesion of plies shall be tested as in Annex G of the standard and the fractured surface of the specimen\nshall show adherent fibres of a ‘pass standard’. 5.4 Mycological Test\nMR Grade block board specimens, when tested according to Annex H of the standard shall show no\nvisible signs of separation at the edges.\n5.5 Modulus of Rupture and Modulus of Elasticity\nThe modulus of rupture and modulus of elasticity when tested according to the method given in Annex J of the\nstandard, BWP Grade and MR Grade boards shall have average and minimum individual values as given below:\nBWP\nMR\nGrade\nGrade\nModulus of rupture, N/mm2:\nAverage\n50\n40\nMinimum, individual\n42\n34\nModulus of elasticity,N/mm2:\nAverage\n5 000\n4 000\nMinimum individual\n4 200\n3 400\nNote — For test prosedures see Appendices D to K of the standard and IS 1734 (Part 11): 1983 Methods of test for plywood,\nPart 11 Determination of static bending strength (second revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1659 : 2004 Specification for Blockboard (fourth revision).\n5.6 Spot Test\nThe preservative treatment when tested according to the method given in Annex K, at any given place after\ncutting across entire cross-sectional area for the width of block board shall show through and through\npenetration of preservative chemical. + Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood(phenolic and aminoplastic (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3087: 1985",
    "title": "Wood Particle Boards (Medium Density) For General Purposes",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Requirements of medium density wood particle boards for general purposes, having specific grativity in the range 0.5 to 0.9. This standard does not cover veneered particle boards, moulded particle boards, high and low density particle boards or particle boards faced by impregnated paper surfaces.",
    "keywords": [
      "boards",
      "particle",
      "soaking",
      "swelling",
      "pressed",
      "perpendicular",
      "adhesive"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of medium density wood particle boards for general purposes, having specific grativity in the range 0.5 to 0.9. This standard does not cover veneered particle boards, moulded particle boards, high and low density particle boards or particle boards faced by impregnated paper surfaces. 2. Classes and Grades 2.1 The particle boards shall be of the following classes : Class Grade Designation Flat pressed, single layers — FPS Flat pressed, three layer, 1 FPT-1 multilayer and graded II FPT-2 Extrusion pressed solid — XPS Extrusion pressed,tubular — XPT 3. Materials 3.1 Any species of wood or any other ligno-cellulosic material may be used in the manufacture of particle board. 3.2 Adhesive —Any suitable type of synthetic resin conforming to IS 848:1974* may be used . However, for fla",
      "Mechanical Properties": "See Table 1 TABLE 1 PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF VARIOUS TYPES OF PARTICLES BOARDS S.l. Properties Flat Presses Flat Presses Extrusion Extrusion No. Single Layer Three Layers Pressed Pressed multi Layers Solid Tubular & Graded (XPS) (XPT) Grade1 Grade 2 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 1.1 Density variation ±10 ±10 ±10 ±10 ±10 1.2 Water absorption percent, 2 h soaking 25 10 40 40 40 24 h soaking 50 20 80 80 80 1.3 a) Linear expansion (Swelling in water) percent 2 h soaking i) Length 0.5 0.5 0.5 2 2 ii) Width 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 b) Thickness swelling percent 2 h soaking 10 8 12 5 5 1.4 Swelling due to surfce absorption percent, 9 6 9 4 4 1.5 Modulus of rupture, N/mm2 up to 20 mm thickness 11 15.0 11 2 1 above 20 mm thickness 11 12.5 11 2 1 1.6 Tensile strength perpendicular to surface,N/mm2",
      "Preservative Treatment": "A suitable preservative may be added to the particle mix at the time of rinsing of the adhesive. The following percentages of preservatives are regarded as suitable : a) Sodium pentachlorophenate – 1 percent on the basis of oven dry weight of particles,or b) Trichlorophenol – 5percent on the basis of resin adhesive mix. Note — For methods of tests, refer to various parts of IS 2380 : 1977 Methods of tests for wood particle boards and boards from other lignocellulosic materials.(first revision) For detailed Information, refer to IS 3087 : 1985 Specification for wood particle boards (medium density) for general purposes (first revision). b) Veneers for cross-band and faces shall be either sawn or rotary cut or sliced and shall be smooth c) Adhesive used for bonding veneers shall be BWP or BW",
      "Finish": "All boards shall be flat and squarely cut. Both faces shall be sanded to a smooth even surface.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances A) Length": "480, 365, 300, 270, 240, 210, 180, 150, 120, 100 and 90 cm. Tolerance ± 5 mm up to 150cm and ± 10 mm above 150 cm. b) Width — 180, 150, 120, 100, 90 and 45 cm. Tolerance same as for length. c) Thickness — 6, 10, 12, 20, 25, 30, 40, 45 and 50 mm Tolerance ± 1 mm. d) Length of two diagonals shall not differ by more than 2.5 mm. e) Edges shall be straight with a maximum deviation of 3 mm. Note – Other thickness or sizes may be manufactured on special demand as specified by the manufacturer. 6. Tests 6.1 Density —Density of each specimen shall not vary from mean density by more than ± 10 percent. 6.2 Moisture Content — Average value shall be between 7 to 16 percent. 6.3 Water Absorption — Value shall not exceed 25 percent for 2 h soaking and 50 percent for 20 h soaking. 6.4 Water Resistance Te"
    },
    "content": "IS 3087: 1985 Wood Particle Boards (Medium Density) For General Purposes\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope– Requirements of medium density wood particle boards for general purposes, having specific\ngrativity in the range 0.5 to 0.9. This standard does not cover veneered particle boards, moulded particle\nboards, high and low density particle boards or particle boards faced by impregnated paper surfaces.\n2.\nClasses and Grades\n2.1 The particle boards shall be of the following\nclasses :\nClass\nGrade Designation\nFlat pressed, single layers\n—\nFPS\nFlat pressed, three layer,\n1 FPT-1\nmultilayer and graded\nII\nFPT-2\nExtrusion pressed solid\n—\nXPS\nExtrusion pressed,tubular\n—\nXPT\n3.\nMaterials\n3.1 Any species of wood or any other ligno-cellulosic\nmaterial may be used in the manufacture of particle board.\n3.2 Adhesive —Any suitable type of synthetic resin\nconforming to IS 848:1974* may be used . However, for flat-pressed three layer, multilayer and graded boards\nof Grade I, BWR or BWP type adhesive should be used.\n3.3 Sizing Material – Paraffin wax dissolved in mineral\nspirit or alternatively emulsified with water or melted shall be used as sizing material.\n4.\nDimensions and tolerances\n4.1 The sizes of wood particle boards in mm shall be as\nfollows :\nLength –\n4850\n(4800) ,\n3650\n3600) ,\n3000 ,\n2750\n(2700),\n2400 ,\n2100 ,\n1800 ,\n1500 ,\n1200 ,\n1000 and\n900\nWidth –\n1850,\n1800,\n1500 ,\n1200 ,\n1000,\n900 , 600 , and\n450\nNote— Values which are underlined are multiples of the300\nmm module for building boards.\n4.2 Thickness — The thickness of particle boards shall\nbe as given below—6, 9, 12,15, 18, 19, 22, 25, 27, 30, 35 and 40 mm\n4.3 Dimensional Tolerance Dimensions\nTolerance a) Length\n:\nfor all lengths\n± 8 mm b) Width\n:\nfor all width ± 8 mm c) thickness\n:\nAbove 25 mm\n± 2.5 per.\nup to and\n± 5 per.\nincluding 25 mm\nThe lengths of two diagonals of a rectangular panel shall not differ by more than 2.5 mm. The edge of the\nboard shall be straight with a tolerance of 3 mm.\n* Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood(Phenolic and aminoplastic) (first revision) 5.\nPhysical, Mechanical Properties — See Table 1\nTABLE 1 PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF VARIOUS TYPES OF PARTICLES\nBOARDS S.l.\nProperties Flat Presses\nFlat Presses Extrusion Extrusion No. Single Layer\nThree Layers Pressed Pressed multi Layers\nSolid Tubular\n& Graded (XPS) (XPT) Grade1 Grade 2 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 1.1\nDensity variation\n±10\n±10\n±10\n±10\n±10 1.2\nWater absorption percent,\n2 h soaking\n25\n10\n40\n40\n40\n24 h soaking\n50\n20\n80\n80\n80 1.3 a) Linear expansion\n(Swelling in water)\npercent 2 h soaking i) Length\n0.5\n0.5\n0.5\n2\n2 ii) Width\n0.5\n0.5\n0.5\n0.5\n0.5 b) Thickness swelling percent 2 h soaking\n10\n8\n12\n5\n5 1.4\nSwelling due to surfce absorption\npercent,\n9\n6\n9\n4\n4 1.5\nModulus of rupture,\nN/mm2 up to 20 mm thickness\n11\n15.0\n11\n2\n1 above 20 mm thickness\n11\n12.5\n11\n2\n1 1.6\nTensile strength perpendicular to\nsurface,N/mm2 up to 20 mm thickness\n0.8\n0.45\n0.3\n1.2\n0.4 above 20 mm thickness\n0.8\n0.40\n0.3\n1.2\n0.4 1.7\nTensile Strength perpendicular to\nsurface N/mm2\n*a) After cycle test\n--\n0.2\n--\n--\n--\n†b) Accelerated water\n--\n0.15\n--\n--\n-resistance test 1.8\nScrew withdrawal strength, N\nFace\n1250\n1250\n1250\n--\n--\nEdge\n850\n850\n700\n--\n--\n* Cyclic test: specimens are immeresed in water at 27± 2ºCfor a period of 72 h, followed by drying in air at 27± 2ºC for 24h and then heating dry air at 70ºC for 72h. Three such cycles are to be followed, and then the specimens are tested for tensile strength\nperpendicular to surface.\n† Accelerated water resistance test- Specimens are immersed in water at 27± 2ºC and water is brought to boiling and kept at boiling temperature for 2 h. Specimens are then cooled in water to 27 ±2ºC and then tested for tensile strength perpendicular to surface. 6.\nPhysical Characteristics\n6.1 Density – Between 500 and 900 kg\n6.2 Moisture Content – Between 5 and 15 percent.\n6.3 See Table 1 for other tests.\n6.4 Workability – The particle boards shall not crack\nor split when drilled, sawed and nailed perpendicular to the surface.\n7.\nPreservative Treatment – A suitable preservative may be added to the particle mix at the time of rinsing of\nthe adhesive. The following percentages of preservatives are regarded as suitable :\na) Sodium pentachlorophenate – 1 percent on the basis of oven dry weight of particles,or\nb) Trichlorophenol – 5percent on the basis of resin adhesive mix.\nNote — For methods of tests, refer to various parts of IS 2380 : 1977 Methods of tests for wood particle boards and boards from other\nlignocellulosic materials.(first revision)\nFor detailed Information, refer to IS 3087 : 1985 Specification for wood particle boards (medium density) for general purposes (first revision). b) Veneers for cross-band and faces shall be either sawn or rotary cut or sliced and shall be smooth\nc) Adhesive used for bonding veneers shall be\nBWP or BWR for Grade I boards and MR for\nGrade II boards.\n4.\nFinish – All boards shall be flat and squarely cut.\nBoth faces shall be sanded to a smooth even surface.\n5.\nDimensions and Tolerances a) Length — 480, 365, 300, 270, 240, 210, 180,\n150, 120, 100 and 90 cm.\nTolerance ± 5 mm up to 150cm and ± 10 mm above 150 cm.\nb) Width — 180, 150, 120, 100, 90 and 45 cm.\nTolerance same as for length.\nc) Thickness — 6, 10, 12, 20, 25, 30, 40, 45 and 50 mm Tolerance ± 1 mm.\nd) Length of two diagonals shall not differ by more than 2.5 mm.\ne) Edges shall be straight with a maximum deviation of 3 mm.\nNote – Other thickness or sizes may be manufactured on\nspecial demand as specified by the manufacturer.\n6.\nTests\n6.1 Density —Density of each specimen shall not vary\nfrom mean density by more than ± 10 percent.\n6.2 Moisture Content — Average value shall be\nbetween 7 to 16 percent.\n6.3 Water Absorption — Value shall not exceed 25\npercent for 2 h soaking and 50 percent for 20 h soaking.\n6.4 Water Resistance Test — Boards shall not show\nsigns of disintegration and /or shall not delaminate.\n6.5 Swelling in Water —Swelling in thickness in\npercentage of original thickness shall not be more than\n7 percent due to general absorption and this shall be not be more than 5 percent in case of swelling due to"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3097: 1980",
    "title": "Veneered Particle Boards",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Requirements, such as, grades and types, material, manufacture, dimensions and tests for veneered particle boards.",
    "keywords": [
      "core",
      "tubular",
      "boards",
      "decorative",
      "purpose",
      "solid",
      "grade"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements, such as, grades and types, material, manufacture, dimensions and tests for veneered particle boards.",
      "Grades": "Shall be of two grades, namely, Grade I and Grade II 2.1 Each grade of veneered particle board shall be of the following four types : a) Type 1 — Solid core, general purpose (boards with faces of veneer of general purpose type). b) Type 2 — Solid core, decorative (boards with solid core but faced with ornamental veneers on one or both sides). c) Type 3 —Tubular core, general purpose boards with tubular core and faced with veneer of general purpose type). d) Type 4 — Tubular core, decorative (boards with tubular core faced with decorative veneers on one or both sides). 2.2 Designation —The grades and types shall be designated as follows : Sl .Grade Type Designation No. 1. Grade I Solid core, general purpose SO GP - I 2. Grade l Solid core, decorative SO D - I 3. Grade I Tubular core, genera"
    },
    "content": "IS 3097: 1980 Veneered Particle Boards\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements, such as, grades and types, material, manufacture, dimensions and tests for\nveneered particle boards.\n2.\nGrades and Types – Shall be of two grades, namely,\nGrade I and Grade II\n2.1 Each grade of veneered particle board shall be of\nthe following four types :\na) Type 1 — Solid core, general purpose (boards with faces of veneer of general purpose type).\nb) Type 2 — Solid core, decorative (boards with solid core but faced with ornamental veneers\non one or both sides).\nc) Type 3 —Tubular core, general purpose boards with tubular core and faced with\nveneer of general purpose type).\nd) Type 4 — Tubular core, decorative (boards with tubular core faced with decorative\nveneers on one or both sides).\n2.2 Designation —The grades and types shall be\ndesignated as follows :\nSl .Grade\nType\nDesignation\nNo.\n1. Grade I\nSolid core, general purpose\nSO GP - I\n2. Grade l\nSolid core, decorative SO D - I\n3. Grade I\nTubular core, general purpose TU GP - I\n4. Grade I\nTubular core, decorative TU D - I\n5. Grade II\nSolid core, general purpose SO GP- II\n6. Grade II\nSolid core, decorative SO D - II\n7. Grade II\nTubular core, general purpose TU GP - II\n8. Grade II\nTubular core, decorative TU D - II\n3.\nMaterial a)\nParticle boards shall be of medium density. surface absorption.\n6.6 Adhesion of Plies – Adhesion of face veneers to\nthe board core shall offer appreciable resistance and the exposed surface of veneer shall show sizes of some\nadherent fibres distributed more or less uniformly.\n6.7 Static Bending Strength – (Maximum Transverse\nStrength or Modulus of Rupture in Bending) - Average value of modulus of rupture shall not be less than 300\nkg/cm2.\n6.8 Deflection Under Sustained Load (Long Time\nLoading Test) — The deflection under load and residual deflection after removal of load shall be as agreed to\nmutually.\nNote—For test procedure, refer to the standard and various parts of IS 2380 : 1977 Method of test for wood particle boards and\nboards from other lignocellulosic materials (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3097 : 1980 Specification for veneered particle boards (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3129: 1985",
    "title": "Low Density Particle Boards",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Essential requirments of low density particle boards having specific grativity not exceeding 0.4",
    "keywords": [
      "boards",
      "particle",
      "slabs",
      "mix",
      "retardant",
      "fire",
      "density"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding dimensions, weight and strength for wood wool building slabs. 2. Types a) Type 1– Light weight slabs, intended for non- load bearing partitions, ceilings, wall linings, permanent shuttering and roof insulation. b) Type 2– Heavy duty slabs, intended for load bearing situations and for use in roof construction.",
      "Thickness": "The thickness of insulation particle boards in mm shall be 50, 45, 40, 30, 27, 25, 22, 19, 16 and 12. 3.3. Tolerances: Dimension Nominal Size Tolerance Length for all lengths ± 8 mm Width for all width ± 8 mm Thickness above 25 mm ± 1 mm up to and including 25 mm ± 0.8 mm",
      "Preservative Treatment": "A suitable preservative may be added to the particle mix at the time of rinsing of adhesive. a) Sodium pentachlorophenate— 1 percent on the basis of oven dry weight of particles or b) Trichlorophenol – 5 percent on the basis of resin adhesive mix. 4.1Sizing Material – A suitable sizing material like paraffin wax or wax emulsion withnot exceeding1.5 percent of the oven dry weight of the particles. Suitable fire retardant chemicals like mono or diammonium phosphate, tri-sodium phosphate, borax or boric acid shall be added to the particle mix at the manufacturing stage or alternatively the board shall be coated or painted on their surface and edges with fire retardant formulations or both the treatment given at their respective stages so that the board meets the requirements given in Table 1.",
      "Finish": "The surface of the boards may be plain, embossed with design or perforated. It may be treated or coated with fire-retardant composition and should be able to take a coat of oil distemper or plastic emulsion paint. 6. Physical Properties 6.1Water Absorption — There shall be no splitting of edges and no signs of disintegration of board when tested as per standard. 6.2See Table 1– for other tests. * Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood(phenolic and aminoplastic) (first revision.) TABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF LOW DENSITY PARTICLES BOARDS Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum Maximum Minimum Sound Minimum Density Variation Moisture Modulus Swelling Thermal Absorption† Fire Resistance kg/m3 In Density Content Of Rupture Due to Conductivity Surface Frequency Absorption Ignitability Surface",
      "Form And Texture": "Slabs shall be uniform thickness with rectangular parallel faces and shall have clean reasonable square edges and shall be of uniform texture. 4. Dimensions, Weights and Tolerances Length Width Type Thickness Weight of the slab, max mm mm mm kg 2000 500 1 12 5 20 8 25 11 40 12.5 50 16 75 22 100 27.5 2000 500 2 40 25.0 50 30.0 75 40.0 1220 610 1 12 3.5 20 6 25 8 40 9.5 50 12 75 16 100 20 1220 610 2 40 18.5 50 22 75 30 4.1 Tolerances In length : ± 6 mm In width : ± 4 mm and In thickness. : ± 2 mm Deviation from rectangular shape not more, than 5 mm 5. Requirements 5.1 Deflection Under Test Load— shall not exceed the following— Type Size Thick- Test Test Deflection ness Load Span (Max) mm × mm mm kg mm mm 1 2000×500 25 100 45 6 1220×610 25 165 27.5 6 2000×500 40 90 75 6 1220×610 50 90 75 6 75"
    },
    "content": "IS 3129: 1985 Low Density Particle Boards\n(First Revision) 1.\nScope – Essential requirments of low density particle boards having specific grativity not exceeding 0.4\n2.\nMaterial\n2.1 Timber and Other Ligno-Cellulosic Material —\nTimber and other ligno-cellulosic matrerial like bagasse, solapith, jute sticks, rice husk, pea-nut shells, etc, may\nbe used for the manufacture of these boards. These shall be light weight materials of bulk density preferably\nnot exceeding 400 kg/m3 and shall be free from exttraneous matter and dust.\n2.2 Adhesive— Shall be BWR or BWP type conforming\nto IS 848 : 1974*. and shall be either a phenolformaldehyde or urea-formaldehyde type fortified with\nmelamine.\n3.\nDimensions and Tolerances\n3.1 The sizes of insulation particle boards shall be as\ngiven below :\nLength in mm :\n3650,3000,2700,2400,\n2100,1800, 1500, 1200, 1000,\n900, 600, 450, and 300\nWidth in mm :\n1800,1500, 1200, 1000, 900,\n600, 450 and 300\n3.2. Thickness—The thickness of insulation particle boards in mm shall be 50, 45, 40, 30, 27, 25, 22, 19, 16 and 12.\n3.3.\nTolerances:\nDimension\nNominal Size\nTolerance\nLength for all lengths\n± 8 mm\nWidth for all width\n± 8 mm\nThickness above 25 mm\n± 1 mm up to and\nincluding 25 mm\n± 0.8 mm\n4.\nPreservativeTreatment—A suitable preservative may be added to the particle mix at the time of rinsing of adhesive.\na) Sodium pentachlorophenate— 1 percent on the basis of oven dry weight of particles or\nb) Trichlorophenol – 5 percent on the basis of resin adhesive mix.\n4.1Sizing Material – A suitable sizing material like paraffin wax or wax emulsion withnot exceeding1.5\npercent of the oven dry weight of the particles. Suitable fire retardant chemicals like mono or diammonium\nphosphate, tri-sodium phosphate, borax or boric acid shall be added to the particle mix at the manufacturing\nstage or alternatively the board shall be coated or painted on their surface and edges with fire retardant\nformulations or both the treatment given at their respective stages so that the board meets the\nrequirements given in Table 1.\n5. Finish – The surface of the boards may be plain,\nembossed with design or perforated. It may be treated or coated with fire-retardant composition and should\nbe able to take a coat of oil distemper or plastic emulsion paint.\n6. Physical Properties\n6.1Water Absorption — There shall be no splitting of edges and no signs of disintegration of board when\ntested as per standard.\n6.2See Table 1– for other tests.\n* Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood(phenolic and aminoplastic) (first revision.) TABLE 1 PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS OF LOW DENSITY PARTICLES BOARDS\nMaximum\nMaximum\nMaximum\nMaximum\nMaximum\nMaximum\nMinimum Sound\nMinimum\nDensity\nVariation\nMoisture\nModulus\nSwelling\nThermal\nAbsorption† Fire\nResistance kg/m3\nIn Density\nContent\nOf Rupture\nDue to\nConductivity Surface Frequency Absorption Ignitability Surface Absorption* coeffcient spread of flame\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\n(9)\n(10)\nPercent\nPercent\nN/mm2\nPercent kcal. cm/cm2 h0C Hz\n1250.05 Not\n250\n0.1\nNot easily lower\nIngnitable than\n400\n±10\n16\n1.5\n5\n5.6\n500\n0.2\n‘p’ class 2\n1000\n0.3\n2000\n0.5\n* On two hours immersion.\n† For boards of 12 mm thickness.\nNote —For test procedure, refer to the standard and various parts of IS 2380:1977. Method of test for wood particle boards and\nboards from other lignocellulosic materials (first revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3129 : 1985. Specification for low density particle boards (first revision)\n{\n{ 1.\nScope – Requirements regarding dimensions, weight and strength for wood wool building slabs.\n2.\nTypes a) Type 1– Light weight slabs, intended for non-\nload bearing partitions, ceilings, wall linings, permanent shuttering and roof insulation.\nb) Type 2– Heavy duty slabs, intended for load bearing situations and for use in roof\nconstruction.\n3.\nForm and Texture – Slabs shall be uniform thickness with rectangular parallel faces and shall\nhave clean reasonable square edges and shall be of uniform texture.\n4.\nDimensions, Weights and Tolerances\nLength\nWidth\nType\nThickness Weight of the slab, max\nmm mm mm kg\n2000\n500\n1\n12\n5\n20\n8\n25\n11\n40\n12.5\n50\n16\n75\n22\n100\n27.5 2000 500 2 40\n25.0\n50\n30.0\n75\n40.0\n1220\n610\n1\n12\n3.5\n20\n6\n25\n8\n40\n9.5\n50\n12\n75\n16\n100\n20\n1220\n610\n2\n40\n18.5\n50 22 75\n30 4.1 Tolerances\nIn length : ± 6 mm\nIn width : ± 4 mm and\nIn thickness. : ± 2 mm\nDeviation from rectangular shape not more, than 5 mm\n5.\nRequirements\n5.1 Deflection Under Test Load— shall not exceed the\nfollowing—\nType\nSize\nThick-\nTest\nTest\nDeflection ness\nLoad\nSpan (Max)\nmm × mm mm\nkg mm\nmm\n1\n2000×500\n25\n100\n45\n6\n1220×610\n25\n165\n27.5\n6\n2000×500\n40\n90\n75\n6\n1220×610\n50\n90\n75\n6\n75\n120\n75\n5\n100\n150\n75\n5\n2\n2000×500\n40 120\n75\n6\n1220×610\n50\n160\n75\n6\n75\n240\n75\n5\n5.2 Thermal Conductivity — Shall not exceed 0.08\nW/m oK\n5.3 Sound Absorption Frequency Minimun Sound Absorprion Hertz Cofficient for 25 mm Thickness with Rigid Backing\n125 0.1\n250 0.2\n500\n0.2\n1000\n0.3\n2000 0.5\n4000\n0.5"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3308: 1981",
    "title": "Wood Wool Building Slabs",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Requirements for insulating boards made of wood or sugarcane fibre. It also covers the following special types of fibre insulation boards Type of Board Nominal Tolerance on Thickness Thickness mm mm cm cm Fibre insulation 9 ± 0.75 365,300 180,150 board, ordinary or 12 ± 0.75 270,240 120,100 flame retardant type 18 ± 1.00 210,180 90,60 25 ± 1.25 150,120 45and Bitumen bonded fibre 9 ± 0.50 100, 90 30 Insulation board, 12 ± 0.50 60, 45 18 ± 0.75 and 30 25 ± 0.75 Tolerance on length ± 3 mm upto 120c",
    "keywords": [
      "board",
      "insulation",
      "fibre",
      "retardant",
      "flame",
      "bonded",
      "bitumen"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for insulating boards made of wood or sugarcane fibre. It also covers the following special types of fibre insulation boards Type of Board Nominal Tolerance on Thickness Thickness mm mm cm cm Fibre insulation 9 ± 0.75 365,300 180,150 board, ordinary or 12 ± 0.75 270,240 120,100 flame retardant type 18 ± 1.00 210,180 90,60 25 ± 1.25 150,120 45and Bitumen bonded fibre 9 ± 0.50 100, 90 30 Insulation board, 12 ± 0.50 60, 45 18 ± 0.75 and 30 25 ± 0.75 Tolerance on length ± 3 mm upto 120cm and and width ± 6 mm above120cm 3. Requirements 3.1 Density — Shall not exceed 0.4g/cm3 3.2 Transverse Strength Type of Board Thickness Mean Breaking Load Approximate Modulus of Rupture mm min, kg for Nominal Thickness,kg/cm2 Fibre insulation 9 7.2 20 board ordinary or flame 12 12.8 20 retardant t"
    },
    "content": "IS 3308: 1981 Wood Wool Building Slabs\n(First Revision)\nNote— For test procedures, refer to Appendix B of the standard, IS 3346 : 1980 Method for the determination of thermal\nconductivity of thermal insulation materials (Two slab, guarded hot-plate method) (first revision) and IS 8225 : 1987 Method of measurement of sound absorption in a reverberation room (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3308 : 1981 Specification for wood wool building slabs (first revision). 1.\nScope – Requirements for insulating boards made of wood or sugarcane fibre. It also covers the following\nspecial types of fibre insulation boards\nType of Board Nominal Tolerance on Thickness Thickness mm mm cm cm Fibre insulation 9 ± 0.75 365,300 180,150 board, ordinary or 12 ± 0.75 270,240 120,100 flame retardant type 18 ± 1.00 210,180 90,60 25 ± 1.25 150,120 45and Bitumen bonded fibre 9 ± 0.50 100, 90 30 Insulation board, 12 ± 0.50 60, 45 18 ± 0.75 and 30 25 ± 0.75 Tolerance on length ± 3 mm upto 120cm and and width ± 6 mm above120cm\n3.\nRequirements\n3.1 Density — Shall not exceed 0.4g/cm3\n3.2 Transverse Strength\nType of Board Thickness Mean Breaking Load Approximate Modulus of Rupture mm min, kg for Nominal Thickness,kg/cm2\nFibre insulation 9 7.2 20 board ordinary or flame 12\n12.8 20 retardant type 18\n23 16 25\n44 16\nBitumen Bonded fibre 9\n13 38 insulation board 12\n23 38 18\n45 32 25\n86 32"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3348: 1965",
    "title": "Fibre Insulation Board",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Requirements of high density wood particle boards in flat sheet or moulded forms.",
    "keywords": [
      "board",
      "flame",
      "retardant",
      "fibre",
      "resin",
      "grade",
      "absorption"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Special Requirement For Flame Retardant Boards": "Average maximum area of char, when tested for surface spread of flame, shall not exceed 75cm2. Note — For test procedures, refer to Appendices A to E of the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 3348 : 1965 Specification for fibre insulation boards. Type Grade Density Moisture Mimimum Minimum Water Resistance Content Modulus Tensile Absorption to Boiling of Strength After 24 h Water After Rupture Immersion 3h Immersion g/cm3 percent kg/cm2 kg/cm2 percent,max Type 1 Grade A 1.2 3 to 7 450 350 10 shall not show any sign of Grade B 0.9 Min 5 to 6 400 300 25 delamination Grade A 1.2 5 to10 300 225 15 Not specified Type 2 Grade B 0.9 Min 5 to16 250 200 25 Maximum Permissible – – – Variation in Individual Specimen from the Mean Max +10 Max+2 Percent Percent",
      "Scope": "Requirements of high density wood particle boards in flat sheet or moulded forms.",
      "Types": "(Depending on Synthetic Resin Used) and Grades ( depending on extent of resin content) Type1 — BWR type of resin—Grades A and B. Type2 — MR type of resin —Grades A and B. Each type and grade may be in flat sheet form or moulded form. 3. Materials 3.1 Timber — Any suitsable species. 3.2 Adhesive —As in 2. In grade A resin content is 20 to 50 percent and in gade B, 8 to 12 percent 3.3 Sizing — Paraffin wax up to 1 percent, Max.",
      "Dimension And Tolerances For Flat Sheet": "a) Length — 180, 150, 120, 100, 90, 60 and 45 cm b) Width— 150, 120, 100, 90, and 45 cm. c) Thickness — 50, 45, 40, 35, 30, 25, 22, 20, 16, 12, 9 m 6 and 4 mm. d) Tolerance— Length and width, ± 6 mm Thickness ±5 percent up to 25 mm., ±2.5 percent above 25 mm. Lenght of diagonals of a board shall not differ by more than 2.5 mm/m length of diagonal. Edge shall be straight with tolerance of 3 mm.",
      "Physical Requirements": "Shall be as specified in table given below:"
    },
    "content": "IS 3348: 1965 Fibre Insulation Board\n2.\nDimensions and Tolerances:\na) Bitumen – Bonded fibre insulating board,and b) Flame – Retardant treated fibre insulating board. Length Width\n3.3 Water Absorption\nType of Board Nominal Mean water Thickness Absorption mm at 27± 20C Max\nFibre insulation board 9 30 ordinary or flame 12 30\nretardant type 18 25 25 25\nBitumen- bonded 9 25 fibre insulation 12 25\nboard 18 20 25 20\n3.4 Thermal Conductivity – shall not exceed 5.6 K\ncal.cm /m2 h0c.. 3.5 Sound Absorption - Frequency, c/s 125, 250, 500,\n1000, 2000 Absorption Coefficient, Min 0.1, 0.1, 0.2,\n0.3, 0.5\n4.\nSpecial Requirement for Flame Retardant Boards–\nAverage maximum area of char, when tested for surface spread of flame, shall not exceed 75cm2. Note — For test procedures, refer to Appendices A to E of the standard\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3348 : 1965 Specification for fibre insulation boards. Type\nGrade Density Moisture Mimimum Minimum Water Resistance Content Modulus Tensile Absorption to Boiling of Strength After 24 h Water After Rupture Immersion 3h Immersion g/cm3 percent kg/cm2 kg/cm2 percent,max\nType 1\nGrade A\n1.2\n3 to 7\n450\n350\n10 shall not show\nany sign of\nGrade B\n0.9 Min\n5 to 6\n400\n300\n25 delamination\nGrade A\n1.2\n5 to10\n300\n225\n15\nNot specified\nType 2 Grade B\n0.9 Min\n5 to16\n250\n200\n25\nMaximum Permissible\n–\n–\n–\nVariation in Individual\nSpecimen from the Mean\nMax +10\nMax+2\nPercent\nPercent\n1.\nScope—Requirements of high density wood particle boards in flat sheet or moulded forms.\n2.\nTypes —(Depending on Synthetic Resin Used) and\nGrades ( depending on extent of resin content)\nType1 — BWR type of resin—Grades A and B.\nType2 — MR type of resin —Grades A and B.\nEach type and grade may be in flat sheet form or moulded form.\n3.\nMaterials\n3.1 Timber — Any suitsable species.\n3.2 Adhesive —As in 2. In grade A resin content is 20\nto 50 percent and in gade B, 8 to 12 percent\n3.3 Sizing — Paraffin wax up to 1 percent, Max.\n4.\nDimension and Tolerances for Flat Sheet—\na) Length — 180, 150, 120, 100, 90, 60 and 45 cm b)\nWidth— 150, 120, 100, 90, and 45 cm.\nc)\nThickness — 50, 45, 40, 35, 30, 25, 22, 20, 16,\n12, 9 m 6 and 4 mm.\nd)\nTolerance— Length and width, ± 6 mm\nThickness ±5 percent up to 25 mm., ±2.5 percent above\n25 mm. Lenght of diagonals of a board shall not differ by more than 2.5 mm/m length of diagonal. Edge shall\nbe straight with tolerance of 3 mm.\n5.\nPhysical Requirements — Shall be as specified in table given below:"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3478: 1966",
    "title": "High Density Wood Particle Boards",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Note —For test procedures, refer to various parts of IS 2380 : 1997 Methods of test for wood particle boards and boards from other lignocellulosic materials ( first revision ) and 9.3 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 3478 :1966 Specification for high density wood particle board",
    "keywords": [
      "particle",
      "boards",
      "wood",
      "lignocellulosic",
      "procedures",
      "board",
      "various"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 3478: 1966 High Density Wood Particle Boards\nNote —For test procedures, refer to various parts of IS 2380 : 1997 Methods of test for wood particle boards and boards from other lignocellulosic materials ( first revision ) and 9.3 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3478 :1966 Specification for high density wood particle board"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12406: 2003",
    "title": "Medium Density Fibre Boards For",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Requirements of medium density fibre boards for general purposes having density in the range of 600 – 900 kg/m3. This standard does not cover veneered or laminated or other specially treated boards, moulded boards, etc.",
    "keywords": [
      "plb",
      "boards",
      "individual",
      "density",
      "sbg",
      "soaking",
      "average"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirement of prelaminated particle boards for general purpose and also for special applications.",
      "Types": "Medium density fibreboards for general purpose shall be of one type only, that is flat pressed single layer. It may, however, be of two grades, designated as follows— Grade Designation Solid board Grade-1 SBF-I Solid board Grade-2 SBG-II 3. Materials 3.1 Wood —Any spicies of wood or any other lignocellulosic material may be used 3.2 Adhesive—Any suitable type of synthetic resin adhesive be used. For the purpose of bonding to comply with physical and mechanical requirements given in Table 1. 3.3 Sizing Material—Paraffin wax dissolved in mineral spirit, or alternatively emulsified with water, or melted shall be used as sizing material. + Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood (phenolic and aminoplastic) (first revision).",
      "Finish": "Medium density fibre board shall be flat and of uniform thickness and density throughout the length and width of the boards. Both surfaces of the boards shall be sanded to a smooth finish.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "The boards shall be rectangular and , unless otherwise specified, shall have square edges. The lengths of the two diagonals of the board shall not differ by more than ±3 mm per metre length of the diagonal. a) Thickness – The thickness of medium density fibreboard shall be as given below— 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, 22, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm the tolerance on thickness shall be ± 0.3 mm b) Width and Length—Unless otherwise specified, the width and length of medium density fibreboard shall be as given below– a) Width — 1.22 m b) Length — 5.49, 4.89, 3.66, 3.05, 2.44, 1.83, 1.22m Any other dimesions as agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer may be used. Tolerance on length and width shall be ±3 mm /m. TABLE 1 PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL REQUIEMENTS OF MEDIUM DENSITY FIBRE BOARDS Sl. Properties Gr",
      "Grades": "Prelaminated particle boards shall be of two grades, namely, Grade I and Grade II corresponding to IS 3087 : 1985+. 2.1 Each of the grades shall be of four types, namely, Type I, II, III and IV. Classified by surface abrasion characteristics specified in Table 1. 2.2 The grades and types shall represented by the symbols. Grade and Type Designation Grade I – Type I PLB-11 Type II PLB-12 Type III PLB-13 Type IV PLB-14 Grade II– Type I PLB-21 Type II PLB-22 Type III PLB-23 Type IV PLB-24 3. Materials 3.1 Particle Board – Synthetic resin bonded flat pressed three layer or multi–layer or graded particle boards conforming to IS 3087 : 1985+ shall be used. 3.2 Impregnated Base Paper — Printed or plain coloured absorbent base paper having a weight of 60- 140 g/m2 impregnated in a suitable syntheti"
    },
    "content": "IS 12406: 2003 Medium Density Fibre Boards For\nGENERAL PURPOSES\n1.\nScope — Requirements of medium density fibre boards for general purposes having density in the range\nof 600 – 900 kg/m3. This standard does not cover veneered or laminated or other specially treated boards,\nmoulded boards, etc.\n2.\nTypes—Medium density fibreboards for general purpose shall be of one type only, that is flat pressed\nsingle layer. It may, however, be of two grades, designated as follows—\nGrade\nDesignation\nSolid board Grade-1\nSBF-I\nSolid board Grade-2\nSBG-II\n3.\nMaterials\n3.1 Wood —Any spicies of wood or any other\nlignocellulosic material may be used\n3.2 Adhesive—Any suitable type of synthetic resin\nadhesive be used. For the purpose of bonding to comply with physical and mechanical requirements given in\nTable 1.\n3.3 Sizing Material—Paraffin wax dissolved in mineral\nspirit, or alternatively emulsified with water, or melted shall be used as sizing material.\n+ Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood (phenolic and aminoplastic) (first revision).\n4.\nFinish – Medium density fibre board shall be flat and of uniform thickness and density throughout the\nlength and width of the boards. Both surfaces of the boards shall be sanded to a smooth finish.\n5.\nDimensions and Tolerances – The boards shall be rectangular and , unless otherwise specified, shall have\nsquare edges. The lengths of the two diagonals of the board shall not differ by more than ±3 mm per metre\nlength of the diagonal.\na) Thickness – The thickness of medium density fibreboard shall be as given below— 6, 9, 12,\n15, 18, 22, 25, 30, 35, 40 mm the tolerance on thickness shall be ± 0.3 mm b) Width and Length—Unless otherwise\nspecified, the width and length of medium density fibreboard shall be as given below– a) Width — 1.22 m b) Length — 5.49, 4.89, 3.66, 3.05, 2.44, 1.83, 1.22m\nAny other dimesions as agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer may be used. Tolerance\non length and width shall be ±3 mm /m. TABLE 1 PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL REQUIEMENTS OF MEDIUM DENSITY FIBRE BOARDS\nSl.\nProperties\nGrade II\nGrade I\nNo.\n(SBG II)\n(SBG I)\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\ni)\nDensity (Kg/m3)\n600–900\n600–900 ii)\nVariation from mean density, percent\n± 10\n± 10 iii)\nMoisture content, percent\n5–10\n5–10 iv)\nVariation from mean moisture content percent (absolute)\n± 3\n± 3 v)\nWater absorption percent, Max a) After 2 h soaking\n9\n6 b) After 24 h soaking: Up to and including 6 mm thick\n45\n30 7 to 12 mm thick\n30\n20 13 to 19 mm thick\n20\n13 20 mm thick and above\n18\n12 vi)\nLinear expansion (swelling in water) percent, Max a) Due to general absorption after 24 h soaking: Thickness\n7\n4 Length\n0.4\n0.3 Width\n0.4\n0.\nb) Due to surface absorption (in thickness) after 2 h soaking\n5\n4 vii)\nModulus of rupture, N/mm2 a) Up to 20 mm thickness: Average\n28\n28 Minimum individual\n25\n25 b) Above 20 mm thickness: Average\n25\n25 Minimum individual\n22\n22 viii)\nModulus of elasticity, N/mm2 a) Up to 20 mm thickness: Average\n2 800\n2 800 Minimum individual\n2 300\n2 300 b) Above 20 mm thickness: Average\n2 500\n2 500 Minimum individual\n2 300\n2 300 ix)\nInternal bond, N/mm2 a) Up to 20 mm thickness: Average\n0.8\n0.9 Minimum individual\n0.7\n0.8 b) Above 20 mm thickness: Average\n0.7\n0.8 Minimum individual\n0.6\n0.7 x)\nInternal bond, N/mm2 a) After cyclie test Average\n–\n0.45 Minimum individual\n–\n0.4 b) After accelerated water resistance test Average\n–\n0.30 Minimum individual\n–\n0.25 xi)\nScrew withdrawal strength (Min).N a) FAce\n1 500\n1 500 b) Edge (for thickness 12 mm)\n1 250\n1 250\nCyclic test – Specimens are immersed in water at 27 ± 2ºC for a period of 72 h, followed b drying in air at 27 ± 2ºC for 24 h and then heating in dry air at 70ºC for 72 h. There such cycles are to be followed and then the specimens are tested for internal bond\nstrength.\nAccelerated water resistance test – Specimens are immersed in water 27 ± 2ºC and water is brought to boiling and kept at boiling temperature for 2 hours. Specimens are then cooled in water 27 ± 2ºC and then tested for internal bond strength. 1.\nScope – Requirement of prelaminated particle boards for general purpose and also for special\napplications.\n2.\nGrades and Types—Prelaminated particle boards shall be of two grades, namely, Grade I and Grade II\ncorresponding to IS 3087 : 1985+.\n2.1 Each of the grades shall be of four types, namely,\nType I, II, III and IV. Classified by surface abrasion characteristics specified in Table 1.\n2.2 The grades and types shall represented by the\nsymbols.\nGrade and Type\nDesignation\nGrade I – Type I\nPLB-11 Type II\nPLB-12 Type III\nPLB-13\nType IV\nPLB-14\nGrade II– Type I\nPLB-21\nType II\nPLB-22\nType III\nPLB-23 Type IV\nPLB-24\n3.\nMaterials\n3.1 Particle Board – Synthetic resin bonded flat\npressed three layer or multi–layer or graded particle boards conforming to IS 3087 : 1985+ shall be used.\n3.2 Impregnated Base Paper — Printed or plain\ncoloured absorbent base paper having a weight of 60-\n140 g/m2 impregnated in a suitable synthetic resin and dried to a volatile content of 4-8 percent shall be used."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12823: 1990",
    "title": "Wood Products-Prelaminated Particles Boards",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "3.3 Impregnated Overlay—An absorbent tissue paper having a weight of 18-40 g/m2 impregnated in a suitable synthetic resin and dried to a volatile content of 4-8 percent. 4. Finish —The finish of the paper overlaid board depends on the surface of caul plates used. 5. Dimensions and Tolerances —Dimensions and tolerances shall conform to IS 12049:1987.* 6. Tests 6.1 Density — 500 to 900 kg/m3 6.2 Moisture Content — 5 to 15 percent 6.3 Resistance to Steam – Shall not show any sign of blister, delami",
    "keywords": [
      "stain",
      "boards",
      "leave",
      "particle",
      "wood",
      "resistance",
      "cleaning"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Finish": "The finish of the paper overlaid board depends on the surface of caul plates used.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "Dimensions and tolerances shall conform to IS 12049:1987.* 6. Tests 6.1 Density — 500 to 900 kg/m3 6.2 Moisture Content — 5 to 15 percent 6.3 Resistance to Steam – Shall not show any sign of blister, delamination or change in surface finish. There may be slight colour change in dark colours/ patterns. 6.4 Crack Resistance – Shall not show any sign of cracks or delamination. 6.5 Resistance to digarette Burn — shall not leave any mark or stain on the specimen after cleaning with water or solvent. 6.6 Resistance to Stain — Shall not leave any stain on the specimen after cleaning with water, solvent or detergent. 6.7 For Other Tests —See Table 1.",
      "Mechanical Properties": "See Table1. + Wood particle boards (medium density) for general purposes (first revision). * Dimensions and tolerances relating to wood based panel materials TABLE 1 PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES Properties Flat, Pressed three layers, Multilayer and Graded Grade I Grade II i) Density variation Max, percent ±10 ±10 ii) absorption, Max, percent a) 2 hours 7.0 15.0 b) 24 hours 15.0 30.0 iii) Thickness swelling, Max, percent, 5.0 8.0 a) 2 hours iv) Modulus of rupture, Min, N/mm2— a) Up to 20 mm thickness 15.0 11.0 b) Above 20 mm thickness 12.5 11.0 v) Tensile strength perpendicular to surface, Min, N/mm2— a) Up to 20 mm thickness 0.45 0.3 b) Above 20 mm thickness 0.4 0.3 vi) Tensile strength perpendicular to surface, Min, N/mm.2 a) After cyclic test 0.2 __ b) After accelerated water resis"
    },
    "content": "IS 12823: 1990 Wood Products-Prelaminated Particles Boards\n3.3 Impregnated Overlay—An absorbent tissue paper\nhaving a weight of 18-40 g/m2 impregnated in a suitable synthetic resin and dried to a volatile content of 4-8\npercent.\n4.\nFinish —The finish of the paper overlaid board depends on the surface of caul plates used.\n5.\nDimensions and Tolerances —Dimensions and tolerances shall conform to IS 12049:1987.*\n6. Tests\n6.1 Density — 500 to 900 kg/m3\n6.2 Moisture Content — 5 to 15 percent\n6.3 Resistance to Steam – Shall not show any sign of\nblister, delamination or change in surface finish. There may be slight colour change in dark colours/ patterns.\n6.4 Crack Resistance – Shall not show any sign of\ncracks or delamination.\n6.5 Resistance to digarette Burn — shall not leave\nany mark or stain on the specimen after cleaning with water or solvent.\n6.6 Resistance to Stain — Shall not leave any stain on\nthe specimen after cleaning with water, solvent or detergent.\n6.7 For Other Tests —See Table 1.\n7.\nPhysical and Mechanical Properties – See Table1.\n+ Wood particle boards (medium density) for general purposes\n(first revision). * Dimensions and tolerances relating to wood based panel materials TABLE 1 PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES\nProperties\nFlat, Pressed three layers, Multilayer and Graded\nGrade I\nGrade II i) Density variation Max, percent\n±10\n±10 ii)\nabsorption, Max, percent a) 2 hours 7.0\n15.0 b) 24 hours\n15.0\n30.0 iii) Thickness swelling, Max, percent,\n5.0\n8.0 a) 2 hours\niv) Modulus of rupture, Min, N/mm2—\na) Up to 20 mm thickness\n15.0\n11.0 b) Above 20 mm thickness\n12.5\n11.0 v)\nTensile strength perpendicular to surface, Min, N/mm2—\na) Up to 20 mm thickness\n0.45\n0.3 b) Above 20 mm thickness\n0.4\n0.3 vi) Tensile strength perpendicular to surface, Min, N/mm.2\na) After cyclic test\n0.2\n__ b) After accelerated water resistance test\n0.15\n__ vii) Screw withdrawal strength, Min,N:\na) Face\n1250\n1250 b) Edge\n850 750 viii) Abrasion resistance, Min in number of revolutions—\na) Type I\n1000\n1000 b) Type II 450 450 c) Type III\n250 250 d) Type IV\n75\n75\nNote— For method of test, refer to the standard and various parts of IS 2380 : 1977 Methods of test for wood particle boards and\nboards from other lignocellulosic materials ( first revision).\nFor detailed Information, refer to IS 12823 : 1990 Specification for wood products- prelaminated particle boards"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14276: 1995",
    "title": "Cement Bonded Particle Boards",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Requirements of cement bonded wood particle boards.This standard does not cover particle boards bonded with synthetic resin adhesives.",
    "keywords": [
      "plmdf",
      "boards",
      "particle",
      "bonded",
      "cement",
      "soaking",
      "board"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirement of prelaminated medium density fibre board for general purposes and also for special applications.",
      "Materials": "Species of wood which do not hinder the process of setting of cement shall be used. Suitable additives such as sodium silicate conforming to IS 381 : 1995* and aluminium sulphate conforming to IS 260 : 1969 +shall be used to prevent inhibitive effect of setting of cement when other species are used. Cement conforming to IS 8112 : 1989++ shall be used. 3. Finish The particle boards shall be of uniform thickness and density throughout the length and width of the boards. All particle boards. shall be flat and smooth.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "The sizes of cement bonded particle boards shall be as follows : Length 3050 mm and 2440 mm Width 1220 mm Thickness—The thickness of cement bonded particle boards shall be as given below 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 25, 30 and 40 mm. Tolerances – The following tolerances for the dimensions shall be permitted: Length ± 5 mm Width ± 5 mm Thickness i) Unsanded boards 6 mm to 12 mm ± 1 mm 12 mm to 20 mm ± 1.5 mm 20 mm and more ± 2 mm ii) Sanded boards For all thickness ) ± 0.3 mm Edge straightness 2 mm per1000 mm Squareness 2 mm per1000 mm 5. Physical characteristics : See Table 1 TABLE1REQUIREMENT OF PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES FOR CEMENT BONDED PARTICLE BOARDS SL. NO PROPERTY REQUIREMENT i) Density Min kg/ m3 1250 ii) Moisture content,percent 6 to12 iii) Water absorption, Max , percent 2 h S",
      "Grades": "Based on surface abrasion characteristics. The grades and types of prelaminated medium density fibre boards shall be represented by symbols as follows : Grade and Type Designation Grade I Type I PLMDF-11 Type II PLMDF-12 Type III PLMDF-13 Type IV PLMDF-14 Grade II Type I PLMDF-21 Type II PLMDF-22 Type III PLMDF-23 Type IV PLMDF-24 3. Materials 3.1 Medium Density Fibre Board —Synthetic resin bonded medium density fibre board shall conform to"
    },
    "content": "IS 14276: 1995 Cement Bonded Particle Boards\n1. Scope – Requirements of cement bonded wood\nparticle boards.This standard does not cover particle boards bonded with synthetic resin adhesives.\n2.\nMaterials – Species of wood which do not hinder the process of setting of cement shall be used. Suitable\nadditives such as sodium silicate conforming to IS 381\n: 1995* and aluminium sulphate conforming to IS 260 :\n1969 +shall be used to prevent inhibitive effect of setting of cement when other species are used. Cement\nconforming to IS 8112 : 1989++ shall be used.\n3.\nFinish\nThe particle boards shall be of uniform thickness and density throughout the length and width of the boards.\nAll particle boards. shall be flat and smooth.\n4.\nDimensions and Tolerances – The sizes of cement bonded particle boards shall be as follows :\nLength\n3050 mm and 2440 mm\nWidth\n1220 mm\nThickness—The thickness of cement bonded particle boards shall be as given below\n6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 25, 30 and 40 mm.\nTolerances – The following tolerances for the dimensions shall be permitted:\nLength\n± 5 mm\nWidth\n± 5 mm\nThickness i)\nUnsanded boards\n6 mm to 12 mm\n± 1 mm\n12 mm to 20 mm\n± 1.5 mm\n20 mm and more\n± 2 mm ii)\nSanded boards\nFor all thickness )\n± 0.3 mm\nEdge straightness\n2 mm per1000 mm\nSquareness\n2 mm per1000 mm\n5.\nPhysical characteristics : See Table 1\nTABLE1REQUIREMENT OF PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES FOR CEMENT\nBONDED PARTICLE BOARDS\nSL. NO\nPROPERTY\nREQUIREMENT i)\nDensity Min kg/ m3\n1250 ii)\nMoisture content,percent\n6 to12 iii)\nWater absorption, Max , percent\n2 h Soaking\n13\n24 h Soaking\n25 iv)\nSwelling in Water Max, percent (after 2 h soaking)\na) Thickness\n2.0 b) Length\n0.5 c) Width\n0.5 v)\nModulus of rupture, Min, N/mm2\nDry condition\n9\nWet condition\n5.5 vi)\nModulus of elasticity, Min, N/mm2\n3 000 vii)\nTensile strength Prpendicular to surface, Min, N/mm2 a) Dry\n0.4 b) Accelerated ageing\n0.25 viii)\nScrew withdrawal strength, Min, N\nFace\n1250\nEdge\n850 ix)\npH\n11to13\n+ Aluminium sulphate, non-ferric (first revision)\n* Sodium silicate (second revision). ++ 43 Grade ordinary portland cement (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 14276 : 1995 Specification for cement bonded particle board. 1.\nScope – Requirement of prelaminated medium density fibre board for general purposes and also for\nspecial applications.\n2.\nGrades and Types – Based on surface abrasion characteristics. The grades and types of prelaminated\nmedium density fibre boards shall be represented by symbols as follows :\nGrade and Type\nDesignation\nGrade I\nType I\nPLMDF-11 Type II\nPLMDF-12\nType III\nPLMDF-13\nType IV\nPLMDF-14\nGrade II\nType I\nPLMDF-21\nType II\nPLMDF-22\nType III\nPLMDF-23\nType IV\nPLMDF-24\n3.\nMaterials\n3.1 Medium Density Fibre Board —Synthetic resin\nbonded medium density fibre board shall conform to"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12406: 1988",
    "title": "+",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "3.2 Impregnated Base Paper – Printed or plain colour absorbant basepaper having a weight of 60-140 g/m2 impregnated in a suitable synthetic resin and dried to a volatile content of 4-8 percent shall be used: 3. Impregnated Overlay – An absorbant tissue paper having a weigth of 18-40 g/m3 impregnated in a suitable synthetic resin and dried to a volatile content of 4-8 percent, shall be used. 4. Finish — The finish of the paper overlaid board depends on the surface of caul plates used. . 5. Dimens",
    "keywords": [
      "impregnated",
      "absorbant",
      "paper",
      "dried",
      "volatile",
      "basepaper",
      "synthetic"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Impregnated Overlay": "An absorbant tissue paper having a weigth of 18-40 g/m3 impregnated in a suitable synthetic resin and dried to a volatile content of 4-8 percent, shall be used.",
      "Finish": "The finish of the paper overlaid board depends on the surface of caul plates used. .",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "Dimensions and tolerances shall conform to IS 12049 : 1987 ++",
      "Mechanical Properties": "see Table 1. + Medium density fibre boards for general purposes. ++Dimensions and tolerances relating to wood based panel material"
    },
    "content": "IS 12406: 1988 +\n3.2 Impregnated Base Paper – Printed or plain colour\nabsorbant basepaper having a weight of 60-140 g/m2 impregnated in a suitable synthetic resin and dried to a\nvolatile content of 4-8 percent shall be used:\n3.\nImpregnated Overlay – An absorbant tissue paper having a weigth of 18-40 g/m3 impregnated in a suitable\nsynthetic resin and dried to a volatile content of 4-8 percent, shall be used.\n4.\nFinish — The finish of the paper overlaid board depends on the surface of caul plates used. .\n5.\nDimensions and Tolerances —Dimensions and tolerances shall conform to IS 12049 : 1987 ++\n6.\nPhysical and Mechanical Properties–\nsee Table 1. + Medium density fibre boards for general purposes. ++Dimensions and tolerances relating to wood based panel material"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14587: 1998",
    "title": "Pre-Laminated Medium Density Fibre Board",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "TABLE 1 PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES PROPERTY REQUIREMENT Grade I Grade II 1.1 Density variation Max, percent ±10 ±10 1.2 Water absorption Max, percent: a) 2 hours 6 9 b) 24 hours 12 18 1.3 Thickness swelling Max, percent, 2 hours 4 7 1.4 Modulus of rupture Min, N/mm2: a) Up to 20mm thickness 28 28 b) Above 20mm thickness 25 25 1.5 Tensile strength perpendicular to surface Min, N/mm2: a) Up to 20mm thickness 0.8 0.7 b) Above 20mm thickness 0.7 0.6 1.6 Tensile strength perpendicular to surf",
    "keywords": [
      "stain",
      "leave",
      "resistance",
      "cleaning",
      "hours",
      "perpendicular",
      "delamination"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 14587: 1998 Pre-Laminated Medium Density Fibre Board\nTABLE 1 PHYSICAL AND MECHANICAL PROPERTIES\nPROPERTY\nREQUIREMENT\nGrade I\nGrade II 1.1\nDensity variation Max, percent\n±10\n±10 1.2\nWater absorption Max, percent:\na) 2 hours\n6\n9 b) 24 hours\n12 18 1.3\nThickness swelling Max, percent, 2 hours\n4\n7 1.4\nModulus of rupture Min, N/mm2:\na) Up to 20mm thickness 28\n28 b) Above 20mm thickness 25 25 1.5\nTensile strength perpendicular to surface Min, N/mm2:\na) Up to 20mm thickness\n0.8\n0.7 b) Above 20mm thickness 0.7\n0.6 1.6\nTensile strength perpendicular to surface Min, N/mm.2:\na) After cyclic test 0.4\n__ b) After acceleratedwater resistance test\n0.25\n__ 1.7\nScrew withdrawal strength(Min),N:\na) Face\n1500\n1500 b) Edge\n1250\n1250 1.8\nAbrasion resistance (Min) in number of revolutions:\na) Type I\n1000\n1000 b) Type II\n450\n450 c) Type III\n250\n250 d) Type IV\n75\n75 6.1 Density – 500 to 900 kg/m3\n6.2 Moisture Content – 5 to 15 percent.\n6.3 Resistance to Steam — Shall not show any sign of\nblister, delamination or change in surface finish. There many be slight colour change in dark colour/patterns.\n6.4 Crack Resistance – Shall not show any sign of\ncracks or delamination.\n6.5 Resistance to Cigarette Burn — Shall not leave\nany mark or stain on the specimen after cleaning with water or solvent.\n6.6 Resistance to Stain — Shall not leave any stain on\nthe specimen after cleaning with water , solvent or detergent.\n6.7 For Other Tests – See Table 1 Note: For methods of tests, refer to various parts of IS 2380 : 1977 Methods of tests for wood particle boards and boards from other lignocellulsic materials (first revision).\nFor detailed Information, refer to IS 14587:1998 Specification for prelaminated medium density fibre board."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1586: 1988",
    "title": "Method For Rockwell Hardness Test For Metallic Material",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "summary": "ii) IS 1708 : 1986 Methods of testing of small clear specimen of Timber (second revision) iii) IS 1734 (Part 9) : 1983 Methods of test of plywood : Part 9 Determination of tensile strength. (second revision) iv) IS 1998 : 1962 Method of test for thermosetting synthetic resin bonded laminated sheets. v)",
    "keywords": [
      "thermosetting",
      "laminated",
      "plywood",
      "small",
      "bonded",
      "clear",
      "synthetic"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 1586: 1988 Method For Rockwell Hardness Test For Metallic Material\nii)\nIS 1708 : 1986 Methods of testing of small clear specimen of Timber (second revision)\niii)\nIS 1734 (Part 9) : 1983 Methods of test of plywood : Part 9 Determination of tensile strength. (second revision) iv)\nIS 1998 : 1962 Method of test for thermosetting synthetic resin bonded laminated sheets. v)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3513 (Part 4): 1966",
    "title": "High And Medium Density Wood Based Laminates (Compreg) : Part 4 Sampling And Tests.",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Requirements of resin treated compressed wood laminates (compregs) for general purposes. This standard does not cover the requirements for solid compressed wood.",
    "keywords": [
      "grain",
      "veneers",
      "orientation",
      "constituent",
      "direction",
      "compressed",
      "type"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of resin treated compressed wood laminates (compregs) for general purposes. This standard does not cover the requirements for solid compressed wood. 2. Grades and Types 2.1 Grades a) High density b) Medium density 2.1.1.General purpose high density grade (or Grade GH) – This shall be a partially impregnated high density material suitable for textile and jute mills accesories and tools, engineering and general engineering applications. This grade shall have four types, namely, Type II, III, V and VI. 2.1.2 General purpose medium density grade (or Grade GM) —This shall be a partially impregnated medium density material suitable for general purposes. This shall have four types, namely, Type II, III, V and VI .2.2. Types – a) Type II – The grain orientation of the constituent vene",
      "Varnishes": "Shall conform to IS 524 : 1983+ and IS 525 : 1968‡ .",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "4.1 Boards 4.1.1 Sizes — Shall generally be the following : mm mm mm mm"
    },
    "content": "IS 3513 (Part 4): 1966 High And Medium Density Wood Based Laminates (Compreg) : Part 4 Sampling And Tests.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3513 (Part 2) : 1989. Specification for resin treated compressed wood laminates (compregs) : Part 2 For chemical purposes (first revision). 1.\nScope – Requirements of resin treated compressed wood laminates (compregs) for general purposes. This\nstandard does not cover the requirements for solid compressed wood.\n2.\nGrades and Types\n2.1 Grades\na) High density b) Medium density 2.1.1.General purpose high density grade (or Grade\nGH) – This shall be a partially impregnated high density material suitable for textile and jute mills accesories and\ntools, engineering and general engineering applications.\nThis grade shall have four types, namely, Type II, III, V and VI.\n2.1.2 General purpose medium density grade (or Grade\nGM) —This shall be a partially impregnated medium density material suitable for general purposes. This shall\nhave four types, namely, Type II, III, V and VI\n.2.2. Types –\na) Type II –\nThe grain orientation of the constituent veneers shall be more than 75 percent in\nthe direction of the major mechanical stress. Every fourth veneer comprising\nthis type shall have its grain direction at right angle to the grain direction of\nadjacent three veneers w h i c h\nwill have their grain in the same direction. This arrangement is specially\nsuitable for tensile links where the end fixings are in the form of boltsor rivets\nlocated close to the end of the components.\nb) Type III —\nIn this type, the grain orientationof the constituent veneers shall be\napproximately equal in all radial directions. This type shall have each\nsuccessive lamination angularly disposed in relation to the adjacent one.\nThis type is suited for fabrication of gears, chuck and wheels.\nc) Type IV —\nIn this type, the grain orientation of the constituent veneers shall be in the\ndirection of the axis of load.This type is suitable for parts subject to tensile\nstress and is thus suited for fabrication of sticks, flats, rods, turn- parts and\nthreading.\nd) Type V—\nIn this type, the grain orientation of the constituent veneers shall be more or less\nequal in each axis, at right angles to each other.\n3.\nMaterials\n3.1 Timber – Any non-resinous species of timber may\nbe used for the manufacture of veneers required for making compreg.\n3.2 Synthetic Resins – Shall be of thermosetting\nphenol or cresol formaldeyde type and shall generally conform to IS 848 : 1974.*\n3.3. Varnishes — Shall conform to IS 524 : 1983+ and IS\n525 : 1968‡ .\n4. Dimensions and Tolerances –\n4.1 Boards 4.1.1 Sizes — Shall generally be the following :\nmm mm\nmm mm"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14616: 1999",
    "title": "Laminated Veneer Lumber",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Covers laminated veneer lumber (LVL) of density range 0.6 to 0.75 in which most natural structural wood fall. Its applications include all the end uses to which structural wood has been traditionally used, such as, beams, rafters, stringers, joists, posts and framework construction, stiles, rails and frames of doors and windows, vehicle bodies, railways coaches, containers, framework of furniture, cabinets, shelving etc.",
    "keywords": [
      "veneers",
      "framework",
      "lvl",
      "lumber",
      "adhesive",
      "veneer",
      "composite"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers laminated veneer lumber (LVL) of density range 0.6 to 0.75 in which most natural structural wood fall. Its applications include all the end uses to which structural wood has been traditionally used, such as, beams, rafters, stringers, joists, posts and framework construction, stiles, rails and frames of doors and windows, vehicle bodies, railways coaches, containers, framework of furniture, cabinets, shelving etc. 2. Terminology Laminated Veneer Lumber (LVL) — A structural composite made by laminating veneers, 1.5 to 4.2 mm thick, with suitable adhesive and with the grain of veneers in successive layers aligned along the longitudinal (length) dimension of the composite. 3. Materials 3.1 Veneers 3.1.1 Veneers of the required thickness shall be obtained from timber logs grown in plant"
    },
    "content": "IS 14616: 1999 Laminated Veneer Lumber\n1.\nScope—Covers laminated veneer lumber (LVL)\nof density range 0.6 to 0.75 in which most natural structural wood fall. Its applications include all the end\nuses to which structural wood has been traditionally used, such as, beams, rafters, stringers, joists, posts\nand framework construction, stiles, rails and frames of doors and windows, vehicle bodies, railways coaches,\ncontainers, framework of furniture, cabinets, shelving etc.\n2.\nTerminology\nLaminated Veneer Lumber (LVL) — A structural composite made by laminating veneers, 1.5 to 4.2 mm\nthick, with suitable adhesive and with the grain of veneers in successive layers aligned along the\nlongitudinal (length) dimension of the composite.\n3.\nMaterials\n3.1 Veneers 3.1.1 Veneers of the required thickness shall be obtained from timber logs grown in plantations outside\nthe natural forest system, such as, rubber wood, silver oak, eucalyptus, poplars, acacias, etc. 3.1.2 Veneers shall be free from knot holes, decayed knots except pin knots, unfilled wider than 3 mm,\nconcentrated borer holes, shakes, objectionable decay or termite attack, except that for the face veneers none\nof these defects nor cross grain exceeding 1 in 10 shall be permitted. The nominal thickness of all the veneers\nused shall be identical and uniform within a tolerance of\n±5 percent.\n3.2 Adhesive 3.2.1 Only BWP grade adhesive conforming to"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 848: 1974",
    "title": "+ Shall Be Used For Making Lvl.",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "3.3 Preservatives 3.3.1 Veneers used for LVL shall be given suitable preservative treatment before lamination, with a preservative that is compatible with the adhesive to be used. + Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood ( phenolic and aminoplastic) (first revision). 3.3.2 Only fixed type of water soluble preservatives, CCA or CCB, or non-leachable, solvent soluble preservatives as per IS 401: 1982 ++ shall be used for treating the veneers. 3.3.3 Retentions of preservative shall be as per IS 401 ",
    "keywords": [
      "grain",
      "lvl",
      "preservatives",
      "plies",
      "laminae",
      "perpendicular",
      "parallel"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Dimensions": "Dimensions of LVL composite supplied shall be inclusive of margin required for dressing and finishing over and above the size of finished component desired, unless finished components (ready for painting) are ordered. The margin for dressing and finishing shall not exceed 3 mm in the width and thickness and 12 mm in the length. 5. Permissible defects Defects Permissible Limits Jointing Not more than 3 mm wide, Gaps Provided they are well staggered in their spacing and position between the successive plies. Slope of Not exceeding 1in 10 in Grain The face layers. Tight knot Three numbers up to 25 mm diameter in one square metre provided they are spaced 300 mm or more apart. Warp Not exceeding 1.5 mm per metre length. 6. Requirements : 6.1 Moisture Content —Between 5 to 15 percent. ++ Code of"
    },
    "content": "IS 848: 1974 + Shall Be Used For Making Lvl.\n3.3 Preservatives\n3.3.1\nVeneers used for LVL shall be given suitable preservative treatment before lamination, with a\npreservative that is compatible with the adhesive to be used.\n+ Synthetic resin adhesives for plywood ( phenolic and aminoplastic) (first revision). 3.3.2 Only fixed type of water soluble preservatives,\nCCA or CCB, or non-leachable, solvent soluble preservatives as per IS 401: 1982 ++ shall be used for\ntreating the veneers. 3.3.3 Retentions of preservative shall be as per IS\n401 : 1982 ++ depending upon the proposed end use.\n4.\nDimensions – Dimensions of LVL composite supplied shall be inclusive of margin required for dressing\nand finishing over and above the size of finished component desired, unless finished components (ready\nfor painting) are ordered.\nThe margin for dressing and finishing shall not exceed 3 mm in the width and thickness and 12 mm in\nthe length.\n5.\nPermissible defects\nDefects\nPermissible Limits\nJointing Not more than 3 mm wide,\nGaps\nProvided they are well staggered in their spacing and position\nbetween the successive plies.\nSlope of\nNot exceeding 1in 10 in\nGrain\nThe face layers.\nTight knot\nThree numbers up to 25 mm diameter in one square metre\nprovided they are spaced 300 mm or more apart.\nWarp\nNot exceeding 1.5 mm per metre length.\n6.\nRequirements :\n6.1 Moisture Content —Between 5 to 15 percent.\n++ Code of practice for preservation of timber (third revision). 6.2 Adhesion of Plies—Adhesion of plies shall be\ntested by knife test as described in IS 1734 (Part 5) on three specimens each under the following condition—\na) In the dry state.\nb) After boiling in water for 72 h followed by cooling in water at room temperature, and\nc) After subjecting to attack by micro-organism as per Annex B. of the standard.\nUnder each condition the fractured specimens shall show some adherent fibres distributed more or\nless uniformly. Also the test should offer appreciable resistance to the seperation of layers.\n6.3 Strength — See Table 1.\n6.4 Swelling in Water—Maximum 3 percent after2 h.\nTABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF LVL Sl.No Properties\nRequirement i)\nModulus of rupture (N/mm2) Min\n550 ii)\nModulus of elasticity (N/mm2) Min,\n7500 iii)\nCompressive strength parallel to grain (N/mm2), Min\n35 iv)\nCompressive strength perpendicular to grain: a) parallel to laminae (N/mm2), Min\n35 b) Perpendicular to laminae (N/mm2), Min\n50 v)\nHorizontal shear: a) Parallel to grain (N/mm2) Min\n6 b) Perpendicular to grain (N/mm2), Min 8 vi)\nTensile strength parallel to grain (N/mm2), Min\n55 vii) Screw holding power: a) Edge(N), Min\n2300 b) Face (N), Min\n2700\nNote – For methods of tests, refer to various parts of IS 1734 : 1983 Methods of test for plywood (second revision), various parts\nof IS : 1708 Methods of testing small clear specimens of timber (second revision) and IS 2380 : 1977 Methods of tests for wood particle boards and boards from other lignocellulosic materials ( first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 14616 : 1999 Specification for laminated veneer lumber."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13958: 1994",
    "title": "Bamboo Mat Board For General Purposes",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Covers the method of manufacture and the requirements of bamboo mat board used for general purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "bamboo",
      "mat",
      "boards",
      "board",
      "give",
      "individual",
      "state"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the method of manufacture and the requirements of bamboo mat board used for general purposes. 2. Materials 2.1 Bamboo – Any suitable species of bamboo may be used for making bamboo mat board. 2.2 Adhesive – Adhesive for bonding bamboo mat board shall be of phenolic type conforming to BWR type specified in IS848:1974. 3. Dimensions and Tolerances 3.1. The dimension of bamboo mat boards shall be as given for plywood in IS 12049 : 1987++.Thickness of bamboo mat boards shall be specified depending upon the number of plies. The thickness shall be measured up to one decimal place of millimetre.",
      "Tolerances": "The following tolerances on the nominal sizes of finished boards shall be permissible Dimension Tolerance a) Length +6mm – 0mm b) Width +3mm – 0mm + Synthetic resin adhesives fcr plywood (phenolic and amino plastic) (first revision) ++ Dimensions and tolerances relating to wood based panel material For detailed information, refer to IS 13958 : 1994 Specification for Bamboo mat board for general purposes. c) Thickness Less than 6 mm ±10 percent 6mm and above ± 5 percent d) Squareness 0.2 percent e) Edge Straightness 0.2 percent",
      "Workmanship And Finish": "The bamboo mat boards shall be of uniform thickness within the tolerance limit specified. The faces of bamboo mat boards shall be reasonably smooth and uniform in colour. 5. Tests 5.1 Internal Bond Strength Test 5.1.1 In Dry State– Shall give an average and a minimum individual value of 0.7 N/mm2 and 0.5 N/mm2 respectively. 5.1.2 In Wet State – Shall give an average and a minimum individual value of 0.5 N/mm2 and 0.3 N/mm2 respectively. 5.2 Mycological Test – Shall give an average and a minimum individual value of 0.5 N/mm2 and of 0.3 N/ mm2 5.3 Surface strength Test – (Alternate)"
    },
    "content": "IS 13958: 1994 Bamboo Mat Board For General Purposes\n1.\nScope – Covers the method of manufacture and the requirements of bamboo mat board used for general\npurposes.\n2.\nMaterials\n2.1 Bamboo – Any suitable species of bamboo may be\nused for making bamboo mat board.\n2.2 Adhesive – Adhesive for bonding bamboo mat\nboard shall be of phenolic type conforming to BWR type specified in IS848:1974.\n3.\nDimensions and Tolerances\n3.1. The dimension of bamboo mat boards shall be as given for plywood in IS 12049 : 1987++.Thickness of\nbamboo mat boards shall be specified depending upon the number of plies. The thickness shall be measured\nup to one decimal place of millimetre.\n3.2. Tolerances– The following tolerances on the nominal sizes of finished boards shall be permissible\nDimension Tolerance a) Length +6mm – 0mm b) Width +3mm – 0mm\n+ Synthetic resin adhesives fcr plywood (phenolic and amino plastic) (first revision)\n++ Dimensions and tolerances relating to wood based panel material\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 13958 : 1994 Specification for Bamboo mat board for general purposes. c) Thickness Less than 6 mm ±10 percent 6mm and above ± 5 percent d) Squareness 0.2 percent e) Edge Straightness 0.2 percent\n4.\nWorkmanship and Finish – The bamboo mat boards shall be of uniform thickness within the tolerance limit\nspecified. The faces of bamboo mat boards shall be reasonably smooth and uniform in colour.\n5.\nTests\n5.1 Internal Bond Strength Test 5.1.1 In Dry State– Shall give an average and a minimum individual value of 0.7 N/mm2 and 0.5 N/mm2\nrespectively. 5.1.2 In Wet State – Shall give an average and a minimum individual value of 0.5 N/mm2 and 0.3 N/mm2\nrespectively.\n5.2 Mycological Test – Shall give an average and a\nminimum individual value of 0.5 N/mm2 and of 0.3 N/ mm2\n5.3 Surface strength Test – (Alternate)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1003 (Part 1): 2003",
    "title": "Timber Panelled And Glazed Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding material, sizes, construction, workmanship, finish, inspection and testing of timber door shutters with timber, plywood, blockboard, veneered particle board, asbestos cement sheet, wire guage and glass panels used in domestic buildings, offices, schools, hospitals, etc. The shutters could be single panelled or multipanelled with or without glazing. This standard does not cover timber door shutters for industrial and other special buildings, such as, workshops and garages.",
    "keywords": [
      "shutters",
      "timber",
      "panelling",
      "door",
      "window",
      "ventilator",
      "panel"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding material, sizes, construction, workmanship, finish, inspection and testing of timber window and ventilator shutters with timber, plywood, blockboard, wireguaze and glass panels used in domestic buildings, offices, schools, hospitals, etc. The shutters of windows are usually double leaved depending upon the design of window, which could be single panelled or multipanelled and generally with glazing. 1.1 This standard does not cover timber window and ventilator shutters, shutters for industrial and other special buildings, such as, workshops, factories and garages having elaborate design and being subjected to rough treatement.",
      "Timber": "Timber suitable for manufacture of window and ventilator shutters shall be in accordance with IS 12896 : 1990* . The maximum permissible moisture content shall be as specified in IS 287 : 1993+. All timbers shall be kiln seasoned. Timber used for rails and stiles shall be of the same species. Note— For details of materials see 5 of the standard. 3. Requirements 3.1 Timber Panelling — No single panel shall exceed 0.5 m2 in area. 3.2 Plywood Panelling — Thickness not less than 9 mm for two or more panel construction and 12 mm for single panel construction. 3.3 Blockboard Panelling — Shall be of one piece of thickne 12 mm or more. * Classification of Indian timbers for doors and windows † Permissible moisture contents for timber used for different purposes (third revision) 4. Dimensions, Size",
      "Glazing": "6.1 The glass used for panels shall be weighing not less than 10 kg/m2 and the thickness shall not be less than 4mm.",
      "Tests": "Door shutters shall be subjected to following tests as specified : (i) Dimensions and defects for squareness (ii) General flatness (iii) Local planeness (iv) Impact intendation (v) Flexure (vi) Edge loading (vii) Shock resistance (viii) Buckling (ix) Misuse (x) Slamming, and (xi) Screw withdrawal resistance. For detailed information,refer to IS 1003 (Part 1) : 2003 Specification for timber panelled and glazed shutter: Part1 door shutters (fourth revision). *Code of practice for finishing of wood and wood based materials: Part 1 Operations and workmanship + Code of practice for finishing of wood and wood based materials: Part 2 Schedules"
    },
    "content": "IS 1003 (Part 1): 2003 Timber Panelled And Glazed Shutters\nPART 1 DOOR SHUTTERS\n(Fourth Revision)\n1.\nScope — Requirements regarding material, sizes, construction, workmanship, finish, inspection and\ntesting of timber door shutters with timber, plywood, blockboard, veneered particle board, asbestos cement\nsheet, wire guage and glass panels used in domestic buildings, offices, schools, hospitals, etc. The shutters\ncould be single panelled or multipanelled with or without glazing.\nThis standard does not cover timber door shutters for industrial and other special buildings, such as,\nworkshops and garages.\n2.\nTimber —Timber suitable for manufacture of door shutters shall be in accordance with\nIS 12896 : 1990.*\n2.1 Timber used for rails and stiles shall be of the same\nspecies. The maximum permissible moisture content in timber shall be as specified in IS 287 : 1993+.\n2.2 All timbers shall be kiln-seasoned. Sapwood of\ndurable species and heartwood and sapwood of nondurable species shall be treated with suitable preservative\n(except the water soluble leachable type). as specified in IS 401‡\n2.3 The timber shall be free from decay, fungal growth,\nboxed heart, splits, pitch pockets or streaks on the exposed faces.\n2.4 The timber shall be graded as First Grade and\nSecond Grade on the basis of the permissible defects in the timber as given in Table 1 of the standard.\nNote: For details of material see 5 of the standard.\n3.\nRequirements\n3.1 Timber Panelling — No single panel shall exceed\n0.5m2 in area.\n3.2 Plywood Panelling — Shall be of one piece of\nthickness not less than 9 mm for 2 or more panel construction and 12 mm for single panel construction.\n3.3 Blockboard Panelling — Shall be of one piece of\nthickness 12 mm or more.\n3.4 Veneered Particle Board Panelling — Shall be\nmade of one piece of veneered particle board. Thickness shall not be less than 12 mm.\n3.5 Asbestos Cement Board Panelling — Shall consist\nof two or more panels with thickness of each panel not less than 6 mm.\n3.6 Medium Density Fibre Board Panelling—\nThickness of boards shall not be less than 12 mm.\n3.7 Prelaminated Particles Board Panelling—\nThickness of boards shall not be less than 12 mm.\n3.8 Wire Gauze Panelleing – Shall be so designated\nthat no single panel exceeds 0.5 m2 in are\n3.9 Medium Density Wood Particle Board Panelling –\nshall be made of one piece of medium density wood particle board. Thicknes of boards used shall not be\nless than 12 mm.\n4.\nDimensions, Sizes and Tolerances\n4.1 Dimensions of Components and Tolerances\nSl. No.Description\nWidth\nThickness mm\nmm i)\nVertical stile\n100±3\n35±1 or 40±1 top and freeze\nrail ii)\nLock rail\n150±3\n35±1 or 40±1 iii)\nBottom rail\n200±3\n35±1 or 40±1 iv)\nMunting\n100±3\n35±1 or 40±1 v)\nGlazing bar 40±1\n35±1 or 40±1\n4.2 Dimensions of Door Shutters –\nDesignation\nWidth\nHeight of Doors\nmm mm 8 DS 20 700\n1905 (1945) 8 DS 21 700\n2005 (2045) 9 DS 20 800\n1905 (1945) 9 DS 21 800\n2005 (2045)\n10 DS 20 900\n1905 (1945)\n10 DS 21 900\n2005 (2045)\n12 DS 20\n1100*\n1905 (1945)\n12 DS 21\n1100*\n2005 (2045)\n* Combined width of double door leaf.\n* Permissible moisture content for timber used for different purpose (Third revision) + Classification of Indian timbers for door and window shutters and frames.\n‡Code of Practice for preservation of Timber Note 1 –The designation refers to modular sizes of door openings.\nFirst number stands for width and the last for height module\n(M=100mm); D= Doors, S–Single shutter and T–Double leaf shutters.\nNote2 – The standard widths and heights for panel doors are\narrived at as shown in Fig. 6 of the standard. In case the modular height is taken from finished floor level, the height of the door\nshall be given in bracket. In case of double leaf shutters, the rebate in the shutters shall be as given in 6.15 of the standard.\n4.3 Tolerances — Tolerances on the sizes of door\nshutters shall be ± 3 mm.\n5\nFinish\n5.1 All door shutters shall be sanded and finished\nsmooth.\n5.2 Panels of shutters shall be flat and well sanded to a\nsmooth and level surface.\n5.3 Defective knots, when permitted on surfaces\nexposed to view shall be completely bored or cut out and tightly plugged with the same timber species and\nproperly glued in. The grains of the plug shall run in direction of the grains of the piece.\n5.4 All the surface of door shutters which are required\nto be painted or polished or varnished ultimately shall be covered initially before delivery by protective coat\nof primer polish or varnish. As specified in IS 2338\n(Part 1)* and IS 2338 (Part 2)+.\n6.\nGlazing –\n6.1 The glass used for panels shall be weighing not\nless than 10 kg/m2 and the thickness shall not be less than 4mm.\n7.\nTests — Door shutters shall be subjected to following tests as specified :\n(i)\nDimensions and defects for squareness\n(ii)\nGeneral flatness\n(iii)\nLocal planeness\n(iv)\nImpact intendation\n(v)\nFlexure\n(vi)\nEdge loading\n(vii)\nShock resistance\n(viii)\nBuckling\n(ix)\nMisuse\n(x)\nSlamming, and\n(xi)\nScrew withdrawal resistance.\nFor detailed information,refer to IS 1003 (Part 1) : 2003 Specification for timber panelled and glazed shutter:\nPart1 door shutters (fourth revision).\n*Code of practice for finishing of wood and wood based materials:\nPart 1 Operations and workmanship\n+ Code of practice for finishing of wood and wood based materials:\nPart 2 Schedules 1.\nScope – Requirements regarding material, sizes, construction, workmanship, finish, inspection and\ntesting of timber window and ventilator shutters with timber, plywood, blockboard, wireguaze and glass\npanels used in domestic buildings, offices, schools, hospitals, etc. The shutters of windows are usually\ndouble leaved depending upon the design of window, which could be single panelled or multipanelled and\ngenerally with glazing.\n1.1 This standard does not cover timber window and\nventilator shutters, shutters for industrial and other special buildings, such as, workshops, factories and\ngarages having elaborate design and being subjected to rough treatement.\n2.\nTimber – Timber suitable for manufacture of window and ventilator shutters shall be in accordance\nwith IS 12896 : 1990* . The maximum permissible moisture content shall be as specified in IS 287 : 1993+. All\ntimbers shall be kiln seasoned. Timber used for rails and stiles shall be of the same species. Note— For details of materials see 5 of the standard.\n3.\nRequirements\n3.1 Timber Panelling — No single panel shall exceed\n0.5 m2 in area.\n3.2 Plywood Panelling — Thickness not less than 9\nmm for two or more panel construction and 12 mm for single panel construction.\n3.3 Blockboard Panelling — Shall be of one piece of\nthickne 12 mm or more.\n* Classification of Indian timbers for doors and windows\n† Permissible moisture contents for timber used for different purposes (third revision)\n4.\nDimensions, Sizes and Tolerances\n4.1 Dimensions of components and Tolerances :\nDescriptionof Window Shutters Ventilator Shutters\nComponent Width Thickness Width Thickness mm mm mm mm\nStiles and Rails 80 ± 3 25 ± 1 80 ± 3 20 ± 1 30 ± 1 22.5 ± 1 25 ± 1 7.5 ± 1 30 ± 1 Mounting 60 ± 3\n25 ± 1 60 ± 3 - do - 30 ± 1 Glazing bars 40 ± 1 25 ± 1 40 ± 1 - do - 30 ± 1\n4.2 Sizes – a) Window Shutters\nDesignation\nWidth\nHeight (1) (2) (3)\n6 WS 12\n500\n1000\n10 WT 12\n460\n1100\n12 WT 12\n560\n1100\n6 WS 13\n500\n1200\n10 WT 13\n460\n1200\n12 WT 13\n560\n1200 b) Ventilator Shutters\nDesignation\nWidth\nHeight (1) (2) (3) 6 V 6\n500\n500\n10 V 6\n900\n500\n12 V 6\n1100\n500\nNote 1 – Sizes are desired after allowing the thickness of\nthe frame and a margin of 5 mm all round for fitting and fixing into a modular opening based on 100 mm module.\nNote 2 – Window and ventilator shutters are designated by\nsymbols denoting the width (number of modules in the width of opening), type (W = window, V = ventilator, S = single\nshutter, T = double shutter) and height (number of modules in the height of the opening)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1003 (Part 2): 1994",
    "title": "Timber Panelled And Glazed Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "summary": "PART 2 – WINDOW AND VENTILATOR SHUTTERS (Third Revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "shutters",
      "panelled",
      "grains",
      "shutter",
      "ventilator",
      "window",
      "glazed"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Tests": "Shutters shall be tested for resistance to slamming as per the procedure given in Annex C of the standard. there shall be no visible damage caused in any part of the shutter after 50 drops. This test is not applicable to glazed and wire gauzed panelled shutters. For detailed information, refer to IS 1003 (Part 2) : 1994 Specification for timber panelled and glazed shutter: Part 2 Window and ventilator shutter (third revision)"
    },
    "content": "IS 1003 (Part 2): 1994 Timber Panelled And Glazed Shutters\nPART 2 – WINDOW AND VENTILATOR SHUTTERS\n(Third Revision) 4.3 Tolerances on overall dimensions shall be ± 3 mm.\n5.\nFinish\n5.1 Defective knots, when permitted on surfaces\nexposed to view shall be completely bored or cut out and tightly plugged with the same timber species and\nproperly glued in. The grains of the plug shall run in the direction of the grains of the piece.\n5.2 All the surface of shutters which are required to be\npainted or polished or varnished ultimately shall be covered initially before delivery by protective coat of\nprimer polish or varnish.\n6.\nTests – Shutters shall be tested for resistance to slamming as per the procedure given in Annex C of the\nstandard. there shall be no visible damage caused in any part of the shutter after 50 drops. This test is not\napplicable to glazed and wire gauzed panelled shutters.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1003 (Part 2) : 1994 Specification for timber panelled and glazed shutter:\nPart 2 Window and ventilator shutter (third revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1826: 1961",
    "title": "Venetian Blinds For Windows",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "summary": "Covers material, constructional details, sizes and requirements of open head custom made Venetian blinds made of either wood or metal slats.",
    "keywords": [
      "slats",
      "enamel",
      "tapes",
      "wooden",
      "coats",
      "paint",
      "kgf"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers material, constructional details, sizes and requirements of open head custom made Venetian blinds made of either wood or metal slats. 2. Grades a) Grade 1 i) Shall have aluminium slats, ii) Shall have provision for locking slats or have dual ladder for each slat (so that may not flutter), and iii) Shall be capable of being removed instanteously. b) Grade 2 Shall have wooden slats. 3. Materials 3.1 Timber – Wooden slats and rails shall be made from timbers having durability of class I and II timbers as given in IS 399 : 1963.* 3.2 Metal – Aluminium alloy used for rolling of slats shall conform to the prescribed standard. 4. Requirments 4.1 Grade 1 – Shall not exceed 500 cm in width and 10 m2 in area. Grade 2 – Shall not exceed 275 cm in width and 7.5 m2 in area. 4.2 Slat Size 4.2.1 W"
    },
    "content": "IS 1826: 1961 Venetian Blinds For Windows\n1.\nScope – Covers material, constructional details, sizes and requirements of open head custom made\nVenetian blinds made of either wood or metal slats.\n2.\nGrades a)\nGrade 1 i)\nShall have aluminium slats, ii)\nShall have provision for locking slats or have dual ladder for each slat (so that may not\nflutter), and iii) Shall be capable of being removed\ninstanteously.\nb)\nGrade 2\nShall have wooden slats.\n3.\nMaterials\n3.1 Timber – Wooden slats and rails shall be made from\ntimbers having durability of class I and II timbers as given in IS 399 : 1963.*\n3.2 Metal – Aluminium alloy used for rolling of slats\nshall conform to the prescribed standard.\n4. Requirments\n4.1 Grade 1 –\nShall not exceed 500 cm in width and 10 m2 in area.\nGrade 2 –\nShall not exceed 275 cm in width and 7.5 m2 in area.\n4.2 Slat Size\n4.2.1 Wooden – 48 ± 0.5 mm wide and 2.5± 0.3 mm thick.\n4.2.2 Aluminium – 48 ± 0.5 mm wide when formed.\nThickness of coated aluminium slats shall be 0.254 to 0.375 mm with toleranceof ± 0.004 mm.\nNote – For number of slats per blind of different heights\n(drops) see Table 1 of the standard.\n4.3 Tilt Rail – 50 ± 1 mm wide and 20 ± 1 mm thick.\n4.4 Tilting Device – Synchronised worm and gear\ndesign.\n4.5 Cord Lock – Automatic; shall be so designed that\nthe blind can be held at any desired height.\n4.6 Cord – Made of cotton yarn, nylon yarn or a\ncombination of cotton and rayon.\n5.\nFinish\n5.1 Aluminium Slats — Shall be given a pretreatment\nand then suitable coats of primer and upper coats of paint which shall be of high gloss and of baked enamel\ntype.\n5.2 Wooden Slats and Rails — For finishing one coat\nof sealer, one coat of primer-surfacer, putty and two coats of paint shall be applied. . Paint used shall be of\nsemi-gloss good quality enamel or cellulose paint.\n6.\nTesting\n6.1 Aluminium Slats\n6.1.1\nPhysics tests a) Tensile strength, Min : 3375 kgf/cm2\nb)Yeild stress, Min : 3100 kgf/cm2 c) Elongation, Max : 2.5 percent.\n6.1.2\nSalt water test – Shall not show blistering, corrosion, caulking, change of colour and loss of gloss\nand adhesion.\n6.1.3\nCold and hot water test for enamel – Backed enamel finish shall resist soaking in cold water for 48\nhours and for 30 minutes in boiling water. The enamel shall not blister and shall recover same hardness after\nbeing out of water for 2 hours.\n6.1.4\nLight test – Shall withstand the prescribed test.\n* Classification of commercial timber and their zonal distribution. 6.1.5\nRigidity test – Slats shall have sufficient flexibility so as to permit a 180º bend around a 7.5 cm dia cyliner\nwithout harm or permanenet deformation or injury to finish when released to their original shape.\n6.2 Ladder Web\n6.2.1\nColour fastness and shrinkage – Face and cross tapes shall have good colour fastness to light\nand water, and shall not shrink more than 7 percent. 6.2.2 Breaking strength – Face tapes shall have breaking strength of 100 kgf, minimum and cross tapes,\na minimum strength of 7 kgf without breaking or tearing away from the face tapes.\n6.3 Breaking Strength of Cords – At least 80 kgf.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1826 : 1961. Specification for venetian blinds for windows."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2191 (Part 1): 1983",
    "title": "Wooden Flush Door Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding types, sizes, material, construction, workmanship and finish, and tests of cellular and hollow core wooden flush door shutters with face panels of plywood or cross-band and face veneers.",
    "keywords": [
      "shutters",
      "core",
      "cellular",
      "shutter",
      "hollow",
      "door",
      "decorative"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding types, sizes, material, construction, workmanship and finish, and tests of cellular and hollow core wooden flush door shutters with face panels of plywood or cross-band and face veneers. 2. Types Core Type Abbreviation Cellular Decorative CD Non-decorative CN Hollow Decorative HD Non-decorative HN 3. Sizes Designation Width Height mm mm 8 DS 20 700 1905 (1945) 8 DS 21 700 2005 (2045) 9 DS 20 800 1905 (1945) 9 DS 21 800 2005 (2045) 10 DS 20 900 1905 (1945) 10 DS 21 900 2005 (2045) 12 DS 20 1100 1905 (1945) 12 DS 21 1100 2005 (2045) Note 1 – In case the modular height is taken from the finished floor level. the height of the doors hall be the one given in bracket. Note 2 – In arriving at the standard widths and heights, an allowance has been made of 60 mm for door fram",
      "Workmanship And Finish": "All the four edges of the door shutter shall be square. The shutter shall be free from twist or warp in its plane. ± 6.1 Both faces of door shutter shall be sanded to a smooth even texture. If required by the purchaser, all surfaces of shutters which are required to be painted shall be covered evenly by brush painting with a priming coat or primer. In the case of shutters to be polished or varnished, a priming coat of suitable polish or varnish shall be given before delivery. However, only unpainted doors shall be subjected to the tests.",
      "Tests": "Shall satisfy the following tests: 7.1 End Immersion Test 7.2 Knife Test 7.3 Adhesion Test Note : For methods of test, refer to 9 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 2191 (Part 1) : 1983 Specification for wooden flush door shutters (cellular and hollow core type) : Part 1 Plywood face panels (fourth revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 2191 (Part 1): 1983 Wooden Flush Door Shutters\n(CELLULAR AND HOLLOW CORE TYPE)\nPART 1 PLYWOOD FACE PANELS\n(Fourth Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements regarding types, sizes, material, construction, workmanship and finish, and\ntests of cellular and hollow core wooden flush door shutters with face panels of plywood or cross-band and\nface veneers.\n2.\nTypes\nCore\nType\nAbbreviation\nCellular\nDecorative\nCD\nNon-decorative\nCN\nHollow\nDecorative\nHD\nNon-decorative\nHN\n3.\nSizes\nDesignation\nWidth\nHeight mm\nmm 8 DS 20 700\n1905 (1945) 8 DS 21 700\n2005 (2045) 9 DS 20 800\n1905 (1945) 9 DS 21 800\n2005 (2045)\n10 DS 20 900\n1905 (1945)\n10 DS 21 900\n2005 (2045)\n12 DS 20\n1100\n1905 (1945)\n12 DS 21\n1100\n2005 (2045)\nNote 1 – In case the modular height is taken from the finished\nfloor level. the height of the doors hall be the one given in bracket.\nNote 2 – In arriving at the standard widths and heights, an\nallowance has been made of 60 mm for door frames, 40 mm for floor finish and 5 mm clearance all round for the shutter into the\nframe.\nNote 3 – D = Doors, S = Single shutter, and T = Double shutter\nNote 4 – The designation indicates the size of door openings.\nThe first number denoting width in modules of 100 mm and the last number, the height in modules.\n3.1 Thickness – 25, 30 or 35 mm nominal.\n3.2 Tolerances\nNominal width and height +3 mm - 0 mm\nNominal thickness 1.2 mm\n3.2.1. Thickness shall be uniform throughtout with a permissible variation of not more than 0.8 mm when\nmeasured at any two points.\n4.\nMaterials\n4.1 Timber – Moisture content shall not be more than\n12 percent. For species of timber see Appendix A of the standard.\n4.1.1\nTimber shall be free from decay and insect attack.\nKnots and knot holes less than half the width of cross section of the members in which they occur may be\npermitted. Pitch pockets, pitch streaks and harmless pinholes shall be permissible except in the exposed edges\nof the core members where they shall be cut out and filled in with carefully fitted glued pieces of wood of\nsimilar species and character with their grain running in the same direction.\nNote— For details of materials see 5 of the standard.\n5.\nRequirements\n5.1 Plywood for Face Panels\nMinimum thickness for cellular core sutters – 3mm\nMinimum thickness for hollow core shutters for 25 mm thickness – 4 mm.\nMinimum thickness for hollow core shutters of other thickness – 6 mm\n5.2 Rebating – One third thickness for double leaved\nshutters.\n5.3 Shutters – Shall be shop prepared for taking mortice\nlocks or laches.\n6.\nWorkmanship and Finish — All the four edges of the door shutter shall be square. The shutter shall be\nfree from twist or warp in its plane.\n± 6.1 Both faces of door shutter shall be sanded to a\nsmooth even texture. If required by the purchaser, all surfaces of shutters which are required to be painted\nshall be covered evenly by brush painting with a priming coat or primer. In the case of shutters to be polished or\nvarnished, a priming coat of suitable polish or varnish shall be given before delivery. However, only unpainted\ndoors shall be subjected to the tests.\n7.\nTests – Shall satisfy the following tests:\n7.1 End Immersion Test\n7.2 Knife Test\n7.3 Adhesion Test Note : For methods of test, refer to 9 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2191 (Part 1) : 1983 Specification for wooden flush door shutters (cellular and hollow core type) : Part 1 Plywood face panels (fourth revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2191 (Part 2): 1983",
    "title": "Wooden Flush Door Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding material, grade, types, sizes, construction, finishes and tests of wooden flush door shutters of cellular and hollow core type with particle board face panels (both veneered and unveneered) and hard board face panels.",
    "keywords": [
      "particle",
      "skins",
      "decorative",
      "board",
      "veneered",
      "cellular",
      "core"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding material, grade, types, sizes, construction, finishes and tests of wooden flush door shutters of cellular and hollow core type with particle board face panels (both veneered and unveneered) and hard board face panels. 2. Types and designation 2.1 Cellular— Decorative with skins of CDPV decorative veneered particle board. Non-decorative with CNP skins of particle boards unveneered Non-decorative with skins CNPV of particle boards veneered with commercial veneers. 2.2 Hollow — Decorative with skins of HDPV decorative veneered particle board. Non-decorative with skins HNP of particle boards unveneered. Non-decorative with HNPV skins of particle boards veneered with commercial veneers.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "Shall be as given in IS 2191 (Part 1) : 1983. 4. Materials 4.1 Timber – As specified in IS 2191(Part 1) : 1983 Note : For details of materials see 4 of the standard. 5. Requirements 5.1 Face Panels — Particle board or veneered particle board shall not be less than 6 mm thick for cellular core and not less than 9 mm thick for hollow core shutters. Hardboard thickness shall not be less than 4 mm for cellular core and not less than 6 mm for hollow core shutters. 5.2 Shutter shall be shop-prepared for taking mortice locks or latches.",
      "Workmanship And Finish": "All the four edges of the door shutter shall be square. The shutter shall be free from twist or warp in its plane. Both faces of door shutter shall be sanded to a smooth even texture.",
      "Tests": "As per 9 of IS 2191 (Part 1) :1983. For detailed information, refer to IS 2191 (Part 2) : 1983 Specification for wooden flush door shutters (cellular and hollow core type) : Part 2 Particle board and hard board face panels (third revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 2191 (Part 2): 1983 Wooden Flush Door Shutters\n(CELLULAR AND HOLLOW CORE TYPE)\nPART 2 – PARTICLE BOARD AND HARDBOARD FACE PANELS\n(Third Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements regarding material, grade, types, sizes, construction, finishes and tests of wooden\nflush door shutters of cellular and hollow core type with particle board face panels (both veneered and\nunveneered) and hard board face panels.\n2.\nTypes and designation\n2.1\nCellular—\nDecorative with skins of\nCDPV\ndecorative veneered particle board.\nNon-decorative with\nCNP\nskins of particle boards unveneered\nNon-decorative with skins\nCNPV\nof particle boards veneered with commercial veneers.\n2.2\nHollow —\nDecorative with skins of\nHDPV\ndecorative veneered particle board.\nNon-decorative with skins HNP\nof particle boards unveneered.\nNon-decorative with\nHNPV\nskins of particle boards veneered with commercial veneers.\n3.\nSizes and Tolerance – Shall be as given in IS 2191\n(Part 1) : 1983.\n4.\nMaterials\n4.1 Timber – As specified in IS 2191(Part 1) : 1983\nNote : For details of materials see 4 of the standard.\n5.\nRequirements\n5.1 Face Panels — Particle board or veneered particle\nboard shall not be less than 6 mm thick for cellular core and not less than 9 mm thick for hollow core shutters.\nHardboard thickness shall not be less than 4 mm for cellular core and not less than 6 mm for hollow core\nshutters.\n5.2 Shutter shall be shop-prepared for taking mortice\nlocks or latches.\n6.\nWorkmanship and Finish – All the four edges of the door shutter shall be square. The shutter shall be\nfree from twist or warp in its plane. Both faces of door shutter shall be sanded to a smooth even texture.\n7.\nTests —As per 9 of IS 2191 (Part 1) :1983.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2191 (Part 2) : 1983 Specification for wooden flush door shutters (cellular and hollow core type) : Part 2 Particle board and hard board face panels (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2202 (Part 1): 1999",
    "title": "Wooden Flush Door Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding types, sizes, material, consttruction, workmanship and finish, and tests, of solid core wooden flush door shutters with face panels of plywood or cross-band and face veneers.",
    "keywords": [
      "decorative",
      "door",
      "shutter",
      "particle",
      "shutters",
      "skins",
      "panels"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding material, grade, types, sizes, construction, finishes and tests of wooden flush door shutters of solid core type with particle board face panels (both veneered and unveneered) and hard- board face panels. 2. Types and designation 2.1 Block Decorative with skins of BDPV board decorative veneered particle board. Non-decorative with skins BNP of particle boards unveneered. Non-decorative with skins BNPV of particle boards veneered with commercial veneers. 2.2 Particle Decorative with skins of PDPV* Boardwith decorative veneered particle or without board. Blockboard Non-decorative with skins PNP* of particle boards unveneered. Non-decorative with skins PNPV* of particle boards veneered with commercial veneers. * Where particle board beaded core is used, the designations ",
      "Workmanship And Finish": "All the four edges of the door shutter shall be square. The shutter shall be free from twist or warp in its plane. 6.1 Both faces of door shutter shall be sanded to a smooth even texture.",
      "Tests": "Shall satisfy the tests prescribed in the standard."
    },
    "content": "IS 2202 (Part 1): 1999 Wooden Flush Door Shutters\n(SOLID CORE TYPE)\nPART 1 PLYWOOD FACE PANELS\n(Sixth Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements regarding types, sizes, material, consttruction, workmanship and finish, and\ntests, of solid core wooden flush door shutters with face panels of plywood or cross-band and face veneers.\n2.\nType and Construction\nSl.No. Core\nType\nAbbreviation\n(1) (2)\n(3)\n(4)\ni) Blockboard\nDecorative\nBD\nNon-decorative\nBN\nii) Particle board\nDecorative\nPD with or without\nNon-decorative\nPN blockboard iii) Medium density\nDecorative\nMD fibreboard with\nNon-decorative\nMN or without blockboard\n3.\nSizes Sl.\nDesignation of\nWidth\nHeight No.\ndoors mm mm i) 8 DS 20 700\n1905 (1945)\nii)\n8 DS 21 700\n2005 ( 2045)\niii)\n9 DS 20 800\n1905 (1945)\niv) 9 DS 21 800\n2005 ( 2045)\nv)\n10 DS 20 900\n1905 (1945)\nvi)\n10 DS 21 900\n2005 ( 2045)\nvii)\n12 DT 20 1100*\n1905 (1945)\nviii)\n12 DT 21 1100*\n2005 ( 2045)\nNote 1 – D–Doors, S – Single shutter, and T– Double leaf shutter.\nNote 2 —The designation indicates the size of door openings.\nthe first number referring to width in modules of 100 mm and the last number, the height in modules of 100 mm.\n*Combined width of two shutters in closed position.\n3.1 Thickness – Nominal thickness shall be 25 mm, 30\nmm and 35 mm.\n4.\nMaterial\n4.1 Timber – Moisture content shall not exceed 12\npercent. Timber shall be free from decay and insect attack. Knots and knot holes less than half the width of\ncross section of the members in which they occur may be permitted. Pitch pockets, pitch streaks and harmless\npin holes shall be permissible except in the exposed edges of the core members where they shall be cut out\nand filled in with carefully fitted glued pieces of wood of similar species and character with their grain running\nin the same direction.\nNote 1 – For species of timber see Annex B of the standard.\nNote 2 – For details of materials see 6 of the standard.\nNote 3 – In arriving at the standard width and heights for\nflush door shutters an allowance of 60 mm has been made for door frames 40 mm for floor finish, 5 mm for clearance all\nround and 15 mm for rebate all round for shutter in to the frame.\nNote 4 – If modular height of door opening is taken from\nfinished floor level. The height of flush door shall be the one given in the brackets.\n5.\nConstruction\n5.1 Face Panels – Thickness of crossbands shall be\nbetween 1 mm and 3 mm. Thickness of face veneers shall be between 0.4 mm to 1.5 mm for commercial veneer\nand 0.35 mm to 1.0 mm for decorative veneers provided the combined thickness of both is not less than 2.2 mm.\n5.2 Stiles and Rails – Stiles shall be made with maximum\none finger or scarftype joint as per 7.3 of the standard\nThe rails Shall be made without any joint.\n5.3 Rebating – Shall be 8 mm to 10 mm in case of\ndouble leaved shutters. Note - for details of materials see 7 of the standard. 6.\nWorkmanship and Finish – All the four edges of the door shutter shall be square. Both faces of the door\nshutter shall be sanded to a smooth even texture.\n7.\nTests – Flush door shutters shall be subjected to the following tests –\ni)\nDimensions and squareness test ii)\nGeneral flatness test iii)\nLocal planeness test iv)\nImpact indentation test v)\nFlexure test vi)\nEdge loading test vii)\nShock resistance test viii)\nBuckling test ix)\nSlamming test x)\nMisuse test xi)\nVarying humidity test xii)\nEnd immersion test xiii)\nKnife test xiv)\nGlue adhesion test xv)\nScrew withdrawal test. Note - For details of requirements please refer 11 of the standard. Note — For methods of test, refer to IS 4020 (Part 1 to 16) : 1998 Door shutters - methods of test.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2202 : 1999 Specification for wooden flush door shutters (solid core type)\nPart 1 Plywood face panels (sixth revision). 1.\nScope – Requirements regarding material, grade, types, sizes, construction, finishes and tests of wooden\nflush door shutters of solid core type with particle board face panels (both veneered and unveneered) and hard-\nboard face panels.\n2.\nTypes and designation\n2.1 Block\nDecorative with skins of BDPV board\ndecorative veneered particle board.\nNon-decorative with skins BNP of particle boards\nunveneered.\nNon-decorative with skins BNPV of particle boards veneered\nwith commercial veneers.\n2.2 Particle\nDecorative with skins of PDPV*\nBoardwith decorative veneered particle\nor without board.\nBlockboard Non-decorative with skins PNP* of particle boards\nunveneered.\nNon-decorative with skins PNPV* of particle boards veneered\nwith commercial veneers.\n* Where particle board beaded core is used, the designations will be PEDPV, PENP and PENPV respectively.\n3.\nSizes and Tolerance\nDesignation Width\nHeight of Doors mm mm 8 DS 20 700\n1905 (1945) 8 DS 21 700\n2005 (2045) 9 DS 20 800\n1905 (1945) 9 DS 21 800\n2005 (2045)\n10 DS 20 900\n1905 (1945)\n10 DS 21 900\n2005 (2045)\n12 DT 20\n1100+\n1905 (1945)\n12 DT 21\n1100+\n2005 (2045) Note 1 —D = Doors, S = Single shuttern and T = Double\nshutter. Note 2— The designation indicates the size of door opening.the\nfirst number referring to width in modules of 100 mm and that last number, the height in modules. Note 3—In case the modular height is taken from the finishe\nfloor level. the height of the door shall be the one given in bracket. Note 4 — In arriving at the standard widths and heights, an\nallowance has been made of 60 mm for door frames, 40 mm for floor finish and 5 mm clearance all round and 15 mm for rebate\nfor the shutter into the frame.\n† Combined width of two shutters in closed position.\n3.1 Thickness — Flush Door Designation Thickness of Shutter 8 DS 20 and 8 DS 21\n25 9 DS 20 and 9 DS 21 30 or 35\n10 DS 20 and 10 DS 21\n35\n12 DT 20 and 12 DT 21\n35\n3.2\nTolerances — Tolerances on nominal width and height shall be and the tolerance on nominal thickness shall be\n. mm. The thickness of the door shutter shall be uniform throughout with a permissible\nvariation of not more than 0.8 mm when measured at any two points.\n4.\nMaterials\n4.1 Timber – As per IS 2202 (Part 1) : 1999.\nNote— For details of materials see 4 of the standard.\n5.\nRequirements\n5.1 Face Panels – Thickness of the face panels of\nparticle board shall be not less than 4 mm and of hardboard not less than 3 mm.\n5.2 Locks – Shutters shall be shop-prepared for taking\nmortice locks or latches.\n6.\nWorkmanship and Finish – All the four edges of the door shutter shall be square. The shutter shall be\nfree from twist or warp in its plane.\n6.1 Both faces of door shutter shall be sanded to a\nsmooth even texture.\n7.\nTests – Shall satisfy the tests prescribed in the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2202 (Part 2): 1983",
    "title": "Wooden Flush Door Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "summary": "(SOLID CORE TYPE) PART 2 PARTICLE BOARD AND HARDBOARD FACE PANELS (Third Revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 2202 (Part 2) :1983 Specification for wooden flush door shutters (solid core type) : Part 2 Particle board and har board face panels (third revision). 2.1 0 3 ± − +",
    "keywords": [
      "board",
      "panels",
      "core",
      "particle",
      "har",
      "solid",
      "face"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 2202 (Part 2): 1983 Wooden Flush Door Shutters\n(SOLID CORE TYPE)\nPART 2 PARTICLE BOARD AND HARDBOARD FACE PANELS\n(Third Revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2202 (Part 2) :1983 Specification for wooden flush door shutters (solid core type) : Part 2 Particle board and har board face panels (third revision).\n2.1\n0\n3 ±\n−\n+"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4021: 1995",
    "title": "Timber Door, Window And Ventilator Frames",
    "category": "Cement and Concrete",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding material, construction, workmanship and sizes of timber door, window and ventilator frames generally used in residential and institutional buildings. 1.1 This standard does not cover timber door, window and ventilator frames for commercial, industrial and other special buildings, such as, workshops and garages.",
    "keywords": [
      "modules",
      "frame",
      "shutter",
      "frames",
      "timber",
      "ventilator",
      "windows"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding material, construction, workmanship and sizes of timber door, window and ventilator frames generally used in residential and institutional buildings. 1.1 This standard does not cover timber door, window and ventilator frames for commercial, industrial and other special buildings, such as, workshops and garages. 2. Timber 2.1 Indian timbers suitables shall be in accordance with IS 12896 : 1990.* For imported timber see Annex B of the standard. 2.2 Moisture Content—Shall be as per IS 287:1993+. 2.3 Seasoning and Treatment – Shall be well seasoned as per IS 1141 : 1993‡. and treated as per IS 401 : 1982§. 2.4 Defects Prohibited – Timber for frames shall be free from decay, fungal growth, boxed heart, splits, pitch pocket or streakes on exposed faces. 2.5 Defects Permitt",
      "Workmanship": "All members of frame shall be exactly at right angles. The depth of rebate in frame for housing the shutter shall in all cases be 15 mm except for small window and ventilator frames where it shall be 12 mm. 3.1 Joinery Frames of timber doors, windows and ventilators shall be assembled by any of the following simple, neat and strong joints: a) Single dovetail joint b) Closed mortice and tenon joint. c) Haunched mortice and tenon joint. 4. Dimensions, Sizes and Tolerances 4.1 Dimensions — See Table 1. TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS Requirements Dimensions, mm Door Window Ventilator Size > 120 cm < 120 cm (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) a) Width of frame carrying one set of shutter i) For 35, 40 mm shutter 100 100 90 90 ii) For 25, 30 mm shutter 90 90 90 90 b) Width of frame carryin",
      "Finish": "The unexposed surfaces in contact with eiter wall or lintel shall be properly painted with coal tar pitch. 5.1 All surfaces of door, window and ventilator frame which are required to be painted ultimately shall be covered evenly by brush painting with a priming coat of wood primer. 5.2 In the case of frames to be polished or varnished, a priming coat of suitable polish or varnish shall be given. For detailed information, refer to IS 4021 : 1995 Timber door, window and ventilator frames (third revision)"
    },
    "content": "IS 4021: 1995 Timber Door, Window And Ventilator Frames\n(Third Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements regarding material, construction, workmanship and sizes of timber door,\nwindow and ventilator frames generally used in residential and institutional buildings.\n1.1 This standard does not cover timber door, window\nand ventilator frames for commercial, industrial and other special buildings, such as, workshops and garages.\n2.\nTimber\n2.1 Indian timbers suitables shall be in accordance with\nIS 12896 : 1990.* For imported timber see Annex B of the standard.\n2.2 Moisture Content—Shall be as per IS 287:1993+.\n2.3 Seasoning and Treatment – Shall be well seasoned\nas per IS 1141 : 1993‡. and treated as per IS 401 : 1982§.\n2.4 Defects Prohibited – Timber for frames shall be\nfree from decay, fungal growth, boxed heart, splits, pitch pocket or streakes on exposed faces.\n2.5 Defects Permitted— Shall be graded as first or\nsecond grade on the basis of permissible defects as given in Table 1 of the standard.\n3.\nWorkmanship—All members of frame shall be exactly at right angles. The depth of rebate in frame for\nhousing the shutter shall in all cases be 15 mm except for small window and ventilator frames where it shall be\n12 mm.\n3.1 Joinery\nFrames of timber doors, windows and ventilators shall be assembled by any of the following simple, neat\nand strong joints:\na)\nSingle dovetail joint b)\nClosed mortice and tenon joint.\nc)\nHaunched mortice and tenon joint.\n4.\nDimensions, Sizes and Tolerances\n4.1 Dimensions — See Table 1.\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF DOORS, WINDOWS AND VENTILATORS\nRequirements Dimensions, mm\nDoor\nWindow\nVentilator\nSize > 120 cm\n< 120 cm\n(1) (2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\na) Width of frame carrying one set of shutter\ni) For 35, 40 mm shutter\n100\n100 90 90 ii) For 25, 30 mm shutter 90 90 90 90 b)\nWidth of frame carrying two sets of shutters\ni) For 30, 35 and 40 mm shutter\n120\n120\n120\n120 ii) For 25 mm shutter 90 90 90 90 c) Thickness 60 60 50 50 * Classification of Indian timber for door and window shutters and frames. † Permissible moisture content for timber used for different purposes (third revision) ‡ Seasoning of timber (second revision) § Preservation of timber (third revision) 4.2 Tolerance + 3\n—0 mm for width and +2\n—3 mm for thickness\n4.3 Designation–In the order of width, type and\nheight.\na) Width — It shall be indicated by the number of modules in the width of opening.\nb) Type — It shall be indicated by the following letter of alphabet.\nD for door\nW for window\nV for ventilator\nS for single shutter\nT for double shutter\nNote—where a frame is intended to carry two sets of\nshutters, the frame shall be designated as DD, WW and VV.\nc) Height— It shall be indicated by the number of modules in height of opening.\nExample —‘12 DT 20’ would mean a frame of double shutter door with a width of 12 modules (119\ncm) and height of 20 modules (199 cm).\n4.4 Combination of Frames of Doors, windows and\nVentilators – When frames of door and windows are combined with those of windows and ventilators, they\nshall be designated as illustrated below. However size of frame for such combination shall be uniform for doors,\nwindows and ventilators, by choosing the highest recommended dimension.\nExample 1—‘ 6 WS 12/12 DT 20/6WS 12’ means 12 modules wide and 20 modules high double shutter door\nframe comibned in its two sides with two windows, 6 modules wide and 12 modules high.\nExample 2 6 V 6\n6 WS 12\n6 V 6\n6 WS 12\nTwo single windows of 6 modules wide and 12 modules high combined side by side and with two ventilators at\ntop 6 modules wide and 6 modules high.\n5.\nFinish – The unexposed surfaces in contact with eiter wall or lintel shall be properly painted with coal tar\npitch.\n5.1 All surfaces of door, window and ventilator frame\nwhich are required to be painted ultimately shall be covered evenly by brush painting with a priming coat\nof wood primer.\n5.2 In the case of frames to be polished or varnished, a\npriming coat of suitable polish or varnish shall be given.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4021 : 1995 Timber door, window and ventilator frames (third revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4962: 1968",
    "title": "Wooden Side Sliding Doors",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding material, type, shape fabrication, assembly and finish of wooden side sliding doors (of the straight sliding type), its gear components and fittings.",
    "keywords": [
      "sliding",
      "roller",
      "guides",
      "arrangement",
      "wooden",
      "side",
      "panels"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding material, type, shape fabrication, assembly and finish of wooden side sliding doors (of the straight sliding type), its gear components and fittings.",
      "Types": "Classified in accordance with mode of sliding of panels into the frame unit. Types 1 to 5 give clear opening, while Types 6 and 7 need no space at the sides. Overall size of door shall be such as to cover modular opening completely. Note – For typical arrangement of panels of side sliding door see Fig. 2 of the standard. 3. Materials 3.1 Rolled steel sections shall be of weldable quality conforming to the prescribed standard. 3.2 Tracks – Made of 2 mm thick structural steel sheet, galvanized. 3.3 Roller – Shall conform to the prescribed standard. 3.4 Guides – Gun metal. 3.5 Brackets – Cast iron. 3.6 Shutter – Made of wood in accordance with the prescribed standard.",
      "Operation": "Shall be capable of being operated in either direction with force not exceeding 3 kg/m of panel width, when panel is in motion.",
      "Finish": "All components machined and finished smooth. Roller guides, fittings for locking arrangement, brackets, etc may be hot-dip galvanized."
    },
    "content": "IS 4962: 1968 Wooden Side Sliding Doors\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4962 : 1968 Specification for wooden side sliding doors. 1. Scope — Requirements regarding material, type,\nshape fabrication, assembly and finish of wooden side sliding doors (of the straight sliding type), its gear\ncomponents and fittings.\n2.\nTypes and Sizes — Classified in accordance with mode of sliding of panels into the frame unit. Types 1 to\n5 give clear opening, while Types 6 and 7 need no space at the sides. Overall size of door shall be such as to\ncover modular opening completely.\nNote – For typical arrangement of panels of side sliding door\nsee Fig. 2 of the standard.\n3.\nMaterials\n3.1 Rolled steel sections shall be of weldable quality\nconforming to the prescribed standard.\n3.2 Tracks – Made of 2 mm thick structural steel sheet,\ngalvanized.\n3.3 Roller – Shall conform to the prescribed standard.\n3.4 Guides – Gun metal.\n3.5 Brackets – Cast iron.\n3.6 Shutter – Made of wood in accordance with the\nprescribed standard.\n4.\nOperation – Shall be capable of being operated in either direction with force not exceeding 3 kg/m of panel\nwidth, when panel is in motion.\n5.\nFinish – All components machined and finished smooth. Roller guides, fittings for locking arrangement,\nbrackets, etc may be hot-dip galvanized."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6198: 1992",
    "title": "Ledged, Braced And Battened Timber Door Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding material, sizes, construction, workmanship and finish of ledged, braced and battened timber door shutters.",
    "keywords": [
      "shutter",
      "door",
      "shutters",
      "timber",
      "ledged",
      "braced",
      "battened"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding material, sizes, construction, workmanship and finish of ledged, braced and battened timber door shutters. 2. Material 2.1 Timber – Suitable for manufacture shall be as per IS 12896 : 1990.* Moisture content shall be between 8 to 14 percent. 2.2 All timbers shall be kiln seasoned. Sapwood of durable species and heartwood and sapwood of nondurable species shall be treated with suitable preservative (except the water soluble leachable type). 2.3 Timber shall be free from decay, fungal growth, boxed heart, pitch pockets or streakes on the exposed edges, borer holes, splits and cracks. 2.4 Timber shall be graded as first or second grade as given in Table 1 of the standard on the basis of permissible defects.",
      "Designation": "Door shutter shall be designated by symbols denoting the width, type and height of door in succession in the following manner : a) Width –It shall be indicated by the number of modules of 100 mm in the width of door opening. b) Type – D = Door, S = Single shutter, T = Double leaf shutter. c) Height – It shall be indicated by the number of modules of 100 mm in the height of door opening. TABLE 1 DIMENSION OF DOOR SHUTTERS Designation ` Width Height of Doors mm mm 8 DS 20 700 1905 (1945) 8 DS 21 700 2005 (2045) 9 DS 20 800 1905 (1945) 9 DS 21 800 2005 (2045) 10 DS 20 900 1905 (1945) 10 DS 21 900 2005 (2045) 12 DT 20 1100+ 1905 (1945) 12 DT 21 1100+ 2005 (2045) * Classification of indian timbers for doors and window shutters and frames. + Combined width of double leaf shutter in closed positi",
      "Workmanship And Finish": "All battens of the shutter shall be sanded and finished smooth. 5.1 Defective knots, where permitted in surfaces exposed to view, shall be completely bored or cut out and tightly plugged with cross-gained plug (round or dovetailed) of similar spices of timber and shall be properly glued. All the surfaces of door shutters which are required to be painted or polished or varnished ultimately shall be covered initially before delivery by protective coat of primer polish or varnish. 6. Tests a) Slamming test, b) Shock resistance test, c) Edge loading test and d) Resistance to buckling test type tests only. For detailed information, refer to IS 6198 : 1992. Specification for ledged, braced and battened timber door shutters (second revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 6198: 1992 Ledged, Braced And Battened Timber Door Shutters\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements regarding material, sizes, construction, workmanship and finish of ledged, braced\nand battened timber door shutters.\n2.\nMaterial\n2.1 Timber – Suitable for manufacture shall be as per IS\n12896 : 1990.* Moisture content shall be between 8 to\n14 percent.\n2.2 All timbers shall be kiln seasoned. Sapwood of\ndurable species and heartwood and sapwood of nondurable species shall be treated with suitable preservative\n(except the water soluble leachable type).\n2.3 Timber shall be free from decay, fungal growth,\nboxed heart, pitch pockets or streakes on the exposed edges, borer holes, splits and cracks.\n2.4 Timber shall be graded as first or second grade as\ngiven in Table 1 of the standard on the basis of permissible defects.\n3.\nDesignation – Door shutter shall be designated by symbols denoting the width, type and height of door in\nsuccession in the following manner :\na) Width –It shall be indicated by the number of modules of 100 mm in the width of door\nopening.\nb) Type – D = Door, S = Single shutter, T =\nDouble leaf shutter.\nc) Height – It shall be indicated by the number of modules of 100 mm in the height\nof door opening.\nTABLE 1 DIMENSION OF DOOR SHUTTERS\nDesignation `\nWidth\nHeight of Doors\nmm mm 8 DS 20 700\n1905 (1945) 8 DS 21 700\n2005 (2045) 9 DS 20 800\n1905 (1945) 9 DS 21 800\n2005 (2045)\n10 DS 20 900\n1905 (1945)\n10 DS 21 900\n2005 (2045)\n12 DT 20\n1100+\n1905 (1945)\n12 DT 21\n1100+\n2005 (2045)\n* Classification of indian timbers for doors and window shutters and frames.\n+ Combined width of double leaf shutter in closed position.\nNote – In arriving at the standard widths and heights,and allowance\nhas been made of 60 mm for door frames, 40 mm forfloor finish and 5 mm clearance all round and 15 mm for rebate all\nround for the shutter into the frame.\nExample – 8 DS 21 would mean a shutter suitable for a single shutter door of 8 module width and 21 module\nheight.\n4.\nDimension and Tolerances\nDescription\nWidth Thickness mm\nmm\nTop and bottom edges\n150 ±1.5\n25 ±1.5\nMiddle Ledge\n200 ±1.5\n25 ±1.5\nBraces\n110 to 125\n25 ±1.5\nBattens\n140 to 160\n25 ±1.5 (depending upon the width of the shutter) Tolerances of sizes of door shutter shall be ± 3mm.\n5.\nWorkmanship and Finish – All battens of the shutter shall be sanded and finished smooth.\n5.1 Defective knots, where permitted in surfaces\nexposed to view, shall be completely bored or cut out and tightly plugged with cross-gained plug (round or\ndovetailed) of similar spices of timber and shall be properly glued. All the surfaces of door shutters which\nare required to be painted or polished or varnished ultimately shall be covered initially before delivery by\nprotective coat of primer polish or varnish.\n6.\nTests a)\nSlamming test, b)\nShock resistance test, c)\nEdge loading test and d)\nResistance to buckling test type tests only.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6198 : 1992. Specification for ledged, braced and battened timber door shutters (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 15380: 2003",
    "title": "Moulded Raised High Density Fibre (Hdf) Panel Doors",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "summary": "This standard lays down requirements regarding types, sizes, material, construction, workmanship and finish and tests for high density fibre (HDF) panel doors.",
    "keywords": [
      "module",
      "windows",
      "hung",
      "shutters",
      "ventilators",
      "doors",
      "door"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding material, fabrication and finish of steel doors, windows, ventilators and fixed-lights manufactured from rolled steel sections to specified sizes and designs. This standard does not cover steel doors, windows,ventilators and fixed-lights for use in industrial buildings",
      "Requirements": "For details refer 11 of the standard TABLE 2 REQUIREMENTS FOR RAISED PANEL FIBREBOARD SKINS Sl. No. Requirements Permissible Limits Method of Test (1) (2) (3) (4) i) Density, kg/m3 > 1 000 2380 (Part 3) ii) Moisture content, percent Max 8 2380 (Part 3) iii) Water absorption, percent 2380 (Part 3) After 2 h < 16 After 24 h < 36 iv) Swelling in water, percent, Max 2380 (Part 17) a) General absorption, 24 h: 1) Thickness 20 2) Length 0.70 3) Width 0.70 b) Surface absorptiong 9 v) Modulus of rupture, N/mm2 Min 35 2380 (Part 4) vi) Internal bond strength, N/mm2 Min. 2380 (Part 5) a) Dry state 1.0 b) Wet state ( 2 h boiling) 0.3 vii) Immersion in boiling water at No. 100 ± 3ººC for 4 h Disintegration viii) Formaldehyde emission < 9 mg / 100 g 13745 For detailed information, refer to IS 15380 : 2",
      "Designation": "The direction of closing and faces of doors, windows and shutters shall be designated in accordance with IS 4043 : 1969.* 3. Sizes, Tolerances and Designation 3.1 Doors 6 HS 20 8 HS 20 10 HS 20 12 HS 20 6 HS 21 8 HS 21 10 HS 21 12 HS 21 3.2 Windows 5 HS 9 10 HS 9 15 HS 9 5 HS 12 10 HS 12 15 HS 12 5 HS 15 10 HS 15 15 HS 15 6 HS 9 12 HS 9 18 HS 9 6 HS 12 12 HS 12 18 HS 12 6 HS 15 12 HS 15 18 HS 15 3.3 Ventilators 5 HT 6 10 HT 6 15 HT 6 5 HC 6 10 HC 6 15 HC 6 5 HT 9 - - 6 HT 6 - - 6 HC 6 12 HT 6 18 HT 6 6 HT 9 12 HC 6 18 HC 6 3.4 Fixed - Lights 5 HF 6 10 HF 6 15 HF 6 5 HF 9 10 HF 9 15 HF 9 5 HF 12 10 HF 12 15 HF 12 5 HF 15 10 HF 15 15 HF 15 6 HF 6 12 HF 6 18 HF 6 6 HF 9 12 HF 9 18 HF 9 6 HF 12 12 HF 12 18 HF 12 6 HF 15 12 HF 15 18 HF 15 Note 1– Doors, windows and ventilators without horizonta"
    },
    "content": "IS 15380: 2003 Moulded Raised High Density Fibre (Hdf) Panel Doors\n1.\nScope – This standard lays down requirements regarding types, sizes, material, construction,\nworkmanship and finish and tests for high density fibre\n(HDF) panel doors.\n2.\nTypes\nDoor shuttes shall be of following two types:\n(a) Heavy Duty – having void area less than 35 percent, and\n(b) Light Duty – having void area not exceeding 65 percent\n3. Size\n3.1 Sizes of the door shutters shall generally conform to\nteh sizes given in table 1. Other sizes, that is, width and height, as agreed to between the manufacturer and the\npurchaser, are also permitted provided they are in modules of 5 mm\n3.2 The nominal thickness of the shuttes shall be 30\nmm, 35 mm and 40 mm\n4. Material\n4.1 Timber\n4.1.1 Any species of timber having minimum bulk density of 450 kg/m3 at 12 percent moisture content may\nbe used for rails, stiles and core fillings of door shutters.\nTable 1 Dimensions of Door Shutters\n(Clause 5.1)\nSl.No.\nWidth\nHeight mm\nOption 1\nOption 2 mm\nmm\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\ni)\n700\n2 005\n–\nii)\n700\n2 045\n2 070 iii)\n800\n2 045\n2 070 iv)\n900\n2 045\n2 070 v)\n1 000\n2 045\n2 070 vi)\n1 000\n2 045\n2 070\n4.2 Raised Fibreboard Skin\nRaised fibre board skin used in door shutters shall be of minimum thickness 3 mm of phenolic bonded high\ndensity fibre board conforming to the requirement given in Table 2.\n4.3 Adhesive\nAdhesive used for bonding the face skins and core shall be phenol formaldehyde synthetic resin adhesive\nconforming to BWP grade of IS 848. For details on mateirals refer 6 of the standard.\n5. Fittings\n5.1 Locks\nShutters shall be shop preapred for taking any suitable type of locks or latches as may be agreed to between\nthe manufacturer and the purchaser. Shop preparing the door with morticed holes for lock fixing shall be\ndone only when desired by the purchaser.\n5.1.1 Other fittings such as pull bolt, etc, sahll be provided as agreed to beteen teh purchaser and the\nmanufacturer.\n6. Workmanship and finish\n6.1 All the four edges of the door shutter shall be square.\nThe shutter shall be free from twist or warp in its plane.\n6.2 The surface of the shutter shall be pre - rimed. The\nshutter may be supplied either in textured or smooth surface finish as agreed to between the purchaswer and\nthe manufacturer.\n7. Test\n7.1 Classification of Tests\n7.1.1 Acceptance Tests\nThe following tests shall constitute product acceptance\n(a) Dimension and sqaureness test\n(b) General flatness test,\n(c) Local planeness test,\n(d) End immersion test,\n(e) Glue adhesion test, and\n(f) Slamming test 7.1.2 Type Tests\nThe following tests shall constitute product approval type tests:\n(a) Impact indentation test,\n(b) Flexure test\n(c) Edge loading test,\n(e) Shock resistance test: 1) Soft and light body impact test, 2) Soft and heavy body impact test,\n(f) Misuse test,\n(g) Screw withdrawal resistance test, and\n(h) Varying humidity test.\n8. Requirements– For details refer 11 of the standard\nTABLE 2 REQUIREMENTS FOR RAISED PANEL FIBREBOARD SKINS\nSl. No.\nRequirements\nPermissible Limits\nMethod of Test\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\ni)\nDensity, kg/m3\n> 1 000\n2380 (Part 3)\nii)\nMoisture content, percent Max\n8\n2380 (Part 3)\niii)\nWater absorption, percent\n2380 (Part 3)\nAfter 2 h\n< 16\nAfter 24 h\n< 36 iv)\nSwelling in water, percent, Max\n2380 (Part 17)\na) General absorption, 24 h:\n1) Thickness\n20\n2) Length\n0.70\n3) Width\n0.70 b) Surface absorptiong\n9 v)\nModulus of rupture, N/mm2 Min\n35\n2380 (Part 4)\nvi)\nInternal bond strength, N/mm2 Min.\n2380 (Part 5)\na) Dry state\n1.0 b) Wet state ( 2 h boiling)\n0.3 vii)\nImmersion in boiling water at\nNo.\n100 ± 3ººC for 4 h\nDisintegration viii)\nFormaldehyde emission\n< 9 mg / 100 g\n13745\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 15380 : 2003 Moulded raised high density fibre (HDF) panel doors specification 1.\nScope – Requirements regarding material, fabrication and finish of steel doors, windows,\nventilators and fixed-lights manufactured from rolled steel sections to specified sizes and designs.\nThis standard does not cover steel doors, windows,ventilators and fixed-lights for use in industrial\nbuildings\n2.\nSymbolic Designation – The direction of closing and faces of doors, windows and shutters shall be\ndesignated in accordance with IS 4043 : 1969.*\n3.\nSizes, Tolerances and Designation\n3.1 Doors\n6 HS 20\n8 HS 20\n10 HS 20\n12 HS 20\n6 HS 21\n8 HS 21\n10 HS 21\n12 HS 21\n3.2 Windows\n5 HS 9\n10 HS 9\n15 HS 9\n5 HS 12\n10 HS 12\n15 HS 12\n5 HS 15\n10 HS 15\n15 HS 15\n6 HS 9\n12 HS 9\n18 HS 9\n6 HS 12\n12 HS 12\n18 HS 12\n6 HS 15\n12 HS 15\n18 HS 15\n3.3 Ventilators\n5 HT 6\n10 HT 6\n15 HT 6\n5 HC 6\n10 HC 6\n15 HC 6\n5 HT 9 - -\n6 HT 6 - -\n6 HC 6\n12 HT 6\n18 HT 6\n6 HT 9\n12 HC 6\n18 HC 6\n3.4 Fixed - Lights\n5 HF 6\n10 HF 6\n15 HF 6\n5 HF 9\n10 HF 9\n15 HF 9\n5 HF 12\n10 HF 12\n15 HF 12\n5 HF 15\n10 HF 15\n15 HF 15\n6 HF 6\n12 HF 6\n18 HF 6\n6 HF 9\n12 HF 9\n18 HF 9\n6 HF 12\n12 HF 12\n18 HF 12\n6 HF 15\n12 HF 15\n18 HF 15 Note 1– Doors, windows and ventilators without horizontal\nglazing bars shall be designated by ‘N’ in place of ‘H’ in the range shown.\nNote 2 – These sizes are derived after allowing 10 mm clearance\non all the four sides for the purpose of fitting.\nNote 3 – Doors, windows, ventilators and fixed light, shall be\ndesignated by symbols denoting their width (number of modules in the width of opening), type (C=centre hung shutter, F=fixed\nglass panes, H=with horizontal glazing bars, N=without horizontal glazing bars, S=side hung shutters, T= top hung\nshutters ) and height (number of modules in the height of opening).\n3.5 Tolerance – ±1.5 mm.\n3.6 Example\na) A window of a width of 10 modules and height\n12 modules having horizontal glazing bars and side hung shutters is designated by 10 HS 12.\nb) A 12 module wide and 21 module high horizontally glazed side hung door coupled on its two sides\nwith two side hung horizontally glazed windows,\n6 module wide and 12 module high is designated by 6 HS12/ 12 HS 21/ 6 HS 12.\nc) Two 10 module wide and 12 module high horizontally glazed side hung windows coupled\nside by side with two horizontally glazed fixedlights at top, each 10 module wide and 6 module\nhigh, is designated by:\n4.\nMaterials\n4.1 Rolled Steel Sections – Shall conform to IS 7452 :\n1990.*\n4.2 Glass Panes – Minimum 3 mm thick and shall\nconform to IS 2835 : 1987.** Note – For sizes of glass panes see Table 1 of the standard.\n* Hot rolled sttel sections for doors, windows and ventilators\n(second revision)\n** Flat transparent sheet glass (third revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1038: 1983",
    "title": "Steel Door, Windows And Ventilators",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "summary": "(Fifth Revision) * Symbolic designation of directions of closing and faces of doors, windows and shutters. 10 HF 6 / 10 HF 6 10 HS 12 / 10 HS 12",
    "keywords": [
      "projecting",
      "hinges",
      "doors",
      "windows",
      "hung",
      "weather",
      "shutter"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Finish": "Painting or phosphating and painting or hot dipped galvanizing."
    },
    "content": "IS 1038: 1983 Steel Door, Windows And Ventilators\n(Fifth Revision)\n* Symbolic designation of directions of closing and faces of doors, windows and shutters.\n10 HF 6 / 10 HF 6\n10 HS 12 / 10 HS 12 5.\nFabrication\n5.1 Side Hung Shutters – Hinges projecting type 65\nmm to 75 mm wide. Friction hinges or Non-projecting type of hinges may also be used. 5.1.1 Handle – Shall be of pressed brass, cast brass, aluminium or steel.\n5.2 Centre Hung Windows and Ventilators – Windows\nshall be hung on two pairs of brass or aluminium cup pivots riveted to the inner or outer frames of window to\nswing to an angle of approximately 850. The opening portion of the window shall be so balanced that it\nremains open at any desired angle under normal weather conditions. Note: For details regarding position of holes, fixing screws and lugs see 7 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1038 : 1983 Specification for steel doors, windows and ventilators\n(third revision).\n5.3 Weather Bar – Where fixed light occurs over external\nopening shutter, a push fit weather bar shall be provided.\n5.4 Doors – Hinges for doors shall be of 50 mm\nprojecting type. Non-projecting type of hinges may also be used.\n5.4.1 A mortice lock with not less than 4 levers or pins shall be provided for the doors. In case of double shutter\ndoors the first closing shutter shall have a concealed brass extruded aluminium or steel bolt at top and bottom.\n6.\nFinish – Painting or phosphating and painting or hot dipped galvanizing."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1361: 1978",
    "title": "Steel Windows For Industrial Buildings",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "summary": "Deals with steel windows suitable for use in industrial buildings and designed to suit openings based on a module of 10 cm.",
    "keywords": [
      "hung",
      "module",
      "ventilators",
      "windows",
      "sash",
      "centre",
      "ventilator"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Holes For Fixing, Coupling And Glazing": "Holes for fixing and coupling sashes shall be provided in the web of the outside frame sections (and of outer ventilator frame sections where these occur at the perimeter of the sash). Holes for glazing clips shall also be provided. 7. Fittings and Fixing Materials 7.1 Centre-hung ventilators shall be mounted on a pair of brass cup pivots, each pivot consisting of an inner and an outer cup, permitting the swinging of the ventilator through at least 850 and so balanced that the ventilator shall be capable of remaining open in any desired position. 7.2 Centre-hung ventilators shall be provided with a pulley with centre of the bottom section of the ventilator, and attached with screws. 7.3 Centre-hung and bottom hung ventilators shall have a bronze spring catch in the centre of the top sectio",
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding material, fabrication and dimensions of aluminium doors, windows and ventilators, manufactured from extruded aluminium alloy sections of standard sizes and designs, complete with fittings, ready for being fixed into the buildings. This standard does not cover the requirements for industrial doors, windows and ventilators.",
      "Handing": "Side-hung opening position of all doors and windows shall be said to be right hand or left hand according to the side on which they are hinged looking from the inside.",
      "Designation": "By symbols denoting in sequence, IN (to indicate industrial window) × Width expressed in number of modules × Type (F= fixed sash, C=centre- hung sash, B=bottom hung sash, T= top hung sash) × Height expressed in number of modules. Examples a) IN 10 C 15 indicates industrial window for open ing 10 module wide (100 cm) by 15 module high (150 cm) with centre hung ventilator. b) IN 10 C 10 / IN 10 C 10 IN 10 C 15 / IN 10 C 15 indicates the combination of four windows, two of the type IN10 C 10 on top and two of the type IN10 C 15 at the bottom, all the four of them coupled both horizontally and vertically. 4. Sizes and Tolerances a) Window Sizes IN 10 C 10 IN 22 C 10 IN 16 C 15 IN 10 T 10 IN 22 T 10 IN 16 T 15 IN 10 B 10 IN 22 B 10 IN 16 B 15 IN 16 C 10 IN 10C 15 IN 22 C 15 IN 16 T 10 IN 10 T 1",
      "Composite Windows": "Shall be desptached unassembled, but complete with necessary coupling components. Each coupling member will increase the overall height or width by 25 mm maximum which includes manufacturing tolerances.",
      "Glass": "Sizes shall be as given below: Pane Designation— a b c d e f Width, mm 269 304 292 304 304 292 Height, mm 425 425 460 460 492 492 Note — For number of glass panes for each type of window see Fig. 4 of the standard.",
      "Finish": "All sashes and coupling members shall be either galvanised or painted.",
      "Standard Sizes,Tolerances And Designations A) Types And Sizes": "6HF6, 10HF6, 12HF6, 15HF6, 18HF6 6HT6, 10HT6, 12HT6, 15HT6, 18HT6 6HC6, 10HC6, 12HC6, 15HC6, 18HC6 6HF9, 10HF9, 12HF9, 15HF9, 18HF9 6HS9, 10HS9, 12HS9, 15HS9, 18HS9 6HT9 6HF12, 10HF12, 12HF12, 15HF12, 18HF12 6HS12, 10HS12, 12HS12, 15HS12, 18HS12 6HF15, 10HF15, 12HF15, 15HF15, 18HF15 6HS15, 10HS15, 12HS15, 15HS15, 18HS15 6HF21, 8HS21, 2HS21, 8HF6, 8HT6, 8HC6. b) Tolerances — For f rames ± 1.5 mm. Note 1 – The external dimensions of width and height derived after allowing 1.25 cm clearance all round for fitting into a modular opening based on 10 cm module. Note 2 – Designated in by symbols denoting width (number of modules in width of opening) ; Type (C = centre hung shutters; F= fixed glass panes; H = with horizontal glazing bars; N = without horizontal glazing bars; S = side-hung shutters;"
    },
    "content": "IS 1361: 1978 Steel Windows For Industrial Buildings\n(First Revision)\nb) Ventilator (Opening part of a Sash) – Shall be of one size and designed to fit into outer frame of IN\n10 C 10 and with 1.2 mm clearance.\nc) Tolerances – Manufacturing tolerances for overall dimensions ±3 mm\nNote— Overall heights and widths to the outside of frames\nshall be derived after allowing 10 mm clearance all round for the purpose of fitting the sashes into modular openings.Thus,\nwidth and depth of IN 16 C 10 shall be 158 cm and 98 cm.\n5.\nMaterials\n5.1 Rolled steel sections shall conform to the\nprescribed standard.\n5.2 Pivots and Spring Catches — Non ferrous metal.\n5.3 Glass – Shall conform to the prescribed standard.\n6.\nHoles for Fixing, Coupling and Glazing – Holes for fixing and coupling sashes shall be provided in the\nweb of the outside frame sections (and of outer ventilator frame sections where these occur at the perimeter of the\nsash). Holes for glazing clips shall also be provided.\n7.\nFittings and Fixing Materials\n7.1 Centre-hung ventilators shall be mounted on a pair\nof brass cup pivots, each pivot consisting of an inner and an outer cup, permitting the swinging of the\nventilator through at least 850 and so balanced that the ventilator shall be capable of remaining open in any\ndesired position.\n7.2 Centre-hung ventilators shall be provided with a\npulley with centre of the bottom section of the ventilator, and attached with screws.\n7.3 Centre-hung and bottom hung ventilators shall have\na bronze spring catch in the centre of the top section, suitable for operation by hand or pole (and by cord in\ncase of centre-hung ventilators). The former shall be provided with a 30 cm peg stay of steel or a 30 cm bronze\ncam opener to hold the ventilator open in three different positions. Bottom-hung ventilators shall have folding\nside arms to limit the opening.\n1. Scope – Deals with steel windows suitable for use in industrial buildings and designed to suit openings\nbased on a module of 10 cm.\n2. Handing – Handing and direction of closing of sashes shall be according to IS 4042 : 1969. *\n3.\nDesignation – By symbols denoting in sequence,\nIN (to indicate industrial window) × Width expressed in number of modules × Type (F= fixed sash, C=centre-\nhung sash, B=bottom hung sash, T= top hung sash)\n× Height expressed in number of modules.\nExamples a) IN 10 C 15 indicates industrial window for\nopen ing 10 module wide (100 cm) by 15 module high (150 cm) with centre hung\nventilator.\nb)\nIN 10 C 10 / IN 10 C 10\nIN 10 C 15 / IN 10 C 15\nindicates the combination of four windows, two of the type IN10 C 10 on top and two of\nthe type IN10 C 15 at the bottom, all the four of them coupled both horizontally and\nvertically.\n4.\nSizes and Tolerances a) Window Sizes\nIN 10 C 10\nIN 22 C 10\nIN 16 C 15\nIN 10 T 10\nIN 22 T 10\nIN 16 T 15\nIN 10 B 10\nIN 22 B 10\nIN 16 B 15\nIN 16 C 10\nIN 10C 15\nIN 22 C 15\nIN 16 T 10\nIN 10 T 15\nIN 22 T 15\nIN 16 B 10\nIN 10 B 15\nIN 22 B 15\nIN 10 C 20\nIN 22 C 20\nIN 22 F 10\nIN 10 T 20\nIN 22 T 20\nIN 22 F 15\nIN 10 B 20\nIN 22 B 20\nIN 22 F 20\nIN 16 C 20\nIN 10 F 10\nIN 22 F 10\nIN 16 T 20\nIN 10 F 15\nIN 22 F 15\nIN 16 B 20\nIN 10 F 20\nIN 22 F 20\n* Symbolic designations of directions of closing and faces of doors, windows and shutters. For detailed information, refer to IS 1361 : 1978 Specification for steel windows for Industrial buildings\n(first revision)\n8. Composite Windows – Shall be desptached\nunassembled, but complete with necessary coupling components. Each coupling member will increase the\noverall height or width by 25 mm maximum which includes manufacturing tolerances.\n9.\nGlass — Sizes shall be as given below:\nPane Designation— a b c d e f\nWidth, mm\n269 304 292 304 304 292\nHeight, mm 425 425 460 460 492 492 Note — For number of glass panes for each type of window see Fig. 4 of the standard.\n10. Finish — All sashes and coupling members shall be\neither galvanised or painted. 1.\nScope – Requirements regarding material, fabrication and dimensions of aluminium doors, windows and\nventilators, manufactured from extruded aluminium alloy sections of standard sizes and designs, complete with\nfittings, ready for being fixed into the buildings. This standard does not cover the requirements for industrial\ndoors, windows and ventilators.\n2.\nHanding — Side-hung opening position of all doors and windows shall be said to be right hand or left hand\naccording to the side on which they are hinged looking from the inside.\n3.\nStandard Sizes,Tolerances and Designations a) Types and Sizes —\n6HF6,\n10HF6,\n12HF6,\n15HF6,\n18HF6\n6HT6,\n10HT6,\n12HT6,\n15HT6,\n18HT6\n6HC6,\n10HC6,\n12HC6,\n15HC6,\n18HC6\n6HF9,\n10HF9,\n12HF9,\n15HF9,\n18HF9\n6HS9,\n10HS9,\n12HS9,\n15HS9,\n18HS9\n6HT9\n6HF12, 10HF12, 12HF12, 15HF12, 18HF12\n6HS12, 10HS12, 12HS12, 15HS12, 18HS12\n6HF15, 10HF15, 12HF15, 15HF15, 18HF15\n6HS15, 10HS15, 12HS15, 15HS15, 18HS15\n6HF21, 8HS21, 2HS21, 8HF6, 8HT6,\n8HC6. b) Tolerances — For f rames ± 1.5 mm.\nNote 1 – The external dimensions of width and height derived\nafter allowing 1.25 cm clearance all round for fitting into a modular opening based on 10 cm module.\nNote 2 – Designated in by symbols denoting width (number of\nmodules in width of opening) ; Type (C = centre hung shutters;\nF= fixed glass panes; H = with horizontal glazing bars; N = without horizontal glazing bars; S = side-hung shutters;\nT = top-hung shutter); and height (number of modules in height of opening).\nExamples a) A window of width 10 modules (97.5 cm) and height\n9 modules (87.5 cm), having horizontal glazing bars and side-hung shutters is designated by 10 HS 9.\nb) Two 10 module wide and 12 module high horizontally glazed side-hung window coupled\nside by side with two fixed glass pane ventilators at top, each 10 module wide and 6 module high, is\ndesignated by:\n10 HF 6 / 10 HF 6\n10 HS 12 / 10 HS 12\nNote 3 – Windows without horizontal glazing bars shall be\ndesignated by ‘N’ in place of ‘H’ in the range shown above.\nNote 4 – Doors and side lights shall only be coupled with 12\nmodule (117.5 cm) high windows.\n4.\nMaterials\n4.1 Aluminium Panes – Shall conform to the\nprescribed standard.\n4.2 Glass Panes – Shall weigh at least 7.5 kg/m2. Glazing\nshall be outside of frames. Note– For sizes of glass panes see Table 1 of the standard.\n5. Fabrication\n5.1 Side – Hung Shutters – Hinges projecting type 67\nmm wide. Friction hinges or peg stays (300 mm long)\nshall be provided.\n5.2 Centre Hung Ventilators – Shall be hung on two\npairs of cup pivots of aluminium alloy.\n5.3 Doors – Outer fixed frame shall be of section\nA1 - FX 8. Shutter frame shall be of either hollow sections\nA1 - HF X 5 and A1 - HF X 6 or of solid sections A1-F X\n5 and A1- F X 6 shown in Fig 5 of the standard.\n5.3.1\nHinges shall be of 50 mm projecting type.\n5.3.2\nA suitable lock for the door operable either from inside or outside shall be provided.\n5.3.3\nIn double shutter doors the first closing shutter shall have a concealed aluminium alloy bolt at\ntop and bottom."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1948: 1961",
    "title": "Aluminium Doors, Windows And Ventilators",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "summary": "5.4 Composite Units – Doors shall be coupled to windows or side lights by extruded aluminium sections made from aluminium conforming to IS Designation HE 9-WP. 5.5 Weather Bar – Where a coupling member is fitted over an external opening shutter, the coupling member should incorporate an integrally extruded weather bar. 6. Positions of Bolts, Fixing Screws and Lugs – Outer frames shall be provided with fixing holes centrally in the web of the sections. Note — For details regarding positions of fi",
    "keywords": [
      "member",
      "fixing",
      "lacquer",
      "positions",
      "coupling",
      "lugs",
      "weather"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Positions Of Bolts, Fixing Screws And Lugs": "Outer frames shall be provided with fixing holes centrally in the web of the sections. Note — For details regarding positions of fixing holes and member of fixing lugs see 7 of the standard. 7. Finish 7.1 Matt, scratch-brush or polished. May be anodized additionally. 7.2 A thick layer of clear transparent lacquer based on methacrylates or cellulose butyrate shall be applied by suppliers to protect the surface from wet cement during construction. This lacquer coating shall be removed after installation is completed. For detailed information, refer to IS 1948 : 1961 Specification for aluminium doors, windows and ventilators."
    },
    "content": "IS 1948: 1961 Aluminium Doors, Windows And Ventilators\n5.4 Composite Units – Doors shall be coupled to\nwindows or side lights by extruded aluminium sections made from aluminium conforming to IS Designation HE\n9-WP.\n5.5 Weather Bar – Where a coupling member is fitted\nover an external opening shutter, the coupling member should incorporate an integrally extruded weather bar.\n6.\nPositions of Bolts, Fixing Screws and Lugs – Outer frames shall be provided with fixing holes centrally in\nthe web of the sections.\nNote — For details regarding positions of fixing holes and\nmember of fixing lugs see 7 of the standard.\n7.\nFinish\n7.1 Matt, scratch-brush or polished. May be anodized\nadditionally.\n7.2 A thick layer of clear transparent lacquer based on\nmethacrylates or cellulose butyrate shall be applied by suppliers to protect the surface from wet cement during\nconstruction. This lacquer coating shall be removed after installation is completed.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1948 : 1961 Specification for aluminium doors, windows and ventilators."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1949: 1961",
    "title": "Aluminium Windows For Industrial Buildings",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "summary": "Deals with aluminium windows suitable for use in industrial buildings and designed to suit openings based on a module of 10 cm.",
    "keywords": [
      "hung",
      "sash",
      "windows",
      "centre",
      "ventilator",
      "ventilators",
      "aluminium"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Deals with aluminium windows suitable for use in industrial buildings and designed to suit openings based on a module of 10 cm.",
      "Designation": "By symbols IN ( to indicate industrial window) × Width expressed in number of modules × Type (F = fixed sash; C=centre hung sash; B = bottomhung sash; T = top-hung sash) × Height expressed in number of modules. Examples a) IN 10 C 15 indicates window for opening 10 module wide (100 cm) by 15 module high (150 cm) with centre-hung ventilator. b) Composite windows IN 10 C 10 / IN 10 C 10 IN 10 C 15 / IN 10 C 15 Indicates the combination of four windows, twoof the types IN 10 C 10 on top and two of the type IN 10 C 15 at bottom, all the four of them coupled both horizontally and vertically. 3. Sizes and Tolerances a) Sizes IN10C10 IN22C10 IN16C15 IN10T10 IN22T10 IN16T15 IN10B10 IN22B10 IN16B15 IN16C10 IN10C15 IN22C15 IN16T10 IN10T15 IN22T15 IN16B10 IN10B15 IN22B15 IN10C20 IN22C20 IN16F15 IN10T",
      "Holes For Fixing, Coupling And Glazing": "Holes for fixing and coupling sashes shall be provided in the web of the outside frame sections and of outer ventilator frame sections where these occur at the perimeter of the sash. Holes for glazing chips shall also be provided, one hole being located in web of the section or tee, on each side of each pane. 6. Fitting and Fixing Materials 6.1 Centre-hung ventilators shall be mounted on a pair of cup-pivots made out of aluminium alloy sheet or chromium plated brass and each pivot consisting of an inner and outer cup, permitting the swinging of the ventilator though at least 85º. The venitlator shall be so balanced that it can remain open in any desired position. 6.2 Centre-hung and bottom-hung ventilators shall have cast aluminium or bronze spring catch in the centre of the top section, s"
    },
    "content": "IS 1949: 1961 Aluminium Windows For Industrial Buildings\n1.\nScope – Deals with aluminium windows suitable for use in industrial buildings and designed to suit\nopenings based on a module of 10 cm.\n2.\nDesignation – By symbols IN ( to indicate industrial window) × Width expressed in number of modules ×\nType (F = fixed sash; C=centre hung sash; B = bottomhung sash; T = top-hung sash) × Height expressed in\nnumber of modules.\nExamples a)\nIN 10 C 15 indicates window for opening 10 module wide (100 cm) by 15 module high (150\ncm) with centre-hung ventilator.\nb)\nComposite windows\nIN 10 C 10 / IN 10 C 10\nIN 10 C 15 / IN 10 C 15\nIndicates the combination of four windows, twoof the types IN 10 C 10 on top and two of\nthe type IN 10 C 15 at bottom, all the four of them coupled both horizontally and vertically.\n3.\nSizes and Tolerances a)\nSizes\nIN10C10\nIN22C10\nIN16C15\nIN10T10\nIN22T10\nIN16T15\nIN10B10\nIN22B10\nIN16B15\nIN16C10\nIN10C15\nIN22C15\nIN16T10\nIN10T15\nIN22T15\nIN16B10\nIN10B15\nIN22B15\nIN10C20\nIN22C20\nIN16F15\nIN10T20\nIN22T20\nIN16F15\nIN10B20\nIN22B20\nIN16F20\nIN16C20\nIN10F10\nIN22F10\nIN16T20\nIN10F15\nIN22F15\nIN16B20\nIN10F20\nIN22F20\nb)\nVentilators (opening part of sash) shall be of one size and designed to fit into outer\nframe IN 10 C 10 and with 1.2 mm clearance.\nc)\nTolerances for overall dimensions ±3mm.\nNote—The overall width and height of window is smaller than\ndimension of modular opening by 2.5 cm, allowing a clearance of 1.25 cm all round. thus, width and height of IN 10 C15 = 97.5\ncm ×147.5 cm.\n4.\nMaterials a)\nAluminium extruded section—Shall conform to the prescribed standard. The\nform of sections, dimensions and weights shall be as given in Fig 2 of the standard.\nb)\nCord-eyes, pulleys, brackets and catch plates – Shall be of aluminium or galvanized\nor cadmium plated steel.\nc)\nPivots, peg stays and spring catches–\nShall be of non-ferrouns metal.\nd)\nGlass Panes – Shall weigh 7.5 kg/m2. Sizes of glass panes shall be as given below–\nPane Designation a b c d e f\nWidth (mm) 265 300 290 300 300 290\nHeight (mm) 420 420 455 455 490 490\nNote– For number of glass panes for each type of window see\nFig 5 of the standard.\n5.\nHoles for Fixing, Coupling and Glazing – Holes for fixing and coupling sashes shall be provided in the\nweb of the outside frame sections and of outer ventilator frame sections where these occur at the perimeter of the\nsash. Holes for glazing chips shall also be provided, one hole being located in web of the section or tee, on\neach side of each pane.\n6.\nFitting and Fixing Materials\n6.1 Centre-hung ventilators shall be mounted on a pair\nof cup-pivots made out of aluminium alloy sheet or chromium plated brass and each pivot consisting of an\ninner and outer cup, permitting the swinging of the ventilator though at least 85º. The venitlator shall be so\nbalanced that it can remain open in any desired position.\n6.2 Centre-hung and bottom-hung ventilators shall\nhave cast aluminium or bronze spring catch in the centre of the top section, suitable for operation by hand or\npole (chord in case of centre-hung). 6.3 Bottom-hung and top-hung ventilators shall be\nhung on aluminium alloy hinges. The former shall be provided with a pair of aluminium alloy folding side\narms ( to limt the opening ) and the latter with a 300 mm long peg stay. Alternatively, top-hung ventilator may\nbe provided with 30 cm cam opener.\n6.4 Two spring glazing clips pane shall be provided.\n7.\nComposite Windows Shall be despatched unassembled, but complete with necessary components. Each coupling member will\nincrease the overall height or width by 25 mm.\n8.\nFinish\nMatt, scratch-brush or polished may be anodized additionally. A thick layer of transparent lacquer, based\non methacrylates or cellulose butyrate, shall be applied, by the suppliers, to protect the surface from action of\nwet cement during installation. This lacquer coating shall be removed after installation is completed.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1949 : 1961 Specification for aluminium windows for Industrial buildings."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4351: 2003",
    "title": "Steel Door Frames",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding material, dimensions and construction of steel door frames for internal and external use.",
    "keywords": [
      "jamb",
      "strike",
      "ties",
      "door",
      "frames",
      "fan",
      "lugs"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding material, dimensions and construction of steel door frames for internal and external use.",
      "Materials": "Shall be manufactured from the materials conforming to relevant Indian standards as per Table 1 of the standard.",
      "Standard Sizes, Tolerances And Designation": "For details refer 6 of the standard.",
      "Base Ties": "Base ties of pressed mild steel angle size of 20 mm × 20 mm × 1.25 mm thick either screwed or welded as per Fig. 3 of the standard to suit floor thickness of 25, 30, 35 or 40 mm. 5. Fittings 5.1 Fixing Lugs – There shall be three adjustable lugs with split end tail to each jamb without fan light, and For detailed information, refer to IS 4351 : 2003 Specification for steel door frames ( second revision). four for jamb with fan light. For details refer 10.1 of the standard. 5.2 Hinges - Frames shall be provided with any one type of the hinges, conforming to the relevant Indian standards as given in Table 3 of the standard. 5.3 Lock-Strike Plate of Steel – A slot suitable for lock strike plate shall be pierced into the rebate of the frame and necessary fixing arrangement and mortar guard fro",
      "Finish": "For details refer 11 of the standard."
    },
    "content": "IS 4351: 2003 Steel Door Frames\n(Second Revision)\n1. Scope – Requirements regarding material, dimensions and construction of steel door frames for\ninternal and external use.\n2.\nMaterial – Shall be manufactured from the materials conforming to relevant Indian standards as per Table 1\nof the standard.\n3.\nStandard Sizes, Tolerances and Designation– For details refer 6 of the standard.\n4.\nBase Ties — Base ties of pressed mild steel angle size of 20 mm × 20 mm × 1.25 mm thick either screwed or\nwelded as per Fig. 3 of the standard to suit floor thickness of 25, 30, 35 or 40 mm.\n5.\nFittings\n5.1 Fixing Lugs – There shall be three adjustable lugs\nwith split end tail to each jamb without fan light, and For detailed information, refer to IS 4351 : 2003 Specification for steel door frames ( second revision).\nfour for jamb with fan light. For details refer 10.1 of the standard.\n5.2 Hinges - Frames shall be provided with any one\ntype of the hinges, conforming to the relevant Indian standards as given in Table 3 of the standard.\n5.3 Lock-Strike Plate of Steel – A slot suitable for lock\nstrike plate shall be pierced into the rebate of the frame and necessary fixing arrangement and mortar guard from\nthe inside of the frame shall be provided (see Fig. 6A of the standard).\n5.4 Shock Absorbers – Minimum 3 buffers, for side hung\ndoor , and 2 buffer for double shutter door.\n6. Finish – For details refer 11 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6248: 1979",
    "title": "Metal Rolling Shutters And Rolling Grills",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding mateials, fabrication and finish of metal rolling shutters and rolling grills for normal use. Note – Since the term ‘rolling shutters’ is more commonly used, the reference in this standard is mainly to rolling shutters. However, since rolling shutters and rolling grills are similar in design, construction and operation, all reference to rolling shutters in this standard shall apply of rolling grills also. Special features of rolling grills, as different from rolling shutte",
    "keywords": [
      "rolling",
      "grills",
      "shutters",
      "operated",
      "clear",
      "grill",
      "radii"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding mateials, fabrication and finish of metal rolling shutters and rolling grills for normal use. Note – Since the term ‘rolling shutters’ is more commonly used, the reference in this standard is mainly to rolling shutters. However, since rolling shutters and rolling grills are similar in design, construction and operation, all reference to rolling shutters in this standard shall apply of rolling grills also. Special features of rolling grills, as different from rolling shutters have also been given.",
      "Sizes": "Specified by clear width (W) and clear height (H) of the opening. Width shall always be mentioned first. Stopper height shall be 10 cm less than clear height, unless otherwise specified.",
      "Types And Applicable Sizes A) Self": "Coiling Type (Push-Pull Type or Manual Type) – For size up to a clear areas of 8m2 without ball bearings and 12 m2 with ballbearings. b) Gear-Operated Type (Mechanical Type)— Shall be fitted with ball bearings. Used for a clear area up to 25m2 if operated by bevel gear-box and crank handle, and up to 35 m2 if operated by chain wheel and hand chain, mounted directly on the worm shaft. c) Electrically-Operated Type — For use up to about 50m2 clear area. Operated by electric motor on 400 / 440 V,3 phase, 50 cycles AC supply. Speed of movement of curtain shall not exceed about10 cm/s. 4. Requirements 4.1 Curtain shall be built up of interlocking lath section formed from cold rolled steel strips. Thickness of sheets not less than 0.9 mm for shutters up to 3.5 m width and 1.20 mm for 3.5 m width",
      "Rolling Grills": "Curtains may be built of aluminium alloy or cold rolled steel sheet links of 0.9 mm thickness assembled on tubes or rods, or out of 8 mm dia mild steel or aluminium alloy round bars. 5.1 Rolling Shutter-cum-Grill — In situations where a certain amount of ventilation combined with safety is called for the rolling shutter may have a small rolling grill portion either at top or at bottom or at both places. Height of grill portion shall be 0.5 m maximum.",
      "Painting": "All components parts (except springs and the inside of guide channels) shall be given one coat of a brusing quality ready mixed primer before despatch. Portions where there is contact between aluminium and steel shall be painted with zinc chromate prier. Note – For details regarding types based on position of fixing, materials, fabrication, optional features, operation, etc, refer to the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 6248 : 1979 Specification for metal rolling shutters and rolling grills (first revision). 4.2 Tolerances 4.2.1 Thickness of the sections — Rolling tolerances on thickness of section shall be ± 0.2 mm. 4.2.2 Radii of curvature – A tolerance of ± 0.5 mm shall be permitted on the nominal value of radii of curvature except where maximum radii has been indicated. ",
      "Finish": "The rolled steel section shall be free from rolling defects, such as knot, steep bends, overlaps, waviness on edges, unparallel flanges, rolling marks and shall be suitable for punching and welding or both. The section shall be straightened by roller straightening machine or any other suitable machine ensuring that twist will not be more than 5 degree over a length of 3 m. The section shall be packed in such a way as to avoid damage in transit.",
      "Tests": "Shall satisfy the prescribed test in 9 of the standard. Note – Refer to Annex A of the standard for recom mended use of sections."
    },
    "content": "IS 6248: 1979 Metal Rolling Shutters And Rolling Grills\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements regarding mateials, fabrication and finish of metal rolling shutters and rolling\ngrills for normal use.\nNote – Since the term ‘rolling shutters’ is more commonly\nused, the reference in this standard is mainly to rolling shutters.\nHowever, since rolling shutters and rolling grills are similar in design, construction and operation, all reference to rolling\nshutters in this standard shall apply of rolling grills also. Special features of rolling grills, as different from rolling shutters have\nalso been given.\n2.\nSizes – Specified by clear width (W) and clear height\n(H) of the opening. Width shall always be mentioned first. Stopper height shall be 10 cm less than clear height,\nunless otherwise specified.\n3.\nTypes and Applicable Sizes a) Self-Coiling Type (Push-Pull Type or Manual\nType) – For size up to a clear areas of 8m2 without ball bearings and 12 m2 with ballbearings.\nb) Gear-Operated Type (Mechanical Type)— Shall be fitted with ball bearings. Used for a clear area\nup to 25m2 if operated by bevel gear-box and crank handle, and up to 35 m2 if operated by chain wheel\nand hand chain, mounted directly on the worm shaft.\nc) Electrically-Operated Type — For use up to about 50m2 clear area. Operated by electric motor\non 400 / 440 V,3 phase, 50 cycles AC supply. Speed of movement of curtain shall not exceed about10\ncm/s.\n4.\nRequirements\n4.1 Curtain shall be built up of interlocking lath section\nformed from cold rolled steel strips. Thickness of sheets not less than 0.9 mm for shutters up to 3.5 m width and\n1.20 mm for 3.5 m width and above.\n4.2 Lock Plate – Made of mid steel sheet not less than\n3.15 mm thick, reinforced with mild steel angle section not less than 35×35×5 mm. Alternatively, it may be\nfabricated out of mild steel angles or ‘Tee’ sections not less than 5 mm thick.\n4.3 Guide Channels and Brackets Plates — Fabricated\nout of mild steel sheets of minimum, 3.15 mm thickness.\n4.4 Hood Covers – Made of mild steel sheets not less\nthan 0.9 mm thick.\n4.5 Safety Devices – For width up to 2.5 m, a properly\nfabricated and reinforced bottom lock plate shall be provided to give protection. For widths above 2.5 m,\nanchorage rods or central hasp and staple, or both may be provided.\n5.\nRolling Grills – Curtains may be built of aluminium alloy or cold rolled steel sheet links of 0.9 mm thickness\nassembled on tubes or rods, or out of 8 mm dia mild steel or aluminium alloy round bars.\n5.1 Rolling Shutter-cum-Grill — In situations where a\ncertain amount of ventilation combined with safety is called for the rolling shutter may have a small rolling\ngrill portion either at top or at bottom or at both places.\nHeight of grill portion shall be 0.5 m maximum.\n6.\nPainting – All components parts (except springs and the inside of guide channels) shall be given one\ncoat of a brusing quality ready mixed primer before despatch. Portions where there is contact between\naluminium and steel shall be painted with zinc chromate prier.\nNote – For details regarding types based on position of\nfixing, materials, fabrication, optional features, operation, etc, refer to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6248 : 1979 Specification for metal rolling shutters and rolling grills\n(first revision). 4.2 Tolerances 4.2.1 Thickness of the sections — Rolling tolerances on thickness of section shall be ± 0.2 mm. 4.2.2 Radii of curvature – A tolerance of ± 0.5 mm shall be permitted on the nominal value of radii of\ncurvature except where maximum radii has been indicated. 4.2.3 Mass tolerance – Mass tolerance per meter length for the various profiles shall be ±5 percent of the\nnominal mass specified for the section.\n5.\nSurface Finish – The rolled steel section shall be free from rolling defects, such as knot, steep bends,\noverlaps, waviness on edges, unparallel flanges, rolling marks and shall be suitable for punching and welding or\nboth. The section shall be straightened by roller straightening machine or any other suitable machine\nensuring that twist will not be more than 5 degree over a length of 3 m. The section shall be packed in such a\nway as to avoid damage in transit.\n6.\nBend Test – Shall satisfy the prescribed test in 9 of the standard. Note – Refer to Annex A of the standard for recom mended use\nof sections."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7452: 1990",
    "title": "Hot Rolled Steel Sections For Doors, Windows And Ventilators",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding materials, nominal dimension and mass, dimensional and mass tolerances, surface finish and packing for hot rolled steel sections used for doors, windows, ventilators and sashes.",
    "keywords": [
      "sections",
      "mass",
      "ventilators",
      "windows",
      "assuming",
      "doors",
      "rolled"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding materials, nominal dimension and mass, dimensional and mass tolerances, surface finish and packing for hot rolled steel sections used for doors, windows, ventilators and sashes. 2. Designation and Mass Designation Mass Designation Mass (kg/m) (kg/m) T 2 1.036 F500 1.955 T 3 1.14 F501 2.250 T 6 0.839 F502 1.955 F2 1.46 F503 2.840 F3 2.280 F4B 2.28 F5 1.55 F7D 1.419 F8 1.75 FX8 2.31 FX6 2.52 FZ5 2.52 FZ7 1.90 K12B 2.30 K11B 1.80 Note 1 – Profiles of the sections shall be as given in Fig 2 of the standard. Note 2 – Mass of the sections as given have been arrived keeping in view the nominal dimensions of the sections and assuming density of the steel as 7.85 gm/cm3.",
      "Materials": "Steel as per prescribed standards. 4. Dimensions and Tolerances 4.1 Dimensions – Shall be as given in Fig 2 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 7452 : 1990 Hot rolled steel sections for doors, windows and ventilators (second revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 7452: 1990 Hot Rolled Steel Sections For Doors, Windows And Ventilators\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements regarding materials, nominal dimension and mass, dimensional and mass tolerances,\nsurface finish and packing for hot rolled steel sections used for doors, windows, ventilators and sashes.\n2.\nDesignation and Mass\nDesignation\nMass Designation\nMass\n(kg/m)\n(kg/m)\nT 2\n1.036\nF500\n1.955\nT 3\n1.14\nF501\n2.250\nT 6\n0.839\nF502\n1.955\nF2\n1.46\nF503\n2.840\nF3\n2.280\nF4B\n2.28\nF5\n1.55\nF7D\n1.419\nF8\n1.75\nFX8\n2.31\nFX6\n2.52\nFZ5\n2.52\nFZ7\n1.90\nK12B\n2.30\nK11B\n1.80\nNote 1 – Profiles of the sections shall be as given in Fig 2 of\nthe standard.\nNote 2 – Mass of the sections as given have been arrived\nkeeping in view the nominal dimensions of the sections and\nassuming density of the steel as 7.85 gm/cm3.\n3.\nMaterial – Steel as per prescribed standards.\n4.\nDimensions and Tolerances\n4.1 Dimensions – Shall be as given in Fig 2 of the\nstandard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 7452 : 1990 Hot rolled steel sections for doors, windows and ventilators\n(second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10451: 1983",
    "title": "Steel Sliding Shutters",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding materials, type, shape, fabrication, assembly and finish of the top hung steel sliding shutters.",
    "keywords": [
      "track",
      "top",
      "hung",
      "sliding",
      "runner",
      "shutters",
      "shutter"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding materials, type, shape, fabrication, assembly and finish of the top hung steel sliding shutters.",
      "Sizes": "The size of the shutter shall be greater than the actual opening for weather protection. The height of the shutter shall be at least 150 mm more and width at least by 300 mm more that the size of the opening. 3. Material 3.1 Angles, Tees, Flats, Channels etc, shall be of rolled sections conforming to the prescribed standards. 3.2 Top Runner (Track) – These shall be of cold rolled mild steel conforming to the prescribed standard, capable of taking the design load for a smooth operation. 4. Fabrication 4.1 Angles of size not less than 50×50×5mm for shutter upto 2 m width and 2.5m height and 65×65×6mm for bigger sizes shall be used. 4.2 Top track shall be either of the following types– Type A – Track made out of 12×80 mm flat securely anchored to the wall, Type B – Cold rolled inverted U type",
      "Finish": "The shutters shall be finished with a coat of red oxide primer. For detailed information, refer to IS 10451 : 1983 Specification for steel sliding shutters (top hung type)."
    },
    "content": "IS 10451: 1983 Steel Sliding Shutters\n(TOP HUNG TYPE)\n1.\nScope – Requirements regarding materials, type, shape, fabrication, assembly and finish of the top hung\nsteel sliding shutters.\n2.\nSize – The size of the shutter shall be greater than the actual opening for weather protection. The height\nof the shutter shall be at least 150 mm more and width at least by 300 mm more that the size of the opening.\n3.\nMaterial\n3.1 Angles, Tees, Flats, Channels etc, shall be of rolled\nsections conforming to the prescribed standards.\n3.2 Top Runner (Track) – These shall be of cold rolled\nmild steel conforming to the prescribed standard, capable of taking the design load for a smooth operation.\n4.\nFabrication\n4.1 Angles of size not less than 50×50×5mm for shutter\nupto 2 m width and 2.5m height and 65×65×6mm for bigger sizes shall be used.\n4.2 Top track shall be either of the following types–\nType A – Track made out of 12×80 mm flat securely anchored to the wall,\nType B – Cold rolled inverted U type mild steel track.\n4.3 Bottom runner shall be channel of about 50 × 40 ×\n5mm .\n4.4 Sliding gear or roller mechanism shall be as given in\n5.4 of the standard.\n5.\nFinish – The shutters shall be finished with a coat of red oxide primer.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 10451 : 1983 Specification for steel sliding shutters (top hung type)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10521: 1983",
    "title": "Collapsible Gates",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding materials, fabrication and finish of different types of collapsible gates.",
    "keywords": [
      "gates",
      "collapsible",
      "gate",
      "opening",
      "fixed",
      "runner",
      "channels"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding materials, fabrication and finish of different types of collapsible gates. 2. Types a) Gates fixed under the lintel, b) Gates fixed outside the opening, c) Gates fixed inside the opening, and d) Gates fixed on movable top and bottom channels with swinging arrangement on either side. The above types may be with single panel collapsible at the right end or left end, or with double panels collapsible at respective ends with wheels attached to the gates rolling on bottom or top runners. 3. Sizes 3.1 Collapsible gates are recommended for a maximum height of 3 m. there is no restriction in width. 3.2 When the gate is fitted under the lintel, the width and height of the gate shall be the same as that of the opening. But when the gate is fixed inside or outside the opening, ",
      "Finish": "Fabricated parts shall be finished with a coat of red oxide primer. For detailed information, refer to IS 10521 : 1983 Specification for collapsible gates."
    },
    "content": "IS 10521: 1983 Collapsible Gates\n1.\nScope – Requirements regarding materials, fabrication and finish of different types of collapsible\ngates.\n2.\nTypes a)\nGates fixed under the lintel, b) Gates fixed outside the opening, c)\nGates fixed inside the opening, and d) Gates fixed on movable top and bottom\nchannels with swinging arrangement on either side.\nThe above types may be with single panel collapsible at the right end or left end, or with double panels\ncollapsible at respective ends with wheels attached to the gates rolling on bottom or top runners.\n3.\nSizes\n3.1 Collapsible gates are recommended for a maximum\nheight of 3 m. there is no restriction in width.\n3.2 When the gate is fitted under the lintel, the width\nand height of the gate shall be the same as that of the opening. But when the gate is fixed inside or outside\nthe opening, the width of the gate shall be the clear width of opening plus the width of the gate in the\ncollapsed position and the height shall be 150 mm more than the clear height to enable usage of the full opening.\n4.\nMaterials\n4.1 Vertical Channels – Shall be hot rolled medium\nchannels of at least 18 × 9 × 3 mm and shall be of weldable quality mild steel conforming to the prescribed standard.\n4.2 Crossing or Lacings – These shall be flats of mild\nsteel of at least 18 × 5 mm size conforming to the prescribed standard.\n4.3 Top and Bottom Runner – Tees or ‘E’ used for\nbottom runner shall have minimum web of 40 ×12 mm and flange of 40 × 6 mm, and the flats used for top\nrunner shall be of minimum size 40 × 12 mm.\nNote — For details of mateial, see 5 of the standard.\n5.\nFabrication\n5.1 Channels shall have a maximum spacing of 100 mm\nwhen the gate is in closed position.\n5.2 One set of crossing shall extend from 450 to 600 m\nin height and clear space between the two sets of crossings shall be within 150 mm.\n5.3 Number and size of role wheels shall be dependent\non the width of the gate and shall be as given in Table 1 of the standard.\n6. Finish – Fabricated parts shall be finished with a\ncoat of red oxide primer.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 10521 : 1983 Specification for collapsible gates."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14856: 2000",
    "title": "Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastic (Grp) Panel Type Door Shutters For Internal Use",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding types, sizes, material, construction, workmanship, finish, performance requirements and sampling of fibre glass reinforced plastic door shutters for use in residential and industrial building.",
    "keywords": [
      "door",
      "shutters",
      "shutter",
      "isophthalic",
      "glass",
      "fibre",
      "strand"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements regarding types, sizes, material, construction, workmanship, finish, performance requirements and sampling of fibre glass reinforced plastic door shutters for use in residential and industrial building. 2. Materials 2.1 Glass Fibre Chopped Strand Mat (CSM) – The glass fibre chopped strand mat used shall be as per IS 11551 : 1996* 2.2 Glass Fibre Rovings – The glass fibre rovings shall be as per IS 11320 : 1997. ** 2.3 Isophthalic Resin – Isophthalic resin shall be as per IS 6746 :1994.+ 2.4 Curing Agents – Catalyst used shall be methyl ethyl ketone peroxide (MEKP), benzyl peroxide, acetyl acto peroxide etc. Accelerator used shall be cobalt napthalate, cobalt octonate, N.N.Dinethyl Anilene etc. 2.5 Fillers and Additives – Permissible fillers and french chalk powder (talc) and c",
      "Finish": "The surface of the moulded shutters shall be free from any visible defects such as small pores, crazing, blistering, wrinkling, impurities, defective impregnation, colour blots and aggregates defects. Scattered pin holes duly repaired and finished by applying resing and not noticeable shall be acceptable. Panels, rails and stiles of the doors shutters shall be flat and shall have smooth and level surface. Surface shall be finished in colour and design as required by the purchaser. 5. Tests 5.1 Test on materials TABLE 3 TESTS ON GRP LAMINATE Sl No. Test Acceptable Value 1. Fibre Glass content 25% (Min) 2. Barchol hardness 30 BHU(Min) 3. Tensile Strength (Mpa) 100(Min) 4. Bending Strengths (Mpa) 120(Min) 5. Elastic Modulus in bend(Mpa) 1500 (Min) 6. Water Absorption 5% (Max) 7. Fire Retardan"
    },
    "content": "IS 14856: 2000 Glass Fibre Reinforced Plastic (Grp) Panel Type Door Shutters For Internal Use\n1.\nScope – Requirements regarding types, sizes, material, construction, workmanship, finish,\nperformance requirements and sampling of fibre glass reinforced plastic door shutters for use in residential\nand industrial building.\n2.\nMaterials\n2.1 Glass Fibre Chopped Strand Mat (CSM) – The\nglass fibre chopped strand mat used shall be as per IS\n11551 : 1996*\n2.2 Glass Fibre Rovings – The glass fibre rovings shall\nbe as per IS 11320 : 1997. **\n2.3 Isophthalic Resin – Isophthalic resin shall be as\nper IS 6746 :1994.+\n2.4 Curing Agents – Catalyst used shall be methyl ethyl\nketone peroxide (MEKP), benzyl peroxide, acetyl acto peroxide etc.\nAccelerator used shall be cobalt napthalate, cobalt octonate, N.N.Dinethyl Anilene etc.\n2.5 Fillers and Additives – Permissible fillers and\nfrench chalk powder (talc) and clacium carbonate.\nAluminium trihydrite, antimony trioxide, minimum 5 percent, by weight of isophthalic resin, shall be used for\nfire retardancy.\nThe fillers and additives content shall not exceed\n10 percent by weight of isophthalic resin.\n2.6 Auxiliary chemical – Polyvinyl alchohol (PVA) or\nother semipenetrant release agents and wax shall be used as a mould release agent.\n2.7 Pigments – Pigments compatible with isophthalic\nresin and gelcoat shall be used to obtain the shade of finish as mutually agreed between the manufacturer and\nthe purchaser.\n2.8 Base Blocks – Base Blocks for fixing fixtures in\nshutter with screws shall be of seasoned and treated hard wood or any other suitable material.\n2.9 Polyurethene Foam – Slabs of minimum density of\n32 kg/m2 and of thickness 4 mm less than the shutter thickness with ± 0.5 mm, tolerance shall be used.\n3 Dimensions, Sizes and Tolerances –See Table 1 & 2\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES OF\nCOMPONENTS OF DOOR SHUTTERS Sl Description Width Thickness No.\nmm mm 1.\nVertical stile, top and 90 ± 3\n30 ± 1 or\nFreeze rail\n35 ± 1 2.\nLock rail 120 ± 3\n30 ± 1 or\n35 ± 1 3.\nBottom rail 150 ± 3\n30 ± 1 or\n35 ± 1\n3.1\nMinimum thickness of GRP laminate of hollow rails and stiles shall be 3 mm.\n3.2\nMinimum thickness of GRP laminate used for panel in the shutter shall be 5 mm.\nTABLE 2 DIMENSIONS OF DOOR SHUTTERS\nDesignation of Doors\nWidth\nHeight mm\nmm 8 DS 20 700\n1905 (1945) 8 DS 21\n700\n2005 (2045) 9 DS 20 800\n1905 (1945) 9 DS 21 800\n2005 (2045)\n10 DS 20\n900\n1905 (1945)\n10 DS 21\n900\n2005 (2045)\n12 DT 20\n1100+\n1905 (1945)\n12 DT 21\n1100+\n2005 (2045)\nNote 1 – The dimensions refers to modular sizes of door\nopenings. first number stands for width and the last for height in module (M =100 mm). Alphabet ‘D’ refers to doors, ‘S’ to\nsingle shutter and ‘T’ to double leaf shutter.\nNote 2—The standard widths and heights for panel doors are\narrived at as shown in Fig 2 of the standard. In case the modular height is taken from the finished floor level, the height of the\ndoor shall be the one given in bracket. + Combined width of double leaf shutters.\n* Glass fibre chopped strand mat for the reinforcement of , phenolic and polyster resin systems (first revision)\n** Glass fibre rovings for the reinforcement of polyster and epoxide resin systems (first revision) + Unsaturated polyster resin system (first revision) + As per 2.1 of IS 4020 (Part 10). Door shutters methods of tests or * As per 3.1 of IS 4020 (Part 10)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 14856 : 2000 Specification for glass fibre reinforced plastic (GRP) panel type door shutters for internal use.\nToelrances — Tolerances on the sizes of door shutters shall be\n4.\nFinish – The surface of the moulded shutters shall be free from any visible defects such as small pores,\ncrazing, blistering, wrinkling, impurities, defective impregnation, colour blots and aggregates defects.\nScattered pin holes duly repaired and finished by applying resing and not noticeable shall be acceptable.\nPanels, rails and stiles of the doors shutters shall be flat and shall have smooth and level surface.\nSurface shall be finished in colour and design as required by the purchaser.\n5.\nTests\n5.1 Test on materials\nTABLE 3 TESTS ON GRP LAMINATE Sl No. Test Acceptable Value\n1.\nFibre Glass content\n25% (Min)\n2.\nBarchol hardness\n30 BHU(Min)\n3.\nTensile Strength (Mpa)\n100(Min)\n4.\nBending Strengths (Mpa)\n120(Min)\n5.\nElastic Modulus in bend(Mpa)\n1500 (Min)\n6.\nWater Absorption 5% (Max)\n7.\nFire Retardancy 100 mm length of the specimen shall not burn within 60 Seconds.\n5.2 Requirements for shutters 5.2.1 Dimensions and Squareness Test – The dimensions of nominal width and height shall be within\na limit ± 5mm. The door shutter shall not deviate by more than 1 mm on a length of 500 mm. The thickness of\nthe door shutter shall be uniform through out with the permissible variation of not more than 0.8 mm between\nany two points. The nominal thickness of the shutter shall be within a limit of ±1.5 mm. 5.2.2 General Flatness Test – The twist, cuping and warping shall not exceed 6 mm. 5.2.3 Local Planeness Test – The depth of deviation measured at any points shall not be more than 0.5mm. 5.2.4 Impact Indentation Test – Shall have no defects such as cracking, tearing or delamination and the depth\nof indentation shall not be more than 0.2mm. 5.2.5 Edge Loading Test – The deflection of the edge at the maximum load shall not be more than 5mm. On\nremoval of the loads, the residual deflection shall not be more than 0.5 mm failing which the test may be repeated\non the other edge in the reverse direction. Also there shall be no lateral buckling by more than 2 mm during\nloaded condition and no residual lateral buckling after removal of the load. 5.2.6 Shock Resistance Test – There shall be no visible damange in any part of the door after twenty-five blows\non each end.\nThe normally hung shutter, with hangings, fixings and fastenings should withstand any significant\npermanent deformation and without deterioration the five impacts on both sides of the shutter. 5.2.7 Buckling Test – Shall not show any detoriation and any residual deformation more than 5 mm after 15\nminutes of unloading and the initial deflection also shall not be more than 50 mm. 5.2.8 Slamming test – Shall not have any visible damage in any Slamming Test part of the door at the end\nof 50 successive impacts+ or. Shall not have any visible damange in any part of the door at the end of 100\nsuccessive impacts*. 5.2.9 Misuse Test,there shall not be any permanent deformation of the fixing or any other part of the door\nset in hindering its normal working after the test.\nmm\n4\n0\n−\n+ SECTION 14\nCONCRETE REINFORCEMENT CONTENTS\nTitle Page\nIS\n280 : 1978\nMild steel wire for general engineering purposes (third revision)\n14.3\nIS 432\nMild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement (Part 1): 1982\nMild steel and medium tensile steel bars (third revision)\n14.4 (Part 2) : 1982\nHard – drawn steel wire (third revision)\n14.6\nIS\n1566 : 1982\nHard – drawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement (second revision)\n14.7\nIS 1785\nPlain hard-drawn steel wire for prestressed concrete (Part 1) : 1983\nCold drawn stress-relieved wire (second revision) 14.8 (Part 2) : 1983\nAs drawn wire (first revision) 14.9\nIS 1786 : 1985\nHigh strength defomed steel bars and wire for concrete reinforcement\n(third revision) 14.10\nIS\n2090 : 1983\nHigh tensile steel bars used in prestressed concrete. (first revision)\n14.12\nIS 6003 : 1983\nIntented wire for pre-stressed concrete (first revision)\n14.13\nIS 6006 : 1983\nUncoated stress relieved strand for prestressed concrete (first revision)\n14.14\nIS 7887 : 1992\nMild steel wire rod for general engineering purposes (first revision)\n14.16\nIS 13620 : 1993\nFusion bonded epoxy coated reinforcing bars\n14.18\nIS 14268 : 1995\nUncoated stress relieved low relaxation seven-ply strand for prestressed concrete\n14.19"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 280: 1978",
    "title": "Mild Steel Wire For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "summary": "Requirement for mild steel wire of sizes 0.125 mm to 12.5 mm diameter for general engineering purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "annealed",
      "over",
      "drawn",
      "galvanized",
      "wire",
      "own",
      "splitting"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirement for mild steel wire of sizes 0.125 mm to 12.5 mm diameter for general engineering purposes. 2. Sizes Diameter in mm 0.125 0.315 0.80 2.00 5.00 0.140 0.355 0.90 2.24 5.60 0.160 0.400 1.00 2.50 6.30 0.180 0.450 1.12 2.80 7.10 0.200 0. 500 1.25 3.15 8.00 0.224 0. 560 1.40 3.55 9.00 0.250 0.630 1.60 4.00 10.00 0.280 0.710 1.80 4.50 11.2 12.5 Note – Other sizes by mutual agreement. 3. Tolerance on Diameter Applicable to coils only a) Galvanized – All sizes ± 2.5 percent with a minimum of ± 0.025 mm. b) Other finishes – Size of Wire Tolerance (mm) (mm) Up to 0.25 ± 0.01 Over 0.25 up to 0.50 ± 0.015 Over 0.50 up to 1.00 ± 0.02 Over 1.00 up to 1.50 ± 0.03 Over 1.50 up to 2.50 ± 0.04 Over 2.50 up to 5.00 ± 0.05 Over 5.0 ± 0.06 4. Mechanical Properties 4.1 Tensile Test Condition Tensile ",
      "Finish": "Annealed; annealed cleaned and limed; bright drawn; dull grey (dry drawn); galvanized; coppered; or tinned. Note 1 – For test procedures, refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals. Tensile testing (second revision),"
    },
    "content": "IS 280: 1978 Mild Steel Wire For General Engineering Purposes\n(Third Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirement for mild steel wire of sizes\n0.125 mm to 12.5 mm diameter for general engineering purposes.\n2. Sizes Diameter in mm\n0.125\n0.315 0.80\n2.00\n5.00\n0.140 0.355\n0.90\n2.24\n5.60\n0.160\n0.400\n1.00\n2.50\n6.30\n0.180\n0.450 1.12\n2.80\n7.10\n0.200\n0. 500 1.25\n3.15\n8.00\n0.224 0. 560 1.40\n3.55\n9.00\n0.250 0.630 1.60\n4.00\n10.00\n0.280\n0.710 1.80\n4.50\n11.2 12.5\nNote – Other sizes by mutual agreement.\n3.\nTolerance on Diameter\nApplicable to coils only a) Galvanized – All sizes ± 2.5 percent with a minimum of ± 0.025 mm. b) Other finishes –\nSize of Wire Tolerance (mm) (mm)\nUp to 0.25\n± 0.01\nOver 0.25 up to 0.50\n± 0.015\nOver 0.50 up to 1.00\n± 0.02\nOver 1.00 up to 1.50\n± 0.03\nOver 1.50 up to 2.50\n± 0.04\nOver 2.50 up to 5.00\n± 0.05\nOver 5.0 ± 0.06\n4.\nMechanical Properties\n4.1 Tensile Test Condition Tensile Strength, MPa Finishes Galvanized other than\nAnnealed 500, Max 300-550\nSoft drawn 550, Max -\n1/4 hard 450-650 -\n1/2 hard 600-800 -\nHard 700-950 550-900\n1 MPa = 1 N/mm2 = 1 MN/m2 = 0.102 0 kgf/mm2.\n4.2 Wrapping Test (For Wire smaller than 5 mm Dia)\n— Shall withstand without breaking or splitting being wrapped 8 times round its own diameter and\nsubsequently straightened.\n4.3 Bend Test (For Wire Dia 5 mm and Over) – Shall\nwithstand being bent through 900 round a former of diameter equal to twice its own dia without breaking or\nsplitting.\n5. Finish – Annealed; annealed cleaned and limed;\nbright drawn; dull grey (dry drawn); galvanized;\ncoppered; or tinned.\nNote 1 – For test procedures, refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals. Tensile testing (second revision),"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1755: 1983",
    "title": "Method For Wrapping Test For Metallic Wire. And 8 Of The Standard.",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "summary": "Requirements of mild steel and medium tensile steel plain bars in round and square sections for use as reinforcement in concrete.",
    "keywords": [
      "bars",
      "loading",
      "mild",
      "structures",
      "dynamic",
      "subjected",
      "wind"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of mild steel and medium tensile steel plain bars in round and square sections for use as reinforcement in concrete. 2. Types and Grades a) Mild steel bars; Grade I and Grade II, and b) Medium tensile steel bars. Note – Grade II bars are not recommended for use in structures located in earthquake zones subjected to severe damage and or structures subjected to dynamic loading (other than wind loading).",
      "Freedom From Defects": "Finished bars shall be sound and free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations and rough, jagged and imperfect edges, etc.",
      "Nominal Sizes": "Diameter of round bars or side of square bars shall be 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 22, 25, 28, 32, 36, 40, 45 and 50 mm. 5. Tolerance 5.1 Bars in Straight Length 5.1.1 Size Size Tolerance Over Up to and Including mm mm mm - 25 ±0.5 25 35 ±0.6 35 50 ±0.8 50 80 ±1.0 80 100 ±1.3 100 – ± 6 percent of dia or side width"
    },
    "content": "IS 1755: 1983 Method For Wrapping Test For Metallic Wire. And 8 Of The Standard.\nNote 2 — For chemical composition see 5 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 280 : 1978. Specification for mild steel wire for general engineering purposes (third revision). 1.\nScope – Requirements of mild steel and medium tensile steel plain bars in round and square sections for\nuse as reinforcement in concrete.\n2.\nTypes and Grades a) Mild steel bars; Grade I and Grade II, and\nb) Medium tensile steel bars.\nNote – Grade II bars are not recommended for use in\nstructures located in earthquake zones subjected to severe damage and or structures subjected to dynamic loading\n(other than wind loading).\n3.\nFreedom from Defects – Finished bars shall be sound and free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations\nand rough, jagged and imperfect edges, etc.\n4.\nNominal Sizes – Diameter of round bars or side of square bars shall be 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 22, 25, 28, 32,\n36, 40, 45 and 50 mm.\n5.\nTolerance\n5.1 Bars in Straight Length 5.1.1 Size Size Tolerance Over Up to and Including mm mm mm - 25 ±0.5 25 35 ±0.6 35 50 ±0.8 50 80 ±1.0 80 100 ±1.3 100 – ± 6 percent of dia or side width"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 432 (Part 1): 1982",
    "title": "Mild Steel And Medium Tensile Steel Bars And Hard-Drawn Steel Wire For Concrete Reinforcement",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "summary": "PART 1 MILD STEEL AND MEDIUM TENSILE STEEL BARS (Third Revision) 5.1.2 Ovality and out-of-square— Permissible ovality for round bars and out-of-square of square bars shall be 75 percent of total tolerance (plus and minus) specified on size. 5.1.3 Weight Size Tolerance Percent Over Up to and Including mm mm — 10 ± 7 10 16 ± 5 16 — ± 3 5.2 Coiled Rounds and Squares 5.2.1 Size – ± 0.5 mm for size up to and including 12 mm. 5.2.2 Out of shape – Permissible value at any cross section shall not exceed",
    "keywords": [
      "bars",
      "including",
      "coiled",
      "square",
      "elongation",
      "over",
      "ovality"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 432 (Part 1): 1982 Mild Steel And Medium Tensile Steel Bars And Hard-Drawn Steel Wire For Concrete Reinforcement\nPART 1 MILD STEEL AND MEDIUM TENSILE STEEL BARS\n(Third Revision) 5.1.2 Ovality and out-of-square— Permissible ovality for round bars and out-of-square of square bars shall\nbe 75 percent of total tolerance (plus and minus)\nspecified on size. 5.1.3 Weight Size Tolerance Percent Over Up to and Including mm mm — 10 ± 7 10 16 ± 5 16 — ± 3\n5.2 Coiled Rounds and Squares 5.2.1 Size – ± 0.5 mm for size up to and including 12 mm. 5.2.2 Out of shape – Permissible value at any cross section shall not exceed 0.65 mm.\nNote 1 – Size shall be diameter in case of round bars and side\nwidth in case of squre bars.\nNote 2– No weight tolerance shall be applicable in case of coiled\nround and square bars.\n6.\nPhysical Requirements\n6.1 Ultimate tensile stress, yield stress andpercentage\nelongation shall be as given in Table 1.\n6.2 Bend Test — Shall withstand the specified test. TABLE 1 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF BARS Sl Type and Nominal Ultimate\nYield Elongation No. Size of Bar\nTensileStress\nStress Percent* Min\nMin Min i) Mild Steel Grade I\nFor bars up to and including 20 mm. 410 250 23\nFor bars over 20 mm, up to and including 50 mm 410 240 23 ii) Mild Steel Grade II\nFor bars up to and including 20 mm. 370 225 23\nFor bars over 20 mm, up to and including 50mm 370 215 23 iii) Medium Tensile Steel\nFor bars up to and including 16 mm 540 350 20\nFor bars over16 mm, up to and including 32 mm 540 340 20\nFor bars over 32 mm, up to and including 50 mm 510 330 20\n*Elongation on a gauge length 5.65\nSo where So is the cross-sectional area of the test piece.\nNote 1 –\nFor test procedures , refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals- tensile testing (second revision),"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1599: 1985",
    "title": "Method For Bend Test, (Is 2062:1999 Steel For General Structural Purposes, And 9 Of The Standard.",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "summary": "Note 2 — For chemical composition refer to see 4 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 432 (Part I) : 1982 Specification for mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement : Part I Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars (third revision).",
    "keywords": [
      "bars",
      "steel",
      "medium",
      "mild",
      "tensile",
      "drawn",
      "reinforcement"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 1599: 1985 Method For Bend Test, (Is 2062:1999 Steel For General Structural Purposes, And 9 Of The Standard.\nNote 2 —\nFor chemical composition refer to see 4 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 432 (Part I) : 1982 Specification for mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard-drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement : Part I Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars\n(third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1566: 1982",
    "title": "Hard - Drawn Steel Wire Fabric For Con- Crete Reinforcement",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "summary": "Requirements for hard-drawn steel wire fabric consisting of hard-drawn steel with cross wires electrically welded to them for use as concrete reinforcement",
    "keywords": [
      "wire",
      "drawn",
      "fabric",
      "hard",
      "mesh",
      "oblong",
      "reverse"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for hard-drawn steel wire fabric consisting of hard-drawn steel with cross wires electrically welded to them for use as concrete reinforcement",
      "Types": "a) Oblong mesh, and b) Square mesh",
      "Materials": "Wire used shall be hard-drawn steel wire suitable for welding",
      "Sizes Of Sheets Or Rolls": "Width of fabric shall be such as to fit in with modular size of 10 cm module",
      "Mass": "Calculated on the basis that steel weighs 0.785 kg/cm2 of nominal cross-sectional area per metre run. Actual weight is determined by weighing any convenient size and if possible at least one sqare metre. 6. Tolerances a) Pitch ± 7½ Percent b) Sizes of Sheet ± 25 mm for dimensions upto 5 m. ± ½ percent for dimensions over 5 mm. c) Mass Percent i) When neither maximum nor ± 6 minimum mass is specified ii) When maximum mass + 0 specified – 12 iii) When minimum mass +12 specified 7. Mechanical Properties 7.1 Shall meet the minimum requirements for physical properties as prescribed in IS 432 (Part 2) :1982*.",
      "Tests": "Test piece shall with stand one complete cycle of reverse bend around a pin of size indicated below– Diameter of Specimen Wire Diameter of Pin 7.5 mm and under Equal to diameter of specimen Over 7.5 mm Equal to twice the diameter of specimen * IS 432 (Part 2) : 1982 Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement : Part 2 Hard-drawn steel wire (third revision). Note.1 – For mesh sizes, weights and sizes of wires for square and oblong welded wire fabric commonly manufactured see Appendix A of the standard. Note.2 – For test procedures, refer to IS1 608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals–Tensile testing (second revision), IS 1716 : 1985 Method for reverse bend test for metallic wire (second revision) and 11 of the standard. For detailed informat"
    },
    "content": "IS 1566: 1982 Hard - Drawn Steel Wire Fabric For Con- Crete Reinforcement\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements for hard-drawn steel wire fabric consisting of hard-drawn steel with cross wires\nelectrically welded to them for use as concrete reinforcement\n2.\nTypes –\na)\nOblong mesh, and b)\nSquare mesh\n3.\nMaterial – Wire used shall be hard-drawn steel wire suitable for welding\n4.\nSizes of Sheets or Rolls – Width of fabric shall be such as to fit in with modular size of 10 cm module\n5.\nMass – Calculated on the basis that steel weighs\n0.785 kg/cm2 of nominal cross-sectional area per metre run. Actual weight is determined by weighing any\nconvenient size and if possible at least one sqare metre.\n6.\nTolerances a) Pitch ± 7½ Percent b) Sizes of Sheet ± 25 mm for dimensions upto 5 m. ± ½ percent for dimensions over 5 mm. c) Mass\nPercent i) When neither maximum nor ± 6 minimum mass is specified ii) When maximum mass + 0 specified – 12 iii) When minimum mass +12 specified\n7. Mechanical Properties\n7.1 Shall meet the minimum requirements for physical\nproperties as prescribed in IS 432 (Part 2) :1982*.\n7.2. Bend Test – Test piece shall with stand one complete cycle of reverse bend around a pin of size indicated\nbelow–\nDiameter of Specimen Wire Diameter of Pin 7.5 mm and under Equal to diameter of specimen Over 7.5 mm Equal to twice the diameter of specimen * IS 432 (Part 2) : 1982 Mild steel and medium tensile steel bars and hard drawn steel wire for concrete reinforcement : Part\n2 Hard-drawn steel wire (third revision).\nNote.1 – For mesh sizes, weights and sizes of wires for square and oblong welded wire fabric commonly manufactured see Appendix\nA of the standard.\nNote.2 – For test procedures, refer to IS1 608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals–Tensile testing (second revision), IS 1716 :\n1985 Method for reverse bend test for metallic wire (second revision) and 11 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1566 : 1982 Specification for hard-drawn steel wire fabric for concrete reinforcement (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1786: 1985",
    "title": "Plain High Strength Deformed Steel Bars And Wires For Concrete Reinforcement",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "summary": "Requirements for high tensile steel bars used in prestressed concrete.",
    "keywords": [
      "bars",
      "proof",
      "stress",
      "tensile",
      "actual",
      "deformed",
      "proceedures"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for high tensile steel bars used in prestressed concrete.",
      "Chemical Composition": "The ladle analysis of steel shall show that steel contains no more than 0.050 percent of sulphur and not more than 0.050 percent of phosphorus.",
      "Nominal Sizes": "10, 12, 16, 20, 22, 25, 28 and 32 mm. 4. Tolerances a) Nominal Size : ±0.5 mm for bars upto 25mm ±0.6 mm for bars above 25mm b) Mass : ±5 percent for bars upto 16mm ±3 percent for bars above 16 mm 5. Physical Requirements Characteristic Requirement Tensile strength, Min 980 N/mm2 Proof stress Notlessthan 80 percent of minimum specified tensile strength Elongation at rupture 10 percent on a gauge length 5.65 A , Min (Where A is the area of cross-section) The relaxation of stress in the bar, shall not exceed 49 N/mm2 at the end of 1000. Note—For test proceedures, refer to 7 of the standard and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals – Tensile testing (second revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 2090 :1983 Specification for high tensile steel bars usd in prestressed concrete ("
    },
    "content": "IS 1786: 1985 Plain High Strength Deformed Steel Bars And Wires For Concrete Reinforcement\n(Third Revision) +75\n–25\n+50\n–0 TABLE 1 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF HIGH STRENGTH DEFORMED BARS AND WIRES Sl. No\nProperty Grade Fe 415\nFe 500\nFe 550 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) i) 0.2 percent proof strees/ yield stress, Min, N/mm2 415.0 500.0 550.0 ii) Elongation, percent, Min, on gauge lenth 5.65 A , 14.5 12.0 8.0 were A is the cross sectional area of the test piece iii) Tensile strength, Min 10 percent more 8 pecent more 6 percent more than the actual 0.2 than the actual 0.2 than the actual\n0.2 percent proof percent proof percent proof stress but not less stress but not less stress but not less than 485.0N/mm2 than 545.0 N/mm2 than585.0 N/mm2\nNote — For test proceedures, refer to 8 of the standard, IS : 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals – Tensile testing (second\nrevision) and IS 1599 : 1985 Method for bend test (second revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1786 :1985 Specification for high strength deformed steel bars and wires for concrete reinforcement (third revision). 1.\nScope – Requirements for high tensile steel bars used in prestressed concrete.\n2.\nChemical Composition – The ladle analysis of steel shall show that steel contains no more than 0.050 percent\nof sulphur and not more than 0.050 percent of phosphorus.\n3.\nNominal Sizes —10, 12, 16, 20, 22, 25, 28 and 32 mm.\n4.\nTolerances a) Nominal Size\n:\n±0.5 mm for bars upto 25mm\n±0.6 mm for bars above 25mm b) Mass\n:\n±5 percent for bars upto 16mm\n±3 percent for bars above\n16 mm\n5. Physical Requirements\nCharacteristic\nRequirement Tensile strength, Min\n980 N/mm2 Proof stress\nNotlessthan 80 percent of minimum specified\ntensile strength Elongation at rupture\n10 percent on a gauge length\n5.65\nA , Min\n(Where A is the area of cross-section)\nThe relaxation of stress in the bar, shall not exceed 49 N/mm2 at the end of 1000.\nNote—For test proceedures, refer to 7 of the standard and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals – Tensile testing\n(second revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2090 :1983 Specification for high tensile steel bars usd in prestressed concrete (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2090: 1983",
    "title": "High Tensile Steel Bars Used In Prestressed Concrete",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "summary": "Requirements for manufacture, supply and testing of intended hard-drawn and stress-relieved wire for use in prestressed concrete.",
    "keywords": [
      "stress",
      "relaxation",
      "nominal",
      "wire",
      "diametrically",
      "rmm",
      "diamete"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for manufacture, supply and testing of intended hard-drawn and stress-relieved wire for use in prestressed concrete.",
      "Chemical Composition": "The ladle analysis shall show that the steel contains not more than 0.04 percent of sulphur and not more than 0.04 percent of phosphorus.",
      "Nominal Sizes": "3.00, 4.00 and 5.00 mm.diameter. 4. Geometrical Characteristics 4.1 The shape and pattern of indentation shall be as mutually agreed provided the indentations are placed in two lines, diametrically opposite and are staggered. 5. Tolerances 5.1 The tolerance on the nominal diameter shall be ± 0.05 mm. 5.2 Where ovality is more than half of the total diameter tolerance, check on section by weighing shall be made. Nominal mass and tolerance on nominal mass of finished wire shall be as given below: Nominal Nominal Mass Tolerance Diameter rmm g/m g/m 5.00 154 ± 3.1 4.00 98.9 ± 2.0 3.00 55.5 ± 1.5 6. Physical Requirements 6.1 Tensile Strength Nominal Diamete Tensile Strength mm Min, N/mm2 5.00 1 570 4.00 1 715 3.00 1 865 6.2 Proof Stress – Not less than 85 percent of minimum tensile strength. 6."
    },
    "content": "IS 2090: 1983 High Tensile Steel Bars Used In Prestressed Concrete\n(First Revision) 1.\nScope – Requirements for manufacture, supply and testing of intended hard-drawn and stress-relieved wire\nfor use in prestressed concrete.\n2.\nChemical Composition – The ladle analysis shall show that the steel contains not more than 0.04 percent\nof sulphur and not more than 0.04 percent of phosphorus.\n3.\nNominal Sizes – 3.00, 4.00 and 5.00 mm.diameter.\n4.\nGeometrical Characteristics\n4.1 The shape and pattern of indentation shall be as\nmutually agreed provided the indentations are placed in two lines, diametrically opposite and are staggered.\n5.\nTolerances\n5.1 The tolerance on the nominal diameter shall be ±\n0.05 mm.\n5.2 Where ovality is more than half of the total diameter\ntolerance, check on section by weighing shall be made.\nNominal mass and tolerance on nominal mass of finished wire shall be as given below:\nNominal\nNominal Mass\nTolerance\nDiameter rmm\ng/m g/m 5.00\n154\n± 3.1 4.00\n98.9\n± 2.0 3.00\n55.5\n± 1.5\n6.\nPhysical Requirements\n6.1 Tensile Strength\nNominal Diamete\nTensile Strength mm\nMin, N/mm2\n5.00\n1 570\n4.00\n1 715\n3.00\n1 865\n6.2 Proof Stress – Not less than 85 percent of minimum\ntensile strength.\n6.3 Ductility – Wire shall withstand the reverse bend\ntest.\n6.4 Elongation after Fracture – (Over a gauge length\nof 200 mm)\nNominal Diameter\nElongation Percent mm Min 5.00\n4.00 4.00\n3.00 3.00\n2.50\n6.5 Relaxation – Relaxation stress shall not exceed 5\npercent of initial stress at the end of 1000 h."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6003: 1983",
    "title": "Indented Wire For Prestressed Concrete",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "summary": "(First Revision) Note – For test procedures, refer to 7 of the standard and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals-Tensile testing (second revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 6003 : 1983 Specification for intended wire for prestressed concrete (first revision).",
    "keywords": [
      "strand",
      "wire",
      "element",
      "seven",
      "wires",
      "ply",
      "strands"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 6003: 1983 Indented Wire For Prestressed Concrete\n(First Revision)\nNote – For test procedures, refer to 7 of the standard and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals-Tensile testing\n(second revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6003 : 1983 Specification for intended wire for prestressed concrete (first revision). 1.\nScope : Requirements for manufacture, supply and testing of uncoated, stress relieved, high tensile steel\nstrands for use in prestressed concrete. The following types of strands are covered:\na)\nTwo wire strand b)\nThree wire strand c)\nSeven wire strand–Class 1 and Class 2 (For classification, see Table 2 and 3)\n2.\nManufacture\n2.1 Wire\n2.1.1 The elements wire to be used for strand shall be cold-drawn from plain carbon steel and shall contain\nnot more than 0.040 percent of sulphur and not more than 0.040 percent of phosphorus.\n2.1.2 The wire used shall be sound and free from splits, surface flaws, piping. and any other defects.\n2.2 Strand – Seven wire strand shall have a centre wire\nat least 1.5 percent greater in diameter than the surrounding wires enclosed tightly by six helically placed\nouter wires with a uniform length of lay of at least 12 times but more than 16 times of nominal diameter of the\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS, TOLERANCES AND MASS OF TWO AND THREE WIRE STRANDS\nDesignation\nNominal Tolerance on Nominal Cross Nominal Diameter of\nDiameter of Sectional Mass of Element Wire\nElement Wire Area of Strand Strand\n(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) mm mm mm2 kg/m\n2-ply 2 mm 2.0 ±0.03 6.28 0.0493\n2-ply 3 mm 3.0 ±0.03 14.14 0.111\n3-ply 3 mm 3.0 ±0.03 21.21 0.166 strand. The length of lay for the two and three wire\nstrands shall be uniform throughout and shall be 24 to\n36 times the diameter of element wire. The wires in the strand shall not unravel when the strand is cut and\nthey shall not fly out of position when the strand is cut without seizing.\n3.\nSize and Designation\n3.1 Two Wire Strand and Three Wire Strand – They\nshall be designated by the number of element wires\n(plies) and the diameter of the element wire making the strand, for example , 2-ply 2 mm strand will mean a strand\nconsisting of two element wires of diameter 2.0 mm each. (see Table 1)\n3.2 Seven Wire Strand – The seven wire strand shall\nbe designated by the approximate overall diameter of the strand and number of element wires (plies) making\nthe strand, for example, 6.3 mm 7-ply strand will mean a strand of approximate diameter 6.3 mm and made out\nof seven (six outer and one central) wires. (See Table 2)\n4.\nDimensions and Tolerances : See Tables 1 and 2"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6006: 1983",
    "title": "Uncoated Stress Relieved Strand For Prestressed Concrete",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "summary": "Requirements of hot-rolled mild steel wire rods in coils or straightened and cut lengths.",
    "keywords": [
      "ply",
      "strand",
      "analysis",
      "relaxation",
      "strands",
      "breaking",
      "manganese"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of hot-rolled mild steel wire rods in coils or straightened and cut lengths. 2. Chemical Composition 2.1 The ladle analysis : See Table TABLE 1 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION Grade Constituent, Percent (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Carbon Manganese Sulphur, Max Phosphorus, Max 1 0.06 Max 0.35 Max 0.050 0.050 2 0.08 Max 0.25 to 0.400 0.050 0.050 3 0.10 Max 0.70 Max 0.050 0.050 4 0.08 to 0.13 0.30 to 0.60 0.050 0.050 4M 0.08 to 0.13 0.60 to0.90 0.050 0.050 5 0.10 to 0.15 0.30 to0.60 0.050 0.050 6 0.13 to 0.18 0.30to0.60 0.050 0.050 6M 0.13 to 0.18 0.60to0.90 0.050 0.050 7 0.15 to 0.20 0.30to0.60 0.050 0.050 7M 0.15 to 0.20 0.60to0.90 0.050 0.050 8 0.18 to 0.23 0.30 to0.60 0.050 0.050 8M 0.18 to 0.23 0.60 to0.90 0.050 0.050 9 0.20 to 0.25 0.30 to0.60 0.050 0.050 10 0.22 to 0.28 0.30to0.60 0.050 0.05"
    },
    "content": "IS 6006: 1983 Uncoated Stress Relieved Strand For Prestressed Concrete\n(First Revision) 5. Physical Requirements\n5.1 Breaking Strength : See Table 3.\n5.2 Proof Load : See Table 3.\n5.3 Elongation : Elongation of the strand shall not be\nless than 3.5 percent and shall be measured on a gauge length of not less than 200 mm for 2 ply and 3 ply strand\nand not less than 600 mm for 7ply strands.\n5.4 Relaxation – The relaxation stress in the wire, shall\nnot exceed 5 percent of the initial stress at the end of\n1000 h.\nTABLE 3 MINIMUM BREAKING LOAD Class Designation Breaking Load\n0.2 percent\nMin Proof load Min\n(1) (2)\n(3)\n(4)\nN N\n-\n2-ply 2 mm\n12 750\n10 840\n2-ply 3 mm\n25 500\n21 670\n3-ply 3 mm\n38 250\n42 460 1\n6.3 mm 7-ply\n40 000 34 000\n7.9 mm 7-ply\n64 500 54 700\n9.5 mm 7-ply\n89 000 75 600\n11.1 mm 7-ply\n120 100\n102 300\n12.7 mm 7-ply\n160 100\n136 200\n15.2 mm 7-ply\n240 200\n204 200 2\n9.5 mm 7-ply\n102 300\n87 200\n11.1 mm 7-ply\n137 900\n117 200\n12.7 mm 7-ply\n183 700\n156 100\n15.2 mm 7-ply\n260 700\n221 500\nNote–The modulus of elasticity is to be taken as 195 ± 10 kN/mm2, unless otherwise indicated by the manufacturer.\nNote – For test procedures, refer to 7 of the standard and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals-tensile testin\n(second revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6006:1983 Uncoated stress relieved strand for prestressed concrete\n(first revision).\nTABLE 2 DIMENSIONS, TOLERANCES AND MASS OF SEVEN WIRE STRANDS Class Designation\nNominal Tolerances Nominal Cross- Nominal Diameter on the Nominal Sectional Area Mass of of Strand Diameter of Strand of Strand Strand\n(1)\n(2) (3) (4) (5)\n(6) mm mm mm2 kg/m\n1 6.3 mm 7-ply 6.3 ± 0.4 23.2\n0.182 7.9 mm 7-ply 7.9 ± 0.4 37.4\n0.294 9.5 mm 7-ply 9.5 ± 0.4 51.6\n0.405 11.1 mm 7-ply 11.1 ± 0.4 69.7\n0.548 12.7 mm 7-ply 12.7\n± 0.4 92.9\n0.730 15.2 mm 7-ply 15.2 ± 0.4 139.4\n1.094\n2 9.5 mm 7-ply 9.5 + 0.66 54.8\n0.432\n–0.15 11.1 mm 7-ply 11.1\n+ 0.66 74.2\n0.582\n–0.15 12.7 mm 7-ply 12.7\n+ 0.66 98.7\n0.775\n–0.15 15.2 mm 7-ply 15.2 + 0.66 140.0\n1.102\n–0.15 1.\nScope – Requirements of hot-rolled mild steel wire rods in coils or straightened and cut lengths.\n2.\nChemical Composition\n2.1 The ladle analysis : See Table\nTABLE 1 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION\nGrade Constituent, Percent\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\nCarbon\nManganese Sulphur, Max\nPhosphorus, Max\n1\n0.06 Max\n0.35 Max\n0.050\n0.050\n2\n0.08 Max\n0.25 to 0.400\n0.050\n0.050\n3\n0.10 Max\n0.70 Max\n0.050\n0.050\n4\n0.08 to 0.13\n0.30 to 0.60\n0.050\n0.050\n4M\n0.08 to 0.13\n0.60 to0.90\n0.050\n0.050\n5\n0.10 to 0.15\n0.30 to0.60\n0.050\n0.050\n6\n0.13 to 0.18\n0.30to0.60\n0.050\n0.050\n6M\n0.13 to 0.18\n0.60to0.90\n0.050\n0.050\n7\n0.15 to 0.20\n0.30to0.60\n0.050\n0.050\n7M\n0.15 to 0.20\n0.60to0.90\n0.050\n0.050\n8\n0.18 to 0.23\n0.30 to0.60\n0.050\n0.050\n8M\n0.18 to 0.23\n0.60 to0.90\n0.050\n0.050\n9\n0.20 to 0.25\n0.30 to0.60\n0.050\n0.050\n10\n0.22 to 0.28\n0.30to0.60\n0.050\n0.050\n10M\n0.22 to 0.28\n0.60to 0.90\n0.050\n0.050\n2.2 Product of Analysis – See Table 2.\nTABLE 2 PERMISSIBLE VARIATION FOR\nPRODUCT ANALYSIS OF CARBON STEEL\nConstituent\nLimit, or Maximum Variation Over\nSpecified Range, Specified\nPercent Maximum or Under the Minimum limits,percent Max (1) (2) (3) Carbon 0.25 upto 0.02 Over 0.25 0.03 Manganese 0.03 Phosphorus 0.005 Sulphur 0.005 Silicon 0.03 0.05"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7887: 1992",
    "title": "Mild Steel Wire Rod For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "summary": "Covers deformed steel reinforcing bars with protective epoxy coating applied by electrostatic spray method.",
    "keywords": [
      "coating",
      "bars",
      "reinforcing",
      "cleaning",
      "cleaned",
      "coated",
      "electrostatic"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Condition Of Material On Delivery": "The hot-rolled wire rod shall be supplied in the form of coils or straigtened and cut lengths.The size and weight of coils shall be as agreed.",
      "Freedom From Defects": "The finished material shall be free from such s urface defects and internal flaws as would be deterimental to the end use of the material. These defects, however, will be ignored in the one metre length of coil from both ends 5. Sizes and Tolerances 5.1 Size – the nominal dia shall be 5mm on wards with an inceament of 0.5 mm. 5.2 Tolerance and out of shape as given in Table 3.",
      "Physical Properties": "As mutually agreed. TABLE 3 TOLERANCE OF WIRE ROD Nominal Diameter Tolerance on Out of shape Diameter mm mm Over Up to and including (1) (2) (3) (4) - 15 ± 0.4 0.60 15 25 ± 0.5 0.75 25 30 ± 0.6 0.90 30 — — * Tolerance should be agreed at the time of ordering. For detailed information, refer to IS 7887 : 1992. Specification for mild steel wire rod for general engineering purposes (first revision).",
      "Scope": "Covers deformed steel reinforcing bars with protective epoxy coating applied by electrostatic spray method. 2. Coating Materials 2.1 The coating material shall meet the requirements specified in Annex A of the standard. 2.2 The patching or repairing material or both, shall be compatible with the coating, inert in concrete and feasible for repairs at the coating plant or in the field. 3. Reinforcing Steel Steel reinforcing bars to be coated shall conform to IS 1786 : 1985* 4. Surface Preparation 4.1 The surface of the steel reinforcing bars to be coated shall be cleaned by abrassive blast cleaning to near white metal. The surface profile shall be free from mill scale ,rust and foreign matter when viewed under well-lit conditions. 4.2 The coating shall be applied to the cleaned surface as so",
      "Application Of Coating": "The coating shall be applied as an electrostatically charged dry powder sprayed onto the grounded steel bar using an electrostatic spray gun . The powder may be applied to either a hot or cold bar. The coated bar shall be given a thermal treatment specified by the manufacturer of the epoxy resin which will provide a fully. cured finish coating. Temperature shall be controlled to ensure a workman like job without blistering or other defects. 6. Requirements of Coated Bars 6.1 Coating Thickness – For acceptance purposes at least 90 percent of all coating thickness measurement shall be 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm after curing. The coating thickness limits do not apply to patch areas. 6.2 Continuity of Coating – The coating shall be visually inspected after curing for continuity of the coating and shall "
    },
    "content": "IS 7887: 1992 Mild Steel Wire Rod For General Engineering Purposes\n(First Revision)\n3.\nCondition of Material on Delivery – The hot-rolled wire rod shall be supplied in the form of coils or\nstraigtened and cut lengths.The size and weight of coils shall be as agreed.\n4.\nFreedom from Defects – The finished material shall be free from such s urface defects and internal\nflaws as would be deterimental to the end use of the material. These defects, however, will be ignored in the\none metre length of coil from both ends 5.\nSizes and Tolerances\n5.1 Size – the nominal dia shall be 5mm on wards\nwith an inceament of 0.5 mm.\n5.2 Tolerance and out of shape as given in Table 3.\n6.\nPhysical Properties — As mutually agreed. TABLE 3 TOLERANCE OF WIRE ROD Nominal Diameter Tolerance on Out of shape Diameter mm mm\nOver\nUp to and including (1) (2) (3) (4) - 15 ± 0.4 0.60 15 25 ± 0.5 0.75 25 30 ± 0.6 0.90 30 —\n—\n* Tolerance should be agreed at the time of ordering.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 7887 : 1992. Specification for mild steel wire rod for general engineering purposes (first revision). 1.\nScope – Covers deformed steel reinforcing bars with protective epoxy coating applied by electrostatic\nspray method.\n2.\nCoating Materials\n2.1 The coating material shall meet the requirements\nspecified in Annex A of the standard.\n2.2 The patching or repairing material or both, shall be\ncompatible with the coating, inert in concrete and feasible for repairs at the coating plant or in the field.\n3.\nReinforcing Steel\nSteel reinforcing bars to be coated shall conform to\nIS 1786 : 1985*\n4.\nSurface Preparation\n4.1 The surface of the steel reinforcing bars to be coated\nshall be cleaned by abrassive blast cleaning to near white metal. The surface profile shall be free from mill scale\n,rust and foreign matter when viewed under well-lit conditions.\n4.2 The coating shall be applied to the cleaned surface\nas soon as possible after cleaning. Any formation of rust blooms on the cleaned bars are to be removed by\nblast cleaning before application of the coating.\nHowever, in no case shall the coating be delayed more than eight hours after cleaning.\n5.\nApplication of Coating—The coating shall be applied as an electrostatically charged dry powder\nsprayed onto the grounded steel bar using an electrostatic spray gun . The powder may be applied to either a hot\nor cold bar. The coated bar shall be given a thermal treatment specified by the manufacturer of the epoxy\nresin which will provide a fully. cured finish coating.\nTemperature shall be controlled to ensure a workman like job without blistering or other defects.\n6.\nRequirements of Coated Bars\n6.1 Coating Thickness – For acceptance purposes at\nleast 90 percent of all coating thickness measurement shall be 0.1 mm to 0.3 mm after curing. The coating\nthickness limits do not apply to patch areas.\n6.2 Continuity of Coating – The coating shall be\nvisually inspected after curing for continuity of the coating and shall be free from holes, voids,\ncontamination, cracks and damaged areas discernible to the unaided eye. In addition, there shall be not more\nthan an average of two holidays per 300 mm\nNote – Holiday means a pin hole not discernible to the unaided\neye.\n6.3 Adhesion – No visible cracks or disbonding in\nthe coating on the outside radius shall be allowed.\n* Plain high strength deformed steel bars, and wires for concrete reinforcement (third revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 13620 : 1993 Fusion bonded epoxy coated reinforceing bars (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13620: 1993",
    "title": "Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Bars",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "summary": "Requirements for manufacture, supply and testing of un-coated,stress relieved ‘low relaxation’ seven -ply steel strand for prestressed concrete.",
    "keywords": [
      "relieved",
      "relaxation",
      "seven",
      "strand",
      "ply",
      "prestressed",
      "coated"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for manufacture, supply and testing of un-coated,stress relieved ‘low relaxation’ seven -ply steel strand for prestressed concrete."
    },
    "content": "IS 13620: 1993 Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Bars\n(First Revision) 1.\nScope – Requirements for manufacture, supply and testing of un-coated,stress relieved ‘low relaxation’\nseven -ply steel strand for prestressed concrete."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14268: 1995",
    "title": "Uncoated Stress Relieved Low Relaxation Seven- Ply Strand For Prestressed Concrete",
    "category": "Concrete Reinforcement",
    "summary": ". TABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES Class Nominal Breaking 0.2% Proof Load Dia of Strand Strength of Strand (90% of Breaking Strength) mm kN kgs kN kgs (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) 1 9.5 89.0 9078 80.1 8170 11.1 120.1 12250 108.1 11026 12.7 160.1 16330 144.1 14698 15.2 240.2 24500 216.2 22052 II 9.5 102.3 10434 92.1 9394 11.1 137.9 14065 124.1 12658 12.7 183.7 18737 165.3 16860 15.2 260.7 26592 234.6 23929 Note — The Modulus of Elasticity is to be taken as 195 ±10 kN/mm2 3. Dimension, Tolerances and Mass –",
    "keywords": [
      "strand",
      "relaxation",
      "breaking",
      "low",
      "steels",
      "structural",
      "kgs"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Dimension, Tolerances And Mass": "See Table 2. TABLE 2 DIMENSION, TOLERANCES AND MASS OF WIRE STRANDS Class Nominal Tolerance Nominal Nominal Dia of Strand Area of Strand Mass of Strand (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) mm mm mm2 kg/km 1 9.5 ±0.40 51.6 405 11.1 ±0.40 69.7 548 12.7 ±0.40 92.9 730 15.2 ±0.40 139.4 1094 II 9.5 +0.66 54.8 432 –0.15 11.1 +0.66 74.2 582 –0.15 12.7 +0.66 98.7 775 –0.15 15.2 +0.66 140.0 1102 –0.15",
      "Class": "Class I or class II depending upon breaking strength of strand given in Table 1 4. Mechanical Properties 4.1 Breaking Strength and 0.2 Percent Proof Load– It shall be not less than the values specified in Table 1. 4.2 Elongation – The total elongation under load shall not be less than 3.5 percent on a minimum gauge length of 600 mm. 4.3 Relaxation Properties – Low relaxation strand, when initially loaded to 70 percent of specified minimum breaking strength of the strand shall have relaxation losses of not more than 1.8 percent after 100 h and not more than 2.5 percent after 1000 h. Note — For test procedures, refer to 6.2, 6.3, and 6.4 of the standard and IS 1608 :1995 Mechanical testing of metals- Tensile testing (second revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 14268 : 1995 Specif"
    },
    "content": "IS 14268: 1995 Uncoated Stress Relieved Low Relaxation Seven- Ply Strand For Prestressed Concrete\n.\nTABLE 1 PHYSICAL PROPERTIES Class Nominal\nBreaking\n0.2% Proof Load Dia of Strand Strength of Strand (90% of Breaking Strength) mm kN\nkgs kN\nkgs\n(1)\n(2) (3) (4)\n(5)\n(6)\n1\n9.5\n89.0\n9078\n80.1\n8170\n11.1\n120.1\n12250 108.1 11026\n12.7\n160.1\n16330\n144.1\n14698\n15.2\n240.2 24500 216.2\n22052\nII\n9.5\n102.3 10434 92.1 9394\n11.1\n137.9 14065 124.1 12658\n12.7\n183.7 18737 165.3 16860\n15.2\n260.7 26592 234.6 23929\nNote — The Modulus of Elasticity is to be taken as 195 ±10 kN/mm2\n3.\nDimension, Tolerances and Mass – See Table 2.\nTABLE 2 DIMENSION, TOLERANCES AND MASS OF WIRE STRANDS\nClass\nNominal Tolerance\nNominal\nNominal\nDia of Strand\nArea of Strand\nMass of Strand\n(1)\n(2) (3)\n(4) (5) mm mm\nmm2 kg/km\n1\n9.5\n±0.40 51.6 405\n11.1\n±0.40\n69.7 548\n12.7\n±0.40\n92.9 730\n15.2\n±0.40\n139.4\n1094\nII\n9.5 +0.66\n54.8 432\n–0.15\n11.1 +0.66\n74.2\n582\n–0.15\n12.7 +0.66\n98.7 775 –0.15\n15.2 +0.66\n140.0\n1102 –0.15\n2.\nClass – Class I or class II depending upon breaking strength of strand given in Table 1 4.\nMechanical Properties\n4.1 Breaking Strength and 0.2 Percent Proof Load– It shall be not less than the values specified in Table 1.\n4.2 Elongation – The total elongation under load shall not be less than 3.5 percent on a minimum gauge length of\n600 mm.\n4.3 Relaxation Properties – Low relaxation strand, when initially loaded to 70 percent of specified minimum\nbreaking strength of the strand shall have relaxation losses of not more than 1.8 percent after 100 h and not more than 2.5 percent after 1000 h.\nNote — For test procedures, refer to 6.2, 6.3, and 6.4 of the standard and IS 1608 :1995 Mechanical testing of metals- Tensile\ntesting (second revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 14268 : 1995 Specification for uncoated stress relieved low relaxation seven-ply strand for prestressed concrete. SECTION 15\nSTRUCTURAL STEELS CONTENTS\nTitle\nPage\nGENERAL\nIS 1977 : 1996\nLow tensile structural steels (third revision)\n15.3\nIS 2062 : 1999\nSteel for general structural purposes (fifth revision)\n15.4\nIS 8500 : 1991\nStructural steel – micro alloyed (medium and high strength qualities)\n15.6\n(first revision)\nIS 11587 : 1986\nStructural weather resistance steels\n15.7\nPLATES, SHEETS AND STRIPS\nIS 277 : 2003\nGalvanised steel sheet (plain and corrugated) (fifth revision)\n15.9\nIS 412 : 1975\nExpanded metal sheets for general purposes (second revision)\n15.11\nIS 513 : 1994\nCold rolled low carbon steel sheets and strips (fourth revision) 15.13\nIS 1079 : 1994\nHot-rolled carbon steel sheet and strip (fifth revision) 15.15\nIS 3502 : 1994\nSteel chequered plates (second revision) 15.16\nIS 7226 : 1974\nCold rolled, medium high carbon and low alloy steel strip for general engineering purposes 15.17"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12313: 1988",
    "title": "Hot Dip Terne Coated Carbon Steel Sheet",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "summary": "Requirements of low carbon steel plates, sections, flats, bars, etc. for general structural purposes in the tensile range of 290 to 470 MPa. 1.1 The steels are equally suitable for bolted and riveted structures and for general engineering purposes. 1.2 When welding is employed for fabrication and guranteed weldability is required, welding procedure should be as specified in IS 9595 : 1996. Metal-arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese steels (first revision)’.",
    "keywords": [
      "structural",
      "bars",
      "purposes",
      "welding",
      "engineering",
      "rivet",
      "carbon"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of low carbon steel plates, sections, flats, bars, etc. for general structural purposes in the tensile range of 290 to 470 MPa. 1.1 The steels are equally suitable for bolted and riveted structures and for general engineering purposes. 1.2 When welding is employed for fabrication and guranteed weldability is required, welding procedure should be as specified in IS 9595 : 1996. Metal-arc welding of carbon and carbon manganese steels (first revision)’.",
      "Grades": "These shall be three Grades – Fe 290, Fe 330, and Fe 370.",
      "Freedom From Defects": "The finished material shall be reasonably free from surface flaws; laminations; rough/jagged and imperfect edges; and all other harmful defects. 3.1 Minor surface defects may be removed by grinding provided the thickness is not reduced locally by more than 4 percent below the minimum specified thickness. 4. Chemical Analysis : See Table – 1 TABLE1 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION Grade Ladle Analysis, Percent, Max Designation C Mn S P (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Fe 290 0.25 1.25 0.055 0.055 Fe 330 0.25 1.25 0.055 0.055 Fe 370 0.25 1.25 0.055 0.055"
    },
    "content": "IS 12313: 1988 Hot Dip Terne Coated Carbon Steel Sheet\n15.18\nBARS WIRES\nIS 1148 : 1982\nHot-rolled steel rivet bars (up to 40 mm dia) for structural purposes\n(third revision) 15.20\nIS 1149 : 1982\nHigh tensile steel rivet bars for structural purposes (third revision) 15.21\nTUBES AND TUBULARS\nIS 1161 : 1998\nSteel tubes for structural purposes (fourth revision) 15.22\nIS 4923 : 1997\nHollow steel sections for structural use (second revision) 15.25\nNote1 – See also Section 17 Structural Shapes\nNote2 – IS 280 : 1978 Mild steel wire for general engineering purposes and IS 7887 : 1992. Mild steel wire rods for general\nengineering purposes (first revision) have been covered in Section 14 Concrete reinforcement. 1.\nScope – Requirements of low carbon steel plates, sections, flats, bars, etc. for general structural purposes\nin the tensile range of 290 to 470 MPa.\n1.1 The steels are equally suitable for bolted and riveted\nstructures and for general engineering purposes.\n1.2 When welding is employed for fabrication and\nguranteed weldability is required, welding procedure should be as specified in IS 9595 : 1996. Metal-arc\nwelding of carbon and carbon manganese steels (first revision)’.\n2.\nGrades – These shall be three Grades – Fe 290,\nFe 330, and Fe 370.\n3.\nFreedom from Defects – The finished material shall be reasonably free from surface flaws; laminations;\nrough/jagged and imperfect edges; and all other harmful defects.\n3.1 Minor surface defects may be removed by grinding\nprovided the thickness is not reduced locally by more than 4 percent below the minimum specified thickness.\n4.\nChemical Analysis : See Table – 1\nTABLE1 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION Grade Ladle Analysis, Percent, Max Designation C Mn S P (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Fe 290 0.25 1.25 0.055 0.055 Fe 330 0.25 1.25 0.055 0.055 Fe 370 0.25 1.25 0.055 0.055"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1977: 1996",
    "title": "Low Tensile Structural Steel",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "summary": "Requirements of steel plates, strips, sections, flats, bars, etc, for use in structural work. 1.1 The steels are suitable for welded, bolted and riveted’ structures, and for general engineering purposes. 1.2 Where welding is employed for fabriction and guaranteed-weldability is required, welding procedure should be as specified in IS 9595 : 1996 `Metal are welding of carbon and carbon manganese steels - Recommendations (first Revision):.",
    "keywords": [
      "steels",
      "bend",
      "welding",
      "tensile",
      "rolling",
      "cutting",
      "products"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Tests": "For bend test, the test piece at room temperature shall withstand bending through 1800 to an internal diameter not greater than that given in Table 2 without cracking.",
      "Dimensions": "Nominal dimensions of rolled products conforming to this specification shall be in accordance with the relevant Indian Standard . Currently available Indian Standards are listed in Table 4 of the standard.",
      "Tolerances": "Rolling and cutting tolerances for steel products conforming to this standard shall be those specified in IS 1852 : 1985 ++. ++ Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products (fourth revision). Note — For test proceedures, refer to IS 1599 : 1985 Method of bend test (second revision) and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals-tensile testing (second revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 1977: 1996 low tensile structural steels. (third revision).",
      "Scope": "Requirements of steel plates, strips, sections, flats, bars, etc, for use in structural work. 1.1 The steels are suitable for welded, bolted and riveted’ structures, and for general engineering purposes. 1.2 Where welding is employed for fabriction and guaranteed-weldability is required, welding procedure should be as specified in IS 9595 : 1996 `Metal are welding of carbon and carbon manganese steels - Recommendations (first Revision):.",
      "Grades": "There shall be three grades: Grade Designation A Fe 410W A B Fe 410W B C Fe 410W C",
      "Freedom From Defects": "The finished material shall be reasonably free from surface flaws; laminations; rough/jagged and imperfect edges; and all other harmful defects."
    },
    "content": "IS 1977: 1996 Low Tensile Structural Steel\n(Third Revision)\n5.\nTensile Properties: See Table 2\nTABLE 2 TENSILE PROPERTIES\nGrade Tensile Yield Percent\nInternal\nDesig-\nStrength Stress Elogation\nDiameter nation MPa Min at Gauge\nof Bend MPa Length 5.65\nSo Min\n(1) (2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\nFe 290\n290-390\n165\n23\n2t\nFe 330\n330-430\n170\n23\n3t\nFe 370 370-470\n215\n23\n3t\nWhere t is the thickness of test piece.\n6.\nBend Test – For bend test, the test piece at room temperature shall withstand bending through 1800 to an\ninternal diameter not greater than that given in Table 2 without cracking.\n7.\nDimensions– Nominal dimensions of rolled products conforming to this specification shall be in\naccordance with the relevant Indian Standard . Currently available Indian Standards are listed in Table 4 of the\nstandard.\n8.\nTolerances – Rolling and cutting tolerances for steel products conforming to this standard shall be those\nspecified in IS 1852 : 1985 ++.\n++ Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products\n(fourth revision).\nNote — For test proceedures, refer to IS 1599 : 1985 Method of bend test (second revision) and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing\nof metals-tensile testing (second revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1977: 1996 low tensile structural steels. (third revision). 1.\nScope — Requirements of steel plates, strips, sections, flats, bars, etc, for use in structural work.\n1.1 The steels are suitable for welded, bolted and\nriveted’ structures, and for general engineering purposes.\n1.2 Where welding is employed for fabriction and\nguaranteed-weldability is required, welding procedure should be as specified in IS 9595 : 1996 `Metal are\nwelding of carbon and carbon manganese steels -\nRecommendations (first Revision):.\n2.\nGrades — There shall be three grades:\nGrade\nDesignation\nA\nFe 410W A\nB\nFe 410W B\nC\nFe 410W C\n3.\nFreedom from Defects — The finished material shall be reasonably free from surface flaws; laminations;\nrough/jagged and imperfect edges; and all other harmful defects."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2062: 1999",
    "title": "Steel For General Structural Purposes",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "summary": "Requirements of microalloyed steels of different strength levels for use in structural work. The steels may be suitable for other application also.",
    "keywords": [
      "crackability",
      "products",
      "groove",
      "bend",
      "room",
      "microalloyed",
      "tensile"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Tests": "As a rule, test pieces with a proportional guage length complying with the requirements L0=5.65 So should be used for the tensile test, where L0 is the gauge length and S is the cross sectional area of the test. 4..2 Bend Test – For bend test, the test piece at room temperature shall withstand bending through 1800 to an internal diameter not greater than that given in Table1 without cracking. 4.3 Impact Test – It shall meet therequirements given in Table 1 provided no individual value shall be less than 70 percent of the specified value. TABLE 1 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES Grade Designation Tensile Yield Stress, Min, MPa Percent Elongation Internal Charpy V-Notch Strength at Gauge length Diameter Impact Energy Min,MPa <20 20-40 >40 5.65 So of bend J, Min mm mm mm min min (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) ",
      "Dimensions": "The nominal dimensions of rolled products conforming to this standard shall be in accordance with the relevant Indian Standard. Currently available Indian Standard are listed in Table 4 of the standard",
      "Tolerances": "The rolling and cutting tolerances for steel products conforming to this standard shall be those specified in S 1852 : 1985++ + Testing and evaluation procedure for Y groove crackability test.",
      "Scope": "Requirements of microalloyed steels of different strength levels for use in structural work. The steels may be suitable for other application also.",
      "Grades": "It shall be in 10 grades given in Table 1.",
      "Freedom From Defects": "The finished material shall be free from surface defects, such as pits, rolled in scales, deep scratches, grooves, laminations, cracks, rough jagged and imperfect edges, and any other harmful defects.",
      "Mechanical Properties": "See Table 1. TABLE 1 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES Grade Tensile Yield Strength Min Elongation Bend Charpy V-notch Strength Percent Internal Impact Toughness, Min <16 16-40 41-63 >63 Min Diameter Joules, Min, (Average mm mm mm mm of 3 Values) Room MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa 5.65 So Min** Temp * -200C <12 mm 12-25 mm Fe 440 440 300 290 280 By 22 2t 3t – – agreement Fe 440B 440 300 290 280 – 22 2 t 3 t 50 30 Fe 490 490 350 330 320 – 22 2 t 3 t – – Fe 490B 490 350 330 320 – 22 2 t 3 t 50 25 Fe 540 540 410 390 380 – 20 2 t 3 t – – Fe 540B 540 410 390 380 – 20 2 t 3 t 50 25 Fe 570 570 450 430 420 – 20 2 t 3 t – – Fe 570B 570 450 430 420 – 20 2 t 3 t 45 20 Fe 590 590 450 430 420 – 20 2 t 3 t – – Fe 590B 590 450 430 420 – 20 2 t 3 t 45 20 * Room Temperature = 25 ± 2ºC; ** + is the thickness of the test piece. N"
    },
    "content": "IS 2062: 1999 Steel For General Structural Purposes\n(Fifth Revision)\nMinor surface defects may be removed by grinding provided the thickness is not reduced locally by more\nthan 4 percent below the minimum specified thickness.\n4.\nMechanical Properties :\n4.1. Tensile Test – As a rule, test pieces with a proportional guage length complying with the\nrequirements L0=5.65\nSo should be used for the tensile test, where L0 is the gauge length and S is the cross\nsectional area of the test.\n4..2 Bend Test – For bend test, the test piece at room temperature shall withstand bending through 1800 to an\ninternal diameter not greater than that given in Table1 without cracking.\n4.3 Impact Test – It shall meet therequirements given\nin Table 1 provided no individual value shall be less than 70 percent of the specified value.\nTABLE 1 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES\nGrade\nDesignation\nTensile\nYield Stress, Min, MPa\nPercent Elongation\nInternal\nCharpy V-Notch\nStrength at Gauge length\nDiameter\nImpact Energy\nMin,MPa\n<20\n20-40\n>40\n5.65\nSo of bend\nJ, Min mm mm mm\nmin min\n(1)\n(2) (3)\n(4)\n(5) (6) (7) (8)\n(9)\nA\nFe410WA\n410\n250\n240 230\n23\n3t —\nB\nFe410WB\n410 250 240 230 23 2 t for less than\n27 or equal to 25 mm\nthick products\n3t for more than\n25 mm thick products\nC\nFe410WC\n410\n250\n240 230 23\n2t\n27 ++ Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled- steel products (fourth revision)\nNote 1 – For test procedures, refer IS 599 : 1985. Method of end test (second revision) and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of\nmetals. Tensile testing (second revision).\nNote 2 – For chemical composition, see 8 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2062 : 1999 Specification for steel for general structural purposes (fifth revision).\n4.4 Groove Crackability Test – Y-Groove crackability\ntest may be carried out in accordance with IS 10842 for products of only Grade C material having thickness\nabove 12 mm and above if specially agreed to between the purchaser and the manufactuer.\n5.\nDimensions – The nominal dimensions of rolled products conforming to this standard shall be in\naccordance with the relevant Indian Standard. Currently available Indian Standard are listed in Table 4 of the\nstandard\n6. Tolerance – The rolling and cutting tolerances for\nsteel products conforming to this standard shall be those specified in S 1852 : 1985++ + Testing and evaluation procedure for Y groove crackability test. 1.\nScope – Requirements of microalloyed steels of different strength levels for use in structural work. The\nsteels may be suitable for other application also.\n2.\nGrades – It shall be in 10 grades given in\nTable 1.\n3.\nFreedom from Defects— The finished material shall be free from surface defects, such as pits, rolled in scales,\ndeep scratches, grooves, laminations, cracks, rough jagged and imperfect edges, and any other harmful\ndefects.\n4.\nMechanical Properties — See Table 1.\nTABLE 1 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES\nGrade\nTensile Yield Strength Min Elongation Bend Charpy V-notch\nStrength Percent Internal\nImpact Toughness, Min <16\n16-40\n41-63\n>63 Min Diameter\nJoules, Min,\n(Average mm mm mm mm\nof 3 Values)\nRoom MPa MPa MPa MPa MPa\n5.65\nSo Min** Temp * -200C <12 mm 12-25 mm\nFe 440 440 300 290 280\nBy 22 2t 3t – – agreement\nFe 440B 440 300 290 280 – 22 2 t 3 t 50 30\nFe 490 490 350 330 320 – 22 2 t 3 t – –\nFe 490B 490 350 330 320 – 22 2 t 3 t 50 25\nFe 540 540 410 390 380 – 20 2 t 3 t – –\nFe 540B 540 410 390 380 – 20 2 t 3 t 50 25\nFe 570 570 450 430 420 – 20 2 t 3 t – –\nFe 570B 570 450 430 420 – 20 2 t 3 t 45 20\nFe 590 590 450 430 420 – 20 2 t 3 t – –\nFe 590B 590 450 430 420 – 20 2 t 3 t 45 20\n* Room Temperature = 25 ± 2ºC;\n** + is the thickness of the test piece.\nNote 1– For test procedures, refer to IS 1599: 1985 Method of bend test (second revision), IS 1608:1995 Mechanical testing of\nmetals – Tensile testing (second revision) and the standard.\nNote 2 – For chemical composition see 7 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8500 : 1991. Specification for structural steel – Microalloyed (medium and high strength qualities) (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8500: 1991",
    "title": "Structural Steel- Micro Alloyed",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "summary": "(MEDIUM AND HIGH STRENGTH QUALITIES) (First Revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "qualities",
      "medium",
      "high",
      "strength"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 8500: 1991 Structural Steel- Micro Alloyed\n(MEDIUM AND HIGH STRENGTH QUALITIES)\n(First Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 11587: 1986",
    "title": "Structural Weather Resistance Steels",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "summary": "Requirements for high strength low alloy weather resistant structural steels in the form of plates, strips, sections and bars for welded, riveted or bolted construction requiring atmospheric corrosion resistance.",
    "keywords": [
      "weld",
      "until",
      "weather",
      "flattering",
      "resistant",
      "plates",
      "rolling"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for high strength low alloy weather resistant structural steels in the form of plates, strips, sections and bars for welded, riveted or bolted construction requiring atmospheric corrosion resistance.",
      "Grades": "There shall be following three grades of structural weather resistant steel: a) WR-Fe 480A, b) WR-Fe 480B, and c) WR-Fe 500",
      "Weldability": "All steel grades specified in this standard are of weldable quality. 3.1 If the weather resistant steels are to be used unpainted, it is advisable to select the welding electrodes with matching weathering characteristics.",
      "Freedom From Defects": "The finished material shall be free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations, rough jagged and imperfect edges, and all other harmful defects. 5. Mechanical Properties 5.1 Tensile Test — See Table1 TABLE 1 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES Grade Tensile Yield Strength, Min, Mpa Percentage Strength MPa Elongation Min on MPa Up to and Over 12 mm Over 25 mm Over 40 mm Gauge Including Up to and Up to and Up to and Length 12 mm Including Including Including 5.65 So 25 mm 40 mm 50 mm min WR-Fe 480A 480 345 325 325 - 21 WR-Fe 480B 480 345 345 345 340 21 WR-Fe 500 500 355 - - - 20 5.2 Bend Test – The test piece when cold shall with stand the test without cracking as prescribed in the standard. 5.3 Impact Test – The mean valves after the test shall be as given in Table 2. TABLE 2 CHARPY V-NOTCH IMPACT TEST VALU",
      "Dimensions": "Shall be in accordance with the relevant Indian Standards. Currently available Indian Standards are listed in Table 5 of the standard.",
      "Tolerances": "Rolling and cutting tolerances for steel products conforming to this standard shall be those specified in IS 1852 :1985+. +Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products (fourth revision) Note 1– For test proceedures, refer to the standard, IS1599 : 1985 method of bend test (second revision), IS 1608 :1995 Mechanical testing of metals-tensile testing (second revision) and"
    },
    "content": "IS 11587: 1986 Structural Weather Resistance Steels\n1.\nScope – Requirements for high strength low alloy weather resistant structural steels in the form of plates,\nstrips, sections and bars for welded, riveted or bolted construction requiring atmospheric corrosion resistance.\n2.\nGrade – There shall be following three grades of structural weather resistant steel:\na) WR-Fe 480A, b) WR-Fe 480B, and\nc) WR-Fe 500\n3.\nWeldability – All steel grades specified in this standard are of weldable quality.\n3.1 If the weather resistant steels are to be used\nunpainted, it is advisable to select the welding electrodes with matching weathering characteristics.\n4.\nFreedom from Defects — The finished material shall be free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations, rough\njagged and imperfect edges, and all other harmful defects.\n5.\nMechanical Properties\n5.1 Tensile Test — See Table1\nTABLE 1 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES Grade\nTensile\nYield Strength, Min, Mpa Percentage Strength MPa Elongation Min on MPa Up to and\nOver 12 mm\nOver 25 mm\nOver 40 mm Gauge Including\nUp to and\nUp to and\nUp to and\nLength 12 mm\nIncluding\nIncluding\nIncluding\n5.65\nSo\n25 mm 40 mm 50 mm min WR-Fe 480A 480 345\n325 325 - 21 WR-Fe 480B 480 345\n345 345 340 21 WR-Fe 500 500 355\n- - - 20\n5.2 Bend Test – The test piece when cold shall with\nstand the test without cracking as prescribed in the standard.\n5.3 Impact Test – The mean valves after the test shall\nbe as given in Table 2. TABLE 2 CHARPY V-NOTCH IMPACT TEST\nVALUE\nGrade\nTemperature Impact Energy, 0C\nJoule\n(Min, Average) WR-Fe 480A 0\n27 WR-Fe 480B 0\n27 WR-Fe 500 -15\n27\n5.4 Flattering Test – Flattering test shall be carried\nout for circular hollow section. If agreed , this test may also be carried out on rectangular hollow\nsections.The ring shall be flattened cold between the parallel plates with the weld, if any, at 450. No open-\ning shall occur by fracture in the weld until the distance between the plates is less than 75 percent of\nthe original outside diameter. The test shall continue until the weld, if any, opens and the weld shall show\nno sign of incomplete fusion. No crack or breakage in the metal elsewhere than the weld shall occur until\nthe distance between the plate is 2/3 of the original outside diameter. 6. Dimensions – Shall be in accordance with the relevant Indian Standards. Currently available Indian\nStandards are listed in Table 5 of the standard.\n7. Tolerances – Rolling and cutting tolerances for steel products conforming to this standard shall be\nthose specified in IS 1852 :1985+. +Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products (fourth revision)\nNote 1–\nFor test proceedures, refer to the standard, IS1599 : 1985 method of bend test (second revision),\nIS 1608 :1995 Mechanical testing of metals-tensile testing (second revision) and"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1757: 1988",
    "title": "Method Of Charpy Impact Test (V Notch) For Mettallic Materials",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "summary": "Requirements of plain galvanized steel sheets and strips coils, and corrugated galvanized sheets.",
    "keywords": [
      "inclusive",
      "zinc",
      "coating",
      "sheets",
      "grade",
      "grades",
      "drawing"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of plain galvanized steel sheets and strips coils, and corrugated galvanized sheets.",
      "Classification": "See Table 1 TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF GRADES OF GP/GC COILS AND SHEETS Type Designation GradeReference of Base Metal IS1079/IS 513 (1) (2) (3) (i) Deep drawing GPD Grade ‘DD’ (ii) Extra deep drawing GPED Grade ‘EDD’ (iii) Interstitial free GPIF Grade ‘IF’ (iv) Corrugated ordinary GC Grade ‘O’ Note – Spangles should not be allowed to form on the surface of strips / sheets during galnerizing",
      "Zinc Coating": "The zinc coating shall conform to the requirement of any one of the grades prescribed in Table 2. The mass of coating referred to in this standard shall represent the total mass of zinc, both sides inclusive. 3.1 The following are recommended grades of zinc coating for the various thickness of sheets – Thickness Grade of mm Zinc Coating 0.18 to 0.28 (both inclusive) 200 0.30 to 0.55 (both inclusive) 220 0.63 to 1.0 (both inclusive) 275 above 1.00 mm 350 Note 1 – The recommended thickness for roofing applications is 0.63 mm and corresponding recommended grade of coating shall be minimum 275 gm/m2. Note 2 – If agreed to between the manufacture and the uprchaser for thickness 0.18 mm to 0.28 mm (both inclusive), other coating grades 180 and 120 may be used."
    },
    "content": "IS 1757: 1988 Method Of Charpy Impact Test (V Notch) For Mettallic Materials\nNote 2– For chemical composition refer to the standard\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 11587 : 1986 Structural weather resistant steels. 1.\nScope – Requirements of plain galvanized steel sheets and strips coils, and corrugated galvanized sheets.\n2.\nClassification — See Table 1\nTABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION OF GRADES OF GP/GC COILS AND SHEETS Type Designation GradeReference of Base Metal IS1079/IS 513\n(1) (2)\n(3)\n(i) Deep drawing\nGPD\nGrade ‘DD’\n(ii) Extra deep drawing\nGPED\nGrade ‘EDD’\n(iii) Interstitial free\nGPIF\nGrade ‘IF’\n(iv) Corrugated ordinary\nGC\nGrade ‘O’\nNote – Spangles should not be allowed to form on the\nsurface of strips / sheets during galnerizing\n3.\nZinc Coating – The zinc coating shall conform to the requirement of any one of the grades prescribed in\nTable 2. The mass of coating referred to in this standard shall represent the total mass of zinc, both sides inclusive.\n3.1 The following are recommended grades of zinc\ncoating for the various thickness of sheets – Thickness Grade of mm Zinc Coating 0.18 to 0.28 (both inclusive) 200 0.30 to 0.55 (both inclusive) 220 0.63 to 1.0 (both inclusive) 275 above 1.00 mm 350\nNote 1 – The recommended thickness for roofing applications\nis 0.63 mm and corresponding recommended grade of coating shall be minimum 275 gm/m2.\nNote 2 – If agreed to between the manufacture and the\nuprchaser for thickness 0.18 mm to 0.28 mm (both inclusive), other coating grades 180 and 120 may be used."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 277: 2003",
    "title": "Galvanized Steel Sheets",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "summary": "Requirements for expanded metal steel used for general purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "corrugation",
      "sheets",
      "corrugations",
      "corrugated",
      "sheet",
      "coil",
      "coating"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Tests": "Samples of galvanized steel sheets shall withstand bending through 180º around a mandrel having diameter specified in Table 3 of the Standard without peeling or flaking of zinc coating. Crack or fracture of base metal, shall not be permitted. However, Cracks of the base metal developing at the edge of the specimen or coarse grain developing at the line of the bend shall be disregarded. 5. Coating Test 5.1 Determination of Mass of Zinc Coating – The average masses of zinc coating shall conform to both the values specified in Table 2.",
      "Freedom From Defects": "Galvanized plain sheets, corrugated sheets and coils shall be reasonably flat and free from bare spots, holes, tears and other harmful defects. 6.1 Coils, however, may contain some abnormal imperfections which render a portion of the coil unusable since the imperfections in the coil cannot be removed as in the case with cut length.",
      "Mass": "See Table 4 of the Standard. 8. Dimensions and Tolerances of Plain Sheets/Coils. 8.1 Sizes of Plain Sheets a) Length - 1 800, 2 200, 2 500, 2 800 and 3 000 mm b) Width - 750, 900, 1 000 and 1 200 mm c) Thickness - 0.18, 0.22, 0.25, 0.28, 0.32, (uncoated 0.40, 0.45, 0.50, 0.55, 0.63, sheets) 0.70, 0.80, 0.90, 1.00, and 1.60 mm. Note : Sheets for other sizes (length, width and thickness) may also be supplied subject tothe mutual agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer. 8.2 Unless other wire agreed, the internal diameter of sheet supplied coil shall be 450, 510 or 610 mm. 8.3 Tolerances 8.3.1 No sheet shall be smaller in length than that specified. Tolerances on length on plus side shall be 15 mm or 0.5 percent of length whichever is greater. 8.3.2 The diagonal distance between o",
      "Scope": "Requirements for expanded metal steel used for general purposes.",
      "Size Of Mesh": "Based on measurements of shortway of mesh (SWM) and longway of mesh (LWM) of diamond, and width and thickness of the strands."
    },
    "content": "IS 277: 2003 Galvanized Steel Sheets\n(PLAIN AND CORRUGATED)\n(Sixth Revision)\nTABLE 2 MASS OF COATING\nGrade of\nMinimum Average\nMinimum Coating\nCoating\nCoating Triple\nSingle Spot Spot Test\nTest g/m2\ng/m2\n(1)\n(2) (3)\n600\n600\n510\n450\n450\n380\n350\n350\n300\n275\n275\n235\n220\n220\n190\n200\n200\n170\n180\n180\n155\n120\n120\n100\n4.\nBend Test – Samples of galvanized steel sheets shall withstand bending through 180º around a mandrel\nhaving diameter specified in Table 3 of the Standard without peeling or flaking of zinc coating. Crack or\nfracture of base metal, shall not be permitted.\nHowever, Cracks of the base metal developing at the edge of the specimen or coarse grain developing at the\nline of the bend shall be disregarded.\n5.\nCoating Test\n5.1 Determination of Mass of Zinc Coating – The\naverage masses of zinc coating shall conform to both the values specified in Table 2.\n6.\nFreedom from Defects – Galvanized plain sheets, corrugated sheets and coils shall be reasonably flat and\nfree from bare spots, holes, tears and other harmful defects.\n6.1 Coils, however, may contain some abnormal\nimperfections which render a portion of the coil unusable since the imperfections in the coil cannot be removed\nas in the case with cut length. 7.\nMass – See Table 4 of the Standard.\n8.\nDimensions and Tolerances of Plain Sheets/Coils.\n8.1 Sizes of Plain Sheets\na) Length\n- 1 800, 2 200, 2 500, 2 800 and 3 000 mm\nb) Width\n- 750, 900, 1 000 and 1 200 mm c) Thickness\n- 0.18, 0.22, 0.25, 0.28, 0.32, (uncoated 0.40, 0.45, 0.50, 0.55, 0.63, sheets) 0.70, 0.80, 0.90, 1.00, and 1.60 mm.\nNote : Sheets for other sizes (length, width and thickness)\nmay also be supplied subject tothe mutual agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer.\n8.2 Unless other wire agreed, the internal diameter of\nsheet supplied coil shall be 450, 510 or 610 mm.\n8.3 Tolerances 8.3.1 No sheet shall be smaller in length than that specified. Tolerances on length on plus side shall be 15\nmm or 0.5 percent of length whichever is greater. 8.3.2 The diagonal distance between opposite corners of any sheet shall not differ by more than 20 mm. 8.3.3 No plain sheet shall be smaller in width than that specified. The positive tolerances on width shall\nbe 10 mm. 8.3.4 Thickness : The tolerance on thickness of sheet and coil shall be according to IS 1079+ or\nIS 513++. 8.3.5 Tolerance on Mass — The tolerance on mass of individual sheets calculated in accordance with Table\n4 of the Standard shall be within ±10 percent and tolerance on mass of each bundle of sheet shall be ±5\npercent.\n9.\nDimensions and Tolerances of Corrugated Sheets.\n9.1 Sizes of Corrugated Sheets\n9.1.1\nLength – The length of the corrugated sheets shall be as follows – 1 800, 2 200, 2 500, 2 800, 3 000 and\n3 050 mm\n9.1.2\nDepth and pitch of the corrugations: The depth and pitch of corrugation shall be as follows (see Fig. 1\nof the standard)\nGrade\nDepth of\nPitch of\nCorrugation\nCorrugation mm\nmm\nA\n17.5\n75\nB\n12.5\n75\n9.1.3 Number of corrugations – The number of corrugations shall be 8, 10, 11 and 13 depending on the\nwidth of the sheet. The overall width of the corrugated sheet before and after corrugation shall as shown in\nTable 3.\n9.1.3.1Sheets of sizes other than those specified above may be supplied, if agreed to between the contracting\nparties.\nTABLE 3 OVERALL WIDTHS AND\nCORRUGATIONS OF SHEETS\nNumber of\nGrade Overall Widths of Sheet\nCorrugations Before\nAfter\nCorrugation\nCorrugation mm mm\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n8 A 750 660\n10 A 900 810 11 A 1 000 910 13 A 1 200\n1 110 8 B 750 680 10 B 900 830 11 B 1 000 930 13 B 1 200\n1 130\n9.2 Tolerances – See Table 4.\nTABLE 4 TOLERANCE ON DIMENSION OF\nCORRUGATED SHEETS\nDimensions Tolerance1 (1) (2)\nDepth of corrugation ± 2.5 mm\nPitch of corrugation ± 5 mm\nOverall width after corrugation ± 25 mm\n1) Average of 4 measurements + Cold rolled low carbon steel sheets and strips (fourth revision) ++ Hot-rolled carbon steel sheets and strip (fifth revision) Note : For test proceedures, see 8, 9 and 10 of the standard\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 277 : 2003 Specification for galvanized steel sheets (plain and corrugated)\n(fifth revision). 1.\nScope – Requirements for expanded metal steel used for general purposes.\n2.\nSize of Mesh – Based on measurements of shortway of mesh (SWM) and longway of mesh (LWM) of\ndiamond, and width and thickness of the strands.\n3.\nDimensions – See Table 1."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 412: 1975",
    "title": "Expanded Metal Steel Sheets For",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "summary": "GENERAL PURPOSES (Second Revision) Ref. No. Size of Mesh Largest Standard Size of Sheet (Nominal)` Size of Sheets Normally Stocked SWM LWM LWM SWM mm mm mm mm mm 1 100 250 3.75 10.97 2 100 250 3.75 14.63 3 100 250 3.75 21.97 4 75 200 3.75 7.30 5 75 200 3.75 7.30 2.50 × 3.75 6 75 200 3.75 14.60 7 40 115 2.50 3.75 8 40 115 2.50 4.85 9 40 75 2.50 4.85 10 40 75 2.50 7.30 11 40 115 2.50 7.30 2.50 × 3.75 12 40 75 3.75 7.30 and 13 40 115 2.50 7.30 1.25 × 3.75 14 40 75 3.75 7.30 15 25 75 2.50 4.85 2.50 ",
    "keywords": [
      "mesh",
      "swm",
      "lwm",
      "expanded",
      "sheets",
      "largest",
      "shortway"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Freedom From Defects": "Finished expanded metal sheets shall be free from flaws, joints, welds, broken strands, laminations, etc.",
      "Preservative Treatment": "Shall be given a suitable protective coating to prevent corrosion. Note 1 – For test procedures, refer to IS 1608 :1995 Mechanical testing of metals tensile testing (second revision),and IS 1599:1985 Method for bend test (second revision), Note 2 – For chemical composition see 3.1 and 3.2 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 412 : 1975 Expanded metal–Steel sheets for general purposes (second revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 412: 1975 Expanded Metal Steel Sheets For\nGENERAL PURPOSES\n(Second Revision)\nRef. No.\nSize of Mesh\nLargest Standard Size of Sheet (Nominal)`\nSize of Sheets Normally Stocked SWM LWM LWM SWM\nmm mm\nmm mm mm\n1\n100\n250\n3.75\n10.97\n2\n100\n250\n3.75\n14.63\n3\n100\n250\n3.75\n21.97\n4\n75\n200\n3.75\n7.30\n5\n75\n200\n3.75\n7.30\n2.50 × 3.75\n6\n75\n200\n3.75\n14.60\n7\n40\n115\n2.50\n3.75\n8\n40\n115\n2.50\n4.85\n9\n40\n75\n2.50\n4.85\n10\n40\n75\n2.50\n7.30\n11\n40\n115\n2.50\n7.30\n2.50 × 3.75\n12\n40\n75\n3.75\n7.30 and\n13\n40\n115\n2.50\n7.30\n1.25 × 3.75\n14\n40\n75\n3.75\n7.30\n15\n25\n75\n2.50\n4.85\n2.50 × 3.75\n16\n25\n75\n2.50\n4.85\n2.50 × 3.75\n17\n25\n75\n2.50\n4.85 and\n18\n25\n75\n2.50\n4.85\n1.25 × 3.75\n19\n20\n60\n2.50\n3.75\n20\n20\n50\n3.75\n3.75\n2.50 × 3.75\n21\n20\n60\n2.50\n3.75\n22\n20\n50\n3.75\n3.75\n2.50 × 3.75\n23\n20\n60\n2.50\n3.75 and\n24\n20\n50\n3.75\n3.75\n1.25 × 3.75\n25\n20\n60\n2.50\n4.85\n26\n20\n50\n3.75\n3.75\n27\n12.5\n50\n2.50\n3.00\n28\n12.5\n40\n3.75\n3.00\n29\n12.5\n50\n2.50\n3.00\n2.50 × 2.75\n30\n12.5\n50\n2.50\n3.00 and\n31\n12.5\n40\n3.75\n3.00\n1.25 × 2.75\n32\n12.5\n50\n2.50\n3.00\n33\n12.5\n40\n3.75\n3.00\n34\n10\n40\n2.50\n2.00\n35\n10\n40\n2.50\n2.00\n2.50 × 1.75\n36\n10\n40\n2.50\n2.00 and\n37\n9.5\n28.5\n2.50\n2.00\n1.25 × 1.75\n38\n9.5\n28.5\n2.50\n2.00\n39\n9.5\n28.5\n2.50\n2.00\n40\n9.5\n25\n2.50\n2.00\n2.50 × 1.75\n41\n6\n25\n2.50\n2.00 and\n42\n6\n25\n2.50\n2.00\n1.25 × 1.75\n43\n5\n20\n2.50\n1.50\n44\n3\n15\n2.50\n1.50\n2.50 × 1.25 TABLE 1 SIZES OF SHORTWAY MESH AND LONGWAY MESH 4.\nTolerances\nOn nominal specified : ± 10 mm dimensions\nOn minimum specified : + 10 mm dimensions – 0 mm\nOn mass\n: ± 10percent\n4.1\nSize of Mesh\nOn SWM\n: ± 1 mm up to 20 mm and\n± 2 mm over 20 mm\nOn LWM\n: ± 2 mm up to 60 mm and\n± 4 mm over 60 mm and\n5.\nMechanical Properties\n5.1 Tensile strength of blank steel sheets shall be\nbetween 280 and 380 MN/m2.\nNote —1 N/mm2 = 1 MN/m2 = 0.102 kgf/mm2.\n5.2 Bend Test – Test piece shall withstand without\ncrack, being doubled over when cold, till the internal radius is not greater than 1.5 times its thickness and\nuntil the two sides of test piece are parallel.\n6.\nFreedom from Defects – Finished expanded metal sheets shall be free from flaws, joints, welds, broken\nstrands, laminations, etc.\n7.\nPreservative Treatment – Shall be given a suitable protective coating to prevent corrosion.\nNote 1 – For test procedures, refer to IS 1608 :1995 Mechanical testing of metals tensile testing (second revision),and IS\n1599:1985 Method for bend test (second revision),\nNote 2 – For chemical composition see 3.1 and 3.2 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 412 : 1975 Expanded metal–Steel sheets for general purposes (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 513: 1994",
    "title": "Cold Rolled Low Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "summary": "Requirements of cold rolled low carbon steel sheets and strips for bending and drawing purpose and where the surface is of prime importance. It covers sheets and strips up to 4 mm thick both in coil form and cut lengths.",
    "keywords": [
      "drawing",
      "strips",
      "edd",
      "analysis",
      "hardness",
      "sheets",
      "deep"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of cold rolled low carbon steel sheets and strips for bending and drawing purpose and where the surface is of prime importance. It covers sheets and strips up to 4 mm thick both in coil form and cut lengths.",
      "Classification Of Grades": "Sheets and strips shall be classified in the following grades – O – Ordinary quality D – Drawing quality DD – Deep drawing quality, and EDD – Extra deep drawing quality 3. Chemical Composition 3.1 Ladle Analysis – The ladle analysis of steel, shall be as given in Table 1. 3.2 Product Analysis – Permissible variation in the case of product analysis from the limits specified in Table 1 shall be as given in Table 2. TABLE 1 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION Grade Constituent, percent, Max Carbon Manganese Sulphur Phosphorus (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Ordinary (O) 0.15 0.60 0.055 0.055 Drawing (D) 0.12 0.50 0.040 0.040 Deep drawing (DD) 0.10 0.45 0.035 0.035 Extra deep 0.08 0.40 0.030 0.030 drawing (EDD) TABLE 2 PERMISSIBLE VARIATION FOR PRODUCT ANALYSIS Constituent Variation Over Specified Limit, Percent,Max Car"
    },
    "content": "IS 513: 1994 Cold Rolled Low Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips\n(Fourth Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements of cold rolled low carbon steel sheets and strips for bending and drawing purpose\nand where the surface is of prime importance. It covers sheets and strips up to 4 mm thick both in coil form and\ncut lengths.\n2.\nClassification of Grades – Sheets and strips shall be classified in the following grades –\nO\n– Ordinary quality\nD\n– Drawing quality\nDD\n– Deep drawing quality, and\nEDD\n– Extra deep drawing quality\n3.\nChemical Composition\n3.1 Ladle Analysis – The ladle analysis of steel, shall\nbe as given in Table 1.\n3.2 Product Analysis – Permissible variation in the\ncase of product analysis from the limits specified in\nTable 1 shall be as given in Table 2.\nTABLE 1 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION Grade Constituent, percent, Max Carbon Manganese Sulphur Phosphorus (1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5) Ordinary (O)\n0.15\n0.60\n0.055\n0.055 Drawing (D)\n0.12\n0.50\n0.040\n0.040 Deep drawing (DD)\n0.10\n0.45\n0.035\n0.035 Extra deep\n0.08\n0.40\n0.030\n0.030 drawing (EDD)\nTABLE 2 PERMISSIBLE VARIATION FOR\nPRODUCT ANALYSIS\nConstituent Variation Over Specified Limit, Percent,Max Carbon\n0.02 Manganese\n0.03 Sulphur\n0.005 Phosphorus\n0.005\nNote — Product analysis shall not be applicable to rimming\nsteel.\n4.\nMechanical and Physical Properties\n4.1 Tensile Test – Mechanical properties at room\ntemperature in as delivered condition for annealed / skin passed sheets and strips ( cut lengths and coils)\nshall be as follows –\nGrade Tensile Yield Elongation Hardness strength Stress Percent (Max) MPa Max , on Gauge Max Length HRB HR 80 mm and (30T) Width 20 mm, Min O\n-- -- --\nSee 4.3 D\n270-410 280 28 65 60 DD\n270-370 250 32\n57 55 EDD\n270-350 220 36\n50 50\n4.2 Cupping Test – It shall be applicable only for\nsheets, strips and coils of D,DD and EDD grades having thickness from 0.5 mm upto 2.00 mm. See Fig.1\nof the standard.\n4.3 Hardness Test – Hardness of different tempers at\nroom temperature for ‘ O’ grade shall be as fallows—:\nTemper\nHardness HRB.\nMin.\nMax.\nHard (H)\n85\n--\nHalf Hard ( ½H)\n75\n85\nQuater Hard (¼H)\n60\n75\nSkin Passed (SP)\n--\n70\nAnnealed (A)\n--\n60\n4.4 Bend Test – The angle of bend and internal diameter\nof bend for different grades of material shall be as follows : Note – For dimensional tolerances applicable to cold rolled sheets and strips See Tables 6 to 16 of the standard.\nNote 1 — For supply conditions including surface finish refer to the standard.\nNote 2 – For test procedures, refer to IS 1501 (Part) – 1984 Method for Vickers Hardness test for metallic materials : Part 1 HV 5\nto HV 100 (second revision), IS 1586 : 2000 Method of Rockwell Hardness test for metallic materials (A-B-C-D-E-G-H-K 15 N, 30\nN, 45N. 15 T, 30 T, 45 T) (third revision).\nIS 1599 : 1985 Method of bend test (second revision),\nIS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals – Tensile testing (second revision) ; and"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10175 (Part 1): 1993",
    "title": "Mechanical Testing Of Metals – Modified Erichsen Cupping Test – Sheet And Strip : Part 1 Thickness Upto",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "summary": "2 mm (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 513 :1994 Specification for cold rolled low carbon steel sheets and strips (fourth revision). 4.4.1 For sheets / strips in cut lengths and coils in Annealed and Skin Pass condition : Steel Grade Angle of Internal Bend of Bend Diameter O 180º t D 180º Close DD 180º Close EDD 180º Close 4.4.2 For Sheets / Strips of ‘ O’ grade Temper Angle of Bend Internal Diameter of Bend H -- -- ½H 180º 3t ¼H 180º 2t SP 1800 t A 1800 t Note – t is thick",
    "keywords": [
      "strips",
      "sheets",
      "close",
      "bend",
      "harmful",
      "angle",
      "rolled"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Freedom From Defects": "The finished sheets and strips shall be free from harmful defects, such as scale rust, blisters lamination, pitting, porosity, cracked or torn edges any other defects which are harmful to the intended use. 6. Dimensions 6.1 Thickness – Dimensions of cold rolled sheets and strips shall be as given below – Thickness, mm 0.18, 0.20,0.22,0.25,0.28 0.30, 0.32, 0.35, 0.40, 0.45, 0.50 0.55, 0.63, 0.80, 0.90, 1.00, 1.20, 1.25, 1.40, 1.50, 1.60, 1.80, 2.00, mm 6.1.1 The following are the preferred thickness for sheets above 2.00 mm, 2.50 mm, 2.65 mm, 3.00 mm, 3.25 mm, 3.50 mm and 4.00 mm"
    },
    "content": "IS 10175 (Part 1): 1993 Mechanical Testing Of Metals – Modified Erichsen Cupping Test – Sheet And Strip : Part 1 Thickness Upto\n2 mm (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 513 :1994 Specification for cold rolled low carbon steel sheets and strips\n(fourth revision).\n4.4.1 For sheets / strips in cut lengths and coils in\nAnnealed and Skin Pass condition :\nSteel Grade\nAngle of\nInternal\nBend of Bend\nDiameter\nO\n180º t\nD\n180º\nClose\nDD\n180º\nClose\nEDD\n180º\nClose\n4.4.2 For Sheets / Strips of ‘ O’ grade Temper\nAngle of Bend\nInternal Diameter of Bend H -- -- ½H\n180º 3t ¼H\n180º 2t SP\n1800 t A\n1800 t\nNote – t is thickness of test piece.\n4.4.3 The test pieces shall be deemed to have passed the test if the outer convex surface is free from cracks.\n5. Freedom from Defects – The finished sheets and\nstrips shall be free from harmful defects, such as scale rust, blisters lamination, pitting, porosity, cracked or\ntorn edges any other defects which are harmful to the intended use.\n6.\nDimensions\n6.1 Thickness – Dimensions of cold rolled sheets and\nstrips shall be as given below –\nThickness, mm\n0.18, 0.20,0.22,0.25,0.28 0.30,\n0.32, 0.35, 0.40, 0.45, 0.50\n0.55, 0.63, 0.80, 0.90, 1.00,\n1.20, 1.25, 1.40, 1.50, 1.60,\n1.80, 2.00, mm\n6.1.1 The following are the preferred thickness for sheets above 2.00 mm, 2.50 mm, 2.65 mm, 3.00 mm, 3.25\nmm, 3.50 mm and 4.00 mm"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1079: 1994",
    "title": "Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "summary": "Requirements of Hot rolled carbon steel sheets including pack rolled sheets and strips intended for cold forming, drawing and general engineering purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "plates",
      "chequered",
      "edd",
      "drawing",
      "strips",
      "bend",
      "rolled"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for steel chequered plates, having raised figures at regular intervals on one surface of the plate.",
      "Grades": "There shall be 4 grades of hot rolled carbon steel sheet and strip designated as follows. a) O— Ordinary quality : intended for general fabrication purposes where sheets or strips are used in the flat or for bending, moderate forming and welding operation b) D – Drawing quality c) DD – Deep drawing quality c) EDD – Extra deep drawing quality Note – D, DD and EDD are intended for applications where drawing, severe forming and welding are involved.",
      "Tensile Properties": "Shall be as follows: Grade Tensile Yield Percent Elongation strength Stress, at Guage length MPa MPa 5.65 Min O – – – D 240-400 – 25 DD 260-390 – 28 EDD 260-380 – 32",
      "Tests": "In accordance with IS 1599 : 1985.*",
      "Cupping Test": "Cupping Test may be carried out only for sheets strips of D , DD and EDD grades having thickness from 0.5mm upto2.00mm. The test and test values shall be as agreed mutually.",
      "Strain Ageing Test": "The test is to be carried out on grades where steel is supplied with non-ageing properties / guarantee and shall be as agreed. The test piece shall not develop crack near the bend, after prescribed test.",
      "Freedom From Defects": "Plates shall be cleanly rolled to the dimensions specified. Finished material shall be free from harmful surface defects, such as cracks, surface flaws, imperfect edges, etc.",
      "Weight": "The mass of the material shall be calculated on the basis that steel weighs 7.85 g/cm3: Note1 — For test proceedures, refer to IS 1599 : 1985 Method of bend test (second revision). IS 1608 : 1995. Mechanical testing of metals Tensile testing (second revision)and IS 10175 (Part 1) :1993.Mechanical testing of metals modified erichsen cupping test-Sheet and strip,Part 1– Thickness upto 2 mm (first revision). Note2— For chemical composition, refer to the standard. For detail information, refer to IS 1079 : 1994 Hot rolled carbon steel sheets and strips (fifth revision). So",
      "Materials": "Steel for the chequered plates shall conform to the requirements of Grade A of IS 2062 : 1992+ or IS 1977 : 1996++.",
      "Patterns": "See Fig.1 of the standard.",
      "Dimensions And Rolling Tolerances": "Chequered plates shall normally be supplied in sheared edges. 7.1 Nominal dimensions of chequered plates (exluding raised portion) shall be in accordance with IS 1730 : 1989+. 7.2. The rolling and cuting tolerances on width, length and thickness (exluding raised portion) shall be as given in IS 1852 : 1985‡. 7.3. The minimum bead height of chequered plates shall be 0.8 mm. * Method of bend test for steel products other than sheet, strip wire and tube (second revision). † Dimensions for steel plates, sheets, strips and flats for general engineering purposes (second revision). ‡ Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products (second revision). Note – For test procedures, refer to IS 1599 : 1985 Methods of bend test (second revision) and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of meta"
    },
    "content": "IS 1079: 1994 Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Sheets And Strips\n(Fifth Revision)\n1.\nScope— Requirements of Hot rolled carbon steel sheets including pack rolled sheets and strips intended\nfor cold forming, drawing and general engineering purposes.\n2.\nGrades— There shall be 4 grades of hot rolled carbon steel sheet and strip designated as follows.\na) O— Ordinary quality : intended for general fabrication purposes where sheets or strips are\nused in the flat or for bending, moderate forming and welding operation\nb) D\n– Drawing quality c) DD\n– Deep drawing quality c) EDD\n– Extra deep drawing quality\nNote – D, DD and EDD are intended for applications where\ndrawing, severe forming and welding are involved.\n3.\nTensile Properties — Shall be as follows:\nGrade Tensile Yield Percent Elongation strength Stress, at Guage length MPa MPa 5.65\nMin O\n–\n–\n– D\n240-400\n–\n25 DD\n260-390\n–\n28 EDD\n260-380\n–\n32\n4.\nBend Test — The test piece shall be bent cold through 1800 .The test piece shall be deemed to have\npassed the test if the outer convex surface is free from cracks after complete bending.The internal diameter of\nbend for different grades shall be as follows Steel Grade\nInternal Diameter of Bend O\n2 t\nD\nt\nDD\nClose\nEDD\nClose\nNote— Where is the thickness of test piece. * Dimensions for steel plates sheets,strips and flats for general engineering purposes (second revision) + Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products\n( fourth revision).\n5.\nCupping Test — Cupping Test may be carried out only for sheets strips of D , DD and EDD grades\nhaving thickness from 0.5mm upto2.00mm. The test and test values shall be as agreed mutually.\n6.\nStrain Ageing Test — The test is to be carried out on grades where steel is supplied with non-ageing\nproperties / guarantee and shall be as agreed. The test piece shall not develop crack near the bend, after\nprescribed test.\n7.\nFreedom from Defects — The finished material in cut lengths shall be free from harmful defects which\nwill affect the end use. When the material is supplied in the form of coils, the degree or amount of surface defects\nare expected to be more than in cut length sheets.\n8.\nDimensions and Tolerances\n8.1 Dimensions of steel sheet and strip shall conform\nto the dimension specified in IS 1730 : 1989.*\n8.2 Tolerance on length, width,thickness,and mass of\nthe steel sheet and strip shall confirm to the limits specifiedin IS 1852:1985.+\n8.3 For Camber tolerances, flatness tolerances and out\nof square tolerances refer 13 of the standard.\n9.\nWeight —\nThe mass of the material shall be calculated on the basis that steel weighs 7.85 g/cm3:\nNote1 — For test proceedures, refer to IS 1599 : 1985 Method of bend test (second revision).\nIS 1608 : 1995. Mechanical testing of metals Tensile testing (second revision)and\nIS 10175 (Part 1) :1993.Mechanical testing of metals modified erichsen cupping test-Sheet and strip,Part 1– Thickness upto 2 mm\n(first revision).\nNote2— For chemical composition, refer to the standard.\nFor detail information, refer to IS 1079 : 1994 Hot rolled carbon steel sheets and strips (fifth revision).\nSo 1.\nScope – Requirements for steel chequered plates, having raised figures at regular intervals on one surface\nof the plate.\n2.\nMaterial – Steel for the chequered plates shall conform to the requirements of Grade A of IS 2062 :\n1992+ or IS 1977 : 1996++.\n3.\nFreedom From Defects – Plates shall be cleanly rolled to the dimensions specified. Finished material shall\nbe free from harmful surface defects, such as cracks, surface flaws, imperfect edges, etc.\n4.\nPatterns – See Fig.1 of the standard.\n5.\nTensile Test – Properties shall conform to Grade A of IS 2062 : 1992+ or IS 1977 : 1996++.\n6.\nBend Test — In accordance with IS 1599 : 1985.*\n7.\nDimensions and Rolling Tolerances— Chequered plates shall normally be supplied in sheared edges.\n7.1 Nominal dimensions of chequered plates (exluding\nraised portion) shall be in accordance with IS 1730 :\n1989+.\n7.2. The rolling and cuting tolerances on width, length and thickness (exluding raised portion) shall be as given\nin IS 1852 : 1985‡.\n7.3. The minimum bead height of chequered plates shall be 0.8 mm.\n* Method of bend test for steel products other than sheet, strip wire and tube (second revision).\n† Dimensions for steel plates, sheets, strips and flats for general engineering purposes (second revision).\n‡ Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products\n(second revision).\nNote – For test procedures, refer to IS 1599 : 1985 Methods of bend test (second revision) and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing\nof metals tensile testing (second revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3502 : 1994 Specification for steel chequered plates (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3502: 1994",
    "title": "Steel Chequered Plates",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "summary": "Requirements for cold-rolled medium, and high carbon and low alloy steel strips of thickness up to 3 mm and width up to 330 mm intended for general engineering purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "carbon",
      "hardness",
      "equivalent",
      "annealed",
      "analysis",
      "requie",
      "hrc"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for cold-rolled medium, and high carbon and low alloy steel strips of thickness up to 3 mm and width up to 330 mm intended for general engineering purposes.",
      "Chemical Composition": "Carbon content (percent) on ladle analysis shall be as follows :",
      "Hardness Test": "When subjected to Rockwell hardness test in accordance with IS 1586 : 1988* or IS 5072 : 1988+ shall conform to the requie ments given below :",
      "Freedom From Defects": "Shall be free from scales, rust, blisters, laminations, pitting and cracked edges.",
      "Edge Condition": "Shall be supplied with mill, trimmed or slit edges. Medium Carbon High Carbon High Carbon Low Alloy C40 C55 C70 C80 C85 C98 120Cr35 110Cr35W2 0.35-0.45 0.50-0.60 0.65-0.75 0.75-0.85 0.80-0.90 0.90 - 1.05 1.10- 1.30 1.0 -1.20 Note — For manganese, silicon, sulphur, phosphorus, chromium and tungsten contents, refer to 4 of the standard. DESIGNATION ANNEALED HARDNESS, MAX ANNEALED AND RE-ROLLED HARDNESS, MAX HRB Equivalent HV HRC Equivalent HV C40 83.4 160 28 290 C55 85.0 165 35 350 C70 87.9 175 35 350 C80 91.6 190 35 350 C85 91.6 190 35 350 C98 94.8 205 35 350 120 Cr 35 97.5 220 35 350 110 Cr 35W2 97.5 220 35 350"
    },
    "content": "IS 3502: 1994 Steel Chequered Plates\n(Second Revision)\n+ Steel for general structural purposes (fourth revision).\n++ Structural steel (ordinary quality) (second revision). 1.\nScope – Requirements for cold-rolled medium, and high carbon and low alloy steel strips of thickness up to\n3 mm and width up to 330 mm intended for general engineering purposes.\n2.\nChemical Analysis — Carbon content (percent) on ladle analysis shall be as follows :\n3.\nHardness Test – When subjected to Rockwell hardness test in accordance with IS 1586 : 1988* or IS\n5072 : 1988+ shall conform to the requie ments given below :\n4.\nFreedom From Defects – Shall be free from scales, rust, blisters, laminations, pitting and cracked edges.\n5.\nEdge Condition – Shall be supplied with mill, trimmed or slit edges.\nMedium Carbon High Carbon High Carbon Low Alloy\nC40 C55\nC70\nC80 C85 C98 120Cr35 110Cr35W2\n0.35-0.45 0.50-0.60\n0.65-0.75 0.75-0.85 0.80-0.90 0.90 - 1.05 1.10- 1.30 1.0 -1.20 Note — For manganese, silicon, sulphur, phosphorus, chromium and tungsten contents, refer to 4 of the standard.\nDESIGNATION ANNEALED HARDNESS, MAX ANNEALED AND RE-ROLLED HARDNESS, MAX HRB Equivalent HV HRC Equivalent HV C40\n83.4 160 28 290 C55\n85.0 165 35 350 C70\n87.9 175 35 350 C80\n91.6 190 35 350 C85\n91.6 190 35 350 C98\n94.8 205 35 350 120 Cr 35\n97.5 220 35 350 110 Cr 35W2\n97.5 220 35 350"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7226: 1974",
    "title": "Cold–Rolled Medium, High Carbon And Low Alloy Steel Strip For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "summary": "Requirements of terne coated carbon steel sheets for use in automobile industry, as a roofing and other similar application the thickness of the sheet shall be between 0.3 to 2.0 mm. The thickness other than this may be as agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer.",
    "keywords": [
      "coating",
      "terne",
      "designation",
      "drawing",
      "spaces",
      "computer",
      "lead"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Finish": "Bright Finish. Note – For rolling tolerances see 9 of the standard. * Methods for rockwell hardness tes for metallic material (second revision). + Method for rockwell superficial hardness test (first revision)",
      "Scope": "Requirements of terne coated carbon steel sheets for use in automobile industry, as a roofing and other similar application the thickness of the sheet shall be between 0.3 to 2.0 mm. The thickness other than this may be as agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer. 2. Terminology 2.1 Terne (Lead Alloy)— In the context of this standard, any lead-based alloy in commercial use for the hot-dip coating of steel sheet. Tin is the most common alloying element, but antimony is also commercially used, or combinations of both elements. If a specific alloy composition is required, it shall be by agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser. 2.2 Designation System Terne coating and qualities – The produced hot-tip terne coating is designated T0 (the `0’ is inserted to fill a compute"
    },
    "content": "IS 7226: 1974 Cold–Rolled Medium, High Carbon And Low Alloy Steel Strip For General Engineering Purposes\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 7226 : 1974 Specification for cold-rolled medium, high carbon and low alloy steel strip for general engineering purposes. 6.\nSurface Finish – Bright Finish. Note – For rolling tolerances see 9 of the standard.\n* Methods for rockwell hardness tes for metallic material (second revision).\n+ Method for rockwell superficial hardness test (first revision) 1.\nScope – Requirements of terne coated carbon steel sheets for use in automobile industry, as a roofing and\nother similar application the thickness of the sheet shall be between 0.3 to 2.0 mm. The thickness other than this\nmay be as agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer.\n2.\nTerminology\n2.1 Terne (Lead Alloy)— In the context of this\nstandard, any lead-based alloy in commercial use for the hot-dip coating of steel sheet. Tin is the most\ncommon alloying element, but antimony is also commercially used, or combinations of both elements.\nIf a specific alloy composition is required, it shall be by agreement between the manufacturer and the purchaser.\n2.2 Designation System\nTerne coating and qualities – The produced hot-tip terne coating is designated T0 (the `0’ is inserted to fill\na computer space and has no significance in the designation). The coating mass designation follows\nthe T0 and three spaces are allocated for coating mass designation. If only two spaces are required, such as\nfor designation `75’, then the `75’ is preceded by a `0’ to fill computer space and is shown as `075’. If the product\nis skin passed, designation `S’ is used to indicate the coating condition. If the pdoduct has not been skin\npassed, the designation `N’ for normal coating (as produced) is shown. The numbers 01, 02, 03 and 04 are\ncommon to other standards indicating the qualities of commercial, drawing, deep drawing, and deep drawing\nspecial killed. An example of a complete condition designation including coating, coating mass, coating\ncondition and quality is T0 120N01. This is composed by combining the following :\nT0 = terne coating\n120 = coating designation N = normal coating 01 = ordinary quality\n3.\nConditions of Manufacture\n3.1 Ladle Analysis — See Table 1.\n3.2 Product Analysis – Permissible variation in the\ncase of product analysis from the limits specified in\nTable1shall be given as below:\nConstituent\nPermissible Variation Over Specified Limit,Percent\nCarbon 0.02\nManganese 0.03\nSulphur 0.005\nPhosphorus 0.005\n3.3 Terne (Lead Alloy) Coating Mass – The mass of\ncoating shall conform to the requirements in Table 2 for the specific coating designation. The mass of coating is\nthe total amount on both surfaces of the sheet, expressed in grams per square metre (g/m2) of sheet."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1148: 1982",
    "title": "Hot Rolled Steel Rivets Bars",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "summary": "Requirement for hot-rolled steel rivet bars in size up to 40 mm diameter used for the manufacture of hot forged rivets for structural purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "bars",
      "analysis",
      "silicon",
      "bar",
      "diameter",
      "rivet",
      "upto"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirement for hot-rolled steel rivet bars in size up to 40 mm diameter used for the manufacture of hot forged rivets for structural purposes. 2. Chemical Composition 2.1 Ladle Analysis – Ladle analysis of the steel,shall be as given below: Constituent Per cent,Max Carbon 0.23 Sulphur 0.050 Phosphorus 0.050 2.2 Product Analysis – Permissible variation in the case of product analysis, from the limits specified under 2.1 shall be as fallows: Constituent Variation Over the Specified Limit Percent,Max. Carbon 0.02 Sulphur 0.005 phosphorus 0.005 2.3 When steel is required in copper bearing quality, copper content shall be between 0.20 to 0.35 percent. In case of product analysis, permissible variation shall not exceed ±0.3 percent. 2.4 When steel is silicon – killed, silicon content on the pro",
      "Freedom From Defects": "The finished material shall be free from such surface and internal flaws as would be determined to the end use of the material.",
      "Lengths": "In multiples of 250 mm.",
      "Dimensional Tolerances": "The bar shall comply with the following dimensional tolerances: : Diameter of Bar Total Tolerance mm mm Below 20 0.40 20 0.45 22 and 24 0.50 Over 24 2 percent of diameter All the tolerances specified shall be minus tolerances. When special plus and minus tolerances are required by the purchaser, the sum of such tolerances shall not be specified as less than the above total tolerances. 6. Tests 6.1 Tensile Test Characteristic Requirement Tensile strength, MPa 410- 530 Min Yield stress, min, MPa a) 6mm upto and 260 including 12mm b) Over 12 mm upto 250 and including 20 mm c) Over 20 mm upto 240 and including 40mm Elongation percent, Min, guage length 5.65 Min 22 6.1.1 No tensile test shall be carried out on bars below 6mm 6.2 Dump Test – Minor surface fiaws which do not tend to open out wide"
    },
    "content": "IS 1148: 1982 Hot Rolled Steel Rivets Bars\n(UPTO 40 MM DIAMETER) FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES\n(Third Revision )\n1.\nScope – Requirement for hot-rolled steel rivet bars in size up to 40 mm diameter used for the manufacture\nof hot forged rivets for structural purposes.\n2.\nChemical Composition\n2.1 Ladle Analysis – Ladle analysis of the steel,shall\nbe as given below:\nConstituent\nPer cent,Max\nCarbon 0.23\nSulphur 0.050\nPhosphorus 0.050\n2.2 Product Analysis – Permissible variation in the\ncase of product analysis, from the limits specified under 2.1 shall be as fallows:\nConstituent Variation Over the Specified Limit Percent,Max.\nCarbon\n0.02\nSulphur\n0.005 phosphorus\n0.005\n2.3 When steel is required in copper bearing quality,\ncopper content shall be between 0.20 to 0.35 percent.\nIn case of product analysis, permissible variation shall not exceed ±0.3 percent.\n2.4 When steel is silicon – killed, silicon content on\nthe product analysis, shall not be less than 0.1 percent.\nWhen the steel is silicon- aliminium - killed or aluminiumkilled, the requirement regarding minimum silicon\ncontent shall not apply.\n3.\nFreedom from Defects – The finished material shall be free from such surface and internal flaws as\nwould be determined to the end use of the material.\n4.\nLengths – In multiples of 250 mm.\n5.\nDimensional Tolerances – The bar shall comply with the following dimensional tolerances:\n:\nDiameter of Bar\nTotal Tolerance mm mm\nBelow 20 0.40 20 0.45 22 and 24 0.50\nOver 24 2 percent of diameter\nAll the tolerances specified shall be minus tolerances.\nWhen special plus and minus tolerances are required by the purchaser, the sum of such tolerances shall not\nbe specified as less than the above total tolerances.\n6.\nTests\n6.1 Tensile Test\nCharacteristic Requirement Tensile strength, MPa 410- 530 Min Yield stress, min, MPa a) 6mm upto and 260 including 12mm b) Over 12 mm upto 250 and including 20 mm c) Over 20 mm upto 240 and including 40mm Elongation percent, Min, guage length 5.65\nMin 22\n6.1.1\nNo tensile test shall be carried out on bars below 6mm\n6.2 Dump Test – Minor surface fiaws which do not tend\nto open out wider than 0.4 mm + 0.04 times the diameter of the rivet bar shall not be the cause for rejection. Dump test\nshall not be applicable to bars below 6 mm.\n6.3 Bend Test – In the case of bars over 25mm in\ndiameter the test piece when cold shall withstand, without fracture, being doubled over, either by pressure or by\nslow and steady blows from a hammer , till the internal diameter is not greater than three times the diameter of\nthe test piece, and sides are parallel. For bars 25mm in diameter and under, the internal diameter of the bend\nshall be not greater than twice the diameter of the bar.\n6.4 Shear Test – The ultimate shear strength of the bars\nas rolled shall be not less than 260 MPa.\nNote – For test proceedures, refer to IS 1599 : 1985 Method of bend test (second revision), and IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical\ntesting of metals-Tensile testing (second revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1148 : 1982 Hot rolled rivet bars upto 40mm diameter) for structural purposes (third revision).\nSo"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1149: 1982",
    "title": "High Tensile Steel Rivets Bars For Structural Purposes",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "summary": "Requirement for high tensile steel rivet bars in size up to 40 mm diameter for structural purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "tubes",
      "bars",
      "analysis",
      "silicon",
      "yst",
      "welded",
      "diameter"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for hot finished welded (HFW), hot finished seamless (HFS), and electric resistance welded (ERW) or high frequency induction welded (HRIW) plain carbon steel tubes for structural purposes.",
      "Freedom From Defects": "The finished material shall be free from such surface and internal flaws as would be determined to the end use of the material.",
      "Lengths": "In multiples of 250 mm. 5. Dimensional Tolerances : Shall be similar as specified for IS 1148 : 1982*. 6. Tests 6.1 Tensile Test Characteristic Requirement Tensile strength, min MPa 460 Min Yield stress, min, MPa a) 6mm upto and 310 including 12 mm b) Over 12 mm upto 300 and including 20 mm c) Over 20 mm upto 280 and including 40 mm Elongation percent, Min guage length 5.65 So Min 22 6.1.1 No tensile test shall be carried out on bars below 6 mm. 6.2 Bend Test – In the case of bars over 25 mm in diameter the test piece when cold shall withstand, without fracture, being doubled over, either by pressure or by slow and steady blows from a hammer , till the internal diameter is not greater than three times the diameter of the test piece, and sides are parallel. For bars 25 mm in diameter and un",
      "Designation": "Shall be designated by their nominal bore and shall be classified as `Light’, `Medium’ and `Heavy’ depending on the wall thickness (see Table 1). They shall be further graded as YSt 210, YSt 240 and YSt 310 depending on the yield stress of the material (see Table 2). The designation of the steel tubes shall, therefore, include the nominal bore of the tube, classification on wall thickness and grade of the material.",
      "Materials": "The tubes shall be manufactured from steel conforming to IS 107 48 : 1995* 4. Dimensions and Weight 4.1 Sizes in weights and some geometrical properties of tubes shall be as given in Table 1. 4.2 Tolerances – The following tolerances shall apply: a) Outside Diameter 1) Up to and including + 0.4 mm 48.3 mm –0.8 mm 2) Over 48.3 mm ±1.0 percent b) Thickness (for all sizes) 1) Welded tubes +Not limited –10 percent 2) Seamless tubes +Not limited 12.5 percent c) Weight +10 percent"
    },
    "content": "IS 1149: 1982 High Tensile Steel Rivets Bars For Structural Purposes\n(Third Revision )\n1.\nScope – Requirement for high tensile steel rivet bars in size up to 40 mm diameter for structural\npurposes.\n2.\nChemical Composition\n2.1 Ladle Analysis – Ladle analysis of the steel, shall\nbe as given below –\nConstituent\nPer cent,Max\nCarbon\n0.23\nSulphur\n0.050\nPhosphorus\n0.050\n2.2 Product Analysis : Permissible variation in the case\nof product analysis, from the limits specified under 2.1 shall be as follows:\nConstituent Variation Over the Specified Limit Percent, Maximum Carbon 0.02 Sulphur 0.005 Phosphorus 0.005\n2.3 When steel is required in copper bearing quality,\ncopper content shall be between 0.20 to 0.35 percent. In case of product analysis, permissible variation shall not\nexceed ± 0.3 percent.\n2.4 When steel is silicon–killed, silicon content on\nthe product analysis, shall not be less than 0.1 percent.\nWhen the steel is silicon- aliminium - killed or aluminiumkilled, the requirement regarding minimum silicon\ncontent shall not apply.\n3.\nFreedom from Defects – The finished material shall be free from such surface and internal flaws as\nwould be determined to the end use of the material.\n4.\nLengths – In multiples of 250 mm.\n5.\nDimensional Tolerances : Shall be similar as specified for IS 1148 : 1982*.\n6. Tests\n6.1 Tensile Test\nCharacteristic Requirement\nTensile strength, min MPa\n460\nMin Yield stress, min, MPa a) 6mm upto and\n310 including 12 mm\nb) Over 12 mm upto\n300 and including 20 mm\nc) Over 20 mm upto\n280 and including 40 mm Elongation percent, Min guage length 5.65\nSo Min\n22\n6.1.1 No tensile test shall be carried out on bars below\n6 mm.\n6.2 Bend Test – In the case of bars over 25 mm in\ndiameter the test piece when cold shall withstand, without fracture, being doubled over, either by pressure\nor by slow and steady blows from a hammer , till the internal diameter is not greater than three times the\ndiameter of the test piece, and sides are parallel. For bars 25 mm in diameter and under, the internal diameter\nof the bend shall be not greater than twice the diameter of the bar.\n6.3 Shear Test – The ultimate shear strength of the bars\nas rolled shall be not less than 370 MPa.\n6.4 Hot Compression Test – A test piece having a\nlength equal to twice its diameter, shall be cut from a bar and shall, without cracking or showing signs of\nfracture withstand being heated to a forging temperature and hammered or compressed on the end\ntill its length has been reduced to its orginal diameter.\n* Hot rolled river bars (upto 40 mm dia) for structural purposes\n(third revision).\nNote – For test proceedures, refer to IS 1599 : 1985 Method of bend test (second revision), IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of\nmetals-Tensile testing (second revision) and IS 5242 :1979 Method of test for determining shear strength of metals (first revision).\nFor detailed information , refer to IS 1149 : 1982 Specification for high tensile steel rivet bars for structural purposes (third revision). 1.\nScope – Requirements for hot finished welded\n(HFW), hot finished seamless (HFS), and electric resistance welded (ERW) or high frequency induction\nwelded (HRIW) plain carbon steel tubes for structural purposes.\n2.\nDesignation – Shall be designated by their nominal bore and shall be classified as `Light’, `Medium’ and\n`Heavy’ depending on the wall thickness (see Table 1).\nThey shall be further graded as YSt 210, YSt 240 and\nYSt 310 depending on the yield stress of the material\n(see Table 2). The designation of the steel tubes shall, therefore, include the nominal bore of the tube,\nclassification on wall thickness and grade of the material.\n3.\nMaterial — The tubes shall be manufactured from steel conforming to IS 107 48 : 1995*\n4.\nDimensions and Weight\n4.1 Sizes in weights and some geometrical properties\nof tubes shall be as given in Table 1.\n4.2 Tolerances – The following tolerances shall apply:\na) Outside Diameter 1) Up to and including + 0.4 mm 48.3 mm –0.8 mm 2) Over 48.3 mm ±1.0 percent b) Thickness (for all sizes) 1) Welded tubes +Not limited –10 percent 2) Seamless tubes +Not limited 12.5 percent c) Weight +10 percent"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1161: 1998",
    "title": "Steel Tubes For Structural Purposes.",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "summary": "Requirements for hot and cold formed square and rectangular hollow steel sections for structural use. Section 1 General Requirements",
    "keywords": [
      "heavy",
      "tubes",
      "light",
      "medium",
      "formed",
      "yst",
      "hollow"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Workmanship": "The tubes shall be cleanly finished and reasonably free from scale. They shall be free from cracks, surface flaws, laminations and other defects. The ends shall be cut cleanly and square with the axis of tube, unless otherwise specified.",
      "Galvanizing": "If the tubes are required in galvanized condition the zinc coating on the tubes shall be conforming to the requirements.",
      "Straightness": "Tubes shall not deviate from straightness by more than 1 mm in any 600 mm length.",
      "Lengths": "The tubes shall normally be supplied in random lengths at 4 to 7 m. 9. Tests 9.1 Tensile Test – See Table 2. 9.2 Ductility Test – The tubes of 50 mm NB and under shall withstand cold bend test and tubes above 50 mm NB shall withstand flattening test as prescribed in the standard. } } TABLE 1 SIZES AND PROPERTIES OF STEEL TUBES FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES Nominal Outside Class Thickness Weight Area of Internal Bore Diameter Cross Volume Section mm mm mm kg/m cm2 cm3/m (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) 15 21.3 Light 2.0 0.947 1.21 235 Medium 2.6 1.21 1.53 203 Heavy 3.2 0.44 1.82 174 20 26.9 Light 2.3 1.38 1.78 390 Medium 2.6 1.56 1.98 370 Heavy 3.2 1.87 2.38 330 25 33.7 Light 2.6 1.98 2.54 638 Medium 3.2 2.41 3.06 585 Heavy 4.0 2.93 3.73 518 32 42.4 Light 2.6 2.54 3.25 1 086 Medium 3.2 3.10 3.94 1 017",
      "Scope": "Requirements for hot and cold formed square and rectangular hollow steel sections for structural use. Section 1 General Requirements",
      "Designation": "A hollow section shall be designated by its outside dimensions and its thickness in millimetres and shall be further classified into CF or HF depending upon whether it is cold formed or hot formed. a) A cold formed square hollow section with outside dimensions of 50 mm square and 2.90 mm thickness is designated as 50 × 50 × 2.90 CF SHS. b) A hot formed rectangular hollow section with outside dimensions of 40 mm depth, 25 mm breadth and 2.65 mm thickness is designated as 40 × 25 × 2.65 HF RHS."
    },
    "content": "IS 1161: 1998 Steel Tubes For Structural Purposes.\n(Fourth Revision) –8 percent 1) Single tube light Medium ± 10 percent Heavy 2) 10 tonne lots light ± 5 percent Medium Heavy ±7.5 percent\n* Hot rolled steel strip for welded tubes and pipes (first revision)\n5.\nWorkmanship – The tubes shall be cleanly finished and reasonably free from scale. They shall be free from\ncracks, surface flaws, laminations and other defects.\nThe ends shall be cut cleanly and square with the axis of tube, unless otherwise specified.\n6.\nGalvanizing– If the tubes are required in galvanized condition the zinc coating on the tubes shall be\nconforming to the requirements.\n7.\nStraightness – Tubes shall not deviate from straightness by more than 1 mm in any 600 mm length.\n8.\nLengths – The tubes shall normally be supplied in random lengths at 4 to 7 m.\n9.\nTests\n9.1 Tensile Test – See Table 2.\n9.2 Ductility Test – The tubes of 50 mm NB and under\nshall withstand cold bend test and tubes above 50 mm\nNB shall withstand flattening test as prescribed in the standard.\n}\n} TABLE 1 SIZES AND PROPERTIES OF STEEL TUBES FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES\nNominal\nOutside\nClass\nThickness\nWeight\nArea of\nInternal\nBore\nDiameter\nCross\nVolume\nSection mm\nmm mm\nkg/m cm2\ncm3/m\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n15\n21.3\nLight\n2.0\n0.947\n1.21\n235\nMedium\n2.6\n1.21\n1.53\n203\nHeavy\n3.2\n0.44\n1.82\n174\n20\n26.9\nLight\n2.3\n1.38\n1.78\n390\nMedium\n2.6\n1.56\n1.98\n370\nHeavy\n3.2\n1.87\n2.38\n330\n25\n33.7\nLight\n2.6\n1.98\n2.54\n638\nMedium\n3.2\n2.41\n3.06\n585\nHeavy\n4.0\n2.93\n3.73\n518\n32\n42.4\nLight\n2.6\n2.54\n3.25\n1 086\nMedium\n3.2\n3.10\n3.94\n1 017\nHeavy\n4.0\n3.79\n4.82\n929\n40\n48.3\nLight\n2.9\n3.23\n4.13\n1 418\nMedium\n3.2\n3.56\n4.53\n1 378\nHeavy\n4.0\n4.37\n5.56\n1 275\n50\n60.3\nLight\n2.9\n4.08\n5.23\n2 332\nMedium\n3.6\n5.03\n6.41\n2 213\nHeavy\n4.5\n6.19\n7.88\n2 066\n65\n76.1\nLight\n3.2\n5.71\n7.32\n3 814\nMedium\n3.6\n6.42\n8.20\n3 727\nHeavy\n4.5\n7.93\n10.1\n3 534\n80\n88.9\nLight\n3.2\n6.72\n8.61\n5 343\nMedium\n4.0\n8.36\n10.7\n5 138\nHeavy\n4.8\n9.90\n12.7\n4 936\n90\n101.6\nLight\n3.6\n8.70\n11.1\n6 995\nMedium\n4.0\n9.63\n12.3\n6 877\nHeavy\n4.8\n11.5\n14.6\n6 644\n100\n114.3\nLight\n3.6\n9.75\n12.5\n9 004\nMedium\n4.5\n12.2\n15.5\n8 704\nHeavy\n5.4\n14.5\n18.5\n8 409\n110\n127.0\nLight\n4.5\n13.6\n17.3\n10 930\nMedium\n4.8\n14.5\n18.4\n10 819\nHeavy\n5.4\n16.2\n20.6\n10 599\n125\n139.7\nLight\n4.5\n15.0\n19.1\n13 410\nMedium\n4.8\n15.9\n20.3\n13 287\nHeavy\n5.4\n17.9\n22.8\n13 043\n135\n152.4\nLight\n4.5\n16.4\n20.9\n16 142\nMedium\n4.8\n17.5\n22.2\n16 008\nHeavy\n5.4\n19.6\n25.0\n15 740\n150\n165.1\nLight\n4.5\n17.8\n22.7\n19 128\nMedium\n4.8\n18.9\n24.2\n18 981\nHeavy\n5.4\n21.3\n27.1\n18 690 Nominal\nOutside\nClass\nThickness\nWeight\nArea of\nInternal\nBore\nDiameter\nCross\nVolume\nSection mm\nmm mm\nkg/m cm2\ncm3/m\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n150\n168.3\nLight\n4.5\n18.2\n23.1\n19 921\nMedium\n4.8\n19.4\n24.7\n19 771\nHeavy 1\n5.4\n21.7\n27.6\n19 473\nHeavy 2\n6.3\n25.2\n32.0\n19 030\n175\n193.7\nLight\n4.8\n22.4\n28.5\n26 606\nMedium\n5.4\n25.1\n32.0\n26 260\nHeavy\n5.9\n27.3\n34.8\n25 974\n200\n219.1\nLight\n4.8\n25.4\n32.3\n34 454\nMedium\n5.6\n29.5\n37.5\n33 930\nHeavy\n5.9\n31.0\n39.5\n33 734\n225\n244.5\nHeavy\n5.9\n34.7\n44.2\n42 507\n250\n273.0\nHeavy\n5.9\n38.9\n49.5\n53 557\n300\n323.9\nHeavy\n6.3\n49.3\n62.8\n76 073\n350\n355.6\nHeavy\n8.0\n68.6\n87.3\n90 533\nTABLE 2 - TENSILE PROPERTIES OF STEEL TUBES FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES\nGrade\nTensile\nYield Stress\nElongation\nStrength\nMin on Gauge\nMin\nLength\n5.65\nSo Min\nMPa\nMPa\nPercent\nYSt210\n330\n210\n20\nYSt240\n410\n240\n17\nYSt310\n450\n310\n14\nNote1 – For test proceedures, refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals-Tensile testing (second revision), IS 2328\n: 1983 Method of flattening test on metallic tubes (first revision), IS 2329 : 1985 Method for bend test on metallic tubes (first revision), IS 4736 : 1986. Hot-dip zinc coating on mild steel tubes (first revision) and the standard.\nNote 2 – For other geometrical properties, refer to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1161 : 1998 Specification for steel tubes for structural purposes (fourth revision).\nTable 1 SIZES AND PROPERTIES OF STEEL TUBES FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES (concluded) 1. Scope – Requirements for hot and cold formed square and rectangular hollow steel sections for\nstructural use. Section 1 General Requirements\n2.\nDesignation – A hollow section shall be designated by its outside dimensions and its thickness in millimetres\nand shall be further classified into CF or HF depending upon whether it is cold formed or hot formed.\na) A cold formed square hollow section with outside dimensions of 50 mm square and 2.90 mm\nthickness is designated as 50 × 50 × 2.90 CF SHS.\nb) A hot formed rectangular hollow section with outside dimensions of 40 mm depth, 25 mm\nbreadth and 2.65 mm thickness is designated as\n40 × 25 × 2.65 HF RHS.\n3. Dimensions and Weights — See Tables 1 and 2."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4923: 1997",
    "title": "Hollow Steel Sections For Structural Use",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "summary": "(Second Revision) TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES OF SQUARE HOLLOW SECTIONS Designation Depth Thick- Weight Area or ness of Width Section (D) mm mm mm kg/m cm2 (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 25.0×25.0×2.6 25.0 2.6 1.69 2.16 25.0×25.0×3.2 25.0 3.2 1.98 2.53 30.0×30.0×2.6 30.0 2.6 2.10 2.68 30.0×30.0×3.2 30.0 3.2 2.49 3.17 30.0×30.0×4.0 30.0 4.0 2.94 3.75 32.0×32.0×2.6 32.0 2.6 2.26 2.88 32.0×32.0×3.2 32.0 3.2 2.69 3.42 32.0×32.0×4.0 32.0 4.0 3.19 4.07 35.0×35.0×2.6 35.0 2.6 2.51 3.20 35.0×35.0×3.2 35.0 3.",
    "keywords": [
      "aluminium",
      "wrought",
      "alloys",
      "sections",
      "yst",
      "tubes",
      "formed"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Straightness And Twist": "Maximum deviation from straightness for tubes in finish straightened condition shall be 1/600th of length at the centre of the length. For tubes in mill straightened condition 1/200th of any length at the centre of the length. Twist shall be measured for square and rectangular sections as given in the standard. the tolerances on twist shall be 2 mm plus 0.5 mm/m.",
      "Oiling And Painting": "Hollow sections may be varnished painted or oiled externally. Section 2 Hot Formed Sections",
      "Tolerances": "The following tolerances shall be permitted on hot formed hollow sections: a) Thickness for all sizes 1) Welded tubes ± 10 percent 2) Seamless tubes + 17.5 percent - 12.5 percent b) Outside dimensions of ±1 percent of sides length of the side to be measured with a minimum of ± 0.5 mm c) Weight 1) On individual length +10 percent - 8 percent 2) On lots of 10 tonnes ± 7.5 percent d) Squareness of corner 900 ± 20 e) Radii of corners- 3t, Max where t is Outside the thickness of section f) Length 1) Exact length ±6 mm 2) Random length This may be obtained by arrangement between the purchaser and manufacturer",
      "Tensile Properties": "See Table 4. TABLE 4 TENSILE PROPERTIES OF COLD FORMED SECTION. Grade Tensile Yield Elongation, Strength, stress, percent, Min Min, MPa Min, MPa 25.4 and Over25.4* under* YSt210 330 210 12 20 YSt240 410 240 10 15 YSt310 450 310 8 10 *The value shall be applicable for the smaller side of the rectangular section. SECTION 16 LIGHT METALS AND THEIR ALLOYS CONTENTS Title Page IS 733 : 1983 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys-bars, rods and sections for general engineering purposes (third revision) 16.3 IS 736 : 1986 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys- plates for general engineering purposes (third revision) 16.4 IS 737 : 1986 Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys sheet and strip, for general engineering purposes (third revision) 16.5 IS 738 : 1994 Wrought aluminium and its alloys-drawn "
    },
    "content": "IS 4923: 1997 Hollow Steel Sections For Structural Use\n(Second Revision)\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES\nOF SQUARE HOLLOW SECTIONS Designation\nDepth\nThick-\nWeight\nArea or\nness of\nWidth\nSection\n(D)\nmm mm\nmm kg/m\ncm2\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5) 25.0×25.0×2.6 25.0 2.6 1.69 2.16 25.0×25.0×3.2 25.0 3.2 1.98 2.53 30.0×30.0×2.6 30.0 2.6 2.10 2.68 30.0×30.0×3.2 30.0 3.2 2.49 3.17 30.0×30.0×4.0 30.0 4.0 2.94 3.75 32.0×32.0×2.6 32.0 2.6 2.26 2.88 32.0×32.0×3.2 32.0 3.2 2.69 3.42 32.0×32.0×4.0 32.0 4.0 3.19 4.07 35.0×35.0×2.6 35.0 2.6 2.51 3.20 35.0×35.0×3.2 35.0 3.2 2.99 3.81 35.0×35.0×4.0 35.0 4.0 3.57 4.55 38.0×38.0×2.6 38.0 2.6 2.75 3.51 38.0×38.0×2.9 38.0 2.9 3.03 3.86 38.0×38.0×3.2 38.0 3.2 3.29 4.19 38.0×38.0×3.6 38.0 3.6 3.63 4.62 38.0×38.0×4.0 38.0 4.0 3.95 5.03 40.0×40.0×2.6 40.0 2.6 2.92 3.72 40.0×40.0x3.2 40.0 3.2 3.49 4.45 40.0×40.0×3.6 40.0 3.6 3.85 4.91 40.0×40.0×4.0 40.0 4.0 4.20 5.35 45.0×45.0×2.6 45.0 2.6 3.32 4.24 45.0×45.0×2.9 45.0 2.9 3.66 4.67 45.0×45.0×3.2 45.0 3.2 3.99 5.09 45.0×45.0×3.6 45.0 3.6 4.42 5.63 45.0×45.0×4.5 45.0 4.5 5.31 6.77 49.5×49.5×2.9 49.5 2.9 4.07 5.19 49.5×49.5×3.6 49.5 3.6 4.93 6.28 49.5×49.5×4.5 49.5 4.5 5.95 7.58\nContinued--- Designation\nDepth\nThick-\nWeight\nArea or\nness of\nWidth\nSection\n(D)\nmm mm\nmm kg/m\ncm2\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n63.5×63.5×3.2\n63.5\n3.2\n5.85\n7.45\n63.5×63.5×3.6\n63.5\n3.6\n6.51\n8.29\n63.5×63.5×4.5\n63.5\n4.5\n7.93\n10.10\n72.0×72.0×3.2\n72.0\n3.2\n6.71\n8.54\n72.0×72.0×4.0\n72.0\n4.0\n8.22\n10.47\n72.0×72.0×4.8\n72.0\n4.8\n9.66\n12.31\n75.0×75.0×3.2\n75.0\n3.2\n7.01\n8.93\n75.0×75.0×4.0\n75.0\n4.0\n8.59\n10.95\n75.0×75.0×4.9\n75.0\n4.9\n10.30\n13.12\n88.9×88.9×3.6\n88.9\n3.6\n9.38\n11.95\n88.9×88.9×4.5\n88.9\n4.5\n11.52\n14.67\n88.9×88.9×4.9\n88.9\n4.9\n12.44\n15.85\n91.5×91.5×3.6\n91.5\n3.6\n9.67\n12.32\n91.5×91.5×4.5\n91.5\n4.5\n11.88\n15.14\n91.5×91.5×5.4\n91.5\n5.4\n14.01\n17.85\n100.0×100.0×4.0 100.0\n4.0\n11.73\n14.95\n100.0×100.0×5.0 100.0\n5.0\n14.41\n18.36\n100.0×100.0×6.0 100.0\n6.0\n16.98\n21.63\n113.5×113.5×4.5 113.5\n4.5\n14.99\n19.10\n113.5×113.5×4.8 113.5\n4.8\n15.92\n20.28\n113.5×113.5×5.4 113.5\n5.4\n17.74\n22.60\n113.5×113.5×6.0 113.5\n6.0\n19.53\n24.87\n125.0×125.0×4.5 125.0\n4.5\n16.62\n21.17\n125.0×125.0×5.0 125.0\n5.0\n18.33\n23.36\n125.0×125.0×6.0 125.0\n6.0\n21.69\n27.63\n132.0×132.0×4.8 132.0\n4.8\n18.71\n23.88\n132.0×132.0×5.4 132.0\n5.4\n20.88\n26.59\n132.0×132.0×6.0 132.0\n6.0\n23.01\n29.31\n150.0×150.0×5.0 150.0\n5.0\n22.26\n28.36\n150.0×150.0×6.0 150.0\n6.0\n26.40\n33.63 TABLE 2 DIMENSIONS AND PROPERTIES\nOF RECTANGULAR HOLLOW SECTIONS\nDesignation Depth Width Thick- Weight Area of\nof ness\nof\nSection Section\nSection (D) (D) (B) mm mm mm mm kg/m\ncm2 (1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n50.0×25.0×2.9\n50.0\n25.0\n2.9\n2.98\n3.80\n50.0×25.0×3.2\n50.0\n25.0\n3.2\n3.24\n4.13\n60.0×40.0×2.9\n60.0\n40.0\n2.9\n4.12\n5.25\n66.0×33.0×2.9\n66.0\n33.0\n2.9\n4.07\n5.19\n66.0×33.0×3.6\n66.0\n33.0\n3.6\n4.93\n6.28\n66.0×33.0×4.5\n66.0\n33.0\n4.5\n5.95\n7.58\n70.0×30.0×2.9\n70.0\n30.0\n2.9 4.12\n5.25 70.0×30.0×3.2\n70.0\n30.0\n3.2 4.50\n5.73\n70.0×30.0×4.0\n70.0\n30.0\n4.0\n5.45\n6.95\n80.0×40.0×2.9\n80.0\n40.0\n2.9\n5.03\n6.41\n80.0×40.0×3.2\n80.0\n40.0\n3.2\n5.50\n7.01\n80.0×40.0×4.0\n80.0\n40.0\n4.0\n6.71\n8.55\n96.0×48.0×3.2\n96.0\n48.0\n3.2\n6.71\n8.54\n96.0×48.0×4.0\n96.0\n48.0\n4.0\n8.22\n10.47\n96.0×48.0×4.8\n96.0\n48.0\n4.8\n9.66\n12.31\n100.0×50.0×3.2 100.0\n50.0\n3.2\n7.01\n8.93\n100.0×50.0×4.0 100.0\n50.0\n4.0\n8.59\n10.95\n122.0×61.0×3.6 122.0\n61.0\n3.6\n9.67\n12.32\n122.0×61.0×4.5 122.0\n61.0 4.5\n11.88\n15.14\n122.0×61.0×5.4 122.0\n61.0\n5.4\n14.01\n17.85\n127.0×50.0×3.6 127.0\n50.0\n3.6 9.34\n11.89\n127.0x50.0×4.6 127.0\n50.0\n4.6\n11.69\n14.89\n145.0×82.0×4.8 145.0\n82.0\n4.8\n15.92\n20.28\n145.0×82.0x5.4 145.0\n82.0\n5.4\n17.74\n22.60\n172.0×92.0×4.8 172.0\n92.0\n4.8\n18.71\n23.83\n172.0x92.0x5.4 172.0\n92.0\n5.4\n20.88\n26.59\n4.\nStraightness and Twist – Maximum deviation from straightness for tubes in finish straightened condition\nshall be 1/600th of length at the centre of the length. For tubes in mill straightened condition 1/200th of any length\nat the centre of the length. Twist shall be measured for square and rectangular sections as given in the\nstandard. the tolerances on twist shall be 2 mm plus 0.5 mm/m.\n5.\nOiling and Painting – Hollow sections may be varnished painted or oiled externally.\nSection 2 Hot Formed Sections\n6.\nTolerances – The following tolerances shall be permitted on hot formed hollow sections:\na)\nThickness for all sizes\n1) Welded tubes\n± 10 percent\n2) Seamless tubes\n+ 17.5 percent\n- 12.5 percent b) Outside dimensions of\n±1 percent of sides\nlength of the side to be measured\nwith a minimum of\n± 0.5 mm c)\nWeight\n1) On individual length\n+10 percent\n- 8 percent\n2) On lots of 10 tonnes\n± 7.5 percent d) Squareness of corner\n900 ± 20 e) Radii of corners-\n3t, Max where t is\nOutside the thickness\nof section f)\nLength\n1) Exact length\n±6 mm\n2) Random length\nThis may be obtained by arrangement\nbetween the purchaser and\nmanufacturer\n7.\nTensile Properties — See Table 3.\nTABLE 3 TENSILE PROPERTIES OF HOT\nFORMED SECTIONS\nGrade\nTensile\nYield elongation,\nStrength,\nStress, percent, Min Min, MPa Min, MPa\nYSt210\n330\n210\n20\nYSt240\n410\n240\n15\nYSt310\n450\n310\n10\nNote—For welded tubes, the strip tensile test specimen shall\nnot include the weld.\nSECTION 3 COLD FORMED SECTIONS\n8.\nTolerances\n8.1 The following tolerances shall be permitted on cold\nformed hollow sections:\na) Thickness for all sizes ±10 percent Notes 1— The measurement of thickness should exclude the weld zone.\n- Note 1 – For test procedures, refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals- Tensile testing (second revision)\nNote 2 – For other geometrical properties, refer to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4923 : 1997 Specification for Hollow steel sections for structural use\n(second revision).\nNote 2 — The height of the internal weld fin shall not exceed\n60 per cent of the wall thickness.\n8.2 The Tolerances on outside dimensions of\nsides,weight, squareness of corners radii of corners and length shall be same as applicable for hot formed\nsections as given in 6 above.\n9.\nTensile Properties – See Table 4.\nTABLE 4 TENSILE PROPERTIES OF COLD FORMED\nSECTION.\nGrade Tensile\nYield\nElongation,\nStrength, stress,\npercent, Min\nMin, MPa\nMin, MPa 25.4 and Over25.4* under*\nYSt210\n330\n210\n12\n20\nYSt240\n410\n240\n10\n15\nYSt310\n450\n310\n8\n10\n*The value shall be applicable for the smaller side of the rectangular section. SECTION 16\nLIGHT METALS AND THEIR ALLOYS CONTENTS\nTitle\nPage\nIS 733 : 1983\nWrought aluminium and aluminium alloys-bars, rods and sections for general engineering purposes (third revision)\n16.3\nIS 736 : 1986\nWrought aluminium and aluminium alloys- plates for general engineering purposes (third revision)\n16.4\nIS 737 : 1986\nWrought aluminium and aluminium alloys sheet and strip, for general engineering purposes (third revision)\n16.5\nIS 738 : 1994\nWrought aluminium and its alloys-drawn tubes for general engineering purposes (third revision)\n16.7\nIS 739 : 1992\nWrought aluminium and its alloys-wire tubes for general engineering pur poses (third revision)\n16.8\nIS 740 : 1977\nWrought aluminium and its alloys-rivet stocks for general engineering purposes (third revision)\n16.9\nIS 1254 : 1991\nCorrugated aluminium sheet (third revision) 16.10\nIS 1285 : 2002\nWrought aluminium and its alloys-extruded round tube and16.11hollow sections for general engineering purposes (second revision) 16.11\nIS 2525 : 1982\nDimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy wire (second revision) 16.12\nIS 2676 : 1981\nDimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, sheet and strip\n(first revision) 16.13\nIS 2677 : 1979\nDimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, plates and hot rolled sheets (first revision) 16.14\nIS 2678 : 1987\nDimensions and tolerances for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys drawn round tubes (second revision) 16.15"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 733: 1983",
    "title": "Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Bars, Rods And Sections For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Light Metal and Their Alloys",
    "summary": "Requirements for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bars, rods and sections for general engineering purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "applications",
      "uses",
      "brewing",
      "structures",
      "marine",
      "cladding",
      "reflectors"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy plates for general engineering purpose.",
      "Freedom From Defects": "The material shall be sound and free from harmful defects.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "Shall be as specified in IS 2677 : 1979.* 4. Designation and Typical Uses of Alloys Designation Typical uses 19800 Jewellery, decorative and novelty anodized items, auto trim, reflectors, breweries and some chemical plants. 19700 Similar to 19800 19600 Corrosion resistant cladding on stronger alloys, impact extruded containters; food, chemical brewing and processing equipment, tanks and pipes, marine fitting, reflectors, pressed and anodized utilityitems, jewellery and cable sheathing 19500 Similar to 19600 19000 Panelling and moulding; refrigeration tubing equipment for chemical, food and brewing industries; packaging; cooking utensils. Sheet metal work, architectural and builder’s hardware spun/pressed holloware, deep drawn parts, cladding, welding wire, electrical appliances. 24345 Heav"
    },
    "content": "IS 733: 1983 Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Bars, Rods And Sections For General Engineering Purposes\n(Third Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bars, rods and sections for general\nengineering purposes.\n2.\nFreedom from Defects – The material shall be sound and free from harmful defects.\n3.\nDimensions and Tolerances – Shall be as laid in IS\n3965 : 1981.\n4.\nDesignation and Typical Uses of Alloys\nDesignation\nTypical uses\n19000\nPanelling and moulding, refrigeration tubing, equipment for chemical, food\nand brewing industrial packaging, cooking utensils, sheet metal work,\narchitectural and builder’s hardware, spun / pressed hollow ware, deep\ndrawn parts, cladding, welding wire, electrical appliances.\n19500\nCorosion resistant cladding on stronger alloys impact extruded\ncontainers; food, chemical brewing and processing equipments; tanks\nand pipes; marine fittings; reflectors;\npressed and anodized utility items, jewellery, and cable sheating.\n19600\nSimilar to 19500.\n24345\nHeavy duty forgings, structures where high mechanical properties are\nof utmost importance, aircraft application of clad sheets, extrusions\nand armaments.\n24534\nStressed parts in aircrafts and other structures where high strength is of\nprimary consideration.\n43000\nFiller wire of welding.\n* Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloybars, rods and sections (first revision)\nDesignation\nTypical uses\n45000\nFiller wire for brazing.\n52000\nPanelling and structures, shear metal work and domestic appliances, marine\napplications like sheathing lining of boat bottom, etc.\n53000\nShipbuilding; rivets; pressure vessels and other processing tanks,\ncryogenics, and welded structures.\n54300\nWelded structures, cryogenic applications, structural marine\napplications, rail and road tank cars, rivets and missile components.\n63400\nArchitectural uses, such as, windows, door frames, wall facings, partitions,\nhand rails etc. and other similar applications where surface finish is\nimportant and medium strength would suffice.\n63401\nBus bar application\n64401\nConductor application\n64423\nApplications requiring good strength and machinability, such as, missile\nmachinery components.\n64430\nStructural applications of all kinds, such as, road and rail transport\nvehicles, bridges,cranes, roof trusses, rivets, etc. Cargo containers, milk\ncontainers, deep-drawn containers, and flooring.\n65032\nSimilar to 64430\n74530\nStressed structural applications requiring welding, such as bridges,\nchequered plates, dump-truck bodies, pressure vessels and rail coaches, etc.\n76528\nStressed structural applications capable of being used at low\ntemperature. Note — For chemical composition and mechanical properties see 5 (Tables 1 and 2) of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 733 : 1983 Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bars, rods and sections for General enginering purposes (third revision). 1.\nScope – Requirements for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy plates for general engineering purpose.\n2.\nFreedom from Defects – The material shall be sound and free from harmful defects.\n3.\nDimensions and Tolerances – Shall be as specified in IS 2677 : 1979.*\n4.\nDesignation and Typical Uses of Alloys\nDesignation\nTypical uses\n19800\nJewellery, decorative and novelty anodized items, auto trim, reflectors,\nbreweries and some chemical plants.\n19700\nSimilar to 19800\n19600\nCorrosion resistant cladding on stronger alloys, impact extruded\ncontainters; food, chemical brewing and processing equipment, tanks and\npipes, marine fitting, reflectors, pressed and anodized utilityitems,\njewellery and cable sheathing\n19500\nSimilar to 19600\n19000\nPanelling and moulding; refrigeration tubing equipment for chemical, food\nand brewing industries; packaging;\ncooking utensils. Sheet metal work, architectural and builder’s hardware\nspun/pressed holloware, deep drawn parts, cladding, welding wire,\nelectrical appliances.\n24345\nHeavy duty forgings, structures where high mechanical properties are\nof utmost importance,aircraft application of clad sheets, extrusions\nand armaments.\n31000\nGeneral purpose alloy for moderate strength applications, pressure"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 736: 1986",
    "title": "Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Plate For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Light Metal and Their Alloys",
    "summary": "Requirements for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy sheet and strip for general engineering purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "applications",
      "utensils",
      "marine",
      "alloys",
      "architectural",
      "panelling",
      "aluminium"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy sheet and strip for general engineering purposes.",
      "Freedom From Defects": "The material shall be sound and free from harmful defects.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "See IS 2676 : 1981* and IS 2677 : 1979.** 4. Designation and Typical uses of Alloys Designation Typical uses 19000 Electrolytic capacitors, decorative hollowares, trims and other applications requring high degree of finish. 19800 Jewellery, decorative and novelty and anodized items, auto rim, reflectors, 19700 breweries and some chemical plants and metallizing. 19600 Corrosion resistant cladding on and stronger alloys, impact extruded containters; food, chemical brewing and processing equipment, tanks and pipes, marine fitting, reflectors, pressed and anodized utility items, jewellery and cable sheathing. 19500 Similar to 19600 19000 Panelling and moulding; refrigeration tubing equipment for chemical, food and brewing industries; packaging; cooking utensils. Sheet metal work, architectural"
    },
    "content": "IS 736: 1986 Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Plate For General Engineering Purposes\n(Third Revision)\nDesignation\nTypical uses vessels, irrigation tubing, heat\nexchangers, utensils and pressure cookers, roffing sheets,\nairconditioning ducting, fan blades and vehicle panelling.\n51000-A\nAppliances and utensils, architectural trims, consumers durable with\nattractive anodized finishes.\n51000-B\nArchitectural applications; high anodizing quality kitchen ware and\ncooking utensils, consumer durables;\nbathroom fittings, auto–trim, airconditioner and TV housing;\nchemical equipment, marine applications and refrigerator trim.\n52000\nPanelling and structures, sheet metal work, domestic appliances.\n53000\nWelded structures, cryogenic applications, structural marine\napplications, rail and road tank cars, rivets and missile components.\n54300\nSimilar to 53000\n55000\nShipbuilding and other applications demanding moderately high strength\nwith good corrosion resistance;\nrivets, zippers, welding wire, etc.\n64430\nStructural applications of all kinds, such as, road and rail transport\nvehicles, bridges, cranes, roof trusses, rivets, etc., cargo containers,\nmilk containers, deep drawn containers and flooring.\n65032\nSimilar to 64430\n74530\nStressed structural applications requiring welding such as bridges,\nchequered plates, dump-truck bodies, pressure vessels, rail coaches, etc. Note – For chemical composition and mechanical properties, see 5 (Table 1) and 6 (Table 2) of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 736 : 1989 Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, plate for general engineering purposes (third revision).\n* Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, plates and hot rolled sheets (first revision). 1. Scope – Requirements for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy sheet and strip for general\nengineering purposes.\n2.\nFreedom from Defects — The material shall be sound and free from harmful defects.\n3.\nDimensions and Tolerances – See IS 2676 : 1981* and IS 2677 : 1979.**\n4.\nDesignation and Typical uses of Alloys\nDesignation\nTypical uses\n19000\nElectrolytic capacitors, decorative hollowares, trims and other\napplications requring high degree of finish.\n19800\nJewellery, decorative and novelty and anodized items, auto rim, reflectors,\n19700 breweries and some chemical plants\nand metallizing.\n19600\nCorrosion resistant cladding on and stronger alloys, impact extruded\ncontainters; food, chemical brewing and processing equipment, tanks and\npipes, marine fitting, reflectors, pressed and anodized utility items,\njewellery and cable sheathing.\n19500 Similar to 19600\n19000\nPanelling and moulding; refrigeration tubing equipment for chemical, food\nand brewing industries; packaging;\ncooking utensils. Sheet metal work, architectural and builder’s hardware\nspun/pressed holloware, deep drawn parts, cladding, welding wire,\nelectrical appliances."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 737: 1986",
    "title": "Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Sheet And Strip For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Wood Products",
    "summary": "Requirements of wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy drawn tubes of round cross-section for general engineering purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "tubes",
      "applications",
      "utensils",
      "panelling",
      "vessels",
      "aluminium",
      "uses"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy drawn tubes of round cross-section for general engineering purposes.",
      "Freedom From Defects": "The drawn tubes shall be sound and free from harmful defects.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "As given in IS 2678 : 1987.* 4. Designation and Typical uses of Alloys Designation Typical uses 19000 Panelling and moulding; equipments for food, chemical and brewing industries; architectural and builder’s hardwares,fasteners, welding wire, electrical appliances, refrigeration tubes and wave guide tubes. 19500 Food, chemical, brewing and processing equipments, marine fittings, pressed and anodized utility items, heat exchanger tubes, condenser tubes, gas and oil transmission pipeline. 24345 Stressed parts in aircraft and other structures where high strength is of primary consideration, hydraulic tubes. * Dimension and tolerances for wrought aluminium and alluminium alloy round tubes (second revision)"
    },
    "content": "IS 737: 1986 Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Sheet And Strip For General Engineering Purposes\n(Third Revision)\nDesignation\nTypical uses\n24345\nHeavy duty forgings, structures where high mechanical peoperties are\nof utmost importance, aircraft application of clad sheets, extrusions\nand armaments.\n31000\nGeneral purpose alloy for moderate strength applications, pressure\nvessels, irrigation tubing, heat exchangers, utensils and pressure\ncookers, roofing sheets, pilferproof and detonator caps, airconditioning\nducting, fan blades and vehicle panelling.\n31500\nGeneral purpose sheet, roofing and siding, utensils, sheet metal work,\nvehicle panelling, pressure vessels and lamp caps.\n40800\nVehicle panelling, fan blades and other applications same as of alloys\n19000 and 31000 except those for bright anodizing purposes,\ndetonators, utensils/holloware containers and closures.\n51000-A\nAppliances and utensils, architectural rims, consumers\ndurable with\nattractive anodized finishes.\n51000-B\nArchitectural applications; high anodizing quality kitchen ware and\ncooking utensils, consumer durables;\nbathroom fittings, auto trim, airconditioner and TV housing;\nchemical equipment, marine applications and refrigerator trim.\n51300\nGeneral purpose alloy which can be used for most of the applications of\nalloys 31000 and 19000.\n* Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy sheet and strip (first revision).\n** Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, plates and hot rolled sheets (first revision). Designation\nTypical uses\n52000\nPanelling and structures, sheet metal work, domestic appliances.\n53000\nShipbuilding; rivets; pressure vessels and other processing tanks;\ncryogenics and welded structures.\n54300\nWelded structures, cryogenic applications, structural marine\napplications, rail and road tank cars, rivets and missile components.\n55000\nShipbuilding and other applications demanding moderately high strength\nwith good corrosion resistance;\nrivets, zippers, welding wire etc.\nDesignation\nTypical uses\n64430\nStructural applications of all kinds, such as road and rail transport\nvehicles, bridges, cranes, roof trusses, rivets, etc. Cargo containers,\nmilk containers, deep drawn containers and flooring.\n65032\nSimilar to 64430\n74530\nStressed structural applications requiring welding such as bridges,\nchequered plates, dump-truck bodies, pressure vessels, rail coaches, etc. Note – For chemical composition and mechanical properties see 5 (Table 1) and 6 (Table 2) of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 737 : 1986 Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy sheet and strip for general engineering purposes (third revision). 1.\nScope – Requirements of wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy drawn tubes of round cross-section for\ngeneral engineering purposes.\n2.\nFreedom from Defects – The drawn tubes shall be sound and free from harmful defects.\n3.\nDimensions and Tolerances – As given in\nIS 2678 : 1987.*\n4.\nDesignation and Typical uses of Alloys Designation\nTypical uses\n19000\nPanelling and moulding; equipments for food, chemical and brewing\nindustries; architectural and builder’s hardwares,fasteners, welding wire,\nelectrical appliances, refrigeration tubes and wave guide tubes.\n19500\nFood, chemical, brewing and processing equipments, marine\nfittings, pressed and anodized utility items, heat exchanger tubes,\ncondenser tubes, gas and oil transmission pipeline.\n24345\nStressed parts in aircraft and other structures where high strength is of\nprimary consideration, hydraulic tubes.\n* Dimension and tolerances for wrought aluminium and alluminium alloy round tubes (second revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 738: 1994",
    "title": "Wrought Aluminium And Its Alloys-Drawn Tubes For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Light Metal and Their Alloys",
    "summary": "Requirements of wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy wire for general engineering purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "tubes",
      "panelling",
      "pipelines",
      "uses",
      "applications",
      "gas",
      "rivet"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy wire for general engineering purposes.",
      "Freedom From Defects": "Wire shall be sound and free from harmful defects.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "Shall given in IS 2525 : 1982.* 4. Designation and Typical uses of Alloys Designation Typical Uses 19000 Panelling and moulding; equipments for food, chemical and brewing industries; architectural and builder’s hardwares, fasteners, welding wire, electrical appliances, rivet wires, spray gun wires. 19500 Food, chemical, brewing and processing equipments, marine fittings, pressed and anodized utility items, jewellery, rivet for aircraft purpose, filler rods for inert gas are welding. 24345 Structures where high mechanical properties are of utmost imprtance, screw machine products, fasteners and rivets for aircraft purposes. 31000 General purpose alloy for moderate strength applications, pressure vessels, builders hardware, vehicle panelling, rivet wires, fasteners, filler rods for inert gas"
    },
    "content": "IS 738: 1994 Wrought Aluminium And Its Alloys-Drawn Tubes For General Engineering Purposes\n(Third Revision)\nDesignation\nTypical uses\n31000\nGeneral purpose alloy for moderate strength applications, pressure vessels, irrigation tubing, heat\nexchangers, utensils and pressure cookers, roofing sheets, pilferproof\nand detonator caps, airconditioning ducting, fan blades and vehicle\npanelling.\n52000\nPanelling and structures, hydraulic tube, appliances, refrigeration tubing,\ncondenser and heat exchanger tubes, gas and oil transmission pipelines.\n63400\nArchitectural uses and other similar applications where surface finish is\nimportant and medium strength would suffice. Electrical conduits,\ntubes for wave guides, gas and oil transmission pipelines.\n64430\nStructural applications of all kinds, such as, road and rail transport\nvehicles, bridges, cranes, roof trusses, rivets, etc. Cargo containers,\nmilk containers, deep drawn containers and flooring.\n65028\nStructural applications of all kinds such road and rail transport vehicles,\nbridges, cranes, roof trusses, furniture, gas and oil transmission\npipelines, condenser and heat exchanger tubes, hydraulic tubes.\n65032\nSimilar to 65028 Note — For chemical composition and mechanical properties see 8 (Table 1) and 9 (Table 2) of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 738 : 1994 Specifications for wrought aluminium and its alloys-drawn tubes for general engineering purpose (third revision). 1.\nScope – Requirements of wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy wire for general engineering purposes.\n2.\nFreedom from Defects – Wire shall be sound and free from harmful defects.\n3.\nDimensions and Tolerances – Shall given in\nIS 2525 : 1982.*\n4.\nDesignation and Typical uses of Alloys Designation\nTypical Uses\n19000\nPanelling and moulding; equipments for food, chemical and brewing\nindustries; architectural and builder’s hardwares, fasteners, welding wire,\nelectrical appliances, rivet wires, spray gun wires.\n19500\nFood, chemical, brewing and processing equipments, marine\nfittings, pressed and anodized utility items, jewellery, rivet for aircraft\npurpose, filler rods for inert gas are welding.\n24345\nStructures where high mechanical properties are of utmost imprtance,\nscrew machine products, fasteners and rivets for aircraft purposes.\n31000\nGeneral purpose alloy for moderate strength applications, pressure\nvessels, builders hardware, vehicle panelling, rivet wires, fasteners, filler\nrods for inert gas arc welding.\n* Dimension of wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, wire\n(first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 739: 1992",
    "title": "Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloys-Wire For General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Light Metal and Their Alloys",
    "summary": "(Third Revision) Designation Typical Uses 43000 Filler wires for brazing and soldering, welding rods, sprays gun wires. 46000 Filler wires for brazing, welding rods, spray gun wires. 52000 Panelling and structures, rivet wires, zippers, grills, fasteners, filler rods for inert gas arc welding. 53000 Shipbuilding, rivets, pressure vessels, welding rods, zippers, screen wires, grills fasteners. 55000 Shipbuilding and other applications demanding moderately high strength with good corrosion resista",
    "keywords": [
      "wires",
      "rivets",
      "welding",
      "rods",
      "grills",
      "zippers",
      "screen"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 739: 1992 Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloys-Wire For General Engineering Purposes\n(Third Revision)\nDesignation\nTypical Uses\n43000\nFiller wires for brazing and soldering, welding rods, sprays gun wires.\n46000\nFiller wires for brazing, welding rods, spray gun wires.\n52000\nPanelling and structures, rivet wires, zippers, grills, fasteners, filler rods for\ninert gas arc welding.\n53000\nShipbuilding, rivets, pressure vessels, welding rods, zippers, screen wires,\ngrills fasteners.\n55000\nShipbuilding and other applications demanding moderately high strength\nwith good corrosion resistance;\nrivets, zippers, welding wire, screen wires, grills, fasteners.\n55380\nFiller wires for welding rivets, screen wires.\n63400\nArchitectural uses and other similar applications where surface finish is\nimportant and medium strength would suffice, builders hardware.\n64430\nStructural applications of all kinds, such as, road and rail transport\nvehicles, bridges, cranes, roof trusses, rivets, etc. Cargo containers,\nmilk containers, deep drawn containers and flooring.\n65032\nStructural applications of all kinds rivets, builders hardwares and\nfastener rods Note – For chemical composition and mechanical properties see 8 (Table 1) and 9 (Table 2) of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 739 : 1992 Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloyswire for general engineering purpose (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 740: 1977",
    "title": "Wrought Aluminium Alloy Rivet Stock For",
    "category": "Light Metal and Their Alloys",
    "summary": "Requirements for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys rivet stock for general engineering purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "rivets",
      "aircraft",
      "containers",
      "stock",
      "rivet",
      "old",
      "wrought"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys rivet stock for general engineering purposes.",
      "Freedom From Defects": "The material shall be sound and free fom harmful defects.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "As given in IS 3577 : 1992.* 4. Designation and Typical Uses of Alloys Designation Typical use New Old 19000 RIC Rivets used in equipment for food, chemical, brewing and processing, cooking, utensils, architectural and builders hardwares and in aircraft manufacture. 24345 HR 15 Rivets used in structures where high mechanical properties are of utmost importance, aircraft structures. Designation Typical use New Old 53000 NR 5 Rivets used in ship building, pressure vessels and other processing tanks and in aircraft manufacture. 55000 NR 6 Rivets used in ship building, aircraft manufacture and other applications demanding moderately high strength with good corrosion resistance. 64430 HR 30 Rivets used in structures of all kinds, such as, road and rail transport vehicles, bridges, cranes, roof "
    },
    "content": "IS 740: 1977 Wrought Aluminium Alloy Rivet Stock For\nGENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys rivet stock for general engineering\npurposes.\n2. Freedom from Defects – The material shall be sound and free fom harmful defects.\n3.\nDimensions and Tolerances – As given in\nIS 3577 : 1992.*\n4.\nDesignation and Typical Uses of Alloys\nDesignation Typical use\nNew Old\n19000 RIC\nRivets used in equipment for food, chemical, brewing and processing,\ncooking, utensils, architectural and builders hardwares and in aircraft\nmanufacture.\n24345 HR 15\nRivets used in structures where high mechanical properties are of utmost\nimportance, aircraft structures.\nDesignation Typical use\nNew Old\n53000 NR 5\nRivets used in ship building, pressure vessels and other processing tanks\nand in aircraft manufacture.\n55000 NR 6\nRivets used in ship building, aircraft manufacture and other applications\ndemanding moderately high strength with good corrosion resistance.\n64430 HR 30\nRivets used in structures of all kinds, such as, road and rail transport\nvehicles, bridges, cranes, roof trusses, cargo containers, flooring.\n65032 HR 20\nStructural applications of all kinds such as, road and rail transport\nvehicles, bridges, cranes, roof trusses, rivets, etc, cargo containers,\nmilk containers, deep drawn containers and flooring. Note – For chemical composition and mechanical properties, see 4 (Table 1 and 2) of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 740 : 1977 Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy rivet stock for general engineering purposes (second revision).\n* Wrought aluminium and its alloys – Rivet, bolt and screw stock– Dimensions and tolerances (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1254: 1991",
    "title": "Corrugated Aluminium Sheet",
    "category": "Floor, Wall, Roof Coverings and Finishes",
    "summary": "Material, profile, dimensions and finish for corrugated aluminium sheets meant for following uses: a) General purpose, b) Industrial, and c) Building.",
    "keywords": [
      "subject",
      "sheets",
      "corrugated",
      "sheet",
      "industrial",
      "aluminium",
      "purpose"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Material, profile, dimensions and finish for corrugated aluminium sheets meant for following uses: a) General purpose, b) Industrial, and c) Building.",
      "Freedom From Defects": "Corrugated sheet shall be clean and reasonably free from harmful defcets. 3. Profiles Uses Pitch Depth mm mm a) General purpose 75 19 b) Industrial 125 38 c) Building 190 38 3.1 The corrugations shall be uniform and parallel with the sides of the sheet. 4. Dimensions 4.1 Thickness – The thickness of the corrugated sheet shall be as agreed. Tolerance on the thickness of the sheets shall be subject to the general thickness tolerance specifieid in IS 2676 : 1981.* 4.2 Width General purpose : 650 to 800 mm overall Industrial : 795 mm overall Building : 830 mm overall 4.2.1 A tolerance of ± 10 mm for sheets of 0.45 mm and above in thickness. The tolerance on width for sheets less than 0.45 mm thick, shall be subject to agreement. 4.3 Length – Preferred lengths are 1800, 2400, 3000 and 3600 mm s",
      "Finish": "The finish shall be ‘as-rolled’. Note — For types of profile, see 5 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 1254 : 1991 Specifications for Corrugated aluminium sheet (third revision). * Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys sheet and strip (first revision)"
    },
    "content": "IS 1254: 1991 Corrugated Aluminium Sheet\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Material, profile, dimensions and finish for corrugated aluminium sheets meant for following\nuses:\na) General purpose, b) Industrial, and\nc) Building.\n2.\nFreedom from Defects – Corrugated sheet shall be clean and reasonably free from harmful defcets.\n3.\nProfiles\nUses\nPitch\nDepth mm\nmm a) General purpose\n75\n19 b) Industrial\n125\n38 c) Building\n190\n38\n3.1 The corrugations shall be uniform and parallel with\nthe sides of the sheet.\n4.\nDimensions\n4.1 Thickness – The thickness of the corrugated sheet\nshall be as agreed. Tolerance on the thickness of the sheets shall be subject to the general thickness\ntolerance specifieid in IS 2676 : 1981.* 4.2\nWidth\nGeneral purpose : 650 to 800 mm overall\nIndustrial\n: 795 mm overall\nBuilding\n: 830 mm overall 4.2.1 A tolerance of ± 10 mm for sheets of 0.45 mm and above in thickness. The tolerance on width for\nsheets less than 0.45 mm thick, shall be subject to agreement.\n4.3 Length – Preferred lengths are 1800, 2400, 3000 and\n3600 mm subject to a tolerance of ± 6 mm.\n4.4 Squareness – The diagonal distance between\ncorners of any finished sheet shall not differ by more than 20 mm for sheets of 0.45 mm and above in thickness.\nThe tolerance on squareness for sheets less than 0.45 mm in thickness, shall be subject to mutual agreement.\n5.\nFinish – The finish shall be ‘as-rolled’. Note — For types of profile, see 5 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1254 : 1991 Specifications for Corrugated aluminium sheet (third revision).\n* Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys sheet and strip (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1285: 2002",
    "title": "Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Extruded Round Tube And Hollow Sections For",
    "category": "Light Metal and Their Alloys",
    "summary": "Requirements of extruded round tube and hollow sections made from wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineering purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "applications",
      "tube",
      "tubes",
      "extruded",
      "panelling",
      "aluminium",
      "condenser"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of extruded round tube and hollow sections made from wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys for general engineering purposes.",
      "Freedom From Defects": "The extruded round tube and hollow sections shall be sound and free from harmful defects.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "The dimensions of extruded round tube and hollow sections and the tolerance shall be as laid down in IS 2673 : 2002* and IS 6477 : 1983 ** respectively.",
      "Designation And Typical Uses Of Alloys": "Designation Typical use 19000 Panelling and moulding, equipment for food, chemical and brewing industries, architectural and builders hardwares, fasteners, welding wires and electrical guide tubes. 19500 Food, chemical, brewing and processing equipment, marine fittings, pressed and anodized utility items, heat exchanger tubes, condenser tubes, gas and oil transmission pipeline. 24345 Stressed parts in aircrafts and other structures where high strength is of primary consdieration, hydraulic tubes air-conditioning ducting fan blades and vehicle panelling. 31000 General purpose alloy for moderate strength applications for chemical equipment, irrigation tubing, heat exchangers furniture, condenser, air- Designation Typical use conditioning, utensils, detonator caps, pressure vessles, fan blade"
    },
    "content": "IS 1285: 2002 Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Extruded Round Tube And Hollow Sections For\nGENERAL ENGINEERING PURPOSES\n(Third Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements of extruded round tube and hollow sections made from wrought aluminium and\naluminium alloys for general engineering purposes.\n2.\nFreedom from Defects – The extruded round tube and hollow sections shall be sound and free from harmful\ndefects.\n3.\nDimensions and Tolerances – The dimensions of extruded round tube and hollow sections and the\ntolerance shall be as laid down in IS 2673 : 2002* and IS\n6477 : 1983 ** respectively.\n4.\nDesignation and Typical uses of Alloys – Designation\nTypical use\n19000\nPanelling and moulding, equipment for food, chemical and brewing\nindustries, architectural and builders hardwares, fasteners, welding wires\nand electrical guide tubes.\n19500\nFood, chemical, brewing and processing equipment, marine fittings,\npressed and anodized utility items, heat exchanger tubes, condenser\ntubes, gas and oil transmission pipeline.\n24345\nStressed parts in aircrafts and other structures where high strength is of\nprimary consdieration, hydraulic tubes air-conditioning ducting fan\nblades and vehicle panelling.\n31000\nGeneral purpose alloy for moderate strength applications for chemical\nequipment, irrigation tubing, heat exchangers furniture, condenser, air-\nDesignation\nTypical use conditioning, utensils, detonator\ncaps, pressure vessles, fan blades and vehicle panelling.\n52000\nPanelling and structures, hydraulic tube appliances, refrigeration tubing\ncondenser and heat exchanger tubes, gas and oil transmissino pipelines.\n53000\nShip building; rivets; pressure vessels and other processing tanks;\ncryogenics, and welded structures.\n54300\nWelded structures, cryogenic applications, structural marine\napplications, rail and road tank cars, rivets and missile components.\n62400\nFurther where appearance and bending characteristics are important,\nsuch as furniture applications.\n63400\nArchitectural uses and other similar applications where surface finish is\nimportant and medium strength would suffice. Electrical conduits,\ntubes for wave guides, gas and oil transmission pipelines.\n64423\nApplications requiring good strength and machinability such as textile\nmachinery components.\n64430\nStructural applications of all kinds, such as road and rail transport\nvehicles, bridges, cranes, roof trusses, rivets, etc. Cargo containers,\nmilk containers, deep drawn containers and flooring.\n65032\nSimilar to 64430\n74530\nStressed structural applications requiring welding, such as bridges,\nchequered plates, dump-truck bodies, pressure vessels and rail coaches.\nNote— For chemical composition and mechanical properties, see 5 (Table 1 and 2) of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1285 : 2002 Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy extruded round tube and hollow sections for general engineering purposes (third revision). * Dimension for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, extruded round tube (first revision) ** Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, extruded hollow sections (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2525: 1982",
    "title": "Dimension For Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloys, Wire",
    "category": "Light Metal and Their Alloys",
    "summary": "Lays down dimensions and tolerances for wrought aluminium alloys in the form of wire.",
    "keywords": [
      "wires",
      "ever",
      "across",
      "flats",
      "higher",
      "width",
      "wrought"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Lays down dimensions and tolerances for wrought aluminium alloys in the form of wire.",
      "Dimensions": "The diameters of round wires and the width/width across flats of shaped wires shall be as follows: mm mm mm 0.32 1.00 3.15 0.36 1.12 3.55 0.40 1.25 4.00 0.45 1.40 4.50 0.50 1.60 5.00 0.56 1.80 5.60 0.63 2.00 6.30 0.71 2.24 7.10 0.80 2.50 8.00 0.90 2.80 9.00 3. Tolerances 3.1 Round Wires Diameter, mm Tolerance, mm Up to 0.63 ± 0.015 From 0.71 to 1.12 ± 0.025 From 1.25 to 9.0 ± 0.05 or 1 per cent of diameter which ever is higher. For detailed information, refer to IS 2525 : 1982 Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy, wire (first revision). 3.2 Hexagonal and Octagonal Wires Width Across Flats, Tolerance mm mm Up to 1.12 ± 0.04 Over 1.12 to 9.00 ± 0.07 or 1.5 percent of width across flats which ever is higher. 3.3 Square and Rectangular Wires Width or Thickness Tolerance mm "
    },
    "content": "IS 2525: 1982 Dimension For Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloys, Wire\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Lays down dimensions and tolerances for wrought aluminium alloys in the form of wire.\n2.\nDimensions – The diameters of round wires and the width/width across flats of shaped wires shall be as\nfollows:\nmm mm\nmm\n0.32\n1.00\n3.15\n0.36\n1.12\n3.55\n0.40\n1.25\n4.00\n0.45\n1.40\n4.50\n0.50\n1.60\n5.00\n0.56\n1.80\n5.60\n0.63\n2.00\n6.30\n0.71\n2.24\n7.10\n0.80\n2.50\n8.00\n0.90\n2.80\n9.00\n3.\nTolerances\n3.1 Round Wires\nDiameter, mm\nTolerance, mm\nUp to 0.63\n± 0.015\nFrom 0.71 to 1.12\n± 0.025\nFrom 1.25 to 9.0\n± 0.05 or 1 per cent of diameter which\never is higher.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2525 : 1982 Specifications for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy, wire\n(first revision).\n3.2 Hexagonal and Octagonal Wires\nWidth Across Flats,\nTolerance mm mm\nUp to 1.12\n± 0.04\nOver 1.12 to 9.00\n± 0.07 or 1.5 percent of width across flats\nwhich ever is higher.\n3.3 Square and Rectangular Wires\nWidth or Thickness\nTolerance mm mm up to 2.50\n± 0.05\nFrom 0.71 to 1.12\n± 0.08\nFrom 1.25 to 9.0\n± 0.10 or 2 percent of width / thickness\nwhich ever is higher."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2676: 1981",
    "title": "Dimensions For Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloys, Sheet And Strip",
    "category": "Light Metal and Their Alloys",
    "summary": "Lays down dimensions and tolerances for wrought aluminium alloys, sheet and strip.",
    "keywords": [
      "sheet",
      "strips",
      "strip",
      "sheets",
      "wrought",
      "alloys",
      "fine"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Lays down dimensions and tolerances for wrought aluminium alloys, sheet and strip. 2. Dimensions 2.1. Lengths and Widths Length Width Length Width mm mm mm mm 1 800 × 600 3 600 × 900 1 800 × 900 3 600 × 1 000 1 800 × 1 000 3 600 × 1 200 1 800 × 1 200 3 600 × 1 500 2 000 × 600 4 000 × 900 2 000 × 900 4 000 × 1 000 2 000 × 1 000 4 000 × 1 200 2 000 × 1 200 4 000 × 1 500 2 000 × 1 500 2 400 × 600 2 400 × 900 2 400 × 1 000 2 400 × 1 200 2 400 × 1 500 2.2 Thickness 0.15 1.25 0.19 1.40 0.23 1.60 0.28 1.80 0.32 2.00 0.36 2.24 0.40 2.50 0.45 2.80 0.50 3.15 0.56 3.55 0.63 4.00 0.71 4.50 0.80 5.00 0.90 5.60 1.0 6.00 1.12 3. Tolerances 3.1 For shearing tolerances, general and fine for sheets and strips and the tolerances, general and fine on thicknesses of sheets and strips, refer to tables 1 to 6 of"
    },
    "content": "IS 2676: 1981 Dimensions For Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloys, Sheet And Strip\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Lays down dimensions and tolerances for wrought aluminium alloys, sheet and strip.\n2.\nDimensions\n2.1. Lengths and Widths\nLength\nWidth\nLength Width mm\nmm mm mm\n1 800 × 600\n3 600 × 900\n1 800 × 900\n3 600 × 1 000\n1 800 × 1 000\n3 600 × 1 200\n1 800 × 1 200\n3 600 × 1 500\n2 000 × 600\n4 000 × 900\n2 000 × 900\n4 000 × 1 000\n2 000 × 1 000\n4 000 × 1 200\n2 000 × 1 200\n4 000 × 1 500\n2 000 × 1 500\n2 400 × 600\n2 400 × 900\n2 400 × 1 000\n2 400 × 1 200\n2 400 × 1 500\n2.2 Thickness\n0.15\n1.25\n0.19\n1.40\n0.23\n1.60\n0.28\n1.80\n0.32\n2.00\n0.36\n2.24\n0.40\n2.50\n0.45\n2.80\n0.50\n3.15\n0.56\n3.55\n0.63\n4.00\n0.71\n4.50\n0.80\n5.00\n0.90\n5.60\n1.0\n6.00\n1.12\n3.\nTolerances\n3.1 For shearing tolerances, general and fine for sheets\nand strips and the tolerances, general and fine on thicknesses of sheets and strips, refer to tables 1 to 6 of\nthe standard.\n3.2 Squareness Tolerances for Sheets – The difference\nof the two diagonal distances between opposite corners of any sheet shall not exceed the total tolerance of the\nsheet, that is, sum of positive and negative tolerance.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2676 : 1981 Specifications for dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, sheet and strip (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2677: 1979",
    "title": "Dimensions For Wrought Aluminium And Alloys Plates And Hot-Rolled Sheets",
    "category": "Light Metal and Their Alloys",
    "summary": "Lays down the dimensions and tolerances for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, plate and hot-rolled sheets.",
    "keywords": [
      "minus",
      "including",
      "widths",
      "plus",
      "shearing",
      "rolled",
      "over"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Lays down the dimensions and tolerances for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, plate and hot-rolled sheets. 2. Dimensions 2.1 Lenghts and Widths mm mm mm mm mm mm 1 800 × 300 2 400 × 300 3 600 × 300 1 800 × 600 2 400 × 600 3 600 × 600 1 800 × 900 2 400 × 900 3 600 × 900 1 800 × 1 200 2 400 × 1 200 3 600 × 1 200 2.2 Thickness and Tolerances – See Table 1. 2.3 Shearing Tolerance on Length and Width – See Table 2. TABLE 1 TOLERANCES ON THICKNESS OF PLATE AND HOT-ROLLED SHEETS All dimensions in millimeters STANDARD FOR WIDTHS UP TO FOR WIDTH THICKNESS AND INCLUDING1200 1201 TO 2000 (1) (2) (3) 4.0 ±0.43 ±0.46 4.5 ±0.43 ±0.46 5.0 ±0.43 ±0.46 5.5 ±0.38 ±0.46 6.0 ±0.38 ±0.46 6.5 ±0.38 ±0.46 7.0 ±0.38 ±0.46 7.5 ±0.38 ±0.46 8.0 ±0.38 ±0.46 9.0 ±0.42 ±0.46 10.0 ±0.46 ±0.48 11.0 ±0.49 ±0.51 12.0"
    },
    "content": "IS 2677: 1979 Dimensions For Wrought Aluminium And Alloys Plates And Hot-Rolled Sheets\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Lays down the dimensions and tolerances for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloys, plate and\nhot-rolled sheets.\n2.\nDimensions\n2.1 Lenghts and Widths mm mm mm mm mm mm 1 800 × 300\n2 400 × 300 3 600 × 300 1 800 × 600\n2 400 × 600 3 600 × 600 1 800 × 900\n2 400 × 900 3 600 × 900 1 800 × 1 200\n2 400 × 1 200 3 600 × 1 200\n2.2 Thickness and Tolerances – See Table 1.\n2.3 Shearing Tolerance on Length and Width – See\nTable 2. TABLE 1 TOLERANCES ON THICKNESS OF\nPLATE AND HOT-ROLLED SHEETS All dimensions in millimeters STANDARD FOR WIDTHS UP TO FOR WIDTH THICKNESS AND INCLUDING1200 1201 TO 2000 (1) (2) (3) 4.0 ±0.43 ±0.46 4.5 ±0.43 ±0.46 5.0 ±0.43 ±0.46 5.5 ±0.38 ±0.46 6.0 ±0.38 ±0.46 6.5 ±0.38 ±0.46 7.0 ±0.38 ±0.46 7.5 ±0.38 ±0.46 8.0 ±0.38 ±0.46 9.0 ±0.42 ±0.46 10.0 ±0.46 ±0.48 11.0 ±0.49 ±0.51 12.0 ±0.52 ±0.53 14.0 ±0.54 ±0.56 16.0 ±0.58 ±0.58 18.0 ±0.64 ±0.64 20.0 ±0.69 ±0.69 22.5 ±0.73 ±0.73 25.0 ±0.76 ±0.76 30.0 ±1.0 ±1.0 35.0 ±1.15 ±1.15 40.0 ±1.20 ±1.20 45.0 ±1.30 ±1.30 50.0 ±1.45 ±1.50 65.0 ±1.50 ±1.55\nTABLE 2 SHEARINGTOLERANCE ON LENGTH AND WIDTH OF PLATE\nAll dimensions in millimetres.\nTHICKNESS FOR LENGTHS AND WIDTHS\nFor Lengths\nFor Lengths For Lengths For Lengths\nUp to and\nOver 2 400, Over 6 300, Over 8 000,\nIncluding\nUp to and Up to and\nUp to and\n2 400\nIncluding Including\nIncluding\n6 300 8 000 10 000\nPlus\nMinus\nPlus Minus Plus\nMinus Plus\nMinus\n(1)\n(2) (3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\n(9)\nUp to and\n7 3\n8\n3\n10\n3\n13\n3 including 12.50\nOver 12.50 and up\n10\n3\n11\n3\n13\n3\n13\n3 to and including 25.0\nOver 25.0\n13\n3\n13\n3\n13\n3\n13\n3\nNote— The shearing tolerance on width of hot-rolled coil having thickness between and including 4.0 mm to 6.00 mm shall be\n± 5mm for widths up to and including 1200 mm and ± 6.5 mm for width over 1200 mm.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2677 : 1979 Specifications for dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminum alloys, plates and hot-rolled sheets (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2678: 1987",
    "title": "Dimensions And Tolerance For Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloys Drawn Round Tubes",
    "category": "Light Metal and Their Alloys",
    "summary": "Lays down the dimensions and tolerances for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy drawn round tube with parallel bore. } } } }",
    "keywords": [
      "sections",
      "aluminium",
      "round",
      "tube",
      "drawn",
      "parallel",
      "bore"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Lays down the dimensions and tolerances for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy drawn round tube with parallel bore. } } } }",
      "Tolerances": "See Tables 2, 3 and 4. } } Note1: Nominal dimension means specified dimensions Note2: Sizes other than standard shall be as agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaswer TABLE 3 TOLERANCES ON OUTSIDE OR INSIDE DIAMETERS OF DRAWN ROUND TUBE WITH PARALLEL BORE All dimemsions in millimeters. Nominal Nominal Wall Thickness of Tube Outside Diameter 0.50 0.63 0.80 1.00 1.25 1.60 2.00 2.50 3.15 4.0 5.0 6.3 8.0 10.0 12.5 16.0 ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± ± 4.0 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 5.0 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 6.3 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 8 .0 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 10.0 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 12.5 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 16.0 – 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 20.0 – 0.15 0.15 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 0.13 25.0 – 0.18 0.15 0.15 0.15 0.13 0.13 0.13 "
    },
    "content": "IS 2678: 1987 Dimensions And Tolerance For Wrought Aluminium And Aluminium Alloys Drawn Round Tubes\n(Second Revision)\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF DRAWN ROUND TUBE WITH PARALLEL BORE\nAll dimensions in millimetres\nNominal\nNominal Wall Thickness\nOutside\nDaimeter\n4.0\n5.0\n0.50,\n0.63,\n0.80 ,\n1.00,\n6.3\n8.0\n0.50,\n0.63,\n0.80,\n1.00,\n1.25,\n1.60,\n2.00,\n10.0\n12.5\n0.50,\n0.63,\n0.80,\n1.00,\n1.25,\n1.60,\n2.00,\n2.50,\n16.0\n20.0\n0.80,\n1.00,\n1.25,\n1.60,\n2.00,\n2.50,\n3.15,\n25.0\n31.5\n0.80,\n1.00,\n1.25,\n1.60,\n2.00,\n2.50\n3.15,\n4.0 ,\n5.0,\n40.0\n0.80,\n1.00,\n1.25,\n1.60,\n2.00,\n2.50\n3.15,\n4.0 ,\n5.0,\n6.3\n50.0\n63.0\n1.60,\n2.00\n2.50,\n3.15,\n4.0,\n5.0,\n6.3,\n8.0,\n10.0,\n12.5\n80.0\n100\n2.00,\n2.50,\n3.15,\n4.0,\n5.0,\n6.3,\n8.0,\n10.0,\n12.5\n125\n160\n3.15,\n4.0,\n5.0,\n6.3\n8.0,\n10.0,\n12.5,\n200\n6.3,\n8.0,\n10.0,\n12.5\n250\n8.0,\n10.0,\n12.5,\n16.0\nTABLE 2 TOLERANCES ONWALL THICKNESS OF\nDRAWN ROUND TUBE WITH PARALLEL BORE\nNominal Wall\nTolerance on\nTolerances on\nThickness\nMean Thickness\nThickness at Any Point mm\n± mm\n± mm\n0.50\n0.05\n0.09\n0.63\n0.05\n0.11\n0.80\n0.05\n0.14\n1.00\n0.05\n0.16\n1.25\n0.05\n0.18\n1.60\n0.08\n0.22\n2.00\n0.09\n0.28\n2.50\n0.10\n0.36\n3.15\n0.13\n0.46\n4.0\n0.20\n0.61\n5.0\n0.26\n0.74\n6.3\n0.33\n0.99\n8.0\n0.40\n1.21\n10.0\n0.51\n1.50\n12.5\n0.63\n1.89\n16.0\n0.80\n2.40\n1.\nScope – Lays down the dimensions and tolerances for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy drawn\nround tube with parallel bore.\n}\n}\n}\n} 2. Dimensions – See Table 1\n3.\nTolerances — See Tables 2, 3 and 4.\n}\n}\nNote1: Nominal dimension means specified dimensions\nNote2: Sizes other than standard shall be as agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaswer TABLE 3 TOLERANCES ON OUTSIDE OR INSIDE DIAMETERS\nOF DRAWN ROUND TUBE WITH PARALLEL BORE\nAll dimemsions in millimeters.\nNominal Nominal Wall Thickness of Tube\nOutside\nDiameter\n0.50\n0.63\n0.80\n1.00\n1.25\n1.60\n2.00\n2.50\n3.15\n4.0\n5.0\n6.3\n8.0\n10.0\n12.5\n16.0\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n± ±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n±\n4.0\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n5.0\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n6.3\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n8 .0\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n10.0\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n12.5\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n16.0\n–\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n20.0\n–\n0.15\n0.15\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n25.0\n–\n0.18\n0.15\n0.15\n0.15\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n31.5\n–\n0.20\n0.18\n0.18\n0.15\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n0.13\n40.0\n–\n0.23\n0.23\n0.20\n0.18\n0.15\n0.15\n0.15\n0.15\n0.15\n0.15\n0.15\n50.0\n–\n–\n0.28\n0.25\n0.20\n0.18\n0.15\n0.15\n0.15\n0.15\n0.15\n0.15\n0.15\n0.15\n63.0\n–\n–\n–\n–\n0.35\n0.28\n0.25\n0.23\n0.20\n0.20\n0.20\n0.20\n0.20\n0.20\n0.20\n80.0\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n0.43\n0.35\n0.30\n0.25\n0.23\n0.23\n0.23\n0.23\n0.23\n0.23\n100\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n0.61\n0.51\n0.46\n0.41\n0.36\n0.33\n0.33\n0.30\n0.30\n0.28\n125\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n0.64\n0.56\n0.48\n0.40\n0.38\n0.38\n0.36\n0.36\n0.33\n160\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n0.64\n0.58\n0.58\n0.58\n0.56\n0.56\n0.51\n200\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n0.94\n0.94\n0.92\n0.92\n0.86\n0.84\n250\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n–\n1.37\n1.37\n1.32\n1.30\nTABLE 4 TOLERANCES ON STRAIGHTNESS OF\nDRAWN ROUND TUBES WITH PARALLEL BORE\nAll dimensions in millimetres.\nNominal outside\nTolerance on\nDiameter straightness\nFrom 10 up to and including 150 1.25 mm/m\nOver 150 2.00 mm/m\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2678 : 1987 Specification for dimensions and tolerances for wrought aluminiu and aluminium alloy drawn round tubes (second revision). 17.1\nSECTION 17\nSTRUCTURAL SHAPES\nSP 21 : 2005 CONTENTS\nTitle page ALUMINIUM SECTIONS\nIS 3908 : 1986\nAluminium equal leg angles (first revision)\n17.3\nIS\n3909 : 1986\nAluminium unequal leg angles (first revision)\n17.4\nIS\n3921 : 1985\nAluminium channels (first revision)\n17.5\nIS\n5384 : 1985\nAluminium I- beam (first revision)\n17.6\nIS 6445 : 1985\nAluminium Tee-sections (first revision)\n17.7\nSTEEL SECTIONS\nIS 808 : 1989\nDimensions for hot rolled steel beam, column, channel and angle sections\n17.8\n(third revision)\nIS 811 : 1987\nCold formed light gauge structural steel sections (second revision)\n17.11\nIS 1173 : 1978\nHot rolled slit steel bars (second revision)\n17.15\nIS\n1730 : 1989\nDimensions for steel plates, sheet strips and flats for general engineering\n17.16 purposes (second revision)\nIS\n1732 : 1989\nDimensions for round and square steel bars , for structural and general\n17.18 engineering purposes\nIS\n1863 : 1979\nHot rolled steel bulb flats (first revision).\n17.19\nIS\n2314 : 1986\nSteel sheet piling sections (first revision)\n17.20\nIS 3443 : 1980\nCrane rail sections (first revision)\n17.21\nIS\n3954 : 1991\nHotrolled steel channel sections for general engineering purpose\n17.22\n(first revision)\nIS\n3964 : 1980\nLight rails (first revision).\n17.23\nIS 8081: 1976*\nSlotted sections.\n17.24\nIS 12778 : 2004\nHot rolled steel parallel flange beam and column sections-dimensions.\n17.25 * This covers both aluminium and steel.\nNote – See also Section 15 Structural steel and Section 16 Light metal and their alloys."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3908: 1986",
    "title": "Aluminium Equal Leg Angles",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "summary": "Cover the material, dimensions and sectional properties of aluminium equal leg angles for structural use and other applications.",
    "keywords": [
      "alu",
      "ale",
      "aluminium",
      "leg",
      "sections",
      "angles",
      "temper"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the material, dimensions and sectional properties of aluminium unequal leg angles for structural use and other applications.",
      "Designation": "Aluminium unequal leg angles sections shall be designated as ALU followed by lengths",
      "Dimensions": "ALE 10×10×1.5 ALE 30×30×3.0 ALE 50×50×3.0 ALE 100×100× 6.0 ALE 10×10×2.0 ALE 30×30×4.0 ALE 50×50×4.0 ALE 100×100× 8.0 ALE 30×30×5.0 ALE 50×50×5.0 ALE 100×100× 10.0 ALE 50×50×6.0 ALE 100×100×12.0 ALE 15×15×1.5 ALE 35×35×3.0 ALE 60×60×4.0 ALE 120×120× 10.0 ALE 15×15×2.0 ALE 35×35×4.0 ALE 60×60×5.0 ALE 120×120× 12.0 ALE 15×15×3.0 ALE 30×30×5.0 ALE 60×60×6.0 ALE 120×120× 16.0 ALE 20×20×2.0 ALE 40×40×3.0 ALE 70×70×5.0 ALE 150×150×10.0 ALE 20×20×3.0 ALE 40×40×4.0 ALE 70×70×6.0 ALE 150×150×12.0 ALE 40×40×5.0 ALE 70×70×7.0 ALE 150×150×16.0 ALE 25×25×2.0 ALE 45×45×3.0 ALE 80×80×6.0 ALE 200×200×12.0 ALE 25×25×3.0 ALE 45×45×4.0 ALE 80×80×8.0 ALE 200×200×16.0 ALE 25×25×4.0 ALE 45×45×5.0 ALE 80×80×10.0 ALE 200×200×20.0 3.1 Designation and Size in mm Note – For sectional properties refer to Table 1 of t",
      "Materials": "4.1 Aluminium sections covered in this standard shall be manufactured from the following alloys in * Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bar, rod and section (first revision). appropriate temper : 19000, 24345, 24534, 52000, 53000, 54300, 63400, 64423, 64430, 65032 and 74530. 4.2 Aluminium alloys and temper selected shall conform to the provisions of IS 733 : 1983.+ + Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bar rods and sections for general engineering purposes (third revision)"
    },
    "content": "IS 3908: 1986 Aluminium Equal Leg Angles\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Cover the material, dimensions and sectional properties of aluminium equal leg angles for\nstructural use and other applications.\n2.\nDesignation – Aluminium equal leg angles sections shall be designated as ALE followed by lengths of legs\nand thickness of the section in mm.\nFor example ALE 80 × 80 × 6\n3.\nDimensions – ALE 10×10×1.5 ALE 30×30×3.0 ALE 50×50×3.0 ALE 100×100× 6.0 ALE 10×10×2.0 ALE 30×30×4.0 ALE 50×50×4.0 ALE 100×100× 8.0 ALE 30×30×5.0 ALE 50×50×5.0 ALE 100×100× 10.0 ALE 50×50×6.0 ALE 100×100×12.0 ALE 15×15×1.5 ALE 35×35×3.0 ALE 60×60×4.0 ALE 120×120× 10.0 ALE 15×15×2.0 ALE 35×35×4.0 ALE 60×60×5.0 ALE 120×120× 12.0 ALE 15×15×3.0 ALE 30×30×5.0 ALE 60×60×6.0 ALE 120×120× 16.0 ALE 20×20×2.0 ALE 40×40×3.0 ALE 70×70×5.0 ALE 150×150×10.0 ALE 20×20×3.0 ALE 40×40×4.0 ALE 70×70×6.0 ALE 150×150×12.0 ALE 40×40×5.0 ALE 70×70×7.0 ALE 150×150×16.0 ALE 25×25×2.0 ALE 45×45×3.0 ALE 80×80×6.0 ALE 200×200×12.0 ALE 25×25×3.0 ALE 45×45×4.0 ALE 80×80×8.0 ALE 200×200×16.0 ALE 25×25×4.0 ALE 45×45×5.0 ALE 80×80×10.0 ALE 200×200×20.0 3.1 Designation and Size in mm\nNote – For sectional properties refer to Table 1 of the standard.\nDimensional tolerances for the sections shall be as specified in IS 3965 : 1981*\n* Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bar, rod and section (first revision) 4. Materials – 4.1 Aluminium sections covered in this standard shall\nbe manufactured from the following alloys in appropriate temper:\n19000, 24345, 24534, 52000, 53000,\n54300, 63400, 64423, 64430, 65032 and\n74530.\n4.2 Aluminium alloys and temper selected shall con\nform to the provisions of IS 733 : 1983*\n*Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bars, rods,and sections for general engineering purposes (third revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3908 : 1986. Specifications for aluminium equal leg angles (first revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 3909 : 1986 Specifications for aluminium unequal leg angles (first revision)\n3.1 Designation and Size in mm\nALU 20×10×1.5\nALU 50×25×3.0\nALU 80×40×4.0\nALU 125×80× 8.0\nALU 20×10×2.0\nALU 50×25×4.0\nALU 80×40×6.0\nALU 125×80× 10.0\nALU 20×15×1.5\nALU50×30×5.0\nALE 80×40×8.0\nALU 125×80×12.0\nALU 20×15×2.0\nALU 20×15×3.0\nALU 50×30×3.0\nALU 80×60×4.0\nALU150×80× 8.0\nALU 50×30×4.0\nALU 80×60×6.0\nALU150×80×10.0\nALU 30×15×2.0\nALU 50×30×5.0\nALU 80×60×8.0\nALU150×80× 12.0\nALU 30×15×3.0\nALU 90×60×6.0\nALU 30×20×2.0\nALU 60×30×3.0\nALU 200×100× 10.0\nALU 30×20×3.0\nALU 60×30×4.0\nALU100×50×6.0\nALU 200×100× 12.0\nALU 30×20×4.0\nALU 60×30×5.0\nALU100×50×8.0\nALU 200×100× 16.0\nALU100×50×10.0\nALU 40×20×2.0\nALU 60×40×4.0\nALU 200×150×12.0\nALU 40×20×3.0\nALU 60×40×5.0\nALU100×80×6.0\nALU 200×150×16.0\nALU 40×20×4.0\nALU 60×40×6.0\nALU 100×80×8.0\nALU 200×150×20.0\nALU100×80×10.0\nALU 40×25×2.0\nALU 65×45×4.0\nALU 40×25×3.0\nALU 65×45×5.0\nALU120×80×8.0\nALU 40×25×4.0\nALU120×80×10.0\nALU 75×50×5.0\nALU120×80×12.0\nALU 45×30×3.0\nALU 75×50×6.0\nALU 45×30×4.0\nALU 45×30×5.0\nNote— For sectional properties, refer to Table 1 of the\nstandard. dimensional tolerances for the sections shall be as specified in IS 3965 :1981*\n4. Material –\n4.1 Aluminium sections covered in this standard shall\nbe manufactured from the following alloys in\n* Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bar, rod and section (first revision).\nappropriate temper : 19000, 24345, 24534, 52000, 53000,\n54300, 63400, 64423, 64430, 65032 and 74530.\n4.2 Aluminium alloys and temper selected shall conform\nto the provisions of IS 733 : 1983.+\n+ Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bar rods and sections for general engineering purposes (third revision)\n1.\nScope – Covers the material, dimensions and sectional properties of aluminium unequal leg angles for\nstructural use and other applications.\n2.\nDesignation – Aluminium unequal leg angles sections shall be designated as ALU followed by lengths"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3909: 1986",
    "title": "Aluminium Unequal Leg Angles",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "summary": "Cover the material, dimensions and sectional properties of aluminium channels for structural use and other applications.",
    "keywords": [
      "aluminium",
      "alc",
      "temper",
      "sections",
      "channels",
      "rods",
      "wrought"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Cover the material, dimensions and sectional properties of aluminium channels for structural use and other applications.",
      "Designation": "Aluminium channels shall be designated as ALC followed by the depth of channel in mm, flange width in mm and mass of the section in kg/m, Example : ALC 80 × 40 - 3. 21 3. Material 3.1 Aluminium sections covered in this standard shall be manufactured from the following alloys in appropriate temper : 19000, 24345, 24534, 52000, 53000, 63400, 64423, 64430, 65032 and 74530. 3.2 Aluminium alloys and temper selected shall conform to the provisions of IS 733 : 1983* * Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bars rods and sections for general engineering purposes (third revision) 4. Dimensions 4.1 Designation and size Note — For sectional properties, refer to Table of the standard, Dimensional tolerances for the sections shall be as specified in IS 3965 :1981+ + Dimensions for wrought aluminium and "
    },
    "content": "IS 3909: 1986 Aluminium Unequal Leg Angles\n(First Revision)\nof longer and shorter legs and thickness of the section in mm.\nFor example Alu 80 × 60 × 6\n3.\nDimensions – 1.\nScope – Cover the material, dimensions and sectional properties of aluminium channels for structural use and\nother applications.\n2.\nDesignation – Aluminium channels shall be designated as ALC followed by the depth of channel in\nmm, flange width in mm and mass of the section in kg/m,\nExample : ALC 80 × 40 - 3. 21\n3.\nMaterial\n3.1 Aluminium sections covered in this standard shall\nbe manufactured from the following alloys in appropriate temper :\n19000, 24345, 24534, 52000, 53000, 63400, 64423,\n64430, 65032 and 74530.\n3.2 Aluminium alloys and temper selected shall\nconform to the provisions of IS 733 : 1983*\n* Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bars rods and sections for general engineering purposes (third revision)\n4.\nDimensions\n4.1 Designation and size\nNote — For sectional properties, refer to Table of the standard,\nDimensional tolerances for the sections shall be as specified in\nIS 3965 :1981+\n+ Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bars rods and section (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3921: 1985",
    "title": "Aluminium Channels",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "summary": "(First Revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 3921 : 1985 Specifications for aluminium channels (first revision). ALC 40 × 20 - 0.63 ALC 40 × 20 - 0.44 ALC 50 × 30 - 1.55 ALC 50 × 30 - 0.88 ALC 50 × 30 - 1.14 ALC 60 × 30 - 1.13 ALC 60 × 30 - 1.55 ALC 60 × 30 - 1.95 ALC 60 × 40 - 1.87 ALC 60 × 40 - 2.38 ALC 80 × 40 - 2.10 ALC 80 × 40 - 2.67 ALC 80 × 40 - 3.21 ALC 100 × 40 - 2.95 ALC 100 × 40 - 3.55 ALC 100 × 50 - 4.98 ALC 100 × 50 - 3.39 ALC 100 × 50 - 4.09 ALC 120 × 50 - 4.43 ALC 120 × ",
    "keywords": [
      "alc",
      "channels",
      "aluminium",
      "information",
      "detailed"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 3921: 1985 Aluminium Channels\n(First Revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3921 : 1985 Specifications for aluminium channels (first revision).\nALC 40 × 20 - 0.63\nALC 40 × 20 - 0.44\nALC 50 × 30 - 1.55\nALC 50 × 30 - 0.88\nALC 50 × 30 - 1.14\nALC 60 × 30 - 1.13\nALC 60 × 30 - 1.55\nALC 60 × 30 - 1.95\nALC 60 × 40 - 1.87\nALC 60 × 40 - 2.38\nALC 80 × 40 - 2.10\nALC 80 × 40 - 2.67\nALC 80 × 40 - 3.21\nALC 100 × 40 - 2.95\nALC 100 × 40 - 3.55\nALC 100 × 50 - 4.98\nALC 100 × 50 - 3.39\nALC 100 × 50 - 4.09\nALC 120 × 50 - 4.43\nALC 120 × 50 - 3.68\nALC 120 × 60 - 4.98\nALC 120 × 60 - 6.08\nALC 150 × 60 - 5.51\nALC 150 × 60 - 6.77\nALC 150 × 80 - 6.59\nALC 150 × 80 - 6.59\nALC 150 × 80 - 8.07\nALC 150 × 80 - 0.26\nALC 200 × 80 - 9.28\nALC 200 × 80 - 11.74\nALC 200 × 100 - 15.33\nALC 200 × 100 -3.47"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5384: 1985",
    "title": "Aluminium I–Beam",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "summary": "Covers the material, dimensions and sectional properties of aluminium I- beam sections for structural use and other applications.",
    "keywords": [
      "alb",
      "aluminium",
      "sections",
      "temper",
      "beam",
      "alloys",
      "kilograms"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the material, dimensions and sectional properties of aluminium tee – sections for structural use and other applications.",
      "Designation": "Aluminium tee-sections shall be designated as ALT followed by the depth of section, in mm width of flange in mm and mass in kilograms per metre of the section. Example : ALT 125 × 100 – 7.0 3. Materials 3.1 Aluminium sections covered in this standard shall be manufactured from the following alloys in appropriate temper – 19000, 24345, 24534, 52000, 53000, 54300, 63400, 64423, 64430, 65032 and 74530. 3.2 Aluminium alloys and temper selected shall conform to the proviions of IS 733 : 1983+ + Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy, bars, rods and sections for general engineering purposes (third revision)",
      "Materials": "3.1 Aluminium sections covered in this standard shall be manufactured from the following alloys in appropriate temper : 19000, 24345, 24534, 52000, 53000, 54300, 63400, 64423, 64430, 65032 and 74530. 3.2 Aluminium alloys and temper selected shall conform to the proviions of IS 733 : 1983+ + Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy, bars, rods and sections for general engineering purposes (third revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 5384 : 1985 Specifications for aluminium I-beam (first revision).",
      "Dimensions": "4.1 Designation ALB 40 × 20 - 0.4 ALB 100 × 60 - 4.7 ALB 40 × 20 - 0.6 ALB 50 × 30 - 0.9 ALB 120 × 60 - 4.7 ALB 50 × 30 - 1.2 ALB 120 × 60 - 5.0 ALB 60 × 30 - 1.1 ALB 120 × 70 - 5.6 ALB 60 × 30 - 1.5 ALB 120 × 80 - 6.1 ALB 60 × 30 - 1.9 ALB 120 × 80 - 7.4 ALB 60 × 40 - 1.9 ALB 150 × 80 - 6.6 ALB 60 × 40 - 2.4 ALB 150 × 80 - 8.1 ALB 80 × 40 - 2.1 ALB 150 × 100 - 7.7 ALB 80 × 40 - 2.7 ALB 150 × 100 - 9.4 ALB 80 × 40 - 3.2 ALB 150 × 100 - 12.1 ALB 100 x 50 - 3.4 ALB 200 × 100 - 10.5 ALB 100 x 50 - 3.9 ALB 200 × 100 - 13.4 ALB 100 x 60 - 3.9 ALB 200 × 100 - 12.9 ALB 100 x 60 - 4.1 ALB 200 × 120 - 16.1 Note– For sectional properties, refer to the standard dimensional tolerances for the sections shall be as specified in IS 3965:1981* * Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bar, ro"
    },
    "content": "IS 5384: 1985 Aluminium I–Beam\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Covers the material, dimensions and sectional properties of aluminium I- beam sections for\nstructural use and other applications.\n2.\nDesignation – Aluminium I- beam sections shall be designated as ALB followed by the depth of section,\nwidth of flange in mm and mass in kilograms per metre of the section. Example : ALB 120 x 60 - 4.7\n3.\nMaterials –\n3.1 Aluminium sections covered in this standard shall\nbe manufactured from the following alloys in appropriate temper :\n19000, 24345, 24534, 52000, 53000, 54300, 63400,\n64423, 64430, 65032 and 74530.\n3.2 Aluminium alloys and temper selected shall conform\nto the proviions of IS 733 : 1983+ + Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy, bars, rods and sections for general engineering purposes (third revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5384 : 1985 Specifications for aluminium I-beam (first revision).\n4. Dimensions —\n4.1 Designation\nALB 40 × 20 - 0.4\nALB 100 × 60 - 4.7\nALB 40 × 20 - 0.6\nALB 50 × 30 - 0.9\nALB 120 × 60 - 4.7\nALB 50 × 30 - 1.2\nALB 120 × 60 - 5.0\nALB 60 × 30 - 1.1\nALB 120 × 70 - 5.6\nALB 60 × 30 - 1.5\nALB 120 × 80 - 6.1\nALB 60 × 30 - 1.9\nALB 120 × 80 - 7.4\nALB 60 × 40 - 1.9\nALB 150 × 80 - 6.6\nALB 60 × 40 - 2.4\nALB 150 × 80 - 8.1\nALB 80 × 40 - 2.1\nALB 150 × 100 - 7.7\nALB 80 × 40 - 2.7\nALB 150 × 100 - 9.4\nALB 80 × 40 - 3.2\nALB 150 × 100 - 12.1\nALB 100 x 50 - 3.4\nALB 200 × 100 - 10.5\nALB 100 x 50 - 3.9\nALB 200 × 100 - 13.4\nALB 100 x 60 - 3.9\nALB 200 × 100 - 12.9\nALB 100 x 60 - 4.1\nALB 200 × 120 - 16.1\nNote– For sectional properties, refer to the standard\ndimensional tolerances for the sections shall be as specified in\nIS 3965:1981*\n* Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bar, rod and sections (first revision) 1.\nScope – Covers the material, dimensions and sectional properties of aluminium tee – sections for\nstructural use and other applications.\n2.\nDesignation – Aluminium tee-sections shall be designated as ALT followed by the depth of section, in\nmm width of flange in mm and mass in kilograms per metre of the section.\nExample : ALT 125 × 100 – 7.0\n3.\nMaterials\n3.1 Aluminium sections covered in this standard shall\nbe manufactured from the following alloys in appropriate temper –\n19000, 24345, 24534, 52000, 53000, 54300, 63400,\n64423, 64430, 65032 and 74530.\n3.2 Aluminium alloys and temper selected shall\nconform to the proviions of IS 733 : 1983+\n+ Wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy, bars, rods and sections for general engineering purposes (third revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6445: 1985",
    "title": "Aluminium Tee - Sections",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "summary": "(First Revision) 4. Dimensions 4.1 Designation ALT 25 × 25 - 0.4 ALT 100 × 75 - 5.4 ALT 30 × 30 - 0.5 ALT 100 × 100 - 4.2 ALT 30 × 30 - 0.7 ALT 100 × 100 - 5.2 ALT 40 × 50 - 0.8 ALT 100 × 100 - 6.2 ALT 50 × 50 - 1.2 ALT 125 × 75 - 5.2 ALT 50 × 50 - 1.6 ALT 125 × 75 - 6.2 ALT 65 × 65 - 1.6 ALT 125 × 100 - 5.9 ALT 65 × 65 - 2.1 ALT 100 × 100 - 7.0 ALT 65 × 65 - 2.7 ALT 150 × 75 - 5.9 ALT 65 × 65 - 3.3 ALT 150 × 75 - 7.0 ALT 75 × 75 - 2.4 ALT 150 × 100 - 7.9 ALT 75 × 75 - 3.1 ALT 150 × 100 - 10.2 A",
    "keywords": [
      "alt",
      "aluminium",
      "sections",
      "tee",
      "bar",
      "wrought",
      "rod"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 6445: 1985 Aluminium Tee - Sections\n(First Revision)\n4.\nDimensions\n4.1 Designation\nALT 25 × 25 - 0.4\nALT 100 × 75 - 5.4\nALT 30 × 30 - 0.5\nALT 100 × 100 - 4.2\nALT 30 × 30 - 0.7\nALT 100 × 100 - 5.2\nALT 40 × 50 - 0.8\nALT 100 × 100 - 6.2\nALT 50 × 50 - 1.2\nALT 125 × 75 - 5.2\nALT 50 × 50 - 1.6\nALT 125 × 75 - 6.2\nALT 65 × 65 - 1.6\nALT 125 × 100 - 5.9\nALT 65 × 65 - 2.1\nALT 100 × 100 - 7.0\nALT 65 × 65 - 2.7\nALT 150 × 75 - 5.9\nALT 65 × 65 - 3.3\nALT 150 × 75 - 7.0\nALT 75 × 75 - 2.4\nALT 150 × 100 - 7.9\nALT 75 × 75 - 3.1\nALT 150 × 100 - 10.2\nALT 75 × 100 - 2.8\nALT 150 × 150 - 9.5\nALT 75 × 100 - 3.7\nALT 150 × 150 - 12.4\nALT 100 ×75-2.0\nALT 175 × 175 - 11.2\nALT 100 × 75 - 3.1\nALT 175 × 175 - 14.7\nALT 100 × 75 - 4.5\nALT 200 × 200 - 12.8\nALT 200 × 200 - 16.8\nNote – For sectional properties, refer to the standard\ndimensional tolerances for the sections shall be as specified in\nIS 3965 :1981*\n* Dimensions for wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy bar, rod and sections (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6445 : 1985 Aluminium tee-section (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 811: 1987",
    "title": "Cold Formed Light Gauge Structural Steel Sections",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "summary": "Lays down dimensions mass, sectional properties and requirements for corrosion protection for cold formed light guage open wall steel sections for structural and other general applications, having minimum thickness of 1.25mm.",
    "keywords": [
      "sections",
      "designations",
      "lips",
      "protection",
      "formed",
      "guage",
      "hat"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Lays down dimensions mass, sectional properties and requirements for corrosion protection for cold formed light guage open wall steel sections for structural and other general applications, having minimum thickness of 1.25mm.",
      "Designation": "Cold formed light guage sections shall be designated by figures denoting depth (mm)× width (mm) × thickness (mm) of the section.",
      "Materials": "Sheet and strip used for making the cold-formed sections shall conform to IS 1079 : 1994* Sheet and strip conforming to IS 513: 1994+ may also be used for sections where load bearing is not a design criteria, for examle, false ceiling, sections for frames of doors and windows.",
      "Dimensions And Properties": "4.1 Equal Angles – 4.1.1 Designations h × h × t in mm h × h × t in mm 20 × 20 × 1.25 20 × 20 × 1.60 20 × 20 × 2.00 30 × 30 × 1.60 30 × 30 × 2.00 30 × 30 × 3.15 40 × 40 × 1.60 40 × 40 × 2.00 40 × 40 × 2.55 40 × 40 × 3.15 50 × 50 × 2.00 50 × 50 × 2.55 50 × 50 × 3.15 50 × 50 × 4.00 60 × 60 × 2.00 60 × 60 × 2.55 60 × 60 × 3.15 60 × 60 × 4.00 70 × 70 × 3.15 70 × 70 × 4.00 70 × 70 × 5.00 80 × 80 × 3.15 80 × 80 × 4.00 80 × 80 × 5.00 80 × 80 × 6.00 100 × 100 × 3.15 100 × 100 × 4.00 100 × 100 × 5.00 100 × 100 × 6.00 4.2 Unequal Angles – 4.2.1 Designations h × b × t in mm h × b × t in mm 20 × 15 × 1.25 20 × 15 × 1.60 20 × 15 × 2.00 30 × 15 × 1.25 30 × 15 × 1.60 30 × 15 × 2.00 30 × 20 × 1.60 30 × 20 × 2.00 40 × 20 × 1.60 40 × 20 × 2.00 40 × 20 × 2.55 40 × 25 × 2.00 40 × 25 × 2.55 50 × 25 × 1.60 50 × ",
      "Corrosion Protection": "Corrosion protection of cold formed light gauge steel sections shall be carried out in accordance with IS 4180 : 1967. The performance tests for protective scheme in the protection of these sections against corrosion shall conform to IS 4777 : 1968. + * Code of practice for corrosion protection of light gauge steel sections used in buildings. + Performance tests for protection schemes used in protection of light guage steel against corrosion."
    },
    "content": "IS 811: 1987 Cold Formed Light Gauge Structural Steel Sections\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Lays down dimensions mass, sectional properties and requirements for corrosion protection\nfor cold formed light guage open wall steel sections for structural and other general applications, having\nminimum thickness of 1.25mm.\n2.\nDesignation – Cold formed light guage sections shall be designated by figures denoting depth (mm)×\nwidth (mm) × thickness (mm) of the section.\n3.\nMaterials – Sheet and strip used for making the cold-formed sections shall conform to IS 1079 : 1994*\nSheet and strip conforming to IS 513: 1994+ may also be used for sections where load bearing is not a design\ncriteria, for examle, false ceiling, sections for frames of doors and windows.\n4.\nDimensions and Properties –\n4.1 Equal Angles – 4.1.1 Designations h × h × t in mm h × h × t in mm 20 × 20 × 1.25 20 × 20 × 1.60 20 × 20 × 2.00 30 × 30 × 1.60 30 × 30 × 2.00 30 × 30 × 3.15 40 × 40 × 1.60 40 × 40 × 2.00 40 × 40 × 2.55 40 × 40 × 3.15 50 × 50 × 2.00 50 × 50 × 2.55 50 × 50 × 3.15 50 × 50 × 4.00 60 × 60 × 2.00 60 × 60 × 2.55 60 × 60 × 3.15 60 × 60 × 4.00 70 × 70 × 3.15 70 × 70 × 4.00 70 × 70 × 5.00 80 × 80 × 3.15 80 × 80 × 4.00 80 × 80 × 5.00 80 × 80 × 6.00 100 × 100 × 3.15 100 × 100 × 4.00 100 × 100 × 5.00 100 × 100 × 6.00\n4.2 Unequal Angles –\n4.2.1 Designations h × b × t in mm h × b × t in mm 20 × 15 × 1.25 20 × 15 × 1.60 20 × 15 × 2.00 30 × 15 × 1.25 30 × 15 × 1.60 30 × 15 × 2.00 30 × 20 × 1.60 30 × 20 × 2.00 40 × 20 × 1.60 40 × 20 × 2.00 40 × 20 × 2.55 40 × 25 × 2.00 40 × 25 × 2.55 50 × 25 × 1.60 50 × 25 × 2.00 50 × 25 × 2.55 60 × 30 × 2.00 60 × 30 × 3.15 80 × 30 × 2.00 80 × 30 × 2.55 80 × 30 × 3.15 80 × 50 × 3.15 80 × 50 × 4.00 80 × 50 × 5.00 100 × 30 × 3.15 100 × 30 × 4.00 100 × 30 × 5.00 100 × 50 × 3.15 100 × 50 × 4.00 100 × 50 × 5.00 100 × 50 × 6.00\n4.3 Designation Channels without Lips-square – h × h × t in mm h x h x t in mm 20 × 20 × 1.25 20 × 20 × 1.60 20 × 20 × 2.00 25 × 25 × 1.25 25 × 25 × 1.60 25 × 25 × 2.00 25 × 25 × 2.55 30 × 30 × 1.60 30 × 30 × 2.00 30 × 30 × 3.15 40 × 40 × 1.60 40 × 40 × 2.00 40 × 40 × 2.55 40 × 40 × 3.15 50 × 50 × 2.00 50 × 50 × 2.55 50 × 50 × 3.15 50 × 50 × 4.00 60 × 60 × 2.00 60 × 60 × 3.15 60 × 60 × 4.00 80 × 80 × 2.00 80 × 80 × 3.15 80 × 80 × 5.00 80 × 80 × 6.00 100 × 100 × 2.00 100 × 100 × 3.15 100 × 100 × 5.00 100 × 100 × 6.00 * Hot rolled carbon steel sheet and strips (fifth revision). + Cold rolled low carbon steel sheets and strips (fourth revision) 30 × 15 × 1.25 30 × 15 × 1.60 30 × 20 × 1.25 30 × 20 × 2.00 40 × 15 × 1.25 40 × 15 × 2.00 40 × 20 × 2.00 40 × 20 × 3.15 40 × 25 × 1.60 40 × 25 × 2.00 40 × 25 × 2.55 50 × 25 × 1.60 50 × 25 × 2.00 50 × 25 × 2.55 50 × 25 × 3.15 50 × 40 × 1.60 50 × 40 × 2.00 50 × 40 × 2.55 50 × 40 × 3.15 60 × 30 × 1.60 60 × 30 × 2.00 60 × 30 × 3.15 60 × 30 × 4.00 60 × 40 × 2.00 60 × 40 × 3.15 60 × 40 × 4.00 60 × 50 × 2.00 60 × 50 × 3.15 70 × 30 × 1.60 70 × 30 × 2.00 70 × 30 × 3.15 70 × 40 × 2.00 70 × 40 × 3.15 70 × 40 × 4.00 80 × 25 × 1.60 80 × 25 × 2.00 80 × 25 × 3.15 80 × 25 x 4.00 80 × 40 x 1.60 80 × 40 x 2.00 80 × 40 x 3.15 80 × 40 × 4.00 80 × 50 × 2.00 80 × 50 × 3.15 80 × 50 × 4.00 25 × 25 × 8 ×1.25 25 × 25 × 8 ×1.60 30 × 30 × 10×1.25 30 × 30 × 10×1.60 35 × 35 × 10×1.25 35 × 35 × 10×1.60 40 × 40 × 10×1.25 40 × 40 × 1.0 × 1.6 40 × 40 × 15 × 2.00 50 x 50 x 15 x 2.00 50 x 50 x 10 x 1.60 80 × 50 × 5.00 80 × 60 × 2.00 80 × 60 × 3.15 80 × 60 × 4.00 90 × 40 × 1.60 90 × 40 × 2.00 90 × 40 × 3.15 90 × 50 × 1.60 90 × 50 × 2.00 90 × 50 × 3.15\n100 × 40 × 1.60\n100 × 40 × 2.00\n100 × 40 × 3.15\n100 × 40 × 4.00\n100 × 50 × 2.00\n100 × 50 × 3.15\n100 × 50 × 4.00\n100 × 50 × 5.00\n100 × 60 × 2.00\n100 × 60 × 3.15\n100 × 60 × 4.00\n100 × 60 × 5.00\n120 × 50 × 3.15\n120 × 50 × 4.00\n120 × 50 × 5.00\n120 × 60 × 4.00\n120 × 60 × 5.00\n120 × 60 × 6.00\n140 × 60 × 4.00\n140 × 60 × 6.00\n150 × 50 × 3.15\n150 × 50 × 4.00\n150 × 50 × 5.00\n180 × 50 × 3.15\n180 × 50 × 5.00\n200 × 50 × 4.00\n200 × 50 × 5.00\n200 × 50 × 6.00\n200 × 80 × 4.00\n200 × 80 × 5.00\n200 × 80 × 6.00\n250 × 50 × 4.00\n250 × 50 × 5.00\n250 × 50 × 6.00\n250 × 80 × 4.00\n250 × 80 × 5.00\n4.5 Designations Channels Without Lips— Square h x h x c x t in mm, where ‘c’ is lip length 60 × 60 × 15 × 2.00 60 × 60 × 15 × 2.55 60 × 60 × 20 × 3.15 80 × 80 × 15 × 2.00 80 × 80 × 20 × 3.15 80 × 80 × 25 × 4.00 80 × 80 × 25 × 5.00 100 × 100 × 15 × 2.00 100 × 100 × 20 × 3.15 100 × 100 × 25 × 4.00 100 × 100 × 25 × 5.00\n4.6 Channels without Lips— Rectangular:\nDesignations h × b × c × t in mm, where ‘c’ is lip length 30 × 15 × 10 ×1.15 30 × 15 × 10 ×1.60 40 × 20 × 10 ×1.25 40 × 20 × 10 ×1.60 50 × 25 × 10 ×1.25 50 × 25 × 10 ×1.60 50 × 25 × 15 ×2.00 50 × 40 × 10 ×1.25 50 × 40 × 10 ×1.60 50 × 40 × 15 ×2.00 50 × 40 × 15 ×3.15 60 × 30 × 10 ×1.60 60 × 30 × 15 ×2.00 60 × 30 × 20 ×3.15 60 × 30 × 20 ×4.00 60 × 40 × 15 ×2.00 60 × 40 × 20 ×3.15 60 × 40 × 20 ×4.00 70 × 25 × 10 ×1.60 70 × 25 × 15 ×2.00 70 × 25 × 20 ×3.15 70 × 30 × 15 ×2.00 70 × 30 × 20 ×3.15 70 × 40 × 15 ×2.00 70 × 40 × 20 ×3.15 70 × 40 × 25 ×4.00 80 × 40 × 10 ×1.60 80 × 40 × 20 ×3.15 80 × 40 × 15 ×4.00 80 × 50 × 10 ×1.60 80 × 50 × 15 × 2.00 80 × 50 × 20 ×3.15 80 × 50 × 25 ×4.00 90 × 40 × 10 ×1.60 90 × 40 × 15 ×2.00 90 × 40 × 20 ×3.15 90 × 50 × 10 ×1.6 90 × 50 × 15 ×2.00 90 × 50 × 20 ×3.15 100 × 40 × 10 ×1.60 100 × 40 × 15 ×2.00 100 × 40 × 25 ×3.15 100 × 50 × 15 ×2.00 100 × 50 × 20 ×3.15 100 × 50 × 25 ×4.00 100 × 25 × 25 ×4.00 100 × 60 × 15 ×2.00 100 × 60 × 20 ×3.15 100 × 60 × 25 ×4.00 100 × 60 × 25 ×5.00 120 × 50 × 15 ×2.00 120 × 50 × 20 ×3.15\n120 × 50 × 25 ×4.00\n120 × 50 × 25 ×5.00\n120 × 60 × 20 × 3.15\n120 × 60 × 25 × 4.0\n120 × 60 × 25 × 5.0\n140 × 60 ×20 ×3.15 140 × 60 ×25 ×4.00 140 × 60 × 25 ×5.00 150 × 50 × 20 ×3.15 150 × 50 × 25 ×4.00 150 × 50 × 25 ×5.00 180 × 50 × 20 ×3.15 180 × 50 × 25 ×4.00 180 × 50 × 25 ×5.00 180 × 80 × 20 ×3.15 180 × 80 × 25 ×4.00 180 × 80 × 25 ×5.00 200 × 50 × 20 ×3.15 200 × 50 × 25 ×4.00 200 × 50 × 25 ×5.00 200 × 80 × 20 ×3.15 200 × 80 × 25 ×4.00 200 × 80 × 25 ×5.00 250 × 50 × 20 ×3.15 250 × 50 × 25 ×4.00 250 × 50 × 25 ×5.00 250 × 80 × 20 ×3.15 250 × 80 × 25 ×4.00 250 × 80 × 25 ×5.00\n4.4 Channels without Lips — Rectangular\n4.4.1 Designations h × b × t in mm h × b × t in mm h x b x d x t in mm h x b x d x t in mm\n4.8 Hat Sections— Rectangular h>b:\n4.8.1 Designation\n50 × 40 × 10 × 1.60\n50 × 40 × 15 × 2.00\n50 × 40 × 20 × 3.15\n60 × 40 × 15 × 2.00\n60 × 40 × 20 × 3.15\n60 × 50 × 15 × 2.00\n60 × 50 × 20 × 3.15\n60 × 50 × 25 × 4.00\n80 × 40 × 15 × 2.00\n80 × 40 × 20 ×x 3.15 80 × 50 × 15 × 2.00 80 × 50 × 20 × 3.15 80 × 50 × 25 × 4.00 80 × 60 × 15 × 2.00 80 × 60 × 20 × 3.15 80 × 60 × 25 × 4.00\n100 × 80 ×15 × 2.00\n100 × 80 × 20 × 3.15\n100 × 80 × 25 × 4.00\n100 × 80 × 30 × 5.00\n4.9 Hat Sections— Rectangular b>h:\n4.9.1 Designation h x b x d x t in mm h x b x d x t in mm 30 × 50 × 10 × 1.25 30 × 50 × 10 × 1.60 40 × 50 × 10 × 1.25 40 × 50 × 10 × 1.60 40 × 60 × 15 × 2.00 40 × 60 × 20 × 3.15 4.10 Lipped Zed Section—Equal Flanges:\n4.10.1 Designation h x b x c x t in mm h x b x c x t in mm 80 × 40 × 20 × 1.60 80 × 40 × 10 × 2.00 80 × 40 × 20 × 2.30 80 × 40 × 20 × 2.55 80 × 40 × 20 × 3.15 85 × 40 × 20 × 1.60 85 × 40 × 20 × 2.00 85 × 40 × 20 × 2.30 85 × 40 × 20 × 2.55 85 × 40 × 20 × 3.15 90 × 40 × 20 × 1.60 90 × 40 × 20 × 2.00 90 × 40 × 20 × 2.30 90 × 40 × 20 × 2.55 90 × 40 × 20 × 3.15 95 × 40 × 20 × 1.60 95 × 40 × 20 × 2.00 95 × 40 × 20 × 2.30 95 × 40 × 20 ×2.55 95 × 40 × 20 ×3.15\n100 × 40 × 20 ×1.60\n100 × 40 × 20 ×2.00\n100 × 40 × 20 ×2.30\n100 × 40 × 20 ×2.55\n100 × 40 × 20 ×3.15\n105 × 45 × 20 ×1.60\n105 × 45 × 20 ×2.00\n105 × 45 × 20 ×2.30\n105 × 45 × 20 ×2.55\n105 × 45 × 20 ×3.15\n110 × 45 × 20 ×1.60\n110 × 45 × 20 ×2.00\n110 × 45 × 20 ×2.30\n110 × 45 × 20 ×2.55\n110 × 45 × 20 ×3.15\n115 × 45 × 20 ×1.60\n115 × 45 × 20 ×2.30\n115 × 45 × 20 ×2.55\n115 × 45 × 20 ×3.15\n120 × 45 × 20 ×1.60\n120 × 45 × 20 ×2.00\n120 × 45 × 20 ×2.30\n120 × 45 × 20 ×2.55\n120 × 45 × 20 ×3.15\n125 × 45 × 20 ×1.60\n125 × 45 × 20 ×2.00\n125 × 45 × 20 ×2.30\n125 × 45 × 20 ×2.55\n125 × 45 × 20 ×3.15\n130 × 45 × 20 ×1.60\n130 × 45 × 20 ×2.00\n130 × 45 × 20 ×2.30\n130 × 45 × 20 ×2.55\n130 × 45 × 20 ×3.15\n140 × 60 × 20 ×1.60\n140 × 60 × 20 ×2.00\n140 × 60 × 20 ×2.30\n140 × 60 × 20 ×2.55\n140 × 60 × 20 ×3.15\n150 × 60 × 20 ×1.60\n150 × 60 × 20 ×2.00\n150 × 60 × 20 ×2.30\n150 × 60 × 20 ×2.55\n150 × 60 × 20 ×3.15\n160 × 60 × 20 ×1.60\n160 × 60 × 20 ×2.00\n160 × 60 × 20 ×2.30\n160 × 60 × 20 ×2.55\n160 × 60 × 20 ×3.15\n170 × 60 × 20 ×1.60\n170 × 60 × 20 ×2.00\n170 × 60 × 20 ×2.30\n170 × 60 × 20 ×2.55\n170 × 60 × 20 ×3.15\n180 × 60 × 20 ×1.60\n180 × 60 × 20 ×2.00\n180 × 60 × 20 ×2.30\n180 × 60 × 20 ×2.55\n180 × 60 × 20 ×3.15\n190 × 60 × 20 ×1.60\n190 × 60 × 20 ×2.00\n190 × 60 × 20 ×2.30\n190 × 60 × 20 ×2.55\n190 × 60 × 20 ×3.15\n200 × 60 × 20 ×1.60\n200 × 60 × 20 ×2.00\n200 × 60 × 20 ×2.30\n200 × 60 × 20 ×2.55\n200 × 60 × 20 ×3.15\n210 × 60 × 20 ×1.60\n210 × 60 × 20 ×2.00\n210 × 60 × 20 ×2.30\n210 × 60 × 20 ×2.55\n210 × 60 × 20 ×3.15\n220 × 60 × 20 ×1.60\n220 × 60 × 20 ×2.00\n220 × 60 × 20 ×2.30\n220 × 60 × 20 ×2.55\n220 × 60 × 20 ×3.15\n230 × 75 × 20 ×1.60\n230 × 75 × 20 ×2.00\n230 × 75 × 20 ×2.30\n230 × 75 × 20 ×2.55\n230 × 75 × 20 ×3.15\n240 × 75 × 20 ×1.60\n240 × 75 × 20 ×2.00\n240 × 75 × 20 ×2.30\n240 × 75 × 20 ×2.55\n240 × 75 × 20 ×3.15\n250 × 75 × 20 ×1.60\n250 × 75 × 20 ×2.00\n250 × 75 × 20 ×2.30\n250 × 75 × 20 ×2.55\n250 × 75 × 20 ×3.15\n260 × 75 × 20 ×1.60\n260 × 75 × 20 ×2.00\n260 × 75 × 20 ×2.30\n260 × 75 × 20 ×2.55\n260 × 75 × 20 ×3.15\n270 × 75 × 20 ×1.60\n270 × 75 × 20 ×2.00\n270 × 75 × 20 ×2.30\n270 × 75 × 20 ×2.55\n270 × 75 × 20 ×3.15\n280 × 75 × 20 ×1.60\n280 × 75 × 20 ×2.00\n280 × 75 × 20 ×2.30\n280 × 75 × 20 ×2.55\n280 × 75 × 20 ×3.15\n290 × 75 × 20 ×1.60\n290 × 75 × 20 ×2.00\n290 × 75 × 20 ×2.30\n290 × 75 × 20 ×2.55\n290 × 75 × 20 ×3.15\n300 × 75 × 20 ×1.60\n300 × 75 × 20 ×2.00\n300 × 75 × 20 ×2.30\n300 × 75 × 20 ×2.55\n300 × 75 × 20 ×3.15\n4.7 Hat Section—Square:\n4.7.1 Designations h x h x d x t in mm h x h x d x t in mm\n30 ×30 ×10 ×1.25\n30 ×30 ×10 ×1.60\n35 ×35 ×10 ×1.25\n35 ×35 ×10 ×1.60\n40 ×40 ×10 ×1.25\n40 ×40 ×10 ×1.60\n40 ×40 ×15 × 2.00\n40 ×40 ×20 × 3.15\n50 ×50 ×10 ×1.60\n50 ×50 ×15 × 2.00\n50 ×50 ×20 ×3.15\n60 ×60 ×10 ×1.60 60 x 60 x 10 x1.60 60 x 60 x 15 x 2.00 60 x 60 x 20 x 3.15 60 x 60 x 25 x 4.00 80 x 80 x 15 x 2.00 80 x 80 x 20 x 3.15 80 x 80 x 25 x 4.00 80 x 80 x 30 x 5.00\n100 x100 x 15 x 2.00\n100 x100 x 20 x 3.15\n100 x100 x 25 x 4.00\n100 x100 x 30 x 5.00\n100 x100 x 30 x 6.00 4.11 90º Corner – Refer to Table 11 of the standard.\n5.\nTolerances\n5.1 Straightness – The straightness of any length shall\nbe such that the offset does not exceed 1/600 of that length, when measured along both the X-X and Y-Y\naxis.\n5.2 Profile – The deviation of the profile dimensions\nshall not exceed ± 0.5 mm. The deviation from the angle of 90º shall not exceed 1º\n5.3 Twist – The section shall be reasonably free from\ntwist.\nFor detailed information refer to IS 811:1984 Specifications for cold formed light guage structural steel sections\n(second revision).\n6.\nCorrosion Protection – Corrosion protection of cold formed light gauge steel sections shall be carried\nout in accordance with IS 4180 : 1967. The performance tests for protective scheme in the protection of these\nsections against corrosion shall conform to IS 4777 :\n1968. +\n* Code of practice for corrosion protection of light gauge steel sections used in buildings.\n+ Performance tests for protection schemes used in protection of light guage steel against corrosion."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1173: 1978",
    "title": "Hot Rolled And Slit Steel Tee Bars",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "summary": "Lays down nominal dimensions, weight and basic geometrical properties.",
    "keywords": [
      "isnt",
      "tee",
      "ismt",
      "bars",
      "slit",
      "isht",
      "isdt"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Lays down nominal dimensions, weight and basic geometrical properties.",
      "Classification": "a) Indian Standard Rolled Normal Tee Bars(ISNT) b) Indian Standard Rolled Deep Legged Tee Bars (ISDT), Designation Weight Normal size Moments of Inertia (kg/m) (Depth × Width) Ixx Iyy mm × mm 106 mm4 106 mm4 a) Indian Standard Normal Tee Bars ISNT 20 1.1 20 × 20 0.005 0.002 ISNT 30 1.8 30 × 30 0.018 0.008 ISNT 40 3.5 40 × 40 0.061 0.029 ISNT 50 4.4 50 × 50 0.123 0.057 ISNT 60 5.4 60 × 60 0.214 0.097 ISNT 75 10.0 75 × 75 0.620 0.292 ISNT 100 14.9 100 × 100 1.64 0.768 ISNT 150 22.7 150 × 150 5.41 2.50 b) Indian Standard Deep Legged Tee Bars ISDT 100 8.1 100 × 50 0.990 0.096 ISDT 150 15.7 150 × 75 4.50 0.370 c) Indian Standard Slit Light Weight Tee Bars ISLT 200 28.4 200 × 165 12.7 3.58 ISLT 250 37.5 250 × 180 27.7 5.32 d) Indian Standard Slit Medium Weight Tee Bars ISMT 50 5.8 50 × 70 0.108 "
    },
    "content": "IS 1173: 1978 Hot Rolled And Slit Steel Tee Bars\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Lays down nominal dimensions, weight and basic geometrical properties.\n2.\nClassification –\na)\nIndian Standard Rolled Normal Tee Bars(ISNT)\nb)\nIndian Standard Rolled Deep Legged Tee Bars\n(ISDT),\nDesignation Weight Normal size Moments of Inertia (kg/m) (Depth × Width) Ixx Iyy mm × mm 106 mm4 106 mm4 a) Indian Standard Normal Tee Bars\nISNT 20 1.1\n20 × 20\n0.005\n0.002\nISNT 30 1.8\n30 × 30\n0.018\n0.008\nISNT 40 3.5\n40 × 40\n0.061\n0.029\nISNT 50 4.4\n50 × 50\n0.123\n0.057\nISNT 60 5.4\n60 × 60\n0.214\n0.097\nISNT 75 10.0\n75 × 75\n0.620\n0.292\nISNT 100 14.9\n100 × 100\n1.64\n0.768\nISNT 150 22.7\n150 × 150\n5.41\n2.50 b) Indian Standard Deep Legged Tee Bars\nISDT 100 8.1\n100 × 50\n0.990\n0.096\nISDT 150 15.7\n150 × 75\n4.50\n0.370 c) Indian Standard Slit Light Weight Tee Bars\nISLT 200 28.4\n200 × 165\n12.7\n3.58\nISLT 250 37.5\n250 × 180\n27.7\n5.32 d) Indian Standard Slit Medium Weight Tee Bars\nISMT 50 5.8\n50 × 70\n0.108\n0.177\nISMT 62.5 6.7\n62.5 × 70\n0.218\n0.192\nISMT 75 7.5\n75 × 75\n0.412\n0.234\nISMT 87.5 9.8\n87.5 × 87.5\n0.756\n0.384\nISMT 100 12.7\n100 × 100\n1.16\n0.750 e) Indian Standard Slit Tee Bars from H-Section\nISHT 75 15.3\n75 × 150\n0.962\n2.30\nISHT 100 20.0\n100 × 200\n1.94\n4.97\nISHT 125 27.4\n125 × 250\n4.15\n10.0\nISHT 150 29.4\n150 × 250\n5.74\n11.0 Note — For detailed dimensions and properties, namely, sectional area, section moduli, etc. see Table 1 of the standard.\nFor detailed information,refer to IS 1173 : 1978 Specifications for hot rolled and sllit steel Tee bars (second revision)\nc)\nIndian Standard Slit Light Weight Tee Bars\n(ISLT).\nd)\nIndian Standard Slit Medium Weight Tee Bars\n(ISMT)\ne)\nIndian Standard Slit Tee Bars from H- sections\n(ISHT).\n3.\nDimensions and Properties"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1730: 1989",
    "title": "Steel Plates Sheets Strips And Flats, For Structural And General Engineering Purposes",
    "category": "Structural Steels",
    "summary": "Specifies nominal dimensions, nominal mass and surface area (for sheets) of hot-rolled steel plates, sheets, strips and flats for structural and general engineering purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "plates",
      "flats",
      "strips",
      "followed",
      "sheets",
      "denoting",
      "follows"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Specifies nominal dimensions, nominal mass and surface area (for sheets) of hot-rolled steel plates, sheets, strips and flats for structural and general engineering purposes.",
      "Designation": "Hot-rolled steel plates, sheets strips and flats conforming to this standard shall be designated as under : a) Plates shall be designated as ISPL followed by figures denoting length (mm) × width (mm) × thickness (mm) of the sheet. b) Sheets shall be designated as ISSH followed by figures denoting length (mm) × width (mm) × thickness (mm) of the sheet. TABLE 1 STANDARD NOMINAL SIZES OF PLATES Width 900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500 1600 1800 2000 2200 2500 in mm Length in mm Maximum Standard Nominal thickness in mm. 2 200 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 2 500 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 2 800 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 3 200 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 3600 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 4000 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 63 4500 63",
      "Sheets": "4.1 Thickness – Standard nominal thickness in mm shall be as follows 0.40 0.80 1.12 1.60 2.00 2.80 4.00 0.50 0.90 1.25 1.80 2.24 3.15 4.30 0.63 1.00 1 .40 1.90 2.50 3.55 4.65 4.2 Dimensions Size mm × mm 1800 × 600 750 900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500 2000 × 600 750 900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500 2200 × 600 750 900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500 2500 × 600 750 900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500 2800 × 600 750 900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500 3200 × 600 750 900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500 3600 × 600 750 900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500 4000×600 750 900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500",
      "Strips": "5.1 Thickness – Standard nominal thickness in mm shall be as follows : 1.60 2.24 3.15 4.50 8.00 1.80 2.50 3.65 5.00 10.00 2.00 2.80 4 .00 6.00 5.2 Dimensions – Width in mm shall be as follows: 100 200 400 800 1050 1300 125 250 500 950 1150 1450 160 320 650 1000 1250 1550 6 Flats 6.1 Thickness – Standard nominal thickness in mm shall be as follows : 3.0 8.0 20.0 4.0 10.0 25.0 5.0 12.0 30.0 6.0 15.0 40.0 50.0 6.2 Dimensions – Width in mm shall be as follows: 10 45 90 180 16 50 100 200 20 60 120 250 25 65 130 300 30 70 140 400 35 75 150 40 80 160",
      "Tolerances": "The rolling and cutting tolerances and masss tolerances for steel plates, sheet strips and , flats shall be as laid down in IS 1852 : 1985. * Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products (fourth revesion) For detailed information, refer to IS 1730 : 1989 Steel plates, sheets, strips and flats structural and general engineering purposes – Dimensions (second revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 1730: 1989 Steel Plates Sheets Strips And Flats, For Structural And General Engineering Purposes\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Specifies nominal dimensions, nominal mass and surface area (for sheets) of hot-rolled steel\nplates, sheets, strips and flats for structural and general engineering purposes.\n2.\nDesignation – Hot-rolled steel plates, sheets strips and flats conforming to this standard shall be\ndesignated as under :\na) Plates shall be designated as ISPL followed by figures denoting length (mm) × width (mm)\n× thickness (mm) of the sheet.\nb) Sheets shall be designated as ISSH followed by figures denoting length (mm) × width (mm)\n× thickness (mm) of the sheet.\nTABLE 1 STANDARD NOMINAL SIZES OF PLATES\nWidth\n900\n950\n1000\n1100\n1200\n1250\n1400\n1500\n1600\n1800\n2000\n2200\n2500 in mm\nLength in mm\nMaximum Standard Nominal thickness in mm.\n2 200\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n2 500\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n2 800\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n3 200\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n3600\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n4000\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n4500\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n5000\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n5600\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n56\n6300\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n56\n50\n7100\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n56\n50\n45\n8000\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n56\n50\n45\n40\n9000\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n56\n56\n50\n45\n40\n36\n10000\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n63\n56\n50\n50\n45\n40\n36\n32\n11000\n63\n63\n63\n63\n56\n56\n50\n50\n45\n40\n36\n32\n28\n12500\n63\n63\n63\n56\n50\n50\n45\n40\n40\n36\n32\n28\n25\n13500\n63\n63\n56\n50\n50\n45\n40\n40\n36\n32\n28\n25\n25 c) Strips shall be designated as ISST followed\nby figures denoting width (mm) x thickness x\n(mm) of the strip.\nd) Flats shall be designated by the width (mm)\nfollowed by letters ISF and the thickness(mm).\n3.\nPlates\n3.1 Thickness – Standard nominal thickness of plates\nin (mm) shall be as follows:\n5.0\n10\n18\n28\n45\n6.0\n12\n20\n32\n50\n7.0\n14\n22\n36\n56\n8.0\n16\n25\n40\n63\n3.2 Size – See Table 1.\nJ\nL 4.\nSheets –\n4.1 Thickness – Standard nominal thickness in mm shall\nbe as follows\n0.40 0.80 1.12 1.60 2.00 2.80 4.00\n0.50 0.90 1.25 1.80 2.24 3.15 4.30\n0.63 1.00 1 .40 1.90 2.50 3.55 4.65\n4.2 Dimensions\nSize mm × mm\n1800 × 600 750 900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500\n2000 × 600\n750\n900\n950\n1000\n1100\n1200\n1250\n1400\n1500\n2200 × 600 750 900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500\n2500 × 600 750 900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500 2800 × 600\n750\n900 950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500 3200 × 600\n750\n900\n950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500 3600 × 600\n750\n900\n950 1000 1100 1200 1250 1400 1500\n4000×600\n750\n900\n950\n1000\n1100\n1200\n1250\n1400\n1500\n5.\nStrips –\n5.1 Thickness – Standard nominal thickness in mm\nshall be as follows :\n1.60 2.24 3.15 4.50 8.00\n1.80 2.50 3.65 5.00 10.00\n2.00 2.80 4 .00 6.00\n5.2 Dimensions – Width in mm shall be as follows:\n100 200 400 800 1050 1300\n125 250 500 950 1150 1450\n160 320 650 1000 1250 1550\n6\nFlats\n6.1 Thickness – Standard nominal thickness in mm shall\nbe as follows :\n3.0 8.0\n20.0\n4.0 10.0\n25.0\n5.0\n12.0\n30.0\n6.0 15.0 40.0 50.0\n6.2 Dimensions – Width in mm shall be as follows:\n10\n45\n90\n180\n16\n50\n100\n200\n20\n60\n120\n250\n25\n65\n130\n300\n30\n70\n140\n400\n35\n75\n150\n40\n80\n160\n7.\nTolerances – The rolling and cutting tolerances and masss tolerances for steel plates, sheet strips and\n, flats shall be as laid down in IS 1852 : 1985.\n* Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled steel products\n(fourth revesion)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1730 : 1989 Steel plates, sheets, strips and flats structural and general engineering purposes – Dimensions (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1732: 1989",
    "title": "Steel Bars, Round And Square For Structural And General Engiineering Purposes-Dimensions",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "summary": "Specifies dimensions, sectional areas and mass of hot-rolled round and square steel bars for structural and general engineering purposes. This standard does not cover bars for rivets and threaded components.",
    "keywords": [
      "isro",
      "issq",
      "bars",
      "round",
      "square",
      "rolled",
      "hot"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Specifies dimensions, sectional areas and mass of hot-rolled round and square steel bars for structural and general engineering purposes. This standard does not cover bars for rivets and threaded components.",
      "Designation": "Hot rolled round and square steel bars conforming to this standard shall be designated by the letters ISRO and ISSQ respectively followed by the diameter in mm in the case of round bars and the side width in mm in the case of square bars (See Tables 1 and 2).",
      "Dimensions And Mass": "The dimensions of hotrolled round and square steel bars shall be as given in Tables 1 and 2. TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF HOT- ROLLED ROUND STEELBARS Designation ISRO 5 ISRO 28 ISRO 70 ISRO 6 ISRO 30 ISRO 75 ISRO 8 ISRO 32 ISRO 80 ISRO 10 ISRO 35 ISRO 90 ISRO 12 ISRO 40 ISRO 100 ISRO 14 ISRO 45 ISRO 110 ISRO 16 ISRO 50 ISRO 120 ISRO 18 ISRO 55 ISRO 140 ISRO 20 ISRO 60 ISRO 160 ISRO 22 ISRO 65 ISRO 180 ISRO 25 ISRO 200 TABLE 2 DIMENSIONS OF HOT-ROLLED SQUARE STEEL BARS Designation ISSQ 5 ISSQ 18 ISSQ 50 ISSQ 6 ISSQ 20 ISSQ 60 ISSQ 8 ISSQ 22 ISSQ 70 ISSQ 10 ISSQ 25 ISSQ 80 ISSQ 12 ISSQ 30 ISSQ 100 ISSQ 14 ISSQ 35 ISSQ 120 ISSQ 16 ISSQ 40 Note – For sectional areas and mass of bars, refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 1732 : 1989 Specifications for steel ba"
    },
    "content": "IS 1732: 1989 Steel Bars, Round And Square For Structural And General Engiineering Purposes-Dimensions\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Specifies dimensions, sectional areas and mass of hot-rolled round and square steel bars for\nstructural and general engineering purposes. This standard does not cover bars for rivets and threaded\ncomponents.\n2.\nDesignation – Hot rolled round and square steel bars conforming to this standard shall be designated\nby the letters ISRO and ISSQ respectively followed by the diameter in mm in the case of round bars and the\nside width in mm in the case of square bars (See Tables\n1 and 2).\n3.\nDimensions and Mass – The dimensions of hotrolled round and square steel bars shall be as given in\nTables 1 and 2.\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF HOT-\nROLLED ROUND STEELBARS\nDesignation\nISRO 5\nISRO 28\nISRO 70\nISRO 6\nISRO 30\nISRO 75\nISRO 8\nISRO 32\nISRO 80\nISRO 10\nISRO 35\nISRO 90\nISRO 12\nISRO 40\nISRO 100\nISRO 14\nISRO 45\nISRO 110\nISRO 16\nISRO 50\nISRO 120\nISRO 18\nISRO 55\nISRO 140\nISRO 20\nISRO 60\nISRO 160\nISRO 22\nISRO 65\nISRO 180\nISRO 25\nISRO 200 TABLE 2 DIMENSIONS OF HOT-ROLLED\nSQUARE STEEL BARS\nDesignation\nISSQ 5\nISSQ 18\nISSQ 50\nISSQ 6\nISSQ 20\nISSQ 60\nISSQ 8\nISSQ 22\nISSQ 70\nISSQ 10\nISSQ 25\nISSQ 80\nISSQ 12\nISSQ 30\nISSQ 100\nISSQ 14\nISSQ 35\nISSQ 120\nISSQ 16\nISSQ 40\nNote – For sectional areas and mass of bars, refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1732 : 1989 Specifications for steel bars, round and square for structural and general engineering purposes-Dimensions (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1863: 1979",
    "title": "Rolled Steel Bulb Flats",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "summary": "Specifies dimenions, sectional properties and dimensional tolerances of hot-rolled steel bulb flats",
    "keywords": [
      "bulb",
      "flats",
      "structural",
      "steel",
      "dimenions",
      "conforing",
      "hulls"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Specifies dimenions, sectional properties and dimensional tolerances of hot-rolled steel bulb flats",
      "Materials": "The bulb flats may be manufactured from steel conforing to IS 2062 : 1992. IS 3039 : 1988 or IS 8500 : 1991‡ as appropriate.",
      "Designation": "The bulb flats shall be designated by the width (b) and thickness (t) Example: 200 × 10",
      "Dimensions": "See Table 1 and 1A TABLE 1 BULB FLATS - DIMENSIONS Designation 80 × 6 200 x 9 300 x 11 7 10 12 100 × 7 11.5 13 8 220 × 10 320 × 12 120 × 7 11.5 13 8 240 × 10 340 × 12 140 × 7 11 14 8 12 370 x 13 160 × 7 260 × 10 15 811 400 × 14 9 12 × 16 180 × 8 280 × 11 430 × 15 9 12 17 10 * Steel for general structural purposes (fourth revision) † Structural steel for construction of hulls of ships (second revision) ‡ Structural steel microalloyed - (medium & high strength qualities) (first revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 1863 : 1979 Specifications for rolled steel bulb flats (first revision) TABLE 1 A SUPPLEMENTARY LIST OF BULB FLATS Designation 120 × 6 320 × 14 140 × 10 340 × 13 160 × 10 15 180 × 11 370 × 16 220 × 9 400 × 15 280 × 10 430 × 14 13 20 Note – For sectional properties of bul",
      "Tolerances": "5.1 Straightness – The maximum permissible variation in straigntness when measured over the entire length shall be 0.0035 x length. 5.2 Length – The cutting tolerance on length shall be 100 mm, – 0 mm Note—For tolerance on width thickness and weight, refer to the standard."
    },
    "content": "IS 1863: 1979 Rolled Steel Bulb Flats\n(First Revision )\n1.\nScope – Specifies dimenions, sectional properties and dimensional tolerances of hot-rolled steel bulb flats\n2.\nMaterial – The bulb flats may be manufactured from steel conforing to IS 2062 : 1992. IS 3039 : 1988 or IS\n8500 : 1991‡ as appropriate.\n3.\nDesignation – The bulb flats shall be designated by the width (b) and thickness (t)\nExample: 200 × 10\n4.\nDimensions – See Table 1 and 1A\nTABLE 1 BULB FLATS - DIMENSIONS\nDesignation\n80 × 6\n200 x 9\n300 x 11\n7\n10\n12 100 × 7 11.5\n13\n8\n220 × 10\n320 × 12\n120 × 7 11.5\n13\n8\n240 × 10\n340 × 12\n140 × 7\n11\n14\n8\n12\n370 x 13\n160 × 7\n260 × 10\n15\n811\n400 × 14\n9\n12\n× 16\n180 × 8\n280 × 11\n430 × 15\n9\n12\n17\n10\n* Steel for general structural purposes (fourth revision)\n† Structural steel for construction of hulls of ships (second revision)\n‡ Structural steel microalloyed - (medium & high strength qualities)\n(first revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1863 : 1979 Specifications for rolled steel bulb flats (first revision)\nTABLE 1 A SUPPLEMENTARY LIST OF\nBULB FLATS\nDesignation\n120 × 6\n320 × 14\n140 × 10\n340 × 13\n160 × 10 15\n180 × 11\n370 × 16\n220 × 9\n400 × 15\n280 × 10\n430 × 14 13 20 Note – For sectional properties of bulb flats, refer to the\nstandard.\n5. Tolerances –\n5.1 Straightness – The maximum permissible variation\nin straigntness when measured over the entire length shall be 0.0035 x length.\n5.2 Length – The cutting tolerance on length shall be\n100 mm, – 0 mm Note—For tolerance on width thickness and weight, refer to\nthe standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2314: 1986",
    "title": "Steel Sheet Pilling Sections",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "summary": "Stipulates dimensions and dimensional tolerances for Z-type , U-type an flat-type profile of hot rolled steel sheet piling sections. Sectional properties of these sections as calculated with the nominal dimensions are also included.",
    "keywords": [
      "piling",
      "isps",
      "sections",
      "piles",
      "flat",
      "rail",
      "sheet"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Lays down dimensions ,shape and other requirements of crane rail sections.",
      "Materials": "Piling sections shall be made from steel of any one grade conforming to IS 2062 : 1992* or IS 8500 : 1991† . Where steel is required in copper bearing quality, the copper content shall be between 0.20 and 0.35 percent.",
      "Types": "Z- Type – Roughly Z shape with joints of piles when driven located alternately at inner and outsides of the pililng wall. U -Type – Roughly U shape with joints of piles when driven located on the neutral axis of the piling wall. Flat-Type – Having flat shape with high resistance to tensile forces.",
      "Designation": "By letters ISCR followed by head width of the rail section in mm.",
      "Tolerances": "4.1 On Length – The sections shall be supplied in lengths between 9 m and 13.4 m subject to a tolerance of + 75 mm and -50 mm. Note – For detailed toleances, refer to 6 of the standard.",
      "Surface Defects": "Sheet piles shall not show defects under use steel sheet piles shall be straight and the cut and surface shall be flat.",
      "Strength Of Joint": "Tensile strength of joints of flat-type sheet piles shall not be less than 400 t/m. * Steel for general structural purposes (fourth revision) † Structural steel - Micro alloyed medium and high strength qualities (first revision)",
      "Tensile Properties": "Steel shall have a minimum tensile strength of 710 MPa with a minimum elongationof 14 pernent on a gauge length of 5.65 where So is the area of cross-section of specimen",
      "Hardness": "Not less than 200 HB.",
      "Freedom From Defects": "Shall be free from twist. Camber shall not exceed 0.2 percent of length. The asymmetry of rail cross section with respect to vertical axis shall not exceed 2 mm and 0.6 mm in rail flange and head respectively."
    },
    "content": "IS 2314: 1986 Steel Sheet Pilling Sections\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Stipulates dimensions and dimensional tolerances for Z-type , U-type an flat-type profile of hot\nrolled steel sheet piling sections. Sectional properties of these sections as calculated with the nominal\ndimensions are also included.\n2.\nMaterial – Piling sections shall be made from steel of any one grade conforming to IS 2062 : 1992* or IS\n8500 : 1991† . Where steel is required in copper bearing quality, the copper content shall be between 0.20 and\n0.35 percent.\n3. Type –\nZ- Type –\nRoughly Z shape with joints of piles when driven located alternately at inner\nand outsides of the pililng wall.\nU -Type –\nRoughly U shape with joints of piles when driven located on the neutral axis\nof the piling wall.\nFlat-Type – Having flat shape with high resistance to tensile forces.\n4.\nDesignation – Steel sheet piling sections conforming to this specification shall be designated with\nthe letters ISPS followed by the section modulus per metre of wall in cm3 and letter symbols Z, U and F\nwhich denote Z-type , U-type and flat-type sections respectively. Designation for available piling sections\nshall be as follows:\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2314 : 1986 Steel sheet piling section (first revision).\na) Z Type Piling Sections\nISPS 1021 Z\nISPS 1888 Z\nISPS 1481 Z\nISPS 2322 Z\nb) U Type Piling Sections\nISPS 1625 U ISPS 2222 U ISPS 2770 U\nc) Flat - Type Piling Sections\nDesignation IS PS 100 F\nNote – For detailed dimensions, tolerances and geometrical\nproperties refer to Figs 1 to 3 and Table 1 to 5 of the\nStandard.\n4. Tolerances –\n4.1 On Length – The sections shall be supplied in\nlengths between 9 m and 13.4 m subject to a tolerance of + 75 mm and -50 mm.\nNote – For detailed toleances, refer to 6 of the standard.\n5.\nSurface Defects – Sheet piles shall not show defects under use steel sheet piles shall be straight and\nthe cut and surface shall be flat.\n6.\nStrength of Joint – Tensile strength of joints of flat-type sheet piles shall not be less than 400 t/m.\n* Steel for general structural purposes (fourth revision)\n† Structural steel - Micro alloyed medium and high strength qualities\n(first revision) 1.\nScope – Lays down dimensions ,shape and other requirements of crane rail sections.\n2.\nDesignation – By letters ISCR followed by head width of the rail section in mm.\n3.\nTensile Properties – Steel shall have a minimum tensile strength of 710 MPa with a minimum elongationof\n14 pernent on a gauge length of 5.65 where So is the area of cross-section of specimen\n4.\nHardness – Not less than 200 HB.\n5.\nFreedom from Defects — Shall be free from twist.\nCamber shall not exceed 0.2 percent of length. The asymmetry of rail cross section with respect to vertical\naxis shall not exceed 2 mm and 0.6 mm in rail flange and head respectively."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3954: 1991",
    "title": "Hot Rolled Channel Sections For General",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "summary": "ENGINEERING PURPOSES – DIMENSIONS (First Revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "engineering",
      "purposes",
      "dimensions"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 3954: 1991 Hot Rolled Channel Sections For General\nENGINEERING PURPOSES – DIMENSIONS\n(First Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3964: 1980",
    "title": "Light Rails",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "summary": "Requirements of light rail sections. 2 . Designation — By letters ISLR followed by a figure denoting weight in kg per metre of the rail section.",
    "keywords": [
      "islr",
      "sections",
      "rail",
      "stress",
      "shelving",
      "loads",
      "yield"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of light rail sections.",
      "Designation": "By letters ISLR followed by a figure denoting weight in kg per metre of the rail section.",
      "Tensile Properties": "Steel shall have a minimum tensile strength of 710 MPa with a minimum elongation of 14 percent on a gauge length of 5.65 Where So is a area of cross section of specimen.",
      "Dimensions And Sectional Properties": "Designation Head Bottom Height Sectional width width mm Area mm mm cm2 ISLR 10 34.93 63.50 63.50 12.74 ISLR 12 35.72 68.00 69.85 15.24 ISLR 15 41.28 76.20 79.38 18.98 ISLR 25 52.39 100.01 104.78 31.68",
      "Tolerances": "Head width ± 2 mm Web thickness +1.0 –0.5 mm Height 1 mm Bottom flange width 2 mm Length of rail 50 mm Weight per metre 3 Percent",
      "Freedom From Defects": "Rail should be reasonably free from twist, camber, etc. Note 1 – For detailed dimensions and sectional properties of rail sections, refer to Table-1 and 2 of the standard. Note 2 – For method of test, refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals–Tensile testing (second revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 3964 : 1980 Specifications for light rails (first revision). ± ± ± ± So 1. Scope 1.1 This standard covers the requirements, such as materials, workmanship, finish, strength tests, general design provisions, tolerances on dimensions and marking for slotted sections. 1.2 This standard does not apply to steel sections used for the fabrication of metal shelving cabinet (adjustable type) and metal shelving racks (adjustable type).",
      "Materials": "Steel and Aluminium shall conform to specified grades.",
      "Workmanship": "Sections shall be supplied free from all burrs.",
      "Finishes": "Before any paint finish is applied, all surfaces shall be free from scale, grease, rust or other surface imperfections. A coat of anti-rust treatment shall be applied before painting the steel surfaces. 4.1 Galvanizing or anodizing, if required, shall comply with prescribed standards.",
      "Strength": "Failure loads determined as in 6.1.3 of the standard shall be reduced in the following ratio : 5.1 Minimum yield stress of material (min. 0.2 percent proof stress in case of aluminium sections) 5.2 Yield stress of test piece (0.2 percent proof stress in case of aluminium sections) 5.3 In no case shall this ratio be greater than one. Note — For the purpose of this standard the minimum yield stress of malerial (other than aluminium sections) shall be taken as given in Table 2 of the stand ard. 6. General Design Provisions 6.1 Permissible loads and factors of safety — Safe working loads shall be obtained by dividing failure load value by minimum factor of safety specified in the standard. 6.2 Limiting Beam Deflection – Should not exceed 1/ 180 of the span."
    },
    "content": "IS 3964: 1980 Light Rails\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope — Requirements of light rail sections.\n2 . Designation — By letters ISLR followed by a figure denoting weight in kg per metre of the rail section.\n3.\nTensile Properties — Steel shall have a minimum tensile strength of 710 MPa with a minimum elongation\nof 14 percent on a gauge length of 5.65 Where So is a area of cross section of specimen.\n4.\nDimensions and Sectional Properties —\nDesignation\nHead\nBottom\nHeight\nSectional width\nwidth mm\nArea mm\nmm cm2\nISLR 10\n34.93\n63.50\n63.50\n12.74\nISLR 12\n35.72\n68.00\n69.85\n15.24\nISLR 15\n41.28\n76.20\n79.38\n18.98\nISLR 25\n52.39\n100.01\n104.78\n31.68\n5.\nTolerances –\nHead width\n± 2 mm\nWeb thickness\n+1.0 –0.5 mm\nHeight 1 mm\nBottom flange width 2 mm\nLength of rail 50 mm\nWeight per metre 3 Percent\n6.\nFreedom from Defects – Rail should be reasonably free from twist, camber, etc.\nNote 1 – For detailed dimensions and sectional properties of rail sections, refer to Table-1 and 2 of the standard.\nNote 2 – For method of test, refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals–Tensile testing (second revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3964 : 1980 Specifications for light rails (first revision).\n±\n±\n±\n±\nSo 1.\nScope\n1.1 This standard covers the requirements, such as\nmaterials, workmanship, finish, strength tests, general design provisions, tolerances on dimensions and\nmarking for slotted sections.\n1.2 This standard does not apply to steel sections used\nfor the fabrication of metal shelving cabinet (adjustable type) and metal shelving racks (adjustable type).\n2.\nMaterials – Steel and Aluminium shall conform to specified grades.\n3.\nWorkmanship – Sections shall be supplied free from all burrs.\n4.\nFinishes – Before any paint finish is applied, all surfaces shall be free from scale, grease, rust or other\nsurface imperfections. A coat of anti-rust treatment shall be applied before painting the steel surfaces.\n4.1 Galvanizing or anodizing, if required, shall comply\nwith prescribed standards.\n5.\nStrength – Failure loads determined as in 6.1.3 of the standard shall be reduced in the following ratio :\n5.1 Minimum yield stress of material (min. 0.2 percent\nproof stress in case of aluminium sections)\n5.2 Yield stress of test piece (0.2 percent proof stress\nin case of aluminium sections)\n5.3 In no case shall this ratio be greater than one.\nNote — For the purpose of this standard the minimum yield\nstress of malerial (other than aluminium sections) shall be taken as given in Table 2 of the stand ard.\n6.\nGeneral Design Provisions\n6.1 Permissible loads and factors of safety — Safe\nworking loads shall be obtained by dividing failure load value by minimum factor of safety specified in the\nstandard.\n6.2 Limiting Beam Deflection – Should not exceed 1/\n180 of the span."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8081: 1976",
    "title": "Slotted Sections",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "summary": "For detailed information, refer to IS 8081 : 1976 Specifications for slotted sections 7. Tolerance of Dimensions – 7.1 Flange Sectional Dimensions – The tolerance on sum of the dimensions of all flanges shall not exceed the following: Nominal Size Tolerance Over Up to and Percent Including mm mm – 40 ± 5 40 50 ± 4 50 75 ± 3 75 – ± 2 7.2 Flange Thickness – The tolerances on the thickness of the section, for steel and for aluminium section shall conform to the respective specification as appropria",
    "keywords": [
      "holes",
      "centre",
      "radius",
      "bend",
      "flange",
      "tolerance",
      "angle"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Tolerance Of Dimensions": "7.1 Flange Sectional Dimensions – The tolerance on sum of the dimensions of all flanges shall not exceed the following: Nominal Size Tolerance Over Up to and Percent Including mm mm – 40 ± 5 40 50 ± 4 50 75 ± 3 75 – ± 2 7.2 Flange Thickness – The tolerances on the thickness of the section, for steel and for aluminium section shall conform to the respective specification as appropriate. 7.3 Internal Radius of Bend – The internal radius of bend shall have a tolerance of 1.00 mm on the nominal radius. 7.4 Angle of Bend – The angle of bend shall be ± 20 throughout the width of the flange. 7.5 Size of Holes –The tolerance on size of holes shall be ± 0.1 mm. 7.6 Pitch of Holes – The deviation in the pitch of holes shall be ± 0.1 mm. 7.7 Overall Length 7.7.1 Standard Length – The tolerance on sta"
    },
    "content": "IS 8081: 1976 Slotted Sections\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8081 : 1976 Specifications for slotted sections\n7.\nTolerance of Dimensions –\n7.1 Flange Sectional Dimensions – The tolerance on\nsum of the dimensions of all flanges shall not exceed the following: Nominal Size\nTolerance\nOver\nUp to and\nPercent Including mm mm\n– 40\n± 5\n40 50\n± 4\n50 75\n± 3\n75 –\n± 2\n7.2 Flange Thickness – The tolerances on the thickness\nof the section, for steel and for aluminium section shall conform to the respective specification as appropriate.\n7.3 Internal Radius of Bend – The internal radius of\nbend shall have a tolerance of 1.00 mm on the nominal radius.\n7.4 Angle of Bend – The angle of bend shall be ± 20\nthroughout the width of the flange.\n7.5 Size of Holes –The tolerance on size of holes shall\nbe ± 0.1 mm.\n7.6 Pitch of Holes – The deviation in the pitch of holes\nshall be ± 0.1 mm.\n7.7 Overall Length 7.7.1 Standard Length – The tolerance on standard lengths shall be ± 1.6 mm. 7.7.2 Overall Centre-to-Centre of End Holes – The tolerance on overall centre-to-centre of end holes shall\nbe ± 1.6 mm.\n7.8 Straightness — The offset shall not be more than\n1/600 of the length.\n7.9 Twist of Section — The twist of section shall not be\nmore than 40 minutes of angle per metre."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12778: 2004",
    "title": "Hot Rolled Parallel Flange Steel Section For Beams, Columns And Bearing Piles Dimensions And Section Properties",
    "category": "Structural Shapes",
    "summary": "Covers the nominal dimensions, mass and sectional properties of hot rolled parallel flange beams, columns and bearing piles. 2 Classification 2.1 Beams, column and pile sections are classified as follows. a) Indian Standard Narrow Parallel Flange Beams, NPB. b) Indian Standard Wide Parallel Flange Beams, WPB. c) Indian Standard Parallel Flange Bearing Piles, PBP. 2.3 The following abbreviated reference symbols have been used in designating the Indian Standard sections mentioned in 2.1: Sl.No. Se",
    "keywords": [
      "welding",
      "electrodes",
      "beams",
      "piles",
      "rods",
      "parallel",
      "flange"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 12778: 2004 Hot Rolled Parallel Flange Steel Section For Beams, Columns And Bearing Piles Dimensions And Section Properties\n(First Revision)\n1\nScope – Covers the nominal dimensions, mass and sectional properties of hot rolled parallel flange beams,\ncolumns and bearing piles.\n2 Classification\n2.1 Beams, column and pile sections are classified as\nfollows.\na) Indian Standard Narrow Parallel Flange Beams,\nNPB.\nb) Indian Standard Wide Parallel Flange Beams,\nWPB.\nc) Indian Standard Parallel Flange Bearing Piles,\nPBP.\n2.3 The following abbreviated reference symbols have\nbeen used in designating the Indian Standard sections mentioned in 2.1:\nSl.No.\nSection\nClassification\nAbbreviated\nReference\nSymbol\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\ni)\nBeams\nISNPB\nNPB\nii) Beams/Columns\nISWPB\nWPB\niii)\nPile Sections\nISPBP\nPBP\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12778 : 2004 Specifications for hot rolled steel sections for parallel flange beams, columns – dimensions and section properties and bearing piles (first revision).\n3 Dimensions, Mass and Tolerances\n3.1 Nominal dimensions and mass of narrow and wide\nparallel flange beams and bearing piles shall conform to the values given in Tables 1 to 3, respectively of the\nstandard.\n3.2 Dimensional and mass tolerances of the various\nsections shall conform to the appropriate values stipulated in IS 12779*.\n4 Sectional Properties Sectional properties of the beam, column and pile sections are given in Tables 1 to 3 of the standard, for\ninformation.\n* Rolling and cutting tolerances for hot rolled parallel flange beam and column sections – specification. SECTION 18\nWELDING ELECTRODES AND WIRES CONTENTS\nTitle\nPage\nIS\n814 : 2004\nCovered electrodes for manual metal arc welding of carbon and\n18.3 carbon manganese steel (Sixth revision)\nIS\n1278 : 1972\nFiller rods and wires for gas welding (second revision)\n18.7\nIS\n1395 : 1982\nLow and medium alloy steel covered electrodes for manual metal\n18.8 arc welding (third revision)\nIS\n4972 : 1968\nResistance spot welding electrodes\n18.10\nIS\n5511 : 1991\nCovered electrodes for manual metal arc welding of cast iron (first revision)\n18.12\nIS\n5897 : 1985\nAluminium and aluminium alloy welding rods and wires and\n18.14 magnesium alloy welding rods (first revision)\nIS\n5898 : 1970\nCopper and copper alloy bare solid welding rods and electrodes\n18.15\nIS\n6419 : 1996\nWelding rods and bare electrodes for gas shielded are welding of\n18.16 structural steel (first revision)\nIS\n6560 : 1996\nMolybdenum and chromium-molybdenum low alloy welding rods\n18.18 and bare electrodes (first revision)\nIS\n7280 : 1974\nBare wire electrodes for submerged arc welding of structural steels\n18.20\nIS\n8363 : 1976\nBase wire electrodes for electroslag welding of steels.\n18.21"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 814: 2004",
    "title": "Covered Electrodes For Manual Metal Arc Welding Of Carbon And Carbon Manganese Steel",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "summary": "Requirements for covered carbon and carbon manganese steel electrodes for carbon and carbon manganese steel, including hydrogen controlled electrodes for manual metal arc welding of mild and medium tensile steels including structural steels, depositing weld metal having a tensile strength not more than 610 MPa. 1.1 Electrodes designed specifically for repair welding, often markedted in India as ‘low heat input’ electrodes are not covered in this standard. 1.1.2 Ilmenite type electrodes are being",
    "keywords": [
      "electrodes",
      "weld",
      "electrode",
      "metal",
      "indicating",
      "digit",
      "arc"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for covered carbon and carbon manganese steel electrodes for carbon and carbon manganese steel, including hydrogen controlled electrodes for manual metal arc welding of mild and medium tensile steels including structural steels, depositing weld metal having a tensile strength not more than 610 MPa. 1.1 Electrodes designed specifically for repair welding, often markedted in India as ‘low heat input’ electrodes are not covered in this standard. 1.1.2 Ilmenite type electrodes are being used fairly widely in few other countries. There appears to be a trend to use ilmenite as an ingredient of the covering in our country also. Provision for a separate class for such electrodes may be considered at a later stage. Notes – For weld metal with tensile strength higher than 610 MPa, a ref",
      "Classification": "2.1 Coding Classification of electrodes shall be indicated by the coding system of letters and numberals as given below to indicate the specified properties or characteristics of the electrodes. 2.1.1 Main Coding– Shall be followed in the order stated: a) A prefix letter ‘E’ shall indicate a covered electrode for manual metal arc welding, manufactured by extrusion process; b) A letter indicating the type of covering; c) First digit indicating ultimate tensile strength in combination with the yield stress of the weld metal deposited; d) Second digit indicating the percentage elongation in combination with the impact values of the weld metal deposited; e) Third digit indicating welding position(s) in which the electrode may be used; and f) Fourth digit indicating the current condition in whi",
      "Core Wire": "Shall conform to IS 2879*.",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "4.1 Size and length – Shall be designated by the nominal diameter of the core wire expressed in mm. Shall be as given in Table 4. Tolerance on specified diameter of the core wire shall be ±0.05 mm. On specified length shall be ±3 mm. TABLE 4 SIZES AND LENGTHS OF ELECTRODES Size, mm Length, mm (1) ( 2) 1.6 150 or 200 or 250 2.0 200 or 250 or 300 or 350 2.5 250 or 300 or 350 3.15 350 or 450 4.0 350 or 450 5.0 350 or 450 6.3 350 or 450 8.0 350 or 450 * Mild steel for metal arc welding electrodes (third revision) 4.2 Bare Length (Contact End) Bare Length, mm Electrode size, mm Minimum Maximum 1.6 to 3.15 15 30 4.0 to 8.0 20 40 4.3 Bare Length ( Arc Striking End) – The arc striking end of the electrode shall be bare and permit easy striking of arc. The distance from the arc end to the first poi"
    },
    "content": "IS 814: 2004 Covered Electrodes For Manual Metal Arc Welding Of Carbon And Carbon Manganese Steel\n(Sixth Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements for covered carbon and carbon manganese steel electrodes for carbon and\ncarbon manganese steel, including hydrogen controlled electrodes for manual metal arc welding of mild and\nmedium tensile steels including structural steels, depositing weld metal having a tensile strength not more\nthan 610 MPa.\n1.1 Electrodes designed specifically for repair welding,\noften markedted in India as ‘low heat input’ electrodes are not covered in this standard.\n1.1.2 Ilmenite type electrodes are being used fairly widely in few other countries. There appears to be a\ntrend to use ilmenite as an ingredient of the covering in our country also. Provision for a separate class for such\nelectrodes may be considered at a later stage.\nNotes – For weld metal with tensile strength higher than 610\nMPa, a reference may be made to IS 1395*.\n2.\nClassification –\n2.1 Coding\nClassification of electrodes shall be indicated by the coding system of letters and numberals as given below\nto indicate the specified properties or characteristics of the electrodes.\n2.1.1 Main Coding– Shall be followed in the order stated:\na) A prefix letter ‘E’ shall indicate a covered electrode for manual metal arc welding, manufactured by\nextrusion process;\nb) A letter indicating the type of covering;\nc) First digit indicating ultimate tensile strength in combination with the yield stress of the weld metal\ndeposited;\nd) Second digit indicating the percentage elongation in combination with the impact values of the weld metal\ndeposited;\ne) Third digit indicating welding position(s) in which the electrode may be used; and f) Fourth digit indicating the current condition in which the electrode is to be used.\n2.1.2 The following letters indicating the additional properties of the electrodes may be used, if required:\na) Letters H1, H2, H3 indicating hydrogen controlled electrodes\nb) Letters J, K and L indicating increased metal recovery as effective electrode:\n‘Efficiency (EE)’ as per IS 13043 in the following range\nJ = 110 - 129 percent;\nK = 130 - 149 percent; and\nL = 150 percent and above.\nc) Letter `X’ indicating the radiographic quality\n2 .2 Type of Covering – Type of covering shall be indicated by the following letters :\nA – Acid\nB – Basic\nC – Cellulosic\nR – Rutile\nRR – Rutile, heavy coated\nS – Any other type not mentioned above.\n2.3 Strength Characteristics – See Table 1\nTABLE 1DESIGNATION OF STRENGTH\nCHARACTERISTICS Designating Ultimate Tensile Yield Strength Digit Strength\nMin N/mm2\nN/mm2 (1) (2) (3) 4 410-510 330 5 510-610 360\n2.4 Elongation and Impact Properties – See Table2\n*Low and medium alloy steel covered electrodes for manual\nmetal arc welding (third revision). TABLE 2 COMBINATION OF PERCENTAGE\nELONGATION AND IMPACT STRENGTH\nDesignating Percentage Impact Digit Elongation Strength on Gauge J/ºC, Min Length\n0\n65\n.5\nS\n, Min (1) (2) (3)\nFor Tensile Range 410-510 N/ mm2 0 16\nNo impact requirements 1 20\n47J/+27º C 2 22\n47J/+0º C 3 24\n47J/-20º C 4 24\n27J/-30º C\nFor Tensile Range 510-610 N/ mm2 0 16 No impact requirements 1 18\n47J/+27º C 2 18\n47J/+0º C 3 20\n47J/-20º C 4 20\n27J/-30º C 5 20\n27J/-40º C 6 20\n27J/-460 C\nNOTE-\n0\nS is the cross-sectional area of test piece.\n2.5 Welding Position – Shall be indicated by the\nappropriate designating digits as follows: 1\nAll positions. 2\nAll positions except vertical down. 3\nFlat butt weld, flat fillet weld and horizontal/vertical fillet weld. 4\nFlat butt weld and flat fillet weld. 5\nVertical down, flat butt, flat fillet and horizontal and vertical fillet weld. 6\nAny other position or combination of positions not classified above.\n2.6 Welding Current and Voltage Conditions– Shall\nbe indicated by the appropriate designating digits as given in Table 3.\n2.7 Hydrogen Controlled Electrodes – The letters H1,\nH2, and H3 shall be included in the classification as a suffix for those electrodes which will give diffusible\nhydrogen ml/100 gm.\n2.8 Increased Metal Recovery –The letters J, K and L\nshall be included in the classification as a suffix for those electrodes which have appreciable quantities of metal\npowder in their coating and give increased metal recovery with respect to that of core wire melted, where\nTABLE 3 WELDING CURRENT AND VOLTAGE\nCONDITIONS\nDigit Direct Current Alternating Current Recommended Open Circuit Voltage Electrode V, Min Polarity1) (1) (2) (3) 02) + Not recommended 1 + or – 50 2 – 50 3 + 50 4 + or - 70 5 – 70 6\n+ 70 7\n+ or – 90 8\n– 90 9\n+ 90\n1) Positive polarity (+) Negative polairity (–)\n2) Symbol 0 reserved for electrodes used exclusively on direct current,\nJ\n= 110–129 percent,\nK\n= 130–149 percent, and\nL\n= 150 percent and above\n2.9 Radiographic Quality Electrodes – The letter `X’\nshall be included in the classification as a suffix for those electrodes which deposit radiographic quality\nwelds.\n3.\nCore Wire – Shall conform to IS 2879*.\n4.\nDimensions and Tolerances –\n4.1 Size and length – Shall be designated by the\nnominal diameter of the core wire expressed in mm. Shall be as given in Table 4.\nTolerance on specified diameter of the core wire shall be ±0.05 mm. On specified length shall be ±3 mm.\nTABLE 4 SIZES AND LENGTHS OF\nELECTRODES\nSize, mm Length, mm (1)\n( 2)\n1.6\n150 or 200 or 250\n2.0\n200 or 250 or 300 or 350\n2.5\n250 or 300 or 350\n3.15\n350 or 450\n4.0\n350 or 450\n5.0\n350 or 450\n6.3\n350 or 450 8.0\n350 or 450\n* Mild steel for metal arc welding electrodes (third revision) 4.2 Bare Length (Contact End) Bare Length, mm Electrode size, mm Minimum Maximum 1.6 to 3.15 15 30 4.0 to 8.0 20 40\n4.3 Bare Length ( Arc Striking End) – The arc striking\nend of the electrode shall be bare and permit easy striking of arc. The distance from the arc end to the first point\nwhere the full cross section of the covering prevails shall not exceed the following limits:\n(i) For all classification\n½ core wire diameter\nOR 2.0 mm whichever is less\n4.4 Concentricity of Flux covering with core wire –\nTolerance shall be such that the maximum core plus one covering dimension shall not exceed the minimum Core\nplus one covering dimensions by more than –\na) 5 percent of the mean of two dimensions for EBXXXX and ESBXXXX\nb) 4 percent of the mean of two dimensions for ERXXXX,\nERRXXXX and EAXXXX c) 3 percent of the mean of two dimensions for ECXXXX\n5.\nTests\n5.1 Chemical Analysis\nThe sample for analysis shall be taken from weld metal obtained with the electrode. The result of the analysis\nshall meet the requirement of Table 5 of the standard.\n5.2 All Weld Metal Mechanical Tests for Tensile and\nImpact – Ultimate tensile strength, minimum yield strength, percentage elongation and impact values shall\nbe as specified in Table 6.\n5.3 Butt Weld test – No crack or defect at the outer\nsurface of the test specimens is greater than 3 mm measured across the specimen and 1.5mm along the\nlength.\n5.4 Running Performance Test ( for Sizes 2.5mm and\nBelow) – Bead should be free from porosites, slag inclusion cracks etc.\n5.5 Increased Metal Recovery Test – Shall conform to\nthat specified in 2.8.\n5.6 Diffusible Hydrogen Evaluation Test – As specified.\n5.7 Radiographic Quality Test – For radiographic\nquality electrode the radiograph shall not show crack or incomplete fusion.\nTABLE 5 CHEMICAL COMPOSITION - REQUIERMENTS FOR WELD METAL\nClassification\nWeight, Percent, Max\nCombined Limit for\nMn+Ni+Cr+Mo+V\nC\nMn\nSi\nP\nS\nNi\nCr\nMo\nV\nEAXXXX\nNot specified\nECXXXX do\nERXXXX do\nERRXXXX do EBXXXX\n1.12\n1.6\n0.75\n0.035\n0.035\n0.30\n0.20\n0.30\n0.08 1.75 ESB XXXX\nSame as EBXXXX TABLE 6 MECHANICAL PROPERTIES OF WELD METAL\nClassification Ultimate Tensile Yield Strength, Percentage E longation\nTemperature Impact\nStrength on Gauge\nfor Impact 0C Strengths\nLength 5.65\nMPa MPa Min J, Min\nEX40XX 410-540 330 16 No impact requirement\nEX41XX 410-540 330 20\n+ 27\n47\nEX42XX 410-540 330 22 0\n47\nEX43XX 410-540 330 24\n– 20 47\nEX44XX 410-540 330 24\n– 30 27\nEX50XX 510-610 360 16 No impact requirement\nEX51XX 510-610 360 18\n+27 47\nEX52XX 510-610 360 18 0 47\nEX53XX 510-610 360 20\n– 20 47\nEX54XX 510-610 360 20\n– 30 27\nEX55XX 510-610 360 20\n– 40 27\nEX56XX 510-610 360 20\n– 46 27\nNote – In view of the possible scatter in welding and testing, the upper limit of ultimate tensile strengths may be exceeded\nby 40MPa.\nNote – For method of tests, refer to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 814 : 2004 Specifications for covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding of carbon manganese steel (sixth revision).\nSo"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1278: 1972",
    "title": "Filler Rods For Gas Welding",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "summary": "Requirements of ferrous and non-ferrous filler rods for gas welding made of the following materials supplied in cut lengths. a) Structural steels, b) Austenitic stainless steels, c) Cast irons (excluding spheroidal graphite and malleable iron castings), d) Copper and copper alloys, e) Nickel and nickel alloys, f) Aluminium and aluminium alloys, and g) Magnesium and magnesium alloys.",
    "keywords": [
      "rods",
      "filler",
      "alloys",
      "welding",
      "magnesium",
      "gas",
      "austenitic"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of ferrous and non-ferrous filler rods for gas welding made of the following materials supplied in cut lengths. a) Structural steels, b) Austenitic stainless steels, c) Cast irons (excluding spheroidal graphite and malleable iron castings), d) Copper and copper alloys, e) Nickel and nickel alloys, f) Aluminium and aluminium alloys, and g) Magnesium and magnesium alloys. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Size Diameter Tolerance on Diameter Other mm Cast Iron gas welding Filler Rods Filler Rods mm mm 1, 1.25,1. 6, 2, 2.5 ± 0.08 ± 0.05 3.15,4, 5, 6.3 8, 10, 12.5 ± 0.08 + 0.05 - 0.10 2.2 Length – It shall be 500 or 1000 mm for rods less than 2.5 mm dia and 1000 mm for rods 2.5 mm and above. The tolerance on length of cast iron filler rods shall be 6 50 + − mm. For all other rods sh"
    },
    "content": "IS 1278: 1972 Filler Rods For Gas Welding\n(Second Revision)\n1. Scope – Requirements of ferrous and non-ferrous\nfiller rods for gas welding made of the following materials supplied in cut lengths.\na)\nStructural steels, b)\nAustenitic stainless steels, c)\nCast irons (excluding spheroidal graphite and malleable iron castings),\nd)\nCopper and copper alloys, e)\nNickel and nickel alloys, f)\nAluminium and aluminium alloys, and g)\nMagnesium and magnesium alloys.\n2.\nDimensions and Tolerances\n2.1 Size Diameter Tolerance on\nDiameter Other mm\nCast Iron gas welding Filler Rods Filler Rods mm\nmm 1, 1.25,1. 6, 2, 2.5 ± 0.08\n± 0.05 3.15,4, 5, 6.3 8, 10, 12.5\n± 0.08\n+ 0.05\n- 0.10\n2.2 Length – It shall be 500 or 1000 mm for rods less\nthan 2.5 mm dia and 1000 mm for rods 2.5 mm and above.\nThe tolerance on length of cast iron filler rods shall be\n6\n50\n+\n− mm. For all other rods shall be ± 5 mm.\n3. Requirements\n3.1 Shall be free from surface imperfections, corrosion\nproducts, grease, excessive oxide, etc.\n3.2 Structural steel filler rods shall have a protective\ncopper coating; copper content not exceeding\n0.4 percent by weight.\n3.3 Aluminium, aluminium alloy and magnesium alloy\nfiller rods shall be supplied in as manufactured condition.\n3.4 In case of austenitic stainless steel filler rods, the\ninter – crystalline corrosion test may be conducted. The test piece shall show no sign of cracking.\nNote 1 – For chemical composition requirements, refer to Tables 2 to 8 of the standard.\nNote 2 – A guide for selection and use of gas welding rods is given in Appendix A of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1278 : 1972 Specifications for filler rods for gas welding (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4972: 1968",
    "title": "Resistance Spot – Welding Electrodes",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "summary": "Code numbers (in metric units), dimensional requirements, and physical and mechanical properties for a series of spot-welding electrodes, cap electrodes and shanks, mainly intented for resistance spot welding of ferrous and non-ferrous metals. This standard covers . electrodes with standard ISO tapers and with Morse tapers.",
    "keywords": [
      "electrodes",
      "electrode",
      "shanks",
      "spot",
      "dome",
      "pointed",
      "morse"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Code numbers (in metric units), dimensional requirements, and physical and mechanical properties for a series of spot-welding electrodes, cap electrodes and shanks, mainly intented for resistance spot welding of ferrous and non-ferrous metals. This standard covers . electrodes with standard ISO tapers and with Morse tapers. 2. Materials Recommended Class Material Conductivity Percent Vickers Application (that for Standard Pyramid Annealed Copper) Hardness (HV) I Cadmium copper con- 85 90 Spot-welding of coated steels, taining 0.5 to 1 percent aluminium and its alloys cadmium II Chromium copper con- 80-85 110 Spot-welding of steels other taining 0.5 to 0.8 percent than covered under class Chromium II and III III Cobalt, beryllium copper 45-50 180 Spot-welding of stainless and heat resisting"
    },
    "content": "IS 4972: 1968 Resistance Spot – Welding Electrodes\n1. Scope – Code numbers (in metric units), dimensional\nrequirements, and physical and mechanical properties for a series of spot-welding electrodes, cap electrodes\nand shanks, mainly intented for resistance spot welding of ferrous and non-ferrous metals. This standard covers\n.\nelectrodes with standard ISO tapers and with Morse tapers.\n2. Materials Recommended\nClass\nMaterial\nConductivity Percent\nVickers\nApplication\n(that for Standard\nPyramid\nAnnealed Copper)\nHardness\n(HV)\nI\nCadmium copper con-\n85 90\nSpot-welding of coated steels, taining 0.5 to 1 percent\naluminium and its alloys cadmium\nII\nChromium copper con-\n80-85 110\nSpot-welding of steels other taining 0.5 to 0.8 percent\nthan covered under class\nChromium\nII and III\nIII\nCobalt, beryllium copper\n45-50 180\nSpot-welding of stainless and heat resisting alloys\n3.\nSpecification for Electrodes with Standard ISO\nTapers –\n3.1 Sizes and Dimensions\n3.1.1\nThe size of an electrode with taper engagement with dimensions of electrode shanks and electrode\nholders is given Table 1.\n3.1.2\nStraight electrodes with tapered shanks: Pointed, dome, flat, offset, truncated cone and spherical types.\nOverall length range from 38 to 102 mm for nominal sizes\n1, 2 and 3 and 64 to 125 mm, 76 to 125 mm and 89 to 125 mm for nominal sizes 4, 9 and 10 respectively.\n3.1.3\nElectrode nose configurations – Types same as given in 3.1.2. Available in all sizes (1 to 10).\n3.1.4\nStandard single – Bend electrodes, cold-formed form standard straight electrodes: Pointed, dome, flat,\neccentric and truncated types. Overall length 64, 70, 83 and 83 for nominal sizes 5, 6, 7 and 8 respectively.\n3.1.5\nStandard double-bend electrodes, cold-formed from standard electrodes – Types, overall length and\nsizes are same as given in 3.1.4.\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF ELECTRODE SHANKS AND ELECTRODE HOLDERS\nNominal\nMajor\nEngage\nCooling Hole\nTaper\nLoad\nSize\nDia Dia\nDia\n(Inclusive)\nmm mm\nmm\n01\n13.0\n12.7\n7.0\n1/10\n02\n16.0\n15.5\n8.5\n1/10\n03\n20.0\n19.0\n10.5\n1/10\nFor straight loading not over 1500 kgf\n04\n25.0\n24.5\n13.5\n1/10\n05\n13.0\n12.7\n7.0\n1/10\n06\n16.0\n15.5\n8.5\n1/10\n07\n20.0\n19.0\n10.5\n1/10\nFor eccentric loading\n08\n25.0\n24.5\n13.5\n1/10\n09\n31.5\n31.0\n14.0\n1/5\n10\n40.0\n39.0\n16.0\n1/5\nFor straight loading over 1500 kgf 3.1.6 Caps and adapter shanks Types A to F. Nominal sizes 1 to 3.\nNote 1 – For dimensions of socket gauges for shanks, refer to\nTables 2 and 3 with Fig. 1 of the standard.\nNote 2 – For electrode designations and other dimensional\ndetails, refer to Tables 1 and 4 to 8 and Fig. 2 of the standard.\n4. Specification for Electrodes with Standard Morse\nTapers\n4.1 Sizes and Dimensions — Nominal size 1, 2 and 3.\nMajor dia 12.24, 15.87 and 22.22 mm for sizes 1, 2 and 3 respectively.\n4.1.1 Morse electrode nose configurations – Pointed, dome, flat, offset, truncated cone and spherical type.\nNose lengths (19.0 and 6.5 mm), (22.0 and 10.0 mm) and\n(28.5 and 10.0 mm) for nominal sizes 1, 2 and 3 respectively in case of pointed and dome types.\n4.1.2\nStraight electrode with tapered shanks – Types same as given in 4.1.1. Overall length range 32 to 102\nmm for sizes 1 and 2 and 38 to 102 mm for size 3.\n4.1.3\nSingle-bend electrodes, cold-formed from standard straight electrodes – Pointed, dome, flat,\neccentric and truncated types. Overall length 64, 70 and\n83 mm for nominal sizes 1, 2 and 3 respectively.\n4.1.4\nDouble-bend electrodes; cold-formed from standard straight electrodes – Types, overall lengths\nand sizes are same as given in 4.1.3.\n4.1.5\nMorse caps and adapter shanks Types A to F.\nNote 1– For dimensions of shanks of electrodes, refer to Fig. 3 and for taper ring and plug gauges, refer to Table 9 of the standard.\nNote 2 – For electrode designations and other dimensional details, refer to Tables 10 to 14 and Fig. 4 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4972 : 1968 Specifications for resistance spot - welding electrodes."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5511: 1991",
    "title": "Covered Electrodes For Manual Metal Arc Welding Of Cast Iron",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "summary": "Specifies a system of classification and coding and covers requirements for covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding of cast iron.",
    "keywords": [
      "rods",
      "welding",
      "symbol",
      "core",
      "weld",
      "wires",
      "arc"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Specifies a system of classification and coding and covers requirements for covered electrodes for manual metal arc welding of cast iron. 2. Coding 2.1 Method of Coding a) Prefix symbol E b) Symbol for chemical composition of the electrode core wire or weld metal, using a group of letters and possibly a number ; c) Symbol characterising using one or two letters types of coating ; and d) Symbol relating to conditions of use : i) Welding positions – using a number ii) Power supply – using a number 2.2 Letter E at the head of the symbol code distinguishes the covered electrodes for are welding from any other filler product. 2.3 Symbols for Chemical Composition Basic Group Symbol Type of Alloy Iron Base FeC1 Grey cast iron FeC2 Grey cast iron with steel core Fe Steel Nickel Base NiFe Nickel-ir",
      "Conditions Of Rods And Wires": "Finished filler rods and wires shall have a smooth finish free from surface imperfections, corrosion products, grease, excess oxide or other foreign matter which would adversely affect the properties of the weld or the operation of the welding equipment. 4. Classification 4.1 S-A1 19000, S-A1 19500, S-A1 26398, S-A1 31000, S-A143000, S-A1 53000, S-A 1 55000 and S-A1 55330 for Aluminium and Aluminium Alloy filler rods and wires on the basis of their chemical composition. 4.1.1 Here , S denotes bars, solid rod or wire and A1 for aluminium alloy. The last part i.e the 5 digit number denotes the IS designation of the material. 4.2 S-mg1, S-mg2, Smg3 and Smg4 for magnesium alloy filler rods. Here S denotes the base solid welding rod and Mg for magnesium alloy. The digit used Indicates the parti",
      "Chemical Composition": "Shall be as given in Tables 5 and 6 of the standard.",
      "Usability Test": "Upon welding, the molten metal shall flow freely and uniformly and shall produce a weld bead of uniform appearance, free from cracks and other deleterious defects. Note 1— For requirements of spool and reeling condition,refer to 5 to 6 of the standard. Note 2— For method of test, refer to the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 5897 : 1985 Specifications for aluminium and aluminium alloy welding rods and wires and magnesium alloy welding rods (first revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 5511: 1991 Covered Electrodes For Manual Metal Arc Welding Of Cast Iron\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Specifies a system of classification and coding and covers requirements for covered electrodes\nfor manual metal arc welding of cast iron.\n2.\nCoding\n2.1 Method of Coding\na) Prefix symbol E b) Symbol for chemical composition of the electrode\ncore wire or weld metal, using a group of letters and possibly a number ;\nc) Symbol characterising using one or two letters types of coating ; and\nd) Symbol relating to conditions of use :\ni) Welding positions – using a number ii) Power supply – using a number\n2.2 Letter E at the head of the symbol code\ndistinguishes the covered electrodes for are welding from any other filler product.\n2.3 Symbols for Chemical Composition\nBasic Group\nSymbol\nType of Alloy\nIron Base\nFeC1\nGrey cast iron\nFeC2\nGrey cast iron with steel core\nFe\nSteel\nNickel Base\nNiFe\nNickel-iron\nNiCu1\nNickel-copper\nNiCu2\nNickel-copper\nNi\nNickel\nCopper Base\nCuA1 Copper-aluminium\nCuSn1\nCopper-tin\nCuSn2\nCopper-tin\nZ\nOther type\n2.4 Symbols of Type of Coating – B- basic, G–graphite.\nBG- basic with graphite, S- Organic salt and V- Other type.\n2.5 Symbols for Welding Position\nSymbol\nBasic Weld Position\n1\nAll\n2\nAll, except vertical downwards\n3\nFlat (butt and fillet welds)\nand horizontal vertical\n(fillet weld)\n4\nFlat (butt and fillet)\n5\nAs for 3 and recommended for vertical down wards.\n2.6 Symbols for Welding Current\nSymbol\nDirect Current\nA.C Current Minmum\nRecommended\nOpen- Circuit\nPolarity\nVoltage,V\n0 +\n1\n+ or –\n50\n2 –\n50\n3 +\n50\n4\n+ or –\n70\n5 –\n70\n6 +\n70\n7\n+ or –\n90\n8 –\n90\n9 +\n90\n3.\nDimensions\n3.1 Size — Shall be designated by the diameter of the\ncore wire expressed in mm. as given in Table 1.\nTABLE 1 SIZE OF ELECTRODES\nSize Designation Diameter of Core\nWire, mm\n2.5\n2.50\n3.15\n3.15\n4\n4.00\n5\n5.00\n6.3\n6.30\n3.2 Tolerance on the Size – On the specified diameter\nof the core wire shall be + 0.00 mm and – 0.15 mm.\n3.3 Length – Shall be 350 mm and 450 mm.\n3.4 Tolerances on Length – Over nominal length shall\nbe ±3 mm. 4.\nQuality Requirements\n4.1 The contact end of the electrode shall be bare and\nclean to a length of 20 to 30 mm.\n4.2 The arc striking end of the electrode shall be\nsufficiently bare to permit easy striking of the arc. The distance from the arc and to the first point where the full\ncross-section of the covering prevails shall not exceed the diameter of the core wire subject to a maximum of\n2.5 mm.\n4.3 The covering shall be free from harmful defects\nand shall be sufficiently robust to withstand normal handling storage and use, without damage.\n4.4. The tolerance permitted for uniformity of covering shall be such that the maximum core plus one covering\ndimensions shall not exceed the minimum core-plus one covering dimension by more than five percent of the\nmean of the two dimensions.\n5. Tests\n5.1 Chemical Analysis – As per Table 5 of the standard.\n5.2 Usability Test – Weld area shall be reasonably free\nfrom cracks and porosity, not exceeding 6 pores per 10 square centimeter area–with no pores greater than 1.5mm\nin diameter.\nNote 1 – For chemical composition, refer to Table 5 of the standard.\nNote 2 – For method of list refer to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5511 : 1991 Specifications for covered electrodes for manual metal are welding of cast iron (first revision). 1.\nScope\n1.1 Requirements of bare solid filler rods and wires for\nwelding aluminium and aluminium alloys and filler rods for welding magnesium alloys by inert gas tungsten arc\nwelding (TIG) or gas metal arc welding (MIG) processes.\nThe chemical composition of the filler rods and wire is also specified.\n1.2 The standard does not specify the chemical\ncomposition and the mechanical properties of the weld deposit.\n1.3 The rods and wires specified in this standard are all\nsuitable for use with argon or helium or mixture of these gases.\n2.\nDimensions and Tolerances\n2.1 The diameters of rods and wires shall be as specified\nbelow. The tolerances appropriate to the specified diameters are also given. Form\nDiameter Tolerances Plus Minus mm mm mm Wire\n0.6 0.01\n0.03\n0.8 0.01\n0.04\n1.0 0.01\n0.04 Wire and rod\n1.2 0.01\n0.04\n1.6 0.01\n0.04\n2.0 0.01\n0.07\n2.4 0.01\n0.07\n3.2 0.01\n0.07 Rod\n4.0 0.01\n0.07\n5.0 0.01\n0.07\n2.2 Lenght of Rods (Cut Lengths) — Rods less than\n2.5 mm in diameter shall be supplied in lengths of 500 or\n1 000 mm. Rods 2.5 mm and larger in diameter shall be supplied in lengths of 1 000 mm.\n2.2.1\nTolerance on length shall be ±5 mm.\n3.\nConditions of Rods and Wires —Finished filler rods and wires shall have a smooth finish free from surface\nimperfections, corrosion products, grease, excess oxide or other foreign matter which would adversely affect\nthe properties of the weld or the operation of the welding equipment.\n4.\nClassification\n4.1 S-A1 19000, S-A1 19500, S-A1 26398, S-A1 31000,\nS-A143000, S-A1 53000, S-A 1 55000 and S-A1 55330 for Aluminium and Aluminium Alloy filler rods and wires\non the basis of their chemical composition.\n4.1.1 Here , S denotes bars, solid rod or wire and A1 for aluminium alloy. The last part i.e the 5 digit number\ndenotes the IS designation of the material.\n4.2 S-mg1, S-mg2, Smg3 and Smg4 for magnesium alloy\nfiller rods. Here S denotes the base solid welding rod and Mg for magnesium alloy. The digit used Indicates\nthe particular chemical composition.\n5.\nChemical Composition — Shall be as given in Tables 5 and 6 of the standard.\n6.\nUsability Test — Upon welding, the molten metal shall flow freely and uniformly and shall produce a weld\nbead of uniform appearance, free from cracks and other deleterious defects.\nNote 1— For requirements of spool and reeling condition,refer to 5 to 6 of the standard.\nNote 2— For method of test, refer to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5897 : 1985 Specifications for aluminium and aluminium alloy welding rods and wires and magnesium alloy welding rods (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5897: 1985",
    "title": "Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Welding Rods And Wires And Magnesium Alloy Welding Rods",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "summary": "(First Revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "rods",
      "welding",
      "gas",
      "wires",
      "arc",
      "shielding",
      "rod"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Finish": "Filler rods and wires shall have smooth finish, free from surface imperfections, corrosion products, grease, excess oxide or oil matter which would adversely affect the properties of the weld or the operation of the welding equipment.",
      "Classification": "S-Cu1, S-Cu2, S-Cu3 Si, S-Cu Sn1, S-Cu Sn2, S-Cu Al1, S-Cu Al2, S-Cu Al3, S-Cu Zn Al, S- Cu Ni1, S-Cu Ni2, S-Cu Ni3, S-Cu Al Ni, and S-Cu Mn Al1 based on their chemical composition. Note 1 – For requirement of spools and reeling conditions, refer to 5 and 6 of the standard Note 2 – For chemical composition, refer to 10.3 to 10.16 of the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 5898 : 1970 Specifications for copper and copper alloy bare solid welding rods and electrodes."
    },
    "content": "IS 5897: 1985 Aluminium And Aluminium Alloy Welding Rods And Wires And Magnesium Alloy Welding Rods\n(First Revision) 1.\nScope\n1.1 Requirements of bare solid filler rods and wires for\nwelding copper and copper alloys by inert-gas arc process, that is, inert-gas tungsten arc welding (TIG)\nor gas metal-arc welding (MIG). The chemical composition of the rods and wires is also specified.\n1.2 The standard does not specify the chemical\ncomposition and mechanical properties of the weld deposit.\n1.3 Certain rods and wires specified in this standard\nare not suitable for use with particular shielding gas.\nSuitability of their use with a particular shielding gas should, therefore, be ascertained from the manufacturer\nwhile purchasing.\n2.\nDimensions and Tolerances\n2.1 Diameter\nForm Diameter\nTolerances Plus Minus m m m m m m\n(0.5) 0.01 0.03\nWire\n0.6\n(0.8)\n0.9\n1.0 0.01 0.04\nWire and rod\n(1.2)\n(1.6)\n(2.0)\n2.4\n2.5 0.01\n0.07\n(3.2)\nRod\n4.0\n5.0\n2.2 Length of Rods – Rods less than 2.5 mm in diameter\nshall preferably be in lengths of 500 or 1000 mm. Rods\n2.5 mm and larger in diameter shall preferably be supplied in lengths of 1000 mm. Lengths other than these two\npreferred lengths may be supplied by mutual agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer.\n2.2.1 Tolerance on each length of rod shall be ±5 mm.\n3.\nFinish – Filler rods and wires shall have smooth finish, free from surface imperfections, corrosion\nproducts, grease, excess oxide or oil matter which would adversely affect the properties of the weld or the\noperation of the welding equipment.\n4.\nClassification — S-Cu1, S-Cu2, S-Cu3 Si, S-Cu Sn1,\nS-Cu Sn2, S-Cu Al1, S-Cu Al2, S-Cu Al3, S-Cu Zn Al, S-\nCu Ni1, S-Cu Ni2, S-Cu Ni3, S-Cu Al Ni, and S-Cu Mn Al1 based on their chemical composition.\nNote 1 – For requirement of spools and reeling conditions, refer to 5 and 6 of the standard\nNote 2 – For chemical composition, refer to 10.3 to 10.16 of the standard\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5898 : 1970 Specifications for copper and copper alloy bare solid welding rods and electrodes."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5898: 1970",
    "title": "Copper And Copper Alloy Bare Solid Welding Rods And Electrodes",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "summary": "1. Scope 1.1 Requirements of solid filler rods and wires for welding structural steels by inert-gas tungsten arc welding (TIG), gas metal arc welding (MIG) or CO2 welding processes. The chemical composition and tensile properties of filler rods and wires are also specified. 1.2 This standard also specifies the mechanical properties of weld deposits. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Diameter Nominal Tolerance, mm Diameter mm Plus Minus 0.6 0.01 0.03 0.8 0.01 0.04 0.9 0.01 0.04 1.0 0.01 0.04 1.2 0",
    "keywords": [
      "helix",
      "rods",
      "welding",
      "filler",
      "rod",
      "wires",
      "indicates"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Condition Of Rod And Wire": "3.1 Finish – Filler rods and wires shall have a smooth finish and be free from surface imperfections, corrosion products, grease, excessive oxide or other foreign matter which would adversely affect the properties of the weld or the operation of the welding equipment. If the rods and wires are supplied with a protective copper coating, it shall be a uniform well-bonded, smooth coating being applied over a thoroughly clean surface. The copper content of the coated rod or wire (or wire plus the coating) expressed as a percentage of the rod shall not exceed 0.5 percent by weight. 3.2 Temper, Cast and Helix a)Temper – Shall be such that they are suitable for uninterrupted feeding on automatic or semiautomatic welding equipment. Tensile strength for those wound on spools of 300 mm and greater i",
      "Classification": "S1, S2, S3, S4, S5 and S6 based on the chemical composition. In a classification for example, S5 - M504, S5 indicates chemical composition of the wire, M indicates that it is a mixed gas, 50 indicates tensile strength of minimum 500 MPa and 4 indicate impact value at 27 joules at minus 300C. SUMMARY"
    },
    "content": "IS 5898: 1970 Copper And Copper Alloy Bare Solid Welding Rods And Electrodes\n1.\nScope\n1.1 Requirements of solid filler rods and wires for\nwelding structural steels by inert-gas tungsten arc welding (TIG), gas metal arc welding (MIG) or CO2\nwelding processes. The chemical composition and tensile properties of filler rods and wires are also\nspecified.\n1.2 This standard also specifies the mechanical\nproperties of weld deposits.\n2. Dimensions and Tolerances\n2.1 Diameter Nominal Tolerance, mm Diameter mm\nPlus\nMinus\n0.6\n0.01\n0.03\n0.8\n0.01\n0.04\n0.9\n0.01\n0.04\n1.0\n0.01\n0.04\n1.2\n0.01\n0.04\n1.6\n0.01\n0.04\n1.8\n0.01\n0.04\n2.0\n0.01\n0.07\n2.4\n0.01\n0.07\n2.5\n0.01\n0.07\n2.8\n0.01\n0.07\n3.0\n0.01\n0.07\n3.2\n0.01\n0.07\n4.0\n0.01\n0.07\n5.0\n0.01\n0.07\n2.2 Length of Rods – Rods supplied in straight lengths\nshall preferably have the following lengths, expressed in millimetres – 250, 350, 450, 500, 600, 750, 900, 1000.\n2.3 Tolerance on each length of rod shall be ±5 mm\n3.\nCondition of Rod and Wire –\n3.1 Finish – Filler rods and wires shall have a smooth\nfinish and be free from surface imperfections, corrosion products, grease, excessive oxide or other foreign matter\nwhich would adversely affect the properties of the weld or the operation of the welding equipment. If the rods\nand wires are supplied with a protective copper coating, it shall be a uniform well-bonded, smooth coating being\napplied over a thoroughly clean surface. The copper content of the coated rod or wire (or wire plus the coating)\nexpressed as a percentage of the rod shall not exceed 0.5 percent by weight.\n3.2 Temper, Cast and Helix a)Temper – Shall be such that they are suitable for uninterrupted feeding on automatic or\nsemiautomatic welding equipment. Tensile strength for those wound on spools of 300 mm\nand greater in diameter shall be as per Table 1.\nb) Cast – Shall be such to impart a curvature to the filler metal so that a specimen sufficient in\nlength to bound one loop or a maximum 3m.\nWhen cut and laid on flat surface shall form a circle or part thereof of dimaeter shown in\nTable 2.\nc) Helix – Shall be such that the maximum distance from any point on the filler metal to flat surface\nshall not exceed as shown in Table 2.\nTABLE 2 DIAMETER OF CAST AND HELIX\nType Standard Size Cast Maximum of Package Helix mm\nmm mm\n100mm spool 1.2 and less\n200-230\n13\nAll except 100 mm 0.8 and less\n305\n25 spool 0.9 and more\n380\n25\n4. Classification – S1, S2, S3, S4, S5 and S6 based on\nthe chemical composition. In a classification for example,\nS5 - M504, S5 indicates chemical composition of the wire, M indicates that it is a mixed gas, 50 indicates tensile\nstrength of minimum 500 MPa and 4 indicate impact value at 27 joules at minus 300C.\nSUMMARY"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6419: 1996",
    "title": "Welding Rods And Bare Electrodes For Gas Shielded Arc Welding Of Structural Steel",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "summary": "(First Revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "symbol",
      "gas",
      "indicating",
      "shielding",
      "energy",
      "tensile",
      "elongation"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 6419: 1996 Welding Rods And Bare Electrodes For Gas Shielded Arc Welding Of Structural Steel\n(First Revision) TABLE 1 TENSILE STRENGTH OF FILLER METAL WIRE\nWire diameter, mm\n0.6\n0.8\n0.9\n1.0\n1.2\n1.6 to 2.0\n2.1 to 3.2\nTensile length,\n1100\n1100\n1000\n950\n900\n700\n600\nMPa, Min A. Symbol Indicating Tensile Strength and Elongation\nSymbol Yield Tensile Percetage Elongation at\nStrength, Min\nStrength Gauge Length MPa MPa 5.65\n, Min 50 420 500-640 22\nB. Symbol Indicating the Impact Energy\nSymbol\nMinimum Impact Energy of 27\nJoules(Charpy V-Notch at ºC\nSpecimen) 1\n+ 27 2 0 3\n- 20 4\n- 30\nC. Symbol Indicating Shielding Gas\nSymbol\nType of Shielding Gas R\nReducing gas I\nInert gas M\nMixed gas C\nCarbon dioxide F\nNitrogen hydrogen mixture\n5.\nTests\n5.1 Chemical Composition – See 12 of the standard\n5.2 Soundness – Radiographs shall reveal no cracks or\nZone of incomplete fusion.\n5.3 All Weld Metal Mechanical Test – Ultimate tensile\nstrength, yeild stress, percentage elongation and impact values shall be as specified in 4.\nNote – For requirements of reels and reeling conditions refer to 6 and 7 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6419 : 1996 Specifications for welding rods and bare electrodes for gas shielded arc welding of structural steel (first revision).\nSo"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6560: 1996",
    "title": "Molybdenum And Chromium-Molybdenum Low Alloy Steel Welding Rods And Bare Electrodes For Gas Shielded Arc Welding",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "summary": "(First Revision) 1. Scope 1.1 Requirements of solid filler rods and wires for welding. It covers molybdenum and chromium molybdenum low alloy steel rods and wires for use in inert-gas tungsten arc welding (TIG), gas metal arc welding (MIG) or CO2 welding processes. The chemical composition and tensile properties of filler rods and wires are also specified. 1.2 This standard also specifies the mechanical properties of the weld deposits. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 Diameter – Nominal Diameter",
    "keywords": [
      "sla",
      "rods",
      "gas",
      "symbol",
      "welding",
      "wires",
      "filler"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Length Of Rods": "Rods less than 2.5 mm in diameter shall preferably be supplied in lengths of 500 or 1000 mm. Rods 2.5 mm and larger in diameter shall preferably supplied in lengths of 1000 mm. Lengths other than these two preferred lengths may be supplied by mutual agreement between the purchaser and the supplier. 2.3. Tolerance on each length of rod shall be ±5 mm 3. Conditions of Rods and Wires 3.1 Finish filler rods and wires shall have a smooth finish and be free from surface imperfections, corrosion products, grease, excessive oxide or other foreign matter which would adversely affect the properties of the weld or the operation of the welding equipment. If the rods and wires are supplied with a protective copper coating, it shall be a uniform well-bonded, smooth coating being applied over a throughly",
      "Classification": "SLA-1, SLA-2, SLA-3, SLA-4 and SLA-5 based on chemical composition. In a classification, for example, SLA-5-M 504 where SLA-5 indicates chemical composition of the filler metal , M indicates that it is mixed gas,50 indicates tensile strength of minimum 500MPa and 4 indicates the impact values of 27 joules at minus 30ºC A. Symbol Indicating Tensile Strength and Elongation Symbol Yield Tensile Percetage Strength, Min Strength Elongation at Gauge Length MPa MPa 5.65 , Min 50 420 500 - 640 20 53 460 530 - 680 18 56 500 560 - 720 16 B. Symbol Indicating the Impact Energy Symbol Minimum Impact Energy of 27 Joules (Charpy V-Notch at ºC Specimen) 1 + 27 2 0 3 - 20 4 - 30 C. Symbol Indicating Shielding Gas Symbol Type of Shielding Gas R Reducing gas I Inert gas M Mixed gas C Carbon dioxide F Nitrog"
    },
    "content": "IS 6560: 1996 Molybdenum And Chromium-Molybdenum Low Alloy Steel Welding Rods And Bare Electrodes For Gas Shielded Arc Welding\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope\n1.1 Requirements of solid filler rods and wires for\nwelding. It covers molybdenum and chromium molybdenum low alloy steel rods and wires for use in\ninert-gas tungsten arc welding (TIG), gas metal arc welding (MIG) or CO2 welding processes. The chemical\ncomposition and tensile properties of filler rods and wires are also specified.\n1.2 This standard also specifies the mechanical\nproperties of the weld deposits.\n2.\nDimensions and Tolerances\n2.1 Diameter – Nominal Diameter Tolerance, mm mm\nPlus\nMinus\n0.6\n0.01\n0.03\n0.8\n0.01\n0.04\n0.9\n0.01\n0.04\n1.0\n0.01\n0.04\n1.2\n0.01\n0.04\n1.6\n0.01\n0.04\n1.8\n0.01\n0.04\n2.0\n0.01\n0.07\n2.4\n0.01\n0.07\n2.5\n0.01\n0.07\n2.8\n0.01\n0.07\n3.0\n0.01\n0.07\n3.2\n0.01\n0.07\n4.0\n0.01\n0.07\n5.0\n0.01\n0.07\n2.2. Length of Rods – Rods less than 2.5 mm in diameter shall preferably be supplied in lengths of 500 or 1000\nmm. Rods 2.5 mm and larger in diameter shall preferably supplied in lengths of 1000 mm. Lengths other than\nthese two preferred lengths may be supplied by mutual agreement between the purchaser and the supplier.\n2.3. Tolerance on each length of rod shall be ±5 mm\n3. Conditions of Rods and Wires\n3.1 Finish filler rods and wires shall have a smooth finish\nand be free from surface imperfections, corrosion products, grease, excessive oxide or other foreign matter\nwhich would adversely affect the properties of the weld or the operation of the welding equipment. If the rods\nand wires are supplied with a protective copper coating, it shall be a uniform well-bonded, smooth coating being\napplied over a throughly clean surface. The copper content of the coated rod or wire expressed as a\npercentage of the rod (or wire) plus the coating shall not exceed 0.35 percent by weight.\n3.2 a) Temper – Shall be such that they are suitable for uninterrupted feeding on automatic or semi\nautomatic welding equipment. Tensile strength for those wound on spools of 300 mm and\ngreater in diameter shall be as per Table 1.\nb) Cast – Shall be such to impart a curvature to the filler metal so that a specimen sufficient in length\nto wound one loop or a maximum 3 m. When cut and laid on flat surface shall form a circle or part\nthereof of dimaeter shown in Table 2.\nc) Helix – Shall be such that the maximum distance from any point on thefiller metal to flat surface\nshall not exceed as shown in Table 2.\nTABLE 1 TENSILE STRENGTH OF FILLER RODS\nWire Diameter (mm)\n0.6\n0.8\n0.9\n1.0\n1.2\n1.6 - 2.0 2.4 - 3.2\nTensile Strength\n1 100\n1 100\n1 000\n950\n900 700 600\nMPa, Min 4.\nClassification – SLA-1, SLA-2, SLA-3,\nSLA-4 and SLA-5 based on chemical composition. In a classification, for example, SLA-5-M 504 where SLA-5\nindicates chemical composition of the filler metal , M indicates that it is mixed gas,50 indicates tensile strength\nof minimum 500MPa and 4 indicates the impact values of 27 joules at minus 30ºC\nA. Symbol Indicating Tensile Strength and\nElongation\nSymbol\nYield\nTensile\nPercetage\nStrength, Min Strength\nElongation at\nGauge Length\nMPa\nMPa\n5.65\n, Min 50 420\n500 - 640\n20 53 460\n530 - 680\n18 56 500\n560 - 720\n16\nB.\nSymbol Indicating the Impact Energy\nSymbol Minimum Impact Energy of 27 Joules (Charpy V-Notch at ºC Specimen) 1\n+ 27 2 0 3\n- 20 4\n- 30\nC. Symbol Indicating Shielding Gas\nSymbol Type of Shielding Gas R\nReducing gas I\nInert gas M\nMixed gas C\nCarbon dioxide F\nNitrogen hydrogen mixture\n5.\nTests\n5.1 Chemical Composition – See 11 of the standard\n5.2 Soundness — Radiographs shall reveal no cracks\nor zone of incomplete fusion.\n5.3 All Weld Metal Mechanical Test – Ultimate tensile\nstrength, yeild stress percentage elongation and impact values shall be as specified in 4.\nNote – For requirements of reels and reeling conditions refer to 6 and 7 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6560 : 1996 Specifications for molybdenum and chromium-lybdenum, low alloy steel welding rods and bare electrodes for gas shielded arc welding (first revision).\nTABLE 2 DIAMETER OF CAST HELIX\nType of package\nStandard size\nCast\nMaximum Helix mm\nmm mm\n100mm spool\n1.2 and less\n100–130\n13\nAl except 100mm\n0.8 and less\n305\n25 spool\n0.9 and larger\n380\n25\nSo"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7280: 1974",
    "title": "Bare Wire Electrodes For Submerged Arc Welding Of Structural Steels",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "summary": "Requirements of solid filler wires for submerged arc welding of structural steels (28-50 kgf/mm2 yield strength and 34-70 kgf/mm2 ultimate tensile strength). Note – This standard is intended to serve as a guide for the manufacture and selection of bare wire electrodes for submerged arc welding of structural steels.",
    "keywords": [
      "wires",
      "submerged",
      "welding",
      "steels",
      "arc",
      "automatic",
      "bare"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of solid filler wires for submerged arc welding of structural steels (28-50 kgf/mm2 yield strength and 34-70 kgf/mm2 ultimate tensile strength). Note – This standard is intended to serve as a guide for the manufacture and selection of bare wire electrodes for submerged arc welding of structural steels. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 The diameters of wires shall be 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.15, 4.0, 5.0, 6.3 and 8.0 mm. 2.2 Tolerance on the diameters of wires shall be ± 0.05 mm.",
      "Conditions Of Wires": "Filler wires shall have smooth finish and they shall be free from surface imperfections, corrosion products, grease, excessive oxide or other foreign matter. Temper and surface conditions shall be suitable for uniform uninterrupted feeding on automatic or semi-automatic welding equipment. The copper content of the coated wire expressed as a percentage of the wire and the coating shall not exceed 0.4 percent by weight.",
      "Classification": "AS-1, AS-1 Si, AS-2, AS-2Si, AS- 2 Mo, AS-2 Ni, AS-3, AS-3 Mo, AS-3 Mo Ni, AS-4, AS- 4 Mo, AS-6 and AS-6 Mo based on their chemical composition. Note 1– For requirements of reels for wires and reeling conditions, refer to 5 and 6 of the standard. Note 2– For chemical composition details, refer to 9 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 7280 : 1974 Specifications for bare wire electrodes for submerged arc welding of structural steels."
    },
    "content": "IS 7280: 1974 Bare Wire Electrodes For Submerged Arc Welding Of Structural Steels\n1.\nScope – Requirements of solid filler wires for submerged arc welding of structural steels\n(28-50 kgf/mm2 yield strength and 34-70 kgf/mm2 ultimate tensile strength).\nNote – This standard is intended to serve as a guide for the\nmanufacture and selection of bare wire electrodes for submerged arc welding of structural steels.\n2.\nDimensions and Tolerances\n2.1 The diameters of wires shall be 1.6, 2.0, 2.5, 3.15,\n4.0, 5.0, 6.3 and 8.0 mm.\n2.2 Tolerance on the diameters of wires shall be\n± 0.05 mm.\n3.\nConditions of Wires— Filler wires shall have smooth finish and they shall be free from surface\nimperfections, corrosion products, grease, excessive oxide or other foreign matter. Temper and surface\nconditions shall be suitable for uniform uninterrupted feeding on automatic or semi-automatic welding\nequipment. The copper content of the coated wire expressed as a percentage of the wire and the coating\nshall not exceed 0.4 percent by weight.\n4.\nClassification— AS-1, AS-1 Si, AS-2, AS-2Si, AS-\n2 Mo, AS-2 Ni, AS-3, AS-3 Mo, AS-3 Mo Ni, AS-4, AS-\n4 Mo, AS-6 and AS-6 Mo based on their chemical\ncomposition.\nNote 1– For requirements of reels for wires and reeling conditions, refer to 5 and 6 of the standard.\nNote 2– For chemical composition details, refer to 9 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 7280 : 1974 Specifications for bare wire electrodes for submerged arc welding of structural steels."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8363: 1976",
    "title": "Bare Wire Electrodes For Electroslag Welding Of Steels",
    "category": "Welding Electrodes and Wires",
    "summary": "Requirements of solid bare wire electrodes for electroslag welding of carbon and low alloy steels. Note. – This standard is intended to serve as a guide for the manufacturer and selection of bare wire electrodes for electroslag welding of carbon manganese and low alloy steels.",
    "keywords": [
      "head",
      "washers",
      "screws",
      "hexagon",
      "bolts",
      "nuts",
      "els"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of solid bare wire electrodes for electroslag welding of carbon and low alloy steels. Note. – This standard is intended to serve as a guide for the manufacturer and selection of bare wire electrodes for electroslag welding of carbon manganese and low alloy steels. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances 2.1 The diameters of wires shall be 2.0, 3.15, 4.0, 5.0 and 6.3 mm. 2.2 Tolerance on dia on wire shall be 0 05 .0 + − mm 2.3 Ovality of wire shall not exceed 50 percent of tolerance on dia.",
      "Conditions Of Wires": "Filler wires shall have smooth finish and they shall be free from surface imperfections, corrosion products, grease, excessive oxide or other foreign matter. Temper and surface conditions shall be suitable for uniform uninterrupted feeding on automatic or semi-automatic welding equipment. The copper content of the coated wire expressed as a percentage of the wire and the coating shall not exceed 0.4 percent by weight.",
      "Classification": "ES-2, ES-2Si, ES-3, ES-3Mo, ES-3 MO Ni, ES-4, ES-4 Mo, ELS-4, ELS-4 Mo, ELS -2 Mo and ELS-2 Mo Cr based on their chemical composition. Note 1– For requirements of coils for wires and reeling conditions, refer to 5 and 6 of the standard. Note 2– For chemical composition details, refer to 9 of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 8363 : 1976 Specifications for bare wire electrodes for electroslag welding of steels. 19.1 SECTION 19 THREADED FASTENERS AND RIVETS SP 21 : 2005 CONTENTS Title Page IS 207 : 1964 Gate and shutter hooks eyes (first revision) 19.4 IS 723 : 1972 Steel countersunk head wire nails (second revision) 19.5 IS 724 : 1964 Mild steel and brass cup ruler and square hooks and screw eyes (first revision) 19.6 IS 725 : 1961 Copper wire nails (revised) 19.7 IS 730 :"
    },
    "content": "IS 8363: 1976 Bare Wire Electrodes For Electroslag Welding Of Steels\n1. Scope – Requirements of solid bare wire electrodes\nfor electroslag welding of carbon and low alloy steels.\nNote. – This standard is intended to serve as a guide for the\nmanufacturer and selection of bare wire electrodes for electroslag welding of carbon manganese and low alloy steels.\n2.\nDimensions and Tolerances\n2.1 The diameters of wires shall be 2.0, 3.15, 4.0, 5.0\nand 6.3 mm.\n2.2 Tolerance on dia on wire shall be 0\n05\n.0\n+\n− mm\n2.3 Ovality of wire shall not exceed 50 percent of\ntolerance on dia.\n3. Conditions of Wires – Filler wires shall have smooth\nfinish and they shall be free from surface imperfections, corrosion products, grease, excessive oxide or other\nforeign matter. Temper and surface conditions shall be suitable for uniform uninterrupted feeding on automatic\nor semi-automatic welding equipment. The copper content of the coated wire expressed as a percentage of\nthe wire and the coating shall not exceed 0.4 percent by weight.\n4. Classification – ES-2, ES-2Si, ES-3, ES-3Mo, ES-3\nMO Ni, ES-4, ES-4 Mo, ELS-4, ELS-4 Mo, ELS -2 Mo and ELS-2 Mo Cr based on their chemical composition.\nNote 1– For requirements of coils for wires and reeling conditions, refer to 5 and 6 of the standard.\nNote 2– For chemical composition details, refer to 9 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8363 : 1976 Specifications for bare wire electrodes for electroslag welding of steels. 19.1\nSECTION 19\nTHREADED FASTENERS\nAND\nRIVETS\nSP 21 : 2005 CONTENTS\nTitle\nPage\nIS\n207 : 1964\nGate and shutter hooks eyes (first revision)\n19.4\nIS\n723 : 1972\nSteel countersunk head wire nails (second revision)\n19.5\nIS 724 : 1964\nMild steel and brass cup ruler and square hooks and screw eyes (first revision)\n19.6\nIS\n725 : 1961\nCopper wire nails (revised)\n19.7\nIS 730 : 1978\nHook bolts for corrugated sheet roofing (second revision)\n19.8\nIS 1120 : 1975\nCoach screws (first revision)\n19.9\nIS 1363 : 2002\nHexagon head bolts screws and nuts of product grade C\nPart 1 hexagon head bolts (size range M5 to M64) (third revision)\n19.10\nPart 2 Hexagon head screws (size range M5 to M64) (third revision)\n19.11\nPart 3 Hexagon head nuts (size range M5 to M64) (third revision)\n19.12\nIS 1364 : 2002\nHexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grades A and B\nPart 1 hexagon head bolts, (size range M1.6 to M64)(third revision)\n19.13\nPart 2 Hexagon head screws (size range M1.6 to M64)(third revision)\n19.14\nPart 3 Hexagon head nuts (size range M1.6 to M64)(third revision)\n19.15\nPart 4 Hexagon thin nuts (chamfered) (size range M1.6 to M64) (third revision)\n19.16\nPart 5 Hexagon thin nuts (unchamfered) (size range M1.6 to M64) (third revision)\n19.17\nIS\n1365 : 1978\nSlotted countersunk head screws (third revision)\n19.18\nIS 1366 : 2002\nSlotted cheese head screws (third revision)\n19.19\nIS\n1929 : 1982\nHot forged steel rivets for hot closing (12 to 36 mm diameter)(first revision)\n19.20\nIS 2016 : 1967\nPlain washers (first revision)\n19.21\nIS 2155 : 1982\nCold forged solid steel rivets for hot closing (6 to 16 mm diameter) (first revision)\n19.23\nIS\n2585 : 1968\nBlack square bolts and nuts (dia range 6 to 39 mm) and black square screws (dia range 6 to 24 mm) (first revision)\n19.24\nIS\n2687 : 1991\nCap nuts (second revision)\n19.25\nIS\n2907 : 1998\nNon-Ferrous rivets (1.6 to 10 mm)\n19.26\nIS\n2998 : 1982\nCold forged steel rivets for cold closing (1 to 16 mm diameter) (first revision)\n19.27\nIS\n3063 : 1994\nFasteners-single coil rectangular section spring lock washers(second revision)\n19.28\nIS\n3121 : 1989\nRigging screws and stretching screws (first revision)\n19.29\nIS\n3468 : 1991\nPipe nuts (second revision)\n19.30\nIS\n3757 : 1985\nHigh strength structural bolts (Second revision)\n19.31\nIS\n4762 : 1984\nWorm drive hose clamps for general purposes (first revision)\n19.32\nIS\n5369 : 1975\nGeneral requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first revision)\n19.33 Title\nPage\nIS\n5372 : 1975\nTaper washers for channels (ISMC) (first revision)\n19.34\nIS\n5373 : 1969\nSquare washers for wood fastening\n19.35\nIS 5374 : 1975\nTaper washers for I-Beams (ISMB) (first revision)\n19.36\nIS 5624 : 1993\nFoundation bolts (first revision)\n19.37\nIS 6113 : 1970\nAluminium fasteners for building purposes\n19.38\nIS\n6610 : 1972\nHeavy washers for steel structures\n19.39\nIS 6623 : 2004\nHigh strength structural nuts (first revision)\n19.40\nIS 6639 : 1972\nHexagonal bolts for steel structures\n19.41\nIS\n6649 : 1985\nHardened and tempered washers for high strength structural bolts and nuts (first revision)\n19.42\nIS 6733 : 1972\nWall and roofing nails\n19.43\nIS 6736 : 1972\nSlotted raised countersunk head wood screws\n19.44\nIS 6739 : 1972\nSlotted round head wood screws\n19.45\nIS\n6760 : 1972\nSlotted countersunk head wood screws\n19.46\nIS\n8033 : 1976\nRound washers with square hole for wood fastenings\n19.47\nIS\n8412 : 1977\nSlotted countersunk head bolts for steel structures\n19.48\nIS\n8869 : 1978\nWashers for corrugated sheet roofing\n19.49\nIS 10238 : 2001\nStep bolts for steel structures\n19.50\nIS 12427 : 2001\nTransmission tower bolts\n19.51"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 207: 1964",
    "title": "Gate And Shutter Hooks And Eyes",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements for gate and shutter hooks and eyes which are commonly used on doors and windows for keeping them in position when kept open.",
    "keywords": [
      "hooks",
      "eyes",
      "brass",
      "gate",
      "revised",
      "shutter",
      "cast"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for gate and shutter hooks and eyes which are commonly used on doors and windows for keeping them in position when kept open. 2. Types Type 1– Mild steel and hard-drawn brass hooks and eyes, and Type 2– Cast brass hooks and plates. 3. Size and Dimensions (in mm) 3.1 Type 1– 65 (4.17), 5 (4.52), 100(5.23),125 (5.59)150 (5.59), 200 (6.30), 250 (6.30) 300 (7.01). 3.2 Type – 75(4), 100(5), 125(6.5), 200(8) Note – Figure in brackets indicate diameter (average diameter in case of cast brass hooks) of unthreaded shank. 4. Tolerances For length upto size 250 ± 2 mm For length upto size 300 ± 3 mm For average Diameter of ± 0.5 mm cast brass hooks",
      "Finish": "The articles shall be finished bright. Note – For detailed dimensions and shapes, refer to Table 1 and 11, Fig.1 and 2 of the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 207 : 1964 Specification for gate and shutter hooks and eyes (revised)."
    },
    "content": "IS 207: 1964 Gate And Shutter Hooks And Eyes\n(Revised)\n1. Scope – Requirements for gate and shutter hooks\nand eyes which are commonly used on doors and windows for keeping them in position when kept open.\n2.\nTypes\nType 1– Mild steel and hard-drawn brass hooks and eyes, and\nType 2– Cast brass hooks and plates.\n3.\nSize and Dimensions (in mm)\n3.1\nType 1– 65 (4.17), 5 (4.52), 100(5.23),125 (5.59)150 (5.59), 200 (6.30), 250 (6.30) 300 (7.01).\n3.2 Type – 75(4), 100(5), 125(6.5), 200(8)\nNote – Figure in brackets indicate diameter (average diameter\nin case of cast brass hooks) of unthreaded shank.\n4.\nTolerances\nFor length upto size\n250 ± 2 mm\nFor length upto size\n300 ± 3 mm\nFor average Diameter of ± 0.5 mm cast brass hooks\n5.\nFinish – The articles shall be finished bright.\nNote – For detailed dimensions and shapes, refer to Table 1 and 11, Fig.1 and 2 of the standard\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 207 : 1964 Specification for gate and shutter hooks and eyes (revised)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 723: 1972",
    "title": "Steel Counter Sunk Head Wire Nails",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements of steel countersunk head wire nails.",
    "keywords": [
      "shank",
      "nails",
      "nail",
      "head",
      "countersunk",
      "diameter",
      "eccentricity"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of steel countersunk head wire nails. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances (in mm) 2.1 Dimensions Shank Length Head Diameter Diameter 1.25 20 3.4 1.4 20 3.8 1.6 15, 20, 25 4 1.8 25, 30 4.5 2 25, 30, 40, 50 4 2.24 40 4.5 2.5 50 5 2.8 60 5.6 3.15 60 5.7 3.55 80 6.4 4 100 7.2 4.5 90, 100, 125 8.1 5 100, 125, 150 9 6.3 150 11.3 8 200, 225 14.4 10 250 18 2.2 Tolerances (in mm) a) On shank dia 1.25 to 2.24 ±0.04 2.5 ±0.05 2.8 to 10 ±0.06 b) On length 15 to 20 ±1 25 to 30 ±1.2 40 ±1.5 50 to 60 ±2.1 80 ±2.6 90 ±3.1 100 ±3.4 125 to 150 ±3.8 200 to 250 ±4.4 2.3 Bend of shank shall not exceed 1 percent of length. 2.4 Eccentricity and ovality of centre of nail head from axis of shank: a) Maximum12 percent of shank diameter for nails with shank diameter 2 mm and above. b) Maximum14 percent of shan",
      "Designation": "As an example, a countersunk head nail of size 4.00 mm and length 100 mm shall be designated as `Nail 4 × 100 IS : 723’.",
      "Finish": "Shall be supplied plain finished.",
      "Test (Bend Test)": "Test piece shall not break or develop crack when doubled over by pressure or hammer blows until internal radius equals diameter of test piece and sides are parallel. For detailed information, refer to IS 723 : 1972 Specification for steel countersunk head wire nails (second revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 724 :1964 Specification for mild steel and brass cup, ruler and square hooks and screw eyes ( revised)."
    },
    "content": "IS 723: 1972 Steel Counter Sunk Head Wire Nails\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements of steel countersunk head wire nails.\n2.\nDimensions and Tolerances (in mm)\n2.1 Dimensions Shank\nLength Head Diameter\nDiameter\n1.25 20 3.4\n1.4 20 3.8\n1.6 15, 20, 25 4\n1.8 25, 30 4.5\n2 25, 30, 40, 50 4\n2.24 40 4.5\n2.5 50 5\n2.8 60 5.6\n3.15 60 5.7\n3.55 80 6.4\n4 100 7.2\n4.5 90, 100, 125 8.1\n5 100, 125, 150 9\n6.3 150 11.3\n8 200, 225 14.4 10 250 18\n2.2 Tolerances (in mm) a) On shank dia 1.25 to 2.24 ±0.04 2.5 ±0.05 2.8 to 10 ±0.06 b) On length 15 to 20 ±1 25 to 30 ±1.2 40 ±1.5 50 to 60 ±2.1 80 ±2.6 90 ±3.1 100 ±3.4 125 to 150 ±3.8 200 to 250 ±4.4\n2.3 Bend of shank shall not exceed 1 percent of length.\n2.4 Eccentricity and ovality of centre of nail head from\naxis of shank: a) Maximum12 percent of shank diameter for nails with shank diameter 2 mm and above. b) Maximum14 percent of shank diameter for nails with shank diameter below 2 mm.\nNote – For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to\nTables 1 to 4 of the standard.\n3.\nDesignation – As an example, a countersunk head nail of size 4.00 mm and length 100 mm shall be\ndesignated as `Nail 4 × 100 IS : 723’.\n4. Finish – Shall be supplied plain finished.\n5. Test (Bend Test) – Test piece shall not break or\ndevelop crack when doubled over by pressure or hammer blows until internal radius equals diameter of\ntest piece and sides are parallel.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 723 : 1972 Specification for steel countersunk head wire nails (second revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 724 :1964 Specification for mild steel and brass cup, ruler and square hooks and screw eyes ( revised)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 724: 1964",
    "title": "Mild Steel And Brass Cup, Ruler And Square Hooks And Screw Eyes",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements for mild steel and brass cup, ruler and square hooks and screw eyes.",
    "keywords": [
      "hooks",
      "shouldered",
      "ruler",
      "cup",
      "eyes",
      "designation",
      "screw"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for mild steel and brass cup, ruler and square hooks and screw eyes.",
      "Types": "a) Shouldered cup hooks b) Shouldered ruler hooks c) Shouldered square hooks d) Plain cup hooks e) Plain ruler hooks f) Plain square hooks 2.1 Screw Eyes shall be of One Type Only.",
      "Designation": "Shall be based on type, length, and screw designation No. of the fitting. For example, shouldered cup hook of length 25 mm and of screw designation No.5. shall be designated as “Shouldered cup hook 25×No. 5” 4. Dimensions 4.1 Shouldered cup, ruler and square hooks Dimension Designation 15×No.3 20×No.4 25×No.5 35×No.7 40×No.8 50×No.10 50×No12 D(mm) 2.39 2.74 3.10 3.81 4.17 4.88 5.59 T(mm) 4.7 6.5 8.0 12.5 14.0 17.5 20.0 4.2 Plain Cup and Ruler Hooks Dimension Designation 25×No.5 30×No.7 40×No.8 45×No.8 5o×No.8 D(mm) 3.10 3.81 4.17 4.17 4.17 T(mm) 8.0 10.0 12.0 15.0 18.0 4.3 Plain Square hooks Dimension Designation 20×No.4 25×No.5 30×No.6 40×No.7 50×No.9 60×No.12 75×No14 D(mm) 2.74 3.10 3.45 3.81 4.52 5.59 6.30 T(mm) 8.0 10.0 14.0 15.0 20.0 24.0 28.0M 4.4 Screw eyes Dimension Designation 16×",
      "Finish": "Hooks and eyes shall be finished bright."
    },
    "content": "IS 724: 1964 Mild Steel And Brass Cup, Ruler And Square Hooks And Screw Eyes\n(Revised)\n1. Scope – Requirements for mild steel and brass cup,\nruler and square hooks and screw eyes.\n2. Types – a) Shouldered cup hooks\nb) Shouldered ruler hooks c) Shouldered square hooks\nd) Plain cup hooks e) Plain ruler hooks\nf)\nPlain square hooks\n2.1 Screw Eyes shall be of One Type Only.\n3. Designation – Shall be based on type, length, and\nscrew designation No. of the fitting. For example, shouldered cup hook of length 25 mm and of screw\ndesignation No.5. shall be designated as “Shouldered cup hook 25×No. 5”\n4.\nDimensions\n4.1 Shouldered cup, ruler and square hooks\nDimension\nDesignation 15×No.3 20×No.4 25×No.5 35×No.7 40×No.8 50×No.10 50×No12\nD(mm) 2.39 2.74 3.10 3.81 4.17 4.88 5.59\nT(mm) 4.7 6.5 8.0 12.5 14.0 17.5 20.0\n4.2 Plain Cup and Ruler Hooks\nDimension Designation 25×No.5 30×No.7 40×No.8 45×No.8 5o×No.8\nD(mm) 3.10 3.81 4.17 4.17 4.17\nT(mm) 8.0 10.0 12.0 15.0 18.0\n4.3 Plain Square hooks\nDimension Designation 20×No.4 25×No.5 30×No.6 40×No.7 50×No.9 60×No.12 75×No14\nD(mm) 2.74 3.10 3.45 3.81 4.52 5.59 6.30\nT(mm) 8.0 10.0 14.0 15.0 20.0 24.0 28.0M\n4.4 Screw eyes\nDimension\nDesignation 16×No.0 20×No.1 20×No.2 25×No.3 25×No.4 30×No.5\nD(mm) 1.52 1.78 2.08 2.39 2.74 3.10\nT(mm) 5.5 6.5 7.5 9.5 9.0 12.0 Dimension\nDesignation 30×No.6 35×No.8 40×No.10 45×No.12 50×No.14\nD(mm) 3.45 4.17 4.88 5.59 6.30\nT(mm) 11.0 12.0 12.5 15.0 19.0\nNote1–D–Nominal diameter of threaded shank.T– threaded\nlength of shank\nNote2 – For detailed dimensions, tolerances and shapes\n,refer to Tables 1 to 5 and Fig.1 to7 of the standard\n5.\nFinish – Hooks and eyes shall be finished bright."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 725: 1961",
    "title": "Copper Wire Nails",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Covers the following types of copper wire nails: a) Rose-head boat nails, square shank, square point. b) Countersunk-head boat nails, square shank, sharp square point. c) Countersunk-head boat nails, square shank, round point, d) Wrought tacks e) Cut-lath nails (Cut tacks)",
    "keywords": [
      "hook",
      "nails",
      "bolts",
      "steps",
      "square",
      "shank",
      "boat"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for hook bolts for corrugated sheet roofing.",
      "Dimensions (In Mm)": "Lengths of different types of copper nails are given in 2.1 to 2.5. Values given in brackets are the sizes of shank across flats except in case of Type (e) where it is diameter. 2.3 Type (c) – 40 (2.5), 25 (2.5) 2.4 Type (d) – 30 (2), 25 (2), 20 (2), 20 (1.6) 2.5 Type (e) – 20 (1.8), 15 (1.8), 10 (1.8), 10 (1.6)",
      "Finish": "Shall be finished bright and free from burrs and sharp edges except at the points. In case of tinned copper nails, tin coating shall cover nails completely and uniformly. 2.1 Type (a) 110 (5) 110 (4) 100(5) 100 (4) 100(3.15) 90 (5) 90 (4) 90(3.15) 80 (4.5) 80(4) 80(3.15) 80 (2.5) 70 (4) 70 (3.15) 70 (2.5) 60 (4) 60 (3.15) 60 (2.5) 60 (2) 50 (3.15) 50 (2.5) 50 (2) 45(3.15) 45 (2.5) 45 (2) 40(3.15) 40(2.5) 40(2) 35(3.15) 35(2.5) 35 (2) 30(3.15) 30 (2.5) 30 (2) 25(5) 25 (2.5) 25 (2) 25(1.6) 2.2 Type (b) 125 (5) 100 (5) 100 (4) 100 (3.15) 90(3.55) 80 (5) 80 (3.15) 70 (5) 70 (3.15) 60 (4) 60 (3.15) 50(3.55) 50(3.15) 40 (3.15) 30 (3.15) 25 (3.15) 20 (3.15) Note 1– Head diameter of side of square shall be 2.5 times the size of shank in case of Types (a), (b) and (c) and shall be 3 times the size ",
      "Types": "a) J - type hook bolts b) L - type hook bolts c) U - type hook bolts 3. Dimensions (in mm)",
      "Grades": "Product grade C according to IS : 1367 (Part 2) Technical supply conditions for thneaded steel fasteners : Part 2 product grades and toleraqnces (second revision).",
      "Mechanical Properties": "Property class 4.60 IS : For detailed information, refer to IS 730 : 1978 Specification for hook bolts for corrugated sheet roofing (second revision). 1367 (Part 3) – 1979 Technical supply conditions for thneaded steel fasteners : Part 3 mechanical properties and test methods for boths, snows and stands with full loadipility (second revision)",
      "Designation": "The hook bolts shall be designated by the type, size, length, inside width in case of L and U-type bolts) and number of the standard. For example, U hook bolt of type II with square nut of size M10, inside width 80 mm and length 180 mm shall be designated as ``U Bolt II M10 × 180N - 80 IS 730’’.",
      "General Requirements": "7.1 Hook bolts and nuts shall be surface protected with suitable coating. 7.2 The square nuts used with bolts shall conform to IS 2585 : 1968†. Type Size (Dia) Inside Width Preferred Length J-Type Hook Bolts M6 12 70 to 150 in steps of 10 (Types I and II) M8 14 70 to 200 in steps of 10 M10 16 70 to 200 in steps of 10 L-Type Hook Bolts M8 50, 60, 70 120 to 200 in steps of 10 M10 80, 95 150 to 200 in steps of 10 110 180, 190, 200, 225 U-Type Hook Bolts M8 50, 60, 80 150 to 200 in steps of 10 (Types I and II) 90 225 M10 50, 60, 80 150 to 200 in steps of 10 90 225 Note 1– All type of hook bolts are with square nuts. Note 2– For tolerances and detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 1 to 3 of the standard. Note 3– The screw threads on the hook bolts shall conform to tolerance class as specified in"
    },
    "content": "IS 725: 1961 Copper Wire Nails\n(Revised)\n1.\nScope – Covers the following types of copper wire nails: a) Rose-head boat nails, square shank, square point. b) Countersunk-head boat nails, square shank, sharp square point. c) Countersunk-head boat nails, square shank, round point, d) Wrought tacks e) Cut-lath nails (Cut tacks)\n2. Dimensions (in mm) – Lengths of different types of copper nails are given in 2.1 to 2.5. Values given in\nbrackets are the sizes of shank across flats except in case of Type (e) where it is diameter.\n2.3 Type (c) – 40 (2.5), 25 (2.5)\n2.4 Type (d) – 30 (2), 25 (2), 20 (2), 20 (1.6)\n2.5 Type (e) – 20 (1.8), 15 (1.8), 10 (1.8), 10 (1.6)\n3. Finish – Shall be finished bright and free from burrs\nand sharp edges except at the points. In case of tinned copper nails, tin coating shall cover nails completely\nand uniformly.\n2.1 Type (a)\n110 (5)\n110 (4)\n100(5)\n100 (4)\n100(3.15)\n90 (5)\n90 (4)\n90(3.15)\n80 (4.5)\n80(4)\n80(3.15)\n80 (2.5)\n70 (4)\n70 (3.15)\n70 (2.5)\n60 (4)\n60 (3.15)\n60 (2.5)\n60 (2)\n50 (3.15)\n50 (2.5)\n50 (2)\n45(3.15)\n45 (2.5)\n45 (2)\n40(3.15)\n40(2.5)\n40(2)\n35(3.15)\n35(2.5)\n35 (2)\n30(3.15)\n30 (2.5)\n30 (2)\n25(5)\n25 (2.5)\n25 (2)\n25(1.6)\n2.2 Type (b)\n125 (5) 100 (5) 100 (4) 100 (3.15) 90(3.55) 80 (5) 80 (3.15) 70 (5) 70 (3.15) 60 (4) 60 (3.15) 50(3.55) 50(3.15) 40 (3.15) 30 (3.15) 25 (3.15) 20 (3.15)\nNote 1– Head diameter of side of square shall be 2.5 times the size of shank in case of Types (a), (b) and (c) and shall be\n3 times the size of shank in case of types (d) and (e) copper nails.\nNote 2– For detailed dimensions, approximate count of copper nails and tolerances refer to 4 (Table 1) with Fig. 1 to 5\nof the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 725 : 1961 Specification for copper wire nails (revised). 1. Scope – Requirements for hook bolts for corrugated\nsheet roofing.\n2. Types – a) J - type hook bolts b) L - type hook bolts c) U - type hook bolts\n3.\nDimensions (in mm)\n4. Grade – Product grade C according to IS : 1367 (Part\n2) Technical supply conditions for thneaded steel fasteners : Part 2 product grades and toleraqnces\n(second revision).\n5. Mechanical Properties – Property class 4.60 IS :\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 730 : 1978 Specification for hook bolts for corrugated sheet roofing (second revision).\n1367 (Part 3) – 1979 Technical supply conditions for thneaded steel fasteners : Part 3 mechanical properties\nand test methods for boths, snows and stands with full loadipility (second revision)\n6. Designation – The hook bolts shall be designated\nby the type, size, length, inside width in case of L and\nU-type bolts) and number of the standard. For example,\nU hook bolt of type II with square nut of size M10, inside width 80 mm and length 180 mm shall be\ndesignated as ``U Bolt II M10 × 180N - 80 IS 730’’.\n7.\nGeneral Requirements –\n7.1 Hook bolts and nuts shall be surface protected with\nsuitable coating.\n7.2 The square nuts used with bolts shall conform to\nIS 2585 : 1968†. Type\nSize (Dia) Inside Width Preferred Length J-Type Hook Bolts M6 12 70 to 150 in steps of 10\n(Types I and II) M8 14 70 to 200 in steps of 10 M10 16 70 to 200 in steps of 10 L-Type Hook Bolts M8 50, 60, 70 120 to 200 in steps of 10 M10 80, 95 150 to 200 in steps of 10 110 180, 190, 200, 225\nU-Type Hook Bolts M8 50, 60, 80 150 to 200 in steps of 10\n(Types I and II) 90 225 M10 50, 60, 80 150 to 200 in steps of 10 90 225\nNote 1– All type of hook bolts are with square nuts.\nNote 2– For tolerances and detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 1 to 3 of the standard.\nNote 3– The screw threads on the hook bolts shall conform to tolerance class as specified in IS 4218 : (Part 4) ISO metric\nscrew threads – Part IV Tolerence systems (first revision). † Black square bolts and nuts (diameter range 6 to 39 mm) and black square screws (diameter range 6 to 24 mm) (first revision).\nNote – In regard to requirements not covered in the standard, including grade and mechanical properties refer to IS 1367\nTechnical supply conditions for threaded fasteners."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 730: 1978",
    "title": "Hook Bolts For Corrugated Sheet Roofing",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements of hexagon head coach screws (hexagon head wood screws).",
    "keywords": [
      "coach",
      "screws",
      "screw",
      "hexagon",
      "thirds",
      "preferred",
      "nearly"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of hexagon head coach screws (hexagon head wood screws). 2. Dimensions (in mm) For detailed information, refer to IS 1120 : 1975 Specification for coach screws (first revision). Size No. Diameter of Unthreaded Shank Range of Preferred Screw Length (See Note 1) Designation Nominal Max Min 10 4.88 5.00 4.72 20 - 35 14 6.33 6.43 6.05 20 - 100 18 7.72 7.85 7.47 25 - 110 24 9.86 9.98 9.00 25 - 200 28 11.28 11.40 11.02 25 - 200"
    },
    "content": "IS 730: 1978 Hook Bolts For Corrugated Sheet Roofing\n(Second Revision) Note 1– Preferred lengths – 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160,\n170, 180, 190 and 200mm.\nNote 2– Threaded portion of the screw shall nearly be equal to two-thirds times the total length of the screw.\nNote 3– For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the standard.\nNote 4– For tolerances, refer to 3 (Fig. 1) of the standard.\n1.\nScope – Requirements of hexagon head coach screws (hexagon head wood screws).\n2.\nDimensions (in mm)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1120 : 1975 Specification for coach screws (first revision).\nSize No. Diameter of Unthreaded Shank\nRange of Preferred\nScrew\nLength (See Note 1) Designation\nNominal\nMax\nMin 10 4.88\n5.00\n4.72\n20 - 35 14 6.33\n6.43\n6.05\n20 - 100 18 7.72\n7.85\n7.47\n25 - 110 24 9.86\n9.98\n9.00\n25 - 200 28 11.28 11.40 11.02\n25 - 200"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1120: 1975",
    "title": "Coach Screw",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Gives specifications for hexagon head botts with threads from M5 up to and including M64 of product grade C.",
    "keywords": [
      "coach",
      "screw",
      "hexagon",
      "threads",
      "botts",
      "preferred",
      "head"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Designation": "As an example, a hexagon head coach screw of screw No. 10, length 30 mm and made of steel, shall be designated as Coach Screw No.10 x 30 IS 1120 Steel. Note – In regard to the requirements not covered in the standard, refer to IS 451 : 1999 Technical supply conditions for wood screws (third revision).",
      "Scope": "Gives specifications for hexagon head botts with threads from M5 up to and including M64 of product grade C. 2. Dimensions M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20, M24, M30, M36, M42, M48, M56 and M64. Note – For details,of preferred and non preferred threads refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the standard."
    },
    "content": "IS 1120: 1975 Coach Screw\n(First Revision)\n3.\nDesignation — As an example, a hexagon head coach screw of screw No. 10, length 30 mm and made of\nsteel, shall be designated as Coach Screw No.10 x 30 IS\n1120 Steel.\nNote – In regard to the requirements not covered in the standard, refer to IS 451 : 1999 Technical supply conditions for wood\nscrews (third revision). 1. Scope – Gives specifications for hexagon head botts\nwith threads from M5 up to and including M64 of product grade C.\n2. Dimensions M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20,\nM24, M30, M36, M42, M48, M56 and M64.\nNote – For details,of preferred and non preferred threads\nrefer to Tables 1 and 2 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1363 (Part 1): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4016 : 1999 Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws And Nuts Of Product Grade C",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Gives specifications for hexagon head screws with threads from M5 up to and including M64 of product grade C.",
    "keywords": [
      "iso",
      "international",
      "hexagon",
      "head",
      "threads",
      "prefered",
      "property"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Specifications": "See Table 1 Note – For corresponding Indian Standards of certain International standard refer, along with their degree of equivalence, refer the National Foreward of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 1363 (Part I) : 2002 – ISO 4016 : 1999. Specification for Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grade C : Part I Heaxagon head bolts (size range M5 to M64) (fourth revision).",
      "Designation": "Example for the designation of a hexagon head bolt, with thread M12, nominal length l = 80 mm and property class 4.6 : Hexagon head bolt IS 1363 (Part I) – ISO 4016 M12 × 80 – 4.6’ TABLE 1 SPECIFICATIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS Material Steel General requirements International Standard ISO 8992 Tolerance 8g Thread International Standards ISO 724, ISO 965-1 Property class a) d≤ 39 mm : 3.6, 4.6, 4.8 Mechanical properties d > 39 mm : as agreed International Standards d ≤ 39 mm : ISO 898-1 d > 39 mm : as agreed Product grade C Tolerance International Standard ISO 4759-1 As processed Finish (1)Requirements for electroplating are covered in ISO 4042. (2)If different electroplating requirements are desired or if requirements are needed for other finishes, they should be agreed between customer a",
      "Scope": "Gives specifications for hexagon head screws with threads from M5 up to and including M64 of product grade C.",
      "Dimensions": "M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20, M24, M30, M36, M42, M48, M56 and M64. Note – For details, of preferred and non preferred threads size refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the Standard). 2.1 Prefered the neads 2.2 Non - Preferred thneads – M14, M22, M27, M33, M39, M45, M52, M60"
    },
    "content": "IS 1363 (Part 1): 2002 Iso 4016 : 1999 Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws And Nuts Of Product Grade C\nPART 1 : HEXAGON HEAD BOLTS (SIZE RANGE M5 TO M64)\n(Fourth Revision)\n2.1 Prefered threads – M5, M6 and M64\n2.2 Non - Prfered threads – M14, M18, M22, M27, M33,\nM39, M45, M52, and M60\n3. Specifications – See Table 1\nNote – For corresponding Indian Standards of certain International standard refer, along with their degree of equivalence, refer the National Foreward of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1363 (Part I) : 2002 – ISO 4016 : 1999. Specification for Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grade C : Part I Heaxagon head bolts (size range M5 to M64) (fourth revision).\n4. Designation – Example for the designation of a\nhexagon head bolt, with thread M12, nominal length l =\n80 mm and property class 4.6 : Hexagon head bolt IS\n1363 (Part I) – ISO 4016 M12 × 80 – 4.6’\nTABLE 1 SPECIFICATIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS\nMaterial\nSteel\nGeneral requirements\nInternational Standard\nISO 8992\nTolerance\n8g\nThread\nInternational Standards ISO 724, ISO 965-1\nProperty class a)\nd≤ 39 mm : 3.6, 4.6, 4.8\nMechanical properties d > 39 mm : as agreed\nInternational Standards d ≤ 39 mm : ISO 898-1\nd > 39 mm : as agreed\nProduct grade C\nTolerance\nInternational Standard ISO 4759-1\nAs processed\nFinish\n(1)Requirements for electroplating are covered in\nISO 4042. (2)If different electroplating requirements are desired or if requirements are\nneeded for other finishes, they should be agreed between customer and supplier\nAcceptability\nFor acceptance procedure see ISO 3269 a) For other property classes see ISO 898 - 1\n2) Requirement for non electrolytically applied\nzero flake coategs are covered in ISO 10683. 1. Scope – Gives specifications for hexagon head screws\nwith threads from M5 up to and including M64 of product grade C.\n2. Dimensions – M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20,\nM24, M30, M36, M42, M48, M56 and M64.\nNote – For details, of preferred and non preferred threads size refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the Standard).\n2.1 Prefered the neads\n2.2 Non - Preferred thneads – M14, M22, M27, M33,\nM39, M45, M52, M60\n3. Specifications – See Table 1"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1363 (Part 2): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4018 : 1999",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Gives specifications for hexagon nuts with thread diameters from M5 to M64 inclusive and product grade C.",
    "keywords": [
      "iso",
      "international",
      "hexagon",
      "head",
      "electroplating",
      "product",
      "thread"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Designation": "Example for the designation of a hexagon nut with thread size d=M12 and property class Note — For Corresponding Indian standards of cerain International standards referred, along with their degree of equivalence, refer, the National Foreward of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 1363 (Part 3) : 2002– ISO 4034 : 1986. Specification for hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grade C : Part 3 Hexagon nuts (size range M5 to M64) (third revision). TABLE 1 SPECIFICATIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS Material Steel General requirements International Standard ISO 8992 Tolerance 7H Thread International Standards ISO 724, ISO 965 -1 Class d ≤ M16 : 5 Mechanical properties M16 < d≤Μ 39 : 4,5 d > 39 mm : as agreed International Standards d ≤ 39 mm : ISO 898-2 d > 39 mm : as agreed ",
      "Scope": "Gives specifications for hexagon nuts with thread diameters from M5 to M64 inclusive and product grade C.",
      "Dimensions": "M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20, M24, M30, M36, M42, M48, M56 and M64."
    },
    "content": "IS 1363 (Part 2): 2002 Iso 4018 : 1999\nHEXAGON HEAD BOLTS, SCREWS & NUTS OF PRODUCT GRADE C PART 2 : HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS (SIZE RANGE M5 TO M64)\n(Fourth Revision)\n4. Designation – Example for the designation of a\nhexagon head screw with thread M12, nominal length\nNote – For corresponding Indian standards of cerain International standard referred, along with their degree of\nequivalence, refer , the National Forewrd of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1363 (Part 2) : 2002 ISO 4016 : 1999 Specification for hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grade C : Part 2 Hexagon head screws (size range M5 to M64) (fourth revision).\nTABLE 1 SPECIFICATIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS\nMaterial\nSteel\nGeneral requirements\nInternational Standard\nISO 8992\nTolerance\n8g\nThread\nInternational Standards ISO 724, ISO 965-1\nClassa)\nd ≤ 39 mm : 3.6, 4.6, 4.8\nMechanical properties d > 39 mm : as agreed\nInternational Standards d ≤ 39 mm : ISO 898-1\nd > 39 mm : as agreed\nProduct grade\nC\nTolerance\nInternational Standard ISO 4759-1\nAs processed\nFinish\n(1) Requirements for electroplating are covered in ISO 4042.(2) if different\nelectroplating requirements are desired or if requirements are needed for other finishes,\nthey should be agreed between customer and supplier. Acceptability\nFor acceptance procedure see ISO 3269 a) For other property classes see ISO 898 – 1\nl = 80 mm and property class 4.6 : Hexagon head screw\nIS 1363 (Part 2) — ISO 4018- M12 × 80 – 4.6\n2) Requirement for non electrolytically applied\nzero flake coategs are covered in ISO 10683. 1. Scope – Gives specifications for hexagon nuts with\nthread diameters from M5 to M64 inclusive and product grade C.\n2. Dimensions – M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20,\nM24, M30, M36, M42, M48, M56 and M64.\n4.\nDesignation — Example for the designation of a hexagon nut with thread size d=M12 and property class\nNote — For Corresponding Indian standards of cerain International standards referred, along with their degree of equivalence,\nrefer, the National Foreward of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1363 (Part 3) : 2002– ISO 4034 : 1986. Specification for hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grade C : Part 3 Hexagon nuts (size range M5 to M64) (third revision).\nTABLE 1 SPECIFICATIONS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS\nMaterial\nSteel\nGeneral requirements\nInternational Standard\nISO 8992\nTolerance\n7H\nThread\nInternational Standards ISO 724, ISO 965 -1\nClass d ≤ M16 : 5\nMechanical properties\nM16 < d≤Μ 39 : 4,5 d > 39 mm : as agreed\nInternational Standards d ≤ 39 mm : ISO 898-2\nd > 39 mm : as agreed\nProduct grade\nC\nTolerance\nInternational Standard ISO 4759-1\nAs processed\nFinish\nRequirements for electroplating are covered in ISO 4042\nIf different electroplating requirements are desired or if requirements are\nneeded for other finishes, they should be agreed between customer and supplier.\nAcceptability\nFor acceptance procedure see ISO 3269"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1363 (Part 3): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4034 : 1999",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Gives specifications for hexagon head bolts with threads from M1,6 up to and including M64, of product grade A for threads M1,6 to M24 and nominal lengths up to and including 10 d or 150 mm, whichever is shorter and product grade B for threads over M24 or nominal lengths over 10 d or 150 mm, whichever is shorter.",
    "keywords": [
      "threads",
      "preferred",
      "hexagon",
      "iso",
      "head",
      "shorter",
      "product"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Gives specifications for hexagon head bolts with threads from M1,6 up to and including M64, of product grade A for threads M1,6 to M24 and nominal lengths up to and including 10 d or 150 mm, whichever is shorter and product grade B for threads over M24 or nominal lengths over 10 d or 150 mm, whichever is shorter. 2. Dimensions 4. Designation : Example for the designation of a hexagon head bolt with thread M12, nominal length l = Note – For Corresponding Indian standards of cerain International standard referred, along with their degree of equivalence,refer , the National Foreward of the standard. 80 mm and property class 8.8 : Hexagon head bolt IS 1364 (Part 1) – ISO – 4014 – M12 × 80 – 8.8 2.1 Preferred threads – M1.6, M2, M2.5, M3, M4, M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20, M24, M30, M36, M42, "
    },
    "content": "IS 1363 (Part 3): 2002 Iso 4034 : 1999\nHEXAGON HEAD BOLTS, SCREWS & NUTS OF PRODUCT GRADE C\nPART 3 : HEXAGON NUTS (SIZE RANGE M5 TO M64) (Fourth Revision)\nNote —For details, of preferred and non preferred size\nrefer to Tables 1 and 2 of the Standard.\n2.1 Preferred threads\n2.2 Non – preferred threads – M14, M18, M22, M27,\nM33, M39, M45, M52, M60\n5 — Hexagon Nut ISO— 4034: M12—5\n2) Requirement for non electrolytically applied\nzero flake coategs are covered in ISO 10683. 1. Scope – Gives specifications for hexagon head bolts\nwith threads from M1,6 up to and including M64, of product grade A for threads M1,6 to M24 and nominal\nlengths up to and including 10 d or 150 mm, whichever is shorter and product grade B for threads over M24 or\nnominal lengths over 10 d or 150 mm, whichever is shorter.\n2. Dimensions\n4. Designation : Example for the designation of a\nhexagon head bolt with thread M12, nominal length l =\nNote – For Corresponding Indian standards of cerain International standard referred, along with their degree of equivalence,refer\n, the National Foreward of the standard.\n80 mm and property class 8.8 : Hexagon head bolt IS\n1364 (Part 1) – ISO – 4014 – M12 × 80 – 8.8\n2.1 Preferred threads – M1.6, M2, M2.5, M3, M4, M5,\nM6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20, M24, M30, M36, M42,\nM48, M56 and M64\nNote—For details, of preferred and non preferred threads refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the standard.\n2.2 None – Preferred threads – M 3.5, M 14, M18, M22,\nM27, M33, M39, M45, M52, M60\n3.\nSpecifications – See Table 1"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1364 (Part 1): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4014 : 1999 Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws And Nuts Of Product Grades A",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "AND B PART 1 : HEXAGON HEAD BOLTS (SIZE RANGE M1.6 TO M64) (Third Revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 1364 (Part 1) :1992. Specification for ISO 4014 : 1998. Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grades A and B – Part I – Hexagon head bolts (size range M1.6 to M64) (third revision). TABLE 1 SPECIFICATION AND REFERENCE STANDARDS Material Steel Stainless steel Non-ferrous metal General International Standard ISO 8992 requirements Thread Tolerance 6g International Standards ISO",
    "keywords": [
      "iso",
      "international",
      "electroplating",
      "agreed",
      "mmb",
      "ford",
      "hexagon"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 1364 (Part 1): 2002 Iso 4014 : 1999 Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws And Nuts Of Product Grades A\nAND B PART 1 : HEXAGON HEAD BOLTS (SIZE RANGE M1.6 TO M64)\n(Third Revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1364 (Part 1) :1992. Specification for ISO 4014 : 1998. Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grades A and B – Part I – Hexagon head bolts (size range M1.6 to M64) (third\nrevision).\nTABLE 1 SPECIFICATION AND REFERENCE STANDARDS\nMaterial\nSteel\nStainless steel\nNon-ferrous metal\nGeneral\nInternational Standard\nISO 8992\nrequirements\nThread\nTolerance\n6g\nInternational Standards\nISO 724, ISO 965-1\nMechanical\nProperty classa d < mm: as agreed\nd ≤ 24 m: A2-70, A4-70\nMaterials properties\n3 mm ≤ d ≤ 39 mm\n24 mm < d ≤ mm:\nspecified\n5.6, 8.8, 9.8, 10.9\nA2-50, A4-50\nISO 8839\nd > 39 mm: as agreed d > 39 mm: as agreed\nInternational Standard\n3 mm ≤ d ≤ 39 mm:\nd ≤ 39 mm: ISO 3506-1\nISO 898-1\nd > 39 mm: as agreed d < 3 mm and d > 39 mm:\nas agreed\nTolerance\nProduct grade Ford ≤ 24 mm and / ≤ 10 d or 150 mmb: A Ford > 24 mm or / > 10 d or 150 mmb: B\nInternational Standard\nISO 4759-1\nFinish and/or coating\nAs processed\nPlain\nPlain\nRequirements for\nRequirements for electroplating are covered in\nelectroplating are\nISO 4042\ncovered in ISO 4042\nRequirements for non-electrolytically applied\nzinc flake coating are covered in ISO 10683 If different electroplating requirements are desired or if requirements are needed for other finishes, thy should be agreed between customer and supplier.\nLimits for surface discontinuities are covered\nin ISO 6157-1 Acceptability For acceptance procedure, see ISO 3269.\na For other property classes see ISO 898-1 for steel and ISO 3506-1 for stainless steel respectively.\nb Whichever is shorter."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1364 (Part 2): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4017 : 1999",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Gives specifications for hexagon head screws with threads from M1.6 upto and including M64, of product grade A for threads M1 6 to M24 and nominal lengths up to and including 10 d or 150 mm, whichever is shorter and product grade B for threads over M24 or nominal lengths over 10 d or 150 mm, whichever is shorter.",
    "keywords": [
      "iso",
      "threads",
      "hexagon",
      "international",
      "preferred",
      "product",
      "head"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Gives specifications for hexagon nuts style 1, with thread diameters from M1.6, to M64, with product grade A for threads d ≤ M16 and product grade B for d > M16.",
      "Designation": "Example for the designation of a hexagon screw with thread size M12, nominal length l = 2.1 Prefered threads – M1.6, M2, M2.5, M3, M4, M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20, M24, M30, M36, M42, M48, M56 and M64. 2.2 Non– Preferred threads – M3.5, M14, M18, M22, M27, M33, M39, M45, M52, and M60. Note —For details, of preferred and non preferred threads refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the Standard.",
      "Specifications": "See Table 1 80 mm and property class 8.8—Hexagon head bolt IS 1364 (Part 2) — ISO 4017 — M12 x 80— 8.8 TABLE 2 SPECIFICATION AND REFERENCE STANDARDS Material Steel Stainless steel Non-ferrous metal General International Standard ISO 8992 requirements Thread Tolerance 6g International Standards ISO 724, ISO 965-1 Mechanical Property classa d < mm: as agreed d ≤ 24 m: A2-70, A4-70 Materials properties 3 mm ≤ d ≤ 39 mm 24 mm < d ≤ mm: specified 5.6, 8.8, 9.8, 10.9 A2-50, A4-50 ISO 8839 d > 39 mm: as agreed d > 39 mm: as agreed International Standard d ≤ 39 mm: ISO 898-1 d ≤ 39 mm: ISO 3506-1 d < 3 mm and d > 39 mm: d > 39 mm: as agreed as agreed Tolerance Product grade Ford ≤ 24 mm and / ≤ 10 d or 150 mmb: A Ford > 24 mm or / > 10 d or 150 mmb: B International Standard ISO 4759-1 Finish and/o",
      "Dimensions": "2.1 Threads Preferred throads –M1.6, M2, M2.5, M3, M4, M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20, M24, M30, M36, M42, M48, M56 and M64. 2.2 Non - preferred threads – M3.5, M14, M18, M22, M27, M33, M39, M45, M52, M60. Note—For details, of preferred and non preferred sizes refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the Standard."
    },
    "content": "IS 1364 (Part 2): 2002 Iso 4017 : 1999\nHEXAGON HEAD BOLTS, SCREWS & NUTS OF PRODUCT GRADE\nA & B PART 2 : HEXAGON HEAD SCREWS (SIZE RANGE 1.6 TO M64)\n(Fourth Revision)\n1.\nScope – Gives specifications for hexagon head screws with threads from M1.6 upto and including\nM64, of product grade A for threads M1 6 to M24 and nominal lengths up to and including 10 d or 150 mm,\nwhichever is shorter and product grade B for threads over M24 or nominal lengths over 10 d or 150 mm,\nwhichever is shorter.\n2.\nDimensions\nNote —For corresponding Indian standards of certain International standards referred, along with their degree of\nequivalence refer to the National foreward of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1364(Part 2) :1992— ISO 4017 : 1998. Specification for Hexagon head bolts,screw and nuts of product grades A and B - Part 2- Hexagon head screws (Size range M1.6 to M64) (third\nrevision).\n4.\nDesignation —Example for the designation of a hexagon screw with thread size M12, nominal length l =\n2.1 Prefered threads – M1.6, M2, M2.5, M3, M4, M5,\nM6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20, M24, M30, M36, M42,\nM48, M56 and M64.\n2.2 Non– Preferred threads – M3.5, M14, M18, M22,\nM27, M33, M39, M45, M52, and M60.\nNote —For details, of preferred and non preferred threads refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the Standard.\n3.\nSpecifications — See Table 1\n80 mm and property class 8.8—Hexagon head bolt IS\n1364 (Part 2) — ISO 4017 — M12 x 80— 8.8\nTABLE 2 SPECIFICATION AND REFERENCE STANDARDS\nMaterial\nSteel\nStainless steel\nNon-ferrous metal\nGeneral\nInternational Standard\nISO 8992\nrequirements\nThread\nTolerance\n6g\nInternational Standards\nISO 724, ISO 965-1\nMechanical\nProperty classa d < mm: as agreed\nd ≤ 24 m: A2-70, A4-70\nMaterials properties\n3 mm ≤ d ≤ 39 mm\n24 mm < d ≤ mm:\nspecified\n5.6, 8.8, 9.8, 10.9\nA2-50, A4-50\nISO 8839\nd > 39 mm: as agreed d > 39 mm: as agreed\nInternational Standard d ≤ 39 mm: ISO 898-1\nd ≤ 39 mm: ISO 3506-1 d < 3 mm and d > 39 mm:\nd > 39 mm: as agreed as agreed\nTolerance\nProduct grade Ford ≤ 24 mm and / ≤ 10 d or 150 mmb: A Ford > 24 mm or / > 10 d or 150 mmb: B\nInternational Standard\nISO 4759-1\nFinish and/or coating\nAs processed\nPlain\nPlain\nRequirements for\nRequirements for electroplating are covered in\nelectroplating are\nISO 4042\ncovered in ISO 4042\nRequirements for non-electrolytically applied\nzinc flake coating are covered in ISO 10683 If different electroplating requirements are desired or if requirements are needed for other finishes, thy should be agreed between customer and supplier.\nLimits for surface discontinuities are covered\nin ISO 6157-1 Acceptability For acceptance procedure, see ISO 3269.\na For other property classes see ISO 898-1 for steel and ISO 3506-1 for stainless steel respectively.\nb Whichever is shorter. 1.\nScope — Gives specifications for hexagon nuts style 1, with thread diameters from M1.6, to M64, with\nproduct grade A for threads d ≤ M16 and product grade\nB for d > M16.\n2.\nDimensions —\n2.1 Threads Preferred throads –M1.6, M2, M2.5, M3,\nM4, M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20, M24, M30,\nM36, M42, M48, M56 and M64.\n2.2 Non - preferred threads – M3.5, M14, M18, M22,\nM27, M33, M39, M45, M52, M60.\nNote—For details, of preferred and non preferred sizes refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the Standard.\n3.\nSpecifications — See Table 1"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1364 (Part 3): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4032 : 1999",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Gives specifications for chamfered hexagon thin nuts, with thread diameters from M1.6 to M64,including , with product grade A for threads d ≤ M16 and product grade B for threads d > M16.",
    "keywords": [
      "iso",
      "hexagon",
      "international",
      "nuts",
      "electroplating",
      "agreed",
      "product"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Gives specifications for chamfered hexagon thin nuts, with thread diameters from M1.6 to M64,including , with product grade A for threads d ≤ M16 and product grade B for threads d > M16.",
      "Dimensions": "2.1 Preferred threads –M1.6, M2, M2.5, M3, M4, M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20, M24, M30, M36, M42, M48, M56 and M64 2.2 Non–preferred threads – M3.5, M14, M18, M22, M2.7, M33, M39, M45, M52, M60 Note – For details, on preferred and non -preferred sizes refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the standard."
    },
    "content": "IS 1364 (Part 3): 2002 Iso 4032 : 1999\nHEXAGON HEAD BOLTS, SCREWS AND NUTS OF PRODUCT GRADES A & B\nPART 3 : HEXAGON NUTS (SIZE RANGE M1.6 TO M64)\n(Fourth Revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1364(PART 3) :1992.Specification for ISO 4032:1986 Hexagon head bolts,screw and nuts of product grades A and B— Part 3— Hexagon nuts (Size range M1.6 to M64) (third\nrevision).\n4. Designation : Example for the designation of a hexagon nut,style1, with thread size d= M12, and\nproperty class 8: Hexagon nut IS 1364(PART 3)—\nISO4032—M12 — 8\nTABLE 3 SPECIFICATION AND REFERENCE STANDARDS\nMaterial\nSteel\nStainless steel\nNon-ferrous metal\nGeneral\nInternational Standard\nISO 8992\nrequirements\nThread\nTolerance\n6H\nInternational Standards\nISO 724, ISO 965-1\nMechanical\nProperty classa d < M3: as agreed\nd ≤ M24: A2-70, A4-70\nMaterials properties\nM3 ≤ d ≤ M39: 6,8,10\nM24 < d ≤ M39:\nspecified d > M39: as agreed\nA2-50, A4-50\nISO 8839\nd > M39: as agreed\nInternational Standard\nM3 ≤ d ≤ M39: ISO 898-2 d ≤ M39: ISO 3506-2\nd < M3 and d > M39 d > M39: as agreed\nas agreed\nTolerance\nProduct grade d < M16:A d < M16: B\nInternational Standard\nISO 4759-1\nFinish and/or coating\nAs processed\nPlain\nPlain\nRequirements for\nRequirements for electroplating are covered in\nelectroplating are\nISO 4042\ncovered in ISO 4042\nRequirements for non-electrolytically applied\nzinc flake coating are covered in ISO 10683 If different electroplating requirements are desired or if requirements are needed for other finishes, thy should be agreed between customer and supplier.\nLimits for surface discontinuities are covered\nin ISO 6157-1 Acceptability For acceptance procedure, see ISO 3269.\na For other property classes see ISO 898-1 for steel and ISO 3506-1 for stainless steel respectively.\nNote —For corresponding Indian standards of certain International standards referred, along with their degree of equivalence,\nafter to the National foreward of the standard. 1.\nScope – Gives specifications for chamfered hexagon thin nuts, with thread diameters from M1.6 to\nM64,including , with product grade A for threads d ≤\nM16 and product grade B for threads d > M16.\n2.\nDimensions –\n2.1 Preferred threads –M1.6, M2, M2.5, M3, M4, M5,\nM6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20, M24, M30, M36, M42,\nM48, M56 and M64\n2.2 Non–preferred threads – M3.5, M14, M18, M22,\nM2.7, M33, M39, M45, M52, M60\nNote – For details, on preferred and non -preferred\nsizes refer to Tables 1 and 2 of the standard.\n3.\nSpecifications – See Table 1"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1364 (Part 4): 2003",
    "title": "Iso 4035 : 1999",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "HEXAGON HEAD BOLTS,SCREWS&NUTS OFPRODUCTGRADEA &B PART 4 HEXAGON THIN NUTS (CHAMFERED) (SIZE RANGE M1.6 TO M64) (Fourth Revision) Note – For corresponding Indian standards of certain International standards referred, along with their degree of equivalence, refer to National Foreward of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 1364 (Part 4):1992. - ISO 4035: 1986 hexagon head bolts, screw and nuts of product grades A and B - Part 4 – Hexagon thin nuts (chamfered) (size range M1.6 to M6",
    "keywords": [
      "iso",
      "international",
      "hexagon",
      "thin",
      "chamfered",
      "electroplating",
      "agreed"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 1364 (Part 4): 2003 Iso 4035 : 1999\nHEXAGON HEAD BOLTS,SCREWS&NUTS OFPRODUCTGRADEA &B\nPART 4 HEXAGON THIN NUTS (CHAMFERED) (SIZE RANGE M1.6 TO M64)\n(Fourth Revision)\nNote – For corresponding Indian standards of certain International standards referred, along with their degree of\nequivalence, refer to National Foreward of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1364 (Part 4):1992. - ISO 4035: 1986 hexagon head bolts, screw and nuts of product grades A and B - Part 4 – Hexagon thin nuts (chamfered) (size range M1.6 to M64) (third revision).\n4.\nDesignation : Example for the designation of a hexagon chamfered haxagon thin nut with thread size\nd= M12, and property class 05 :Hexagon thin nut IS\n1364 (Part 4) — ISO 4035— M12 — 05\nTABLE 3 SPECIFICATION AND REFERENCE STANDARDS\nMaterial\nSteel\nStainless steel\nNon-ferrous metal\nGeneral\nInternational Standard\nISO 8992\nrequirements\nThread\nTolerance\n6H\nInternational Standards\nISO 724, ISO 965-1\nMechanical\nProperty classa d < M3: as agreed\nd ≤ M24: A2-35, A4-35\nMaterials properties\nM3 ≤ d ≤ M39: 4, 5,\nM24 < d ≤ M39: A2-25 specified\nd > M39: as agreed\nA4-025\nISO 8839\nInternational Standard d ≤ M3: as agreed\nd ≤ M39: ISO 3506-2\nM3 ≤ d ≤ M39: ISO 898-2 d > M39: as agreed d > M39: as agreed\nTolerance\nProduct grade d ≤ M16:A d < M16: B\nInternational Standard\nISO 4759-1\nFinish and/or coating\nAs processed\nPlain\nPlain\nRequirements for\nRequirements for electroplating are covered in\nelectroplating are\nISO 4042\ncovered in ISO 4042\nRequirements for non-electrolytically applied\nzinc flake coating are covered in ISO 10683 If different electroplating requirements are desired or if requirements are needed for other finishes, thy should be agreed between customer and supplier.\nLimits for surface discontinuities are covered\nin ISO 6157-1 Acceptability For acceptance procedure, see ISO 3269."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1364 (Part 5): 2002",
    "title": "Iso 4036 : 1999 Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws And Nuts Of Product",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Gives specifications for hexagon thin nuts with metric dimensions and thread diameters from 1.6, up to and including 10 mm and product grade B.",
    "keywords": [
      "iso",
      "international",
      "hexagon",
      "thin",
      "unchamfered",
      "nuts",
      "metric"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Gives specifications for hexagon thin nuts with metric dimensions and thread diameters from 1.6, up to and including 10 mm and product grade B.",
      "Dimensions": "M1.6, M2, M2.5, M(3.5), M4, M5, M6, M8, M10. Note – For details see 3 of the standard",
      "Specifications": "See Table Note — For corresponding Indian standards of certain International standards referred, along with their degree of equivalence, refer to National foreward of the standard.",
      "Designation": "Example for the designation of an hexagon thin nut with metric thread d=M6 For detailed information, refer to IS 1364 (Part 5) :1992 - ISO 4036 : 1979 Hexagon head bolts,screw and nuts of product grades A and B Part 5 Hexagon thin nuts (unchamfered) (Size range M1.6 to M10) (fourth revision). made from steel with 110 HV 30.(st): Hexagon nut IS 1364 (Part 5) — ISO 4036 M6-st TABLE 4 SPECIFICATION AND REFERENCE STANDARDS Material Steel (S) Non - ferrous metal General International ISO 8992 requirments Standard Thread Tolerance 6H International ISO 724, ISO 965-1 Standards Mechanical Hardness min. 110 HV30 International Materials as specified in ISO 8839 Standard Tolerances Product grade B International ISO 4759-1 Standard As processed Plain Requirements for electroplating are covered in ISO "
    },
    "content": "IS 1364 (Part 5): 2002 Iso 4036 : 1999 Hexagon Head Bolts, Screws And Nuts Of Product\nGRADES A AND B PART 5 HEXAGON THIN NUTS\n(UNCHAMFERED) (SIZE RANGE M1.6 TO M10)\n(Third Revision)\n1.\nScope – Gives specifications for hexagon thin nuts with metric dimensions and thread diameters from 1.6,\nup to and including 10 mm and product grade B.\n2.\nDimensions – M1.6, M2, M2.5, M(3.5), M4, M5,\nM6, M8, M10.\nNote – For details see 3 of the standard\n3.\nSpecifications — See Table\nNote — For corresponding Indian standards of certain International standards referred, along with their degree of\nequivalence, refer to National foreward of the standard.\n4.\nDesignation — Example for the designation of an hexagon thin nut with metric thread d=M6\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1364 (Part 5) :1992 - ISO 4036 : 1979 Hexagon head bolts,screw and nuts of product grades A and B Part 5 Hexagon thin nuts (unchamfered) (Size range M1.6 to M10) (fourth revision).\nmade from steel with 110 HV 30.(st): Hexagon nut\nIS 1364 (Part 5) — ISO 4036 M6-st\nTABLE 4 SPECIFICATION AND REFERENCE STANDARDS\nMaterial\nSteel (S)\nNon - ferrous metal\nGeneral\nInternational ISO 8992 requirments\nStandard\nThread\nTolerance 6H\nInternational ISO 724, ISO 965-1\nStandards\nMechanical\nHardness min.\n110 HV30\nInternational\nMaterials as specified in ISO 8839\nStandard\nTolerances\nProduct grade B\nInternational ISO 4759-1\nStandard\nAs processed\nPlain Requirements for electroplating are covered in ISO 4042.\nRequirements for non-electrolytically applied zinc flake coatings are covered\nin ISO 10683. If different electroplating requirements are desired or if requirements are needed for other finishes, they should be agreed between customer and supplier.\nLimits for surface discontinuities are covered in ISO 6157- 2\nAcceptability\nFor acceptance procedure, see ISO 3269."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1365: 1978",
    "title": "Slotted Countersunk Head Screws",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements for slotted countersunk head screws in the diameter range 1 to 20 mm.",
    "keywords": [
      "countersunk",
      "slotted",
      "head",
      "screws",
      "property",
      "neads",
      "parantheses"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for slotted cheese head screws of product grade A and with the neads from M1.6 to M10.",
      "Designation": "Shall be designated by name, nominal size, length, the number of this standard and the property class. For example, a slotted countersunk head screw of size M4, length 10 mm and of property class 4.8 shall be designated as : Countersunk Screw M4 × 10 —IS 1365—4.8 For detailed information, refer to IS 1365 : 1978 Specification for slotted countersunk head screws (third revision). 4. Dimensions (in mm) Nominal Diameter Length Size Nom Max Min M1 1.9 1.90 1.76 1.10 M1.2 2.3 2.30 2.16 1.12 (M1.4) 2.6 2.60 2.46 1.14 M1.6 3.0 3.00 3.00 2.16 (M1.8) 3.4 3.40 3.10 2.18 M2 3.8 3.80 3.50 2.52 (M2.2) 4.2 4.20 3.90 2.52 M2.5 4.7 4.70 4.40 3.25 M3 5.6 5.60 5.30 4.30 (M3.5) 6.5 6.50 6.14 4.35 M4 7.5 7.50 7.14 5.40 (M4.5) 8.3 8.30 7.94 7.45 M5 9.2 9.20 8.84 7.50 M6 11 11.0 10.57 7.55 M8 14.5 14.5 14.07 9."
    },
    "content": "IS 1365: 1978 Slotted Countersunk Head Screws\n(Third Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements for slotted countersunk head screws in the diameter range 1 to 20 mm.\n2. Requirements\n2.1 Mechanical Properties – Shall conform to\nIS : 1367*. Where brass or aluminium alloy is used, it shall have minimum tensile strength of 300 MPa.\n2.2 Grade— Precision Grade (P) of IS : 1367*—\n3. Designation — Shall be designated by name, nominal size, length, the number of this standard and\nthe property class. For example, a slotted countersunk head screw of size M4, length 10 mm and of property\nclass 4.8 shall be designated as :\nCountersunk Screw M4 × 10 —IS 1365—4.8\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1365 : 1978 Specification for slotted countersunk head screws\n(third revision).\n4.\nDimensions (in mm)\nNominal Diameter Length Size\nNom Max Min\nM1 1.9 1.90 1.76 1.10\nM1.2 2.3 2.30 2.16 1.12\n(M1.4) 2.6 2.60 2.46 1.14\nM1.6 3.0 3.00 3.00 2.16\n(M1.8) 3.4 3.40 3.10 2.18\nM2 3.8 3.80 3.50 2.52\n(M2.2) 4.2 4.20 3.90 2.52\nM2.5 4.7 4.70 4.40 3.25\nM3 5.6 5.60 5.30 4.30\n(M3.5) 6.5 6.50 6.14 4.35\nM4 7.5 7.50 7.14 5.40\n(M4.5) 8.3 8.30 7.94 7.45\nM5 9.2 9.20 8.84 7.50\nM6 11 11.0 10.57 7.55\nM8 14.5 14.5 14.07 9.80\nM10 18 18.00 17.57 11.100\nM12 22 22.00 21.48 14.120\n(M14) 25 25.00 24.48 18.140\nM16 29 29.00 28.48 22.160\n(M18) 33 33.00 32.38 28.180\nM20 36 36.00 35.38 28.200\nNote 1— Sizes shown in the Parantheses are of second\npreference.\n* Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners. 1.\nScope – Requirements for slotted cheese head screws of product grade A and with the neads from\nM1.6 to M10."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1366: 2002",
    "title": "Iso 1207 - 1992 Slotted Cheese Head Screws",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "(Third Revision) 2. Dimensions – M1.6, M2, M2.5, M3, (M3.5), M4, M6, M8, M12 3. Specification – See Table 1 4. Designation – as per sheet attahced. For detailed information, refer to IS 1366 : 1982. Specification for Slotted cheese head screws (third revision). Material Steel Stainless steel Non-ferrous metal General requirements International Standard ISO 8992 Tolerance 6 g Thread International Standards ISO 261, ISO 965-2 Property class 4, 8, 5.8 A2-70, A2-50 Mechanical properties Internationa",
    "keywords": [
      "iso",
      "international",
      "electroplating",
      "areneeded",
      "attahced",
      "covered",
      "cheese"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Dimensions": "M1.6, M2, M2.5, M3, (M3.5), M4, M6, M8, M12",
      "Designation": "as per sheet attahced. For detailed information, refer to IS 1366 : 1982. Specification for Slotted cheese head screws (third revision). Material Steel Stainless steel Non-ferrous metal General requirements International Standard ISO 8992 Tolerance 6 g Thread International Standards ISO 261, ISO 965-2 Property class 4, 8, 5.8 A2-70, A2-50 Mechanical properties International Standards ISO 898-1 ISO 3506 ISO 8839 Product grade A Tolerance International Standard ISO 4759-1 Plain Requirements for electroplating are covered in ISO 4042. If different electroplating requirements are desired or if requirements Finish areneeded for other finishes, they should be agreed between customer and supplier. Limits for surface discontinuities are covered in ISO 6157-1 and ISO 6157 - 3. Acceptability Accepta"
    },
    "content": "IS 1366: 2002 Iso 1207 - 1992 Slotted Cheese Head Screws\n(Third Revision)\n2.\nDimensions – M1.6, M2, M2.5, M3, (M3.5), M4,\nM6, M8, M12\n3. Specification – See Table 1\n4. Designation – as per sheet attahced.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1366 : 1982. Specification for Slotted cheese head screws (third revision).\nMaterial\nSteel\nStainless steel\nNon-ferrous metal\nGeneral requirements\nInternational Standard\nISO 8992\nTolerance\n6 g\nThread\nInternational Standards\nISO 261, ISO 965-2\nProperty class\n4, 8, 5.8\nA2-70, A2-50\nMechanical properties\nInternational Standards\nISO 898-1\nISO 3506\nISO 8839\nProduct grade\nA\nTolerance\nInternational Standard\nISO 4759-1\nPlain\nRequirements for electroplating are covered in ISO 4042.\nIf different electroplating requirements are desired or if requirements\nFinish areneeded for other finishes, they should be agreed between customer\nand supplier.\nLimits for surface discontinuities are covered in ISO 6157-1 and ISO\n6157 - 3.\nAcceptability\nAcceptance procedure is covered in ISO 3269."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1929: 1982",
    "title": "Hot Forged Steel Rivets For Hot Closing",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements of hot forged solid mild steel and high tensile steel rivets (snap head, flat countersunk head and flat head rivets) for hot closing in the diameter range 12 to 36 mm intended for general engineering purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "rivets",
      "washers",
      "head",
      "punched",
      "diameter",
      "rivet",
      "snap"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for plain washers of the following types : a) Machined washers, for precision and semiprecision grade of general purpose bolts and screws, in diameter range 1.7 to 155 mm. b) Punched washers, Type A, for black grade general purpose bolts and screws, in diameter range 1.8 to 52 mm. c) Punched washers, Type B, for slotted head screws, in diameter range 7.8 to 22 mm. 2. Requirements 2.1 Shall be of steel, brass, aluminium or any other specified material. 2.2 The washers shall be free from cracks, burrs, pits and other defects. The holes shall be reasonably concentric with the outer periphery.",
      "Tolerances": "On length, +1.5, – 0 mm for diameter upto 16 mm and +3.0, – 0 mm for diameter above 16 mm. 4. Tests 4.1 Shear Test – Shear stength shall not be less than 260 MPa for mild steel rivets and 280 MPa for high tensile rivets. 4.2 Head Soundness Test – Rivets shall withstand the test without exhibiting any sign of cracking at the fillet between head and shank.",
      "Designation": "A washer shall be designated by name, type, size, number of the standard and material. For example, a punched washer, Type B of size 14 mm made of brass shall be designated as, Punched Washer B 14 IS 2016 — Brass’. 4. Dimensions (in mm) 4.1 Machined Washers Size External Thickness For Bolt/ (Diameter Diameter Screw Size of Hole) 1.7 4 0.3 M1.6 (2) 5 0.3 (M1.8) 2.2 5 0.3 M2 (2.4) 6 0.5 (M2.2) 2.7 6.5 0.5 M2.5 3.2 7 0.5 M3 (3.7) 8 0.8 (M3.5) 4.3 9 0.8 M4 (4.8) 10 1 (M4.5) 5.3 10 1 M5 6.4 12.5 1.6 M6 (7.4) 14 1.6 (M7) 8.4 17 1.6 M8 10.5 21 2 M10 13 24 2.5 M12 (15) 28 2.5 (M14) 17 30 3 M16 Size External Thickness For Bolt/ Screw (Diameterof Hole) Diameter Size (19) 34 3 (M18) 21 37 3 M20 (23) 39 3 (M22) 25 44 4 M24 (28) 50 4 (M27) 31 56 4 M30 (34) 60 5 (M33) 37 66 5 M36 (40) 72 6 (M39) 43 78 7"
    },
    "content": "IS 1929: 1982 Hot Forged Steel Rivets For Hot Closing\n(12 TO 36 mm DIAMETER)\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements of hot forged solid mild steel and high tensile steel rivets (snap head, flat countersunk\nhead and flat head rivets) for hot closing in the diameter range 12 to 36 mm intended for general engineering\npurposes.\n2.\nDimensions\n2.1 Range of Preferred Length Diameter Combinations\nand Diameter of Rivet Holes\nDiameter Range of Preferred Diameter of Lengths (See Note 2) Rivet Hole mm\nmm mm 12 28-80 13.5 14 32-95 15.5 16 35-110 17.5 18 40-120 19.5 20 45-125 21.5 22 50-140 23.5 24 55-160 25.5 27 65-180 29 30 70-200 32 33 85-225 35 36 95-225 38\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1929 : 1982 Specification for hot forged steel rivets for hot closing (12 to 36 mm diameter) (first revision).\nNote 1– The nominal diameters 14, 18, 22, 27 and 33\nmm are of second preference.\nNote 2 – Preferred lengths 28, 30, 32, 35, 38, 40, 45, 50,\n55,50, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 100,105, 110, 115, 120,\n125, 130, 135, 140, 145, 150, 155, 160, 165,170, 175,\n180,185, 190, 195, 200, 205, 210, 215, 220, and 225 mm.\n3.\nTolerances – On length, +1.5, – 0 mm for diameter upto 16 mm and +3.0, – 0 mm for diameter above 16 mm.\n4.\nTests\n4.1 Shear Test – Shear stength shall not be less than\n260 MPa for mild steel rivets and 280 MPa for high tensile\nrivets.\n4.2 Head Soundness Test – Rivets shall withstand the\ntest without exhibiting any sign of cracking at the fillet between head and shank.\n5.\nDesignation – As an example, a high tensile steel snap head rivet of 16 mm diameter having a length of 70\nmm shall be designated as ``Snap Head Rivet 16 × 70HT\nIS 1929”. In case of mild steel revet, the symbol `HT’ shall not be included in designation.\nNote 1–\nFor detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 1 to 3 of the standard.\nNote 2–\nFor general requirements for supply of rivets and their workmanship, limits of surface cracks on rivets, tolerances, methods of tests, refer to IS 10102 : 1982 Technical supply conditions for rivets. 1.\nScope – Requirements for plain washers of the following types : a)\nMachined washers, for precision and semiprecision grade of general\npurpose bolts and screws, in diameter range 1.7 to 155 mm. b)\nPunched washers, Type A, for black grade general purpose bolts and screws, in diameter range 1.8\nto 52 mm. c)\nPunched washers, Type B, for slotted head screws, in diameter range 7.8 to 22 mm.\n2. Requirements\n2.1 Shall be of steel, brass, aluminium or any other\nspecified material.\n2.2 The washers shall be free from cracks, burrs, pits\nand other defects. The holes shall be reasonably concentric with the outer periphery.\n3.\nDesignation —A washer shall be designated by name, type, size, number of the standard and material.\nFor example, a punched washer, Type B of size 14 mm made of brass shall be designated as, Punched Washer\nB 14 IS 2016 — Brass’.\n4. Dimensions (in mm)\n4.1 Machined Washers Size External\nThickness For Bolt/\n(Diameter Diameter Screw Size of Hole) 1.7 4 0.3 M1.6 (2) 5 0.3\n(M1.8) 2.2 5 0.3 M2 (2.4) 6 0.5\n(M2.2) 2.7 6.5 0.5 M2.5 3.2 7 0.5 M3 (3.7) 8 0.8 (M3.5) 4.3 9 0.8 M4 (4.8)\n10 1 (M4.5) 5.3\n10 1 M5 6.4 12.5 1.6 M6 (7.4) 14 1.6 (M7) 8.4 17 1.6 M8 10.5 21 2 M10 13 24 2.5 M12 (15) 28 2.5 (M14) 17 30 3 M16 Size External Thickness For Bolt/ Screw\n(Diameterof Hole) Diameter\nSize (19) 34 3\n(M18) 21 37 3 M20\n(23) 39 3\n(M22) 25 44 4 M24\n(28) 50 4\n(M27) 31 56 4 M30\n(34) 60 5 (M33) 37 66 5 M36\n(40) 72 6 (M39) 43 78 7 M42\n(46) 85 7 (M45) 50 92 8 M48\n(54) 98 8\n(M52) 58 105 9 M56 (62) 110 9 (M60) 66 115 9 M64\n(70) 120 10 (M68) 74 125 10 M72\n(78) 135 10 (M76) 82 140 12 M80\n(87) 145 12 (M85) 93 160 12 M90\n(98) 165 12\n(M95) 104 175 14 M100 (109) 180 14 (M105) 114 185 14 M110 (119) 200 14\n(M115) (124) 210 16\n(M120) 129 220 16 M125 (134) 230 16 (M130) 144 240 18 M140 (155) 250 18\n(M150)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2016: 1967",
    "title": "Plain Washers",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements of cold forged solid steel rivets for hot closing in the diameter range 6 to 16 mm, intended for general engineering purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "washers",
      "rivets",
      "rivet",
      "punched",
      "diameter",
      "head",
      "snap"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Tolerances": "+0.5 for l ≤ 10; 4. Tests 4.1 Shear Test – Shear strength shall not be less than 260 MPa. 4.2 Heat Soundness Test – Rivets shall withstand the test without exhibiting any sign of marking at the fillet between head and shank.",
      "Finish": "Plain washers shall be supplied in natural finish. At the request of purchasers, washers may be phosphate coated, nickel plated, tinned, galvanized, copper plated, cadmium plated, etc. *General requirements of plain washers and lock washers (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 2016 : 1967 Specification for Plain washers (first revision).",
      "Scope": "Requirements of cold forged solid steel rivets for hot closing in the diameter range 6 to 16 mm, intended for general engineering purposes. 2. Dimensions 2.1 Range of Preferred Length – Diameter Combinations and Diameter of Rivet Holes – Diameter Range of Preferred Diameter of Lengths (See Note 2) Rivet Hole mm mm mm 6 12-55 6.3 8 14-70 8.4 10 18-85 10.5 12 20-100 13 14 22-110 15 16 24-110 17 Note 1– The nominal diameter 14 mm is of second preference. Note 2– Preferred lengths–- 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 35, 38, 40, 42, 45, 48, 50, 55, 60, 65,70, 75, 80,85, 90, 95, 100, 105, 110 mm.",
      "Designation": "As an example, a snap head rivet of 6 mm diameter having a length of 30 mm shall be designated as Snap Head Rivet 6 × 30 IS 2155. For detailed Information, refer to IS 2155 : 1982 Specification for cold forged solid steel rivets for hot closing (6 to 16 mm diameter) (first revision). Note 1 – For detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 1 to 3 of the standard. Note 2 – For general requirements for supply of rivets and their workmanship, limits of surface cracks on rivets, tolerances, Methods of tests, refer to IS 10102 : 1982 technical supply conditions for rivets."
    },
    "content": "IS 2016: 1967 Plain Washers\n(First Revision) 4.2 Punched Washers, Type A, for Hexagonal Bolts\nand Screws (Diameter External\nThickness For Bolt/ Size of Hole) Diameter Screw 1.8\n4\n0.4\nM1.6 (2.1)\n5\n0.4\n(M1.8) 2.4\n5\n0.4\nM2 (2.6)\n6\n0.5\n(M2.2) 2.9\n6.5\n0.5\nM2.5 3.4\n7\n0.5\nM3\n(4)\n8\n0.8\n(M3.5) 4.5\n9\n0.8\nM4\n(5)\n10\n1\n(M4.5) 5.5\n10\n1\nM5 6.6\n12.5\n1.6\nM6 (7.6)\n14\n1.6\n(M7) 9\n17\n1.6\nM8 11\n21\n2\nM10 14\n24\n2.5\nM12 (16)\n28\n2.5\n(M14)\n18\n30\n3.15\nM16 (20)\n34\n3.15\n(M18)\n22\n37\n3.15\nM20 (24)\n39\n3.15\n(M22)\n26\n44\n4\nM24 (30)\n50\n4\n(M27) 33\n56\n4\nM30 (36)\n60\n5\n(M33) 39\n66\n5\nM36 (42)\n72\n6\n(M39) 45\n78\n6\nM42 (48)\n85\n8\n(M45) 52\n92\n8 M48\n4.3 Punched Washers, Type B, for Round and Cheese\nHead Screws\n(Diameter External Thickness For Bolt/ Size of Hole) Diameter Screw\n1.8\n3.5 0.4\nM1.6\n(2.1)\n3.5 0.4\n(M1.8)\n2.4\n4.5 0.4\nM2\n(2.6)\n4.5 0.4\n(M2.2)\n2.9\n5 0.5\nM2.5\n3.4\n6 0.5\nM3\n(4)\n7 0.5\n(M3.5)\n4.5\n8 0.8\nM4\n(5)\n9 0.8\n(M4.5)\n5.5\n9.5 1\nM5\n6.6\n11 1.6\nM6\n(7.6)\n13 1.6\n(M7)\n9\n14 1.6\nM8\n11\n18 2\nM10\n14\n20 2.5\nM12\n(16)\n24 2.5\n(M14)\n18\n27 3.15\nM16\n(20)\n30 3.15\n(M18)\n22\n33 3.15\nM20\nNote 1– Sizes in brackets are of second preference.\nNote 2– For detailed dimensions of machined washers,\nrefer to Table 1 of the Standard.\n5.\nTolerances – For tolerances on diameters, thickness, concentricity, permissible deviations for\nparallelism and flatness for machined and punched washers, refer to precision and ordinarywashers\nrespectively as specified in IS 5369 : 1975*.\n6.\nFinish – Plain washers shall be supplied in natural finish. At the request of purchasers, washers may be\nphosphate coated, nickel plated, tinned, galvanized, copper plated, cadmium plated, etc.\n*General requirements of plain washers and lock washers\n(first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2016 : 1967 Specification for Plain washers (first revision). 1.\nScope – Requirements of cold forged solid steel rivets for hot closing in the diameter range 6 to 16 mm,\nintended for general engineering purposes.\n2.\nDimensions\n2.1 Range of Preferred Length – Diameter\nCombinations and Diameter of Rivet Holes –\nDiameter Range of Preferred Diameter of Lengths (See Note 2) Rivet Hole mm\nmm mm 6\n12-55 6.3 8\n14-70 8.4 10\n18-85 10.5 12\n20-100 13 14\n22-110 15 16\n24-110 17\nNote 1– The nominal diameter 14 mm is of second preference.\nNote 2– Preferred lengths–- 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22, 24, 26, 28, 30, 32, 35, 38, 40, 42, 45, 48, 50, 55, 60, 65,70, 75, 80,85, 90, 95, 100, 105, 110 mm.\n3.\nTolerances –\n+0.5 for l ≤ 10;\n4.\nTests\n4.1 Shear Test – Shear strength shall not be less\nthan 260 MPa.\n4.2 Heat Soundness Test – Rivets shall withstand the\ntest without exhibiting any sign of marking at the fillet between head and shank.\n5.\nDesignation – As an example, a snap head rivet of 6 mm diameter having a length of 30 mm shall be designated\nas Snap Head Rivet 6 × 30 IS 2155.\nFor detailed Information, refer to IS 2155 : 1982 Specification for cold forged solid steel rivets for hot closing\n(6 to 16 mm diameter) (first revision).\nNote 1 – For detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 1 to 3 of the standard.\nNote 2 – For general requirements for supply of rivets and their workmanship, limits of surface cracks on rivets, tolerances,\nMethods of tests, refer to IS 10102 : 1982 technical supply conditions for rivets."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2155: 1982",
    "title": "Cold Forged Solid Steel Rivets For Hot",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements for black square bolts and nuts in the diameter range 6 to 39 mm and black square screws in the diameter range 6 to 24 mm.",
    "keywords": [
      "square",
      "bolt",
      "nut",
      "black",
      "screws",
      "bolts",
      "diameter"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for black square bolts and nuts in the diameter range 6 to 39 mm and black square screws in the diameter range 6 to 24 mm. 2. Requirements 3. Designation 2.1 Mechanical Properties – Bolts and screws shalll conform to the property class 4.6 and those for nuts to property class as specified in the prescribed standard. 2.2 Grade – Shall conform to the black grade B as specified in prescribed Fastener Thread Length Designation Size (mm) Square bolt with square nut M10 30 Square bolt M10×30N — IS 2585 Square bolt only M10 30 Square bolt M10×30 — IS 2585 Square screw M10 30 Square screw M10×30 — IS 2585 Square nut M10 - Square nut M10 — IS 2585 Square bolt with hexagon nut M10 30 Square bolt M10×30HN — IS 2585 4. Dimensions (in mm) Size Nominal Maximum Minimum Thickness Length of Le"
    },
    "content": "IS 2155: 1982 Cold Forged Solid Steel Rivets For Hot\nCLOSING (6 TO 16 mm DIAMETER)\n(First Revision) 20\n0\n5.1\n;\n20\n10\n0.1\n0\n>\n−\n+\n≤\n<\n+ l\nfor l\nfor 1.\nScope – Requirements for black square bolts and nuts in the diameter range 6 to 39 mm and black square\nscrews in the diameter range 6 to 24 mm.\n2.\nRequirements\n3.\nDesignation\n2.1 Mechanical Properties – Bolts and screws shalll\nconform to the property class 4.6 and those for nuts to property class as specified in the prescribed standard.\n2.2 Grade – Shall conform to the black grade B as\nspecified in prescribed Fastener Thread\nLength\nDesignation Size\n(mm)\nSquare bolt with square nut M10\n30 Square bolt M10×30N — IS 2585\nSquare bolt only M10\n30 Square bolt M10×30 — IS 2585\nSquare screw M10\n30 Square screw M10×30 — IS 2585\nSquare nut M10 - Square nut M10 — IS 2585\nSquare bolt with hexagon nut M10\n30 Square bolt M10×30HN — IS 2585\n4.\nDimensions (in mm)\nSize\nNominal Maximum Minimum Thickness Length of Length of\nDiameter Diameter Diameter of Head of Head Bolt*\nScrew†\nM6 6 6.48 5.7 4\n25-100\n16-40\nM8 8 8.9 7.64 5.5\n30-120\n16-50\nM10\n10\n10.9 9.64 7\n35-150\n16-60\nM12\n12\n13.1\n11.57 8\n40-300\n20-80\n(M14) 14\n15.1\n13.57 9\n45-300\n25-80\nM16\n16\n17.1\n15.57\n10\n50-300\n25-80\n(M18) 18\n19.1\n17.57\n12\n55.300\n40-80\nM20\n20\n21.5\n19.48\n13\n60-400\n45-80\n(M22) 22\n23.3\n21.48\n14\n65-400\n50-80\nM24\n24\n25.3\n23.48\n15\n70-400\n55-80\n(M27) 27\n28.3\n26.48\n17\n80-400 -\nM30\n30\n31.3\n29.48\n19\n90-400 -\n(M33) 33\n34.6\n32.38\n21 100-400 -\nM36\n36\n37.6\n35.38\n23 110-400 -\n(M39) 39\n40.6\n38.38\n25 110-400 -\nNote 1— Preferred lengths for bolts – 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160,\n170, 180, 190, 200, 220, 240, 260, 280, 300, 320, 340, 360, 380, and 400.\nNote 2— Preferred lengths for screws – 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75 and 80\nNote 3— Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference.\nNote 4— For detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 2 and 3 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2585: 1968",
    "title": "Black Square Bolts And Nuts",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements for cap nuts of product Grade A in the size range M4 to M48 with coarse pitch and fine pitch threads. For detailed information, refer to IS 2687 : 1991. Specification for cap nuts (second revision) Tolerances Product Grade A Screw Threads Tolerance 6H Material Steel Stainless Steel Non-ferrous Metal Mechanical Property <M36 : 5 <36 : Al – 50 Brass or Properties Class >M36: as agreed >M36 : as agreed Al. Alloy by purchaser by purchaser and supplier and supplier Min 300 N/mm2 As produ",
    "keywords": [
      "cap",
      "nuts",
      "range",
      "technical",
      "screws",
      "nut",
      "brass"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for cap nuts of product Grade A in the size range M4 to M48 with coarse pitch and fine pitch threads. For detailed information, refer to IS 2687 : 1991. Specification for cap nuts (second revision) Tolerances Product Grade A Screw Threads Tolerance 6H Material Steel Stainless Steel Non-ferrous Metal Mechanical Property <M36 : 5 <36 : Al – 50 Brass or Properties Class >M36: as agreed >M36 : as agreed Al. Alloy by purchaser by purchaser and supplier and supplier Min 300 N/mm2 As produced or Bright As produced electroplated Finish coatings Hot-dip galvanized coatings",
      "Dimensions": "M4, M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16, M20, M24, M30, M36, M42, and M48. Note – For details See Table 1 of the standard. 4. Designation 4.1 The Cap Nuts shall be designated by the nomenclature, thread size and number of this standard. 4.1.1 A Cap Nut of thread size M8 shall be designated as – Cap Nut IS 2687 : M8 4.2 When stainless steel, brass or aluminium alloy is used for manufacture of cap nuts, the word `Stainless Steel’, `Brass’ and `Aluminium’ shall be added at the end of the designation. Note1 – Refer to various Parts of IS 1367 Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners. Note2 – For references to corresponding Indian standards for tolerences, screw threads, mechanical properties and finish, refer to 3. 2. Technical Supply Conditions 4.2.1 A Cap Nut of thread size M10 and mad"
    },
    "content": "IS 2585: 1968 Black Square Bolts And Nuts\n(DIAMETER RANGE 6 TO 39 mm) AND BLACK SQUARE SCREWS\n(DIAMETER RANGE 6 TO 24 mm)\n(First Revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2585 : 1968 Specification for black square bolts and nuts (diameter range\n6 to 39 mm) and black square screws (diameter range 6 to 24 mm) (first revision).\n* Range of preferred lengths for bolts (bolts with lengths less than the minimum preferred lengths are to be treated as screws). † Range of preferred lengths for screws. 1.\nScope – Requirements for cap nuts of product\nGrade A in the size range M4 to M48 with coarse pitch and fine pitch threads.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2687 : 1991. Specification for cap nuts (second revision)\nTolerances Product Grade\nA\nScrew Threads Tolerance\n6H\nMaterial Steel\nStainless Steel Non-ferrous Metal\nMechanical Property <M36 : 5\n<36 : Al – 50 Brass or\nProperties Class >M36: as agreed\n>M36 : as agreed Al. Alloy by purchaser by purchaser and supplier and supplier Min 300 N/mm2 As produced or Bright As produced electroplated\nFinish coatings Hot-dip galvanized coatings\n3. Dimensions – M4, M5, M6, M8, M10, M12, M16,\nM20, M24, M30, M36, M42, and M48.\nNote – For details See Table 1 of the standard.\n4.\nDesignation\n4.1 The Cap Nuts shall be designated by the\nnomenclature, thread size and number of this standard.\n4.1.1 A Cap Nut of thread size M8 shall be designated as – Cap Nut IS 2687 : M8\n4.2 When stainless steel, brass or aluminium alloy is\nused for manufacture of cap nuts, the word `Stainless\nSteel’, `Brass’ and `Aluminium’ shall be added at the end of the designation.\nNote1 – Refer to various Parts of IS 1367 Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners.\nNote2 – For references to corresponding Indian standards for tolerences, screw threads, mechanical properties and finish, refer to\n3.\n2.\nTechnical Supply Conditions\n4.2.1\nA Cap Nut of thread size M10 and made of brass shall be designated as—Cap Nut IS 2687: M10 Brass\n5. General Requirements\n5.1 With respect to surface discontinuities, the cap\nnuts shall conform to IS 1367 (Part 10) : 1979.*\n5.2 In respect of requirement not covered in this\nstandard, the nuts shall conform to IS 1367 (Part 1) :\n1980.\n* Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners –\nPart 10: Suface dis continuities – Nuts (third revision) † Technical supply ...... Part 1: General requirements for botts, screws and stands (third revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2687: 1991",
    "title": "Cap Nuts",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "(Second Revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "cap",
      "nuts"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 2687: 1991 Cap Nuts\n(Second Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2907: 1998",
    "title": "Non-Ferrous Rivets (1.6 To 10 Mm)",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements of copper, tinned copper, brass and aluminium rivets in the diameter range of 1mm to 10mm, intended for general engineering purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "rivets",
      "head",
      "rivet",
      "countersunk",
      "snap",
      "vpm",
      "grade"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of cold forged rivets, for cold closing in the diameter range 1 to 16 mm, intended for general engineering purposes. 2. Material a) Grade 1 – Steel Class 1A, and b) Grade 2 – Steel 10C4 of prescribed standards. 3. Dimensions 3.1 Range of Preferred Length – Diameter Combinations and Diameter of Rivet Holes Diameter Range of Preferred Diameter of Lengths (See Note 2) Rivet Hole mm mm mm 1 3-6 1.05 1.2 4-7 1.25 1.4 4-8 1.45 1.6 5-10 1.65 2 6-12 2.1 2.5 6-16 2.6 3 6-35 3.1 3.5 7-40 3.6 4 8-45 4.2 5 10-45 5.3 6 12-55 6.3 7 14-65 7.3 8 14-70 8.4 10 18-85 10.5 12 20-100 13 14 22-110 15 16 24-110 17 4. Tolerances 5. Tests 5.1 Shear Test – Minimum shear strength shall be 230 MPa for Grade 1 and 200 MPa for Grade 2. 5.2 Hardness Test – Hardness on the head of rivet shall be for – Grade ",
      "Dimensions A) Snap Head Rivets": "Nominal sizes 1, 1.6, 2, 2.5, 3, 4.0, 5, 6, 8 and 10 mm. b) Flat Counter sink head – (90º and 120 º) rivets Nomininal sizes 1,1.6, 2, 2.5, 3, 4.0, 5, 6, 8 and 10 mm. c) Flat head rivets – Nominal sizes 1,1.6, 2, 2.5, 3, 4.0, 5, 6, 8 and 10 mm Note 1– For detailed dimensions refer to Table 1 to 3 of the standard. Note 2 – For preferred diameter-length combinations refer to Table 4 of the standard.",
      "Designation": "As an example, a countersunk head rivet, with a countersunk angle of 900, diameter 4 mm, length 24 mm and made from material Grade 2 shall be designated as Countersunk Head (900) Rivet 4x24 Grade 2 IS 2998.",
      "Manufacture": "Shall be made by cold forging and shall subseqnently be appropriately head treated, if necessary. 5. Tests 5.1 Heat Soundness Test – Shall withstand the prescribed test without exhibiting any sign of cracking at the filled between head and the shank. 6. General Requirement 6.1 In respect of requirements not covered in this standard, the rivets shall conform to IS 10102 : 1982* 6.2 Limits of Surface cracks on rivets shall be in Technical suply conditino for rivels accordance with IS 10102 : 1982*."
    },
    "content": "IS 2907: 1998 Non-Ferrous Rivets (1.6 To 10 Mm)\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements of copper, tinned copper, brass and aluminium rivets in the diameter range of 1mm to\n10mm, intended for general engineering purposes.\n2.\nDimensions a) Snap head rivets— Nominal sizes 1, 1.6, 2, 2.5, 3, 4.0, 5, 6, 8 and 10 mm. b) Flat Counter sink head – (90º and 120 º) rivets\nNomininal sizes 1,1.6, 2, 2.5, 3, 4.0, 5, 6, 8 and 10 mm. c) Flat head rivets – Nominal sizes 1,1.6, 2, 2.5, 3,\n4.0, 5, 6, 8 and 10 mm\nNote 1– For detailed dimensions refer to Table 1 to 3 of the\nstandard.\nNote 2 – For preferred diameter-length combinations refer\nto Table 4 of the standard.\n3. Designation – Shall be designated by type head,\nnominal diameter, length, material and number of this standard. In case of countersunk head rivets. A\n.\nNote *– For method of test refer to IS 10102 : 1982 Technical supply condition for rivets.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2907 : 1998 Specification for non-ferrous rivets (1.6 to 10 mm) (first revision).\ncountersunk angle (90º or 120º) shall be included in the designation.\nExample — A snap head rivet of 6 mm nominal diameter, having length of 30 mm and made of copper, shall be\ndesignated as snap head rivet 6 × 30 IS 2907 Copper.\n4.\nManufacture – Shall be made by cold forging and shall subseqnently be appropriately head treated, if\nnecessary.\n5.\nTests\n5.1 Heat Soundness Test – Shall withstand the\nprescribed test without exhibiting any sign of cracking at the filled between head and the shank.\n6.\nGeneral Requirement\n6.1 In respect of requirements not covered in this\nstandard, the rivets shall conform to IS 10102 : 1982*\n6.2 Limits of Surface cracks on rivets shall be in\nTechnical suply conditino for rivels accordance with IS\n10102 : 1982*. 1.\nScope – Requirements of cold forged rivets, for cold closing in the diameter range 1 to 16 mm, intended for\ngeneral engineering purposes.\n2.\nMaterial a) Grade 1 – Steel Class 1A, and b) Grade 2 – Steel 10C4 of prescribed standards.\n3. Dimensions\n3.1 Range of Preferred Length – Diameter\nCombinations and Diameter of Rivet Holes\nDiameter Range of Preferred Diameter of Lengths (See Note 2) Rivet Hole mm mm mm 1 3-6 1.05 1.2 4-7 1.25 1.4 4-8 1.45 1.6 5-10 1.65 2 6-12 2.1 2.5 6-16 2.6 3 6-35 3.1 3.5 7-40 3.6 4 8-45 4.2 5 10-45 5.3 6 12-55 6.3 7 14-65 7.3 8 14-70 8.4 10 18-85 10.5 12 20-100 13 14 22-110 15 16 24-110 17\n4.\nTolerances\n5. Tests\n5.1 Shear Test – Minimum shear strength shall be 230\nMPa for Grade 1 and 200 MPa for Grade 2.\n5.2 Hardness Test – Hardness on the head of rivet\nshall be for –\nGrade 1 – 56 to 78 HRB (100 – 139 VPM) Grade 2 – 48 to 73 HRB (91– 127 VPM)\n5.3 Head Soundness Test – Rivets shall withstand the\ntest without exhibiting any sign of cracking at the fillet between head and shank.\n6.\nDesignation – As an example, a countersunk head rivet, with a countersunk angle of 900, diameter 4 mm,\nlength 24 mm and made from material Grade 2 shall be designated as Countersunk Head (900) Rivet 4x24 Grade\n2 IS 2998."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2998: 1982",
    "title": "Cold Forged Steel Rivets For Cold",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "CLOSING (1 TO 16 MM DIAMETER) (First Revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 2998 : 1982 Specification for cold forged steel rivets for cold closing (1 to 16 mm diameter) (first revision). Note 1– For detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 1 to 4 of the standard. Note 2– For general requirements for supply of rivets and their workmanship, limits of surface crack on rivets, tolerances, refer to",
    "keywords": [
      "rivets",
      "closing",
      "cold",
      "forged",
      "crack",
      "limits",
      "supply"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 2998: 1982 Cold Forged Steel Rivets For Cold\nCLOSING (1 TO 16 MM DIAMETER)\n(First Revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2998 : 1982 Specification for cold forged steel rivets for cold closing (1 to\n16 mm diameter) (first revision).\nNote 1– For detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 1 to 4 of the standard.\nNote 2– For general requirements for supply of rivets and their workmanship, limits of surface crack on rivets, tolerances, refer to"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10102: 1982",
    "title": "Technical Supply Conditions Of Rivets.",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Note 3 – For methods of tests, refer to IS 1500 : 1983 Method for Brinell hardness test for Metallic material (second revision) and",
    "keywords": [
      "brinell",
      "metallic",
      "hardness",
      "material"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 10102: 1982 Technical Supply Conditions Of Rivets.\nNote 3 – For methods of tests, refer to IS 1500 : 1983 Method for Brinell hardness test for Metallic material (second revision) and"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3063: 1994",
    "title": "Fasteners-Single Coil Rectangular Section Spring Lock Washers",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements for single coil rectangular section spring lock washers suitable for use with bolt/ nut assemblies involving fasteners of property class 5.8 or less in the size range 2 to 100 mm.",
    "keywords": [
      "washers",
      "spring",
      "lock",
      "phosphate",
      "washer",
      "marks",
      "plated"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for single coil rectangular section spring lock washers suitable for use with bolt/ nut assemblies involving fasteners of property class 5.8 or less in the size range 2 to 100 mm. 2. Types Type A – Spring lock washers with bent (deflected or tong ) ends Type B – Spring lock washers with flat (square ends)",
      "Dimensions": "Nominal sizes 2, 2.2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 20, 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64, 68, 72, 80, 90 and 100 mm. Nominal sizes of non-prefered sizes are 3.5 ,7,14, 18, 22, 27, 33, 39 and 45 mm. Note —For detailed dimensions and tolerances refer to Table 1A and 1B of the standard.",
      "Materials": "The spring lock washers shall be made from suitable steel according to IS 4072 : 1975 * to meet the requirements specified",
      "Finish": "Natural – May be phosphate coated, nickel plated, electro-galvanized, copper plated or cadmium plated if specified.",
      "Designation": "The spring lock washers shall be designated by the nomenclature, type, nominal size, the number of this standard and the surface protection, if any. Example – A spring lock washer of nominal size 10 mm, Type A and with phosphate coating shall be designated as follows : Spring Lock Washers A 10 - IS 3063 Phosphate coated * Steel spring washers (first revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 3063 : 1994 Specification for fasteners-single coil rectangular section spring lock washers (second revision). Note 1– For test detailed, refer to 11 of the standard. Note 2– For spring force test,refer to Annex A of the standard. 6.1 In case the spring washer is intended for use with LH thread, the designation shall be modified as follows: Spring Lock Washer LH-A 10 IS 3063 Phosphate coated 7. G"
    },
    "content": "IS 3063: 1994 Fasteners-Single Coil Rectangular Section Spring Lock Washers\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements for single coil rectangular section spring lock washers suitable for use with bolt/\nnut assemblies involving fasteners of property class 5.8 or less in the size range 2 to 100 mm.\n2.\nTypes\nType A – Spring lock washers with bent (deflected or tong ) ends\nType B – Spring lock washers with flat (square ends)\n3.\nDimensions – Nominal sizes 2, 2.2, 2.5, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8,\n10, 12, 16, 20, 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, 52, 56, 60, 64, 68, 72, 80, 90 and 100 mm.\nNominal sizes of non-prefered sizes are 3.5 ,7,14, 18, 22,\n27, 33, 39 and 45 mm.\nNote —For detailed dimensions and tolerances refer to\nTable 1A and 1B of the standard.\n4.\nMaterial — The spring lock washers shall be made from suitable steel according to IS 4072 : 1975 * to meet\nthe requirements specified\n5.\nFinish— Natural – May be phosphate coated, nickel plated, electro-galvanized, copper plated or\ncadmium plated if specified.\n6.\nDesignation – The spring lock washers shall be designated by the nomenclature, type, nominal size, the\nnumber of this standard and the surface protection, if any.\nExample – A spring lock washer of nominal size 10 mm,\nType A and with phosphate coating shall be designated as follows : Spring Lock Washers A 10 - IS 3063\nPhosphate coated\n* Steel spring washers (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3063 : 1994 Specification for fasteners-single coil rectangular section spring lock washers (second revision).\nNote 1– For test detailed, refer to 11 of the standard.\nNote 2– For spring force test,refer to Annex A of the standard.\n6.1 In case the spring washer is intended for use with\nLH thread, the designation shall be modified as follows:\nSpring Lock Washer LH-A 10 IS 3063 Phosphate coated\n7.\nGeneral Requirements\n7.1 The flat faces of washers and the inner and outer\nperipheries shall be smooth and free from knurling, serrations, die-marks, deep scratches, etc, although\nslight feed roll marks shall be permissible.\n7.2 Washers shall also be free from burrs, rust, pit\nmarks, loose scale and defects that might affect their serviceability.\n7.3 The clearances and angles of the cut ends shall be\nin such degree so that the washers do not cause lapping when they are completely compressed and shall not be\nliable to tangle or link together when in the free condition.\n8.\nTests\n8.1 Hardness Test – Shall be HV 430 to 530\n8.2 Permanent Set Test — Free height of washers after\nrelease of load shall not be less than the values specified in Table 2A and 2B of the standard.\n8.3 Permanent Load Test – Shall not crack or fracture.\n8.4 Twist Test – The washer shall show no sign of\nfracture."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3121: 1981",
    "title": "Rigging Screws And Stretching Screws",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements regarding materials, components, dimensions, finishing and tests for rigging screws and stretching screws (double-ended and singleended) of the following nominal size : a) Rigging screws – M12 to M90 b) Stretching screws – M6 to M52",
    "keywords": [
      "stretching",
      "eye",
      "rigging",
      "screw",
      "screwed",
      "screws",
      "pipe"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for pipe nuts in the size range G 1/8 to G6. 2. Specifications",
      "Dimensions": "Thread sizes 4 1 G , 8 3 G , 2 1 G , 8 5 G , 4 3 G , 8 7 G ,G1, ) 8 1 1 G ( , ) 4 1 1 G ( ) 2 1 1 G ( , ) 4 3 1 G ( , G2, ) 4 1 2 G ( , ) 2 1 2 G ( , G3, G4, G5 and G6. Note 1 – For detailed dimension see Table 1 of the standard. Note 2 – Sizes shown within braclcets are of second preference. 3. Designation 3.1 The pipe nuts shall be designated by nomenclature, thread size and number of this standard. 3.1.1 A pipe nut of thread size G6 shall be designated as— Pipe Nut G 6 – IS 3468 3.2 When the pipe nuts are manufactured from stainless steel or brass, the word `stainless steel’ or `Brass’ shall be added at the end of the designation. 3.2.1 A pipe nut of thread size G 3/8 and made from brass shall be designated as – Pipe Nut G 3/8 – IS 3468-Brass * Technical supply conditions for threaded s"
    },
    "content": "IS 3121: 1981 Rigging Screws And Stretching Screws\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements regarding materials, components, dimensions, finishing and tests for rigging\nscrews and stretching screws (double-ended and singleended) of the following nominal size : a) Rigging screws\n– M12 to M90 b) Stretching screws – M6 to M52\n2.\nDimensions\n2.1 Rigging Screws (With Screwed Eye at Both Ends):\nNom. Siz Length Proof\n(Dia of Load\nScrew) Closed/mm Open/ mm kN\nM12 330 525\n10.0\nM16 370 550\n18.0\nM20 400 570\n28.0\nM24 475 700\n36.0\nM27 550 825\n44.0\nM30 550 825\n63.0\nM33 600 875\n75.0\nM36 600 875\n86.0\nM39 660 960\n100.0\nM45 700 960\n112.0\nM52 750 1 000\n144.0\nM56 775 1 025\n194.0\nM60 800 1 050\n214.0\nM64 1 070 1 450\n286.0\nM68 1 120 1 590\n342.0\nM75 1 270 1 700\n400.0\nM80 1 360 1 760\n500.0\nM90 1 440 1 860\n624.0\n2.2 Stretching Screws\nNominal SizeLoad Body Length Proof\n(Dia of Screw) mm kN\nM6\n100 2.0\nM8\n125 3.0\nM10\n160 6.0\nM12\n200 9.0\nM14\n225\n12.0\nM16\n250\n15.2\nM20\n315\n22.4\nM22\n355\n32.4\nM24\n400\n40.0\nM30\n450\n63.0\nM36\n450\n90.0\nM45\n450 142.0\nM52\n450 190.0\nNote 1— Safe working load = 1/2 proof load\nNote 2– Tolerance ±5 percent on all dimensions\nNote 3– For detailed dimensions and shapes of riggings crews,\ntubular body, screwed eye, screwed fork, screwed stud eye and stretching screws (open body, screw eyes and\nswivel eye), refer to Tables 1 to 6 of the Standard.\n3.\nRequirements\n3.1 Galvanizing – All components of assembled\nstretching screw shall be galvanized as per\nIS 4759 : 1996\nAll screw threads shall be `brush’ or `spun’ galvanized.\n3.2 Workmanship\n3.2.1\nRigging screw – The tubular body shall be neatly and clearly made and finished. The screwed eye,\nscrewed fork and screwed stud eye shall be cleanly forged and finished. The thimble, when in place in the\nfork, shall be capable of free movement.\n3.2.2\nStretching screw – The body, the screw eye and the swivel eye shall be solid forging without weld, neatly\nand cleanly made and finished.\n3.2.3\nEach component of the completed rigging screw or stretching screw shall be free from any visible flaw or\ndefect.\n4.\nTests\n4.1 Proof Testing – Each screw shall withstand the\nproof load without any sign of defect.\n4.2 Tests for Galvanizing : Shall be tested in accordance\nwith IS 2633 : 1986+ and IS 6745 : 1972+ if specified.\n* Methods of testing uniformity of coating on fine coated articles (second revision).\n+ Methods for determination of weight of zinc coating on zinc coated iron and steel articles.\n* Hot dip zinc coatings on structural steel and other allied products (third revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3121 : 1981 Specification for ringging screws and stretching screws\n(first revision). Product grade\nB Tolerances\nIndian Standard IS 1367 (Part 2) : 1979 *\nType\n: Pipe threads Threads\nIndian Standard IS 2643 Material Steel\nStainles Steel Brass Minimum Mechanical\nProperty Class 14 H A2-50 tensile strength 300 MPa properties\nIndian Standard IS 1367(Part 7)\nIS 1367(Part 14)+ 1. Scope – Requirements for pipe nuts in the size range\nG 1/8 to G6. 2. Specifications 3. Dimensions—Thread sizes\n4\n1\nG\n,\n8\n3\nG\n,\n2\n1\nG\n,\n8\n5\nG\n,\n4\n3\nG\n,\n8\n7\nG\n,G1,\n)\n8\n1\n1\nG\n(\n,\n)\n4\n1\n1\nG\n( )\n2\n1\n1\nG\n(\n,\n)\n4\n3\n1\nG\n(\n, G2,\n)\n4\n1\n2\nG\n(\n,\n)\n2\n1\n2\nG\n(\n, G3, G4,\nG5\nand G6.\nNote 1 – For detailed dimension see Table 1 of the standard.\nNote 2 – Sizes shown within braclcets are of second preference.\n3. Designation\n3.1 The pipe nuts shall be designated by\nnomenclature, thread size and number of this standard.\n3.1.1 A pipe nut of thread size G6 shall be designated as— Pipe Nut G 6 – IS 3468\n3.2 When the pipe nuts are manufactured from\nstainless steel or brass, the word `stainless steel’ or\n`Brass’ shall be added at the end of the designation. 3.2.1 A pipe nut of thread size G 3/8 and made from brass shall be designated as\n– Pipe Nut G 3/8 – IS 3468-Brass\n* Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners\n(Various Parts)\n+ Dimension, tolerances and designatino for pipe threads where pressure – tight joints are not made on the threads.\n+ As per sheet attached † As per sheet attached 4. General Requirements 4.1 With respect to surface discontinuities, the pipe\nnuts shall conform to IS 1367 (Part 10). 4.2 In respect of requirements not covered in this\nstandard, the nuts shall conform to IS 1367 (Part 1) :\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3468 : 1991 Specification for pipe nuts (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3468: 1991",
    "title": "Pipe Nuts",
    "category": "Sanitary Appliances and Water Fittings",
    "summary": "(Second Revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "pipe",
      "nuts"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 3468: 1991 Pipe Nuts\n(Second Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3757: 1985",
    "title": "High Strength Structural Bolts",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements for large series hexagon, high strength structural steel bolts in property classes 8.8 and 10.9 and in the size range M16 to M36 with short thread lengths suitable for use in both friction-type and bearing-type structural steel joints. Bolts to this standard when matched with the appropriate nuts have been designed to provide an assembly with a high level of assurance against failure by thread stripping on overtightening. Note – Attention is drawn to the importance of ensuring that ",
    "keywords": [
      "bolts",
      "thread",
      "tolerence",
      "property",
      "structural",
      "dip",
      "regard"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for large series hexagon, high strength structural steel bolts in property classes 8.8 and 10.9 and in the size range M16 to M36 with short thread lengths suitable for use in both friction-type and bearing-type structural steel joints. Bolts to this standard when matched with the appropriate nuts have been designed to provide an assembly with a high level of assurance against failure by thread stripping on overtightening. Note – Attention is drawn to the importance of ensuring that the bolts are correctly used if satisfactory results are to be obtained. 2. Dimensions and Tolerence 2.1 Thread sizes shall be M16, M20, (M22), M24, (M27), M30 and M36. Note 1 – For detailed dimensions refer to Table 1of the standard. Note 2 – Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference. 2.2 Re",
      "Grades": "The bolts shall be of product grade C as specified in IS 1367(Part 2) *",
      "Mechanical Properties": "The bolts shall as specified in prescribed standard.",
      "Finish": "Shall be in dull black heat treated condition with a residual coating of light oil. Where property class 8.8 bolts are required to be hot dip galbanized they shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of IS 1367(Part13) + Note – Bolts of property class 10.9 should not be hot dip galvanized since this may cause hydrogen embritlement. 6 General Requirements 6.1 In regard to permissible surface discontinuities, the bolts shall conform to prescribed standards. 6.2 In regard to requirements not covered in the standard, tbe bolts shall conform to IS 1367(Part I)+ * ISO Metric screw thread * As per sheet + Attahced + For commercial bolts and nuts (diameter range 1 to 52 mm) (first revision)"
    },
    "content": "IS 3757: 1985 High Strength Structural Bolts\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements for large series hexagon, high strength structural steel bolts in property classes 8.8\nand 10.9 and in the size range M16 to M36 with short thread lengths suitable for use in both friction-type and\nbearing-type structural steel joints. Bolts to this standard when matched with the appropriate nuts have been\ndesigned to provide an assembly with a high level of assurance against failure by thread stripping on\novertightening.\nNote – Attention is drawn to the importance of ensuring\nthat the bolts are correctly used if satisfactory results are to be obtained.\n2.\nDimensions and Tolerence\n2.1 Thread sizes shall be M16, M20, (M22), M24, (M27),\nM30 and M36.\nNote 1 – For detailed dimensions refer to Table 1of the\nstandard.\nNote 2 – Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference.\n2.2 Recommended length size combinations shall be\nas given in Table 2 of the standard.\n2.3 Threads shall conform to tolerence class 6g of IS\n4218 (Part 6) *\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3757 : 1985 Specification for high strength structural bolts (second revision).\n3.\nGrade – The bolts shall be of product grade C as specified in IS 1367(Part 2) *\n4.\nMechanical Properties –The bolts shall as specified in prescribed standard.\n5.\nFinish – Shall be in dull black heat treated condition with a residual coating of light oil.\nWhere property class 8.8 bolts are required to be hot dip galbanized they shall be galvanized in accordance with\nthe requirements of IS 1367(Part13) +\nNote – Bolts of property class 10.9 should not be hot dip\ngalvanized since this may cause hydrogen embritlement.\n6\nGeneral Requirements\n6.1 In regard to permissible surface discontinuities, the\nbolts shall conform to prescribed standards.\n6.2 In regard to requirements not covered in the\nstandard, tbe bolts shall conform to IS 1367(Part I)+ * ISO Metric screw thread\n* As per sheet\n+ Attahced\n+ For commercial bolts and nuts (diameter range 1 to 52 mm)\n(first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4762: 1984",
    "title": "Worm Drive Clamps For General Purpose",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements for worm drive hose clamps for general purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "clamp",
      "hose",
      "clamps",
      "torque",
      "band",
      "tightened",
      "turning"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for worm drive hose clamps for general purposes.",
      "Sizes": "12, 16, 20, 22, 25,28, 30, 35, 38, 40, 45, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100, 110, 115, 120, 130, 140, 145, 150 and",
      "General": "For detailed dimensions refer to Table 1 of the standard.",
      "Materials": "Shall be selected at the manufacturer’s discretion provided that the finished clamps meet the test requirements. 4. Manufacture 4.1 Screw – Shall be held captive in the clamp housing 4.2 Band – Shall have a thread form commencing at the free end and extending for a length sufficent to enable the clamp to be tightened on to the smallest diameter of component within the working range for which it is designed. 4.3 Housing – Shall be readily removable from the band.",
      "Designation": "Shall be designated by nomenclature, size and number of this standard. 5.1 A hose clamp of size 25 mm shall be designated as – Hose clamp 25 – IS 4762. 6. General Requirements 6.1 When the loop is formed, the screw shall be held firmly in engagement with the band during tightening and the clamp shall be capable of being decreased in diameter by turning the screw in clockwise direction and increased in diameter by turning the screw in anti- clockwise direction. 6.2 After expanding until the band is disconnected from the screw, it shall be to open clamps of size 35 and above to provide a gap equal to the largest diameter of the hose for which the clamp is designed and to permit easy fitting and removal of the clamp by passing the clamp over the hose in position without disturbing any connect",
      "Finish": "Shall be smooth and free from burrs and sharp edges. Clamps other than those manufactured from corrosion-resistant materials shall be protected against corrosion by electroplating as specified. 8. Tests 8.1 Free Turning Toque Test – Shall be conducted to ensure smooth action of the lubricated clamp in its freeturning state. 8.2 Torque Test — Shall reveal no sign of permanent distortion of the housing nor damage determental to the efficient functioning of the clamp when tightened to 75 percent of torque load specified. Also, the torque load at premanent distortion or failure shall be in excess of the appropriate value specified. 8.3 Fatique Torque Loading Test – These shall be no distortion or permanent deformation of the clamp as a whole when tested as prescribed. 8.4 Hydraulic Pressure Te"
    },
    "content": "IS 4762: 1984 Worm Drive Clamps For General Purpose\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements for worm drive hose clamps for general purposes.\n2.\nSize – 12, 16, 20, 22, 25,28, 30, 35, 38, 40, 45, 55, 60,\n65, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100, 110, 115, 120, 130, 140, 145, 150 and\n160.\nNote —For detailed dimensions refer to Table 1 of the standard.\n3. Materials – Shall be selected at the manufacturer’s\ndiscretion provided that the finished clamps meet the test requirements.\n4.\nManufacture\n4.1 Screw – Shall be held captive in the clamp housing\n4.2 Band – Shall have a thread form commencing at the\nfree end and extending for a length sufficent to enable the clamp to be tightened on to the smallest diameter of\ncomponent within the working range for which it is designed.\n4.3 Housing – Shall be readily removable from the band.\n5.\nDesignation – Shall be designated by nomenclature, size and number of this standard.\n5.1 A hose clamp of size 25 mm shall be designated as\n– Hose clamp 25 – IS 4762.\n6.\nGeneral Requirements\n6.1 When the loop is formed, the screw shall be held\nfirmly in engagement with the band during tightening and the clamp shall be capable of being decreased in\ndiameter by turning the screw in clockwise direction and increased in diameter by turning the screw in anti-\nclockwise direction.\n6.2 After expanding until the band is disconnected\nfrom the screw, it shall be to open clamps of size 35 and above to provide a gap equal to the largest diameter of\nthe hose for which the clamp is designed and to permit easy fitting and removal of the clamp by passing the\nclamp over the hose in position without disturbing any connections.\n6.3 The clamp shall be so designed that when tightened\non the hose, it shall remain positively secured in position without the need for any additional locking device and\nin firm engagement with the hose on which it is fitted.\n7.\nFinish – Shall be smooth and free from burrs and sharp edges. Clamps other than those manufactured from\ncorrosion-resistant materials shall be protected against corrosion by electroplating as specified.\n8. Tests\n8.1 Free Turning Toque Test – Shall be conducted to\nensure smooth action of the lubricated clamp in its freeturning state.\n8.2 Torque Test — Shall reveal no sign of permanent\ndistortion of the housing nor damage determental to the efficient functioning of the clamp when tightened to 75\npercent of torque load specified. Also, the torque load at premanent distortion or failure shall be in excess of\nthe appropriate value specified.\n8.3 Fatique Torque Loading Test – These shall be no\ndistortion or permanent deformation of the clamp as a whole when tested as prescribed.\n8.4 Hydraulic Pressure Test – At leakage or other failure,\nthe pressure shall not be less than the appropriate value specified.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4762 : 1984 Specification for worm drive clamps for general purposes (first revision).\nNote— For methods of tests, refer to Table 1 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5369: 1975",
    "title": "General Requirements For Plain Washers And Lock Washers",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "General requirements and permissible deviation for plain washers, lock washers and similar parts.",
    "keywords": [
      "washers",
      "taper",
      "ismc",
      "precision",
      "lock",
      "ordinary",
      "channels"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for taper washers for use with Indian Standard Medium Weight Channels (ISMC) with bolts in diameter range of 10 to 39 mm. 2. Dimensions (in mm) Nominal L × B Thickness For Bolt Size (See Note 1) Size (Diameter Thin Thick of Hole) End End 11 22 × 22 2 4.3 M10 14 26 × 30 2.5 5.7 M12 18 32 × 36 3 6.8 M16 22 40 × 44 3.5 8.1 M20 (24) 44 × 50 4 9.2 (M22) 26 56 × 56 4 9.9 M24 (30) 56 × 56 4 9.9 (M27) 33 62 × 62 4 10.5 M30 (36) 68 × 68 4 11.2 (M33) 39 75 × 75 4 11.9 M36 (42) 80 × 80 4 12.4 (M39) For detailed information, refer to IS 5372 : 1975 Specification for taper washers for channels (ISMC) (first revision). Note 1– L × B are dimensions for taper washers in plan. Note 2– Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference. Note 3 – For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the st",
      "Grades": "‘Ordinary’ grade of IS 5369 : 1975*",
      "Designation": "Shall be designated by the name, size and number of the standard. For example, a taper washer of nominal size 18 mm shall be designated as `Taper Washer 18 - IS : 5372’. * General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 5369: 1975 General Requirements For Plain Washers And Lock Washers\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope — General requirements and permissible deviation for plain washers, lock washers and similar\nparts.\n2.\nGrades— Precision and ordinary.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5369 : 1975 Specification for general requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first revision)\nNote– For permissible deviation on main dimensions and concentricity of the hole with respect to outside diameter of\nprecision grade washers as well as of ordinary grade washers, refer to Tables 1 to 4 of the standard.\n3. Requirements\n3.1 Finish —Natural. May be phosphate-coated,\nnickel plated, tinned, galvanized, copper-plated or cadmium-coated.\n3.2 Shall be free from cracks, burrs, pits and other\ndefects. All sharp edges shall be removed. 1.\nScope—Requirements for taper washers for use with Indian Standard Medium Weight Channels (ISMC)\nwith bolts in diameter range of 10 to 39 mm.\n2.\nDimensions (in mm)\nNominal L × B Thickness\nFor Bolt\nSize (See Note 1)\nSize\n(Diameter\nThin\nThick of Hole) End\nEnd\n11 22 × 22\n2\n4.3\nM10\n14 26 × 30\n2.5\n5.7\nM12\n18 32 × 36\n3\n6.8\nM16\n22 40 × 44\n3.5\n8.1 M20\n(24) 44 × 50\n4\n9.2\n(M22) 26 56 × 56\n4\n9.9\nM24\n(30) 56 × 56\n4\n9.9\n(M27)\n33 62 × 62\n4\n10.5\nM30\n(36) 68 × 68\n4\n11.2\n(M33)\n39 75 × 75\n4\n11.9\nM36\n(42) 80 × 80\n4\n12.4\n(M39)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5372 : 1975 Specification for taper washers for channels (ISMC) (first revision).\nNote 1– L × B are dimensions for taper washers in plan.\nNote 2– Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference.\nNote 3 – For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 of the\nstandard.\n3.\nGrade – ‘Ordinary’ grade of IS 5369 : 1975*\n4.\nDesignation – Shall be designated by the name, size and number of the standard. For example, a taper\nwasher of nominal size 18 mm shall be designated as\n`Taper Washer 18 - IS : 5372’.\n* General requirements for plain washers and lock washers\n(first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5372: 1975",
    "title": "Taper Washers For Channels (Ismc)",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "(First Revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "taper",
      "washers",
      "channels",
      "ismc"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 5372: 1975 Taper Washers For Channels (Ismc)\n(First Revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5373: 1969",
    "title": "Square Washers For Wood Fastenings",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements for square washers intended for use in wood fastenings with bolts in diameter range 10 to 52 mm.",
    "keywords": [
      "fastenings",
      "washers",
      "square",
      "wood",
      "washer",
      "preference",
      "brackets"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for square washers intended for use in wood fastenings with bolts in diameter range 10 to 52 mm. 2. Dimensions (in mm) Nominal Sides Thickness For Bolt Size Size (Dia of Hole) 11.5 30 3 M10 14 40 4 M12 18 50 5 M16 23 60 5 M20 24 70 6 M22 27 80 6 M24 (30) 90 6 (M27) 33 95 6 M30 (36) 100 6 (M33) For detailed information, refer to IS 5373 : 1969 Specification for square washers for wood fastenings. Note— Other Requirements not covered in the standard shall conform to IS : 5369-1975 General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first revision). 39 110 8 M36 (42) 125 8 (M39) 45 135 8 M42 48 140 8 M45 52 150 10 M48 56 160 10 M52 Note 2 – Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference.",
      "Designation": "As an example, a square washer for wood fastenings having a nominal size of 18 mm shall be designated as `Square Washer18 – IS 5373’."
    },
    "content": "IS 5373: 1969 Square Washers For Wood Fastenings\n1.\nScope – Requirements for square washers intended for use in wood fastenings with bolts in diameter range\n10 to 52 mm.\n2. Dimensions (in mm)\nNominal Sides Thickness For Bolt\nSize\nSize\n(Dia of\nHole)\n11.5 30\n3\nM10\n14 40\n4\nM12\n18 50\n5\nM16\n23 60\n5 M20\n24 70\n6\nM22\n27 80\n6\nM24\n(30) 90\n6\n(M27)\n33 95\n6\nM30\n(36) 100\n6\n(M33)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5373 : 1969 Specification for square washers for wood fastenings.\nNote— Other Requirements not covered in the standard shall conform to IS : 5369-1975 General requirements for plain\nwashers and lock washers (first revision).\n39 110\n8\nM36\n(42) 125\n8 (M39)\n45 135\n8\nM42\n48 140\n8\nM45\n52 150 10\nM48\n56 160 10\nM52\nNote 2 – Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference.\n3.\nDesignation – As an example, a square washer for wood fastenings having a nominal size of 18 mm shall\nbe designated as `Square Washer18 – IS 5373’."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5374: 1975",
    "title": "Taper Washers For I-Beams (Ismb)",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements for taper washers for use with Indian Standard Medium Weight Beams (ISMB) with bolts of 10 mm to 39 mm diameter.",
    "keywords": [
      "foundation",
      "taper",
      "bolt",
      "bolts",
      "washers",
      "nuts",
      "galv"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for foundation bolts in the size range M8 to M72. 2. Technical Supply Conditions",
      "Grades": "‘Ordinary’ grade of IS : 5369-1975 *",
      "Designation": "Shall be designated by the nomenclature, thread size, length and number of this standard. Example – A foundation bolt of thread size M20 and length 200 mm shall be designated as – Foundation Bolt M20 × 200 IS 5624 5.1 When foundation bolts are required/supplied with hexagon nuts conforming to IS 1363 (Part 3)§ letter `N’ shall be added after length, in the designation. Example – A foundation bolt of therad size M20, length 200 mm supplied with hexagon nut shall be designated as—Foundation Bolt M20 × 200 N IS 5624 a) Hexagon head bolts screws and nuts of product grade C. Note — For some typical shank forms and their dimensions see Annex A of the standard. 5.2 If foundation bolts are to be hot dip galvanized the word `GALV’ shall be added at the end of the designation. Example – A foundation",
      "General Requirements": "In respect of requirements not covered in this standard, the nuts shall conform to IS 1367 (Part 1) § + Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners. * ISO Metric Screw Threads. § Hexagen head bolts, screwesand nuts of product grade C-Part 3: Hexagen Nuts (size range M5 to M64) (third revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 5624 : 1993 Specification for foundation bolts (first revision)",
      "Dimensions": "M8, M10, M12, M16, M20, M24, M30, M36, M42, M48, M56, M64, and M72 3.1 Dimensions and Preferred – SeeTable 1 of the standard Length-Dia Combination Material Steel Tolerances 8g Thread Indian IS 4218 (Part 5) : 1979 * Standards IS 4218 (Part 6) : 1978 + Mechanical Property Class 4.6 Properties Indian Standard IS 1367 (Part 3) : 1991 ++ Tolerance Produce Grade C Indian Standard IS 1367 (Part 2) : 1979 t As produced or Hot-dip galvanized,IS 1367** (Part 13):1983,+ if agreed between supplier and purchaser."
    },
    "content": "IS 5374: 1975 Taper Washers For I-Beams (Ismb)\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements for taper washers for use with\nIndian Standard Medium Weight Beams (ISMB) with bolts of 10 mm to 39 mm diameter.\n2.\nDimensions (in mm)\nNominal L × B Thickness For Bolt\nSize (See Note 1) Size\n(Diameter\nThin\nThick of Hole) End\nEnd\n11 22 × 22 1.5\n4.6 M10\n14 26 × 30 2\n6.2 M12\n18 32 × 36 2.5\n7.6 M16\n22 40 × 44 3\n9.2 M20 (24) 44 × 50 3 10 (M22) 26 56 × 56 3 10.8 M24 (30) 56 × 56 3 10.8 (M27) 33 62 × 62 3 11.7 M30 (36) 68 × 68 3 12.6 (M33) 39 75 × 75 3 13.6 M36 (42) 80 × 80 3 14.2 (M39)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5374 : 1975 Specification for taper washers for I-beams (ISMB) (first revision).\nNote 1– L × B are dimensions for taper washers in plan\nNote 2– Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference.\nNote 3– For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 2 of the Standard.\n3.\nGrade – ‘Ordinary’ grade of IS : 5369-1975 *\n4.\nDesignation – As an example, a taper washer of nominal size 18 mm shall be designated as `Taper Washer\n18 IS : 5374.\n* General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first revision). 1.\nScope – Requirements for foundation bolts in the size range M8 to M72.\n2.\nTechnical Supply Conditions 5. Designation – Shall be designated by the\nnomenclature, thread size, length and number of this standard.\nExample – A foundation bolt of thread size M20 and length 200 mm shall be designated as – Foundation Bolt\nM20 × 200 IS 5624\n5.1 When foundation bolts are required/supplied with\nhexagon nuts conforming to IS 1363 (Part 3)§ letter `N’ shall be added after length, in the designation.\nExample – A foundation bolt of therad size M20, length\n200 mm supplied with hexagon nut shall be designated as—Foundation Bolt M20 × 200 N IS 5624\na) Hexagon head bolts screws and nuts of product grade C.\nNote — For some typical shank forms and their dimensions\nsee Annex A of the standard.\n5.2 If foundation bolts are to be hot dip galvanized the\nword `GALV’ shall be added at the end of the designation.\nExample – A foundation bolt of thread size M20, length\n200 mm and hot dip galvanized shall be designated as–\nFoundation Bolt M20 × 200 IS 5624 GALV\n5.3 In addition, type of the shank form required may\nalso be indicated with the designation. However, if no shank form is specified in the designation it shall be at\nthe discretion of the manufacturer.\n6.\nGeneral Requirements– In respect of requirements not covered in this standard, the nuts shall conform to\nIS 1367 (Part 1) §\n+ Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners.\n* ISO Metric Screw Threads.\n§ Hexagen head bolts, screwesand nuts of product grade C-Part 3:\nHexagen Nuts (size range M5 to M64) (third revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5624 : 1993 Specification for foundation bolts (first revision)\n3.\nDimensions – M8, M10, M12, M16, M20, M24, M30,\nM36, M42, M48, M56, M64, and M72\n3.1 Dimensions and Preferred – SeeTable 1 of the\nstandard Length-Dia Combination Material\nSteel\nTolerances\n8g Thread\nIndian\nIS 4218 (Part 5) : 1979 *\nStandards\nIS 4218 (Part 6) : 1978 + Mechanical\nProperty Class\n4.6 Properties\nIndian Standard\nIS 1367 (Part 3) : 1991 ++ Tolerance\nProduce Grade\nC\nIndian Standard\nIS 1367 (Part 2) : 1979 t\nAs produced or Hot-dip galvanized,IS 1367**\n(Part 13):1983,+ if agreed between supplier and purchaser."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5624: 1993",
    "title": "Foundation Bolts",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements for J-type hook bolts and nuts, mushroom head seam bolts and nuts, and washers of aluminium for roofing sheets.",
    "keywords": [
      "bolts",
      "nuts",
      "mushroom",
      "washers",
      "hook",
      "seam",
      "aluminium"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for J-type hook bolts and nuts, mushroom head seam bolts and nuts, and washers of aluminium for roofing sheets. 2. Requirements 2.1 Material – Aluminium and aluminium alloys, as specified in the standard. Size Nominal Dia Thread Length, Size of Nut Preferred Lengths Min M6 6 25 M6 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140 and 150 M8 8 25 M8 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190 and 200 M10 10 25 M10 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150,160, 170, 180, 190 and 200 3.2 Mushroom Head Seam Bolts and Nuts — Size Nominal Dia Thickness of , Size of Nut Preferred Lengths Head (Nom) M5 5 3 M5 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45 and 50 M6 6 4 M6 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 80, 90 and 100 M8 8 5 M8 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60,"
    },
    "content": "IS 5624: 1993 Foundation Bolts\n(First Revision) 1.\nScope – Requirements for J-type hook bolts and nuts, mushroom head seam bolts and nuts, and washers\nof aluminium for roofing sheets.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Material – Aluminium and aluminium alloys, as\nspecified in the standard.\nSize\nNominal Dia Thread Length, Size of Nut\nPreferred Lengths Min\nM6 6 25 M6 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140 and 150\nM8 8 25 M8 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150, 160, 170, 180, 190 and 200\nM10 10 25 M10 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150,160, 170, 180, 190 and 200\n3.2 Mushroom Head Seam Bolts and Nuts —\nSize\nNominal Dia Thickness of , Size of Nut Preferred Lengths Head (Nom)\nM5 5 3 M5 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45 and 50\nM6 6 4 M6 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 80, 90 and 100\nM8 8 5 M8 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 80, 90 and 100\nM10 10 6 M10 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45 and 50\n3.3 Washers — Types A, B, C and D. Hole diameter 5.8,\n7, 10 and 12 for size 5, 6, 8 and 10 respectively.\nNote – For detailed dimensions of bolts, nuts and washers,\nrefer to Tables 1 to 3 of the standard\nNote — For other requirements in regard to manufacture tolerence, test etc of bolts and nuts, refer to the prescribed standards\n2.2 Grade — Black Grade B.\n3.\nDimensions (in mm)\n3.1 J-Type Hook Bolts\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6113 : 1970 Specification for aluminium fasteners for building purposes."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6113: 1970",
    "title": "Aluminium Fasteners For Building Purposes",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements for heavy washers for use in steel structures in the diameter range 14 to 42 mm. Nominal Tolerance on Outer Dia Tolerance Thickness Suitable for Size Size on Outer Bolt Size (Diameter) Dia 14 +0.43 24 -1.30 8 M12 18 +0.43 30 -1.30 8 M16 22 +0.52 37 -1.60 8 M20 24 +0.52 39 -1.60 8 M22 26 +0.52 44 -1.60 8 M24 30 +0.52 50 -1.60 8 M27 33 +0.62 56 -1.90 8 M30 36 +0.62 60 -1.90 8 M33 39 +0.62 66 -1.90 8 M36 42 +0.62 72 -1.90 8 M39",
    "keywords": [
      "washers",
      "seam",
      "structures",
      "outer",
      "requiremens",
      "bolt",
      "heavy"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Designation": "As an example, seam bolt size M8, length 20 mm and material HG 19 shall be designated as `Seam Bolts M8 x 20, IS 6113— HG 19’. For detailed information, refer to IS 6610 : 1972 Specification for heavy washers for steel structures.",
      "Scope": "Requirements for heavy washers for use in steel structures in the diameter range 14 to 42 mm. Nominal Tolerance on Outer Dia Tolerance Thickness Suitable for Size Size on Outer Bolt Size (Diameter) Dia 14 +0.43 24 -1.30 8 M12 18 +0.43 30 -1.30 8 M16 22 +0.52 37 -1.60 8 M20 24 +0.52 39 -1.60 8 M22 26 +0.52 44 -1.60 8 M24 30 +0.52 50 -1.60 8 M27 33 +0.62 56 -1.90 8 M30 36 +0.62 60 -1.90 8 M33 39 +0.62 66 -1.90 8 M36 42 +0.62 72 -1.90 8 M39",
      "Materials": "Shall be made from steel. Note – Other requirements of washers shall be as specified in IS 5369 : 1975 General requiremens for plain washers and lock washers (first revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 6113: 1970 Aluminium Fasteners For Building Purposes\n4. Designation — As an example, seam bolt size M8, length 20 mm and material HG 19 shall be designated as\n`Seam Bolts M8 x 20, IS 6113— HG 19’. For detailed information, refer to IS 6610 : 1972 Specification for heavy washers for steel structures.\n1.\nScope – Requirements for heavy washers for use in steel structures in the diameter range 14 to 42 mm.\nNominal Tolerance on\nOuter Dia\nTolerance Thickness Suitable for\nSize Size on Outer Bolt Size\n(Diameter) Dia 14 +0.43 24 -1.30\n8 M12 18 +0.43 30 -1.30\n8 M16 22 +0.52 37 -1.60\n8 M20 24 +0.52 39 -1.60\n8 M22 26 +0.52 44 -1.60\n8 M24 30 +0.52 50 -1.60\n8 M27 33 +0.62 56 -1.90\n8 M30 36 +0.62 60 -1.90\n8 M33 39 +0.62 66 -1.90\n8 M36 42 +0.62 72 -1.90\n8 M39\n3. Material – Shall be made from steel.\nNote – Other requirements of washers shall be as specified in IS 5369 : 1975 General requiremens for plain washers and lock\nwashers (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6610: 1972",
    "title": "Heavy Washers For Steel Structures",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "2. Dimensions (in mm) 4. Designation – By nominal size and the number of this standard. Example – Washer 14 IS 6610.",
    "keywords": [
      "nuts",
      "galvanized",
      "structural",
      "dip",
      "property",
      "high",
      "class"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Designation": "Shall be designated by name , size, the number of this standard and the property class identification symbol 8s or 10s. In case of hot dip galvanized nuts the word galvanized shall be added to the designation. Example – A high strength structural nut of size M24, propery class 8 and galvanized shall be designated as — High Strength Structural Nut M24 IS 6623—8S Galvanized ** High strength structural bolts (second revision)",
      "Mechanical Properties": "Shall be of property class B 10 as per the specified standard, except that all nuts shall be or C hardened and then tempered at a temperature of atleast 4250c and the proof load and hardness values as given in Table 2 of the standard. 5. Finish : Shall be supplied in the dull black heattreated condition with a residual coating of light oil. 6.1 Where property class 10 nuts are required to be hot-dip galvanized, they shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of IS : 1367 (Part 13)- 1983. * The hot-dip galvanized nuts shall be subjected to the anti-seizing test.",
      "Requirements": "In regard to permissible surface discontinuities, the nuts shall conform toIS 1367 (Part 10) :2002 * 6.1 In regard to requirements not covered in the standard, the nuts shall conform to IS 1367 (Part1) :2002+ 6.2 The high strength structural bolts to be used with these nuts shall conform to the requirements of IS : 3757**"
    },
    "content": "IS 6610: 1972 Heavy Washers For Steel Structures\n2. Dimensions (in mm)\n4.\nDesignation – By nominal size and the number of this standard. Example – Washer 14 IS 6610. For detailed information, refer to IS 6623 : 2004 Specification for high strength structural nuts (second revision).\n4.\nMechanical Properties – Shall be of property class\nB 10 as per the specified standard, except that all nuts shall be or C hardened and then tempered at a\ntemperature of atleast 4250c and the proof load and hardness values as given in Table 2 of the standard.\n5.\nFinish : Shall be supplied in the dull black heattreated condition with a residual coating of light oil.\n6.1 Where property class 10 nuts are required to be\nhot-dip galvanized, they shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of IS : 1367 (Part 13)-\n1983. * The hot-dip galvanized nuts shall be subjected to the anti-seizing test.\n6.\nRequirements —In regard to permissible surface discontinuities, the nuts shall conform toIS 1367 (Part 10) :2002 *\n6.1 In regard to requirements not covered in the\nstandard, the nuts shall conform to IS 1367\n(Part1) :2002+\n6.2 The high strength structural bolts to be used with\nthese nuts shall conform to the requirements of IS : 3757**\n7.\nDesignation — Shall be designated by name , size, the number of this standard and the property class\nidentification symbol 8s or 10s. In case of hot dip galvanized nuts the word galvanized shall be added to\nthe designation.\nExample – A high strength structural nut of size M24, propery class 8 and galvanized shall be designated as\n— High Strength Structural Nut M24 IS 6623—8S\nGalvanized\n** High strength structural bolts (second revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6623: 2004",
    "title": "High Strength Structural Nuts",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements for large series hexagon, high strength structural steel nuts in property classes 8 and 10 and in the size range M16 to M36 suitable for use in both friction-type and bearing-type structural steel connections. Nuts to this standard when matched with the appropriate bolts have been designed to provide an assembly with a high level of assurance against failure by thread stripping on overtightening. Note – Attention is drawn to the importance of ensuring that the nuts are correctly use",
    "keywords": [
      "nuts",
      "hexagon",
      "bolts",
      "threads",
      "structures",
      "property",
      "condance"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for hexagon bolts in the size range 12 to 39 mm for steel structures. 2. Dimensions (in mm) 3. Requirements 3.1 Mechanical Properties– Shall conform to property class 4.6 or 5.6 of IS 1367(Part3) :1991*. The bolts shall withstand a minimum shear stress of 260 MPa (for bolt testing purposes and is not related to actual design stresses). 3.2 Grade – Product grade C according to",
      "Grades": "Unless other wire specified the nuts shall be of product grade B as specified in IS 1367 (Part 2). The tolerances on the threads shall conform to tolerance 6H of IS 14962 [Part (1, 2 and 3) and in case of hot dip galramized with the tolerances shall be in accordance with IS 14962 [(Part 4 and 5)] * Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners (various parts) + ISO metric Threads For detailed information, refer to IS 6639 : 1972 Specification for hexagon bolts for steel structures."
    },
    "content": "IS 6623: 2004 High Strength Structural Nuts\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements for large series hexagon, high strength structural steel nuts in property classes 8 and\n10 and in the size range M16 to M36 suitable for use in both friction-type and bearing-type structural steel\nconnections. Nuts to this standard when matched with the appropriate bolts have been designed to provide an\nassembly with a high level of assurance against failure by thread stripping on overtightening.\nNote – Attention is drawn to the importance of ensuring that\nthe nuts are correctly used if satisfactory results are to be obtained.\n2.\nDimensions and Tolerances\n2.1 Thread Sizes – M12, M16, M20, (M22), M24,\n(M27), M30 and M36\nNote 1 – Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference\nNote 2 – For detailed dimensions refer to Table 1 of the\nstandard\n2.2\nThreads of the nuts shall be in a condance to IS\n4218 [Parts (1, 2, 3 and 4)]\n3.\nGrade – Unless other wire specified the nuts shall be of product grade B as specified in IS 1367 (Part 2).\nThe tolerances on the threads shall conform to tolerance\n6H of IS 14962 [Part (1, 2 and 3) and in case of hot dip galramized with the tolerances shall be in accordance\nwith IS 14962 [(Part 4 and 5)]\n* Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners (various parts)\n+ ISO metric Threads For detailed information, refer to IS 6639 : 1972 Specification for hexagon bolts for steel structures.\n1.\nScope – Requirements for hexagon bolts in the size range 12 to 39 mm for steel structures.\n2.\nDimensions (in mm)\n3. Requirements\n3.1 Mechanical Properties– Shall conform to property\nclass 4.6 or 5.6 of IS 1367(Part3) :1991*. The bolts shall withstand a minimum shear stress of 260 MPa (for bolt\ntesting purposes and is not related to actual design stresses).\n3.2 Grade – Product grade C according to"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1367(Part 2): 1979",
    "title": "*",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "* Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners (various Parts) 4. Designation – By size, length, number of the standard and property class. Example – Hex Bolt M12 × 30 – IS 6639 – 4.6 + Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grade C. ** Industrial Hexagon nut of product grade C Hot dip galvanized (size range M12 to M36 fasteners) Size Diameter Distance Between Length of Bolts Parallel Side, Nom Nom (see Note 1) Nom Max Min M12 12 12.70 11.30 19 30-120 M16 16 16.70 15.30 24 35-150 M",
    "keywords": [
      "bolts",
      "nom",
      "hexagon",
      "nuts",
      "fasteners",
      "hex",
      "lengths"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Designation": "By size, length, number of the standard and property class. Example – Hex Bolt M12 × 30 – IS 6639 – 4.6 + Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grade C. ** Industrial Hexagon nut of product grade C Hot dip galvanized (size range M12 to M36 fasteners) Size Diameter Distance Between Length of Bolts Parallel Side, Nom Nom (see Note 1) Nom Max Min M12 12 12.70 11.30 19 30-120 M16 16 16.70 15.30 24 35-150 M20 20 20.84 19.16 30 40-175 (M22) 22 22.84 21.16 32 40-200 M24 24 24.84 23.16 36 45-200 (M27) 27 27.84 26.16 41 60-200 M30 30 30.84 29.16 46 80-200 (M33) 33 34.00 32.00 50 100-200 M36 36 37.00 35.00 55 100-200 (M39) 39 40.00 38.00 60 110-200 Note 1— Range of preferred lengths. Note 2— Preferred lengths - 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 105, 110, 115, 120, 125"
    },
    "content": "IS 1367(Part 2): 1979 *\n* Technical supply conditions for threaded fasteners (various Parts)\n4. Designation – By size, length, number of the standard\nand property class.\nExample – Hex Bolt M12 × 30 – IS 6639 – 4.6\n+ Hexagon head bolts, screws and nuts of product grade C.\n** Industrial Hexagon nut of product grade C Hot dip galvanized (size range M12 to M36 fasteners)\nSize\nDiameter\nDistance Between Length of Bolts\nParallel Side, Nom Nom (see Note 1)\nNom\nMax\nMin\nM12\n12\n12.70\n11.30\n19\n30-120\nM16\n16\n16.70\n15.30\n24\n35-150\nM20\n20\n20.84\n19.16\n30\n40-175\n(M22)\n22\n22.84\n21.16\n32\n40-200\nM24\n24\n24.84\n23.16\n36\n45-200\n(M27)\n27\n27.84\n26.16\n41\n60-200\nM30\n30\n30.84\n29.16\n46\n80-200\n(M33)\n33\n34.00\n32.00\n50\n100-200\nM36\n36\n37.00\n35.00\n55\n100-200\n(M39)\n39\n40.00\n38.00\n60\n110-200\nNote 1— Range of preferred lengths.\nNote 2— Preferred lengths - 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 105, 110, 115, 120, 125, 130, 135, 140,\n145,150, 155, 160, 165, 170, 175, 180, 185, 190, 195 and 200.\nNote 3— Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference.\nNote 4— For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1 and for tolerance, refer to Fig. 1 of the Standard.\nNote 5— For clamping lengths for bolts, refer to Table 2 of the Standard.\nNote1—For other requirements of bolts, refer to IS 1367\n(Part1) and IS 14394** and for requirements of hexagon nuts used with bolts, refer to IS 1363 (Part3).\nNote 2—For approximate weight of bolts with nuts, refer to\nAppendix A of the standard for guidance."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6639: 1972",
    "title": "Hexagon Bolts For Steel Structures",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements for through hardened and tempered steel washers intended for assembly with large series hexagon, high strength structural bolts and nuts in the size range M16 to M36.",
    "keywords": [
      "washers",
      "taper",
      "washer",
      "galvanized",
      "clipped",
      "structural",
      "hole"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for through hardened and tempered steel washers intended for assembly with large series hexagon, high strength structural bolts and nuts in the size range M16 to M36. 2. Types Type A – Plain hole circular washers. Type B – Square taper washers for use with channels (60 taper) Type C– Square taper washers for use with I-beams (80 taper)",
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "3.1 Nominal Size (Thread Size of Associated Bolt) M16, M20, (M22), M24, (M27), M30 and M36. See Tables 1 and 2 of the standard. 3.2 The washers shall be flat with a maximum deviation not exceeding 0.25 mm from the straightedge laid along a line passing through the centre of the hole. 3.3 The hole of the washer shall be concentric with the outside dimensions within 0.50 mm. 3.4 When circular or square taper washers are required to be clipped to provide clearance, the clipped edge shall not be closer to the centre of the washer than 0.9 of the bolt diameter. In case of square taper washers, these may be clipped along the thin edge parallel to the opposite edge.",
      "Grades": "Shall conform to IS 5369 : 1975 +.",
      "Materials": "The washers shall be made from 45C8 steel as perscribed.",
      "Hardness": "Shall be between 35 to 45 HRC. The minimum for hot-dip galvanized washers shall be 26 HRC.",
      "Finish": "Shall be supplied in the dull black heattreated condition with a residual coating of light oil. 7.1 Where washers are required to be hot-dip galvanized, they shall conform to the prescribed standard except that the minimum value of average mass of coating shall be 300 g/m2.",
      "General Requirements": "In regard to requirements not covered in the standard, the washers shall conform to the requirements specified for ordinary washers according to IS 5369 : 1975. 8.1 The high strength structural bolts to be used with these washers shall conform to the requirements of IS 3757:1985. # 8.2 The high strength structural nuts to be used with these washers shall conform to the requirements of IS 6623:1985. *",
      "Designation": "Shall be designated by the word `washer’, nominal size, type and the number of this standard. In case of hot-dip galvanized washers the word galvanized’ shall be added to the designation. Examples – A plain hole circular washer of nominal size M24 conforming to this standard and galvanized shall be designated as – Washer M24A – IS 6649 galvanized. 9.1 A square taper washer of 60 taper for use with channels, of nominal size M24 conforming to this standard and galvanized shall be designated as – Washer M24B– IS 6649 galvanized. # High strength structural bolts (second revision). * High strength structural nuts (first revision). + General reqirements for plain washers and lock washers (first revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 6649 : 1985 Specification for hardened and tempered wa"
    },
    "content": "IS 6639: 1972 Hexagon Bolts For Steel Structures\n1. Scope – Requirements for through hardened and\ntempered steel washers intended for assembly with large series hexagon, high strength structural bolts and nuts\nin the size range M16 to M36. 2. Types\nType A – Plain hole circular washers.\nType B – Square taper washers for use with channels (60 taper)\nType C– Square taper washers for use with I-beams (80 taper)\n3.\nDimensions and Tolerances— 3.1 Nominal Size (Thread Size of Associated Bolt) M16, M20, (M22), M24, (M27), M30 and M36. See Tables 1 and 2 of the standard. 3.2 The washers shall be flat with a maximum deviation\nnot exceeding 0.25 mm from the straightedge laid along a line passing through the centre of the hole.\n3.3 The hole of the washer shall be concentric with the\noutside dimensions within 0.50 mm.\n3.4 When circular or square taper washers are required\nto be clipped to provide clearance, the clipped edge shall not be closer to the centre of the washer than 0.9 of the\nbolt diameter. In case of square taper washers, these may be clipped along the thin edge parallel to the\nopposite edge.\n4.\nGrade – Shall conform to IS 5369 : 1975 +.\n5. Material – The washers shall be made from 45C8 steel as perscribed.\n6.\nHardness – Shall be between 35 to 45 HRC. The minimum for hot-dip galvanized washers shall be 26\nHRC.\n7.\nFinish – Shall be supplied in the dull black heattreated condition with a residual coating of light oil.\n7.1 Where washers are required to be hot-dip galvanized,\nthey shall conform to the prescribed standard except that the minimum value of average mass of coating shall\nbe 300 g/m2.\n8. General Requirements – In regard to requirements not covered in the standard, the washers shall conform\nto the requirements specified for ordinary washers according to IS 5369 : 1975.\n8.1 The high strength structural bolts to be used with\nthese washers shall conform to the requirements of\nIS 3757:1985. #\n8.2 The high strength structural nuts to be used with\nthese washers shall conform to the requirements of\nIS 6623:1985. *\n9. Designation – Shall be designated by the word\n`washer’, nominal size, type and the number of this standard. In case of hot-dip galvanized washers the word\ngalvanized’ shall be added to the designation.\nExamples – A plain hole circular washer of nominal size M24 conforming to this standard and galvanized\nshall be designated as – Washer M24A – IS 6649 galvanized.\n9.1 A square taper washer of 60 taper for use with\nchannels, of nominal size M24 conforming to this standard and galvanized shall be designated as –\nWasher M24B– IS 6649 galvanized.\n# High strength structural bolts (second revision).\n* High strength structural nuts (first revision).\n+ General reqirements for plain washers and lock washers (first revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6649 : 1985 Specification for hardened and tempered washers for high strength structural bolts and nuts (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6649: 1985",
    "title": "Hardened And Tempered Washers For High Strength Structural Bolts And Nuts",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements of wall and roofing nails.",
    "keywords": [
      "nail",
      "nails",
      "shank",
      "roofing",
      "wall",
      "marks",
      "wastes"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of wall and roofing nails. 2. Dimensions (in mm) Type of Size Dia of Length Approx Nail (Dia of Head No. of Shank) Nails/kg Wall nail 4.00 8.0 30 260 4.50 9.0 40 190 Wall nail 5.60 13.4 50 95 60 80 6.30 15.1 70 60 80 50 2.1 Maximum eccentricity and ovality of the centre of the nail head from axis of shank shall be 14 percent of shank diameter, Max. Note 1— For tolerance, refer to Table 1 of the standard. Note 2— Length of tapered portion (pointed at bottom) of the nail shall be 1 to 1.5 times the diameter of shank.",
      "Designation": "Shall be designated by size, length and the number of the standard. Example– Wall nail 4 × 30 — IS 6733 Roofing nail 5.6 × 50 — IS 6733",
      "General Requirements": "Nails shall be machine made and may have die marks and feeding knife marks on shank. They shall be uniformly circular in section, straight, free from wastes. Wall nails shall have sharp points and roofing nails, a chiesel point. The heads shall be properly formed and concentric with shanks.",
      "Finish": "Plain finished. 6. Test 6.1 Bend Test – Nails when cold shall not break or crack when doubled over either by pressure or by blows from a hammer until the internal radius is equal to the diameter of the test piece For detailed information, refer to IS 6733 : 1972 Specification for wall and roofing nails."
    },
    "content": "IS 6649: 1985 Hardened And Tempered Washers For High Strength Structural Bolts And Nuts\n(First Revision) 1.\nScope – Requirements of wall and roofing nails.\n2.\nDimensions (in mm)\nType of Size Dia of Length Approx\nNail (Dia of Head No. of Shank) Nails/kg\nWall nail 4.00\n8.0 30 260 4.50\n9.0 40 190\nWall nail 5.60 13.4 50 95 60 80 6.30 15.1 70 60 80 50\n2.1 Maximum eccentricity and ovality of the centre of\nthe nail head from axis of shank shall be 14 percent of shank diameter, Max.\nNote 1— For tolerance, refer to Table 1 of the standard.\nNote 2— Length of tapered portion (pointed at bottom) of the\nnail shall be 1 to 1.5 times the diameter of shank.\n3.\nDesignation – Shall be designated by size, length and the number of the standard.\nExample– Wall nail\n4 × 30 — IS 6733 Roofing nail 5.6 × 50 — IS 6733\n4. General Requirements – Nails shall be machine made and may have die marks and feeding knife marks\non shank. They shall be uniformly circular in section, straight, free from wastes. Wall nails shall have sharp\npoints and roofing nails, a chiesel point. The heads shall be properly formed and concentric with shanks.\n5. Finish – Plain finished.\n6.\nTest\n6.1 Bend Test – Nails when cold shall not break or\ncrack when doubled over either by pressure or by blows from a hammer until the internal radius is equal to the\ndiameter of the test piece\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6733 : 1972 Specification for wall and roofing nails."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6733: 1972",
    "title": "Wall And Roofing Nails",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements for slotted raised countersunk head wood screws.",
    "keywords": [
      "raised",
      "countersunk",
      "wood",
      "screw",
      "slotted",
      "head",
      "unthreaded"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for slotted raised countersunk head wood screws. 2. Dimensions (in mm) No. Dia of Unthreaded shank Range of Screw Preferred Lengths Designation) Nom Max Min (see Note1) 0 1.52 1.55 1.47 8-12 1 1.78 1.85 1.70 8-12 2 2.08 2.16 1.98 8-12 3 2.39 2.46 2.29 8-12 4 2.74 2.87 2.64 12-25 5 3.10 3.23 2.97 12-30 6 3.45 3.58 3.33 12-40 7 3.81 3.94 3.68 12-40 8 4.17 4.29 4.04 12-75 9 4.52 4.65 4.39 15-75 10 4.88 5.00 4.72 15-75 12 5.59 5.72 5.38 20-75 14 6.30 6.43 6.05 25-75 16 7.01 7.14 6.76 30-75 18 7.72 7.85 7.47 30-75 20 8.43 8.56 8.18 30-75 24 9.86 9.98 9.60 30-75 Note 1– Preferred lengths - 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70 and 75mm Note 2– Threaded portion of the screw shall nearly be equal to 2/3 times the total length of the screw. Note 3– Dia of head (Max) ",
      "Designation": "As an example, a slotted raised countersunk head wood screw No. 8, length 20 mm and made of steel shall be designated as `Wood Screw No. 8 × 20 IS 6736 Steel. Note – In regard to the requirements not covered in the standard, Refer to IS 451 : 1999 Technical supply conditions for wood screws (third revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 6733: 1972 Wall And Roofing Nails\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6736 : 1972 Specification for slotted raised countersunk head wood screws.\n1.\nScope – Requirements for slotted raised countersunk head wood screws.\n2.\nDimensions (in mm) No. Dia of Unthreaded shank Range of\nScrew Preferred\nLengths\nDesignation) Nom Max Min (see Note1) 0\n1.52\n1.55\n1.47\n8-12 1\n1.78\n1.85\n1.70\n8-12 2\n2.08\n2.16\n1.98\n8-12 3\n2.39\n2.46\n2.29\n8-12 4\n2.74\n2.87\n2.64\n12-25 5\n3.10\n3.23\n2.97\n12-30 6\n3.45\n3.58\n3.33\n12-40 7\n3.81\n3.94\n3.68\n12-40 8\n4.17\n4.29\n4.04\n12-75 9\n4.52\n4.65\n4.39\n15-75\n10\n4.88\n5.00\n4.72\n15-75\n12\n5.59\n5.72\n5.38\n20-75\n14\n6.30\n6.43\n6.05\n25-75\n16\n7.01\n7.14\n6.76\n30-75\n18\n7.72\n7.85\n7.47\n30-75\n20\n8.43\n8.56\n8.18\n30-75\n24\n9.86\n9.98\n9.60\n30-75\nNote 1–\nPreferred lengths - 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40\n45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70 and 75mm\nNote 2–\nThreaded portion of the screw shall nearly be equal to\n2/3 times the total length of the screw.\nNote 3–\nDia of head (Max) shall be 2 times the diameter of unthreaded shank (Nom).\nNote 4–\nFor detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1of the standard.\nNote 5–\nFor tolerances, see Fig 1 of the standard.\n3.\nDesignation – As an example, a slotted raised countersunk head wood screw No. 8, length 20 mm and\nmade of steel shall be designated as `Wood Screw No.\n8 × 20 IS 6736 Steel.\nNote – In regard to the requirements not covered in the standard, Refer to IS 451 : 1999 Technical supply conditions for wood\nscrews (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6736: 1972",
    "title": "Slotted Raised Countersunk Head Wood Screws",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Slotted Raised Countersunk Head Wood Screws",
    "keywords": [
      "slotted",
      "raised",
      "countersunk",
      "head",
      "wood",
      "screws"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 6736: 1972 Slotted Raised Countersunk Head Wood Screws\n"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6739: 1972",
    "title": "Slotted Round Head Wood Screws",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements for slotted round head wood screws.",
    "keywords": [
      "wood",
      "screw",
      "slotted",
      "unthreaded",
      "head",
      "nom",
      "screws"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for slotted countersunk head wood screws. 2. Dimensions (in mm) No. Dia of Unthreaded Range of Shank Preferred (Screw Designation) Nom Max Min Lengths (See Note1) 0 1.52 1.55 1.47 8-12 1 1.78 1.85 1.70 8-12 2 2.08 2.16 1.98 8-12 3 2.39 2.46 2.29 8-12 4 2.74 2.87 2.64 12-25 5 3.10 3.23 2.97 12-30 6 3.45 3.58 3.33 12-40 7 3.81 3.94 3.68 12-40 8 4.17 4.29 4.04 12-75 9 4.52 4.65 4.39 15-75 10 4.88 5.00 4.72 15-75 12 5.59 5.72 5.38 20-100 14 6.30 6.43 6.05 30-100 16 7.01 7.14 6.76 30-200 18 7.72 7.85 7.47 30-200 20 8.43 8.56 8.18 30-200 24 9.86 9.98 9.60 30-200 Note 1— Preferred lengths - 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25,30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175 and 200 mm Note 2 – Threaded portion of the screw shall nearly be equalto 2/3 times the total ",
      "Designation": "As an example, a slotted countersunk head wood screw No. 8, length 20 mm and made of steel shall be designated as `Wood Screw No. 8×20 – IS 6760 Steel’. Note – In regard to the requirements not covered in the standard, Refer to IS 451 : 1999 Technical supply conditions for wood screws (third revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 6739: 1972 Slotted Round Head Wood Screws\n1. Scope – Requirements for slotted round head wood screws.\n2.\nDimensions (in mm) No. Dia of Unthreaded Shank Range of\nScrew Preferred\nDesignation) Nom\nMax\nMin\nLengths (See Note1) 0\n1.52\n1.55\n1.47\n8-12 1\n1.78\n1.85\n1.70\n8-12 2\n2.08\n2.16\n1.98\n8-12 3\n2.39\n2.46\n2.29\n8-12 4\n2.74\n2.87\n2.64\n12-25 5\n3.10\n3.23\n2.97\n12-30 6\n3.45\n3.58\n3.33\n12-40 7\n3.81\n3.94\n3.68\n12-40 8\n4.17\n4.29\n4.04\n12-75 9\n4.52\n4.65\n4.39\n15-75\n10\n4.88\n5.00\n4.72\n15-75\n12\n5.59\n5.72\n5.38\n20-75\n14\n6.30\n6.43\n6.05\n25-75\n16\n7.01\n7.14\n6.76\n30-75\n18\n7.72\n7.85\n7.47\n30-75\n20\n8.43\n8.56\n8.18\n30-75\n24\n9.86\n9.98\n9.60\n30-75\nNote 1— Preferred lengths - 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40,\n45, 50, 55, 60,65, 70 and 75 mm\nNote 2— Threaded portion of the screw shall nearly be equal to\n2/3 times the total length of the screw.\nNote 3— Dia of head (Max) shall be 2 times the diameter of\nunthreaded shank (Nom).\nNote 4— For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1of the\nstandard.\nNote 5— For tolerances, see Fig 1 of thestandard.\n3.\nDesignation – As an example, a slotted round head wood screw No. 8, length 20 mm and made of steel shall\nbe designated as `Wood Screw No. 8×20 – IS 6739\nSteel’.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6739 : 1972 Specification for slotted round head wood screws.\nNote – In regard to the requirements not covered in the standard, Refer to IS 451 : 1999. Technical supply conditions for wood\nscrews (third revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 6760 : 1972 Specification for slotted countersunk wood screws.\n1.\nScope – Requirements for slotted countersunk head wood screws.\n2.\nDimensions (in mm)\nNo. Dia of Unthreaded\nRange of\nShank Preferred\n(Screw\nDesignation)\nNom\nMax\nMin\nLengths (See Note1) 0\n1.52\n1.55\n1.47\n8-12 1\n1.78\n1.85\n1.70\n8-12 2\n2.08\n2.16\n1.98\n8-12 3\n2.39\n2.46\n2.29\n8-12 4\n2.74\n2.87\n2.64\n12-25 5\n3.10\n3.23\n2.97\n12-30 6\n3.45\n3.58\n3.33\n12-40 7\n3.81\n3.94\n3.68\n12-40 8\n4.17\n4.29\n4.04\n12-75 9\n4.52\n4.65\n4.39\n15-75\n10\n4.88\n5.00\n4.72\n15-75\n12\n5.59\n5.72\n5.38\n20-100\n14\n6.30\n6.43\n6.05\n30-100\n16\n7.01\n7.14\n6.76\n30-200\n18\n7.72\n7.85\n7.47\n30-200\n20\n8.43\n8.56\n8.18\n30-200\n24\n9.86\n9.98\n9.60\n30-200\nNote 1— Preferred lengths - 8, 10, 12, 15, 20, 25,30, 35, 40,\n45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 85, 90, 95, 100, 110, 125, 150,\n175 and 200 mm\nNote 2 – Threaded portion of the screw shall nearly be equalto\n2/3 times the total length of the screw.\nNote 3 – Dia of head (Max) shall be 2 times the diameter of\nunthreaded shank (Nom).\nNote 4 – For detailed dimensions, refer to Table 1\nof the\nStandard\nNote 5 – For tolerances, see Fig 1 of the Standard.\n3.\nDesignation – As an example, a slotted countersunk head wood screw No. 8, length 20 mm and made of steel\nshall be designated as `Wood Screw No. 8×20 – IS\n6760 Steel’. Note – In regard to the requirements not covered in the standard, Refer to IS 451 : 1999 Technical supply conditions for\nwood screws (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6760: 1972",
    "title": "Slotted Countersunk Head Wood Screws",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements for washers with square hole for use in wood fastenings with bolts in dia range 6 to 24 mm.",
    "keywords": [
      "fastenings",
      "washers",
      "square",
      "hole",
      "side",
      "wood",
      "dia"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for washers with square hole for use in wood fastenings with bolts in dia range 6 to 24 mm.",
      "Grades": "Ordinary grade as specified in IS 5369 3. Dimensions (in mm) Size (Side of External Thickness Suitable of Internal Square) Dia / Side Bolt Size 6.6 22 1 M6 9 28 2 M8 11 34 2 M10 14 45 3.15 M12 18 58 4 M16 22 68 4 M20 26 92 4 M24"
    },
    "content": "IS 6760: 1972 Slotted Countersunk Head Wood Screws\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8033 : 1976 Specification for round washers with square hole for wood fastenings.\n1.\nScope – Requirements for washers with square hole for use in wood fastenings with bolts in dia range 6 to 24\nmm.\n2.\nGrade – Ordinary grade as specified in IS 5369\n3. Dimensions (in mm) Size (Side of External Thickness Suitable of Internal Square) Dia / Side Bolt Size\n6.6 22\n1 M6\n9 28\n2 M8\n11 34\n2 M10\n14 45\n3.15 M12\n18 58\n4 M16\n22 68\n4 M20 26 92\n4 M24"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8033: 1976",
    "title": "Washers With Square Hole For Wood Fastenings",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements of slotted countersunk head bolts for steel structures in the dia range 10 to 24 mm.",
    "keywords": [
      "countersunk",
      "slotted",
      "head",
      "bolts",
      "washers",
      "washer",
      "structures"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Designation": "As an example, a slotted countersunk head bolt of nominal size M16, length 70 mm with nut and property class 8.8 shall be designated as `Slotted Countersunk Head Bolt M16 × 70 N IS 8412— 8.8’. 4.1 When the bolts are required without nuts, the letter `N’ appearing between length and number of the standard in the designation shall be omitted.",
      "Scope": "Requirements of slotted countersunk head bolts for steel structures in the dia range 10 to 24 mm. 2. Dimensions (in mm) Nominal Nominal Dia Range of Preferred Size Lengths (See Note 1) M10 10 20-160 M12 12 25-160 M16 16 30-160 M20 20 50-160 M22 22 55-160 M24 24 60-160 Note 1– Preferred lengths – 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 65, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 130, 140, 150 and 160 mm. Note 2– For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to Table 1 of the Standard. Note 3 – For lengths of fully threaded bolts, refer to Table 2 of the Standard.",
      "Grades": "Black grade (B) as specified in the prescribed standard.",
      "Mechanical Properties": "Property classes 4.6 or 8.8 of the prescribed standard.",
      "General Requirements": "Nuts used with slotted countersunk head bolts shall conform to the requirements as specified in the prescribed standard."
    },
    "content": "IS 8033: 1976 Washers With Square Hole For Wood Fastenings\n4. Designation – As an example, a round washer with square hole of nominal size 14 mm shall be designated\nas `Washer With Square Hole 14 IS : 8033’. * General requirements for plain washers and lock washers\n(first revision)\nNote 1—Dimensional tolerances as well as tolerances for form\nand position shall conform to those of ordinary washers of\nIS 5369.\nNote 2— In regard to requirements not covered, refer to\nIS 5369. For detailed information, refer to IS 8412 : 1977 Specification for slotted countersunk head bolts for steel structures.\n1. Scope – Requirements of slotted countersunk head bolts for steel structures in the dia range 10 to 24 mm.\n2.\nDimensions (in mm)\nNominal Nominal Dia Range of Preferred\nSize Lengths (See Note 1) M10 10 20-160 M12 12 25-160 M16 16 30-160 M20 20 50-160 M22 22 55-160 M24 24 60-160\nNote 1– Preferred lengths – 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60,\n65, 70, 75, 80, 90, 100, 110,\n120, 130, 140, 150 and 160 mm.\nNote 2– For detailed dimensions and tolerances, refer to Table\n1 of the Standard.\nNote 3 – For lengths of fully threaded bolts, refer to Table 2 of\nthe Standard.\n3.\nGrade – Black grade (B) as specified in the prescribed standard.\n4.\nDesignation – As an example, a slotted countersunk head bolt of nominal size M16, length 70 mm with nut\nand property class 8.8 shall be designated as `Slotted\nCountersunk Head Bolt M16 × 70 N IS 8412— 8.8’.\n4.1 When the bolts are required without nuts, the letter\n`N’ appearing between length and number of the standard in the designation shall be omitted.\n5.\nMechanical Properties – Property classes 4.6 or\n8.8 of the prescribed standard.\n6.\nGeneral Requirements – Nuts used with slotted countersunk head bolts shall conform to the\nrequirements as specified in the prescribed standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8412: 1977",
    "title": "Slotted Countersunk Head Bolts For Steel Structures",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Requirements for washers for corrugated sheet roofing.",
    "keywords": [
      "washers",
      "felt",
      "bituminous",
      "types",
      "lead",
      "namely",
      "washer"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for washers for corrugated sheet roofing. 2. Types a) Bituminous felt washers, b) Steel washers, and c) Lead washers. 2.1 Bituminous felt washers and lead washers are of two types namely Type A and Type B, and steel washers are four types namely Type A, Type B, Type C and Type D. 3. Dimensions (in mm) Nominal Size Thickness Suitable (Dia of Hole) Bolt Size 7 1.6 M6 10 1.6 M8 12 1.6 M10 For detailed information, refer to IS 8869 : 1978 Specification for washers for corrugated sheet roofing. Note 1—The dimensions given in the above table shall be applicable to all types of washersmentioned in 2 and 2.1. Note 2— For detailed dimensions and shapes of washers of all types, refer to Tables 1 to 3 of the standard.",
      "Grades": "Ordinary grade specified in IS 5369.",
      "Designation": "As an example, a bituminous felt washer, Type A of nominal size 7 shall be designated as `Bituminous Felt Washer A7 – IS 8869. 6. General Requirements 6.1 Steel washers shall be galvanized by hot dipping. 6.2 Bituminous felt washers shall be suitably impregnated. These washers when heated and maintained at a temperature of 75 ± 10C for 1 hour shall not get separated and flow out. * General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 8412: 1977 Slotted Countersunk Head Bolts For Steel Structures\n1.\nScope – Requirements for washers for corrugated sheet roofing.\n2.\nTypes a) Bituminous felt washers,\nb) Steel washers, and c) Lead washers.\n2.1 Bituminous felt washers and lead washers are of\ntwo types namely Type A and Type B, and steel washers are four types namely Type A, Type B, Type C and Type\nD.\n3.\nDimensions (in mm) Nominal Size Thickness Suitable (Dia of Hole) Bolt Size\n7 1.6\nM6 10 1.6 M8 12 1.6 M10\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8869 : 1978 Specification for washers for corrugated sheet roofing. Note 1—The dimensions given in the above table shall be\napplicable to all types of washersmentioned in 2 and 2.1.\nNote 2— For detailed dimensions and shapes of washers of all\ntypes, refer to Tables 1 to 3 of the standard. 4. Grade – Ordinary grade specified in IS 5369.\n5. Designation – As an example, a bituminous felt washer, Type A of nominal size 7 shall be designated as\n`Bituminous Felt Washer A7 – IS 8869.\n6.\nGeneral Requirements\n6.1 Steel washers shall be galvanized by hot dipping.\n6.2 Bituminous felt washers shall be suitably\nimpregnated. These washers when heated and maintained at a temperature of 75 ± 10C for 1 hour shall\nnot get separated and flow out.\n* General requirements for plain washers and lock washers (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8869: 1978",
    "title": "Washers For Corrugated Sheet Roofing",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Washers For Corrugated Sheet Roofing",
    "keywords": [
      "washers",
      "corrugated",
      "sheet",
      "roofing"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 8869: 1978 Washers For Corrugated Sheet Roofing\n"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10238: 2001",
    "title": "Fasteners – Threaded Steel",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "FASTENERS – STEP BOLT FOR STEEL STRUCTURES (First Revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 10238 : 2001 Specification for Fasteners – Threaded steel fasteners – Step bolt for steel structures. 1. Scope 1.1 Covers the requirements for step bolt used in steel structures including transmission towers to gain access to the top. 1.2 Each bolt shall be supplied with two hexagon nuts. 2. Dimensions and Tolerances – Shall be as given in figure 1 of the standard. 3. Grades – The step bolts shall b",
    "keywords": [
      "step",
      "bolts",
      "washers",
      "nuts",
      "fasteners",
      "bolt",
      "hexagon"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Dimensions And Tolerances": "Shall be as given in figure 1 of the standard.",
      "Grades": "The step bolts shall be of product Grade C as specified in IS 1367 (Part 2)+",
      "Mechanical Properties": "The step bolts shall conform to the requirements of property class 4.6 as specified in IS1367 (Part 3)++ 5. Mating Nuts and Washers 5.1 Nuts – The hexagon nuts used with step bolts covered in this standard shall be of property class 5 and conforms to the requirements of the prescribed standard. 5.2 Washers – The plain washers used on these bolts shall be of Type A punched washers type and conform to the requirements given in the prescribed standard except the thickness of washers which shall be 5 ± 1mm. The washers supplied along with bolts shall shall be hot-dip galvanized",
      "General Requirements": "The permissible surface discontinuities of the step bolts shall conform to IS 1367(Part 9/Sec2).* 7. Finish 7.1 The step bolts shall be galvanized in accordance with IS1367(Part13)* 8. Tests 8.1 The step bolts shall not have any permanent set when subjected to the cantilever test as shown in Fig. 2 of the standard.",
      "Designation": "The step bolts shall be designated by the size, length and the number of this Indian Standard. The letter NN shall be added to the designation to indicate supply with two nuts. Example – A step bolt of size M16 and length 175mm with two hexagon nuts shall be designated as – Step bolts M16×175 NN IS 10238 + Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners"
    },
    "content": "IS 10238: 2001 Fasteners – Threaded Steel\nFASTENERS – STEP BOLT FOR STEEL STRUCTURES\n(First Revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 10238 : 2001 Specification for Fasteners – Threaded steel fasteners – Step bolt for steel structures.\n1. Scope\n1.1 Covers the requirements for step bolt used in steel\nstructures including transmission towers to gain access to the top.\n1.2 Each bolt shall be supplied with two hexagon nuts.\n2.\nDimensions and Tolerances – Shall be as given in figure 1 of the standard.\n3.\nGrades – The step bolts shall be of product Grade C as specified in IS 1367 (Part 2)+\n4.\nMechanical Properties – The step bolts shall conform to the requirements of property class 4.6 as\nspecified in IS1367 (Part 3)++\n5.\nMating Nuts and Washers\n5.1 Nuts – The hexagon nuts used with step bolts\ncovered in this standard shall be of property class 5 and conforms to the requirements of the prescribed standard.\n5.2 Washers – The plain washers used on these bolts\nshall be of Type A punched washers type and conform to the requirements given in the prescribed standard\nexcept the thickness of washers which shall be 5 ± 1mm.\nThe washers supplied along with bolts shall shall be hot-dip galvanized\n6. General Requirements –The permissible surface discontinuities of the step bolts shall conform to\nIS 1367(Part 9/Sec2).*\n7.\nFinish\n7.1 The step bolts shall be galvanized in accordance\nwith IS1367(Part13)*\n8.\nTests\n8.1 The step bolts shall not have any permanent set\nwhen subjected to the cantilever test as shown in Fig.\n2 of the standard.\n9.\nDesignation – The step bolts shall be designated by the size, length and the number of this Indian\nStandard. The letter NN shall be added to the designation to indicate supply with two nuts.\nExample – A step bolt of size M16 and length 175mm with two hexagon nuts shall be designated as – Step\nbolts M16×175 NN IS 10238\n+ Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12427: 2001",
    "title": "Fasteners – Threaded Steel",
    "category": "Threaded Fasteners and Rivets",
    "summary": "Covers the requirements for hot-dip galvanized hexagon head transmission tower bolts in the size range M12 to 24 for use in the construction of transmission towers, sub-stations and similar steel structures 1.1 The bolts covered in this standard are not suitable for applications requiring improved low temperatures characteristics.",
    "keywords": [
      "bolts",
      "tower",
      "transmission",
      "washers",
      "property",
      "galvanized",
      "fasteners"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers the requirements for hot-dip galvanized hexagon head transmission tower bolts in the size range M12 to 24 for use in the construction of transmission towers, sub-stations and similar steel structures 1.1 The bolts covered in this standard are not suitable for applications requiring improved low temperatures characteristics. 2. Dimensions 2.1 The dimensions of the bolts shall be as given in Table 1 when read with Fig 1. of the standard. 2.2 The length-size combinations as well as grip ranges shall be as given in Table 2 of the standard.",
      "Grades": "Unless otherwise specified, the bolts shall be of product grade ‘C’ as specified in IS 1367 (Part 2) * 4. Mating Nuts and Washers 4.1 Nuts—The hexagon nuts used with these bolts shall conform to the requirements given in IS 14394. 4.2 Washers 4.2.1 The plain washers used with these bolts shall be of type A, punched washer type and shall conform to the requirements of the prescribed standard to except the thickness of the washer which shall be 5 ± 1 m m. The washers supplied along with these bolts shall be hot-dip galvanised. 5. Mechanical Properties 5.1 The bolts shall be of property class 5.6, 5.8 or 8.8 as specified in IS : 1367 (Part 3)* and shall be tested full size. 5.2 Shear Strength 5.2.1 The Bolts with shank lengths ls more than the nominal diameter shall withstand a minimum shear ",
      "General Requirements": "The permissible surface discontinuities of the bolts shall conform to IS 1367 (Part 9/sec 1) *",
      "Designation": "The bolts shall be designated by nomenclature, thread size, nominal length, number of this standard and property class.. The letters N and W shall be added to the designation to indicate supply with nut and plain wsher respectively. Example – A transmission tower bolt of thread size M16 and nominal length 50mm with nut and property class 5.6 shall be designated as—Transmission Tower Bolts M16 × 50 N– 5.6 IS 12427. A transmission tower bolt of thread size M16, nominal length 50mm, property class 5.6 with nut and plain washers shall be designated as: Transmission Tower Bolt M16× 50NW—5.6 IS 12427. For detailed information, refer to IS 12427 : 2001 Specification for fasteners – Threaded steel fasteners hexagon head transmissiom tower bolts (first revision). *Technical supply conditions for th"
    },
    "content": "IS 12427: 2001 Fasteners – Threaded Steel\nFASTENERS – HEXAGON HEAD TRANSMISSION TOWER BOLTS\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Covers the requirements for hot-dip galvanized hexagon head transmission tower bolts in\nthe size range M12 to 24 for use in the construction of transmission towers, sub-stations and similar steel\nstructures\n1.1 The bolts covered in this standard are not suitable\nfor applications requiring improved low temperatures characteristics.\n2.\nDimensions\n2.1 The dimensions of the bolts shall be as given in\nTable 1 when read with Fig 1. of the standard.\n2.2 The length-size combinations as well as grip ranges\nshall be as given in Table 2 of the standard.\n3.\nGrades – Unless otherwise specified, the bolts shall be of product grade ‘C’ as specified in IS 1367\n(Part 2) *\n4.\nMating Nuts and Washers\n4.1 Nuts—The hexagon nuts used with these bolts shall\nconform to the requirements given in IS 14394.\n4.2 Washers 4.2.1 The plain washers used with these bolts shall be of type A, punched washer type and shall conform\nto the requirements of the prescribed standard to except the thickness of the washer which shall be 5 ± 1 m m.\nThe washers supplied along with these bolts shall be hot-dip galvanised.\n5.\nMechanical Properties\n5.1 The bolts shall be of property class 5.6, 5.8 or 8.8 as\nspecified in IS : 1367 (Part 3)* and shall be tested full size.\n5.2 Shear Strength 5.2.1 The Bolts with shank lengths ls more than the nominal diameter shall withstand a minimum shear stress\nas given below– Property Class Minimum Shear Stress\n(MPa) 5.6\n310 5.8\n322 8.8\n515\n6.\nFinish\n6.1 The bolts and nuts shall be hot-dip galvanized in\naccordance with the requirements of IS 1367 (Part13)*\n7.\nGeneral Requirements – The permissible surface discontinuities of the bolts shall conform to IS 1367\n(Part 9/sec 1) *\n8.\nDesignation – The bolts shall be designated by nomenclature, thread size, nominal length, number of\nthis standard and property class.. The letters N and W shall be added to the designation to indicate supply\nwith nut and plain wsher respectively.\nExample – A transmission tower bolt of thread size M16 and nominal length 50mm with nut and property class\n5.6 shall be designated as—Transmission Tower Bolts\nM16 × 50 N– 5.6 IS 12427.\nA transmission tower bolt of thread size M16, nominal length 50mm, property class 5.6 with nut and plain\nwashers shall be designated as:\nTransmission Tower Bolt M16× 50NW—5.6 IS 12427.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12427 : 2001 Specification for fasteners – Threaded steel fasteners hexagon head transmissiom tower bolts (first revision).\n*Technical supply conditions for threaded steel fasteners SECTION 20\nWIRES ROPES AND WIRE PRODUCTS CONTENTS\nTitle\nPage\nIS\n278 : 1978\nGalvanized steel barbed wire for fencing (third revision)\n20.3\nIS\n2140 : 1978\nStranded galvanized steel wire for fencing (first revision)\n20.4\nIS\n2365 : 1977\nSteel wire suspension ropes for lifts, elevators, and hoist (first revision)\n20.5\nIS\n2721 : 2003\nGalvanized steel chain link fence fabric (first revision)\n20.6"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 278: 1978",
    "title": "Galvanized Steel Barbed Wire For Fencing",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "summary": "Requirements for two types of galvanized steel barbed wire with two strands of wire.",
    "keywords": [
      "wire",
      "barbed",
      "line",
      "turns",
      "barbs",
      "wires",
      "galvanized"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for two types of galvanized steel barbed wire with two strands of wire.",
      "Types": "2.1 Types A (Iowa Type) – Barbs shall have 4 points, formed by twisting two point wires, each two turns, tightly around both line wires making altogether four complete turns. 2.2 Types B (Glidden Type) — Barbs shall have 4 points, formed by twisting two point wires, each two turns, tightly around one line wire making altogether four complete turns. Note — For details, see Fig. 1 of the standard. 3. Sizes (in mm) Sizes Nominal Diameter Mass of Distance Desig- Complete Between nation Line Point Barbed Two Wire Wire Wire Barbs g/m 1. 2.50 2.50 136-155 75±12 2. 2.50 2.50 108-120 150±12 3. 2.50 2.00 108-125 75±12 4. 2.50 2.00 89-103 150±12 5. 2.24 2.00 97-106 75±12 6. 2.24 2.00 78-85 150±12 Note – Number of lays between the two consecutive barbs shall vary between 2 to 7. 3.1 Tolerances – ± 0.0",
      "Materials": "Galvanized mild steel wire conforming to IS 280 : 1978.* * Mild steel wire for general engineering purposes (third revision) Note – For methods of tests refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals–tensile testing (second revision), IS 1755 : 1983 Method for wrapping test of mettalic wire (first revision) and IS 4826 : 1979 Hot-dipped galvanized coatings on round steel wires (first revision). For detailed infomation, refer to IS 278 : 1978 Specifications for galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing. (third revision). 4.2 Freedom from Defects 4.2.1 Line and point wires shall be circular in section, free from scales and other defects and shall be uniformly galvanized. 4.2.2 Line wire shall be in continuous lengths and shall not contain any welds other than those in rod before it is d",
      "Designation": "A galvanized steel barbed wire of Type A and of size designation 1 shall be designated as: Steel Barbed Wire, A-1 IS 278 6. Tests 6.1 Tensile Test – Tensile strength of line wire shall be 390 to 590 N/mm2. Minimum breaking loads of completed barbed wire and individual line wires shall be 3.7 and 3.0 kN for 2.50 and 2.24 line wire respectively. 6.2 Zinc Coating – 6.2.1 Line wire – Shall satisfy the requirements as for minimum medium coated wire given in IS 4826 : 1979†. subject to a reduction of not more than 15 percent of the specified values. 6.3 Ductility Test – Line wire shall withstand wrapping and unwrapping eight turns round its own diameter without fracture. † Hot-dipped galvanized coatings on round steel wires (first revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 278: 1978 Galvanized Steel Barbed Wire For Fencing\n(Third Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements for two types of galvanized steel barbed wire with two strands of wire.\n2.\nTypes –\n2.1 Types A (Iowa Type) – Barbs shall have 4 points,\nformed by twisting two point wires, each two turns, tightly around both line wires making altogether four\ncomplete turns.\n2.2 Types B (Glidden Type) — Barbs shall have 4\npoints, formed by twisting two point wires, each two turns, tightly around one line wire making altogether\nfour complete turns.\nNote — For details, see Fig. 1 of the standard.\n3.\nSizes (in mm)\nSizes\nNominal Diameter\nMass of\nDistance\nDesig-\nComplete\nBetween nation\nLine\nPoint\nBarbed\nTwo\nWire\nWire\nWire\nBarbs g/m\n1. 2.50 2.50 136-155 75±12\n2. 2.50 2.50 108-120 150±12\n3. 2.50 2.00 108-125 75±12\n4. 2.50 2.00 89-103 150±12\n5. 2.24 2.00 97-106 75±12\n6. 2.24 2.00 78-85 150±12\nNote – Number of lays between the two consecutive barbs shall\nvary between 2 to 7.\n3.1 Tolerances – ± 0.08 mm on diameter of line wire and\npoint wire.\n4.\nRequirements\n4.1. Material — Galvanized mild steel wire conforming to IS 280 : 1978.*\n* Mild steel wire for general engineering purposes\n(third revision)\nNote – For methods of tests refer to IS 1608 : 1995 Mechanical testing of metals–tensile testing (second revision), IS 1755 :\n1983 Method for wrapping test of mettalic wire (first revision) and IS 4826 : 1979 Hot-dipped galvanized coatings on round steel\nwires (first revision).\nFor detailed infomation, refer to IS 278 : 1978 Specifications for galvanized steel barbed wire for fencing. (third revision).\n4.2 Freedom from Defects\n4.2.1 Line and point wires shall be circular in section, free from scales and other defects and shall be uniformly\ngalvanized.\n4.2.2\nLine wire shall be in continuous lengths and shall not contain any welds other than those in rod before it\nis drawn. The distance between two successive weldings in the line of finished barbed wire shall not be\nless than 15 m.\nNote —\nFor requirements in regard to manufacture, galvanizing and chromating, refer to 6 and 7 of the standard.\n5.\nDesignation – A galvanized steel barbed wire of\nType A and of size designation 1 shall be designated as:\nSteel Barbed Wire, A-1 IS 278\n6.\nTests\n6.1 Tensile Test – Tensile strength of line wire shall be\n390 to 590 N/mm2. Minimum breaking loads of completed barbed wire and individual line wires shall be 3.7 and\n3.0 kN for 2.50 and 2.24 line wire respectively.\n6.2 Zinc Coating –\n6.2.1\nLine wire – Shall satisfy the requirements as for minimum medium coated wire given in IS 4826 : 1979†.\nsubject to a reduction of not more than 15 percent of the specified values.\n6.3 Ductility Test – Line wire shall withstand wrapping\nand unwrapping eight turns round its own diameter without fracture.\n† Hot-dipped galvanized coatings on round steel wires\n(first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2140: 1978",
    "title": "Stranded Galvanized Steel Wire For Fencing",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "summary": "Requirements for galvanized strand fencing wire of 3-ply and 7-ply construction. For detailed information, refer to IS 2140 : 1978 Specifications for stranded galvanized steel wire for fencing (first revision).",
    "keywords": [
      "strand",
      "lay",
      "wire",
      "breaking",
      "completed",
      "ply",
      "load"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for galvanized strand fencing wire of 3-ply and 7-ply construction. For detailed information, refer to IS 2140 : 1978 Specifications for stranded galvanized steel wire for fencing (first revision). 2. Dimensions 2.1 Wire Strand, 3-Ply Construction Nominal Dia Minimum Breaking Load Length of Tolerance on of Single Wire Lay Length of Lay SingleWire Completed 540 N/mm2 Strand* mm N N mm mm 1.60 1080 3078 40 ±10 2.24 2160 6156 50 ±10 2.50 2700 7695 60 ±10 2.80 3240 9234 60 ±10 3.15 4320 12312 70 ±10 3.55 5400 15390 80 ±10 *The minimum breaking load of the completed strand is 95 percent of the minimum aggregate breaking load. 2.2. Wire Strand, 7- Ply Construction Nominal Dia Minimum Breaking Load Length of Tolerance on of Single Wire Lay Length of Lay SingleWire Completed 540 N/mm2",
      "Materials": "3.1 Shall be manufactured from galvanized mild steel wire conforming to IS 280 : 1978*. The wire shall have a tensile strength of 540 N/mm2, Min. 3.2 The galvanized Mild steel wire used shall conform to the requirements for galvanizing as laid down for the’ heavily- coated wire’ or ‘ medium coated wire as per the prescribed standard. * Mild steel wire for general engineering purposes (third revision).",
      "Lay": "Shall be right-hand. The strand shall be evenly and uniformly laid . The length of the lay shall be as specified in 2.1 and 2.2.",
      "Freedom From Defects": "Shall be free from scale, irregularities,imperfections, flaws, sand- spilts and other defects. The galvanizing shall be smooth, even and bright. 6. Tests 6.1 Minimum Breaking Load — As given in 2.1 and 2.2"
    },
    "content": "IS 2140: 1978 Stranded Galvanized Steel Wire For Fencing\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements for galvanized strand fencing wire of 3-ply and 7-ply construction.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2140 : 1978 Specifications for stranded galvanized steel wire for fencing\n(first revision).\n2.\nDimensions\n2.1 Wire Strand, 3-Ply Construction\nNominal Dia\nMinimum Breaking Load\nLength of\nTolerance on of Single Wire\nLay\nLength of Lay\nSingleWire\nCompleted\n540 N/mm2\nStrand* mm N N\nmm mm\n1.60 1080\n3078\n40\n±10\n2.24 2160\n6156\n50\n±10\n2.50 2700\n7695\n60\n±10\n2.80 3240\n9234\n60\n±10\n3.15 4320\n12312\n70\n±10\n3.55 5400\n15390\n80\n±10\n*The minimum breaking load of the completed strand is 95 percent of the minimum aggregate breaking load.\n2.2. Wire Strand, 7- Ply Construction\nNominal Dia\nMinimum Breaking Load\nLength of\nTolerance on of Single Wire\nLay\nLength of Lay\nSingleWire\nCompleted\n540 N/mm2\nStrand ** mm\nN N\nmm mm\n0.50\n135 898 40\n±10\n0.80\n270 1796 50\n±10\n1.25\n735 4888 60\n±10\n1.60\n1080 7182 60\n±10\n2.24\n2160\n14362 70\n±10\n2.50\n2700\n17955 80\n±10\n2.80\n3240\n21546 80\n±10\n3.15\n4320\n28728 90\n±10\n3.55\n5400\n35910\n100\n±10\n**The minimum breaking load of the completed strand is 95 percent of the minimum aggregate breaking load.\n3.\nMaterial –\n3.1 Shall be manufactured from galvanized mild steel wire\nconforming to IS 280 : 1978*. The wire shall have a tensile strength of 540 N/mm2, Min.\n3.2 The galvanized Mild steel wire used shall conform to\nthe requirements for galvanizing as laid down for the’ heavily- coated wire’ or ‘ medium coated wire as per the\nprescribed standard.\n* Mild steel wire for general engineering purposes (third revision).\n4.\nLay – Shall be right-hand. The strand shall be evenly and uniformly laid . The length of the lay shall be as\nspecified in 2.1 and 2.2.\n5.\nFreedom from Defects – Shall be free from scale, irregularities,imperfections, flaws, sand- spilts and other\ndefects. The galvanizing shall be smooth, even and bright.\n6.\nTests\n6.1 Minimum Breaking Load — As given in 2.1 and 2.2"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2365: 1977",
    "title": "Steel Wire Suspension Ropes For Lifts, Elevators And Hoists",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "summary": "Requirements of steel wire ropes for use with lifts, elevators and hoists having cars or platforms carrying passengers or goods and working in guides. Does not apply to ropes used for winding purposes in mines. Following rope constructions and size ranges are covered: Nominal Approximate Range of Minimum Breaking Load Corresponsing Diameter Mass Range to Tensile Designation of Wires of mm kg/100m 1230 1420 1570 kN kN kN 6 12.5 t o 13.7 13.6 t o 15 15.7 t o 17.3 17.4 to 19.1 7 17.0 t o 18.6 18.5 ",
    "keywords": [
      "rope",
      "ropes",
      "hoists",
      "breaking",
      "lifts",
      "elevators",
      "range"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of steel wire ropes for use with lifts, elevators and hoists having cars or platforms carrying passengers or goods and working in guides. Does not apply to ropes used for winding purposes in mines. Following rope constructions and size ranges are covered: Nominal Approximate Range of Minimum Breaking Load Corresponsing Diameter Mass Range to Tensile Designation of Wires of mm kg/100m 1230 1420 1570 kN kN kN 6 12.5 t o 13.7 13.6 t o 15 15.7 t o 17.3 17.4 to 19.1 7 17.0 t o 18.6 18.5 t o 20.4 21 t o 23 24 t o 26 8 22.1 t o 24.3 23 t o 27 26 t 31 29 t o 34 9 28.0 t o 30.8 29 t o 34 33 t o 39 37 t o 43 10 34.6 t o 38.0 35 t o 42 41 t o 48 45 t o 53 11 41.9 t o 46.0 43 t o 50 49 t o 58 55 t o 64 12 49.8 t o 54.7 51 t o 60 59 t o 69 65 t o 76 13 58.9 t o 64.3 60 t o 70 69 t o 81 76 ",
      "General Requirements": "The wire ropes shall conform to IS 6594 : 1977* and also meet the following requirements of 3.1 to 3.3. * Technical supply conditions for wire ropes and strands (first revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 2365: 1977 Steel Wire Suspension Ropes For Lifts, Elevators And Hoists\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements of steel wire ropes for use with lifts, elevators and hoists having cars or platforms\ncarrying passengers or goods and working in guides.\nDoes not apply to ropes used for winding purposes in mines. Following rope constructions and size ranges\nare covered:\nNominal\nApproximate\nRange of Minimum Breaking Load Corresponsing\nDiameter\nMass Range to Tensile Designation of Wires of\nmm kg/100m\n1230\n1420\n1570 kN\nkN kN\n6\n12.5 t o\n13.7\n13.6 t o\n15\n15.7 t o\n17.3\n17.4 to\n19.1\n7\n17.0 t o\n18.6\n18.5 t o\n20.4\n21 t o\n23\n24 t o\n26\n8\n22.1 t o\n24.3\n23 t o\n27\n26 t\n31\n29 t o\n34\n9\n28.0 t o\n30.8\n29 t o\n34\n33 t o\n39\n37 t o\n43\n10\n34.6 t o\n38.0\n35 t o\n42\n41 t o\n48\n45 t o\n53\n11\n41.9 t o\n46.0\n43 t o\n50\n49 t o\n58\n55 t o 64\n12\n49.8 t o\n54.7\n51 t o\n60\n59 t o\n69\n65 t o\n76\n13\n58.9 t o\n64.3\n60 t o 70\n69 t o\n81\n76 t o 90\n14\n68.3 t o\n74.5\n69 t o\n81\n80 t o\n94\n88 t o\n104\n16\n89.2 t o\n97.3\n90 t o\n106\n104 t o\n123\n115 t o\n136\n18\n113 t o\n123\n114 t o\n135\n132 t o\n155\n146 t o\n172\n19\n126 t o\n137\n127 t o\n150\n147 t o\n173\n161 t o\n191\n20\n139 t o\n152\n141 t o\n166\n163 t o\n192\n180 t o\n212\nNote 1–The nominal diameter 19 mm is non-preferred.\nNote 2–For exact value of minimum breaking load and approximate mass corresponding to each rope construction. refer to\nTables 1 to 5 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2365 : 1977 Specifications for steel wire suspension ropes for lifts, elevators and hoists (first revision) Construction\nTensile Disignation\nCore\nSize Range\n1230 1420 1570 Fibre Steel mm 6×19(12/6/1) ×\n×\n×\n× --\n6 to 12 6×19(9/9/1) ×\n×\n×\n× --\n6 to 20 6×19(12/6+6F/1) ×\n×\n×\n× --\n6 to 20 8×19(9/9/1) ×\n×\n×\n× --\n8 to 20 8×19(12/6+6 F/1) ×\n×\n×\n× --\n8 to 20\n2.\nRope Size, Tolerance and Minimum Breaking load\n2.1 The sizes of the rope, designated as ‘nominal\ndiameter’ shall be 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16, 18, 19 and\n20 mm. Size range of breaking load and mass for different rope construction is given below:\n3.1 The main core of rope shall be of fibre only.\n3.2 If jointing by tucking is required, it shall be in case\nof wires 0.5 mm diameter and smaller.\n3.3 The mass of ropes given in 2.1 are for fully greased\nropes.\n2.2 The actual diameter of rope shall be within +4 and-\n1 percent of the nominal diameter.\n3.\nGeneral Requirements – The wire ropes shall conform to IS 6594 : 1977* and also meet the following\nrequirements of 3.1 to 3.3. * Technical supply conditions for wire ropes and strands\n(first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2721: 1979",
    "title": "Galvanized Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric",
    "category": "Wire Ropes and Wire Products",
    "summary": "Requirements for galvanized steel chain fence fabric intended for various purposes. This standard does not cover the requirements pertaining to straining posts, struts, base plates and other fittings. *Mild steel wire for general engineering purposes (third revision)",
    "keywords": [
      "mesh",
      "fabric",
      "wire",
      "line",
      "fence",
      "glass",
      "chain"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for galvanized steel chain fence fabric intended for various purposes. This standard does not cover the requirements pertaining to straining posts, struts, base plates and other fittings. *Mild steel wire for general engineering purposes (third revision)",
      "Dimensions": "See Table 2.1 Mesh Size – Shall be determined by measuring the minimum clear distance between the wires forming the parallel sizes of the mesh when measured in normal structured condition. 2.2 Width – Shall be the overall dimension from one extreme line wire to other extreme line wire and shall be checked in fully stretched condition. The tolerance on the width shall be ± 0.7 of the mesh size. 2.3 Length – Shall be supplied in rolls of 5, 10, 15,20, and 25m or as per the requirements of the purchaser The supplied length shall not be less than the above values when measured in fully stretched condition. 2.4 Tolerances – As per IS 280 *",
      "Materials": "The mesh wire and the line wire of the fabric shall be manufactured from galvanized steel conforming to IS 280* having a tensile strength within the range of 400 to 550 MPa.",
      "Galvanizing": "The chain link fence fabric shall have zinc coating of type ‘ heavy’ as given in the prescribed standards.",
      "Workmanship And Finish": "Each roll shall be warranted to contain no weld joint or splice whatever. The wire shall be circular and shall be free from scales, irregularities, imperfections, flaws, sand splits and other defects. The zinc coating shall be smooth, even and bright. 5.1 The fabric shall be manufactured in widths of 0.90 m, 1.20m, 1.50 m, 1.80 m, 2.00 m, 2.50, and 3.00 m, or as per the requirements of the purchaser. Table 1 Dimensions and Tolerances Mesh Nominal Line Wire Size Dia of Mesh Wire Diameter Number of wires mm mm mm Up to and Above 2 m including width 2 m width (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) 2.00 2.50 2 3 25 ± 3 2.50 3.15 2 3 3.15 4.00 2 5 2.00 2.50 2 3 40 ± 4 2.50 3.15 2 3 3.15 4.00 2 3 4.00 4.50 2 3 2.00 2.50 2 3 50 ± 4 2.50 3.15 2 3 3.15 4.00 2 3 4.00 4.50 2 3 3.15 4.00 2 3 63 ± 4 4.00 4.50 2 3 4.50 5.",
      "Tests": "6.1 Tensile Test – Tensile strength shall be within the range of 400 to 550 N/mm2. 6.2 Wrapping Test – Wires shall not break or split when wrapped eight times round its own diameter and subsequently straightened. 6.3 Twist Test – Mesh and line wires shall withstand not less than 18 twists on a length equal to 100 diameters between rices. 6.4 Bend test– Mesh wire and line wire of 5 mm diameter and above shall be subjected to this test. The wire shall withstand being bent through an angle of 900 round a former of diameter equal to twice its own diameter without breaking or splitting. 6.5 Galvanizing Test – Shall be up to 10 percent less than the minimum mass of zinc coating specified in the prescribed standard and withstand one dip of half minute duration less than specified. For detailed in"
    },
    "content": "IS 2721: 1979 Galvanized Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements for galvanized steel chain fence fabric intended for various purposes. This\nstandard does not cover the requirements pertaining to straining posts, struts, base plates and other fittings.\n*Mild steel wire for general engineering purposes\n(third revision) 2. Dimensions – See Table\n2.1 Mesh Size – Shall be determined by measuring the\nminimum clear distance between the wires forming the parallel sizes of the mesh when measured in normal\nstructured condition.\n2.2 Width – Shall be the overall dimension from one\nextreme line wire to other extreme line wire and shall be checked in fully stretched condition. The tolerance on\nthe width shall be ± 0.7 of the mesh size.\n2.3 Length – Shall be supplied in rolls of 5, 10, 15,20,\nand 25m or as per the requirements of the purchaser\nThe supplied length shall not be less than the above values when measured in fully stretched condition.\n2.4 Tolerances – As per IS 280 *\n3.\nMaterial – The mesh wire and the line wire of the fabric shall be manufactured from galvanized steel\nconforming to IS 280* having a tensile strength within the range of 400 to 550 MPa.\n4.\nGalvanizing – The chain link fence fabric shall have zinc coating of type ‘ heavy’ as given in the prescribed\nstandards.\n5.\nWorkmanship and Finish – Each roll shall be warranted to contain no weld joint or splice whatever.\nThe wire shall be circular and shall be free from scales, irregularities, imperfections, flaws, sand splits and other\ndefects. The zinc coating shall be smooth, even and bright.\n5.1 The fabric shall be manufactured in widths of 0.90\nm, 1.20m, 1.50 m, 1.80 m, 2.00 m, 2.50, and 3.00 m, or as per the requirements of the purchaser.\nTable 1 Dimensions and Tolerances\nMesh\nNominal Line Wire\nSize\nDia of\nMesh Wire\nDiameter Number of wires mm\nmm mm\nUp to and Above 2 m including\nwidth\n2 m width\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n2.00\n2.50\n2\n3\n25 ± 3\n2.50\n3.15\n2\n3\n3.15\n4.00\n2\n5\n2.00\n2.50\n2\n3\n40 ± 4\n2.50\n3.15\n2\n3\n3.15\n4.00\n2\n3\n4.00\n4.50\n2\n3\n2.00\n2.50\n2\n3\n50 ± 4\n2.50\n3.15\n2\n3\n3.15\n4.00\n2\n3\n4.00\n4.50\n2\n3\n3.15\n4.00\n2\n3\n63 ± 4\n4.00\n4.50\n2\n3\n4.50\n5.00\n2\n3\n3.15\n4.00\n2\n3\n75 ± 4\n4.00\n4.50\n2\n3\n4.50\n5.00\n2\n3\n5.00\n5.50\n2\n3\n3.15\n4.00\n2\n3\n100 ± 5\n4.00\n4.50\n2\n3\n4.50\n5.00\n2\n3\n5.00\n5.50\n2\n3\n125 ± 5\n4.00\n4.50\n2\n3\n4.50\n5.00\n2\n3\n5.00\n5.50\n2\n3\n150 ± 5\n4.00\n4.50\n2\n3\n4.50\n5.00\n2\n3\n5.00\n5.50\n2\n3 Note – Sizes other than those mentinoed above shall be\nsupplied subject to agreement between the purchaser and the manufacturer. 6.\nTest –\n6.1 Tensile Test – Tensile strength shall be within the\nrange of 400 to 550 N/mm2.\n6.2 Wrapping Test – Wires shall not break or split when\nwrapped eight times round its own diameter and subsequently straightened.\n6.3 Twist Test – Mesh and line wires shall withstand\nnot less than 18 twists on a length equal to 100 diameters between rices.\n6.4 Bend test– Mesh wire and line wire of 5 mm diameter\nand above shall be subjected to this test. The wire shall withstand being bent through an angle of 900 round a\nformer of diameter equal to twice its own diameter without breaking or splitting.\n6.5 Galvanizing Test – Shall be up to 10 percent less\nthan the minimum mass of zinc coating specified in the prescribed standard and withstand one dip of half minute\nduration less than specified.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2721 : 1979 Specifications for galvanized steel chain link fence fabric (first revision).\nfor details of tests for fabric refer to cl.9. of the standard SECTION 21\nGLASS CONTENTS\nTitle\nPage\nIS 2553 : (Part 1):1990\nSafety Glass: Part 1– General purposes (third revision)\n21.3\nIS 2835 : 1987\nFlat transparent sheet glass (third revision)\n21.5\nIS 3438 : 1994\nSilvered glass mirror for General purposes (second revision)\n21.7\nIS 5437 : 1994\nFigured rolled and wired glass (first revision)\n21.8"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2553 (Part 1): 1990",
    "title": "Safety Glass",
    "category": "Pipes and Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for safety glass meant for general purposes such as for use in glazing windows, doors of buildings and railway coaches.",
    "keywords": [
      "glass",
      "safety",
      "laminated",
      "toughened",
      "float",
      "pass",
      "sheet"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for safety glass meant for general purposes such as for use in glazing windows, doors of buildings and railway coaches. 2. Types a) Toughened safety (tempered) glass (TS) b) Toughened float safety glass(TF), c) Laminated safety glass (LS) and d) Laminated float safety glass (LF). 3. Requirements 3.1 General 3.1.1 Material – Safety glass shall be made of ‘A A’ and ‘A’ quality [see IS 2835 : 1987*] from flat transparent glass. Note – Safety glass may also be made from float glass, if agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser. 3.1.1.1 Safety glass may be flat or curved and tinted/ coloured itself or by providing coloured interlay(s),as agreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser. 3.1.2 Measurement of thickness — The thickne",
      "Specific Requirements For Laminated Safety Glass": "* Specified Requirements for laminated Safety glass- 3.3.1 Thickness – Laminated safety glass shall be of thickness as specified in Table 1. 3.3.1.1 If agreed between the purchaser and the supplier, nominal thickness of laminated safety glass, other than those specified in Table 1 may also be supplied. In such cases the range of thickness shall be those which are applicable to immediately lower thickness as specified in Table 1. TABLE 1 NOMINAL THICKNESS, RANGE OF THICKNESS, DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCE ON LENGTH AND WIDTH OF LAMINATED SAFETY GLASS (CLAUSES 3.3.1, 3.3.1.1 AND 3.2) SL. Nominal Range of Dimensional No Thickness Thickness Tolerance on Cut Size Length and Width (1) (2) (3) (4) mm mm mm i) 3.5 3.1 to 3.7 2.5 ii) 4.0 4.0 to 4.8 2.5 iii) 5.0 5.0 to 5.8 2.5 iv) 6.0 6.0 to 6.8 2.5 v) 8.0 "
    },
    "content": "IS 2553 (Part 1): 1990 Safety Glass\nPART 1 GENERAL PURPOSE\n(Third Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for safety glass meant for general purposes\nsuch as for use in glazing windows, doors of buildings and railway coaches.\n2.\nTypes a)\nToughened safety (tempered) glass (TS)\nb)\nToughened float safety glass(TF), c)\nLaminated safety glass (LS) and d)\nLaminated float safety glass (LF).\n3.\nRequirements\n3.1 General 3.1.1 Material – Safety glass shall be made of\n‘A A’ and ‘A’ quality [see IS 2835 : 1987*] from flat transparent glass.\nNote – Safety glass may also be made from float glass, if\nagreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser.\n3.1.1.1 Safety glass may be flat or curved and tinted/ coloured itself or by providing coloured interlay(s),as\nagreed to between the manufacturer and the purchaser.\n3.1.2\nMeasurement of thickness — The thickness of safety glass shall be measured in accordance with the\nmethod prescribed in 5.1 and Annex B of IS 2835 : 1987.*\n3.1.3\nDistribution of allowable defects — Safety glass made from AA or A quality sheet glass shall not\nhave defects greater than those specified for AA or A quality of sheet glass as the case may be in Table 2 of\nIS 2835 : 1987.*\nNote —\nSafety glass made from float glass shall not have waviness more than 8 mm (Refer IS 2835:1987* test for\nwaviness) both in central and outer area and for other defects it shall not have more than those specified for AA quality of sheet\nglass of IS 2835 : 1987.\n* Flat transparent sheet glass (third revision).\n3.1.3.1\nTonghened safety glass made from float glass shall and have cluster of defects more than those\nspecified for ‘AA’ quality of sheet glass and tonghened safety glass made from ‘AA’ or ‘A’ quality and sheet\nglass shall not have cluster of defects more than those specified respectively for ‘AA’ or ‘A’ quality of sheet\nglass, as the case may be in Table 2A of IS 2835.\n3.1.3.2\nAs the laminated safety glass contains two pieces or more of sheet glass, cluster of defects in the\nproduct made from AA or A quality of sheet glass or float glass as the case may be shall be as agreed to\nbetween the purchaser and the manufacturer.\n3.2. Specific Requirements for Toughened Safety\nGlass–\n3.2.1\nThickness – Toughened safety glass shall be of nominal thickness and range of thickness as specified\nin Table 1 of IS 2835 : 1987.*\n3.2.2\nDimensional tolerances on cut size (length and width) – Tolerance on length and width of the\ntoughened safety glass shall be in accordance with\nTable1 of IS 2835 : 1987.* 3.2.3 Fragmentation test – It shall pass the prescribed test. 3.2.4 Warp – It shall not exceed o.5 percent for arc and\n0.3 percent for wave pattern for flat glasses.\nNote – This test is meant for flat safety glass only.\n3.2.5\nResistance to shock test – Shall pass the prescribed test.\nNote – This test shall apply to the toughened safety glasses hav\ning a thickness of 5.0 mm and above. For glasses having a thickness of less than 5.0 mm, adoption of the test and\ninterpretation of the results shall be as agreed to between the purchaser and the manufacturer.\n3.3. Specific Requirements for laminated Safety glass–\n* Specified Requirements for laminated Safety glass- 3.3.1 Thickness – Laminated safety glass shall be of thickness as specified in Table 1.\n3.3.1.1 If agreed between the purchaser and the supplier, nominal thickness of laminated safety glass,\nother than those specified in Table 1 may also be supplied.\nIn such cases the range of thickness shall be those which are applicable to immediately lower thickness as\nspecified in Table 1.\nTABLE 1 NOMINAL THICKNESS, RANGE OF\nTHICKNESS, DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCE ON\nLENGTH AND WIDTH OF LAMINATED SAFETY\nGLASS (CLAUSES 3.3.1, 3.3.1.1 AND 3.2)\nSL. Nominal\nRange of\nDimensional\nNo Thickness\nThickness\nTolerance on\nCut Size Length and Width\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\nmm mm\nmm i) 3.5\n3.1 to 3.7\n2.5 ii) 4.0\n4.0 to 4.8\n2.5 iii) 5.0\n5.0 to 5.8\n2.5 iv) 6.0\n6.0 to 6.8\n2.5 v) 8.0\n8.0 to 8.8\n3.0 vi)\n10.0\n9.8 to11.0\n3.5 3.3.2 Cut sizes — For matching the edges of laminates in laminated safety glass, the tolerance limit within which\noverlapping of edges shall be maintained shall not exceed\n±1.5 mm, but overall dimensional tolerance on the cut sizes (length and width) shall be subjected to the limit\nspecified, in col 4 of the Table 1. 3.3.3 Light stability test – Laminated safety glass shall pass the requirements of light stability test as prescribed. 3.3.4 Boil test – Laminated safety glass shall pass the requirements of boil test as prescribed. 3.3.5 Fracture and adhesion test – Laminated safety glass shall pass the requirements of fracture and\nadhesion test as prescribed.\nNote – For methods of tests, refer to Annexes A to E of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2553 (Part1) :1990 Specifications for safety glass :\nPart 1 General Purposes (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2835: 1987",
    "title": "Flat Transparent Sheet Glass",
    "category": "Doors, Windows and Shutters",
    "summary": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for flat transparent sheet glass for use in the manufacture of photographic plates, projection slides, silvered glass mirrors, toughened or laminated safety glasses and for glazing and framing purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "glass",
      "cluster",
      "quality",
      "sheet",
      "nil",
      "seperated",
      "cenral"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for flat transparent sheet glass for use in the manufacture of photographic plates, projection slides, silvered glass mirrors, toughened or laminated safety glasses and for glazing and framing purposes.",
      "Classification A) Aa Quality Or Special Selected Quality (Ssq)": "In tended for use where superior quality of safety glass, high quality mirrors, photographic plates, projection slides, etc. b) A quality or selected quality (SQ) – Intended for selected glazing, manufacture of mirrors, safety glass etc. c)B Quality or Ordinary Quality (OQ) – Intended for glazing and framing purposes; and d) C Quality or Greenhouse Quality (GQ) – Intended for green house glazing, production of frosted glass, strips for flooring, etc. 3. Requirements 3.1 Material – Sheet glass shall be flat, transparent and clear as judged by the unaided eye. It may, however, possess a light tint, when viewed edge-wise. It shall be free from any cracks. 3.2 Dimensions – Nominal thickness, range of thickness and dimensional tolerance on cut sizes (length and width) of sheet glass shall be as"
    },
    "content": "IS 2835: 1987 Flat Transparent Sheet Glass\n(Third Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements and methods of sampling and test for flat transparent sheet glass for use in the\nmanufacture of photographic plates, projection slides, silvered glass mirrors, toughened or laminated safety\nglasses and for glazing and framing purposes.\n2.\nClassification a) AA Quality or Special Selected Quality (SSQ)\n– In tended for use where superior quality of safety glass, high quality mirrors, photographic\nplates, projection slides, etc.\nb) A quality or selected quality (SQ) – Intended for selected glazing, manufacture of mirrors,\nsafety glass etc. c)B Quality or Ordinary Quality (OQ) – Intended for glazing and framing purposes; and\nd) C Quality or Greenhouse Quality (GQ) –\nIntended for green house glazing, production of frosted glass, strips for flooring, etc.\n3.\nRequirements\n3.1 Material – Sheet glass shall be flat, transparent\nand clear as judged by the unaided eye. It may, however, possess a light tint, when viewed edge-wise. It shall be\nfree from any cracks.\n3.2 Dimensions – Nominal thickness, range of thickness\nand dimensional tolerance on cut sizes (length and width) of sheet glass shall be as prescribed in Table1.\n3.2.1\nIf agreed between the purchaser and the supplier, thickness other than those specified in Table 1\nmay be supplied. In such cases, range of thickness and tolerance on cut size shall be those which are applicable to immediate lower thickness specified in Table 1. TABLE 1 NOMINAL THICKNESS, RANGE OF THICKNESS OF SHEET GLASS AND DIMENSIONAL\nTOLERANCE ON CUT SIZES\nSL No. Nominal Thickness Range of Thickness\nDimensional Tolerance on Cut Sizes (1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\nmm mm\n± mm i) 1.0 0.85-1.15\n1.5 ii) 1.5\n1.35-1.65\n1.5 iii) 2.0\n1.80- 2.20\n1.5 iv) 3.0\n2.80- 3.20\n1.5 v) 3.5\n3.30- 3.70\n2.0 vi) 4.0\n3.80- 4.20\n2.0 vii) 5.0\n4.70- 5.30\n2.0 viii) 5.5\n5.20- 5.80\n2.0 ix) 6.3\n5.90- 6.70\n2.0 x) 8.0\n7.50- 8.50\n3.0 xi)\n10.0\n9.50-10.50\n3.0 xii)\n12.0\n11.00-13.00\n3.0 xiii)\n15.0\n13.50-16.50\n4.0 xiv)\n19.0\n17.00- 21.00\n4.0 xv)\n25.0\n22.00- 28.00\n5.0 xvi)\n32.0\n28.50- 35.50\n6.0 3.3 Distribution of Allowable Defects – Sheet glass\nshall not have defects greater than those specified in\nTable 2.\n3.3.1\nAllowable cluster of defects – Sheet glass shall not have cluster of defects more than those\nspecified in Table 2A.\nTABLE 2 DISTRIBUTION OF ALLOWABLE DEFECTS IN SHEET GLASS\nSl.No.\nDefects ‘AA’ Quality ‘ A ‘Quality ‘B’Quality Remark\nCenral\nOuter\nCenral\nOuter\nCenral Outer\n(1)\n(2)\n( 3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\n(9)\ni)\nGaseous\n1.0\n2.0\n3.0\n6.0\n12.0\n18.0\nSeperated inclusion\nby at least max size, mm\n30.0cm ii)\nOpaque\nNil\n0.5\n3.0\n6.0\n6.0\n12.5\nSeperated\nGaseous by at least\ninclusion,\n60.0cm max, size in mm\niii)\nKnots, dirts\nNil\n1.0\n1.0\n1.0\n1.5\n2.0\nSeperated and stones*,\nby at least maxsize,mm\n60.0cm iv)\nScratches,\nFaint\nFaint\nFaint\nLight\nLight\nMedium\nSeperated cubs and frush\nby atleast 60.0cm v)\nBow,percent,Max\n0.25\n0.25\n0.5\n0.5\n1.0\n1.0 vi)\nReams\nLight\nLight\nLight\nLight\nMedium\nHeavy strings and\nlines vii)\nWaviness,mm\n10\n10\n15.0\n15.0\n20.0\n20.0\n(see Appendix A of the standard)\nviii)\nSulphur\nNil\nNil\nNil\nNil\nInconspicuous -stains\none allowed ix)\nCorner Not more than\nNot more than\nNot more than breakage nominal thickness nominal thicknes\nnominal thickness and chip of sheet glass of sheet glass\nof sheet glass\nNote – ‘C’ quality sheet glass may have defect of any size or intensity but shall have no stones or knots which may cause breakage. *There shall be none which hinders serviceability for automobile industry.\nTABLE 2 A ALLOWABLE CLUSTER OF DEFECTS MENTIONED UNDER\nSL.NO.(I), (II) AND (III) OF TABLE 2\nSL.\nQuality\nCentral Area\nOuter Area\nNo of Sheet\nGlass\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\ni)\nAA\nNil\nOne cluster of maximum 3 defects comprising only one from (iii) and 2 from either (i) or (ii),\nor one each from (i) and (ii) in an optional circle of 30 cm dia.\nii)\nA\nOne cluster of maximum\nOne cluster of maximum 5 defects of any\n3 defects comprising typementioned in (i), (ii) and (iii) but the\nonly one from (iii) and presence of stone should not be more\n2 from either (i) or (ii), than one in optional circle of 30 cm dia.\nor one each from (i)\nand (ii) in an optional circle of 30 cm dia\niii)\nB --------do---------\nOne cluster of maximum 6 defects of any type mentioned in (i), (ii) and (iii) but the\npresence of stone should not be more than one in optional circle of 30cm dia.\nNote – For methods of measurement and test refer to 5, Annex A and B of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2835 : 1987 Specifications for flat transparent sheet glass (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3438: 1994",
    "title": "Silvered Glass Mirrors For General Purposes",
    "category": "Pipes and Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for silvered glass mirrors used for general purposes.",
    "keywords": [
      "silver",
      "mirrors",
      "glass",
      "copper",
      "silvered",
      "coating",
      "silvering"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for silvered glass mirrors used for general purposes. 2. Requirements 2.1 General – Mirrors shall consist of glass sheet coated with silver on one surface. The silver shall be protected by a metallic copper film which in turn shall be covered by a suitable protective paint coating. 2.2 Glass Sheet – The Glass sheet used for mirrors shall comply with the requirements prescribed for AA and A qualities of IS 2835 : 1987 Note – Float glass may also be used if agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier. 2.3 Silvering – Silvering shall be a coating of deposited silver. It shall be free from defects or blemishes in the reflecting surface, such as, lifting or separation of the silver from the glass, sulphide or other spots, haze of any other visi",
      "Tests": "Shall pass the prescribed tests for: a) Test for waviness b) Salt spray test c) Hot water test d) Testing for copper and silver plating. Note— For methods of tests refer to 5 and Appendices A to D of the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 3438 : 1994 Specifications for silvered glass mirrors for general purposes (second revision)."
    },
    "content": "IS 3438: 1994 Silvered Glass Mirrors For General Purposes\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements and methods of sampling and test for silvered glass mirrors used for general\npurposes.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 General – Mirrors shall consist of glass sheet\ncoated with silver on one surface. The silver shall be protected by a metallic copper film which in turn shall\nbe covered by a suitable protective paint coating.\n2.2 Glass Sheet – The Glass sheet used for mirrors\nshall comply with the requirements prescribed for AA and A qualities of IS 2835 : 1987\nNote – Float glass may also be used if agreed to between\nthe purchaser and the supplier.\n2.3 Silvering – Silvering shall be a coating of deposited\nsilver. It shall be free from defects or blemishes in the reflecting surface, such as, lifting or separation of the\nsilver from the glass, sulphide or other spots, haze of any other visible defects. The amount of silver deposit\nshall not be less than 0.8 g/m2.\n* Flat transparent sheet glass (third revision)\n2.4 Copper Costing — The silvered surface shall be\nprotected by a film of deposited copper. The amount of copper deposit shall be not less than 0.4 g/m2.\n2.5 Protective Coating – A suitable protective paint\ncoating shall be applied over the copper coating. 2.5.1 This paint coating shall not crack or peel the silver or copper coating due to change in the\natmospheric temperature or age-dying.\n2.6 Reflectance – Reflectance of the mirrors shall not\nbe less than 80 percent for clear (untinted) glass mirrors.\n3.\nTests – Shall pass the prescribed tests for:\na)\nTest for waviness b)\nSalt spray test c)\nHot water test d)\nTesting for copper and silver plating.\nNote— For methods of tests refer to 5 and Appendices A to D of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3438 : 1994 Specifications for silvered glass mirrors for general purposes\n(second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 5437: 1994",
    "title": "Figured, Rolled And Wired Glass",
    "category": "Pipes and Fittings",
    "summary": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for figured, rolled and wired glass.",
    "keywords": [
      "wired",
      "glass",
      "mesh",
      "figured",
      "wire",
      "wires",
      "stones"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for figured, rolled and wired glass. 2. General Requirements 2.1 May be clear or tinted as agreed. 2.2 Shall not contain any stones with cracks. 2.3 Shall not contain any stones bigger than 2 mm diameter or which protrude from either side of the glass. 2.4 Stones shall be seperated by at least 60 cms. 2.5 The glass sheet shall have not more than one gaseous inclusion greater than 3.5 mm or equivalent elliptical inclusion up to 20 mm long in 1m2 of each cut sheet. 2.6 Warpage – Shall not be more than 1 percent. 3. Thickness and Dimensional Tolerance of Figured and Rolled Glass 3.1 Thickness and dimensional tolerances of figured and rolled glass shall be as given below. Any other thickness as agreed to between purchaser and supplier may be provid",
      "Specific Requirements For Wired Glass": "4.1 Thickness — Thickness of wired glass shall be 6.0 ± 0.4 mm. Note – The thickness can also be as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier and the maximum tolerance on thickness shall be 9 percent of the nominal thickness 4.2 Dimensional Tolerance – Tolerance on cut size of wired glass shall be ± 3.0 mm. 4.3 Wire Mesh – The wire mesh used in the wired glass or wired figured glass shall be made of steel wire 0.46 to 0.56 mm in diameter. The pattern of mesh shall be square or diamond with wires welded or hexagonal with wires twisted. In the case of welded mesh, the wire running across the manufacturing width shall be measured. 4.4 Position of Wire Mesh – The wire mesh shall be embedded completely in the glass sheet at least 1mm from the surface and shall not be exposed at any place"
    },
    "content": "IS 5437: 1994 Figured, Rolled And Wired Glass\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements and methods of sampling and test for figured, rolled and wired glass.\n2.\nGeneral Requirements\n2.1 May be clear or tinted as agreed.\n2.2 Shall not contain any stones with cracks.\n2.3 Shall not contain any stones bigger than 2 mm\ndiameter or which protrude from either side of the glass.\n2.4 Stones shall be seperated by at least 60 cms.\n2.5 The glass sheet shall have not more than one\ngaseous inclusion greater than 3.5 mm or equivalent elliptical inclusion up to 20 mm long in 1m2 of each cut\nsheet.\n2.6 Warpage – Shall not be more than 1 percent.\n3.\nThickness and Dimensional Tolerance of Figured and Rolled Glass\n3.1 Thickness and dimensional tolerances of figured\nand rolled glass shall be as given below. Any other thickness as agreed to between purchaser and supplier\nmay be provided.\nSl.\nNominal Thickness Dimensional\nNo.\nThickness Tolerance Tolerance\n(mm)\n(mm)\n(mm)\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4) i.\n2.0\n±0.2\n±1.5 ii.\n3.0\n±0.2\n±2.0 iii.\n4.0\n±0.2\n±2.0 iv.\n5.0\n±0.3\n±2.0 v.\n6.0\n±0.3\n±2.0\n4.\nSpecific Requirements for Wired Glass –\n4.1 Thickness — Thickness of wired glass shall be 6.0\n± 0.4 mm.\nNote – The thickness can also be as agreed to between the\npurchaser and the supplier and the maximum tolerance on thickness shall be 9 percent of the nominal thickness\n4.2 Dimensional Tolerance – Tolerance on cut size of\nwired glass shall be ± 3.0 mm.\n4.3 Wire Mesh – The wire mesh used in the wired glass\nor wired figured glass shall be made of steel wire 0.46 to\n0.56 mm in diameter. The pattern of mesh shall be square or diamond with wires welded or hexagonal with\nwires twisted. In the case of welded mesh, the wire running across the manufacturing width shall be\nmeasured.\n4.4 Position of Wire Mesh – The wire mesh shall be\nembedded completely in the glass sheet at least 1mm from the surface and shall not be exposed at any place.\n4.5 Broken Wires – Wire mesh shall not contain more\nthan 3 broken wires per square metre of the wired glass or wired figured glass.\n4.6 Flame Proofness – Shall satisfy the prescribed test.\nNote – For methods of measurements and tests, refer to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 5437 : 1994 Specifications for figured, rolled and wired glass (first revision). SECTION 22\nFILLERS, STOPPERS AND PUTTIES CONTENTS\nTitle\nPage\nIS\n110 : 1983\nReady mixed paint, brushing, grey filler, for enamels for use over primers\n22.3\n(second revision)\nIS\n419 : 1967\nPutty for use on window frames (first revision)\n22.4\nIS\n423 : 1961\nPlastic wood for joiners filler (revised)\n22.5\nIS\n3709:1966\nMastic cement for bedding of metal windows\n22.6"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 110: 1983",
    "title": "Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Grey Filler, For Enamels For Use Over Primers",
    "category": "Electrical Installations",
    "summary": "Requirements, and the methods of sampling and test for ready mixed paint, brushing, grey filler, for enamels, for use over primers. The material is used as a filler over the primer in the painting system normally followed by enamels.",
    "keywords": [
      "enamels",
      "ready",
      "brushing",
      "paint",
      "mixed",
      "primers",
      "grey"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements, and the methods of sampling and test for ready mixed paint, brushing, grey filler, for enamels, for use over primers. The material is used as a filler over the primer in the painting system normally followed by enamels. 2. Requirements 2.1 Composition – The material shall be of such a composition as to satisfy the requirements of this standard. In order to obtain satisfactory flattening properties, use of slate powder along with suitable extenders and pigments, as may be necessary, is recommended. 2.2 Flattening Properties – The material shall not be inferior to the approved sample. 2.3 Hold Out Property – The material shall pass the test as prescribed in Appendix B of the standard. 2.4 The material shall also comply with the requirements given in Table 1. 2.5 Water Content –"
    },
    "content": "IS 110: 1983 Ready Mixed Paint, Brushing, Grey Filler, For Enamels For Use Over Primers\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements, and the methods of sampling and test for ready mixed paint, brushing, grey filler, for\nenamels, for use over primers. The material is used as a filler over the primer in the painting system normally\nfollowed by enamels.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Composition – The material shall be of such a\ncomposition as to satisfy the requirements of this standard. In order to obtain satisfactory flattening\nproperties, use of slate powder along with suitable extenders and pigments, as may be necessary, is\nrecommended.\n2.2 Flattening Properties – The material shall not be\ninferior to the approved sample.\n2.3 Hold Out Property – The material shall pass the\ntest as prescribed in Appendix B of the standard.\n2.4 The material shall also comply with the requirements\ngiven in Table 1.\n2.5 Water Content – If water is suspected to be present\nin the material, it shall not exceed 0.5 percent.\n2.6 Mass in kg/10 litres – The minimum mass in kg /10\nlitres of this material shall be 14. It shall be, however within ± 3 percent of the sample approved against this\nspecification.\n2.7 Opacity – The paint, after having been thinned to\na consisency of 35 seconds (Ford cup viscometer No.\n4) with petroleum hydrocarbon solvent 145/205, low aromatic grade, when applied by a brush on a chequer\nboard surface having alternate black and white squares shall satisfactorily obscure the lines of demarcation\nbetween the black and white squares.\n2.8 Dry Film Thichness – The paint, thinned with\npetroleum hydrocarbon solvent, to a consistency of 35 seconds (Ford cup viscometer No. 4), when applied by\na brush, shall give a minimum dry film – thickness of 20 micro metres in one coat. TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR READY MIXED PAINT,BRUSHING, GREY FILLER, FOR ENAMELS,\nFOR USE OVER PRIMERS\nSL\nCharacteristic\nRequirement\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\ni)\nDrying Time a) Surface dry\nNot more than 20 minutes b) Hard dry\nNot more than 8 hours ii)\nConsistency\nSmooth, uniform and suitable for brushing without appreciable drag on the brush\niii)\nViscosity by flow cup method\nNot less than 80 seconds iv)\nFinish\nSmooth and matt to semi- glossy v)\nColour\nGrey vi)\nResidue on sieve,\n2.0 percent by weight, Max\nvii)\nFlexibility and adhesion\nNo visible damage or detachment of film\n(after 48 hours air-drying)\nviii)\nFlash point\nNot below 30ºC ix)\nKeeping properties\nNot less than six months\nNote – For test procedures, refer to the standard and IS 101: 1964 Methods of test for ready mixed paints and enamels\n(second revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 110 : 1983 Specifications for ready mixed paint, brushing, grey filler, for enamels, for use over primers (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 419: 1967",
    "title": "Putty, For Use On Window Frames",
    "category": "Electrical Installations",
    "summary": "Requirements, and the methods of sampling and test for putty for use in fixing glass panes on wood and metal frames and for filling splits, cracks and holes in wood or metal.",
    "keywords": [
      "paints",
      "putty",
      "varnishes",
      "related",
      "sec",
      "frames",
      "carbonate"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements, and the methods of sampling and test for putty for use in fixing glass panes on wood and metal frames and for filling splits, cracks and holes in wood or metal.",
      "Requirements": "2.1 Form and Condition – Shall be homogeneous paste and shall be free from grit and other visible impurities. 2.2 Composition – Shall consist of mainly whiting and linsed oil, if necessary, varnish and suitable additives. 2.2.1 The calcium carbonate content of extracted pigment, from putty, shall be not less than 80 percent. 2.3 Consistency – The material, after thorough working in hands, shall have good plastic quality without sliminess or stickness that would render it difficult to handle and apply. It shall work readily and smoothly under a palette knife without crumbling or cracking. After being moulded in place, it shall convert itself into a cohesive mass which will not yield to specified pressure after 72 hours. 2.4 The material shall also comply with the requirements given in Table"
    },
    "content": "IS 419: 1967 Putty, For Use On Window Frames\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements, and the methods of sampling and test for putty for use in fixing glass panes on wood\nand metal frames and for filling splits, cracks and holes in wood or metal.\n2.\nRequirements –\n2.1 Form and Condition – Shall be homogeneous paste\nand shall be free from grit and other visible impurities.\n2.2 Composition – Shall consist of mainly whiting and\nlinsed oil, if necessary, varnish and suitable additives. 2.2.1 The calcium carbonate content of extracted pigment, from putty, shall be not less than 80 percent.\n2.3 Consistency – The material, after thorough working\nin hands, shall have good plastic quality without sliminess or stickness that would render it difficult to\nhandle and apply. It shall work readily and smoothly under a palette knife without crumbling or cracking. After\nbeing moulded in place, it shall convert itself into a cohesive mass which will not yield to specified pressure\nafter 72 hours.\n2.4 The material shall also comply with the requirements\ngiven in Table 1.\nTABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR PUTTY, FOR USE\nON WINDOW FRAMES\n1\n2\n3\n4 i)\nResidue on sieve,\n5.0\nIS 101 (Part 8/Sec 1):19891)\npercent by weight, Max ii)\nWater content, percent\n1.5\nIS 101 (Part 2/Sec 1):19882)\nby weight, Max iii) Keeping properties\nNot less than 6 IS 101 (Part 6/Sec2): 19893)\nmonths\nNote—For methods of tests, refer to IS 85 : 1950 Methods of test for oil pastes for paints; and for method of determination\nof calcium carbonate content and setting time, refer to Appendix A and B of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 419 : 1967 Specifications for putty, for use on window frames (first revision).\n1) Method of sampling and test for paints, varnishes and related products : Part\n8 Tests for pigments and other solids. Section 1 Residue on sieve (third revision)\n2) Method of sampling and test for paints, varnishes and related products : Part\n2 Tests on liquid paints (chemical examination), Section 1 Water content (thrid\nrevision).\n3) Method of sampling and test for paints, varnishes and related products : Part\n6 Durability tests on paint films, Section 2 Keeping properties (third revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 423: 1961",
    "title": "Plastic Wood For Joiners Filler",
    "category": "Electrical Installations",
    "summary": "Requirements, and methods of test for material commercially known as plastic wood, for joiners fillers. The material is used for filling holes, cracks and other irregularities in wood to produce a smooth surface capable of taking suitable stain to match timber.",
    "keywords": [
      "syrup",
      "worked",
      "wood",
      "revised",
      "filling",
      "containers",
      "condition"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements, and methods of test for material commercially known as plastic wood, for joiners fillers. The material is used for filling holes, cracks and other irregularities in wood to produce a smooth surface capable of taking suitable stain to match timber. 2. Requirements 2.1 Form and Condition – Shall be homogeneous and free from grit and other visible impurities. 2.2 Composition a) Nitrocellulose syrup 77 percent, Min b) Wood dust passing Remainder through IS Sieve No.15 (aperture 151 microns) With a maximum moisture content of 5 percent Note —The introcellulose lose syrup shall consist of nitocellulose, suitable resins, plasticizers, solvent and dilluent. 2.3 Consistency – It shall be in such a condition that it can be easily worked into a smooth paste suitable for application by a"
    },
    "content": "IS 423: 1961 Plastic Wood For Joiners Filler\n(Revised)\n1.\nScope – Requirements, and methods of test for material commercially known as plastic wood, for joiners\nfillers. The material is used for filling holes, cracks and other irregularities in wood to produce a smooth surface\ncapable of taking suitable stain to match timber.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Form and Condition – Shall be homogeneous\nand free from grit and other visible impurities.\n2.2 Composition\na)\nNitrocellulose syrup 77 percent, Min\nb)\nWood dust passing Remainder through IS Sieve No.15\n(aperture 151 microns)\nWith a maximum moisture content of 5 percent\nNote —The introcellulose lose syrup shall consist of\nnitocellulose, suitable resins, plasticizers, solvent and dilluent.\n2.3 Consistency – It shall be in such a condition that it\ncan be easily worked into a smooth paste suitable for application by a palette knife for filling.\n2.4 Performance – Twenty-four hours after application,\nit shall be in such a condition that it has not shrunk unduly, cracked or fallen away from the wooden surfaces\nto which it was applied. Shall be capable of being worked by a chisel, plane or saw, as if it were timber, and of\nholding nails screws and similar fixtures.\n2.5 Keeping Qualities – Six months from the date of\nmanufacture, in original sealed containers.\n2.6 Marking – Containers shall be marked\n“HIGHLY INFLAMMABLE” in red letters and flash point below 24.4º C.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 423 : 1961 Specification for plastic wood for joiner filler (revised)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3709: 1966",
    "title": "Mastic Cement For Bedding Of Metal Window",
    "category": "Electrical Installations",
    "summary": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for mastic cement for bedding of metal windows. The material is intended for application by hand or with a putty knife. It is used for bedding, one metal window into another, metal windows into wooden frames, or metal frames into masonry or concrete. It is expected to be suitable for taking paint without lifting, bleeding or cracking.",
    "keywords": [
      "insulation",
      "thermal",
      "preformed",
      "bedding",
      "metal",
      "replaced",
      "silicate"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for mastic cement for bedding of metal windows. The material is intended for application by hand or with a putty knife. It is used for bedding, one metal window into another, metal windows into wooden frames, or metal frames into masonry or concrete. It is expected to be suitable for taking paint without lifting, bleeding or cracking. 2. Requirements 2.1 Shall be in the form of a homogeneous paste which after working in the hands, shall have good plastic quality. Shall work smoothly under a knife without crumbling or cracking and without sticking unduly to hand or knife. 2.2 Composition a) Whiting 80 to 85 percent by weight b) Oils 15 to 20 percent by weight Note 1 — Up to 10 percent of whiting may be replaced by asbestos fibrous powder. One to"
    },
    "content": "IS 3709: 1966 Mastic Cement For Bedding Of Metal Window\n1.\nScope – Requirements and methods of sampling and test for mastic cement for bedding of metal windows.\nThe material is intended for application by hand or with a putty knife. It is used for bedding, one metal window\ninto another, metal windows into wooden frames, or metal frames into masonry or concrete. It is expected to\nbe suitable for taking paint without lifting, bleeding or cracking.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Shall be in the form of a homogeneous paste which\nafter working in the hands, shall have good plastic quality. Shall work smoothly under a knife without\ncrumbling or cracking and without sticking unduly to hand or knife.\n2.2 Composition\na) Whiting\n80 to 85 percent by weight b) Oils\n15 to 20 percent by weight\nNote 1 — Up to 10 percent of whiting may be replaced by\nasbestos fibrous powder. One to two percent shall be replaced by yellow ochre to distinguish it from putty for fixing glass.\nNote 2 — Oils shall be a mixture of 85 percent raw linseed oil\nand 15 percent castor oil.\n2.3 Adhesion – The material shall satisfactorily adhere\nto wood, masonry, concrete and metal frames of painted or etched galvanized steel or pre-treated aluminium.\n2.4 Water Content – Not more than 0.5 percent.\n2.5 Setting Properties – Spread material to a thickness\nof 5 to 6 mm on a mild steel plate 300 × 300 mm and approximately 2.5 mm thick. Keep it in vertical position\nunder standard atmospheric conditions for 7 days. There shall be no cracks or sagging of the film and shall remain\nplastic.\n2.6 Keeping Properties – Six months from the date of\nmanufacture in original sealed containers.\nNote – For Methods of test, refer to IS 85 : 1950 Methods of test for oil pastes for paints.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3709 : 1966 Specification for mastic cement for bedding of metal windows. SECTION 23\nTHERMAL INSULATION MATERIALS CONTENTS\nTitle\nPage\nIS\n3677 : 1985\nUnbonded rock and slag wool for thermal insulation (second revision)\n23.3\nIS\n4671 : 1984\nExpanded polystyrene for thermal insulation purposes (first revision)\n23.5\nIS\n6598 : 1972\nCellular concrete for thermal insulation\n23.7\nIS\n7509 : 1993\nThermal insulating cement (first revision)\n23.8\nIS\n8154 : 1993\nPreformed calcium silicate insulation (for temperature up to 650ºC)\n23.9\n(first revision)\nIS\n8183 : 1993\nBonded mineral wool (first revision)\n23.11\nIS\n9428 : 1993\nPreformed Calcium silicate insulation (for temperatures upto 950ºC)\n23.13\n(first revision)\nIS\n9742 : 1993\nSprayed mineral wool thermal insulation (first revision)\n23.15\nIS\n9743 : 1990\nThermal insulation finishing cements (first revision)\n23.16\nIS\n9842 : 1994\nPreformed fibrous pipe insulation (first revision)\n23.18\nIS\n11128 : 1984\nSpray applied hydrated Calcium silicate thermal insulation\n23.20\nIS\n11307: 1985\nCellular glass block and pipe thermal insulation\n23.21\nIS\n11308 : 1985\nHydraulic setting thermal insulating castables for temperatures\n23.22 up to 1250º C.\nIS\n12436 : 1988\nPreformed rigid polyurethane (PUR) and polyisocyanurate (PIR) foams\n23.23 for thermal insulation\nIS\n13204 : 1991\nRigid phenolic foams for thermal insulation\n23.25"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3677: 1985",
    "title": "Unbonded Rock And Slag Wool For Thermal Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for unbonded rock and slag wool for thermal insulation.",
    "keywords": [
      "apparent",
      "confining",
      "deg",
      "wool",
      "stitched",
      "insulation",
      "rock"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for unbonded rock and slag wool for thermal insulation.",
      "Types": "2.1 Type 1 – Loose rock and slag wool, shall be a fluffy, light weight material. 2.2 Type 2 – Stitched rock and slagwool mats. Shall be in the form of stitched mats provided with a confining media on one or both sides. If the confining medium provided is of metallic cage, it shall be attached to the mat either stabbing at not more than 250 mm centres of by stitching at not more than 250 mm along the width and 150 mm along the length with twine or metallic wire of 0.7 mm or 0.56 mm diameter or as agreed. If the confining medium provided is of hessian cloth, scrim cloth, kraft paper or glass tissue, it shall be stitched to the mat with a suitable twine. 3. Requirements 3.1 Apparent Density — The apparent density of Type 2 of the material shall be as agreed to between the purchaser and the su"
    },
    "content": "IS 3677: 1985 Unbonded Rock And Slag Wool For Thermal Insulation\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for unbonded rock and slag wool for thermal\ninsulation.\n2.\nTypes –\n2.1 Type 1 – Loose rock and slag wool, shall be a fluffy,\nlight weight material.\n2.2 Type 2 – Stitched rock and slagwool mats. Shall be\nin the form of stitched mats provided with a confining media on one or both sides. If the confining medium\nprovided is of metallic cage, it shall be attached to the mat either stabbing at not more than 250 mm centres of\nby stitching at not more than 250 mm along the width and 150 mm along the length with twine or metallic wire\nof 0.7 mm or 0.56 mm diameter or as agreed. If the confining medium provided is of hessian cloth, scrim\ncloth, kraft paper or glass tissue, it shall be stitched to the mat with a suitable twine.\n3.\nRequirements\n3.1 Apparent Density — The apparent density of Type\n2 of the material shall be as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier. A tolerance of ± 15 percent\nshall be allowed on the manufacturer’s declared value.\n3.2 Apparent Density Under Specified Load – The\napparent density under specified load of both types of the material shall be not more than the following values.\nLoad\nApparent Density Under Specified\nKg/cm2\nLoad, Max\nAt Factory\nAt Site\nKg/m3\nKg/m3\n0.01\n95\n115\n0.02\n105\n130\n0.05\n136\n165\n0.07\n150\n185\n0.10\n165\n200\n3.3 Shot Content – Shall be not more than the values\ngiven below. Any shot present shall not be greater than\n5 mm in any dimension.\nIS Sieve\nShot Content, Percent by Mass, Max\n500-micron\n5\n250-micron\n10\n3.4 Moisture Absorption – The material shall not gain\nin mass by more than 2 percent.\n3.5 Incombustibility – The material shall be rated as\nincombustible when it passes the prescribed test. The loss in total mass, when determined by this test, shall\nnot exceed 5 percent.\n3.6 Thermal Conductivity or k-Value — At specified\napparent densities shall not exceed the following values Mean Temperature\nThermal Conductivity (k-Value)\nof Material at Different Apparent Densities\n200 Kg/m3\n150 Kg/m3\n120 Kg/m3\n100 Kg/m3\n( 1 )\n( 2 )\n( 3 )\n( 4 )\n( 5 )\n0C\nmW/cm deg C mW/cm deg C\nmW/cm deg C mW/cm deg C\n50\n0.42\n0.46\n0.48\n0.50\n100\n0.50\n0.52\n0.54\n0.56\n150\n0.60\n0.62\n0.66\n0.68\n200\n0.72\n0.75\n0.78\n0.80 250 0.83 0.88 0.89 1.02 Note – For methods of tests, refer to IS 3144 : 1992 Mineral wool thermal insulation materials-Methods of tests (second revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3677 : 1985 Specifications for unbonded rock and slag wool for thermal insulation (second revision).\n3.7 Sulphur Content – The material, after removal of\nthe confining media, if any, shall not contain more than\n0.6 percent of sulphur.\n3.8 Width – Type 2 material shall be supplied in width\nof 90 ± 5 cm or any other width mutually agreed upon between the buyer and the supplier.\n3.9 Thickness – Type 2 material shall be supplied in\nthickness of 25, 40, 50, 60, 75, 90 and 100 mm or as agreed upon between the purchaser and the supplier.\nThe usual tolerance allowed is – 5 mm.\n3.10 Optional Requirements\n3.10.1 Moisture content – Shall not contain more than\n2 percent moisture.\n3.10.2 Resistance to micro-organisms – Shall not show any mould or bacterial growth.\n3.10.3 Odour emission test – There shall be no apparent difference in odour of the butter when compared with\nthe blanks.\n3.10.4 Oil content – Shall be as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier but it shall be not more than\n2 percent. 3.10.5 Carbon content — Shall not contain more than\n0.3 percent of total carbon.\n3.10.6 Resistance to vibration – Shall show not more than 1 percent by height of settlement.\n3.10.7 Resistance to jolting – Shall show not more than 3 percent by height of settlement, or as agreed to\nbetween the purchaser and the supplier.\n3.10.8 Heat resistance – Shall not suffer visible deterioration in the fibrous structure when heated to\nthe maximum recommended temperature of use.\n3.10.9 Fibre diameter – The average fibre diameter of the wool shall not be more than 7 microns.\n3.10.10 Alkalinty – The pH of the solution of the material shall be between 7.0 and 10.0.\n3.10.11 Corrosive attack — Shall not cause corrosion of the surface on which it is applied.\nNote – It has been found that if the chloride content in the\nmaterial exceeds 0.01 percent by mass and if the conditions are such that chloride concentration can take place on the\nsurface of certain austenitic stainless steels, there is a possibility of stress corrosion at elevated temperature.\nIf such an instance arises, suitable measures should be taken during the applications of insulation, for example, aluminium\nfail should be wrapped around the surface to be insulated before the application of insulation or an anticorrosive paint should\nbe applied prior to the application of insulation."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4671: 1984",
    "title": "Expanded Polystyrene For Thermal Insulation Purposes",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for expanded polystyrene in the form of rough shapes, finished boards and blocks, and pipe sections / segments for thermal insulation primarily for use in refrigeration and building applications in the temperature range - 150º to 80ºC.",
    "keywords": [
      "thermal",
      "extinguishing",
      "polystyrene",
      "expanded",
      "bulk",
      "deg",
      "self"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for expanded polystyrene in the form of rough shapes, finished boards and blocks, and pipe sections / segments for thermal insulation primarily for use in refrigeration and building applications in the temperature range - 150º to 80ºC. 2. Types Type 1– Non-self extinguishing type and, Type 2– Self extinguishing type 3. Requirements 3.1 Bulk Density – The bulk density of the material, calculated at nominal thickness, excluding facing, shall be 15, 20, 25, 30 or 35 kg/m3. A tolerance of ±5 percent shall be allowed on bulk density. 3.2 Dimensions 3.2.1 Size – 1.0 x 0.5 m or other agreed sizes. Pipe sections / segments — 1.0 m or 0.5 m in length, or other agreed length. 3.2.2 Thickness – 15, 20, 25, 40, 50, 60, 75 and 100 mm unless otherwise ag"
    },
    "content": "IS 4671: 1984 Expanded Polystyrene For Thermal Insulation Purposes\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for expanded polystyrene in the form of rough\nshapes, finished boards and blocks, and pipe sections / segments for thermal insulation primarily for use in\nrefrigeration and building applications in the temperature range - 150º to 80ºC.\n2.\nTypes\nType 1– Non-self extinguishing type and,\nType 2– Self extinguishing type\n3.\nRequirements\n3.1 Bulk Density – The bulk density of the material,\ncalculated at nominal thickness, excluding facing, shall be 15, 20, 25, 30 or 35 kg/m3. A tolerance of ±5 percent\nshall be allowed on bulk density.\n3.2 Dimensions\n3.2.1 Size – 1.0 x 0.5 m or other agreed sizes. Pipe sections\n/ segments — 1.0 m or 0.5 m in length, or other agreed length.\n3.2.2 Thickness – 15, 20, 25, 40, 50, 60, 75 and 100 mm unless otherwise agreed.\n3.2.3 Tolerance\nFinished Boards and Blocks\nTolerance\nLength, width and thickness\n± 2 mm\nPipe Laggings Outside diameter\n± 3 mm Inside diameter\n± 2 mm\n3.3 Thermal Conductivity – Shall not exceed the values\ngiven below:\nBulk Density\nThermal Conductivity kg/m3\nmW/cm0C\n0ºC\n10ºC\n15.0\n0.34\n0.37\n20.0\n0.32\n0.35\n25.0\n0.30\n0.33\n30.0\n0.29\n0.32\n35.0\n0.28\n0.31\nNote – To convert values from mW/cm deg to kcal/m h deg\nor vice versa, the following conversion factors are used :\nKilocolories / m h ºC\nMilliwalts / cm ºC\n1\n11.630 0\n0.085 985\n1\n3.4 The material of both the types shall also comply\nwith the requirements given in Table 1.\n3.5 Special requirement for Type 2 only.\n3.5.1 Flammability – The material shall be of self extinguishing type when tested by the method\nprescribed in Appendix F of the standard. TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPANDED POLYSTYRENE Sl.\nCharacteristic\nRequirements at Various Nominal No.\nApparent Densities, kg/m3\n15\n20\n25\n30\n35 i)\nCompressive strength at\n0.7\n0.9\n1.1\n1.4\n1.7\n10 percent deformation, at kg/cm2, Min\nii)\nCross-breaking\n1.4\n1.6\n1.8\n2.2\n2.6 strength, kg/cm2, Min\niii)\nWater vapour permeance,\n50\n40\n30\n20\n15 in g/m2.24 h, Max\niv)\nThermal stability,\n1\n1\n1\n1\n1 percent, Max\nv)\nMoisture absorption,\n2\n1\n1\n1\n1 percent Note – For method of tests, refer to Appendices A to F of the standard and IS 3346 : 1980 Method of determination of thermal\nconductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guard hot-plate method) (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4671 : 1984 Specifications for expanded polystyrene for thermal insulation purposes (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6598: 1972",
    "title": "Cellular Concrete For Thermal Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for cellular concrete for thermal linsulation. Note – Cellular concrete (formed by producing gas or air bubbles in a cement or cement-sand slurry) is a versatile construction material on account of its light weight, high thermal insulation, resistance to sulphate action, resistance to alternate cooling and thawing (when high pressure steam cured) and resistance to penetration of water. When cast in situ, it can be applied over flat roofs for ther",
    "keywords": [
      "thermal",
      "cellular",
      "cured",
      "agents",
      "insulation",
      "situ",
      "conductivity"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for cellular concrete for thermal linsulation. Note – Cellular concrete (formed by producing gas or air bubbles in a cement or cement-sand slurry) is a versatile construction material on account of its light weight, high thermal insulation, resistance to sulphate action, resistance to alternate cooling and thawing (when high pressure steam cured) and resistance to penetration of water. When cast in situ, it can be applied over flat roofs for thermal insulation. 2. Types and Grades 2.1 Two types of material depending on manner of manufacture, namely : Type 1– High pressure steam cured (auto claved) material in the form of precast blocks. Type 2 – Cured under normal conditions (that is, under ambient pressure and temperature) by water. Either",
      "Materials A) Aggregate": "Sand, ground quartz, shale, fly ash, granulated slag, etc. b) Binders – Portland cement of lime. c) Glassing agents – Organic foaming agents based on resin soap, glue, surface active agents, or fine aluminium powder, zinc dust, calcium carbide, calcium hypochlorite, etc. 4. Requirements 4.1 Density Grade Average Bulk Density, kg/m3 A Min 320 B 321 to 400 C 401 to 500 4.2 Crushing Strength Grade Strength, Min kgf/m2 Type 1 Type 2 A 7.0 2.5 B 12.0 4.5 C 20.0 8.0 4.3 Capillary Absorption – Shall not exceed 20 percent in case of Type 1 cellular concrete. 4.4 Thermal Conductivity – Grade Thermal Conductivity at 50ºC Mean Temp, Max mW/cmºC A 0.7 B 0.85 C 1.0 4.5 Dimensions – For Type 1 and Type 2, length 50 or 60 cm; width 20, 25 or 30 cm; thickness 7.5, 10, 15, 25 or 40 cm. 4.6 Tolerance – ±3 p"
    },
    "content": "IS 6598: 1972 Cellular Concrete For Thermal Insulation\n1.\nScope – Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for cellular concrete for thermal linsulation.\nNote – Cellular concrete (formed by producing gas or air\nbubbles in a cement or cement-sand slurry) is a versatile construction material on account of its light weight, high\nthermal insulation, resistance to sulphate action, resistance to alternate cooling and thawing (when high pressure steam\ncured) and resistance to penetration of water. When cast in situ, it can be applied over flat roofs for thermal insulation.\n2.\nTypes and Grades\n2.1 Two types of material depending on manner of\nmanufacture, namely :\nType 1– High pressure steam cured (auto claved)\nmaterial in the form of precast blocks.\nType 2 – Cured under normal conditions (that is, under ambient pressure and temperature) by water. Either cast\nin situ or as precast blocks.\n2.2 Each of these two types shall have three grades,\nnamely :\nGrade A\n— Light weight\nGrade B\n— Medium weight\nGrade C\n— Heavy weight\n3.\nMaterials a) Aggregate – Sand, ground quartz, shale, fly ash,\ngranulated slag, etc.\nb) Binders – Portland cement of lime.\nc) Glassing agents – Organic foaming agents based on resin soap, glue, surface active agents,\nor fine aluminium powder, zinc dust, calcium carbide, calcium hypochlorite, etc.\n4.\nRequirements\n4.1 Density\nGrade\nAverage Bulk Density, kg/m3\nA\nMin 320\nB\n321 to 400\nC\n401 to 500\n4.2 Crushing Strength\nGrade\nStrength, Min kgf/m2\nType 1\nType 2\nA\n7.0\n2.5\nB\n12.0\n4.5\nC\n20.0\n8.0\n4.3 Capillary Absorption – Shall not exceed 20 percent\nin case of Type 1 cellular concrete.\n4.4 Thermal Conductivity –\nGrade\nThermal Conductivity at 50ºC Mean Temp, Max\nmW/cmºC\nA\n0.7\nB\n0.85\nC\n1.0\n4.5 Dimensions – For Type 1 and Type 2, length 50 or\n60 cm; width 20, 25 or 30 cm; thickness 7.5, 10, 15, 25 or\n40 cm.\n4.6 Tolerance – ±3 percent on width and height and ±1\npercent on thickness.\nNote – For method of test refer to Appendix A of the standard and IS 3346 : 1980 Method for determination of thermal\nconductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate method) (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6598 : 1972 Specifications for cellular concrete for thermal insulation"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7509: 1993",
    "title": "Thermal Insulating Cement",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for thermal linsulating cements for use at temperatures up to 950ºC.",
    "keywords": [
      "thermal",
      "temperatures",
      "cements",
      "shrinkage",
      "dry",
      "conductivity",
      "service"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for thermal linsulating cements for use at temperatures up to 950ºC.",
      "Types": "Type 350 – for use of temperatures up to 350º C, Type 750 – for use of temperatures up to 750ºC,and Type 950 – for use of temperatures up to 950º C. TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF THERMAL INSULATING CEMENTS SI No. Characteristic Requirements Type 350 Type 750 Type 950 i) Service temperature 3500 C 7500 C 9500 C ii) Consistency, percent a) Method A 35 to 45 35 to 45 — b) Method B 175 to 230 175 to 235 — iii) Dry covering capacity m2, 1 cm, 17.5 20.0 14.0 in thickness per 100 kg of dry cement, Min iv) Compressive strength at 5 3.5 3.5 5.0 percent deformation, kg/cm2, Min v) Volume change (shrinkage) 25 25 30 upon drying, percent, Max vi) Linear shrinkage (length) 2.0 3.0 3.0 after heat soaking at service temperature, percent, Max vii) Dry adhesion to steel, kg/cm2, Min 0.35 0.35 0.50 viii) Thermal "
    },
    "content": "IS 7509: 1993 Thermal Insulating Cement\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for thermal linsulating cements for use at\ntemperatures up to 950ºC.\n2.\nTypes –\nType 350 – for use of temperatures up to 350º C,\nType 750 – for use of temperatures up to 750ºC,and\nType 950 – for use of temperatures up to 950º C.\nTABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS OF THERMAL INSULATING CEMENTS SI No.\nCharacteristic\nRequirements\nType 350 Type 750\nType 950 i)\nService temperature\n3500 C\n7500 C\n9500 C\nii)\nConsistency, percent a) Method A\n35 to 45\n35 to 45\n—\nb) Method B\n175 to 230\n175 to 235\n—\niii)\nDry covering capacity m2, 1 cm,\n17.5\n20.0\n14.0 in thickness per 100 kg of\ndry cement, Min iv)\nCompressive strength at 5\n3.5\n3.5\n5.0 percent deformation,\nkg/cm2, Min v)\nVolume change (shrinkage)\n25\n25\n30 upon drying, percent, Max\nvi)\nLinear shrinkage (length)\n2.0\n3.0\n3.0 after heat soaking at service\ntemperature, percent, Max vii)\nDry adhesion to steel, kg/cm2, Min\n0.35\n0.35\n0.50 viii)\nThermal conductivity\nW/mK, Max\nMean Temp, 0C 100\n0.09\n0.07\n0.14 200\n0.11\n0.09\n0.16 300\n—\n0.11\n0.18 400\n—\n—\n0.20\nNote – For methods of tests, refer to IS 3346 : 1980 Method for determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulation\nmaterials (two slab, guarded hot – plate method) (first revision) IS 5724 : 1970 Method of tests for thermal insulation cements; and"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9490: 1980",
    "title": "Method For Determination Of Thermal Conductivity Of Insulation Material (Water Calorimeter Method)",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "summary": "For detailed information, refer to IS 7509 : 1993 Specification for thermal insulating cements (first revision). 3. Requirements – The material shall be in the form of dry powder and/or granulated aggregate. The material shall also conform to the requirements given in Table 1.",
    "keywords": [
      "granulated",
      "cements",
      "powder",
      "insulating",
      "aggregate",
      "thermal",
      "dry"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Requirements": "The material shall be in the form of dry powder and/or granulated aggregate. The material shall also conform to the requirements given in Table 1."
    },
    "content": "IS 9490: 1980 Method For Determination Of Thermal Conductivity Of Insulation Material (Water Calorimeter Method)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 7509 : 1993 Specification for thermal insulating cements (first revision).\n3.\nRequirements – The material shall be in the form of dry powder and/or granulated aggregate. The material\nshall also conform to the requirements given in Table 1."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8154: 1993",
    "title": "Preormed Calcium Silicate Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for performed calcium silicate insulation intended for use on surface which reach temperatures upto 6500C.",
    "keywords": [
      "thermal",
      "lags",
      "curved",
      "bevelled",
      "preformed",
      "insulation",
      "calcium"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for performed calcium silicate insulation intended for use on surface which reach temperatures upto 6500C. 2. Requirements 2.1 Material – Shall be predominantly composed of reacted hydrous calcium silicate reinforced with suitable fibres such that the physical requirements prescribed in 2 are satisfied. 2.2 Bulk Density – Average value shall be between 200 to 280 kg/m3. For any particular density, a tolerance of ±10 percent shall be allowed on the purchaser’s declared value and shall be within the range specified above. 2.3 Compressive Strength – The reduction in thickness under the following conditions shall not exceed 5 percent. a) dry under a load of 415 kN/m2, and b) wet (after 18 h immersion in water) under a load of 170 kN/m2. Note – ",
      "Thickness": "1.5 mm + 3 mm b) Pipe sections 1) Length ±3 mm 2) Inside diameter 0 mm +5 mm",
      "Thickness (Average)": "1.5 mm +3 mm 2.9.3.1 Uniformity – The local thickness at any point shall not vary from the average thickness by more than ±3 mm."
    },
    "content": "IS 8154: 1993 Preormed Calcium Silicate Insulation\n(FOR TEMPERATURES UPTO 650 0C)\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for performed calcium silicate insulation\nintended for use on surface which reach temperatures upto 6500C.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Material – Shall be predominantly composed of\nreacted hydrous calcium silicate reinforced with suitable fibres such that the physical requirements prescribed in\n2 are satisfied.\n2.2 Bulk Density – Average value shall be between 200\nto 280 kg/m3. For any particular density, a tolerance of\n±10 percent shall be allowed on the purchaser’s declared value and shall be within the range specified above.\n2.3 Compressive Strength – The reduction in thickness\nunder the following conditions shall not exceed 5 percent.\na) dry under a load of 415 kN/m2, and b) wet (after 18 h immersion in water) under a load of 170 kN/m2.\nNote – For compressive strength for pipes / curved segments\nan equivalent flat slab shall be used for performing the test.\n2.4 Flexural Strength – The average minimum value\nshall be 240 kN/m2.\n2.5 Heat Resistance – When tested at increasing\ntemperatures, the material shall be deemed suitable for use under conditions of soaking heat for 24 hours at\n650ºC up to the temperature at which the following requirements are met:\na) Linear shrinkage (Length),\n2 percent, Max\nb) Loss in mass, percent, Max\n15 c) Compressive strength –Reduction in\nthickness not exceeding 5 percent under a load of 345 kN/m2.\n2.6 Thermal Conductivity — The average value shall\nbe as given below :\nMean\nThermal\nTemperature\nConductivity, Max\n0C\nW/m.K\n100\n0.060\n150\n0.070\n200\n0.080\n300\n0.100\nNote – For thermal conductivety determination for pipes /\ncurved segmenth\n2.7 Moisture Content – Shall not exceed 7.5 percent\nby mass.\n2.8 Alkalinity – The pH of the solution of the material\nshall be between 8 and 11.\n2.9 Standard Shapes, Sizes and Dimensional\nTolerance –\n2.9.1\nShapes — Preformed calcium silicate shall be supplied in the form of flat blocks, bevelled lags, pipe\nsection of radiused and bevelled lags. 2.9.2 Standard sizes 2.9.2.1 Flat blocks\nLength\n–\n500 mm, 600 mm or 900 mm\nWidth\n–\n150 mm, 300 mm, 450 mm or\n600 mm\nThickness\n–\n25 mm, 40 mm, 50 mm, 60 mm, 75 mm, or 100 mm 2.9.2.2 Bevelled lags\nLength\n–\n500 mm, 600 mm or 900 mm\nMajor width\n–\n75 mm to 166 mm\nThickness\n–\n40 mm, 50 mm, 60 mm or 75 mm 2.9.2.3 Pipe Sections\nLength\n–\n500 mm, 600 mm or 900 mm\nDiameter\n–\nTo fit standard pipes of external dia up to 219 mm Note – For method of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard, IS 3846 : 1980 Methods for determination of thermal\nconductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab, guarded hot-plate method) (first revision), IS 5688 : 1982 Methods of test for preformed block-type and pipe covering type thermal insulation (first revision), IS 5724 : 1970 Method of test for thermal\ninsulating cement, and IS 9490 : 1980 Method for determination of thermal conductivities of insulating materials (water calorimeter method)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8154 : 1993 Specifications for preformed calcium sillicate insulation (for temperatures upto 650ºC) (first revision).\nThickness\n–\n40 mm, 50 mm or 75 mm\n2.9.2.4 Curved segments (radiused and bevelled lags)–\nShall be furnished in lengths of 500 mm, 600 mm or 900 mm and in thckness of 40 mm, 50 mm, 60 mm or 75 mm for\ncurved surface having external radius greater than\n110 mm.\n2.9.3 Dimensional Tolerance – The dimensional tolerance of preformed insulation material shall be as\nfollows –\na)\nFlat blocks\n1)\nLength and width\n± 3 mm\n2)\nThickness\n-1.5 mm\n+ 3 mm b)\nPipe sections\n1)\nLength\n±3 mm\n2)\nInside diameter\n0 mm\n+5 mm\n3) Thickness (average)\n-1.5 mm\n+3 mm\n2.9.3.1 Uniformity – The local thickness at any point shall not vary from the average thickness by more than\n±3 mm."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8183: 1993",
    "title": "Bonded Mineral Wool",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for bonded mineral wool for thermal insulation.",
    "keywords": [
      "wool",
      "mineral",
      "bonded",
      "thermal",
      "group",
      "shot",
      "conductivity"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for bonded mineral wool for thermal insulation. 2. Requirements 2.1 Description – The material shall be mineral wool made from rock, slag or glass processed from a molten state into fibrous form and shall be bonded with a suitable binder. The slabs are normally supplied unfaced. Certain applications may require an applied finish of cloth, foil, wire netting, glass tissue, polythene or any other suitable material on one or both faces and these may be obtained as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier. 2.2 Bulk Density Group Bulk Density Maximum Recommended kg/m3 Hot FaceTemperature ºC 1 12-50 Up to 250 2 51-80 Up to 400 3 81-120 Up to 550 4 121-160 Up to 750 2.2.1 For any particular product, the variation from the manufacturer’s de"
    },
    "content": "IS 8183: 1993 Bonded Mineral Wool\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for bonded mineral wool for thermal insulation.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Description – The material shall be mineral wool\nmade from rock, slag or glass processed from a molten state into fibrous form and shall be bonded with a\nsuitable binder. The slabs are normally supplied unfaced. Certain applications may require an applied\nfinish of cloth, foil, wire netting, glass tissue, polythene or any other suitable material on one or both faces and\nthese may be obtained as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier.\n2.2 Bulk Density Group Bulk Density Maximum Recommended kg/m3\nHot FaceTemperature ºC 1 12-50\nUp to 250 2 51-80\nUp to 400 3 81-120\nUp to 550 4\n121-160\nUp to 750\n2.2.1 For any particular product, the variation from the manufacturer’s declared value for bulk density shall not\nexceed ±15 percent. When tested in accordance with the method prescribed in 9 of IS 3149 except that nominal\n/ specified thickness shall be used for calculating the bank density.\n2.3 Recovery After Compression – The recovery, after\ncompression of 75 percent of the original thickness, shall not be less than 90 percent of the original thickness.\n2.4 Shot Content – Shall not be more than the values\ngiven below. Any shot present in the bonded mineral wool shall not be greater than 5 mm in any dimension.\nIS Sieve\nShot Content, Percent by\nMass, Max\n500 micron\n5\n250 micron\n15\n2.5 Moisture Content and Moisture Absorption –\nShall not contain more than 2 percent moisture. It shall not gain in mass by more than 2 percent.\n2.6 Incombustibility – Shall be rated as incombustible\nwhen it passes the prescribed test. 2.6.1 The loss in total mass when determined by this test shall not exceed 5 percent.\n2.7 Thermal conductivity – The thermal conductivity\nor k-value of the material shall not exceed the values given below when determined in accordance with the\nmethod presscribed in 11 of IS 3346.\nMean\nThermal Conductivity\nTemperature mW/cm ºC\n0C\nGroup1\nGroup2\nGroup3\nGroup4\n50\n0.49\n0.43\n0.43\n0.43\n100\n0.69\n0.52\n0.52\n0.52\n150\n0.95\n0.64\n0.62\n0.62\n200\n—\n0.78\n0.73\n0.68\n250\n—\n0.93\n0.84\n0.80\n300\n—\n1.10\n0.95\n0.90\n2.8 Sulphur Content – Shall not contain more than 0.6\npercent of sulphur. When determined by the method prescribed in 19 of IS 3144.\n2.9 Dimensions – The bonded mineral wool shall be\nsupplied in widths of 50, 60, 75 and 100 cm and lengths of 100, 120 and 140 cm or as agreed to between the\npurchaser and the supplier. The thickness of the bonded mineral wool shall be 25, 40, 50, 65, 75 mm or as agreed to\nbetween the purchaser and the supplier.\n2.9.1 Dimensional Tolerances – For width and length, the dimensional tolerance of the bonded mineral wool\nslabs shall be:1/2 percent. For nominal thickness in the range of 25 to 75 mm the tolerance shall be: 2 mm. An\nexcess in all dimensions is permitted.\n2.10 Optional Requirements\n2.10.1Resistance to micro-organisms – Shall not show any mould or bacterial growth.\n2.10.2 Odour emission test – There shall be no apparent difference in odour of the butter when compared with\nthe blanks. 2.10.3 Resistance to vibration – Shall show not more than 1 percent height of settlement.\n2.10.4 Resistance to jolting – Shall show not more than\n3 percent height of settlement.\n2.10.5 Heat resistance – Shall not suffer any visible deterioration of the fibrous structure and shall not show\nany evidence of internal self-heating when heated to the maximum recommended temperature of use, as\nspecified by the manufacturer.\n2.10.6 Alkalinity – The pH of the solution of the material shall be between 7.0 and 10.0.\n2.10.7 Corrosive Attack – Shall not cause corrosion of the surface on which it is applied.\nNote – For method of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard, IS 3144 : 1992 Mineral wool thermal insulation\nmaterials–Methods of tests (second revision) and IS 3346 : 1980 Method of determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulating materials (two slab guarded hot plate method) (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8183 : 1993 Specifications for bonded mineral wool (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9428: 1993",
    "title": "Preformed Calcium Silicate Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for preformed calcium silicate insulation intended for use with surfaces with reach temperatures up to 9500C.",
    "keywords": [
      "lags",
      "bevelled",
      "thermal",
      "temperatures",
      "reduction",
      "under",
      "preformed"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for preformed calcium silicate insulation intended for use with surfaces with reach temperatures up to 9500C. 2. Requirements 2.1 Bulk Density – The average value shall be between 220 and 280 kg/m3. For any particular product, a tolerance of ±10 percent shall be allowed on the purchaser’s declared value and shall be within the range specified above. 2.2 Compressive Strength – The reduction in thickness under the following conditions shall not exceed 5 percent. a) Dry, under a load of 415 kN/m2; and b) Wet (after 18 hours immersion in water), under a load of 170 kN/m2. 2.3 Flexural Strength – The minimum value shall be 240 kN/m2. 2.4 Heat Resistance – When tested at increasing temperatures, the material shall be deemed suitable for use under"
    },
    "content": "IS 9428: 1993 Preformed Calcium Silicate Insulation\n(FOR TEMPERATURES UP TO 950ºC)\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for preformed calcium silicate insulation\nintended for use with surfaces with reach temperatures up to 9500C.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Bulk Density – The average value shall be between\n220 and 280 kg/m3. For any particular product, a tolerance of ±10 percent shall be allowed on the\npurchaser’s declared value and shall be within the range specified above.\n2.2 Compressive Strength – The reduction in thickness\nunder the following conditions shall not exceed 5 percent.\na)\nDry, under a load of 415 kN/m2; and b)\nWet (after 18 hours immersion in water), under a load of 170 kN/m2.\n2.3 Flexural Strength – The minimum value shall be\n240 kN/m2.\n2.4 Heat Resistance – When tested at increasing\ntemperatures, the material shall be deemed suitable for use under conditions of soaking heat, for 24 hours, up\nto the temperature at which the following requirements are met:\na) Linear shrinkage\n2 percent\n(length), percent\nMax b) Loss in mass,\n15 percent percent, Max\nc) Compressive\nReduction in thickness strength not exceeding 5\npercent under a load of 345 kN/m2\n2.5 Thermal Conductivity\nMean\nThermal\nTemperature\nConductivity, Max\n0C\nW/mK\n200\n0.080\n250\n0.088\n300\n0.097\n350\n0.110\n400\n0.121\n450\n0.135\n500\n0.148\n2.6 Moisture Content – Shall not exceed 7.5 percent\nby mass.\n2.7 Alkalinity – The pH of the solution of the material\nshall be between 8.0 and 11.0.\n2.8 Standard Shapes, Size and Dimensional Tolerance 2.8.1 Shapes – Shall be supplied in the form of flat slabs, bevelled lags, pipe sections or radiused and\nbevelled lags. 2.8.2 Standard sizes –\na)\nFlat blocks\n–\nLength\n–\n500 mm, 600 mm or 900 mm\nWidth\n–\n150 mm, 300 mm, 450 mm or 600 mm\nThickness –\n25 mm, 40 mm, 50 mm,\n60 mm, 75 mm, or 100 mm b) Bevelled lags\n–\nLength\n–\n500 mm, 600 mm or 900 mm\nMajor width\n–\n75 mm to 166 mm\nThickness\n–\n40 mm, 50 mm, 60 mm or\n75 mm c)\nPipe sections\n–\nLength\n–\n500 mm, 600 mm or 900 mm\nDiameter\n–\nTo fit standard pipe of external dia up to 219 mm\nThickness\n–\n40 mm, 50 mm or 75 mm Note – For method of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard, IS 5688 : 1982 Method of test for preformed block-type\nand pipe covering type thermal insulation (first revision), IS 5724 : 1970 Methods of tests for thermal insulating cements and"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9742: 1993",
    "title": "Sprayed Mineral Wool Thermal Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for sprayed mineral wool thermal insulation.",
    "keywords": [
      "wool",
      "thermal",
      "mineral",
      "insulation",
      "sprayed",
      "fire",
      "settlement"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for sprayed mineral wool thermal insulation. 2. Material 2.1 Mineral Wool – Mineral wool conforming to IS 3677 : 1985* shall be used. 2.2 Sprayable Mineral Wool – Mineral wool with suitable binder, uniformly blended to ensure that it does not separate during normal handling and spraying operations shall be used. 3. Requirements 3.1 Density – The density of the applied and dried material shall be in the range of 200 to 250 kg/m3 and shall also not vary by more than ±15 percent from the value declared by the manufacturer. 3.2 Compressive Strength Deformation Compresive Strength, Percent Min Pa (N/m2) 10 4 550 15 6 460 3.3 Thermal Conductivity Mean Thermal Temperature Conductivity, Max ºC W/mK 100 0.066 150 0.072 200 0.079 250 0.085 370 0.101 "
    },
    "content": "IS 9742: 1993 Sprayed Mineral Wool Thermal Insulation\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for sprayed mineral wool thermal insulation.\n2.\nMaterial\n2.1 Mineral Wool – Mineral wool conforming to IS\n3677 : 1985* shall be used.\n2.2 Sprayable Mineral Wool – Mineral wool with\nsuitable binder, uniformly blended to ensure that it does not separate during normal handling and spraying\noperations shall be used.\n3.\nRequirements\n3.1 Density – The density of the applied and dried\nmaterial shall be in the range of 200 to 250 kg/m3 and shall also not vary by more than ±15 percent from the\nvalue declared by the manufacturer.\n3.2 Compressive Strength\nDeformation\nCompresive Strength,\nPercent\nMin Pa (N/m2)\n10\n4 550\n15\n6 460\n3.3\nThermal Conductivity\nMean\nThermal\nTemperature\nConductivity, Max ºC\nW/mK\n100\n0.066\n150\n0.072\n200\n0.079\n250\n0.085\n370\n0.101\n3.4 Heat Resistance – Shall not suffer visible\ndeterioration of the fibrous structure when tested by heating to 600ºC.\n3.5 Incombustibility – Shall be found to be\nincombustible.\n3.6 Fire Protection – When the material is to be used\nfor fire protection purposes, it shall satisfy the heating conditions (time-temperature curve) as specified in IS\n3809 : 1979** for determination of fire resistance rating.\n3.7 Thickness – The thickness of finished, sprayed-on\ninsulation shall not vary from the nominal value by more than +10 mm -3 mm for thickness up to 100 mm and by -\n5 +15 percent for the thickness above 100 mm.\n3.8 Corrosion Protection – Shall not corrode the\nsurface on which it is applied.\n3.9\nOptional Requirements –\n3.9.1 Resistance to Vibration – Shall show not more than 1 percent by height of settlement.\n3.9.2 Resistance to Jolting – Shall show not more than 3 percent by height of settlement.\n** Fire resistance test for structures (first revision).\n* Unbonded rock and slag wool for thermal insulation\n(second revision)\nNote – For methods of tests, refer to IS 3144 : 1992 Mineral wool thermal insulation materials methods of tests (second\nrevision), IS 3346 : 1980 Methods of determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulation materials (two slab guarded hot plate method) (first revision), IS 5688 : 1982 Methods of test for preformed block -type and pipe covering type thermal\ninsulation (first revision) and IS 5724 : 1970 Methods of tests for thermal insulating cements.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 9742 : 1993 Specifications for sprayed mineral wool thermal insulation (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9743: 1990",
    "title": "Thermal Insulation Finishing Cements",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "summary": "(First Revision) 1. Scope 1.1 Requirements for thermal insulation finishing cements, prepared by mixing with water for application to insulating materials after they have been applied at site to the plant of piping systems. Note – Some of these finishing cements are used for services at temperatures below ambient, in which case a vapour barrier is required. This standard does not prescribe requirements for setting time. 1.2 This standard does not prescribe requirements for setting time. 2. Types",
    "keywords": [
      "finishing",
      "cements",
      "setting",
      "cement",
      "thermal",
      "insulation",
      "distributed"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 9743: 1990 Thermal Insulation Finishing Cements\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope\n1.1 Requirements for thermal insulation finishing\ncements, prepared by mixing with water for application to insulating materials after they have been applied at\nsite to the plant of piping systems.\nNote – Some of these finishing cements are used for\nservices at temperatures below ambient, in which case a vapour barrier is required. This standard does not prescribe\nrequirements for setting time.\n1.2 This standard does not prescribe requirements for\nsetting time.\n2.\nTypes\nType 1 – Hard-setting compositions.\nType 2 – Self-setting cements\nType 3 – Gypsum plaster ompositions, and\nType 4 – Fire-proof finishing cements\n2.1 Type 1 – finishing cements are a mixture of inorganic\nfillers and well distributed reinforcing fibres with a clay bonding agent, and set by removal of water by natural\ndrying or on heating. The normal ratio of hard-setting cements will be 1 part of hydraulic cement to 4 parts of\nhard-setting composition.\n2.2 Type 2 – finishing cements consist of well distributed\nreinforcing fibres (1 part) with a hydraulic cement (3 parts) as binder, with or without plasticizing agents or\nfillers. These set without the application of heat.\n2.3 Type 3 – finishing cements set without the\napplication of heat and consist of calcium sulphate hemihydrate, and well distributed reinforcing fibres,\nusually to a lower percentage by mass than for selfsetting cement.\n2.4 Type 4 – fire-proof cement is non-combustible and\ncould effectively be used as a finishing cement over turbine insulation applications, etc. where the finishing\ncement should not give rise to fire due to oil leakage, etc.\nNote – Thermal insulation finishing cements of Type 1 and\nType 3 are not suitable for exposure to weather conditions without further protection\n3.\nRequirements\n3.1 Description – Shall be thoroughly permixed and\nfree from unopened or badly distributed fibres or coarse constituents.\n3.2 Bulk Density – The average value shall be as given\nbelow :\nType of the\nDensity\nFinishing Cement kg/m3, Max\n1\n1 500\n2\n1 800\n3\n1 600\n4\n1 300\n3.3 Wet Covering Capacity – Wet covering of the four\ntypes of finishing cements shall be not less than 6 m2/\n100 kg at 10 mm thickness.\n3.4 Inertness — Shall not include any substance that\nmay promote corrosive attack of the surfaces with which it is in contact, for example, wire netting used as\nreinforcement.\n3.5 Compresive Strength\nType of the\nCompressive Strength\nMaterial kN/m3, Min\n1\n1 030\n2\n1 720\n3\n820\n4\n1 800 Note – For method of test refer to Annex A of the standard, IS 3144 : 1992 Mineral wool thermal insulation materials methods\nof test (second revision), IS 5688 : 1982 Method of test for preformed block type and pipe covering type thermal insulation\n(first revision) and IS 5724 : 1970 Mehtods of test for thermal insulating cement.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 9743 : 1990 Specifications for thermal insulation finishing cement\n(first revision).\n3.6 Flexural Strength – For Type 1 shall be not less\nthan 2000 kN/m2.\n3.7 Resistance to Impact – The average diameter of\nfive indentations shall not exceed 30 mm. Any cracking of the specimen that is observed shall be reported.\n3.8 Heat Resistance – The blocks of the finishing\ncement shall neither disintegrate, nor have observable cracks.\n3.9 Consistency of Wet Mixed Material – Shall be 35\nto 45 percent.\n3.10 Moisture Content – For hard setting compositions,\nthe maximum free moisture content shall be not greater than 5 percent, and self-setting compositions and\ngypsum plaster shall be supplied dry."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9842: 1994",
    "title": "Preformed Fibrous Pipe Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for preformed fibrous pipe sections for thermal imsulation.",
    "keywords": [
      "thermal",
      "group",
      "bulk",
      "fibrous",
      "shot",
      "thicknesses",
      "preformed"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for preformed fibrous pipe sections for thermal imsulation. 2. Requirements 2.1 Description – Shall be mineral wool made from rock, slag or glass, processed from a molten state into fibrous form and bonded with a suitable binder. The sections shall normally be supplied unfaced. Certain applications may require an applied finish of aluminium foil, paper, roofing felt or other material. 2.2 Bulk Density Group Bulk Density, Maximum kg/m3 Recommended Hot Face Temperature, ºC 1 50-80 Up to 400 2 81-120 Up to 550 3 121-160 Up to 650 4 161-250 Up to 750 2.2.1 For any particular product, the variation from the manufacturer’s declared value for bulk density, calculated at the nominal thickness, shall not exceed ±15 percent. The actual bulk density shall"
    },
    "content": "IS 9842: 1994 Preformed Fibrous Pipe Insulation\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements and methods of sampling and test for preformed fibrous pipe sections for thermal\nimsulation.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Description – Shall be mineral wool made from rock,\nslag or glass, processed from a molten state into fibrous form and bonded with a suitable binder. The sections\nshall normally be supplied unfaced. Certain applications may require an applied finish of aluminium foil, paper,\nroofing felt or other material.\n2.2 Bulk Density\nGroup\nBulk Density,\nMaximum kg/m3\nRecommended\nHot Face\nTemperature, ºC\n1\n50-80\nUp to 400\n2\n81-120\nUp to 550\n3\n121-160\nUp to 650\n4\n161-250\nUp to 750\n2.2.1\nFor any particular product, the variation from the manufacturer’s declared value for bulk density,\ncalculated at the nominal thickness, shall not exceed\n±15 percent. The actual bulk density shall, however, be within the bulk density range given in 2.2.\n2.3 Shot Content – Shall be not more than the values\ngiven below. Any shot present in the bonded mineral wool shall not be greater than 5 mm in any dimension.\nIS Sieve\nShot Content,\nPercent by\nMass, Max\n500 micron 5\n250 micron\n15\n2.4 Moisture Content and Moisture Absorption –\nShall not contain more than 2 percent moisture and shall not gain in mass by more than 2 percent.\n2.5 Incombustibililty – Shall be found to be\nincombustible. The loss in total mass, when tested for incombustibility, shall not exceed 5 percent.\n2.6 Thermal Conductivity – Shall not exceed the values\ngiven below:\nMean\nThermal Conductivity\nTempemW/cm0C rature ºC Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4\n50\n0.43\n0.43\n0.43\n0.43\n100\n0.52\n0.52\n0.52\n0.52\n150\n0.64\n0.62\n0.62\n0.62\n200\n0.78\n0.73\n0.70\n0.68\n250\n0.93\n0.85\n0.8 5\n0.80\n300\n1.10\n1.00\n1.00\n0.90\n2.7 Dimensions – Shall be supplied as hollow cylinders\nsplit lengthwise on one or both sides of the cylindrical axis, with lengths of 50 cm, 60 cm, 75 cm, 90 cm and 100\ncm to fit standard size of pipe and tubing. The nominal thicknesses regularly furnished shall be 25 mm, 40 mm,\n50 mm, 60 mm, 75 mm, 90 mm and 100 mm. Nominal thicknesses greater than 60 mm may be furnished in\nmultiple layers.\n2.7.1\nDimensional Tolerance – For length, the tolerance shall be 0.5 percent; excess is permitted. For\nnominal thickness up to 75 mm the tolerance shall be +\n5 mm, – 2 mm. For greater nominal thicknesses, the toleracne on thickness shall be as agreed to between\nthe purchaser and the supplier. When installed on the pipe of the specified size, sections shall fit snugly and\nshall have tight longitudinal land circumferential joints.\n2.8 Linear Shrinkage – Shall be not greater than 2\npercent when subjected to condition of soaking heat at the static maximum temperature of use for 24 hours.\nNote– To avoid crushing the ends of the specimen, travelling\nmicroscope should be used.\n2.9 Heat Resistance – Shall not suffer any visible\ndeterioration of the fibrous structure and shall not show any evidence of internal self-heating when heated to\nthe maximum recommended temperature of use, as specified by the manufacturer. Note – For method of tests, refer to Appendices A and B of the standard, IS 3144 : 1992 Mineral wool thermal insulation materials\n– Methods of test (second revision), IS 3346 : 1980 Method of determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulating materials (two slab guarded hot plate method) (first revision), IS 5688 : 1982 Methods of test for preformed block-type and pipe\ncovering type thermal insulation (first revision), and IS 5724 : 1970 Method of test for thermal insulating cements.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 9842 : 1994 Specifications for Preformed fibrous pipe insulation\n(first revision).\n2.10\nRecovery After Compression – The recovery, after compression to 75 percent of the original thickness,\nshall be not less than 90 percent of the original thickness.\n2.11 Sulphur Content – Shall not contain more than 0.6\npercent of sulphur.\n2.12 Optional Requirements\n2.12.1 Alkalinty – The the pH of the solution of the material shall be between 7.0 and 10.0.\n2.12.2 Resistance to Micro-organisms – Shall not show any mould or bacterial growth.\n2.12.3 Odour Emission Test – There shall be no apparent difference in odour of the butter, when compared with\nthe blanks.\n2.12.4 Corrosive Attack – Shall not cause corrosion of the surface on which it is applied."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 11128: 1984",
    "title": "Spray – Applied Hydrated Calcium Silicate Thermal Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for spray-applied, hydrated calcium silicate thermal insulation.",
    "keywords": [
      "thermal",
      "insulation",
      "silicate",
      "hydrated",
      "calcium",
      "conductivity",
      "spray"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for spray-applied, hydrated calcium silicate thermal insulation. 2. Requirements 2.1 Sprayable hydrated calcium silicate insulation shall be composed predominantly of calcium silicate mineral or refractory fibres and a suitable proportion of inorganic, heat-resistant binder. The binder and the fibres shall be uniformly blended and shall not separate during normal handling and spraying operations. The fibre content shall be less than 15 percent. 2.2 Density — The applied and dried density of the material shall be in the range of 160-350 kg/m3 and shall not vary by more than ±10 percent from the value declared by the manufacturer. 2.3 Compressive Strength — Shall be as given below: Deformation, Compressive Strength, Percent kPa (kN/m2), Min 5 285"
    },
    "content": "IS 11128: 1984 Spray – Applied Hydrated Calcium Silicate Thermal Insulation\n1.\nScope – Requirements and methods of sampling and test for spray-applied, hydrated calcium silicate\nthermal insulation.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Sprayable hydrated calcium silicate insulation shall\nbe composed predominantly of calcium silicate mineral or refractory fibres and a suitable proportion of\ninorganic, heat-resistant binder. The binder and the fibres shall be uniformly blended and shall not separate during\nnormal handling and spraying operations. The fibre content shall be less than 15 percent.\n2.2 Density — The applied and dried density of the\nmaterial shall be in the range of 160-350 kg/m3 and shall not vary by more than ±10 percent from the value\ndeclared by the manufacturer.\n2.3 Compressive Strength — Shall be as given below:\nDeformation,\nCompressive Strength,\nPercent kPa (kN/m2), Min\n5\n285\n10\n500\n2.4 Thermal Conductivity – Shall not exceed the values\ngiven below:\nMean Temp-\nThermal Conductivity erature ºC\nW/m.K\n100\n0.069\n200\n0.081\n300\n0.097\n400\n0.117\n500\n0.144\n2.5 Adhesion – Adhesion of dried thermal insulation\nto steel shall be 3.65 kN/m2.\n2.6 Heat Resistance – Shall not suffer visible\ndeterioration when tested to the maximum recommended temperature of use. At increasing temperatures, the\nmaterial shall be deemed suitable for use conditions of soaking heat for 24 hours up to the specified temperature\nat which the following requirements are met :\na) Linear shrinkage –\n2 percent, Max b) Loss in mass –\n15 percent, Max c) Compressive strength – 10 percent, Max\nreduction in thickness under a load of 345 kN/m2\n2.7 Incombustibility – Shall be found to be\nincombustible.\n2.8 Moisture Content – Shall not exceed 7.5 percent.\n2.9 Optical Requirement\n2.9.1\nFire Protection – When the material is to be used for fire protection, it shall satisty the time-\ntemperature curve as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier.\nNote – For method of tests, refer to IS 3144 : 1992 Mineral wool thermal insulation materials – Methods of test (second\nrevision), IS 3346 : 1980 method of determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulating materials (two slab guarded hot plate method) (first revision), IS 5688 : 1982 Methods of test for preformed block-type and pipe covering type thermal\ninsulation (first revision), and IS 5724 : 1970 Method of test for thermal insulating cements.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 11128 : 1984 Specificatiosns for spray - applied hydrated calcium silicate thermal insulation."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 11307: 1985",
    "title": "Cellular Glass Block And Pipe Thermal Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for cellular glass block and pipe thermal insulation intended for use on surfaces operating at temperatures between – 2000C and 4250C.",
    "keywords": [
      "thermal",
      "insulation",
      "block",
      "shapes",
      "sections",
      "conductivity",
      "average"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for cellular glass block and pipe thermal insulation intended for use on surfaces operating at temperatures between – 2000C and 4250C. 2. Requirements 2.1 General – Shall consist of a glass composition that has been formed or cellulated under molten conditions, annealed, and set to form a rigid incombustible material with hermetically-sealed cells. The material shall be trimmed into blocks of standard dimensions or commercial sizes. It shall not have visible defects that may adversely affect its service qualities. 2.2 Bulk Density – The average value shall be 160 ±15 kg/m3. 2.3 Thermal Conductivity – The average value shall be as given below: Mean Thermal Conductivity,Max Temperature ºC W/mK 150 0.082 65 0.064 0 0.048 -65 0.043 2.4 Compressive "
    },
    "content": "IS 11307: 1985 Cellular Glass Block And Pipe Thermal Insulation\n1.\nScope – Requirements and methods of sampling and test for cellular glass block and pipe thermal\ninsulation intended for use on surfaces operating at temperatures between – 2000C and 4250C.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 General – Shall consist of a glass composition\nthat has been formed or cellulated under molten conditions, annealed, and set to form a rigid\nincombustible material with hermetically-sealed cells.\nThe material shall be trimmed into blocks of standard dimensions or commercial sizes. It shall not have visible\ndefects that may adversely affect its service qualities.\n2.2 Bulk Density – The average value shall be 160 ±15\nkg/m3.\n2.3 Thermal Conductivity – The average value shall\nbe as given below:\nMean\nThermal Conductivity,Max\nTemperature ºC\nW/mK\n150\n0.082\n65\n0.064\n0\n0.048\n-65\n0.043\n2.4 Compressive Strength – The average value shall\nbe not less than 520 kPa with the exception given in 3.4 of the standard.\n2.5 Flexural Strength – The average minimum value\nshall be 410 kPa with the exceptions given in 3.5 of the standard .\n2.6 Water Absorption – Shall be not more than 0.6\npercent by volume.\n2.7 Standard Shapes, Sizes and Dimensional\nTolerances\n2.7.1 Flat Blocks – Block shall be of rectangular sections and shall be true to form and dimension, the corners\nsquare and the sides and edges parallel. Sizes and thickness shall be as given below, and the tolerance on\neach nominal dimension shall be ±1.6 mm.\nLength\n450 or 600 mm\nWidth\n300 or 450 mm\nThickness\n25, 40, 50, 60, 75, 100 or 125 mm\n2.7.2\nPipe Sections – Pipe sections shall be supplied, with or without facing as agreed to between the\npurchaser and the supplier, as hollow cylindrical shapes split in half lengthwise (in plane including the cylindrical\naxis) or as curved segments. The insulation shall be furnished in sections or segments of dimensions given\nbelow, and the tolerance on each nominal dimensions shall be ± 3.2 mm.\nLength\n450 or 600 mm\nDiameter\nTo fit standard pipes of external dia up to 219 mm\nThickness 20, 25, 40, 50, 60, 75 or 100 mm\n2.7.3 Special Shapes – Dimensions and tolerances on nominal dimensions of special shapes shall be as agreed\nto between the purchaser and the supplier.\n2.7.4 Uniformity – The local thickness of the insulation material at any point shall not vary from the average\nthickness by more than ± 3 mm.\nNote – For method of tests, refer to Appendix A of the standard, IS 3346 : 1980 Method of determination of thermal conductivity\nof thermal insulating materials (two slab guarded hot plate method) (first revision), and IS 5688 : 1982 Methods of test for preformed block-type and pipe covering type thermal insulation (first revision).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 11307 : 1985 Specifications for cellular glass block and pipe thermal insulation."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 11308: 1985",
    "title": "Hydraulic Setting Thermal Insulating",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for hydraulic setting thermal insulating castables for use as either hot face or cold face backing of refractory linings, at temperatures up to 12500C.",
    "keywords": [
      "thermal",
      "castables",
      "temperatures",
      "insulating",
      "setting",
      "insulation",
      "crushing"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for hydraulic setting thermal insulating castables for use as either hot face or cold face backing of refractory linings, at temperatures up to 12500C. 2. Types a) Type 1050 – Suitable for use at temperatures up to 1 0500C, and b) Type 1 250– Suitable for use at temperatures up to 1 2500C. 3. Requirements 3.1 General – Shall be in the form of dry powder with maximum grain size 5 mm. 3.2 Moisture Content – Shall not contain more than 2 percent moisture by mass. 3.3 The material shall also conform to the reqirements given in Table 1. 3.4 Ferric Oxide Content – For temperatures up to 1 2500C shall be 5 percent, maximum TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR HYDRAULIC SETTING THERMAL INSULATING CASTABLES FOR TEMPERATURES UP TO 1 2500C. Sl Characterstic Requireme"
    },
    "content": "IS 11308: 1985 Hydraulic Setting Thermal Insulating\nCASTABLES FOR TEMPERATURE UPTO 1250ºC\n1.\nScope – Requirements and methods of sampling and test for hydraulic setting thermal insulating\ncastables for use as either hot face or cold face backing of refractory linings, at temperatures up to 12500C.\n2.\nTypes a) Type 1050 – Suitable for use at temperatures up\nto 1 0500C, and b) Type 1 250– Suitable for use at temperatures up\nto 1 2500C.\n3.\nRequirements\n3.1 General – Shall be in the form of dry powder with\nmaximum grain size 5 mm.\n3.2 Moisture Content – Shall not contain more than 2\npercent moisture by mass.\n3.3 The material shall also conform to the reqirements\ngiven in Table 1.\n3.4 Ferric Oxide Content – For temperatures up to\n1 2500C shall be 5 percent, maximum\nTABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR HYDRAULIC SETTING THERMAL INSULATING\nCASTABLES FOR TEMPERATURES UP TO 1 2500C.\nSl\nCharacterstic\nRequirements\nNo.\nType 1 050\nType 1 250 i)\nDensity after moulding and\n1 000\n1 400 drying at 1100C kg/m3, Max\nii)\nCrushing strength after curing\n1 350\n3 000 and drying at 1100C, kN/m2, Min\niii)\nThermal conductivity, W/mk Max:\nMean\nHot face\nTemperature\nTemperature\n(Approximate)\nºC ºC\n200\n350\n0.23\n0.46\n400\n725\n0.30\n0.51\n500\n900\n0.30\n0.58 iv)\nHeat resistance when subjected to soaking heat for 24 hours at\n1 0500C and 1 2500C respectively:\na)\nLinear shrinkage (length)\n1.5\n1.5 percent, Max\nb)\nLoss in mass, percent, Max\n15\n15 c)\nCrushing strength, kN/m2, Min\n900\n2000\nNote – For method of tests, refer to Appendix A of the standard, IS 3144 : 1992 Mineral wool thermal insulation materials -\nMethods of test (second revision), IS 3346 : 1980 Method of determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulating materials (two slab guarded hot plate method) (first revision), IS 5688 : 1982 Methods of test for preformed block-type and pipe\ncovering type thermal insulation (first revision), and IS 5724 : 1970 Method of test for thermal insulating cements, and IS 9490\n: 1980 Method of determination of thermal conductiviy of insulation materials (water calorimeter method).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 11308 : 1985 Specification for hydraulic setting thermal insulating castables for temperatures up to 1250ºC."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12436: 1988",
    "title": "Preformed Rigid Polyurethane (Pur) And Polyisocyanurate (Pir) Foams For Thermal Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements, and the methods of sampling and test for preformed rigid polyurethane (PUR) and polyisocyanurate (PIR) foam for thermal insulation in the form of boards, cut and moulded slabs, cut and moulded pipe sections, cut and moulded radiused and bevelled lags, panels with adhesive integrally laminated facings, panels with adhesive applied facings, and cut and moulded special shapes.",
    "keywords": [
      "foam",
      "pir",
      "pur",
      "rigid",
      "lags",
      "thermal",
      "mating"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements, and the methods of sampling and test for preformed rigid polyurethane (PUR) and polyisocyanurate (PIR) foam for thermal insulation in the form of boards, cut and moulded slabs, cut and moulded pipe sections, cut and moulded radiused and bevelled lags, panels with adhesive integrally laminated facings, panels with adhesive applied facings, and cut and moulded special shapes. 2. Classification 2.1 Type – The rigid preformed cellular urethane thermal insulation materials shall be of two types: Type 1 – For general use. Type 2 – For use where there is a requirement for greater resistance to compressive forces. 2.2 Grades – The rigid preformed cellular urethane thermal insulation materials shall be of two grades: PUR – Rigid polyurethane foam whose maximum recommended operating te",
      "Compositions": "Shall consist of rigid polyurethane or rigid polyisocyanurate foam with substantially closed cell structure.",
      "Requirements": "Shall conform to the requirements given in Table 1.",
      "Standard Sizes And Dimensions": "In the case of finished boards of both the types, the sizes shall be either 1.0 × 0.5 m or 1.22 × 0.61 m or as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier. The size for pipe-section and lags shall be 1.0 or 0.5 m length unless otherwise agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier, and the bore shall be the specified outside diameter of the pipe to be lagged. 5.1 Thickness — The material shall normally be supplied in thickness of 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 75, 90 and 100 mm or as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier. 5.2 Tolerance — See Table 2 and 3. TABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR RIGID PREFORMED CELLULAR URETHANE FOAM THERMAL INSULATION MATERIALS Sl Characterstic Requirements NO. PUR 1 PUR 2 PIR 1 PIR 2 i) Dimensional Stability at 100 ± 20C ±2 ±2 ±2 ±2 percent, for 24 h, Max "
    },
    "content": "IS 12436: 1988 Preformed Rigid Polyurethane (Pur) And Polyisocyanurate (Pir) Foams For Thermal Insulation\n1.\nScope – Requirements, and the methods of sampling and test for preformed rigid polyurethane (PUR) and\npolyisocyanurate (PIR) foam for thermal insulation in the form of boards, cut and moulded slabs, cut and\nmoulded pipe sections, cut and moulded radiused and bevelled lags, panels with adhesive integrally laminated\nfacings, panels with adhesive applied facings, and cut and moulded special shapes.\n2.\nClassification\n2.1 Type – The rigid preformed cellular urethane thermal\ninsulation materials shall be of two types:\nType 1 – For general use.\nType 2 – For use where there is a requirement for greater resistance to compressive forces.\n2.2 Grades – The rigid preformed cellular urethane\nthermal insulation materials shall be of two grades:\nPUR – Rigid polyurethane foam whose maximum recommended operating temperature is up to 110ºC.\nPIR – Rigid polyisocyanurate foam whose maximum recommended operating temperature is up to 140ºC.\n3. Compositions – Shall consist of rigid polyurethane\nor rigid polyisocyanurate foam with substantially closed cell structure.\n4. Requirements – Shall conform to the requirements\ngiven in Table 1.\n5.\nStandard Sizes and Dimensions – In the case of finished boards of both the types, the sizes shall be\neither 1.0 × 0.5 m or 1.22 × 0.61 m or as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier. The size for pipe-section\nand lags shall be 1.0 or 0.5 m length unless otherwise agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier, and\nthe bore shall be the specified outside diameter of the pipe to be lagged.\n5.1 Thickness — The material shall normally be supplied\nin thickness of 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 75, 90 and 100 mm or as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier.\n5.2 Tolerance — See Table 2 and 3.\nTABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR RIGID PREFORMED CELLULAR URETHANE FOAM\nTHERMAL INSULATION MATERIALS\nSl\nCharacterstic\nRequirements NO.\nPUR 1 PUR 2 PIR 1 PIR 2\ni)\nDimensional Stability at 100 ± 20C ±2 ±2\n±2\n±2 percent, for 24 h, Max\nii)\nWater vapour transmission, Max, 5.5 5.5\n8.5\n8.5 ng/Pasm\niii)\nClosed cell content, Min, Percent 85 85\n85\n85 iv)\nCompressive strength at 10 115 205\n115\n205 percent deformation, Min, kN/m2\nv)\nThermal conductivity (w/m,k), Max, at 0.023 0.023\n0.023\n0.023\n50 0C 10 0C\nvi)\nHorizontal burning, Max, mm 125 125\n25\n25 TABLE 2 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES FOR\nPIPE SECTIONS AND LAGS Sl\nDimensions Permissible No.\nDeviations Moulded/ Cut Pipe Sections and Lags mm i) Lengths\n± 3 ii) Bores less than 150 mm\n+ 2\n– 0 iii) Bores 150 mm and above\n+ 3\n– 0 iv) Outside diameters\n+ 2 less than 150 mm\n– 0 v) Outside diameters\n+ 3 150 mm and above\n– 0\nTABLE 3 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES\nFOR SLABS\nAll dimensions in millimeters. SlLengths Permissible Max Thickness Noor Deviations Differences Tolerance\nWidths of Lengths in the Lengths or Widths of the Diagonals of Rectangular Slab i) Up to and ± 2 5 ±2\nincluding 1000 ii) Over 1000 up ±4 8 ±2\nto and including\n2500\n6. Workmanship and Finish\n6.1 General — Shall not have visible defects that\nwould adversely affects its service qualities.\n6.2 Pipe Sections — Shall be supplied in two semi-\ncircular pieces; the longitudinally mating faces shall be flat and in the same plane so that when the two pieces\nare put together no gaps exist between the mating surfaces.\nNote — It is common practice for the mating faces while\nstill being flat in the length-wise direction to have a variable profile in the radial direction. This is acceptable provided\nthat the mating surfaces so created still fits snugly together.\nIn many cases, this practice enchances the snugness of the fit. 6.2.1 The ends shall be flat and normal to the\nNote 1– For notes on guidance to user/designers refer to Appendix A of the standard.\nNote 2– For method of tests, refer to IS 3346 : 1980 Method of determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulation\nmaterial (two slab guarded hot plate method) (first revision) and relevant parts of IS 11239 : 1985 Method of test for cellular thermal insulating materials.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12436 : 1988 Specifications for Preformed rigid polyurethane (PUR) and polyisocyanurate (PIR) foams for thermal insulation.\nlongitudinal axis of the sections.\n6.3 Radiused and Bevelled Lags – The mating bevelled\nedges shall be flat, so that when they are put together to form a cylinder no gaps exists between abutting lags. 6.3.1 The ends shall be flat and normal to the longitudinal axis of the lag.\nNote — No values are specified for their width on the outer\nand inner faces.\n6.4 Moulded Components – All moulded items shall be\nfree from grease or other mould release agent that will adversely reduce the adhesion of insulation, mastics\nand adhesives.\n6.5 Colour Identification – PIR foam shall be supplied\ncoloured pink. PUR foam shall be supplied in any other colour or without added colour, as required."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 13204: 1991",
    "title": "Rigid Phenolic Foam For Thermal Insulation",
    "category": "Thermal Insulation Materials",
    "summary": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for rigid for phenolic foam for thermal insulation purposes. It applies to slab (blocks, boards and profiled sheets) and profiled sections (pipe sections and radiused or bevelled lags) cut from pipes. The nominal temperature range for which the insulation material is suitable is –180 to + 130ºC without any facing. The material is normally supplied with craft paper facing on both sides. This standard is not applicable to continuously extended phenolic",
    "keywords": [
      "foam",
      "lags",
      "phenolic",
      "sections",
      "thermal",
      "rigid",
      "pipe"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for rigid for phenolic foam for thermal insulation purposes. It applies to slab (blocks, boards and profiled sheets) and profiled sections (pipe sections and radiused or bevelled lags) cut from pipes. The nominal temperature range for which the insulation material is suitable is –180 to + 130ºC without any facing. The material is normally supplied with craft paper facing on both sides. This standard is not applicable to continuously extended phenolic foam pipe insulating sections. 2. Requirements 2.1 Composition — Shall consist of phenolic foam of uniform cellular structure. 2.2 The rigid phenolic foam faced or unfaced shall conform to the requirements given in Table 1. TABLE 1 REQUIREMENT OF RIGID PHENOLIC FOAM Sl Characteristic Requirement NO"
    },
    "content": "IS 13204: 1991 Rigid Phenolic Foam For Thermal Insulation\n1.\nScope – Requirements and methods of sampling and test for rigid for phenolic foam for thermal\ninsulation purposes. It applies to slab (blocks, boards and profiled sheets) and profiled sections (pipe sections\nand radiused or bevelled lags) cut from pipes. The nominal temperature range for which the insulation\nmaterial is suitable is –180 to + 130ºC without any facing.\nThe material is normally supplied with craft paper facing on both sides.\nThis standard is not applicable to continuously extended phenolic foam pipe insulating sections.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Composition — Shall consist of phenolic foam of\nuniform cellular structure.\n2.2 The rigid phenolic foam faced or unfaced shall\nconform to the requirements given in Table 1.\nTABLE 1 REQUIREMENT OF RIGID\nPHENOLIC FOAM Sl Characteristic\nRequirement NO.\ni)\nDensity, kg/m3\n32-60 ii)\nCompressive strength at\n100\n10 percent deformation,\nMin, kPa iii)\nDimensional stability; percent\n1.5 linear change after 7 days at\n70±20C and 95±5 percent RH,Max iv)\nWater vapour permeability rate\n5.5 at 380C and 88 percent RH,\nng/Pa.s.m, Max v)\nApparent water absorption\n7.5 percent by volume, Max\nvi)\nHorizontal burning, mm, Max\n25 vii)\nClosed cell content, percent, Min\n60 viii)\nThermal conductivity at 530C\n0.034 after 30 days of manufacture\nW/m, 0K, Max\n3.\nSizes and Dimensions\n3.1 In the case of finished boards of all the three types,\nthe sizes shall be either 1.0 m × 0.5 m or 1.22 m × 0.61 m or as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier.\nThe size for pipe-section and lags shall be 1.0 or 0.5 m length unless otherwise agreed to between the\npurchaser and the supplier, and the bore shall be the specified outside diameter of the pipe to be lagged.\n3.2 Thickness – The material shall normally be supplied\nin thickness of 20, 25, 30, 40, 50, 60, 75, 90 and 100 mm.\n3.3 Tolerance – Shall not deviate from those specified\nby more than the appropriate tolerances given in Tables\n2 and 3. For slabs, the permissible thickness deviations shall be ±2 mm.\nTABLE 2 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES FOR\nPIPE SECTIONS AND LAGS Sl\nDimensions Permissible Deviations NO.\nMoulded\nCut Pipe\nSection and Lags\nmm mm\ni)\nLengths\n±3\n±3 ii)\nBores less than 150 mm\n+2\n+2\n– 0\n– 0 iii)\nBores 150 mm and above\n+3\n+3\n– 0\n– 0 iv)\nOutside diameters\n+2\n+2 less than 150 mm\n– 0\n– 0 v)\nOutside diameters\n+3\n+3\n150 mm and above\n– 0\n– 0\nTABLE 3 DIMENSIONAL TOLERANCES\nFOR SLABS Sl\nLengths\nPermissible\nMax\nThickness No or\nDeviations\nDifferences\nTolerance\nWidths of Lengths\nin the Lengths or Widths\nof the\nDiagonals of Rectangular Slab mm\nmm mm\nmm i)\nUp to and\n± 2\n5\n±2 including 1000\nii)\nOver 1000 up\n±3\n7\n±2 to and including\n2000 4.\nWorkmanship and Finish\n4.1 General – Shall not have visible defects that would\nadversely affects its service qualities.\n4.2 Profiled Sections – 4.2.1 Pipe Sections – Pipe sections shall be supplied in two semicircular pieces with the longitudinally mating\nsurfaces flat and in the same plane, so that when the two pieces are put together no gap exist between the\nmating surfaces.The ends shall be flat and normal to the longitudinal axis of the sections.\n4.2.2\nRadiused and Bevelled Lags – The mating bevelled edges shall be flat, so that when they are put\ntogether to form a cylinder no gaps exist between abutting lags. The ends shall be flat and normal to the\nlongitudinal axis of the lag.\nNote1 –\nFor notes on guidance to user/designers refer to Appendix A of the standard.\nNote2 – For method of tests, refer to IS 3144 : 1992 Mineral wool thermal insulation materials Methods of tests (second\nrevision), IS 3346 : 1980 Method of determination of thermal conductivity of thermal insulating materials (two slab guarded hot plate method) (first revision) and relevant parts of IS 11239 : 1985 Method of test for cellular thermal insulating\nmaterials.\nFor detailed information , refer to ISI 13208 : 1991 Specifications for rigid phenolic foam for thermal insulation. SECTION 24\nPLASTICS CONTENTS\nTitle\nPage\nIS\n2036 : 1995\nPhenolic laminated sheets (second revision)\n24.3\nIS\n2046 : 1995\nDecorative thermosetting synthetic resin bonded laminated sheets\n24.5\n(second revision)\nIS\n2508 : 1984\nLow density polyethylene films (second revision)\n24.8\nIS\n6307 : 1985\nRigid PVC sheets (first revision)\n24.10\nIS\n10889 : 1984\nHigh density polyethylene films\n24.11\nIS\n12830 : 1989\nRubber based adhesives for fixing PVC tiles to cement\n24.13\nIS\n12994 : 1990\nEpoxy adhesives room temperature curing, general purpose\n24.14\nIS\n14182 : 1994\nSolvent cement for use with unplasticized PVC plastic pipe fittings\n24.15\nIS\n14443 : 1997\nPolycarbonate sheets\n24.17\nIS\n14643 : 1999\nUnsintered polytetra fluoroethylene ( PTFE) tapes for thread\n24.19 sealing applications\nIS\n14753 : 1999\nPolymethyl methacrylate (PMMA) (Acrylic) sheets\n24.20"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2036: 1995",
    "title": "Phenolic Laminated Sheets",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "summary": "(Second Revision) 1. Scope 1.1 Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for phenolic resin bonded laminated sheets of one class in which the mechanical properties in directions A and B are of the same order, with asbestos, woven cotton fabric and cellulose paper reinforcements and covers seventeen types. 1.2 Covers only sheets of a nominal thickness from 0.4 to 50 mm for cellulose paper based types and nominal thickness from 0.4 mm to 100 mm for woven cotton fabric and asbestos reinforc",
    "keywords": [
      "sheets",
      "cotton",
      "departure",
      "paper",
      "asbestos",
      "woven",
      "cellulose"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Optional Requirements": "Shall comply with requirements given in Table 7 of the standard, if agreed. 5. Sanded Sheets 5.1 General – Sanded sheets of types P2/1, P3, P3/1 and P4 of any nominal thickness in the range of 0.4 mm to 3 mm shall be produced by sanding one or both sides. Before sanding, the sheets shall comply with requirements of 3 except 3.3. 5.2 Deviations of Thickness – ± 0.050 mm for thickness up to and including 1.6 mm + 0.1 mm at higher values up to and including 3 mm. 5.3 Insulation Resistance – Shall not be less than following – Types Values, m Ω P2/1 30 P3 500 P3/1 100 P4 1000 5.4 Water Absorption – Shall not exceed the limits specified. Note – For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to K of the standard, IS 1998 : 1962, Methods of test for thermosetting synthetic resin bonded laminated shee"
    },
    "content": "IS 2036: 1995 Phenolic Laminated Sheets\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope\n1.1 Requirements and the methods of sampling and test\nfor phenolic resin bonded laminated sheets of one class in which the mechanical properties in directions A and\nB are of the same order, with asbestos, woven cotton fabric and cellulose paper reinforcements and covers\nseventeen types.\n1.2 Covers only sheets of a nominal thickness from 0.4\nto 50 mm for cellulose paper based types and nominal thickness from 0.4 mm to 100 mm for woven cotton fabric\nand asbestos reinforced types.\n1.3 Also prescribes requirements for phenolic resin\nbonded paper laminated sheet sanded on one side, of nominal thickness in the range 0.4 mm to 3 mm inclusive.\nNote — It is permissible for sheet complying with this standard\nto contain additives.\n2.\nClassification a)\nGroup A – Sheets with asbestos reinforcement comprising of following types—\nType\nReinforcement\nA 1\nAsbestos felt\nA 2 and A 5\nAsbestos paper\nA 3 and A 4\nWoven asbestos cloth b)\nGroup F – Sheets with fabric reinforcement made from cotton or cotton/synthetic fibre\nmixture comprising types F1, F2, F2/1, F3, F4 and F5.\nc)\nGroup P – Sheets with cellulose paper reinforcement comprising types P1, P2, P2/1,\nP3. P3/1 and P4.\nNote – For applications and distinguishing properties refer\nto Table 1 of the standard.\n3.\nRequirements\n3.1 Appearance and Workmanship\n3.1.1\nShall be free from blisters, wrinkles and cracks and from other visible defects. Sheets shall be of uniform\nappearance and be free from other small defects, for example, scratches, dents, inclusions, excessive mottling\nand discolouration. Sheets shall be supplied with trimmed edges.\n3.2 Flatness – When any sheet of nominal thickness 3\nmm or more is placed without restraint, concave side up, on a flat horizontal surface, the departure at any part\nof the upper surface of the sheet from a light straightedge laid in any direction upon it shall not exceed the values\ngiven in Table 1.\nTABLE 1 DEPARTURE FROM STRAIGHTEDGE\nAll dimensions in millimeters.\nThickness\nDeparture from straighedge\n1 000 mm\n500 mm\nStraight-edge\nStraight-edge\n3 to 8 inclusive\n8\n2\nOver 8\n6\n1.5\n3.3\nNominal Thickness and Permissible\nDeviations – Preferred nominal thickness shall be 0.4,\n0.5, 0.6, 0.8, 1.0, 1.2, 1.6, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.0, 8.0, 10.0,\n12.0, 14.0, 16.0, 20.0, 25.0, 30.0, 35.0, 40.0, 45.0, 50.0, 60.0,\n70.0, 80.0, 90.0 and 100.0 mm.\nNote — Thickness of the sheet at any point shall not deviate\nby more than the value given in Table 3 of the standard.\n3.4 Machinability – When sawn, drilled turned, routed,\nmilled or punched in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations the sheet shall not show any sign of\nsplitting, cracking or delamination.\n3.5 Resistance to Hot Oil – Sheets shall not show any\nsign of splitting, blistering, disintegration, appreciable warping or delamination.\n3.6 Physical and Electrical Properties — Shall further\ncomply with the requirements in Tables 4 to 6 of the standard. 4.\nOptional Requirements – Shall comply with requirements given in Table 7 of the standard, if agreed.\n5.\nSanded Sheets\n5.1\nGeneral – Sanded sheets of types P2/1, P3,\nP3/1 and P4 of any nominal thickness in the range of 0.4 mm to 3 mm shall be produced by sanding one or both\nsides. Before sanding, the sheets shall comply with requirements of 3 except 3.3.\n5.2 Deviations of Thickness – ± 0.050 mm for thickness\nup to and including 1.6 mm + 0.1 mm at higher values up to and including 3 mm.\n5.3 Insulation Resistance – Shall not be less than\nfollowing –\nTypes\nValues, m Ω\nP2/1 30\nP3 500\nP3/1\n100\nP4\n1000\n5.4 Water Absorption – Shall not exceed the limits\nspecified.\nNote – For methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to K of the standard, IS 1998 : 1962, Methods of test for thermosetting\nsynthetic resin bonded laminated sheets, and, IS 13411 : 1992 Glass reinforced polyster dough moulding compound (DMC).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2036 : 1995 Specifications for phenolic laminated sheets (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2046: 1995",
    "title": "Decorative Thermosetting Synthetic Resin Bonded Laminated Sheets",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "summary": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for decorative laminated sheets (HPL) classified according to their performance and main recommended fields of application and provides also for materials of special characteristics, for example, post formability or defined reaction to fire. They are intended for interior applications.",
    "keywords": [
      "resistance",
      "index",
      "scratching",
      "wear",
      "hpl",
      "impact",
      "compact"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for decorative laminated sheets (HPL) classified according to their performance and main recommended fields of application and provides also for materials of special characteristics, for example, post formability or defined reaction to fire. They are intended for interior applications.",
      "Classification": "Consists of a materials type with three index numbers describing levels of performance. An alphabetical classification system can also be used as an alternative. Table 1compares the two systems and typical application. 2.1 Index numbers for specifying HPL properties – a) Index for – resistance to surface wear (First Index Number) b) Index for – resistance to impact by small diameter ball (Second Index Number) c) Index for resistance to scratching (Third Index Number) Note — For details refer Table 2, 3 and 4 of the standard 2.2 Special Characteristics – Material type Type S–Standard type decorative laminated sheet Type P–Post formable Decorative laminated sheet Type F–Decorative laminated sheets having defined reaction to fire. 2.3 Nomenclature – In addition to the prefix HPL and the numbe"
    },
    "content": "IS 2046: 1995 Decorative Thermosetting Synthetic Resin Bonded Laminated Sheets\n(Second Revision)\n1. Scope – Requirements and the methods of sampling\nand test for decorative laminated sheets (HPL) classified according to their performance and main recommended\nfields of application and provides also for materials of special characteristics, for example, post formability or\ndefined reaction to fire. They are intended for interior applications.\n2. Classification – Consists of a materials type with\nthree index numbers describing levels of performance.\nAn alphabetical classification system can also be used as an alternative. Table 1compares the two systems and\ntypical application.\n2.1 Index numbers for specifying HPL properties –\na)\nIndex for – resistance to surface wear (First\nIndex Number)\nb) Index for – resistance to impact by small diameter ball (Second Index Number)\nc)\nIndex for resistance to scratching (Third Index\nNumber)\nNote — For details refer Table 2, 3 and 4 of the standard\n2.2 Special Characteristics – Material type\nType S–Standard type decorative laminated sheet\nType P–Post formable Decorative laminated sheet\nType F–Decorative laminated sheets having defined reaction to fire.\n2.3 Nomenclature – In addition to the prefix HPL and\nthe number of this standard, materials can be specified either by the type and index number system or by the\nalphabetical classification system.\nFor Example, horizontal general purpose post forming laminate can be specified as, HPL - IS 2046-P333 or HPL\n- IS 2046- HGP.\n3.\nRequirements\n3.1 Colour and Pattern – When inspected in daylight\n(or D 65 standard illuminant and again under a tungsten illuminant) there shall be no significant difference\nbetween a standard agreed by the supplier and the specimen under test.\n3.2 Surface Finish 3.2.1 When inspected at a different viewing angles, there shall be no significant difference between a\nstandard agreed by the supplier and the specimen under test. 3.2.2 Reverse side/bonding – The reverse side of sheets having only one decorative surface shall be\nsuitable for adhesive bonding if so required.\n3.3 Thickness – No requirements specified , however,\nvariations from the nominal thickness supplies shall at no point exceed the limits shown in Table 2.\nTABLE 2 PERMITTED VARIATIONS OF\nTHICKNESS\nAll dimensions in millimeters. Sl No.\nNominal Thickness, t\nMaximum Variation i) 0.5 ≤ t ≤ 1.0\n± 0.10 ii)\n1.0 < t ≤ 2.0\n± 0.15 iii)\n2.0 < t ≤ 2.5\n± 0.18 iv)\n2.5 < t ≤ 3.0\n± 0.20 v)\n3.0 < t ≤ 4.0\n± 0.25 vi)\n4.0 < t ≤ 5.0\n± 0.30 vii)\n5.0 < t\nAs agreed\n3.4 Appearance – The following inspection\nrequirements are intended as a general guide, indicating the minimum acceptable quality to laminate supplies as\nfull size sheets:\ni)\nSurface defects ii)\nEdge defects iii)\nBroken corners iv)\nSanding defects v)\nWarping (Flatness)\nvi)\nLength and width of a full size laminate vii)\nStraightness of edges viii)\nSquareness of the laminate\nNote – For details refer to 5.4 of the standard. TABLE 1 CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM AND TYPICAL APPLICATIONS Sl Performance Type Index Number Equivalent Typical No. Category\nWear Impact Scratch\nAlphabetical Applications\nClassification (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)\n(8)\ni)\nThick materials of high performance\nfor special use in horizontal and ver-\ntical applications requiring particu-\nlarly high impact and moisture\nresistance.\nii)\nVery high resistance to surface wear\nHigh impact resistance\nVery high resistance to scratching\niii)\nHigh resistance to surface wear\nHigh resistance to impact\nHigh resistance to scratching\niv)\nHigh resistance to surface wear\nModerate resistance to impact\nHigh resistance to scratching\nv)\nModerate resistance to surface wear\nHigh resistance to impact\nModerate resistance to scratching\nvi)\nPost forming\nmaterial with\nmoderate resistance to impact\nvii)\nLow resistance to surface wear\nModerate resistance to impact and\nscratching viii)\nLow resistance to surface wear and\nscratching\nModerate resistance to impact\nCompact S or\n3\n2\n3\nCompact F\nS or F\n4\n3\n4\nS, F or F\n3\n3\n3\nS, F or P\n3\n2\n3\nS or F\n2\n3\n2\nP\n2\n2\n2\nS, F or P\n1\n2\n2\nS\n1\n2\n1\nCGS (Compact general purpose stan-\ndard)\nCGF\n(Compact general purpose flame retardant)\nHDS (Horizontal heavy duty stan-\ndard)\nHDF (Horizontal heavy duty flame\nretardant)\nHGS (Horizontal general purpose standard)\nHGP (Horizontal general purpose fire\nretandant)\n—\nVGS (Vertical general purpose stan-\ndard)\nVGF (Vertical general purpose flame\nretardant)\nVGP (Vertical general purpose post\nforming)\n—\nVLS (Vertical light duty standard)\nDoors, partitions, walls, various self-supporting\ncomponents, construction and transportation\nCountertops, flooring on special substrate\nKitchen working surfaces, restaurants and\nhotel tables, heavy duty doors and wall cover-\nings, interior walls of public transport ve-\nhicles.\nHorizontal applications for office (Computer\ntables) and bathroom furniture\n—\nFront panels for kitchen, office and bath-\nroom furniture, wall coverings, shelves\nSpecial decorative surface effects for vertical\nuse in kitchen, showroom, etc.\nExposed side components of cupboards 3.5 Other Properties – Shall satisfy the requirements\ngiven below –\ni) Resistance to surface wear ii)\nResistance to immersion in boiling water.\niii)\nResistance to dry heat at 180ºC.\niv)\nDimensional stability at elevated temperatures v)\nDimensional stability at 20ºC.\nvi)\nResistance to impact by small diameter ball.\nvii) Resistance to impact by large diameter ball\n(self supporting compact laminates)\nviii) Resistance to cracking (thin laminates)\nix)\nResistance to scratching.\nx)\nResistance to staining.\nxi)\nResistance to colour change in xenon arc light.\nxii)\nResistance to cigarette burns xiii) Formability\nxiv) Resistance to blisterning xv) Resistance to steam.\nxvi) Resistance to crazing (thick laminates)\nxvii) Resistance to moisture (Double faced compact laminates)\nxviii)Flexural modulus xix) Flexural strength\nxx)\nTensile strength Note – For details refer to Table 7 of the standard.\nNote – For method of tests refer to Appendices A to Y of the standard, IS 8543 (Part 4/ Sec 1) : 1984 Methods of testing plastics:\nPart 4 Short term mechanical properties, Section 1 Determination of tensile properties and IS 13411 : 1992 Glass reinforced polyster dough moulding compounds (DMC).\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2046 : 1995 Decorative thermosetting synthetic resin bonded laminated sheets (second revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2508: 1984",
    "title": "Low Density Polythylene Films",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "summary": "(Second Revision) 1. Scope 1.1 Requirements and methods of sampling and test for natural and black colour (carbon black pigment) low density polyethylene films intended for packaging, canal lining, agricultural operations and post harvest uses, construction work and allied purposes. 1.2 This standard cover flexible, unsupported flat or tubular films 12.5 to 250 mm in thickness and width 175 to 7 500 mm (350 to 15 000 mm slit open width in the case of tubular films), made from polyethylene materi",
    "keywords": [
      "film",
      "slip",
      "clarity",
      "impact",
      "films",
      "low",
      "black"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Grades": "Film shall be classified according to the optical properties, impact strength and slip. Each grade shall be designated by a set of 3 numerals : first one for optical property, second for impact strength and third for slip property. Numeral 0 shall mean the material has not been tested for that particular property. For clarity, impact strength and slip property, numerals 1, 2, 3 and 4 shall mean the following Numeral Clarity Impact Slip Property 1 Low Low Low 2 Normal Normal Medium 3 High High High 4 – – Extra High 2.1 For example, Grade 210 shall mean that the film is of normal clarity, low impact strength and slip has not been tested. 3. Requirements 3.1 General 3.1.1 Appearance – Shall be uniform is colour, texture and finish and free from pin-holes and substantially free from undisperse"
    },
    "content": "IS 2508: 1984 Low Density Polythylene Films\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope\n1.1 Requirements and methods of sampling and test\nfor natural and black colour (carbon black pigment) low density polyethylene films intended for packaging, canal\nlining, agricultural operations and post harvest uses, construction work and allied purposes.\n1.2 This standard cover flexible, unsupported flat or\ntubular films 12.5 to 250 mm in thickness and width 175 to 7 500 mm (350 to 15 000 mm slit open width in the case\nof tubular films), made from polyethylene materials having a density between 0.913 to 0.937 g/ml at 270C\n(0.915 to 0.939 g/ml 230C)\n1.3 Coloured film other than black shall be as agreed to\nbetween the supplier and the purchaser.\n2. Grades – Film shall be classified according to the\noptical properties, impact strength and slip. Each grade shall be designated by a set of 3 numerals : first one for\noptical property, second for impact strength and third for slip property. Numeral 0 shall mean the material has\nnot been tested for that particular property. For clarity, impact strength and slip property, numerals 1, 2, 3 and 4\nshall mean the following Numeral Clarity\nImpact Slip Property\n1\nLow\nLow\nLow\n2\nNormal\nNormal\nMedium\n3\nHigh\nHigh\nHigh\n4\n–\n–\nExtra High\n2.1 For example, Grade 210 shall mean that the film is of\nnormal clarity, low impact strength and slip has not been tested.\n3. Requirements\n3.1 General\n3.1.1\nAppearance – Shall be uniform is colour, texture and finish and free from pin-holes and substantially free\nfrom undispersed raw materials, streaks and particles of foreign matters. Shall have no other defects, such as\nholes, tears, or blisters. The edges shall be free from nicks and cuts visible to unaided eye. The natural films\nshall be from pin holes.\n3.1.2\nFilm form – Shall be in the form of flat sheet or rolls or flat tubing or as agreed.\n3.1.3\nOdour – Shall be free from objectionable odours.\n3.1.4\nDensity – Shall be as prescribed\n3.1.5\nMelt flow index – Shall be as prescribed\n3.1.6\nBlack film – Percentage of carbon black in the material shall be 2.5 ± 0.5 percent by mass and its\ndispersion shall be satisfactory.\n3.2 Dimensional Requirements 3.2.1 Tolerance on thickness\nNominal Thickness\nTolerance, percent\nUp to and including 40 µm ± 25\nAbove 40 µm ± 20 3.2.2 Tolerance on width\nNominal Width Tolerance, mm\nUp to 500\n± 5\nAbove 500 and up to 1250\n± 8\nAbove 1 250 and up to 2500\n± 20\nAbove 2 500 and up to 3000\n± 40\nAbove 3 000 and up to 7500\n+150-65\nAbove 7 500 and up to 15000\n+200-100. 3.2.3 Yield Tolerance\nOne roll\n± 10 percent\nLots of 250 kg\n± 10 percent\nLots over 250 kg and\n± 5 percent upto 1 250 kg\nLots over 1 250 kg\n± 3 percent 3.3 Tensile Strength at Break – Not less than 11.77MN/\nm2 (120 kgf/cm2) in length wise directionand 8.33 Mn/ m2.( 85 kgf /cm2 ) in crosswise direction.\n3.4 Elongation at Break\nThickness\nElongation at Break,Min.\nof the Film\nLengthwise, Crosswise,\nPercent\nPercent\nFrom 12.5 µm\n100\n350 up to but not including\n75 µm\n75 µm and above\n200\n400\n3.5 Optical Properties – 45º gloss and haze of the film\nshall conform to requirements given below\nGrade\n45º Gloss\nHaze\nLow clarity film\nBelow 30 Greater than 15 Per.\nNormal clarity film 30 to 55\n10 to 15 percent\nHigh clarity film\nGreater 6 to 10 percent than 55\nNote – These two measurement do not always corelate and\nthis clause is not relevant to black films.\n3.6 Impact Resistance 3.6.1 Low impact resistance film\nAverage thickness\nImpact Failure of film,µm\nLoad, Min N(gf)\n12.5\n0.4 (40)\n20\n0.6 (60)\n25\n0.8 (80)\n40\n1.25 (125)\n3.6.2 Normal impact resistance film\nAverage thickness Impact failure load, µm\nMin N (gf)\n40\n0.55 (55)\n50\n0.70 (70)\n75\n1.00 (100)\n100\n1.20 (120)\n125\n1.60 (160)\n150\n1.85 (185)\n175\n2.10 (210)\n200\n2.35 (235)\n225\n2.60 (260)\n250\n3.00 (300)\n3.6.3 High impact resistance film\nAverage Thickness Impact Failure Load, µm\nMin. N(gf)\n50\n90\n75\n125\n100\n165\n125\n210\n150\n255\n175\n295\n200\n340\n225\n380\n250\n425\n3.7 Slip – Kinetic coefficient of friction shall be as\nfollows: a) Low slip film\nGreater than 0.40 b) Medium slip film\nGreater than 0.30 and up to and including 0.40 c) High slip film\nGreater than 0.20 and up to and including 0.30 d) Extra high slip film upto and including 0.20\nNote – For special requirements refer to 4.9 of the standard.\nNote – For method of tests, refer to A of the standard and IS 2530 : 1963 Methods of test for polyethylene moulding materials\nand polythylene compounds.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2508 : 1984 Specifications for low density polyethylene films (second revision). ."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6307: 1985",
    "title": "Rigid Pvc Sheets",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "summary": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for rigid PVC sheets of 0.10 to 12.5 mm in thickness, manufactured by calendering, extrusion or calendering followed by lamination.",
    "keywords": [
      "calendered",
      "calendering",
      "laminated",
      "sheets",
      "burning",
      "delamination",
      "extruded"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for rigid PVC sheets of 0.10 to 12.5 mm in thickness, manufactured by calendering, extrusion or calendering followed by lamination. 2. Types Type 1 – General purpose, Type 2 – With specified impact strength, and Type 3 – Suitable for deep draw vacuum forming. 3. Requirements 3.1 Appearance — Sheet shall be unifarm in colour and finish, transparent or opaque , and shall be reasonably free from detrimental scratches, creases, streaks, pinholes, pimples and inclusions. 3.2 Thickness Nominal Tolerance on Thickness, Thickness Percent mm Extruded Calendered Calender and Laminated 0.10 to 0.24 ± 20 ± 12 — 0.25 to 0.49 ± 15 ± 10 — 0.50 to 0.74 ± 12 ± 10 — 0.75 to 1.24 ± 10 — ± 20 1.25 to 1.49 ± 10 — ± 18 1.50 to 1.99 ± 10 — ± 18 2.00 to 4.99 ± 10 — ± 1"
    },
    "content": "IS 6307: 1985 Rigid Pvc Sheets\n(First Revision)\n1. Scope – Requirements and methods of sampling and\ntest for rigid PVC sheets of 0.10 to 12.5 mm in thickness, manufactured by calendering, extrusion or calendering\nfollowed by lamination.\n2.\nTypes\nType 1 – General purpose,\nType 2 – With specified impact strength, and\nType 3 – Suitable for deep draw vacuum forming.\n3.\nRequirements\n3.1 Appearance — Sheet shall be unifarm in colour\nand finish, transparent or opaque , and shall be reasonably free from detrimental scratches, creases,\nstreaks, pinholes, pimples and inclusions.\n3.2 Thickness\nNominal\nTolerance on Thickness,\nThickness Percent mm\nExtruded Calendered Calender and Laminated\n0.10 to 0.24 ± 20 ± 12\n—\n0.25 to 0.49 ± 15 ± 10\n—\n0.50 to 0.74 ± 12 ± 10\n—\n0.75 to 1.24 ± 10 —\n± 20\n1.25 to 1.49 ± 10 —\n± 18\n1.50 to 1.99 ± 10 —\n± 18\n2.00 to 4.99 ± 10 —\n± 15\n5.00 to 9.99 ± 10 —\n± 10\n10.00 to 12.50 ± 10 —\n± 10\n3.3 Length and Width – The length and width of\nrectangular sheets shall be within the tolerance −\n+\n0\n5 mm of the nominal size. For other shapes, the tolerances on\nlinear dimensions shall be as agreed.\n3.4 Squareness – Cut sheets shall not deviate more\nthan 10 mm from a true rectangle of the same dimensions.\n3.5 Other Requirements Sl. Characteristic Requirement No. Type1 Type2 Type3 i) Vicat softening 75 65 50 temperature, oC, Min\nii) Impact strength, — No —\nnumber of failures failure\niii) Tensile stress at 450 380 380 yield, kg/crn2,Min\niv) Dimensional change at\n120oC, percent, Max:\na) Extruded or calendered 20 20 * b) Calendered and 5 5 15 laminated\n* Limits shall be as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier.\n3.5.1\nDelamination (for calendered and laminated sheet) – The material shall show no signs of\ndelamination.\n3.5.2\nHorizontal burning characteristics – Shall also be tested for horizontal burning characteristics\naccording to the test method prescribed if agreed to.\nNote – For method of tests refer to Appendices A to G of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6307 : 1995 Specifications for rigid PVC sheets (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 10889: 1984",
    "title": "High Density Polythylene Film",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "summary": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for natural and black colour (carbon black pigment) high density polyethylene films. Coloured films other than black shall be as a greed to between the purchaser and the supplier.",
    "keywords": [
      "film",
      "grade",
      "polyethylene",
      "films",
      "black",
      "break",
      "lots"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for natural and black colour (carbon black pigment) high density polyethylene films. Coloured films other than black shall be as a greed to between the purchaser and the supplier. 2. Grades Grade1– High molecular mass, high density polyethylene (HM HDPE); and Grade 2 – Medium molecular mass, high density polyethylene (MM HDPE). 3. Requirements 3.1 General 3.1.1 Appearance – Shall be uniform in colour, texture and finish. The material shall be substantially free from pinholes and reasonably free from undispersed raw materials, streaks and particles of foreign matter. There shall be no other visible defects, such as holes, tears or blisters. The edges shall be free from nicks and cuts visible to unaided eye. 3.1.2 Film Form – Shall be furnish"
    },
    "content": "IS 10889: 1984 High Density Polythylene Film\n1.\nScope – Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for natural and black colour (carbon black\npigment) high density polyethylene films. Coloured films other than black shall be as a greed to between the\npurchaser and the supplier.\n2.\nGrades\nGrade1– High molecular mass, high density polyethylene (HM HDPE); and\nGrade 2 – Medium molecular mass, high density polyethylene (MM HDPE).\n3.\nRequirements\n3.1 General\n3.1.1 Appearance – Shall be uniform in colour, texture and finish. The material shall be substantially free from\npinholes and reasonably free from undispersed raw materials, streaks and particles of foreign matter. There\nshall be no other visible defects, such as holes, tears or blisters. The edges shall be free from nicks and cuts\nvisible to unaided eye.\n3.1.2 Film Form – Shall be furnished in the form of flat sheet or rolls or in the form of flat tubing or in any other\nform as agreed.\n3.1.3\nOdour – Shall be free from any objectionable odour.\n3.1.4\nDensity – Shall be as prescribed.\n3.1.5\nMelt flow index (i5 ) – The melt flow index (i5) of the film shall be as prescribed for the appropriate grade.\n3.1.6\nBlack Film a) The percentage of carbon black in the material shall\nbe 2.5 ± 0.5 percent by mass; and b) The dispersion of the carbon black shall be\nsatisfactory.\n3.2 Dimensional Requirements\n3.2.1\nNominal Thickness – Is the theoretically desired thickness of a film for a particular application.\n3.2.1.1 Tolerance on Thickness – At any given point and the average thickness of polyethylene films for\nvarious thicknesses shall be as follows\nNominal Thickness\nTolerance, percent\nGrade 1 film\nGrade 2 film\nUp to and including 40 µm\n± 25\n± 25\nAbove 40 µm\n± 20\n± 20\n3.2.2 Nominal Width – The theoretically desired width of a film for a particular application.\n3.2.2.1 Tolerance on Width – Shall be as given below:\nNominal Width\nTolerance, mm cm\nGrade 1 film\nGrade 2 film\nUp to to 50\n± 5\n± 5\nAbove 50 and up to 125\n± 8\n± 8\nAbove 125 and up to 250\n± 20\n± 20\nAbove 250 and up to 300\n± 40\n± 40\nAbove 300\n± 65\n± 65\n3.3 Yield Tolerance – The actual yield shall be within\nthe following tolerance limits of the nominal yields:\nGrade 1 film\nGrade 2 film\nOne roll\n± 10 percent\n± 10 percent\nLots of 250 kg\n± 10 percent\n± 10 percent\nLots over 250 kg and\n± 5 percent\n± 5 percent upto 1 250 kg\nLots over 1 250 kg\n± 3 percent\n± 3 percent\n3.4 Physical Properties 3.4.1 Tensile Strength at Break – The minimum tensile strength at break for all thickness of polyethylene film\nshall be as under: Grade 1 film Grade 2 film\nMachine direction, kgf/cm2 300\n250\nTransverse direction, kgf/cm2 250\n200\n3.4.2 Elongation at Break – The elongation at break for all thickness of polyethylene film shall be as under:\nElongation at Break, Min\nGrade 1 film\nGrade 2 film\nMachine direction\n300\n300\nTransverse direction\n300\n300\n3.4.3 Impact Resistance (Falling Dart) : The impact failure load obtained from the drop of 66 cm shall not be\nless than that given below for appropriate average thickness of film:\nAverage Thickness\nImpact Failure Load, of Film\nN(gf), Min µm\nGrade 1 film\nGrade 2 film\n12.5\n35\n—\n25.0\n70\n25\n50.0\n140\n50\n100.0\n280\n100\nNote – Values for impact failure loads for intermediate\nthickness may be obtained by interpolation.,\nNote – For methods of tests, refer to Appendix A of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 10889 : 1984 Specifications for high density polythylene films."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12830: 1989",
    "title": "Rubber Based Adhesive For Fixing Pvc Tiles To Cement",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "summary": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for rubber based adhesives used for bonding PVC tiles to cement, floors and walls of buildings.",
    "keywords": [
      "batch",
      "application",
      "assembly",
      "consistency",
      "rubber",
      "adhesives",
      "adhesion"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for rubber based adhesives used for bonding PVC tiles to cement, floors and walls of buildings. 2. Requirements 2.1 Description – The material shall be manufactured from rubber, compounding ingredients, resins and appropriate solvents. The colour of the material shall be compatible with the application of the material as may be agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier. 2.2 Consistency – The material shall be of a consistency suitable for its mode of application. 2.3 Open Assembly Time – The open assembly time shall be as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier depending upon the application and shall not vary from batch to batch. 2.4 Adhesion Strength – The adhesion strength shall be as follows. 2.4.1 Strength of joint in s"
    },
    "content": "IS 12830: 1989 Rubber Based Adhesive For Fixing Pvc Tiles To Cement\n1.\nScope – Requirements and the methods of sampling and test for rubber based adhesives used for bonding\nPVC tiles to cement, floors and walls of buildings.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Description – The material shall be manufactured\nfrom rubber, compounding ingredients, resins and appropriate solvents. The colour of the material shall be\ncompatible with the application of the material as may be agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier.\n2.2 Consistency – The material shall be of a consistency\nsuitable for its mode of application.\n2.3 Open Assembly Time – The open assembly time\nshall be as agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier depending upon the application and shall not\nvary from batch to batch.\n2.4 Adhesion Strength – The adhesion strength shall\nbe as follows.\n2.4.1\nStrength of joint in shear – The material shall have shear strength not less than 8 kg/cm2 after\nconditioning in standard atmospheric condition and not less than 6 kg/cm2 after heat ageing and immersion in\nwater.\n2.5 Keeping Quality – The material shall comply with\nthe requirements specified in 2.1 to 2.4 when it has been stored in the original closed containers according\nto the manufacturer’s instructions for a minimum period of one year from the date of manufacture.\nNote – For method of test refer to Appendices A to C of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12830 : 1989 Specifications for Rubber based adhesives for fixing PVC tiles to cement."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 12994: 1990",
    "title": "Epoxy Adhesives, Room Temperature Curing, General Purpose",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "summary": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for liquid and paste type epoxy adhesives for performance : (a) up to 50ºC, and (b) up to 100ºC.",
    "keywords": [
      "adhesives",
      "paste",
      "uncured",
      "liquid",
      "adhesive",
      "mpas",
      "epoxy"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for liquid and paste type epoxy adhesives for performance : (a) up to 50ºC, and (b) up to 100ºC.",
      "Types": "There shall be four types of epoxy adhesives: Type L 50 – Liquid adhesives for performance up to 50ºC. Type P 50 – Paste adhesives for performance up to 50ºC. Type L 100 – Liquid adhesives for performance up to 100ºC. Type P 100 – Paste adhesives for performance up to 100ºC.",
      "Requirements": "3.1 Properties of Uncured Components 3.1.1 Solids Content – Each component of the adhesive shall be free from volatile solvents, and the non-volatilise in each component shall be not less than 99.5 percent. 3.1.2 Viscosity – The viscosity of the individual components shall comply with the following requirements: Type L 50 and L 100 – 10 00 0 mPas Max Type P 50 and P 100 – 10 00 000 mPas Max 3.2 Properties of Uncured Mixture 3.2.1 Gelation Time of Liquid Adhesives – The gelation time of the mix of resin and hardener of Type L 50 and L 100 prepared in the ratio recommended by the manufacturer shall not be less than 30 minutes at a bath temperature of 27 ± 1ºC. 3.2.2 Spreadability of paste adhesives – A mass of 25 g of the adhesive of Type P 50 and P 100, when uniformly mixed with the prescri"
    },
    "content": "IS 12994: 1990 Epoxy Adhesives, Room Temperature Curing, General Purpose\n1. Scope – Requirements and methods of sampling and\ntest for liquid and paste type epoxy adhesives for performance : (a) up to 50ºC, and (b) up to 100ºC.\n2. Types – There shall be four types of epoxy adhesives:\nType L 50\n– Liquid adhesives for performance up to 50ºC.\nType P 50\n– Paste adhesives for performance up to 50ºC.\nType L 100 – Liquid adhesives for performance up to 100ºC.\nType P 100 – Paste adhesives for performance up to 100ºC.\n3.\nRequirements –\n3.1 Properties of Uncured Components 3.1.1 Solids Content – Each component of the adhesive shall be free from volatile solvents, and the\nnon-volatilise in each component shall be not less than\n99.5 percent. 3.1.2 Viscosity – The viscosity of the individual components shall comply with the following\nrequirements:\nType L 50 and L 100 – 10 00 0 mPas Max\nType P 50 and P 100 – 10 00 000 mPas Max\n3.2 Properties of Uncured Mixture 3.2.1 Gelation Time of Liquid Adhesives – The gelation time of the mix of resin and hardener of Type L\n50 and L 100 prepared in the ratio recommended by the manufacturer shall not be less than 30 minutes at a bath\ntemperature of 27 ± 1ºC.\n3.2.2\nSpreadability of paste adhesives – A mass of 25 g of the adhesive of Type P 50 and P 100, when uniformly\nmixed with the prescribed hardener in the ratio recommended by the manufacturers, shall remain\nspreadable at a temperature of 27 ± 10C for a minimum of\n15 minutes.\n3.2.3\nSagging – The uncured adhesive of Type P 50 and P 100, when uniformly mixed in the ratio\nrecommended by the manufactures, shall not run, drip or sag.\n3.3 Properties of Cured Adhesive Joints –The tensile\nshear strength of joints shall be not less than the following minimum values, after curing the joints for 24\nhours at 27 ± 1ºC. Types L 50 Types L 100 and P 50 and P 100\nAt 27ºC (N/mm2)\n14\n14\nAt 50ºC (N/mm2)\n10\n14\nAt 100ºC (N/mm2) –\n12\nNote – For methods of tests refer to Appendices A to E of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 12994 : 1990 Specificsations for epoxy adhesives, room temperature curing, general purpose."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14182: 1994",
    "title": "Solvent Cement For Use With Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe And Fittings",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "summary": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for solvent cements to be used in joining unplasticized polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings intended for use in carrying potable water. The pipes may be pressure or non-pressure type.",
    "keywords": [
      "solvent",
      "pvc",
      "bodied",
      "cement",
      "unplasticized",
      "viscosity",
      "mass"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and methods of sampling and test for solvent cements to be used in joining unplasticized polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings intended for use in carrying potable water. The pipes may be pressure or non-pressure type. 2. Requirements 2.1 The solvent cement shall be a solution of unplasticized polyvinyl chloride moulding or extrusion compound or PVC resin. The requirements for rigid PVC compound are given in Table 1 for information only. 2.2 The solvent cement shall be thixotropic and consist substantially of solvents that will swell plasticized PVC polymers and stabilizers. Fillers may be incorporated provided the resulting cement meets all the requirements of specification. 2.3 The solvent cement shall be capable of application by brush and shall contain no lumps or foreign m"
    },
    "content": "IS 14182: 1994 Solvent Cement For Use With Unplasticized Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe And Fittings\n1.\nScope – Requirements and methods of sampling and test for solvent cements to be used in joining\nunplasticized polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings intended for use in carrying potable water. The pipes\nmay be pressure or non-pressure type.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 The solvent cement shall be a solution of\nunplasticized polyvinyl chloride moulding or extrusion compound or PVC resin. The requirements for rigid PVC\ncompound are given in Table 1 for information only.\n2.2 The solvent cement shall be thixotropic and consist\nsubstantially of solvents that will swell plasticized PVC polymers and stabilizers. Fillers may be incorporated\nprovided the resulting cement meets all the requirements of specification.\n2.3 The solvent cement shall be capable of application\nby brush and shall contain no lumps or foreign matter or macroscopic undissolved particles that will adversely\naffect the ultimate joint strength or chemical resistance of the material.\n2.4 The cement shall show no gelation. It shall show\nno evidence of stratification or separation that cannot be removed by stirring.\n2.5 When used for bonding pipes and fittings coming\nin contact with potable water, the cemerd, after evaporation of the solved, shall conform to the\nrequirements, when tested in accordance with relavent\nIndian Standards, as prescribed in 10.3 of IS 4985*.\n2.6 The particular solvent system to be used in the\nformulation of this solvent cement is not specified, since several adequate solvent system for PVC are known.\nSolvent systems consisting of blends of tetrahydrofuran and cyclohexanone have been found\nto be acceptable under the requirements of this specification.\n* Unplasticized PVC pipes for potable water supplies (third revision)\nTABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR RIGID PVC COMPOUND\nSl. No.Characteristic Requirement i)\nTensile strength, MPa, Min\n48.3 ii)\nImpact strength (Izod), J/m, Min\n34.7 iii)\nModulus of elasticity in tension, MPa, Min\n2.758 iv)\nDeflection temperature under load, ºC, Min\n70 v)\nChemical resistance\nTo pass the test a)\nChange in mass\nIncrease, percent by mass, Max\n5.0\nDecrease, percent by mass, Max\n0.1 b)\nChange in flexural yield strength\nIncrease, percent by mass, Max\n5.0\nDecrease, percent by mass, Max\n25.0 vi)\nResistance to oil change in mass\nTo pass the test\nIncrease, percent by mass, Max\n1.0\nDecrease, percent by mass, Max\n1.0 2.7 Vinyl Chloride Polymer Content – The PVC resin\ncontent shall be minimum 10 percent by mass.\n2.8 Dissolution – The cement shall be capable of\ndissolving an additional 3 percent by mass of unplasticized PVC granular, powder compound or resin\nat 27 ± 2ºC without evidence of gelation.\n2.9 Viscosity – Cements are classified as regular,\nmedium or heavy bodied types, based on their minimum viscosity.\ni)\nRegular-bodied cement shall have a minimum viscosity of 90 mPa.s;\nNote 1– A guide for PVC solvent cement selection is given at Annex D of the standard.\nNote 2–\nFor methods of tests, refer to Appendices A to C of the standard, IS 2267 : 1995 Polystyrene moulding and extrusion materials (second revision), IS 5210 : 1995 High impact polystrene sheet (first revision), IS 6746 : 1994.\nUnsaturated polyster resin systems (first revision) and IS 8543 (Part 4/Sec 1) : 1984 Methods of testing plastics : Part 4 Short term mechanical properties, Section 1 Determination of tensile properties.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 14182 : 1994 Specifications for solvent cement for use with unplasticized polyvinyl chloride plastic pipes and fittings.\nii)\nMedium-bodied cement shall have a minimum viscosity of 500 mPa.s; and\niii)\nHeavy-bodied cement shall have a minimum viscosity of 1 600 mPa.s.\n2.10 Lap Shear Strength – The minimum average lap\nshear strength, shall be 1.7 MPa after 2 h curing time, 3.4\nMPa after 10 h curing time and 6.2 MPa after 72 h curing time.\n2.11 Hydrostatic Burst Strength – The minimum average\nhydrostatic burst strength test, shall be 2.8 MPa after 2 h curing time.\n2.12 Shelf Life – The manufacturer shall declare the\nshelf life of the product on the container."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14443: 1997",
    "title": "Polycarbonate Sheets",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "summary": "1. Scope 1.1 Requirements and methods of sampling and tests for polycarbonate sheets of solid section as well as multi-wall variety and also thinner gauge sheets (films), multi-layer composite laminates of polycarbonate compact sheets and composites of polycarbonate compact sheets and glass sheets. Sheets containing glass fibre or any other reinforcement are, however, not covered by this standard. 1.2 This standard establishes a system for designating vacrious possible polycarbonate sheets and f",
    "keywords": [
      "block",
      "polycarbonate",
      "codes",
      "code",
      "indicates",
      "digit",
      "letter"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 14443: 1997 Polycarbonate Sheets\n1. Scope\n1.1 Requirements and methods of sampling and tests\nfor polycarbonate sheets of solid section as well as multi-wall variety and also thinner gauge sheets (films),\nmulti-layer composite laminates of polycarbonate compact sheets and composites of polycarbonate\ncompact sheets and glass sheets. Sheets containing glass fibre or any other reinforcement are, however, not\ncovered by this standard.\n1.2 This standard establishes a system for designating\nvacrious possible polycarbonate sheets and films. Since the system is not based on application, end use\ncondition and performance requirement, it cannot be used for selection of any sheet or film for specific end\nuse. For specific end use and type of sheet or film expert opinion should be sought for fabrication details.\n2.\nDesignation/Classification System\n2.1 This standard adopts a data block system consisting\nof five blocks – each block, describing specific information about the product. Each block is separated\nfrom the other by an asterisk mark. In case a block is not used, the skipped block will be indicated by an additional\nasterisk mark.\nBlock 1* Block 2* Block 3* Block 4* Block 5*\nBlock 1 – Contains this IS specification number to indicate that the classification is according to this\nstandard.\nBlock 2 – This block is used to describe the product in general. This block consists of four letters and one digit.\nThe first two letters are invariably ‘PC’ to denote that the product under specification is made out of\npolycarbonate. The digit that comes next indicates the number of layers or walls (in case of hollow sheets).\nThe letter following the digit indicates whether the product under consideration has a solid or hollow cross-\nsection and the type of profile in case of hollow product.\nAnd the last letter indicates the surface texture of the product. Codes for Block 2 are described in Table 1.\nTABLE 1 CODES FOR BLOCK 2 3rd Position\n4th Position\n5th Position\nCode No. of\nCode\nProfile\nCode Texture Layers/Walls\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n1\nOne\nS\nSolid section\nR\nRibbed\n2\nTwo\nN\nHollow N\nF\nFine profile\ngrain\n3\nThree\nR\nHollow\nC\nCoarse rectangular\ngrain profile\n4\nFour\nT\nHollow tunnel\nP\nPolished profile\n0\nNot\nO\nNot\nO\nNot specified\nspecified specified\nExample:\nFor a twin wall hollow sheet with N profile and polished surface texture the Block 2 will be represented by PC 2\nNP.\nBlock 3 – This block accommodates four letters. The first letter indicates whether the material used to\nmanufacture the sheet is light stabilized or not. The next letter indicates whether any special coating has been\napplied on the sheet or not. Third letter is to indicate whether the sheets is transparent, translucent or opaque\nand the last letter takes care of colour. Table 2 describes the codes for Block 3.\nExample:\nAn opaque colourd sheet made out of polycarbonate grade containing UV stabilizer and having a hard\nabrasion resistance surface coating is designated by\nLHQC in Block 3.\nBlock 4 – Combination of four digits form this block.\nEach digit indicates the following properties in order:\na)\nWeight per sq. metre of the sheet/film as per the codes given in Table 3.\nb)\nDart drop impact strength at 27ºC.\nc)\nLight transmission.\nd)\nFlammability rating codes listed in Table 3. Example :\nFor a sheet with 1.3 kg/m2, dart drop impact value of 12J, light transmission of 55 percent and flammability rating\nnot specified, the block 4 will be represented by 1530.\nBlock 5 – This block is provided for any additional specific performance requirements, if required to be\nspecified. These specific performances include resistance to vandalism, resistance to forced entry,\nresistance to bullet and resistance to explosion. In case, there is no specific requirement for the sheet the\ndesignation ends at Block 4 with an asterisk mark.\nEach requirement is codified by a combination of one letter and one digit. The letter indicates the type of\nresistance under consideration and the digit indicates the level of resistance. The scheme is elaborated below:\nV = Resistance to vandalism\nF = Resistance to forced entry\nB = Resistance to bullet\nE = Resistance to explosion\nTable 4 to 7 of the standard give the condition under the above categories.\nTABLE 2 CODES FOR BLOCK 3\n1st Position\n2nd Position\n3rd Position\n4th Position\nCode\nLight\nCode\nCoating\nCode\nTransparency\nCode\nColour\nStabilization\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\nL\nYes\nH\nHard\nT\nTransparent\nC\nColoured\nX\nNo\nU\nUV\nR\nTransparent\nN\nNatural\nO\nNot specified\nO\nNot specified\nQ\nOpaque\nO\nNot specified\nO\nNot specified\nTABLE 3 CODES FOR BLOCK 4\n1st Position\n2nd Position\n3rd Position\n4th Position\nCode\nWt./Sq. metre\nCode\nDart Drop\nCode\nLight Transmi-\nCode\nFlame\n(kg/m2)\nImpact ssion Percent\nRetardancy\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\n1\nUp to 1.5\n1\nAbove 150\n1\nAbove 85\n1\nUL 94 HB\n2\nAbove 1.5 up to\n2\nAbove 100 up to\n2\nAbove 70 up to\n2\nUL 94 V2\nand including 3.0 and including 150\nand including 85\n3\nAbove 3.0 up to\n3\nAbove 60 up to\n3\nAbove 50 up to\n3\nUL 94 V1\nand including 4.5 and including 100\nand including 70\n4\nAbove 4.5 up to\n4\nAbove 15 up to\n4\nAbove 35 up to\n4\nUL 94 V0\nand including 6.5 and including 60\nand including 50\n5\nAbove 6.5 up to\n5\nUp to 15\n5\nUp to 35\n5\nUL 94 5V\nand including 8.5\n6\nAbove 8.5 up to\n0\nNot specified\n0\nNot specified\n0\nNot specified and including 12.0\n7\nAbove 12.0 up to and including 15.0\n8\nAbove 15.0\n9\nNot specified\nNote 1 – Code of good fabricating practices is given at Annex A of the standards.\nNote 2 –\nFor method of tests, refer to Appendices B to F of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 14443 : 1997 Specifications for polycarbonate sheets."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14643: 1999",
    "title": "Unsintered Polytetrafluoroethylene",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "summary": "Requirements, methods of sampling and tests for unsintered polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) tapes for use as a thread sealing material and in similar applications. This tape is suitable for applications under ambient conditions with all common fluids and gases up to 80 bar gauge for pipes. This tape is suitable for applications in the range —200C to 2000C for pipe sizes up to 50 mm.",
    "keywords": [
      "tape",
      "ptfe",
      "lubricant",
      "spool",
      "unsintered",
      "applications",
      "sealing"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements, methods of sampling and tests for unsintered polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) tapes for use as a thread sealing material and in similar applications. This tape is suitable for applications under ambient conditions with all common fluids and gases up to 80 bar gauge for pipes. This tape is suitable for applications in the range —200C to 2000C for pipe sizes up to 50 mm. 2. Requirements 2.1 Composition 2.1.1 Manufacture – Shall be manufactured from a suitable grade of virgin PTFE material . The tape shall not contain fillers or additives other than residual lubricant. The residual lubricant content shall not exceed 0.1 percent by mass. 2.1.2 The lubricant used in the manufacture of the tape shall be such that any residue left in the tape shall be entirely removed under the condit"
    },
    "content": "IS 14643: 1999 Unsintered Polytetrafluoroethylene\n(PTFE) TAPE FOR THREADS SEALING APPLICATIONS\n1.\nScope – Requirements, methods of sampling and tests for unsintered polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)\ntapes for use as a thread sealing material and in similar applications.\nThis tape is suitable for applications under ambient conditions with all common fluids and gases up to 80\nbar gauge for pipes. This tape is suitable for applications in the range —200C to 2000C for pipe sizes up to 50 mm.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Composition\n2.1.1 Manufacture – Shall be manufactured from a suitable grade of virgin PTFE material . The tape shall\nnot contain fillers or additives other than residual lubricant. The residual lubricant content shall not exceed\n0.1 percent by mass.\n2.1.2\nThe lubricant used in the manufacture of the tape shall be such that any residue left in the tape shall be\nentirely removed under the conditions of test for the determination of residual lubricant content.\n2.2 Appearance and Finish\n2.2.1 The unsintered PTFE tape, when viewed by reflected light, shall appear white. 2.2.2 It shall be free from any inclusions visible to the naked eye and shall be free from any surface or edge\ndefects which may affect its suitability for use.\n2.3 Tolerance and Dimensions\n2.3.1 Length – The actual length of the tape on a spool shall not be less than that marked on the spool.\n2.3.2 Width – The mean width of the tape on a spool shall not differ from that marked on the spool by more\nthan ± 0.5 mm.\n2.3.3 Thickness – The thickness of the tape at any measured point shall not differ from the mean of the\nreadings by more than ± 10 percent.\n2.4 Thread Wrapping Properties – Any sample of the\ntape shall conform to and hold the thread form, shall not break and the finishing end of the tape shall remain in\nposition with no tendency to unwind.\n2.5 Sealing – Any sample of the tape shall form a leak\nfree seal.\nNote – For methods of tests and method of measurements, refer to Appendices A to D of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 14643 : 1999 Specifications for unsintered polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)\ntape for threads sealing applications."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14753: 1999",
    "title": "Polymethyl Methacrylate (Pmma)",
    "category": "Paints, Varnishes and Allied Products",
    "summary": "Requirements, methods of sampling and tests for polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) sheets.",
    "keywords": [
      "diffusion",
      "acrylic",
      "anywhere",
      "sheets",
      "cables",
      "factor",
      "sheet"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements, methods of sampling and tests for polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) sheets. 2. Requirements 2.1 Protection of Surface – Unless otherwise agreed between the supplier and the purchaser, the surface of the sheet, as delivered, shall be protected by suitable material, for example, kraft paper pasted with a water soluble or pressure-sensitive adhesive or a polyethylene or any other suitable film; readily removable without surface contamination or damage. 2.2 Appearance 2.2.1 Surface Defects – The sheets shall have a smooth surface. There shall be no surface defects, scratches or marks larger than 5 mm2 each anywhere in the sheet. 2.2.2 Inclusion Defects – There shall be no bubbles, large inclusions, cracks or other defects that could adversely affect the performance of the sheet i"
    },
    "content": "IS 14753: 1999 Polymethyl Methacrylate (Pmma)\n(ACRYLIC) SHEETS\n1.\nScope – Requirements, methods of sampling and tests for polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) sheets.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Protection of Surface – Unless otherwise agreed\nbetween the supplier and the purchaser, the surface of the sheet, as delivered, shall be protected by suitable\nmaterial, for example, kraft paper pasted with a water soluble or pressure-sensitive adhesive or a\npolyethylene or any other suitable film; readily removable without surface contamination or damage.\n2.2 Appearance\n2.2.1 Surface Defects – The sheets shall have a smooth surface. There shall be no surface defects, scratches or\nmarks larger than 5 mm2 each anywhere in the sheet. 2.2.2 Inclusion Defects – There shall be no bubbles, large inclusions, cracks or other defects that could\nadversely affect the performance of the sheet in its intended application. There shall be no foreign matter\ninclusions larger than 4 mm2 each anywhere in the sheet.\n2.2.3\nClassification of Defects\nClassification\nSurface Defects Inclusion Defects (1) (2) (3)\nNegligible\nLess than 2 mm2\nLess than 1 mm2\nAcceptable\n2 to 5 mm2\n1 to 4 mm2\n2.2.4 Distribution of Defects\n2.2.4.1 There shall not be a significant (for the application) amount of fine defects, each of which is\ndefined as negligible in above, within 1 mm2 each anywhere in the sheet.\n2.2.4.2 No defect defined as acceptable above shall be within 500 mm of another acceptable defect anywhere\nin or on the sheet.\n2.3 Colour – The colour distribution shall be\nhomogenous, unless otherwise specified. Variations in colours shall be agreed between the purchaser and the\nsupplier.\n2.4 Visual Examination – The sheets shall be visually\nexamined for scratch, air bubbles, foreign material or any other marks except such special marks which have\nbeen specified by the purchaser.\n2.5 Dimensions\n2.5.1\nThe preferred dimensions, after trimming, for the supply of cast acrylic sheets shall be as follows.\n2.5.1.1 Size I – The sheets up to 2 m2 surface area –\na)\n765 × 610 mm b)\n1 220 × 915 mm c)\n1 220 × 1525 mm d)\n1 375 × 915 mm e)\n1 750 × 1140 mm f)\n1 830 × 915 mm\n2.5.1.2 Size II – The sheets offering more that 2 m2 surface area\na)\n1 220 × 1 830 mm b)\n1 780 × 1 180 mm c)\n1 800 × 1 200 mm d)\n2 170 ×1 050 mm\n2.5.1.3\nThe tolerance for the dimensions shall be\n+\n-\n5\n0 mm.\n2.5.2 Thickness – The preferred thickness and permissible thickness variation for the acrylic sheets be\nas given below : Thickness Tolerance (mm)\nSize I\nSize II\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n2.0\n± 0.43\n± 0.6\n2.5\n± 0.43\n± 0.6\n3.0\n± 0.5\n± 0.6\n4.0\n± 0.5\n± 0.7\n5.0\n± 0.6\n± 0.8\n6.0\n± 0.8\n± 0.9\n8.0\n± 0.9\n± 1.0\n10.0\n± 1.0\n± 1.1\n12.0 - 13.0\n± 1.1\n± 1.3\n15.0\n± 1.4\n± 1.4\n18.0\n± 1.4\n± 1.4\n20.0 - 25.0\n± 1.4\n± 1.4\n30.0\n± 1.8\n± 1.8\n2.6 Specific Gravity – Shall not be less than 1.18 and\nmore than 1.20.\n2.7 Water Absorption – Shall not be more than 0.4\npercent of the dry mass of the sample after 24 h immersion.\n2.8 Tensile Strength and Elongation – Shall show a\ntensile strength of 570 kg/cm2, Min and elongation at rupture shall not be less than 4.0 percent.\n2.9 Impact Strength – Shall not be less than 1.6 kg cm/\ncm of the notch.\n2.10 Rockwell Hardness – Shall be RHM 100 ± 5.\n2.11\nEffect of Heat on Rigidity, that is Temperature of\nDeflection Under Load – Shall not show a defection of\n0.25 mm until it reaches a temperature in excess of 850C.\n2.12 Vicat Softening Temperature – Shall not be less\nthan 1000C.\n2.13 Burning Rate – Shall show a burning rate of not\nmore than 40 mm per minute.\n2.14 Refractive Index – Shall show a refractive index\nnot more than 1.49.\n2.15\nHaze and Luminous Transmittance – Shall show minimum transmittance of 91 percent and haze percent\nshall not exceed 3.\n2.16\nStability Towards Yellowing\n2.16.1\nYellowness Index Method – Yellowness index values of PMMA sheets produced from virgin monomer\nMMA, colour code 001-clear transparent shall be as given below :\nThickness, t YI for Sheet YI/t Sheet\n(mm)\n2\n3.6 to 4.2 1.80 to 2.10\n2.5\n3.7 to 4.3 1.8 to 1.72\n3\n3.8 to 4.4 1.27 to 1.47\n2.17 Diffusion Factor and Uniformity of Diffusion –\n2.17.1 Diffusion Factor – The diffusion factor shall be calculated as : Diffusion factor =\nL 2 0 + L 7 0\n2 L 5 where\nL5, L20 and L70 are the luminance values of the surface when viewed at 5º, 20º and 70º to the normal.\n2.17.2\nThe test sheet for uniformity of diffusion\n(applicable for diffusion factors between 0.85 and 0.9 shall appear to be uniformly bright.\n2.18\nResidual Monomer Test – Shall not exceed by more than 2 percent by mass.\nNote – For methods of tests, refer to Appendix A to F of the standard and relevant parts of IS 13360 Plastics Methods of\ntesting.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 14753 : 1999 Specifications for polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA) (acrylic)\nsheets. SECTION 25\nCONDUCTORS AND CABLES CONTENTS\nTitle\nPage\nIS 694 : 1990\nPVC insulated cables for working voltages up to and including\n25.3\n1100 volts (third revision)\nIS 1554 (Part 1) : 1988\nPVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables for working voltages up to\n25.6 and including1100 volts (third revision)\nIS 7098 (Part 1) : 1988\nCross linked polyethylene insulated PVC sheathed cables for\n25.8 working voltages up to and including 1100 volts (first revision)\nIS 9968 (Part 1) : 1988\nElastometer insulated cables for working voltages upto and including\n25.10\n1100 volts (first revision)"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 694: 1990",
    "title": "Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "Requirements and tests for armoured and unarmoured single-core, twin-core, three-core and multi- core PVC insulated and sheathed cables for electric supply and control purposes. 1.2 This standard also covers cables with improved fire performance Categories C1 and C2 for which addtional requirements have been included. 1.3 The cables covered in this standard are suitable for use on ac single phase or three phase (earthed or unearthed) systems for rated voltages up to and including 1 100 V. These ",
    "keywords": [
      "cables",
      "twin",
      "cords",
      "sheath",
      "unsheathed",
      "core",
      "insulation"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and tests for armoured and unarmoured single-core, twin-core, three-core and multi- core PVC insulated and sheathed cables for electric supply and control purposes. 1.2 This standard also covers cables with improved fire performance Categories C1 and C2 for which addtional requirements have been included. 1.3 The cables covered in this standard are suitable for use on ac single phase or three phase (earthed or unearthed) systems for rated voltages up to and including 1 100 V. These cables may be used on d.c. systems for rated voltages up to and including 1 500 V to earth. Note – The cables conforming to this standard may be operated continuously at a power frequency voltage up to 10 percent higher than the rated voltage. 1.4 The cables covered in this standard are suitable for"
    },
    "content": "IS 694: 1990 Pvc Insulated Cable For Working Voltages\nUP TO AND INCLUDING 1100 VOLTS\n(Third Revision)\n1.\nScope\n1.1 Requirements and tests for the following types of\nunarmoured PVC insulated cables with copper or aluminium conductors and flexible cords with copper\nconductors for electric power and lighting (including cables for outdoor use and cables for low temperature\nconditions) for voltages up to and including 1100 Volts.\nNote 1 For out door use, the cables shall meet the requirements\nof additional ageing test. [see 15.4 of the standard]\nNote 2 The cables intended for low-temperature conditions\nshall meet the requirements of cold bend or cold impact test whichever is applicable. [see 15.4 of the standard] 1.1.1 Types of Cables a) Cables for fixed wiring:\ni) Single core (unsheathed);\nii) Single core (sheathed);\niii) Circular twin, three and four core\n(sheathed);\niv) Flat twin with or without ECC\n(sheathed); and v) Flat three core (sheathed).\nb) Flexible cables, single core (unsheathed).\nc) Flexible cords:\ni) Single core (unsheathed);\nii) Single core (sheathed);\niii) Parallel twin (unsheathed);\niv) Twisted twin (unsheathed);\nv) Circular twin, three , four and five core (sheathed); and vi) Flat twin (sheathed).\n1.2 The cables covered in this standard are suitable for\nuse on ac single phase or three phase (earthed or unearthed) systems for rated voltages up to and\nincluding 1100 volts. These cables may be used on dc systems for rated voltage up to and including 1500 volts.\n1.3 The cables covered in this standard are suitable for\nuse where the combination of ambient temperature and temperature rise due to load results in a continuous\nconductor temperature not exceeding 700C.\n1.4 The cables covered in this standard are also suitable\nfor use under outdoor or low temperature conditions provided these meet the additional requirements as\ngiven under type tests. For still lower temperature, the purchaser may specify the additional requirements.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Material\n2.1.1 Conductor – The conductor shall be composed of plain annealed high conductivity copper wires and\naluminium wires in case of copper and aluminium conductors respectively.\n2.1.2 Insulation/ Sheath – Shall be composed of PVC compound.\n2.1.3 Filters – It shall consist of vulcanized / unvulcanized rubber, thermoplastic compound or textile\nmaterials.\n2.1.4 Binder Tape – It shall consist of plastic or proofed textile material.\n2.2 Construction\n2.2.1 Conductor – Conductors for cables for fixed wiring shall be solid and / or stranded type depending\nupon nominal cross-sectional area of conductors. For cables having nominal area less than 16 mm2 shall be\ncircular only and for nominal area 16 mm2 and above, these may be circular or shaped.\n2.2.2 Insulation – It shall be of PVC compound.\n2.2.3 Laying-up of cores a)\nFlat twin and three-core cables (without ECC)–\nTwo or three cores shall be laid side by side.\nb)\nFlat-twin cables (with ECC)–Two cores in a bare ECC (in centre) shall be laid side by side.\nc)\nCircular twin, three and four core cables–\nTwo, three or four cores shall be laid together with a suitable right-hand lay. The interstices between cores may be filed with fillers. A binder tape may be applied over laid-up cores.\nd) Circular twin, three,four and five core flexible cords–Two, three, four or five cords shall be\ntwisted together with a suitable right-hand lay. The interstices may be filled with\nsheathing material fillers or strengthening cords of textile or any other suitable material.\ne) Parallel twin (unsheathed) flexible cords–Two conductors shall be laid parallel and insulated\nsimultaneously such that the cores can be separated readily without damage.\nf) Twisted twin (unsheathed) flexible cords–Two cores shall be twisted together with a suitable\nright hand lay.\ng) Flat twin (sheathed) flexible cords – Two cores shall be laid side by side.\n2.2.4 Sheathing – Shall be applied by extrusion.\n2.2.5 Thickness of insulation and sheath – Range of average thickness shall not be less than the nominal\nvalues specified in Table 1.\n2.3 Cable Code – The following code shall be used for\ndesignating the cable:\nConstituent\nCode Letter\nAluminum conductor\nA\nPVC insulation\nY\nPVC sheath\nY\nEarth continuity conductor\n(ECC)\nSuitable for outdoor use\nOU\nSuitable for low temperature\nSZ\nNote – No code letter is required when the conductors material\nis copper.\n3.\nTests\n3.1 Type Tests\na) Annealing test (for copper), b) Tensile test (for aluminium),\nc) Wrapping test (for aluminum), d) Resistance test,\ne) Test for overall dimensions and thickness of insulation and sheath\nf) Physical tests for insulation and sheath g) Insulation test, and\nh) High voltage test (water immersion test) and j) Flammability test.\nTABLE 1 RANGE OF AVERAGE THICKNESS\nSl. No. Type\nRange of Nominal\nRange of Nominal\nRange of Nominal\nSectional Area of\nThickness of\nThickness of\nConductor\nInsultation\nSheath mm2\nmm2 mm2\ni)\nSingle-core PVC insulated\n1-630\n0.7-2.8 cables (unsheathed) ii) Flexible PVC insulated cords 0.5-40 0.6-0.8 - (unsheathed)\niii)\nSingle core unsheathed\n6.50\n0.8-1.4 - Flexible cables iv) PVC insulted and sheathed\n1-50\n0.6-1.4 0.8-1.8 cables\nv)\nFlexible PVC insulated and\n0.5-4.0\n0.6-0.8 0.9-1.1 sheathed cords\nNote 1 – Nominal cross-sectional area of conductor- 1, 1.5, 2.5, 4, 6, 10, 16, 25, 35, 50, 70, 95, 120, 150, 185, 240, 300,\n400, 500 and 630 mm2.\nNote 2 – For detailed dimensions, refer to Tables 2 to 6 of the standard. Note – For test details, refer to IS 5831 : 1984 PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables, (first Revision) IS 8130 : 1984\nConductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords (first revision) and the standard.\nFor details information, refer to IS 694 : 1990 Specification for PVC insulated cables for working voltages upto and including 1 100 volts (third revision).\n3.2 Acceptance Tests – Tests specified in (a) to (d), (h)\nand ( j ) of 3.1 and following:\na) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath b) Tensile strength and elongation at break of\ninsulation and sheath.\nc) Insulation resistance test\n3.3 Routine Tests\na) Conductor resistance test, and b) High voltage test\n3.4 Optional Tests\na) Cold bend test, b) Cold impact test, and\nc) Additional ageing test d) Flexing test 2.1.2 Insulation – The general purpose and heat resisting insulation of Type A and Type C PVC\ncompound respectively conforming to the requirements of IS 5831:1984+\n2.1.3 Filler and Inner Sheath a) Unvulcanized rubber, or\nb) Thermoplastic materials, or c) Proofed tape (for inner sheath only)\n2.1.4 Armouring – Shall be of the following:\na) Galvanized round steel wire, b) Galvanized steel strip, or\nc) Any metallic non-magnetic wire/strip.\n2.1.5 Outer Sheath – Shall be of Type ST1 & ST2\nPVC compound conforming to IS 5831: 1984† for Cables with general purpose insulation and with heat resisting\ninsulation respectively.\n2.2 Construction\n2.2.1 Conductor – Shall be as follows :\nNOMINAL CROSS SECTIONAL AREA Copper Aluminium Solid/ Flexibility mm2 mm2 Stranded Class – 1.5 Solid Class 1 1.5 to 6 2.5 to 10 Solid/ Class1 for Stranded Solid Class2 for Stranded\n10 and above 16 and above Stranded Class 2\nCables with reduced neutral conductors shall have sizes as given in Table 1 of the stranded.\n2.2.2 Insulation – Shall be provided with PVC insulation applied by extrusion. The average thickness\nof insulation shall be not less than the nominal value specified in Table 2 of the standard.\n1.\nScope – Requirements and tests for armoured and unarmoured single-core, twin-core, three-core and multi-\ncore PVC insulated and sheathed cables for electric supply and control purposes.\n1.2 This standard also covers cables with improved\nfire performance Categories C1 and C2 for which addtional requirements have been included.\n1.3 The cables covered in this standard are suitable\nfor use on ac single phase or three phase (earthed or unearthed) systems for rated voltages up to and\nincluding 1 100 V. These cables may be used on d.c.\nsystems for rated voltages up to and including 1 500 V to earth.\nNote – The cables conforming to this standard may be\noperated continuously at a power frequency voltage up to\n10 percent higher than the rated voltage.\n1.4 The cables covered in this standard are suitable\nfor use where the combination of ambient temperature and temperature rise due to load results in conductor\ntemperature not exceeding the following:\nType of Insulation\nNormal\nShort\nContinuous\nCircuit\nOperation\nCondition\nGeneral purpose\n70ºC\n160ºC\nHeat resisting\n85ºC\n160ºC\nThe selection of type of insulation rests with the purchaser.\n1.5 Armoured cables specified in this standard are\nsuitable for use in mines also. However, for such cables, additional requirements have been included wherever\nnecessary.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Materials\n2.1.1 Conductor – Shall be composed of plain copper or aluminium wires complying with IS 8130 : 1984*.\nMining cables to be used in gassy mines shall be of copper conductor only.\n* Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords\n(first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1554 (Part 1): 1988",
    "title": "Pvc Insulated (Heavy Duty) Electric Cables",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "PART 1 – FOR WORKING VOLTAGES UPTO AND INCLUDING 1 100 VOLTS (Third Revision) †PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables (first revision).",
    "keywords": [
      "sheath",
      "cores",
      "cables",
      "core",
      "insulation",
      "armour",
      "conductor"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 1554 (Part 1): 1988 Pvc Insulated (Heavy Duty) Electric Cables\nPART 1 – FOR WORKING VOLTAGES UPTO AND INCLUDING 1 100 VOLTS\n(Third Revision) †PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables (first revision). 2.2.3 Core Identification – Shall be identified by different colouring of PVC insulation.\n(a)\n1 core:red, black, yellow, blue or natural (nonpigmented)\n(b) 2 cores – red and black\n(c)\n3 cores – red , yellow and blue\n(d) 4 cores – red, yelow and blue and black\n(e)\n5 cores – red,yellow, blue, black,and grey\n(f)\n6 cores and above – Two adjacent cores\n(counting and direction core) in each layer,blue and yellow, remaining Cores grey\nNote1– For reduced neutral conductors, the insulation colour\nshall be black.\nNote 2 – For cables of more than 5 cores, the core\nidentification may be done by numbers.\n2.2.4 Laying up of cores – Shall be laid together with a suitable lay; the outermost having right hand lay and\nsuccessive layers with opposite lay. Recommended plan up to 100 is given in Table 3 of the standard.\n2.2.5 Inner Sheath – Shall be applied either by extrusion or by wrapping. Thickness of inner sheath\nshall be as given in Table 4 of the standard.\n2.2.6 Armouring – Shall be applied over the insulation in case of single core cables and over the inner sheath\nin case of twin, three and multi core cables.\n2.2.7 Outer Sheath – Shall be applied by extrusion as below:\na) Over the insulation in case of unarmoured single core cables\nb) Over the inner sheath in case of unarmoured twin, three and multi-core cables, and\nc) Over the armouring in case of armoured cables thickness shall be as given in Table 7 of the standard\n3.\nTests\n3.1 Type Tests\na) Tests on conductor:\n1) Annealing test (for copper), 2) Tensile test (for aluminium), and\n3) Wrapping test (for aluminium), and\n4) Conductor resistance test.\nb) Test for armouring wire/strips c) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath.\nd) Physical tests for insulation and outer sheath:\n1) Tensile strength and elongation at break\n2) Ageing in air oven,\n3) Shrinkage test,\n4) Hot deformation,\n5) Loss of mass in air oven,\n6) Heat shock test, and\n7) Thermal stability, e) Insulation resistance test.\nf) High voltage test (water immersion test).\ng) High voltage test at room temperature.\nh) Flammability test.\nNote1 – For acceptance, routine optional tests and additional\ntests for Cables with improved fix performance refer to 15\n0f the standard.\n4.\nIdentification\n4.1 Cable Code – The following code shall be used for\ndesignating the cable :\nConstituent\nCode Letter\nAluminium conductor\nA\nPVC insulation\nY\nSteel round wire armour\nW\nSteel strip armour\nF\nSteel double round wire armour\nWW\nSteel double strip armour\nF F\nPVC outer sheath\nY\nNote – No code letter for conductor is required when the\nconductor material is copper.\nNote – For method of tests, refer to the relevent parts of IS 10810. Methods of tests for cables.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 1554 (Part I) : 1988 Specification for PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cable: Part I For working voltages up to and including 1 100 volts (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 7098 (Part 1): 1988",
    "title": "Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Thermoplastic Sheathed Cables",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "PART-1 FOR WORKING VOLTAGES UP TO AND INCLUDING 1 100 VOLTS (First Revision) 1. Scope 1.1 Requirements for both armoured and unarmoured single, twin, three, four and multi-core cross–linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated and PVC sheathed cables for electric supply and control purpose. 1.2 The cables covered in this standard are suitable for use on ac single phase or three phase (earthed or unearthed) systems for rated voltages up to and including 1 100 volts. These cables may be used on dc system",
    "keywords": [
      "cables",
      "core",
      "sheath",
      "conductor",
      "insulation",
      "armour",
      "cores"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 7098 (Part 1): 1988 Crosslinked Polyethylene Insulated Thermoplastic Sheathed Cables\nPART-1 FOR WORKING VOLTAGES UP TO AND INCLUDING 1 100 VOLTS\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope\n1.1 Requirements for both armoured and unarmoured\nsingle, twin, three, four and multi-core cross–linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated and PVC sheathed cables\nfor electric supply and control purpose.\n1.2 The cables covered in this standard are suitable for\nuse on ac single phase or three phase (earthed or unearthed) systems for rated voltages up to and\nincluding 1 100 volts. These cables may be used on dc systems for rated voltage up to and including 1 500\nvolts to earth.\nNote –The cables conforming to this standard may be\noperated continuously at a power frequency voltage 10 percent higher than rated voltage.\n1.3 Armoured cables specified in this standard are\nsuitable for use in mines also. However, for such cables, additional requirements have been included.\n1.4 These cables are suitable for use where combination\nof ambient temperature and temperature rise due to load results in conductor temperature not exceeding 90ºC\nunder normal operation and 250ºC under short circuit condition.\n1.5 This standard also covers cables with improved\nfire performance categories C1 and C2 for which additional requirements have been included.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Materials\n2.1.1 Conductor – Shall be composed of plain copper or aluminium wires complying with IS 8130: 1984+.\nMining cables to be used in gassy mines shall be of copper conductor only.\n2.1.2 Insulation – Shall be of cross linked polyethylene conforming to the requirements given in\nTable 1 of the standard.\n2.1.3 Filler and Inner Sheath – Shall be of the following:\na) Vulcanized or unvulcanized rubber, or b) Thermoplastic materials.\n2.1.4 Armouring – Shall be of the following : a) Galvanized round steel wire, or b) Galvanized steel strip, or c) Any metallic non-magnetic wire/strip.\n2.1.5 Outer Sheath – Shall be of polyviny choride\n(PVC) compound conforming to the requirements of type\nST 2 compound of IS 5831 : 1984*.\n2.2 Construction\n2.2.1 Conductor – Shall be as follows : Nominal Cross Sectional Area Solid / Flexiblitity stranded class Copper Alluminium mm2 mm2 --\n1.5 Solid\n1 1.5- 6\n2.5-10 Solid/ Stranded 1 for solid 2 for stranded 10 and 16 and Stranded 2 above above\nCables with reduced neutral conductor shall have size as given in Table 2 of the standard.\n2.2.2 Insulation – Shall be provided with cross linked polyethylene insulation applied by extrusion. The\naverage thickness of insulation shall be not less than the nominal value specified in Table 3 of the standard.\n2.2.3 Core identification – Cores shall be identified as specified below : †Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords\n(first revision). * PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables (first revision) a) Coloured strip applied on the core b) Colouring of XLPE insulation as follows : 1 Core—Red, black, yellow, blue or natural; 2 Core—Red and black; 3 Core—Red, yellow and blue; 4 Core—Red, yellow, blue and black; 5 Core—Red, yellow, blue, black and grey; 6 Core— and above—Two adjacent cores (counting and direction core) in each layer, blue and yellow, remaining cores, grey; or c) By numerals either by applying numbered\nstrips or by printing on the cores as follows\n2 Core – 0, 1\n3 Core – 0, 1, 2, 3 4 Core – 0, 1, 2 and 3\nNote 1– For reduced neutral conductors, the core shall be\nblack.\nNote 2 – For cables of more than 5 cores, the core\nidentification may be done by numbers\n2.2.4 Laying of core – Shall be laid up togather with a suitable lay, the outermost layer having right hand lay\nand successive layers with opposite layers.\nRecommended plan up to 100 be is given in Table 4 of the standard.\n2.2.5 Inner Sheath – Shall be applied either by extrusion or by wrapping. Thickness of inner sheath shall be as\ngiven in Table 5 of the standard.\n2.2.6 Armouring – Shall be applied over the insulation in case of single core cables and over the inner sheath\nin case of twin, three and multicore cables\n2.2.7 Outer sheath – Shall be applied by extrusion as below:\na) Over the insulation in case of unarmoured single core cables,\nb) Over the inner sheath in case of unarmoured twin, three and multi-core cables; and\nc) Over the armouring in case of armoured cables.\nThickness shall be as given in Table 8 of the standard\n3.\nTests\n3.1 Types Tests –\na) Tests on conductor:\ni) Annealing test (for copper)\nii) Tensile test (for aluminium)\niii) Wrapping test (for aluminium)\niv) Resistance test b) Test for armouring wires/strips.\nc) Test for thickness of insulation and sheath d) Physical tests for insulation :\ni) Tensile strength and elongation at break ii) Ageing in air oven\niii) Shrinkage test iv) Hot set test\nv) Water absorption (gravimetric)\ne) Physical tests for outer sheath i) Tensile strength and elongation at break\nii) Ageing in air oven, iii) Loss of mass in air oven\niv) Shrinkage test, and v) Hot deformation\nvi) Heat shock test vii) Thermal stability\nf) Insulation resistence (Volume resistivity Test)\ng) High voltage test, h) Flammability test,\nNote – For acceptance, routine, optional tests and additional\ntests for cables with improved fine performance refer to 15 of the standard.\n4.\nIdentification\n4.1 The following code shall be used for designating\nthe cable:\nSl. No. Constituent\nCode Letter i)\nAluminium conductor\nA\nii)\nXLPE insulation\n2X\niii)\nSteel round wire armour\nW\niv)\nNon-magnetic round wire armour\nWa v)\nSteel strip armour\nF\nvi)\nNon-magnetic strip armour\nFa vii)\nDouble steel strip armour\nF F\nviii)\nDouble steel round wire armour\nW W\nix)\nPVC outer sheath\nY\nNote – No code letter for conductor is required when the conductor\nmaterial is copper. Cables with heat resisting insulation suitable for 85ºC conductor temperature shall be identified by the letters\n‘HR 85’ marked on it.\nNote – For methods tests, refer to relevant parts of IS 10810 Methods of test for cables.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 7098 (Part I) : 1988 Specification for cross–linked polyethylene insulated thermoplastic sheathed cables: Part I For working voltages upto and including 1100 volts (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9968 (Part 1): 1998",
    "title": "Elastomer Insulated Cables,",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "Requirements of elastomeric insulated cables for fixed wiring, flexible cables and flexible cords for electric power and lighting for operation at voltages up to and including 1100 volts. 1.1 The following types of cables and cords are covered in this standard. 1.1.1 Cables for fixed wiring a) Braided and compounded/varnished, b) Elastomer sheathed (normal duty), and c) Elastomer sheathed (normal duty) with earth continuity conductor. 1.1.2 Flexible cables a) Braided and varnished, and b) Elasto",
    "keywords": [
      "cables",
      "cords",
      "flexible",
      "elastomer",
      "insulation",
      "sheath",
      "wiring"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements of elastomeric insulated cables for fixed wiring, flexible cables and flexible cords for electric power and lighting for operation at voltages up to and including 1100 volts. 1.1 The following types of cables and cords are covered in this standard. 1.1.1 Cables for fixed wiring a) Braided and compounded/varnished, b) Elastomer sheathed (normal duty), and c) Elastomer sheathed (normal duty) with earth continuity conductor. 1.1.2 Flexible cables a) Braided and varnished, and b) Elastomer sheathed (heavy duty). 1.1.3 Flexible cords a) Braided b) Elastomer sheathed (normal duty), c) Unkinkable flexible cords – braided and compounded (workshop type), and d) Unkinkable flexible cords – braided and compounded. 1.2 The cables covered in this standard are suitable for use on single-pha",
      "Identification": "Cables or cords shall be identified throughout the length of the cable or cords by the legends shown below, either printed or indented or embossed on the cable. Type of Cable Insulation Legend Heat resisting rubber HR 90 Silicon rubber HR 150 The following code shall be used for designating the cable : Constituent Code Letter Aluminium conductor A Elastomer insulation R Braiding, compounding or B varnishing Elastomer sheath R Earth continuity conductor ECC SECTION 26 WIRING ACCESSORIES CONTENTS Title Page IS 371 : 1999 Ceiling Roses (third revision) 26.3 IS 1293 : 1988 Plugs and Socket Outlets of Rated Voltage upto and Including 250 Volts and Rated Current upto and Including 16 Amperes (second revision) 26.5 IS 2086 : 1993 Carriers and Bases Used in Rewirable Type Electric Fuses for Voltag",
      "Conditions Of Use": "Shall be suitable for use under the following conditions: a) An ambient temperature having a peak value not exceeding 45ºC with an average value not exceeding 40ºC in a period of 24 h, but not subject to exposure to direct radiation from the sun or any other source of heat likely to raise the temperature above the specified ambient temperature. b) An ambient temperature having a value not less than – 5ºC; and c) An atmposphere not subject to excessive pollution by smoke chemical fumes, salt laden spray, prolonged periods of high humidity or other abnormal conditions.",
      "General Requirements": "Shall be so design and and constructed that when installed in the proper manner and in normal use they function reliable and cause no danger to person or surrounding ceiling roses shall be capable of meeting all the relevard requirements and tests specified in the standard. SU MMARY OF"
    },
    "content": "IS 9968 (Part 1): 1998 Elastomer Insulated Cables,\nPART1 FOR WORKING VOLTAGES UPTO AND INCLUDING 1 100 VOLTS\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements of elastomeric insulated cables for fixed wiring, flexible cables and flexible cords\nfor electric power and lighting for operation at voltages up to and including 1100 volts.\n1.1 The following types of cables and cords are\ncovered in this standard.\n1.1.1 Cables for fixed wiring a) Braided and compounded/varnished,\nb) Elastomer sheathed (normal duty), and c) Elastomer sheathed (normal duty) with earth\ncontinuity conductor.\n1.1.2 Flexible cables a) Braided and varnished, and\nb) Elastomer sheathed (heavy duty).\n1.1.3 Flexible cords a) Braided\nb) Elastomer sheathed (normal duty), c) Unkinkable flexible cords – braided and\ncompounded (workshop type), and d) Unkinkable flexible cords – braided and\ncompounded.\n1.2 The cables covered in this standard are suitable for\nuse on single-phase or three-phase (earthed or unearthed) system for rated voltages up to and including\n1 100 volts. These cables may be used on dc system for rated voltages up to and including 1500 volts to earth.\n1.3 The cables covered in this standard are suitable for\nuse where the combination of ambient temperature and temperature rise due to load results in conductor\ntemperature not exceeding the following. Type of Insulation\nNormal\nShort-Circuit\nContinuous\nCondition\nOperation Insulation for general\n60ºC 200ºC service Heat resisting insulation\n90ºC 250ºC Silicone rubber insulation\n150ºC 350ºC\n2.\nMaterials\n2.1 Conductor\n2.1.1 Copper conductor – Shall be tinned annealed copper wires complying with the requirement of IS 8130\n: 1984*.\n2.1.2 Aluminium Conductor – The conductor shall be composed of aluminium wires complying with the\nrequirements of IS 8130: 1984*.\n2.2. Insulation\n2.2.1 Insulation for general services – The insulation shall be of elastomer compound conforming to Type IE\n2 of IS 6380 : 1984†.\n2.2.2 Heat resisting insulation – Shall be of elastomer compound conforming to Type IE 2 of IS 6380 : 1984.\n2.2.3 Silicone Rubber Insulation – The insulation shall be of silicone rubber conforming to Type IE 5 of\nIS 6380 : 1984.\n2.3 Tape\na) Proofed tape.\nb) Polyethylene terephthalate (PETP) tape or\nPlastic tape or any other suitable tape, and c) Glass tape.\n2.4 Fillers – Shall be of natural or synthetic fibres or\nelastomer.\n2.5 Braid\na) Textile Braid, and b) Grass braid\n2.6 Sheath\n*Condutors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords\n(first revision).\n† Elastomeric insulation and sheath of electric cables\n(first revision). 2.6.1 General service insulated cables and flexible cords – Cables for fixed wiring and flexible cords shall\ncosists sheath of elastomeric compounds of type SE1 of IS 6380 : 1984 Flexible cables sheath shall also be of\nelastomeric compound of type SE2 of IS 6380 : 1984.\n2.6.2 Heat resisting insulated cables – Cables for fixed wiring and flexible cords shall consist sheath of\nelastromeric compounds of Type SE3 of IS 6380 : 1984.\nFlexible cables sheath shall also be of elastomeric compound of Type SE4 of IS 6380: 1984.\n3.\nConstruction\n3.1 Conductors\n3.1.1 Cables for fixed wiring – Shall be as follows: Nominal Cross Sectional Solid / Flexiblitity Area ,mm2 Stranded class Copper Alluminium 1and 1.5 1.5 solid\nClass 1 2.5 to 6 2.5 to 10 solid/ stranded Class1 for solid Class2 for stranded 10 and above 16 and above stranded Class 2\n3.1.2\nFlexible cables and cords – Shall be according to class 5 of IS 8130 : 1984.\n3.2 Insulation – Shall have the average thickness not\nless than nominal value specified in respective tables of the standard.\n3.3 Core identfication – Shall be identified either by\ncolours or numbers using any one of the following methods:\na) Numbered tapes, b) Coloured insulation,\nc) Coloured tape, and d) Numbered printed on cores.\nNote— For details see 13 of the standard.\n3.4 Laying Up of Cores – Shall be laid together with a\nsuitable right hand lay. The value of lay for flexible cables and cords shall be maximum 18 times the pitch circle\ndiameter.\nNote – For method of test refer to IS 6380 : 1984 Elastomeric insulation and sheath of electric cables (first revision) and IS 8130\n: 1984 Conductors for insulated electric cables and flexible cords (first revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 9968 (Part I) : 1988 Specification for elastomer insulated cables Part I -\nFor working voltages up to and including 1 100 volts (first revision).\n3.5 Sheath – Shall be applied by extrusion. The average\nthickness shall be not less than the nominal value specified in the respective tables in the standard.\n4.\nTests\n4.1 Type Tests\na) Tensile strength and elongation at break, b) Ageing in air oven ,\nc) Ageing in air bomb, d) Ageing in oxygen bomb,\ne) Hot set, f) Oil resistance, and\nh) Tear resistance,\nInsulation resistance\nHigh voltage (water immersion) test\nFlammability test (applicable to cables finished with\nSE 3 and SE 4 sheaths only)\nWater absorption test (for insulation as applicable)\nPersulphate test (for copper)\nAnnealing test (for copper)\nTensile test (for aluminium)\nWrapping test (for aluminium)\nConductor resistance test\nTest for thickness of insulation and sheath and overall diameter (where specified)\nNote – For acceptance, routine and optional tests, refer\nto the standard.\n5. Identification – Cables or cords shall be identified\nthroughout the length of the cable or cords by the legends shown below, either printed or indented or\nembossed on the cable. Type of Cable Insulation\nLegend Heat resisting rubber\nHR 90 Silicon rubber\nHR 150\nThe following code shall be used for designating the cable : Constituent\nCode Letter Aluminium conductor\nA Elastomer insulation\nR Braiding, compounding or\nB varnishing Elastomer sheath\nR Earth continuity conductor\nECC SECTION 26\nWIRING ACCESSORIES CONTENTS\nTitle Page\nIS\n371 : 1999\nCeiling Roses (third revision) 26.3\nIS\n1293 : 1988\nPlugs and Socket Outlets of Rated Voltage upto and Including 250 Volts and\nRated Current upto and Including 16 Amperes (second revision) 26.5\nIS\n2086 : 1993\nCarriers and Bases Used in Rewirable Type Electric Fuses for Voltages upto\n650 Volts (third revision)\n26.7\nIS\n2412 : 1975\nLink Clips for Electrical Wiring (first revision) 26.9\nIS\n2667 : 1988\nFittings for Rigid Steel Conduits for Electrical Wiring (first revision) 26.10\nIS\n3419 : 1989\nFittings for Rigid Non-Metallic Conduits (third revision) 26.12\nIS\n3480 : 1966\nFlexible Steel Conduits for Electrical Wiring\n26.13\nIS\n3837 : 1976\nAccessories for Rigid Steel Conduits for Electrical Wiring (first revision)\n26.14\nIS\n3854 : 1997\nSwitches for Domestic and Similar Purposes (second revision)\n26.15\nIS\n4160 : 1967\nInterlocking Switch Socket Outlet\n26.17\nIS\n4615 : 1968\nSwitch Socket Outlets (Non-Inter Locking Type)\n26.19\nIS\n4649 : 1968\nAdaptors for Flexible Steel Conduits\n26.21\nIS\n6538 : 1971\nThree Pin Plugs Made of Resilient Material\n26.22\nIS\n8828 : 1996\nIEC 898 (1995) Circuit Breakers for Over Current Protection for House-Hold and Similar Installations (second revision)\n26.24\nIS\n9537\nConduits for Electrical Installations\n(Part I) – 1980 General Requirements\n26.27\n(Part 2) – 1981 Rigid Steel Conduits\n26.29\n(Part 3) – 1983 Rigid Plain Conduits of Insulating Materials\n26.30\n(Part 4) – 1983 Pliable Self-Recovering Conduits of Insulating Materials\n26.31\n(Part 5) – 2000 Pliable conducts of Insulating material\n26.32\nIS\n14772 : 2000\nGeneral requirements for enclosure for accessories for household\n26.33 and similar fixed electrical installation. 1.\nScope\n1.1 This standard covers ceiling roses of surface and\nsemi-recessed types for use with simple or multiple pendant lighting fitting and for the use in circuits in\nwhich the nominal voltage does not exceed 250V and the current does not exceed 6A and intended to be\nused in final circuits with rated current 16A maximum for ceiling roses with screw type supply terminals.or 10\nA maximum for ceiling roses with screwless supply terminals. The requirements specified in this standard\nhave particular reference to safety in use.\n1.2 The ceiling roses are intended for use with cables\ncomplying with IS 694 : 1990.\n1.3 The ceiling roses incorporating means other than\nrewirable terminals to facilitate the connection and disconnection of lampholders or luminaries, are not\ncovered by this standard.\n2. Conditions of Use – Shall be suitable for use under\nthe following conditions:\na) An ambient temperature having a peak value not exceeding 45ºC with an average value not\nexceeding 40ºC in a period of 24 h, but not subject to exposure to direct radiation from the sun or\nany other source of heat likely to raise the temperature above the specified ambient\ntemperature.\nb) An ambient temperature having a value not less than – 5ºC; and\nc) An atmposphere not subject to excessive pollution by smoke chemical fumes, salt laden\nspray, prolonged periods of high humidity or other abnormal conditions.\n3. General requiremnts – Shall be so design and and\nconstructed that when installed in the proper manner and in normal use they function reliable and cause no\ndanger to person or surrounding ceiling roses shall be capable of meeting all the relevard requirements and\ntests specified in the standard.\nSU MMARY OF"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 371: 1999",
    "title": "Ceiling Roses",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "(Third Revision) * Pvc insulated cables for working voltages up to and including 1100V (third revision). 4. Ratings – Shall have a rated voltage of not exceeding 250 V and rated current not exceeding 6A. 5. Classification a) According to the method of mounting : i) Surface type, and ii) Semi-recessed or flush type b) According to load support : i) Intended to support mechanical load by means or a flexible cord complying widh IS 694, and ii) Intended to support mechanical loads as nominated by th",
    "keywords": [
      "terminals",
      "provision",
      "terminal",
      "flexible",
      "cord",
      "support",
      "current"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Ratings": "Shall have a rated voltage of not exceeding 250 V and rated current not exceeding 6A. 5. Classification a) According to the method of mounting : i) Surface type, and ii) Semi-recessed or flush type b) According to load support : i) Intended to support mechanical load by means or a flexible cord complying widh IS 694, and ii) Intended to support mechanical loads as nominated by the manufacturer in addition to those specified in 5 (b) (i), by means other than a flexible cord. c) According to current carrying terminal arrangement : i) Having provision for the connection of switch wiring, and ii) Having no provision for the connection of switch wiring. d) According to terminal type : i) Having screw type terminals, ii) Having screw-less terminals, and iii) Having a combination of both terminal",
      "Construction": "Where protection against electric shock is provided by a cover screwing on to a base or by similar attachments, such parts shall withstand the forces likely to be applied in normal use. Provision shall be made for entry and connection of a circular flexible cord having three conductors of 1.0 mm2. A device or means of unsultating materials, shall be provided to prevent strain upon flexible conductors connected to the ceiling rose, being transmitted to the terminal. 8. Tests a) Marking, b) Dimensions, c) Accessibility of live parts, d) Provision of earthing, e) Terminals, Note – For detailed requirements and methods of tests refer to the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 371 : 1999 Specification for ceiling roses (third revision). f) Construction, g) Resistance to moisture and "
    },
    "content": "IS 371: 1999 Ceiling Roses\n(Third Revision)\n* Pvc insulated cables for working voltages up to and including\n1100V (third revision).\n4. Ratings – Shall have a rated voltage of not exceeding\n250 V and rated current not exceeding 6A.\n5.\nClassification a) According to the method of mounting :\ni) Surface type, and ii) Semi-recessed or flush type\nb) According to load support :\ni) Intended to support mechanical load by means or a flexible cord complying widh IS 694, and\nii) Intended to support mechanical loads as nominated by the manufacturer in addition to\nthose specified in 5 (b) (i), by means other than a flexible cord.\nc) According to current carrying terminal arrangement :\ni) Having provision for the connection of switch wiring, and\nii) Having no provision for the connection of switch wiring.\nd) According to terminal type :\ni) Having screw type terminals, ii) Having screw-less terminals, and\niii) Having a combination of both terminals\n7. Construction – Where protection against electric\nshock is provided by a cover screwing on to a base or by similar attachments, such parts shall withstand the\nforces likely to be applied in normal use. Provision shall be made for entry and connection of a circular flexible\ncord having three conductors of 1.0 mm2. A device or means of unsultating materials, shall be provided to\nprevent strain upon flexible conductors connected to the ceiling rose, being transmitted to the terminal.\n8.\nTests a)\nMarking, b)\nDimensions, c)\nAccessibility of live parts, d)\nProvision of earthing, e)\nTerminals, Note – For detailed requirements and methods of tests refer to the standard\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 371 : 1999 Specification for ceiling roses (third revision).\nf)\nConstruction, g)\nResistance to moisture and humidity, insulation resistance and electric strength,\nh)\nTemperature rise, j)\nMechanical strength, k) Resistance to heat,\nl) Resistance to abnormal heat fire and tracking, m) Screws, current carrying parts and connector,\nn) Creepage distances and clearances, and o) Ressistance to excessive residual stress and to\nrusting.\n26.4"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 1293: 1988",
    "title": "Plugs And Socket-Outlets – Rated",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "Requirements and tests for three-pin twopole and earthing plugs and socket-outlets (shuttered and non-shuttered) including multi-socket-outlet (shuttered and non-shuttered) suitable for ac circuits with a rated voltage above 50 V but not exceeding 250 volts and a rated current of 6 A or 16 A. Note 1– 2 pin plugs and socket outlets are considered non- standard. Note 2– Fused plugs are not covered under the scope of this standard.",
    "keywords": [
      "outlets",
      "rated",
      "socket",
      "voltage",
      "shuttered",
      "plugs",
      "current"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and tests for three-pin twopole and earthing plugs and socket-outlets (shuttered and non-shuttered) including multi-socket-outlet (shuttered and non-shuttered) suitable for ac circuits with a rated voltage above 50 V but not exceeding 250 volts and a rated current of 6 A or 16 A. Note 1– 2 pin plugs and socket outlets are considered non- standard. Note 2– Fused plugs are not covered under the scope of this standard.",
      "General Requirements": "Accessories shall be so designed and constructed that in normal use their performance is reliable and without danger to the user or the surroundings. 3. Ratings 3.1 Rated Voltage – The rated voltage shall not exceed 250 V. The preferred voltage shall be 240 V. 3.2 Rated Current – Shall be 6 or 16 A in line with international practice. However, for the convenience of manufacturers and users used to the present series of 5 and 15 A and in order to facilitate a smooth change over, both the series shall be used con-currently.",
      "Classification": "Shall be classified according to: a) Absence or presence of enclosures: i) Unenclosed, and ii) Enclosed. b) Absence or the presence of shutters: i) Without shutters, and ii) With shutters c) The method of application: i) Surface-type socket-outlets, ii) Flush-type socket-outlets, iii) Portable type socket-outlets. 5. Dimensions Reference Rating to Fig 1 6A 16A m m mm A 22.2 28.6 B 19.1 25.4 +0.025 +0.025 C 7.06 8.71 – 0.050 – 0.050 +0.025 +0.025 D 5.08 7.06 – 0.050 – 0.050 +1.04 +1.04 E 15.9 20.6 – 0.13 – 0.13 +1.04 +1.04 F 20.06 28.6 – 0.13 – 0.13 G.min. 7.94 9.52 H 5.16 to 7.54 6.76 to 9.12 26.5 6. Materials Part Material a) Plug base, plug Though, non-ignitable cover, socket- insulating material outlet cover shutter b) Socket base Tough, non-ignitable insulating material or vitrified ce"
    },
    "content": "IS 1293: 1988 Plugs And Socket-Outlets – Rated\nVOLTAGE UPTO AND INCLUDING 250 VOLTS AND RATED\nCURRENT UPTO AND INCLUDING 16 AMPERES\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements and tests for three-pin twopole and earthing plugs and socket-outlets (shuttered\nand non-shuttered) including multi-socket-outlet\n(shuttered and non-shuttered) suitable for ac circuits with a rated voltage above 50 V but not exceeding 250\nvolts and a rated current of 6 A or 16 A.\nNote 1– 2 pin plugs and socket outlets are considered non-\nstandard.\nNote 2– Fused plugs are not covered under the scope of this\nstandard.\n2. General Requirements – Accessories shall be so\ndesigned and constructed that in normal use their performance is reliable and without danger to the user\nor the surroundings.\n3.\nRatings\n3.1 Rated Voltage – The rated voltage shall not exceed\n250 V. The preferred voltage shall be 240 V.\n3.2 Rated Current – Shall be 6 or 16 A in line with\ninternational practice. However, for the convenience of manufacturers and users used to the present series of 5\nand 15 A and in order to facilitate a smooth change over, both the series shall be used con-currently.\n4. Classification – Shall be classified according to:\na) Absence or presence of enclosures:\ni) Unenclosed, and ii) Enclosed.\nb) Absence or the presence of shutters:\ni) Without shutters, and ii) With shutters\nc) The method of application:\ni) Surface-type socket-outlets, ii) Flush-type socket-outlets,\niii) Portable type socket-outlets.\n5.\nDimensions\nReference Rating to Fig 1\n6A\n16A\nm m mm\nA\n22.2\n28.6\nB\n19.1\n25.4\n+0.025\n+0.025\nC 7.06 8.71\n– 0.050\n– 0.050\n+0.025\n+0.025\nD\n5.08 7.06\n– 0.050\n– 0.050\n+1.04\n+1.04\nE\n15.9\n20.6\n– 0.13\n– 0.13\n+1.04\n+1.04\nF\n20.06\n28.6\n– 0.13\n– 0.13\nG.min.\n7.94\n9.52\nH\n5.16 to 7.54\n6.76 to 9.12 26.5 6.\nMaterials\nPart\nMaterial a) Plug base, plug\nThough, non-ignitable cover, socket-\ninsulating material outlet cover\nshutter b) Socket base\nTough, non-ignitable\ninsulating material or vitrified ceramic material\nc) Pins, terminals\nPhosphor-bronze, and current-\nbrass aluminium alloy carrying parts,\nor suitable material including earthing-pin and earthing contact\nd) Noncurrent\nMild steel, aluminium carrying parts\nalloy, brass or similar alloys, or insulating\nmaterial.\nNote 1– For constructional requirements with regard to aspect such as protection against electric shocks, provisions for earthing,\nterminal and screw, construction of fixed socket–outlets and construction of plugs and portable socket outlets refer to 9 to 13 of the standard.\nNote 2 – For detailed requirements and methods of tests refer to the standard\nFor detailed requirements refer to IS 1293 : 1988 Specification for plugs and socket-outlets-rated voltage up to and including of 250 volts and rated current up to and including 16 amperes (second revision).\n7.\nTests a) Visual examination,\nb) Checking of dimensions, c) Protection against electric shock,\nd) Construction, e) Interchangability,\nf) Resistance to ageing and moisture, g) Insulation resistance and electric strength,\nh) Effectiveness of contact, j) Temperature rise,\nk) Breaking capacity, m)Endurance test for shutters,\nn) Withdrawal pull, p) Cord grip,\nq) Mechanical strength, r) Resistance to heat,\ns) Screws and connections, t) Water absorption,\nu) Resistance to rusting, v) Resistance to abnormal heat and fire,"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2086: 1993",
    "title": "Carriers And Bases Used In Rewirable Type",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "Performance requirements and tests as well as dimensions of carriers and bases used in rewirable type electric fuses having a rated current up to and including 100 A meant for alternating current systems of voltages not exceeding 650v between lines.The specification does not cover fuse-wire used in rewirable type fuses.",
    "keywords": [
      "fuse",
      "carrier",
      "fuses",
      "rated",
      "ceramic",
      "current",
      "carriers"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Performance requirements and tests as well as dimensions of carriers and bases used in rewirable type electric fuses having a rated current up to and including 100 A meant for alternating current systems of voltages not exceeding 650v between lines.The specification does not cover fuse-wire used in rewirable type fuses. 2. Electrical Requirements 2.1 Preferred Voltages – Fuses shall be rated for one of the following voltages – For ac systems – 240 V singlephase and 415 V three phase. Note – A 240 V grade fuse shall not be used in a three- phase 4 wire 415 V systems. 2.2 Rated Currents – The preferred values shall be 16, 32, 63 and 100 A 2.2.1 The fuse-carrier and base shall be so designed and proportioned, that when they are carrying their rated current continuously in an ambient temperatu",
      "Dimensions Of Carriers And Bases": "The dimensions of carriers and bases used in rewirable type electric fuses shall conform to Type A dimensions given in Annex-A of the standard. 5. Tests 5.1 Type Tests a) Mechanical test sequence : i) Visual examination ii) Test for dimensions iii) Test for mechanical endurance iv) Test for mechanical strength v) Test for withdrawal force b) Electrical test sequence : i) Test for temperature rise ii) Insulation resistance test iii) High voltage test iv) Test for breaking capacity c) Test for proving material properties: i) Test for water absorption (non-ceramic) ii) Test on ceramic material iii) Ignition test 5.2 Acceptance Test – Tests specified in [(a) – (i), (ii), (iii), (iv)] [(b) – (i), (ii), (iii) ] [(c) – (i)] of 5.1and Temperature cycle test (for ceramic materials). 5.3 Routine Tes"
    },
    "content": "IS 2086: 1993 Carriers And Bases Used In Rewirable Type\nELECTRIC FUSES FOR VOLTAGES UP TO 650 VOLTS\n(Third Revision)\n1. Scope – Performance requirements and tests as well\nas dimensions of carriers and bases used in rewirable type electric fuses having a rated current up to and\nincluding 100 A meant for alternating current systems of voltages not exceeding 650v between lines.The\nspecification does not cover fuse-wire used in rewirable type fuses.\n2. Electrical Requirements\n2.1 Preferred Voltages – Fuses shall be rated for one of\nthe following voltages – For ac systems – 240 V singlephase and 415 V three phase.\nNote – A 240 V grade fuse shall not be used in a three-\nphase 4 wire 415 V systems.\n2.2 Rated Currents – The preferred values shall be 16,\n32, 63 and 100 A\n2.2.1 The fuse-carrier and base shall be so designed and proportioned, that when they are carrying their rated\ncurrent continuously in an ambient temperature not exceeding 40ºC, the temperature rise of the carrier and\nbase contacts does not exceed 55ºC.\n2.3 Rated Breaking Capacity – When tested as\nprescribred the fuse carriers and the fuse base shall be deemed to have failed if one or more of the following\noccur :\na) Any part of the carrier or the base ignites b) The fuse carrier is rejected,\nc) Any part of the fuse except the fuse element and its covering is damaged to such an extent to\nrender it unserviceable, d) Melting of the fire-wire fuse, indicating arching\nto metal core, and e) Arcing between fuses on tests involving 2 or\nmore fuses.\n2.3.1 The values of rated breaking / capacity recognized for the purpose of this standard are 2 kA in the case\nfuses of rating up to and including 16 A, and 4 kA in the case of higher current ratings at a power factor not\nexceeding 0.4 (lag).\n2.4 Fuse-Wire – The fuse-wire, specified by the\nmanufacturer for use with the fuse-carrier, shall conform to the requirements in IS 9926 : 1981*. In addition, the\nfuse – wire shall be capable of blowing – off within 30 minutes when carrying a current of 1.9 times the rated\ncurrent of the fuse-wire and be capable of carrying 1.6 times the current rating continuously without blowing\nfor at least 30 minutes.\n3.\nPhysical Requirements\n3.1 Mechanical Robustness\n3.1.1 Mechanical Endurance – At the end of the prescribed test, the fuse base and fuse carrier shall be\nexamined for the following :\na) The contacts shall not work loose.\nb) No damage shall be caused to any part of fuse carrier of fuse-base.\nc) There shall be no displacement of any of the component parts, and\nd) The saviceability of the fuse shall not have been impaired.\n3.1.2 Mechanical Strength – Fuse base and fuse carrier shall show neither cracks nor permanent\ndeformation.\n3.2 Withdrawal Force\nRated Current\nWithdrawal Force\nA\nN\n16\n5 to 35\n32\n15 to 55\n63\n30 to 100\n100\n40 to 160\n3.3 Requirements for ceramic material\n3.3.1 The ceramic material shall be sound, thoroughly vitrified, smoothly glazed except in the case of steatite,\nand shall be free from defects, such as, dents and projections. The mounting surface may be left unglazed\n*Fuse wires used in rewirable type electric fuses up to 650 volts. 3.3.1.1 The glaze, which shall show no signs of crazing, shall be leadless and shall cover at least those surface\nwhich are exposed when the fuse has been mounted in the intended manner.\n3.3.2 Temperature cycle – When fuse-bases and fusecarrier are subjected to the temperature cycle test the\nceramic material shall withstand the series of tests without breaking, cracking or crazing. In addition, the\nfuse-base and fuse-carrier shall comply with the requirements of the standard when subjected to high\nvoltage test at the end of the temperature cycle tests.\n3. 3.3. Water absorption – Shall not absorb more than 2 percent of its weight of water, when broken and tested.\n3.4 Requirements for Non-ceramic Material\n3.4.1 Water absorption (for non – ceramic material)–\nmaterials other than ceramics, required to be nonhygroscopic shall be incapable of taking up water in\nsufficient quantity to cause appreciable swelling, laminating, warping or changing of the material.\n3.5 Non Flammability – Materials required to be non-\ninflammable shall be incapable of burning or giving off inflammable vapours in sufficient quantity to ignite at a\npilot flame when heated for 5 minutes in an oven at\n300ºC.\n3.6 High Voltage Test – Shall withstand without\npuncture or flash over when ac voltage given below is applied between the parts specified and maintained for\none minute.\nRated Voltage of Fuse (V) Test Voltage (rms)(V)\n240 single-phase 2 000\n415 three-phase 2 500\n3.7 Insulation Resistance – Shall be not less than\n10MΩ\n3.8 Ignition Test – Specimen shall not inflame or give\noff inflamable vapours in sufficient quantities to ignite at the pilot flame when tested as prescribed.\nNote – For design and construction of fuse carrier and fuse base\nwith regard to aspects such as material, protection, handle or grip etc. refer to 6 of the standard.\n4. Dimensions of Carriers and Bases – The dimensions\nof carriers and bases used in rewirable type electric fuses shall conform to Type A dimensions given in Annex-A\nof the standard.\n5.\nTests\n5.1 Type Tests\na) Mechanical test sequence :\ni) Visual examination ii) Test for dimensions\niii) Test for mechanical endurance iv) Test for mechanical strength\nv) Test for withdrawal force b) Electrical test sequence :\ni) Test for temperature rise ii) Insulation resistance test\niii) High voltage test iv) Test for breaking capacity\nc) Test for proving material properties:\ni) Test for water absorption (non-ceramic)\nii) Test on ceramic material iii) Ignition test\n5.2 Acceptance Test – Tests specified in\n[(a) – (i), (ii), (iii), (iv)]\n[(b) – (i), (ii), (iii) ] [(c) – (i)] of 5.1and Temperature cycle test (for ceramic materials).\n5.3 Routine Test – High voltage test. Note – For detailed requirements and method of tests refer to the standard\nFor detailed information, refer to : IS 2086: 1993. Specification for carriers and bases used in rewirable type electric fuses for voltages up to 650 volts (third revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2412: 1975",
    "title": "Link Clips For Electrical Wiring",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "Requirements and tests for link clips (both joint link clips and link clips with separate linking eyes) for general wiring purpose.",
    "keywords": [
      "link",
      "clips",
      "boxes",
      "linking",
      "hole",
      "fixing",
      "wiring"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Material, dimensions and other requirements of screwed type fittings for use with rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring purposes conforming to IS 9537 (Part 2) : 1981* 1.2 The fittings covered by this standard are – (a) couplers, (b) elbows, (c) tees, (d) bends, and (e) boxes. Note – Screw reducers which are generally tailor-made items are not covered by this standard. 2. Requirements 2.1 Material – Shall be made of steel, cast iron or malleable cast iron. 2.2 Fittings shall be fabricated or cast to shape. The interior and the ends of fittings shall be free from burrs, dents, fins sharp edges or projection and the like which may cause damage to the cables. 2.3 Screwed couples shall be screwed inside throughout their entire length. 2.4 Elbow – The axis of any elbow shall be a quadrant "
    },
    "content": "IS 2412: 1975 Link Clips For Electrical Wiring\n(First Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements and tests for link clips (both joint link clips and link clips with separate linking eyes)\nfor general wiring purpose.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Material – Aluminium sheet or strip in the annealed\ncondition.\n2.2 Construction – Shall be smooth, free from dents or\nburrs, and shall have corners rounded off smoothly.\n2.2.1 One fixing hole for sizes up to 40 mm and two for size over 40 mm. Size of hole 2.6 mm clear diameter and\ntolerance on hole +0.25,– 0 mm.\n2.3 Finish – Shall be free from any mark of corrosion.\n3.\nDimensions (in mm)\n3.1 Link Clip with Separate Eyes\nSize (Length)\n25\n32\n40\n50\n63\n80\nThickness\n0.32\n0.32\n0.32\n0.40\n0.40\n0.40\nWidth\n8\n8\n8\n8\n8\n8\nNote – Values of thickness are minimum values. Tolerance\non other dimensions shall be ± 5 percent\n3.1.1 Linking Eye – Size 15 × 6.5 mm and hole 10 × 2 mm.\n3.2 Joint Link Clips\nSize (Length)\n16\n25\n32\n40\n50\n63\n80\nThickness\n0.32\n0.32\n0.32\n0.32\n0.4\n0.4\n0.4\nWidth\n8\n8\n8\n8\n8\n8\n8\nDistance of\n5\n10\n10\n12.5\n12.5\n20\n25 fixing hole\nSpacing of\n—\n—\n—\n—\n12.5\n12.5\n12.5 fixing hole\nNote 1 – For details, see Fig. 1 and 2 of the standard.\nNote 2 – Values of thickness are minium values. Tolerance on\nother dimensions shall be + 5 percent.\n4.\nTests\n4.1 Type Tests\n4.1.1\nGeneral examination\n4.1.2\nDimensions\n4.1.3\nFlexibility – Clips shall be wound round a mandrel 5 mm dia, and fixed with linking eye. It shall\nthen be opened out, flattened by hand and again wound and fixed. At the end of 5 such operations, clip shall\nretain its flexibility and shall be fit for use.\nFor detailed information, Refer to IS 2412 : 1975 Specification for link clips for electrical wiring (first revision). 1. Scope – Material, dimensions and other requirements\nof screwed type fittings for use with rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring purposes conforming to IS 9537\n(Part 2) : 1981*\n1.2 The fittings covered by this standard are – (a)\ncouplers, (b) elbows, (c) tees, (d) bends, and (e) boxes.\nNote – Screw reducers which are generally tailor-made\nitems are not covered by this standard.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Material – Shall be made of steel, cast iron or\nmalleable cast iron.\n2.2 Fittings shall be fabricated or cast to shape. The\ninterior and the ends of fittings shall be free from burrs, dents, fins sharp edges or projection and the like which\nmay cause damage to the cables.\n2.3 Screwed couples shall be screwed inside\nthroughout their entire length.\n2.4 Elbow – The axis of any elbow shall be a quadrant\nof a circle plus a straight portion at each end (tangential to the arc at the end).\n2.5 Bend\n2.5.1 Normal bend – Shall be large sweep bend giving a diversion of 90º (degrees) in turn of the conduit.\n2.5.2 Half-normal bend – Shall be similar to normal bend except that the diversion in the run of conduit\nshall be 450 (degrees).\n2.6 Circular Boxes – Small cicular boxes shall be\nprovided with two lugs of thickness not less than 2.8 mm for fixing the covers. Large circular boxes shall have\nfour lugs of thickness not less than 4 mm for fixing the covers.\n2.7 Rectangular Boxes – Those used in conjuction\nwith 16 and 20 mm conduits are recognised as standard and shall be provided with two lugs of thickness not\nless than 2.8 mm.\nSUMMAY OF"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 2667: 1988",
    "title": "Fittings For Rigid Steel Conduits For Electrical Wiring",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "(First Revision) 2.8 Covers for Boxes – Shall be steel, malleable cast iron or other suitable material.Thickness shall not be less than 1,2 mm for steel covers; and not less than minimum thickness of box for malleable cast iron. 2.9 Protection Against Corrosion – Shall be treated both outside and inside excluding machined surfaces and screw threads. Each fitting shall be supplied with a medium or heavy protective coating as agreed. Example of protection are: a) Medium Protection – Stove enamelli",
    "keywords": [
      "boxes",
      "conduits",
      "circular",
      "protection",
      "rigid",
      "electrical",
      "threads"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Dimensions": "The nominal sizes of outlets of the fittings shall correspond to the nominal outside diameter of the conduits covered by IS 9537 (Part 2) : 1981 3.1 For all cast fittings (other than boxes), the minimum thickness of the machined part measured at the root of the thread shall be as follows : Thickness mm For sizes equal to 16, 20, and 25 mm dia 1.5 For sizes equal to 32, 40, and 50 mm dia 2.5 For sizes equal to 63 mm dia 3.0 3.2 All dimensions except those for which tolerance are specifically stated herein or which are definitely stated as being maximum or minimum, shall be taken as nominal dimensions and subject to a tolerance of ±5 percent. 3.3 Couplers – Sizes (Min) Nominal 16, 20, 25, 32, 40,50 and 63. 3.4 Elbows – Nominal Size in mm 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50 and 63 3.5 Normal Bends and Hal"
    },
    "content": "IS 2667: 1988 Fittings For Rigid Steel Conduits For Electrical Wiring\n(First Revision)\n2.8 Covers for Boxes – Shall be steel, malleable cast\niron or other suitable material.Thickness shall not be less than 1,2 mm for steel covers; and not less than\nminimum thickness of box for malleable cast iron.\n2.9 Protection Against Corrosion – Shall be treated\nboth outside and inside excluding machined surfaces and screw threads. Each fitting shall be supplied with a\nmedium or heavy protective coating as agreed. Example of protection are:\na) Medium Protection – Stove enamelling, Air drying paint and electrolytic deposits.\nb) Heavy protection – Hot -dip galvanized coating\n2.10\nScrew Threads – ISO metric threads.\n3.\nDimensions – The nominal sizes of outlets of the fittings shall correspond to the nominal outside\ndiameter of the conduits covered by IS 9537 (Part 2) :\n1981\n3.1 For all cast fittings (other than boxes), the minimum\nthickness of the machined part measured at the root of the thread shall be as follows :\nThickness mm For sizes equal to 16, 20, and 25 mm dia\n1.5 For sizes equal to 32, 40, and 50 mm dia\n2.5 For sizes equal to 63 mm dia\n3.0\n3.2 All dimensions except those for which tolerance\nare specifically stated herein or which are definitely stated as being maximum or minimum, shall be taken as\nnominal dimensions and subject to a tolerance of ±5 percent.\n3.3 Couplers – Sizes (Min) Nominal 16, 20, 25, 32, 40,50\nand 63.\n3.4 Elbows – Nominal Size in mm 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50 and 63\n3.5 Normal Bends and Half Normal Bends – Nominal\nsize in mm16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50 and 63.\n*Conduits for electrical installations, Part 2.Rigid steel coduits. Note – For method of tests refer to 4 and Appendix C of the standard and IS 9537 (Part 2) : 1981 Condiuts for electrical in\nstallations Part 2 Rigid steel conduits.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 2667 : 1988 Specification for fitting for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring (second revision).\n3.6 Tees – Nominal Size in mm 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50 and\n63.\n3.7 Circular Boxes – Size of conduits\na)\nSmall circular – 16, 20, 25mm b)\nLarge circular boxes – 20, 25, 32mm\n3.8 RectangularBoxes – Preferred internal dimensions:\nHeight\nLength\nBreadth\n37.5\n75\n75\n100\n75\n100\n100\n150\n75\n150\n100\n150\n150\n50.0\n75\n75\n100\n75\n100\n100\n150\n75\n150\n100\n150\n150\n75.0\n100\n100\n150\n75\n150\n100\n150\n150\n100.0\n100\n100\n150\n150\n150.0\n100\n100\n3.9 Circular Looping Boxes – Nominal size16 and 20\nmm.\nNote – For detailed dimensions refer to Tables1 to 7 of the\nstandard.\n4.\nTests a)\nTests for visual examination, b)\nDimensional check, c)\nTest for protective coatings, and d)\nTest for resistance to impact."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3419: 1989",
    "title": "Fittings For Rigid Non-Metallic Conduits",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "Requirements and methods of test for rigid conduit fittings manufactured from insulating materials for use with circular, rigid, non-flame propagating and non-threadable plain conduits of insulating materials. This standard covers conduit fittings suitable for temperature between –5ºC and + 60ºC. Only plain type fittings are covered in this standard. The fittings covered by this standard are–couplers, bends, elbows,tees, inspection sleeves, and boxes.",
    "keywords": [
      "conduits",
      "couplers",
      "tees",
      "rigid",
      "conduit",
      "elbows",
      "normal"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for flexible steel conduits for protection of cables in electrical installations. Such conduits shall not be used as an earth continuity conductor. 2. Requirements 2.1 Strip steel used in manufacture shall be of mild steel, bright, cold-rolled and annealed. Shall be electrogalvanized or electro-tinned to a minimum thickness of 0.0025 mm, or otherwise provided with equally effective protective coating. 2.2 Conduit shall be wound tightly and the strip so overlapped in subsequent helicis that no openings are seen in normal position. 2.3 Internal surfaces shall be free from burrs and sharp edges. 3. Dimensions (See Table 1 ) 4. Tests 4.1 Tests for Dimensions 4.2 Linear Breaking Test – Shall show no indication of yielding under a load less than that specified in above table maintai",
      "Dimensions (In Mm)": "Nominal size of the outlets of the fittings shall correspond to the nominal outside diameter of the conduits covered by IS 9537 (Part 3) : 1983*. Note – For detailed dimenasions of slip type couplers, socketed type couplers, clamp type couplers, normal type bends, slip type coupling bends, normal type elbows, normal type tees, socketed type tees and spout type circular boxes refer to Tables 1 to 9 of the standard. * Conduitsfor electrical insulations, Part 3, Rigid plain conduits of insulating materials. 4. Tests 4.1 Type Tests 4.1.1 Visual examination 4.1.2 Checking of dimensions 4.1.3 Resistance to heat – Diameter of the impression shall not exceed 2 mm when tested as prescribed. 4.1.4 Resistance to burning – When tested as prescribed, if the sample burns, it shall do so slowly that the "
    },
    "content": "IS 3419: 1989 Fittings For Rigid Non-Metallic Conduits\n(Second Revision)\n1.\nScope – Requirements and methods of test for rigid conduit fittings manufactured from insulating materials\nfor use with circular, rigid, non-flame propagating and non-threadable plain conduits of insulating materials.\nThis standard covers conduit fittings suitable for temperature between –5ºC and + 60ºC. Only plain type\nfittings are covered in this standard. The fittings covered by this standard are–couplers, bends,\nelbows,tees, inspection sleeves, and boxes.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Shall be homogenous and non-porous.\n2.2 Inside and outside surfaces shall be smooth, clean\nand uniform and free from projections, grooving and other defects.\n2.3 Elbows – Area of the opening in case of inspection\nelbow shall not be less than two and a half times the internal cross-sectional area of the corresponding\nconduits.\n2.4 Tees – Area of the opening for inspection tees shall\nnot be less than three times the internal cross sectional area of the corresponding cover.\n2.5 Cover of Circular Box – Minimum thickness of 1.6\nmm.\n3. Dimensions (in mm) – Nominal size of the outlets\nof the fittings shall correspond to the nominal outside diameter of the conduits covered by IS 9537 (Part 3) :\n1983*.\nNote – For detailed dimenasions of slip type couplers, socketed\ntype couplers, clamp type couplers, normal type bends, slip type coupling bends, normal type elbows, normal type tees,\nsocketed type tees and spout type circular boxes refer to\nTables 1 to 9 of the standard.\n* Conduitsfor electrical insulations, Part 3, Rigid plain conduits of insulating materials.\n4.\nTests\n4.1 Type Tests\n4.1.1 Visual examination\n4.1.2 Checking of dimensions\n4.1.3 Resistance to heat – Diameter of the impression shall not exceed 2 mm when tested as prescribed.\n4.1.4 Resistance to burning – When tested as prescribed, if the sample burns, it shall do so slowly\nthat the burning shall not spread. Any flame shall die out in less than 30s after removal of the burner.\n4.1.5 Moisture absorption test – Shall not exeed 1.0 per cent.\n4.1.6 Ressistance to chemical action – There shall be no visible sign of deterioration of the specimen\nwhentested as prescribed. Slight changes in colour shall however be allowed.\n4.1.7 Copper test – There shall be no visible evidence of copper salts or the sample.\n4.1.8 Resistance to oil – Shall not show any sign of penetration of oil, cracking or splitting when tested as\nprescribed.\n4.1.9 Resistance to impact – Shall show no damage or cracks visible to the naked eye.\n4.1.10 Tests for electric characteristic.\n4.2 Acceptance tests – Tests specified in 4.1.1, 4.1.2,\n4.1.3 and 4.1.10.\n4.3 Routine tests – Tests specified in 4.1.1 and 4.1.2.\nNote – For methods of tests refer to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3419 : 1989 Specification for fittings for rigid non–metallic conduits\n(second revision). For detailed information, refer to IS 3480 :1966 Specification for flexible steel conduits for electrical wiring\n1.\nScope – Requirements for flexible steel conduits for protection of cables in electrical installations. Such\nconduits shall not be used as an earth continuity conductor.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Strip steel used in manufacture shall be of mild steel,\nbright, cold-rolled and annealed. Shall be electrogalvanized or electro-tinned to a minimum thickness of\n0.0025 mm, or otherwise provided with equally effective protective coating.\n2.2 Conduit shall be wound tightly and the strip so\noverlapped in subsequent helicis that no openings are seen in normal position.\n2.3 Internal surfaces shall be free from burrs and sharp\nedges.\n3.\nDimensions (See Table 1 )\n4.\nTests\n4.1 Tests for Dimensions\n4.2 Linear Breaking Test – Shall show no indication of\nyielding under a load less than that specified in above table maintained for 3 minutes when undergone the\nprescribed test.\n4.3 Test for Flexibility – Shall show no crack or flaws\nand shall return to normal position without damage to its outer or inner diameter.\n4.4 Bend Fracture Test – Radius of bend shall be\ndecreased until the yield point is reached under a load, not less than that specified in Table given in 3.\n4.5 Crushing Test – There shall be no permanent\ndistortion.\nNote – For test details, refer to 8 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3480: 1966",
    "title": "Flexible Steel Conduits For Electrical Wiring",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "Material, dimensions and other requirements of accessories (other than fittings) used with rigid steel conduits conforming of IS : 9537 (Part 2) 1981*. Accessories include clips (ordinary), saddles (single and multiple), pipe hooks and crampets, plugs, lock nuts and bushes (externally screwed hexagonal and internally screwed circular).",
    "keywords": [
      "bushes",
      "saddles",
      "multiple",
      "hexagonal",
      "clips",
      "across",
      "accessories"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Material, dimensions and other requirements of accessories (other than fittings) used with rigid steel conduits conforming of IS : 9537 (Part 2) 1981*. Accessories include clips (ordinary), saddles (single and multiple), pipe hooks and crampets, plugs, lock nuts and bushes (externally screwed hexagonal and internally screwed circular). 2. Requirements 2.1 Saddles shall be ribbed for reinforcement at crown. 2.2 Plug may be recessed to the thickness of the head, thickness of wall being not less than 3 mm. 2.3 The inside edges of entry bushes shall be smoothly rounded in order to prevent abrasion of cables. Note – For constructional details in respect of screw thread, spacing plates, plug, lock nuts and entry bush, refer to 3 of the standard. 2.4 Shall be protected against corrosion both insi"
    },
    "content": "IS 3480: 1966 Flexible Steel Conduits For Electrical Wiring\nTABLE 1 REQUIREMENTS FOR FLEXIBLE STEEL CONDUCTS\nNOMINAL\nINTERNAL\nTOLERANCE\nEXTERNAL\nTURNS\n*BENDING\n+LINEAR\nBENDING\nINTERNAL\nDIAMETER\nON INTERNAL\nDIAMETER\nMETRE IN\nDIAMETRE\nBREAKING\nFRACTURE\nDIAMETER\nDIAMETER\nIN NORMAL\nNORMAL\nLOAD\nLOAD\nPOSITION\nPOSITION\nMax\nMin\nMin\nMin\nMIN\n(1)\n(2)\n(3)\n(4)\n(5)\n(6)\n(7)\n(8)\nm m m m\nm m m m\nm m m m\nm m m m\n6.5\n6.5\n9.0\n315\n55\n35\n11.5\n10\n10.0\n±0.5\n13.0\n235\n63\n60\n18.0\n16\n16.0\n-0.8\n20.0\n200\n90\n110\n35\n25\n25.0\n31.0\n160\n150\n210\n45\n40\n40.0\n46.0\n100\n225\n330\n70\n63\n63.0\n+1.0\n70.0\n100\n350\n430\n125\n100\n100.0\n–0.0\n108.0\n100\n450\n500\n190\n* Inner diameter of bend without straining conduit.\n+ Linear breaking load – load at which coils pull off adjacent beading. 1.\nScope – Material, dimensions and other requirements of accessories (other than fittings) used\nwith rigid steel conduits conforming of IS : 9537 (Part 2)\n1981*. Accessories include clips (ordinary), saddles\n(single and multiple), pipe hooks and crampets, plugs, lock nuts and bushes (externally screwed hexagonal\nand internally screwed circular).\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Saddles shall be ribbed for reinforcement at crown.\n2.2 Plug may be recessed to the thickness of the head,\nthickness of wall being not less than 3 mm.\n2.3 The inside edges of entry bushes shall be smoothly\nrounded in order to prevent abrasion of cables.\nNote – For constructional details in respect of screw thread,\nspacing plates, plug, lock nuts and entry bush, refer to 3 of the standard.\n2.4 Shall be protected against corrosion both inside\nand outside, excluding machined surfaces and screw threads. Example of protections are:\na) Medium protection– Stove enamelling;Air rying paint, Electrolytic deposits, etc.\nb) Heavy protection– Hot-dip galvanized coating;\nSherardizing, etc.\n3.\nDimensions (in mm)\nSize of Conduit/Bush\n16\n20\n25\n32\n40\n50\n63\nMinimum thickness (ordinary clips,\n0.6\n1.0\n1.0\n1.25\n1.25\n1.25\n1.25 single and multiple saddles)\nMinimum width (ordinary clips,\n15\n20\n20\n25\n25\n25\n25 single and multiple saddles)\nMaximum width across flats (plugs)\n22\n26\n31\n38\n46\n56\n69\nMaximum width across flats (lock nuts)\n22\n27\n36\n41\n50\n65\n80\nMaximum width across flats (hexagonal bushes)\n17\n22\n30\n36\n41\n55\n—\nBore (hexagonal bushes)\n10\n13.5\n19\n26.2\n31\n44.4\n—\nCircular bushes, external dia\n20\n24\n29\n36\n44\n56\n—\nCircular bushes, bore\n11.1\n14.3\n19\n26.2\n31.8\n44.4\n—\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3837 : 1976 Specification for accessories for rigid steel conduits for electrical wiring (first revision)."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3837: 1976",
    "title": "Accessories For Rigid Steel Conduits For Electrical Wiring",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "(First Revision) Note 1 – Tolerance shall be ±5 percent on nominal dimensions. Note 2 – The material shall be mild steel for clips, saddles, plugs and lock nuts, mild steel forgings for pipe hooks and crampets, and shall be moulded insulating for bushes. Note 3 – For detailed dimensions of accessories, refer to Table 1 to 8 of the standard. * Conduits for electrical wiring Part 2 Rigid steel conduits 4. Tests a) Visual examination, b) Dimensional check, and c) Test for protective coating (for me",
    "keywords": [
      "switches",
      "rated",
      "pole",
      "remote",
      "delay",
      "way",
      "current"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "General Requirements": "Switches and boxes shall be so designed and constructed, that in normal use, their performance is reliable and without danger to the user or surroundings.",
      "Ratings": "Switches shall preferably have rated voltage of 110 V, 230V, 240V and 250V, 400V, 415V. For momentary contact switches intended to operate bells, electromagnetic remote control switches or time-delay switches, the standard rated voltages are 110V and 250V. 3.1 Switches shall preferably have rated currents of 6 A, 10 A, 16 A, 20 A, 25 A, 32 A, 40 A, and 63 A. The rated current shall be not less than 6A, except that rated current of 1 A, 2 A and 4 A are allowed for push-button switches intended to operated bells, electromagenetic remote control switches or time-delay switches.",
      "Classification": "a) According to the possible connections – Pattern No. – Single-pole switches 1 – Double-pole switches 2 – Three-pole switches 3 – Three-pole plus switched neutral switches 03 – Two-way switches 6 – Two-circuit switches with a common incoming 5 – Two-way switches with one off position 4 – Two-way double-poleswitches 6/2 – Two-way double-pole reversing switches 7 b) According to the contact opening – – Switches of normal gap constructions. – Switches of mini-gap construction (only for a.c.) c) According to the degree of protection against electric shock –"
    },
    "content": "IS 3837: 1976 Accessories For Rigid Steel Conduits For Electrical Wiring\n(First Revision)\nNote 1 – Tolerance shall be ±5 percent on nominal\ndimensions.\nNote 2 – The material shall be mild steel for clips, saddles,\nplugs and lock nuts, mild steel forgings for pipe hooks and crampets, and shall be moulded insulating for bushes.\nNote 3 – For detailed dimensions of accessories, refer to\nTable 1 to 8 of the standard.\n* Conduits for electrical wiring Part 2 Rigid steel conduits\n4.\nTests a)\nVisual examination, b)\nDimensional check, and c)\nTest for protective coating (for medium and heavy protection). 1.\nScope\n1.1 Applies to manually operated general purpose\nswitches with a rated voltage not exceeding 440 Volts and a rated current not exceeding 63A. intended for\nhousehold and similar fixed electrical installations either indoors or outdoors.\n1.1.1 The rated current is limited to 16 A for switches provided with screwless terminals.\n1.2 The standard applies to boxes for switches which\nare an inegral part of it. It does not however apply to mounting boxes for flush type switches.\n1.3 This standard also applies to switches such as–\n–\nSwitches incorporating pilot lights.\n–\nElectromagnetic remote control switches\n–\nSwitches incorporating a time delay device.\n–\nCombinations of switches and other functions\n(with the exception of switches combined with fuses).\n–\nElectronicwitches\n1.4Switches complying with this standard are suitable for use at ambient temperatures not normally exceeding\n35ºC, but occasionally reaching 45ºC.\n1.5 It does not cover switches for location where special\nconditions prevail, as in ships, vehicles and the like and in hazardous locations, for instance where explosions\nare liable to occur, special constructions may be required.\n1.6 This standard does not apply to circuit-breakers\nfor household and similar installations, to switches for appliances, to (in-line) cord switches and switches\nincorporated in cable reels.\n1.7 This standard does not include requirements and\ntests for switches with protection against solid foreign with their titles and insert the following IS No. at the\nend:\n2.\nGeneral Requirements – Switches and boxes shall be so designed and constructed, that in normal use,\ntheir performance is reliable and without danger to the user or surroundings.\n3. Ratings – Switches shall preferably have rated voltage\nof 110 V, 230V, 240V and 250V, 400V, 415V. For momentary contact switches intended to operate bells,\nelectromagnetic remote control switches or time-delay switches, the standard rated voltages are 110V and 250V.\n3.1 Switches shall preferably have rated currents of\n6 A, 10 A, 16 A, 20 A, 25 A, 32 A, 40 A, and 63 A. The\nrated current shall be not less than 6A, except that rated current of 1 A, 2 A and 4 A are allowed for push-button\nswitches intended to operated bells, electromagenetic remote control switches or time-delay switches.\n4.\nClassification –\na) According to the possible connections –\nPattern No.\n–\nSingle-pole switches\n1\n–\nDouble-pole switches\n2\n–\nThree-pole switches\n3\n–\nThree-pole plus switched neutral switches\n03\n–\nTwo-way switches\n6\n–\nTwo-circuit switches with a common incoming\n5\n–\nTwo-way switches with one off position\n4\n–\nTwo-way double-poleswitches\n6/2\n–\nTwo-way double-pole reversing switches\n7 b) According to the contact opening –\n–\nSwitches of normal gap constructions.\n–\nSwitches of mini-gap construction (only for a.c.) c) According to the degree of protection against electric shock –"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 3854: 1997",
    "title": "Switches For Domestic And Similar Purposes",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "Requirements for interlocking type switch socket outlets, rating up to 30A, suitable for use in ac and dc circuits at rated voltages up to 250 V.",
    "keywords": [
      "switches",
      "terminals",
      "switch",
      "current",
      "rated",
      "conductors",
      "earthing"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Protection Against Electric Shock": "Switches shall be so designed that when they are mounted and wired as in normal use, live parts are not accessibl even after removal of parts which can be removed without the use of a tool.",
      "Provision For Earthing": "Accessible metal parts, which may become live in the event of an insulation fault, shall be provided with, or permanently and reliably connected to, an earthing terminal.",
      "Terminals": "Switches shall be provided with terminals having screw clamping or with screwless terminals. The means for clamping the conductors shall not serve to fix any other component, although they may hold the terminals in place or prevent them from turning. 8. Tests 8.1 Type tests – a) Rating b) Classification c) Marking d) Checking of dimensions e) Protection against electric shock f) Provision for earthing g) Terminals h) Constructional requirements j) Mechanism k) Resistance to ageing, to harmful ingress of water and to humidity m) Insulation resistance and electric strength n) Temperature rise p) Making and breaking capacity q) Normal operation r) Mechanical strength s) Resistance to heat t) Screws, current carrying parts and connections u) Creepage distance, clearance and distance through se",
      "Scope": "Requirements for interlocking type switch socket outlets, rating up to 30A, suitable for use in ac and dc circuits at rated voltages up to 250 V.",
      "Standard Current Ratings": "5, 15 and 30 A 3. Requirements 3.1 Material – Part manufactured with following materials : a) Base – of vitrified ceramic material or tough nonignitable moulded insulating material. b) Cover, cover plates and actuating member– of tough, non-ignitable insulating material. c) Current carrying parts – of brass, copper, phosphor, bronze, aluminium alloy, or other suitable material. d) Springs – of corrosion resistant metal. e) Attachment fittings, screws, noncurrent carrying parts – of mild steel, aluminium alloy or insulating material. 3.2 Terminals – Shall allow a conductor to be connected without special preparation such as soldering of strands, use of cable lugs and formation of eyelets. Shall be designed to clamp the conductor between metal surfaces with sufficient contact pressure and wi"
    },
    "content": "IS 3854: 1997 Switches For Domestic And Similar Purposes\n(Second Revision) Note – For details requirements and method of tests refer to the standard\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 3854 : 1997 Specification for switches for domestic and similar purposes\n(second revision).\n–\nUnenclosed switches.\n–\nEnclosed switches.\nd) According to the degree of protection against harmful ingress of water –\n–\nOrdinary switches having no special protection against harmful ingress of water; IPXO\n–\nSplash-proof switches with degree of protection\nIPX4.\n–\nJet-proof switches with degree of protection\nIPX5\ne) According to the method of activating the switch –\n–\nRotary\n–\nTumbler\n–\nRocker\n–\nPush-button\n–\nCord-operated f)\nAccording to the method of application :\n–\nSurface type\n–\nFlush type\n–\nSemi flush type\n–\nPanel type\n–\nArchitrave type g) According to the method of Installtion,as a\nconsequence of the design :\n–\nSwitches with screw the cover or cover plate can be removed without displacement of the\nconductors (Design A)\n–\nSwitches where the cover or cover plate cannot be removed without displacement of the\nconductors (Design B)\nh) According to ttype of terminal–\n– Switches with screw type terminals\n–\nSwitches with screwless terminals for rigid conductors only\n–\nSwitches with screwless terminals for rigid and flexible conductors only\n5.\nProtection Against Electric Shock –Switches shall be so designed that when they are mounted and wired\nas in normal use, live parts are not accessibl even after removal of parts which can be removed without the use\nof a tool.\n6.\nProvision for Earthing – Accessible metal parts, which may become live in the event of an insulation\nfault, shall be provided with, or permanently and reliably connected to, an earthing terminal.\n7.\nTerminals – Switches shall be provided with terminals having screw clamping or with screwless\nterminals. The means for clamping the conductors shall not serve to fix any other component, although they\nmay hold the terminals in place or prevent them from turning.\n8.\nTests\n8.1 Type tests –\na) Rating b) Classification\nc) Marking d) Checking of dimensions\ne) Protection against electric shock f) Provision for earthing\ng) Terminals h) Constructional requirements\nj) Mechanism k) Resistance to ageing, to harmful ingress of water\nand to humidity m) Insulation resistance and electric strength\nn) Temperature rise p) Making and breaking capacity\nq) Normal operation r) Mechanical strength\ns) Resistance to heat t) Screws, current carrying parts and connections\nu) Creepage distance, clearance and distance through sealing compound\nv) Normal operation for fluorescent lamp circuits w) Resistance to abnormal heat and fire\nx) Resistance to tracking y) Resistance to rusting.\n8.2 Acceptance Tests – Tests specified in 8.1c,) k), n),\np), r) and t).\n8.3 Routine Tests – Tests specified in 8.1c) and electric\nstrength. 1.\nScope – Requirements for interlocking type switch socket outlets, rating up to 30A, suitable for use in ac\nand dc circuits at rated voltages up to 250 V.\n2.\nStandard Current Ratings – 5, 15 and 30 A\n3.\nRequirements\n3.1 Material – Part manufactured with following\nmaterials :\na) Base – of vitrified ceramic material or tough nonignitable moulded insulating material.\nb) Cover, cover plates and actuating member– of tough, non-ignitable insulating material.\nc) Current carrying parts – of brass, copper, phosphor, bronze, aluminium alloy, or other\nsuitable material.\nd) Springs – of corrosion resistant metal.\ne) Attachment fittings, screws, noncurrent carrying parts – of mild steel, aluminium alloy\nor insulating material.\n3.2 Terminals – Shall allow a conductor to be\nconnected without special preparation such as soldering of strands, use of cable lugs and formation of eyelets.\nShall be designed to clamp the conductor between metal surfaces with sufficient contact pressure and without\ndamage to conductor.\n3.2.1 Dimensions of pillar type terminals (in mm):\nRated current , A\n5\n15 30\nNominal thread dia, Min\n3.5\n4\n6\nDia of hole for conductor , Min\n3.5\n4.5\n7\nLength of thread in pillar, Min\n2.5\n3\n4\nDifference between dia of hole\n0.6\n0.6\n1.2 and nominal dia of screw; Max 3.2.2 Dimensions of screw type terminals (in mm):\nRated current, A\n5\n15\n30\nNominal thread dia, Min\n3.5\n5\n5\nLength of screw under head, Min 4\n7\n8.5\nLength of thread in nut, Min\n1.5\n3\n3\nNominal difference between\n3.5\n5\n5 dia of head and thread part, Min\nHeight of head, Min\n2\n3\n3.5\n3.3 Interlocking Mechanism – Moving member which\nlocks the plug into the socket outlet shall not be more than 2 mm thick and shall not protrude more than 1.5 mm\ninto the earthing pin of the plug.\n3.4 Creepage Distance and Clearance – Not less than\n3 mm\nNote 1 – For constructional details in respect of enclosures,\ncovers and cover plates, mounting of switch socket outlet, carrying parts, precaution against electrical contact, socket\ncontacts, prevention against charring of base, sealing and holes, refer to 5 of the standard.\nNote 2 – For requirements regarding terminals and screws,\nand switch actuating mechanism, refer to 6 and 7 of the standard.\n4.\nTests\n4.1 Type Tests\na) Visual Examination b) Dimensional Check\nc) Interlocking Action d) Insulation resistance (dry)—Shall not be less\nthan 100 megohms.\ne) High voltage – Shall withstand AC voltage of\n1500 V rms for a period of one minute under the\nspecified test.\nf) Moisture resistance – Insulation resistance shall not be less than 2 megohms.\ng) Contact resistance and temperature raise –\nShall be capable of carrying rated current for half an hour without voltage drop in a switched pole\nof switch socket outlet measured from the terminal of the switch to the corresponding plug\npin exceeding 0.1 volt and without temperature rise exceeding 25ºC.\nh) Overvoltage and overcurrent capacity –130 percent of rated current at 110 percent of rated\nvoltage 10 times in succession at intervals of 30 seconds. j) Endurance –15 000 witch cycles for 5 and 15 A and 10 000 for 30 A.\nk) Test for switch socket outlets for AC inductive"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4160: 1967",
    "title": "Interlocking Switch Socket Outlet",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "Requirements for switch socket-outlets of the non-interlocking type of the surface and flush type (shuttered and non-shuttered) having ratings up to 30 A and suitable for use on ac and dc circuits at rated voltage not exceeding 250 V.",
    "keywords": [
      "switch",
      "current",
      "terminals",
      "rated",
      "voltage",
      "conductor",
      "insulating"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for switch socket-outlets of the non-interlocking type of the surface and flush type (shuttered and non-shuttered) having ratings up to 30 A and suitable for use on ac and dc circuits at rated voltage not exceeding 250 V.",
      "Standard Current Ratings": "5,15, and 30 A. 3. Requirements: 3.1 Materials – Parts shall be manufactured with following materials – a) Base – Vitrified ceramic material or tough nonignitable moulded insulating material. b) Covers, cover plates and actuating member– Tough, non ignitable insulating material– c) Current-carrying parts – Brass, copper, phosphor bronze, aluminium alloy, etc. d) Springs – Corrosion resistant material e) Attachment fittings, screws, non current carrying parts – Mild steel, aluminium alloy or insulating material. 3.2 Terminals – Shall allow a conductor to be connected without special preparation such as soldering of stands, use of cable lugs and formation of eyelets. Shall be designed to clamp the conductor between metal surfaces with sufficient contact pressure and without damage to the con"
    },
    "content": "IS 4160: 1967 Interlocking Switch Socket Outlet\nNote 1–Test for tracking shall be applicable to mould insulating materials only and be carried out by manufacturer for proper\nselection of raw materials.\nNote 2 – For detailed requirements and methods of test, refer to 11 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4160 : 1967 Specification for interlocking switch socket outlet.\ncircuits l) Screws and connections.\nm)Mechanical strength n) Water absorption – Shall not exceed 0.5 percent\nfor ceramic material and 1 percentfor moulded insulating material.\no) Resistance to heat p) Resistance to rusting – Shall show no sign of\nrust after the prescribed ammonium chloride test.\n4.2 Acceptance Tests – Tests specifiedin 4.1 (a) 4.1 (k)\nand 4.1 (n)\n4.3 Routine Tests – Tests specified in 4.1 (a) to 4.1 (e). 1.\nScope – Requirements for switch socket-outlets of the non-interlocking type of the surface and flush type\n(shuttered and non-shuttered) having ratings up to 30\nA and suitable for use on ac and dc circuits at rated voltage not exceeding 250 V.\n2.\nStandard Current Ratings – 5,15, and 30 A.\n3.\nRequirements:\n3.1 Materials – Parts shall be manufactured with\nfollowing materials –\na) Base – Vitrified ceramic material or tough nonignitable moulded insulating material.\nb) Covers, cover plates and actuating member–\nTough, non ignitable insulating material–\nc) Current-carrying parts – Brass, copper, phosphor bronze, aluminium alloy, etc.\nd) Springs – Corrosion resistant material e) Attachment fittings, screws, non current\ncarrying parts – Mild steel, aluminium alloy or insulating material.\n3.2 Terminals – Shall allow a conductor to be connected\nwithout special preparation such as soldering of stands, use of cable lugs and formation of eyelets. Shall be\ndesigned to clamp the conductor between metal surfaces with sufficient contact pressure and without damage to\nthe conductor.\n3.2.1 Dimensions of pillar type terminals (in mm):\nRated current, A\n5\n15\n30\nNominal thread dia, Min\n3.5\n4\n6\nDia of hole for conductor, Min\n3.5\n4.5\n7\nLength of thread in pillar Min\n2.5\n3\n4\nDifference between dia of hole\n0.6 0.6 1.2 and nominal dia of screw,Max\n3.2.2 Dimensions of pillar type terminals(in mm):\nRated current, A\n5\n15\n30\nNominal thread dia, Min\n3.5\n5\n5\nLength of screw under the head Min\n4 7 8.5\nLength of thread in nut, Min\n1.5\n3\n3\nNormal differences between dia\n3.5\n5\n5 of head and thread part, Min\nHeight of head, Min\n2\n3\n3.5\n3.3 Clearances and Creepage Distances – Not less\nthan 3mm\nNote 1 – For constructional details in respect of enclosures,\ncovers, cover plates, mounting of switch socket outlet, current carrying parts, precautions against electrical contact,\nearthing, socket contacts, prevention against charring of base sealing and holes, refer to 5 of the standard.\nNote 2 – For requirements regarding terminals and screws,\nand switch actuating mechanism, refer 6 and 7 of the standard.\n4.\nTests\n4.1 Type Tests\na) Visual examination b) Dimensional check\nc) Effectiveness of contact – Voltage drop between terminals of switch socket outlet and\ncorresponding plug pin shall not exceed 25 and\n60 millivolts in unswitched neutral pole and switched pole respectively.\nd) Withdrawal pull – Between 3 to 60, 4 to 80 and\n7 to 100 Newtons for 5, 15, and 30A rating respectively.\ne) Insulation resistance (dry) – Shall not be less than 100 megohms.\nf)\nHigh voltage – Shall withstand ac voltage of\n1500 V rms for a period of one minute under\nspecified test conditions.\ng) Moisture resistance – Insulation resistance shall not be less than 2 megohms after moisture\ntreatment.\nh) Contact resistance and temperature Rise – Not more than 25ºc\nj)\nOvervoltage and overcurrent capacity – 130 percent of rated current at 110 percent of rated\nvoltage, 10 times in succession at intervals of\n30 seconds.\nk) Endurance – 15 000 switch cycles for 5 and 15\nA and 10 000 for 30 A."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4615: 1968",
    "title": "Switch Socket-Outlets",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "Requirements for adaptors of clamp and solid types for flexible steel conduits intended for the protection of cables in electrical installations. Adaptors are used for connecting flexible metallic conduits to a rigid conduits or its fitting. Flexible steel conduits shall not be used as earth continuity conductor.",
    "keywords": [
      "switch",
      "flexible",
      "conduits",
      "earthing",
      "headed",
      "protection",
      "turns"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements for adaptors of clamp and solid types for flexible steel conduits intended for the protection of cables in electrical installations. Adaptors are used for connecting flexible metallic conduits to a rigid conduits or its fitting. Flexible steel conduits shall not be used as earth continuity conductor. 2. Requirements 2.1 Material – Malleable iron. 2.2 Shall be protected against corrosion, both inside and outside, excluding machined surfaces and screw threads. Examples a) Medium protection – Stoved enamel; Airdrying paint; and Electrolytic deposits. b) Heavy protection – Hot-dip galvanized coating; Sherardiring 2.3 Shall be fitted with external earthing lug with hole to accommodate not less than 4 mm2 earthing wire. The lug shall be tapped and fitted with a headed clamping screw"
    },
    "content": "IS 4615: 1968 Switch Socket-Outlets\n(NON-INTERLOCKING TYPE) m) Switch socket – outlets for ac inductive circuits125 percent or rated current at 110\npercent of rated voltage at 0.3 power factor, 100 times, at a rate approximate 7.5 switch cycles per\nminute.\nn) Screws and connections –\no) Mechanical strength –\np) Water absorption q) Resistance to heat\ns) Resistance to rusting – Shall show no sign of rust after the prescribed ammonium chloride\ntest.\nt) Endurance of shutters – 5 000 operations\n4.2 Acceptance tests – Tests specified in 4.1(a) to (p)\nand(s)\n4.3 Routine tests – Tests specified in 4.1(a), (b) (e),\nand (f)\nNote 1 – Test for tracking shall be applicable to mould insulating materials only and be carried out by manufacturer for proper\nselection of raw materials.\nNote 2– For detailed requirement and methods of tests, refer to 10 of the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4615 : 1968 Specification for switch socket- outlets (non-interlocking type) 1. Scope – Requirements for adaptors of clamp and\nsolid types for flexible steel conduits intended for the protection of cables in electrical installations. Adaptors\nare used for connecting flexible metallic conduits to a rigid conduits or its fitting. Flexible steel conduits shall\nnot be used as earth continuity conductor.\n2.\nRequirements\n2.1 Material – Malleable iron.\n2.2 Shall be protected against corrosion, both inside\nand outside, excluding machined surfaces and screw threads.\nExamples a) Medium protection – Stoved enamel; Airdrying\npaint; and Electrolytic deposits.\nb) Heavy protection – Hot-dip galvanized coating;\nSherardiring\n2.3 Shall be fitted with external earthing lug with hole\nto accommodate not less than 4 mm2 earthing wire. The lug shall be tapped and fitted with a headed clamping\nscrew. Alternately, a headed earthing screw and washer shall be fitted to the solid portion.\n2.4 Workmanship – Shall be free from burrs or sharp\nedges and edges of turns of fins shall be well-formed.\n2.5 Dimensions (in mm)\nNominal internal dia\n6.5\n10\n16\n25\n40\n63\n100 of flexible conduit\nExternal dia in normal 9\n13\n20\n31\n46\n70\n108 position, Max\nTurns per metre in\n315 235 200 160\n100\n100\n100 normal position Min\nDepth of engagement\n10 15\n15 25\n30\n35 45 between conduit and\nadaptor, Min\nNote – Tolerances on internal dia shall be +0.5and 0.0 and +1.0\nand – 0.0 for nominal dia range 6.5 to 25 and 40 to 100 respectively.\n3.\nTests\n3.1 Type Tests\na) Visual examination, b) Dimension check, and\nc) Test for protective-coating (for medium and heavy protection)\n3.2 Acceptation Tests\na) Visual examination, and b) Dimension check\nNote – For test details, refer to 10 of the standard."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 4649: 1968",
    "title": "Adaptors For Flexible Steel Conduits",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "Requirements and tests for three-pin (two - pole and earthing-pin) plugs having the base and cover, or either of these components, constructed of rubber or other suitable resilient material and suitable for use in ac and dc circuits having voltage up to 250 V. Note –These are intended to be used with socket outlet conforming to IS 1293:1988*",
    "keywords": [
      "current",
      "pin",
      "plugs",
      "pins",
      "earthing",
      "carrying",
      "plug"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and tests for three-pin (two - pole and earthing-pin) plugs having the base and cover, or either of these components, constructed of rubber or other suitable resilient material and suitable for use in ac and dc circuits having voltage up to 250 V. Note –These are intended to be used with socket outlet conforming to IS 1293:1988*",
      "Standard Ratings": "5 and 15 A 3. Requirements 3.1 Materials a) Plug base and cover– of rubber (hardness < 85 IRHD) or tough non-ignitable insulating material. b) Pins, terminals, current-carrying parts– of phosphor-bronze, brass, aluminium alloy, etc. c) Non-current-carrying parts – of mild steel, aluminium alloy, or insulating material. 3.2 Construction 3.2.1 During insertion of plug into socket-outlet, it shall not be possible to touch a live pin after contact has been established between pins and socket contacts. Earthing pin shall make and break contact respectively before and after the associated current-carrying pins make and break contact with corresponding contacts. 3.2.2 Dimensions of plugs (in mm) – See Table 1. 3.2.3 Terminals and screws –The design shall allow a conductor to be connected without "
    },
    "content": "IS 4649: 1968 Adaptors For Flexible Steel Conduits\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 4649 : 1968 Specification for adaptors for flexible steel conduits 1.\nScope – Requirements and tests for three-pin (two\n- pole and earthing-pin) plugs having the base and cover, or either of these components, constructed of rubber or\nother suitable resilient material and suitable for use in ac and dc circuits having voltage up to 250 V.\nNote –These are intended to be used with socket outlet\nconforming to IS 1293:1988*\n2.\nStandard Ratings – 5 and 15 A\n3.\nRequirements\n3.1 Materials\na) Plug base and cover– of rubber (hardness < 85\nIRHD) or tough non-ignitable insulating material.\nb) Pins, terminals, current-carrying parts– of phosphor-bronze, brass, aluminium alloy, etc.\nc) Non-current-carrying parts – of mild steel, aluminium alloy, or insulating material.\n3.2 Construction\n3.2.1 During insertion of plug into socket-outlet, it shall not be possible to touch a live pin after contact has\nbeen established between pins and socket contacts.\nEarthing pin shall make and break contact respectively before and after the associated current-carrying pins\nmake and break contact with corresponding contacts.\n3.2.2 Dimensions of plugs (in mm) – See Table 1.\n3.2.3 Terminals and screws –The design shall allow a conductor to be connected without special\npreparations, such as soldering, use of cable lugs and formation of eyelets. When pillar type terminals are\nused, their dimensions shall be as follows\nCurrent rating\n6A\n16A\nNom thread dia, Min\n3.5 mm\n4.0 mm\nDia of hole for conductor, Min\n3.5 mm\n4.0 mm\nLength of thread in pillar, Min\n2.5 mm\n3.0 mm\nDifference between dia of\n0.6 mm\n0.6 mm hole and nominal dia of screw, Max\nPlugs and socket outlets of 250 volts and rated current up to 16 ampheres (second revision)\nTABLE 1 DIMENSIONS OF PLUGS Current Rating 6A 16A\ni) Distance between earthing-pin\n22.2\n28.6 and current-carrying pin\n(centre to centre)\nii) Distance between current-carrying\n19.1\n25.4 pins (centre to centre)\niii) Dia of earthing pin\n7.06\n8.71 iv) Dia of current -carrying pin\n5.08\n7.06 v) Projection of current-carrying\n15.9\n20.6 pins from plug face\nvi) Projection of earthing-pin from\n20.6\n28.6 plug face\nNote – For detailed dimensions and tolerances refer to Table\n1 of the standard.\n3.3 Ageing—Plugs shall be resistant to ageing.\n3.4 Clearances and Creepage Distances – Not less\nthan 3.0 mm.\nNote – For constructional requirements of three-pin plugs with\nregard to aspects such as earthing, plug cover and base, pins, cord entry and cord grip, current-carrying parts, finger grip, plugs\nwith integral flexible cord, and terminals and screws, refer to 5 of the standard.\n4.\nTests\n4.1 Type Tests\na)\nVisual examination, b)\nTest for interchangeability, c)\nTest for effectiveness of contact d)\nTest for insulation resistance (dry), e)\nHigh voltage test, f)\nTest for moisture resistance, g)\nTemperature-rise test, h)\nBreaking capacity test, j)\nTest for mechanical strength, k)\nTest for mechanical strength, m)\nAgeing test, n) Plug pin deflection test,"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 6538: 1971",
    "title": "Three-Pin Plugs Made Of Resilientmaterial",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "p) Test for water absorption q) Test for screws and connections (not applicable for moulded-on type plugs), r) Test for cord grip, s) Test for resistance to heat, and t) Test for resistance to rust. Note – For test details, refer to 9 of the standard and IS : 1293-1988 Three-pin plugs and socket-outlets (second revision) For detailed information, refer to IS 6538: 1971 Specification for three-pin plugs made of resilient material. 4.2 Acceptance Test – Tests specified in (a) to (m) of 4.1 4.3 Rou",
    "keywords": [
      "circuit",
      "breakers",
      "pole",
      "poles",
      "protected",
      "plugs",
      "three"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 6538: 1971 Three-Pin Plugs Made Of Resilientmaterial\np) Test for water absorption q) Test for screws and connections\n(not applicable for moulded-on type plugs), r) Test for cord grip,\ns) Test for resistance to heat, and t) Test for resistance to rust.\nNote – For test details, refer to 9 of the standard and IS : 1293-1988 Three-pin plugs and socket-outlets (second revision)\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 6538: 1971 Specification for three-pin plugs made of resilient material.\n4.2 Acceptance Test – Tests specified in (a) to (m) of\n4.1\n4.3 Routine Tests–Tests specified in (a), (b) and (e) of\n4.1 d) their dielectric properties;\niii) the tests intended for confirming that these conditions have been met and the methods to\nbe adopted for the tests;\niv)the data to be marked on the devices;\nv) the test sequences to be carried out and the number of samples to be submitted for\ncertification purposes (see Annex C of the standard).\nvi)the coordination with separate fuses associated in the same circuit (see Annex D of the standard).\n2.\nClassification\n2.1 According to the number of poles:\n– single-pole circuit-breakers\n– two-pole-circuit-breakers with one protected pole;\n– two-pole circuit-breakers with two protected poles;\n– three-pole circuit-breakers with three protected poles;\n– four-pole circuit-breakers with three protected poles;\n– four-pole circuit- breakers with four protected poles.\n2.2 According to the protection against external\ninfluences :\n–\nenclosed-type (not requiring an appropriate enclosure);\n–\nunenclosed-type (for use with an appropriate enclosure);\n2.3 According to the method of mounting :\n– surface-type;\n– flush-type;\n– panel board type, also referred to as distribution board type."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 8828: 1996",
    "title": "/Iec 898 (1995) Circuit Breakers For Over Current Protection For Household And Similar Installations",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "Applies to A.C. air-break circuit-breakers for operation at 50 Hz or 60 Hz, having a rated voltage not exceeding 440 V (between phases), a rated current not exceeding 125 A and a rated short-circuit capacity not exceeding 25 000 A. 1.2 These circuit-breakers are intended for the protection against overcurrents of wiring installations of buildings and similar applications; they are designed for use by uninstructed people and for not being maintained. 1.3 This standard also applies to circuit-brea",
    "keywords": [
      "conduits",
      "circuit",
      "phase",
      "protection",
      "breakers",
      "rated",
      "stresses"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "This standard (Part I) applies to conduits of circular cross section for the protection of conductors and/or cables in electrical installations. Note – Cover conduits suitanble for -5ºC to + 60ºC.",
      "Standard And Preferred Values": "See Table 1 TABLE 1 PREFERRED VALUES OF RATED VOLTAGE Circuit-breakers Circuit Supplying the Circuit-Breaker Rated Voltage Single phase (phase to neutral) 230 V Single phase (Phase to earthed middle 120 V conductor, or phase to neutral) Single-pole Single phase (phase to neutral) or three phase (3 single-pole circuit- 230/400 V breaker) (3-wire or 4- wire) Single phase (phase to neutral) 230 V Two-pole Single phase (phase to phase ) 400 V Single phase (phase to phase, 3-wire) 120/240 V Three-pole Three phase 240 V Four-pole (3-wire or 4-wire) 400 V 3.1 Preferred Values of Rated Current are – 6 A, 8 A, 10 A, 13 A, 16 A, 20 A, 25 A, 32 A, 40 A, 50 A, 63 A, 80 A, 100 A and 125 A. 3.2 Standard Values of Rated Frequency – Standard values of rated frequency are 50 Hz and 60 Hz. 3.3 Standard Valu",
      "Standard Condition For Operation In Service": "The ambient air temperature does not exceed +40 0C and its average over a period of 24 h does not exceed +35 0C. — The lower limit of the ambient air temperature is -5 0C. — In general the altitude of the site of installation does not exceed 2000 m (6600 ft). — The air is clean and its relative humidity does not exceed 50% at a maximum temperature of +40 0C Note – For detailed requirements and methods of tests refer to the standard. For detailed information, refer to IS 8828 : 1996 Specification for circuit breakers for over current protection for house-hold and similar installations (second revision). 5. Tests a) Indeliblity of marketing, b) Reliability of screws,current-carrying, Parts and connections c) Reliability of terminals for external conductors d) Protection against electric shoc",
      "General Requirements": "Conduits shall be so designed and constructed that they ensure reliable mechanical protection to the conductors and/or cables contained therein. Furthermore the conduit shall withstand stresses likely to occur during transport, storage, recommended practice and usage. 3. Classification a) According to material : 1) Metal conduits and 2) Insulating conduits, and 3) Composite conduits. b) According to the method of connection : 1) Threadable conduits (only plain conduits).",
      "General": "flame propagating conduits, and 2) Flame propagating conduits. f) According to electrical characteristics : 1) With electrical insulating characteristics, and 2)Without electrical insulating characteristics. g) According to resistance to external influences– 1)Resistance against ingress of water: i) Unprotected conduits, ii)Conduits with protection against sprays, splashes and jets, iii) Conduits with protection against waves and immersion, and iv) Conduits with protection against submersion: 2) Resistance against corrosive or polluting substances. i) Conduits with the same protect on the outside and the inside, Conduits with low protection, Conduits with medium protection, and Conduits with high protection, and ii) Conduits with greater protection on the outside than the inside, Conduits "
    },
    "content": "IS 8828: 1996 /Iec 898 (1995) Circuit Breakers For Over Current Protection For Household And Similar Installations\n(Second Revision)\n1. Scope – Applies to A.C. air-break circuit-breakers for\noperation at 50 Hz or 60 Hz, having a rated voltage not exceeding 440 V (between phases), a rated current not\nexceeding 125 A and a rated short-circuit capacity not exceeding 25 000 A.\n1.2 These circuit-breakers are intended for the\nprotection against overcurrents of wiring installations of buildings and similar applications; they are designed\nfor use by uninstructed people and for not being maintained.\n1.3 This standard also applies to circuit-breakers having\nmore than one rated current, provided that the means for changing from one discrete rating to another is not\naccessible in normal service and that the rating cannot be changed without the use of a tool.\n1.4 This standard does not apply to:\n– circuit-breakers intended to protect motors.\n– circuit-breakers, the current setting of which is adjustable by means accessible to the user.\n1.5 For circuit-breakers having a degree of protection\nhigher than IP 20 according to IEC 529, for use in locations where arduous environmental conditions\nprevail (for example excessive humidity, heat or cold or deposition of dust) and in hazardous locations (for\nexample where explosions are liable to occur) special constructions may be required.\n1.6 This standard states :\ni) the characteristics of circuit-breakers;\nii) the conditions with which circuit-breakers shall comply, with reference to –\na) their operation and behaviour in normal service;\nb) their operation and behaviour in case of overload;\nc) their operation and behaviour in case of shortcircuits up to their rated short-circuit capacity; 2.4 According to the method of connection :\n– circuit-breakers the electrical connections of which are not associated with the mechanical\nmounting;\n– circuit-breakers the electrical connections of which are associated with the mechanical\nmounting; enclosed-type (not requiring an appropriate enclosure); Note – Examples of this type are : –\nplug-in type; –\nbolt-on type; –\nscrew-in type.\n2.5 According to the instantaneous tripping current:\n–\nB - type;\n–\nC - type;\n–\nD - type.\n2.6 According to the l2t characteristic – In addition to\nthe l2t characteristic provided by the manufacturer, circuit-breakers may be classified according to their l2t\ncharacteristic.\n3.\nStandard and preferred values – See Table 1\nTABLE 1 PREFERRED VALUES OF RATED VOLTAGE\nCircuit-breakers\nCircuit Supplying the Circuit-Breaker\nRated Voltage\nSingle phase (phase to neutral)\n230 V\nSingle phase (Phase to earthed middle\n120 V\nconductor, or phase to neutral)\nSingle-pole\nSingle phase (phase to neutral)\nor three phase (3 single-pole circuit-\n230/400 V\nbreaker) (3-wire or 4- wire)\nSingle phase (phase to neutral)\n230 V\nTwo-pole\nSingle phase (phase to phase ) 400 V\nSingle phase (phase to phase, 3-wire)\n120/240 V\nThree-pole\nThree phase\n240 V\nFour-pole\n(3-wire or 4-wire)\n400 V\n3.1 Preferred Values of Rated Current are – 6 A, 8 A, 10\nA, 13 A, 16 A, 20 A, 25 A, 32 A, 40 A, 50 A, 63 A, 80 A, 100\nA and 125 A.\n3.2 Standard Values of Rated Frequency – Standard\nvalues of rated frequency are 50 Hz and 60 Hz.\n3.3 Standard Values of Rated Short-Circuit capacities:\n(a) up to and including 10 000 A are1 500 A, 3 000A,\n4 500 A, 6 000 A, and 1 0000 A.\n(b) Above 10000 A,upto and including 20,000A and\n25,000 A\n4.\nStandard Condition for Operation in Service\n— The ambient air temperature does not exceed\n+40 0C and its average over a period of 24 h does not exceed +35 0C.\n— The lower limit of the ambient air temperature is -5 0C.\n— In general the altitude of the site of installation does not exceed 2000 m (6600 ft).\n— The air is clean and its relative humidity does not exceed 50% at a maximum temperature of\n+40 0C Note – For detailed requirements and methods of tests refer to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 8828 : 1996 Specification for circuit breakers for over current protection for house-hold and similar installations (second revision).\n5.\nTests a) Indeliblity of marketing,\nb) Reliability of screws,current-carrying, Parts and connections\nc) Reliability of terminals for external conductors d) Protection against electric shock\ne) Di-electric properties f) Temperature-rise test,\ng) 28 days test, h) Tripping characteristic\nj) Mechanical and electrical strength, k) Short-circuit*,\nm) Resistance to mechanical shock and impact n) Resistance to heat\np) Resistance to a abnormal heat and to fire q) Resistance to rusting.\n* This test comprises several type tests. 1.\nScope –This standard (Part I) applies to conduits of circular cross section for the protection of conductors\nand/or cables in electrical installations.\nNote – Cover conduits suitanble for -5ºC to + 60ºC.\n2.\nGeneral Requirements – Conduits shall be so designed and constructed that they ensure reliable\nmechanical protection to the conductors and/or cables contained therein. Furthermore the conduit shall\nwithstand stresses likely to occur during transport, storage, recommended practice and usage.\n3.\nClassification a) According to material :\n1) Metal conduits and\n2) Insulating conduits, and\n3) Composite conduits.\nb) According to the method of connection :\n1) Threadable conduits (only plain conduits).\n2) Non-threadable conduits:\ni) Plain conduits, and ii) Corrugated conduits.\nc) According to mechanical properties :\n1) Conduits for very light mechanical stresses\n2) Conduits for light mechanical stresses,\n3) Conduits for medium mechanical stresses,\n4) Conduits for heavy mechanical stresses and\n5) Conduits for very heavy mechanical stresses\nNote – Conduits which are designed for higher mechanical\nstresses can be used for lower mechanical stresses. For example – conduits of classification (c) (5) can be used for\nany of the conditions covered in (c) (1) to (c) (4).\nd) According to suitability for bending :\n1) Rigid conduits,\n2) Flexible conduits,\n3) Self-recovering conduits, and\n4) Pliable conduits.\ne) According to resistance to flame propagatio :\n1) Non-flame propagating conduits, and\n2) Flame propagating conduits.\nf) According to electrical characteristics :\n1) With electrical insulating characteristics, and\n2)Without electrical insulating characteristics.\ng) According to resistance to external influences–\n1)Resistance against ingress of water:\ni) Unprotected conduits, ii)Conduits with protection against sprays,\nsplashes and jets, iii) Conduits with protection against waves and immersion, and iv) Conduits with protection against submersion:\n2) Resistance against corrosive or polluting substances.\ni) Conduits with the same protect on the outside and the inside, Conduits with low protection,\nConduits with medium protection, and\nConduits with high protection, and ii) Conduits with greater protection on the\noutside than the inside, Conduits with medium protection outside and low protection inside,\nConduits with high protection outside and low protection inside, and Conduits with high\nprotection outside and medium protection inside.\nh) According to resistance to solar radiation:\n1) Conduits without protection against solar radiation.\n2) Conduits with protection against solarr adiation.\ni) Conduits with low protection against radiation.\nii)Conduits with medium protection against radiation."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9537 (Part 1): 1980",
    "title": "Conduits For Electrical Installations",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "Requirements and methods of test of threaded/threadable plain rigid steel conduits.",
    "keywords": [
      "conduits",
      "protection",
      "stresses",
      "conduit",
      "mechanical",
      "outside",
      "influences"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "External Influences": "Conduits shall have adequate protection against external influences. The influences included here are ingress of water or oil or building materials, low or high temperatures and polluting substances and solar radiation.",
      "Scope": "Requirements and methods of test of threaded/threadable plain rigid steel conduits.",
      "General Requirements": "Conduits shall be so designed and constructed that they ensure reliable mechanical protection to conductors and/or cables contained therein. Conduit shall withstand stresses likely to occur during transport, storage, recommended practice and usage. 3. Classification 3.1 According to Resistance against Corrosiv or Polluting substances : a) Conduits with low protection, b) Conduits with medium protection, c) Conduits with high protection, d) Conduits with high protection on the outside and low protection inside, e) Conduits with medium protection outside and low protection inside, and f) Conduits with high protection outside and medium protection inside. Note 1 – Normally, protection mentioned at (b) and (c) are commonly used. Note 2– Typical examples of medium protection are stove enamellin",
      "Construction": "The inside and outside surfaces of conduits shall be reasonably smooth and free from burrs, flash and similar defects. The conduits shall be solid drawn or seam joined by welding. 6. Mechanical Properties 6.1 Bending Test – After the test, basic material or protective coating of conduits shall not show any cracks visible by normal or corrected vision without magnification. Seams, if any, shall not have opened, and section of conduit shall not have distored unduly. 6.2 Compression Test – The difference between the initial diameter and diameter of flattened samples shall not exceed 10 percent of outside diameter measured before the test."
    },
    "content": "IS 9537 (Part 1): 1980 Conduits For Electrical Installations\nPART 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Note — For methods of Test, refer to the standard.\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 9537 (Part I) : 1980 Specification for conduits for electrical installations\n: Part I General requirements.\niii)\nConduits with high protection against radiation.\n4.\nMechanical Properties a) Conduits shall have adequate mechanical\nstrength.\nb) Bend Test – Values as per relevant conduit specifications.\nc) Compression Test – when tested as prescribed, the difference between the initial diameter and\ndiameter of flattened sample shall not exceed a specified percentage of the outside diameter\nmeasured before the test.\nd) Impact Test – There shall be no sign of disintegration, neither shall there be any cracks\nvisible to the naked eye when tested as prescribed.\ne) Collapse Test – Values of minimum internal diameter as per relevant conduits specifications)\nf) Resistance to Heat – (As per relevant conduit specifications).\ng) Resistance to Burning – Time of exposure as per relevant conduit specifications. If the sample\nburns it shall do so slowly and the flame shall not spread appreciably; any flame shall have died\nout in less than 30 seconds after removal of the burner.\n5.\nElectrical Characteristics a) Electrical Strength.\nb) Insulation Resistance.\n6.\nExternal Influences – Conduits shall have adequate protection against external influences. The influences\nincluded here are ingress of water or oil or building materials, low or high temperatures and polluting\nsubstances and solar radiation. 1.\nScope—Requirements and methods of test of threaded/threadable plain rigid steel conduits.\n2.\nGeneral Requirements – Conduits shall be so designed and constructed that they ensure reliable\nmechanical protection to conductors and/or cables contained therein. Conduit shall withstand stresses\nlikely to occur during transport, storage, recommended practice and usage.\n3.\nClassification\n3.1 According to Resistance against Corrosiv or\nPolluting substances :\na) Conduits with low protection, b) Conduits with medium protection,\nc) Conduits with high protection, d) Conduits with high protection on the outside\nand low protection inside, e) Conduits with medium protection outside and\nlow protection inside, and f) Conduits with high protection outside and\nmedium protection inside.\nNote 1 – Normally, protection mentioned at (b) and (c) are\ncommonly used.\nNote 2– Typical examples of medium protection are stove\nenamelling, air drying point and electrolytic deposits.\nNote 3 – Typical examples of high protection are hot-dip\ngalvanized coating and sherardizing.\n3.2 According to Mechanical Properties:\na) Conduits for very light mechanical stresses, b) Conduits for light mechanical stresses,\nc) conduits for medium mechanical stresses, d) Conduits for heavy mechanical stresses, and\ne) Conduits for very heavy mechanical stresses.\n4. Dimensions\nNominal Size\nTolerance Wall\nThickness of Conduit\non Outside of Conduits\n(Outside\nDiameter)\nmm mm\nmm\n16\n0\n1. 4 to 1.8\n–0.3\n20\n0\n1.4 to 1.8\n–0.3\n25\n0\n1.4 to 1.8\n–0.4\n32\n0\n1.4 to 1.8\n–0.4\n40\n0\n1.6 to 2.2\n–0.4\n50\n0\n1.6 to 2.2\n–0.5\n63\n0\n1.6 to 2.2\n–0.6\n4.1 Length – Conduits shall be supplied in straight\nlengths of 3 to 5 metres.\n5.\nConstruction –The inside and outside surfaces of conduits shall be reasonably smooth and free from burrs,\nflash and similar defects. The conduits shall be solid drawn or seam joined by welding.\n6.\nMechanical Properties\n6.1 Bending Test – After the test, basic material or\nprotective coating of conduits shall not show any cracks visible by normal or corrected vision without\nmagnification. Seams, if any, shall not have opened, and section of conduit shall not have distored unduly.\n6.2 Compression Test – The difference between the\ninitial diameter and diameter of flattened samples shall not exceed 10 percent of outside diameter measured\nbefore the test."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9537 (Part 3): 1983",
    "title": "Conduits For Electrical Installations",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "Requirements and methods of tests for pliable self-recovering plain and corrugated conduits of insulating materials.",
    "keywords": [
      "conduits",
      "insulating",
      "recovering",
      "pliable",
      "provision",
      "plain",
      "self"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Requirements and methods of tests for pliable self-recovering plain and corrugated conduits of insulating materials."
    },
    "content": "IS 9537 (Part 3): 1983 Conduits For Electrical Installations\nPART 3 – RIGID PLAIN CONDUITS OF INSULATING MATERIALS 1.\nScope – Requirements and methods of tests for pliable self-recovering plain and corrugated conduits\nof insulating materials.\n2.\nGeneral Requirements – Provision s of"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9537 (Part 4): 1983",
    "title": "Conduits For Electrical Installations",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "PART 4 – PLIABLE SELF RECOVERING CONDUITS OF INSULATING MATERIALS Note – For details requirements refer to the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 9537 (Part 4) : 1983 Specification for conduits for electrical installations :Part 4 Pliable self- recovering conduits of insulating materials.",
    "keywords": [
      "conduits",
      "recovering",
      "pliable",
      "self",
      "insulating",
      "installations",
      "electrical"
    ],
    "key_sections": {},
    "content": "IS 9537 (Part 4): 1983 Conduits For Electrical Installations\nPART 4 – PLIABLE SELF RECOVERING CONDUITS OF\nINSULATING MATERIALS\nNote – For details requirements refer to the standard\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 9537 (Part 4) : 1983 Specification for conduits for electrical installations\n:Part 4 Pliable self- recovering conduits of insulating materials."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 9537 (Part 5): 2000",
    "title": "Conduits For Electrical Installations",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "This clause of Part 1 of the Standard is applicable except as follows: Addition: This Indian Standard (Part 5) specifies requirements for pliable non-flame propagating plain and corrugated conduits of insulating material. It does not include selfrecovering or flexible conduits. This standard also applies to corrugated conduits with a smooth exterior surface.",
    "keywords": [
      "conduits",
      "clause",
      "applicable",
      "temperature",
      "collapse",
      "pliable",
      "checking"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "This clause of Part 1 of the Standard is applicable except as follows: Addition: This Indian Standard (Part 5) specifies requirements for pliable non-flame propagating plain and corrugated conduits of insulating material. It does not include selfrecovering or flexible conduits. This standard also applies to corrugated conduits with a smooth exterior surface.",
      "General Requirements": "This clause of Part 1 is applicable",
      "General Notes On Tests": "This clause of Part 1 is applicable except as follows: Replacement: The minimum total length of conduit to be submitted for all tests is 36 m. Temperature Temperature not Permanent Classification Normally less Than Application Temperature Range Storae and Use and Transport Installation oC oC oC – 45 – 45 – 15 – 15 to + 60 – 25 – 25 – 15 – 15 to + 60 – 5 – 5 – 5 – 5 to + 60 + 90 – 5 – 5 – 5 to 601 + 90/–25 – 25 – 15 – 15 to + 601 1 These types, for use in prefabricated concrete, will temporarity withstand temperatures up to + 900C. Note : Conduits of insulating materials for temperature up to 2000C are under consideration.",
      "Classification": "This clause of Part 1 is applicable except as follows: 5.1 (a), (1), 5.1 (a), (3), 5.1 (b), (1), 5.1 (d), (1) 5.1 (d), (2), 5.1 (d), (3), 5.1 (c), (2), 5.1 (f), (2) and 5.1 (g), (1) (i), not applicable. Additional Sub-clause 5.101 According to temperature, given as follows:",
      "Classification Of Tests": "5.1 Types Tests The following shall constitute the type tests: a) Checking of admissions b) Bending test c) Compression d) Impact test e) Collapse test f) Resistance to heat g) Resistance to burning h) Electrical characteristics, and j) External influences 5.1.1 Acceptance Tests The following shall constitue the acceptance tests: a) Checking of dimensions b) Bending test (at room temperature only) c) Compression test d) Collapse test e) Resistance to burning f) Electrical characteristics Note – For detail requirements refer to the standard For detailed information, refer to IS 9537 (Part 5): 1983. Specification for conduits for electric installations - Part 3 Rigid plain conduits of insulation materials."
    },
    "content": "IS 9537 (Part 5): 2000 Conduits For Electrical Installations\nPART 5 – PLIABLE CONDUITS OF INSULATING MATERIAL\n1.\nScope – This clause of Part 1 of the Standard is applicable except as follows:\nAddition:\nThis Indian Standard (Part 5) specifies requirements for pliable non-flame propagating plain and corrugated\nconduits of insulating material. It does not include selfrecovering or flexible conduits.\nThis standard also applies to corrugated conduits with a smooth exterior surface.\n2. General Requirements – This clause of Part 1 is\napplicable\n3. General Notes on tests – This clause of Part 1 is\napplicable except as follows:\nReplacement:\nThe minimum total length of conduit to be submitted for all tests is 36 m.\nTemperature\nTemperature not\nPermanent\nClassification\nNormally less Than\nApplication\nTemperature\nRange\nStorae and\nUse and\nTransport\nInstallation oC\noC oC\n– 45\n– 45\n– 15\n– 15 to + 60\n– 25\n– 25\n– 15\n– 15 to + 60\n– 5\n– 5\n– 5\n– 5 to + 60\n+ 90\n– 5\n– 5\n– 5 to 601\n+ 90/–25\n– 25\n– 15\n– 15 to + 601\n1 These types, for use in prefabricated concrete, will temporarity withstand temperatures\nup to + 900C.\nNote : Conduits of insulating materials for temperature up to\n2000C are under consideration.\n4. Classification – This clause of Part 1 is applicable\nexcept as follows: 5.1 (a), (1), 5.1 (a), (3), 5.1 (b), (1), 5.1\n(d), (1) 5.1 (d), (2), 5.1 (d), (3), 5.1 (c), (2), 5.1 (f), (2) and\n5.1 (g), (1) (i), not applicable.\nAdditional Sub-clause\n5.101 According to temperature, given as follows:\n5. Classification of tests –\n5.1 Types Tests\nThe following shall constitute the type tests:\na) Checking of admissions b) Bending test\nc) Compression d) Impact test\ne) Collapse test f) Resistance to heat\ng) Resistance to burning h) Electrical characteristics, and\nj) External influences\n5.1.1 Acceptance Tests\nThe following shall constitue the acceptance tests:\na) Checking of dimensions b) Bending test (at room temperature only)\nc) Compression test d) Collapse test\ne) Resistance to burning f) Electrical characteristics\nNote – For detail requirements refer to the standard\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 9537 (Part 5): 1983. Specification for conduits for electric installations -\nPart 3 Rigid plain conduits of insulation materials."
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 14772: 2000",
    "title": "General Requirements For Enclosures For Accessories For Household And Similar Fixed",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "This standard applies to enclosures or parts of enclosures or parts for accessories with a rated voltage not exceeding 440 V intended for household or similar fixed electrical installatinos, either indoors or outdoors. This standard may be used as a guide for enclosures having a rated vltage up to 100 V. Enclosures complying with this standard are suitable for use, after installation, an ambient temperatures not normally exceeding 35oC, but occasionally reaching 45oC. For the purpose of this sta",
    "keywords": [
      "enclosures",
      "ingress",
      "electrical",
      "accessory",
      "objects",
      "combustible",
      "protection"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "This standard applies to enclosures or parts of enclosures or parts for accessories with a rated voltage not exceeding 440 V intended for household or similar fixed electrical installatinos, either indoors or outdoors. This standard may be used as a guide for enclosures having a rated vltage up to 100 V. Enclosures complying with this standard are suitable for use, after installation, an ambient temperatures not normally exceeding 35oC, but occasionally reaching 45oC. For the purpose of this standard the enclosures include surface, flush and semi-flush mounting boxes provided, for electrical accessories, where the cover or cover plate may or may not be part of the accessory. This standard does not apply to enclosures for assemblies containing overcurrent protective devices, not to enclosur",
      "Classification": "Enclosures are classified according to: 3.1 The nature of their material 3.1.1 Insulating material 3.1.2 Metallic 3.1.3 Composite 3.2 The method of installatino 3.2.1 Flush - type 3.2.2 Semi-flush type 3.2.3 Surface - type 3.3 The Nature of installation 3.3.1 Enclosures flush mounted in : 3.3.1.1 Solid non - combustible walls and ceillilngs: a) Suitable to be placed before the building process (for example not suitable for casting into concrete) b) Suitable to be placed after the building process (for example not suitable for casting into concrete). 3.3.1.2 Solid combustible walls and ceilings 3.3.1.3 Hollow walls, hollow ceillings, furniture, architraves 3.3.1.4 Trunking and ducting 3.3.2 Enclosures surface mounted on : 3.3.2.1 Non-combustible walls and ceilings 3.3.2.2 Combustible walls ",
      "Tests": "4.1 Category of Test – Tests are classified as type, acceptance and routine test. Table 3 Scheduled of Test (Clause 18.1) Sl. No. Test i) Making ii) Dimensions iii) Protection against electric shock iv) Provision for earthing v) Construction vi) Resistance to ageing, to humid conditinos, ingress of solid objects and to harmful ingress of water vii) Mechanical strenghs viii) Resistance to heat ix) Resistance of insulating material to abnormal heat and fire x) Resistance to rusting xi) Resistance of tracking 4.2 Acceptance test – The follosing shall constitue the accpetance test: Test Making Protection against electric shock Provision for earthing Construction Resistance to ageing, to humid condition, to ingress of solid objects and to harmful ingress of water Mechanical Strength 4.3 Routine"
    },
    "content": "IS 14772: 2000 General Requirements For Enclosures For Accessories For Household And Similar Fixed\nELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS – SPECIFICAION\n1.\nScope – This standard applies to enclosures or parts of enclosures or parts for accessories with a rated\nvoltage not exceeding 440 V intended for household or similar fixed electrical installatinos, either indoors or\noutdoors.\nThis standard may be used as a guide for enclosures having a rated vltage up to 100 V.\nEnclosures complying with this standard are suitable for use, after installation, an ambient temperatures not\nnormally exceeding 35oC, but occasionally reaching 45oC.\nFor the purpose of this standard the enclosures include surface, flush and semi-flush mounting boxes provided,\nfor electrical accessories, where the cover or cover plate may or may not be part of the accessory. This standard\ndoes not apply to enclosures for assemblies containing overcurrent protective devices, not to enclosures of the\nbusbar trunking of luminaires.\nThis standard also applies to boxes intended for the mounting or suspension of luminaries.\nThis standard is intended to apply to enclosures for electrical accessories but is also intended to serve as a\nreference document for other Indian Standards.\nAs enclosures which is an integral part of an electrical accessory and provides protection for that accessory\nagainst external influences (for example mechanical impact, ingress of solid objects or water etc) is covered\nby the relevant standard for such an accessory.\n(AQL) for lot-by-lot inspection (second revision)\n2824 : 1975\nMethod for determining the comparative tracking index of solid insulating material\nunder moist condition (first revision)\n11000 (Part 2/ Fire hazard testing: Part 2 Test method,\nSec 1) : 1984 method, Section I Glow wire test and guidance\n12063 : 1987\nClassification of degree of protection provided by enclosures of electrical\nequipment.\n13588 : 1993/ Spring operated impact test apparatus\nIEC 817:1984 and calibration\n14763 : 2000 conduits for electrical purposes, inside\ndiameters of conduits for electrical installations and thread for conduits and\nfittings\n2. General Requirements\n2.1 Enclosures shall be so designed and constructed\nthat, when mounted as for normal use, they ensure adequate electrical and mechanical protection to the\nparts so enclosed and prevent danger to the user or surroundings.\nCompliance is checked by carrying out all the relevant tests specified.\n3. Classification – Enclosures are classified according\nto:\n3.1 The nature of their material\n3.1.1 Insulating material\n3.1.2 Metallic\n3.1.3 Composite\n3.2 The method of installatino\n3.2.1 Flush - type\n3.2.2 Semi-flush type\n3.2.3 Surface - type\n3.3 The Nature of installation\n3.3.1 Enclosures flush mounted in :\n3.3.1.1 Solid non - combustible walls and ceillilngs:\na) Suitable to be placed before the building process\n(for example not suitable for casting into concrete)\nb) Suitable to be placed after the building process\n(for example not suitable for casting into concrete).\n3.3.1.2 Solid combustible walls and ceilings\n3.3.1.3 Hollow walls, hollow ceillings, furniture, architraves\n3.3.1.4 Trunking and ducting\n3.3.2 Enclosures surface mounted on :\n3.3.2.1 Non-combustible walls and ceilings\n3.3.2.2 Combustible walls and/or ceilings and/or furniture\n3.4 The temperature range during installation\n3.4.1 from –5oC to + 60oC\n3.4.2 from – 15oC to + 60oC\n3.4.3 from – 25oC to + 60oC (see Note)\nNote – These tpes aer intended for enclosures to be used\nnutdoor conditions with a cold climate.\n3.5 The maximum temperature during the building\nprocess.\n3.5.1 +60oC\n3.5.2 + 60oC (see Note)\nNote – These tpes aer intended for enclosures to be used\nnutdoor conditions with a cold climate.\n3.3 The degree of protection against direct contact\nand harmful ingress of solid objects and harmful ingress of water.\nAccording to IP given in IS 12063.\n3.7 The provision for suspension means\n3.7.1 Without suspension means\n3.7.2 With suspension mens\nEnclosures intended to provide double or reinforced insulation are under consideration. The time interval\nbetween one drop and the next is 30 ± 5s.\nNo flashover or breakdown between electrodes shall occur before a total of 50 drops has fallen.\nNote– 1. Care is taken that the electrodes are clean, correctly\nshaped and correctly positioned before each test is started.\n2. In case of doubt the test is repeated, if necessary, on a new\nset of samploes.\n4. Tests –\n4.1 Category of Test – Tests are classified as type,\nacceptance and routine test.\nTable 3 Scheduled of Test\n(Clause 18.1)\nSl. No.\nTest i)\nMaking ii)\nDimensions iii)\nProtection against electric shock iv)\nProvision for earthing v)\nConstruction vi)\nResistance to ageing, to humid conditinos, ingress of solid objects and to harmful ingress of water\nvii)\nMechanical strenghs viii)\nResistance to heat ix)\nResistance of insulating material to abnormal heat and fire\nx)\nResistance to rusting xi)\nResistance of tracking\n4.2 Acceptance test – The follosing shall constitue the\naccpetance test:\nTest\nMaking\nProtection against electric shock\nProvision for earthing\nConstruction\nResistance to ageing, to humid condition, to ingress of solid objects and to harmful ingress of water\nMechanical Strength\n4.3 Routine Test\nTest\nProtection against electric shock\nProvision for earthing\nNote – For detail requirements refer to the standard\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 14772 : 2000. Specification for conduits for electric installations - Part 3\nRigid plain conduits of insulation materials. SECTION 27\nGENERAL CONTENTS\nTitle\nPage\nIS 875 :\nCode of practice for Design loads (Other than Earthquake)for Buildings and Structures\n(Part-1): 1987\nDead loads — Unit Weights of Building Materials and stored materials .27.2"
  },
  {
    "standard_id": "IS 875 (Part 1): 1987",
    "title": "Code Of Practice For Design Loads",
    "category": "Adhesives",
    "summary": "Covers unit weight mass of materials, and parts or components in a building that apply to the determination of dead loads in the design of buildings. The unit weight mass of materials that are likely to be stored in a building are also specified in the standard for the purpose of load calculations along with angles internal friction as appropriate.",
    "keywords": [
      "cement",
      "unit",
      "building",
      "miscellaneous",
      "asbestos",
      "sheeting",
      "materials"
    ],
    "key_sections": {
      "Scope": "Covers unit weight mass of materials, and parts or components in a building that apply to the determination of dead loads in the design of buildings. The unit weight mass of materials that are likely to be stored in a building are also specified in the standard for the purpose of load calculations along with angles internal friction as appropriate.",
      "Building Materials": "Table 1 of the standard gives the unit weight mass of the following materials used in building construction: Acoustical materials Aggregate, coarse Aggregate, organic Asbestos Asbestos cement building pipes Asbestos cement gutters Asbestos cement pressure pipes Asbestos cement sheeting Bitumen Blocks Boards Bricks Brick chips and broken bricks Brick dust (SURKHI) Cast iron, manhole covers Cast iron, manhole frames Cast iron pipes Cement Cement concrete, plain Cement concrete, reinforced Cement concrete pipes Cement concrete, prestressed Cement mortar Cement plaster Cork Expanded metal Felt, bituminous for water-proofing and damp-proofing Foam slag, foundry pumice Glass Gutter, asbestos cement Gypsum Iron Lime Linoleum Mastic asphalt. Masonry brick Masonry stone Metal sheeting, protected ga",
      "Building Parts And Components": "Table 2 of the standard gives the unit weights of the following building parts or components: Ceilings Finishing Cement concrete, plain Flooring Cement concrete, reinforced Roofing Damp-proofing Walling Earth filling",
      "Store And Miscellaneous Materials": "Unit weights of the following store and miscellaneous materials are given in Appendix A of the standard. Agricultural and Chemicals and allied food products materials For detailed information, refer to IS 875 (Part 1) : 1987 Code of practice for design loads (other than earth quake) for building and structures. Part 1 Dead codes - Unit weight of building materials and stread materials. Fuels Metals and alloys Ores Textiles paper and allied materials Manures Miscellaneous materials"
    },
    "content": "IS 875 (Part 1): 1987 Code Of Practice For Design Loads\n(OTHERTHAN EARTHQUAKE)FORBUILDINGSANDSTRUCTURES,\nPART-1 DEAD LOADS – UNIT WEIGHTS OF BUILDING\nMATERIALS AND STORED MATERIALS.\n1.\nScope – Covers unit weight mass of materials, and parts or components in a building that apply to the\ndetermination of dead loads in the design of buildings.\nThe unit weight mass of materials that are likely to be stored in a building are also specified in the standard\nfor the purpose of load calculations along with angles internal friction as appropriate.\n2.\nBuilding Materials – Table 1 of the standard gives the unit weight mass of the following materials used in\nbuilding construction:\nAcoustical materials\nAggregate, coarse\nAggregate, organic\nAsbestos\nAsbestos cement building pipes\nAsbestos cement gutters\nAsbestos cement pressure pipes\nAsbestos cement sheeting\nBitumen\nBlocks\nBoards\nBricks\nBrick chips and broken bricks\nBrick dust (SURKHI)\nCast iron, manhole covers\nCast iron, manhole frames\nCast iron pipes\nCement\nCement concrete, plain\nCement concrete, reinforced\nCement concrete pipes\nCement concrete, prestressed\nCement mortar\nCement plaster\nCork\nExpanded metal\nFelt, bituminous for water-proofing and damp-proofing\nFoam slag, foundry pumice\nGlass\nGutter, asbestos cement\nGypsum\nIron\nLime\nLinoleum\nMastic asphalt.\nMasonry brick\nMasonry stone\nMetal sheeting, protected galvanized steel sheets and plain.\nMortar\nPipes\nPlaster\nSheeting\nSlagwool\nSoil and gravels\nSteel sections\nStones\nTar, coal\nThermal Insulation\nTerra cotta\nTerrazzo\nTiles\nTimber\nWater\nWood-wool building slabs\n3.\nBuilding Parts and Components – Table 2 of the standard gives the unit weights of the following building\nparts or components:\nCeilings\nFinishing\nCement concrete, plain\nFlooring\nCement concrete, reinforced\nRoofing\nDamp-proofing\nWalling\nEarth filling 4.\nStore and Miscellaneous Materials – Unit weights of the following store and miscellaneous materials are\ngiven in Appendix A of the standard.\nAgricultural and\nChemicals and allied food products\nmaterials\nFor detailed information, refer to IS 875 (Part 1) : 1987 Code of practice for design loads (other than earth quake) for building and structures. Part 1 Dead codes - Unit weight of building materials and stread materials.\nFuels\nMetals and alloys\nOres\nTextiles paper and allied materials\nManures\nMiscellaneous materials"
  }
]